Biblia Griega Interlineal

Matthew 1
Matthew
1:1 biblos genesews ihsou cristou uiou dabid uiou abraam 1 . The book of the generation
biblos geneseOs iEsou christou huiou dabid huiou abraam
G976 G1078 G2424 G5547 G5207 G1138 G5207 G11
of Jesus Christ, the son of
n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m ni proper n_ Gen Sg m ni proper David, the son of Abraham.
SCROLL OF-generating OF-JESUS ANOINTED SON of-DAVID SON of-ABRAHAM
of-lineage Christ of-David of-Abraham
1:2 abraam egennhsen ton isaak isaak de egennhsen ton iakwb iakwb 2 Abraham begat Isaac; and
abraam egennEsen ton isaak isaak de egennEsen ton iakOb iakOb
G11 G1080 G3588 G2464 G2464 G1161 G1080 G3588 G2384 G2384
Isaac begat Jacob; and Jacob
ni proper vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper ni proper begat Judas and his brethren;
ABRAHAM generatES THE ISAAC ISAAC YET generatES THE JACOB JACOB
begets begets
de egennhsen ton ioudan kai tous adelfous autou

de egennEsen ton ioudan kai tous adelphous autou
G1161 G1080 G3588 G2455 G2532 G3588 G80 G846
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m
YET generatES THE JUDAS AND THE brothers OF-him
begets
1:3 ioudas de egennhsen ton fares kai ton zara ek ths qamar 3And Judas begat Phares and
ioudas de egennEsen ton phares kai ton zara ek tEs thamar
G2455 G1161 G1080 G3588 G5329 G2532 G3588 G2196 G1537 G3588 G2283
Zara of Thamar; and Phares
n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper Conj t_ Acc Sg m ni proper Prep t_ Gen Sg f ni proper begat Esrom; and Esrom begat
JUDAS YET generatES THE PHARES AND THE ZARA OUT OF-THE THAMAR Aram;
begets
fares de egennhsen ton esrwm esrwm de egennhsen ton aram

phares de egennEsen ton hesrOm hesrOm de egennEsen ton aram
G5329 G1161 G1080 G3588 G2074 G2074 G1161 G1080 G3588 G689
ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper
PHARES YET generatES THE ESROM ESROM YET generatES THE ARAM
begets begets
1:4 aram de egennhsen ton aminadab aminadab de egennhsen ton 4 And Aram begat Aminadab;
aram de egennEsen ton aminadab aminadab de egennEsen ton
G689 G1161 G1080 G3588 G284 G284 G1161 G1080 G3588
and Aminadab begat Naasson;
ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m and Naasson begat Salmon;
ARAM YET generatES THE AMINADAB AMINADAB YET generatES THE
begets begets
naasswn naasswn de egennhsen ton salmwn

naassOn naassOn de egennEsen ton salmOn
G3476 G3476 G1161 G1080 G3588 G4533
ni proper ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper
NAASSON NAASSON YET generatES THE SALMON
begets
1:5 salmwn de egennhsen ton booz ek ths racab booz de egennhsen 5 And Salmon begat Booz of
salmOn de egennEsen ton booz ek tEs rachab booz de egennEsen
G4533 G1161 G1080 G3588 G1003 G1537 G3588 G4477 G1003 G1161 G1080
Rachab; and Booz begat Obed
ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper Prep t_ Gen Sg f ni proper ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg of Ruth; and Obed begat Jesse;
SALMON YET generatES THE BOOZ OUT OF-THE RAHAB BOOZ YET generatES
begets Boaz Boaz begets
ton wbhd ek ths rouq wbhd de egennhsen ton iessai

ton ObEd ek tEs routh ObEd de egennEsen ton iessai
G3588 G5601 G1537 G3588 G4503 G5601 G1161 G1080 G3588 G2421
t_ Acc Sg m ni proper Prep t_ Gen Sg f ni proper ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper
THE OBED OUT OF-THE RUTH OBED YET generatES THE JESSE
begets
1:6 iessai de egennhsen ton dabid ton basilea dabid de o 6 And Jesse begat David the
iessai de egennEsen ton dabid ton basilea dabid de ho
G2421 G1161 G1080 G3588 G1138 G3588 G935 G1138 G1161 G3588
king; and David the king begat
ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m ni proper Conj t_ Nom Sg m Solomon of her [that had been
JESSE YET generatES THE DAVID THE KING DAVID YET THE the wife] of Urias;
begets
basileus egennhsen ton solomwnta ek ths tou ouriou

basileus egennEsen ton solomOnta ek tEs tou ouriou
G935 G1080 G3588 G4672 G1537 G3588 G3588 G3774
n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
KING generatES THE SOLOMON OUT OF-THE- one OF-THE URIAH
begets of-the-onef
1:7 solomwn de egennhsen ton roboam roboam de egennhsen ton abia 7 And Solomon begat Roboam;
solomOn de egennEsen ton roboam roboam de egennEsen ton abia
G4672 G1161 G1080 G3588 G4497 G4497 G1161 G1080 G3588 G7
and Roboam begat Abia; and
n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper Abia begat Asa;
SOLOMON YET generatES THE ROBOAM ROBOAM YET generatES THE ABIA
begets begets
ScrTR : ScrTR_t 1.0 / Strong 1.0 / Parsing 1.1 / CGTS 1.5 / CGES_id 2.3 Translation : AV © 2010 Scripture4all Foundation - www.scripture4all.org
Matthew 1
abia de egennhsen ton asa

abia de egennEsen ton asa
G7 G1161 G1080 G3588 G760
ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper
ABIA YET generatES THE ASA
begets
1:8 asa de egennhsen ton iwsafat iwsafat de egennhsen ton 8 And Asa begat Josaphat; and
asa de egennEsen ton iOsaphat iOsaphat de egennEsen ton
G760 G1161 G1080 G3588 G2498 G2498 G1161 G1080 G3588
Josaphat begat Joram; and
ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m Joram begat Ozias;
ASA YET generatES THE JOSAPHAT JOSAPHAT YET generatES THE
begets begets
iwram iwram de egennhsen ton ozian

iOram iOram de egennEsen ton ozian
G2496 G2496 G1161 G1080 G3588 G3604
ni proper ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
JORAM JORAM YET generatES THE OZIAS
begets
1:9 ozias de egennhsen ton iwaqam iwaqam de egennhsen ton acaz 9 And Ozias begat Joatham;
ozias de egennEsen ton iOatham iOatham de egennEsen ton achaz
G3604 G1161 G1080 G3588 G2488 G2488 G1161 G1080 G3588 G881
and Joatham begat Achaz; and
n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper Achaz begat Ezekias;
OZIAS YET generatES THE JOATHAM JOATHAM YET generatES THE ACHAZ
begets begets
acaz de egennhsen ton ezekian

achaz de egennEsen ton hezekian
G881 G1161 G1080 G3588 G1478
ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
ACHAZ YET generatES THE HEZEKIAH
begets
1:10 ezekias de egennhsen ton manassh manasshs de egennhsen ton 10 And Ezekias begat
hezekias de egennEsen ton manassE manassEs de egennEsen ton
G1478 G1161 G1080 G3588 G3128 G3128 G1161 G1080 G3588
Manasses; and Manasses begat
n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m Amon; and Amon begat Josias;
HEZEKIAH YET generatES THE MANASSEH MANASSEH YET generatES THE
begets begets
amwn amwn de egennhsen ton iwsian

amOn amOn de egennEsen ton iOsian
G300 G300 G1161 G1080 G3588 G2502
ni proper ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
AMON AMON YET generatES THE JOSIAH
begets
1:11 iwsias de egennhsen ton ieconian kai tous adelfous autou 11 And Josias begat Jechonias
iOsias de egennEsen ton iechonian kai tous adelphous autou
G2502 G1161 G1080 G3588 G2423 G2532 G3588 G80 G846
and his brethren, about the
n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m time they were carried away to
JOSIAH YET generatES THE JECHONIAS AND THE brothers OF-him Babylon:
begets
epi ths metoikesias babulwnos

epi tEs metoikesias babulOnos
G1909 G3588 G3350 G897
Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
ON OF-THE after-HOMEing OF-BABYLON
the exile
1:12 meta de thn metoikesian babulwnos ieconias egennhsen ton 12 And after they were brought
meta de tEn metoikesian babulOnos iechonias egennEsen ton
G3326 G1161 G3588 G3350 G897 G2423 G1080 G3588
to Babylon, Jechonias begat
Prep Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m Salathiel; and Salathiel begat
after YET THE after-HOMEing OF-BABYLON JECHONIAS generatES THE Zorobabel;
exile begets
salaqihl salaqihl de egennhsen ton zorobabel

salathiEl salathiEl de egennEsen ton zorobabel
G4528 G4528 G1161 G1080 G3588 G2216
SALATHIEL SALATHIEL YET generatES THE ZOROBABEL
begets
1:13 zorobabel de egennhsen ton abioud abioud de egennhsen ton 13 And Zorobabel begat
zorobabel de egennEsen ton abioud abioud de egennEsen ton
G2216 G1161 G1080 G3588 G10 G10 G1161 G1080 G3588
Abiud; and Abiud begat
ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m Eliakim; and Eliakim begat
ZOROBABEL YET generatES THE ABIUD ABIUD YET generatES THE Azor;
begets begets
eliakeim eliakeim de egennhsen ton azwr

eliakeim eliakeim de egennEsen ton azOr
G1662 G1662 G1161 G1080 G3588 G107
ELIAKIM ELIAKIM YET generatES THE AZOR
begets
Matthew 1
1:14 azwr de egennhsen ton sadwk sadwk de egennhsen ton aceim 14 And Azor begat Sadoc; and
azOr de egennEsen ton sadOk sadOk de egennEsen ton acheim
G107 G1161 G1080 G3588 G4524 G4524 G1161 G1080 G3588 G885
Sadoc begat Achim; and
ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper Achim begat Eliud;
AZOR YET generatES THE SADOK SADOK YET generatES THE ACHIM
begets begets
aceim de egennhsen ton elioud

acheim de egennEsen ton elioud
G885 G1161 G1080 G3588 G1664
ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper
ACHIM YET generatES THE ELIUD
begets
1:15 elioud de egennhsen ton eleazar eleazar de egennhsen ton 15 And Eliud begat Eleazar;
elioud de egennEsen ton eleazar eleazar de egennEsen ton
G1664 G1161 G1080 G3588 G1648 G1648 G1161 G1080 G3588
and Eleazar begat Matthan;
ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m and Matthan begat Jacob;
ELIUD YET generatES THE ELEAZAR ELEAZAR YET generatES THE
begets begets
matqan matqan de egennhsen ton iakwb

matthan matthan de egennEsen ton iakOb
G3157 G3157 G1161 G1080 G3588 G2384
MATTHAN MATTHAN YET generatES THE JACOB
begets
1:16 iakwb de egennhsen ton iwshf ton andra marias ex hs 16 And Jacob begat Joseph the
iakOb de egennEsen ton iOsEph ton andra marias ex hEs
G2384 G1161 G1080 G3588 G2501 G3588 G435 G3137 G1537 G3739
husband of Mary, of whom
ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m ni proper t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg f Prep pr Gen Sg f was born Jesus, who is called
JACOB YET generatES THE JOSEPH THE MAN OF-MARY OUT OF-WHOM Christ.
begets husband of-whom(f)
egennhqh ihsous o legomenos cristos

egennEthE iEsous ho legomenos christos
G1080 G2424 G3588 G3004 G5547
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
WAS-generatED JESUS THE One-beING-said ANOINTED
was-born one-being-said Christ
1:17 pasai oun ai geneai apo abraam ews dabid geneai dekatessares 17 So all the generations from
pasai oun hai geneai apo abraam heOs dabid geneai dekatessares
G3956 G3767 G3588 G1074 G575 G11 G2193 G1138 G1074 G1180
Abraham to David [are]
a_ Nom Pl f Conj t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f Prep ni proper Conj ni proper n_ Nom Pl f a_ Nom Pl f fourteen generations; and from
ALL THEN THE generations FROM ABRAHAM TILL DAVID generations TEN-FOUR David until the carrying away
fourteen into Babylon [are] fourteen
generations; and from the
kai apo dabid ews ths metoikesias babulwnos geneai dekatessares kai carrying away into Babylon
kai apo dabid heOs tEs metoikesias babulOnos geneai dekatessares kai unto Christ [are] fourteen
G2532 G575 G1138 G2193 G3588 G3350 G897 G1074 G1180 G2532
Conj Prep ni proper Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Pl f a_ Nom Pl f Conj generations.
AND FROM DAVID TILL OF-THE after-HOMEing OF-BABYLON generations TEN-FOUR AND
the exile fourteen
apo ths metoikesias babulwnos ews tou cristou geneai dekatessares

apo tEs metoikesias babulOnos heOs tou christou geneai dekatessares
G575 G3588 G3350 G897 G2193 G3588 G5547 G1074 G1180
Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Nom Pl f a_ Nom Pl f
FROM THE after-HOMEing OF-BABYLON TILL OF-THE ANOINTED generations TEN-FOUR
exile the Christ fourteen
1:18 tou de ihsou cristou h gennhsis outws hn 18 . Now the birth of Jesus
tou de iEsou christou hE gennEsis houtOs En
G3588 G1161 G2424 G5547 G3588 G1083 G3779 G2258
Christ was on this wise: When
t_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Adv vi Impf vxx 3 Sg as his mother Mary was
OF-THE YET JESUS ANOINTED THE generating thus WAS espoused to Joseph, before
Christ birth they came together, she was
found with child of the Holy
mnhsteuqeishs gar ths mhtros autou marias tw iwshf prin h Ghost.
mnEsteutheisEs gar tEs mEtros autou marias tO iOsEph prin E
G3423 G1063 G3588 G3384 G846 G3137 G3588 G2501 G4250 G2228
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg f Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg f t_ Dat Sg m ni proper Adv Part
OF-BEING-espousED for THE MOTHER OF-him MARY to-THE JOSEPH ERE OR
than
sunelqein autous eureqh en gastri ecousa ek

sunelthein autous heurethE en gastri echousa ek
G4905 G846 G2147 G1722 G1064 G2192 G1537
vn 2Aor Act pp Acc Pl m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f Prep
TO-BE-TOGETHER-COMING them she-WAS-FOUND IN BELLY HAVING OUT
to-be-coming-together
pneumatos agiou
pneumatos hagiou
G4151 G40
n_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n
OF-spirit (BLOW-effect) HOLY
of-spirit
Matthew 1
1:19 iwshf de o anhr auths dikaios wn kai mh 19 Then Joseph her husband,
iOsEph de ho anEr autEs dikaios On kai mE
G2501 G1161 G3588 G435 G846 G1342 G5607 G2532 G3361
being a just [man], and not
ni proper Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg f a_ Nom Sg m vp Pres vxx Nom Sg m Conj Part Neg willing to make her a publick
JOSEPH YET THE MAN OF-her JUST BEING AND NO example, was minded to put
husband her away privily.
qelwn authn paradeigmatisai eboulhqh laqra apolusai authn

thelOn autEn paradeigmatisai eboulEthE lathra apolusai autEn
G2309 G846 G3856 G1014 G2977 G630 G846
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg f vn Aor Act vi Aor pasD 3 Sg Adv vn Aor Act pp Acc Sg f
WILLING her TO-BESIDE-SHOWize WAS-COUNSELED covertly TO-FROM-LOOSE her
to-hold-up-to-infamy intended to-dismiss
1:20 tauta de autou enqumhqentos idou aggelos kuriou 20 But while he thought on
tauta de autou enthumEthentos idou aggelos kuriou
G5023 G1161 G846 G1760 G2400 G32 G2962
these things, behold, the angel
pd Acc Pl n Conj pp Gen Sg m vp Aor pasD Gen Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg m of the Lord appeared unto him
these YET OF-him OF-BEING-IN-FELT BE-PERCEIVING MESSENGER OF-Master (SANCTIONer) in a dream, saying, Joseph,
these-things of-brooding lo ! of-Lord thou son of David, fear not to
take unto thee Mary thy wife:
kat onar efanh autw legwn iwshf uios dabid mh for that which is conceived in
kat onar ephanE autO legOn iOsEph huios dabid mE her is of the Holy Ghost.
G2596 G3677 G5316 G846 G3004 G2501 G5207 G1138 G3361
Prep ni other vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m ni proper n_ Nom Sg m ni proper Part Neg
according-to TRANCE APPEARed to-him sayING JOSEPH SON of-DAVID NO
of-David
fobhqhs paralabein mariam thn gunaika sou to gar

phobEthEs paralabein mariam tEn gunaika sou to gar
G5399 G3880 G3137 G3588 G1135 G4675 G3588 G1063
vs Aor pasD 2 Sg vn 2Aor Act ni proper t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg n Conj
YOU-MAY-BE-BEING-afraid TO-BE-BESIDE-GETTING MARIAM THE WOMAN OF-YOU THE for
to-be-accepting Mary wife
en auth gennhqen ek pneumatos estin agiou

en autE gennEthen ek pneumatos estin hagiou
G1722 G846 G1080 G1537 G4151 G2076 G40
Prep pp Dat Sg f vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n Prep n_ Gen Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Gen Sg n
IN her BEING-generatED OUT OF-spirit IS HOLY
1:21 texetai de uion kai kaleseis to onoma 21 And she shall bring forth a
texetai de huion kai kaleseis to onoma
G5088 G1161 G5207 G2532 G2564 G3588 G3686
son, and thou shalt call his
vi Fut midD 3 Sg Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Fut Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n name JESUS: for he shall save
she-SHALL-BE-BRINGING-FORTH YET SON AND YOU-SHALL-BE-CALLING THE NAME his people from their sins.
autou ihsoun autos gar swsei ton laon autou apo twn
autou iEsoun autos gar sOsei ton laon autou apo tOn
G846 G2424 G846 G1063 G4982 G3588 G2992 G846 G575 G3588
pp Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Nom Sg m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl f
OF-Him JESUS He for SHALL-BE-SAVING THE PEOPLE OF-Him FROM THE
amartiwn autwn
hamartiOn autOn
G266 G846
n_ Gen Pl f pp Gen Pl m
misses OF-them
sins
1:22 touto de olon gegonen ina plhrwqh to rhqen 22 Now all this was done, that
touto de holon gegonen hina plErOthE to rEthen
G5124 G1161 G3650 G1096 G2443 G4137 G3588 G4483
it might be fulfilled which was
pd Nom Sg n Conj a_ Nom Sg n vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n spoken of the Lord by the
this YET WHOLE HAS-BECOME THAT MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE BEING-declarED prophet, saying,
may-be-being-fulfilled
upo tou kuriou dia tou profhtou legontos

hupo tou kuriou dia tou prophEtou legontos
G5259 G3588 G2962 G1223 G3588 G4396 G3004
Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg n
by THE Master THRU THE BEFORE-AVERer sayING
Lord through prophet
1:23 idou h parqenos en gastri exei kai 23 Behold, a virgin shall be

idou hE parthenos en gastri exei kai
G2400 G3588 G3933 G1722 G1064 G2192 G2532
with child, and shall bring
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep n_ Dat Sg f vi Fut Act 3 Sg Conj forth a son, and they shall call
BE-PERCEIVING THE virgin IN BELLY SHALL-BE-HAVING AND his name Emmanuel, which
lo ! being interpreted is, God with
us.
texetai uion kai kalesousin to onoma autou
texetai huion kai kalesousin to onoma autou
G5088 G5207 G2532 G2564 G3588 G3686 G846
vi Fut midD 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-BRINGING-FORTH SON AND THEY-SHALL-BE-CALLING THE NAME OF-Him
she-shall-be-bringing-forth
Matthew 1 - Matthew 2
emmanouhl o estin meqermhneuomenon meq hmwn o qeos

emmanouEl ho estin methermEneuomenon meth hEmOn ho theos
G1694 G3739 G2076 G3177 G3326 G2257 G3588 G2316
ni proper pr Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n Prep pp 1 Gen Pl t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
EMMANUEL WHICH IS beING-after-TRANSLATED WITH US THE God (PLACer)
being-construed God
1:24 diegerqeis de o iwshf apo tou upnou epoihsen ws 24 Then Joseph being raised
diegertheis de ho iOsEph apo tou hupnou epoiEsen hOs
G1326 G1161 G3588 G2501 G575 G3588 G5258 G4160 G5613
from sleep did as the angel of
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m ni proper Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv the Lord had bidden him, and
BEING-THRU-ROUSED YET THE JOSEPH FROM THE SLEEP he-DOES AS took unto him his wife:
being-roused
prosetaxen autw o aggelos kuriou kai parelaben thn gunaika

prosetaxen autO ho aggelos kuriou kai parelaben tEn gunaika
G4367 G846 G3588 G32 G2962 G2532 G3880 G3588 G1135
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
TOWARD-SETS to-him THE MESSENGER OF-Master AND BESIDE-GOT THE WOMAN
bids him of-Lord he-accepted wife
autou
autou
G846
pp Gen Sg m
OF-him
1:25 kai ouk eginwsken authn ews ou eteken ton uion 25 And knew her not till she
kai ouk eginOsken autEn heOs hou eteken ton huion
G2532 G3756 G1097 G846 G2193 G3739 G5088 G3588 G5207
had brought forth her firstborn
Conj Part Neg vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f Conj pr Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m son: and he called his name
AND NOT KNEW her TILL OF-WHICH she-BROUGHT-FORTH THE SON JESUS.
he-knew which
auths ton prwtotokon kai ekalesen to onoma autou

autEs ton prOtotokon kai ekalesen to onoma autou
G846 G3588 G4416 G2532 G2564 G3588 G3686 G846
pp Gen Sg f t_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m
OF-her THE BEFORE-most-BROUGHT-FORTH AND he-CALLS THE NAME OF-Him
firstborn
ihsoun
iEsoun
G2424
n_ Acc Sg m
JESUS
Matthew 2
2:1 tou de ihsou gennhqentos en bhqleem ths ioudaias en 1 . Now when Jesus was born
tou de iEsou gennEthentos en bEthleem tEs ioudaias en
G3588 G1161 G2424 G1080 G1722 G965 G3588 G2449 G1722
in Bethlehem of Judaea in the
t_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m vp Aor Pas Gen Sg m Prep ni proper t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Prep days of Herod the king,
OF-THE YET JESUS BEING-generatED IN BETHLEHEM OF-THE JUDEA IN behold, there came wise men
being-born from the east to Jerusalem,
hmerais hrwdou tou basilews idou magoi apo anatolwn

hEmerais hErOdou tou basileOs idou magoi apo anatolOn
G2250 G2264 G3588 G935 G2400 G3097 G575 G395
n_ Dat Pl f n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Pl m Prep n_ Gen Pl f
DAYS OF-HEROD THE KING BE-PERCEIVING MAGians FROM risings
lo ! magi east
paregenonto eis ierosoluma

paregenonto eis ierosoluma
G3854 G1519 G2414
vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg f
BESIDE-BECAME INTO JERUSALEM
came-along
2:2 legontes pou estin o tecqeis basileus twn 2 Saying, Where is he that is
legontes pou estin ho techtheis basileus tOn
G3004 G4226 G2076 G3588 G5088 G935 G3588
born King of the Jews? for we
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Part Int vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m have seen his star in the east,
sayING ?-where IS THE BEING-BROUGHT-FORTH KING OF-THE and are come to worship him.
where ?
ioudaiwn eidomen gar autou ton astera en th anatolh kai

ioudaiOn eidomen gar autou ton astera en tE anatolE kai
G2453 G1492 G1063 G846 G3588 G792 G1722 G3588 G395 G2532
a_ Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl Conj pp Gen Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj
JUDA-ans WE-PERCEIVED for OF-Him THE GLEAMer IN THE rising AND
Jews star east
hlqomen proskunhsai autw

Elthomen proskunEsai autO
G2064 G4352 G846
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl vn Aor Act pp Dat Sg m
WE-CAME TO-worship to-Him
2:3 akousas de hrwdhs o basileus etaracqh kai pasa 3 When Herod the king had
akousas de hErOdEs ho basileus etarachthE kai pasa
G191 G1161 G2264 G3588 G935 G5015 G2532 G3956
heard [these things], he was
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg f troubled, and all Jerusalem
HEARing YET HEROD THE KING WAS-DISTURBED AND EVERY with him.
all
ierosoluma met autou

ierosoluma met autou
G2414 G3326 G846
n_ Nom Sg f Prep pp Gen Sg m
JERUSALEM WITH him
2:4 kai sunagagwn pantas tous arciereis kai grammateis tou 4 And when he had gathered
kai sunagagOn pantas tous archiereis kai grammateis tou
G2532 G4863 G3956 G3588 G749 G2532 G1122 G3588
all the chief priests and scribes
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg m of the people together, he
AND TOGETHER-LEADING ALL THE chief-SACRED-ones AND WRITers OF-THE demanded of them where
gathering chief-priests scribes Christ should be born.
laou epunqaneto par autwn pou o cristos gennatai

laou epunthaneto par autOn pou ho christos gennatai
G2992 G4441 G3844 G846 G4226 G3588 G5547 G1080
n_ Gen Sg m vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Pl m Part Int t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
PEOPLE he-ASCERTAINED-UP BESIDE them ?-where THE ANOINTED IS-beING-generatED
he-ascertained where ? Christ is-being-born
2:5 oi de eipon autw en bhqleem ths ioudaias outws gar 5 And they said unto him, In
hoi de eipon autO en bEthleem tEs ioudaias houtOs gar
G3588 G1161 G2036 G846 G1722 G965 G3588 G2449 G3779 G1063
Bethlehem of Judaea: for thus
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Prep ni proper t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Adv Conj it is written by the prophet,
THE YET THEY-said to-him IN BETHLEHEM OF-THE JUDEA thus for
gegraptai dia tou profhtou

gegraptai dia tou prophEtou
G1125 G1223 G3588 G4396
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
HAS-been-WRITTEN THRU THE BEFORE-AVERer
through prophet
2:6 kai su bhqleem gh iouda oudamws elacisth 6 And thou Bethlehem, [in] the
kai su bEthleem gE iouda oudamOs elachistE
G2532 G4771 G965 G1093 G2448 G3760 G1646
land of Juda, art not the least
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg ni proper n_ Voc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m Adv a_ Nom Sg f among the princes of Juda: for
AND YOU BETHLEHEM LAND of-JUDA NOT-YET-SIMULTANEOUSly INFERIOR-most out of thee shall come a
of-Judah in-no-respect least Governor, that shall rule my
Matthew 2
people Israel.
ei en tois hgemosin iouda ek sou gar exeleusetai
ei en tois hEdemosin iouda ek sou gar exeleusetai
G1488 G1722 G3588 G2232 G2448 G1537 G4675 G1063 G1831
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m n_ Gen Sg m Prep pp 2 Gen Sg Conj vi Fut midD 3 Sg
ARE IN THE ones-LEADING of-JUDA OUT OF-YOU for SHALL-BE-OUT-COMING
you-are among governors of-Judah shall-be-coming-out
hgoumenos ostis poimanei ton laon mou ton

hEdoumenos hostis poimanei ton laon mou ton
G2233 G3748 G4165 G3588 G2992 G3450 G3588
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m pr Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Acc Sg m
One-LEADING WHO-ANY SHALL-BE-SHEPHERDING THE PEOPLE OF-ME THE
one-governing who-any
israhl
israEl
G2474
ni proper
ISRAEL
2:7 tote hrwdhs laqra kalesas tous magous hkribwsen par autwn 7 Then Herod, when he had
tote hErOdEs lathra kalesas tous magous EkribOsen par autOn
G5119 G2264 G2977 G2564 G3588 G3097 G198 G3844 G846
privily called the wise men,
Adv n_ Nom Sg m Adv vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Pl m enquired of them diligently
then HEROD covertly CALLing THE MAGians makES-EXACT BESIDE them what time the star appeared.
magi ascertains-exactly
ton cronon tou fainomenou asteros

ton chronon tou phainomenou asteros
G3588 G5550 G3588 G5316 G792
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m vp Pres mid/pas Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
THE TIME OF-THE APPEARING OF-GLEAMer
of-star
2:8 kai pemyas autous eis bhqleem eipen poreuqentes akribws 8 And he sent them to
kai pempsas autous eis bEthleem eipen poreuthentes akribOs
G2532 G3992 G846 G1519 G965 G2036 G4198 G199
Bethlehem, and said, Go and
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m Prep ni proper vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m Adv search diligently for the young
AND SENDing them INTO BETHLEHEM said BEING-GONE EXACTly child; and when ye have found
he-said accurately [him], bring me word again,
that I may come and worship
exetasate peri tou paidiou epan de eurhte apaggeilate him also.
exetasate peri tou paidiou epan de heurEte apaggeilate
G1833 G4012 G3588 G3813 G1875 G1161 G2147 G518
vm Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Conj Conj vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl vm Aor Act 2 Pl
OUT-INTERROGATE ABOUT THE little-boy ON-[IF]-EVER YET YE-MAY-BE-FINDING FROM-MESSAGE
inquire-ye ! concerning if-ever report-ye !
moi opws kagw elqwn proskunhsw autw

moi hopOs kagO elthOn proskunEsO autO
G3427 G3704 G2504 G2064 G4352 G846
pp 1 Dat Sg Adv pp 1 Nom Sg Con vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vs Aor Act 1 Sg pp Dat Sg m
to-ME WHICH-how AND-I COMING SHOULD-BE-worshipING to-Him
so-that also-I him
2:9 oi de akousantes tou basilews eporeuqhsan kai idou 9 . When they had heard the
hoi de akousantes tou basileOs eporeuthEsan kai idou
G3588 G1161 G191 G3588 G935 G4198 G2532 G2400
king, they departed; and, lo,
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor pasD 3 Pl Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg the star, which they saw in the
THE YET ones-HEARing OF-THE KING WERE-GONE AND BE-PERCEIVING east, went before them, till it
ones-hearing went lo ! came and stood over where the
young child was.
o asthr on eidon en th anatolh prohgen autous
ho astEr hon eidon en tE anatolE proEgen autous
G3588 G792 G3739 G1492 G1722 G3588 G395 G4254 G846
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pr Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m
THE GLEAMer WHICH THEY-PERCEIVED IN THE rising BEFORE-LED them
star east preceded
ews elqwn esth epanw ou hn to paidion

heOs elthOn hestE epanO hou En to paidion
G2193 G2064 G2476 G1883 G3757 G2258 G3588 G3813
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv Adv vi Impf vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
TILL COMING it-STOOD ON-UP where WAS THE little-boy
over
2:10 idontes de ton astera ecarhsan caran megalhn sfodra 10 When they saw the star,
idontes de ton astera echarEsan charan megalEn sphodra
G1492 G1161 G3588 G792 G5463 G5479 G3173 G4970
they rejoiced with exceeding
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor pasD 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f Adv great joy.
PERCEIVING YET THE GLEAMer THEY-WERE-JOYed JOY GREAT VEHEMENT
star they-rejoiced tremendously
2:11 kai elqontes eis thn oikian eidon to paidion meta 11 And when they were come
kai elthontes eis tEn oikian eidon to paidion meta
G2532 G2064 G1519 G3588 G3614 G1492 G3588 G3813 G3326
into the house, they saw the
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Prep young child with Mary his
AND COMING INTO THE HOME THEY-PERCEIVED THE little-boy (-or-girl) WITH mother, and fell down, and
house little-boy worshipped him: and when
Matthew 2
they had opened their

marias ths mhtros autou kai pesontes prosekunhsan autw kai treasures, they presented unto
marias tEs mEtros autou kai pesontes prosekunEsan autO kai
G3137 G3588 G3384 G846 G2532 G4098 G4352 G846 G2532 him gifts; gold, and
n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg n Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Conj frankincense, and myrrh.
MARY THE MOTHER OF-Him AND FALLING THEY-worship to-Him AND
him
anoixantes tous qhsaurous autwn proshnegkan autw

anoixantes tous thEsaurous autOn prosEnegkan autO
G455 G3588 G2344 G846 G4374 G846
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
UP-OPENing THE PLACED-INTO-MORROWS OF-them THEY-TOWARD-CARRY to-Him
opening treasures they-bring
dwra cruson kai libanon kai smurnan

dOra chruson kai libanon kai smurnan
G1435 G5557 G2532 G3030 G2532 G4666
n_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg f
oblations GOLD AND frankincense AND MYRRH
approach-presents
2:12 kai crhmatisqentes kat onar mh anakamyai pros hrwdhn di 12 And being warned of God
kai chrEmatisthentes kat onar mE anakampsai pros hErOdEn di
G2532 G5537 G2596 G3677 G3361 G344 G4314 G2264 G1223
in a dream that they should not
Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m Prep ni other Part Neg vn Aor Act Prep n_ Acc Sg m Prep return to Herod, they departed
AND BEING-apprizED according-to TRANCE NO TO-UP-BOW TOWARD HEROD THRU into their own country another
being-apprised to-go-back through way.
allhs odou anecwrhsan eis thn cwran autwn

allEs hodou anechOrEsan eis tEn chOran autOn
G243 G3598 G402 G1519 G3588 G5561 G846
a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Pl m
other WAY THEY-UP-SPACE INTO THE SPACE OF-them
they-retire country
2:13 anacwrhsantwn de autwn idou aggelos kuriou fainetai 13 . And when they were
anachOrEsantOn de autOn idou aggelos kuriou phainetai
G402 G1161 G846 G2400 G32 G2962 G5316
departed, behold, the angel of
vp Aor Act Gen Pl m Conj pp Gen Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres mid/pas 3 Sg the Lord appeareth to Joseph in
OF-UP-SPACing YET OF-them BE-PERCEIVING MESSENGER OF-Master IS-APPEARING a dream, saying, Arise, and
of-retiring lo ! of-Lord take the young child and his
mother, and flee into Egypt,
kat onar tw iwshf legwn egerqeis paralabe to and be thou there until I bring
kat onar tO iOsEph legOn egertheis paralabe to thee word: for Herod will seek
G2596 G3677 G3588 G2501 G3004 G1453 G3880 G3588
Prep ni other t_ Dat Sg m ni proper vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg n the young child to destroy him.
according-to TRANCE to-THE JOSEPH sayING BEING-ROUSED BE-BESIDE-GETTING THE
be-you-taking-along !
paidion kai thn mhtera autou kai feuge eis aigupton kai
paidion kai tEn mEtera autou kai pheuge eis aigupton kai
G3813 G2532 G3588 G3384 G846 G2532 G5343 G1519 G125 G2532
n_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj vm Pres Act 2 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj
little-boy AND THE MOTHER OF-Him AND BE-FLEEING INTO EGYPT AND
be-you-fleeing !
isqi ekei ews an eipw soi mellei gar hrwdhs zhtein

isthi ekei heOs an eipO soi mellei gar hErOdEs zEtein
G2468 G1563 G2193 G302 G2036 G4671 G3195 G1063 G2264 G2212
vm Pres vxx 2 Sg Adv Conj Part vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg m vn Pres Act
YOU-BE there TILL EVER I-MAY-BE-sayING to-YOU IS-ABOUTING for HEROD TO-BE-SEEKING
be-you ! is-being-about
to paidion tou apolesai auto

to paidion tou apolesai auto
G3588 G3813 G3588 G622 G846
t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act pp Acc Sg n
THE little-boy OF-THE TO-destroy Him
it
2:14 o de egerqeis parelaben to paidion kai thn mhtera 14 When he arose, he took the
ho de egertheis parelaben to paidion kai tEn mEtera
G3588 G1161 G1453 G3880 G3588 G3813 G2532 G3588 G3384
young child and his mother by
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f night, and departed into Egypt:
THE YET BEING-ROUSED he-BESIDE-GOT THE little-boy AND THE MOTHER
he-took-along
autou nuktos kai anecwrhsen eis aigupton

autou nuktos kai anechOrEsen eis aigupton
G846 G3571 G2532 G402 G1519 G125
pp Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f
OF-Him OF-NIGHT AND UP-SPACES INTO EGYPT
retires
2:15 kai hn ekei ews ths teleuths hrwdou ina plhrwqh 15 And was there until the
kai En ekei heOs tEs teleutEs hErOdou hina plErOthE
G2532 G2258 G1563 G2193 G3588 G5054 G2264 G2443 G4137
death of Herod: that it might be
Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Adv Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg fulfilled which was spoken of
AND he-WAS there TILL OF-THE decease OF-HEROD THAT MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED the Lord by the prophet,
the may-be-being-fulfilled saying, Out of Egypt have I
Matthew 2
called my son.
to rhqen upo tou kuriou dia tou profhtou
to rEthen hupo tou kuriou dia tou prophEtou
G3588 G4483 G5259 G3588 G2962 G1223 G3588 G4396
t_ Nom Sg n vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
THE BEING-declarED by THE Master THRU THE BEFORE-AVERer
Lord through prophet
legontos ex aiguptou ekalesa ton uion mou

legontos ex aiguptou ekalesa ton huion mou
G3004 G1537 G125 G2564 G3588 G5207 G3450
vp Pres Act Gen Sg n Prep n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg
sayING OUT OF-EGYPT I-CALL THE SON OF-ME
2:16 tote hrwdhs idwn oti enepaicqh upo twn magwn 16 . Then Herod, when he saw
tote hErOdEs idOn hoti enepaichthE hupo tOn magOn
G5119 G2264 G1492 G3754 G1702 G5259 G3588 G3097
that he was mocked of the wise
Adv n_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m men, was exceeding wroth, and
then HEROD PERCEIVING that he-WAS-IN-sportED by THE MAGians sent forth, and slew all the
he-was-scoffed-at magi children that were in
Bethlehem, and in all the
equmwqh lian kai aposteilas aneilen pantas tous paidas tous en coasts thereof, from two years
ethumOthE lian kai aposteilas aneilen pantas tous paidas tous en old and under, according to the
G2373 G3029 G2532 G649 G337 G3956 G3588 G3816 G3588 G1722
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Adv Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m Prep time which he had diligently
WAS-furious VERY AND commissioning UP-LIFTED ALL THE boys THE IN enquired of the wise men.
dispatching he-massacred
bhqleem kai en pasin tois oriois auths apo dietous kai katwterw
bEthleem kai en pasin tois horiois autEs apo dietous kai katOterO
G965 G2532 G1722 G3956 G3588 G3725 G846 G575 G1332 G2532 G2736
ni proper Conj Prep a_ Dat Pl n t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n pp Gen Sg f Prep a_ Gen Sg m Conj Adv
BETHLEHEM AND IN ALL THE boundaries OF-her FROM TWO-YEARS AND DOWN-more
below
kata ton cronon on hkribwsen para twn magwn

kata ton chronon hon EkribOsen para tOn magOn
G2596 G3588 G5550 G3739 G198 G3844 G3588 G3097
Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pr Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
according-to THE TIME WHICH he-makES-EXACT BESIDE THE MAGians
he-ascertains-exactly magi
2:17 tote eplhrwqh to rhqen upo ieremiou tou profhtou 17 Then was fulfilled that
tote eplErOthE to rEthen hupo ieremiou tou prophEtou
G5119 G4137 G3588 G4483 G5259 G2408 G3588 G4396
which was spoken by Jeremy
Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n Prep n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m the prophet, saying,
then WAS-FILLED THE BEING-declarED by JEREMIAH THE BEFORE-AVERer
was-fulfilled prophet
legontos
legontos
G3004
vp Pres Act Gen Sg n
sayING
2:18 fwnh en rama hkousqh qrhnos kai klauqmos kai odurmos polus 18 In Rama was there a voice
phOnE en rama EkousthE thrEnos kai klauthmos kai odurmos polus
G5456 G1722 G4471 G191 G2355 G2532 G2805 G2532 G3602 G4183
heard, lamentation, and
n_ Nom Sg f Prep ni proper vi Aor Pas 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m weeping, and great mourning,
SOUND IN RAMA IS-HEARD DIRGE AND LAMENTing AND PAIN-GUSH much Rachel weeping [for] her
wailing lamentation anguish children, and would not be
comforted, because they are
rachl klaiousa ta tekna auths kai ouk hqelen paraklhqhnai not.
rachEl klaiousa ta tekna autEs kai ouk Ethelen paraklEthEnai
G4478 G2799 G3588 G5043 G846 G2532 G3756 G2309 G3870
ni proper vp Pres Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Sg f Conj Part Neg vi Impf Act 3 Sg vn Aor Pas
RACHEL LAMENTING THE offsprings OF-her AND NOT WILLED TO-BE-BESIDE-CALLED
children she-would to-be-consoled
oti ouk eisin

hoti ouk eisin
G3754 G3756 G1526
Conj Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
that NOT THEY-ARE
2:19 teleuthsantos de tou hrwdou idou aggelos kuriou kat 19 . But when Herod was dead,
teleutEsantos de tou hErOdou idou aggelos kuriou kat
G5053 G1161 G3588 G2264 G2400 G32 G2962 G2596
behold, an angel of the Lord
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep appeareth in a dream to Joseph
OF-deceasing YET OF-THE HEROD BE-PERCEIVING MESSENGER OF-Master according-to in Egypt,
lo ! of-Lord
onar fainetai tw iwshf en aiguptw

onar phainetai tO iOsEph en aiguptO
G3677 G5316 G3588 G2501 G1722 G125
ni other vi Pres mid/pas 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m ni proper Prep n_ Dat Sg f
TRANCE IS-APPEARING to-THE JOSEPH IN EGYPT
2:20 legwn egerqeis paralabe to paidion kai thn 20 Saying, Arise, and take the
legOn egertheis paralabe to paidion kai tEn
G3004 G1453 G3880 G3588 G3813 G2532 G3588
young child and his mother,
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg f and go into the land of Israel:
sayING BEING-ROUSED BE-BESIDE-GETTING THE little-boy AND THE for they are dead which sought
be-you-taking-along ! the young child's life.
mhtera autou kai poreuou eis ghn israhl teqnhkasin gar

mEtera autou kai poreuou eis gEn israEl tethnEkasin gar
G3384 G846 G2532 G4198 G1519 G1093 G2474 G2348 G1063
n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f ni proper vi Perf Act 3 Pl Conj
MOTHER OF-Him AND BE-GOING INTO LAND of-ISRAEL THEY-HAVE-DIED for
be-you-going ! of-Israel
oi zhtountes thn yuchn tou paidiou

hoi zEtountes tEn psuchEn tou paidiou
G3588 G2212 G3588 G5590 G3588 G3813
t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
THE ones-SEEKING THE soul OF-THE little-boy
ones-seeking
2:21 o de egerqeis parelaben to paidion kai thn mhtera 21 And he arose, and took the
ho de egertheis parelaben to paidion kai tEn mEtera
G3588 G1161 G1453 G3880 G3588 G3813 G2532 G3588 G3384
young child and his mother,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f and came into the land of
THE YET BEING-ROUSED he-BESIDE-GOT THE little-boy AND THE MOTHER Israel.
he-took-along
autou kai hlqen eis ghn israhl

autou kai Elthen eis gEn israEl
G846 G2532 G2064 G1519 G1093 G2474
pp Gen Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f ni proper
OF-Him AND CAME INTO LAND of-ISRAEL
of-Israel
2:22 akousas de oti arcelaos basileuei epi ths ioudaias anti 22 But when he heard that
akousas de hoti archelaos basileuei epi tEs ioudaias anti
G191 G1161 G3754 G745 G936 G1909 G3588 G2449 G473
Archelaus did reign in Judaea
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Prep in the room of his father
HEARing YET that Archelaus IS-reignING ON THE JUDEA INSTEAD Herod, he was afraid to go
over thither: notwithstanding, being
warned of God in a dream, he
hrwdou tou patros autou efobhqh ekei apelqein crhmatisqeis turned aside into the parts of
hErOdou tou patros autou ephobEthE ekei apelthein chrEmatistheis Galilee:
G2264 G3588 G3962 G846 G5399 G1563 G565 G5537
n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m vi Aor pasD 3 Sg Adv vn 2Aor Act vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
OF-HEROD THE FATHER OF-him he-WAS-afraid there TO-BE-FROM-COMING BEING-apprizED
to-be-passing-forth
de kat onar anecwrhsen eis ta merh ths galilaias

de kat onar anechOrEsen eis ta merE tEs galilaias
G1161 G2596 G3677 G402 G1519 G3588 G3313 G3588 G1056
Conj Prep ni other vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
YET according-to TRANCE he-UP-SPACES INTO THE PARTS OF-THE GALILEE
he-retires
2:23 kai elqwn katwkhsen eis polin legomenhn nazareq opws 23 And he came and dwelt in a
kai elthOn katOkEsen eis polin legomenEn nazareth hopOs
G2532 G2064 G2730 G1519 G4172 G3004 G3478 G3704
city called Nazareth: that it
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Pas Acc Sg f ni proper Adv might be fulfilled which was
AND COMING he-DOWN-HOMES INTO city beING-said NAZARETH WHICH-how spoken by the prophets, He
he-dwells so-that shall be called a Nazarene.
plhrwqh to rhqen dia twn profhtwn oti nazwraios

plErOthE to rEthen dia tOn prophEtOn hoti nazOraios
G4137 G3588 G4483 G1223 G3588 G4396 G3754 G3480
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE BEING-declarED THRU THE BEFORE-AVERers that NAZARENE
may-be-being-fulfilled through prophets
klhqhsetai
klEthEsetai
G2564
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
He-SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED
Matthew 3
3:1 en de tais hmerais ekeinais paraginetai iwannhs o baptisths 1. In those days came John the
en de tais hEmerais ekeinais paraginetai iOannEs ho baptistEs
G1722 G1161 G3588 G2250 G1565 G3854 G2491 G3588 G910
Baptist, preaching in the
Prep Conj t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pd Dat Pl f vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m wilderness of Judaea,
IN YET THE DAYS those IS-BESIDE-BECOMING JOHN THE DIPist
is-coming-along baptist
khrusswn en th erhmw ths ioudaias

kErussOn en tE erEmO tEs ioudaias
G2784 G1722 G3588 G2048 G3588 G2449
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
PROCLAIMING IN THE DESOLATE OF-THE JUDEA
heralding wilderness
3:2 kai legwn metanoeite hggiken gar h basileia twn 2 And saying, Repent ye: for
kai legOn metanoeite Eggiken gar hE basileia tOn
G2532 G3004 G3340 G1448 G1063 G3588 G932 G3588
the kingdom of heaven is at
Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Pl vi Perf Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m hand.
AND sayING BE-YE-after-MINDING HAS-NEARED for THE KINGdom OF-THE
be-ye-repenting ! has-drawn-near
ouranwn
ouranOn
G3772
n_ Gen Pl m
heavens
3:3 outos gar estin o rhqeis upo hsaiou tou 3 For this is he that was spoken
houtos gar estin ho rEtheis hupo Esaiou tou
G3778 G1063 G2076 G3588 G4483 G5259 G2268 G3588
of by the prophet Esaias,
pd Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m saying, The voice of one
this for IS THE one-BEING-declarED by ISAIAH THE crying in the wilderness,
one-being-declared Prepare ye the way of the Lord,
make his paths straight.
profhtou legontos fwnh bowntos en th erhmw etoimasate
prophEtou legontos phOnE boOntos en tE erEmO hetoimasate
G4396 G3004 G5456 G994 G1722 G3588 G2048 G2090
n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Act Gen Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f vm Aor Act 2 Pl
BEFORE-AVERer sayING SOUND OF-IMPLORING-one IN THE DESOLATE make-YE-READY
prophet voice of-one-imploring wilderness make-ready-ye !
thn odon kuriou euqeias poieite tas tribous autou

tEn hodon kuriou eutheias poieite tas tribous autou
G3588 G3598 G2962 G2117 G4160 G3588 G5147 G846
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m a_ Acc Pl f vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Sg m
THE WAY OF-Master straight BE-YE-makING THE WEAR (ways) OF-Him
road of-Lord be-ye-making ! highways
3:4 autos de o iwannhs eicen to enduma autou apo 4 And the same John had his
autos de ho iOannEs eichen to enduma autou apo
G846 G1161 G3588 G2491 G2192 G3588 G1742 G846 G575
raiment of camel's hair, and a
pp Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m Prep leathern girdle about his loins;
he YET THE JOHN HAD THE IN-SLIP OF-him FROM and his meat was locusts and
apparel wild honey.
tricwn kamhlou kai zwnhn dermatinhn peri thn osfun autou h

trichOn kamElou kai zOnEn dermatinEn peri tEn osphun autou hE
G2359 G2574 G2532 G2223 G1193 G4012 G3588 G3751 G846 G3588
n_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg f
HAIR OF-CAMEL AND GIRDle SKIN ABOUT THE LOIN OF-him THE
hairs leather
de trofh autou hn akrides kai meli agrion

de trophE autou En akrides kai meli agrion
G1161 G5160 G846 G2258 G200 G2532 G3192 G66
Conj n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Pl f Conj n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n
YET NURTURE OF-him WAS LOCUSTS AND HONEY FIELD
nourishment wild
3:5 tote exeporeueto pros auton ierosoluma kai pasa h ioudaia 5 Then went out to him
tote exeporeueto pros auton ierosoluma kai pasa hE ioudaia
G5119 G1607 G4314 G846 G2414 G2532 G3956 G3588 G2449
Jerusalem, and all Judaea, and
Adv vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg m n_ Nom Sg f Conj a_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f all the region round about
then OUT-WENT TOWARD him JERUSALEM AND EVERY THE JUDEA Jordan,
went-out entire
kai pasa h pericwros tou iordanou

kai pasa hE perichOros tou iordanou
G2532 G3956 G3588 G4066 G3588 G2446
Conj a_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
AND EVERY THE ABOUT-SPACE OF-THE JORDAN
entire country-about
3:6 kai ebaptizonto en tw iordanh up autou exomologoumenoi tas 6 And were baptized of him in
kai ebaptizonto en tO iordanE hup autou exomologoumenoi tas
G2532 G907 G1722 G3588 G2446 G5259 G846 G1843 G3588
Jordan, confessing their sins.
Conj vi Impf Pas 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Prep pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl f
AND THEY-were-DIPizED IN THE JORDAN by him OUT-avowING THE
they-were-baptized confessing
Matthew 3
amartias autwn
hamartias autOn
G266 G846
n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Pl m
misses OF-them
sins
3:7 idwn de pollous twn farisaiwn kai saddoukaiwn 7 . But when he saw many of
idOn de pollous tOn pharisaiOn kai saddoukaiOn
G1492 G1161 G4183 G3588 G5330 G2532 G4523
the Pharisees and Sadducees
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj a_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m come to his baptism, he said
PERCEIVING YET MANY OF-THE PHARISEES AND SADDUCEES unto them, O generation of
vipers, who hath warned you to
flee from the wrath to come?
ercomenous epi to baptisma autou eipen autois gennhmata
erchomenous epi to baptisma autou eipen autois gennEmata
G2064 G1909 G3588 G908 G846 G2036 G846 G1081
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m n_ Voc Pl n
COMING ON THE DIPism OF-him he-said to-them product
baptism progeny !
ecidnwn tis upedeixen umin fugein apo ths melloushs

echidnOn tis hupedeixen humin phugein apo tEs mellousEs
G2191 G5101 G5263 G5213 G5343 G575 G3588 G3195
n_ Gen Pl f pi Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Gen Sg f
OF-VIPERS ANY UNDER-SHOWS to-YOU(p) TO-BE-FLEEING FROM THE beING-ABOUT
who intimates to-ye impending
orghs
orgEs
G3709
n_ Gen Sg f
INDIGNATION
3:8 poihsate oun karpous axious ths metanoias 8Bring forth therefore fruits
poiEsate oun karpous axious tEs metanoias
G4160 G3767 G2590 G514 G3588 G3341
meet for repentance:
vm Aor Act 2 Pl Conj n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
DO-YE THEN FRUITS WORTHY OF-THE after-MIND
produce-ye ! repentance
3:9 kai mh doxhte legein en eautois patera ecomen 9 And think not to say within
kai mE doxEte legein en heautois patera echomen
G2532 G3361 G1380 G3004 G1722 G1438 G3962 G2192
yourselves, We have Abraham
Conj Part Neg vs Aor Act 2 Pl vn Pres Act Prep pf 3 Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Pl to [our] father: for I say unto
AND NO YE-SHOULD-BE-SEEMING TO-BE-sayING IN selves FATHER WE-ARE-HAVING you, that God is able of these
ye-should-be-presuming among yourselves stones to raise up children unto
Abraham.
ton abraam legw gar umin oti dunatai o qeos ek
ton abraam legO gar humin hoti dunatai ho theos ek
G3588 G11 G3004 G1063 G5213 G3754 G1410 G3588 G2316 G1537
t_ Acc Sg m ni proper vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep
THE ABRAHAM I-AM-sayING for to-YOU(p) that IS-ABLE THE God OUT
to-ye
twn liqwn toutwn egeirai tekna tw abraam

tOn lithOn toutOn egeirai tekna tO abraam
G3588 G3037 G5130 G1453 G5043 G3588 G11
t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pd Gen Pl m vn Aor Act n_ Acc Pl n t_ Dat Sg m ni proper
OF-THE STONES these TO-ROUSE offsprings to-THE ABRAHAM
children
3:10 hdh de kai h axinh pros thn rizan twn dendrwn 10 And now also the axe is laid
EdE de kai hE axinE pros tEn rizan tOn dendrOn
G2235 G1161 G2532 G3588 G513 G4314 G3588 G4491 G3588 G1186
unto the root of the trees:
Adv Conj Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n therefore every tree which
ALREADY YET AND THE AX TOWARD THE ROOT OF-THE TREES bringeth not forth good fruit is
also hewn down, and cast into the
fire.
keitai pan oun dendron mh poioun karpon kalon
keitai pan oun dendron mE poioun karpon kalon
G2749 G3956 G3767 G1186 G3361 G4160 G2590 G2570
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg n Conj n_ Nom Sg n Part Neg vp Pres Act Nom Sg n n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m
IS-LYING EVERY THEN TREE NO DOING FRUIT IDEAL
doproducing
ekkoptetai kai eis pur balletai

G1581 G2532 G1519 G4442 G906
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Conj Prep n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
IS-beING-OUT-STRIKen AND INTO FIRE IS-beING-CAST
is-being-hewn-down
3:11 egw men baptizw umas en udati eis metanoian o de 11 I indeed baptize you with
egO men baptizO humas en hudati eis metanoian ho de
G1473 G3303 G907 G5209 G1722 G5204 G1519 G3341 G3588 G1161
water unto repentance: but he
pp 1 Nom Sg Part vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl Prep n_ Dat Sg n Prep n_ Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg m Conj that cometh after me is
I INDEED AM-DIPizING YOU(p) IN water INTO after-MIND THE-One YET mightier than I, whose shoes I
am-baptizing ye repentance the-one am not worthy to bear: he shall
Matthew 3
baptize you with the Holy

opisw mou ercomenos iscuroteros mou estin ou ouk Ghost, and [with] fire:
opisO mou erchomenos ischuroteros mou estin hou ouk
G3694 G3450 G2064 G2478 G3450 G2076 G3739 G3756
Adv pp 1 Gen Sg vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Cmp pp 1 Gen Sg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pr Gen Sg m Part Neg
BEHIND ME COMING STRONGER OF-ME IS OF-WHOM NOT
after stronger-one
eimi ikanos ta upodhmata bastasai autos umas baptisei

eimi hikanos ta hupodEmata bastasai autos humas baptisei
G1510 G2425 G3588 G5266 G941 G846 G5209 G907
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg a_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n vn Aor Act pp Nom Sg m pp 2 Acc Pl vi Fut Act 3 Sg
I-AM enough THE sandals TO-BEAR He YOU(p) SHALL-BE-DIPizING
competent ye shall-be-baptizing
en pneumati agiw kai puri

en pneumati hagiO kai puri
G1722 G4151 G40 G2532 G4442
Prep n_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n Conj n_ Dat Sg n
IN spirit HOLY AND to-FIRE
3:12 ou to ptuon en th ceiri autou kai 12 Whose fan [is] in his hand,
hou to ptuon en tE cheiri autou kai
G3739 G3588 G4425 G1722 G3588 G5495 G846 G2532
and he will throughly purge his
pr Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj floor, and gather his wheat into
OF-WHOM THE WINNOWING-SHOVEL IN THE HAND OF-Him AND the garner; but he will burn up
the chaff with unquenchable
fire.
diakaqariei thn alwna autou kai sunaxei
diakathariei tEn halOna autou kai sunaxei
G1245 G3588 G257 G846 G2532 G4863
vi Fut Act 3 Sg Att t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg
He-SHALL-BE-THRU-cleansING THE THRESHing-floor OF-Him AND SHALL-BE-TOGETHER-LEADING
he-shall-be-scouring shall-be-gathering
ton siton autou eis thn apoqhkhn to de acuron

ton siton autou eis tEn apothEkEn to de achuron
G3588 G4621 G846 G1519 G3588 G596 G3588 G1161 G892
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg n Conj n_ Acc Sg n
THE GRAIN OF-Him INTO THE FROM-PLACE THE YET CHAFF
barn
katakausei puri asbestw

katakausei puri asbestO
G2618 G4442 G762
vi Fut Act 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n
He-SHALL-BE-DOWN-BURNING to-FIRE UN-EXTINGUISHed
he-shall-be-burning-up unextinguished
3:13 tote paraginetai o ihsous apo ths galilaias epi ton 13 . Then cometh Jesus from
tote paraginetai ho iEsous apo tEs galilaias epi ton
G5119 G3854 G3588 G2424 G575 G3588 G1056 G1909 G3588
Galilee to Jordan unto John, to
Adv vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg m be baptized of him.
then IS-BESIDE-BECOMING THE JESUS FROM THE GALILEE ON THE
is-coming-along
iordanhn pros ton iwannhn tou baptisqhnai up autou

iordanEn pros ton iOannEn tou baptisthEnai hup autou
G2446 G4314 G3588 G2491 G3588 G907 G5259 G846
n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Pas Prep pp Gen Sg m
JORDAN TOWARD THE JOHN OF-THE TO-BE-DIPizED by him
to-be-baptized
3:14 o de iwannhs diekwluen auton legwn egw creian 14 But John forbad him,
ho de iOannEs diekOluen auton legOn egO chreian
G3588 G1161 G2491 G1254 G846 G3004 G1473 G5532
saying, I have need to be
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp 1 Nom Sg n_ Acc Sg f baptized of thee, and comest
THE YET JOHN THRU-FORBADE Him sayING I need thou to me?
prohibited
ecw upo sou baptisqhnai kai su erch pros me

echO hupo sou baptisthEnai kai su erchE pros me
G2192 G5259 G4675 G907 G2532 G4771 G2064 G4314 G3165
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Prep pp 2 Gen Sg vn Aor Pas Conj pp 2 Nom Sg vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Prep pp 1 Acc Sg
AM-HAVING by YOU TO-BE-DIPizED AND YOU ARE-COMING TOWARD ME
to-be-baptized
3:15 apokriqeis de o ihsous eipen pros auton afes 15 And Jesus answering said
apokritheis de ho iEsous eipen pros auton aphes
G611 G1161 G3588 G2424 G2036 G4314 G846 G863
unto him, Suffer [it to be so]
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg now: for thus it becometh us to
answerING YET THE JESUS said TOWARD him FROM-LET fulfil all righteousness. Then
let-you ! he suffered him.
arti outws gar prepon estin hmin plhrwsai pasan

arti houtOs gar prepon estin hEmin plErOsai pasan
G737 G3779 G1063 G4241 G2076 G2254 G4137 G3956
Adv Adv Conj vp Pres im-Act Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl vn Aor Act a_ Acc Sg f
at-PRESENT thus for BEHOOVING it-IS to-US TO-FILL EVERY
to-fulfill all
dikaiosunhn tote afihsin auton

dikaiosunEn tote aphiEsin auton
G1343 G5119 G863 G846
n_ Acc Sg f Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
JUSTice then he-IS-FROM-LETTING Him
righteousness he-is-letting
3:16 kai baptisqeis o ihsous anebh euqus apo tou udatos 16 And Jesus, when he was
kai baptistheis ho iEsous anebE euthus apo tou hudatos
G2532 G907 G3588 G2424 G305 G2117 G575 G3588 G5204
baptized, went up straightway
Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n out of the water: and, lo, the
AND BEING-DIPizED THE JESUS UP-STEPPed straightway FROM THE water heavens were opened unto him,
being-baptized stepped-up and he saw the Spirit of God
descending like a dove, and
kai idou anewcqhsan autw oi ouranoi kai eiden to lighting upon him:
kai idou aneOchthEsan autO hoi ouranoi kai eiden to
G2532 G2400 G455 G846 G3588 G3772 G2532 G1492 G3588
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Aor Pas 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
AND BE-PERCEIVING WERE-UP-OPENED to-Him THE heavens AND He-PERCEIVED THE
lo ! were-opened
pneuma tou qeou katabainon wsei peristeran kai ercomenon

pneuma tou theou katabainon hOsei peristeran kai erchomenon
G4151 G3588 G2316 G2597 G5616 G4058 G2532 G2064
n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Acc Sg n Adv n_ Acc Sg f Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg n
spirit OF-THE God DOWN-STEPPING AS-IF DOVE AND COMING
descending
ep auton
ep auton
G1909 G846
Prep pp Acc Sg m
ON Him
3:17 kai idou fwnh ek twn ouranwn legousa outos 17 And lo a voice from heaven,
kai idou phOnE ek tOn ouranOn legousa houtos
G2532 G2400 G5456 G1537 G3588 G3772 G3004 G3778
saying, This is my beloved
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg f pd Nom Sg m Son, in whom I am well
AND BE-PERCEIVING SOUND OUT OF-THE heavens sayING this pleased.
lo ! voice
estin o uios mou o agaphtos en w eudokhsa

estin ho huios mou ho agapEtos en hO eudokEsa
G2076 G3588 G5207 G3450 G3588 G27 G1722 G3739 G2106
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Prep pr Dat Sg m vi Aor Act 1 Sg
IS THE SON OF-ME THE beLOVED IN WHOM I-WELL-SEEM
I-delight
Matthew 4
4:1 tote o ihsous anhcqh eis thn erhmon upo tou pneumatos 1 . Then was Jesus led up of
tote ho iEsous anEchthE eis tEn erEmon hupo tou pneumatos
G5119 G3588 G2424 G321 G1519 G3588 G2048 G5259 G3588 G4151
the Spirit into the wilderness to
Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n be tempted of the devil.
then THE JESUS WAS-UP-LED INTO THE DESOLATE by THE spirit
was-led-up wilderness
peirasqhnai upo tou diabolou

peirasthEnai hupo tou diabolou
G3985 G5259 G3588 G1228
vn Aor Pas Prep t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m
TO-BE-triED by THE THRU-CASTer
Adversary
4:2 kai nhsteusas hmeras tessarakonta kai nuktas tessarakonta usteron 2 And when he had fasted
kai nEsteusas hEmeras tessarakonta kai nuktas tessarakonta husteron
G2532 G3522 G2250 G5062 G2532 G3571 G5062 G5305
forty days and forty nights, he
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Pl f a_ Nom Conj n_ Acc Pl f a_ Nom Adv was afterward an hungred.
AND fasting DAYS FOUR-TY AND NIGHTS FOUR-TY subsequently
forty forty
epeinasen
epeinasen
G3983
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
He-HUNGERS
4:3 kai proselqwn autw o peirazwn eipen ei uios 3 And when the tempter came
kai proselthOn autO ho peirazOn eipen ei huios
G2532 G4334 G846 G3588 G3985 G2036 G1487 G5207
to him, he said, If thou be the
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Cond n_ Nom Sg m Son of God, command that
AND TOWARD-COMING to-Him THE one-tryING said IF SON these stones be made bread.
coming-to him one-trying
ei tou qeou eipe ina oi liqoi outoi artoi

ei tou theou eipe hina hoi lithoi houtoi artoi
G1488 G3588 G2316 G2036 G2443 G3588 G3037 G3778 G740
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pd Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
YOU-ARE OF-THE God BE-sayING THAT THE STONES these BREADS
be-you-saying ! cakes-of-bread
genwntai
genOntai
G1096
vs 2Aor midD 3 Pl
MAY-BE-BECOMING
4:4 o de apokriqeis eipen gegraptai ouk ep artw 4 But he answered and said, It
ho de apokritheis eipen gegraptai ouk ep artO
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G1125 G3756 G1909 G740
is written, Man shall not live
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Part Neg Prep n_ Dat Sg m by bread alone, but by every
THE YET answerING He-said it-HAS-been-WRITTEN NOT ON BREAD word that proceedeth out of the
mouth of God.
monw zhsetai anqrwpos all epi panti rhmati ekporeuomenw dia

monO zEsetai anthrOpos all epi panti rEmati ekporeuomenO dia
G3441 G2198 G444 G235 G1909 G3956 G4487 G1607 G1223
a_ Dat Sg m vi Fut midD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Conj Prep a_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Sg n Prep
ONLY SHALL-BE-LIVING human but ON EVERY declaration OUT-GOING THRU
alone going-out through
stomatos qeou
stomatos theou
G4750 G2316
n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg m
MOUTH OF-God
4:5 tote paralambanei auton o diabolos eis thn agian polin 5 Then the devil taketh him up
tote paralambanei auton ho diabolos eis tEn hagian polin
G5119 G3880 G846 G3588 G1228 G1519 G3588 G40 G4172
into the holy city, and setteth
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f him on a pinnacle of the
then IS-BESIDE-GETTING Him THE THRU-CASTer INTO THE HOLY city temple,
is-taking-along Adversary
kai isthsin auton epi to pterugion tou ierou

kai istEsin auton epi to pterugion tou hierou
G2532 G2476 G846 G1909 G3588 G4419 G3588 G2411
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
AND IS-STANDING Him ON THE flyer-let OF-THE SACRED-place
little-wing sanctuary
4:6 kai legei autw ei uios ei tou qeou bale 6 And saith unto him, If thou
kai legei autO ei huios ei tou theou bale
G2532 G3004 G846 G1487 G5207 G1488 G3588 G2316 G906
be the Son of God, cast thyself
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Cond n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 2 Sg t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg down: for it is written, He shall
AND he-IS-sayING to-Him IF SON YOU-ARE OF-THE God BE-CASTING give his angels charge
be-you-casting ! concerning thee: and in [their]
Matthew 4
hands they shall bear thee up,

seauton katw gegraptai gar oti tois aggelois autou lest at any time thou dash thy
seauton katO gegraptai gar hoti tois aggelois autou
G4572 G2736 G1125 G1063 G3754 G3588 G32 G846 foot against a stone.
pf 2 Acc Sg m Prep vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Conj Conj t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m
YOURself DOWN it-HAS-been-WRITTEN for that to-THE MESSENGERS OF-Him
enteleitai peri sou kai epi ceirwn arousin se

enteleitai peri sou kai epi cheirOn arousin se
G1781 G4012 G4675 G2532 G1909 G5495 G142 G4571
vi Fut midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep pp 2 Gen Sg Conj Prep n_ Gen Pl f vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Sg
SHALL-BE-beING-directED ABOUT YOU AND ON HANDS THEY-SHALL-BE-LIFTING YOU
concerning
mhpote proskoyhs pros liqon ton poda sou

mEpote proskopsEs pros lithon ton poda sou
G3379 G4350 G4314 G3037 G3588 G4228 G4675
Adv vs Aor Act 2 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
NO-?-when YOU-SHOULD-BE-TOWARD-STRIKING TOWARD STONE THE FOOT OF-YOU
lest-at-some-time you-should-be-dashing-against
4:7 efh autw o ihsous palin gegraptai ouk 7 Jesus said unto him, It is
ephE autO ho iEsous palin gegraptai ouk
G5346 G846 G3588 G2424 G3825 G1125 G3756
written again, Thou shalt not
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Adv vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Part Neg tempt the Lord thy God.
AVERRed to-him THE JESUS AGAIN it-HAS-been-WRITTEN NOT
ekpeiraseis kurion ton qeon sou

ekpeiraseis kurion ton theon sou
G1598 G2962 G3588 G2316 G4675
vi Fut Act 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-OUT-tryING Master THE God OF-YOU
you-shall-be-putting-on-trial Lord
4:8 palin paralambanei auton o diabolos eis oros uyhlon lian 8 Again, the devil taketh him
palin paralambanei auton ho diabolos eis oros hupsElon lian
G3825 G3880 G846 G3588 G1228 G1519 G3735 G5308 G3029
up into an exceeding high
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Adv mountain, and sheweth him all
AGAIN IS-BESIDE-GETTING Him THE THRU-CASTer INTO mountain HIGH VERY the kingdoms of the world, and
is-taking-along Adversary the glory of them;
kai deiknusin autw pasas tas basileias tou kosmou kai thn
kai deiknusin autO pasas tas basileias tou kosmou kai tEn
G2532 G1166 G846 G3956 G3588 G932 G3588 G2889 G2532 G3588
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m a_ Acc Pl f t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg f
AND IS-SHOWING to-Him ALL THE KINGdoms OF-THE SYSTEM AND THE
world
doxan autwn
doxan autOn
G1391 G846
n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Pl f
esteem OF-them
glory
4:9 kai legei autw tauta panta soi dwsw ean 9 And saith unto him, All these
kai legei autO tauta panta soi dOsO ean
G2532 G3004 G846 G5023 G3956 G4671 G1325 G1437
things will I give thee, if thou
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m pd Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n pp 2 Dat Sg vi Fut Act 1 Sg Cond wilt fall down and worship me.
AND he-IS-sayING to-Him these ALL to-YOU I-SHALL-BE-GIVING IF-EVER
peswn proskunhshs moi

pesOn proskunEsEs moi
G4098 G4352 G3427
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vs Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg
FALLING YOU-SHOULD-BE-worshipING to-ME
falling-down me
4:10 tote legei autw o ihsous upage satana 10 Then saith Jesus unto him,
tote legei autO ho iEsous hupage satana
G5119 G3004 G846 G3588 G2424 G5217 G4567
Get thee hence, Satan: for it is
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg n_ Voc Sg m written, Thou shalt worship the
then IS-sayING to-him THE JESUS BE-UNDER-LEADING SATAN (adversary) Lord thy God, and him only
be-you-going-away ! Satan ! shalt thou serve.
gegraptai gar kurion ton qeon sou proskunhseis kai

gegraptai gar kurion ton theon sou proskunEseis kai
G1125 G1063 G2962 G3588 G2316 G4675 G4352 G2532
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg vi Fut Act 2 Sg Conj
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN for Master THE God OF-YOU YOU-SHALL-BE-worshipING AND
Lord
autw monw latreuseis

autO monO latreuseis
G846 G3441 G3000
pp Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m vi Fut Act 2 Sg
to-Him ONLY YOU-SHALL-BE-offerING-DIVINE-SERVICE
you-shall-be-offering-divine-service
Matthew 4
4:11 tote afihsin auton o diabolos kai idou aggeloi 11 Then the devil leaveth him,
tote aphiEsin auton ho diabolos kai idou aggeloi
G5119 G863 G846 G3588 G1228 G2532 G2400 G32
and, behold, angels came and
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Pl m ministered unto him.
then IS-FROM-LETTING Him THE THRU-CASTer AND BE-PERCEIVING MESSENGERS
is-leaving Adversary lo !
proshlqon kai dihkonoun autw

prosElthon kai diEkonoun autO
G4334 G2532 G1247 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
TOWARD-CAME AND THRU-SERVED to-Him
approached waited-on him
4:12 akousas de o ihsous oti iwannhs paredoqh anecwrhsen 12 . Now when Jesus had
akousas de ho iEsous hoti iOannEs paredothE anechOrEsen
G191 G1161 G3588 G2424 G3754 G2491 G3860 G402
heard that John was cast into
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg vi Aor Act 3 Sg prison, he departed into
HEARing YET THE JESUS that JOHN WAS-BESIDE-GIVEN He-UP-SPACES Galilee;
was-given-up he-retires
eis thn galilaian

eis tEn galilaian
G1519 G3588 G1056
Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
INTO THE GALILEE
4:13 kai katalipwn thn nazareq elqwn katwkhsen eis 13 And leaving Nazareth, he
kai katalipOn tEn nazareth elthOn katOkEsen eis
G2532 G2641 G3588 G3478 G2064 G2730 G1519
came and dwelt in Capernaum,
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f ni proper vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep which is upon the sea coast, in
AND leavING THE NAZARETH COMING He-DOWN-HOMES INTO the borders of Zabulon and
he-dwells Nephthalim:
kapernaoum thn paraqalassian en oriois zaboulwn kai nefqaleim

kapernaoum tEn parathalassian en horiois zaboulOn kai nephthaleim
G2584 G3588 G3864 G1722 G3725 G2194 G2532 G3508
ni proper t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f Prep n_ Dat Pl n ni proper Conj ni proper
CAPERNAUM THE BESIDE-SEA IN boundaries of-ZABULON AND NEPHTHALIM
by-the-seaside of-Zebulon
4:14 ina plhrwqh to rhqen dia hsaiou tou profhtou 14 That it might be fulfilled
hina plErOthE to rEthen dia Esaiou tou prophEtou
G2443 G4137 G3588 G4483 G1223 G2268 G3588 G4396
which was spoken by Esaias
Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n Prep n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m the prophet, saying,
THAT MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE BEING-declarED THRU ISAIAH THE BEFORE-AVERer
may-be-being-fulfilled through prophet
legontos
legontos
G3004
vp Pres Act Gen Sg n
sayING
4:15 gh zaboulwn kai gh nefqaleim odon qalasshs peran 15 The land of Zabulon, and
gE zaboulOn kai gE nephthaleim hodon thalassEs peran
G1093 G2194 G2532 G1093 G3508 G3598 G2281 G4008
the land of Nephthalim, [by]
n_ Nom Sg f ni proper Conj n_ Nom Sg f ni proper n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Adv the way of the sea, beyond
LAND ZABULON AND LAND of-NEPHTHALIM WAY OF-SEA OTHER-SIDE Jordan, Galilee of the Gentiles;
of-Zebulon road
tou iordanou galilaia twn eqnwn

tou iordanou galilaia tOn ethnOn
G3588 G2446 G1056 G3588 G1484
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
OF-THE JORDAN GALILEE OF-THE NATIONS
4:16 o laos o kaqhmenos en skotei eide fws 16 The people which sat in
ho laos ho kathEmenos en skotei eide phOs
G3588 G2992 G3588 G2521 G1722 G4655 G1492 G5457
darkness saw great light; and
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n to them which sat in the region
THE PEOPLE THE one-sittING IN DARKness PERCEIVED LIGHT and shadow of death light is
sitting sprung up.
mega kai tois kaqhmenois en cwra kai skia qanatou fws

mega kai tois kathEmenois en chOra kai skia thanatou phOs
G3173 G2532 G3588 G2521 G1722 G5561 G2532 G4639 G2288 G5457
a_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Dat Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl m Prep n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg n
GREAT AND to-THE ones-sittING IN SPACE AND SHADE OF-DEATH LIGHT
ones-sitting province shadow
aneteilen autois
aneteilen autois
G393 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m
UP-risES to-them
arises
Matthew 4
4:17 apo tote hrxato o ihsous khrussein kai legein 17 From that time Jesus began
apo tote Erxato ho iEsous kErussein kai legein
G575 G5119 G756 G3588 G2424 G2784 G2532 G3004
to preach, and to say, Repent:
Prep Adv vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vn Pres Act Conj vn Pres Act for the kingdom of heaven is at
FROM then begins THE JESUS TO-BE-PROCLAIMING AND TO-BE-sayING hand.
to-be-heralding
metanoeite hggiken gar h basileia twn ouranwn

metanoeite Eggiken gar hE basileia tOn ouranOn
G3340 G1448 G1063 G3588 G932 G3588 G3772
vm Pres Act 2 Pl vi Perf Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
BE-YE-after-MINDING HAS-NEARED for THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens
be-ye-repenting ! has-drawn-near
4:18 peripatwn de o ihsous para thn qalassan ths galilaias 18 . And Jesus, walking by the
peripatOn de ho iEsous para tEn thalassan tEs galilaias
G4043 G1161 G3588 G2424 G3844 G3588 G2281 G3588 G1056
sea of Galilee, saw two
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f brethren, Simon called Peter,
ABOUT-TREADING YET THE JESUS BESIDE THE SEA OF-THE GALILEE and Andrew his brother,
walking casting a net into the sea: for
they were fishers.
eiden duo adelfous simwna ton legomenon petron kai andrean
eiden duo adelphous simOna ton legomenon petron kai andrean
G1492 G1417 G80 G4613 G3588 G3004 G4074 G2532 G406
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m
He-PERCEIVED TWO brothers SIMON THE beING-said Peter (ROCK) AND ANDREW
perceived Peter
ton adelfon autou ballontas amfiblhstron eis thn qalassan

ton adelphon autou ballontas amphiblEstron eis tEn thalassan
G3588 G80 G846 G906 G293 G1519 G3588 G2281
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m n_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
THE brother OF-him CASTING ENVELOPE-CASTer INTO THE SEA
purse-net
hsan gar alieis

Esan gar halieis
G2258 G1063 G231
vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj n_ Nom Pl m
THEY-WERE for fishers
4:19 kai legei autois deute opisw mou kai poihsw umas 19 And he saith unto them,
kai legei autois deute opisO mou kai poiEsO humas
G2532 G3004 G846 G1205 G3694 G3450 G2532 G4160 G5209
Follow me, and I will make
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vm txx vxx 2 Pl Adv pp 1 Gen Sg Conj vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl you fishers of men.
AND He-IS-sayING to-them HITHER BEHIND ME AND I-SHALL-BE-makING YOU(p)
hither-ye ! after ye
alieis anqrwpwn
halieis anthrOpOn
G231 G444
n_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
fishers OF-humans
4:20 oi de euqews afentes ta diktua hkolouqhsan autw 20 And they straightway left
hoi de eutheOs aphentes ta diktua EkolouthEsan autO
G3588 G1161 G2112 G863 G3588 G1350 G190 G846
[their] nets, and followed him.
t_ Nom Pl m Conj Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
THE YET immediately FROM-LETTING THE NETS THEY-follow to-Him
leaving him
4:21 kai probas ekeiqen eiden allous duo adelfous iakwbon 21 And going on from thence,
kai probas ekeithen eiden allous duo adelphous iakObon
G2532 G4260 G1564 G1492 G243 G1417 G80 G2385
he saw other two brethren,
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Sg m James [the son] of Zebedee,
AND BEFORE-STEPPing thence He-PERCEIVED others TWO brothers JACOBUS and John his brother, in a ship
advancing James with Zebedee their father,
mending their nets; and he
ton tou zebedaiou kai iwannhn ton adelfon autou en tw called them.
ton tou zebedaiou kai iOannEn ton adelphon autou en tO
G3588 G3588 G2199 G2532 G2491 G3588 G80 G846 G1722 G3588
t_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg n
THE OF-THE ZEBEDEE AND JOHN THE brother OF-him IN THE
ploiw meta zebedaiou tou patros autwn katartizontas ta diktua

ploiO meta zebedaiou tou patros autOn katartizontas ta diktua
G4143 G3326 G2199 G3588 G3962 G846 G2675 G3588 G1350
n_ Dat Sg n Prep n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
FLOATer WITH ZEBEDEE OF-THE FATHER OF-them DOWN-EQUIPPING THE NETS
ship the adjusting
autwn kai ekalesen autous

autOn kai ekalesen autous
G846 G2532 G2564 G846
pp Gen Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m
OF-them AND He-CALLS them
4:22 oi de euqews afentes to ploion kai ton patera 22 And they immediately left
hoi de eutheOs aphentes to ploion kai ton patera
G3588 G1161 G2112 G863 G3588 G4143 G2532 G3588 G3962
the ship and their father, and
t_ Nom Pl m Conj Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m followed him.
THE YET immediately FROM-LETTING THE FLOATer AND THE FATHER
leaving ship
autwn hkolouqhsan autw

autOn EkolouthEsan autO
G846 G190 G846
pp Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
OF-them THEY-follow to-Him
him
4:23 kai perihgen olhn thn galilaian o ihsous didaskwn en 23 . And Jesus went about all
kai periEgen holEn tEn galilaian ho iEsous didaskOn en
G2532 G4013 G3650 G3588 G1056 G3588 G2424 G1321 G1722
Galilee, teaching in their
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep synagogues, and preaching the
AND ABOUT-LED WHOLE THE GALILEE THE JESUS TEACHING IN gospel of the kingdom, and
went-about healing all manner of sickness
and all manner of disease
tais sunagwgais autwn kai khrusswn to euaggelion ths among the people.
tais sunagOgais autOn kai kErussOn to euaggelion tEs
G3588 G4864 G846 G2532 G2784 G3588 G2098 G3588
t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pp Gen Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg f
THE TOGETHER-LEADS OF-them AND PROCLAIMING THE WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
synagogues heralding
basileias kai qerapeuwn pasan noson kai pasan malakian en tw

basileias kai therapeuOn pasan noson kai pasan malakian en tO
G932 G2532 G2323 G3956 G3554 G2532 G3956 G3119 G1722 G3588
n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Dat Sg m
KINGdom AND curING EVERY DISEASE AND EVERY SOFTness IN THE
weakness among
law
laO
G2992
n_ Dat Sg m
PEOPLE
4:24 kai aphlqen h akoh autou eis olhn thn surian kai 24 And his fame went
kai apElthen hE akoE autou eis holEn tEn surian kai
G2532 G565 G3588 G189 G846 G1519 G3650 G3588 G4947 G2532
throughout all Syria: and they
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m Prep a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj brought unto him all sick
AND FROM-CAME THE HEARing OF-Him INTO WHOLE THE SYRIA AND people that were taken with
came-forth tidings divers diseases and torments,
and those which were
proshnegkan autw pantas tous kakws econtas poikilais nosois possessed with devils, and
prosEnegkan autO pantas tous kakOs echontas poikilais nosois those which were lunatick, and
G4374 G846 G3956 G3588 G2560 G2192 G4164 G3554
vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m Adv vp Pres Act Acc Pl m a_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f those that had the palsy; and he
THEY-TOWARD-CARRY to-Him ALL THE EVILly HAVING to-VARIOUS DISEASES healed them.
they-bring him the-ones illness
kai basanois sunecomenous kai daimonizomenous kai selhniazomenous kai

kai basanois sunechomenous kai daimonizomenous kai selEniazomenous kai
G2532 G931 G4912 G2532 G1139 G2532 G4583 G2532
Conj n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Pas Acc Pl m Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m Conj
AND ORDEALS pressING AND ones-beING-demonizED AND ones-beING-MOONizED AND
torments also ones-being-demonized ones-being-lunatics
paralutikous kai eqerapeusen autous

paralutikous kai etherapeusen autous
G3885 G2532 G2323 G846
a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m
paralytics AND He-curES them
4:25 kai hkolouqhsan autw ocloi polloi apo ths galilaias kai 25 And there followed him
kai EkolouthEsan autO ochloi polloi apo tEs galilaias kai
G2532 G190 G846 G3793 G4183 G575 G3588 G1056 G2532
great multitudes of people
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj from Galilee, and [from]
AND follow to-Him THRONGS MANY FROM THE GALILEE AND Decapolis, and [from]
him vast Jerusalem, and [from] Judaea,
and [from] beyond Jordan.
dekapolews kai ierosolumwn kai ioudaias kai peran tou iordanou
dekapoleOs kai ierosolumOn kai ioudaias kai peran tou iordanou
G1179 G2532 G2414 G2532 G2449 G2532 G4008 G3588 G2446
n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Pl n Conj n_ Gen Sg f Conj Adv t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
Decapolis AND JERUSALEM AND JUDEA AND OTHER-SIDE OF-THE JORDAN
Matthew 5
5:1 idwn de tous oclous anebh eis to oros kai 1 . And seeing the multitudes,
idOn de tous ochlous anebE eis to oros kai
G1492 G1161 G3588 G3793 G305 G1519 G3588 G3735 G2532
he went up into a mountain:
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj and when he was set, his
PERCEIVING YET THE THRONGS He-UP-STEPPed INTO THE mountain AND disciples came unto him:
he-ascended
kaqisantos autou proshlqon autw oi maqhtai autou

kathisantos autou prosElthon autO hoi mathEtai autou
G2523 G846 G4334 G846 G3588 G3101 G846
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m
OF-being-seated Him TOWARD-CAME to-Him THE LEARNers OF-Him
came-to him disciples
5:2 kai anoixas to stoma autou edidasken autous legwn 2 And he opened his mouth,
kai anoixas to stoma autou edidasken autous legOn
G2532 G455 G3588 G4750 G846 G1321 G846 G3004
and taught them, saying,
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
AND UP-OPENing THE MOUTH OF-Him He-TAUGHT them sayING
opening
5:3 makarioi oi ptwcoi tw pneumati oti autwn estin h 3 . Blessed [are] the poor in
makarioi hoi ptOchoi tO pneumati hoti autOn estin hE
G3107 G3588 G4434 G3588 G4151 G3754 G846 G2076 G3588
spirit: for theirs is the kingdom
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n Conj pp Gen Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f of heaven.
HAPPY THE POOR-ones to-THE spirit that OF-them IS THE
happy-are poor-ones
basileia twn ouranwn

basileia tOn ouranOn
G932 G3588 G3772
n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
KINGdom OF-THE heavens
5:4 makarioi oi penqountes oti autoi paraklhqhsontai 4 Blessed [are] they that
makarioi hoi penthountes hoti autoi paraklEthEsontai
G3107 G3588 G3996 G3754 G846 G3870
mourn: for they shall be
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj pp Nom Pl m vi Fut Pas 3 Pl comforted.
HAPPY THE MOURNING-ones that they SHALL-BE-BEING-BESIDE-CALLED
happy-are ones-mourning shall-be-being-consoled
5:5 makarioi oi praeis oti autoi klhronomhsousin thn ghn 5 Blessed [are] the meek: for
makarioi hoi praeis hoti autoi klEronomEsousin tEn gEn
G3107 G3588 G4239 G3754 G846 G2816 G3588 G1093
they shall inherit the earth.
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Conj pp Nom Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
HAPPY THE MEEK that they SHALL-BE-tenantING THE LAND
happy-are meek-ones shall-be-enjoying-the-allotment
5:6 makarioi oi peinwntes kai diywntes thn dikaiosunhn oti 6 Blessed [are] they which do
makarioi hoi peinOntes kai dipsOntes tEn dikaiosunEn hoti
G3107 G3588 G3983 G2532 G1372 G3588 G1343 G3754
hunger and thirst after
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj righteousness: for they shall be
HAPPY THE ones-HUNGERING AND THIRSTING THE JUSTice that filled.
happy-are ones-hungering righteousness
autoi cortasqhsontai
autoi chortasthEsontai
G846 G5526
pp Nom Pl m vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
they SHALL-BE-BEING-satisfiED
5:7 makarioi oi elehmones oti autoi elehqhsontai 7 Blessed [are] the merciful:
makarioi hoi eleEmones hoti autoi eleEthEsontai
G3107 G3588 G1655 G3754 G846 G1653
for they shall obtain mercy.
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Conj pp Nom Pl m vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
HAPPY THE MERCIful that they SHALL-BE-BEING-MERCIED
happy-are merciful-ones shall-be-being-shown-mercy
5:8 makarioi oi kaqaroi th kardia oti autoi ton qeon 8Blessed [are] the pure in
makarioi hoi katharoi tE kardia hoti autoi ton theon
G3107 G3588 G2513 G3588 G2588 G3754 G846 G3588 G2316
heart: for they shall see God.
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj pp Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
HAPPY THE clean to-THE HEART that they THE God
happy-are clean-ones
oyontai
opsontai
G3700
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
SHALL-BE-VIEWING
shall-be-seeing
5:9 makarioi oi eirhnopoioi oti autoi uioi qeou klhqhsontai 9 Blessed [are] the
makarioi hoi eirEnopoioi hoti autoi huioi theou klEthEsontai
G3107 G3588 G1518 G3754 G846 G5207 G2316 G2564
peacemakers: for they shall be
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Conj pp Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Pl called the children of God.
HAPPY THE PEACE-makers that they SONS OF-God SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED
happy-are
Matthew 5
5:10 makarioi oi dediwgmenoi eneken dikaiosunhs oti autwn 10 Blessed [are] they which are
makarioi hoi dediOgmenoi heneken dikaiosunEs hoti autOn
G3107 G3588 G1377 G1752 G1343 G3754 G846
persecuted for
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m Adv n_ Gen Sg f Conj pp Gen Pl m righteousness'sake: for theirs is
HAPPY THE ones-HAVING-been-CHASED on-account-of OF-JUSTice that OF-them the kingdom of heaven.
happy-are ones-having-been-persecuted righteousness
estin h basileia twn ouranwn

estin hE basileia tOn ouranOn
G2076 G3588 G932 G3588 G3772
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
IS THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens
5:11 makarioi este otan oneidiswsin umas kai 11 Blessed are ye, when [men]
makarioi este hotan oneidisOsin humas kai
G3107 G2075 G3752 G3679 G5209 G2532
shall revile you, and persecute
a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 2 Pl Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Pl Conj [you], and shall say all manner
HAPPY YE-ARE when-EVER THEY-SHOULD-BE-REPROACHING YOU(p) AND of evil against you falsely, for
whenever ye my sake.
diwxwsin kai eipwsin pan ponhron rhma kaq umwn

diOxOsin kai eipOsin pan ponEron rEma kath humOn
G1377 G2532 G2036 G3956 G4190 G4487 G2596 G5216
vs Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Prep pp 2 Gen Pl
THEY-SHOULD-BE-CHASING AND THEY-MAY-BE-sayING EVERY wicked declaration DOWN OF-YOU(p)
they-should-be-persecuting against ye
yeudomenoi eneken emou

pseudomenoi heneken emou
G5574 G1752 G1700
vp Pres mid/pas Nom Pl m Adv pp 1 Gen Sg
FALSifyING on-account-of ME
5:12 cairete kai agalliasqe oti o misqos umwn polus en 12 Rejoice, and be exceeding
chairete kai agalliasthe hoti ho misthos humOn polus en
G5463 G2532 G21 G3754 G3588 G3408 G5216 G4183 G1722
glad: for great [is] your reward
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl a_ Nom Sg m Prep in heaven: for so persecuted
BE-YE-JOYING AND BE-beING-exultED that THE HIRE OF-YOU(p) much IN they the prophets which were
be-ye-rejoicing ! be-ye-exulting ! wages of-ye vast before you.
tois ouranois outws gar ediwxan tous profhtas tous pro umwn
tois ouranois houtOs gar ediOxan tous prophEtas tous pro humOn
G3588 G3772 G3779 G1063 G1377 G3588 G4396 G3588 G4253 G5216
t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Adv Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m Prep pp 2 Gen Pl
THE heavens thus for THEY-CHASE THE BEFORE-AVERers THE BEFORE YOU(p)
they-persecute prophets ye
5:13 umeis este to alas ths ghs ean de to 13 . Ye are the salt of the earth:
humeis este to halas tEs gEs ean de to
G5210 G2075 G3588 G217 G3588 G1093 G1437 G1161 G3588
but if the salt have lost his
pp 2 Nom Pl vi Pres vxx 2 Pl t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Cond Conj t_ Nom Sg n savour, wherewith shall it be
YOU(p) ARE THE SALT OF-THE LAND IF-EVER YET THE salted? it is thenceforth good
ye earth for nothing, but to be cast out,
and to be trodden under foot of
alas mwranqh en tini alisqhsetai eis ouden men.
halas mOranthE en tini halisthEsetai eis ouden
G217 G3471 G1722 G5101 G233 G1519 G3762
n_ Nom Sg n vs Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep pi Dat Sg n vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep a_ Acc Sg n
SALT MAY-BE-BEING-made-INSIPID IN ANY it-SHALL-BE-BEING-SALTED INTO NOT-YET-ONE
what ? nothing
iscuei eti ei mh blhqhnai exw kai katapateisqai upo twn

ischuei eti ei mE blEthEnai exO kai katapateisthai hupo tOn
G2480 G2089 G1487 G3361 G906 G1854 G2532 G2662 G5259 G3588
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv Cond Part Neg vn Aor Pas Adv Conj vn Pres Pas Prep t_ Gen Pl m
it-IS-beING-STRONG STILL IF NO TO-BE-CAST OUT AND TO-BE-beING-tramplED UNDER THE
it-is-availing outside by
anqrwpwn
anthrOpOn
G444
n_ Gen Pl m
humans
5:14 umeis este to fws tou kosmou ou dunatai 14 Ye are the light of the
humeis este to phOs tou kosmou ou dunatai
G5210 G2075 G3588 G5457 G3588 G2889 G3756 G1410
world. A city that is set on an
pp 2 Nom Pl vi Pres vxx 2 Pl t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg hill cannot be hid.
YOU(p) ARE THE LIGHT OF-THE SYSTEM NOT IS-ABLE
ye world can
polis krubhnai epanw orous keimenh

polis krubEnai epanO orous keimenE
G4172 G2928 G1883 G3735 G2749
n_ Nom Sg f vn 2Aor Pas Adv n_ Gen Sg n vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg f
city TO-BE-HID ON-UP OF-mountain LYING
upon mountain being-located
Matthew 5
5:15 oude kaiousin lucnon kai tiqeasin auton upo ton modion 15 Neither do men light a
oude kaiousin luchnon kai titheasin auton hupo ton modion
G3761 G2545 G3088 G2532 G5087 G846 G5259 G3588 G3426
candle, and put it under a
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m bushel, but on a candlestick;
NOT-YET THEY-ARE-BURNING LAMP AND ARE-PLACING it UNDER THE MEASURE and it giveth light unto all that
neither him peck-measure are in the house.
all epi thn lucnian kai lampei pasin tois en th oikia

all epi tEn luchnian kai lampei pasin tois en tE oikia
G235 G1909 G3588 G3087 G2532 G2989 G3956 G3588 G1722 G3588 G3614
Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg a_ Dat Pl m t_ Dat Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
but ON THE LAMPstand AND it-IS-SHINING to-ALL THE-ones IN THE HOME
she-is-shining the-ones house
5:16 outws lamyatw to fws umwn emprosqen twn anqrwpwn 16 Let your light so shine
houtOs lampsatO to phOs humOn emprosthen tOn anthrOpOn
G3779 G2989 G3588 G5457 G5216 G1715 G3588 G444
before men, that they may see
Adv vm Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Gen Pl Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m your good works, and glorify
thus LET-SHINE THE LIGHT OF-YOU(p) IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE humans your Father which is in heaven.
let-it-shine ! of-ye in-front-of the
opws idwsin umwn ta kala erga kai doxaswsin

hopOs idOsin humOn ta kala erga kai doxasOsin
G3704 G1492 G5216 G3588 G2570 G2041 G2532 G1392
Adv vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl
WHICH-how THEY-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING OF-YOU(p) THE IDEAL ACTS AND SHOULD-BE-esteemING
so-that of-ye should-be-glorifying
ton patera umwn ton en tois ouranois

ton patera humOn ton en tois ouranois
G3588 G3962 G5216 G3588 G1722 G3588 G3772
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
THE FATHER OF-YOU(p) THE IN THE heavens
of-ye
5:17 mh nomishte oti hlqon katalusai ton nomon h 17 . Think not that I am come
mE nomisEte hoti Elthon katalusai ton nomon E
G3361 G3543 G3754 G2064 G2647 G3588 G3551 G2228
to destroy the law, or the
Part Neg vs Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Part prophets: I am not come to
NO YE-SHOULD-BE-inferrING that I-CAME TO-DOWN-LOOSE THE LAW OR destroy, but to fulfil.
to-demolish
tous profhtas ouk hlqon katalusai alla plhrwsai

tous prophEtas ouk Elthon katalusai alla plErOsai
G3588 G4396 G3756 G2064 G2647 G235 G4137
t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg vn Aor Act Conj vn Aor Act
THE BEFORE-AVERers NOT I-CAME TO-DOWN-LOOSE but TO-FILL
prophets to-demolish to-fulfill
5:18 amhn gar legw umin ews an parelqh o ouranos 18 For verily I say unto you,
amEn gar legO humin heOs an parelthE ho ouranos
G281 G1063 G3004 G5213 G2193 G302 G3928 G3588 G3772
Till heaven and earth pass, one
Hebrew Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Part vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m jot or one tittle shall in no wise
AMEN for I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) TILL EVER MAY-BE-BESIDE-COMING THE heaven pass from the law, till all be
verily to-ye may-be-passing-by fulfilled.
kai h gh iwta en h mia keraia ou mh

kai hE gE iOta hen E mia keraia ou mE
G2532 G3588 G1093 G2503 G1520 G2228 G1520 G2762 G3756 G3361
Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f ni letter a_ Nom Sg n Part a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Part Neg Part Neg
AND THE LAND IOTA ONE OR ONE horn NOT NO
earth serif
parelqh apo tou nomou ews an panta genhtai

parelthE apo tou nomou heOs an panta genEtai
G3928 G575 G3588 G3551 G2193 G302 G3956 G1096
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj Part a_ Nom Pl n vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
MAY-BE-BESIDE-COMING FROM THE LAW TILL EVER ALL MAY-BE-BECOMING
may-be-passing-by may-be-occurring
5:19 os ean oun lush mian twn entolwn toutwn twn 19 Whosoever therefore shall
hos ean oun lusE mian tOn entolOn toutOn tOn
G3739 G1437 G3767 G3089 G1520 G3588 G1785 G5130 G3588
break one of these least
pr Nom Sg m Cond Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f pd Gen Pl f t_ Gen Pl f commandments, and shall
WHO IF-EVER THEN SHOULD-BE-LOOSING ONE OF-THE directions these THE teach men so, he shall be called
should-be-annulling precepts the least in the kingdom of
heaven: but whosoever shall do
elacistwn kai didaxh outws tous anqrwpous elacistos and teach [them], the same
elachistOn kai didaxE houtOs tous anthrOpous elachistos shall be called great in the
G1646 G2532 G1321 G3779 G3588 G444 G1646
a_ Gen Pl f Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg Adv t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom Sg m kingdom of heaven.
INFERIOR-most AND SHOULD-BE-TEACHING thus THE humans INFERIOR-most
least least-one
klhqhsetai en th basileia twn ouranwn os d an

klEthEsetai en tE basileia tOn ouranOn hos d an
G2564 G1722 G3588 G932 G3588 G3772 G3739 G1161 G302
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pr Nom Sg m Conj Part
SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED IN THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens WHO YET EVER
he-shall-be-being-called
Matthew 5
poihsh kai didaxh outos megas klhqhsetai en

poiEsE kai didaxE houtos megas klEthEsetai en
G4160 G2532 G1321 G3778 G3173 G2564 G1722
vs Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg pd Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep
SHOULD-BE-DOING AND SHOULD-BE-TEACHING this-one GREAT SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED IN
this-one
th basileia twn ouranwn

tE basileia tOn ouranOn
G3588 G932 G3588 G3772
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens
5:20 legw gar umin oti ean mh perisseush h dikaiosunh 20 For I say unto you, That
legO gar humin hoti ean mE perisseusE hE dikaiosunE
G3004 G1063 G5213 G3754 G1437 G3361 G4052 G3588 G1343
except your righteousness shall
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Cond Part Neg vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f exceed [the righteousness] of
I-AM-sayING for to-YOU(p) that IF-EVER NO SHOULD-BE-exceedING THE JUSTice the scribes and Pharisees, ye
to-ye righteousness shall in no case enter into the
kingdom of heaven.
umwn pleion twn grammatewn kai farisaiwn ou mh
humOn pleion tOn grammateOn kai pharisaiOn ou mE
G5216 G4119 G3588 G1122 G2532 G5330 G3756 G3361
pp 2 Gen Pl a_ Acc Sg n Cmp t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m Part Neg Part Neg
OF-YOU(p) MORE OF-THE WRITers AND PHARISEES NOT NO
scribes
eiselqhte eis thn basileian twn ouranwn

eiselthEte eis tEn basileian tOn ouranOn
G1525 G1519 G3588 G932 G3588 G3772
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens
ye-may-be-entering
5:21 hkousate oti erreqh tois arcaiois ou foneuseis os 21 . Ye have heard that it was
Ekousate hoti errethE tois archaiois ou phoneuseis hos
G191 G3754 G4483 G3588 G744 G3756 G5407 G3739
said by them of old time, Thou
vi Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m Part Neg vi Fut Act 2 Sg pr Nom Sg m shalt not kill; and whosoever
YE-HEAR that it-WAS-declarED to-THE ORIGINals NOT YOU-SHALL-BE-MURDERING WHO shall kill shall be in danger of
ancients the judgment:
d an foneush enocos estai th krisei

d an phoneusE enochos estai tE krisei
G1161 G302 G5407 G1777 G2071 G3588 G2920
Conj Part vs Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m vi Fut vxx 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
YET EVER SHOULD-BE-MURDERING liable SHALL-BE to-THE JUDGing
5:22 egw de legw umin oti pas o orgizomenos tw 22 But I say unto you, That
egO de legO humin hoti pas ho orgizomenos tO
G1473 G1161 G3004 G5213 G3754 G3956 G3588 G3710 G3588
whosoever is angry with his
pp 1 Nom Sg Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m brother without a cause shall
I YET AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that EVERY THE-one beING-INDIGNANT to-THE be in danger of the judgment:
to-ye the-one being-angry and whosoever shall say to his
brother, Raca, shall be in
adelfw autou eikh enocos estai th krisei os d an danger of the council: but
adelphO autou eikE enochos estai tE krisei hos d an whosoever shall say, Thou
G80 G846 G1500 G1777 G2071 G3588 G2920 G3739 G1161 G302
n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m Adv a_ Nom Sg m vi Fut vxx 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pr Nom Sg m Conj Part fool, shall be in danger of hell
brother OF-him SIMULATEly liable SHALL-BE to-THE JUDGing WHO YET EVER fire.
feignedly
eiph tw adelfw autou raka enocos estai tw

eipE tO adelphO autou raka enochos estai tO
G2036 G3588 G80 G846 G4469 G1777 G2071 G3588
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m Aramaic a_ Nom Sg m vi Fut vxx 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg n
MAY-BE-sayING to-THE brother OF-him RAKA (Heb,empty) liable SHALL-BE to-THE
Raka !
sunedriw os d an eiph mwre enocos estai eis thn

sunedriO hos d an eipE mOre enochos estai eis tEn
G4892 G3739 G1161 G302 G2036 G3474 G1777 G2071 G1519 G3588
n_ Dat Sg n pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Voc Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f
Sanhedrin WHO YET EVER MAY-BE-sayING INSIPID ! liable SHALL-BE INTO THE
Stupid !
geennan tou puros

geennan tou puros
G1067 G3588 G4442
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
GEHENNA OF-THE FIRE
5:23 ean oun prosferhs to dwron sou epi to 23 Therefore if thou bring thy
ean oun prospherEs to dOron sou epi to
G1437 G3767 G4374 G3588 G1435 G4675 G1909 G3588
gift to the altar, and there
Cond Conj vs Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n rememberest that thy brother
IF-EVER THEN YOU-MAY-BE-TOWARD-CARRYING THE oblation OF-YOU ON THE hath ought against thee;
you-may-be-offering approach-present
Matthew 5
qusiasthrion kakei mnhsqhs oti o adelfos sou

thusiastErion kakei mnEsthEs hoti ho adelphos sou
G2379 G2546 G3415 G3754 G3588 G80 G4675
n_ Acc Sg n Adv Con vs Aor Pas 2 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
SACRIFICE-place AND-there YOU-SHOULD-BE-BEING-REMINDED that THE brother OF-YOU
altar
ecei ti kata sou

echei ti kata sou
G2192 G5100 G2596 G4675
vi Pres Act 3 Sg px Acc Sg n Prep pp 2 Gen Sg
IS-HAVING ANY DOWN OF-YOU
anything against you
5:24 afes ekei to dwron sou emprosqen tou 24 Leave there thy gift before
aphes ekei to dOron sou emprosthen tou
G863 G1563 G3588 G1435 G4675 G1715 G3588
the altar, and go thy way; first
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Adv t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg n be reconciled to thy brother,
FROM-LET there THE oblation OF-YOU IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE and then come and offer thy
leave-you ! approach-present in-front-of the gift.
qusiasthriou kai upage prwton diallaghqi tw adelfw

thusiastEriou kai hupage prOton diallagEthi tO adelphO
G2379 G2532 G5217 G4412 G1259 G3588 G80
n_ Gen Sg n Conj vm Pres Act 2 Sg Adv vm 2Aor Pas 2 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
SACRIFICE-place AND BE-UNDER-LEADING BEFORE-most YOU-BE-THRU-CHANGED to-THE brother
altar be-you-going-away ! first be-you-placated !
sou kai tote elqwn prosfere to dwron sou

sou kai tote elthOn prosphere to dOron sou
G4675 G2532 G5119 G2064 G4374 G3588 G1435 G4675
pp 2 Gen Sg Conj Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-YOU AND then COMING BE-TOWARD-CARRYING THE oblation OF-YOU
be-you-offering ! approach-present
5:25 isqi eunown tw antidikw sou tacu ews otou 25 Agree with thine adversary
isthi eunoOn tO antidikO sou tachu heOs hotou
G2468 G2132 G3588 G476 G4675 G5035 G2193 G3755
quickly, whiles thou art in the
vm Pres vxx 2 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg Adv Conj pr Gen Sg n Att way with him; lest at any time
YOU-BE WELL-MINDING to-THE INSTEAD-JUSTer OF-YOU SWIFTLY TILL OF-WHICH-ANY the adversary deliver thee to
be-you ! humoring plaintiff quickly which-any the judge, and the judge deliver
thee to the officer, and thou be
ei en th odw met autou mhpote se paradw cast into prison.
ei en tE hodO met autou mEpote se paradO
G1488 G1722 G3588 G3598 G3326 G846 G3379 G4571 G3860
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Prep pp Gen Sg m Adv pp 2 Acc Sg vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
YOU-ARE IN THE WAY WITH him NO-?-when YOU MAY-BE-BESIDE-GIVING
lest-at-some-time may-be-giving-up
o antidikos tw krith kai o kriths se

ho antidikos tO kritE kai ho kritEs se
G3588 G476 G3588 G2923 G2532 G3588 G2923 G4571
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Acc Sg
THE INSTEAD-JUSTer to-THE JUDGer AND THE JUDGer YOU
plaintiff judge judge
paradw tw uphreth kai eis fulakhn blhqhsh

paradO tO hupEretE kai eis phulakEn blEthEsE
G3860 G3588 G5257 G2532 G1519 G5438 G906
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj Prep n_ Acc Sg f vi Fut Pas 2 Sg
MAY-BE BESIDE-GIVING to-THE subservient AND INTO GUARD-house YOU-SHOULD-BE-BEING-CAST
may-be-giving-up deputy jail
5:26 amhn legw soi ou mh exelqhs ekeiqen ews an 26 Verily I say unto thee, Thou
amEn legO soi ou mE exelthEs ekeithen heOs an
G281 G3004 G4671 G3756 G3361 G1831 G1564 G2193 G302
shalt by no means come out
Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Part Neg Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg Adv Conj Part thence, till thou hast paid the
AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU NOT NO YOU-MAY-BE-OUT-COMING thence TILL EVER uttermost farthing.
verily you-may-be-coming-out
apodws ton escaton kodranthn

apodOs ton eschaton kodrantEn
G591 G3588 G2078 G2835
vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
YOU-MAY-BE-FROM-GIVING THE LAST QUADRANS
you-may-be-paying
5:27 hkousate oti erreqh tois arcaiois ou moiceuseis 27 . Ye have heard that it was
Ekousate hoti errethE tois archaiois ou moicheuseis
G191 G3754 G4483 G3588 G744 G3756 G3431
said by them of old time, Thou
vi Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m Part Neg vi Fut Act 2 Sg shalt not commit adultery:
YE-HEAR that it-WAS-declarED to-THE ORIGINals NOT YOU-SHALL-BE-ADULTERING
ancients you-shall-be-committing-adultery
5:28 egw de legw umin oti pas o blepwn gunaika 28 But I say unto you, That
egO de legO humin hoti pas ho blepOn gunaika
G1473 G1161 G3004 G5213 G3754 G3956 G3588 G991 G1135
whosoever looketh on a
pp 1 Nom Sg Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg f woman to lust after her hath
I YET AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that EVERY THE one-lookING WOMAN committed adultery with her
to-ye one-looking already in his heart.
Matthew 5
pros to epiqumhsai auths hdh emoiceusen authn en th

pros to epithumEsai autEs EdE emoicheusen autEn en tE
G4314 G3588 G1937 G846 G2235 G3431 G846 G1722 G3588
Prep t_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Act pp Gen Sg f Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f Prep t_ Dat Sg f
TOWARD THE TO-ON-FEEL OF-her ALREADY commits-ADULTERY her IN THE
to-lust commits-adultery
kardia autou
kardia autou
G2588 G846
n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m
HEART OF-him
5:29 ei de o ofqalmos sou o dexios skandalizei se 29 And if thy right eye offend
ei de ho ophthalmos sou ho dexios skandalizei se
G1487 G1161 G3588 G3788 G4675 G3588 G1188 G4624 G4571
thee, pluck it out, and cast [it]
Cond Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg from thee: for it is profitable
IF YET THE VIEWer OF-YOU THE RIGHT IS-SNARING YOU for thee that one of thy
eye members should perish, and
not [that] thy whole body
exele auton kai bale apo sou sumferei gar soi should be cast into hell.
exele auton kai bale apo sou sumpherei gar soi
G1807 G846 G2532 G906 G575 G4675 G4851 G1063 G4671
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep pp 2 Gen Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Sg
BE-OUT-LIFTING it AND BE-CASTING FROM YOU it-IS-beING-expedient for to-YOU
be-you-wrenching-out ! him be-you-casting !
ina apolhtai en twn melwn sou kai mh olon

hina apolEtai hen tOn melOn sou kai mE holon
G2443 G622 G1520 G3588 G3196 G4675 G2532 G3361 G3650
Conj vs 2Aor Mid 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n pp 2 Gen Sg Conj Part Neg a_ Nom Sg n
THAT SHOULD-BE-beING-destroyED ONE OF-THE MEMBERS OF-YOU AND NO WHOLE
should-be-perishing
to swma sou blhqh eis geennan

to sOma sou blEthE eis geennan
G3588 G4983 G4675 G906 G1519 G1067
t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg vs Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f
THE BODY OF-YOU MAY-BE-BEING-CAST INTO GEHENNA
5:30 kai ei h dexia sou ceir skandalizei se ekkoyon 30 And if thy right hand offend
kai ei hE dexia sou cheir skandalizei se ekkopson
G2532 G1487 G3588 G1188 G4675 G5495 G4624 G4571 G1581
thee, cut it off, and cast [it]
Conj Cond t_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg n_ Nom Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg vm Aor Act 2 Sg from thee: for it is profitable
AND IF THE RIGHT OF-YOU HAND IS-SNARING YOU OUT-STRIKE for thee that one of thy
strike-off-you ! members should perish, and
not [that] thy whole body
authn kai bale apo sou sumferei gar soi ina should be cast into hell.
autEn kai bale apo sou sumpherei gar soi hina
G846 G2532 G906 G575 G4675 G4851 G1063 G4671 G2443
pp Acc Sg f Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep pp 2 Gen Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Sg Conj
her AND BE-CASTING FROM YOU it-IS-beING-expedient for to-YOU THAT
be-you-casting !
apolhtai en twn melwn sou kai mh olon to

apolEtai hen tOn melOn sou kai mE holon to
G622 G1520 G3588 G3196 G4675 G2532 G3361 G3650 G3588
vs 2Aor Mid 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n pp 2 Gen Sg Conj Part Neg a_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n
SHOULD-BE-beING-destroyED ONE OF-THE MEMBERS OF-YOU AND NO WHOLE THE
should-be-perishing
swma sou blhqh eis geennan

sOma sou blEthE eis geennan
G4983 G4675 G906 G1519 G1067
n_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg vs Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f
BODY OF-YOU MAY-BE-BEING-CAST INTO GEHENNA
5:31 erreqh de oti os an apolush thn gunaika 31 It hath been said,

errethE de hoti hos an apolusE tEn gunaika
G4483 G1161 G3754 G3739 G302 G630 G3588 G1135
Whosoever shall put away his
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj Conj pr Nom Sg m Part vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f wife, let him give her a writing
it-WAS-declarED YET that WHO EVER SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING THE WOMAN of divorcement:
should-be-dismissing wife
autou dotw auth apostasion

autou dotO autE apostasion
G846 G1325 G846 G647
pp Gen Sg m vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f n_ Acc Sg n
OF-him LET-him-BE-GIVING to-her FROM-STAND
let-him-be-giving ! divorce
5:32 egw de legw umin oti os an apolush thn 32 But I say unto you, That
egO de legO humin hoti hos an apolusE tEn
G1473 G1161 G3004 G5213 G3754 G3739 G302 G630 G3588
whosoever shall put away his
pp 1 Nom Sg Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj pr Nom Sg m Part vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f wife, saving for the cause of
I YET AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that WHO EVER SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING THE fornication, causeth her to
to-ye should-be-dismissing commit adultery: and
Matthew 5
whosoever shall marry her that

gunaika autou parektos logou porneias poiei authn moicasqai is divorced committeth
gunaika autou parektos logou porneias poiei autEn moichasthai
G1135 G846 G3924 G3056 G4202 G4160 G846 G3429 adultery.
n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Adv n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f vn Pres midD/pasD
WOMAN OF-him BESIDE-OUTed OF-saying OF-PROSTITUTION IS-makING her TO-BE-ADULTERING
wife outside of-case to-commit-adultery
kai os ean apolelumenhn gamhsh moicatai

kai hos ean apolelumenEn gamEsE moichatai
G2532 G3739 G1437 G630 G1060 G3429
Conj pr Nom Sg m Cond vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f vs Aor Act 3 Sg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
AND WHO IF-EVER one-HAVING-been-FROM-LOOSED SHOULD-BE-MARRYING IS-committING-ADULTERY
one-having-been-dismissed(f) is-committing-adultery
5:33 palin hkousate oti erreqh tois arcaiois ouk epiorkhseis 33 . Again, ye have heard that
palin Ekousate hoti errethE tois archaiois ouk epiorkEseis
G3825 G191 G3754 G4483 G3588 G744 G3756 G1964
it hath been said by them of
Adv vi Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m Part Neg vi Fut Act 2 Sg old time, Thou shalt not
AGAIN YE-HEAR that it-WAS-declarED to-THE ORIGINals NOT YOU-SHALL-BE-ON-OATHING forswear thyself, but shalt
ancients you-shall-be-perjuring perform unto the Lord thine
oaths:
apodwseis de tw kuriw tous orkous sou
apodOseis de tO kuriO tous horkous sou
G591 G1161 G3588 G2962 G3588 G3727 G4675
vi Fut Act 2 Sg Conj t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING YET to-THE Master THE OATHS OF-YOU
you-shall-be-paying Lord
5:34 egw de legw umin mh omosai olws mhte en tw 34 But I say unto you, Swear
egO de legO humin mE omosai holOs mEte en tO
G1473 G1161 G3004 G5213 G3361 G3660 G3654 G3383 G1722 G3588
not at all; neither by heaven;
pp 1 Nom Sg Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Part Neg vn Aor Act Adv Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m for it is God's throne:
I YET AM-sayING to-YOU(p) NO TO-SWEAR WHOLly NO-BESIDES IN THE
to-ye at-all neither
ouranw oti qronos estin tou qeou

ouranO hoti thronos estin tou theou
G3772 G3754 G2362 G2076 G3588 G2316
n_ Dat Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
heaven that THRONE it-IS OF-THE God
5:35 mhte en th gh oti upopodion estin twn podwn 35 Nor by the earth; for it is his
mEte en tE gE hoti hupopodion estin tOn podOn
G3383 G1722 G3588 G1093 G3754 G5286 G2076 G3588 G4228
footstool: neither by Jerusalem;
Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m for it is the city of the great
NO-BESIDES IN THE LAND that UNDER-FOOT it-IS OF-THE FEET King.
nor earth footstool
autou mhte eis ierosoluma oti polis estin tou megalou

autou mEte eis ierosoluma hoti polis estin tou megalou
G846 G3383 G1519 G2414 G3754 G4172 G2076 G3588 G3173
pp Gen Sg m Conj Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m
OF-Him NO-BESIDES INTO JERUSALEM that city it-IS OF-THE GREAT
nor
basilews
basileOs
G935
n_ Gen Sg m
KING
5:36 mhte en th kefalh sou omoshs oti ou 36 Neither shalt thou swear by
mEte en tE kephalE sou omosEs hoti ou
G3383 G1722 G3588 G2776 G4675 G3660 G3754 G3756
thy head, because thou canst
Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg vs Aor Act 2 Sg Conj Part Neg not make one hair white or
NO-BESIDES IN THE HEAD OF-YOU YOU-SHOULD-BE-SWEARING that NOT black.
nor
dunasai mian trica leukhn h melainan poihsai

dunasai mian tricha leukEn E melainan poiEsai
G1410 G1520 G2359 G3022 G2228 G3189 G4160
vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f Part a_ Acc Sg f vn Aor Act
YOU-ARE-ABLE ONE HAIR WHITE OR BLACK TO-make
5:37 estw de o logos umwn nai nai ou ou to de 37 But let your communication
estO de ho logos humOn nai nai ou ou to de
G2077 G1161 G3588 G3056 G5216 G3483 G3483 G3756 G3756 G3588 G1161
be, Yea, yea; Nay, nay: for
vm Pres vxx 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl Part Part Part Neg Part Neg t_ Nom Sg n Conj whatsoever is more than these
LET-BE YET THE saying OF-YOU(p) YEA YEA NOT NOT THE YET cometh of evil.
let-him-be ! word of-ye not not
perisson toutwn ek tou ponhrou estin

perisson toutOn ek tou ponErou estin
G4053 G5130 G1537 G3588 G4190 G2076
a_ Nom Sg n pd Gen Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
excessive OF-these OUT OF-THE wicked IS
excess wicked-one
Matthew 5
5:38 hkousate oti erreqh ofqalmon anti ofqalmou kai odonta anti 38 . Ye have heard that it hath
Ekousate hoti errethE ophthalmon anti ophthalmou kai odonta anti
G191 G3754 G4483 G3788 G473 G3788 G2532 G3599 G473
been said, An eye for an eye,
vi Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Prep and a tooth for a tooth:
YE-HEAR that it-WAS-declarED VIEWer INSTEAD OF-VIEWer AND TOOTH INSTEAD
eye of-eye
odontos
odontos
G3599
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-TOOTH
5:39 egw de legw umin mh antisthnai tw ponhrw all 39 But I say unto you, That ye
egO de legO humin mE antistEnai tO ponErO all
G1473 G1161 G3004 G5213 G3361 G436 G3588 G4190 G235
resist not evil: but whosoever
pp 1 Nom Sg Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Part Neg vn 2Aor Act t_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m Conj shall smite thee on thy right
I YET AM-sayING to-YOU(p) NO TO-withSTAND to-THE wicked but cheek, turn to him the other
to-ye wicked-person also.
ostis se rapisei epi thn dexian sou siagona streyon autw

hostis se rapisei epi tEn dexian sou siagona strepson autO
G3748 G4571 G4474 G1909 G3588 G1188 G4675 G4600 G4762 G846
pr Nom Sg m pp 2 Acc Sg vi Fut Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg n_ Acc Sg f vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp Dat Sg m
WHO-ANY YOU SHALL-SLAP ON THE RIGHT OF-YOU CHEEK TURN to-him
anyone-who turn-you !
kai thn allhn

kai tEn allEn
G2532 G3588 G243
Conj t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f
AND THE other
also
5:40 kai tw qelonti soi kriqhnai kai ton citwna sou 40 And if any man will sue
kai tO thelonti soi krithEnai kai ton chitOna sou
G2532 G3588 G2309 G4671 G2919 G2532 G3588 G5509 G4675
thee at the law, and take away
Conj t_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m pp 2 Dat Sg vn Aor Pas Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg thy coat, let him have [thy]
AND to-THE one-WILLING YOU TO-BE-JUDGED AND THE TUNIC OF-YOU cloke also.
one-willing to-sue
labein afes autw kai to imation

labein aphes autO kai to himation
G2983 G863 G846 G2532 G3588 G2440
vn 2Aor Act vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp Dat Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
TO-BE-GETTING FROM-LET to-him AND THE cloak
to-be-obtaining leave-you ! also
5:41 kai ostis se aggareusei milion en upage met 41 And whosoever shall
kai hostis se aggareusei milion hen hupage met
G2532 G3748 G4571 G29 G3400 G1520 G5217 G3326
compel thee to go a mile, go
Conj pr Nom Sg m pp 2 Acc Sg vi Fut Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n vm Pres Act 2 Sg Prep with him twain.
AND WHO-ANY YOU SHALL-BE-DRAFTING MILE (1000 paces) ONE BE-UNDER-LEADING WITH
anyone-who shall-be-conscripting mile be-you-going-away !
autou duo
autou duo
G846 G1417
pp Gen Sg m a_ Nom
him TWO
5:42 tw aitounti se didou kai ton qelonta apo 42 Give to him that asketh
tO aitounti se didou kai ton thelonta apo
G3588 G154 G4571 G1325 G2532 G3588 G2309 G575
thee, and from him that would
t_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m pp 2 Acc Sg vm Pres Act 2 Sg Conj t_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Acc Sg m Prep borrow of thee turn not thou
to-THE one-REQUESTING YOU BE-GIVING AND THE one-WILLING FROM away.
one-requesting be-you-giving ! one-willing
sou daneisasqai mh apostrafhs

sou daneisasthai mE apostraphEs
G4675 G1155 G3361 G654
pp 2 Gen Sg vn Aor Mid Part Neg vs 2Aor Pas 2 Sg
YOU TO-be-LOANED NO YOU-MAY-BE-FROM-TURNING
to-borrow you-may-be-turning-away
5:43 hkousate oti erreqh agaphseis ton plhsion sou kai 43 . Ye have heard that it hath
Ekousate hoti errethE agapEseis ton plEsion sou kai
G191 G3754 G4483 G25 G3588 G4139 G4675 G2532
been said, Thou shalt love thy
vi Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg vi Fut Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg m Adv pp 2 Gen Sg Conj neighbour, and hate thine
YE-HEAR that it-WAS-declarED YOU-SHALL-BE-LOVING THE NIGH-one OF-YOU AND enemy.
associate
mishseis ton ecqron sou

misEseis ton echthron sou
G3404 G3588 G2190 G4675
vi Fut Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-HATING THE enemy OF-YOU
5:44 egw de legw umin agapate tous ecqrous umwn eulogeite 44 But I say unto you, Love
egO de legO humin agapate tous echthrous humOn eulogeite
G1473 G1161 G3004 G5213 G25 G3588 G2190 G5216 G2127
your enemies, bless them that
pp 1 Nom Sg Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl curse you, do good to them that
I YET AM-sayING to-YOU(p) BE-YE-LOVING THE enemies OF-YOU(p) BE-blessING hate you, and pray for them
to-ye be-ye-loving ! of-ye be-ye-blessing ! which despitefully use you,
and persecute you;
tous katarwmenous umas kalws poieite tous misountas umas
tous katarOmenous humas kalOs poieite tous misountas humas
G3588 G2672 G5209 G2573 G4160 G3588 G3404 G5209
t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m pp 2 Acc Pl Adv vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m pp 2 Acc Pl
THE ones-DOWN-EXECRATING YOU(p) IDEALly BE-DOING THE ones-HATING YOU(p)
ones-cursing be-ye-doing ! ones-hating
kai proseucesqe uper twn ephreazontwn umas kai diwkontwn

kai proseuchesthe huper tOn epEreazontOn humas kai diOkontOn
G2532 G4336 G5228 G3588 G1908 G5209 G2532 G1377
Conj vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Prep t_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Gen Pl m pp 2 Acc Pl Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl m
AND BE-YE-prayING OVER THE ones-traducING YOU(p) AND ones-CHASING
be-ye-praying ! for-the-sake-of ones-traducing ones-persecuting
umas
humas
G5209
pp 2 Acc Pl
YOU(p)
ye
5:45 opws genhsqe uioi tou patros umwn tou en 45 That ye may be the children
hopOs genEsthe huioi tou patros humOn tou en
G3704 G1096 G5207 G3588 G3962 G5216 G3588 G1722
of your Father which is in
Adv vs 2Aor midD 2 Pl n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Gen Sg m Prep heaven: for he maketh his sun
WHICH-how YE-MAY-BE-BECOMING SONS OF-THE FATHER OF-YOU(p) THE-One IN to rise on the evil and on the
so-that of-ye the-one good, and sendeth rain on the
just and on the unjust.
ouranois oti ton hlion autou anatellei epi ponhrous kai agaqous
ouranois hoti ton hElion autou anatellei epi ponErous kai agathous
G3772 G3754 G3588 G2246 G846 G393 G1909 G4190 G2532 G18
n_ Dat Pl m Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m
heavens that THE SUN OF-Him IS-UP-risING ON wicked AND GOOD
is-rising wicked-ones good-ones
kai brecei epi dikaious kai adikous

kai brechei epi dikaious kai adikous
G2532 G1026 G1909 G1342 G2532 G94
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m
AND IS-RAINING ON JUST AND UN-JUST
it-is-raining just-ones unjust-ones
5:46 ean gar agaphshte tous agapwntas umas tina misqon 46 For if ye love them which
ean gar agapEsEte tous agapOntas humas tina misthon
G1437 G1063 G25 G3588 G25 G5209 G5101 G3408
love you, what reward have
Cond Conj vs Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m pp 2 Acc Pl pi Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m ye? do not even the publicans
IF-EVER for YE-SHOULD-BE-LOVING THE ones-LOVING YOU(p) ANY HIRE the same?
ones-loving ye what ? wages
ecete ouci kai oi telwnai to auto poiousin

echete ouchi kai hoi telOnai to auto poiousin
G2192 G3780 G2532 G3588 G5057 G3588 G846 G4160
vi Pres Act 2 Pl Part Int Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg n pp Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Pl
YE-ARE-HAVING NOT(emph.) AND THE tribute-collectors THE SAME ARE-DOING
also
5:47 kai ean aspashsqe tous adelfous umwn monon ti 47 And if ye salute your
kai ean aspasEsthe tous adelphous humOn monon ti
G2532 G1437 G782 G3588 G80 G5216 G3440 G5101
brethren only, what do ye more
Conj Cond vs Aor midD 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl Adv pi Acc Sg n [than others]? do not even the
AND IF-EVER YE-SHOULD-BE-greetING THE brothers OF-YOU(p) ONLY ANY publicans so?
of-ye what
perisson poieite ouci kai oi telwnai outws poiousin

perisson poieite ouchi kai hoi telOnai houtOs poiousin
G4053 G4160 G3780 G2532 G3588 G5057 G3779 G4160
a_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Pl Part Int Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Adv vi Pres Act 3 Pl
excessive YE-ARE-DOING NOT(emph.) AND THE tribute-collectors thus ARE-DOING
also
5:48 esesqe oun umeis teleioi wsper o pathr umwn o en 48 Be ye therefore perfect,
esesthe oun humeis teleioi hOsper ho patEr humOn ho en
G2071 G3767 G5210 G5046 G5618 G3588 G3962 G5216 G3588 G1722
even as your Father which is in
vi Fut vxx 2 Pl Conj pp 2 Nom Pl a_ Nom Pl m Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Nom Sg m Prep heaven is perfect.
SHALL-BE THEN YOU(p) mature AS-EVEN THE FATHER OF-YOU(p) THE IN
ye perfect even-as of-ye
tois ouranois teleios estin

tois ouranois teleios estin
G3588 G3772 G5046 G2076
t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE heavens mature IS
perfect
Matthew 6
6:1 prosecete thn elehmosunhn umwn mh poiein emprosqen twn 1 . Take heed that ye do not
prosechete tEn eleEmosunEn humOn mE poiein emprosthen tOn
G4337 G3588 G1654 G5216 G3361 G4160 G1715 G3588
your alms before men, to be
vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl Part Neg vn Pres Act Prep t_ Gen Pl m seen of them: otherwise ye
BE-YE-heedING THE alms OF-YOU(p) NO TO-BE-DOING IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE have no reward of your Father
be-ye-heeding ! of-ye in-front-of the which is in heaven.
anqrwpwn pros to qeaqhnai autois ei de mhge misqon ouk

anthrOpOn pros to theathEnai autois ei de mEge misthon ouk
G444 G4314 G3588 G2300 G846 G1487 G1161 G3361 G3408 G3756
n_ Gen Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Pas pp Dat Pl m Cond Conj Part Neg n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg
humans TOWARD THE TO-BE-gazED to-them IF YET NO-SURELY HIRE NOT
to-be-gazed-at surely-no wages
ecete para tw patri umwn tw en tois ouranois

echete para tO patri humOn tO en tois ouranois
G2192 G3844 G3588 G3962 G5216 G3588 G1722 G3588 G3772
vi Pres Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Dat Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
YE-ARE-HAVING BESIDE THE FATHER OF-YOU(p) THE IN THE heavens
of-ye
6:2 otan oun poihs elehmosunhn mh salpishs 2 Therefore when thou doest
hotan oun poiEs eleEmosunEn mE salpisEs
G3752 G3767 G4160 G1654 G3361 G4537
[thine] alms, do not sound a
Conj Conj vs Pres Act 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg f Part Neg vs Aor Act 2 Sg trumpet before thee, as the
when-EVER THEN YOU-MAY-BE-DOING alms NO YOU-SHOULD-BE-TRUMPETING hypocrites do in the
whenever synagogues and in the streets,
that they may have glory of
emprosqen sou wsper oi upokritai poiousin en tais men. Verily I say unto you,
emprosthen sou hOsper hoi hupokritai poiousin en tais They have their reward.
G1715 G4675 G5618 G3588 G5273 G4160 G1722 G3588
Prep pp 2 Gen Sg Adv t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Pl f
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-YOU AS-EVEN THE hypocrites ARE-DOING IN THE
in-front-of you even-as
sunagwgais kai en tais rumais opws doxasqwsin upo

sunagOgais kai en tais rumais hopOs doxasthOsin hupo
G4864 G2532 G1722 G3588 G4505 G3704 G1392 G5259
n_ Dat Pl f Conj Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f Adv vs Aor Pas 3 Pl Prep
TOGETHER-LEADS AND IN THE streets WHICH-how THEY-SHOULD-BE-BEING-esteemizED by
synagogues so-that they-should-be-being-glorified
twn anqrwpwn amhn legw umin apecousin ton misqon

tOn anthrOpOn amEn legO humin apechousin ton misthon
G3588 G444 G281 G3004 G5213 G568 G3588 G3408
t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
THE humans AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) THEY-ARE-FROM-HAVING THE HIRE
verily to-ye they-are-collecting wages
autwn
autOn
G846
pp Gen Pl m
OF-them
6:3 sou de poiountos elehmosunhn mh gnwtw h aristera 3 But when thou doest alms, let
sou de poiountos eleEmosunEn mE gnOtO hE aristera
G4675 G1161 G4160 G1654 G3361 G1097 G3588 G710
not thy left hand know what
pp 2 Gen Sg Conj vp Pres Act Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg f Part Neg vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f thy right hand doeth:
OF-YOU YET DOING alms NO LET-BE-KNOWING THE best (left-hand)
let-her-be-knowing ! left-hand
sou ti poiei h dexia sou

sou ti poiei hE dexia sou
G4675 G5101 G4160 G3588 G1188 G4675
pp 2 Gen Sg pi Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-YOU ANY IS-DOING THE RIGHT OF-YOU
what right-hand
6:4 opws h sou h elehmosunh en tw kruptw kai 4 That thine alms may be in
hopOs E sou hE eleEmosunE en tO kruptO kai
G3704 G5600 G4675 G3588 G1654 G1722 G3588 G2927 G2532
secret: and thy Father which
Adv vs Pres vxx 3 Sg pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n Conj seeth in secret himself shall
WHICH-how MAY-BE OF-YOU THE alms IN THE HIDDen AND reward thee openly.
so-that hiding
o pathr sou o blepwn en tw kruptw autos

ho patEr sou ho blepOn en tO kruptO autos
G3588 G3962 G4675 G3588 G991 G1722 G3588 G2927 G846
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n pp Nom Sg m
THE FATHER OF-YOU THE One-lookING IN THE HIDDen He
one-observing hiding
apodwsei soi en tw fanerw

apodOsei soi en tO phanerO
G591 G4671 G1722 G3588 G5318
vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n
SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-YOU IN THE apparent
shall-be-paying you
Matthew 6
6:5 kai otan proseuch ouk esh wsper oi upokritai oti 5 . And when thou prayest,
kai hotan proseuchE ouk esE hOsper hoi hupokritai hoti
G2532 G3752 G4336 G3756 G2071 G5618 G3588 G5273 G3754
thou shalt not be as the
Conj Conj vs Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Part Neg vi Fut vxx 2 Sg Adv t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj hypocrites [are]: for they love
AND when-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-prayING NOT YOU-SHALL-BE AS-EVEN THE hypocrites that to pray standing in the
whenever even-as synagogues and in the corners
of the streets, that they may be
filousin en tais sunagwgais kai en tais gwniais twn seen of men. Verily I say unto
philousin en tais sunagOgais kai en tais gOniais tOn you, They have their reward.
G5368 G1722 G3588 G4864 G2532 G1722 G3588 G1137 G3588
vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f Conj Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f t_ Gen Pl f
THEY-ARE-beING-FOND IN THE TOGETHER-LEADS AND IN THE CORNERS OF-THE
they-are-being-fond-of synagogues
plateiwn estwtes proseucesqai opws an fanwsin tois

plateiOn hestOtes proseuchesthai hopOs an phanOsin tois
G4113 G2476 G4336 G3704 G302 G5316 G3588
n_ Gen Pl f vp Perf Act Nom Pl m vn Pres midD/pasD Adv Part vs 2Aor Pas 3 Pl t_ Dat Pl m
BROADS HAVING-STOOD TO-BE-prayING WHICH-how EVER THEY-MAY-BE-APPEARING to-THE
squares standing so-that
anqrwpois amhn legw umin oti apecousin ton misqon autwn

anthrOpois amEn legO humin hoti apechousin ton misthon autOn
G444 G281 G3004 G5213 G3754 G568 G3588 G3408 G846
n_ Dat Pl m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Pl m
humans AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that THEY-ARE-FROM-HAVING THE HIRE OF-them
verily to-ye they-are-collecting wages
6:6 su de otan proseuch eiselqe eis to tamieion 6 But thou, when thou prayest,
su de hotan proseuchE eiselthe eis to tamieion
G4771 G1161 G3752 G4336 G1525 G1519 G3588 G5009
enter into thy closet, and when
pp 2 Nom Sg Conj Conj vs Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Nom Sg n thou hast shut thy door, pray to
YOU YET when-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-prayING BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE STOREROOM thy Father which is in secret;
whenever be-you-entering ! and thy Father which seeth in
secret shall reward thee openly.
sou kai kleisas thn quran sou proseuxai tw patri
sou kai kleisas tEn thuran sou proseuxai tO patri
G4675 G2532 G2808 G3588 G2374 G4675 G4336 G3588 G3962
pp 2 Gen Sg Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg vm Aor midD 2 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
OF-YOU AND LOCKing THE DOOR OF-YOU pray to-THE FATHER
pray-you !
sou tw en tw kruptw kai o pathr sou o

sou tO en tO kruptO kai ho patEr sou ho
G4675 G3588 G1722 G3588 G2927 G2532 G3588 G3962 G4675 G3588
pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Dat Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg m
OF-YOU to-THE-One IN THE HIDDen AND THE FATHER OF-YOU THE
to-the-one hiding
blepwn en tw kruptw apodwsei soi en tw fanerw

blepOn en tO kruptO apodOsei soi en tO phanerO
G991 G1722 G3588 G2927 G591 G4671 G1722 G3588 G5318
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n
One-lookING IN THE HIDDen SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-YOU IN THE apparent
one-observing hiding shall-be-paying
6:7 proseucomenoi de mh battologhshte wsper oi 7 But when ye pray, use not

proseuchomenoi de mE battologEsEte hOsper hoi
G4336 G1161 G3361 G945 G5618 G3588
vain repetitions, as the heathen
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m Conj Part Neg vs Aor Act 2 Pl Adv t_ Nom Pl m [do]: for they think that they
prayING YET NO YE-SHOULD-BE-STUTTER-sayING AS-EVEN THE shall be heard for their much
ye-should-be-using-useless-repetitions even-as speaking.
eqnikoi dokousin gar oti en th polulogia autwn

ethnikoi dokousin gar hoti en tE polulogia autOn
G1482 G1380 G1063 G3754 G1722 G3588 G4180 G846
a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Pl m
NATIONics THEY-ARE-SEEMING for that IN THE much-sayING OF-them
ones-of-the-nations they-are-supposing loquacity
eisakousqhsontai
eisakousthEsontai
G1522
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
THEY-SHALL-BE-BEING-INTO-HEARD
they-shall-be-being-hearkened-to
6:8 mh oun omoiwqhte autois oiden gar o pathr 8 Be not ye therefore like unto
mE oun homoiOthEte autois oiden gar ho patEr
G3361 G3767 G3666 G846 G1492 G1063 G3588 G3962
them: for your Father knoweth
Part Neg Conj vs Aor Pas 2 Pl pp Dat Pl m vi Perf Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m what things ye have need of,
NO THEN YE-MAY-BE-BEING-LIKenED to-them HAS-PERCEIVED for THE FATHER before ye ask him.
ye-may-be-being-like them is-aware
umwn wn creian ecete pro tou umas aithsai auton

humOn hOn chreian echete pro tou humas aitEsai auton
G5216 G3739 G5532 G2192 G4253 G3588 G5209 G154 G846
pp 2 Gen Pl pr Gen Pl n n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Acc Pl vn Aor Act pp Acc Sg m
OF-YOU(p) OF-WHICH NEED YE-ARE-HAVING BEFORE OF-THE YOU(p) TO-REQUEST Him
of-ye the ye
Matthew 6
6:9 outws oun proseucesqe umeis pater hmwn o en tois 9 . After this manner therefore
houtOs oun proseuchesthe humeis pater hEmOn ho en tois
G3779 G3767 G4336 G5210 G3962 G2257 G3588 G1722 G3588
pray ye: Our Father which art
Adv Conj vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl pp 2 Nom Pl n_ Voc Sg m pp 1 Gen Pl t_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl m in heaven, Hallowed be thy
thus THEN BE-prayING YOU(p) FATHER ! OF-US THE IN THE name.
be-ye-praying ! ye
ouranois agiasqhtw to onoma sou

ouranois hagiasthEtO to onoma sou
G3772 G37 G3588 G3686 G4675
n_ Dat Pl m vm Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg
heavens LET-BE-BEING-HOLYizED THE NAME OF-YOU
let-it-be-being-hallowed !
6:10 elqetw h basileia sou genhqhtw to qelhma 10 Thy kingdom come. Thy
elthetO hE basileia sou genEthEtO to thelEma
G2064 G3588 G932 G4675 G1096 G3588 G2307
will be done in earth, as [it is]
vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg vm Aor pasD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n in heaven.
LET-BE-COMING THE KINGdom OF-YOU LET-BE-BEING-BECOME THE WILL
let-her-be-coming ! let-it-be-being-become !
sou ws en ouranw kai epi ths ghs

sou hOs en ouranO kai epi tEs gEs
G4675 G5613 G1722 G3772 G2532 G1909 G3588 G1093
pp 2 Gen Sg Adv Prep n_ Dat Sg m Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
OF-YOU AS IN heaven AND ON THE LAND
also earth
6:11 ton arton hmwn ton epiousion dos hmin shmeron 11 Give us this day our daily
ton arton hEmOn ton epiousion dos hEmin sEmeron
G3588 G740 G2257 G3588 G1967 G1325 G2254 G4594
bread.
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Pl t_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl Adv
THE BREAD OF-US THE ON-BEINGed BE-GIVING to-US toDAY
dole be-you-giving !
6:12 kai afes hmin ta ofeilhmata hmwn ws kai hmeis 12 And forgive us our debts, as
kai aphes hEmin ta opheilEmata hEmOn hOs kai hEmeis
G2532 G863 G2254 G3588 G3783 G2257 G5613 G2532 G2249
we forgive our debtors.
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp 1 Gen Pl Adv Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
AND FROM-LET to-US THE OWES OF-US AS AND WE
remit-you ! debts also
afiemen tois ofeiletais hmwn

aphiemen tois opheiletais hEmOn
G863 G3588 G3781 G2257
vi Pres Act 1 Pl t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp 1 Gen Pl
ARE-FROM-LETTING to-THE OWErs OF-US
are-remitting debtors
6:13 kai mh eisenegkhs hmas eis peirasmon alla rusai 13 And lead us not into
kai mE eisenegkEs hEmas eis peirasmon alla rusai
G2532 G3361 G1533 G2248 G1519 G3986 G235 G4506
temptation, but deliver us from
Conj Part Neg vs Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg m Conj vm Aor midD 2 Sg evil: For thine is the kingdom,
AND NO YOU-MAY-BE-INTO-CARRYING US INTO trial but rescue and the power, and the glory,
you-may-be-bringing-into rescue-you ! for ever. Amen.
hmas apo tou ponhrou oti sou estin h basileia kai

hEmas apo tou ponErou hoti sou estin hE basileia kai
G2248 G575 G3588 G4190 G3754 G4675 G2076 G3588 G932 G2532
pp 1 Acc Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m Conj pp 2 Gen Sg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj
US FROM THE wicked that OF-YOU IS THE KINGdom AND
wicked-one
h dunamis kai h doxa eis tous aiwnas amhn

hE dunamis kai hE doxa eis tous aiOnas amEn
G3588 G1411 G2532 G3588 G1391 G1519 G3588 G165 G281
t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Hebrew
THE ABILITY AND THE esteem INTO THE eons AMEN
power glory
6:14 ean gar afhte tois anqrwpois ta paraptwmata 14 For if ye forgive men their
ean gar aphEte tois anthrOpois ta paraptOmata
G1437 G1063 G863 G3588 G444 G3588 G3900
trespasses, your heavenly
Cond Conj vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Father will also forgive you:
IF-EVER for YE-MAY-BE-FROM-LETTING to-THE humans THE BESIDE-FALLS
ye-may-be-forgiving the offenses
autwn afhsei kai umin o pathr umwn o

autOn aphEsei kai humin ho patEr humOn ho
G846 G863 G2532 G5213 G3588 G3962 G5216 G3588
pp Gen Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Nom Sg m
OF-them SHALL-BE-FROM-LETTING AND to-YOU(p) THE FATHER OF-YOU(p) THE
shall-be-forgiving also to-ye of-ye
ouranios
ouranios
G3770
a_ Nom Sg m
heavenly
Matthew 6
6:15 ean de mh afhte tois anqrwpois ta paraptwmata 15 But if ye forgive not men
ean de mE aphEte tois anthrOpois ta paraptOmata
G1437 G1161 G3361 G863 G3588 G444 G3588 G3900
their trespasses, neither will
Cond Conj Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n your Father forgive your
IF-EVER YET NO YE-MAY-BE-FROM-LETTING to-THE humans THE BESIDE-FALLS trespasses.
ye-may-be-forgiving the offenses
autwn oude o pathr umwn afhsei ta paraptwmata

autOn oude ho patEr humOn aphEsei ta paraptOmata
G846 G3761 G3588 G3962 G5216 G863 G3588 G3900
pp Gen Pl m Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
OF-them NOT-YET THE FATHER OF-YOU(p) SHALL-BE-FROM-LETTING THE BESIDE-FALLS
neither of-ye shall-be-forgiving offenses
umwn
humOn
G5216
pp 2 Gen Pl
OF-YOU(p)
of-ye
6:16 otan de nhsteuhte mh ginesqe wsper oi upokritai 16 . Moreover when ye fast, be

hotan de nEsteuEte mE ginesthe hOsper hoi hupokritai
G3752 G1161 G3522 G3361 G1096 G5618 G3588 G5273
not, as the hypocrites, of a sad
Conj Conj vs Pres Act 2 Pl Part Neg vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Adv t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m countenance: for they disfigure
when-EVER YET YE-MAY-BE-fastING NO BE-YE-BECOMING AS-EVEN THE hypocrites their faces, that they may
whenever be-ye-becoming ! even-as appear unto men to fast. Verily
I say unto you, They have their
skuqrwpoi afanizousin gar ta proswpa autwn opws reward.
skuthrOpoi aphanizousin gar ta prosOpa autOn hopOs
G4659 G853 G1063 G3588 G4383 G846 G3704
a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Pl m Adv
SAD-VIEWers THEY-ARE-UN-APPEARizING for THE faces OF-them WHICH-how
of-a-sad-countenance they-are-disguising so-that
fanwsin tois anqrwpois nhsteuontes amhn legw umin oti

phanOsin tois anthrOpois nEsteuontes amEn legO humin hoti
G5316 G3588 G444 G3522 G281 G3004 G5213 G3754
vs 2Aor Pas 3 Pl t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj
THEY-MAY-BE-APPEARING to-THE humans fastING AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that
verily to-ye
apecousin ton misqon autwn

apechousin ton misthon autOn
G568 G3588 G3408 G846
vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Pl m
THEY-ARE-FROM-HAVING THE HIRE OF-them
they-are-collecting wages
6:17 su de nhsteuwn aleiyai sou thn kefalhn kai to 17 But thou, when thou fastest,
su de nEsteuOn aleipsai sou tEn kephalEn kai to
G4771 G1161 G3522 G218 G4675 G3588 G2776 G2532 G3588
anoint thine head, and wash
pp 2 Nom Sg Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm Aor Mid 2 Sg pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Acc Sg n thy face;
YOU YET fastING RUB OF-YOU THE HEAD AND THE
rub-you !
proswpon sou niyai

prosOpon sou nipsai
G4383 G4675 G3538
n_ Acc Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg vm Aor Mid 2 Sg
face OF-YOU WASH
wash-you !
6:18 opws mh fanhs tois anqrwpois nhsteuwn alla 18 That thou appear not unto
hopOs mE phanEs tois anthrOpois nEsteuOn alla
G3704 G3361 G5316 G3588 G444 G3522 G235
men to fast, but unto thy Father
Adv Part Neg vs 2Aor Pas 2 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj which is in secret: and thy
WHICH-how NO YOU-MAY-BE-APPEARING to-THE humans fastING but Father, which seeth in secret,
so-that shall reward thee openly.
tw patri sou tw en tw kruptw kai o pathr

tO patri sou tO en tO kruptO kai ho patEr
G3588 G3962 G4675 G3588 G1722 G3588 G2927 G2532 G3588 G3962
t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Dat Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
to-THE FATHER OF-YOU to-THE-One IN THE HIDDen AND THE FATHER
the-one hiding
sou o blepwn en tw kruptw apodwsei soi en

sou ho blepOn en tO kruptO apodOsei soi en
G4675 G3588 G991 G1722 G3588 G2927 G591 G4671 G1722
pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Prep
OF-YOU THE One-lookING IN THE HIDDen SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-YOU IN
one-observing hiding shall-be-paying you
tw fanerw
tO phanerO
G3588 G5318
t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n
THE apparent
Matthew 6
6:19 mh qhsaurizete umin qhsaurous epi ths ghs 19 . Lay not up for yourselves
mE thEsaurizete humin thEsaurous epi tEs gEs
G3361 G2343 G5213 G2344 G1909 G3588 G1093
treasures upon earth, where
Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Pl pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Acc Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f moth and rust doth corrupt,
NO YE-BE-PLACING-INTO-MORROW to-YOU(p) PLACED-INTO-MORROWS ON THE LAND and where thieves break
be-ye-hoarding ! to-ye treasures earth through and steal:
opou shs kai brwsis afanizei kai opou kleptai

hopou sEs kai brOsis aphanizei kai hopou kleptai
G3699 G4597 G2532 G1035 G853 G2532 G3699 G2812
Adv n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj Adv n_ Nom Pl m
THE-?-where MOTH AND FEEDing IS-UN-APPEARizING AND THE-?-where thieves
wheree corrosion is-causing-to-disappear wheree
diorussousin kai kleptousin

diorussousin kai kleptousin
G1358 G2532 G2813
vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ARE-THRU-EXCAVATING AND ARE-stealING
are-burrowing
6:20 qhsaurizete de umin qhsaurous en ouranw opou 20 But lay up for yourselves
thEsaurizete de humin thEsaurous en ouranO hopou
G2343 G1161 G5213 G2344 G1722 G3772 G3699
treasures in heaven, where
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Acc Pl m Prep n_ Dat Sg m Adv neither moth nor rust doth
YE-BE-PLACING-INTO-MORROW YET to-YOU(p) PLACED-INTO-MORROWS IN heaven THE-?-where corrupt, and where thieves do
be-ye-hoarding ! to-ye treasures wheree not break through nor steal:
oute shs oute brwsis afanizei kai opou kleptai ou

oute sEs oute brOsis aphanizei kai hopou kleptai ou
G3777 G4597 G3777 G1035 G853 G2532 G3699 G2812 G3756
Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj Adv n_ Nom Pl m Part Neg
NOT-BESIDES MOTH NOT-BESIDES FEEDing IS-UN-APPEARizING AND THE-?-where thieves NOT
neither nor corrosion is-causing-to-disappear wheree
diorussousin oude kleptousin

diorussousin oude kleptousin
G1358 G3761 G2813
vi Pres Act 3 Pl Adv vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ARE-THRU-EXCAVATING NOT-YET ARE-stealING
are-burrowing nor
6:21 opou gar estin o qhsauros umwn ekei estai kai 21 For where your treasure is,
hopou gar estin ho thEsauros humOn ekei estai kai
G3699 G1063 G2076 G3588 G2344 G5216 G1563 G2071 G2532
there will your heart be also.
Adv Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Conj
THE-?-where for IS THE PLACED-INTO-MORROW OF-YOU(p) there SHALL-BE AND
wherever treasure also
h kardia umwn
hE kardia humOn
G3588 G2588 G5216
t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl
THE HEART OF-YOU(p)
6:22 o lucnos tou swmatos estin o ofqalmos ean oun 22 The light of the body is the
ho luchnos tou sOmatos estin ho ophthalmos ean oun
G3588 G3088 G3588 G4983 G2076 G3588 G3788 G1437 G3767
eye: if therefore thine eye be
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Cond Conj single, thy whole body shall be
THE LAMP OF-THE BODY IS THE VIEWer IF-EVER THEN full of light.
eye
o ofqalmos sou aplous h olon to swma

ho ophthalmos sou haplous hE holon to sOma
G3588 G3788 G4675 G573 G5600 G3650 G3588 G4983
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg m vs Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
THE VIEWer OF-YOU UN-COMPOUND MAY-BE WHOLE THE BODY
eye single
sou fwteinon estai

sou phOteinon estai
G4675 G5460 G2071
pp 2 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg n vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
OF-YOU luminous SHALL-BE
6:23 ean de o ofqalmos sou ponhros h olon to 23 But if thine eye be evil, thy
ean de ho ophthalmos sou ponEros E holon to
G1437 G1161 G3588 G3788 G4675 G4190 G5600 G3650 G3588
whole body shall be full of
Cond Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg m vs Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n darkness. If therefore the light
IF-EVER YET THE VIEWer OF-YOU wicked MAY-BE WHOLE THE that is in thee be darkness, how
eye great [is] that darkness!
swma sou skoteinon estai ei oun to fws to en

sOma sou skoteinon estai ei oun to phOs to en
G4983 G4675 G4652 G2071 G1487 G3767 G3588 G5457 G3588 G1722
n_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg n vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Cond Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n Prep
BODY OF-YOU DARK SHALL-BE IF THEN THE LIGHT THE IN
Matthew 6
soi skotos estin to skotos poson

soi skotos estin to skotos poson
G4671 G4655 G2076 G3588 G4655 G4214
pp 2 Dat Sg n_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pq Nom Sg n
YOU DARKness IS THE DARKness how-much
how-much ?
6:24 oudeis dunatai dusi kuriois douleuein h gar ton 24 No man can serve two
oudeis dunatai dusi kuriois douleuein E gar ton
G3762 G1410 G1417 G2962 G1398 G2228 G1063 G3588
masters: for either he will hate
a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg a_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vn Pres Act Part Conj t_ Acc Sg m the one, and love the other; or
NOT-YET-ONE IS-ABLE to-TWO masters TO-BE-SLAVING OR for THE else he will hold to the one,
no-one can lords either and despise the other. Ye
cannot serve God and
ena mishsei kai ton eteron agaphsei h enos mammon.
hena misEsei kai ton heteron agapEsei E henos
G1520 G3404 G2532 G3588 G2087 G25 G2228 G1520
a_ Acc Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg Part a_ Gen Sg m
ONE he-SHALL-BE-HATING AND THE DIFFERENT he-SHALL-BE-LOVING OR OF-ONE
one
anqexetai kai tou eterou katafronhsei ou dunasqe

anthexetai kai tou heterou kataphronEsei ou dunasthe
G472 G2532 G3588 G2087 G2706 G3756 G1410
vi Fut midD 3 Sg Conj t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
he-SHALL-BE-upholdING AND OF-THE DIFFERENT he-SHALL-BE-despisING NOT YE-ARE-ABLE
the ye-can
qew douleuein kai mammwna

theO douleuein kai mammOna
G2316 G1398 G2532 G3126
n_ Dat Sg m vn Pres Act Conj n_ Dat Sg n
to-God TO-BE-SLAVING AND to-MAMMON
6:25 dia touto legw umin mh merimnate th yuch umwn 25 . Therefore I say unto you,
dia touto legO humin mE merimnate tE psuchE humOn
G1223 G5124 G3004 G5213 G3361 G3309 G3588 G5590 G5216
Take no thought for your life,
Prep pd Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl what ye shall eat, or what ye
THRU this I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) NO BE-YE-beING-anxious to-THE soul OF-YOU(p) shall drink; nor yet for your
because-of to-ye be-ye-worrying ! of-ye body, what ye shall put on. Is
not the life more than meat,
ti faghte kai ti pihte mhde tw swmati umwn and the body than raiment?
ti phagEte kai ti piEte mEde tO sOmati humOn
G5101 G5315 G2532 G5101 G4095 G3366 G3588 G4983 G5216
pi Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl Conj pi Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl Conj t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pp 2 Gen Pl
ANY YE-MAY-BE-EATING AND ANY YE-MAY-BE DRINKING NO-YET to-THE BODY OF-YOU(p)
what what ye-may-be-drinking nor-yet of-ye
ti endushsqe ouci h yuch pleion estin ths

ti endusEsthe ouchi hE psuchE pleion estin tEs
G5101 G1746 G3780 G3588 G5590 G4119 G2076 G3588
pi Acc Sg n vs Aor Mid 2 Pl Part Int t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Gen Sg f
ANY YE-SHOULD-BE-IN-SLIPPING NOT(emph.) THE soul MORE IS OF-THE
what ye-should-be-putting-on
trofhs kai to swma tou endumatos

trophEs kai to sOma tou endumatos
G5160 G2532 G3588 G4983 G3588 G1742
n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
NURTURE AND THE BODY OF-THE IN-SLIP
nourishment apparel
6:26 embleyate eis ta peteina tou ouranou oti ou speirousin 26 Behold the fowls of the air:
emblepsate eis ta peteina tou ouranou hoti ou speirousin
G1689 G1519 G3588 G4071 G3588 G3772 G3754 G3756 G4687
for they sow not, neither do
vm Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Pl they reap, nor gather into
IN-look INTO THE flyers OF-THE heaven that NOT THEY-ARE-SOWING barns; yet your heavenly Father
look-at-ye ! flying-creatures feedeth them. Are ye not much
better than they?
oude qerizousin oude sunagousin eis apoqhkas kai o
oude therizousin oude sunagousin eis apothEkas kai ho
G3761 G2325 G3761 G4863 G1519 G596 G2532 G3588
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Pl Adv vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep n_ Acc Pl f Conj t_ Nom Sg m
NOT-YET THEY-ARE-reapING NOT-YET THEY-ARE-TOGETHER-LEADING INTO FROM-PLACES AND THE
neither nor they-are-gathering barns
pathr umwn o ouranios trefei auta ouc umeis mallon

patEr humOn ho ouranios trephei auta ouch humeis mallon
G3962 G5216 G3588 G3770 G5142 G846 G3756 G5210 G3123
n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl n Part Neg pp 2 Nom Pl Adv
FATHER OF-YOU(p) THE heavenly IS-NURTURING them NOT YOU(p) RATHER
of-ye is-nourishing ye more
diaferete autwn
diapherete autOn
G1308 G846
vi Pres Act 2 Pl pp Gen Pl n
ARE-THRU-CARRYING OF-them
are-being-of-consequence
Matthew 6
6:27 tis de ex umwn merimnwn dunatai prosqeinai epi 27 Which of you by taking
tis de ex humOn merimnOn dunatai prostheinai epi
G5101 G1161 G1537 G5216 G3309 G1410 G4369 G1909
thought can add one cubit unto
pi Nom Sg m Conj Prep pp 2 Gen Pl vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act Prep his stature?
ANY YET OUT OF-YOU(p) beING-anxious IS-ABLE TO-add ON
who of-ye worrying
thn hlikian autou phcun ena

tEn hElikian autou pEchun hena
G3588 G2244 G846 G4083 G1520
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m
THE PRIME OF-him CUBIT ONE
stature
6:28 kai peri endumatos ti merimnate katamaqete ta krina 28 And why take ye thought
kai peri endumatos ti merimnate katamathete ta krina
G2532 G4012 G1742 G5101 G3309 G2648 G3588 G2918
for raiment? Consider the lilies
Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg n pi Acc Sg n vm Pres Act 2 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n of the field, how they grow;
AND ABOUT IN-SLIP ANY YE-ARE-beING-anxious BE-YE-DOWN-LEARNING THE ANEMONES they toil not, neither do they
apparel why ? ye-are-worrying be-ye-studying ! spin:
tou agrou pws auxanei ou kopia oude nhqei

tou agrou pOs auxanei ou kopia oude nEthei
G3588 G68 G4459 G837 G3756 G2872 G3761 G3514
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg
OF-THE FIELD how it-IS-GROWING NOT it-IS-toilING NOT-YET it-IS-SPINNING
nor
6:29 legw de umin oti oude solomwn en pash th doxh 29 And yet I say unto you, That
legO de humin hoti oude solomOn en pasE tE doxE
G3004 G1161 G5213 G3754 G3761 G4672 G1722 G3956 G3588 G1391
even Solomon in all his glory
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Adv n_ Nom Sg m Prep a_ Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f was not arrayed like one of
I-AM-sayING YET to-YOU(p) that NOT-YET SOLOMON IN EVERY THE esteem these.
to-ye all glory
autou periebaleto ws en toutwn

autou periebaleto hOs hen toutOn
G846 G4016 G5613 G1520 G5130
pp Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg Adv a_ Acc Sg n pd Gen Pl n
OF-him was-ABOUT-CAST AS ONE OF-these
was-clothed
6:30 ei de ton corton tou agrou shmeron onta kai 30 Wherefore, if God so clothe
ei de ton chorton tou agrou sEmeron onta kai
G1487 G1161 G3588 G5528 G3588 G68 G4594 G5607 G2532
the grass of the field, which to
Cond Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Adv vp Pres vxx Acc Sg m Conj day is, and to morrow is cast
IF YET THE FODDER OF-THE FIELD toDAY BEING AND into the oven, [shall he] not
grass much more [clothe] you, O ye
of little faith?
aurion eis klibanon ballomenon o qeos outws amfiennusin ou
aurion eis klibanon ballomenon ho theos houtOs amphiennusin ou
G839 G1519 G2823 G906 G3588 G2316 G3779 G294 G3756
Adv Prep n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg Part Neg
MORROW INTO STOVE beING-CAST THE God thus IS-ENVELOPING-IN NOT
tomorrow is-garbing
pollw mallon umas oligopistoi

pollO mallon humas oligopistoi
G4183 G3123 G5209 G3640
a_ Dat Sg n Adv pp 2 Acc Pl a_ Voc Pl m
to-much RATHER YOU(p) FEW-BELIEVing-ones
much ye scant-of-faith-ones !
6:31 mh oun merimnhshte legontes ti fagwmen h 31 Therefore take no thought,

mE oun merimnEsEte legontes ti phagOmen E
G3361 G3767 G3309 G3004 G5101 G5315 G2228
saying, What shall we eat? or,
Part Neg Conj vs Aor Act 2 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pi Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl Part What shall we drink? or,
NO THEN YE-SHOULD-BE-beING-anxious sayING ANY WE-MAY-BE-EATING OR Wherewithal shall we be
ye-should-be-worrying what ? clothed?
ti piwmen h ti peribalwmeqa
ti piOmen E ti peribalOmetha
G5101 G4095 G2228 G5101 G4016
pi Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl Part pi Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Mid 1 Pl
ANY WE-MAY-BE-DRINKING OR ANY WE-MAY-BE-beING-ABOUT-CAST
what ? what ? we-may-be-being-clothed
6:32 panta gar tauta ta eqnh epizhtei oiden gar o 32 (For after all these things do
panta gar tauta ta ethnE epizEtei oiden gar ho
G3956 G1063 G5023 G3588 G1484 G1934 G1492 G1063 G3588
the Gentiles seek:) for your
a_ Acc Pl n Conj pd Acc Pl n t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n vi Pres Act 3 Sg vi Perf Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m heavenly Father knoweth that
ALL for these THE NATIONS IS-ON-SEEKING HAS-PERCEIVED for THE ye have need of all these
is-seeking-for is-aware things.
pathr umwn o ouranios oti crhzete toutwn apantwn

patEr humOn ho ouranios hoti chrEzete toutOn hapantOn
G3962 G5216 G3588 G3770 G3754 G5535 G5130 G537
n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl pd Gen Pl n a_ Gen Pl n
FATHER OF-YOU(p) THE heavenly that YE-ARE-needING OF-these OF-ALL(emph.)
of-ye of-these-things all(emph.)
6:33 zhteite de prwton thn basileian tou qeou kai thn 33 But seek ye first the
zEteite de prOton tEn basileian tou theou kai tEn
G2212 G1161 G4412 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316 G2532 G3588
kingdom of God, and his
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Adv t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg f righteousness; and all these
YE-BE-SEEKING YET BEFORE-most THE KINGdom OF-THE God AND THE things shall be added unto you.
be-ye-seeking ! first
dikaiosunhn autou kai tauta panta prosteqhsetai umin

dikaiosunEn autou kai tauta panta prostethEsetai humin
G1343 G846 G2532 G5023 G3956 G4369 G5213
n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj pd Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
JUSTice OF-Him AND these ALL SHALL-BE-BEING-addED to-YOU(p)
righteousness these-things to-ye
6:34 mh oun merimnhshte eis thn aurion h gar aurion 34 Take therefore no thought
mE oun merimnEsEte eis tEn aurion hE gar aurion
G3361 G3767 G3309 G1519 G3588 G839 G3588 G1063 G839
for the morrow: for the morrow
Part Neg Conj vs Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f Adv t_ Nom Sg f Conj Adv shall take thought for the
NO THEN YE-SHOULD-BE-beING-anxious INTO THE MORROW THE for MORROW things of itself. Sufficient unto
ye-should-be-worrying the day [is] the evil thereof.
merimnhsei ta eauths arketon th hmera h kakia auths

merimnEsei ta heautEs arketon tE hEmera hE kakia autEs
G3309 G3588 G1438 G713 G3588 G2250 G3588 G2549 G846
vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n pf 3 Gen Sg f a_ Nom Sg n t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg f
SHALL-BE-beING-anxious THE OF-self SUFFICient to-THE DAY THE EVIL OF-her
shall-be-be worrying the-things of-herself
Matthew 7
7:1 mh krinete ina mh kriqhte 1 . Judge not, that ye be not

mE krinete hina mE krithEte
G3361 G2919 G2443 G3361 G2919
judged.
Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Part Neg vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
NO BE-JUDGING THAT NO YE-MAY-BE-BEING-JUDGED
be-ye-judging !
7:2 en w gar krimati krinete kriqhsesqe kai en w 2 For with what judgment ye
en hO gar krimati krinete krithEsesthe kai en hO
G1722 G3739 G1063 G2917 G2919 G2919 G2532 G1722 G3739
judge, ye shall be judged: and
Prep pr Dat Sg n Conj n_ Dat Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Pl vi Fut Pas 2 Pl Conj Prep pr Dat Sg n with what measure ye mete, it
IN WHICH for JUDGment YE-ARE-JUDGING YE-SHALL-BE-BEING-JUDGED AND IN WHICH shall be measured to you again.
metrw metreite antimetrhqhsetai umin

metrO metreite antimetrEthEsetai humin
G3358 G3354 G488 G5213
n_ Dat Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Pl vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
MEASURE YE-ARE-MEASURING it-SHALL-BE-BEING-INSTEAD-MEASURED to-YOU(p)
it-shall-be-being-measured-again to-ye
7:3 ti de blepeis to karfos to en tw ofqalmw 3 And why beholdest thou the

ti de blepeis to karphos to en tO ophthalmO
G5101 G1161 G991 G3588 G2595 G3588 G1722 G3588 G3788
mote that is in thy brother's
pi Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m eye, but considerest not the
ANY YET YOU-ARE-lookING THE SHRIVEL THE IN THE VIEWer beam that is in thine own eye?
why ? you-are-observing mote eye
tou adelfou sou thn de en tw sw ofqalmw dokon

tou adelphou sou tEn de en tO sO ophthalmO dokon
G3588 G80 G4675 G3588 G1161 G1722 G3588 G4674 G3788 G1385
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Acc Sg f Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m ps 2 Dat Sg n_ Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg f
OF-THE brother OF-YOU THE YET IN THE YOUR VIEWer BEAM
eye
ou katanoeis
ou katanoeis
G3756 G2657
Part Neg vi Pres Act 2 Sg
NOT YOU-ARE-DOWN-MINDING
you-are-considering
7:4 h pws ereis tw adelfw sou afes 4 Or how wilt thou say to thy
E pOs ereis tO adelphO sou aphes
G2228 G4459 G2046 G3588 G80 G4675 G863
brother, Let me pull out the
Part Adv Int vi Fut Act 2 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg mote out of thine eye; and,
OR how YOU-SHALL-BE-declarING to-THE brother OF-YOU FROM-LET behold, a beam [is] in thine
how ? let-you ! own eye?
ekbalw to karfos apo tou ofqalmou sou kai

ekbalO to karphos apo tou ophthalmou sou kai
G1544 G3588 G2595 G575 G3588 G3788 G4675 G2532
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg Conj
I-SHOULD-BE-OUT-CASTING THE SHRIVEL FROM THE VIEWer OF-YOU AND
I-should-be-extracting mote eye
idou h dokos en tw ofqalmw sou

idou hE dokos en tO ophthalmO sou
G2400 G3588 G1385 G1722 G3588 G3788 G4675
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
BE-PERCEIVING THE BEAM IN THE VIEWer OF-YOU
lo ! eye
7:5 upokrita ekbale prwton thn dokon ek tou ofqalmou 5 Thou hypocrite, first cast out
hupokrita ekbale prOton tEn dokon ek tou ophthalmou
G5273 G1544 G4412 G3588 G1385 G1537 G3588 G3788
the beam out of thine own eye;
n_ Voc Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Adv t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m and then shalt thou see clearly
hypocrite BE-OUT-CASTING BEFORE-most THE BEAM OUT OF-THE VIEWer to cast out the mote out of thy
hypocrite ! be-you-extracting ! first eye brother's eye.
sou kai tote diableyeis ekbalein to karfos ek

sou kai tote diablepseis ekbalein to karphos ek
G4675 G2532 G5119 G1227 G1544 G3588 G2595 G1537
pp 2 Gen Sg Conj Adv vi Fut Act 2 Sg vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Prep
OF-YOU AND then YOU-SHALL-BE-THRU-lookING TO-BE-OUT-CASTING THE SHRIVEL OUT
you-shall-be-being-keen-sighted to-be-extracting mote
tou ofqalmou tou adelfou sou

tou ophthalmou tou adelphou sou
G3588 G3788 G3588 G80 G4675
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-THE VIEWer OF-THE brother OF-YOU
eye
7:6 mh dwte to agion tois kusin mhde balhte 6 Give not that which is holy
mE dOte to hagion tois kusin mEde balEte
G3361 G1325 G3588 G40 G3588 G2965 G3366 G906
unto the dogs, neither cast ye
Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Conj vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl your pearls before swine, lest
NO YE-MAY-BE-GIVING THE HOLY to-THE dogs NO-YET YE-SHOULD-BE-CASTING they trample them under their
nor-yet feet, and turn again and rend
Matthew 7
you.
tous margaritas umwn emprosqen twn coirwn mhpote
tous margaritas humOn emprosthen tOn choirOn mEpote
G3588 G3135 G5216 G1715 G3588 G5519 G3379
t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Adv
THE PEARLS OF-YOU(p) IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE HOGS NO-?-when
of-ye in-front-of the lest-at-some-time
katapathswsin autous en tois posin autwn kai strafentes

katapatEsOsin autous en tois posin autOn kai straphentes
G2662 G846 G1722 G3588 G4228 G846 G2532 G4762
vs Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Pl m Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Pas Nom Pl m
THEY-SHOULD-BE-trampING them IN THE FEET OF-them AND BEING-TURNED
they-should-be-trampling
rhxwsin umas
rExOsin humas
G4486 G5209
vs Aor Act 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Pl
THEY-SHOULD-BE-BURSTING YOU(p)
they-should-be-tearing ye
7:7 aiteite kai doqhsetai umin zhteite kai eurhsete 7. Ask, and it shall be given
aiteite kai dothEsetai humin zEteite kai heurEsete
G154 G2532 G1325 G5213 G2212 G2532 G2147
you; seek, and ye shall find;
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi Fut Act 2 Pl knock, and it shall be opened
BE-REQUESTING AND it-SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-YOU(p) BE-SEEKING AND YE-SHALL-BE-FINDING unto you:
be-ye-requesting ! to-ye be-ye-seeking !
krouete kai anoighsetai umin

krouete kai anoigEsetai humin
G2925 G2532 G455 G5213
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
BE-KNOCKING AND it-SHALL-BE-BEING-UP-OPENED to-YOU(p)
be-ye-knocking ! it-shall-be-being opened to-ye
7:8 pas gar o aitwn lambanei kai o zhtwn 8 For every one that asketh
pas gar ho aitOn lambanei kai ho zEtOn
G3956 G1063 G3588 G154 G2983 G2532 G3588 G2212
receiveth; and he that seeketh
a_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m findeth; and to him that
EVERY for THE one-REQUESTING IS-GETTING-UP AND THE one-SEEKING knocketh it shall be opened.
one-requesting is-obtaining one-seeking
euriskei kai tw krouonti anoighsetai

heuriskei kai tO krouonti anoigEsetai
G2147 G2532 G3588 G2925 G455
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg
IS-FINDING AND to-THE one-KNOCKING it-SHALL-BE-BEING-UP-OPENED
one-knocking it-shall-be-being opened
7:9 h tis estin ex umwn anqrwpos on ean 9Or what man is there of you,
E tis estin ex humOn anthrOpos hon ean
G2228 G5101 G2076 G1537 G5216 G444 G3739 G1437
whom if his son ask bread, will
Part pi Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep pp 2 Gen Pl n_ Nom Sg m pr Acc Sg m Cond he give him a stone?
OR ANY IS OUT OF-YOU(p) human WHOM IF-EVER
what ? of-ye
aithsh o uios autou arton mh liqon

aitEsE ho huios autou arton mE lithon
G154 G3588 G5207 G846 G740 G3361 G3037
vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg n_ Acc Sg m
SHOULD-BE REQUESTING THE SON OF-him BREAD NO STONE
should-be-requesting
epidwsei autw
epidOsei autO
G1929 G846
vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
SHALL-BE-ON-GIVING to-him
he-shall-be-handing him
7:10 kai ean icqun aithsh mh ofin epidwsei autw 10 Or if he ask a fish, will he
kai ean ichthun aitEsE mE ophin epidOsei autO
G2532 G1437 G2486 G154 G3361 G3789 G1929 G846
give him a serpent?
Conj Cond n_ Acc Sg m vs Aor Act 3 Sg Part Neg n_ Acc Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
AND IF-EVER FISH he-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING NO serpent SHALL-BE-ON-GIVING to-him
7:11 ei oun umeis ponhroi ontes oidate domata agaqa 11 If ye then, being evil, know
ei oun humeis ponEroi ontes oidate domata agatha
G1487 G3767 G5210 G4190 G5607 G1492 G1390 G18
how to give good gifts unto
Cond Conj pp 2 Nom Pl a_ Nom Pl m vp Pres vxx Nom Pl m vi Perf Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n your children, how much more
IF THEN YOU(p) wicked BEING HAVE-PERCEIVED GIFTS GOOD shall your Father which is in
ye heaven give good things to
them that ask him?
didonai tois teknois umwn posw mallon o pathr umwn
didonai tois teknois humOn posO mallon ho patEr humOn
G1325 G3588 G5043 G5216 G4214 G3123 G3588 G3962 G5216
vn Pres Act t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n pp 2 Gen Pl pq Dat Sg n Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl
TO-BE-GIVING to-THE offsprings OF-YOU(p) how-much RATHER THE FATHER OF-YOU(p)
children of-ye of-ye
Matthew 7
o en tois ouranois dwsei agaqa tois aitousin auton

ho en tois ouranois dOsei agatha tois aitousin auton
G3588 G1722 G3588 G3772 G1325 G18 G3588 G154 G846
t_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl n t_ Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Dat Pl m pp Acc Sg m
THE IN THE heavens SHALL-BE-GIVING GOODS to-THE ones-REQUESTING Him
good-things ones-requesting
7:12 panta oun osa an qelhte ina poiwsin umin oi 12 . Therefore all things
panta oun hosa an thelEte hina poiOsin humin hoi
G3956 G3767 G3745 G302 G2309 G2443 G4160 G5213 G3588
whatsoever ye would that men
a_ Acc Pl n Conj pk Acc Pl n Part vs Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vs Pres Act 3 Pl pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Nom Pl m should do to you, do ye even so
ALL THEN as-much-as EVER YE-MAY-BE-WILLING THAT MAY-BE-DOING to-YOU(p) THE to them: for this is the law and
whatever to-ye the prophets.
anqrwpoi outws kai umeis poieite autois outos gar estin

anthrOpoi houtOs kai humeis poieite autois houtos gar estin
G444 G3779 G2532 G5210 G4160 G846 G3778 G1063 G2076
n_ Nom Pl m Adv Conj pp 2 Nom Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl pp Dat Pl m pd Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
humans thus AND YOU(p) BE-DOING to-them this for IS
also ye be-ye-doing !
o nomos kai oi profhtai

ho nomos kai hoi prophEtai
G3588 G3551 G2532 G3588 G4396
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
THE LAW AND THE BEFORE-AVERers
prophets
7:13 eiselqete dia ths stenhs pulhs oti plateia h pulh 13 Enter ye in at the strait gate:
eiselthete dia tEs stenEs pulEs hoti plateia hE pulE
G1525 G1223 G3588 G4728 G4439 G3754 G4116 G3588 G4439
for wide [is] the gate, and
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj a_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f broad [is] the way, that leadeth
BE-YE-INTO-COMING THRU THE CRAMPED GATE that BROAD THE GATE to destruction, and many there
be-ye-entering ! through be which go in thereat:
kai eurucwros h odos h apagousa eis thn apwleian

kai euruchOros hE hodos hE apagousa eis tEn apOleian
G2532 G2149 G3588 G3598 G3588 G520 G1519 G3588 G684
Conj a_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
AND WELL-GUSH-SPACED THE WAY THE one-FROM-LEADING INTO THE destruction
spacious leading-away
kai polloi eisin oi eisercomenoi di auths

kai polloi eisin hoi eiserchomenoi di autEs
G2532 G4183 G1526 G3588 G1525 G1223 G846
Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m Prep pp Gen Sg f
AND MANY ARE THE ones-INTO-COMING THRU her
ones-entering through
7:14 oti stenh h pulh kai teqlimmenh h odos 14 Because strait [is] the gate,
hoti stenE hE pulE kai tethlimmenE hE hodos
G3754 G4728 G3588 G4439 G2532 G2346 G3588 G3598
and narrow [is] the way, which
Conj a_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj vp Perf Pas Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f leadeth unto life, and few there
that CRAMPED THE GATE AND HAVING-been-CONSTRICTED THE WAY be that find it.
having-been-narrowed
h apagousa eis thn zwhn kai oligoi eisin oi

hE apagousa eis tEn zOEn kai oligoi eisin hoi
G3588 G520 G1519 G3588 G2222 G2532 G3641 G1526 G3588
t_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
THE one-FROM-LEADING INTO THE LIFE AND FEW ARE THE
leading-away
euriskontes authn
heuriskontes autEn
G2147 G846
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg f
ones-FINDING her
ones-finding
7:15 prosecete de apo twn yeudoprofhtwn oitines ercontai pros 15 . Beware of false prophets,
prosechete de apo tOn pseudoprophEtOn hoitines erchontai pros
G4337 G1161 G575 G3588 G5578 G3748 G2064 G4314
which come to you in sheep's
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pr Nom Pl m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep clothing, but inwardly they are
BE-YE-heedING YET FROM THE FALSE-BEFORE-AVERers WHO-ANY ARE-COMING TOWARD ravening wolves.
be-ye-heeding ! false-prophets who-any
umas en endumasin probatwn eswqen de eisin lukoi arpages

humas en endumasin probatOn esOthen de eisin lukoi harpages
G5209 G1722 G1742 G4263 G2081 G1161 G1526 G3074 G727
pp 2 Acc Pl Prep n_ Dat Pl n n_ Gen Pl n Adv Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
YOU(p) IN IN-SLIPS OF-sheep INTO-PLACE YET THEY-ARE WOLVES SNATCHing
ye apparel(p) of-sheep(p) inside rapacious
7:16 apo twn karpwn autwn epignwsesqe autous mhti 16 Ye shall know them by their
apo tOn karpOn autOn epignOsesthe autous mEti
G575 G3588 G2590 G846 G1921 G846 G3385
fruits. Do men gather grapes of
Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m vi Fut midD 2 Pl pp Acc Pl m Part Int thorns, or figs of thistles?
FROM THE FRUITS OF-them YE-SHALL-BE-ON-KNOWING them NO-ANY
ye-shall-be-recognizing not ?
Matthew 7
sullegousin apo akanqwn stafulhn h apo tribolwn suka

sullegousin apo akanthOn staphulEn E apo tribolOn suka
G4816 G575 G173 G4718 G2228 G575 G5146 G4810
vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep n_ Gen Pl f n_ Acc Sg f Part Prep n_ Gen Pl m n_ Acc Pl n
THEY-ARE-TOGETHER-collectING FROM POINT-FLOWERS GRAPE OR FROM THREE-CASTS FIGS
they-are-culling thorns star-thistles
7:17 outws pan dendron agaqon karpous kalous poiei to de 17 Even so every good tree
houtOs pan dendron agathon karpous kalous poiei to de
G3779 G3956 G1186 G18 G2590 G2570 G4160 G3588 G1161
bringeth forth good fruit; but a
Adv a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n Conj corrupt tree bringeth forth evil
thus EVERY TREE GOOD FRUITS IDEAL IS-DOING THE YET fruit.
is-producing
sapron dendron karpous ponhrous poiei

sapron dendron karpous ponErous poiei
G4550 G1186 G2590 G4190 G4160
a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ROTTen TREE FRUITS wicked IS-DOING
noxious is-producing
7:18 ou dunatai dendron agaqon karpous ponhrous poiein oude 18 A good tree cannot bring
ou dunatai dendron agathon karpous ponErous poiein oude
G3756 G1410 G1186 G18 G2590 G4190 G4160 G3761
forth evil fruit, neither [can] a
Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vn Pres Act Adv corrupt tree bring forth good
NOT IS-ABLE TREE GOOD FRUITS wicked TO-BE-DOING NOT-YET fruit.
can noxious to-be-producing neither
dendron sapron karpous kalous poiein

dendron sapron karpous kalous poiein
G1186 G4550 G2590 G2570 G4160
n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vn Pres Act
TREE ROTTen FRUITS IDEAL TO-BE-DOING
to-be-producing
7:19 pan dendron mh poioun karpon kalon ekkoptetai kai 19 Every tree that bringeth not
pan dendron mE poioun karpon kalon ekkoptetai kai
G3956 G1186 G3361 G4160 G2590 G2570 G1581 G2532
forth good fruit is hewn down,
a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Part Neg vp Pres Act Nom Sg n n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Conj and cast into the fire.
EVERY TREE NO DOING FRUIT IDEAL IS-beING-OUT-STRIKen AND
doproducing is-being-hewn-down
eis pur balletai

eis pur balletai
G1519 G4442 G906
Prep n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
INTO FIRE IS-beING-CAST
7:20 arage apo twn karpwn autwn epignwsesqe autous 20 Wherefore by their fruits ye
arage apo tOn karpOn autOn epignOsesthe autous
G686 G575 G3588 G2590 G846 G1921 G846
shall know them.
Part Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m vi Fut midD 2 Pl pp Acc Pl m
CONSEQUENTLY-SURELY FROM THE FRUITS OF-them YE-SHALL-BE-ON-KNOWING them
surely-then ye-shall-be-recognizing
7:21 ou pas o legwn moi kurie kurie 21 . Not every one that saith
ou pas ho legOn moi kurie kurie
G3756 G3956 G3588 G3004 G3427 G2962 G2962
unto me, Lord, Lord, shall
Part Neg a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp 1 Dat Sg n_ Voc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m enter into the kingdom of
NOT EVERY THE one-sayING to-ME Master ! Master ! heaven; but he that doeth the
one-saying Lord ! Lord ! will of my Father which is in
heaven.
eiseleusetai eis thn basileian twn ouranwn all o
eiseleusetai eis tEn basileian tOn ouranOn all ho
G1525 G1519 G3588 G932 G3588 G3772 G235 G3588
vi Fut midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg m
SHALL-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens but THE
shall-be-entering
poiwn to qelhma tou patros mou tou en ouranois

poiOn to thelEma tou patros mou tou en ouranois
G4160 G3588 G2307 G3588 G3962 G3450 G3588 G1722 G3772
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Gen Sg m Prep n_ Dat Pl m
one-DOING THE WILL OF-THE FATHER OF-ME THE IN heavens
one-doing
7:22 polloi erousin moi en ekeinh th hmera kurie kurie 22 Many will say to me in that
polloi erousin moi en ekeinE tE hEmera kurie kurie
G4183 G2046 G3427 G1722 G1565 G3588 G2250 G2962 G2962
day, Lord, Lord, have we not
a_ Nom Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg Prep pd Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f n_ Voc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m prophesied in thy name? and in
MANY SHALL-BE-declarING to-ME IN that THE DAY Master ! Master ! thy name have cast out devils?
Lord ! Lord ! and in thy name done many
wonderful works?
ou tw sw onomati proefhteusamen kai tw sw onomati
ou tO sO onomati proephEteusamen kai tO sO onomati
G3756 G3588 G4674 G3686 G4395 G2532 G3588 G4674 G3686
Part Neg t_ Dat Sg m ps 2 Dat Sg n_ Dat Sg n vi Aor Act 1 Pl Conj t_ Dat Sg m ps 2 Dat Sg n_ Dat Sg n
NOT to-THE YOUR NAME WE-BEFORE-AVER AND to-THE YOUR NAME
we-prophesy
Matthew 7
daimonia exebalomen kai tw sw onomati dunameis pollas epoihsamen

daimonia exebalomen kai tO sO onomati dunameis pollas epoiEsamen
G1140 G1544 G2532 G3588 G4674 G3686 G1411 G4183 G4160
n_ Acc Pl n vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl Conj t_ Dat Sg m ps 2 Dat Sg n_ Dat Sg n n_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f vi Aor Act 1 Pl
demons WE-OUT-CAST AND to-THE YOUR NAME ABILITIES MANY WE-DO
we-cast-out powerful-deeds
7:23 kai tote omologhsw autois oti oudepote egnwn umas 23 And then will I profess unto
kai tote homologEsO autois hoti oudepote egnOn humas
G2532 G5119 G3670 G846 G3754 G3763 G1097 G5209
them, I never knew you: depart
Conj Adv vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj Adv vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl from me, ye that work iniquity.
AND then I-SHALL-BE-avowING to-them that NOT-YET-?-when I-KNEW YOU(p)
never ye
apocwreite ap emou oi ergazomenoi thn anomian

apochOreite ap emou hoi ergazomenoi tEn anomian
G672 G575 G1700 G3588 G2038 G3588 G458
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
BE-YE-FROM-SPACING FROM ME THE ones-ACTING THE UN-LAWness
be-ye-departing ! ones-working lawlessness
7:24 pas oun ostis akouei mou tous logous toutous kai 24 Therefore whosoever
pas oun hostis akouei mou tous logous toutous kai
G3956 G3767 G3748 G191 G3450 G3588 G3056 G5128 G2532
heareth these sayings of mine,
a_ Nom Sg m Conj pr Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Pl m Conj and doeth them, I will liken
EVERY THEN WHO-ANY IS-HEARING OF-ME THE sayings these AND him unto a wise man, which
every-one who-any built his house upon a rock:
poiei autous omoiwsw auton andri fronimw ostis wkodomhsen

poiei autous homoiOsO auton andri phronimO hostis OkodomEsen
G4160 G846 G3666 G846 G435 G5429 G3748 G3618
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp Acc Sg m n_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m pr Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
IS-DOING them I-SHALL-BE-LIKenING him to-MAN DISPOSED WHO-ANY HOME-BUILDS
prudent who-any builds
thn oikian autou epi thn petran

tEn oikian autou epi tEn petran
G3588 G3614 G846 G1909 G3588 G4073
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
THE HOME OF-him ON THE ROCK
house
7:25 kai katebh h broch kai hlqon oi potamoi kai 25 And the rain descended, and
kai katebE hE brochE kai Elthon hoi potamoi kai
G2532 G2597 G3588 G1028 G2532 G2064 G3588 G4215 G2532
the floods came, and the winds
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj blew, and beat upon that
AND DOWN-STEPPed THE RAIN AND CAME THE rivers AND house; and it fell not: for it was
descended founded upon a rock.
epneusan oi anemoi kai prosepeson th oikia ekeinh kai ouk

epneusan hoi anemoi kai prosepeson tE oikia ekeinE kai ouk
G4154 G3588 G417 G2532 G4363 G3588 G3614 G1565 G2532 G3756
vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f Conj Part Neg
BLOW THE WINDS AND THEY-TOWARD-FELL to-THE HOME that AND NOT
they-lunged house
epesen teqemeliwto gar epi thn petran

epesen tethemeliOto gar epi tEn petran
G4098 G2311 G1063 G1909 G3588 G4073
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vi Plup Pas 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
it-FALLS it-HAD-been-foundED for ON THE ROCK
she-falls she-had-been-founded
7:26 kai pas o akouwn mou tous logous toutous kai 26 And every one that heareth
kai pas ho akouOn mou tous logous toutous kai
G2532 G3956 G3588 G191 G3450 G3588 G3056 G5128 G2532
these sayings of mine, and
Conj a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Pl m Conj doeth them not, shall be
AND EVERY THE one-HEARING OF-ME THE sayings these AND likened unto a foolish man,
one-hearing which built his house upon the
sand:
mh poiwn autous omoiwqhsetai andri mwrw ostis
mE poiOn autous homoiOthEsetai andri mOrO hostis
G3361 G4160 G846 G3666 G435 G3474 G3748
Part Neg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m pr Nom Sg m
NO DOING them SHALL-BE-BEING-LIKenED to-MAN INSIPID WHO-ANY
stupid who-any
wkodomhsen thn oikian autou epi thn ammon

OkodomEsen tEn oikian autou epi tEn ammon
G3618 G3588 G3614 G846 G1909 G3588 G285
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
HOME-BUILDS THE HOME OF-him ON THE SAND
builds house
7:27 kai katebh h broch kai hlqon oi potamoi kai 27 And the rain descended, and
kai katebE hE brochE kai Elthon hoi potamoi kai
G2532 G2597 G3588 G1028 G2532 G2064 G3588 G4215 G2532
the floods came, and the winds
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj blew, and beat upon that
AND DOWN-STEPPed THE RAIN AND CAME THE rivers AND house; and it fell: and great
descended was the fall of it.
epneusan oi anemoi kai prosekoyan th oikia ekeinh kai

epneusan hoi anemoi kai prosekopsan tE oikia ekeinE kai
G4154 G3588 G417 G2532 G4350 G3588 G3614 G1565 G2532
vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f Conj
BLOW THE WINDS AND THEY-TOWARD-STRIKE to-THE HOME that AND
they-dash-against the house
epesen kai hn h ptwsis auths megalh

epesen kai En hE ptOsis autEs megalE
G4098 G2532 G2258 G3588 G4431 G846 G3173
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg f a_ Nom Sg f
it-FALLS AND WAS THE FALL OF-her GREAT
she-falls
7:28 kai egeneto ote sunetelesen o ihsous tous logous 28 And it came to pass, when
kai egeneto hote sunetelesen ho iEsous tous logous
G2532 G1096 G3753 G4931 G3588 G2424 G3588 G3056
Jesus had ended these sayings,
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m the people were astonished at
AND it-BECAME when TOGETHER-FINISHES THE JESUS THE sayings his doctrine:
concludes
toutous exeplhssonto oi ocloi epi th didach autou

toutous exeplEssonto hoi ochloi epi tE didachE autou
G5128 G1605 G3588 G3793 G1909 G3588 G1322 G846
pd Acc Pl m vi Impf Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m
these were-astonishED THE THRONGS ON THE TEACHing OF-Him
7:29 hn gar didaskwn autous ws exousian ecwn kai ouc 29 For he taught them as [one]
En gar didaskOn autous hOs exousian echOn kai ouch
G2258 G1063 G1321 G846 G5613 G1849 G2192 G2532 G3756
having authority, and not as the
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m Adv n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj Part Neg scribes.
He-WAS for One-TEACHING them AS authority HAVING AND NOT
teaching one-having
ws oi grammateis
hOs hoi grammateis
G5613 G3588 G1122
Adv t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
AS THE WRITers
scribes
Matthew 8
8:1 katabanti de autw apo tou orous hkolouqhsan autw ocloi 1 . When he was come down
katabanti de autO apo tou orous EkolouthEsan autO ochloi
G2597 G1161 G846 G575 G3588 G3735 G190 G846 G3793
from the mountain, great
vp 2Aor Act Dat Sg m Conj pp Dat Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m n_ Nom Pl m multitudes followed him.
to-DOWN-STEPPing YET Him FROM THE mountain follow to-Him THRONGS
to-descending him
polloi
polloi
G4183
a_ Nom Pl m
MANY
vast
8:2 kai idou lepros elqwn prosekunei autw legwn 2 And, behold, there came a
kai idou lepros elthOn prosekunei autO legOn
G2532 G2400 G3015 G2064 G4352 G846 G3004
leper and worshipped him,
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m saying, Lord, if thou wilt, thou
AND BE-PERCEIVING leper COMING worshipED to-Him sayING canst make me clean.
lo ! him
kurie ean qelhs dunasai me kaqarisai

kurie ean thelEs dunasai me katharisai
G2962 G1437 G2309 G1410 G3165 G2511
n_ Voc Sg m Cond vs Pres Act 2 Sg vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg vn Aor Act
Master ! IF-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-WILLING YOU-ARE-ABLE ME TO-cleanse
Lord ! you-can
8:3 kai ekteinas thn ceira hyato autou o ihsous 3 And Jesus put forth [his]
kai ekteinas tEn cheira hEpsato autou ho iEsous
G2532 G1614 G3588 G5495 G680 G846 G3588 G2424
hand, and touched him, saying,
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m I will; be thou clean. And
AND OUT-STRETCHing THE HAND TOUCHES him THE JESUS immediately his leprosy was
stretching-out cleansed.
legwn qelw kaqarisqhti kai euqews ekaqarisqh autou h

legOn thelO katharisthEti kai eutheOs ekatharisthE autou hE
G3004 G2309 G2511 G2532 G2112 G2511 G846 G3588
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Sg vm Aor Pas 2 Sg Conj Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg f
sayING I-AM-WILLING BE-BEING-cleansED AND immediately IS-cleansED OF-him THE
be-you-being-cleansed !
lepra
lepra
G3014
n_ Nom Sg f
leprosy
8:4 kai legei autw o ihsous ora mhdeni eiphs 4 And Jesus saith unto him,
kai legei autO ho iEsous hora mEdeni eipEs
G2532 G3004 G846 G3588 G2424 G3708 G3367 G2036
See thou tell no man; but go
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg a_ Dat Sg m vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg thy way, shew thyself to the
AND IS-sayING to-him THE JESUS BE-SEEING to-NO-YET-ONE YOU-MAY-BE-sayING priest, and offer the gift that
be-you-seeing ! to-no-one you-may-be-telling Moses commanded, for a
testimony unto them.
all upage seauton deixon tw ierei kai prosenegke
all hupage seauton deixon tO hierei kai prosenegke
G235 G5217 G4572 G1166 G3588 G2409 G2532 G4374
Conj vm Pres Act 2 Sg pf 2 Acc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
but BE-UNDER-LEADING YOURself SHOW to-THE SACRED-one AND BE-TOWARD-CARRYING
be-you-going-away ! show-you ! priest bring-you !
to dwron o prosetaxen mwshs eis marturion autois

to dOron ho prosetaxen mOsEs eis marturion autois
G3588 G1435 G3739 G4367 G3475 G1519 G3142 G846
t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pr Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg n pp Dat Pl m
THE oblation WHICH TOWARD-SETS MOSES INTO witness to-them
approach-present bids testimony
8:5 eiselqonti de tw ihsou eis kapernaoum proshlqen autw 5 . And when Jesus was
eiselthonti de tO iEsou eis kapernaoum prosElthen autO
G1525 G1161 G3588 G2424 G1519 G2584 G4334 G846
entered into Capernaum, there
vp 2Aor Act Dat Sg m Conj t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Prep ni proper vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m came unto him a centurion,
to-INTO-COMING YET THE JESUS INTO CAPERNAUM TOWARD-CAME to-Him beseeching him,
to-entering came-to him
ekatontarcos parakalwn auton

hekatontarchos parakalOn auton
G1543 G3870 G846
n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m
HUNDRED-chief BESIDE-CALLING Him
centurion entreating
8:6 kai legwn kurie o pais mou beblhtai en th 6 And saying, Lord, my servant
kai legOn kurie ho pais mou beblEtai en tE
G2532 G3004 G2962 G3588 G3816 G3450 G906 G1722 G3588
lieth at home sick of the palsy,
Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Voc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f grievously tormented.
AND sayING Master ! THE boy OF-ME HAS-been-CAST IN THE
Lord ! is-prostrate
Matthew 8
oikia paralutikos deinws basanizomenos

oikia paralutikos deinOs basanizomenos
G3614 G3885 G1171 G928
n_ Dat Sg f a_ Nom Sg m Adv vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m
HOME paralytic DREADly beING-ORDEALizED
house dreadfully being-tormented
8:7 kai legei autw o ihsous egw elqwn qerapeusw 7And Jesus saith unto him, I
kai legei autO ho iEsous egO elthOn therapeusO
G2532 G3004 G846 G3588 G2424 G1473 G2064 G2323
will come and heal him.
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Nom Sg vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 1 Sg
AND IS-sayING to-him THE JESUS I COMING SHALL-BE-curING
auton
auton
G846
pp Acc Sg m
him
8:8 kai apokriqeis o ekatontarcos efh kurie ouk eimi 8 The centurion answered and
kai apokritheis ho hekatontarchos ephE kurie ouk eimi
G2532 G611 G3588 G1543 G5346 G2962 G3756 G1510
said, Lord, I am not worthy
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg n_ Voc Sg m Part Neg vi Pres vxx 1 Sg that thou shouldest come under
AND answerING THE HUNDRED-chief AVERRed Master ! NOT I-AM my roof: but speak the word
centurion Lord ! only, and my servant shall be
healed.
ikanos ina mou upo thn steghn eiselqhs alla monon
hikanos hina mou hupo tEn stegEn eiselthEs alla monon
G2425 G2443 G3450 G5259 G3588 G4721 G1525 G235 G3440
a_ Nom Sg m Conj pp 1 Gen Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg Conj Adv
enough THAT OF-ME UNDER THE EXCLUDer YOU-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING but ONLY
competent roof you-may-be-entering
eipe logon kai iaqhsetai o pais mou

eipe logon kai iathEsetai ho pais mou
G2036 G3056 G2532 G2390 G3588 G3816 G3450
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg
BE-sayING saying AND SHALL-BE-BEING-HEALED THE boy OF-ME
be-you-saying ! word
8:9 kai gar egw anqrwpos eimi upo exousian ecwn up 9 For I am a man under
kai gar egO anthrOpos eimi hupo exousian echOn hup
G2532 G1063 G1473 G444 G1510 G5259 G1849 G2192 G5259
authority, having soldiers
Conj Conj pp 1 Nom Sg n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 1 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep under me: and I say to this
AND for I human AM UNDER authority HAVING UNDER [man], Go, and he goeth; and
also to another, Come, and he
cometh; and to my servant, Do
emauton stratiwtas kai legw toutw poreuqhti kai poreuetai this, and he doeth [it].
emauton stratiOtas kai legO toutO poreuthEti kai poreuetai
G1683 G4757 G2532 G3004 G5129 G4198 G2532 G4198
pf 1 Acc Sg m n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg pd Dat Sg m vm Aor pasD 2 Sg Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
MYself WARriors AND I-AM-sayING to-this-one BE-BEING-GONE AND he-IS-GOING
soldiers to-this-one be-you-being-gone !
kai allw ercou kai ercetai kai tw doulw mou

kai allO erchou kai erchetai kai tO doulO mou
G2532 G243 G2064 G2532 G2064 G2532 G3588 G1401 G3450
Conj a_ Dat Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg
AND to-other BE-COMING AND he-IS-COMING AND to-THE SLAVE OF-ME
to-another be-you-coming !
poihson touto kai poiei

poiEson touto kai poiei
G4160 G5124 G2532 G4160
vm Aor Act 2 Sg pd Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
DO this AND he-IS-DOING
do-you !
8:10 akousas de o ihsous eqaumasen kai eipen tois 10 When Jesus heard [it], he
akousas de ho iEsous ethaumasen kai eipen tois
G191 G1161 G3588 G2424 G2296 G2532 G2036 G3588
marvelled, and said to them
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m that followed, Verily I say unto
HEARing YET THE JESUS He-MARVELS AND said to-THE you, I have not found so great
faith, no, not in Israel.
akolouqousin amhn legw umin oude en tw israhl tosauthn

akolouthousin amEn legO humin oude en tO israEl tosautEn
G190 G281 G3004 G5213 G3761 G1722 G3588 G2474 G5118
vp Pres Act Dat Pl m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Adv Prep t_ Dat Sg m ni proper pd Acc Sg f
ones-followING AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) NOT-YET IN THE ISRAEL so-much
ones-following verily to-ye not-yeteven
pistin euron
pistin heuron
G4102 G2147
n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
BELIEF I-FOUND
faith
Matthew 8
8:11 legw de umin oti polloi apo anatolwn kai dusmwn 11 And I say unto you, That
legO de humin hoti polloi apo anatolOn kai dusmOn
G3004 G1161 G5213 G3754 G4183 G575 G395 G2532 G1424
many shall come from the east
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m Prep n_ Gen Pl f Conj n_ Gen Pl f and west, and shall sit down
I-AM-sayING YET to-YOU(p) that MANY FROM risings AND west with Abraham, and Isaac, and
to-ye east Jacob, in the kingdom of
heaven.
hxousin kai anakliqhsontai meta abraam kai isaak kai iakwb en
hExousin kai anaklithEsontai meta abraam kai isaak kai iakOb en
G2240 G2532 G347 G3326 G11 G2532 G2464 G2532 G2384 G1722
vi Fut Act 3 Pl Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Pl Prep ni proper Conj ni proper Conj ni proper Prep
SHALL-BE-ARRIVING AND SHALL-BE-BEING-reCLINED WITH ABRAHAM AND ISAAC AND JACOB IN
th basileia twn ouranwn

tE basileia tOn ouranOn
G3588 G932 G3588 G3772
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
8:12 oi de uioi ths basileias ekblhqhsontai eis to 12 But the children of the
hoi de huioi tEs basileias ekblEthEsontai eis to
G3588 G1161 G5207 G3588 G932 G1544 G1519 G3588
kingdom shall be cast out into
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut Pas 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg n outer darkness: there shall be
THE YET SONS OF-THE KINGdom SHALL-BE-BEING-OUT-CAST INTO THE weeping and gnashing of teeth.
shall-be-being-cast-out
skotos to exwteron ekei estai o klauqmos kai o

skotos to exOteron ekei estai ho klauthmos kai ho
G4655 G3588 G1857 G1563 G2071 G3588 G2805 G2532 G3588
n_ Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m
DARK THE OUTer there SHALL-BE THE LAMENTing AND THE
darkness lamentation
brugmos twn odontwn

brugmos tOn odontOn
G1030 G3588 G3599
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
GNASHing OF-THE TEETH
8:13 kai eipen o ihsous tw ekatontarcw upage kai 13 And Jesus said unto the
kai eipen ho iEsous tO ekatontarchO hupage kai
G2532 G2036 G3588 G2424 G3588 G1543 G5217 G2532
centurion, Go thy way; and as
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg Conj thou hast believed, [so] be it
AND said THE JESUS to-THE HUNDRED-chief YOU-BE-UNDER-LEADING AND done unto thee. And his
centurion be-you-going-away ! servant was healed in the
selfsame hour.
ws episteusas genhqhtw soi kai iaqh o pais
hOs episteusas genEthEtO soi kai iathE ho pais
G5613 G4100 G1096 G4671 G2532 G2390 G3588 G3816
Adv vi Aor Act 2 Sg vm Aor pasD 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
AS YOU-BELIEVE LET-it-BE-BEING-BECOME to-YOU AND WAS-HEALED THE boy
let-it-be-being-become !
autou en th wra ekeinh

autou en tE hOra ekeinE
G846 G1722 G3588 G5610 G1565
pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f
OF-him IN THE HOUR that
8:14 kai elqwn o ihsous eis thn oikian petrou eiden 14 . And when Jesus was come
kai elthOn ho iEsous eis tEn oikian petrou eiden
G2532 G2064 G3588 G2424 G1519 G3588 G3614 G4074 G1492
into Peter's house, he saw his
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg wife's mother laid, and sick of
AND COMING THE JESUS INTO THE HOME OF-Peter He-PERCEIVED a fever.
house
thn penqeran autou beblhmenhn kai puressousan

tEn pentheran autou beblEmenEn kai puressousan
G3588 G3994 G846 G906 G2532 G4445
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f Conj vp Pres Act Acc Sg f
THE mother-IN-LAW OF-him HAVING-been-CAST AND beING-feverish
being-prostrate
8:15 kai hyato ths ceiros auths kai afhken authn o 15 And he touched her hand,
kai hEpsato tEs cheiros autEs kai aphEken autEn ho
G2532 G680 G3588 G5495 G846 G2532 G863 G846 G3588
and the fever left her: and she
Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg m arose, and ministered unto
AND He-TOUCHES OF-THE HAND OF-her AND FROM-LETS her THE them.
the leaves
puretos kai hgerqh kai dihkonei autois

puretos kai EgerthE kai diEkonei autois
G4446 G2532 G1453 G2532 G1247 G846
n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m
fever AND she-WAS-ROUSED AND THRU-SERVED to-them
waited-on them
Matthew 8
8:16 oyias de genomenhs proshnegkan autw daimonizomenous 16 When the even was come,
opsias de genomenEs prosEnegkan autO daimonizomenous
G3798 G1161 G1096 G4374 G846 G1139
they brought unto him many
a_ Gen Sg f Conj vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m that were possessed with
OF-evening YET BECOMING THEY-TOWARD-CARRY to-Him ones-demonizING devils: and he cast out the
they-bring ones-being-demonized spirits with [his] word, and
healed all that were sick:
pollous kai exebalen ta pneumata logw kai pantas tous kakws
pollous kai exebalen ta pneumata logO kai pantas tous kakOs
G4183 G2532 G1544 G3588 G4151 G3056 G2532 G3956 G3588 G2560
a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n n_ Dat Sg m Conj a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m Adv
MANY AND He-OUT-CAST THE spirits to-saying AND ALL THE EVILly
he-cast-out to-word the-ones illness
econtas eqerapeusen
echontas etherapeusen
G2192 G2323
vp Pres Act Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
HAVING He-curES
8:17 opws plhrwqh to rhqen dia hsaiou tou 17 That it might be fulfilled
hopOs plErOthE to rEthen dia Esaiou tou
G3704 G4137 G3588 G4483 G1223 G2268 G3588
Adv vs Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n Prep n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m the prophet, saying, Himself
WHICH-how MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE BEING-declarED THRU ISAIAH THE took our infirmities, and bare
so-that may-be-being-fulfilled through [our] sicknesses.
profhtou legontos autos tas asqeneias hmwn elaben kai

prophEtou legontos autos tas astheneias hEmOn elaben kai
G4396 G3004 G846 G3588 G769 G2257 G2983 G2532
n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg n pp Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pp 1 Gen Pl vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj
BEFORE-AVERer OF-sayING He THE UN-FIRMnesses OF-US GOT AND
prophet saying infirmities took
tas nosous ebastasen

tas nosous ebastasen
G3588 G3554 G941
t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE DISEASES BEARS
he-bears
8:18 idwn de o ihsous pollous oclous peri auton 18 . Now when Jesus saw great
idOn de ho iEsous pollous ochlous peri auton
G1492 G1161 G3588 G2424 G4183 G3793 G4012 G846
multitudes about him, he gave
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Prep pp Acc Sg m commandment to depart unto
PERCEIVING YET THE JESUS MANY THRONGS ABOUT Him the other side.
vast
ekeleusen apelqein eis to peran

ekeleusen apelthein eis to peran
G2753 G565 G1519 G3588 G4008
vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg n Adv
He-ORDERS TO-BE-FROM-COMING INTO THE OTHER-SIDE
to-be-coming-away
8:19 kai proselqwn eis grammateus eipen autw didaskale 19 And a certain scribe came,
kai proselthOn heis grammateus eipen autO didaskale
G2532 G4334 G1520 G1122 G2036 G846 G1320
and said unto him, Master, I
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m will follow thee whithersoever
AND TOWARD-COMING ONE WRITer said to-Him TEACHer ! thou goest.
approaching scribe
akolouqhsw soi opou ean aperch

akolouthEsO soi hopou ean aperchE
G190 G4671 G3699 G1437 G565
vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Adv Cond vs Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg
I-SHALL-BE-followING to-YOU THE-?-where IF-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-FROM-COMING
you wherever you-may-be-coming-away
8:20 kai legei autw o ihsous ai alwpekes fwleous 20 And Jesus saith unto him,
kai legei autO ho iEsous hai alOpekes phOleous
G2532 G3004 G846 G3588 G2424 G3588 G258 G5454
The foxes have holes, and the
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f n_ Acc Pl m birds of the air [have] nests;
AND IS-sayING to-him THE JESUS THE JACKALS BURROWS but the Son of man hath not
where to lay [his] head.
ecousin kai ta peteina tou ouranou kataskhnwseis o de

echousin kai ta peteina tou ouranou kataskEnOseis ho de
G2192 G2532 G3588 G4071 G3588 G3772 G2682 G3588 G1161
vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Acc Pl f t_ Nom Sg m Conj
ARE-HAVING AND THE flyers OF-THE heaven DOWN-BOOTHS THE YET
flying-creatures roosts
uios tou anqrwpou ouk ecei pou thn kefalhn

huios tou anthrOpou ouk echei pou tEn kephalEn
G5207 G3588 G444 G3756 G2192 G4226 G3588 G2776
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg Part Int t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
SON OF-THE human NOT IS-HAVING ?-where THE HEAD
where ?
Matthew 8
klinh
klinE
G2827
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
He-MAY-BE-deCLINING
he-may-be-reclining
8:21 eteros de twn maqhtwn autou eipen autw kurie 21 And another of his disciples
heteros de tOn mathEtOn autou eipen autO kurie
G2087 G1161 G3588 G3101 G846 G2036 G846 G2962
said unto him, Lord, suffer me
a_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m first to go and bury my father.
DIFFERENT YET OF-THE LEARNers OF-Him said to-Him Master !
different-one disciples Lord !
epitreyon moi prwton apelqein kai qayai ton patera mou

epitrepson moi prOton apelthein kai thapsai ton patera mou
G2010 G3427 G4412 G565 G2532 G2290 G3588 G3962 G3450
vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg Adv vn 2Aor Act Conj vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg
permit to-ME BEFORE-most TO-BE-FROM-COMING AND TO-entomb THE FATHER OF-ME
permit-you ! me first to-be-coming-away
8:22 o de ihsous eipen autw akolouqei moi kai afes 22 But Jesus said unto him,
ho de iEsous eipen autO akolouthei moi kai aphes
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G846 G190 G3427 G2532 G863
Follow me; and let the dead
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg bury their dead.
THE YET JESUS said to-him BE-followING to-ME AND FROM-LET
be-you-following ! me leave-you !
tous nekrous qayai tous eautwn nekrous

tous nekrous thapsai tous heautOn nekrous
G3588 G3498 G2290 G3588 G1438 G3498
t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vn Aor Act t_ Acc Pl m pf 3 Gen Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
THE DEAD TO-entomb THE OF-selves DEAD
dead-ones of-themselves dead-ones
8:23 kai embanti autw eis to ploion hkolouqhsan autw oi 23 . And when he was entered
kai embanti autO eis to ploion EkolouthEsan autO hoi
G2532 G1684 G846 G1519 G3588 G4143 G190 G846 G3588
into a ship, his disciples
Conj vp 2Aor Act Dat Sg m pp Dat Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m followed him.
AND to-IN-STEPPing Him INTO THE FLOATer follow to-Him THE
to-stepping-in ship him
maqhtai autou
mathEtai autou
G3101 G846
n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m
LEARNers OF-Him
disciples
8:24 kai idou seismos megas egeneto en th qalassh wste 24 And, behold, there arose a
kai idou seismos megas egeneto en tE thalassE hOste
G2532 G2400 G4578 G3173 G1096 G1722 G3588 G2281 G5620
great tempest in the sea,
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj insomuch that the ship was
AND BE-PERCEIVING QUAKing GREAT BECAME IN THE SEA AS-BESIDES covered with the waves: but he
lo ! occurred so-that was asleep.
to ploion kaluptesqai upo twn kumatwn autos de ekaqeuden

to ploion kaluptesthai hupo tOn kumatOn autos de ekatheuden
G3588 G4143 G2572 G5259 G3588 G2949 G846 G1161 G2518
t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n vn Pres Pas Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n pp Nom Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg
THE FLOATer TO-BE-beING-COVERED by THE BILLOWS He YET DOWN-LOUNGED
ship drowsed
8:25 kai proselqontes oi maqhtai autou hgeiran auton legontes 25 And his disciples came to
kai proselthontes hoi mathEtai autou Egeiran auton legontes
G2532 G4334 G3588 G3101 G846 G1453 G846 G3004
[him], and awoke him, saying,
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Lord, save us: we perish.
AND TOWARD-COMING THE LEARNers OF-Him ROUSE Him sayING
approaching disciples
kurie swson hmas apollumeqa

kurie sOson hEmas apollumetha
G2962 G4982 G2248 G622
n_ Voc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl vi Pres Mid 1 Pl
Master ! SAVE US WE-ARE-beING-destroyED
Lord ! save-you ! we-are-perishing
8:26 kai legei autois ti deiloi este oligopistoi tote 26 And he saith unto them,
kai legei autois ti deiloi este oligopistoi tote
G2532 G3004 G846 G5101 G1169 G2075 G3640 G5119
Why are ye fearful, O ye of
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pi Nom Sg n a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 2 Pl a_ Voc Pl m Adv little faith? Then he arose, and
AND He-IS-sayING to-them ANY DREADers YE-ARE FEW-BELIEVing-ones then rebuked the winds and the sea;
why ? timid scant-of-faith-ones ! and there was a great calm.
egerqeis epetimhsen tois anemois kai th qalassh kai egeneto

egertheis epetimEsen tois anemois kai tE thalassE kai egeneto
G1453 G2008 G3588 G417 G2532 G3588 G2281 G2532 G1096
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Conj t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
BEING-ROUSED He-rebukES to-THE WINDS AND to-THE SEA AND BECAME
the the
Matthew 8
galhnh megalh
galEnE megalE
G1055 G3173
n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f
CALM GREAT
8:27 oi de anqrwpoi eqaumasan legontes potapos estin outos 27 But the men marvelled,
hoi de anthrOpoi ethaumasan legontes potapos estin houtos
G3588 G1161 G444 G2296 G3004 G4217 G2076 G3778
saying, What manner of man is
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pd Nom Sg m this, that even the winds and
THE YET humans MARVEL sayING ?-where-FROM IS this the sea obey him!
what-manner-of this-man
oti kai oi anemoi kai h qalassa upakouousin autw

hoti kai hoi anemoi kai hE thalassa hupakouousin autO
G3754 G2532 G3588 G417 G2532 G3588 G2281 G5219 G846
Conj Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
that AND THE WINDS AND THE SEA ARE-obeyING to-Him
also him
8:28 kai elqonti autw eis to peran eis thn cwran twn 28 . And when he was come to
kai elthonti autO eis to peran eis tEn chOran tOn
G2532 G2064 G846 G1519 G3588 G4008 G1519 G3588 G5561 G3588
the other side into the country
Conj vp 2Aor Act Dat Sg m pp Dat Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n Adv Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl m of the Gergesenes, there met
AND to-COMING Him INTO THE OTHER-SIDE INTO THE SPACE OF-THE him two possessed with devils,
country coming out of the tombs,
exceeding fierce, so that no
gergeshnwn uphnthsan autw duo daimonizomenoi ek twn mnhmeiwn man might pass by that way.
gergesEnOn hupEntEsan autO duo daimonizomenoi ek tOn mnEmeiOn
G1086 G5221 G846 G1417 G1139 G1537 G3588 G3419
n_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
GERGESENES UNDER-meet to-Him TWO demonizING-ones OUT OF-THE memorial-vaults
meet him ones-being-demonized tombs
exercomenoi calepoi lian wste mh iscuein tina

exerchomenoi chalepoi lian hOste mE ischuein tina
G1831 G5467 G3029 G5620 G3361 G2480 G5100
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Adv Conj Part Neg vn Pres Act px Acc Sg m
OUT-COMING FEROCIOUS VERY AS-BESIDES NO TO-BE-beING-STRONG ANY
coming-out so-that
parelqein dia ths odou ekeinhs

parelthein dia tEs hodou ekeinEs
G3928 G1223 G3588 G3598 G1565
vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f
TO-BE-BESIDE-COMING THRU THE WAY that
to-be-passing-by through road
8:29 kai idou ekraxan legontes ti hmin kai soi ihsou 29 And, behold, they cried out,
kai idou ekraxan legontes ti hEmin kai soi iEsou
G2532 G2400 G2896 G3004 G5101 G2254 G2532 G4671 G2424
saying, What have we to do
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Aor Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pi Nom Sg n pp 1 Dat Pl Conj pp 2 Dat Sg n_ Voc Sg m with thee, Jesus, thou Son of
AND BE-PERCEIVING THEY-CRY sayING ANY to-US AND to-YOU JESUS ! God? art thou come hither to
lo ! what ? torment us before the time?
uie tou qeou hlqes wde pro kairou basanisai hmas

huie tou theou Elthes hOde pro kairou basanisai hEmas
G5207 G3588 G2316 G2064 G5602 G4253 G2540 G928 G2248
n_ Voc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg Adv Prep n_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act pp 1 Acc Pl
SON ! OF-THE God YOU-CAME here BEFORE SEASON TO-ORDEALize US
to-torment
8:30 hn de makran ap autwn agelh coirwn pollwn boskomenh 30 And there was a good way
En de makran ap autOn agelE choirOn pollOn boskomenE
G2258 G1161 G3112 G575 G846 G34 G5519 G4183 G1006
off from them an herd of many
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj Adv Prep pp Gen Pl m n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Pas Nom Sg f swine feeding.
WAS YET FAR FROM them HERD OF-HOGS MANY beING-HERBED
grazing
8:31 oi de daimones parekaloun auton legontes ei 31 So the devils besought him,

hoi de daimones parekaloun auton legontes ei
G3588 G1161 G1142 G3870 G846 G3004 G1487
saying, If thou cast us out,
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Cond suffer us to go away into the
THE YET demons BESIDE-CALLED Him sayING IF herd of swine.
entreated
ekballeis hmas epitreyon hmin apelqein eis thn agelhn

ekballeis hEmas epitrepson hEmin apelthein eis tEn agelEn
G1544 G2248 G2010 G2254 G565 G1519 G3588 G34
vi Pres Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
YOU-ARE-OUT-CASTING US permit to-US TO-BE-FROM-COMING INTO THE HERD
you-are-casting-out permit-you ! us to-be-passing-forth
twn coirwn
tOn choirOn
G3588 G5519
t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE HOGS
8:32 kai eipen autois upagete oi de exelqontes aphlqon 32 And he said unto them, Go.
kai eipen autois hupagete hoi de exelthontes apElthon
G2532 G2036 G846 G5217 G3588 G1161 G1831 G565
And when they were come out,
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl they went into the herd of
AND He-said to-them BE-UNDER-LEADING THE YET OUT-COMING THEY-FROM-CAME swine: and, behold, the whole
be-ye-going-away ! coming-out they-came-away herd of swine ran violently
down a steep place into the
eis thn agelhn twn coirwn kai idou wrmhsen pasa h sea, and perished in the waters.
eis tEn agelEn tOn choirOn kai idou hOrmEsen pasa hE
G1519 G3588 G34 G3588 G5519 G2532 G2400 G3729 G3956 G3588
Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f
INTO THE HERD OF-THE HOGS AND BE-PERCEIVING RUSHES EVERY THE
lo ! entire
agelh twn coirwn kata tou krhmnou eis thn qalassan kai
agelE tOn choirOn kata tou krEmnou eis tEn thalassan kai
G34 G3588 G5519 G2596 G3588 G2911 G1519 G3588 G2281 G2532
n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj
HERD OF-THE HOGS DOWN THE HANG INTO THE SEA AND
precipice
apeqanon en tois udasin

apethanon en tois hudasin
G599 G1722 G3588 G5204
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n
THEY-FROM-DIED IN THE waters
died
8:33 oi de boskontes efugon kai apelqontes eis thn polin 33 And they that kept them
hoi de boskontes ephugon kai apelthontes eis tEn polin
G3588 G1161 G1006 G5343 G2532 G565 G1519 G3588 G4172
fled, and went their ways into
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f the city, and told every thing,
THE YET ones-HERBING FLED AND FROM-COMING INTO THE city and what was befallen to the
graziers coming-away possessed of the devils.
aphggeilan panta kai ta twn daimonizomenwn

apEggeilan panta kai ta tOn daimonizomenOn
G518 G3956 G2532 G3588 G3588 G1139
vi Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Acc Pl n Conj t_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl m
THEY-FROM-MESSAGE ALL AND THE OF-THE ones-demonizING
they-report the(p) ones-being-demonized
8:34 kai idou pasa h polis exhlqen eis sunanthsin 34 And, behold, the whole city
kai idou pasa hE polis exElthen eis sunantEsin
G2532 G2400 G3956 G3588 G4172 G1831 G1519 G4877
came out to meet Jesus: and
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f when they saw him, they
AND BE-PERCEIVING EVERY THE city OUT-CAME INTO TOGETHER-INSTEADing besought [him] that he would
lo ! entire came-out meeting-with depart out of their coasts.
tw ihsou kai idontes auton parekalesan opws

tO iEsou kai idontes auton parekalesan hopOs
G3588 G2424 G2532 G1492 G846 G3870 G3704
t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Adv
to-THE JESUS AND PERCEIVING Him THEY-BESIDE-CALL WHICH-how
the they-entreat so-that
metabh apo twn oriwn autwn

metabE apo tOn horiOn autOn
G3327 G575 G3588 G3725 G846
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n pp Gen Pl m
He-MAY-BE-after-STEPPING FROM THE boundaries OF-them
he-may-be-proceeding
Matthew 9
9:1 kai embas eis to ploion dieperasen kai hlqen eis 1 . And he entered into a ship,
kai embas eis to ploion dieperasen kai Elthen eis
G2532 G1684 G1519 G3588 G4143 G1276 G2532 G2064 G1519
and passed over, and came into
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep his own city.
AND IN-STEPPing INTO THE FLOATer He-ferriES AND CAME INTO
stepping-in ship he-ferries-over
thn idian polin

tEn idian polin
G3588 G2398 G4172
t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
THE OWN city
9:2 kai idou proseferon autw paralutikon epi klinhs 2 And, behold, they brought to
kai idou prosepheron autO paralutikon epi klinEs
G2532 G2400 G4374 G846 G3885 G1909 G2825
him a man sick of the palsy,
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg f lying on a bed: and Jesus
AND BE-PERCEIVING THEY-TOWARD-CARRIED to-Him paralytic ON couch seeing their faith said unto the
lo ! they-brought sick of the palsy; Son, be of
good cheer; thy sins be
beblhmenon kai idwn o ihsous thn pistin autwn forgiven thee.
beblEmenon kai idOn ho iEsous tEn pistin autOn
G906 G2532 G1492 G3588 G2424 G3588 G4102 G846
vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Pl m
HAVING-been-CAST AND PERCEIVING THE JESUS THE BELIEF OF-them
prostrate faith
eipen tw paralutikw qarsei teknon afewntai soi

eipen tO paralutikO tharsei teknon apheOntai soi
G2036 G3588 G3885 G2293 G5043 G863 G4671
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg n_ Voc Sg n vi Perf Pas 3 Pl pp 2 Dat Sg
He-said to-THE paralytic YOU-BE-COURAGE-ING offspring HAVE-been-FROM-LET to-YOU
be-you-having-courage ! child ! have-been-pardoned you
ai amartiai sou
hai hamartiai sou
G3588 G266 G4675
t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f pp 2 Gen Sg
THE misses OF-YOU
sins
9:3 kai idou tines twn grammatewn eipon en eautois outos 3 And, behold, certain of the
kai idou tines tOn grammateOn eipon en heautois houtos
G2532 G2400 G5100 G3588 G1122 G2036 G1722 G1438 G3778
scribes said within themselves,
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg px Nom Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pf 3 Dat Pl m pd Nom Sg m This [man] blasphemeth.
AND BE-PERCEIVING ANY OF-THE WRITers said IN selves this-One
lo ! some scribes among themselves this-man
blasfhmei
blasphEmei
G987
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IS-HARM-AVERRING
is-blaspheming
9:4 kai idwn o ihsous tas enqumhseis autwn eipen 4 And Jesus knowing their
kai idOn ho iEsous tas enthumEseis autOn eipen
G2532 G1492 G3588 G2424 G3588 G1761 G846 G2036
thoughts said, Wherefore think
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg ye evil in your hearts?
AND PERCEIVING THE JESUS THE IN-FEELings OF-them said
sentiments
ina ti umeis enqumeisqe ponhra en tais kardiais umwn

hina ti humeis enthumeisthe ponEra en tais kardiais humOn
G2443 G2444 G5210 G1760 G4190 G1722 G3588 G2588 G5216
Conj Adv Int pp 2 Nom Pl vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl a_ Acc Pl n Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pp 2 Gen Pl
THAT ANY YOU(p) ARE-IN-FEELING wickeds IN THE HEARTS OF-YOU(p)
why ? are-brooding wicked(p) of-ye
9:5 ti gar estin eukopwteron eipein afewntai soi ai 5 For whether is easier, to say,
ti gar estin eukopOteron eipein apheOntai soi hai
G5101 G1063 G2076 G2123 G2036 G863 G4671 G3588
[Thy] sins be forgiven thee; or
pi Nom Sg n Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vn 2Aor Act vi Perf Pas 3 Pl pp 2 Dat Sg t_ Nom Pl f to say, Arise, and walk?
ANY for IS easier TO-BE-sayING HAVE-been-FROM-LET to-YOU THE
what ? have-been-pardoned you
amartiai h eipein egeirai kai peripatei

hamartiai E eipein egeirai kai peripatei
G266 G2228 G2036 G1453 G2532 G4043
n_ Nom Pl f Part vn 2Aor Act vm Aor Mid 2 Sg Conj vm Pres Act 2 Sg
misses OR TO-BE-sayING be-YOU-ROUSED AND BE-ABOUT-TREADING
sins be-you-roused ! be-you-walking !
9:6 ina de eidhte oti exousian ecei o uios tou 6 But that ye may know that
hina de eidEte hoti exousian echei ho huios tou
G2443 G1161 G1492 G3754 G1849 G2192 G3588 G5207 G3588
the Son of man hath power on
Conj Conj vs Perf Act 2 Pl Conj n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m earth to forgive sins, (then
THAT YET YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING that authority IS-HAVING THE SON OF-THE saith he to the sick of the
palsy,) Arise, take up thy bed,
Matthew 9
and go unto thine house.

anqrwpou epi ths ghs afienai amartias tote legei tw
anthrOpou epi tEs gEs aphienai hamartias tote legei tO
G444 G1909 G3588 G1093 G863 G266 G5119 G3004 G3588
n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vn Pres Act n_ Acc Pl f Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m
human ON THE LAND TO-FROM-LET misses then He-IS-sayING to-THE
earth to-pardon sins
paralutikw egerqeis aron sou thn klinhn kai upage

paralutikO egertheis aron sou tEn klinEn kai hupage
G3885 G1453 G142 G4675 G3588 G2825 G2532 G5217
a_ Dat Sg m vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj vm Pres Act 2 Sg
paralytic BEING-ROUSED LIFT OF-YOU THE couch AND BE-UNDER-LEADING
pick-up-you ! be-you-going-away !
eis ton oikon sou

eis ton oikon sou
G1519 G3588 G3624 G4675
Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
INTO THE HOME OF-YOU
house
9:7 kai egerqeis aphlqen eis ton oikon autou 7 And he arose, and departed
kai egertheis apElthen eis ton oikon autou
G2532 G1453 G565 G1519 G3588 G3624 G846
to his house.
Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m
AND BEING-ROUSED he-FROM-CAME INTO THE HOME OF-him
he-came-away house
9:8 idontes de oi ocloi eqaumasan kai edoxasan ton qeon 8 But when the multitudes saw
idontes de hoi ochloi ethaumasan kai edoxasan ton theon
G1492 G1161 G3588 G3793 G2296 G2532 G1392 G3588 G2316
[it], they marvelled, and
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m glorified God, which had given
PERCEIVING YET THE THRONGS MARVEL AND THEY-esteem THE God such power unto men.
they-glorify
ton donta exousian toiauthn tois anqrwpois

ton donta exousian toiautEn tois anthrOpois
G3588 G1325 G1849 G5108 G3588 G444
t_ Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
THE One-GIVING authority such to-THE humans
one-giving
9:9 kai paragwn o ihsous ekeiqen eiden anqrwpon 9 . And as Jesus passed forth
kai paragOn ho iEsous ekeithen eiden anthrOpon
G2532 G3855 G3588 G2424 G1564 G1492 G444
from thence, he saw a man,
Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m named Matthew, sitting at the
AND BESIDE-LEADING THE JESUS thence He-PERCEIVED human receipt of custom: and he saith
passing-by unto him, Follow me. And he
arose, and followed him.
kaqhmenon epi to telwnion matqaion legomenon kai legei
kathEmenon epi to telOnion matthaion legomenon kai legei
G2521 G1909 G3588 G5058 G3156 G3004 G2532 G3004
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
sittING ON THE tribute-office MATTHEW beING-said AND He-IS-sayING
onat
autw akolouqei moi kai anastas hkolouqhsen autw

autO akolouthei moi kai anastas EkolouthEsen autO
G846 G190 G3427 G2532 G450 G190 G846
pp Dat Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
to-him BE-followING to-ME AND UP-STANDing he-follows to-Him
be-you-following ! me rising him
9:10 kai egeneto autou anakeimenou en th oikia kai 10 And it came to pass, as
kai egeneto autou anakeimenou en tE oikia kai
G2532 G1096 G846 G345 G1722 G3588 G3614 G2532
Jesus sat at meat in the house,
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj behold, many publicans and
AND BECAME OF-Him UP-LYING IN THE HOME AND sinners came and sat down
it-became lying-back-at-table house with him and his disciples.
idou polloi telwnai kai amartwloi elqontes

idou polloi telOnai kai hamartOloi elthontes
G2400 G4183 G5057 G2532 G268 G2064
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
BE-PERCEIVING MANY tribute-collectors AND missers COMING
lo ! sinners
sunanekeinto tw ihsou kai tois maqhtais autou

sunanekeinto tO iEsou kai tois mathEtais autou
G4873 G3588 G2424 G2532 G3588 G3101 G846
vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m
TOGETHER-UP-LAID to-THE JESUS AND to-THE LEARNers OF-Him
lay-back-at-the-table-together-with disciples
9:11 kai idontes oi farisaioi eipon tois maqhtais autou 11 And when the Pharisees
kai idontes hoi pharisaioi eipon tois mathEtais autou
G2532 G1492 G3588 G5330 G2036 G3588 G3101 G846
saw [it], they said unto his
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m disciples, Why eateth your
AND PERCEIVING THE PHARISEES said to-THE LEARNers OF-Him Master with publicans and
disciples sinners?
Matthew 9
dia ti meta twn telwnwn kai amartwlwn esqiei o

dia ti meta tOn telOnOn kai hamartOlOn esthiei ho
G1223 G5101 G3326 G3588 G5057 G2532 G268 G2068 G3588
Prep pi Acc Sg n Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
THRU ANY WITH THE tribute-collectors AND missers IS-EATING THE
because-of what ? sinners
didaskalos umwn
didaskalos humOn
G1320 G5216
n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl
TEACHer OF-YOU(p)
of-ye
9:12 o de ihsous akousas eipen autois ou creian ecousin 12 But when Jesus heard [that],
ho de iEsous akousas eipen autois ou chreian echousin
G3588 G1161 G2424 G191 G2036 G846 G3756 G5532 G2192
he said unto them, They that be
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Part Neg n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Pl whole need not a physician,
THE YET JESUS HEARing He-said to-them NOT need ARE-HAVING but they that are sick.
hearing-it
oi iscuontes iatrou all oi kakws econtes

hoi ischuontes iatrou all hoi kakOs echontes
G3588 G2480 G2395 G235 G3588 G2560 G2192
t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m Adv vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
THE ones-beING-STRONG OF-HEALer but THE-ones EVILly HAVING
ones-being-strong of-physician the-ones illness
9:13 poreuqentes de maqete ti estin eleon qelw kai 13 But go ye and learn what
poreuthentes de mathete ti estin eleon thelO kai
G4198 G1161 G3129 G5101 G2076 G1656 G2309 G2532
[that] meaneth, I will have
vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl pi Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj mercy, and not sacrifice: for I
BEING-GONE YET BE-LEARNING ANY IS MERCY I-AM-WILLING AND am not come to call the
be-ye-learning ! what this-is righteous, but sinners to
repentance.
ou qusian ou gar hlqon kalesai dikaious all amartwlous eis
ou thusian ou gar Elthon kalesai dikaious all hamartOlous eis
G3756 G2378 G3756 G1063 G2064 G2564 G1342 G235 G268 G1519
Part Neg n_ Acc Sg f Part Neg Conj vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg vn Aor Act a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m Prep
NOT SACRIFICE NOT for I-CAME TO-CALL JUST-ones but missers INTO
just-ones sinners
metanoian
metanoian
G3341
n_ Acc Sg f
after-MIND
repentance
9:14 tote prosercontai autw oi maqhtai iwannou legontes dia 14 . Then came to him the
tote proserchontai autO hoi mathEtai iOannou legontes dia
G5119 G4334 G846 G3588 G3101 G2491 G3004 G1223
disciples of John, saying, Why
Adv vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep do we and the Pharisees fast
then ARE-TOWARD-COMING to-Him THE LEARNers OF-JOHN sayING THRU oft, but thy disciples fast not?
coming-to him disciples because-of
ti hmeis kai oi farisaioi nhsteuomen polla oi de maqhtai

ti hEmeis kai hoi pharisaioi nEsteuomen polla hoi de mathEtai
G5101 G2249 G2532 G3588 G5330 G3522 G4183 G3588 G1161 G3101
pi Acc Sg n pp 1 Nom Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 1 Pl a_ Acc Pl n t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m
ANY WE AND THE PHARISEES ARE-fastING much THE YET LEARNers
what ? disciples
sou ou nhsteuousin
sou ou nEsteuousin
G4675 G3756 G3522
pp 2 Gen Sg Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Pl
OF-YOU NOT ARE-fastING
9:15 kai eipen autois o ihsous mh dunantai oi uioi 15 And Jesus said unto them,
kai eipen autois ho iEsous mE dunantai hoi huioi
G2532 G2036 G846 G3588 G2424 G3361 G1410 G3588 G5207
Can the children of the
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m bridechamber mourn, as long
AND said to-them THE JESUS NO ARE-ABLE THE SONS as the bridegroom is with
can them? but the days will come,
when the bridegroom shall be
tou numfwnos penqein ef oson met autwn estin o taken from them, and then
tou numphOnos penthein eph hoson met autOn estin ho shall they fast.
G3588 G3567 G3996 G1909 G3745 G3326 G846 G2076 G3588
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vn Pres Act Prep pk Acc Sg n Prep pp Gen Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
OF-THE BRIDal-chamber TO-BE-MOURNING ON as-much-as WITH them IS THE
numfios eleusontai de hmerai otan aparqh ap autwn

numphios eleusontai de hEmerai hotan aparthE ap autOn
G3566 G2064 G1161 G2250 G3752 G522 G575 G846
n_ Nom Sg m vi Fut midD 3 Pl Conj n_ Nom Pl f Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Pl m
BRIDE-groom SHALL-BE-COMING YET DAYS when-EVER MAY-BE-BEING-FROM-LIFTED FROM them
bridegroom whenever may-be-being-taken-away
Matthew 9
o numfios kai tote nhsteusousin

ho numphios kai tote nEsteusousin
G3588 G3566 G2532 G5119 G3522
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj Adv vi Fut Act 3 Pl
THE BRIDE-groom AND then THEY-SHALL-BE-fastING
bridegroom
9:16 oudeis de epiballei epiblhma rakous agnafou epi imatiw 16 No man putteth a piece of
oudeis de epiballei epiblEma rakous agnaphou epi himatiO
G3762 G1161 G1911 G1915 G4470 G46 G1909 G2440
new cloth unto an old garment,
a_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n Prep n_ Dat Sg n for that which is put in to fill it
NOT-YET-ONE YET IS-ON-CASTING ON-CAST-effect OF-BURSTer OF-UN-CARDED ON cloak up taketh from the garment,
no-one is-patching patch of-shred unshrunk and the rent is made worse.
palaiw airei gar to plhrwma autou apo tou imatiou kai

palaiO airei gar to plErOma autou apo tou himatiou kai
G3820 G142 G1063 G3588 G4138 G846 G575 G3588 G2440 G2532
a_ Dat Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Conj
OLD IS-LIFTING for THE FILLing OF-it FROM THE cloak AND
it
ceiron scisma ginetai

cheiron schisma ginetai
G5501 G4978 G1096
a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
WORSE SPLIT IS-BECOMING
rent
9:17 oude ballousin oinon neon eis askous palaious ei de 17 Neither do men put new
oude ballousin oinon neon eis askous palaious ei de
G3761 G906 G3631 G3501 G1519 G779 G3820 G1487 G1161
wine into old bottles: else the
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Prep n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Cond Conj bottles break, and the wine
NOT-YET THEY-ARE-CASTING WINE YOUNG INTO BOTTLES (of-skin) OLD IF YET runneth out, and the bottles
neither fresh wine-skins perish: but they put new wine
into new bottles, and both are
mhge rhgnuntai oi askoi kai o oinos ekceitai preserved.
mEge rEgnuntai hoi askoi kai ho oinos ekcheitai
G3361 G4486 G3588 G779 G2532 G3588 G3631 G1632
Part Neg vi Pres Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
NO-SURELY ARE-beING-BURST THE BOTTLES (of-skin) AND THE WINE IS-beING-OUT-POURED
surely-no are-bursting wine-skins is-spilling
kai oi askoi apolountai alla ballousin oinon neon

kai hoi askoi apolountai alla ballousin oinon neon
G2532 G3588 G779 G622 G235 G906 G3631 G3501
Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Fut Mid 3 Pl Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m
AND THE BOTTLES (of-skin) SHALL-BE-beING-destroyED but THEY-ARE-CASTING WINE YOUNG
wine-skins shall-be-perishing they-are-draining fresh
eis askous kainous kai amfotera sunthrountai

eis askous kainous kai amphotera suntErountai
G1519 G779 G2537 G2532 G297 G4933
Prep n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl n vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
INTO BOTTLES (of-skin) NEW AND both ARE-beING-TOGETHER-KEPT
wine-skins are-being-preserved
9:18 tauta autou lalountos autois idou arcwn eis 18 . While he spake these
tauta autou lalountos autois idou archOn heis
G5023 G846 G2980 G846 G2400 G758 G1520
things unto them, behold, there
pd Acc Pl n pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m pp Dat Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m came a certain ruler, and
these OF-Him TALKING to-them BE-PERCEIVING chief ONE worshipped him, saying, My
these-things speaking lo ! daughter is even now dead: but
come and lay thy hand upon
elqwn prosekunei autw legwn oti h qugathr mou her, and she shall live.
elthOn prosekunei autO legOn hoti hE thugatEr mou
G2064 G4352 G846 G3004 G3754 G3588 G2364 G3450
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg
COMING he-worshipED to-Him sayING that THE DAUGHTER OF-ME
worshiped him
arti eteleuthsen alla elqwn epiqes thn ceira sou

arti eteleutEsen alla elthOn epithes tEn cheira sou
G737 G5053 G235 G2064 G2007 G3588 G5495 G4675
Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg
at-PRESENT deceasES but COMING BE-ON-PLACING THE HAND OF-YOU
just-now be-placing-on-you !
ep authn kai zhsetai

ep autEn kai zEsetai
G1909 G846 G2532 G2198
Prep pp Acc Sg f Conj vi Fut midD 3 Sg
ON her AND she-SHALL-BE-LIVING
9:19 kai egerqeis o ihsous hkolouqhsen autw kai oi 19 And Jesus arose, and
kai egertheis ho iEsous EkolouthEsen autO kai hoi
G2532 G1453 G3588 G2424 G190 G846 G2532 G3588
followed him, and [so did] his
Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m disciples.
AND BEING-ROUSED THE JESUS follows to-him AND THE
him
Matthew 9
maqhtai autou
mathEtai autou
G3101 G846
n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m
LEARNers OF-Him
disciples
9:20 kai idou gunh aimorroousa dwdeka eth proselqousa 20 And, behold, a woman,
kai idou gunE haimorroousa dOdeka etE proselthousa
G2532 G2400 G1135 G131 G1427 G2094 G4334
which was diseased with an
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f a_ Nom n_ Nom Pl n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f issue of blood twelve years,
AND BE-PERCEIVING WOMAN BLOOD-GUSHING TWO-TEN YEARS TOWARD-COMING came behind [him], and
lo ! having-hemorrhage twelve approaching touched the hem of his
garment:
opisqen hyato tou kraspedou tou imatiou autou
opisthen hEpsato tou kraspedou tou himatiou autou
G3693 G680 G3588 G2899 G3588 G2440 G846
Adv vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n pp Gen Sg m
BEHIND-PLACE she-TOUCHES OF-THE HANG-FOOT OF-THE cloak OF-Him
from-behind touches the tassel
9:21 elegen gar en eauth ean monon aywmai tou imatiou 21 For she said within herself,
elegen gar en heautE ean monon hapsOmai tou himatiou
G3004 G1063 G1722 G1438 G1437 G3440 G680 G3588 G2440
If I may but touch his garment,
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj Prep pf 3 Dat Sg f Cond Adv vs Aor Mid 1 Sg t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n I shall be whole.
she-said for IN self IF-EVER ONLY I-SHOULD-BE-TOUCHING OF-THE cloak
herself the
autou swqhsomai
autou sOthEsomai
G846 G4982
pp Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 1 Sg
OF-Him I-SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED
9:22 o de ihsous epistrafeis kai idwn authn eipen 22 But Jesus turned him about,
ho de iEsous epistrapheis kai idOn autEn eipen
G3588 G1161 G2424 G1994 G2532 G1492 G846 G2036
and when he saw her, he said,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Daughter, be of good comfort;
THE YET JESUS BEING-ON-TURNED AND PERCEIVING her said thy faith hath made thee whole.
being-turned-about And the woman was made
whole from that hour.
qarsei qugater h pistis sou seswken se kai eswqh
tharsei thugater hE pistis sou sesOken se kai esOthE
G2293 G2364 G3588 G4102 G4675 G4982 G4571 G2532 G4982
vm Pres Act 2 Sg n_ Voc Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg vi Perf Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
BE-COURAGE-ING DAUGHTER THE BELIEF OF-YOU HAS-SAVED YOU AND WAS-SAVED
be-you-having-courage ! daughter ! faith
h gunh apo ths wras ekeinhs

hE gunE apo tEs hOras ekeinEs
G3588 G1135 G575 G3588 G5610 G1565
t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f
THE WOMAN FROM THE HOUR that
9:23 kai elqwn o ihsous eis thn oikian tou arcontos 23 And when Jesus came into
kai elthOn ho iEsous eis tEn oikian tou archontos
G2532 G2064 G3588 G2424 G1519 G3588 G3614 G3588 G758
the ruler's house, and saw the
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m minstrels and the people
AND COMING THE JESUS INTO THE HOME OF-THE chief making a noise,
house
kai idwn tous aulhtas kai ton oclon qoruboumenon

kai idOn tous aulEtas kai ton ochlon thoruboumenon
G2532 G1492 G3588 G834 G2532 G3588 G3793 G2350
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m
AND PERCEIVING THE FLAGEOLETers AND THE THRONG TUMULTING
flutists making-a-tumult
9:24 legei autois anacwreite ou gar apeqanen to korasion alla 24 He said unto them, Give
legei autois anachOreite ou gar apethanen to korasion alla
G3004 G846 G402 G3756 G1063 G599 G3588 G2877 G235
place: for the maid is not dead,
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl Part Neg Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Conj but sleepeth. And they laughed
He-IS-sayING to-them BE-YE-UP-SPACING NOT for FROM-DIED THE maiden but him to scorn.
be-ye-retiring ! died
kaqeudei kai kategelwn autou

katheudei kai kategelOn autou
G2518 G2532 G2606 G846
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Gen Sg m
she-IS-DOWN-LOUNGING AND THEY-DOWN-LAUGHED OF-Him
she-is-drowsing they-ridiculed him
9:25 ote de exeblhqh o oclos eiselqwn ekrathsen ths 25 But when the people were
hote de exeblEthE ho ochlos eiselthOn ekratEsen tEs
G3753 G1161 G1544 G3588 G3793 G1525 G2902 G3588
put forth, he went in, and took
Adv Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Gen Sg f her by the hand, and the maid
when YET WAS-OUT-CAST THE THRONG INTO-COMING He-HOLDS OF-THE arose.
was-cast-out entering the
Matthew 9
ceiros auths kai hgerqh to korasion

cheiros autEs kai EgerthE to korasion
G5495 G846 G2532 G1453 G3588 G2877
n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg f Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
HAND OF-her AND WAS-ROUSED THE maiden
9:26 kai exhlqen h fhmh auth eis olhn thn ghn ekeinhn 26 And the fame hereof went
kai exElthen hE phEmE hautE eis holEn tEn gEn ekeinEn
G2532 G1831 G3588 G5345 G3778 G1519 G3650 G3588 G1093 G1565
abroad into all that land.
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pd Nom Sg f Prep a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f
AND OUT-CAME THE AVERment this INTO WHOLE THE LAND that
came-out fame
9:27 kai paragonti ekeiqen tw ihsou hkolouqhsan autw duo 27 . And when Jesus departed
kai paragonti ekeithen tO iEsou EkolouthEsan autO duo
G2532 G3855 G1564 G3588 G2424 G190 G846 G1417
thence, two blind men
Conj vp Pres Act Dat Sg m Adv t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom followed him, crying, and
AND to-BESIDE-LEADING thence THE JESUS follow to-Him TWO saying, [Thou] Son of David,
to-passing-by him have mercy on us.
tufloi krazontes kai legontes elehson hmas uie dabid

tuphloi krazontes kai legontes eleEson hEmas huie dabid
G5185 G2896 G2532 G3004 G1653 G2248 G5207 G1138
a_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl n_ Voc Sg m ni proper
BLIND-ones CRYING AND sayING BE-MERCIFUL-to US SON ! of-DAVID
blind-men be-you-merciful ! of-David
9:28 elqonti de eis thn oikian proshlqon autw oi tufloi 28 And when he was come into
elthonti de eis tEn oikian prosElthon autO hoi tuphloi
G2064 G1161 G1519 G3588 G3614 G4334 G846 G3588 G5185
the house, the blind men came
vp 2Aor Act Dat Sg m Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m to him: and Jesus saith unto
to-COMING YET INTO THE HOME TOWARD-CAME to-Him THE BLIND-ones them, Believe ye that I am able
house came-to him blind-men to do this? They said unto him,
Yea, Lord.
kai legei autois o ihsous pisteuete oti dunamai touto
kai legei autois ho iEsous pisteuete hoti dunamai touto
G2532 G3004 G846 G3588 G2424 G4100 G3754 G1410 G5124
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg pd Acc Sg n
AND IS-sayING to-them THE JESUS YE-ARE-BELIEVING that I-AM-ABLE this
poihsai legousin autw nai kurie

poiEsai legousin autO nai kurie
G4160 G3004 G846 G3483 G2962
vn Aor Act vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Part n_ Voc Sg m
TO-DO THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him YEA Master !
yes Lord !
9:29 tote hyato twn ofqalmwn autwn legwn kata thn 29 Then touched he their eyes,
tote hEpsato tOn ophthalmOn autOn legOn kata tEn
G5119 G680 G3588 G3788 G846 G3004 G2596 G3588
saying, According to your faith
Adv vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f be it unto you.
then He-TOUCHES OF-THE VIEWers OF-them sayING according-to THE
the eyes
pistin umwn genhqhtw umin

pistin humOn genEthEtO humin
G4102 G5216 G1096 G5213
n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl vm Aor pasD 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
BELIEF OF-YOU(p) LET-it-BE-BEING-BECOME to-YOU(p)
faith of-ye let-it-be-being-become ! to-ye
9:30 kai anewcqhsan autwn oi ofqalmoi kai enebrimhsato autois 30 And their eyes were opened;
kai aneOchthEsan autOn hoi ophthalmoi kai enebrimEsato autois
G2532 G455 G846 G3588 G3788 G2532 G1690 G846
and Jesus straitly charged
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl pp Gen Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m them, saying, See [that] no
AND WERE-UP-OPENED OF-them THE VIEWers AND IN-THUNDERS to-them man know [it].
were-opened eyes mutters
o ihsous legwn orate mhdeis ginwsketw

ho iEsous legOn horate mEdeis ginOsketO
G3588 G2424 G3004 G3708 G3367 G1097
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Pl a_ Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 3 Sg
THE JESUS sayING BE-SEEING NO-YET-ONE LET-BE-KNOWING
be-ye-seeing ! no-one let-him-be-knowing !
9:31 oi de exelqontes diefhmisan auton en olh th gh 31 But they, when they were
hoi de exelthontes diephEmisan auton en holE tE gE
G3588 G1161 G1831 G1310 G846 G1722 G3650 G3588 G1093
departed, spread abroad his
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Prep a_ Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f fame in all that country.
THE YET OUT-COMING THEY-THRU-AVERize Him IN WHOLE THE LAND
coming-out they-blaze-abroad
ekeinh
ekeinE
G1565
pd Dat Sg f
that
Matthew 9
9:32 autwn de exercomenwn idou proshnegkan autw anqrwpon 32 As they went out, behold,
autOn de exerchomenOn idou prosEnegkan autO anthrOpon
G846 G1161 G1831 G2400 G4374 G846 G444
they brought to him a dumb
pp Gen Pl m Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg m man possessed with a devil.
OF-them YET OUT-COMING BE-PERCEIVING THEY-TOWARD-CARRY to-Him human
coming-out lo ! they-bring
kwfon daimonizomenon
kOphon daimonizomenon
G2974 G1139
a_ Acc Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m
MUTE demonizING-one
deaf-mute being-demonized
9:33 kai ekblhqentos tou daimoniou elalhsen o kwfos kai 33 And when the devil was
kai ekblEthentos tou daimoniou elalEsen ho kOphos kai
G2532 G1544 G3588 G1140 G2980 G3588 G2974 G2532
cast out, the dumb spake: and
Conj vp Aor Pas Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Conj the multitudes marvelled,
AND OF-BEING-OUT-CAST THE demon TALKS THE MUTE AND saying, It was never so seen in
of-being-cast-out speaks deaf-mute-man Israel.
eqaumasan oi ocloi legontes oudepote efanh outws en

ethaumasan hoi ochloi legontes oudepote ephanE houtOs en
G2296 G3588 G3793 G3004 G3763 G5316 G3779 G1722
vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Adv vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg Adv Prep
MARVEL THE THRONGS sayING NOT-YET-?-when APPEARed thus IN
never ìt-appeared
tw israhl
tO israEl
G3588 G2474
t_ Dat Sg m ni proper
THE ISRAEL
9:34 oi de farisaioi elegon en tw arconti twn daimoniwn 34 But the Pharisees said, He
hoi de pharisaioi elegon en tO archonti tOn daimoniOn
G3588 G1161 G5330 G3004 G1722 G3588 G758 G3588 G1140
casteth out devils through the
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n prince of the devils.
THE YET PHARISEES said IN THE chief OF-THE demons
ekballei ta daimonia
G1544 G3588 G1140
vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
He-IS-OUT-CASTING THE demons
he-is-casting-out
9:35 kai perihgen o ihsous tas poleis pasas kai tas kwmas 35 . And Jesus went about all
kai periEgen ho iEsous tas poleis pasas kai tas kOmas
G2532 G4013 G3588 G2424 G3588 G4172 G3956 G2532 G3588 G2968
the cities and villages, teaching
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f Conj t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f in their synagogues, and
AND ABOUT-LED THE JESUS THE cities ALL AND THE VILLAGES preaching the gospel of the
went-about kingdom, and healing every
sickness and every disease
didaskwn en tais sunagwgais autwn kai khrusswn to among the people.
didaskOn en tais sunagOgais autOn kai kErussOn to
G1321 G1722 G3588 G4864 G846 G2532 G2784 G3588
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pp Gen Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n
TEACHING IN THE TOGETHER-LEADS OF-them AND PROCLAIMING THE
synagogues heralding
euaggelion ths basileias kai qerapeuwn pasan noson kai pasan

euaggelion tEs basileias kai therapeuOn pasan noson kai pasan
G2098 G3588 G932 G2532 G2323 G3956 G3554 G2532 G3956
n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Acc Sg f
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE KINGdom AND curING EVERY DISEASE AND EVERY
malakian en tw law
malakian en tO laO
G3119 G1722 G3588 G2992
n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
SOFTness IN THE PEOPLE
weakness among
9:36 idwn de tous oclous esplagcnisqh peri autwn oti 36 But when he saw the
idOn de tous ochlous esplagchnisthE peri autOn hoti
G1492 G1161 G3588 G3793 G4697 G4012 G846 G3754
multitudes, he was moved with
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vi Aor pasD 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Pl m Conj compassion on them, because
PERCEIVING YET THE THRONGS He-IS-compassionatED ABOUT them that they fainted, and were
he-is-moved-with-compassion scattered abroad, as sheep
having no shepherd.
hsan eklelumenoi kai errimmenoi wsei probata mh
Esan eklelumenoi kai errimmenoi hOsei probata mE
G2258 G1590 G2532 G4496 G5616 G4263 G3361
vi Impf vxx 3 Pl vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m Conj vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m Adv n_ Acc Pl n Part Neg
THEY-WERE HAVING-been-OUT-LOOSED AND HAVING-been-TOSSED AS-IF sheep NO
having-fainted sheep(p)
econta poimena
echonta poimena
G2192 G4166
vp Pres Act Nom Pl n n_ Acc Sg m
HAVING SHEPHERD
9:37 tote legei tois maqhtais autou o men qerismos polus 37 Then saith he unto his
tote legei tois mathEtais autou ho men therismos polus
G5119 G3004 G3588 G3101 G846 G3588 G3303 G2326 G4183
disciples, The harvest truly [is]
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg m Part n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m plenteous, but the labourers
then He-IS-sayING to-THE LEARNers OF-Him THE INDEED harvest much [are] few;
disciples vast
oi de ergatai oligoi
hoi de ergatai oligoi
G3588 G1161 G2040 G3641
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
THE YET ACTers FEW
workers
9:38 dehqhte oun tou kuriou tou qerismou opws 38 Pray ye therefore the Lord
deEthEte oun tou kuriou tou therismou hopOs
G1189 G3767 G3588 G2962 G3588 G2326 G3704
of the harvest, that he will send
vm Aor pasD 2 Pl Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Adv forth labourers into his harvest.
BE-BINDING THEN OF-THE Master OF-THE harvest WHICH-how
be-ye-beseeching ! the Lord so-that
ekbalh ergatas eis ton qerismon autou

ekbalE ergatas eis ton therismon autou
G1544 G2040 G1519 G3588 G2326 G846
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m
He-SHOULD-BE-OUT-CASTING ACTers INTO THE harvest OF-Him
he-should-be-ejecting workers
Matthew 10
10:1 kai proskalesamenos tous dwdeka maqhtas autou edwken autois 1 . And when he had called
kai proskalesamenos tous dOdeka mathEtas autou edOken autois
G2532 G4341 G3588 G1427 G3101 G846 G1325 G846
unto [him] his twelve disciples,
Conj vp Aor midD Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m he gave them power [against]
AND TOWARD-CALLing THE TWO-TEN LEARNers OF-Him He-GIVES to-them unclean spirits, to cast them
calling-to-him twelve disciples them out, and to heal all manner of
sickness and all manner of
exousian pneumatwn akaqartwn wste ekballein auta kai qerapeuein disease.
exousian pneumatOn akathartOn hOste ekballein auta kai therapeuein
G1849 G4151 G169 G5620 G1544 G846 G2532 G2323
n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Pl n a_ Gen Pl n Conj vn Pres Act pp Acc Pl n Conj vn Pres Act
authority OF-spirits UN-clean AS-BESIDES TO-BE-OUT-CASTING them AND TO-BE-curING
unclean so-as to-be-casting-out
pasan noson kai pasan malakian

pasan noson kai pasan malakian
G3956 G3554 G2532 G3956 G3119
a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
EVERY DISEASE AND EVERY SOFTness
weakness
10:2 twn de dwdeka apostolwn ta onomata estin tauta 2 Now the names of the twelve
tOn de dOdeka apostolOn ta onomata estin tauta
G3588 G1161 G1427 G652 G3588 G3686 G2076 G5023
apostles are these; The first,
t_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Nom n_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pd Nom Pl n Simon, who is called Peter,
OF-THE YET TWO-TEN commissioners THE NAMES IS these and Andrew his brother; James
twelve apostles [the son] of Zebedee, and John
his brother;
prwtos simwn o legomenos petros kai andreas o
prOtos simOn ho legomenos petros kai andreas ho
G4413 G4613 G3588 G3004 G4074 G2532 G406 G3588
a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
BEFORE-most SIMON THE beING-said Peter (ROCK) AND ANDREW THE
first one-being-said Peter
adelfos autou iakwbos o tou zebedaiou kai iwannhs o

adelphos autou iakObos ho tou zebedaiou kai iOannEs ho
G80 G846 G2385 G3588 G3588 G2199 G2532 G2491 G3588
n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
brother OF-him JACOBUS THE OF-THE ZEBEDEE AND JOHN THE
James
adelfos autou
adelphos autou
G80 G846
n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m
brother OF-him
10:3 filippos kai barqolomaios qwmas kai matqaios o telwnhs 3Philip, and Bartholomew;
philippos kai bartholomaios thOmas kai matthaios ho telOnEs
G5376 G2532 G918 G2381 G2532 G3156 G3588 G5057
Thomas, and Matthew the
n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m publican; James [the son] of
Philip AND Bartholomew THOMAS AND MATTHEW THE tribute-collector Alphaeus, and Lebbaeus,
whose surname was
Thaddaeus;
iakwbos o tou alfaiou kai lebbaios o epiklhqeis
iakObos ho tou halphaiou kai lebbaios ho epiklEtheis
G2385 G3588 G3588 G256 G2532 G3002 G3588 G1941
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
JACOBUS THE OF-THE ALPHEUS AND LEBBEUS THE one-BEING-ON-CALLED
James one-being-surnamed
qaddaios
thaddaios
G2280
n_ Nom Sg m
THADDEUS
10:4 simwn o kananiths kai ioudas iskariwths o kai 4 Simon the Canaanite, and
simOn ho kananitEs kai ioudas iskariOtEs ho kai
G4613 G3588 G2581 G2532 G2455 G2469 G3588 G2532
Judas Iscariot, who also
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m Conj betrayed him.
SIMON THE CANANITE ( Hebrew zealous ) AND JUDAS ISCARIOT THE-one AND
Cananite the-one also
paradous auton
paradous auton
G3860 G846
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m
BESIDE-GIVING Him
betraying
10:5 toutous tous dwdeka apesteilen o ihsous paraggeilas autois 5 . These twelve Jesus sent
toutous tous dOdeka apesteilen ho iEsous paraggeilas autois
G5128 G3588 G1427 G649 G3588 G2424 G3853 G846
forth, and commanded them,
pd Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Dat Pl m saying, Go not into the way of
these THE TWO-TEN commissions THE JESUS charging to-them the Gentiles, and into [any] city
twelve them of the Samaritans enter ye not:
Matthew 10
legwn eis odon eqnwn mh apelqhte kai eis polin

legOn eis hodon ethnOn mE apelthEte kai eis polin
G3004 G1519 G3598 G1484 G3361 G565 G2532 G1519 G4172
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Pl n Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl Conj Prep n_ Acc Sg f
sayING INTO WAY OF-NATIONS NO YE-MAY-BE-FROM-COMING AND INTO city
road ye-may-be-passing-forth
samareitwn mh eiselqhte
samareitOn mE eiselthEte
G4541 G3361 G1525
n_ Gen Pl m Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
OF-SAMARItans NO YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING
ye-may-be-entering
10:6 poreuesqe de mallon pros ta probata ta apolwlota 6 But go rather to the lost
poreuesthe de mallon pros ta probata ta apolOlota
G4198 G1161 G3123 G4314 G3588 G4263 G3588 G622
sheep of the house of Israel.
vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Conj Adv Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Pl n vp 2Perf Act Acc Pl n
BE-YE-GOING YET RATHER TOWARD THE sheep THE HAVING-been-destroyED
be-ye-going ! sheep(p) having-been-lost
oikou israhl
oikou israEl
G3624 G2474
n_ Gen Sg m ni proper
OF-HOME of-ISRAEL
of-house of-Israel
10:7 poreuomenoi de khrussete legontes oti hggiken h 7And as ye go, preach, saying,
poreuomenoi de kErussete legontes hoti Eggiken hE
G4198 G1161 G2784 G3004 G3754 G1448 G3588
The kingdom of heaven is at
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vi Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f hand.
GOING YET BE-PROCLAIMING sayING that HAS-NEARED THE
be-ye-heralding ! has-drawn-near
basileia twn ouranwn

basileia tOn ouranOn
G932 G3588 G3772
n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
10:8 asqenountas qerapeuete leprous kaqarizete nekrous egeirete daimonia 8 Heal the sick, cleanse the
asthenountas therapeuete leprous katharizete nekrous egeirete daimonia
G770 G2323 G3015 G2511 G3498 G1453 G1140
lepers, raise the dead, cast out
vp Pres Act Acc Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl a_ Acc Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl a_ Acc Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Pl n devils: freely ye have received,
ones-beING-UN-FIRM BE-curING lepers BE-cleansING DEAD-ones BE-ROUSING demons freely give.
ones-being-infirm be-ye-curing ! be-ye-cleansing ! dead-ones be-ye-rousing !
ekballete dwrean elabete dwrean dote

ekballete dOrean elabete dOrean dote
G1544 G1432 G2983 G1432 G1325
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Adv vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Adv vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
BE-OUT-CASTING gratuitously YE-GOT gratuitously BE-GIVING
be-ye-casting-out ! be-ye-giving !
10:9 mh kthshsqe cruson mhde arguron mhde calkon eis tas 9 Provide neither gold, nor
mE ktEsEsthe chruson mEde arguron mEde chalkon eis tas
G3361 G2932 G5557 G3366 G696 G3366 G5475 G1519 G3588
silver, nor brass in your purses,
Part Neg vs Aor midD 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl f
NO YE-SHOULD-BE-ACQUIRING GOLD NO-YET SILVER NO-YET COPPER INTO THE
nor-yet nor-yet
zwnas umwn
zOnas humOn
G2223 G5216
n_ Acc Pl f pp 2 Gen Pl
GIRDles OF-YOU(p)
of-ye
10:10 mh phran eis odon mhde duo citwnas mhde upodhmata mhde 10 Nor scrip for [your]
mE pEran eis hodon mEde duo chitOnas mEde hupodEmata mEde
G3361 G4082 G1519 G3598 G3366 G1417 G5509 G3366 G5266 G3366
journey, neither two coats,
Part Neg n_ Acc Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl n Conj neither shoes, nor yet staves:
NO BAG (beggar's) INTO WAY NO-YET TWO TUNICS NO-YET sandals NO-YET for the workman is worthy of
beggar's-bag road nor-yet nor-yet nor-yet his meat.
rabdous axios gar o ergaths ths trofhs autou estin

rabdous axios gar ho ergatEs tEs trophEs autou estin
G4464 G514 G1063 G3588 G2040 G3588 G5160 G846 G2076
n_ Acc Pl f a_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
RODS WORTHY for THE ACTer OF-THE NURTURE OF-him IS
staves worker nourishment
10:11 eis hn d an polin h kwmhn eiselqhte exetasate 11 And into whatsoever city or
eis hEn d an polin E kOmEn eiselthEte exetasate
G1519 G3739 G1161 G302 G4172 G2228 G2968 G1525 G1833
town ye shall enter, enquire
Prep pr Acc Sg f Conj Part n_ Acc Sg f Part n_ Acc Sg f vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl vm Aor Act 2 Pl who in it is worthy; and there
INTO WHICH YET EVER city OR VILLAGE YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING OUT-INTERROGATE abide till ye go thence.
ye-may-be-entering inquire-ye !
Matthew 10
tis en auth axios estin kakei meinate ews an

tis en autE axios estin kakei meinate heOs an
G5101 G1722 G846 G514 G2076 G2546 G3306 G2193 G302
pi Nom Sg m Prep pp Dat Sg f a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Adv Con vm Aor Act 2 Pl Conj Part
ANY IN her WORTHY IS AND-there REMAIN TILL EVER
who remain-ye !
exelqhte
exelthEte
G1831
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
YE-MAY-BE-OUT-COMING
ye-may-be-coming-out
10:12 eisercomenoi de eis thn oikian aspasasqe authn 12 And when ye come into an
eiserchomenoi de eis tEn oikian aspasasthe autEn
G1525 G1161 G1519 G3588 G3614 G782 G846
house, salute it.
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vm Aor midD 2 Pl pp Acc Sg f
INTO-COMING YET INTO THE HOME greet her
entering house salute-ye !
10:13 kai ean men h h oikia axia elqetw h 13 And if the house be worthy,
kai ean men E hE oikia axia elthetO hE
G2532 G1437 G3303 G5600 G3588 G3614 G514 G2064 G3588
let your peace come upon it:
Conj Cond Part vs Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f but if it be not worthy, let your
AND IF-EVER INDEED MAY-BE THE HOME WORTHY LET-BE-COMING THE peace return to you.
house let-her-be-coming !
eirhnh umwn ep authn ean de mh h axia h eirhnh

eirEnE humOn ep autEn ean de mE E axia hE eirEnE
G1515 G5216 G1909 G846 G1437 G1161 G3361 G5600 G514 G3588 G1515
n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl Prep pp Acc Sg f Cond Conj Part Neg vs Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
PEACE OF-YOU(p) ON her IF-EVER YET NO MAY-BE WORTHY THE PEACE
of-ye she-may-be
umwn pros umas epistrafhtw

humOn pros humas epistraphEtO
G5216 G4314 G5209 G1994
pp 2 Gen Pl Prep pp 2 Acc Pl vm 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
OF-YOU(p) TOWARD YOU(p) LET-BE-BEING-ON-TURNED
of-ye ye let-her-be-being-turned-back !
10:14 kai os ean mh dexhtai umas mhde akoush 14 And whosoever shall not
kai hos ean mE dexEtai humas mEde akousE
G2532 G3739 G1437 G3361 G1209 G5209 G3366 G191
receive you, nor hear your
Conj pr Nom Sg m Cond Part Neg vs Aor midD 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg words, when ye depart out of
AND WHO IF-EVER NO SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING YOU(p) NO-YET SHOULD-BE-HEARING that house or city, shake off the
ye nor-yet dust of your feet.
tous logous umwn exercomenoi ths oikias h ths polews

tous logous humOn exerchomenoi tEs oikias E tEs poleOs
G3588 G3056 G5216 G1831 G3588 G3614 G2228 G3588 G4172
t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Part t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
THE sayings OF-YOU(p) OUT-COMING OF-THE HOME OR OF-THE city
words of-ye coming-out house
ekeinhs ektinaxate ton koniorton twn podwn umwn

ekeinEs ektinaxate ton koniorton tOn podOn humOn
G1565 G1621 G3588 G2868 G3588 G4228 G5216
pd Gen Sg f vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl
that OUT-QUIVER THE DUST OF-THE FEET OF-YOU(p)
shake-off-ye ! of-ye
10:15 amhn legw umin anektoteron estai gh sodomwn kai 15 Verily I say unto you, It
amEn legO humin anektoteron estai gE sodomOn kai
G281 G3004 G5213 G414 G2071 G1093 G4670 G2532
shall be more tolerable for the
Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vi Fut vxx 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Pl n Conj land of Sodom and Gomorrha
AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) more-tolerable it-SHALL-BE to-LAND OF-SODOM AND in the day of judgment, than
verily to-ye for that city.
gomorrwn en hmera krisews h th polei ekeinh

gomorrOn en hEmera kriseOs E tE polei ekeinE
G1116 G1722 G2250 G2920 G2228 G3588 G4172 G1565
n_ Gen Pl n Prep n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Part t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f
OF-GOMORRAH IN DAY OF-JUDGing OR to-THE city that
than
10:16 idou egw apostellw umas ws probata en mesw lukwn 16 . Behold, I send you forth as
idou egO apostellO humas hOs probata en mesO lukOn
G2400 G1473 G649 G5209 G5613 G4263 G1722 G3319 G3074
sheep in the midst of wolves:
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl Adv n_ Nom Pl n Prep a_ Dat Sg n n_ Gen Pl m be ye therefore wise as
BE-PERCEIVING I AM-commissionING YOU(p) AS sheep IN MIDst OF-WOLVES serpents, and harmless as
lo ! am-dispatching ye sheep(p) doves.
ginesqe oun fronimoi ws oi ofeis kai akeraioi ws ai

ginesthe oun phronimoi hOs hoi opheis kai akeraioi hOs hai
G1096 G3767 G5429 G5613 G3588 G3789 G2532 G185 G5613 G3588
vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m Adv t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m Adv t_ Nom Pl f
BE-YE-BECOMING THEN DISPOSED AS THE serpents AND UN-blendED AS THE
be-ye-becoming ! prudent artless
Matthew 10
peristerai
peristerai
G4058
n_ Nom Pl f
DOVES
10:17 prosecete de apo twn anqrwpwn paradwsousin gar umas 17 But beware of men: for they
prosechete de apo tOn anthrOpOn paradOsousin gar humas
G4337 G1161 G575 G3588 G444 G3860 G1063 G5209
will deliver you up to the
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl Conj pp 2 Acc Pl councils, and they will scourge
BE-heedING YET FROM THE humans THEY-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING for YOU(p) you in their synagogues;
be-ye-heeding ! they-shall-be-giving-up ye
eis sunedria kai en tais sunagwgais autwn mastigwsousin umas

eis sunedria kai en tais sunagOgais autOn mastigOsousin humas
G1519 G4892 G2532 G1722 G3588 G4864 G846 G3146 G5209
Prep n_ Acc Pl n Conj Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pp Gen Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Pl
INTO Sanhedrins AND IN THE TOGETHER-LEADS OF-them THEY-SHALL-BE-scourgING YOU(p)
synagogues ye
10:18 kai epi hgemonas de kai basileis acqhsesqe eneken emou 18 And ye shall be brought
kai epi hEdemonas de kai basileis achthEsesthe heneken emou
G2532 G1909 G2232 G1161 G2532 G935 G71 G1752 G1700
before governors and kings for
Conj Prep n_ Acc Pl m Conj Conj n_ Acc Pl m vi Fut Pas 2 Pl Adv pp 1 Gen Sg my sake, for a testimony
AND ON LEADers YET AND KINGS YOU-SHALL-BE-BEING-LED on-account-of OF-ME against them and the Gentiles.
also governors ye-shall-be-being-led me
eis marturion autois kai tois eqnesin

eis marturion autois kai tois ethnesin
G1519 G3142 G846 G2532 G3588 G1484
Prep n_ Acc Sg n pp Dat Pl m Conj t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n
INTO witness to-them AND to-THE NATIONS
testimony
10:19 otan de paradidwsin umas mh merimnhshte pws 19 But when they deliver you
hotan de paradidOsin humas mE merimnEsEte pOs
G3752 G1161 G3860 G5209 G3361 G3309 G4459
up, take no thought how or
Conj Conj vs Pres Act 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Pl Part Neg vs Aor Act 2 Pl Adv Int what ye shall speak: for it shall
when-EVER YET THEY-MAY-BE BESIDE-GIVING YOU(p) NO YE-SHOULD-BE-beING-anxious how be given you in that same hour
whenever they-may-be-giving-up ye ye-should-be-worrying how ? what ye shall speak.
h ti lalhshte doqhsetai gar umin en ekeinh th

E ti lalEsEte dothEsetai gar humin en ekeinE tE
G2228 G5101 G2980 G1325 G1063 G5213 G1722 G1565 G3588
Part pi Acc Sg n vs Aor Act 2 Pl vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl Prep pd Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f
OR ANY YE-SHOULD-BE-TALKING SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN for to-YOU(p) IN that THE
what ye-should-be-speaking it-shall-be-being-given ye
wra ti lalhsete
hOra ti lalEsete
G5610 G5101 G2980
n_ Dat Sg f pi Acc Sg n vi Fut Act 2 Pl
HOUR ANY YE-SHALL-BE-TALKING
what ye-shall-be-speaking
10:20 ou gar umeis este oi lalountes alla to pneuma 20 For it is not ye that speak,
ou gar humeis este hoi lalountes alla to pneuma
G3756 G1063 G5210 G2075 G3588 G2980 G235 G3588 G4151
but the Spirit of your Father
Part Neg Conj pp 2 Nom Pl vi Pres vxx 2 Pl t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n which speaketh in you.
NOT for YOU(p) ARE THE ones-TALKING but THE spirit
ye ones-speaking
tou patros umwn to laloun en umin

tou patros humOn to laloun en humin
G3588 G3962 G5216 G3588 G2980 G1722 G5213
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Nom Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Sg n Prep pp 2 Dat Pl
OF-THE FATHER OF-YOU(p) THE One-TALKING IN YOU(p)
of-ye one-speaking ye
10:21 paradwsei de adelfos adelfon eis qanaton kai pathr 21 And the brother shall
paradOsei de adelphos adelphon eis thanaton kai patEr
G3860 G1161 G80 G80 G1519 G2288 G2532 G3962
deliver up the brother to death,
vi Fut Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m and the father the child: and
SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING YET brother brother INTO DEATH AND FATHER the children shall rise up
shall-be-giving-up against [their] parents, and
cause them to be put to death.
teknon kai epanasthsontai tekna epi goneis kai qanatwsousin
teknon kai epanastEsontai tekna epi goneis kai thanatOsousin
G5043 G2532 G1881 G5043 G1909 G1118 G2532 G2289
n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Fut midD 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl n Prep n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl
offspring AND SHALL-BE-ON-UP-STANDING offsprings ON parents AND THEY-SHALL-BE-(causing-to)-DIE
child shall-be-rising-up children shall-be-putting-to-death
autous
autous
G846
pp Acc Pl m
them
Matthew 10
10:22 kai esesqe misoumenoi upo pantwn dia to onoma mou 22 And ye shall be hated of all
kai esesthe misoumenoi hupo pantOn dia to onoma mou
G2532 G2071 G3404 G5259 G3956 G1223 G3588 G3686 G3450
[men] for my name's sake: but
Conj vi Fut vxx 2 Pl vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m Prep a_ Gen Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg he that endureth to the end
AND YE-SHALL-BE beING-HATED by ALL THRU THE NAME OF-ME shall be saved.
because-of
o de upomeinas eis telos outos swqhsetai

ho de hupomeinas eis telos houtos sOthEsetai
G3588 G1161 G5278 G1519 G5056 G3778 G4982
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg n pd Nom Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
THE-one YET UNDER-REMAINing INTO FINISH this-one SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED
the-one enduring consummation this-one
10:23 otan de diwkwsin umas en th polei tauth feugete 23 But when they persecute
hotan de diOkOsin humas en tE polei tautE pheugete
G3752 G1161 G1377 G5209 G1722 G3588 G4172 G3778 G5343
you in this city, flee ye into
Conj Conj vs Pres Act 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f vm Pres Act 2 Pl another: for verily I say unto
when-EVER YET THEY-MAY-BE-CHASING YOU(p) IN THE city this BE-FLEEING you, Ye shall not have gone
whenever they-may-be-persecuting ye be-ye-fleeing ! over the cities of Israel, till the
Son of man be come.
eis thn allhn amhn gar legw umin ou mh teleshte
eis tEn allEn amEn gar legO humin ou mE telesEte
G1519 G3588 G243 G281 G1063 G3004 G5213 G3756 G3361 G5055
Prep t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f Hebrew Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Part Neg Part Neg vs Aor Act 2 Pl
INTO THE other AMEN for I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) NOT NO YE-SHOULD-BE-FINISHING
verily to-ye
tas poleis tou israhl ews an elqh o uios tou

tas poleis tou israEl heOs an elthE ho huios tou
G3588 G4172 G3588 G2474 G2193 G302 G2064 G3588 G5207 G3588
t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Sg m ni proper Conj Part vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
THE cities OF-THE ISRAEL TILL EVER MAY-BE-COMING THE SON OF-THE
anqrwpou
anthrOpou
G444
n_ Gen Sg m
human
10:24 ouk estin maqhths uper ton didaskalon oude doulos uper 24 The disciple is not above
ouk estin mathEtEs huper ton didaskalon oude doulos huper
G3756 G2076 G3101 G5228 G3588 G1320 G3761 G1401 G5228
[his] master, nor the servant
Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Adv n_ Nom Sg m Prep above his lord.
NOT IS LEARNer OVER THE TEACHer NOT-YET SLAVE OVER
disciple above neither above
ton kurion autou

ton kurion autou
G3588 G2962 G846
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m
THE master OF-him
lord
10:25 arketon tw maqhth ina genhtai ws o didaskalos 25 It is enough for the disciple
arketon tO mathEtE hina genEtai hOs ho didaskalos
G713 G3588 G3101 G2443 G1096 G5613 G3588 G1320
that he be as his master, and
a_ Nom Sg n t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m the servant as his lord. If they
SUFFICient to-THE LEARNer THAT he-MAY-BE-BECOMING AS THE TEACHer have called the master of the
disciple house Beelzebub, how much
more [shall they call] them of
autou kai o doulos ws o kurios autou ei ton his household?
autou kai ho doulos hOs ho kurios autou ei ton
G846 G2532 G3588 G1401 G5613 G3588 G2962 G846 G1487 G3588
pp Gen Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m Cond t_ Acc Sg m
OF-him AND THE SLAVE AS THE master OF-him IF THE
lord
oikodespothn beelzeboub ekalesan posw mallon tous oikiakous

oikodespotEn beelzeboub ekalesan posO mallon tous oikiakous
G3617 G954 G2564 G4214 G3123 G3588 G3615
n_ Acc Sg m ni proper vi Aor Act 3 Pl pq Dat Sg n Adv t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
HOME-OWNER BEELZEBOUB THEY-CALL to-how-much RATHER THE HOME-ics
householder Beelzebub how-much ones-of-the-household
autou
autou
G846
pp Gen Sg m
OF-him
10:26 mh oun fobhqhte autous ouden gar estin kekalummenon 26 Fear them not therefore: for
mE oun phobEthEte autous ouden gar estin kekalummenon
G3361 G3767 G5399 G846 G3762 G1063 G2076 G2572
there is nothing covered, that
Part Neg Conj vm Aor pasD 2 Pl pp Acc Pl m a_ Nom Sg n Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg vp Perf Pas Nom Sg n shall not be revealed; and hid,
NO THEN YE-BE-BEING-afraid-of them NOT-YET-ONE for IS HAVING-been-COVERED that shall not be known.
be-ye-being-afraid-of ! nothing
Matthew 10
o ouk apokalufqhsetai kai krupton o ou

ho ouk apokaluphthEsetai kai krupton ho ou
G3739 G3756 G601 G2532 G2927 G3739 G3756
pr Nom Sg n Part Neg vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg n pr Nom Sg n Part Neg
WHICH NOT SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-COVERED AND HIDDen WHICH NOT
shall-be-being-revealed
gnwsqhsetai
gnOsthEsetai
G1097
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-BEING-KNOWN
10:27 o legw umin en th skotia eipate en tw fwti 27 What I tell you in darkness,
ho legO humin en tE skotia eipate en tO phOti
G3739 G3004 G5213 G1722 G3588 G4653 G2036 G1722 G3588 G5457
[that] speak ye in light: and
pr Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n what ye hear in the ear, [that]
WHICH I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) IN THE DARKness say IN THE LIGHT preach ye upon the housetops.
to-ye say-ye !
kai o eis to ous akouete khruxate epi twn dwmatwn

kai ho eis to ous akouete kEruxate epi tOn dOmatOn
G2532 G3739 G1519 G3588 G3775 G191 G2784 G1909 G3588 G1430
Conj pr Acc Sg n Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Pl vm Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
AND WHICH INTO THE EAR YE-ARE-HEARING PROCLAIM ON THE housetops
herald-ye !
10:28 kai mh fobhqhte apo twn apokteinontwn to swma thn 28 And fear not them which
kai mE phobEthEte apo tOn apokteinontOn to sOma tEn
G2532 G3361 G5399 G575 G3588 G615 G3588 G4983 G3588
kill the body, but are not able
Conj Part Neg vm Aor pasD 2 Pl Prep t_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Gen Pl m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg f to kill the soul: but rather fear
AND NO BE-BEING-afraid FROM THE ones-FROM-KILLING THE BODY THE him which is able to destroy
be-ye-being-afraid ! ones-killing both soul and body in hell.
de yuchn mh dunamenwn apokteinai fobhqhte de mallon

de psuchEn mE dunamenOn apokteinai phobEthEte de mallon
G1161 G5590 G3361 G1410 G615 G5399 G1161 G3123
Conj n_ Acc Sg f Part Neg vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl m vn Aor Act vm Aor pasD 2 Pl Conj Adv
YET soul NO OF-beING-ABLE TO-FROM-KILL BE-BEING-afraid YET RATHER
being-able to-kill be-ye-being-afraid-of !
ton dunamenon kai yuchn kai swma apolesai en geennh

ton dunamenon kai psuchEn kai sOma apolesai en geennE
G3588 G1410 G2532 G5590 G2532 G4983 G622 G1722 G1067
t_ Acc Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Act Prep n_ Dat Sg f
THE One-beING-ABLE AND soul AND BODY TO-destroy IN GEHENNA
one-being-able
10:29 ouci duo strouqia assariou pwleitai kai en ex autwn ou 29 Are not two sparrows sold
ouchi duo strouthia assariou pOleitai kai hen ex autOn ou
G3780 G1417 G4765 G787 G4453 G2532 G1520 G1537 G846 G3756
for a farthing? and one of them
Part Int a_ Nom n_ Nom Pl n n_ Gen Sg n vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg n Prep pp Gen Pl n Part Neg shall not fall on the ground
NOT(emph.) TWO PASSERINES OF-ASSARION IS-beING-SOLD AND ONE OUT OF-them NOT without your Father.
not(emph.) ? sparrows of-penny
peseitai epi thn ghn aneu tou patros umwn

peseitai epi tEn gEn aneu tou patros humOn
G4098 G1909 G3588 G1093 G427 G3588 G3962 G5216
vi Fut midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl
SHALL-BE-FALLING ON THE LAND WITHOUT OF-THE FATHER OF-YOU(p)
earth the of-ye
10:30 umwn de kai ai trices ths kefalhs pasai hriqmhmenai 30 But the very hairs of your
humOn de kai hai triches tEs kephalEs pasai ErithmEmenai
G5216 G1161 G2532 G3588 G2359 G3588 G2776 G3956 G705
head are all numbered.
pp 2 Gen Pl Conj Conj t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f a_ Nom Pl f vp Perf Pas Nom Pl f
OF-YOU(p) YET AND THE HAIRS OF-THE HEAD ALL HAVING-been-NUMBERED
of-ye also
eisin
eisin
G1526
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
ARE
10:31 mh oun fobhqhte pollwn strouqiwn diaferete umeis 31 Fear ye not therefore, ye are
mE oun phobEthEte pollOn strouthiOn diapherete humeis
G3361 G3767 G5399 G4183 G4765 G1308 G5210
of more value than many
Part Neg Conj vm Aor pasD 2 Pl a_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n vi Pres Act 2 Pl pp 2 Nom Pl sparrows.
NO THEN BE-BEING-afraid OF-MANY PASSERINES ARE-THRU-CARRYING YOU(p)
be-ye-being-afraid ! sparrows are-of-more-consequence ye
10:32 pas oun ostis omologhsei en emoi emprosqen twn 32 Whosoever therefore shall
pas oun hostis homologEsei en emoi emprosthen tOn
G3956 G3767 G3748 G3670 G1722 G1698 G1715 G3588
confess me before men, him
a_ Nom Sg m Conj pr Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg Prep pp 1 Dat Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl m will I confess also before my
EVERY THEN WHO-ANY SHALL-BE-avowING IN ME IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE Father which is in heaven.
every-one who-any in-front-of the
Matthew 10
anqrwpwn omologhsw kagw en autw emprosqen tou patros

anthrOpOn homologEsO kagO en autO emprosthen tou patros
G444 G3670 G2504 G1722 G846 G1715 G3588 G3962
n_ Gen Pl m vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 1 Nom Sg Con Prep pp Dat Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
humans SHALL-BE-avowING AND-I IN him IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE FATHER
also-I in-front-of the
mou tou en ouranois

mou tou en ouranois
G3450 G3588 G1722 G3772
pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Gen Sg m Prep n_ Dat Pl m
OF-ME THE IN heavens
10:33 ostis d an arnhshtai me emprosqen twn anqrwpwn 33 But whosoever shall deny
hostis d an arnEsEtai me emprosthen tOn anthrOpOn
G3748 G1161 G302 G720 G3165 G1715 G3588 G444
me before men, him will I also
pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs Aor midD 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m deny before my Father which
WHO-ANY YET EVER SHOULD-BE-disownING ME IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE humans is in heaven.
who-any in-front-of the
arnhsomai auton kagw emprosqen tou patros mou tou

arnEsomai auton kagO emprosthen tou patros mou tou
G720 G846 G2504 G1715 G3588 G3962 G3450 G3588
vi Fut midD 1 Sg pp Acc Sg m pp 1 Nom Sg Con Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-disownING him AND-I IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE FATHER OF-ME THE
also-I in-front-of the
en ouranois
en ouranois
G1722 G3772
Prep n_ Dat Pl m
IN heavens
10:34 mh nomishte oti hlqon balein eirhnhn epi thn 34 Think not that I am come to
mE nomisEte hoti Elthon balein eirEnEn epi tEn
G3361 G3543 G3754 G2064 G906 G1515 G1909 G3588
send peace on earth: I came not
Part Neg vs Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg f to send peace, but a sword.
NO YE-SHOULD-BE-inferrING that I-CAME TO-BE-CASTING PEACE ON THE
ghn ouk hlqon balein eirhnhn alla macairan

gEn ouk Elthon balein eirEnEn alla machairan
G1093 G3756 G2064 G906 G1515 G235 G3162
n_ Acc Sg f Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f
LAND NOT I-CAME TO-BE-CASTING PEACE but sword
earth
10:35 hlqon gar dicasai anqrwpon kata tou patros autou kai 35 For I am come to set a man
Elthon gar dichasai anthrOpon kata tou patros autou kai
G2064 G1063 G1369 G444 G2596 G3588 G3962 G846 G2532
at variance against his father,
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg Conj vn Aor Act n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m Conj and the daughter against her
I-CAME for TO-TWO-ize human DOWN OF-THE FATHER OF-him AND mother, and the daughter in
to-pit against the law against her mother in law.
qugatera kata ths mhtros auths kai numfhn kata ths penqeras
thugatera kata tEs mEtros autEs kai numphEn kata tEs pentheras
G2364 G2596 G3588 G3384 G846 G2532 G3565 G2596 G3588 G3994
n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
DAUGHTER DOWN OF-THE MOTHER OF-her AND BRIDE DOWN OF-THE mother-IN-LAW
against the daughter-in-law against the
auths
autEs
G846
pp Gen Sg f
OF-her
10:36 kai ecqroi tou anqrwpou oi oikiakoi autou 36 And a man's foes [shall be]
kai echthroi tou anthrOpou hoi oikiakoi autou
G2532 G2190 G3588 G444 G3588 G3615 G846
they of his own household.
Conj a_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m
AND enemies OF-THE human THE HOME-ics OF-him
ones-of-the-household
10:37 o filwn patera h mhtera uper eme ouk estin 37 He that loveth father or
ho philOn patera E mEtera huper eme ouk estin
G3588 G5368 G3962 G2228 G3384 G5228 G1691 G3756 G2076
mother more than me is not
t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Part n_ Acc Sg f Prep pp 1 Acc Sg Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg worthy of me: and he that
THE one-beING-FOND FATHER OR MOTHER OVER ME NOT IS loveth son or daughter more
one-being-fond-of above than me is not worthy of me.
mou axios kai o filwn uion h qugatera uper eme

mou axios kai ho philOn huion E thugatera huper eme
G3450 G514 G2532 G3588 G5368 G5207 G2228 G2364 G5228 G1691
pp 1 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Part n_ Acc Sg f Prep pp 1 Acc Sg
OF-ME WORTHY AND THE one-beING-FOND SON OR DAUGHTER OVER ME
one-being-fond-of above
Matthew 10
ouk estin mou axios

ouk estin mou axios
G3756 G2076 G3450 G514
Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pp 1 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg m
NOT IS OF-ME WORTHY
10:38 kai os ou lambanei ton stauron autou kai akolouqei 38 And he that taketh not his
kai hos ou lambanei ton stauron autou kai akolouthei
G2532 G3739 G3756 G2983 G3588 G4716 G846 G2532 G190
cross, and followeth after me,
Conj pr Nom Sg m Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg is not worthy of me.
AND WHO NOT IS-GETTING-UP THE pale OF-him AND IS-followING
is-taking cross
opisw mou ouk estin mou axios

opisO mou ouk estin mou axios
G3694 G3450 G3756 G2076 G3450 G514
Adv pp 1 Gen Sg Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pp 1 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg m
BEHIND ME NOT IS OF-ME WORTHY
after
10:39 o eurwn thn yuchn autou apolesei authn kai 39 He that findeth his life shall
ho heurOn tEn psuchEn autou apolesei autEn kai
G3588 G2147 G3588 G5590 G846 G622 G846 G2532
lose it: and he that loseth his
t_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f Conj life for my sake shall find it.
THE one-FINDING THE soul OF-him SHALL-BE-destroyING her AND
one-finding
o apolesas thn yuchn autou eneken emou eurhsei

ho apolesas tEn psuchEn autou heneken emou heurEsei
G3588 G622 G3588 G5590 G846 G1752 G1700 G2147
t_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Adv pp 1 Gen Sg vi Fut Act 3 Sg
THE one-destroying THE soul OF-him on-account-of OF-ME SHALL-BE-FINDING
one-destroying me
authn
autEn
G846
pp Acc Sg f
her
10:40 o decomenos umas eme decetai kai o 40 He that receiveth you

ho dechomenos humas eme dechetai kai ho
G3588 G1209 G5209 G1691 G1209 G2532 G3588
receiveth me, and he that
t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m pp 2 Acc Pl pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m receiveth me receiveth him that
THE one-RECEIVING YOU(p) ME IS-RECEIVING AND THE-one sent me.
one-receiving ye the-one
eme decomenos decetai ton aposteilanta me

eme dechomenos dechetai ton aposteilanta me
G1691 G1209 G1209 G3588 G649 G3165
pp 1 Acc Sg vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m vp Aor Act Acc Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg
ME RECEIVING IS-RECEIVING THE-One commissioning ME
the-one
10:41 o decomenos profhthn eis onoma profhtou misqon 41 He that receiveth a prophet
ho dechomenos prophEtEn eis onoma prophEtou misthon
G3588 G1209 G4396 G1519 G3686 G4396 G3408
in the name of a prophet shall
t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg m receive a prophet's reward; and
THE one-RECEIVING BEFORE-AVERer INTO NAME OF-BEFORE-AVERer HIRE he that receiveth a righteous
one-receiving prophet of-prophet wages man in the name of a righteous
man shall receive a righteous
profhtou lhyetai kai o decomenos dikaion eis onoma man's reward.
prophEtou lEpsetai kai ho dechomenos dikaion eis onoma
G4396 G2983 G2532 G3588 G1209 G1342 G1519 G3686
n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut midD 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg n
OF-BEFORE-AVERer SHALL-BE-GETTING AND THE one-RECEIVING JUST-one INTO NAME
of-prophet shall-be-obtaining one-receiving just-man
dikaiou misqon dikaiou lhyetai

dikaiou misthon dikaiou lEpsetai
G1342 G3408 G1342 G2983
a_ Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg m a_ Gen Sg m vi Fut midD 3 Sg
OF-JUST-one HIRE OF-JUST-one SHALL-BE-GETTING
of-just-man wages of-just-man shall-be-obtaining
10:42 kai os ean potish ena twn mikrwn toutwn 42 And whosoever shall give to
kai hos ean potisE hena tOn mikrOn toutOn
G2532 G3739 G1437 G4222 G1520 G3588 G3398 G5130
drink unto one of these little
Conj pr Nom Sg m Cond vs Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m pd Gen Pl m ones a cup of cold [water] only
AND WHO IF-EVER SHOULD-BE-DRINKizING ONE OF-THE LITTLE-ones these in the name of a disciple, verily
should-be-giving-to-drink little-ones I say unto you, he shall in no
wise lose his reward.
pothrion yucrou monon eis onoma maqhtou amhn legw umin ou
potErion psuchrou monon eis onoma mathEtou amEn legO humin ou
G4221 G5593 G3440 G1519 G3686 G3101 G281 G3004 G5213 G3756
n_ Acc Sg n a_ Gen Sg n Adv Prep n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Part Neg
DRINK-cup OF-COOL ONLY INTO NAME OF-LEARNer AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) NOT
cup of-cool-water of-disciple verily to-ye
mh apolesh ton misqon autou

mE apolesE ton misthon autou
G3361 G622 G3588 G3408 G846
Part Neg vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m
NO he-SHOULD-BE-destroyING THE HIRE OF-him
he-should-be-losing wages
Matthew 11
11:1 kai egeneto ote etelesen o ihsous diatasswn tois 1 . And it came to pass, when
kai egeneto hote etelesen ho iEsous diatassOn tois
G2532 G1096 G3753 G5055 G3588 G2424 G1299 G3588
Jesus had made an end of
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Dat Pl m commanding his twelve
AND it-BECAME when FINISHES THE JESUS prescribING to-THE disciples, he departed thence to
teach and to preach in their
cities.
dwdeka maqhtais autou metebh ekeiqen tou didaskein kai
dOdeka mathEtais autou metebE ekeithen tou didaskein kai
G1427 G3101 G846 G3327 G1564 G3588 G1321 G2532
a_ Nom n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv t_ Gen Sg m vn Pres Act Conj
TWO-TEN LEARNers OF-Him He-after-STEPPed thence OF-THE TO-BE-TEACHING AND
twelve disciples he-proceeded
khrussein en tais polesin autwn

kErussein en tais polesin autOn
G2784 G1722 G3588 G4172 G846
vn Pres Act Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pp Gen Pl m
TO-BE-PROCLAIMING IN THE cities OF-them
to-be-heralding
11:2 o de iwannhs akousas en tw desmwthriw ta erga 2 Now when John had heard in
ho de iOannEs akousas en tO desmOtEriO ta erga
G3588 G1161 G2491 G191 G1722 G3588 G1201 G3588 G2041
the prison the works of Christ,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n he sent two of his disciples,
THE YET JOHN HEARing IN THE BIND-place THE ACTS
prison works
tou cristou pemyas duo twn maqhtwn autou

tou christou pempsas duo tOn mathEtOn autou
G3588 G5547 G3992 G1417 G3588 G3101 G846
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m a_ Nom t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m
OF-THE ANOINTED SENDing TWO OF-THE LEARNers OF-him
Christ disciples
11:3 eipen autw su ei o ercomenos h 3 And said unto him, Art thou
eipen autO su ei ho erchomenos E
G2036 G846 G4771 G1488 G3588 G2064 G2228
he that should come, or do we
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m pp 2 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m Part look for another?
said to-Him YOU ARE THE One-COMING OR
one-coming
eteron prosdokwmen
heteron prosdokOmen
G2087 G4328
a_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Pl
DIFFERENT WE-MAY-BE-TOWARD-SEEMING
different-one we-may-be-hoping
11:4 kai apokriqeis o ihsous eipen autois poreuqentes 4 Jesus answered and said unto
kai apokritheis ho iEsous eipen autois poreuthentes
G2532 G611 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G4198
them, Go and shew John again
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m those things which ye do hear
AND answerING THE JESUS said to-them BEING-GONE and see:
apaggeilate iwannh a akouete kai blepete

apaggeilate iOannE ha akouete kai blepete
G518 G2491 G3739 G191 G2532 G991
vm Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Dat Sg m pr Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl
FROM-MESSAGE to-JOHN WHICH YE-ARE-HEARING AND YE-ARE-lookING
report-ye ! are-observing
11:5 tufloi anablepousin kai cwloi peripatousin leproi kaqarizontai 5 The blind receive their sight,
tuphloi anablepousin kai chOloi peripatousin leproi katharizontai
G5185 G308 G2532 G5560 G4043 G3015 G2511
and the lame walk, the lepers
a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Pas 3 Pl are cleansed, and the deaf hear,
BLIND-ones ARE-UP-lookING AND LAME-ones ARE-ABOUT-TREADING lepers ARE-beING-cleansED the dead are raised up, and the
blind-ones are-receiving-sight lame-ones are-walking poor have the gospel preached
to them.
kai kwfoi akouousin nekroi egeirontai kai ptwcoi
kai kOphoi akouousin nekroi egeirontai kai ptOchoi
G2532 G2974 G191 G3498 G1453 G2532 G4434
Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Pas 3 Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m
AND MUTE-ones ARE-HEARING DEAD-ones ARE-beING-ROUSED AND POOR-ones
deaf-mutes dead-ones poor-ones
euaggelizontai
euaggelizontai
G2097
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
ARE-beING-WELL-MESSAGizED
are-being-brought-the-well-message
11:6 kai makarios estin os ean mh skandalisqh en emoi 6 And blessed is [he],
kai makarios estin hos ean mE skandalisthE en emoi
G2532 G3107 G2076 G3739 G1437 G3361 G4624 G1722 G1698
whosoever shall not be
Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pr Nom Sg m Cond Part Neg vs Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep pp 1 Dat Sg offended in me.
AND HAPPY he-IS WHO IF-EVER NO MAY-BE-BEING-SNARED IN ME
Matthew 11
11:7 toutwn de poreuomenwn hrxato o ihsous legein tois 7 . And as they departed, Jesus
toutOn de poreuomenOn Erxato ho iEsous legein tois
G5130 G1161 G4198 G756 G3588 G2424 G3004 G3588
began to say unto the
pd Gen Pl m Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vn Pres Act t_ Dat Pl m multitudes concerning John,
OF-these YET GOING begins THE JESUS TO-BE-sayING to-THE What went ye out into the
wilderness to see? A reed
shaken with the wind?
oclois peri iwannou ti exhlqete eis thn erhmon qeasasqai kalamon
ochlois peri iOannou ti exElthete eis tEn erEmon theasasthai kalamon
G3793 G4012 G2491 G5101 G1831 G1519 G3588 G2048 G2300 G2563
n_ Dat Pl m Prep n_ Gen Sg m pi Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f vn Aor midD n_ Acc Sg m
THRONGS ABOUT JOHN ANY YE-OUT-CAME INTO THE DESOLATE TO-gaze REED
what ? ye-came-out wilderness to-gaze-at
upo anemou saleuomenon

hupo anemou saleuomenon
G5259 G417 G4531
Prep n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m
by WIND beING-SHAKEN
11:8 alla ti exhlqete idein anqrwpon en malakois imatiois 8 But what went ye out for to
alla ti exElthete idein anthrOpon en malakois himatiois
G235 G5101 G1831 G1492 G444 G1722 G3120 G2440
see? A man clothed in soft
Conj pi Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg m Prep a_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n raiment? behold, they that wear
but ANY YE-OUT-CAME TO-BE-PERCEIVING human IN SOFT GARMENTS soft [clothing] are in
what ? ye-came-out kings'houses.
hmfiesmenon idou oi ta malaka forountes en

Emphiesmenon idou hoi ta malaka phorountes en
G294 G2400 G3588 G3588 G3120 G5409 G1722
vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep
HAVING-been-ENVELOPED-IN BE-PERCEIVING THE-ones THE SOFTnesses CARRYING IN
having-been-garbed lo ! the-ones soft-garments wearing
tois oikois twn basilewn eisin

tois oikois tOn basileOn eisin
G3588 G3624 G3588 G935 G1526
t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
THE HOMES OF-THE KINGS ARE
houses
11:9 alla ti exhlqete idein profhthn nai legw umin kai 9 But what went ye out for to
alla ti exElthete idein prophEtEn nai legO humin kai
G235 G5101 G1831 G1492 G4396 G3483 G3004 G5213 G2532
see? A prophet? yea, I say unto
Conj pi Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg m Part vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj you, and more than a prophet.
but ANY YE-OUT-CAME TO-BE-PERCEIVING BEFORE-AVERer YEA I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) AND
what ? ye-came-out prophet yes to-ye
perissoteron profhtou
perissoteron prophEtou
G4053 G4396
a_ Nom Sg n Cmp n_ Gen Sg m
more-excessive OF-BEFORE-AVERer
exceedingly-more of-prophet
11:10 outos gar estin peri ou gegraptai idou egw 10 For this is [he], of whom it
houtos gar estin peri hou gegraptai idou egO
G3778 G1063 G2076 G4012 G3739 G1125 G2400 G1473
is written, Behold, I send my
pd Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep pr Gen Sg m vi Perf Pas 3 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Nom Sg messenger before thy face,
this-one for IS ABOUT WHOM it-HAS-been-WRITTEN BE-PERCEIVING I which shall prepare thy way
this-one lo ! before thee.
apostellw ton aggelon mou pro proswpou sou os

apostellO ton aggelon mou pro prosOpou sou hos
G649 G3588 G32 G3450 G4253 G4383 G4675 G3739
vi Pres Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Prep n_ Gen Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg pr Nom Sg m
AM-commissionING THE MESSENGER OF-ME BEFORE face OF-YOU WHO
am-dispatching
kataskeuasei thn odon sou emprosqen sou

kataskeuasei tEn hodon sou emprosthen sou
G2680 G3588 G3598 G4675 G1715 G4675
vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Prep pp 2 Gen Sg
SHALL-BE-constructING THE WAY OF-YOU IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-YOU
road in-front-of you
11:11 amhn legw umin ouk eghgertai en gennhtois gunaikwn 11 Verily I say unto you,
amEn legO humin ouk egEgertai en gennEtois gunaikOn
G281 G3004 G5213 G3756 G1453 G1722 G1084 G1135
Among them that are born of
Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Part Neg vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Prep a_ Dat Pl m n_ Gen Pl f women there hath not risen a
AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) NOT HAS-been-ROUSED IN ones-generated OF-WOMEN greater than John the Baptist:
verily to-ye among ones-born notwithstanding he that is least
in the kingdom of heaven is
meizwn iwannou tou baptistou o de mikroteros en th greater than he.
meizOn iOannou tou baptistou ho de mikroteros en tE
G3187 G2491 G3588 G910 G3588 G1161 G3398 G1722 G3588
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m Cmp Prep t_ Dat Sg f
GREATER OF-JOHN THE DIPist THE YET LITTLER IN THE
baptist smaller-one
Matthew 11
basileia twn ouranwn meizwn autou estin

basileia tOn ouranOn meizOn autou estin
G932 G3588 G3772 G3187 G846 G2076
n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom Sg m Cmp pp Gen Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
KINGdom OF-THE heavens GREATER OF-him IS
11:12 apo de twn hmerwn iwannou tou baptistou ews arti h 12 And from the days of John
apo de tOn hEmerOn iOannou tou baptistou heOs arti hE
G575 G1161 G3588 G2250 G2491 G3588 G910 G2193 G737 G3588
the Baptist until now the
Prep Conj t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj Adv t_ Nom Sg f kingdom of heaven suffereth
FROM YET THE DAYS OF-JOHN THE DIPist TILL at-PRESENT THE violence, and the violent take it
baptist by force.
basileia twn ouranwn biazetai kai biastai arpazousin authn

basileia tOn ouranOn biazetai kai biastai harpazousin autEn
G932 G3588 G3772 G971 G2532 G973 G726 G846
n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg f
KINGdom OF-THE heavens IS-beING-FORCED AND FORCEful-ones ARE-SNATCHING her
is-being-violently-forced violent-ones
11:13 pantes gar oi profhtai kai o nomos ews iwannou 13 For all the prophets and the
pantes gar hoi prophEtai kai ho nomos heOs iOannou
G3956 G1063 G3588 G4396 G2532 G3588 G3551 G2193 G2491
law prophesied until John.
a_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m
ALL for THE BEFORE-AVERers AND THE LAW TILL OF-JOHN
prophets John
proefhteusan
proephEteusan
G4395
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
BEFORE-AVER
prophesy
11:14 kai ei qelete dexasqai autos estin hlias o 14 And if ye will receive [it],
kai ei thelete dexasthai autos estin Elias ho
G2532 G1487 G2309 G1209 G846 G2076 G2243 G3588
this is Elias, which was for to
Conj Cond vi Pres Act 2 Pl vn Aor midD pp Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m come.
AND IF YE-ARE-WILLING TO-RECEIVE he IS ELIAS THE
Elijah
mellwn ercesqai
mellOn erchesthai
G3195 G2064
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vn Pres midD/pasD
one-beING-ABOUT TO-BE-COMING
one-being-about
11:15 o ecwn wta akouein akouetw 15 He that hath ears to hear, let
ho echOn Ota akouein akouetO
G3588 G2192 G3775 G191 G191
him hear.
t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Pl n vn Pres Act vm Pres Act 3 Sg
THE one-HAVING EARS TO-BE-HEARING LET-him-BE-HEARING
one-having let-him-be-hearing !
11:16 tini de omoiwsw thn genean tauthn omoia estin 16 . But whereunto shall I liken
tini de homoiOsO tEn genean tautEn homoia estin
G5101 G1161 G3666 G3588 G1074 G3778 G3664 G2076
this generation? It is like unto
pi Dat Sg n Conj vi Fut Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f a_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg children sitting in the markets,
to-ANY YET I-SHALL-BE-LIKenING THE generation this LIKE it-IS and calling unto their fellows,
to-what ? she-is
paidariois en agorais kaqhmenois kai prosfwnousin tois etairois

paidariois en agorais kathEmenois kai prosphOnousin tois etairois
G3808 G1722 G58 G2521 G2532 G4377 G3588 G2083
n_ Dat Pl n Prep n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Dat Pl m t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
to-lads IN BUY-places sittING AND TOWARD-SOUNDING to-THE COMRADES
markets shouting-to the
autwn
autOn
G846
pp Gen Pl n
OF-them
11:17 kai legousin hulhsamen umin kai ouk wrchsasqe eqrhnhsamen 17 And saying, We have piped
kai legousin EulEsamen humin kai ouk OrchEsasthe ethrEnEsamen
G2532 G3004 G832 G5213 G2532 G3756 G3738 G2354
unto you, and ye have not
Conj vp Pres Act Dat Pl m vi Aor Act 1 Pl pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Part Neg vi Aor midD 2 Pl vi Aor Act 1 Pl danced; we have mourned unto
AND ARE-sayING WE-FLAGEOLET to-YOU(p) AND NOT YE-DANCE WE-DIRGE you, and ye have not lamented.
we-flute to-ye we-wail
umin kai ouk ekoyasqe

humin kai ouk ekopsasthe
G5213 G2532 G3756 G2875
pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Part Neg vi Aor Mid 2 Pl
to-YOU(p) AND NOT YE-STRIKE-(yourselves)
to-ye ye-grieve
Matthew 11
11:18 hlqen gar iwannhs mhte esqiwn mhte pinwn kai 18 For John came neither
Elthen gar iOannEs mEte esthiOn mEte pinOn kai
G2064 G1063 G2491 G3383 G2068 G3383 G4095 G2532
eating nor drinking, and they
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj say, He hath a devil.
CAME for JOHN NO-BESIDES EATING NO-BESIDES DRINKING AND
neither nor
legousin daimonion ecei

legousin daimonion echei
G3004 G1140 G2192
vi Pres Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THEY-ARE-sayING demon he-IS-HAVING
11:19 hlqen o uios tou anqrwpou esqiwn kai 19 The Son of man came
Elthen ho huios tou anthrOpou esthiOn kai
G2064 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G2068 G2532
eating and drinking, and they
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj say, Behold a man gluttonous,
CAME THE SON OF-THE human EATING AND and a winebibber, a friend of
publicans and sinners. But
wisdom is justified of her
pinwn kai legousin idou anqrwpos fagos kai oinopoths children.
pinOn kai legousin idou anthrOpos phagos kai oinopotEs
G4095 G2532 G3004 G2400 G444 G5314 G2532 G3630
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
DRINKING AND THEY-ARE-sayING BE-PERCEIVING human EATer AND WINE-DRINKer
lo ! gluttonous
telwnwn filos kai amartwlwn kai edikaiwqh h sofia apo

telOnOn philos kai hamartOlOn kai edikaiOthE hE sophia apo
G5057 G5384 G2532 G268 G2532 G1344 G3588 G4678 G575
n_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Gen Pl m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep
OF-tribute-collectors FOND-One AND OF-missers AND WAS-JUSTIFIED THE WISDOM FROM
friend of-sinners
twn teknwn auths

tOn teknOn autEs
G3588 G5043 G846
t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n pp Gen Sg f
THE offsprings OF-her
children
11:20 tote hrxato oneidizein tas poleis en ais egenonto ai 20 Then began he to upbraid
tote Erxato oneidizein tas poleis en hais egenonto hai
G5119 G756 G3679 G3588 G4172 G1722 G3739 G1096 G3588
the cities wherein most of his
Adv vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Prep pr Dat Pl f vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f mighty works were done,
then He-begins TO-BE-REPROACHING THE cities IN WHICH BECAME THE because they repented not:
occurred
pleistai dunameis autou oti ou metenohsan

pleistai dunameis autou hoti ou metenoEsan
G4118 G1411 G846 G3754 G3756 G3340
a_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f pp Gen Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Pl
MOST ABILITIES OF-Him that NOT THEY-after-MIND
powerful-deeds they-repent
11:21 ouai soi corazin ouai soi bhqsaida oti ei en turw kai 21 Woe unto thee, Chorazin!
ouai soi chorazin ouai soi bEthsaida hoti ei en turO kai
G3759 G4671 G5523 G3759 G4671 G966 G3754 G1487 G1722 G5184 G2532
woe unto thee, Bethsaida! for
Inj pp 2 Dat Sg ni proper Inj pp 2 Dat Sg ni proper Conj Cond Prep n_ Dat Sg f Conj if the mighty works, which
WOE to-YOU CHORAZIN WOE to-YOU BETHSAIDA that IF IN TYRE AND were done in you, had been
woe ! woe ! done in Tyre and Sidon, they
would have repented long ago
sidwni egenonto ai dunameis ai genomenai en umin palai an in sackcloth and ashes.
sidOni egenonto hai dunameis hai genomenai en humin palai an
G4605 G1096 G3588 G1411 G3588 G1096 G1722 G5213 G3819 G302
n_ Dat Sg f vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f t_ Nom Pl f vp 2Aor midD Nom Pl f Prep pp 2 Dat Pl Adv Part
SIDON BECAME THE ABILITIES THE BECOMING IN YOU(p) OLD EVER
occurred powerful-deeds occurring ye long-ago
en sakkw kai spodw metenohsan

en sakkO kai spodO metenoEsan
G1722 G4526 G2532 G4700 G3340
Prep n_ Dat Sg m Conj n_ Dat Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
IN SACKCLOTH-of-hair AND ASHES THEY-after-MIND
sackcloth they-repent
11:22 plhn legw umin turw kai sidwni anektoteron estai en 22 But I say unto you, It shall
plEn legO humin turO kai sidOni anektoteron estai en
G4133 G3004 G5213 G5184 G2532 G4605 G414 G2071 G1722
be more tolerable for Tyre and
Adv vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Prep Sidon at the day of judgment,
MOREly I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) to-TYRE AND SIDON more-tolerable it-SHALL-BE IN than for you.
moreover to-ye to-Sidon
hmera krisews h umin

hEmera kriseOs E humin
G2250 G2920 G2228 G5213
n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Part pp 2 Dat Pl
DAY OF-JUDGing OR to-YOU(p)
than to-ye
Matthew 11
11:23 kai su kapernaoum h ews tou ouranou uywqeisa ews 23 And thou, Capernaum,
kai su kapernaoum hE heOs tou ouranou upsOtheisa heOs
G2532 G4771 G2584 G3588 G2193 G3588 G3772 G5312 G2193
which art exalted unto heaven,
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg ni proper t_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Aor Pas Nom Sg f Conj shalt be brought down to hell:
AND YOU CAPERNAUM THE-one TILL THE heaven BEING-HEIGHTenED TILL for if the mighty works, which
the-one being-exalted have been done in thee, had
been done in Sodom, it would
adou katabibasqhsh oti ei en sodomois egenonto have remained until this day.
hadou katabibasthEsE hoti ei en sodomois egenonto
G86 G2601 G3754 G1487 G1722 G4670 G1096
n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 2 Sg Conj Cond Prep n_ Dat Pl n vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl
OF-UN-PERCEIVED YOU-SHALL-BE-BEING-DOWN-have-STEPizED that IF IN SODOM BECAME
unseen you-shall-be-being-subsided occurred
ai dunameis ai genomenai en soi emeinan an mecri ths

hai dunameis hai genomenai en soi emeinan an mechri tEs
G3588 G1411 G3588 G1096 G1722 G4671 G3306 G302 G3360 G3588
t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f t_ Nom Pl f vp 2Aor midD Nom Pl f Prep pp 2 Dat Sg vi Aor Act 3 Pl Part Adv t_ Gen Sg f
THE ABILITIES THE BECOMING IN YOU THEY-REMAIN EVER UNTO THE
powerful-deeds occurring
shmeron
sEmeron
G4594
Adv
toDAY
11:24 plhn legw umin oti gh sodomwn anektoteron estai en 24 But I say unto you, That it
plEn legO humin hoti gE sodomOn anektoteron estai en
G4133 G3004 G5213 G3754 G1093 G4670 G414 G2071 G1722
shall be more tolerable for the
Adv vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Pl n a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Prep land of Sodom in the day of
MOREly I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that to-LAND OF-SODOM more-tolerable it-SHALL-BE IN judgment, than for thee.
moreover to-ye
hmera krisews h soi

hEmera kriseOs E soi
G2250 G2920 G2228 G4671
n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Part pp 2 Dat Sg
DAY OF-JUDGing OR to-YOU
than
11:25 en ekeinw tw kairw apokriqeis o ihsous eipen 25 . At that time Jesus

en ekeinO tO kairO apokritheis ho iEsous eipen
G1722 G1565 G3588 G2540 G611 G3588 G2424 G2036
answered and said, I thank
Prep pd Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg thee, O Father, Lord of heaven
IN that THE SEASON answerING THE JESUS said and earth, because thou hast
hid these things from the wise
and prudent, and hast revealed
exomologoumai soi pater kurie tou ouranou kai ths ghs them unto babes.
exomologoumai soi pater kurie tou ouranou kai tEs gEs
G1843 G4671 G3962 G2962 G3588 G3772 G2532 G3588 G1093
vi Pres Mid 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg n_ Voc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
I-AM-OUT-avowING to-YOU FATHER ! Master ! OF-THE heaven AND OF-THE LAND
I-am-acclaiming you Lord ! earth
oti apekruyas tauta apo sofwn kai sunetwn kai apekaluyas auta
hoti apekrupsas tauta apo sophOn kai sunetOn kai apekalupsas auta
G3754 G613 G5023 G575 G4680 G2532 G4908 G2532 G601 G846
Conj vi Aor Act 2 Sg pd Acc Pl n Prep a_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Gen Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 2 Sg pp Acc Pl n
that YOU-FROM-HIDE these FROM WISE AND intelligent AND YOU-FROM-COVER them
you-conceal these-things wise-ones intelligent-ones you-reveal
nhpiois
nEpiois
G3516
a_ Dat Pl m
to-minors
11:26 nai o pathr oti outws egeneto eudokia emprosqen 26 Even so, Father: for so it
nai ho patEr hoti houtOs egeneto eudokia emprosthen
G3483 G3588 G3962 G3754 G3779 G1096 G2107 G1715
seemed good in thy sight.
Part t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj Adv vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f Prep
YEA THE FATHER that thus it-BECAME WELL-SEEMing IN-TOWARD-PLACE
delight in-front-of
sou
sou
G4675
pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-YOU
you
11:27 panta moi paredoqh upo tou patros mou kai oudeis 27 All things are delivered unto
panta moi paredothE hupo tou patros mou kai oudeis
G3956 G3427 G3860 G5259 G3588 G3962 G3450 G2532 G3762
me of my Father: and no man
a_ Nom Pl n pp 1 Dat Sg vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg m knoweth the Son, but the
ALL to-ME WAS-BESIDE-GIVEN by THE FATHER OF-ME AND NOT-YET-ONE Father; neither knoweth any
was-given-up no-one man the Father, save the Son,
and [he] to whomsoever the

epiginwskei ton uion ei mh o pathr oude ton patera Son will reveal [him].
epiginOskei ton huion ei mE ho patEr oude ton patera
G1921 G3588 G5207 G1487 G3361 G3588 G3962 G3761 G3588 G3962
vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Cond Part Neg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Adv t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
IS-ON-KNOWING THE SON IF NO THE FATHER NOT-YET THE FATHER
is-recognizing neither
tis epiginwskei ei mh o uios kai w ean

tis epiginOskei ei mE ho huios kai hO ean
G5100 G1921 G1487 G3361 G3588 G5207 G2532 G3739 G1437
px Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Cond Part Neg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj pr Dat Sg m Cond
ANY IS-ON-KNOWING IF NO THE SON AND to-WHOM IF-EVER
anyone is-recognizing
boulhtai o uios apokaluyai

boulEtai ho huios apokalupsai
G1014 G3588 G5207 G601
vs Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vn Aor Act
MAY-BE-intendING THE SON TO-FROM-COVER
to-unveil
11:28 deute pros me pantes oi kopiwntes kai 28 Come unto me, all [ye] that
deute pros me pantes hoi kopiOntes kai
G1205 G4314 G3165 G3956 G3588 G2872 G2532
labour and are heavy laden,
vm txx vxx 2 Pl Prep pp 1 Acc Sg a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj and I will give you rest.
HITHER TOWARD ME ALL THE-ones toilING AND
hither-ye ! the ones-toiling
pefortismenoi kagw anapausw umas

pephortismenoi kagO anapausO humas
G5412 G2504 G373 G5209
vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m pp 1 Nom Sg Con vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl
HAVING-been-CARRYizED AND-I SHALL-BE-UP-CEASING YOU(p)
having-been-laden shall-be-giving-rest ye
11:29 arate ton zugon mou ef umas kai maqete ap emou 29 Take my yoke upon you,
arate ton zugon mou eph humas kai mathete ap emou
G142 G3588 G2218 G3450 G1909 G5209 G2532 G3129 G575 G1700
and learn of me; for I am meek
vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Prep pp 2 Acc Pl Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep pp 1 Gen Sg and lowly in heart: and ye shall
LIFT THE YOKE OF-ME ON YOU(p) AND BE-LEARNING FROM ME find rest unto your souls.
lift-ye ! upon ye be-ye-learning !
oti praos eimi kai tapeinos th kardia kai eurhsete

hoti praos eimi kai tapeinos tE kardia kai heurEsete
G3754 G4235 G1510 G2532 G5011 G3588 G2588 G2532 G2147
Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 1 Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi Fut Act 2 Pl
that MEEK I-AM AND humble to-THE HEART AND YE-SHALL-BE-FINDING
anapausin tais yucais umwn

anapausin tais psuchais humOn
G372 G3588 G5590 G5216
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pp 2 Gen Pl
UP-CEASing to-THE souls OF-YOU(p)
rest of-ye
11:30 o gar zugos mou crhstos kai to fortion mou 30 For my yoke [is] easy, and
ho gar zugos mou chrEstos kai to phortion mou
G3588 G1063 G2218 G3450 G5543 G2532 G3588 G5413 G3450
my burden is light.
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg
THE for YOKE OF-ME kind AND THE load OF-ME
kindly
elafron estin
elaphron estin
G1645 G2076
a_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
LIGHT IS
Matthew 12
12:1 en ekeinw tw kairw eporeuqh o ihsous tois sabbasin 1 . At that time Jesus went on
en ekeinO tO kairO eporeuthE ho iEsous tois sabbasin
G1722 G1565 G3588 G2540 G4198 G3588 G2424 G3588 G4521
the sabbath day through the
Prep pd Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi Aor pasD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n corn; and his disciples were an
IN that THE SEASON went THE JESUS to-THE SABBATHS hungred, and began to pluck
the ears of corn, and to eat.
dia twn sporimwn oi de maqhtai autou epeinasan kai hrxanto

dia tOn sporimOn hoi de mathEtai autou epeinasan kai Erxanto
G1223 G3588 G4702 G3588 G1161 G3101 G846 G3983 G2532 G756
Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Aor midD 3 Pl
THRU THE SOWings THE YET LEARNers OF-Him HUNGER AND begin
through disciples they-begin
tillein stacuas kai esqiein

tillein stachuas kai esthiein
G5089 G4719 G2532 G2068
vn Pres Act n_ Acc Pl m Conj vn Pres Act
TO-BE-PLUCKING EARS-(of-plants) AND TO-BE-EATING
ears-of-grain
12:2 oi de farisaioi idontes eipon autw idou oi 2 But when the Pharisees saw
hoi de pharisaioi idontes eipon autO idou hoi
G3588 G1161 G5330 G1492 G2036 G846 G2400 G3588
[it], they said unto him,
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Pl m Behold, thy disciples do that
THE YET PHARISEES PERCEIVING said to-Him BE-PERCEIVING THE which is not lawful to do upon
lo ! the sabbath day.
maqhtai sou poiousin o ouk exestin poiein en sabbatw

mathEtai sou poiousin ho ouk exestin poiein en sabbatO
G3101 G4675 G4160 G3739 G3756 G1832 G4160 G1722 G4521
n_ Nom Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg vi Pres Act 3 Pl pr Acc Sg n Part Neg vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg vn Pres Act Prep n_ Dat Sg n
LEARNers OF-YOU ARE-DOING WHICH NOT it-IS-allowed TO-BE-DOING IN SABBATH
disciples is-allowed
12:3 o de eipen autois ouk anegnwte ti epoihsen dabid ote 3 But he said unto them, Have
ho de eipen autois ouk anegnOte ti epoiEsen dabid hote
G3588 G1161 G2036 G846 G3756 G314 G5101 G4160 G1138 G3753
ye not read what David did,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl pi Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg ni proper Adv when he was an hungred, and
THE YET He-said to-them NOT YE-read(past) ANY DOES DAVID when they that were with him;
ye-did-read what
epeinasen autos kai oi met autou

epeinasen autos kai hoi met autou
G3983 G846 G2532 G3588 G3326 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m Prep pp Gen Sg m
HUNGERS he AND THE-ones WITH him
the-ones
12:4 pws eishlqen eis ton oikon tou qeou kai tous artous 4 How he entered into the
pOs eisElthen eis ton oikon tou theou kai tous artous
G4459 G1525 G1519 G3588 G3624 G3588 G2316 G2532 G3588 G740
house of God, and did eat the
Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m shewbread, which was not
how he-INTO-CAME INTO THE HOME OF-THE God AND THE BREADS lawful for him to eat, neither
he-entered house bread(p) for them which were with him,
but only for the priests?
ths proqesews efagen ous ouk exon hn autw
tEs protheseOs ephagen ous ouk exon En autO
G3588 G4286 G5315 G3739 G3756 G1832 G2258 G846
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pr Acc Pl m Part Neg vp Pres im-Act Nom Sg n vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
OF-THE BEFORE-PLACing he-ATE WHICH NOT allowING WAS to-him
it-was
fagein oude tois met autou ei mh tois iereusin monois

phagein oude tois met autou ei mE tois hiereusin monois
G5315 G3761 G3588 G3326 G846 G1487 G3361 G3588 G2409 G3441
vn 2Aor Act Adv t_ Dat Pl m Prep pp Gen Sg m Cond Part Neg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m
TO-BE-EATING NOT-YET to-THE-ones WITH him IF NO to-THE SACRED-ones ONLY
neither to-the-ones priests
12:5 h ouk anegnwte en tw nomw oti tois sabbasin oi 5 Or have ye not read in the
E ouk anegnOte en tO nomO hoti tois sabbasin hoi
G2228 G3756 G314 G1722 G3588 G3551 G3754 G3588 G4521 G3588
law, how that on the sabbath
Part Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n t_ Nom Pl m days the priests in the temple
OR NOT YE-read(past) IN THE LAW that to-THE SABBATHS THE profane the sabbath, and are
ye-did-read blameless?
iereis en tw ierw to sabbaton bebhlousin kai anaitioi

hiereis en tO hierO to sabbaton bebElousin kai anaitioi
G2409 G1722 G3588 G2411 G3588 G4521 G953 G2532 G338
n_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m
SACRED-ones IN THE SACRED-place THE SABBATH ARE-profanING AND UN-caused
priests sanctuary faultless
eisin
eisin
G1526
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
THEY-ARE
are
Matthew 12
12:6 legw de umin oti tou ierou meizwn estin wde 6 But I say unto you, That in
legO de humin hoti tou hierou meizOn estin hOde
G3004 G1161 G5213 G3754 G3588 G2411 G3187 G2076 G5602
this place is [one] greater than
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl Conj t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n a_ Nom Sg m Cmp vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Adv the temple.
I-AM-sayING YET to-YOU(p) that OF-THE SACRED-place GREATER IS here
to-ye sanctuary
12:7 ei de egnwkeite ti estin eleon qelw kai ou 7 But if ye had known what
ei de egnOkeite ti estin eleon thelO kai ou
G1487 G1161 G1097 G5101 G2076 G1656 G2309 G2532 G3756
[this] meaneth, I will have
Cond Conj vi Plup Act 2 Pl pi Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj Part Neg mercy, and not sacrifice, ye
IF YET YE-HAD-KNOWN ANY IS MERCY I-AM-WILLING AND NOT would not have condemned the
what this-is guiltless.
qusian ouk an katedikasate tous anaitious

thusian ouk an katedikasate tous anaitious
G2378 G3756 G302 G2613 G3588 G338
n_ Acc Sg f Part Neg Part vi Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
SACRIFICE NOT EVER YE-convict THE UN-caused
faultless-ones
12:8 kurios gar estin kai tou sabbatou o uios tou 8 For the Son of man is Lord
kurios gar estin kai tou sabbatou ho huios tou
G2962 G1063 G2076 G2532 G3588 G4521 G3588 G5207 G3588
even of the sabbath day.
n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Conj t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
Master for IS AND OF-THE SABBATH THE SON OF-THE
Lord also
anqrwpou
anthrOpou
G444
n_ Gen Sg m
human
12:9 kai metabas ekeiqen hlqen eis thn sunagwghn autwn 9 And when he was departed
kai metabas ekeithen Elthen eis tEn sunagOgEn autOn
G2532 G3327 G1564 G2064 G1519 G3588 G4864 G846
thence, he went into their
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Pl m synagogue:
AND after-STEPPing thence He-CAME INTO THE TOGETHER-LEAD OF-them
proceeding synagogue
12:10 kai idou anqrwpos hn thn ceira ecwn xhran 10 And, behold, there was a
kai idou anthrOpos En tEn cheira echOn xEran
G2532 G2400 G444 G2258 G3588 G5495 G2192 G3584
man which had [his] hand
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg f withered. And they asked him,
AND BE-PERCEIVING human WAS THE HAND HAVING DRY saying, Is it lawful to heal on
lo ! there-was withered the sabbath days? that they
might accuse him.
kai ephrwthsan auton legontes ei exestin tois sabbasin
kai epErOtEsan auton legontes ei exestin tois sabbasin
G2532 G1905 G846 G3004 G1487 G1832 G3588 G4521
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Cond vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n
AND THEY-inquire-of Him sayING IF it-IS-allowed to-THE SABBATHS
qerapeuein ina kathgorhswsin autou

therapeuein hina katEgorEsOsin autou
G2323 G2443 G2723 G846
vn Pres Act Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl pp Gen Sg m
TO-BE-curING THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-accusING OF-Him
him
12:11 o de eipen autois tis estai ex umwn anqrwpos 11 And he said unto them,
ho de eipen autois tis estai ex humOn anthrOpos
G3588 G1161 G2036 G846 G5101 G2071 G1537 G5216 G444
What man shall there be
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pi Nom Sg m vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Prep pp 2 Gen Pl n_ Nom Sg m among you, that shall have one
THE YET He-said to-them ANY SHALL-BE OUT OF-YOU(p) human sheep, and if it fall into a pit on
what ? of-ye the sabbath day, will he not lay
hold on it, and lift [it] out?
os exei probaton en kai ean empesh touto
hos exei probaton hen kai ean empesE touto
G3739 G2192 G4263 G1520 G2532 G1437 G1706 G5124
pr Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Conj Cond vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg pd Nom Sg n
WHO SHALL-BE-HAVING sheep ONE AND IF-EVER SHOULD-BE-IN-FALLING this
should-be-falling-in
tois sabbasin eis boqunon ouci krathsei auto kai egerei

tois sabbasin eis bothunon ouchi kratEsei auto kai egerei
G3588 G4521 G1519 G999 G3780 G2902 G846 G2532 G1453
t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n Prep n_ Acc Sg m Part Int vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg n Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg
to-THE SABBATHS INTO PIT NOT(emph.) SHALL-BE-HOLDING it AND SHALL-BE-ROUSING
not(emph.) ? shall-be-taking-hold shall-be-raising
12:12 posw oun diaferei anqrwpos probatou wste exestin 12 How much then is a man
posO oun diapherei anthrOpos probatou hOste exestin
G4214 G3767 G1308 G444 G4263 G5620 G1832
better than a sheep? Wherefore
pq Dat Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg n Conj vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg it is lawful to do well on the
how-much THEN IS-THRU-CARRYING human OF-sheep AS-BESIDES IS-allowed sabbath days.
to-how-much is-being-of-consequence so-that it-is-allowed
Matthew 12
tois sabbasin kalws poiein

tois sabbasin kalOs poiein
G3588 G4521 G2573 G4160
t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n Adv vn Pres Act
to-THE SABBATHS IDEALly TO-BE-DOING
12:13 tote legei tw anqrwpw ekteinon thn ceira sou kai 13 Then saith he to the man,
tote legei tO anthrOpO ekteinon tEn cheira sou kai
G5119 G3004 G3588 G444 G1614 G3588 G5495 G4675 G2532
Stretch forth thine hand. And
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Conj he stretched [it] forth; and it
then He-IS-sayING to-THE human OUT-STRETCH THE HAND OF-YOU AND was restored whole, like as the
stretch-out-you ! other.
exeteinen kai apokatestaqh ugihs ws h allh

exeteinen kai apokatestathE hugiEs hOs hE allE
G1614 G2532 G600 G5199 G5613 G3588 G243
vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg f Adv t_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f
he-OUT-STRETCHES AND it-WAS-restorED SOUND AS THE other
he-stretches-out
12:14 oi de farisaioi sumboulion elabon kat autou exelqontes 14 . Then the Pharisees went
hoi de pharisaioi sumboulion elabon kat autou exelthontes
G3588 G1161 G5330 G4824 G2983 G2596 G846 G1831
out, and held a council against
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pp Gen Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m him, how they might destroy
THE YET PHARISEES TOGETHER-COUNSEL GOT DOWN OF-Him OUT-COMING him.
consultation held against him coming-out
opws auton apoleswsin

hopOs auton apolesOsin
G3704 G846 G622
Adv pp Acc Sg m vs Aor Act 3 Pl
WHICH-how Him THEY-SHOULD-BE-destroyING
so-that
12:15 o de ihsous gnous anecwrhsen ekeiqen kai hkolouqhsan 15 But when Jesus knew [it],
ho de iEsous gnous anechOrEsen ekeithen kai EkolouthEsan
G3588 G1161 G2424 G1097 G402 G1564 G2532 G190
he withdrew himself from
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl thence: and great multitudes
THE YET JESUS KNOWING UP-SPACES thence AND follow followed him, and he healed
retires them all;
autw ocloi polloi kai eqerapeusen autous pantas

autO ochloi polloi kai etherapeusen autous pantas
G846 G3793 G4183 G2532 G2323 G846 G3956
pp Dat Sg m n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
to-Him THRONGS MANY AND He-curES them ALL
him vast
12:16 kai epetimhsen autois ina mh faneron auton poihswsin 16 And charged them that they
kai epetimEsen autois hina mE phaneron auton poiEsOsin
G2532 G2008 G846 G2443 G3361 G5318 G846 G4160
should not make him known:
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj Part Neg a_ Acc Sg m pp Acc Sg m vs Aor Act 3 Pl
AND He-rebukES to-them THAT NO apparent Him THEY-SHOULD-BE-makING
he-warns them manifest
12:17 opws plhrwqh to rhqen dia hsaiou tou 17 That it might be fulfilled
hopOs plErOthE to rEthen dia Esaiou tou
G3704 G4137 G3588 G4483 G1223 G2268 G3588
Adv vs Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n Prep n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m the prophet, saying,
WHICH-how MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE BEING-declarED THRU ISAIAH THE
so-that may-be-being-fulfilled through
profhtou legontos
prophEtou legontos
G4396 G3004
n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg n
BEFORE-AVERer OF-sayING
prophet saying
12:18 idou o pais mou on hretisa o agaphtos 18 Behold my servant, whom I

idou ho pais mou hon hEretisa ho agapEtos
G2400 G3588 G3816 G3450 G3739 G140 G3588 G27
have chosen; my beloved, in
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg pr Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 1 Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m whom my soul is well pleased:
BE-PERCEIVING THE Boy OF-ME WHOM I-prefer THE beLOVED I will put my spirit upon him,
lo ! and he shall shew judgment to
the Gentiles.
mou eis on eudokhsen h yuch mou qhsw to
mou eis hon eudokEsen hE psuchE mou thEsO to
G3450 G1519 G3739 G2106 G3588 G5590 G3450 G5087 G3588
pp 1 Gen Sg Prep pr Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg vi Fut Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
OF-ME INTO WHOM WELL-SEEMS THE soul OF-ME I-SHALL-BE-PLACING THE
delights
pneuma mou ep auton kai krisin tois eqnesin apaggelei

pneuma mou ep auton kai krisin tois ethnesin apaggelei
G4151 G3450 G1909 G846 G2532 G2920 G3588 G1484 G518
n_ Acc Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg Prep pp Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg f t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n vi Fut Act 3 Sg
spirit OF-ME ON Him AND JUDGing to-THE NATIONS He-SHALL-BE-FROM-MESSAGING
he-shall-be-reporting
Matthew 12
12:19 ouk erisei oude kraugasei oude akousei 19 He shall not strive, nor cry;
ouk erisei oude kraugasei oude akousei
G3756 G2051 G3761 G2905 G3761 G191
neither shall any man hear his
Part Neg vi Fut Act 3 Sg Adv vi Fut Act 3 Sg Adv vi Fut Act 3 Sg voice in the streets.
NOT He-SHALL-BE-STRIFEizING NOT-YET He-SHALL-BE-clamorING NOT-YET SHALL-BE-HEARING
he-shall-be-brawling nor neither
tis en tais plateiais thn fwnhn autou

tis en tais plateiais tEn phOnEn autou
G5100 G1722 G3588 G4113 G3588 G5456 G846
px Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m
ANY IN THE BROADS THE SOUND OF-Him
anyone squares voice
12:20 kalamon suntetrimmenon ou kateaxei kai linon 20 A bruised reed shall he not
kalamon suntetrimmenon ou kateaxei kai linon
G2563 G4937 G3756 G2608 G2532 G3043
break, and smoking flax shall
n_ Acc Sg m vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Acc Sg n he not quench, till he send
REED HAVING-been-crushED NOT He-SHALL-BE-DOWN-FRACTURING AND FLAX forth judgment unto victory.
having-been-bruised he-shall-be-fracturing
tufomenon ou sbesei ews an ekbalh eis

tuphomenon ou sbesei heOs an ekbalE eis
G5188 G3756 G4570 G2193 G302 G1544 G1519
vp Pres Pas Acc Sg n Part Neg vi Fut Act 3 Sg Conj Part vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
SMOULDERING NOT He-SHALL-BE-EXTINGUISHING TILL EVER He-SHOULD-BE-OUT-CASTING INTO
he-should-be-casting-out
nikos thn krisin

nikos tEn krisin
G3534 G3588 G2920
n_ Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
CONQUEST THE JUDGing
victory
12:21 kai en tw onomati autou eqnh elpiousin 21 And in his name shall the
kai en tO onomati autou ethnE elpiousin
G2532 G1722 G3588 G3686 G846 G1484 G1679
Gentiles trust.
Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pp Gen Sg m n_ Nom Pl n vi Fut Act 3 Pl Att
AND IN THE NAME OF-Him NATIONS SHALL-BE-EXPECTING
shall-be-relying-on
12:22 tote proshnecqh autw daimonizomenos tuflos kai kwfos 22 . Then was brought unto
tote prosEnechthE autO daimonizomenos tuphlos kai kOphos
G5119 G4374 G846 G1139 G5185 G2532 G2974
him one possessed with a
Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m devil, blind, and dumb: and he
then WAS-TOWARD-CARRIED to-Him one-demonizING BLIND AND MUTE healed him, insomuch that the
was-brought one-being-demonized blind and dumb both spake and
saw.
kai eqerapeusen auton wste ton tuflon kai kwfon kai lalein
kai etherapeusen auton hOste ton tuphlon kai kOphon kai lalein
G2532 G2323 G846 G5620 G3588 G5185 G2532 G2974 G2532 G2980
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Conj a_ Acc Sg m Conj vn Pres Act
AND He-curES him AS-BESIDES THE BLIND AND MUTE AND TO-BE-TALKING
so-that mute-man to-be-speaking
kai blepein
kai blepein
G2532 G991
Conj vn Pres Act
AND TO-BE-lookING
to-be-observing
12:23 kai existanto pantes oi ocloi kai elegon mhti outos 23 And all the people were
kai existanto pantes hoi ochloi kai elegon mEti houtos
G2532 G1839 G3956 G3588 G3793 G2532 G3004 G3385 G3778
amazed, and said, Is not this
Conj vi Impf Mid 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl Part Int pd Nom Sg m the son of David?
AND are-OUT-STOOD ALL THE THRONGS AND said NO-ANY this-One
are-amazed they-said not ? this-one
estin o uios dabid

estin ho huios dabid
G2076 G3588 G5207 G1138
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m ni proper
IS THE SON of-DAVID
of-David
12:24 oi de farisaioi akousantes eipon outos ouk ekballei 24 But when the Pharisees
hoi de pharisaioi akousantes eipon houtos ouk ekballei
G3588 G1161 G5330 G191 G2036 G3778 G3756 G1544
heard [it], they said, This
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pd Nom Sg m Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg [fellow] doth not cast out
THE YET PHARISEES HEARing said this-One NOT IS-OUT-CASTING devils, but by Beelzebub the
this-man is-casting-out prince of the devils.
ta daimonia ei mh en tw beelzeboul arconti twn daimoniwn

ta daimonia ei mE en tO beelzeboul archonti tOn daimoniOn
G3588 G1140 G1487 G3361 G1722 G3588 G954 G758 G3588 G1140
t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Cond Part Neg Prep t_ Dat Sg m ni proper n_ Dat Sg m t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
THE demons IF NO IN THE BEELZEBOUL chief OF-THE demons
Matthew 12
12:25 eidws de o ihsous tas enqumhseis autwn eipen 25 And Jesus knew their
eidOs de ho iEsous tas enthumEseis autOn eipen
G1492 G1161 G3588 G2424 G3588 G1761 G846 G2036
thoughts, and said unto them,
vp Perf Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Every kingdom divided against
HAVING-PERCEIVED YET THE JESUS THE IN-FEELings OF-them He-said itself is brought to desolation;
sentiments and every city or house divided
against itself shall not stand:
autois pasa basileia merisqeisa kaq eauths erhmoutai kai pasa
autois pasa basileia meristheisa kath heautEs erEmoutai kai pasa
G846 G3956 G932 G3307 G2596 G1438 G2049 G2532 G3956
pp Dat Pl m a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vp Aor Pas Nom Sg f Prep pf 3 Gen Sg f vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg f
to-them EVERY KINGdom BEING-PARTED DOWN OF-self IS-beING-DESOLATED AND EVERY
against herself
polis h oikia merisqeisa kaq eauths ou staqhsetai

polis E oikia meristheisa kath heautEs ou stathEsetai
G4172 G2228 G3614 G3307 G2596 G1438 G3756 G2476
n_ Nom Sg f Part n_ Nom Sg f vp Aor Pas Nom Sg f Prep pf 3 Gen Sg f Part Neg vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
city OR HOME BEING-PARTED DOWN OF-self NOT SHALL-BE-BEING-STOOD
house against herself shall-be-standing
12:26 kai ei o satanas ton satanan ekballei ef 26 And if Satan cast out Satan,
kai ei ho satanas ton satanan ekballei eph
G2532 G1487 G3588 G4567 G3588 G4567 G1544 G1909
he is divided against himself;
Conj Cond t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep how shall then his kingdom
AND IF THE SATAN (Heb. adversary) THE SATAN (adversary) IS-OUT-CASTING ON stand?
Satan Satan is-casting-out
eauton emerisqh pws oun staqhsetai h basileia autou

heauton emeristhE pOs oun stathEsetai hE basileia autou
G1438 G3307 G4459 G3767 G2476 G3588 G932 G846
pf 3 Acc Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Adv Int Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m
self he-IS-PARTED how THEN SHALL-BE-BEING-STOOD THE KINGdom OF-him
himself how ? shall-be-standing
12:27 kai ei egw en beelzeboul ekballw ta daimonia oi 27 And if I by Beelzebub cast

kai ei egO en beelzeboul ekballO ta daimonia hoi
G2532 G1487 G1473 G1722 G954 G1544 G3588 G1140 G3588
out devils, by whom do your
Conj Cond pp 1 Nom Sg Prep ni proper vi Pres Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Nom Pl m children cast [them] out?
AND IF I IN BEELZEBOUL AM-OUT-CASTING THE demons THE therefore they shall be your
am-casting-out judges.
uioi umwn en tini ekballousin dia touto autoi umwn

huioi humOn en tini ekballousin dia touto autoi humOn
G5207 G5216 G1722 G5101 G1544 G1223 G5124 G846 G5216
n_ Nom Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl Prep pi Dat Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep pd Acc Sg n pp Nom Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl
SONS OF-YOU(p) IN ANY ARE-OUT-CASTING THRU this they OF-YOU(p)
of-ye whom ? are-casting-out because-of
esontai kritai
esontai kritai
G2071 G2923
vi Fut vxx 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl m
SHALL-BE JUDGers
judges
12:28 ei de egw en pneumati qeou ekballw ta daimonia 28 But if I cast out devils by
ei de egO en pneumati theou ekballO ta daimonia
G1487 G1161 G1473 G1722 G4151 G2316 G1544 G3588 G1140
the Spirit of God, then the
Cond Conj pp 1 Nom Sg Prep n_ Dat Sg n n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n kingdom of God is come unto
IF YET I IN spirit OF-God AM-OUT-CASTING THE demons you.
am-casting-out
ara efqasen ef umas h basileia tou qeou

ara ephthasen eph humas hE basileia tou theou
G686 G5348 G1909 G5209 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316
Part vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp 2 Acc Pl t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
CONSEQUENTLY OUTSTRIPS ON YOU(p) THE KINGdom OF-THE God
outstrips-in-time ye
12:29 h pws dunatai tis eiselqein eis thn oikian tou 29 Or else how can one enter
E pOs dunatai tis eiselthein eis tEn oikian tou
G2228 G4459 G1410 G5100 G1525 G1519 G3588 G3614 G3588
into a strong man's house, and
Part Adv Int vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg px Nom Sg m vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m spoil his goods, except he first
OR how IS-ABLE ANY TO-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE HOME OF-THE bind the strong man? and then
how ? can anyone to-be-entering house he will spoil his house.
iscurou kai ta skeuh autou diarpasai ean mh prwton

ischurou kai ta skeuE autou diarpasai ean mE prOton
G2478 G2532 G3588 G4632 G846 G1283 G1437 G3361 G4412
a_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Sg m vn Aor Act Cond Part Neg Adv
STRONG-one AND THE INSTRUMENTS OF-him TO-THRU-SNATCH IF-EVER NO BEFORE-most
strong-one gear to-plunder first
dhsh ton iscuron kai tote thn oikian autou

dEsE ton ischuron kai tote tEn oikian autou
G1210 G3588 G2478 G2532 G5119 G3588 G3614 G846
vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Conj Adv t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m
he-SHOULD-BE-BINDING THE STRONG-one AND then THE HOME OF-him
strong-one house
Matthew 12
diarpasei
diarpasei
G1283
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
he-SHALL-BE-THRU-SNATCHING
he-shall-be-plundering
12:30 o mh wn met emou kat emou estin kai 30 He that is not with me is
ho mE On met emou kat emou estin kai
G3588 G3361 G5607 G3326 G1700 G2596 G1700 G2076 G2532
against me; and he that
t_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vp Pres vxx Nom Sg m Prep pp 1 Gen Sg Prep pp 1 Gen Sg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Conj gathereth not with me
THE-one NO BEING WITH ME DOWN OF-ME IS AND scattereth abroad.
the-one against me
o mh sunagwn met emou skorpizei

ho mE sunagOn met emou skorpizei
G3588 G3361 G4863 G3326 G1700 G4650
t_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep pp 1 Gen Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE-one NO TOGETHER-LEADING WITH ME IS-SCATTERING
the-one gathering
12:31 dia touto legw umin pasa amartia kai blasfhmia 31 Wherefore I say unto you,
dia touto legO humin pasa hamartia kai blasphEmia
G1223 G5124 G3004 G5213 G3956 G266 G2532 G988
All manner of sin and
Prep pd Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f blasphemy shall be forgiven
THRU this I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) EVERY missing AND HARM-AVERment unto men: but the blasphemy
because-of to-ye sin blasphemy [against] the [Holy] Ghost shall
not be forgiven unto men.
afeqhsetai tois anqrwpois h de tou pneumatos
aphethEsetai tois anthrOpois hE de tou pneumatos
G863 G3588 G444 G3588 G1161 G3588 G4151
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET to-THE humans THE YET OF-THE spirit
shall-be-being-pardoned the
blasfhmia ouk afeqhsetai tois anqrwpois

blasphEmia ouk aphethEsetai tois anthrOpois
G988 G3756 G863 G3588 G444
n_ Nom Sg f Part Neg vi Fut Pas 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
HARM-AVERment NOT SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET to-THE humans
blasphemy shall-be-being-pardoned the
12:32 kai os an eiph logon kata tou uiou tou 32 And whosoever speaketh a
kai hos an eipE logon kata tou huiou tou
G2532 G3739 G302 G2036 G3056 G2596 G3588 G5207 G3588
word against the Son of man, it
Conj pr Nom Sg m Part vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m shall be forgiven him: but
AND WHO EVER MAY-BE-sayING saying DOWN OF-THE SON OF-THE whosoever speaketh against
word against the the Holy Ghost, it shall not be
forgiven him, neither in this
anqrwpou afeqhsetai autw os d an eiph kata world, neither in the [world] to
anthrOpou aphethEsetai autO hos d an eipE kata come.
G444 G863 G846 G3739 G1161 G302 G2036 G2596
n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
human it-SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET to-him WHO YET EVER MAY-BE-sayING DOWN
it-shall-be-being-pardoned him against
tou pneumatos tou agiou ouk afeqhsetai autw oute

tou pneumatos tou hagiou ouk aphethEsetai autO oute
G3588 G4151 G3588 G40 G3756 G863 G846 G3777
t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n Part Neg vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Conj
OF-THE spirit THE HOLY NOT it-SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET to-him NOT-BESIDES
the it-shall-be-being-pardoned him neither
en toutw tw aiwni oute en tw mellonti

en toutO tO aiOni oute en tO mellonti
G1722 G5129 G3588 G165 G3777 G1722 G3588 G3195
Prep pd Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m
IN this THE eon NOT-BESIDES IN THE one-beING-ABOUT
nor one-impending
12:33 h poihsate to dendron kalon kai ton karpon autou 33 Either make the tree good,
E poiEsate to dendron kalon kai ton karpon autou
G2228 G4160 G3588 G1186 G2570 G2532 G3588 G2590 G846
and his fruit good; or else
Part vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg n make the tree corrupt, and his
OR make THE TREE IDEAL AND THE FRUIT OF-it fruit corrupt: for the tree is
either make-ye ! known by [his] fruit.
kalon h poihsate to dendron sapron kai ton karpon autou

kalon E poiEsate to dendron sapron kai ton karpon autou
G2570 G2228 G4160 G3588 G1186 G4550 G2532 G3588 G2590 G846
a_ Acc Sg m Part vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg n
IDEAL OR make THE TREE ROTTen AND THE FRUIT OF-it
make-ye !
sapron ek gar tou karpou to dendron ginwsketai

sapron ek gar tou karpou to dendron ginOsketai
G4550 G1537 G1063 G3588 G2590 G3588 G1186 G1097
a_ Acc Sg m Prep Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
ROTTen OUT for OF-THE FRUIT THE TREE IS-beING-KNOWN
Matthew 12
12:34 gennhmata ecidnwn pws dunasqe agaqa lalein ponhroi 34 O generation of vipers, how
gennEmata echidnOn pOs dunasthe agatha lalein ponEroi
G1081 G2191 G4459 G1410 G18 G2980 G4190
can ye, being evil, speak good
n_ Voc Pl n n_ Gen Pl f Adv Int vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl a_ Acc Pl n vn Pres Act a_ Nom Pl m things? for out of the
product OF-VIPERS how YE-ARE-ABLE GOODS TO-BE-TALKING wicked abundance of the heart the
progeny ! how ? ye-can good(p) to-be-speaking wicked-ones mouth speaketh.
ontes ek gar tou perisseumatos ths kardias to stoma

ontes ek gar tou perisseumatos tEs kardias to stoma
G5607 G1537 G1063 G3588 G4051 G3588 G2588 G3588 G4750
vp Pres vxx Nom Pl m Prep Conj t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
BEING OUT for OF-THE excess OF-THE HEART THE MOUTH
superabundance
lalei
lalei
G2980
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IS-TALKING
is-speaking
12:35 o agaqos anqrwpos ek tou agaqou qhsaurou ths 35 A good man out of the good
ho agathos anthrOpos ek tou agathou thEsaurou tEs
G3588 G18 G444 G1537 G3588 G18 G2344 G3588
treasure of the heart bringeth
t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg f forth good things: and an evil
THE GOOD human OUT OF-THE GOOD PLACED-INTO-MORROW OF-THE man out of the evil treasure
treasure bringeth forth evil things.
kardias ekballei ta agaqa kai o ponhros anqrwpos ek

kardias ekballei ta agatha kai ho ponEros anthrOpos ek
G2588 G1544 G3588 G18 G2532 G3588 G4190 G444 G1537
n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n Conj t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep
HEART IS-OUT-CASTING THE GOODS AND THE wicked human OUT
is-extracting good-things
tou ponhrou qhsaurou ekballei ponhra

tou ponErou thEsaurou ekballei ponEra
G3588 G4190 G2344 G1544 G4190
t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl n
OF-THE wicked PLACED-INTO-MORROW IS-OUT-CASTING wickeds
treasure is-extracting wicked-things
12:36 legw de umin oti pan rhma argon o ean 36 But I say unto you, That
legO de humin hoti pan rEma argon ho ean
G3004 G1161 G5213 G3754 G3956 G4487 G692 G3739 G1437
every idle word that men shall
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl Conj a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n pr Acc Sg n Cond speak, they shall give account
I-AM-sayING YET to-YOU(p) that EVERY declaration UN-ACTive WHICH IF-EVER thereof in the day of judgment.
to-ye idle
lalhswsin oi anqrwpoi apodwsousin peri autou logon

lalEsOsin hoi anthrOpoi apodOsousin peri autou logon
G2980 G3588 G444 G591 G4012 G846 G3056
vs Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl Prep pp Gen Sg n n_ Acc Sg m
SHOULD-BE TALKING THE humans THEY-SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING ABOUT it saying
should-be-speaking they-shall-be-rendering concerning account
en hmera krisews
en hEmera kriseOs
G1722 G2250 G2920
Prep n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
IN DAY OF-JUDGing
12:37 ek gar twn logwn sou dikaiwqhsh kai ek twn 37 For by thy words thou shalt
ek gar tOn logOn sou dikaiOthEsE kai ek tOn
G1537 G1063 G3588 G3056 G4675 G1344 G2532 G1537 G3588
be justified, and by thy words
Prep Conj t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg vi Fut Pas 2 Sg Conj Prep t_ Gen Pl m thou shalt be condemned.
OUT for OF-THE sayings OF-YOU YOU-SHALL-BE-BEING-JUSTIFIED AND OUT OF-THE
words
logwn sou katadikasqhsh

logOn sou katadikasthEsE
G3056 G4675 G2613
n_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg vi Fut Pas 2 Sg
sayings OF-YOU YOU-SHALL-BE-BEING-convictED
words
12:38 tote apekriqhsan tines twn grammatewn kai farisaiwn legontes 38 . Then certain of the scribes
tote apekrithEsan tines tOn grammateOn kai pharisaiOn legontes
G5119 G611 G5100 G3588 G1122 G2532 G5330 G3004
and of the Pharisees answered,
Adv vi Aor midD 3 Pl px Nom Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m saying, Master, we would see a
then answerED ANY OF-THE WRITers AND PHARISEES sayING sign from thee.
some scribes
didaskale qelomen apo sou shmeion idein

didaskale thelomen apo sou sEmeion idein
G1320 G2309 G575 G4675 G4592 G1492
n_ Voc Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Pl Prep pp 2 Gen Sg n_ Acc Sg n vn 2Aor Act
TEACHer ! WE-ARE-WILLING FROM YOU SIGN TO-BE-PERCEIVING
Matthew 12
12:39 o de apokriqeis eipen autois genea ponhra kai 39 But he answered and said
ho de apokritheis eipen autois genea ponEra kai
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G846 G1074 G4190 G2532
unto them, An evil and
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f Conj adulterous generation seeketh
THE YET answerING He-said to-them generation wicked AND after a sign; and there shall no
a generation sign be given to it, but the sign
of the prophet Jonas:
moicalis shmeion epizhtei kai shmeion ou doqhsetai auth ei
moichalis sEmeion epizEtei kai sEmeion ou dothEsetai autE ei
G3428 G4592 G1934 G2532 G4592 G3756 G1325 G846 G1487
n_ Nom Sg f n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg n Part Neg vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f Cond
ADULTERess SIGN IS-ON-SEEKING AND SIGN NOT SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-her IF
an-adulteress is-seeking-for
mh to shmeion iwna tou profhtou

mE to sEmeion iOna tou prophEtou
G3361 G3588 G4592 G2495 G3588 G4396
Part Neg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
NO THE SIGN of-JONA THE BEFORE-AVERer
of-Jonah prophet
12:40 wsper gar hn iwnas en th koilia tou khtous treis 40 For as Jonas was three days
hOsper gar En iOnas en tE koilia tou kEtous treis
G5618 G1063 G2258 G2495 G1722 G3588 G2836 G3588 G2785 G5140
and three nights in the whale's
Adv Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n a_ Acc Pl f belly; so shall the Son of man
AS-EVEN for WAS JONA IN THE CAVITY OF-THE SEA-MONSTER THREE be three days and three nights
even-as Jonah bowel in the heart of the earth.
hmeras kai treis nuktas outws estai o uios tou anqrwpou

hEmeras kai treis nuktas houtOs estai ho huios tou anthrOpou
G2250 G2532 G5140 G3571 G3779 G2071 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444
n_ Acc Pl f Conj a_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
DAYS AND THREE NIGHTS thus SHALL-BE THE SON OF-THE human
en th kardia ths ghs treis hmeras kai treis nuktas

en tE kardia tEs gEs treis hEmeras kai treis nuktas
G1722 G3588 G2588 G3588 G1093 G5140 G2250 G2532 G5140 G3571
Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f a_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Conj a_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f
IN THE HEART OF-THE LAND THREE DAYS AND THREE NIGHTS
earth
12:41 andres nineuitai anasthsontai en th krisei meta ths geneas 41 The men of Nineveh shall
andres nineuitai anastEsontai en tE krisei meta tEs geneas
G435 G3536 G450 G1722 G3588 G2920 G3326 G3588 G1074
rise in judgment with this
n_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Fut Mid 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f generation, and shall condemn
MEN NINEVITES SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING IN THE JUDGing WITH THE generation it: because they repented at the
shall-be-rising preaching of Jonas; and,
behold, a greater than Jonas
tauths kai katakrinousin authn oti metenohsan eis to [is] here.
tautEs kai katakrinousin autEn hoti metenoEsan eis to
G3778 G2532 G2632 G846 G3754 G3340 G1519 G3588
pd Gen Sg f Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg n
this AND THEY-SHALL-BE-DOWN-JUDGING her that THEY-after-MIND INTO THE
they-shall-be-condemning they-repent
khrugma iwna kai idou pleion iwna wde

kErugma iOna kai idou pleion iOna hOde
G2782 G2495 G2532 G2400 G4119 G2495 G5602
n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Nom Sg n Cmp n_ Gen Sg m Adv
PROCLAMATION of-JONA AND BE-PERCEIVING MORE of-JONA here
heralding of-Jonah lo ! of-Jonah
12:42 basilissa notou egerqhsetai en th krisei meta ths 42 The queen of the south shall
basilissa notou egerthEsetai en tE krisei meta tEs
G938 G3558 G1453 G1722 G3588 G2920 G3326 G3588
rise up in the judgment with
n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg f this generation, and shall
KINGess OF-SOUTH SHALL-BE-BEING-ROUSED IN THE JUDGing WITH THE condemn it: for she came from
queen the uttermost parts of the earth
to hear the wisdom of
geneas tauths kai katakrinei authn oti hlqen ek twn Solomon; and, behold, a
geneas tautEs kai katakrinei autEn hoti Elthen ek tOn greater than Solomon [is] here.
G1074 G3778 G2532 G2632 G846 G3754 G2064 G1537 G3588
n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl n
generation this AND SHALL-BE-DOWN-JUDGING her that she-CAME OUT OF-THE
shall-be-condemning
peratwn ths ghs akousai thn sofian solomwntos kai idou

peratOn tEs gEs akousai tEn sophian solomOntos kai idou
G4009 G3588 G1093 G191 G3588 G4678 G4672 G2532 G2400
n_ Gen Pl n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ends OF-THE LAND TO-HEAR THE WISDOM OF-SOLOMON AND BE-PERCEIVING
earth lo !
pleion solomwntos wde

pleion solomOntos hOde
G4119 G4672 G5602
a_ Nom Sg n Cmp n_ Gen Sg m Adv
MORE OF-SOLOMON here
Matthew 12
12:43 otan de to akaqarton pneuma exelqh apo tou 43 When the unclean spirit is
hotan de to akatharton pneuma exelthE apo tou
G3752 G1161 G3588 G169 G4151 G1831 G575 G3588
gone out of a man, he walketh
Conj Conj t_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m through dry places, seeking
when-EVER YET THE UN-clean spirit MAY-BE-OUT-COMING FROM THE rest, and findeth none.
whenever unclean may-be-coming-out
anqrwpou diercetai di anudrwn topwn zhtoun anapausin kai

anthrOpou dierchetai di anudrOn topOn zEtoun anapausin kai
G444 G1330 G1223 G504 G5117 G2212 G372 G2532
n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep a_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg n n_ Acc Sg f Conj
human it-IS-THRU-COMING THRU UN-WET PLACES SEEKING UP-CEASing AND
it-is-passing-through through waterless rest
ouc euriskei
ouch heuriskei
G3756 G2147
Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg
NOT it-IS-FINDING
12:44 tote legei epistreyw eis ton oikon mou oqen 44 Then he saith, I will return
tote legei epistrepsO eis ton oikon mou hothen
G5119 G3004 G1994 G1519 G3588 G3624 G3450 G3606
into my house from whence I
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg vi Fut Act 1 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Adv came out; and when he is
then it-IS-sayING I-SHALL-BE-ON-TURNING INTO THE HOME OF-ME WHICH-PLACE come, he findeth [it] empty,
I-shall-be-turning-back house whence swept, and garnished.
exhlqon kai elqon euriskei scolazonta sesarwmenon kai

exElthon kai elthon heuriskei scholazonta sesarOmenon kai
G1831 G2532 G2064 G2147 G4980 G4563 G2532
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Acc Sg m vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m Conj
I-OUT-CAME AND COMING it-IS-FINDING LEISURING HAVING-been-SWEPT AND
I-came-out being-unoccupied
kekosmhmenon
kekosmEmenon
G2885
vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m
HAVING-been-SYSTEMED
having-been-decorated
12:45 tote poreuetai kai paralambanei meq eautou epta etera 45 Then goeth he, and taketh
tote poreuetai kai paralambanei meth heautou hepta hetera
G5119 G4198 G2532 G3880 G3326 G1438 G2033 G2087
with himself seven other spirits
Adv vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep pf 3 Gen Sg m a_ Nom a_ Acc Pl n more wicked than himself, and
then it-IS-GOING AND IS-BESIDE-GETTING WITH self SEVEN DIFFERENT they enter in and dwell there:
is-taking-along itself and the last [state] of that man
is worse than the first. Even so
pneumata ponhrotera eautou kai eiselqonta katoikei ekei kai shall it be also unto this wicked
pneumata ponErotera heautou kai eiselthonta katoikei ekei kai generation.
G4151 G4191 G1438 G2532 G1525 G2730 G1563 G2532
n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n Cmp pf 3 Gen Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl n vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv Conj
spirits more-wicked OF-self AND INTO-COMING it-IS-DOWN-HOMING there AND
of-itself entering it-is-dwelling
ginetai ta escata tou anqrwpou ekeinou ceirona twn

ginetai ta eschata tou anthrOpou ekeinou cheirona tOn
G1096 G3588 G2078 G3588 G444 G1565 G5501 G3588
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m a_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Pl n
IS-BECOMING THE LAST OF-THE human that WORSE OF-THE
last(p)
prwtwn outws estai kai th genea tauth th ponhra

prOtOn houtOs estai kai tE genea tautE tE ponEra
G4413 G3779 G2071 G2532 G3588 G1074 G3778 G3588 G4190
a_ Gen Pl n Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Conj t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f
BEFORE-most thus it-SHALL-BE AND to-THE generation this THE wicked
first also
12:46 eti de autou lalountos tois oclois idou h mhthr 46 . While he yet talked to the
eti de autou lalountos tois ochlois idou hE mEtEr
G2089 G1161 G846 G2980 G3588 G3793 G2400 G3588 G3384
people, behold, [his] mother
Adv Conj pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f and his brethren stood without,
STILL YET OF-Him TALKING to-THE THRONGS BE-PERCEIVING THE MOTHER desiring to speak with him.
speaking lo !
kai oi adelfoi autou eisthkeisan exw zhtountes autw lalhsai

kai hoi adelphoi autou heistEkeisan exO zEtountes autO lalEsai
G2532 G3588 G80 G846 G2476 G1854 G2212 G846 G2980
Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Plup Act 3 Pl Adv vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Dat Sg m vn Aor Act
AND THE brothers OF-Him HAD-STOOD OUT SEEKING to-Him TO-TALK
stood outside to-speak
12:47 eipen de tis autw idou h mhthr sou kai 47 Then one said unto him,
eipen de tis autO idou hE mEtEr sou kai
G2036 G1161 G5100 G846 G2400 G3588 G3384 G4675 G2532
Behold, thy mother and thy
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj px Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Conj brethren stand without,
said YET ANY to-Him BE-PERCEIVING THE MOTHER OF-YOU AND desiring to speak with thee.
someone lo !
oi adelfoi sou exw esthkasin zhtountes soi lalhsai

hoi adelphoi sou exO hestEkasin zEtountes soi lalEsai
G3588 G80 G4675 G1854 G2476 G2212 G4671 G2980
t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg Adv vi Perf Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp 2 Dat Sg vn Aor Act
THE brothers OF-YOU OUT HAVE-STOOD SEEKING to-YOU TO-TALK
outside stand to-speak
12:48 o de apokriqeis eipen tw eiponti autw tis 48 But he answered and said
ho de apokritheis eipen tO eiponti autO tis
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G3588 G2036 G846 G5101
unto him that told him, Who is
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m vp 2Aor Act Dat Sg m pp Dat Sg m pi Nom Sg m my mother? and who are my
THE YET answerING He-said to-THE one-sayING to-Him ANY brethren?
one-saying who ?
estin h mhthr mou kai tines eisin oi adelfoi

estin hE mEtEr mou kai tines eisin hoi adelphoi
G2076 G3588 G3384 G3450 G2532 G5101 G1526 G3588 G80
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg Conj pi Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
IS THE MOTHER OF-ME AND ANY ARE THE brothers
who(p) ?
mou
mou
G3450
pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-ME
12:49 kai ekteinas thn ceira autou epi tous maqhtas autou 49 And he stretched forth his
kai ekteinas tEn cheira autou epi tous mathEtas autou
G2532 G1614 G3588 G5495 G846 G1909 G3588 G3101 G846
hand toward his disciples, and
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m said, Behold my mother and
AND OUT-STRETCHing THE HAND OF-Him ON THE LEARNers OF-Him my brethren!
stretching-out onover disciples
eipen idou h mhthr mou kai oi adelfoi mou

eipen idou hE mEtEr mou kai hoi adelphoi mou
G2036 G2400 G3588 G3384 G3450 G2532 G3588 G80 G3450
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg
He-said BE-PERCEIVING THE MOTHER OF-ME AND THE brothers OF-ME
lo !
12:50 ostis gar an poihsh to qelhma tou patros mou 50 For whosoever shall do the
hostis gar an poiEsE to thelEma tou patros mou
G3748 G1063 G302 G4160 G3588 G2307 G3588 G3962 G3450
will of my Father which is in
pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg heaven, the same is my
WHO-ANY for EVER SHOULD-BE-DOING THE WILL OF-THE FATHER OF-ME brother, and sister, and mother.
anyone-who
tou en ouranois autos mou adelfos kai adelfh kai mhthr

tou en ouranois autos mou adelphos kai adelphE kai mEtEr
G3588 G1722 G3772 G846 G3450 G80 G2532 G79 G2532 G3384
t_ Gen Sg m Prep n_ Dat Pl m pp Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f
THE IN heavens he OF-ME brother AND sister AND MOTHER
the-one
estin
estin
G2076
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS
Matthew 13
13:1 en de th hmera ekeinh exelqwn o ihsous apo ths 1 . The same day went Jesus
en de tE hEmera ekeinE exelthOn ho iEsous apo tEs
G1722 G1161 G3588 G2250 G1565 G1831 G3588 G2424 G575 G3588
out of the house, and sat by the
Prep Conj t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f sea side.
IN YET THE DAY that OUT-COMING THE JESUS FROM THE
coming-out
oikias ekaqhto para thn qalassan

oikias ekathEto para tEn thalassan
G3614 G2521 G3844 G3588 G2281
n_ Gen Sg f vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
HOME sat BESIDE THE SEA
house
13:2 kai sunhcqhsan pros auton ocloi polloi wste auton eis 2 And great multitudes were
kai sunEchthEsan pros auton ochloi polloi hOste auton eis
G2532 G4863 G4314 G846 G3793 G4183 G5620 G846 G1519
gathered together unto him, so
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl Prep pp Acc Sg m n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Conj pp Acc Sg m Prep that he went into a ship, and
AND WERE-TOGETHER-LED TOWARD Him THRONGS MANY AS-BESIDES Him INTO sat; and the whole multitude
were-gathered vast so-that stood on the shore.
to ploion embanta kaqhsqai kai pas o oclos epi

to ploion embanta kathEsthai kai pas ho ochlos epi
G3588 G4143 G1684 G2521 G2532 G3956 G3588 G3793 G1909
t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg m vn Pres midD/pasD Conj a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep
THE FLOATer IN-STEPPing TO-BE-sittING AND EVERY THE THRONG ON
ship stepping-in entire
ton aigialon eisthkei

ton aigialon heistEkei
G3588 G123 G2476
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Plup Act 3 Sg
THE BEACH HAD-STOOD
stood
13:3 kai elalhsen autois polla en parabolais legwn idou 3 And he spake many things
kai elalEsen autois polla en parabolais legOn idou
G2532 G2980 G846 G4183 G1722 G3850 G3004 G2400
unto them in parables, saying,
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m a_ Acc Pl n Prep n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Behold, a sower went forth to
AND He-TALKS to-them MANY IN BESIDE-CASTS sayING BE-PERCEIVING sow;
he-speaks many-things parables lo !
exhlqen o speirwn tou speirein

exElthen ho speirOn tou speirein
G1831 G3588 G4687 G3588 G4687
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m vn Pres Act
OUT-CAME THE one-SOWING OF-THE TO-BE-SOWING
came-out one-sowing
13:4 kai en tw speirein auton a men epesen para thn 4 And when he sowed, some
kai en tO speirein auton ha men epesen para tEn
G2532 G1722 G3588 G4687 G846 G3739 G3303 G4098 G3844 G3588
[seeds] fell by the way side,
Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg n vn Pres Act pp Acc Sg m pr Nom Pl n Part vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f and the fowls came and
AND IN THE TO-BE-SOWING him WHICH INDEED FALLS BESIDE THE devoured them up:
which(p)
odon kai hlqen ta peteina kai katefagen auta

hodon kai Elthen ta peteina kai katephagen auta
G3598 G2532 G2064 G3588 G4071 G2532 G2719 G846
n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl n
WAY AND CAME THE flyers AND DOWN-ATE them
road flying-creatures devoured
13:5 alla de epesen epi ta petrwdh opou ouk eicen 5 Some fell upon stony places,
alla de epesen epi ta petrOdE hopou ouk eichen
G243 G1161 G4098 G1909 G3588 G4075 G3699 G3756 G2192
where they had not much earth:
a_ Nom Pl n Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n Adv Part Neg vi Impf Act 3 Sg and forthwith they sprung up,
others YET FALLS ON THE ROCK-PERCEIVEDS THE-?-where NOT it-HAD because they had no deepness
it-falls rocky-places wheree of earth:
ghn pollhn kai euqews exaneteilen dia to mh ecein

gEn pollEn kai eutheOs exaneteilen dia to mE echein
G1093 G4183 G2532 G2112 G1816 G1223 G3588 G3361 G2192
n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n Part Neg vn Pres Act
LAND much AND immediately it-OUT-risES THRU THE NO TO-BE-HAVING
earth it-shoots-up because-of
baqos ghs
bathos gEs
G899 G1093
n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg f
DEPTH OF-LAND
of-earth
13:6 hliou de anateilantos ekaumatisqh kai dia to mh 6 And when the sun was up,
hEliou de anateilantos ekaumatisthE kai dia to mE
G2246 G1161 G393 G2739 G2532 G1223 G3588 G3361
they were scorched; and
n_ Gen Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Gen Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg n Part Neg because they had no root, they
OF-SUN YET UP-rising it-IS-BURNizED AND THRU THE NO withered away.
rising it-is-scorched because-of
Matthew 13
ecein rizan exhranqh

echein rizan exEranthE
G2192 G4491 G3583
vn Pres Act n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
TO-BE-HAVING ROOT it-IS-DRIED
it-is-withered
13:7 alla de epesen epi tas akanqas kai anebhsan ai 7 And some fell among thorns;
alla de epesen epi tas akanthas kai anebEsan hai
G243 G1161 G4098 G1909 G3588 G173 G2532 G305 G3588
and the thorns sprung up, and
a_ Nom Pl n Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f choked them:
others YET FALLS ON THE POINT-FLOWERS AND UP-STEPPed THE
it-falls thorns came-up
akanqai kai apepnixan auta

akanthai kai apepnixan auta
G173 G2532 G638 G846
n_ Nom Pl f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Pl n
POINT-FLOWERS AND FROM-CHOKE them
thorns smother
13:8 alla de epesen epi thn ghn thn kalhn kai edidou 8 But other fell into good
alla de epesen epi tEn gEn tEn kalEn kai edidou
G243 G1161 G4098 G1909 G3588 G1093 G3588 G2570 G2532 G1325
ground, and brought forth fruit,
a_ Nom Pl n Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg some an hundredfold, some
others YET FALLS ON THE LAND THE IDEAL AND GAVE sixtyfold, some thirtyfold.
it-falls earth
karpon o men ekaton o de exhkonta o de triakonta

karpon ho men hekaton ho de hexEkonta ho de triakonta
G2590 G3739 G3303 G1540 G3739 G1161 G1835 G3739 G1161 G5144
n_ Acc Sg m pr Acc Sg n Part a_ Nom pr Acc Sg n Conj a_ Nom pr Acc Sg n Conj a_ Nom
FRUIT WHICH INDEED HUNDRED WHICH YET SIX-TY WHICH YET THREE-TY
sixty thirtyfold
13:9 o ecwn wta akouein akouetw 9 Who hath ears to hear, let
ho echOn Ota akouein akouetO
G3588 G2192 G3775 G191 G191
him hear.
t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Pl n vn Pres Act vm Pres Act 3 Sg
THE one-HAVING EARS TO-BE-HEARING LET-him-BE-HEARING
13:10 kai proselqontes oi maqhtai eipon autw dia ti en 10 And the disciples came, and
kai proselthontes hoi mathEtai eipon autO dia ti en
G2532 G4334 G3588 G3101 G2036 G846 G1223 G5101 G1722
said unto him, Why speakest
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Prep pi Acc Sg n Prep thou unto them in parables?
AND TOWARD-COMING THE LEARNers said to-Him THRU ANY IN
approaching disciples because-of what ?
parabolais laleis autois

parabolais laleis autois
G3850 G2980 G846
n_ Dat Pl f vi Pres Act 2 Sg pp Dat Pl m
BESIDE-CASTS YOU-ARE-TALKING to-them
parables you-are-speaking
13:11 o de apokriqeis eipen autois oti umin dedotai 11 He answered and said unto
ho de apokritheis eipen autois hoti humin dedotai
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G846 G3754 G5213 G1325
them, Because it is given unto
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj pp 2 Dat Pl vi Perf Pas 3 Sg you to know the mysteries of
THE YET answerING He-said to-them that to-YOU(p) HAS-been-GIVEN the kingdom of heaven, but to
to-ye them it is not given.
gnwnai ta musthria ths basileias twn ouranwn ekeinois de ou

gnOnai ta mustEria tEs basileias tOn ouranOn ekeinois de ou
G1097 G3588 G3466 G3588 G932 G3588 G3772 G1565 G1161 G3756
vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pd Dat Pl m Conj Part Neg
TO-KNOW THE CLOSE-KEEPS OF-THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens to-those YET NOT
secrets
dedotai
dedotai
G1325
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
it-HAS-been-GIVEN
13:12 ostis gar ecei doqhsetai autw kai perisseuqhsetai 12 For whosoever hath, to him
hostis gar echei dothEsetai autO kai perisseuthEsetai
G3748 G1063 G2192 G1325 G846 G2532 G4052
shall be given, and he shall
pr Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg have more abundance: but
WHO-ANY for IS-HAVING SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-him AND he-SHALL-BE-BEING-exceedED whosoever hath not, from him
anyone-who he-shall-be-having-a-superfluity shall be taken away even that
he hath.
ostis de ouk ecei kai o ecei arqhsetai ap
hostis de ouk echei kai ho echei arthEsetai ap
G3748 G1161 G3756 G2192 G2532 G3739 G2192 G142 G575
pr Nom Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj pr Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep
WHO-ANY YET NOT IS-HAVING AND WHICH he-IS-HAVING SHALL-BE-BEING-LIFTED FROM
anyone-who also shall-be-being-taken-away
Matthew 13
autou
autou
G846
pp Gen Sg m
him
13:13 dia touto en parabolais autois lalw oti blepontes ou 13 Therefore speak I to them in
dia touto en parabolais autois lalO hoti blepontes ou
G1223 G5124 G1722 G3850 G846 G2980 G3754 G991 G3756
parables: because they seeing
Prep pd Acc Sg n Prep n_ Dat Pl f pp Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Part Neg see not; and hearing they hear
THRU this IN BESIDE-CASTS to-them I-AM-TALKING that lookING NOT not, neither do they
because-of parables I-am-speaking observing understand.
blepousin kai akouontes ouk akouousin oude suniousin

blepousin kai akouontes ouk akouousin oude suniousin
G991 G2532 G191 G3756 G191 G3761 G4920
vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Pl Adv vi Pres Act 3 Pl
THEY-ARE-lookING AND HEARING NOT THEY-ARE-HEARING NOT-YET THEY-ARE-understandING
they-are-observing neither
13:14 kai anaplhroutai ep autois h profhteia hsaiou h 14 And in them is fulfilled the
kai anaplEroutai ep autois hE prophEteia Esaiou hE
G2532 G378 G1909 G846 G3588 G4394 G2268 G3588
prophecy of Esaias, which
Conj vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Prep pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg f saith, By hearing ye shall hear,
AND IS-beING-UP-FILLED ON them THE BEFORE-AVERment OF-ISAIAH THE and shall not understand; and
is-being-filled-up prophecy seeing ye shall see, and shall
not perceive:
legousa akoh akousete kai ou mh sunhte kai
legousa akoE akousete kai ou mE sunEte kai
G3004 G189 G191 G2532 G3756 G3361 G4920 G2532
vp Pres Act Nom Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi Fut Act 2 Pl Conj Part Neg Part Neg vs 2Aor vxx 2 Pl Conj
sayING to-HEARing YE-SHALL-BE-HEARING AND NOT NO YE-MAY-BE-understandING AND
may-be-understanding
blepontes bleyete kai ou mh idhte

blepontes blepsete kai ou mE idEte
G991 G991 G2532 G3756 G3361 G1492
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vi Fut Act 2 Pl Conj Part Neg Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
lookING YE-SHALL-BE-lookING AND NOT NO YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING
observing ye-shall-be-observing may-be-perceiving
13:15 epacunqh gar h kardia tou laou toutou kai tois wsin 15 For this people's heart is
epachunthE gar hE kardia tou laou toutou kai tois Osin
G3975 G1063 G3588 G2588 G3588 G2992 G5127 G2532 G3588 G3775
waxed gross, and [their] ears
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m Conj t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n are dull of hearing, and their
IS-STOUTenED for THE HEART OF-THE PEOPLE this AND to-THE EARS eyes they have closed; lest at
any time they should see with
[their] eyes, and hear with
barews hkousan kai tous ofqalmous autwn ekammusan mhpote [their] ears, and should
bareOs Ekousan kai tous ophthalmous autOn ekammusan mEpote understand with [their] heart,
G917 G191 G2532 G3588 G3788 G846 G2576 G3379
Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Adv and should be converted, and I
HEAVIly THEY-HEAR AND THE VIEWers OF-them THEY-shut NO-?-when should heal them.
eyes lest-at-some-time
idwsin tois ofqalmois kai tois wsin akouswsin kai

idOsin tois ophthalmois kai tois Osin akousOsin kai
G1492 G3588 G3788 G2532 G3588 G3775 G191 G2532
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Conj t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n vs Aor Act 3 Pl Conj
THEY-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING to-THE VIEWers AND to-THE EARS THEY-SHOULD-BE-HEARING AND
eyes should-be-hearing
th kardia sunwsin kai epistreywsin kai iaswmai

tE kardia sunOsin kai epistrepsOsin kai iasOmai
G3588 G2588 G4920 G2532 G1994 G2532 G2390
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vs Aor midD 1 Sg
to-THE HEART THEY-MAY-BE-understandING AND THEY-SHOULD-BE-ON-TURNING AND I-SHOULD BE-HEALING
may-be-understanding should-be-turning-about I-should-be-healing
autous
autous
G846
pp Acc Pl m
them
13:16 umwn de makarioi oi ofqalmoi oti blepousin kai ta 16 But blessed [are] your eyes,
humOn de makarioi hoi ophthalmoi hoti blepousin kai ta
G5216 G1161 G3107 G3588 G3788 G3754 G991 G2532 G3588
for they see: and your ears, for
pp 2 Gen Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl n they hear.
OF-YOU(p) YET HAPPY THE VIEWers that THEY-ARE-lookING AND THE
of-ye happy-are eyes they-are-observing
wta umwn oti akouei

Ota humOn hoti akouei
G3775 G5216 G3754 G191
n_ Nom Pl n pp 2 Gen Pl Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
EARS OF-YOU(p) that it-IS-HEARING
of-ye
Matthew 13
13:17 amhn gar legw umin oti polloi profhtai kai dikaioi 17 For verily I say unto you,
amEn gar legO humin hoti polloi prophEtai kai dikaioi
G281 G1063 G3004 G5213 G3754 G4183 G4396 G2532 G1342
That many prophets and
Hebrew Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m righteous [men] have desired
AMEN for I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that MANY BEFORE-AVERers AND JUST to see [those things] which ye
verily to-ye prophets just-men see, and have not seen [them];
and to hear [those things]
epequmhsan idein a blepete kai ouk eidon kai which ye hear, and have not
epethumEsan idein ha blepete kai ouk eidon kai heard [them].
G1937 G1492 G3739 G991 G2532 G3756 G1492 G2532
vi Aor Act 3 Pl vn 2Aor Act pr Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj
ON-FEEL TO-BE-PERCEIVING WHICH YE-ARE-lookING AND NOT THEY-PERCEIVED AND
yearn which(p) ye-are-observing
akousai a akouete kai ouk hkousan

akousai ha akouete kai ouk Ekousan
G191 G3739 G191 G2532 G3756 G191
vn Aor Act pr Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Pl
TO-HEAR WHICH YE-ARE-HEARING AND NOT THEY-HEAR
which(p)
13:18 umeis oun akousate thn parabolhn tou speirontos 18 Hear ye therefore the
humeis oun akousate tEn parabolEn tou speirontos
G5210 G3767 G191 G3588 G3850 G3588 G4687
parable of the sower.
pp 2 Nom Pl Conj vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m
YOU(p) THEN HEAR THE BESIDE-CAST OF-THE SOWING
ye hear-ye ! parable one-sowing
13:19 pantos akouontos ton logon ths basileias kai mh 19 When any one heareth the
pantos akouontos ton logon tEs basileias kai mE
G3956 G191 G3588 G3056 G3588 G932 G2532 G3361
word of the kingdom, and
a_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj Part Neg understandeth [it] not, then
OF-EVERY one-HEARING THE saying OF-THE KINGdom AND NO cometh the wicked [one], and
one-hearing word catcheth away that which was
sown in his heart. This is he
sunientos ercetai o ponhros kai arpazei to which received seed by the
sunientos erchetai ho ponEros kai harpazei to way side.
G4920 G2064 G3588 G4190 G2532 G726 G3588
vp Pres Act Gen Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
OF-understandING IS-COMING THE wicked-one AND IS-SNATCHING THE
understanding wicked-one
esparmenon en th kardia autou outos estin o para

esparmenon en tE kardia autou houtos estin ho para
G4687 G1722 G3588 G2588 G846 G3778 G2076 G3588 G3844
vp Perf Pas Acc Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m pd Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m Prep
HAVING-been-SOWN IN THE HEART OF-him this IS THE-one BESIDE
the-one
thn odon spareis

tEn hodon spareis
G3588 G3598 G4687
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg m
THE WAY BEING-SOWN
road
13:20 o de epi ta petrwdh spareis outos estin 20 But he that received the
ho de epi ta petrOdE spareis houtos estin
G3588 G1161 G1909 G3588 G4075 G4687 G3778 G2076
seed into stony places, the
t_ Nom Sg m Conj Prep t_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg same is he that heareth the
THE YET ON THE ROCK-PERCEIVEDS BEING-SOWN this IS word, and anon with joy
the-one rocky-places receiveth it;
o ton logon akouwn kai euqus meta caras lambanwn

ho ton logon akouOn kai euthus meta charas lambanOn
G3588 G3588 G3056 G191 G2532 G2117 G3326 G5479 G2983
t_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj Adv Prep n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
THE-one THE saying HEARING AND straightway WITH JOY GETTING-UP
the-one word getting
auton
auton
G846
pp Acc Sg m
him
13:21 ouk ecei de rizan en eautw alla proskairos estin 21 Yet hath he not root in
ouk echei de rizan en heautO alla proskairos estin
G3756 G2192 G1161 G4491 G1722 G1438 G235 G4340 G2076
himself, but dureth for a while:
Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Acc Sg f Prep pf 3 Dat Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg for when tribulation or
NOT IS-HAVING YET ROOT IN self but TOWARD-SEASON IS persecution ariseth because of
he-is-having himself temporary the word, by and by he is
offended.
genomenhs de qliyews h diwgmou dia ton logon euqus
genomenEs de thlipseOs E diOgmou dia ton logon euthus
G1096 G1161 G2347 G2228 G1375 G1223 G3588 G3056 G2117
vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f Part n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Adv
OF-BECOMING YET CONSTRICTION OR OF-CHASE-ing THRU THE saying straightway
of-affliction of-persecution because-of word
Matthew 13
skandalizetai
skandalizetai
G4624
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
he-IS-beING-SNARED
13:22 o de eis tas akanqas spareis outos estin 22 He also that received seed
ho de eis tas akanthas spareis houtos estin
G3588 G1161 G1519 G3588 G173 G4687 G3778 G2076
among the thorns is he that
t_ Nom Sg m Conj Prep t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg heareth the word; and the care
THE YET INTO THE POINT-FLOWERS BEING-SOWN this IS of this world, and the
the-one thorns deceitfulness of riches, choke
the word, and he becometh
o ton logon akouwn kai h merimna tou aiwnos unfruitful.
ho ton logon akouOn kai hE merimna tou aiOnos
G3588 G3588 G3056 G191 G2532 G3588 G3308 G3588 G165
t_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
THE-one THE saying HEARING AND THE anxiety OF-THE eon
the-one word worry
toutou kai h apath tou ploutou sumpnigei ton logon

toutou kai hE apatE tou ploutou sumpnigei ton logon
G5127 G2532 G3588 G539 G3588 G4149 G4846 G3588 G3056
pd Gen Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
this AND THE SEDUCtion OF-THE RICHES IS-TOGETHER-CHOKING THE saying
is-stifling word
kai akarpos ginetai

kai akarpos ginetai
G2532 G175 G1096
Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
AND UN-FRUITful it-IS-BECOMING
unfruitful
13:23 o de epi thn ghn thn kalhn spareis outos 23 But he that received seed
ho de epi tEn gEn tEn kalEn spareis houtos
G3588 G1161 G1909 G3588 G1093 G3588 G2570 G4687 G3778
into the good ground is he that
t_ Nom Sg m Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m heareth the word, and
THE YET ON THE LAND THE IDEAL BEING-SOWN this understandeth [it]; which also
the-one earth beareth fruit, and bringeth
forth, some an hundredfold,
estin o ton logon akouwn kai suniwn os some sixty, some thirty.
estin ho ton logon akouOn kai suniOn hos
G2076 G3588 G3588 G3056 G191 G2532 G4920 G3739
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pr Nom Sg m
IS THE-one THE saying HEARING AND understandING WHO
the-one word
dh karpoforei kai poiei o men ekaton o de

dE karpophorei kai poiei ho men hekaton ho de
G1211 G2592 G2532 G4160 G3739 G3303 G1540 G3739 G1161
Part vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pr Nom Sg n Part a_ Nom pr Nom Sg n Conj
BIND IS-FRUIT-CARRYING AND IS-DOING WHICH INDEED HUNDRED WHICH YET
by-all-means is-bearing-fruit is-producing
exhkonta o de triakonta
hexEkonta ho de triakonta
G1835 G3739 G1161 G5144
a_ Nom pr Nom Sg n Conj a_ Nom
SIX-TY WHICH YET THREE-TY
sixty thirtyfold
13:24 allhn parabolhn pareqhken autois legwn wmoiwqh h 24 . Another parable put he
allEn parabolEn parethEken autois legOn hOmoiOthE hE
G243 G3850 G3908 G846 G3004 G3666 G3588
forth unto them, saying, The
a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f kingdom of heaven is likened
other BESIDE-CAST He-BESIDE-PLACES to-them sayING WAS-LIKenED THE unto a man which sowed good
another parable he-places-before them seed in his field:
basileia twn ouranwn anqrwpw speiranti kalon sperma en tw

basileia tOn ouranOn anthrOpO speiranti kalon sperma en tO
G932 G3588 G3772 G444 G4687 G2570 G4690 G1722 G3588
n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg m vp Aor Act Dat Sg m a_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg m
KINGdom OF-THE heavens to-human SOWing IDEAL seed IN THE
agrw autou
agrO autou
G68 G846
n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m
FIELD OF-him
13:25 en de tw kaqeudein tous anqrwpous hlqen autou 25 But while men slept, his
en de tO katheudein tous anthrOpous Elthen autou
G1722 G1161 G3588 G2518 G3588 G444 G2064 G846
enemy came and sowed tares
Prep Conj t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres Act t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m among the wheat, and went his
IN YET THE TO-BE-DOWN-LOUNGING THE humans CAME OF-him way.
to-be-drowsing
Matthew 13
o ecqros kai espeiren zizania ana meson tou sitou kai

ho echthros kai espeiren zizania ana meson tou sitou kai
G3588 G2190 G2532 G4687 G2215 G303 G3319 G3588 G4621 G2532
t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl n Prep a_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj
THE enemy AND SOWS BEARDED-DARNELS UP MIDst OF-THE GRAIN AND
the
aphlqen
apElthen
G565
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
FROM-CAME
came-away
13:26 ote de eblasthsen o cortos kai karpon epoihsen tote 26 But when the blade was
hote de eblastEsen ho chortos kai karpon epoiEsen tote
G3753 G1161 G985 G3588 G5528 G2532 G2590 G4160 G5119
sprung up, and brought forth
Adv Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv fruit, then appeared the tares
when YET GERMINATES THE FODDER AND FRUIT DOES then also.
blade produces
efanh kai ta zizania

ephanE kai ta zizania
G5316 G2532 G3588 G2215
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n
APPEARed AND THE BEARDED-DARNELS
also
13:27 proselqontes de oi douloi tou oikodespotou eipon 27 So the servants of the

proselthontes de hoi douloi tou oikodespotou eipon
G4334 G1161 G3588 G1401 G3588 G3617 G2036
householder came and said
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl unto him, Sir, didst not thou
TOWARD-COMING YET THE SLAVES OF-THE HOME-OWNER said sow good seed in thy field?
approaching householder from whence then hath it tares?
autw kurie ouci kalon sperma espeiras en tw sw agrw

autO kurie ouchi kalon sperma espeiras en tO sO agrO
G846 G2962 G3780 G2570 G4690 G4687 G1722 G3588 G4674 G68
pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m Part Int a_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m ps 2 Dat Sg n_ Dat Sg m
to-him master ! NOT(emph.) IDEAL seed YOU-SOW IN THE YOUR FIELD
Lord !
poqen oun ecei ta zizania

pothen oun echei ta zizania
G4159 G3767 G2192 G3588 G2215
Adv Int Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
?-WHICH-PLACE THEN IS-HAVING THE BEARDED-DARNELS
whence ? he-is-having
13:28 o de efh autois ecqros anqrwpos touto epoihsen oi 28 He said unto them, An
ho de ephE autois echthros anthrOpos touto epoiEsen hoi
G3588 G1161 G5346 G846 G2190 G444 G5124 G4160 G3588
enemy hath done this. The
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pd Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl m servants said unto him, Wilt
THE YET he-AVERRed to-them enemy human this DOES THE thou then that we go and gather
them up?
de douloi eipon autw qeleis oun apelqontes

de douloi eipon autO theleis oun apelthontes
G1161 G1401 G2036 G846 G2309 G3767 G565
Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Sg Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
YET SLAVES said to-him YOU-ARE-WILLING THEN FROM-COMING
coming-away
sullexwmen auta
sullexOmen auta
G4816 G846
vs Aor Act 1 Pl pp Acc Pl n
WE-SHOULD-BE-TOGETHER-collectING them
we-should-be-culling
13:29 o de efh ou mhpote sullegontes ta 29 But he said, Nay; lest while

ho de ephE ou mEpote sullegontes ta
G3588 G1161 G5346 G3756 G3379 G4816 G3588
ye gather up the tares, ye root
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Part Neg Adv vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl n up also the wheat with them.
THE YET he-AVERRed NOT NO-?-when TOGETHER-collectING THE
not lest-at-some-time culling
zizania ekrizwshte ama autois ton siton

zizania ekrizOsEte hama autois ton siton
G2215 G1610 G260 G846 G3588 G4621
n_ Acc Pl n vs Aor Act 2 Pl Adv pp Dat Pl n t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
BEARDED-DARNELS YE-SHOULD-BE-OUT-ROOTING SIMULTANEOUS to-them THE GRAIN
ye-should-be-rooting-up at-the-same-time
13:30 afete sunauxanesqai amfotera mecri tou qerismou kai 30 Let both grow together until
aphete sunauxanesthai amphotera mechri tou therismou kai
G863 G4885 G297 G3360 G3588 G2326 G2532
the harvest: and in the time of
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl vn Pres Pas a_ Acc Pl n Adv t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj harvest I will say to the
FROM-LET TO-BE-TOGETHER-GROWING-UP both UNTO THE harvest AND reapers, Gather ye together
leave-ye ! to-be-growing-up-together first the tares, and bind them in
Matthew 13
bundles to burn them: but

en tw kairw tou qerismou erw tois qeristais gather the wheat into my barn.
en tO kairO tou therismou erO tois theristais
G1722 G3588 G2540 G3588 G2326 G2046 G3588 G2327
Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Act 1 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
IN THE SEASON OF-THE harvest I-SHALL-BE-declarING to-THE reapers
sullexate prwton ta zizania kai dhsate auta eis desmas

sullexate prOton ta zizania kai dEsate auta eis desmas
G4816 G4412 G3588 G2215 G2532 G1210 G846 G1519 G1197
vm Aor Act 2 Pl Adv t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Conj vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp Acc Pl n Prep n_ Acc Pl f
TOGETHER-collect BEFORE-most THE BEARDED-DARNELS AND BIND them INTO bundles
cull-ye ! first bind-ye !
pros to katakausai auta ton de siton sunagagete eis

pros to katakausai auta ton de siton sunagagete eis
G4314 G3588 G2618 G846 G3588 G1161 G4621 G4863 G1519
Prep t_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Act pp Acc Pl n t_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep
TOWARD THE TO-DOWN-BURN them THE YET GRAIN BE-TOGETHER-LEADING INTO
to-burn-up be-ye-gathering !
thn apoqhkhn mou

tEn apothEkEn mou
G3588 G596 G3450
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg
THE FROM-PLACE OF-ME
barn
13:31 allhn parabolhn pareqhken autois legwn omoia estin 31 Another parable put he forth
allEn parabolEn parethEken autois legOn homoia estin
G243 G3850 G3908 G846 G3004 G3664 G2076
unto them, saying, The
a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg kingdom of heaven is like to a
other BESIDE-CAST He-BESIDE-PLACES to-them sayING LIKE IS grain of mustard seed, which a
another parable he-places-before them man took, and sowed in his
field:
h basileia twn ouranwn kokkw sinapews on labwn
hE basileia tOn ouranOn kokkO sinapeOs hon labOn
G3588 G932 G3588 G3772 G2848 G4615 G3739 G2983
t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg m n_ Gen Sg n pr Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens to-KERNEL OF-MUSTARD WHICH GETTING
anqrwpos espeiren en tw agrw autou

anthrOpos espeiren en tO agrO autou
G444 G4687 G1722 G3588 G68 G846
n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m
human SOWS IN THE FIELD OF-him
13:32 o mikroteron men estin pantwn twn spermatwn otan 32 Which indeed is the least of
ho mikroteron men estin pantOn tOn spermatOn hotan
G3739 G3398 G3303 G2076 G3956 G3588 G4690 G3752
all seeds: but when it is grown,
pr Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n Cmp Part vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Gen Pl n t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n Conj it is the greatest among herbs,
WHICH LITTLER INDEED IS OF-ALL OF-THE seeds when-EVER and becometh a tree, so that
smaller the whenever the birds of the air come and
lodge in the branches thereof.
de auxhqh meizon twn lacanwn estin kai ginetai
de auxEthE meizon tOn lachanOn estin kai ginetai
G1161 G837 G3173 G3588 G3001 G2076 G2532 G1096
Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg n Cmp t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
YET MAY-BE-BEING-GROWN GREATer OF-THE GREENS IS AND IS-BECOMING
it-may-be-being-grown
dendron wste elqein ta peteina tou ouranou kai

dendron hOste elthein ta peteina tou ouranou kai
G1186 G5620 G2064 G3588 G4071 G3588 G3772 G2532
n_ Nom Sg n Conj vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj
TREE AS-BESIDES TO-BE-COMING THE flyers OF-THE heaven AND
so-that flying-creatures
kataskhnoun en tois kladois autou

kataskEnoun en tois kladois autou
G2681 G1722 G3588 G2798 G846
vn Pres Act Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg n
TO-BE-DOWN-BOOTHING IN THE boughs OF-it
to-be-roosting among
13:33 allhn parabolhn elalhsen autois omoia estin h basileia 33 Another parable spake he
allEn parabolEn elalEsen autois homoia estin hE basileia
G243 G3850 G2980 G846 G3664 G2076 G3588 G932
unto them; The kingdom of
a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m a_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f heaven is like unto leaven,
other BESIDE-CAST He-TALKS to-them LIKE IS THE KINGdom which a woman took, and hid
another parable he-speaks in three measures of meal, till
the whole was leavened.
twn ouranwn zumh hn labousa gunh enekruyen eis aleurou
tOn ouranOn zumE hEn labousa gunE enekrupsen eis aleurou
G3588 G3772 G2219 G3739 G2983 G1135 G1470 G1519 G224
t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg f pr Acc Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Gen Sg n
OF-THE heavens to-FERMENT WHICH GETTING WOMAN she-IN-HIDES INTO OF-MEAL
to-leaven hides-in
Matthew 13
sata tria ews ou ezumwqh olon

sata tria heOs hou ezumOthE holon
G4568 G5140 G2193 G3739 G2220 G3650
n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n Conj pr Gen Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg n
SATONS THREE TILL OF-WHICH WAS-FERMENTED WHOLE
seahs which was-leavened
13:34 tauta panta elalhsen o ihsous en parabolais tois oclois 34 All these things spake Jesus
tauta panta elalEsen ho iEsous en parabolais tois ochlois
G5023 G3956 G2980 G3588 G2424 G1722 G3850 G3588 G3793
unto the multitude in parables;
pd Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Dat Pl f t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m and without a parable spake he
these ALL TALKS THE JESUS IN BESIDE-CASTS to-THE THRONGS not unto them:
these-things speaks parables
kai cwris parabolhs ouk elalei autois

kai chOris parabolEs ouk elalei autois
G2532 G5565 G3850 G3756 G2980 G846
Conj Adv n_ Gen Sg f Part Neg vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m
AND apart-from BESIDE-CAST NOT He-TALKED to-them
parable he-spoke
13:35 opws plhrwqh to rhqen dia tou profhtou 35 That it might be fulfilled
hopOs plErOthE to rEthen dia tou prophEtou
G3704 G4137 G3588 G4483 G1223 G3588 G4396
which was spoken by the
Adv vs Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m prophet, saying, I will open my
WHICH-how MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE BEING-declarED THRU THE BEFORE-AVERer mouth in parables; I will utter
so-that may-be-being-fulfilled through prophet things which have been kept
secret from the foundation of
legontos anoixw en parabolais to stoma mou the world.
legontos anoixO en parabolais to stoma mou
G3004 G455 G1722 G3850 G3588 G4750 G3450
vp Pres Act Gen Sg n vi Fut Act 1 Sg Prep n_ Dat Pl f t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg
sayING I-SHALL-BE-UP-OPENING IN BESIDE-CASTS THE MOUTH OF-ME
I-shall-be-opening parables
ereuxomai kekrummena apo katabolhs kosmou

ereuxomai kekrummena apo katabolEs kosmou
G2044 G2928 G575 G2602 G2889
vi Fut midD 1 Sg vp Perf Pas Acc Pl n Prep n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
I-SHALL-BE-BELCHING HAVING-been-HID FROM DOWN-CASTing OF-SYSTEM
I-shall-be-emitting things-having-been-hid disruption of-world
13:36 tote afeis tous oclous hlqen eis thn oikian o 36 Then Jesus sent the
tote apheis tous ochlous Elthen eis tEn oikian ho
G5119 G863 G3588 G3793 G2064 G1519 G3588 G3614 G3588
multitude away, and went into
Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg m the house: and his disciples
then FROM-LETTING THE THRONGS CAME INTO THE HOME THE came unto him, saying, Declare
leaving house unto us the parable of the tares
of the field.
ihsous kai proshlqon autw oi maqhtai autou legontes
iEsous kai prosElthon autO hoi mathEtai autou legontes
G2424 G2532 G4334 G846 G3588 G3101 G846 G3004
n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
JESUS AND TOWARD-CAME to-Him THE LEARNers OF-Him sayING
came-to him disciples
frason hmin thn parabolhn twn zizaniwn tou agrou

phrason hEmin tEn parabolEn tOn zizaniOn tou agrou
G5419 G2254 G3588 G3850 G3588 G2215 G3588 G68
vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
DECIPHER to-US THE BESIDE-CAST OF-THE BEARDED-DARNELS OF-THE FIELD
decipher-you ! parable
13:37 o de apokriqeis eipen autois o speirwn to 37 He answered and said unto

ho de apokritheis eipen autois ho speirOn to
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G846 G3588 G4687 G3588
them, He that soweth the good
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n seed is the Son of man;
THE YET answerING He-said to-them THE One-SOWING THE
one-sowing
kalon sperma estin o uios tou anqrwpou

kalon sperma estin ho huios tou anthrOpou
G2570 G4690 G2076 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444
a_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
IDEAL seed IS THE SON OF-THE human
13:38 o de agros estin o kosmos to de kalon 38 The field is the world; the
ho de agros estin ho kosmos to de kalon
G3588 G1161 G68 G2076 G3588 G2889 G3588 G1161 G2570
good seed are the children of
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg n Conj a_ Nom Sg n the kingdom; but the tares are
THE YET FIELD IS THE SYSTEM THE YET IDEAL the children of the wicked
world [one];
sperma outoi eisin oi uioi ths basileias ta de

sperma houtoi eisin hoi huioi tEs basileias ta de
G4690 G3778 G1526 G3588 G5207 G3588 G932 G3588 G1161
n_ Nom Sg n pd Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Nom Pl n Conj
seed these ARE THE SONS OF-THE KINGdom THE YET
Matthew 13
zizania eisin oi uioi tou ponhrou

zizania eisin hoi huioi tou ponErou
G2215 G1526 G3588 G5207 G3588 G4190
n_ Nom Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m
BEARDED-DARNELS ARE THE SONS OF-THE wicked-one
wicked-one
13:39 o de ecqros o speiras auta estin o 39 The enemy that sowed them
ho de echthros ho speiras auta estin ho
G3588 G1161 G2190 G3588 G4687 G846 G2076 G3588
is the devil; the harvest is the
t_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m end of the world; and the
THE YET enemy THE SOWing them IS THE reapers are the angels.
the-one
diabolos o de qerismos sunteleia tou aiwnos estin

diabolos ho de therismos sunteleia tou aiOnos estin
G1228 G3588 G1161 G2326 G4930 G3588 G165 G2076
a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THRU-CASTer THE YET harvest TOGETHER-FINISH OF-THE eon IS
Adversary conclusion
oi de qeristai aggeloi eisin

hoi de theristai aggeloi eisin
G3588 G1161 G2327 G32 G1526
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
THE YET reapers MESSENGERS ARE
13:40 wsper oun sullegetai ta zizania kai puri 40 As therefore the tares are
hOsper oun sullegetai ta zizania kai puri
G5618 G3767 G4816 G3588 G2215 G2532 G4442
gathered and burned in the fire;
Adv Conj vi Pres Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n Conj n_ Dat Sg n so shall it be in the end of this
AS-EVEN THEN IS-beING-TOGETHER-collectED THE BEARDED-DARNELS AND to-FIRE world.
even-as is-being-culled
katakaietai outws estai en th sunteleia tou aiwnos

katakaietai houtOs estai en tE sunteleia tou aiOnos
G2618 G3779 G2071 G1722 G3588 G4930 G3588 G165
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
IS-beING-DOWN-BURNED thus it-SHALL-BE IN THE TOGETHER-FINISH OF-THE eon
is-being-burned-up conclusion
toutou
toutou
G5127
pd Gen Sg m
this
13:41 apostelei o uios tou anqrwpou tous aggelous 41 The Son of man shall send
apostelei ho huios tou anthrOpou tous aggelous
G649 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G3588 G32
forth his angels, and they shall
vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m gather out of his kingdom all
SHALL-BE-commissionING THE SON OF-THE human THE MESSENGERS things that offend, and them
shall-be-dispatching which do iniquity;
autou kai sullexousin ek ths basileias autou panta

autou kai sullexousin ek tEs basileias autou panta
G846 G2532 G4816 G1537 G3588 G932 G846 G3956
pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m a_ Acc Pl n
OF-Him AND THEY-SHALL-BE-TOGETHER-collectING OUT OF-THE KINGdom OF-Him ALL
they-shall-be-culling
ta skandala kai tous poiountas thn anomian

ta skandala kai tous poiountas tEn anomian
G3588 G4625 G2532 G3588 G4160 G3588 G458
t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Conj t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
THE SNARES AND THE-ones DOING THE UN-LAWness
the-ones lawlessness
13:42 kai balousin autous eis thn kaminon tou puros ekei 42 And shall cast them into a
kai balousin autous eis tEn kaminon tou puros ekei
G2532 G906 G846 G1519 G3588 G2575 G3588 G4442 G1563
furnace of fire: there shall be
Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp Acc Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Adv wailing and gnashing of teeth.
AND THEY-SHALL-BE-CASTING them INTO THE BURNer OF-THE FIRE there
furnace
estai o klauqmos kai o brugmos twn odontwn

estai ho klauthmos kai ho brugmos tOn odontOn
G2071 G3588 G2805 G2532 G3588 G1030 G3588 G3599
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
SHALL-BE THE LAMENTing AND THE GNASHing OF-THE TEETH
lamentation
13:43 tote oi dikaioi eklamyousin ws o hlios en th 43 Then shall the righteous

tote hoi dikaioi eklampsousin hOs ho hElios en tE
G5119 G3588 G1342 G1584 G5613 G3588 G2246 G1722 G3588
shine forth as the sun in the
Adv t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f kingdom of their Father. Who
then THE JUST SHALL-BE-OUT-SHINING AS THE SUN IN THE hath ears to hear, let him hear.
just-ones shall-be-shining-out
Matthew 13
basileia tou patros autwn o ecwn wta akouein

basileia tou patros autOn ho echOn Ota akouein
G932 G3588 G3962 G846 G3588 G2192 G3775 G191
n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Pl m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Pl n vn Pres Act
KINGdom OF-THE FATHER OF-them THE one-HAVING EARS TO-BE-HEARING
one-having
akouetw
akouetO
G191
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
LET-him-BE-HEARING
let-him-be-hearing !
13:44 palin omoia estin h basileia twn ouranwn qhsaurw 44 . Again, the kingdom of
palin homoia estin hE basileia tOn ouranOn thEsaurO
G3825 G3664 G2076 G3588 G932 G3588 G3772 G2344
heaven is like unto treasure hid
Adv a_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg m in a field; the which when a
AGAIN LIKE IS THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens to-PLACE-INTO-MORROW man hath found, he hideth, and
to-treasure for joy thereof goeth and
selleth all that he hath, and
kekrummenw en tw agrw on eurwn anqrwpos ekruyen kai buyeth that field.
kekrummenO en tO agrO hon heurOn anthrOpos ekrupsen kai
G2928 G1722 G3588 G68 G3739 G2147 G444 G2928 G2532
vp Perf Pas Dat Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pr Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj
HAVING-been-HID IN THE FIELD WHICH FINDING human HIDES AND
he-hides
apo ths caras autou upagei kai panta osa ecei

apo tEs charas autou hupagei kai panta hosa echei
G575 G3588 G5479 G846 G5217 G2532 G3956 G3745 G2192
Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj a_ Acc Pl n pk Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
FROM THE JOY OF-it IS-UNDER-LEADING AND ALL as-much-as he-IS-HAVING
of-him is-going-away whatever
pwlei kai agorazei ton agron ekeinon

pOlei kai agorazei ton agron ekeinon
G4453 G2532 G59 G3588 G68 G1565
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pd Acc Sg m
IS-SELLING AND IS-BUYING THE FIELD that
13:45 palin omoia estin h basileia twn ouranwn anqrwpw 45 Again, the kingdom of
palin homoia estin hE basileia tOn ouranOn anthrOpO
G3825 G3664 G2076 G3588 G932 G3588 G3772 G444
heaven is like unto a merchant
Adv a_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg m man, seeking goodly pearls:
AGAIN LIKE IS THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens to-human
emporw zhtounti kalous margaritas

emporO zEtounti kalous margaritas
G1713 G2212 G2570 G3135
n_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
merchant SEEKING IDEAL PEARLS
13:46 os eurwn ena polutimon margarithn apelqwn 46 Who, when he had found
hos heurOn hena polutimon margaritEn apelthOn
G3739 G2147 G1520 G4186 G3135 G565
one pearl of great price, went
pr Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m a_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m and sold all that he had, and
WHO FINDING ONE MUCH-VALUED PEARL FROM-COMING bought it.
very-precious coming-away
pepraken panta osa eicen kai hgorasen auton

pepraken panta hosa eichen kai Egorasen auton
G4097 G3956 G3745 G2192 G2532 G59 G846
vi Perf Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl n pk Acc Pl n vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
he-HAS-disposED-of ALL as-much-as he-HAD AND BUYS SAME
whatever him
13:47 palin omoia estin h basileia twn ouranwn saghnh 47 Again, the kingdom of
palin homoia estin hE basileia tOn ouranOn sagEnE
G3825 G3664 G2076 G3588 G932 G3588 G3772 G4522
heaven is like unto a net, that
Adv a_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg f was cast into the sea, and
AGAIN LIKE IS THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens to-SEINE gathered of every kind:
to-dragnet
blhqeish eis thn qalassan kai ek pantos genous sunagagoush

blEtheisE eis tEn thalassan kai ek pantos genous sunagagousE
G906 G1519 G3588 G2281 G2532 G1537 G3956 G1085 G4863
vp Aor Pas Dat Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj Prep a_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vp 2Aor Act Dat Sg f
BEING-CAST INTO THE SEA AND OUT OF-EVERY breed TOGETHER-LEADING
species gathering
13:48 hn ote eplhrwqh anabibasantes epi ton aigialon kai 48 Which, when it was full,
hEn hote eplErOthE anabibasantes epi ton aigialon kai
G3739 G3753 G4137 G307 G1909 G3588 G123 G2532
they drew to shore, and sat
pr Acc Sg f Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj down, and gathered the good
WHICH when it-WAS-FILLED UP-STEPizing ON THE BEACH AND into vessels, but cast the bad
hauling-up away.
Matthew 13
kaqisantes sunelexan ta kala eis aggeia ta de sapra

kathisantes sunelexan ta kala eis aggeia ta de sapra
G2523 G4816 G3588 G2570 G1519 G30 G3588 G1161 G4550
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n Prep n_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Pl n Conj a_ Acc Pl n
being-seated THEY-TOGETHER-collect THE IDEAL INTO CROCKS THE YET ROTTen
they-cull ideal(p) rotten(p)
exw ebalon
exO ebalon
G1854 G906
Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
OUT THEY-CAST(past)
13:49 outws estai en th sunteleia tou aiwnos exeleusontai 49 So shall it be at the end of
houtOs estai en tE sunteleia tou aiOnos exeleusontai
G3779 G2071 G1722 G3588 G4930 G3588 G165 G1831
the world: the angels shall
Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut midD 3 Pl come forth, and sever the
thus it-SHALL-BE IN THE TOGETHER-FINISH OF-THE eon SHALL-BE-OUT-COMING wicked from among the just,
conclusion shall-be-coming-out
oi aggeloi kai aforiousin tous ponhrous ek mesou twn

hoi aggeloi kai aphoriousin tous ponErous ek mesou tOn
G3588 G32 G2532 G873 G3588 G4190 G1537 G3319 G3588
t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl Att t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Prep a_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Pl m
THE MESSENGERS AND SHALL-BE-FROM-definING THE wicked OUT OF-MIDst OF-THE
shall-be-severing wicked-ones
dikaiwn
dikaiOn
G1342
a_ Gen Pl m
JUST
just-ones
13:50 kai balousin autous eis thn kaminon tou puros ekei 50 And shall cast them into the
kai balousin autous eis tEn kaminon tou puros ekei
G2532 G906 G846 G1519 G3588 G2575 G3588 G4442 G1563
furnace of fire: there shall be
Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp Acc Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Adv wailing and gnashing of teeth.
AND THEY-SHALL-BE-CASTING them INTO THE BURNer OF-THE FIRE there
furnace
estai o klauqmos kai o brugmos twn odontwn

estai ho klauthmos kai ho brugmos tOn odontOn
G2071 G3588 G2805 G2532 G3588 G1030 G3588 G3599
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
SHALL-BE THE LAMENTing AND THE GNASHing OF-THE TEETH
lamentation
13:51 legei autois o ihsous sunhkate tauta panta legousin 51 Jesus saith unto them, Have
legei autois ho iEsous sunEkate tauta panta legousin
G3004 G846 G3588 G2424 G4920 G5023 G3956 G3004
ye understood all these things?
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 2 Pl pd Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 3 Pl They say unto him, Yea, Lord.
IS-sayING to-them THE JESUS YE-understand these ALL THEY-ARE-sayING
these-things
autw nai kurie

autO nai kurie
G846 G3483 G2962
pp Dat Sg m Part n_ Voc Sg m
to-Him YEA Master !
yes Lord !
13:52 o de eipen autois dia touto pas grammateus 52 Then said he unto them,
ho de eipen autois dia touto pas grammateus
G3588 G1161 G2036 G846 G1223 G5124 G3956 G1122
Therefore every scribe [which
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Prep pd Acc Sg n a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m is] instructed unto the kingdom
THE YET He-said to-them THRU this EVERY WRITer of heaven is like unto a man
because-of scribe [that is] an householder, which
bringeth forth out of his
maqhteuqeis eis thn basileian twn ouranwn omoios estin treasure [things] new and old.
mathEteutheis eis tEn basileian tOn ouranOn homoios estin
G3100 G1519 G3588 G932 G3588 G3772 G3664 G2076
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
BEING-made-LEARNer INTO THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens LIKE IS
being-made-disciple
anqrwpw oikodespoth ostis ekballei ek tou qhsaurou

anthrOpO oikodespotE hostis ekballei ek tou thEsaurou
G444 G3617 G3748 G1544 G1537 G3588 G2344
n_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pr Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
to-human HOME-OWNER WHO-ANY IS-OUT-CASTING OUT OF-THE PLACED-INTO-MORROW
householder who-any is-extracting treasure
autou kaina kai palaia

autou kaina kai palaia
G846 G2537 G2532 G3820
pp Gen Sg m a_ Acc Pl n Conj a_ Acc Pl n
OF-him NEW AND OLD
new-things
Matthew 13
13:53 kai egeneto ote etelesen o ihsous tas parabolas tautas 53 . And it came to pass, [that]
kai egeneto hote etelesen ho iEsous tas parabolas tautas
G2532 G1096 G3753 G5055 G3588 G2424 G3588 G3850 G3778
when Jesus had finished these
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pd Acc Pl f parables, he departed thence.
AND it-BECAME when FINISHES THE JESUS THE BESIDE-CASTS these
it-occurred parables
methren ekeiqen
metEren ekeithen
G3332 G1564
vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv
He-WITH-LIFTS thence
he-withdraws
13:54 kai elqwn eis thn patrida autou edidasken autous en 54 And when he was come into
kai elthOn eis tEn patrida autou edidasken autous en
G2532 G2064 G1519 G3588 G3968 G846 G1321 G846 G1722
his own country, he taught
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Prep them in their synagogue,
AND COMING INTO THE FATHER[-place] OF-Him He-TAUGHT them IN insomuch that they were
own-country astonished, and said, Whence
hath this [man] this wisdom,
th sunagwgh autwn wste ekplhttesqai autous kai legein and [these] mighty works?
tE sunagOgE autOn hOste ekplEttesthai autous kai legein
G3588 G4864 G846 G5620 G1605 G846 G2532 G3004
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Pl m Conj vn Pres Pas pp Acc Pl m Conj vn Pres Act
THE TOGETHER-LEAD OF-them AS-BESIDES TO-BE-beING-astonishED them AND TO-BE-sayING
synagogue so-that
poqen toutw h sofia auth kai ai dunameis

pothen toutO hE sophia hautE kai hai dunameis
G4159 G5129 G3588 G4678 G3778 G2532 G3588 G1411
Adv Int pd Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pd Nom Sg f Conj t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f
?-WHICH-PLACE to-this-One THE WISDOM this AND THE ABILITIES
whence ? to-this-one powerful-deeds
13:55 ouc outos estin o tou tektonos uios ouci 55 Is not this the carpenter's
ouch houtos estin ho tou tektonos huios ouchi
G3756 G3778 G2076 G3588 G3588 G5045 G5207 G3780
son? is not his mother called
Part Neg pd Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Part Int Mary? and his brethren, James,
NOT this IS THE OF-THE ARTisan SON NOT(emph.) and Joses, and Simon, and
carpenter Judas?
h mhthr autou legetai mariam kai oi adelfoi autou

hE mEtEr autou legetai mariam kai hoi adelphoi autou
G3588 G3384 G846 G3004 G3137 G2532 G3588 G80 G846
t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg ni proper Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m
THE MOTHER OF-Him IS-beING-said MARIAM AND THE brothers OF-Him
Mary
iakwbos kai iwshs kai simwn kai ioudas

iakObos kai iOsEs kai simOn kai ioudas
G2385 G2532 G2500 G2532 G4613 G2532 G2455
n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
JACOBUS AND JOSES AND SIMON AND JUDAS
James
13:56 kai ai adelfai autou ouci pasai pros hmas eisin 56 And his sisters, are they not
kai hai adelphai autou ouchi pasai pros hEmas eisin
G2532 G3588 G79 G846 G3780 G3956 G4314 G2248 G1526
all with us? Whence then hath
Conj t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f pp Gen Sg m Part Int a_ Nom Pl f Prep pp 1 Acc Pl vi Pres vxx 3 Pl this [man] all these things?
AND THE sisters OF-Him NOT(emph.) ALL TOWARD US ARE
not(emph.) ? they-are
poqen oun toutw tauta panta

pothen oun toutO tauta panta
G4159 G3767 G5129 G5023 G3956
Adv Int Conj pd Dat Sg m pd Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n
?-WHICH-PLACE THEN to-this-One these ALL
whence ? to-this-one these-things
13:57 kai eskandalizonto en autw o de ihsous eipen autois 57 And they were offended in
kai eskandalizonto en autO ho de iEsous eipen autois
G2532 G4624 G1722 G846 G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G846
him. But Jesus said unto them,
Conj vi Impf Pas 3 Pl Prep pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m A prophet is not without
AND THEY-were-SNARED IN Him THE YET JESUS said to-them honour, save in his own
country, and in his own house.
ouk estin profhths atimos ei mh en th patridi autou

ouk estin prophEtEs atimos ei mE en tE patridi autou
G3756 G2076 G4396 G820 G1487 G3361 G1722 G3588 G3968 G846
Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Cond Part Neg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m
NOT IS BEFORE-AVERer UN-VALUED IF NO IN THE FATHER[-place] OF-him
prophet dishonored own-country
kai en th oikia autou

kai en tE oikia autou
G2532 G1722 G3588 G3614 G846
Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m
AND IN THE HOME OF-him
house
13:58 kai ouk epoihsen ekei dunameis pollas dia thn apistian autwn 58 And he did not many
kai ouk epoiEsen ekei dunameis pollas dia tEn apistian autOn
G2532 G3756 G4160 G1563 G1411 G4183 G1223 G3588 G570 G846
mighty works there because of
Conj Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv n_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Pl m their unbelief.
AND NOT He-DOES there ABILITIES MANY THRU THE UN-BELIEF OF-them
powerful-deeds because-of unbelief
Matthew 14
14:1 en ekeinw tw kairw hkousen hrwdhs o tetrarchs thn 1 . At that time Herod the
en ekeinO tO kairO Ekousen hErOdEs ho tetrarchEs tEn
G1722 G1565 G3588 G2540 G191 G2264 G3588 G5076 G3588
tetrarch heard of the fame of
Prep pd Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f Jesus,
IN that THE SEASON HEARS HEROD THE FOURth-chief THE
tetrarch
akohn ihsou
akoEn iEsou
G189 G2424
n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
HEARing OF-JESUS
tidings
14:2 kai eipen tois paisin autou outos estin iwannhs o 2 And said unto his servants,
kai eipen tois paisin autou houtos estin iOannEs ho
G2532 G2036 G3588 G3816 G846 G3778 G2076 G2491 G3588
This is John the Baptist; he is
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m pd Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m risen from the dead; and
AND he-said to-THE boys OF-him this IS JOHN THE therefore mighty works do
said pages shew forth themselves in him.
baptisths autos hgerqh apo twn nekrwn kai dia touto ai

baptistEs autos EgerthE apo tOn nekrOn kai dia touto hai
G910 G846 G1453 G575 G3588 G3498 G2532 G1223 G5124 G3588
n_ Nom Sg m pp Nom Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m Conj Prep pd Acc Sg n t_ Nom Pl f
DIPist he WAS-ROUSED FROM THE DEAD AND THRU this THE
baptist dead-ones because-of
dunameis energousin en autw

dunameis energousin en autO
G1411 G1754 G1722 G846
n_ Nom Pl f vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep pp Dat Sg m
ABILITIES ARE-IN-ACTING IN him
powerful-deeds are-operating
14:3 o gar hrwdhs krathsas ton iwannhn edhsen auton kai 3 For Herod had laid hold on
ho gar hErOdEs kratEsas ton iOannEn edEsen auton kai
G3588 G1063 G2264 G2902 G3588 G2491 G1210 G846 G2532
John, and bound him, and put
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj [him] in prison for
THE for HEROD HOLDing THE JOHN BINDS him AND Herodias'sake, his brother
Philip's wife.
eqeto en fulakh dia hrwdiada thn gunaika filippou tou

etheto en phulakE dia hErOdiada tEn gunaika philippou tou
G5087 G1722 G5438 G1223 G2266 G3588 G1135 G5376 G3588
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg Prep n_ Dat Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
PLACED IN GUARD-house THRU HERODIAS THE WOMAN OF-Philip THE
jail because-of wife
adelfou autou
adelphou autou
G80 G846
n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m
brother OF-him
14:4 elegen gar autw o iwannhs ouk exestin soi ecein 4For John said unto him, It is
elegen gar autO ho iOannEs ouk exestin soi echein
G3004 G1063 G846 G3588 G2491 G3756 G1832 G4671 G2192
not lawful for thee to have her.
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg vn Pres Act
said for to-him THE JOHN NOT IS-allowed to-YOU TO-BE-HAVING
it-is-allowed you
authn
autEn
G846
pp Acc Sg f
her
14:5 kai qelwn auton apokteinai efobhqh ton oclon oti ws 5 And when he would have put
kai thelOn auton apokteinai ephobEthE ton ochlon hoti hOs
G2532 G2309 G846 G615 G5399 G3588 G3793 G3754 G5613
him to death, he feared the
Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m vn Aor Act vi Aor pasD 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj Adv multitude, because they
AND WILLING him TO-FROM-KILL he-WAS-afraid-of THE THRONG that AS counted him as a prophet.
to-kill
profhthn auton eicon

prophEtEn auton eichon
G4396 G846 G2192
n_ Acc Sg m pp Acc Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Pl
BEFORE-AVERer him THEY-HAD
prophet
14:6 genesiwn de agomenwn tou hrwdou wrchsato h qugathr 6 But when Herod's birthday
genesiOn de agomenOn tou hErOdou OrchEsato hE thugatEr
G1077 G1161 G71 G3588 G2264 G3738 G3588 G2364
was kept, the daughter of
n_ Gen Pl n Conj vp Pres Pas Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Herodias danced before them,
OF-birthdays YET beING-LED OF-THE HEROD DANCES THE DAUGHTER and pleased Herod.
of-birthday-celebrations being-held
Matthew 14
ths hrwdiados en tw mesw kai hresen tw hrwdh

tEs hErOdiados en tO mesO kai Eresen tO hErOdE
G3588 G2266 G1722 G3588 G3319 G2532 G700 G3588 G2264
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Prep t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE HERODIAS IN THE MIDst AND PLEASES to-THE HEROD
the
14:7 oqen meq orkou wmologhsen auth dounai o ean 7 Whereupon he promised with
hothen meth horkou hOmologEsen autE dounai ho ean
G3606 G3326 G3727 G3670 G846 G1325 G3739 G1437
an oath to give her whatsoever
Adv Prep n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f vn 2Aor Act pr Acc Sg n Cond she would ask.
WHICH-PLACE WITH OATH he-avows to-her TO-GIVE WHICH IF-EVER
whence
aithshtai
aitEsEtai
G154
vs Aor Mid 3 Sg
she-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING
14:8 h de probibasqeisa upo ths mhtros auths dos 8 And she, being before
hE de probibastheisa hupo tEs mEtros autEs dos
G3588 G1161 G4264 G5259 G3588 G3384 G846 G1325
instructed of her mother, said,
t_ Nom Sg f Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg f vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Give me here John Baptist's
THE YET BEING-BEFORE-have-STEPizED by THE MOTHER OF-her BE-GIVING head in a charger.
being-egged-on be-you-giving !
moi fhsin wde epi pinaki thn kefalhn iwannou tou

moi phEsin hOde epi pinaki tEn kephalEn iOannou tou
G3427 G5346 G5602 G1909 G4094 G3588 G2776 G2491 G3588
pp 1 Dat Sg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Adv Prep n_ Dat Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
to-ME she-IS-AVERRING here ON BOARD THE HEAD OF-JOHN THE
platter
baptistou
baptistou
G910
n_ Gen Sg m
DIPist
baptist
14:9 kai eluphqh o basileus dia de tous orkous kai tous 9 And the king was sorry:
kai elupEthE ho basileus dia de tous horkous kai tous
G2532 G3076 G3588 G935 G1223 G1161 G3588 G3727 G2532 G3588
nevertheless for the oath's
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep Conj t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Pl m sake, and them which sat with
AND WAS-SORROWED THE KING THRU YET THE OATHS AND THE him at meat, he commanded
was-sorry because-of [it] to be given [her].
sunanakeimenous ekeleusen doqhnai

sunanakeimenous ekeleusen dothEnai
G4873 G2753 G1325
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn Aor Pas
ones-TOGETHER-UP-LYING he-ORDERS TO-BE-GIVEN
ones-lying-back-at-table-together
14:10 kai pemyas apekefalisen ton iwannhn en th fulakh 10 And he sent, and beheaded
kai pempsas apekephalisen ton iOannEn en tE phulakE
G2532 G3992 G607 G3588 G2491 G1722 G3588 G5438
John in the prison.
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
AND SENDing he-FROM-HEADizES THE JOHN IN THE GUARD-house
he-beheads jail
14:11 kai hnecqh h kefalh autou epi pinaki kai edoqh tw 11 And his head was brought
kai EnechthE hE kephalE autou epi pinaki kai edothE tO
G2532 G5342 G3588 G2776 G846 G1909 G4094 G2532 G1325 G3588
in a charger, and given to the
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg n damsel: and she brought [it] to
AND WAS-CARRIED THE HEAD OF-him ON BOARD AND it-WAS-GIVEN to-THE her mother.
was-brought platter was-given
korasiw kai hnegken th mhtri auths

korasiO kai Enegken tE mEtri autEs
G2877 G2532 G5342 G3588 G3384 G846
n_ Dat Sg n Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg f
maiden AND she-CARRIES to-THE MOTHER OF-her
14:12 kai proselqontes oi maqhtai autou hran to swma kai 12 And his disciples came, and
kai proselthontes hoi mathEtai autou Eran to sOma kai
G2532 G4334 G3588 G3101 G846 G142 G3588 G4983 G2532
took up the body, and buried it,
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj and went and told Jesus.
AND TOWARD-COMING THE LEARNers OF-him LIFT THE BODY AND
approaching disciples take-away
eqayan auto kai elqontes aphggeilan tw ihsou

ethapsan auto kai elthontes apEggeilan tO iEsou
G2290 G846 G2532 G2064 G518 G3588 G2424
vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg n Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
entomb it AND COMING THEY-FROM-MESSAGE to-THE JESUS
they-report
Matthew 14
14:13 kai akousas o ihsous anecwrhsen ekeiqen en ploiw eis 13 . When Jesus heard [of it],
kai akousas ho iEsous anechOrEsen ekeithen en ploiO eis
G2532 G191 G3588 G2424 G402 G1564 G1722 G4143 G1519
he departed thence by ship into
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv Prep n_ Dat Sg n Prep a desert place apart: and when
AND HEARing THE JESUS UP-SPACES thence IN FLOATer INTO the people had heard [thereof],
hearing-it retires ship they followed him on foot out
of the cities.
erhmon topon kat idian kai akousantes oi ocloi hkolouqhsan
erEmon topon kat idian kai akousantes hoi ochloi EkolouthEsan
G2048 G5117 G2596 G2398 G2532 G191 G3588 G3793 G190
a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep a_ Acc Sg f Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
DESOLATE PLACE according-to OWN AND HEARing THE THRONGS follow
wilderness
autw pezh apo twn polewn

autO pezE apo tOn poleOn
G846 G3979 G575 G3588 G4172
pp Dat Sg m Adv Prep t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f
to-Him aFOOT FROM THE cities
him
14:14 kai exelqwn o ihsous eiden polun oclon kai 14 And Jesus went forth, and
kai exelthOn ho iEsous eiden polun ochlon kai
G2532 G1831 G3588 G2424 G1492 G4183 G3793 G2532
saw a great multitude, and was
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj moved with compassion
AND OUT-COMING THE JESUS PERCEIVED MANY THRONG AND toward them, and he healed
coming-out vast their sick.
esplagcnisqh ep autous kai eqerapeusen tous arrwstous autwn

esplagchnisthE ep autous kai etherapeusen tous arrOstous autOn
G4697 G1909 G846 G2532 G2323 G3588 G732 G846
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Pl m
He-IS-compassionatED ON them AND curES THE UN-FARE-WELLS OF-them
he-is-moved-with-compassion he-cures ones-ailing
14:15 oyias de genomenhs proshlqon autw oi maqhtai autou 15 And when it was evening,
opsias de genomenEs prosElthon autO hoi mathEtai autou
G3798 G1161 G1096 G4334 G846 G3588 G3101 G846
his disciples came to him,
a_ Gen Sg f Conj vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m saying, This is a desert place,
OF-evening YET BECOMING TOWARD-CAME to-Him THE LEARNers OF-Him and the time is now past; send
came-to him disciples the multitude away, that they
may go into the villages, and
legontes erhmos estin o topos kai h wra hdh buy themselves victuals.
legontes erEmos estin ho topos kai hE hOra EdE
G3004 G2048 G2076 G3588 G5117 G2532 G3588 G5610 G2235
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Adv
sayING DESOLATE IS THE PLACE AND THE HOUR ALREADY
wilderness
parhlqen apoluson tous oclous ina apelqontes eis tas kwmas

parElthen apoluson tous ochlous hina apelthontes eis tas kOmas
G3928 G630 G3588 G3793 G2443 G565 G1519 G3588 G2968
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vm Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f
BESIDE-CAME FROM-LOOSE THE THRONGS THAT FROM-COMING INTO THE VILLAGES
passed-by dismiss-you ! coming-away
agoraswsin eautois brwmata

agorasOsin heautois brOmata
G59 G1438 G1033
vs Aor Act 3 Pl pf 3 Dat Pl m n_ Acc Pl n
THEY-SHOULD-BE-BUYING to-selves FOODS
themselves
14:16 o de ihsous eipen autois ou creian ecousin 16 But Jesus said unto them,
ho de iEsous eipen autois ou chreian echousin
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G846 G3756 G5532 G2192
They need not depart; give ye
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Part Neg n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Pl them to eat.
THE YET JESUS said to-them NOT need THEY-ARE-HAVING
apelqein dote autois umeis fagein

apelthein dote autois humeis phagein
G565 G1325 G846 G5210 G5315
vn 2Aor Act vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl pp Dat Pl m pp 2 Nom Pl vn 2Aor Act
TO-BE-FROM-COMING BE-GIVING to-them YOU(p) TO-BE-EATING
to-be-coming-away be-ye-giving ! them ye
14:17 oi de legousin autw ouk ecomen wde ei mh pente 17 And they say unto him, We
hoi de legousin autO ouk echomen hOde ei mE pente
G3588 G1161 G3004 G846 G3756 G2192 G5602 G1487 G3361 G4002
have here but five loaves, and
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Part Neg vi Pres Act 1 Pl Adv Cond Part Neg a_ Nom two fishes.
THE YET THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him NOT WE-ARE-HAVING here IF NO FIVE
artous kai duo icquas

artous kai duo ichthuas
G740 G2532 G1417 G2486
n_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m
BREADS AND TWO FISHES
cakes-of-bread
Matthew 14
14:18 o de eipen ferete moi autous wde 18 He said, Bring them hither
ho de eipen pherete moi autous hOde
G3588 G1161 G2036 G5342 G3427 G846 G5602
to me.
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vm Pres Act 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg pp Acc Pl m Adv
THE YET He-said BE-CARRYING to-ME them here
be-ye-bringing !
14:19 kai keleusas tous oclous anakliqhnai epi tous cortous kai 19 And he commanded the
kai keleusas tous ochlous anaklithEnai epi tous chortous kai
G2532 G2753 G3588 G3793 G347 G1909 G3588 G5528 G2532
multitude to sit down on the
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vn Aor Pas Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj grass, and took the five loaves,
AND ORDERing THE THRONGS TO-BE-UP-CLINED ON THE FODDER(p) AND and the two fishes, and looking
to-recline grass up to heaven, he blessed, and
brake, and gave the loaves to
labwn tous pente artous kai tous duo icquas anableyas [his] disciples, and the
labOn tous pente artous kai tous duo ichthuas anablepsas disciples to the multitude.
G2983 G3588 G4002 G740 G2532 G3588 G1417 G2486 G308
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
GETTING THE FIVE BREADS AND THE TWO FISHES UP-looking
taking cakes-of-bread looking-up
eis ton ouranon euloghsen kai klasas edwken tois maqhtais

eis ton ouranon eulogEsen kai klasas edOken tois mathEtais
G1519 G3588 G3772 G2127 G2532 G2806 G1325 G3588 G3101
Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
INTO THE heaven He-blessES AND BREAKing GIVES to-THE LEARNers
he-gives disciples
tous artous oi de maqhtai tois oclois

tous artous hoi de mathEtai tois ochlois
G3588 G740 G3588 G1161 G3101 G3588 G3793
t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
THE BREADS THE YET LEARNers to-THE THRONGS
cakes-of-bread disciples
14:20 kai efagon pantes kai ecortasqhsan kai hran to 20 And they did all eat, and
kai ephagon pantes kai echortasthEsan kai Eran to
G2532 G5315 G3956 G2532 G5526 G2532 G142 G3588
were filled: and they took up of
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n the fragments that remained
AND ATE ALL AND ARE-satisfiED AND THEY-LIFT THE twelve baskets full.
they-ate they-pick-up
perisseuon twn klasmatwn dwdeka kofinous plhreis

perisseuon tOn klasmatOn dOdeka kophinous plEreis
G4052 G3588 G2801 G1427 G2894 G4134
vp Pres Act Acc Sg n t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
exceedING OF-THE BREAKS TWO-TEN PANNIERS FULL
being-superfluous fragments twelve
14:21 oi de esqiontes hsan andres wsei pentakiscilioi cwris 21 And they that had eaten
hoi de esthiontes Esan andres hOsei pentakischilioi chOris
G3588 G1161 G2068 G2258 G435 G5616 G4000 G5565
were about five thousand men,
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vi Impf vxx 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl m Adv a_ Nom Pl m Adv beside women and children.
THE YET ones-EATING WERE MEN AS-IF FIVE-times-THOUSAND apart-from
ones-eating about five-thousand
gunaikwn kai paidiwn

gunaikOn kai paidiOn
G1135 G2532 G3813
n_ Gen Pl f Conj n_ Gen Pl n
WOMEN AND little-boys-and-girls
14:22 kai euqews hnagkasen o ihsous tous maqhtas autou embhnai 22 . And straightway Jesus
kai eutheOs Enagkasen ho iEsous tous mathEtas autou embEnai
G2532 G2112 G315 G3588 G2424 G3588 G3101 G846 G1684
constrained his disciples to get
Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m vn 2Aor Act into a ship, and to go before
AND immediately necessitatES THE JESUS THE LEARNers OF-Him TO-IN-STEP him unto the other side, while
compels disciples to-step-in he sent the multitudes away.
eis to ploion kai proagein auton eis to peran ews

eis to ploion kai proagein auton eis to peran heOs
G1519 G3588 G4143 G2532 G4254 G846 G1519 G3588 G4008 G2193
Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj vn Pres Act pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n Adv Conj
INTO THE FLOATer AND TO-BE-BEFORE-LEADING Him INTO THE OTHER-SIDE TILL
ship to-be-preceding
ou apolush tous oclous

hou apolusE tous ochlous
G3739 G630 G3588 G3793
pr Gen Sg m vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
OF-WHICH He-SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING THE THRONGS
which he-should-be-dismissing
14:23 kai apolusas tous oclous anebh eis to oros kat 23 And when he had sent the
kai apolusas tous ochlous anebE eis to oros kat
G2532 G630 G3588 G3793 G305 G1519 G3588 G3735 G2596
multitudes away, he went up
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Prep into a mountain apart to pray:
AND FROM-LOOSing THE THRONGS He-UP-STEPPed INTO THE mountain according-to and when the evening was
dismissing he-ascended come, he was there alone.
Matthew 14
idian proseuxasqai oyias de genomenhs monos hn ekei

idian proseuxasthai opsias de genomenEs monos En ekei
G2398 G4336 G3798 G1161 G1096 G3441 G2258 G1563
a_ Acc Sg f vn Aor midD a_ Gen Sg f Conj vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f a_ Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Adv
OWN TO-pray OF-evening YET BECOMING ONLY He-WAS there
alone
14:24 to de ploion hdh meson ths qalasshs hn 24 But the ship was now in the
to de ploion EdE meson tEs thalassEs En
G3588 G1161 G4143 G2235 G3319 G3588 G2281 G2258
midst of the sea, tossed with
t_ Nom Sg n Conj n_ Nom Sg n Adv a_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Impf vxx 3 Sg waves: for the wind was
THE YET FLOATer ALREADY MIDST OF-THE SEA WAS contrary.
ship
basanizomenon upo twn kumatwn hn gar enantios o anemos

basanizomenon hupo tOn kumatOn En gar enantios ho anemos
G928 G5259 G3588 G2949 G2258 G1063 G1727 G3588 G417
vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
beING-ORDEALizED by THE BILLOWS WAS for IN-INSTEAD THE WIND
being-tormented contrary
14:25 tetarth de fulakh ths nuktos aphlqen pros autous o 25 And in the fourth watch of
tetartE de phulakE tEs nuktos apElthen pros autous ho
G5067 G1161 G5438 G3588 G3571 G565 G4314 G846 G3588
the night Jesus went unto them,
a_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m t_ Nom Sg m walking on the sea.
to-FOURth YET GUARD OF-THE NIGHT FROM-CAME TOWARD them THE
watch came-forth
ihsous peripatwn epi ths qalasshs

iEsous peripatOn epi tEs thalassEs
G2424 G4043 G1909 G3588 G2281
n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
JESUS ABOUT-TREADING ON THE SEA
walking
14:26 kai idontes auton oi maqhtai epi thn qalassan 26 And when the disciples saw
kai idontes auton hoi mathEtai epi tEn thalassan
G2532 G1492 G846 G3588 G3101 G1909 G3588 G2281
him walking on the sea, they
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f were troubled, saying, It is a
AND PERCEIVING Him THE LEARNers ON THE SEA spirit; and they cried out for
disciples fear.
peripatounta etaracqhsan legontes oti fantasma estin kai apo

peripatounta etarachthEsan legontes hoti phantasma estin kai apo
G4043 G5015 G3004 G3754 G5326 G2076 G2532 G575
vp Pres Act Acc Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Conj Prep
ABOUT-TREADING WERE-DISTURBED sayING that APPEAR-effect it-IS AND FROM
walking phantom
tou fobou ekraxan

tou phobou ekraxan
G3588 G5401 G2896
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THE FEAR THEY-CRY
they-cry-out
14:27 euqews de elalhsen autois o ihsous legwn 27 But straightway Jesus spake
eutheOs de elalEsen autois ho iEsous legOn
G2112 G1161 G2980 G846 G3588 G2424 G3004
unto them, saying, Be of good
Adv Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m cheer; it is I; be not afraid.
immediately YET TALKS to-them THE JESUS sayING
speaks
qarseite egw eimi mh fobeisqe

tharseite egO eimi mE phobeisthe
G2293 G1473 G1510 G3361 G5399
vm Pres Act 2 Pl pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 1 Sg Part Neg vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
BE-YE-COURAGE-ING I AM NO BE-FEARING
be-ye-having-courage ! be-ye-fearing !
14:28 apokriqeis de autw o petros eipen kurie ei 28 And Peter answered him
apokritheis de autO ho petros eipen kurie ei
G611 G1161 G846 G3588 G4074 G2036 G2962 G1487
and said, Lord, if it be thou,
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Voc Sg m Cond bid me come unto thee on the
answerING YET to-Him THE Peter said Master ! IF water.
him Lord !
su ei keleuson me pros se elqein epi ta

su ei keleuson me pros se elthein epi ta
G4771 G1488 G2753 G3165 G4314 G4571 G2064 G1909 G3588
pp 2 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 2 Sg vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg Prep pp 2 Acc Sg vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Pl n
YOU ARE ORDER ME TOWARD YOU TO-BE-COMING ON THE
order-you !
udata
hudata
G5204
n_ Acc Pl n
waters
Matthew 14
14:29 o de eipen elqe kai katabas apo tou ploiou 29 And he said, Come. And
ho de eipen elthe kai katabas apo tou ploiou
G3588 G1161 G2036 G2064 G2532 G2597 G575 G3588 G4143
when Peter was come down
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n out of the ship, he walked on
THE YET He-said BE-COMING AND DOWN-STEPPing FROM THE FLOATer the water, to go to Jesus.
be-you-coming ! descending ship
o petros periepathsen epi ta udata elqein pros ton

ho petros periepatEsen epi ta hudata elthein pros ton
G3588 G4074 G4043 G1909 G3588 G5204 G2064 G4314 G3588
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg m
THE Peter ABOUT-TREADS ON THE waters TO-BE-COMING TOWARD THE
walks
ihsoun
iEsoun
G2424
n_ Acc Sg m
JESUS
14:30 blepwn de ton anemon iscuron efobhqh kai arxamenos 30 But when he saw the wind
blepOn de ton anemon ischuron ephobEthE kai arxamenos
G991 G1161 G3588 G417 G2478 G5399 G2532 G756
boisterous, he was afraid; and
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vi Aor pasD 3 Sg Conj vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m beginning to sink, he cried,
lookING YET THE WIND STRONG he-WAS-afraid AND beginning saying, Lord, save me.
observing
katapontizesqai ekraxen legwn kurie swson me

katapontizesthai ekraxen legOn kurie sOson me
G2670 G2896 G3004 G2962 G4982 G3165
vn Pres Pas vi Aor Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Voc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg
TO-BE-DOWN-MARINE-ING he-CRIES sayING Master ! SAVE ME
to-be-sinking Lord ! save-you !
14:31 euqews de o ihsous ekteinas thn ceira epelabeto 31 And immediately Jesus
eutheOs de ho iEsous ekteinas tEn cheira epelabeto
G2112 G1161 G3588 G2424 G1614 G3588 G5495 G1949
stretched forth [his] hand, and
Adv Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg caught him, and said unto him,
immediately YET THE JESUS OUT-STRETCHing THE HAND ON-GOT O thou of little faith, wherefore
stretching-out got-hold didst thou doubt?
autou kai legei autw oligopiste eis ti edistasas

autou kai legei autO oligopiste eis ti edistasas
G846 G2532 G3004 G846 G3640 G1519 G5101 G1365
pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m a_ Voc Sg m Prep pi Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 2 Sg
OF-him AND IS-sayING to-him FEW-BELIEVing ! INTO ANY YOU-TWO-STAND
scant-of-faith-one ! why ? you-hesitate
14:32 kai embantwn autwn eis to ploion ekopasen o anemos 32 And when they were come
kai embantOn autOn eis to ploion ekopasen ho anemos
G2532 G1684 G846 G1519 G3588 G4143 G2869 G3588 G417
into the ship, the wind ceased.
Conj vp 2Aor Act Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
AND OF-IN-STEPPing OF-them INTO THE FLOATer STRIKES THE WIND
of-stepping-into ship flags
14:33 oi de en tw ploiw elqontes prosekunhsan autw 33 Then they that were in the
hoi de en tO ploiO elthontes prosekunEsan autO
G3588 G1161 G1722 G3588 G4143 G2064 G4352 G846
ship came and worshipped
t_ Nom Pl m Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m him, saying, Of a truth thou art
THE-ones YET IN THE FLOATer COMING worship to-Him the Son of God.
the-ones ship him
legontes alhqws qeou uios ei

legontes alEthOs theou huios ei
G3004 G230 G2316 G5207 G1488
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Adv n_ Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
sayING TRUly OF-God SON YOU-ARE
14:34 kai diaperasantes hlqon eis thn ghn gennhsaret 34 . And when they were gone
kai diaperasantes Elthon eis tEn gEn gennEsaret
G2532 G1276 G2064 G1519 G3588 G1093 G1082
over, they came into the land
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f ni proper of Gennesaret.
AND ferrying THEY-CAME INTO THE LAND of-GENNESARET
of-Gennesaret
14:35 kai epignontes auton oi andres tou topou ekeinou 35 And when the men of that
kai epignontes auton hoi andres tou topou ekeinou
G2532 G1921 G846 G3588 G435 G3588 G5117 G1565
place had knowledge of him,
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m they sent out into all that
AND ON-KNOWING Him THE MEN OF-THE PLACE that country round about, and
recognizing brought unto him all that were
diseased;
apesteilan eis olhn thn pericwron ekeinhn kai proshnegkan autw
apesteilan eis holEn tEn perichOron ekeinEn kai prosEnegkan autO
G649 G1519 G3650 G3588 G4066 G1565 G2532 G4374 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
THEY-commission INTO WHOLE THE ABOUT-SPACE that AND TOWARD-CARRY to-Him
dispatch country-about they-bring
pantas tous kakws econtas

pantas tous kakOs echontas
G3956 G3588 G2560 G2192
a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m Adv vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
ALL THE EVILly HAVING
the-ones illness
14:36 kai parekaloun auton ina monon aywntai tou 36 And besought him that they
kai parekaloun auton hina monon hapsOntai tou
G2532 G3870 G846 G2443 G3440 G680 G3588
might only touch the hem of
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj Adv vs Aor Mid 3 Pl t_ Gen Sg n his garment: and as many as
AND THEY-BESIDE-CALLED Him THAT ONLY THEY-SHOULD-BE-TOUCHING OF-THE touched were made perfectly
they-entreated the whole.
kraspedou tou imatiou autou kai osoi hyanto dieswqhsan

kraspedou tou himatiou autou kai hosoi hEpsanto diesOthEsan
G2899 G3588 G2440 G846 G2532 G3745 G680 G1295
n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n pp Gen Sg m Conj pk Nom Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Pl vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
HANG-FOOT OF-THE cloak OF-Him AND as-many-as TOUCH WERE-THRU-SAVED
tassel were-saved-through
Matthew 15
15:1 tote prosercontai tw ihsou oi apo ierosolumwn grammateis 1 . Then came to Jesus scribes
tote proserchontai tO iEsou hoi apo ierosolumOn grammateis
G5119 G4334 G3588 G2424 G3588 G575 G2414 G1122
and Pharisees, which were of
Adv vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m Prep n_ Gen Pl n n_ Nom Pl m Jerusalem, saying,
then ARE-TOWARD-COMING to-THE JESUS THE FROM JERUSALEM WRITers
are-coming-to the scribes
kai farisaioi legontes

kai pharisaioi legontes
G2532 G5330 G3004
Conj n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
AND PHARISEES sayING
15:2 dia ti oi maqhtai sou parabainousin thn paradosin 2 Why do thy disciples
dia ti hoi mathEtai sou parabainousin tEn paradosin
G1223 G5101 G3588 G3101 G4675 G3845 G3588 G3862
transgress the tradition of the
Prep pi Acc Sg n t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f elders? for they wash not their
THRU ANY THE LEARNers OF-YOU ARE-BESIDE-STEPPING THE tradition hands when they eat bread.
because-of what ? disciples are-transgressing
twn presbuterwn ou gar niptontai tas ceiras autwn otan

tOn presbuterOn ou gar niptontai tas cheiras autOn hotan
G3588 G4245 G3756 G1063 G3538 G3588 G5495 G846 G3752
t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m Part Neg Conj vi Pres Mid 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Pl m Conj
OF-THE SENIORS NOT for THEY-ARE-WASHING THE HANDS OF-them when-EVER
elders whenever
arton esqiwsin
arton esthiOsin
G740 G2068
n_ Acc Sg m vs Pres Act 3 Pl
BREAD THEY-MAY-BE-EATING
15:3 o de apokriqeis eipen autois dia ti kai umeis 3 But he answered and said
ho de apokritheis eipen autois dia ti kai humeis
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G846 G1223 G5101 G2532 G5210
unto them, Why do ye also
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Prep pi Acc Sg n Conj pp 2 Nom Pl transgress the commandment
THE YET answerING He-said to-them THRU ANY AND YOU(p) of God by your tradition?
because-of what ? also ye
parabainete thn entolhn tou qeou dia thn paradosin

parabainete tEn entolEn tou theou dia tEn paradosin
G3845 G3588 G1785 G3588 G2316 G1223 G3588 G3862
vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
ARE-BESIDE-STEPPING THE direction OF-THE God THRU THE tradition
are-transgressing precept because-of
umwn
humOn
G5216
pp 2 Gen Pl
OF-YOU(p)
of-ye
15:4 o gar qeos eneteilato legwn tima ton patera 4 For God commanded, saying,
ho gar theos eneteilato legOn tima ton patera
G3588 G1063 G2316 G1781 G3004 G5091 G3588 G3962
Honour thy father and mother:
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m and, He that curseth father or
THE for God directs sayING BE-VALUING THE FATHER mother, let him die the death.
be-you-honoring !
sou kai thn mhtera kai o kakologwn patera h mhtera

sou kai tEn mEtera kai ho kakologOn patera E mEtera
G4675 G2532 G3588 G3384 G2532 G3588 G2551 G3962 G2228 G3384
pp 2 Gen Sg Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Part n_ Acc Sg f
OF-YOU AND THE MOTHER AND THE one-EVIL-sayING FATHER OR MOTHER
one-speaking-evil
qanatw teleutatw
thanatO teleutatO
G2288 G5053
n_ Dat Sg m vm Pres Act 3 Sg
to-DEATH LET-BE-deceasING
let-him-be-deceasing !
15:5 umeis de legete os an eiph tw patri h th 5 But ye say, Whosoever shall

humeis de legete hos an eipE tO patri E tE
G5210 G1161 G3004 G3739 G302 G2036 G3588 G3962 G2228 G3588
say to [his] father or [his]
pp 2 Nom Pl Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl pr Nom Sg m Part vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Part t_ Dat Sg f mother, [It is] a gift, by
YOU(p) YET ARE-sayING WHO EVER MAY-BE-sayING to-THE FATHER OR to-THE whatsoever thou mightest be
ye profited by me;
mhtri dwron o ean ex emou wfelhqhs (15:6) kai

mEtri dOron ho ean ex emou OphelEthEs (15:6) kai
G3384 G1435 G3739 G1437 G1537 G1700 G5623 G2532
n_ Dat Sg f n_ Nom Sg n pr Acc Sg n Cond Prep pp 1 Gen Sg vs Aor Pas 2 Sg Conj
MOTHER oblation WHICH IF-EVER OUT OF-ME YOU-MAY-BE-BEING-benefitED AND
approach-present
Matthew 15
ou mh timhsh ton patera autou h thn mhtera

ou mE timEsE ton patera autou hE tEn mEtera
G3756 G3361 G5091 G3588 G3962 G846 G2228 G3588 G3384
Part Neg Part Neg vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m Part t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
NOT NO he-SHOULD-BE-VALUING THE FATHER OF-him OR THE MOTHER
he-should-be-honoring
autou
autou
G846
pp Gen Sg m
OF-him
15:6 kai hkurwsate thn entolhn tou qeou dia thn paradosin 6 And honour not his father or
kai EkurOsate tEn entolEn tou theou dia tEn paradosin
G2532 G208 G3588 G1785 G3588 G2316 G1223 G3588 G3862
his mother, [he shall be free].
Conj vi Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Thus have ye made the
AND YE-UN-SANCTION THE direction OF-THE God THRU THE tradition commandment of God of none
ye-invalidate precept because-of effect by your tradition.
umwn
humOn
G5216
pp 2 Gen Pl
OF-YOU(p)
of-ye
15:7 upokritai kalws proefhteusen peri umwn hsaias legwn 7 [Ye] hypocrites, well did
hupokritai kalOs proephEteusen peri humOn Esaias legOn
G5273 G2573 G4395 G4012 G5216 G2268 G3004
Esaias prophesy of you,
n_ Voc Pl m Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp 2 Gen Pl n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m saying,
hypocrites IDEALly BEFORE-AVERS ABOUT YOU(p) ISAIAH sayING
hypocrites ! prophesies ye
15:8 eggizei moi o laos outos tw stomati autwn kai 8This people draweth nigh
eggizei moi ho laos houtos tO stomati autOn kai
G1448 G3427 G3588 G2992 G3778 G3588 G4750 G846 G2532
unto me with their mouth, and
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pp Gen Pl m Conj honoureth me with [their] lips;
IS-NEARING to-ME THE PEOPLE this to-THE MOUTH OF-them AND but their heart is far from me.
tois ceilesin me tima h de kardia autwn porrw

tois cheilesin me tima hE de kardia autOn porrO
G3588 G5491 G3165 G5091 G3588 G1161 G2588 G846 G4206
t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Pl m Adv
to-THE LIPS ME IS-VALUING THE YET HEART OF-them forward
is-honoring at-a-distance
apecei ap emou
apechei ap emou
G568 G575 G1700
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
IS-FROM-HAVING FROM ME
is-being-away
15:9 mathn de sebontai me didaskontes didaskalias entalmata 9 But in vain they do worship
matEn de sebontai me didaskontes didaskalias entalmata
G3155 G1161 G4576 G3165 G1321 G1319 G1778
me, teaching [for] doctrines the
Adv Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl n commandments of men.
VAIN YET THEY-ARE-REVERING ME TEACHING TEACHings directions
in-vain
anqrwpwn
anthrOpOn
G444
n_ Gen Pl m
OF-humans
15:10 kai proskalesamenos ton oclon eipen autois akouete kai 10 . And he called the
kai proskalesamenos ton ochlon eipen autois akouete kai
G2532 G4341 G3588 G3793 G2036 G846 G191 G2532
multitude, and said unto them,
Conj vp Aor midD Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Hear, and understand:
AND TOWARD-CALLing THE THRONG He-said to-them BE-HEARING AND
calling-to-him be-ye-hearing !
suniete
suniete
G4920
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
BE-understandING
be-ye-understanding !
15:11 ou to eisercomenon eis to stoma koinoi ton 11 Not that which goeth into
ou to eiserchomenon eis to stoma koinoi ton
G3756 G3588 G1525 G1519 G3588 G4750 G2840 G3588
the mouth defileth a man; but
Part Neg t_ Nom Sg n vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg n Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m that which cometh out of the
NOT THE INTO-COMING INTO THE MOUTH IS-COMMONING THE mouth, this defileth a man.
thing-entering is-contaminating
Matthew 15
anqrwpon alla to ekporeuomenon ek tou stomatos touto

anthrOpon alla to ekporeuomenon ek tou stomatos touto
G444 G235 G3588 G1607 G1537 G3588 G4750 G5124
n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg n vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n pd Nom Sg n
human but THE OUT-GOING OUT OF-THE MOUTH this
thing-going-out
koinoi ton anqrwpon

koinoi ton anthrOpon
G2840 G3588 G444
vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
IS-COMMONING THE human
is-contaminating
15:12 tote proselqontes oi maqhtai autou eipon autw 12 Then came his disciples,
tote proselthontes hoi mathEtai autou eipon autO
G5119 G4334 G3588 G3101 G846 G2036 G846
and said unto him, Knowest
Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m thou that the Pharisees were
then TOWARD-COMING THE LEARNers OF-Him said to-Him offended, after they heard this
approaching disciples saying?
oidas oti oi farisaioi akousantes ton logon

oidas hoti hoi pharisaioi akousantes ton logon
G1492 G3754 G3588 G5330 G191 G3588 G3056
vi Perf Act 2 Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
YOU-HAVE-PERCEIVED that THE PHARISEES HEARing THE saying
you-are-aware word
eskandalisqhsan
eskandalisthEsan
G4624
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
ARE-SNARED
15:13 o de apokriqeis eipen pasa futeia hn ouk 13 But he answered and said,
ho de apokritheis eipen pasa phuteia hEn ouk
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G3956 G5451 G3739 G3756
Every plant, which my
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pr Acc Sg f Part Neg heavenly Father hath not
THE YET answerING He-said EVERY plant WHICH NOT planted, shall be rooted up.
efuteusen o pathr mou o ouranios ekrizwqhsetai

ephuteusen ho patEr mou ho ouranios ekrizOthEsetai
G5452 G3588 G3962 G3450 G3588 G3770 G1610
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
plants THE FATHER OF-ME THE heavenly SHALL-BE-BEING-OUT-ROOTED
shall-be-being-uprooted
15:14 afete autous odhgoi eisin tufloi tuflwn tuflos de 14 Let them alone: they be
aphete autous hodEgoi eisin tuphloi tuphlOn tuphlos de
G863 G846 G3595 G1526 G5185 G5185 G5185 G1161
blind leaders of the blind. And
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl pp Acc Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m a_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom Sg m Conj if the blind lead the blind, both
FROM-LET them WAY-LEADers THEY-ARE BLIND OF-BLIND BLIND YET shall fall into the ditch.
leave-ye ! guides of-blind-ones blind-one
tuflon ean odhgh amfoteroi eis boqunon pesountai

tuphlon ean hodEgE amphoteroi eis bothunon pesountai
G5185 G1437 G3594 G297 G1519 G999 G4098
a_ Acc Sg m Cond vs Pres Act 3 Sg a_ Nom Pl m Prep n_ Acc Sg m vi Fut midD/pasD 3 Pl
BLIND IF-EVER MAY-BE-WAY-LEADING both INTO PIT SHALL-BE-FALLING
blind-one may-be-guiding
15:15 apokriqeis de o petros eipen autw frason hmin 15 Then answered Peter and
apokritheis de ho petros eipen autO phrason hEmin
G611 G1161 G3588 G4074 G2036 G846 G5419 G2254
said unto him, Declare unto us
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl this parable.
answerING YET THE Peter said to-Him DECIPHER to-US
decipher-you !
thn parabolhn tauthn

tEn parabolEn tautEn
G3588 G3850 G3778
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f
THE BESIDE-CAST this
parable
15:16 o de ihsous eipen akmhn kai umeis asunetoi 16 And Jesus said, Are ye also
ho de iEsous eipen akmEn kai humeis asunetoi
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G188 G2532 G5210 G801
yet without understanding?
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f Conj pp 2 Nom Pl a_ Nom Pl m
THE YET JESUS said POINT AND YOU(p) UN-intelligent
at-this-point-of-time also ye unintelligent
este
este
G2075
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
ARE
Matthew 15
15:17 oupw noeite oti pan to eisporeuomenon eis to 17 Do not ye yet understand,
oupO noeite hoti pan to eisporeuomenon eis to
G3768 G3539 G3754 G3956 G3588 G1531 G1519 G3588
that whatsoever entereth in at
Adv vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj a_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg n Prep t_ Acc Sg n the mouth goeth into the belly,
NOT-as-yet YE-ARE-MINDING that EVERY THE INTO-GOING INTO THE and is cast out into the
ye-are-apprehending thing-going-into draught?
stoma eis thn koilian cwrei kai eis afedrwna ekballetai

stoma eis tEn koilian chOrei kai eis aphedrOna ekballetai
G4750 G1519 G3588 G2836 G5562 G2532 G1519 G856 G1544
n_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj Prep n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
MOUTH INTO THE CAVITY IS-SPACING AND INTO FROM-SETTLE IS-beING-OUT-CAST
bowel is-becoming-contents latrine is-being-evacuated
15:18 ta de ekporeuomena ek tou stomatos ek ths kardias 18 But those things which
ta de ekporeuomena ek tou stomatos ek tEs kardias
G3588 G1161 G1607 G1537 G3588 G4750 G1537 G3588 G2588
proceed out of the mouth come
t_ Nom Pl n Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl n Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f forth from the heart; and they
THE YET OUT-GOINGS OUT OF-THE MOUTH OUT OF-THE HEART defile the man.
the-things going-out
exercetai kakeina koinoi ton anqrwpon

exerchetai kakeina koinoi ton anthrOpon
G1831 G2548 G2840 G3588 G444
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg pd Nom Pl n Con vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
IS-OUT-COMING AND-those IS-COMMONING THE human
is-coming-out and-those-things is-contaminating
15:19 ek gar ths kardias exercontai dialogismoi ponhroi fonoi 19 For out of the heart proceed
ek gar tEs kardias exerchontai dialogismoi ponEroi phonoi
G1537 G1063 G3588 G2588 G1831 G1261 G4190 G5408
evil thoughts, murders,
Prep Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m adulteries, fornications, thefts,
OUT for OF-THE HEART ARE-OUT-COMING THRU-accounts wicked MURDERS false witness, blasphemies:
are-coming-out reasonings
moiceiai porneiai klopai yeudomarturiai blasfhmiai

moicheiai porneiai klopai pseudomarturiai blasphEmiai
G3430 G4202 G2829 G5577 G988
n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f
ADULTERIES PROSTITUTIONS thefts FALSE-witnesses HARM-AVERments
false-testimonies calumnies
15:20 tauta estin ta koinounta ton anqrwpon to de 20 These are [the things] which
tauta estin ta koinounta ton anthrOpon to de
G5023 G2076 G3588 G2840 G3588 G444 G3588 G1161
defile a man: but to eat with
pd Nom Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Pl n t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg n Conj unwashen hands defileth not a
these IS THE COMMONING THE human THE YET man.
the-things contaminating
aniptois cersin fagein ou koinoi ton anqrwpon

aniptois chersin phagein ou koinoi ton anthrOpon
G449 G5495 G5315 G3756 G2840 G3588 G444
a_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl f vn 2Aor Act Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
to-UN-WASHED HANDS TO-BE-EATING NOT IS-COMMONING THE human
to-unwashed is-contaminating
15:21 kai exelqwn ekeiqen o ihsous anecwrhsen eis ta merh 21 . Then Jesus went thence,
kai exelthOn ekeithen ho iEsous anechOrEsen eis ta merE
G2532 G1831 G1564 G3588 G2424 G402 G1519 G3588 G3313
and departed into the coasts of
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Tyre and Sidon.
AND OUT-COMING thence THE JESUS UP-SPACES INTO THE PARTS
coming-out retires
turou kai sidwnos

turou kai sidOnos
G5184 G2532 G4605
n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f
OF-TYRE AND OF-SIDON
15:22 kai idou gunh cananaia apo twn oriwn ekeinwn exelqousa 22 And, behold, a woman of
kai idou gunE chananaia apo tOn horiOn ekeinOn exelthousa
G2532 G2400 G1135 G5478 G575 G3588 G3725 G1565 G1831
Canaan came out of the same
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n pd Gen Pl n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f coasts, and cried unto him,
AND BE-PERCEIVING WOMAN CANAANitish FROM THE boundaries those OUT-COMING saying, Have mercy on me, O
lo ! coming-out Lord, [thou] Son of David; my
daughter is grievously vexed
ekraugasen autw legousa elehson me kurie uie dabid with a devil.
ekraugasen autO legousa eleEson me kurie huie dabid
G2905 G846 G3004 G1653 G3165 G2962 G5207 G1138
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg f vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg n_ Voc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m ni proper
clamors to-Him sayING BE-MERCIFUL-to ME Master ! SON ! of-DAVID
be-you-merciful-to ! Lord ! of-David
h qugathr mou kakws daimonizetai

hE thugatEr mou kakOs daimonizetai
G3588 G2364 G3450 G2560 G1139
t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg Adv vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
THE DAUGHTER OF-ME EVILly IS-beING-demonizED
Matthew 15
15:23 o de ouk apekriqh auth logon kai proselqontes oi 23 But he answered her not a
ho de ouk apekrithE autE logon kai proselthontes hoi
G3588 G1161 G3756 G611 G846 G3056 G2532 G4334 G3588
word. And his disciples came
t_ Nom Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f n_ Acc Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m and besought him, saying,
THE YET NOT He-answerED to-her saying AND TOWARD-COMING THE Send her away; for she crieth
her word approaching after us.
maqhtai autou hrwtwn auton legontes apoluson authn oti

mathEtai autou ErOtOn auton legontes apoluson autEn hoti
G3101 G846 G2065 G846 G3004 G630 G846 G3754
n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp Acc Sg f Conj
LEARNers OF-Him askED Him sayING FROM-LOOSE her that
disciples dismiss-you !
krazei opisqen hmwn

krazei opisthen hEmOn
G2896 G3693 G2257
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv pp 1 Gen Pl
she-IS-CRYING BEHIND-PLACE OF-US
after us
15:24 o de apokriqeis eipen ouk apestalhn ei mh eis 24 But he answered and said, I
ho de apokritheis eipen ouk apestalEn ei mE eis
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G3756 G649 G1487 G3361 G1519
am not sent but unto the lost
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Part Neg vi 2Aor Pas 1 Sg Cond Part Neg Prep sheep of the house of Israel.
THE YET answerING He-said NOT I-WAS-commissionED IF NO INTO
ta probata ta apolwlota oikou israhl

ta probata ta apolOlota oikou israEl
G3588 G4263 G3588 G622 G3624 G2474
t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Pl n vp 2Perf Act Acc Pl n n_ Gen Sg m ni proper
THE sheep THE HAVING-been-destroyED OF-HOME of-ISRAEL
sheep(p) having-been-lost of-house of-Israel
15:25 h de elqousa prosekunei autw legousa kurie 25 Then came she and
hE de elthousa prosekunei autO legousa kurie
G3588 G1161 G2064 G4352 G846 G3004 G2962
worshipped him, saying, Lord,
t_ Nom Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg f n_ Voc Sg m help me.
THE YET COMING she-worshipED to-Him sayING Master !
him Lord !
bohqei moi
boEthei moi
G997 G3427
vm Pres Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg
BE-helpING to-ME
be-you-helping ! me
15:26 o de apokriqeis eipen ouk estin kalon labein 26 But he answered and said, It
ho de apokritheis eipen ouk estin kalon labein
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G3756 G2076 G2570 G2983
is not meet to take the
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg n vn 2Aor Act children's bread, and to cast
THE YET answerING He-said NOT it-IS IDEAL TO-BE-GETTING [it] to dogs.
to-be-taking
ton arton twn teknwn kai balein tois kunariois

ton arton tOn teknOn kai balein tois kunariois
G3588 G740 G3588 G5043 G2532 G906 G3588 G2952
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n Conj vn 2Aor Act t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n
THE BREAD OF-THE offsprings AND TO-BE-CASTING to-THE dogs (dim)
children puppies
15:27 h de eipen nai kurie kai gar ta kunaria esqiei 27 And she said, Truth, Lord:
hE de eipen nai kurie kai gar ta kunaria esthiei
G3588 G1161 G2036 G3483 G2962 G2532 G1063 G3588 G2952 G2068
yet the dogs eat of the crumbs
t_ Nom Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Part n_ Voc Sg m Conj Conj t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n vi Pres Act 3 Sg which fall from their
THE YET she-said YEA Master ! AND for THE dogs (dim) IS-EATING masters'table.
yes Lord ! also puppies
apo twn yiciwn twn piptontwn apo ths trapezhs twn kuriwn
apo tOn psichiOn tOn piptontOn apo tEs trapezEs tOn kuriOn
G575 G3588 G5589 G3588 G4098 G575 G3588 G5132 G3588 G2962
Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n t_ Gen Pl n vp Pres Act Gen Pl n Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
FROM THE SCRAPS OF-THE FALLING FROM THE table OF-THE masters
the-ones
autwn
autOn
G846
pp Gen Pl n
OF-them
15:28 tote apokriqeis o ihsous eipen auth w gunai megalh 28 Then Jesus answered and
tote apokritheis ho iEsous eipen autE O gunai megalE
G5119 G611 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G5599 G1135 G3173
said unto her, O woman, great
Adv vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f Inj n_ Voc Sg f a_ Nom Sg f [is] thy faith: be it unto thee
then answerING THE JESUS said to-her o! WOMAN ! GREAT even as thou wilt. And her
daughter was made whole from
Matthew 15
that very hour.

sou h pistis genhqhtw soi ws qeleis kai
sou hE pistis genEthEtO soi hOs theleis kai
G4675 G3588 G4102 G1096 G4671 G5613 G2309 G2532
pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vm Aor pasD 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Adv vi Pres Act 2 Sg Conj
OF-YOU THE BELIEF LET-it-BE-BEING-BECOME to-YOU AS YOU-ARE-WILLING AND
faith let-it-be-being-become !
iaqh h qugathr auths apo ths wras ekeinhs

iathE hE thugatEr autEs apo tEs hOras ekeinEs
G2390 G3588 G2364 G846 G575 G3588 G5610 G1565
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f
WAS-HEALED THE DAUGHTER OF-her FROM THE HOUR that
15:29 kai metabas ekeiqen o ihsous hlqen para thn 29 . And Jesus departed from
kai metabas ekeithen ho iEsous Elthen para tEn
G2532 G3327 G1564 G3588 G2424 G2064 G3844 G3588
thence, and came nigh unto the
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f sea of Galilee; and went up
AND after-STEPPing thence THE JESUS CAME BESIDE THE into a mountain, and sat down
proceeding there.
qalassan ths galilaias kai anabas eis to oros

thalassan tEs galilaias kai anabas eis to oros
G2281 G3588 G1056 G2532 G305 G1519 G3588 G3735
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
SEA OF-THE GALILEE AND UP-STEPPing INTO THE mountain
ascending
ekaqhto ekei
ekathEto ekei
G2521 G1563
vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Adv
He-sat there
15:30 kai proshlqon autw ocloi polloi econtes meq eautwn 30 And great multitudes came
kai prosElthon autO ochloi polloi echontes meth heautOn
G2532 G4334 G846 G3793 G4183 G2192 G3326 G1438
unto him, having with them
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep pf 3 Gen Pl m [those that were] lame, blind,
AND TOWARD-CAME to-Him THRONGS MANY HAVING WITH selves dumb, maimed, and many
came-to him vast themselves others, and cast them down at
Jesus'feet; and he healed them:
cwlous tuflous kwfous kullous kai eterous pollous kai erriyan
chOlous tuphlous kOphous kullous kai heterous pollous kai erripsan
G5560 G5185 G2974 G2948 G2532 G2087 G4183 G2532 G4496
a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
LAME-ones BLIND-ones MUTES MAIMED-ones AND DIFFERENT-ones MANY AND THEY-TOSS
lame-ones blind-ones deaf-mutes maimed-ones different-ones
autous para tous podas tou ihsou kai eqerapeusen autous

autous para tous podas tou iEsou kai etherapeusen autous
G846 G3844 G3588 G4228 G3588 G2424 G2532 G2323 G846
pp Acc Pl m Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m
them BESIDE THE FEET OF-THE JESUS AND He-curES them
15:31 wste tous oclous qaumasai blepontas kwfous lalountas 31 Insomuch that the multitude
hOste tous ochlous thaumasai blepontas kOphous lalountas
G5620 G3588 G3793 G2296 G991 G2974 G2980
wondered, when they saw the
Conj t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vn Aor Act vp Pres Act Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m dumb to speak, the maimed to
AS-BESIDES THE THRONGS TO-MARVEL lookING MUTES TALKING be whole, the lame to walk,
so-that observing deaf-mutes speaking and the blind to see: and they
glorified the God of Israel.
kullous ugieis cwlous peripatountas kai tuflous blepontas kai
kullous hugieis chOlous peripatountas kai tuphlous blepontas kai
G2948 G5199 G5560 G4043 G2532 G5185 G991 G2532
a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Conj
MAIMED-ones SOUND-ones LAME-ones ABOUT-TREADING AND BLIND-ones lookING AND
maimed-ones sound lame-ones walking blind-ones observing
edoxasan ton qeon israhl

edoxasan ton theon israEl
G1392 G3588 G2316 G2474
vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m ni proper
THEY-esteemize THE God of-ISRAEL
they-glorify of-Israel
15:32 o de ihsous proskalesamenos tous maqhtas autou eipen 32 Then Jesus called his
ho de iEsous proskalesamenos tous mathEtas autou eipen
G3588 G1161 G2424 G4341 G3588 G3101 G846 G2036
disciples [unto him], and said,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor midD Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg I have compassion on the
THE YET JESUS TOWARD-CALLing THE LEARNers OF-Him said multitude, because they
calling-to-him disciples continue with me now three
days, and have nothing to eat:
splagcnizomai epi ton oclon oti hdh hmeras treis and I will not send them away
splagchnizomai epi ton ochlon hoti EdE hEmeras treis fasting, lest they faint in the
G4697 G1909 G3588 G3793 G3754 G2235 G2250 G5140
vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj Adv n_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f way.
I-AM-beING-compassionatED ON THE THRONG that ALREADY DAYS THREE
I-am-being-moved-with-compassion
Matthew 15
prosmenousin moi kai ouk ecousin ti fagwsin

prosmenousin moi kai ouk echousin ti phagOsin
G4357 G3427 G2532 G3756 G2192 G5101 G5315
vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg Conj Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Pl pi Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-ARE-TOWARD-REMAINING to-ME AND NOT THEY-ARE-HAVING ANY THEY-MAY-BE-EATING
they-are-remaining-with me anything
kai apolusai autous nhsteis ou qelw mhpote

kai apolusai autous nEsteis ou thelO mEpote
G2532 G630 G846 G3523 G3756 G2309 G3379
Conj vn Aor Act pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Part Neg vi Pres Act 1 Sg Adv
AND TO-FROM-LOOSE them fasting NOT I-AM-WILLING NO-?-when
to-dismiss lest-at-some-time
ekluqwsin en th odw
ekluthOsin en tE hodO
G1590 G1722 G3588 G3598
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
THEY-MAY-BE-BEING-OUT-LOOSED IN THE WAY
they-may-be-fainting
15:33 kai legousin autw oi maqhtai autou poqen hmin en 33 And his disciples say unto
kai legousin autO hoi mathEtai autou pothen hEmin en
G2532 G3004 G846 G3588 G3101 G846 G4159 G2254 G1722
him, Whence should we have
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m Adv Int pp 1 Dat Pl Prep so much bread in the
AND ARE-sayING to-Him THE LEARNers OF-Him ?-WHICH-PLACE to-US IN wilderness, as to fill so great a
disciples whence ? multitude?
erhmia artoi tosoutoi wste cortasai oclon tosouton

erEmia artoi tosoutoi hOste chortasai ochlon tosouton
G2047 G740 G5118 G5620 G5526 G3793 G5118
n_ Dat Sg f n_ Nom Pl m pd Nom Pl m Conj vn Aor Act n_ Acc Sg m pd Acc Sg m
DESOLATE BREADS so-much AS-BESIDES TO-satisfy THRONG so-much
wilderness bread(p) so-as
15:34 kai legei autois o ihsous posous artous ecete 34 And Jesus saith unto them,
kai legei autois ho iEsous posous artous echete
G2532 G3004 G846 G3588 G2424 G4214 G740 G2192
How many loaves have ye?
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pq Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl And they said, Seven, and a
AND IS-sayING to-them THE JESUS how-many BREADS YE-ARE-HAVING few little fishes.
cakes-of-bread
oi de eipon epta kai oliga icqudia

hoi de eipon hepta kai oliga ichthudia
G3588 G1161 G2036 G2033 G2532 G3641 G2485
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Conj a_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
THE YET THEY-said SEVEN AND FEW FISHES (dim)
small-fishes
15:35 kai ekeleusen tois oclois anapesein epi thn ghn 35 And he commanded the
kai ekeleusen tois ochlois anapesein epi tEn gEn
G2532 G2753 G3588 G3793 G377 G1909 G3588 G1093
multitude to sit down on the
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f ground.
AND He-ORDERS to-THE THRONGS TO-BE-UP-FALLING ON THE LAND
to-be-leaning-back earth
15:36 kai labwn tous epta artous kai tous icquas 36 And he took the seven
kai labOn tous hepta artous kai tous ichthuas
G2532 G2983 G3588 G2033 G740 G2532 G3588 G2486
loaves and the fishes, and gave
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m thanks, and brake [them], and
AND GETTING THE SEVEN BREADS AND THE FISHES gave to his disciples, and the
taking cakes-of-bread disciples to the multitude.
eucaristhsas eklasen kai edwken tois maqhtais autou oi de

eucharistEsas eklasen kai edOken tois mathEtais autou hoi de
G2168 G2806 G2532 G1325 G3588 G3101 G846 G3588 G1161
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m t_ Nom Pl m Conj
thanking He-BREAKS AND GIVES to-THE LEARNers OF-Him THE YET
giving-thanks disciples
maqhtai tw oclw
mathEtai tO ochlO
G3101 G3588 G3793
n_ Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
LEARNers to-THE THRONG
disciples
15:37 kai efagon pantes kai ecortasqhsan kai hran to 37 And they did all eat, and
kai ephagon pantes kai echortasthEsan kai Eran to
G2532 G5315 G3956 G2532 G5526 G2532 G142 G3588
were filled: and they took up of
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n the broken [meat] that was left
AND THEY-ATE ALL AND ARE-satisfiED AND THEY-LIFT THE seven baskets full.
they-pick-up
perisseuon twn klasmatwn epta spuridas plhreis

perisseuon tOn klasmatOn hepta spuridas plEreis
G4052 G3588 G2801 G2033 G4711 G4134
vp Pres Act Acc Sg n t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f
exceedING OF-THE BREAKS SEVEN HAMPERS FULL
being-superfluous fragments
15:38 oi de esqiontes hsan tetrakiscilioi andres cwris 38 And they that did eat were
hoi de esthiontes Esan tetrakischilioi andres chOris
G3588 G1161 G2068 G2258 G5070 G435 G5565
four thousand men, beside
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vi Impf vxx 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Adv women and children.
THE-ones YET EATING WERE FOUR-times-THOUSAND MEN apart-from
the ones-eating four-thousand
gunaikwn kai paidiwn

gunaikOn kai paidiOn
G1135 G2532 G3813
n_ Gen Pl f Conj n_ Gen Pl n
WOMEN AND little-boys-and-girls
15:39 kai apolusas tous oclous enebh eis to ploion kai 39 And he sent away the
kai apolusas tous ochlous enebE eis to ploion kai
G2532 G630 G3588 G3793 G1684 G1519 G3588 G4143 G2532
multitude, and took ship, and
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj came into the coasts of
AND FROM-LOOSing THE THRONGS He-IN-STEPPed INTO THE FLOATer AND Magdala.
dismissing he-stepped-in ship
hlqen eis ta oria magdala

Elthen eis ta horia magdala
G2064 G1519 G3588 G3725 G3093
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n ni proper
CAME INTO THE boundaries of-MAGDALA
of-Magdala
Matthew 16
16:1 kai proselqontes oi farisaioi kai saddoukaioi peirazontes 1 . The Pharisees also with the
kai proselthontes hoi pharisaioi kai saddoukaioi peirazontes
G2532 G4334 G3588 G5330 G2532 G4523 G3985
Sadducees came, and tempting
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m desired him that he would
AND TOWARD-COMING THE PHARISEES AND SADDUCEES tryING shew them a sign from heaven.
approaching
ephrwthsan auton shmeion ek tou ouranou epideixai autois

epErOtEsan auton sEmeion ek tou ouranou epideixai autois
G1905 G846 G4592 G1537 G3588 G3772 G1925 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act pp Dat Pl m
THEY-inquire-of Him SIGN OUT OF-THE heaven TO-ON-SHOW to-them
inquire-of to-exhibit
16:2 o de apokriqeis eipen autois oyias genomenhs 2 He answered and said unto
ho de apokritheis eipen autois opsias genomenEs
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G846 G3798 G1096
them, When it is evening, ye
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m a_ Gen Sg f vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f say, [It will be] fair weather:
THE YET answerING He-said to-them OF-evening BECOMING for the sky is red.
legete eudia purrazei gar o ouranos

legete eudia purrazei gar ho ouranos
G3004 G2105 G4449 G1063 G3588 G3772
vi Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Nom Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
YE-ARE-sayING WELL-weather IS-FIERYizING for THE heaven
fair-weather is-coloring-fiery-red sky
16:3 kai prwi shmeron ceimwn purrazei gar stugnazwn o 3 And in the morning, [It will
kai prOi sEmeron cheimOn purrazei gar stugnazOn ho
G2532 G4404 G4594 G5494 G4449 G1063 G4768 G3588
be] foul weather to day: for the
Conj Adv Adv n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m sky is red and lowring. O [ye]
AND to-morning toDAY WINTER IS-FIERYizING for SOMBERING THE hypocrites, ye can discern the
in-the-morning tempest is-coloring-fiery-red being-somber face of the sky; but can ye not
[discern] the signs of the
ouranos upokritai to men proswpon tou ouranou ginwskete times?
ouranos hupokritai to men prosOpon tou ouranou ginOskete
G3772 G5273 G3588 G3303 G4383 G3588 G3772 G1097
n_ Nom Sg m n_ Voc Pl m t_ Acc Sg n Part n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Pl
heaven hypocrites THE INDEED face OF-THE heaven YE-ARE-KNOWING
sky hypocrites ! sky
diakrinein ta de shmeia twn kairwn ou dunasqe

diakrinein ta de sEmeia tOn kairOn ou dunasthe
G1252 G3588 G1161 G4592 G3588 G2540 G3756 G1410
vn Pres Act t_ Acc Pl n Conj n_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
TO-BE-THRU-JUDGING THE YET SIGNS OF-THE SEASONS NOT YE-ARE-ABLE
to-be-discriminating appointed-times ye-can
16:4 genea ponhra kai moicalis shmeion epizhtei kai shmeion ou 4 A wicked and adulterous
genea ponEra kai moichalis sEmeion epizEtei kai sEmeion ou
G1074 G4190 G2532 G3428 G4592 G1934 G2532 G4592 G3756
generation seeketh after a sign;
n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg n Part Neg and there shall no sign be
generation wicked AND ADULTERess SIGN IS-ON-SEEKING AND SIGN NOT given unto it, but the sign of
a generation an-adulteress is-seeking-for the prophet Jonas. And he left
them, and departed.
doqhsetai auth ei mh to shmeion iwna tou profhtou
dothEsetai autE ei mE to sEmeion iOna tou prophEtou
G1325 G846 G1487 G3361 G3588 G4592 G2495 G3588 G4396
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f Cond Part Neg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-her IF NO THE SIGN of-JONA THE BEFORE-AVERer
of-Jonah prophet
kai katalipwn autous aphlqen

kai katalipOn autous apElthen
G2532 G2641 G846 G565
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND leavING them He-FROM-CAME
he-came-away
16:5 kai elqontes oi maqhtai autou eis to peran 5 . And when his disciples
kai elthontes hoi mathEtai autou eis to peran
G2532 G2064 G3588 G3101 G846 G1519 G3588 G4008
were come to the other side,
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n Adv they had forgotten to take
AND COMING THE LEARNers OF-Him INTO THE OTHER-SIDE bread.
disciples
epelaqonto artous labein

epelathonto artous labein
G1950 G740 G2983
vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl n_ Acc Pl m vn 2Aor Act
THEY-forgot BREADS TO-BE-GETTING
bread(p)
16:6 o de ihsous eipen autois orate kai prosecete apo 6 Then Jesus said unto them,
ho de iEsous eipen autois horate kai prosechete apo
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G846 G3708 G2532 G4337 G575
Take heed and beware of the
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep leaven of the Pharisees and of
THE YET JESUS said to-them BE-SEEING AND BE-heedING FROM the Sadducees.
be-ye-seeing ! be-ye-heeding !
Matthew 16
ths zumhs twn farisaiwn kai saddoukaiwn

tEs zumEs tOn pharisaiOn kai saddoukaiOn
G3588 G2219 G3588 G5330 G2532 G4523
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m
THE FERMENT OF-THE PHARISEES AND SADDUCEES
leaven
16:7 oi de dielogizonto en eautois legontes oti artous ouk 7 And they reasoned among
hoi de dielogizonto en heautois legontes hoti artous ouk
G3588 G1161 G1260 G1722 G1438 G3004 G3754 G740 G3756
themselves, saying, [It is]
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep pf 3 Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl m Part Neg because we have taken no
THE YET THEY-THRU-accountED IN selves sayING that BREADS NOT bread.
they-reasoned among themselves bread(p)
elabomen
elabomen
G2983
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
WE-GOT
16:8 gnous de o ihsous eipen autois ti 8 [Which] when Jesus

gnous de ho iEsous eipen autois ti
G1097 G1161 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G5101
perceived, he said unto them,
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg n O ye of little faith, why reason
KNOWING YET THE JESUS He-said to-them ANY ye among yourselves, because
why ? ye have brought no bread?
dialogizesqe en eautois oligopistoi oti artous ouk elabete

dialogizesthe en heautois oligopistoi hoti artous ouk elabete
G1260 G1722 G1438 G3640 G3754 G740 G3756 G2983
vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Prep pf 3 Dat Pl m a_ Voc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl m Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
YE-ARE-THRU-accountING IN selves FEW-BELIEVing-ones that BREADS NOT YE-GOT
ye-are-reasoning among yourselves scant-of-faith-ones ! bread(p)
16:9 oupw noeite oude mnhmoneuete tous pente artous twn 9 Do ye not yet understand,
oupO noeite oude mnEmoneuete tous pente artous tOn
G3768 G3539 G3761 G3421 G3588 G4002 G740 G3588
neither remember the five
Adv vi Pres Act 2 Pl Adv vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Pl m loaves of the five thousand,
NOT-as-yet YE-ARE-MINDING NOT-YET YE-ARE-rememberING THE FIVE BREADS OF-THE and how many baskets ye took
ye-are-apprehending neither cakes-of-bread up?
pentakisciliwn kai posous kofinous elabete

pentakischiliOn kai posous kophinous elabete
G4000 G2532 G4214 G2894 G2983
a_ Gen Pl m Conj pq Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
FIVE-times-THOUSAND AND how-many PANNIERS YE-GOT
five-thousand
16:10 oude tous epta artous twn tetrakisciliwn kai posas spuridas 10 Neither the seven loaves of
oude tous hepta artous tOn tetrakischiliOn kai posas spuridas
G3761 G3588 G2033 G740 G3588 G5070 G2532 G4214 G4711
the four thousand, and how
Adv t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m Conj pq Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f many baskets ye took up?
NOT-YET THE SEVEN BREADS OF-THE FOUR-times-THOUSAND AND how-many HAMPERS
neither cakes-of-bread four-thousand
elabete
elabete
G2983
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
YE-GOT
16:11 pws ou noeite oti ou peri artou eipon umin 11 How is it that ye do not
pOs ou noeite hoti ou peri artou eipon humin
G4459 G3756 G3539 G3754 G3756 G4012 G740 G2036 G5213
understand that I spake [it] not
Adv Int Part Neg vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Part Neg Prep n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl to you concerning bread, that
how NOT YE-ARE-MINDING that NOT ABOUT BREAD I-said to-YOU(p) ye should beware of the leaven
how ? ye-are-apprehending concerning to-ye of the Pharisees and of the
Sadducees?
prosecein apo ths zumhs twn farisaiwn kai saddoukaiwn
prosechein apo tEs zumEs tOn pharisaiOn kai saddoukaiOn
G4337 G575 G3588 G2219 G3588 G5330 G2532 G4523
vn Pres Act Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m
TO-BE-heedING FROM THE FERMENT OF-THE PHARISEES AND SADDUCEES
leaven
16:12 tote sunhkan oti ouk eipen prosecein apo ths zumhs 12 Then understood they how
tote sunEkan hoti ouk eipen prosechein apo tEs zumEs
G5119 G4920 G3754 G3756 G2036 G4337 G575 G3588 G2219
that he bade [them] not beware
Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vn Pres Act Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f of the leaven of bread, but of
then THEY-understand that NOT He-said TO-BE-heedING FROM THE FERMENT the doctrine of the Pharisees
leaven and of the Sadducees.
tou artou all apo ths didachs twn farisaiwn kai saddoukaiwn
tou artou all apo tEs didachEs tOn pharisaiOn kai saddoukaiOn
G3588 G740 G235 G575 G3588 G1322 G3588 G5330 G2532 G4523
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE BREAD but FROM THE TEACHing OF-THE PHARISEES AND SADDUCEES
Matthew 16
16:13 elqwn de o ihsous eis ta merh kaisareias ths 13 . When Jesus came into the
elthOn de ho iEsous eis ta merE kaisareias tEs
G2064 G1161 G3588 G2424 G1519 G3588 G3313 G2542 G3588
coasts of Caesarea Philippi, he
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f asked his disciples, saying,
COMING YET THE JESUS INTO THE PARTS OF-CAESAREA OF-THE Whom do men say that I the
Son of man am?
filippou hrwta tous maqhtas autou legwn tina me

philippou ErOta tous mathEtas autou legOn tina me
G5376 G2065 G3588 G3101 G846 G3004 G5101 G3165
n_ Gen Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pi Acc Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg
Philip askED THE LEARNers OF-Him sayING ANY ME
he-asked disciples who ?
legousin oi anqrwpoi einai ton uion tou anqrwpou

legousin hoi anthrOpoi einai ton huion tou anthrOpou
G3004 G3588 G444 G1511 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444
vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vn Pres vxx t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
ARE-sayING THE humans TO-BE THE SON OF-THE human
16:14 oi de eipon oi men iwannhn ton baptisthn alloi 14 And they said, Some [say
hoi de eipon hoi men iOannEn ton baptistEn alloi
G3588 G1161 G2036 G3588 G3303 G2491 G3588 G910 G243
that thou art] John the Baptist:
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m Part n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m a_ Nom Pl m some, Elias; and others,
THE YET THEY-said THE INDEED JOHN THE DIPist others Jeremias, or one of the
the-ones baptist prophets.
de hlian eteroi de ieremian h ena twn profhtwn

de Elian heteroi de ieremian E hena tOn prophEtOn
G1161 G2243 G2087 G1161 G2408 G2228 G1520 G3588 G4396
Conj n_ Acc Sg m a_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Part a_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
YET ELIAS DIFFERENT-ones YET JEREMIAH OR ONE OF-THE BEFORE-AVERers
Elijah different-ones prophets
16:15 legei autois umeis de tina me legete einai 15 He saith unto them, But
legei autois humeis de tina me legete einai
G3004 G846 G5210 G1161 G5101 G3165 G3004 G1511
whom say ye that I am?
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pp 2 Nom Pl Conj pi Acc Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres Act 2 Pl vn Pres vxx
He-IS-sayING to-them YOU(p) YET ANY ME ARE-sayING TO-BE
ye who ? ye-are-saying
16:16 apokriqeis de simwn petros eipen su ei o 16 And Simon Peter answered

apokritheis de simOn petros eipen su ei ho
G611 G1161 G4613 G4074 G2036 G4771 G1488 G3588
and said, Thou art the Christ,
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp 2 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m the Son of the living God.
answerING YET SIMON Peter said YOU ARE THE
cristos o uios tou qeou tou zwntos

christos ho huios tou theou tou zOntos
G5547 G3588 G5207 G3588 G2316 G3588 G2198
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m
ANOINTED THE SON OF-THE God THE LIVING
Christ
16:17 kai apokriqeis o ihsous eipen autw makarios ei 17 And Jesus answered and
kai apokritheis ho iEsous eipen autO makarios ei
G2532 G611 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G3107 G1488
said unto him, Blessed art
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 2 Sg thou, Simon Barjona: for flesh
AND answerING THE JESUS said to-him HAPPY YOU-ARE and blood hath not revealed [it]
unto thee, but my Father which
is in heaven.
simwn bar iwna oti sarx kai aima ouk apekaluyen
simOn bar iOna hoti sarx kai haima ouk apekalupsen
G4613 G920 G920 G3754 G4561 G2532 G129 G3756 G601
n_ Voc Sg m Aramaic Aramaic Conj n_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg n Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Sg
SIMON BAR (Aramaic SON) JONA (Hebrew DOVE) that FLESH AND BLOOD NOT it-FROM-COVERS
Bar Jona reveals
soi all o pathr mou o en tois ouranois

soi all ho patEr mou ho en tois ouranois
G4671 G235 G3588 G3962 G3450 G3588 G1722 G3588 G3772
pp 2 Dat Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
to-YOU but THE FATHER OF-ME THE IN THE heavens
the-one
16:18 kagw de soi legw oti su ei petros kai 18 And I say also unto thee,
kagO de soi legO hoti su ei petros kai
G2504 G1161 G4671 G3004 G3754 G4771 G1488 G4074 G2532
That thou art Peter, and upon
pp 1 Nom Sg Con Conj pp 2 Dat Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Conj this rock I will build my
AND-I YET to-YOU AM-sayING that YOU ARE Peter (ROCK) AND church; and the gates of hell
also-I Peter shall not prevail against it.
epi tauth th petra oikodomhsw mou thn ekklhsian kai

epi tautE tE petra oikodomEsO mou tEn ekklEsian kai
G1909 G3778 G3588 G4073 G3618 G3450 G3588 G1577 G2532
Prep pd Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj
ON this THE ROCK I-SHALL-BE-HOME-BUILDING OF-ME THE OUT-CALLED AND
I-shall-be-building ecclesia
Matthew 16
pulai adou ou katiscusousin auths

pulai hadou ou katischusousin autEs
G4439 G86 G3756 G2729 G846
n_ Nom Pl f n_ Gen Sg m Part Neg vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp Gen Sg f
GATES OF-UN-PERCEIVED NOT SHALL-BE-DOWN-STRONG-ING OF-her
of-unseen shall-be-prevailing
16:19 kai dwsw soi tas kleis ths basileias twn ouranwn 19 And I will give unto thee the
kai dOsO soi tas kleis tEs basileias tOn ouranOn
G2532 G1325 G4671 G3588 G2807 G3588 G932 G3588 G3772
keys of the kingdom of heaven:
Conj vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m and whatsoever thou shalt bind
AND I-SHALL-BE-GIVING to-YOU THE LOCKers OF-THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens on earth shall be bound in
keys heaven: and whatsoever thou
shalt loose on earth shall be
kai o ean dhshs epi ths ghs estai loosed in heaven.
kai ho ean dEsEs epi tEs gEs estai
G2532 G3739 G1437 G1210 G1909 G3588 G1093 G2071
Conj pr Acc Sg n Cond vs Aor Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
AND WHICH IF-EVER YOU-SHOULD-BE-BINDING ON THE LAND SHALL-BE
earth
dedemenon en tois ouranois kai o ean lushs epi

dedemenon en tois ouranois kai ho ean lusEs epi
G1210 G1722 G3588 G3772 G2532 G3739 G1437 G3089 G1909
vp Perf Pas Nom Sg n Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Conj pr Acc Sg n Cond vs Aor Act 2 Sg Prep
HAVING-been-BOUND IN THE heavens AND WHICH IF-EVER YOU-SHOULD-BE-LOOSING ON
ths ghs estai lelumenon en tois ouranois

tEs gEs estai lelumenon en tois ouranois
G3588 G1093 G2071 G3089 G1722 G3588 G3772
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut vxx 3 Sg vp Perf Pas Nom Sg n Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
THE LAND SHALL-BE HAVING-been-LOOSED IN THE heavens
earth
16:20 tote diesteilato tois maqhtais autou ina mhdeni eipwsin 20 Then charged he his
tote diesteilato tois mathEtais autou hina mEdeni eipOsin
G5119 G1291 G3588 G3101 G846 G2443 G3367 G2036
disciples that they should tell
Adv vi Aor Mid 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj a_ Dat Sg m vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl no man that he was Jesus the
then He-THRU-PUTS to-THE LEARNers OF-Him THAT to-NO-YET-ONE THEY-MAY-BE-sayING Christ.
he-cautions the disciples to-no-one
oti autos estin ihsous o cristos

hoti autos estin iEsous ho christos
G3754 G846 G2076 G2424 G3588 G5547
Conj pp Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
that He IS JESUS THE ANOINTED
Christ
16:21 apo tote hrxato o ihsous deiknuein tois maqhtais 21 . From that time forth began
apo tote Erxato ho iEsous deiknuein tois mathEtais
G575 G5119 G756 G3588 G2424 G1166 G3588 G3101
Jesus to shew unto his
Prep Adv vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vn Pres Act t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m disciples, how that he must go
FROM then begins THE JESUS TO-BE-SHOWING to-THE LEARNers unto Jerusalem, and suffer
disciples many things of the elders and
chief priests and scribes, and
autou oti dei auton apelqein eis ierosoluma kai polla be killed, and be raised again
autou hoti dei auton apelthein eis ierosoluma kai polla the third day.
G846 G3754 G1163 G846 G565 G1519 G2414 G2532 G4183
pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m vn 2Aor Act Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Acc Pl n
OF-Him that it-IS-BINDING Him TO-BE-FROM-COMING INTO JERUSALEM AND much
to-be-coming-away
paqein apo twn presbuterwn kai arcierewn kai grammatewn kai

pathein apo tOn presbuterOn kai archiereOn kai grammateOn kai
G3958 G575 G3588 G4245 G2532 G749 G2532 G1122 G2532
vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m Conj
TO-BE-EMOTIONING FROM THE SENIORS AND chief-SACRED-ones AND WRITers AND
to-be-suffering elders chief-priests scribes
apoktanqhnai kai th trith hmera egerqhnai

apoktanthEnai kai tE tritE hEmera egerthEnai
G615 G2532 G3588 G5154 G2250 G1453
vn Aor Pas Conj t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vn Aor Pas
TO-BE-FROM-KILLED AND to-THE third DAY TO-BE-ROUSED
to-be-killed
16:22 kai proslabomenos auton o petros hrxato epitiman autw 22 Then Peter took him, and
kai proslabomenos auton ho petros Erxato epitiman autO
G2532 G4355 G846 G3588 G4074 G756 G2008 G846
began to rebuke him, saying,
Conj vp 2Aor Mid Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act pp Dat Sg m Be it far from thee, Lord: this
AND TOWARD-GETTING Him THE Peter he-begins TO-BE-rebukING to-Him shall not be unto thee.
taking-to-him him
legwn ilews soi kurie ou mh estai soi touto

legOn hileOs soi kurie ou mE estai soi touto
G3004 G2436 G4671 G2962 G3756 G3361 G2071 G4671 G5124
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Att pp 2 Dat Sg n_ Voc Sg m Part Neg Part Neg vi Fut vxx 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg pd Nom Sg n
sayING PROPITIOUS to-YOU Master ! NOT NO SHALL-BE to-YOU this
propitious-be-it Lord !
Matthew 16
16:23 o de strafeis eipen tw petrw upage opisw 23 But he turned, and said unto
ho de strapheis eipen tO petrO hupage opisO
G3588 G1161 G4762 G2036 G3588 G4074 G5217 G3694
Peter, Get thee behind me,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg Adv Satan: thou art an offence unto
THE YET BEING-TURNED He-said to-THE Peter BE-UNDER-LEADING BEHIND me: for thou savourest not the
be-you-going-away ! things that be of God, but those
that be of men.
mou satana skandalon mou ei oti ou froneis
mou satana skandalon mou ei hoti ou phroneis
G3450 G4567 G4625 G3450 G1488 G3754 G3756 G5426
pp 1 Gen Sg n_ Voc Sg m n_ Acc Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg vi Pres vxx 2 Sg Conj Part Neg vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ME SATAN (adversary) SNARE OF-ME YOU-ARE that NOT YOU-ARE-beING-DISPOSed-to
Satan !
ta tou qeou alla ta twn anqrwpwn

ta tou theou alla ta tOn anthrOpOn
G3588 G3588 G2316 G235 G3588 G3588 G444
t_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
THE OF-THE God but THE OF-THE humans
the(p) the(p)
16:24 tote o ihsous eipen tois maqhtais autou ei tis 24 . Then said Jesus unto his
tote ho iEsous eipen tois mathEtais autou ei tis
G5119 G3588 G2424 G2036 G3588 G3101 G846 G1487 G5100
disciples, If any [man] will
Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m Cond px Nom Sg m come after me, let him deny
then THE JESUS said to-THE LEARNers OF-Him IF ANY himself, and take up his cross,
disciples anyone and follow me.
qelei opisw mou elqein aparnhsasqw eauton kai aratw

thelei opisO mou elthein aparnEsasthO heauton kai aratO
G2309 G3694 G3450 G2064 G533 G1438 G2532 G142
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv pp 1 Gen Sg vn 2Aor Act vm Aor midD 3 Sg pf 3 Acc Sg m Conj vm Aor Act 3 Sg
IS-WILLING BEHIND ME TO-BE-COMING LET-him-renounce self AND LET-him-LIFT
after let-him-renounce ! himself let-him-pick-up !
ton stauron autou kai akolouqeitw moi

ton stauron autou kai akoloutheitO moi
G3588 G4716 G846 G2532 G190 G3427
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m Conj vm Pres Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg
THE pale OF-him AND LET-him-BE-followING to-ME
cross let-him-be-following ! me
16:25 os gar an qelh thn yuchn autou swsai apolesei 25 For whosoever will save his
hos gar an thelE tEn psuchEn autou sOsai apolesei
G3739 G1063 G302 G2309 G3588 G5590 G846 G4982 G622
life shall lose it: and
pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m vn Aor Act vi Fut Act 3 Sg whosoever will lose his life for
WHO for EVER MAY-BE-WILLING THE soul OF-him TO-SAVE SHALL-BE-destroyING my sake shall find it.
authn os d an apolesh thn yuchn autou eneken

autEn hos d an apolesE tEn psuchEn autou heneken
G846 G3739 G1161 G302 G622 G3588 G5590 G846 G1752
pp Acc Sg f pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Adv
her WHO YET EVER SHOULD-BE-destroyING THE soul OF-him on-account-of
emou eurhsei authn

emou heurEsei autEn
G1700 G2147 G846
pp 1 Gen Sg vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f
OF-ME SHALL-BE-FINDING her
me
16:26 ti gar wfeleitai anqrwpos ean ton kosmon olon 26 For what is a man profited,
ti gar Opheleitai anthrOpos ean ton kosmon holon
G5101 G1063 G5623 G444 G1437 G3588 G2889 G3650
if he shall gain the whole
pi Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres Pas 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Cond t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m world, and lose his own soul?
ANY for IS-beING-benefitED human IF-EVER THE SYSTEM WHOLE or what shall a man give in
what ? world exchange for his soul?
kerdhsh thn de yuchn autou zhmiwqh h ti

kerdEsE tEn de psuchEn autou zEmiOthE E ti
G2770 G3588 G1161 G5590 G846 G2210 G2228 G5101
vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m vs Aor Pas 3 Sg Part pi Acc Sg n
he-SHOULD-BE-GAINING THE YET soul OF-him MAY-BE-BEING-FINED OR ANY
may-be-forfeiting what ?
dwsei anqrwpos antallagma ths yuchs autou

dOsei anthrOpos antallagma tEs psuchEs autou
G1325 G444 G465 G3588 G5590 G846
vi Fut Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-GIVING human INSTEAD-CHANGE OF-THE soul OF-him
in-exchange
16:27 mellei gar o uios tou anqrwpou ercesqai en th 27 For the Son of man shall
mellei gar ho huios tou anthrOpou erchesthai en tE
G3195 G1063 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G2064 G1722 G3588
come in the glory of his Father
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vn Pres midD/pasD Prep t_ Dat Sg f with his angels; and then he
IS-ABOUT for THE SON OF-THE human TO-BE-COMING IN THE shall reward every man
is-being-about according to his works.
doxh tou patros autou meta twn aggelwn autou kai tote
doxE tou patros autou meta tOn aggelOn autou kai tote
G1391 G3588 G3962 G846 G3326 G3588 G32 G846 G2532 G5119
n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj Adv
esteem OF-THE FATHER OF-Him WITH THE MESSENGERS OF-Him AND then
glory
apodwsei ekastw kata thn praxin autou

apodOsei hekastO kata tEn praxin autou
G591 G1538 G2596 G3588 G4234 G846
vi Fut Act 3 Sg a_ Dat Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m
He-SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-EACH according-to THE PRACTISing OF-him
he-shall-be-paying each-one practice
16:28 amhn legw umin eisin tines twn wde esthkotwn 28 Verily I say unto you, There
amEn legO humin eisin tines tOn hOde hestEkotOn
G281 G3004 G5213 G1526 G5100 G3588 G5602 G2476
be some standing here, which
Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl vi Pres vxx 3 Pl px Nom Pl m t_ Gen Pl m Adv vp Perf Act Gen Pl m shall not taste of death, till they
AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) ARE ANY OF-THE-ones here HAVING-STOOD see the Son of man coming in
verily to-ye some of-the-ones standing his kingdom.
oitines ou mh geuswntai qanatou ews an idwsin ton

hoitines ou mE geusOntai thanatou heOs an idOsin ton
G3748 G3756 G3361 G1089 G2288 G2193 G302 G1492 G3588
pr Nom Pl m Part Neg Part Neg vs Aor midD 3 Pl n_ Gen Sg m Conj Part vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
WHO-ANY NOT NO SHOULD-BE-TASTING OF-DEATH TILL EVER THEY-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE
who-any death
uion tou anqrwpou ercomenon en th basileia autou

huion tou anthrOpou erchomenon en tE basileia autou
G5207 G3588 G444 G2064 G1722 G3588 G932 G846
n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m
SON OF-THE human COMING IN THE KINGdom OF-Him
Matthew 17
17:1 kai meq hmeras ex paralambanei o ihsous ton petron kai 1 . And after six days Jesus
kai meth hEmeras hex paralambanei ho iEsous ton petron kai
G2532 G3326 G2250 G1803 G3880 G3588 G2424 G3588 G4074 G2532
taketh Peter, James, and John
Conj Prep n_ Acc Pl f a_ Nom vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj his brother, and bringeth them
AND after DAYS SIX IS-BESIDE-GETTING THE JESUS THE Peter AND up into an high mountain apart,
is-taking-aside
iakwbon kai iwannhn ton adelfon autou kai anaferei autous eis
iakObon kai iOannEn ton adelphon autou kai anapherei autous eis
G2385 G2532 G2491 G3588 G80 G846 G2532 G399 G846 G1519
n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Prep
JACOBUS AND JOHN THE brother OF-him AND He-IS-UP-CARRYING them INTO
James is-bringing-up
oros uyhlon kat idian

oros hupsElon kat idian
G3735 G5308 G2596 G2398
n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Prep a_ Acc Sg f
mountain HIGH according-to OWN
17:2 kai metemorfwqh emprosqen autwn kai elamyen to proswpon 2 And was transfigured before
kai metemorphOthE emprosthen autOn kai elampsen to prosOpon
G2532 G3339 G1715 G846 G2532 G2989 G3588 G4383
them: and his face did shine as
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n the sun, and his raiment was
AND He-WAS-after-FORMED IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-them AND SHINES THE face white as the light.
he-was-transformed in-front-of them
autou ws o hlios ta de imatia autou egeneto leuka

autou hOs ho hElios ta de himatia autou egeneto leuka
G846 G5613 G3588 G2246 G3588 G1161 G2440 G846 G1096 G3022
pp Gen Sg m Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Pl n Conj n_ Nom Pl n pp Gen Sg m vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg a_ Nom Pl n
OF-Him AS THE SUN THE YET GARMENTS OF-Him BECAME WHITE
ws to fws
hOs to phOs
G5613 G3588 G5457
Adv t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
AS THE LIGHT
17:3 kai idou wfqhsan autois mwshs kai hlias met autou 3 And, behold, there appeared
kai idou OphthEsan autois mOsEs kai Elias met autou
G2532 G2400 G3700 G846 G3475 G2532 G2243 G3326 G846
unto them Moses and Elias
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Aor Pas 3 Pl pp Dat Pl m n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Prep pp Gen Sg m talking with him.
AND BE-PERCEIVING WERE VIEWED to-them MOSES AND ELIAS WITH Him
lo ! were-seen Elijah
sullalountes
sullalountes
G4814
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
TOGETHER-TALKING
conferring
17:4 apokriqeis de o petros eipen tw ihsou kurie 4 Then answered Peter, and
apokritheis de ho petros eipen tO iEsou kurie
G611 G1161 G3588 G4074 G2036 G3588 G2424 G2962
said unto Jesus, Lord, it is
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m good for us to be here: if thou
answerING YET THE Peter said to-THE JESUS Master ! wilt, let us make here three
Lord ! tabernacles; one for thee, and
one for Moses, and one for
kalon estin hmas wde einai ei qeleis poihswmen wde Elias.
kalon estin hEmas hOde einai ei theleis poiEsOmen hOde
G2570 G2076 G2248 G5602 G1511 G1487 G2309 G4160 G5602
a_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl Adv vn Pres vxx Cond vi Pres Act 2 Sg vs Aor Act 1 Pl Adv
IDEAL it-IS US here TO-BE IF YOU-ARE-WILLING WE-SHOULD BE makING here
we-should-be-making
treis skhnas soi mian kai mwsh mian kai mian hlia
treis skEnas soi mian kai mOsE mian kai mian Elia
G5140 G4633 G4671 G1520 G2532 G3475 G1520 G2532 G1520 G2243
a_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pp 2 Dat Sg a_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg m a_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Acc Sg f n_ Dat Sg m
THREE BOOTHS to-YOU ONE AND to-MOSES ONE AND ONE to-ELIAS
tabernacles to-Elijah
17:5 eti autou lalountos idou nefelh fwteinh epeskiasen autous 5 While he yet spake, behold, a
eti autou lalountos idou nephelE phOteinE epeskiasen autous
G2089 G846 G2980 G2400 G3507 G5460 G1982 G846
bright cloud overshadowed
Adv pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m them: and behold a voice out
STILL OF-him TALKING BE-PERCEIVING CLOUD luminous ON-SHADES them of the cloud, which said, This
speaking lo ! overshadows is my beloved Son, in whom I
am well pleased; hear ye him.
kai idou fwnh ek ths nefelhs legousa outos estin
kai idou phOnE ek tEs nephelEs legousa houtos estin
G2532 G2400 G5456 G1537 G3588 G3507 G3004 G3778 G2076
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f pd Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
AND BE-PERCEIVING SOUND OUT OF-THE CLOUD sayING this IS
lo ! voice
Matthew 17
o uios mou o agaphtos en w eudokhsa autou

ho huios mou ho agapEtos en hO eudokEsa autou
G3588 G5207 G3450 G3588 G27 G1722 G3739 G2106 G846
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Prep pr Dat Sg m vi Aor Act 1 Sg pp Gen Sg m
THE SON OF-ME THE beLOVED IN WHOM I-WELL-SEEM OF-Him
I-delight him
akouete
akouete
G191
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
BE-HEARING
be-ye-hearing !
17:6 kai akousantes oi maqhtai epeson epi proswpon autwn kai 6 And when the disciples heard
kai akousantes hoi mathEtai epeson epi prosOpon autOn kai
G2532 G191 G3588 G3101 G4098 G1909 G4383 G846 G2532
[it], they fell on their face, and
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Pl m Conj were sore afraid.
AND HEARing THE LEARNers FELL ON face OF-them AND
disciples
efobhqhsan sfodra
ephobEthEsan sphodra
G5399 G4970
vi Aor pasD 3 Pl Adv
THEY-WERE-afraid VEHEMENT
tremendously
17:7 kai proselqwn o ihsous hyato autwn kai eipen 7 And Jesus came and touched
kai proselthOn ho iEsous hEpsato autOn kai eipen
G2532 G4334 G3588 G2424 G680 G846 G2532 G2036
them, and said, Arise, and be
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Gen Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg not afraid.
AND TOWARD-COMING THE JESUS TOUCHES OF-them AND said
approaching them
egerqhte kai mh fobeisqe

egerthEte kai mE phobeisthe
G1453 G2532 G3361 G5399
vm Aor Pas 2 Pl Conj Part Neg vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
BE-BEING-ROUSED AND NO BE-FEARING
be-ye-being-roused ! be-ye-fearing !
17:8 eparantes de tous ofqalmous autwn oudena eidon ei 8 And when they had lifted up
eparantes de tous ophthalmous autOn oudena eidon ei
G1869 G1161 G3588 G3788 G846 G3762 G1492 G1487
their eyes, they saw no man,
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Pl m a_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Cond save Jesus only.
ON-LIFTing YET THE VIEWers OF-them NOT-YET-ONE THEY-PERCEIVED IF
lifting-up eyes no-one
mh ton ihsoun monon

mE ton iEsoun monon
G3361 G3588 G2424 G3441
Part Neg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m
NO THE JESUS ONLY
17:9 kai katabainontwn autwn apo tou orous eneteilato autois 9 And as they came down from
kai katabainontOn autOn apo tou orous eneteilato autois
G2532 G2597 G846 G575 G3588 G3735 G1781 G846
the mountain, Jesus charged
Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m them, saying, Tell the vision to
AND OF-DOWN-STEPPING OF-them FROM THE mountain directs to-them no man, until the Son of man
of-descending them be risen again from the dead.
o ihsous legwn mhdeni eiphte to orama ews

ho iEsous legOn mEdeni eipEte to horama heOs
G3588 G2424 G3004 G3367 G2036 G3588 G3705 G2193
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m a_ Dat Sg m vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj
THE JESUS sayING to-NO-YET-ONE YE-MAY-BE-sayING THE sight TILL
to-no-one ye-may-be-telling vision
ou o uios tou anqrwpou ek nekrwn anasth

hou ho huios tou anthrOpou ek nekrOn anastE
G3739 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G1537 G3498 G450
pr Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep a_ Gen Pl m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
OF-WHICH THE SON OF-THE human OUT OF-DEAD-ones MAY-BE-UP-STANDING
which of-dead-ones may-be-rising
17:10 kai ephrwthsan auton oi maqhtai autou legontes ti 10 And his disciples asked
kai epErOtEsan auton hoi mathEtai autou legontes ti
G2532 G1905 G846 G3588 G3101 G846 G3004 G5101
him, saying, Why then say the
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pi Nom Sg n scribes that Elias must first
AND inquire-of Him THE LEARNers OF-Him sayING ANY come?
disciples why ?
oun oi grammateis legousin oti hlian dei elqein prwton

oun hoi grammateis legousin hoti Elian dei elthein prOton
G3767 G3588 G1122 G3004 G3754 G2243 G1163 G2064 G4412
Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act Adv
THEN THE WRITers ARE-sayING that ELIAS IS-BINDING TO-BE-COMING BEFORE-most
scribes Elijah must first
Matthew 17
17:11 o de ihsous apokriqeis eipen autois hlias men 11 And Jesus answered and
ho de iEsous apokritheis eipen autois Elias men
G3588 G1161 G2424 G611 G2036 G846 G2243 G3303
said unto them, Elias truly shall
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m n_ Nom Sg m Part first come, and restore all
THE YET JESUS answerING said to-them ELIAS INDEED things.
Elijah
ercetai prwton kai apokatasthsei panta

erchetai prOton kai apokatastEsei panta
G2064 G4412 G2532 G600 G3956
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Adv Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl n
IS-COMING BEFORE-most AND SHALL-BE-restorING ALL
first all-things
17:12 legw de umin oti hlias hdh hlqen kai ouk 12 But I say unto you, That
legO de humin hoti Elias EdE Elthen kai ouk
G3004 G1161 G5213 G3754 G2243 G2235 G2064 G2532 G3756
Elias is come already, and they
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl Conj n_ Nom Sg m Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Part Neg knew him not, but have done
I-AM-sayING YET to-YOU(p) that ELIAS ALREADY CAME AND NOT unto him whatsoever they
to-ye Elijah listed. Likewise shall also the
Son of man suffer of them.
epegnwsan auton all epoihsan en autw osa hqelhsan outws kai
epegnOsan auton all epoiEsan en autO hosa EthelEsan houtOs kai
G1921 G846 G235 G4160 G1722 G846 G3745 G2309 G3779 G2532
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pp Dat Sg m pk Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Pl Adv Conj
THEY-ON-KNOW him but THEY-DO IN him as-much-as THEY-WILL thus AND
they-recognize whatever also
o uios tou anqrwpou mellei pascein up autwn

ho huios tou anthrOpou mellei paschein hup autOn
G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G3195 G3958 G5259 G846
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg vn Pres Act Prep pp Gen Pl m
THE SON OF-THE human IS-ABOUT TO-BE-EMOTIONING UNDER them
is-being-about to-be-suffering by
17:13 tote sunhkan oi maqhtai oti peri iwannou tou baptistou 13 Then the disciples
tote sunEkan hoi mathEtai hoti peri iOannou tou baptistou
G5119 G4920 G3588 G3101 G3754 G4012 G2491 G3588 G910
understood that he spake unto
Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m them of John the Baptist.
then understand THE LEARNers that ABOUT JOHN THE DIPist
disciples concerning baptist
eipen autois
eipen autois
G2036 G846
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m
He-said to-them
17:14 kai elqontwn autwn pros ton oclon proshlqen autw 14 . And when they were come
kai elthontOn autOn pros ton ochlon prosElthen autO
G2532 G2064 G846 G4314 G3588 G3793 G4334 G846
to the multitude, there came to
Conj vp 2Aor Act Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m him a [certain] man, kneeling
AND OF-COMING OF-them TOWARD THE THRONG TOWARD-CAME to-Him down to him, and saying,
them came-to him
anqrwpos gonupetwn autw

anthrOpos gonupetOn autO
G444 G1120 G846
n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg m
human KNEE-FALLING to-Him
falling-on-his-knees
17:15 kai legwn (17:15) kurie elehson mou ton uion oti 15 Lord, have mercy on my
kai legOn (17:15) kurie eleEson mou ton huion hoti
G2532 G3004 G2962 G1653 G3450 G3588 G5207 G3754
son: for he is lunatick, and sore
Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Voc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vexed: for ofttimes he falleth
AND sayING Master ! BE-MERCIFUL OF-ME THE SON that into the fire, and oft into the
Lord ! be-you-merciful ! water.
selhniazetai kai kakws pascei pollakis gar piptei eis to

selEniazetai kai kakOs paschei pollakis gar piptei eis to
G4583 G2532 G2560 G3958 G4178 G1063 G4098 G1519 G3588
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n
he-IS-beING-MOONizED AND EVILly IS-EMOTIONING MANY-times for he-IS-FALLING INTO THE
he-is-a-lunatic is-suffering often
pur kai pollakis eis to udwr

pur kai pollakis eis to hudOr
G4442 G2532 G4178 G1519 G3588 G5204
n_ Acc Sg n Conj Adv Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
FIRE AND MANY-times INTO THE water
often
17:16 kai proshnegka auton tois maqhtais sou kai ouk 16 And I brought him to thy
kai prosEnegka auton tois mathEtais sou kai ouk
G2532 G4374 G846 G3588 G3101 G4675 G2532 G3756
disciples, and they could not
Conj vi Aor Act 1 Sg pp Acc Sg m t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg Conj Part Neg cure him.
AND I-TOWARD-CARRY him to-THE LEARNers OF-YOU AND NOT
I-bring disciples
Matthew 17
hdunhqhsan auton qerapeusai

EdunEthEsan auton therapeusai
G1410 G846 G2323
vi Aor pasD 3 Pl Att pp Acc Sg m vn Aor Act
THEY-WERE-enABLED him TO-cure
they-could
17:17 apokriqeis de o ihsous eipen w genea apistos kai 17 Then Jesus answered and
apokritheis de ho iEsous eipen O genea apistos kai
G611 G1161 G3588 G2424 G2036 G5599 G1074 G571 G2532
said, O faithless and perverse
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Inj n_ Voc Sg f a_ Voc Sg f Conj generation, how long shall I be
answerING YET THE JESUS said o! generation UN-BELIEVing AND with you? how long shall I
generation ! unbelieving ! suffer you? bring him hither to
me.
diestrammenh ews pote esomai meq umwn ews pote anexomai
diestrammenE heOs pote esomai meth humOn heOs pote anexomai
G1294 G2193 G4219 G2071 G3326 G5216 G2193 G4219 G430
vp Perf Pas Nom Sg f Conj Part Int vi Fut vxx 1 Sg Prep pp 2 Gen Pl Conj Part Int vi Fut midD 1 Sg
HAVING-been-THRU-TURNED TILL ?-when I-SHALL-BE WITH YOU(p) TILL ?-when I-SHALL-BE-toleratING
having-been-perverted when ? ye when ? I-shall-bear
umwn ferete moi auton wde

humOn pherete moi auton hOde
G5216 G5342 G3427 G846 G5602
pp 2 Gen Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg pp Acc Sg m Adv
OF-YOU(p) BE-CARRYING to-ME him here
of-ye be-ye-bringing !
17:18 kai epetimhsen autw o ihsous kai exhlqen ap autou 18 And Jesus rebuked the
kai epetimEsen autO ho iEsous kai exElthen ap autou
G2532 G2008 G846 G3588 G2424 G2532 G1831 G575 G846
devil; and he departed out of
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg n t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m him: and the child was cured
AND rebukES to-it THE JESUS AND OUT-CAME FROM him from that very hour.
it came-out
to daimonion kai eqerapeuqh o pais apo ths wras

to daimonion kai etherapeuthE ho pais apo tEs hOras
G3588 G1140 G2532 G2323 G3588 G3816 G575 G3588 G5610
t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
THE demon AND WAS-curED THE boy FROM THE HOUR
ekeinhs
ekeinEs
G1565
pd Gen Sg f
that
17:19 tote proselqontes oi maqhtai tw ihsou kat idian 19 Then came the disciples to
tote proselthontes hoi mathEtai tO iEsou kat idian
G5119 G4334 G3588 G3101 G3588 G2424 G2596 G2398
Jesus apart, and said, Why
Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Prep a_ Acc Sg f could not we cast him out?
then TOWARD-COMING THE LEARNers to-THE JESUS according-to OWN
coming-to disciples
eipon dia ti hmeis ouk hdunhqhmen ekbalein auto

eipon dia ti hEmeis ouk EdunEthEmen ekbalein auto
G2036 G1223 G5101 G2249 G3756 G1410 G1544 G846
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pi Acc Sg n pp 1 Nom Pl Part Neg vi Aor pasD 1 Pl Att vn 2Aor Act pp Acc Sg n
said THRU ANY WE NOT WERE-enABLED TO-BE-OUT-CASTING it
because-of what ? could to-be-casting-out
17:20 o de ihsous eipen autois dia thn apistian umwn 20 And Jesus said unto them,
ho de iEsous eipen autois dia tEn apistian humOn
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G846 G1223 G3588 G570 G5216
Because of your unbelief: for
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl verily I say unto you, If ye
THE YET JESUS said to-them THRU THE UN-BELIEF OF-YOU(p) have faith as a grain of
because-of unbelief of-ye mustard seed, ye shall say unto
this mountain, Remove hence
amhn gar legw umin ean echte pistin ws kokkon sinapews to yonder place; and it shall
amEn gar legO humin ean echEte pistin hOs kokkon sinapeOs remove; and nothing shall be
G281 G1063 G3004 G5213 G1437 G2192 G4102 G5613 G2848 G4615
Hebrew Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Cond vs Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg f Adv n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg n impossible unto you.
AMEN for I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-HAVING BELIEF AS KERNEL OF-MUSTARD
verily to-ye faith
ereite tw orei toutw metabhqi enteuqen ekei kai

ereite tO orei toutO metabEthi enteuthen ekei kai
G2046 G3588 G3735 G5129 G3327 G1782 G1563 G2532
vi Fut Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pd Dat Sg n vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Adv Adv Conj
YE-SHALL-BE-declarING to-THE mountain this BE-after-STEPPING hence there AND
be-you-proceeding !
metabhsetai kai ouden adunathsei umin

metabEsetai kai ouden adunatEsei humin
G3327 G2532 G3762 G101 G5213
vi Fut midD 3 Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg n vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
it-SHALL-BE-after-STEPPING AND NOT-YET-ONE SHALL-BE-UN-ABLE to-YOU(p)
it-shall-be-proceeding nothing shall-be-impossible to-ye
Matthew 17
17:21 touto de to genos ouk ekporeuetai ei mh en 21 Howbeit this kind goeth not
touto de to genos ouk ekporeuetai ei mE en
G5124 G1161 G3588 G1085 G3756 G1607 G1487 G3361 G1722
out but by prayer and fasting.
pd Nom Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Cond Part Neg Prep
this YET THE breed NOT IS-OUT-GOING IF NO IN
species is-going-out
proseuch kai nhsteia

proseuchE kai nEsteia
G4335 G2532 G3521
n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f
prayer AND fast
17:22 anastrefomenwn de autwn en th galilaia eipen autois 22 . And while they abode in
anastrephomenOn de autOn en tE galilaia eipen autois
G390 G1161 G846 G1722 G3588 G1056 G2036 G846
Galilee, Jesus said unto them,
vp Pres Pas Gen Pl m Conj pp Gen Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m The Son of man shall be
OF-UP-TURNING YET OF-them IN THE GALILEE said to-them betrayed into the hands of men:
of-conducting them
o ihsous mellei o uios tou anqrwpou

ho iEsous mellei ho huios tou anthrOpou
G3588 G2424 G3195 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
THE JESUS IS-ABOUT THE SON OF-THE human
is-being-about
paradidosqai eis ceiras anqrwpwn

paradidosthai eis cheiras anthrOpOn
G3860 G1519 G5495 G444
vn Pres Pas Prep n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Pl m
TO-BE-beING-BESIDE-GIVEN INTO HANDS OF-humans
to-be-being-given-up
17:23 kai apoktenousin auton kai th trith hmera 23 And they shall kill him, and
kai apoktenousin auton kai tE tritE hEmera
G2532 G615 G846 G2532 G3588 G5154 G2250
the third day he shall be raised
Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f again. And they were
AND THEY-SHALL-BE-FROM-KILLING Him AND to-THE third DAY exceeding sorry.
they-shall-be-killing
egerqhsetai kai eluphqhsan sfodra

egerthEsetai kai elupEthEsan sphodra
G1453 G2532 G3076 G4970
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl Adv
He-SHALL-BE-BEING-ROUSED AND THEY-WERE-SORROWED VEHEMENT
and-they-were-sorry tremendously
17:24 elqontwn de autwn eis kapernaoum proshlqon oi ta 24 . And when they were come
elthontOn de autOn eis kapernaoum prosElthon hoi ta
G2064 G1161 G846 G1519 G2584 G4334 G3588 G3588
to Capernaum, they that
vp 2Aor Act Gen Pl m Conj pp Gen Pl m Prep ni proper vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl n received tribute [money] came
OF-COMING YET them INTO CAPERNAUM TOWARD-CAME THE-ones THE to Peter, and said, Doth not
approached the-ones your master pay tribute?
didracma lambanontes tw petrw kai eipon o didaskalos

didrachma lambanontes tO petrO kai eipon ho didaskalos
G1323 G2983 G3588 G4074 G2532 G2036 G3588 G1320
n_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
TWO-drachma GETTING-UP to-THE Peter AND said THE TEACHer
double-drachma getting
umwn ou telei ta didracma

humOn ou telei ta didrachma
G5216 G3756 G5055 G3588 G1323
pp 2 Gen Pl Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
OF-YOU(p) NOT IS-FINISHING THE TWO-drachma
of-ye is-settling-tribute double-drachma
17:25 legei nai kai ote eishlqen eis thn oikian proefqasen 25 He saith, Yes. And when he
legei nai kai hote eisElthen eis tEn oikian proephthasen
G3004 G3483 G2532 G3753 G1525 G1519 G3588 G3614 G4399
was come into the house, Jesus
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Part Conj Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg prevented him, saying, What
he-IS-sayING YEA AND when he-INTO-CAME INTO THE HOME BEFORE-OUTSTRIPS thinkest thou, Simon? of whom
yes he-entered house forestalls do the kings of the earth take
custom or tribute? of their own
auton o ihsous legwn ti soi dokei simwn children, or of strangers?
auton ho iEsous legOn ti soi dokei simOn
G846 G3588 G2424 G3004 G5101 G4671 G1380 G4613
pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pi Acc Sg n pp 2 Dat Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Voc Sg m
him THE JESUS sayING ANY to-YOU it-IS-SEEMING SIMON
what ?
oi basileis ths ghs apo tinwn lambanousin telh h khnson

hoi basileis tEs gEs apo tinOn lambanousin telE E kEnson
G3588 G935 G3588 G1093 G575 G5101 G2983 G5056 G2228 G2778
t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Prep pi Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Pl n Part n_ Acc Sg m
THE KINGS OF-THE LAND FROM ANY ARE-GETTING-UP FINISHES OR POLL-TAX
earth whom(p) ? they-are-getting tribute(p)
apo twn uiwn autwn h apo twn allotriwn

apo tOn huiOn autOn E apo tOn allotriOn
G575 G3588 G5207 G846 G2228 G575 G3588 G245
Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m Part Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
FROM THE SONS OF-them OR FROM THE other-placed-ones
outsiders
17:26 legei autw o petros apo twn allotriwn efh 26 Peter saith unto him, Of
legei autO ho petros apo tOn allotriOn ephE
G3004 G846 G3588 G4074 G575 G3588 G245 G5346
strangers. Jesus saith unto him,
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Then are the children free.
IS-sayING to-Him THE Peter (ROCK) FROM THE other-placed-ones AVERRed
Peter outsiders
autw o ihsous arage eleuqeroi eisin oi uioi

autO ho iEsous arage eleutheroi eisin hoi huioi
G846 G3588 G2424 G686 G1658 G1526 G3588 G5207
pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Part a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
to-him THE JESUS CONSEQUENTLY-SURELY FREE-ones ARE THE SONS
free
17:27 ina de mh skandaliswmen autous poreuqeis eis thn 27 Notwithstanding, lest we

hina de mE skandalisOmen autous poreutheis eis tEn
G2443 G1161 G3361 G4624 G846 G4198 G1519 G3588
should offend them, go thou to
Conj Conj Part Neg vs Aor Act 1 Pl pp Acc Pl m vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f the sea, and cast an hook, and
THAT YET NO WE-SHOULD-BE-SNARING them BEING-GONE INTO THE take up the fish that first
cometh up; and when thou hast
opened his mouth, thou shalt
qalassan bale agkistron kai ton anabanta prwton icqun find a piece of money: that
thalassan bale agkistron kai ton anabanta prOton ichthun take, and give unto them for
G2281 G906 G44 G2532 G3588 G305 G4412 G2486
n_ Acc Sg f vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg m Adv n_ Acc Sg m me and thee.
SEA BE-CASTING fish-hook AND THE UP-STEPPing BEFORE-most FISH
be-you-casting ! ascending first
aron kai anoixas to stoma autou eurhseis stathra

aron kai anoixas to stoma autou heurEseis statEra
G142 G2532 G455 G3588 G4750 G846 G2147 G4715
vm Aor Act 2 Sg Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m vi Fut Act 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg m
LIFT AND UP-OPENing THE MOUTH OF-it YOU-SHALL-BE-FINDING stater
pick-up-you ! opening of-him
ekeinon labwn dos autois anti emou kai sou

ekeinon labOn dos autois anti emou kai sou
G1565 G2983 G1325 G846 G473 G1700 G2532 G4675
pd Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp Dat Pl m Prep pp 1 Gen Sg Conj pp 2 Gen Sg
that GETTING BE-GIVING to-them INSTEAD OF-ME AND YOU
be-you-giving ! of-you
Matthew 18
18:1 en ekeinh th wra proshlqon oi maqhtai tw ihsou 1 . At the same time came the
en ekeinE tE hOra prosElthon hoi mathEtai tO iEsou
G1722 G1565 G3588 G5610 G4334 G3588 G3101 G3588 G2424
disciples unto Jesus, saying,
Prep pd Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Who is the greatest in the
IN that THE HOUR TOWARD-CAME THE LEARNers to-THE JESUS kingdom of heaven?
approached disciples
legontes tis ara meizwn estin en th basileia

legontes tis ara meizOn estin en tE basileia
G3004 G5101 G687 G3187 G2076 G1722 G3588 G932
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pi Nom Sg m Part Int a_ Nom Sg m Cmp vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
sayING ANY CONSEQUENTLY GREATER IS IN THE KINGdom
who ? greatest
twn ouranwn
tOn ouranOn
G3588 G3772
OF-THE heavens
18:2 kai proskalesamenos o ihsous paidion esthsen auto en 2And Jesus called a little child
kai proskalesamenos ho iEsous paidion hestEsen auto en
G2532 G4341 G3588 G2424 G3813 G2476 G846 G1722
unto him, and set him in the
Conj vp Aor midD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg n Prep midst of them,
AND TOWARD-CALLing THE JESUS little-boy (-or-girl) He-STANDS it IN
calling-to-him
mesw autwn
mesO autOn
G3319 G846
a_ Dat Sg n pp Gen Pl m
MIDst OF-them
18:3 kai eipen amhn legw umin ean mh strafhte kai 3 And said, Verily I say unto
kai eipen amEn legO humin ean mE straphEte kai
G2532 G2036 G281 G3004 G5213 G1437 G3361 G4762 G2532
you, Except ye be converted,
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Cond Part Neg vs 2Aor Pas 2 Pl Conj and become as little children,
AND said AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) IF-EVER NO YE-MAY-BE-TURNING AND ye shall not enter into the
verily to-ye kingdom of heaven.
genhsqe ws ta paidia ou mh eiselqhte eis thn

genEsthe hOs ta paidia ou mE eiselthEte eis tEn
G1096 G5613 G3588 G3813 G3756 G3361 G1525 G1519 G3588
vs 2Aor midD 2 Pl Adv t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Part Neg Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f
MAY-BE-BECOMING AS THE little-boys-or-girls NOT NO YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE
little-boys-and-girls ye-may-be-entering
basileian twn ouranwn

basileian tOn ouranOn
G932 G3588 G3772
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
18:4 ostis oun tapeinwsh eauton ws to paidion touto 4 Whosoever therefore shall
hostis oun tapeinOsE heauton hOs to paidion touto
G3748 G3767 G5013 G1438 G5613 G3588 G3813 G5124
humble himself as this little
pr Nom Sg m Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg pf 3 Acc Sg m Adv t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pd Nom Sg n child, the same is greatest in
WHO-ANY THEN SHALL-BE-makING-LOW self AS THE little-boy (-or-girl) this the kingdom of heaven.
who-any shall-be-humbling himself
outos estin o meizwn en th basileia twn ouranwn

houtos estin ho meizOn en tE basileia tOn ouranOn
G3778 G2076 G3588 G3187 G1722 G3588 G932 G3588 G3772
pd Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Cmp Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
this-one IS THE GREATER IN THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens
this-one greatest
18:5 kai os ean dexhtai paidion toiouton en epi 5 And whoso shall receive one
kai hos ean dexEtai paidion toiouton hen epi
G2532 G3739 G1437 G1209 G3813 G5108 G1520 G1909
such little child in my name
Conj pr Nom Sg m Cond vs Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n pd Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Prep receiveth me.
AND WHO IF-EVER SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING little-boy (-or-girl) such ONE ON
tw onomati mou eme decetai

tO onomati mou eme dechetai
G3588 G3686 G3450 G1691 G1209
t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
THE NAME OF-ME ME IS-RECEIVING
18:6 os d an skandalish ena twn mikrwn toutwn twn 6 But whoso shall offend one
hos d an skandalisE hena tOn mikrOn toutOn tOn
G3739 G1161 G302 G4624 G1520 G3588 G3398 G5130 G3588
of these little ones which
pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m pd Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m believe in me, it were better for
WHO YET EVER SHOULD-BE-SNARING ONE OF-THE LITTLE-ones these THE him that a millstone were
little-ones hanged about his neck, and
Matthew 18
[that] he were drowned in the

pisteuontwn eis eme sumferei autw ina kremasqh mulos depth of the sea.
pisteuontOn eis eme sumpherei autO hina kremasthE mulos
G4100 G1519 G1691 G4851 G846 G2443 G2910 G3458
vp Pres Act Gen Pl m Prep pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m
ones-BELIEVING INTO ME it-IS-beING-expedient to-him THAT MAY-BE-BEING-HANGED MILL(stone)
ones-believing mill-stone
onikos epi ton trachlon autou kai katapontisqh

onikos epi ton trachElon autou kai katapontisthE
G3684 G1909 G3588 G5137 G846 G2532 G2670
a_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
ASSic ON THE NECK OF-him AND SHOULD-BE-BEING-DOWN-MARINED
requiring-an-ass-to-turn-it he-should-be-being-sunk
en tw pelagei ths qalasshs

en tO pelagei tEs thalassEs
G1722 G3588 G3989 G3588 G2281
Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
IN THE OCEAN OF-THE SEA
18:7 ouai tw kosmw apo twn skandalwn anagkh gar estin 7 . Woe unto the world because
ouai tO kosmO apo tOn skandalOn anagkE gar estin
G3759 G3588 G2889 G575 G3588 G4625 G318 G1063 G2076
of offences! for it must needs
Inj t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n n_ Nom Sg f Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg be that offences come; but woe
WOE to-THE SYSTEM FROM THE SNARES necessity for it-IS to that man by whom the
woe ! world offence cometh!
elqein ta skandala plhn ouai tw anqrwpw ekeinw di ou

elthein ta skandala plEn ouai tO anthrOpO ekeinO di hou
G2064 G3588 G4625 G4133 G3759 G3588 G444 G1565 G1223 G3739
vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Adv Inj t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pd Dat Sg m Prep pr Gen Sg m
TO-BE-COMING THE SNARES MOREly WOE to-THE human that THRU WHOM
moreover woe ! through
to skandalon ercetai
to skandalon erchetai
G3588 G4625 G2064
t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
THE SNARE IS-COMING
18:8 ei de h ceir sou h o pous sou skandalizei 8 Wherefore if thy hand or thy
ei de hE cheir sou E ho pous sou skandalizei
G1487 G1161 G3588 G5495 G4675 G2228 G3588 G4228 G4675 G4624
foot offend thee, cut them off,
Cond Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Part t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg and cast [them] from thee: it is
IF YET THE HAND OF-YOU OR THE FOOT OF-YOU IS-SNARING better for thee to enter into life
halt or maimed, rather than
having two hands or two feet
se ekkoyon auta kai bale apo sou kalon soi to be cast into everlasting fire.
se ekkopson auta kai bale apo sou kalon soi
G4571 G1581 G846 G2532 G906 G575 G4675 G2570 G4671
pp 2 Acc Sg vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp Acc Pl n Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep pp 2 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Dat Sg
YOU OUT-STRIKE them AND BE-CASTING FROM YOU IDEAL to-YOU
strike-off-you ! be-you-casting !
estin eiselqein eis thn zwhn cwlon h kullon h duo

estin eiselthein eis tEn zOEn chOlon hE kullon E duo
G2076 G1525 G1519 G3588 G2222 G5560 G2228 G2948 G2228 G1417
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg m Part a_ Acc Sg m Part a_ Nom
it-IS TO-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE LIFE LAME OR MAIMED OR TWO
to-be-entering than
ceiras h duo podas econta blhqhnai eis to pur to

cheiras E duo podas echonta blEthEnai eis to pur to
G5495 G2228 G1417 G4228 G2192 G906 G1519 G3588 G4442 G3588
n_ Acc Pl f Part a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl n vn Aor Pas Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg n
HANDS OR TWO FEET HAVING TO-BE-CAST INTO THE FIRE THE
aiwnion
aiOnion
G166
a_ Acc Sg n
eonian
18:9 kai ei o ofqalmos sou skandalizei se exele 9 And if thine eye offend thee,
kai ei ho ophthalmos sou skandalizei se exele
G2532 G1487 G3588 G3788 G4675 G4624 G4571 G1807
pluck it out, and cast [it] from
Conj Cond t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg thee: it is better for thee to
AND IF THE VIEWer OF-YOU IS-SNARING YOU BE-OUT-LIFTING enter into life with one eye,
eye be-you-wrenching-out ! rather than having two eyes to
be cast into hell fire.
auton kai bale apo sou kalon soi estin monofqalmon
auton kai bale apo sou kalon soi estin monophthalmon
G846 G2532 G906 G575 G4675 G2570 G4671 G2076 G3442
pp Acc Sg m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep pp 2 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Dat Sg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg m
it AND BE-CASTING FROM YOU IDEAL to-YOU it-IS ONLY-VIEWer
him be-you-casting ! one-eyed
Matthew 18
eis thn zwhn eiselqein h duo ofqalmous econta blhqhnai

eis tEn zOEn eiselthein E duo ophthalmous echonta blEthEnai
G1519 G3588 G2222 G1525 G2228 G1417 G3788 G2192 G906
Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vn 2Aor Act Part a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl n vn Aor Pas
INTO THE LIFE TO-BE-INTO-COMING OR TWO VIEWers HAVING TO-BE-CAST
to-be-entering than eyes
eis thn geennan tou puros

eis tEn geennan tou puros
G1519 G3588 G1067 G3588 G4442
Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
INTO THE GEHENNA OF-THE FIRE
18:10 orate mh katafronhshte enos twn mikrwn toutwn 10 Take heed that ye despise
horate mE kataphronEsEte henos tOn mikrOn toutOn
G3708 G3361 G2706 G1520 G3588 G3398 G5130
not one of these little ones; for
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Part Neg vs Aor Act 2 Pl a_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m pd Gen Pl m I say unto you, That in heaven
BE-SEEING NO YE-SHOULD-BE-despisING OF-ONE OF-THE LITTLE-ones these their angels do always behold
be-ye-seeing ! one little-ones the face of my Father which is
in heaven.
legw gar umin oti oi aggeloi autwn en ouranois dia
legO gar humin hoti hoi aggeloi autOn en ouranois dia
G3004 G1063 G5213 G3754 G3588 G32 G846 G1722 G3772 G1223
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Pl m Prep n_ Dat Pl m Prep
I-AM-sayING for to-YOU(p) that THE MESSENGERS OF-them IN heavens THRU
to-ye during
pantos blepousin to proswpon tou patros mou tou en

pantos blepousin to prosOpon tou patros mou tou en
G3956 G991 G3588 G4383 G3588 G3962 G3450 G3588 G1722
a_ Gen Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Gen Sg m Prep
EVERY ARE-lookING THE face OF-THE FATHER OF-ME THE IN
all are-observing the-one
ouranois
ouranois
G3772
n_ Dat Pl m
heavens
18:11 hlqen gar o uios tou anqrwpou swsai to 11 For the Son of man is come
Elthen gar ho huios tou anthrOpou sOsai to
G2064 G1063 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G4982 G3588
to save that which was lost.
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n
CAME for THE SON OF-THE human TO-SAVE THE
apolwlos
apolOlos
G622
vp 2Perf Act Acc Sg n
one-HAVING-destroyED
one-being-lost
18:12 ti umin dokei ean genhtai tini anqrwpw ekaton 12 How think ye? if a man
ti humin dokei ean genEtai tini anthrOpO hekaton
G5101 G5213 G1380 G1437 G1096 G5100 G444 G1540
have an hundred sheep, and
pi Acc Sg n pp 2 Dat Pl vi Pres Act 3 Sg Cond vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg px Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m a_ Nom one of them be gone astray,
ANY to-YOU(p) it-IS-SEEMING IF-EVER it-MAY-BE-BECOMING to-ANY human HUNDRED doth he not leave the ninety
what ? to-ye it-may-be-occurring and nine, and goeth into the
mountains, and seeketh that
probata kai planhqh en ex autwn ouci afeis ta which is gone astray?
probata kai planEthE hen ex autOn ouchi apheis ta
G4263 G2532 G4105 G1520 G1537 G846 G3780 G863 G3588
n_ Nom Pl n Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg n Prep pp Gen Pl n Part Int vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl n
sheep AND MAY-BE-BEING-STRAYED ONE OUT OF-them NOT(emph.) FROM-LETTING THE
sheep(p) may-be-being-gone-astray leaving
ennenhkontaennea epi ta orh poreuqeis zhtei to

ennenEkontaennea epi ta orE poreutheis zEtei to
G1768 G1909 G3588 G3735 G4198 G2212 G3588
a_ Nom Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
NINEty-NINE ON THE mountains BEING-GONE he-IS-SEEKING THE
is-seeking
planwmenon
planOmenon
G4105
vp Pres Pas Acc Sg n
one-beING-STRAYED
one-being-gone-astray
18:13 kai ean genhtai eurein auto amhn legw umin oti 13 And if so be that he find it,
kai ean genEtai heurein auto amEn legO humin hoti
G2532 G1437 G1096 G2147 G846 G281 G3004 G5213 G3754
verily I say unto you, he
Conj Cond vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act pp Acc Sg n Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj rejoiceth more of that [sheep],
AND IF-EVER he-MAY-BE-BECOMING TO-BE-FINDING it AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that than of the ninety and nine
verily to-ye which went not astray.
Matthew 18
cairei ep autw mallon h epi tois ennenhkontaennea tois mh

chairei ep autO mallon E epi tois ennenEkontaennea tois mE
G5463 G1909 G846 G3123 G2228 G1909 G3588 G1768 G3588 G3361
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep pp Dat Sg n Adv Part Prep t_ Dat Pl n a_ Nom t_ Dat Pl n Part Neg
he-IS-JOYING ON it RATHER OR ON THE NINEty-NINE THE-ones NO
he-is-rejoicing than the
peplanhmenois
peplanEmenois
G4105
vp Perf Pas Dat Pl n
HAVING-been-STRAYED
18:14 outws ouk estin qelhma emprosqen tou patros umwn 14 Even so it is not the will of
houtOs ouk estin thelEma emprosthen tou patros humOn
G3779 G3756 G2076 G2307 G1715 G3588 G3962 G5216
your Father which is in heaven,
Adv Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl that one of these little ones
thus NOT IS WILL IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE FATHER OF-YOU(p) should perish.
it-is in-front-of the of-ye
tou en ouranois ina apolhtai eis twn mikrwn

tou en ouranois hina apolEtai eis tOn mikrOn
G3588 G1722 G3772 G2443 G622 G1520 G3588 G3398
t_ Gen Sg m Prep n_ Dat Pl m Conj vs 2Aor Mid 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
THE IN heavens THAT SHOULD-BE-beING-destroyED ONE OF-THE LITTLE-ones
the-one should-be-perishing little-ones
toutwn
toutOn
G5130
pd Gen Pl m
these
18:15 ean de amarthsh eis se o adelfos sou 15 . Moreover if thy brother

ean de hamartEsE eis se ho adelphos sou
G1437 G1161 G264 G1519 G4571 G3588 G80 G4675
shall trespass against thee, go
Cond Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp 2 Acc Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg and tell him his fault between
IF-EVER YET SHOULD-BE-missING INTO YOU THE brother OF-YOU thee and him alone: if he shall
should-be-sinning hear thee, thou hast gained thy
brother.
upage kai elegxon auton metaxu sou kai autou monou
hupage kai elegxon auton metaxu sou kai autou monou
G5217 G2532 G1651 G846 G3342 G4675 G2532 G846 G3441
vm Pres Act 2 Sg Conj vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp Acc Sg m Adv pp 2 Gen Sg Conj pp Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m
BE-UNDER-LEADING AND EXPOSE him between YOU AND him ONLY
be-you-going-away ! expose-you ! alone
ean sou akoush ekerdhsas ton adelfon sou

ean sou akousE ekerdEsas ton adelphon sou
G1437 G4675 G191 G2770 G3588 G80 G4675
Cond pp 2 Gen Sg vs Aor Act 3 Sg vi Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
IF-EVER OF-YOU he-SHOULD-BE-HEARING YOU-GAIN THE brother OF-YOU
you
18:16 ean de mh akoush paralabe meta sou eti ena 16 But if he will not hear [thee,
ean de mE akousE paralabe meta sou eti hena
G1437 G1161 G3361 G191 G3880 G3326 G4675 G2089 G1520
then] take with thee one or two
Cond Conj Part Neg vs Aor Act 3 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep pp 2 Gen Sg Adv a_ Acc Sg m more, that in the mouth of two
IF-EVER YET NO he-SHOULD-BE-HEARING BE-BESIDE-GETTING WITH YOU STILL ONE or three witnesses every word
be-you-taking-along ! may be established.
h duo ina epi stomatos duo marturwn h triwn staqh

E duo hina epi stomatos duo marturOn E triOn stathE
G2228 G1417 G2443 G1909 G4750 G1417 G3144 G2228 G5140 G2476
Part a_ Nom Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg n a_ Nom n_ Gen Pl m Part a_ Gen Pl m vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
OR TWO THAT ON MOUTH TWO witnesses OR OF-THREE MAY-BE-BEING-STOOD
of-two may-be-being-established
pan rhma
pan rEma
G3956 G4487
a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
EVERY declaration
18:17 ean de parakoush autwn eipe th ekklhsia ean de 17 And if he shall neglect to
ean de parakousE autOn eipe tE ekklEsia ean de
G1437 G1161 G3878 G846 G2036 G3588 G1577 G1437 G1161
hear them, tell [it] unto the
Cond Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg pp Gen Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Cond Conj church: but if he neglect to
IF-EVER YET he-SHOULD-BE-disobeyING OF-them BE-sayING to-THE OUT-CALLED IF-EVER YET hear the church, let him be
them be-you-telling ! ecclesia unto thee as an heathen man
and a publican.
kai ths ekklhsias parakoush estw soi wsper o
kai tEs ekklEsias parakousE estO soi hOsper ho
G2532 G3588 G1577 G3878 G2077 G4671 G5618 G3588
Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vs Aor Act 3 Sg vm Pres vxx 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Adv t_ Nom Sg m
AND OF-THE OUT-CALLED he-SHOULD-BE-disobeyING LET-him-BE to-YOU AS-EVEN THE
also the ecclesia let-him-be ! even-as
Matthew 18
eqnikos kai o telwnhs

ethnikos kai ho telOnEs
G1482 G2532 G3588 G5057
a_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
NATIONic AND THE tribute-collector
one-of-the-nations
18:18 amhn legw umin osa ean dhshte epi ths ghs 18 Verily I say unto you,
amEn legO humin hosa ean dEsEte epi tEs gEs
G281 G3004 G5213 G3745 G1437 G1210 G1909 G3588 G1093
Whatsoever ye shall bind on
Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl pk Acc Pl n Cond vs Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f earth shall be bound in heaven:
AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) as-much-as IF-EVER YE-SHOULD-BE-BINDING ON THE LAND and whatsoever ye shall loose
verily to-ye earth on earth shall be loosed in
heaven.
estai dedemena en tw ouranw kai osa ean
estai dedemena en tO ouranO kai hosa ean
G2071 G1210 G1722 G3588 G3772 G2532 G3745 G1437
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg vp Perf Pas Nom Pl n Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj pk Acc Pl n Cond
SHALL-BE HAVING-been-BOUND IN THE heaven AND as-much-as IF-EVER
lushte epi ths ghs estai lelumena en tw

lusEte epi tEs gEs estai lelumena en tO
G3089 G1909 G3588 G1093 G2071 G3089 G1722 G3588
vs Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut vxx 3 Sg vp Perf Pas Nom Pl n Prep t_ Dat Sg m
YE-SHOULD-BE-LOOSING ON THE LAND SHALL-BE HAVING-been-LOOSED IN THE
earth
ouranw
ouranO
G3772
n_ Dat Sg m
heaven
18:19 palin legw umin oti ean duo umwn sumfwnhswsin epi ths 19 Again I say unto you, That
palin legO humin hoti ean duo humOn sumphOnEsOsin epi tEs
G3825 G3004 G5213 G3754 G1437 G1417 G5216 G4856 G1909 G3588
if two of you shall agree on
Adv vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Cond a_ Nom pp 2 Gen Pl vs Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg f earth as touching any thing that
AGAIN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that IF-EVER TWO OF-YOU(p) SHOULD-BE-agreeING ON THE they shall ask, it shall be done
to-ye for them of my Father which is
in heaven.
ghs peri pantos pragmatos ou ean aithswntai
gEs peri pantos pragmatos hou ean aitEsOntai
G1093 G4012 G3956 G4229 G3739 G1437 G154
n_ Gen Sg f Prep a_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n pr Gen Sg n Cond vs Aor Mid 3 Pl
LAND ABOUT EVERY PRACTISE OF-WHICH IF-EVER THEY-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING
earth concerning everyany matter which
genhsetai autois para tou patros mou tou en ouranois

genEsetai autois para tou patros mou tou en ouranois
G1096 G846 G3844 G3588 G3962 G3450 G3588 G1722 G3772
vi Fut midD 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Gen Sg m Prep n_ Dat Pl m
it-SHALL-BE-BECOMING to-them BESIDE THE FATHER OF-ME THE IN heavens
the-one
18:20 ou gar eisin duo h treis sunhgmenoi eis to 20 For where two or three are
hou gar eisin duo E treis sunEgmenoi eis to
G3757 G1063 G1526 G1417 G2228 G5140 G4863 G1519 G3588
gathered together in my name,
Adv Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Pl a_ Nom Part a_ Nom Pl m vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg n there am I in the midst of them.
where for ARE TWO OR THREE HAVING-been-TOGETHER-LED INTO THE
having-been-gathered
emon onoma ekei eimi en mesw autwn

emon onoma ekei eimi en mesO autOn
G1699 G3686 G1563 G1510 G1722 G3319 G846
ps 1 Acc Sg n_ Acc Sg n Adv vi Pres vxx 1 Sg Prep a_ Dat Sg n pp Gen Pl m
MY NAME there I-AM IN MIDst OF-them
18:21 tote proselqwn autw o petros eipen kurie posakis 21 . Then came Peter to him,
tote proselthOn autO ho petros eipen kurie posakis
G5119 G4334 G846 G3588 G4074 G2036 G2962 G4212
and said, Lord, how oft shall
Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Voc Sg m Adv my brother sin against me, and
then TOWARD-COMING to-Him THE Peter said Master ! how-many-times I forgive him? till seven times?
approaching Lord ! how-many-times ?
amarthsei eis eme o adelfos mou kai afhsw

hamartEsei eis eme ho adelphos mou kai aphEsO
G264 G1519 G1691 G3588 G80 G3450 G2532 G863
vi Fut Act 3 Sg Prep pp 1 Acc Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Conj vi Fut Act 1 Sg
SHALL-BE-missing INTO ME THE brother OF-ME AND I-SHALL-BE-FROM-LETTING
shall-be-sinning I-shall-be-pardoning
autw ews eptakis

autO heOs heptakis
G846 G2193 G2034
pp Dat Sg m Conj Adv
to-him TILL SEVEN-times
him
Matthew 18
18:22 legei autw o ihsous ou legw soi ews eptakis 22 Jesus saith unto him, I say
legei autO ho iEsous ou legO soi heOs heptakis
G3004 G846 G3588 G2424 G3756 G3004 G4671 G2193 G2034
not unto thee, Until seven
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Conj Adv times: but, Until seventy times
IS-sayING to-him THE JESUS NOT I-AM-sayING to-YOU TILL SEVEN-times seven.
all ews ebdomhkontakis epta

all heOs hebdomEkontakis hepta
G235 G2193 G1441 G2033
Conj Conj Adv a_ Nom
but TILL SEVEN-TY-times SEVEN
seventy-times
18:23 dia touto wmoiwqh h basileia twn ouranwn anqrwpw 23 Therefore is the kingdom of
dia touto hOmoiOthE hE basileia tOn ouranOn anthrOpO
G1223 G5124 G3666 G3588 G932 G3588 G3772 G444
heaven likened unto a certain
Prep pd Acc Sg n vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg m king, which would take
THRU this WAS-LIKenED THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens to-human account of his servants.
because-of
basilei os hqelhsen sunarai logon meta twn doulwn autou

basilei hos EthelEsen sunarai logon meta tOn doulOn autou
G935 G3739 G2309 G4868 G3056 G3326 G3588 G1401 G846
n_ Dat Sg m pr Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn Aor Act n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m
KING WHO WILLS TO-TOGETHER-LIFT saying WITH THE SLAVES OF-him
to-settle account
18:24 arxamenou de autou sunairein proshnecqh autw 24 And when he had begun to
arxamenou de autou sunairein prosEnechthE autO
G756 G1161 G846 G4868 G4374 G846
reckon, one was brought unto
vp Aor Mid Gen Sg m Conj pp Gen Sg m vn Pres Act vi Aor Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m him, which owed him ten
OF-beginning YET OF-him TO-BE-TOGETHER-LIFTING WAS-TOWARD-CARRIED to-him thousand talents.
to-be-settling was-brought
eis ofeileths muriwn talantwn

heis opheiletEs muriOn talantOn
G1520 G3781 G3463 G5007
a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl n
ONE OWEr OF-MYRIADS OF-WEIGHTS
debtor of-ten-thousands of-talents
18:25 mh econtos de autou apodounai ekeleusen auton o 25 But forasmuch as he had

mE echontos de autou apodounai ekeleusen auton ho
G3361 G2192 G1161 G846 G591 G2753 G846 G3588
not to pay, his lord
Part Neg vp Pres Act Gen Sg m Conj pp Gen Sg m vn 2Aor Act vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m commanded him to be sold,
NO OF-HAVING YET him TO-FROM-GIVE ORDERS him THE and his wife, and children, and
to-pay all that he had, and payment to
be made.
kurios autou praqhnai kai thn gunaika autou kai ta tekna
kurios autou prathEnai kai tEn gunaika autou kai ta tekna
G2962 G846 G4097 G2532 G3588 G1135 G846 G2532 G3588 G5043
n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m vn Aor Pas Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
master OF-him TO-BE-disposED-of AND THE WOMAN OF-him AND THE offsprings
lord wife children
kai panta osa eicen kai apodoqhnai

kai panta hosa eichen kai apodothEnai
G2532 G3956 G3745 G2192 G2532 G591
Conj a_ Acc Pl n pk Acc Pl n vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj vn Aor Pas
AND ALL as-much-as he-HAD AND TO-BE-FROM-GIVEN
whatever to-be-paid
18:26 peswn oun o doulos prosekunei autw legwn 26 The servant therefore fell
pesOn oun ho doulos prosekunei autO legOn
G4098 G3767 G3588 G1401 G4352 G846 G3004
down, and worshipped him,
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m saying, Lord, have patience
FALLING THEN THE SLAVE he-worshipED to-him sayING with me, and I will pay thee all.
falling-down worshiped him
kurie makroqumhson ep emoi kai panta soi apodwsw

kurie makrothumEson ep emoi kai panta soi apodOsO
G2962 G3114 G1909 G1698 G2532 G3956 G4671 G591
n_ Voc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg Prep pp 1 Dat Sg Conj a_ Acc Pl n pp 2 Dat Sg vi Fut Act 1 Sg
Master ! FAR-FEEL-YOU ON ME AND ALL to-YOU I-SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING
Lord ! be-you-patient ! you I-shall-be-paying
18:27 splagcnisqeis de o kurios tou doulou ekeinou 27 Then the lord of that servant
splagchnistheis de ho kurios tou doulou ekeinou
G4697 G1161 G3588 G2962 G3588 G1401 G1565
was moved with compassion,
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m and loosed him, and forgave
BEING-compassionatED YET THE master OF-THE SLAVE that him the debt.
being-moved-with-compassion lord
apelusen auton kai to daneion afhken autw

apelusen auton kai to daneion aphEken autO
G630 G846 G2532 G3588 G1156 G863 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
FROM-LOOSES him AND THE LOAN he-FROM-LETS to-him
dismisses remits
Matthew 18
18:28 exelqwn de o doulos ekeinos euren ena twn 28 But the same servant went
exelthOn de ho doulos ekeinos heuren hena tOn
G1831 G1161 G3588 G1401 G1565 G2147 G1520 G3588
out, and found one of his
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Pl m fellowservants, which owed
OUT-COMING YET THE SLAVE that FOUND ONE OF-THE him an hundred pence: and he
coming-out laid hands on him, and took
[him] by the throat, saying, Pay
sundoulwn autou os wfeilen autw ekaton dhnaria kai me that thou owest.
sundoulOn autou hos Opheilen autO hekaton dEnaria kai
G4889 G846 G3739 G3784 G846 G1540 G1220 G2532
n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m pr Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n Conj
TOGETHER-SLAVES OF-him WHO OWED to-him HUNDRED DENARII AND
fellow-slaves him
krathsas auton epnigen legwn apodos moi o

kratEsas auton epnigen legOn apodos moi ho
G2902 G846 G4155 G3004 G591 G3427 G3739
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg pr Acc Sg n
HOLDing him he-CHOKED sayING BE-FROM-GIVING to-ME WHICH
he-choked-him be-you-paying ! me
ti ofeileis
ti opheileis
G5100 G3784
px Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ANY YOU-ARE-OWING
18:29 peswn oun o sundoulos autou eis tous podas 29 And his fellowservant fell
pesOn oun ho sundoulos autou eis tous podas
G4098 G3767 G3588 G4889 G846 G1519 G3588 G4228
down at his feet, and besought
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m him, saying, Have patience
FALLING THEN THE TOGETHER-SLAVE OF-him INTO THE FEET with me, and I will pay thee all.
falling-down fellow-slave
autou parekalei auton legwn makroqumhson ep emoi kai

autou parekalei auton legOn makrothumEson ep emoi kai
G846 G3870 G846 G3004 G3114 G1909 G1698 G2532
pp Gen Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg Prep pp 1 Dat Sg Conj
OF-him he-BESIDE-CALLED him sayING FAR-FEEL-YOU ON ME AND
entreated be-you-patient !
panta apodwsw soi

panta apodOsO soi
G3956 G591 G4671
a_ Acc Sg m vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg
ALL I-SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-YOU
I-shall-be-paying you
18:30 o de ouk hqelen all apelqwn ebalen auton eis 30 And he would not: but went
ho de ouk Ethelen all apelthOn ebalen auton eis
G3588 G1161 G3756 G2309 G235 G565 G906 G846 G1519
and cast him into prison, till he
t_ Nom Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Prep should pay the debt.
THE YET NOT he-WILLED but FROM-COMING he-CASTS him INTO
he-would coming-away
fulakhn ews ou apodw to ofeilomenon

phulakEn heOs hou apodO to opheilomenon
G5438 G2193 G3739 G591 G3588 G3784
n_ Acc Sg f Conj pr Gen Sg m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n vp Pres Pas Acc Sg n
GUARD-house TILL OF-WHICH he-MAY-BE-FROM-GIVING THE beING-OWED
jail which he-may-be-paying
18:31 idontes de oi sundouloi autou ta genomena 31 So when his fellowservants

idontes de hoi sundouloi autou ta genomena
G1492 G1161 G3588 G4889 G846 G3588 G1096
saw what was done, they were
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m t_ Acc Pl n vp 2Aor midD Acc Pl n very sorry, and came and told
PERCEIVING YET THE TOGETHER-SLAVES OF-him THE BECOMING(p) unto their lord all that was
fellow-slaves occurring(p) done.
eluphqhsan sfodra kai elqontes diesafhsan tw kuriw

elupEthEsan sphodra kai elthontes diesaphEsan tO kuriO
G3076 G4970 G2532 G2064 G1285 G3588 G2962
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl Adv Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
THEY-WERE-SORROWED VEHEMENT AND COMING THEY-THRU-LUCID to-THE master
they-were-sorry tremendously they-elucidate lord
autwn panta ta genomena

autOn panta ta genomena
G846 G3956 G3588 G1096
pp Gen Pl m a_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Pl n vp 2Aor midD Acc Pl n
OF-them ALL THE BECOMING(p)
occurring(p)
18:32 tote proskalesamenos auton o kurios autou legei autw 32 Then his lord, after that he
tote proskalesamenos auton ho kurios autou legei autO
G5119 G4341 G846 G3588 G2962 G846 G3004 G846
had called him, said unto him,
Adv vp Aor midD Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m O thou wicked servant, I
then TOWARD-CALLing him THE master OF-him IS-sayING to-him forgave thee all that debt,
calling-to lord because thou desiredst me:
doule ponhre pasan thn ofeilhn ekeinhn afhka soi epei

doule ponEre pasan tEn opheilEn ekeinEn aphEka soi epei
G1401 G4190 G3956 G3588 G3782 G1565 G863 G4671 G1893
n_ Voc Sg m a_ Voc Sg m a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Conj
SLAVE ! wicked ! EVERY THE OWED that I-FROM-LET to-YOU since
entire debt I-remit
parekalesas me
parekalesas me
G3870 G3165
vi Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg
YOU-BESIDE-CALL ME
you-entreat
18:33 ouk edei kai se elehsai ton sundoulon sou 33 Shouldest not thou also
ouk edei kai se eleEsai ton sundoulon sou
G3756 G1163 G2532 G4571 G1653 G3588 G4889 G4675
have had compassion on thy
Part Neg vi Impf im-Act 3 Sg Conj pp 2 Acc Sg vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg fellowservant, even as I had
NOT it-WAS-BINDING AND YOU TO-be-MERCIFUL-to THE TOGETHER-SLAVE OF-YOU pity on thee?
also fellow-slave
ws kai egw se hlehsa

hOs kai egO se EleEsa
G5613 G2532 G1473 G4571 G1653
Adv Conj pp 1 Nom Sg pp 2 Acc Sg vi Aor Act 1 Sg
AS AND I YOU am-MERCIFUL
also am-merciful-to
18:34 kai orgisqeis o kurios autou paredwken auton tois 34 And his lord was wroth, and
kai orgistheis ho kurios autou paredOken auton tois
G2532 G3710 G3588 G2962 G846 G3860 G846 G3588
delivered him to the
Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m t_ Dat Pl m tormentors, till he should pay
AND BEING-INDIGNANT THE master OF-him BESIDE-GIVES him to-THE all that was due unto him.
lord gives-up
basanistais ews ou apodw pan to ofeilomenon autw

basanistais heOs hou apodO pan to opheilomenon autO
G930 G2193 G3739 G591 G3956 G3588 G3784 G846
n_ Dat Pl m Conj pr Gen Sg m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg n vp Pres Pas Acc Sg n pp Dat Sg m
ORDEALers TILL OF-WHICH he-MAY-BE-FROM-GIVING EVERY THE beING-OWED to-him
tormentors which he-may-be-paying all
18:35 outws kai o pathr mou o epouranios poihsei 35 So likewise shall my

houtOs kai ho patEr mou ho epouranios poiEsei
G3779 G2532 G3588 G3962 G3450 G3588 G2032 G4160
heavenly Father do also unto
Adv Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg you, if ye from your hearts
thus AND THE FATHER OF-ME THE ON-heavenlly SHALL-BE-DOING forgive not every one his
also celestial brother their trespasses.
umin ean mh afhte ekastos tw adelfw autou apo

humin ean mE aphEte hekastos tO adelphO autou apo
G5213 G1437 G3361 G863 G1538 G3588 G80 G846 G575
pp 2 Dat Pl Cond Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl a_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m Prep
to-YOU(p) IF-EVER NO YE-MAY-BE-FROM-LETTING EACH to-THE brother OF-him FROM
to-ye ye-may-be-pardoning each-one the
twn kardiwn umwn ta paraptwmata autwn

tOn kardiOn humOn ta paraptOmata autOn
G3588 G2588 G5216 G3588 G3900 G846
t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Pl m
THE HEARTS OF-YOU(p) THE BESIDE-FALLS OF-them
of-ye offenses
Matthew 19
19:1 kai egeneto ote etelesen o ihsous tous logous toutous 1 . And it came to pass, [that]
kai egeneto hote etelesen ho iEsous tous logous toutous
G2532 G1096 G3753 G5055 G3588 G2424 G3588 G3056 G5128
when Jesus had finished these
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Pl m sayings, he departed from
AND it-BECAME when FINISHES THE JESUS THE sayings these Galilee, and came into the
it-occurred coasts of Judaea beyond
Jordan;
methren apo ths galilaias kai hlqen eis ta oria ths
metEren apo tEs galilaias kai Elthen eis ta horia tEs
G3332 G575 G3588 G1056 G2532 G2064 G1519 G3588 G3725 G3588
vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Sg f
He-WITH-LIFTS FROM THE GALILEE AND CAME INTO THE boundaries OF-THE
he-withdraws
ioudaias peran tou iordanou

ioudaias peran tou iordanou
G2449 G4008 G3588 G2446
n_ Gen Sg f Adv t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
JUDEA OTHER-SIDE OF-THE JORDAN
19:2 kai hkolouqhsan autw ocloi polloi kai eqerapeusen autous ekei 2 And great multitudes
kai EkolouthEsan autO ochloi polloi kai etherapeusen autous ekei
G2532 G190 G846 G3793 G4183 G2532 G2323 G846 G1563
followed him; and he healed
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Adv them there.
AND follow to-Him THRONGS MANY AND He-curES them there
him vast
19:3 kai proshlqon autw oi farisaioi peirazontes auton kai 3 . The Pharisees also came
kai prosElthon autO hoi pharisaioi peirazontes auton kai
G2532 G4334 G846 G3588 G5330 G3985 G846 G2532
unto him, tempting him, and
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m Conj saying unto him, Is it lawful
AND TOWARD-CAME to-Him THE PHARISEES tryING Him AND for a man to put away his wife
came-to him for every cause?
legontes autw ei exestin anqrwpw apolusai thn gunaika

legontes autO ei exestin anthrOpO apolusai tEn gunaika
G3004 G846 G1487 G1832 G444 G630 G3588 G1135
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Dat Sg m Cond vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg m vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
sayING to-Him IF it-IS-allowed to-human TO-FROM-LOOSE THE WOMAN
to-dismiss wife
autou kata pasan aitian

autou kata pasan aitian
G846 G2596 G3956 G156
pp Gen Sg m Prep a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
OF-him according-to EVERY cause
19:4 o de apokriqeis eipen autois ouk anegnwte oti o 4 And he answered and said
ho de apokritheis eipen autois ouk anegnOte hoti ho
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G846 G3756 G314 G3754 G3588
unto them, Have ye not read,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Conj t_ Nom Sg m that he which made [them] at
THE YET answerING He-said to-them NOT YE-read(past) that THE the beginning made them male
ye-did-read and female,
poihsas ap archs arsen kai qhlu epoihsen autous

poiEsas ap archEs arsen kai thElu epoiEsen autous
G4160 G575 G746 G730 G2532 G2338 G4160 G846
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg f n_ Acc Sg n Conj a_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m
One-making FROM ORIGINal MALE AND female makES them
one-making beginning
19:5 kai eipen eneken toutou kataleiyei anqrwpos ton patera kai 5 And said, For this cause shall
kai eipen heneken toutou kataleipsei anthrOpos ton patera kai
G2532 G2036 G1752 G5127 G2641 G444 G3588 G3962 G2532
a man leave father and mother,
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv pd Gen Sg n vi Fut Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj and shall cleave to his wife:
AND He-said on-account-of this SHALL-BE-leavING human THE FATHER AND and they twain shall be one
flesh?
thn mhtera kai proskollhqhsetai th gunaiki autou kai esontai

tEn mEtera kai proskollEthEsetai tE gunaiki autou kai esontai
G3588 G3384 G2532 G4347 G3588 G1135 G846 G2532 G2071
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Fut vxx 3 Pl
THE MOTHER AND SHALL-BE-BEING-TOWARD-JOINED to-THE WOMAN OF-him AND SHALL-BE
shall-be-being-joined-to wife
oi duo eis sarka mian

hoi duo eis sarka mian
G3588 G1417 G1519 G4561 G1520
t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Prep n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f
THE TWO INTO FLESH ONE
19:6 wste ouketi eisin duo alla sarx mia o oun o 6 Wherefore they are no more
hOste ouketi eisin duo alla sarx mia ho oun ho
G5620 G3765 G1526 G1417 G235 G4561 G1520 G3739 G3767 G3588
twain, but one flesh. What
Conj Adv vi Pres vxx 3 Pl a_ Nom Conj n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f pr Acc Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg m therefore God hath joined
AS-BESIDES NOT-STILL THEY-ARE TWO but FLESH ONE WHICH THEN THE together, let not man put
so-that not-longer asunder.
Matthew 19
qeos sunezeuxen anqrwpos mh cwrizetw

theos sunezeuxen anthrOpos mE chOrizetO
G2316 G4801 G444 G3361 G5563
n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vm Pres Act 3 Sg
God TOGETHER-YOKES human NO LET-BE-SPACizING
yokes-together let-him-be-separating !
19:7 legousin autw ti oun mwshs eneteilato dounai biblion 7They say unto him, Why did
legousin autO ti oun mOsEs eneteilato dounai biblion
G3004 G846 G5101 G3767 G3475 G1781 G1325 G975
Moses then command to give a
vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m pi Acc Sg n Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg n writing of divorcement, and to
THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him ANY THEN MOSES directs TO-GIVE SCROLLet put her away?
why ?
apostasiou kai apolusai authn

apostasiou kai apolusai autEn
G647 G2532 G630 G846
n_ Gen Sg n Conj vn Aor Act pp Acc Sg f
OF-FROM-STAND AND TO-FROM-LOOSE her
of-divorce to-dismiss
19:8 legei autois oti mwshs pros thn sklhrokardian umwn 8He saith unto them, Moses
legei autois hoti mOsEs pros tEn sklErokardian humOn
G3004 G846 G3754 G3475 G4314 G3588 G4641 G5216
because of the hardness of
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl your hearts suffered you to put
He-IS-sayING to-them that MOSES TOWARD THE HARD-HEART OF-YOU(p) away your wives: but from the
hardheartedness of-ye beginning it was not so.
epetreyen umin apolusai tas gunaikas umwn ap archs de ou

epetrepsen humin apolusai tas gunaikas humOn ap archEs de ou
G2010 G5213 G630 G3588 G1135 G5216 G575 G746 G1161 G3756
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl vn Aor Act t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pp 2 Gen Pl Prep n_ Gen Sg f Conj Part Neg
permits to-YOU(p) TO-FROM-LOOSE THE WOMEN OF-YOU(p) FROM ORIGINal YET NOT
ye to-dismiss wives of-ye beginning
gegonen outws
gegonen houtOs
G1096 G3779
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg Adv
it-HAS-BECOME thus
19:9 legw de umin oti os an apolush thn gunaika 9 And I say unto you,
legO de humin hoti hos an apolusE tEn gunaika
G3004 G1161 G5213 G3754 G3739 G302 G630 G3588 G1135
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl Conj pr Nom Sg m Part vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f wife, except [it be] for
I-AM-sayING YET to-YOU(p) that WHO EVER SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING THE WOMAN fornication, and shall marry
to-ye should-be-dismissing wife another, committeth adultery:
and whoso marrieth her which
autou ei mh epi porneia kai gamhsh allhn is put away doth commit
autou ei mE epi porneia kai gamEsE allEn adultery.
G846 G1487 G3361 G1909 G4202 G2532 G1060 G243
pp Gen Sg m Cond Part Neg Prep n_ Dat Sg f Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg f
OF-him IF NO ON PROSTITUTION AND SHOULD-BE-MARRYING other
another
moicatai kai o apolelumenhn gamhsas

moichatai kai ho apolelumenEn gamEsas
G3429 G2532 G3588 G630 G1060
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
IS-committING-ADULTERY AND THE one-HAVING-been-FROM-LOOSED one-MARRYing
is-committing-adultery one-having-been-dismissed one-marrying
moicatai
moichatai
G3429
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
IS-committING-ADULTERY
is-committing-adultery
19:10 legousin autw oi maqhtai autou ei outws estin h 10 His disciples say unto him,
legousin autO hoi mathEtai autou ei houtOs estin hE
G3004 G846 G3588 G3101 G846 G1487 G3779 G2076 G3588
If the case of the man be so
vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m Cond Adv vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f with [his] wife, it is not good
ARE-sayING to-Him THE LEARNers OF-Him IF thus IS THE to marry.
disciples
aitia tou anqrwpou meta ths gunaikos ou sumferei gamhsai

aitia tou anthrOpou meta tEs gunaikos ou sumpherei gamEsai
G156 G3588 G444 G3326 G3588 G1135 G3756 G4851 G1060
n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg vn Aor Act
cause OF-THE human WITH THE WOMAN NOT it-IS-beING-expedient TO-MARRY
19:11 o de eipen autois ou pantes cwrousin ton logon 11 But he said unto them, All
ho de eipen autois ou pantes chOrousin ton logon
G3588 G1161 G2036 G846 G3756 G3956 G5562 G3588 G3056
[men] cannot receive this
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Part Neg a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m saying, save [they] to whom it
THE YET He-said to-them NOT ALL ARE-SPACING THE saying is given.
are-containing
Matthew 19
touton all ois dedotai

touton all hois dedotai
G5126 G235 G3739 G1325
pd Acc Sg m Conj pr Dat Pl m vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
this but to-WHOM it-HAS-been-GIVEN
19:12 eisin gar eunoucoi oitines ek koilias mhtros egennhqhsan outws 12 For there are some eunuchs,
eisin gar eunouchoi hoitines ek koilias mEtros egennEthEsan houtOs
G1526 G1063 G2135 G3748 G1537 G2836 G3384 G1080 G3779
which were so born from
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl Conj n_ Nom Pl m pr Nom Pl m Prep n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Pas 3 Pl Adv [their] mother's womb: and
ARE for EUNUCHS WHO-ANY OUT OF-CAVITY OF-MOTHER WERE-generatED thus there are some eunuchs, which
there-are who-any of-womb were-born were made eunuchs of men:
and there be eunuchs, which
kai eisin eunoucoi oitines eunoucisqhsan upo twn anqrwpwn kai have made themselves eunuchs
kai eisin eunouchoi hoitines eunouchisthEsan hupo tOn anthrOpOn kai for the kingdom of heaven's
G2532 G1526 G2135 G3748 G2134 G5259 G3588 G444 G2532
Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl m pr Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj sake. He that is able to receive
AND ARE EUNUCHS WHO-ANY ARE-EUNUCHED by THE humans AND [it], let him receive [it].
there-are who-any are-emasculated
eisin eunoucoi oitines eunoucisan eautous dia thn basileian

eisin eunouchoi hoitines eunouchisan heautous dia tEn basileian
G1526 G2135 G3748 G2134 G1438 G1223 G3588 G932
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl m pr Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pf 3 Acc Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
ARE EUNUCHS WHO-ANY EUNUCH selves THRU THE KINGdom
there-are who-any emasculate themselves because-of
twn ouranwn o dunamenos cwrein cwreitw

tOn ouranOn ho dunamenos chOrein chOreitO
G3588 G3772 G3588 G1410 G5562 G5562
t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m vn Pres Act vm Pres Act 3 Sg
OF-THE heavens THE one-beING-ABLE TO-BE-SPACING LET-him-BE-SPACING
one-being-able to-be-containing-it let-him-be-containing-it !
19:13 tote proshnecqh autw paidia ina tas ceiras 13 . Then were there brought
tote prosEnechthE autO paidia hina tas cheiras
G5119 G4374 G846 G3813 G2443 G3588 G5495
unto him little children, that he
Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Nom Pl n Conj t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f should put [his] hands on them,
then WAS-TOWARD-CARRIED to-Him little-boys-and-girls THAT THE HANDS and pray: and the disciples
was-brought rebuked them.
epiqh autois kai proseuxhtai oi de maqhtai epetimhsan

epithE autois kai proseuxEtai hoi de mathEtai epetimEsan
G2007 G846 G2532 G4336 G3588 G1161 G3101 G2008
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl n Conj vs Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
He-MAY-BE-ON-PLACING to-them AND He-SHOULD-BE-prayING THE YET LEARNers rebuke
he-may-be-placing-on them should-be-praying disciples
autois
autois
G846
pp Dat Pl m
to-them
them
19:14 o de ihsous eipen afete ta paidia kai mh 14 But Jesus said, Suffer little
ho de iEsous eipen aphete ta paidia kai mE
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G863 G3588 G3813 G2532 G3361
children, and forbid them not,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Conj Part Neg to come unto me: for of such is
THE YET JESUS said FROM-LET THE little-boys-and-girls AND NO the kingdom of heaven.
leave-ye !
kwluete auta elqein pros me twn gar toioutwn estin

kOluete auta elthein pros me tOn gar toioutOn estin
G2967 G846 G2064 G4314 G3165 G3588 G1063 G5108 G2076
vm Pres Act 2 Pl pp Acc Pl n vn 2Aor Act Prep pp 1 Acc Sg t_ Gen Pl n Conj pd Gen Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
BE-YE-FORBIDDING them TO-BE-COMING TOWARD ME OF-THE for such IS
be-ye-forbidding ! such(p)
h basileia twn ouranwn

hE basileia tOn ouranOn
G3588 G932 G3588 G3772
t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
19:15 kai epiqeis autois tas ceiras eporeuqh ekeiqen 15 And he laid [his] hands on
kai epitheis autois tas cheiras eporeuthE ekeithen
G2532 G2007 G846 G3588 G5495 G4198 G1564
them, and departed thence.
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Dat Pl n t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vi Aor pasD 3 Sg Adv
AND ON-PLACING to-them THE HANDS He-WAS-GONE thence
placing-on he-went
19:16 kai idou eis proselqwn eipen autw didaskale 16 . And, behold, one came
kai idou heis proselthOn eipen autO didaskale
G2532 G2400 G1520 G4334 G2036 G846 G1320
and said unto him, Good
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m Master, what good thing shall I
AND BE-PERCEIVING ONE TOWARD-COMING said to-Him TEACHer ! do, that I may have eternal life?
lo ! approaching
Matthew 19
agaqe ti agaqon poihsw ina ecw zwhn aiwnion

agathe ti agathon poiEsO hina echO zOEn aiOnion
G18 G5101 G18 G4160 G2443 G2192 G2222 G166
a_ Voc Sg m pi Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n vs Aor Act 1 Sg Conj vs Pres Act 1 Sg n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f
GOOD ! ANY GOOD I-SHALL-BE-DOING THAT I-MAY BE-HAVING LIFE eonian
what I-may-be-having
19:17 o de eipen autw ti me legeis agaqon 17 And he said unto him, Why
ho de eipen autO ti me legeis agathon
G3588 G1161 G2036 G846 G5101 G3165 G3004 G18
callest thou me good? [there is]
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m pi Acc Sg n pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres Act 2 Sg a_ Acc Sg m none good but one, [that is],
THE YET He-said to-him ANY ME YOU-ARE-sayING GOOD God: but if thou wilt enter into
why ? life, keep the commandments.
oudeis agaqos ei mh eis o qeos ei de qeleis

oudeis agathos ei mE heis ho theos ei de theleis
G3762 G18 G1487 G3361 G1520 G3588 G2316 G1487 G1161 G2309
a_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Cond Part Neg a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Cond Conj vi Pres Act 2 Sg
NOT-YET-ONE GOOD IF NO ONE THE God (PLACer) IF YET YOU-ARE-WILLING
no-one God
eiselqein eis thn zwhn thrhson tas entolas

eiselthein eis tEn zOEn tErEson tas entolas
G1525 G1519 G3588 G2222 G5083 G3588 G1785
vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vm Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f
TO-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE LIFE KEEP THE directions
to-be-entering keep-you ! precepts
19:18 legei autw poias o de ihsous eipen to 18 He saith unto him, Which?
legei autO poias ho de iEsous eipen to
G3004 G846 G4169 G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G3588
Jesus said, Thou shalt do no
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m pi Acc Pl f t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n murder, Thou shalt not commit
he-IS-sayING to-Him OF-?-THE-WHICH THE YET JESUS said THE adultery, Thou shalt not steal,
which(p) ? Thou shalt not bear false
witness,
ou foneuseis ou moiceuseis ou kleyeis ou
ou phoneuseis ou moicheuseis ou klepseis ou
G3756 G5407 G3756 G3431 G3756 G2813 G3756
Part Neg vi Fut Act 2 Sg Part Neg vi Fut Act 2 Sg Part Neg vi Fut Act 2 Sg Part Neg
NOT YOU-SHALL-BE-MURDERING NOT YOU-SHALL-BE-ADULTERING NOT YOU-SHALL-BE-stealING NOT
you-shall-be-committing-adultery
yeudomarturhseis
pseudomarturEseis
G5576
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-FALSE-witnessING
you-shall-be-testifying-falsely
19:19 tima ton patera sou kai thn mhtera kai 19 Honour thy father and [thy]
tima ton patera sou kai tEn mEtera kai
G5091 G3588 G3962 G4675 G2532 G3588 G3384 G2532
mother: and, Thou shalt love
vm Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj thy neighbour as thyself.
BE-VALUING THE FATHER OF-YOU AND THE MOTHER AND
be-you-honoring !
agaphseis ton plhsion sou ws seauton

agapEseis ton plEsion sou hOs seauton
G25 G3588 G4139 G4675 G5613 G4572
vi Fut Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg m Adv pp 2 Gen Sg Adv pf 2 Acc Sg m
YOU-SHALL-BE-LOVING THE NIGH-one OF-YOU AS YOURself
associate
19:20 legei autw o neaniskos panta tauta efulaxamhn ek 20 The young man saith unto
legei autO ho neaniskos panta tauta ephulaxamEn ek
G3004 G846 G3588 G3495 G3956 G5023 G5442 G1537
him, All these things have I
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Acc Pl n pd Acc Pl n vi Aor Mid 1 Sg Prep kept from my youth up: what
IS-sayING to-Him THE YOUTH ALL these I-GUARD OUT lack I yet?
I-maintain
neothtos mou ti eti usterw

neotEtos mou ti eti husterO
G3503 G3450 G5101 G2089 G5302
n_ Gen Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg pi Acc Sg n Adv vi Pres Act 1 Sg Con
OF-YOUTH OF-ME ANY STILL I-AM-WANTING
what ? I-am-being-deficient
19:21 efh autw o ihsous ei qeleis teleios einai 21 Jesus said unto him, If thou
ephE autO ho iEsous ei theleis teleios einai
G5346 G846 G3588 G2424 G1487 G2309 G5046 G1511
wilt be perfect, go [and] sell
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Cond vi Pres Act 2 Sg a_ Nom Sg m vn Pres vxx that thou hast, and give to the
AVERRed to-him THE JESUS IF YOU-ARE-WILLING mature TO-BE poor, and thou shalt have
perfect treasure in heaven: and come
[and] follow me.
upage pwlhson sou ta uparconta kai dos ptwcois
hupage pOlEson sou ta huparchonta kai dos ptOchois
G5217 G4453 G4675 G3588 G5224 G2532 G1325 G4434
vm Pres Act 2 Sg vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Acc Pl n Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Dat Pl m
BE-UNDER-LEADING SELL OF-YOU THE belongINGS AND BE-GIVING to-POOR-ones
be-you-going-away ! sell-you ! possessions be-you-giving ! to-poor-ones
Matthew 19
kai exeis qhsauron en ouranw kai deuro akolouqei

kai exeis thEsauron en ouranO kai deuro akolouthei
G2532 G2192 G2344 G1722 G3772 G2532 G1204 G190
Conj vi Fut Act 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg m Conj vm txx vxx 2 Sg vm Pres Act 2 Sg
AND YOU-SHALL-BE-HAVING PLACED-INTO-MORROW IN heaven AND HITHER YOU-BE-followING
treasure hither-you ! be-you-following !
moi
moi
G3427
pp 1 Dat Sg
to-ME
me
19:22 akousas de o neaniskos ton logon aphlqen 22 But when the young man
akousas de ho neaniskos ton logon apElthen
G191 G1161 G3588 G3495 G3588 G3056 G565
heard that saying, he went
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg away sorrowful: for he had
HEARing YET THE YOUTH THE saying he-FROM-CAME great possessions.
he-came-away
lupoumenos hn gar ecwn kthmata polla

lupoumenos En gar echOn ktEmata polla
G3076 G2258 G1063 G2192 G2933 G4183
vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n
SORROWING he-WAS for HAVING ACQUISITIONS MANY
19:23 o de ihsous eipen tois maqhtais autou amhn legw 23 . Then said Jesus unto his
ho de iEsous eipen tois mathEtais autou amEn legO
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G3588 G3101 G846 G281 G3004
disciples, Verily I say unto
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg you, That a rich man shall
THE YET JESUS said to-THE LEARNers OF-Him AMEN I-AM-sayING hardly enter into the kingdom
disciples verily of heaven.
umin oti duskolws plousios eiseleusetai eis thn basileian twn

humin hoti duskolOs plousios eiseleusetai eis tEn basileian tOn
G5213 G3754 G1423 G4145 G1525 G1519 G3588 G932 G3588
pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Adv a_ Nom Sg m vi Fut midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl m
to-YOU(p) that ILL-VICTUALly RICH SHALL-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE KINGdom OF-THE
to-ye squeamishly rich-man shall-be-entering
ouranwn
ouranOn
G3772
n_ Gen Pl m
heavens
19:24 palin de legw umin eukopwteron estin kamhlon dia 24 And again I say unto you, It
palin de legO humin eukopOteron estin kamElon dia
G3825 G1161 G3004 G5213 G2123 G2076 G2574 G1223
is easier for a camel to go
Adv Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Prep through the eye of a needle,
AGAIN YET I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) easier it-IS CAMEL THRU than for a rich man to enter
to-ye through into the kingdom of God.
truphmatos rafidos dielqein h plousion eis thn basileian

trupEmatos raphidos dielthein E plousion eis tEn basileian
G5169 G4476 G1330 G2228 G4145 G1519 G3588 G932
n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg f vn 2Aor Act Part a_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
BORE OF-SEWer TO-BE-THRU-COMING OR RICH INTO THE KINGdom
of-needle to-be-coming-through than rich-man
tou qeou eiselqein

tou theou eiselthein
G3588 G2316 G1525
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vn 2Aor Act
OF-THE God TO-BE-INTO-COMING
to-be-entering
19:25 akousantes de oi maqhtai autou exeplhssonto sfodra 25 When his disciples heard
akousantes de hoi mathEtai autou exeplEssonto sphodra
G191 G1161 G3588 G3101 G846 G1605 G4970
[it], they were exceedingly
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Impf Pas 3 Pl Adv amazed, saying, Who then can
HEARing YET THE LEARNers OF-Him were-astonishED VEHEMENT be saved?
disciples tremendously
legontes tis ara dunatai swqhnai

legontes tis ara dunatai sOthEnai
G3004 G5101 G687 G1410 G4982
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pi Nom Sg m Part Int vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg vn Aor Pas
sayING ANY CONSEQUENTLY IS-ABLE TO-BE-SAVED
who can
19:26 embleyas de o ihsous eipen autois para anqrwpois 26 But Jesus beheld [them],
emblepsas de ho iEsous eipen autois para anthrOpois
G1689 G1161 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G3844 G444
and said unto them, With men
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Prep n_ Dat Pl m this is impossible; but with
IN-looking YET THE JESUS said to-them BESIDE humans God all things are possible.
looking-at-them
Matthew 19
touto adunaton estin para de qew panta dunata estin

touto adunaton estin para de theO panta dunata estin
G5124 G102 G2076 G3844 G1161 G2316 G3956 G1415 G2076
pd Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep Conj n_ Dat Sg m a_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
this UN-ABLE IS BESIDE YET God ALL ABLE IS
impossible all-things possible
19:27 tote apokriqeis o petros eipen autw idou hmeis 27 Then answered Peter and
tote apokritheis ho petros eipen autO idou hEmeis
G5119 G611 G3588 G4074 G2036 G846 G2400 G2249
said unto him, Behold, we have
Adv vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Nom Pl forsaken all, and followed
then answerING THE Peter said to-Him BE-PERCEIVING WE thee; what shall we have
lo ! therefore?
afhkamen panta kai hkolouqhsamen soi ti ara estai

aphEkamen panta kai EkolouthEsamen soi ti ara estai
G863 G3956 G2532 G190 G4671 G5101 G687 G2071
vi Aor Act 1 Sg a_ Acc Pl n Conj vi Aor Act 1 Pl pp 2 Dat Sg pi Nom Sg n Part Int vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
FROM-LET ALL AND follow to-YOU ANY CONSEQUENTLY SHALL-BE
leave you what
hmin
hEmin
G2254
pp 1 Dat Pl
to-US
19:28 o de ihsous eipen autois amhn legw umin oti 28 And Jesus said unto them,
ho de iEsous eipen autois amEn legO humin hoti
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G846 G281 G3004 G5213 G3754
Verily I say unto you, That ye
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj which have followed me, in the
THE YET JESUS said to-them AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that regeneration when the Son of
verily to-ye man shall sit in the throne of
his glory, ye also shall sit upon
umeis oi akolouqhsantes moi en th paliggenesia otan twelve thrones, judging the
humeis hoi akolouthEsantes moi en tE paliggenesia hotan twelve tribes of Israel.
G5210 G3588 G190 G3427 G1722 G3588 G3824 G3752
pp 2 Nom Pl t_ Nom Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m pp 1 Dat Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj
YOU(p) THE ones-following to-ME IN THE AGAIN-BECOMing when-EVER
ye ones-following me renascence whenever
kaqish o uios tou anqrwpou epi qronou doxhs autou

kathisE ho huios tou anthrOpou epi thronou doxEs autou
G2523 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G1909 G2362 G1391 G846
vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m
SHOULD-BE-seatING THE SON OF-THE human ON THRONE OF-esteem OF-Him
should-be-being-seated of-glory
kaqisesqe kai umeis epi dwdeka qronous krinontes tas dwdeka

kathisesthe kai humeis epi dOdeka thronous krinontes tas dOdeka
G2523 G2532 G5210 G1909 G1427 G2362 G2919 G3588 G1427
vi Fut midD 2 Pl Conj pp 2 Nom Pl Prep a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl f a_ Nom
SHALL-BE-beING-seatED AND YOU(p) ON TWO-TEN THRONES JUDGING THE TWO-TEN
shall-be-sitting also ye twelve twelve
fulas tou israhl

phulas tou israEl
G5443 G3588 G2474
n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Sg m ni proper
tribes OF-THE ISRAEL
19:29 kai pas os afhken oikias h adelfous h adelfas h 29 And every one that hath
kai pas hos aphEken oikias E adelphous E adelphas E
G2532 G3956 G3739 G863 G3614 G2228 G80 G2228 G79 G2228
forsaken houses, or brethren,
Conj a_ Nom Sg m pr Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl f Part n_ Acc Pl m Part n_ Acc Pl f Part or sisters, or father, or mother,
AND EVERY WHO FROM-LETS HOMES OR brothers OR sisters OR or wife, or children, or lands,
every-one leaves houses for my name's sake, shall
receive an hundredfold, and
patera h mhtera h gunaika h tekna h agrous eneken tou shall inherit everlasting life.
patera E mEtera E gunaika hE tekna E agrous heneken tou
G3962 G2228 G3384 G2228 G1135 G2228 G5043 G2228 G68 G1752 G3588
n_ Acc Sg m Part n_ Acc Sg f Part n_ Acc Sg f Part n_ Acc Pl n Part n_ Acc Pl m Adv t_ Gen Sg n
FATHER OR MOTHER OR WOMAN OR offsprings OR FIELDS on-account-of OF-THE
wife children the
onomatos mou ekatontaplasiona lhyetai kai zwhn aiwnion

onomatos mou hekatontaplasiona lEpsetai kai zOEn aiOnion
G3686 G3450 G1542 G2983 G2532 G2222 G166
n_ Gen Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg a_ Acc Pl n vi Fut midD 3 Sg Conj n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f
NAME OF-ME HUNDRED-FOLD SHALL-BE-GETTING AND LIFE eonian
klhronomhsei
klEronomEsei
G2816
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-tenantING
shall-be-enjoying-the-allotment-of
19:30 polloi de esontai prwtoi escatoi kai escatoi prwtoi 30 But many [that are] first
polloi de esontai prOtoi eschatoi kai eschatoi prOtoi
G4183 G1161 G2071 G4413 G2078 G2532 G2078 G4413
shall be last; and the last [shall
a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Fut vxx 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m be] first.
MANY YET SHALL-BE BEFORE-mosts LASTS AND LASTS BEFORE-mosts
first-ones last-ones last-ones first-ones
Matthew 20
20:1 omoia gar estin h basileia twn ouranwn anqrwpw 1 . For the kingdom of heaven
homoia gar estin hE basileia tOn ouranOn anthrOpO
G3664 G1063 G2076 G3588 G932 G3588 G3772 G444
is like unto a man [that is] an
a_ Nom Sg f Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg m householder, which went out
LIKE for IS THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens to-human early in the morning to hire
labourers into his vineyard.
oikodespoth ostis exhlqen ama prwi misqwsasqai ergatas eis

oikodespotE hostis exElthen hama prOi misthOsasthai ergatas eis
G3617 G3748 G1831 G260 G4404 G3409 G2040 G1519
n_ Dat Sg m pr Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv Adv vn Aor Mid n_ Acc Pl m Prep
HOME-OWNER WHO-ANY OUT-CAME SIMULTANEOUS morning TO-HIRE ACTers INTO
householder who-any came-out at-the-same-time in-the-morning workers
ton ampelwna autou

ton ampelOna autou
G3588 G290 G846
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m
THE VINEyard OF-him
20:2 sumfwnhsas de meta twn ergatwn ek dhnariou thn hmeran 2 And when he had agreed
sumphOnEsas de meta tOn ergatOn ek dEnariou tEn hEmeran
G4856 G1161 G3326 G3588 G2040 G1537 G1220 G3588 G2250
with the labourers for a penny
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Prep n_ Gen Sg n t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f a day, he sent them into his
agreeing YET WITH THE ACTers OUT OF-DENARIUS THE DAY vineyard.
workers
apesteilen autous eis ton ampelwna autou

apesteilen autous eis ton ampelOna autou
G649 G846 G1519 G3588 G290 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m
he-commissions them INTO THE VINEyard OF-him
he-dispatches
20:3 kai exelqwn peri thn trithn wran eiden allous 3 And he went out about the
kai exelthOn peri tEn tritEn hOran eiden allous
G2532 G1831 G4012 G3588 G5154 G5610 G1492 G243
third hour, and saw others
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m standing idle in the
AND OUT-COMING ABOUT THE third HOUR he-PERCEIVED others marketplace,
coming-out
estwtas en th agora argous

hestOtas en tE agora argous
G2476 G1722 G3588 G58 G692
vp Perf Act Acc Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f a_ Acc Pl m
HAVING-STOOD IN THE BUY-place UN-ACTive
standing market idle
20:4 kakeinois eipen upagete kai umeis eis ton ampelwna kai 4 And said unto them; Go ye
kakeinois eipen hupagete kai humeis eis ton ampelOna kai
G2548 G2036 G5217 G2532 G5210 G1519 G3588 G290 G2532
also into the vineyard, and
pd Dat Pl m Con vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj pp 2 Nom Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj whatsoever is right I will give
AND-to-those he-said BE-UNDER-LEADING AND YOU(p) INTO THE VINEyard AND you. And they went their way.
be-ye-going-away ! also ye
o ean h dikaion dwsw umin

ho ean E dikaion dOsO humin
G3739 G1437 G5600 G1342 G1325 G5213
pr Nom Sg n Cond vs Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg n vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
WHICH IF-EVER MAY-BE JUST I-SHALL-BE-GIVING to-YOU(p)
to-ye
20:5 oi de aphlqon (20:5) palin exelqwn peri ekthn kai ennathn 5 Again he went out about the
hoi de apElthon (20:5) palin exelthOn peri hektEn kai ennatEn
G3588 G1161 G565 G3825 G1831 G4012 G1623 G2532 G1766
sixth and ninth hour, and did
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep a_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Acc Sg f likewise.
THE-ones YET FROM-CAME AGAIN OUT-COMING ABOUT SIXth AND NINth
the they-came-away coming-out
wran epoihsen wsautws

hOran epoiEsen hOsautOs
G5610 G4160 G5615
n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv
HOUR he-DOES AS-SAMEly
similarly
20:6 peri de thn endekathn wran exelqwn euren allous 6 And about the eleventh hour
peri de tEn hendekatEn hOran exelthOn heuren allous
G4012 G1161 G3588 G1734 G5610 G1831 G2147 G243
he went out, and found others
Prep Conj t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m standing idle, and saith unto
ABOUT YET THE ONE-TENth HOUR OUT-COMING he-FOUND others them, Why stand ye here all the
eleventh coming-out day idle?
estwtas argous kai legei autois ti wde esthkate olhn

hestOtas argous kai legei autois ti hOde hestEkate holEn
G2476 G692 G2532 G3004 G846 G5101 G5602 G2476 G3650
vp Perf Act Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg n Adv vi Perf Act 2 Pl a_ Acc Sg f
HAVING-STOOD UN-ACTive AND he-IS-sayING to-them ANY here YE-HAVE-STOOD WHOLE
standing idle why ? ye-stand
Matthew 20
thn hmeran argoi

tEn hEmeran argoi
G3588 G2250 G692
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f a_ Nom Pl m
THE DAY UN-ACTive
idle
20:7 legousin autw oti oudeis hmas emisqwsato legei autois 7 They say unto him, Because
legousin autO hoti oudeis hEmas emisthOsato legei autois
G3004 G846 G3754 G3762 G2248 G3409 G3004 G846
no man hath hired us. He saith
vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Acc Pl vi Aor Mid 3 Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m unto them, Go ye also into the
THEY-ARE-sayING to-him that NOT-YET-ONE US HIRES he-IS-sayING to-them vineyard; and whatsoever is
no-one right, [that] shall ye receive.
upagete kai umeis eis ton ampelwna kai o ean h

hupagete kai humeis eis ton ampelOna kai ho ean hE
G5217 G2532 G5210 G1519 G3588 G290 G2532 G3739 G1437 G5600
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj pp 2 Nom Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj pr Acc Sg n Cond vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
BE-UNDER-LEADING AND YOU(p) INTO THE VINEyard AND WHICH IF-EVER MAY-BE
be-ye-going-away ! also ye
dikaion lhyesqe
dikaion lEpsesthe
G1342 G2983
a_ Acc Sg n vi Fut midD 2 Pl
JUST YE-SHALL-BE GETTING
ye-shall-be-getting
20:8 oyias de genomenhs legei o kurios tou ampelwnos 8 So when even was come, the
opsias de genomenEs legei ho kurios tou ampelOnos
G3798 G1161 G1096 G3004 G3588 G2962 G3588 G290
lord of the vineyard saith unto
a_ Gen Sg f Conj vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m his steward, Call the labourers,
OF-evening YET BECOMING IS-sayING THE master OF-THE VINEyard and give them [their] hire,
lord beginning from the last unto
the first.
tw epitropw autou kaleson tous ergatas kai apodos autois
tO epitropO autou kaleson tous ergatas kai apodos autois
G3588 G2012 G846 G2564 G3588 G2040 G2532 G591 G846
t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp Dat Pl m
to-THE permitter OF-him CALL THE ACTers AND BE-FROM-GIVING to-them
manager call-you ! workers be-you-paying ! them
ton misqon arxamenos apo twn escatwn ews twn prwtwn

ton misthon arxamenos apo tOn eschatOn heOs tOn prOtOn
G3588 G3408 G756 G575 G3588 G2078 G2193 G3588 G4413
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m Conj t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
THE HIRE beginning FROM THE LAST TILL OF-THE BEFORE-most
wages last-ones the first-ones
20:9 kai elqontes oi peri thn endekathn wran elabon ana 9 And when they came that
kai elthontes hoi peri tEn hendekatEn hOran elabon ana
G2532 G2064 G3588 G4012 G3588 G1734 G5610 G2983 G303
[were hired] about the eleventh
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep hour, they received every man
AND COMING THE-ones ABOUT THE ONE-TENth HOUR GOT UP a penny.
the-ones eleventh apiece
dhnarion
dEnarion
G1220
n_ Acc Sg n
DENARIUS
20:10 elqontes de oi prwtoi enomisan oti pleiona 10 But when the first came,
elthontes de hoi prOtoi enomisan hoti pleiona
G2064 G1161 G3588 G4413 G3543 G3754 G4119
they supposed that they should
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj a_ Acc Pl n Cmp have received more; and they
COMING YET THE-ones BEFORE-most infer that MORE likewise received every man a
the first-ones penny.
lhyontai kai elabon kai autoi ana dhnarion

lEpsontai kai elabon kai autoi ana dEnarion
G2983 G2532 G2983 G2532 G846 G303 G1220
vi Fut midD 3 Pl Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj pp Nom Pl m Prep n_ Acc Sg n
THEY-SHALL-BE GETTING AND GOT AND they UP DENARIUS
they-shall-be-getting also apiece
20:11 labontes de egogguzon kata tou oikodespotou 11 And when they had
labontes de egogguzon kata tou oikodespotou
G2983 G1161 G1111 G2596 G3588 G3617
received [it], they murmured
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m against the goodman of the
GETTING YET THEY-MURMURED DOWN OF-THE HOME-OWNER house,
against the householder
20:12 legontes oti outoi oi escatoi mian wran epoihsan kai 12 Saying, These last have
legontes hoti houtoi hoi eschatoi mian hOran epoiEsan kai
G3004 G3754 G3778 G3588 G2078 G1520 G5610 G4160 G2532
wrought [but] one hour, and
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj pd Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj thou hast made them equal
sayING that these THE LAST ONE HOUR DO AND unto us, which have borne the
last-ones burden and heat of the day.
Matthew 20
isous hmin autous epoihsas tois bastasasin to baros ths

isous hEmin autous epoiEsas tois bastasasin to baros tEs
G2470 G2254 G846 G4160 G3588 G941 G3588 G922 G3588
a_ Acc Pl m pp 1 Dat Pl pp Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Dat Pl m vp Aor Act Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg f
EQUAL to-US them YOU-DO to-THE ones-BEARing THE HEAVY OF-THE
you-make the ones-bearing burden
hmeras kai ton kauswna

hEmeras kai ton kausOna
G2250 G2532 G3588 G2742
n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
DAY AND THE BURNing
scorching-heat
20:13 o de apokriqeis eipen eni autwn etaire ouk 13 But he answered one of
ho de apokritheis eipen heni autOn hetaire ouk
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G1520 G846 G2083 G3756
them, and said, Friend, I do
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Pl m n_ Voc Sg m Part Neg thee no wrong: didst not thou
THE YET answerING he-said to-ONE OF-them COMRADE ! NOT agree with me for a penny?
adikw se ouci dhnariou sunefwnhsas moi

adikO se ouchi dEnariou sunephOnEsas moi
G91 G4571 G3780 G1220 G4856 G3427
vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg Part Int n_ Gen Sg n vi Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg
I-AM-injurING YOU NOT(emph.) OF-DENARIUS YOU-agree to-ME
not(emph.) ?
20:14 aron to son kai upage qelw de toutw tw 14 Take [that] thine [is], and
aron to son kai hupage thelO de toutO tO
G142 G3588 G4674 G2532 G5217 G2309 G1161 G5129 G3588
go thy way: I will give unto
vm Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg n ps 2 Acc Sg Conj vm Pres Act 2 Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pd Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m this last, even as unto thee.
LIFT THE YOUR AND BE-UNDER-LEADING I-AM-WILLING YET to-this THE
pick-up-you ! yours be-you-going-away !
escatw dounai ws kai soi

eschatO dounai hOs kai soi
G2078 G1325 G5613 G2532 G4671
a_ Dat Sg m vn 2Aor Act Adv Conj pp 2 Dat Sg
LAST TO-GIVE AS AND to-YOU
last-one also
20:15 h ouk exestin moi poihsai o qelw en tois emois 15 Is it not lawful for me to do
E ouk exestin moi poiEsai ho thelO en tois emois
G2228 G3756 G1832 G3427 G4160 G3739 G2309 G1722 G3588 G1699
what I will with mine own? Is
Part Part Neg vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg vn Aor Act pr Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 1 Sg Prep t_ Dat Pl n ps 1 Dat Pl thine eye evil, because I am
OR NOT IS-allowed to-ME TO-DO WHICH I-AM-WILLING IN THE MY(p) good?
it-is-allowed me
ei o ofqalmos sou ponhros estin oti egw agaqos

ei ho ophthalmos sou ponEros estin hoti egO agathos
G1487 G3588 G3788 G4675 G4190 G2076 G3754 G1473 G18
Cond t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Conj pp 1 Nom Sg a_ Nom Sg m
IF THE VIEWer OF-YOU wicked IS that I GOOD
since eye seeing-that
eimi
eimi
G1510
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
AM
20:16 outws esontai oi escatoi prwtoi kai oi prwtoi escatoi 16 So the last shall be first, and
houtOs esontai hoi eschatoi prOtoi kai hoi prOtoi eschatoi
G3779 G2071 G3588 G2078 G4413 G2532 G3588 G4413 G2078
the first last: for many be
Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m called, but few chosen.
thus SHALL-BE THE LAST BEFORE-most AND THE BEFORE-most LAST
last-ones first-ones first-ones last-ones
polloi gar eisin klhtoi oligoi de eklektoi

polloi gar eisin klEtoi oligoi de eklektoi
G4183 G1063 G1526 G2822 G3641 G1161 G1588
a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m
MANY for ARE CALLED FEW YET chosen
20:17 kai anabainwn o ihsous eis ierosoluma parelaben tous 17 . And Jesus going up to
kai anabainOn ho iEsous eis ierosoluma parelaben tous
G2532 G305 G3588 G2424 G1519 G2414 G3880 G3588
Jerusalem took the twelve
Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m disciples apart in the way, and
AND UP-STEPPING THE JESUS INTO JERUSALEM He-BESIDE-GOT THE said unto them,
going-up he-took-aside
dwdeka maqhtas kat idian en th odw kai eipen autois

dOdeka mathEtas kat idian en tE hodO kai eipen autois
G1427 G3101 G2596 G2398 G1722 G3588 G3598 G2532 G2036 G846
a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m Prep a_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m
TWO-TEN LEARNers according-to OWN IN THE WAY AND said to-them
twelve disciples road
Matthew 20
20:18 idou anabainomen eis ierosoluma kai o uios tou 18 Behold, we go up to

idou anabainomen eis ierosoluma kai ho huios tou
G2400 G305 G1519 G2414 G2532 G3588 G5207 G3588
Jerusalem; and the Son of man
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Pres Act 1 Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m shall be betrayed unto the chief
BE-PERCEIVING WE-ARE-UP-STEPPING INTO JERUSALEM AND THE SON OF-THE priests and unto the scribes,
lo ! we-are-going-up and they shall condemn him to
death,
anqrwpou paradoqhsetai tois arciereusin kai grammateusin kai
anthrOpou paradothEsetai tois archiereusin kai grammateusin kai
G444 G3860 G3588 G749 G2532 G1122 G2532
n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Conj n_ Dat Pl m Conj
human SHALL-BE-BEING-BESIDE-GIVEN to-THE chief-SACRED-ones AND WRITers AND
shall-be-being-given-up chief-priests scribes
katakrinousin auton qanatw

katakrinousin auton thanatO
G2632 G846 G2288
vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
THEY-SHALL-BE-DOWN-JUDGING Him to-DEATH
they-shall-be-condemning
20:19 kai paradwsousin auton tois eqnesin eis to empaixai 19 And shall deliver him to the
kai paradOsousin auton tois ethnesin eis to empaixai
G2532 G3860 G846 G3588 G1484 G1519 G3588 G1702
Gentiles to mock, and to
Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n Prep t_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Act scourge, and to crucify [him]:
AND THEY-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING Him to-THE NATIONS INTO THE TO-IN-sport and the third day he shall rise
they-shall-be-giving-up to-scoff-at again.
kai mastigwsai kai staurwsai kai th trith hmera anasthsetai

kai mastigOsai kai staurOsai kai tE tritE hEmera anastEsetai
G2532 G3146 G2532 G4717 G2532 G3588 G5154 G2250 G450
Conj vn Aor Act Conj vn Aor Act Conj t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi Fut Mid 3 Sg
AND TO-scourge AND TO-impale AND to-THE third DAY He-SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING
to-crucify he-shall-be-rising
20:20 tote proshlqen autw h mhthr twn uiwn zebedaiou meta 20 . Then came to him the
tote prosElthen autO hE mEtEr tOn huiOn zebedaiou meta
G5119 G4334 G846 G3588 G3384 G3588 G5207 G2199 G3326
mother of Zebedee's children
Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Sg m Prep with her sons, worshipping
then TOWARD-CAME to-Him THE MOTHER OF-THE SONS OF-ZEBEDEE WITH [him], and desiring a certain
came-to him thing of him.
twn uiwn auths proskunousa kai aitousa ti par autou

tOn huiOn autEs proskunousa kai aitousa ti par autou
G3588 G5207 G846 G4352 G2532 G154 G5100 G3844 G846
t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg f px Acc Sg n Prep pp Gen Sg m
THE SONS OF-her worshipING AND REQUESTING ANY BESIDE OF-Him
worshipingf requestingf something him
20:21 o de eipen auth ti qeleis legei autw 21 And he said unto her, What
ho de eipen autE ti theleis legei autO
G3588 G1161 G2036 G846 G5101 G2309 G3004 G846
wilt thou? She saith unto him,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f pi Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Grant that these my two sons
THE YET He-said to-her ANY YOU-ARE-WILLING she-IS-sayING to-Him may sit, the one on thy right
what ? hand, and the other on the left,
in thy kingdom.
eipe ina kaqiswsin outoi oi duo uioi mou eis
eipe hina kathisOsin houtoi hoi duo huioi mou heis
G2036 G2443 G2523 G3778 G3588 G1417 G5207 G3450 G1520
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl pd Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom n_ Nom Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg m
BE-sayING THAT SHOULD-BE-seatING these THE TWO SONS OF-ME ONE
be-you-saying ! should-be-being-seated
ek dexiwn sou kai eis ex euwnumwn en th basileia sou

ek dexiOn sou kai heis ex euOnumOn en tE basileia sou
G1537 G1188 G4675 G2532 G1520 G1537 G2176 G1722 G3588 G932 G4675
Prep a_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg m Prep a_ Gen Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg
OUT OF-RIGHT OF-YOU AND ONE OUT OF-left IN THE KINGdom OF-YOU
of-right(p) of-left(p)
20:22 apokriqeis de o ihsous eipen ouk oidate ti 22 But Jesus answered and
apokritheis de ho iEsous eipen ouk oidate ti
G611 G1161 G3588 G2424 G2036 G3756 G1492 G5101
said, Ye know not what ye ask.
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Part Neg vi Perf Act 2 Pl pi Acc Sg n Are ye able to drink of the cup
answerING YET THE JESUS said NOT YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED ANY that I shall drink of, and to be
ye-are-aware what baptized with the baptism that
I am baptized with? They say
aiteisqe dunasqe piein to pothrion o egw unto him, We are able.
aiteisthe dunasthe piein to potErion ho egO
G154 G1410 G4095 G3588 G4221 G3739 G1473
vi Pres Mid 2 Pl vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pr Acc Sg n pp 1 Nom Sg
YE-ARE-REQUESTING YE-ARE-ABLE TO-BE-DRINKING THE DRINK-cup WHICH I
cup
mellw pinein kai to baptisma o egw baptizomai

mellO pinein kai to baptisma ho egO baptizomai
G3195 G4095 G2532 G3588 G908 G3739 G1473 G907
vi Pres Act 1 Sg vn Pres Act Conj t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pr Acc Sg n pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
AM-beING-ABOUT TO-BE-DRINKING AND THE DIPism WHICH I AM-beING-DIPizED
baptism am-being-baptized
Matthew 20
baptisqhnai legousin autw dunameqa

baptisthEnai legousin autO dunametha
G907 G3004 G846 G1410
vn Aor Pas vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Pl
TO-BE-DIPizED THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him WE-ARE-ABLE
to-be-baptized
20:23 kai legei autois to men pothrion mou piesqe kai 23 And he saith unto them, Ye
kai legei autois to men potErion mou piesthe kai
G2532 G3004 G846 G3588 G3303 G4221 G3450 G4095 G2532
shall drink indeed of my cup,
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg n Part n_ Acc Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg vi Fut midD 2 Pl Conj and be baptized with the
AND He-IS-sayING to-them THE INDEED DRINK-cup OF-ME YE-SHALL-BE-DRINKING AND baptism that I am baptized
cup with: but to sit on my right
hand, and on my left, is not
to baptisma o egw baptizomai baptisqhsesqe to de mine to give, but [it shall be
to baptisma ho egO baptizomai baptisthEsesthe to de given to them] for whom it is
G3588 G908 G3739 G1473 G907 G907 G3588 G1161
t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pr Acc Sg n pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres Pas 1 Sg vi Fut Pas 2 Pl t_ Nom Sg n Conj prepared of my Father.
THE DIPism WHICH I AM-beING-DIPizED YE-SHALL-BE-BEING-DIPizED THE YET
baptism am-being-baptized ye-shall-be-being-baptized
kaqisai ek dexiwn mou kai ex euwnumwn mou ouk estin

kathisai ek dexiOn mou kai ex euOnumOn mou ouk estin
G2523 G1537 G1188 G3450 G2532 G1537 G2176 G3450 G3756 G2076
vn Aor Act Prep a_ Gen Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg Conj Prep a_ Gen Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
TO-be-seated OUT OF-RIGHT OF-ME AND OUT OF-left OF-ME NOT IS
of-right(p) of-left(p)
emon dounai all ois htoimastai upo tou patros

emon dounai all hois hEtoimastai hupo tou patros
G1699 G1325 G235 G3739 G2090 G5259 G3588 G3962
ps 1 Nom Sg vn 2Aor Act Conj pr Dat Pl m vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
MY TO-GIVE but to-WHOM it-HAS-been-made-READY by THE FATHER
mine it-shall-be-given-to-them-to-whom
mou
mou
G3450
pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-ME
20:24 kai akousantes oi deka hganakthsan peri twn duo adelfwn 24 And when the ten heard [it],
kai akousantes hoi deka EganaktEsan peri tOn duo adelphOn
G2532 G191 G3588 G1176 G23 G4012 G3588 G1417 G80
they were moved with
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom n_ Gen Pl m indignation against the two
AND HEARing THE TEN resent ABOUT THE TWO brothers brethren.
hearing-of-it concerning
20:25 o de ihsous proskalesamenos autous eipen oidate 25 But Jesus called them [unto
ho de iEsous proskalesamenos autous eipen oidate
G3588 G1161 G2424 G4341 G846 G2036 G1492
him], and said, Ye know that
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor midD Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vi Perf Act 2 Pl the princes of the Gentiles
THE YET JESUS TOWARD-CALLing them said YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED exercise dominion over them,
calling-to-him ye-are-aware and they that are great exercise
authority upon them.
oti oi arcontes twn eqnwn katakurieuousin autwn kai oi
hoti hoi archontes tOn ethnOn katakurieuousin autOn kai hoi
G3754 G3588 G758 G3588 G1484 G2634 G846 G2532 G3588
Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Gen Pl n Conj t_ Nom Pl m
that THE chiefs OF-THE NATIONS ARE-DOWN-masterING OF-them AND THE
are-lording-it-over them
megaloi katexousiazousin autwn

megaloi katexousiazousin autOn
G3173 G2715 G846
a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Gen Pl n
GREAT-ones ARE-coercING OF-them
great-men them
20:26 ouc outws de estai en umin all os ean qelh 26 But it shall not be so among
ouch houtOs de estai en humin all hos ean thelE
G3756 G3779 G1161 G2071 G1722 G5213 G235 G3739 G1437 G2309
you: but whosoever will be
Part Neg Adv Conj vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Prep pp 2 Dat Pl Conj pr Nom Sg m Cond vs Pres Act 3 Sg great among you, let him be
NOT thus YET it-SHALL-BE IN YOU(p) but WHO IF-EVER MAY-BE-WILLING your minister;
among ye
en umin megas genesqai estw umwn diakonos

en humin megas genesthai estO humOn diakonos
G1722 G5213 G3173 G1096 G2077 G5216 G1249
Prep pp 2 Dat Pl a_ Nom Sg m vn 2Aor midD vm Pres vxx 3 Sg pp 2 Gen Pl n_ Nom Sg m
IN YOU(p) GREAT TO-BE-BECOMING LET-him-BE OF-YOU(p) THRU-SERVitor
among ye let-him-be ! of-ye servant
20:27 kai os ean qelh en umin einai prwtos estw 27 And whosoever will be
kai hos ean thelE en humin einai prOtos estO
G2532 G3739 G1437 G2309 G1722 G5213 G1511 G4413 G2077
chief among you, let him be
Conj pr Nom Sg m Cond vs Pres Act 3 Sg Prep pp 2 Dat Pl vn Pres vxx a_ Nom Sg m vm Pres vxx 3 Sg your servant:
AND WHO IF-EVER MAY-BE-WILLING IN YOU(p) TO-BE BEFORE-most LET-him-BE
among ye foremost let-him-be !
Matthew 20
umwn doulos
humOn doulos
G5216 G1401
pp 2 Gen Pl n_ Nom Sg m
OF-YOU(p) SLAVE
of-ye
20:28 wsper o uios tou anqrwpou ouk hlqen diakonhqhnai 28 Even as the Son of man
hOsper ho huios tou anthrOpou ouk Elthen diakonEthEnai
G5618 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G3756 G2064 G1247
came not to be ministered unto,
Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vn Aor Pas but to minister, and to give his
AS-EVEN THE SON OF-THE human NOT CAME TO-BE-THRU-SERVED life a ransom for many.
even-as to-be-served
alla diakonhsai kai dounai thn yuchn autou lutron anti pollwn
alla diakonEsai kai dounai tEn psuchEn autou lutron anti pollOn
G235 G1247 G2532 G1325 G3588 G5590 G846 G3083 G473 G4183
Conj vn Aor Act Conj vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg n Prep a_ Gen Pl m
but TO-THRU-SERVE AND TO-GIVE THE soul OF-Him LOOSener INSTEAD OF-MANY
to-serve ransom insteadfor many
20:29 kai ekporeuomenwn autwn apo iericw hkolouqhsen autw oclos 29 . And as they departed from
kai ekporeuomenOn autOn apo ierichO EkolouthEsen autO ochlos
G2532 G1607 G846 G575 G2410 G190 G846 G3793
Jericho, a great multitude
Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m Prep ni proper vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg m followed him.
AND OF-OUT-GOING OF-them FROM JERICHO follows to-Him THRONG
of-going-out him
polus
polus
G4183
a_ Nom Sg m
MANY
vast
20:30 kai idou duo tufloi kaqhmenoi para thn odon 30 And, behold, two blind men
kai idou duo tuphloi kathEmenoi para tEn hodon
G2532 G2400 G1417 G5185 G2521 G3844 G3588 G3598
sitting by the way side, when
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Nom a_ Nom Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f they heard that Jesus passed
AND BE-PERCEIVING TWO BLIND-ones sittING BESIDE THE WAY by, cried out, saying, Have
lo ! blind-men road mercy on us, O Lord, [thou]
Son of David.
akousantes oti ihsous paragei ekraxan legontes elehson
akousantes hoti iEsous paragei ekraxan legontes eleEson
G191 G3754 G2424 G3855 G2896 G3004 G1653
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg vi Aor Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Sg
HEARing that JESUS IS-BESIDE-LEADING THEY-CRY sayING BE-MERCIFUL-to
is-passing-by cry be-you-merciful-to !
hmas kurie uios dabid

hEmas kurie huios dabid
G2248 G2962 G5207 G1138
pp 1 Acc Pl n_ Voc Sg m n_ Nom Sg m ni proper
US Master ! SON of-DAVID
Lord ! of-David
20:31 o de oclos epetimhsen autois ina siwphswsin 31 And the multitude rebuked
ho de ochlos epetimEsen autois hina siOpEsOsin
G3588 G1161 G3793 G2008 G846 G2443 G4623
them, because they should hold
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl their peace: but they cried the
THE YET THRONG rebukES to-them THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-beING-SILENT more, saying, Have mercy on
them us, O Lord, [thou] Son of
David.
oi de meizon ekrazon legontes elehson hmas kurie uios
hoi de meizon ekrazon legontes eleEson hEmas kurie huios
G3588 G1161 G3185 G2896 G3004 G1653 G2248 G2962 G5207
t_ Nom Pl m Conj Adv vi Impf Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl n_ Voc Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
THE YET GREATer THEY-CRIED sayING BE-MERCIFUL-to US Master ! SON
louder be-you-merciful-to ! Lord !
dabid
dabid
G1138
ni proper
of-DAVID
of-David
20:32 kai stas o ihsous efwnhsen autous kai eipen 32 And Jesus stood still, and
kai stas ho iEsous ephOnEsen autous kai eipen
G2532 G2476 G3588 G2424 G5455 G846 G2532 G2036
called them, and said, What
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg will ye that I shall do unto you?
AND STANDing THE JESUS SOUNDS them AND said
summons
ti qelete poihsw umin

ti thelete poiEsO humin
G5101 G2309 G4160 G5213
pi Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Pl vs Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
ANY YE-ARE-WILLING I-SHALL-BE-DOING to-YOU(p)
what ? to-ye
20:33 legousin autw kurie ina anoicqwsin hmwn oi 33 They say unto him, Lord,
legousin autO kurie hina anoichthOsin hEmOn hoi
G3004 G846 G2962 G2443 G455 G2257 G3588
that our eyes may be opened.
vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Pl pp 1 Gen Pl t_ Nom Pl m
THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him Master ! THAT MAY-BE-BEING-UP-OPENED OF-US THE
Lord ! may-be-being-opened
ofqalmoi
ophthalmoi
G3788
n_ Nom Pl m
VIEWers
eyes
20:34 splagcnisqeis de o ihsous hyato twn ofqalmwn 34 So Jesus had compassion

splagchnistheis de ho iEsous hEpsato tOn ophthalmOn
G4697 G1161 G3588 G2424 G680 G3588 G3788
[on them], and touched their
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m eyes: and immediately their
BEING-compassionatED YET THE JESUS TOUCHES OF-THE VIEWers eyes received sight, and they
being-moved-with-compassion the eyes followed him.
autwn kai euqews anebleyan autwn oi ofqalmoi kai hkolouqhsan

autOn kai eutheOs aneblepsan autOn hoi ophthalmoi kai EkolouthEsan
G846 G2532 G2112 G308 G846 G3588 G3788 G2532 G190
pp Gen Pl m Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Gen Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
OF-them AND immediately UP-look OF-them THE VIEWers AND THEY-follow
receive-sight eyes
autw
autO
G846
pp Dat Sg m
to-Him
him
Matthew 21
21:1 kai ote hggisan eis ierosoluma kai hlqon eis bhqfagh pros 1 . And when they drew nigh
kai hote Eggisan eis ierosoluma kai Elthon eis bEthphagE pros
G2532 G3753 G1448 G1519 G2414 G2532 G2064 G1519 G967 G4314
unto Jerusalem, and were come
Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep ni proper Prep to Bethphage, unto the mount
AND when THEY-NEAR INTO JERUSALEM AND CAME INTO BETHPHAGE TOWARD of Olives, then sent Jesus two
they-draw-near disciples,
to oros twn elaiwn tote o ihsous apesteilen duo maqhtas

to oros tOn elaiOn tote ho iEsous apesteilen duo mathEtas
G3588 G3735 G3588 G1636 G5119 G3588 G2424 G649 G1417 G3101
t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m
THE mountain OF-THE OLIVES then THE JESUS commissions TWO LEARNers
Mount dispatches disciples
21:2 legwn autois poreuqhte eis thn kwmhn thn apenanti 2 Saying unto them, Go into
legOn autois poreuthEte eis tEn kOmEn tEn apenanti
G3004 G846 G4198 G1519 G3588 G2968 G3588 G561
the village over against you,
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Dat Pl m vs Aor pasD 2 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f Adv and straightway ye shall find
sayING to-them BE-YE-BEING-GONE INTO THE VILLAGE THE-one FROM-IN-INSTEAD an ass tied, and a colt with her:
be-ye-being-gone ! the-one in-front-of loose [them], and bring [them]
unto me.
umwn kai euqews eurhsete onon dedemenhn kai pwlon met
humOn kai eutheOs heurEsete onon dedemenEn kai pOlon met
G5216 G2532 G2112 G2147 G3688 G1210 G2532 G4454 G3326
pp 2 Gen Pl Conj Adv vi Fut Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg f vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg m Prep
OF-YOU(p) AND immediately YE-SHALL-BE-FINDING ASS HAVING-been-BOUND AND COLT WITH
ye
auths lusantes agagete moi

autEs lusantes agagete moi
G846 G3089 G71 G3427
pp Gen Sg f vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg
her LOOSing BE-LEADING to-ME
loosing-them be-ye-leading-them !
21:3 kai ean tis umin eiph ti ereite oti o 3 And if any [man] say ought
kai ean tis humin eipE ti ereite hoti ho
G2532 G1437 G5100 G5213 G2036 G5100 G2046 G3754 G3588
unto you, ye shall say, The
Conj Cond px Nom Sg m pp 2 Dat Pl vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg px Acc Sg n vi Fut Act 2 Pl Conj t_ Nom Sg m Lord hath need of them; and
AND IF-EVER ANY to-YOU(p) MAY-BE-sayING ANY YE-SHALL-BE-declarING that THE straightway he will send them.
anyone to-ye anything
kurios autwn creian ecei euqews de apostelei autous

kurios autOn chreian echei eutheOs de apostelei autous
G2962 G846 G5532 G2192 G2112 G1161 G649 G846
n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Pl m n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m
Master OF-them need IS-HAVING immediately YET he-SHALL-BE-commissionING them
Lord he-shall-be-dispatching
21:4 touto de olon gegonen ina plhrwqh to rhqen 4 All this was done, that it
touto de holon gegonen hina plErOthE to rEthen
G5124 G1161 G3650 G1096 G2443 G4137 G3588 G4483
might be fulfilled which was
pd Nom Sg n Conj a_ Nom Sg n vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n spoken by the prophet, saying,
this YET WHOLE HAS-BECOME THAT MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE BEING-declarED
has-occurred may-be-being-fulfilled
dia tou profhtou legontos

dia tou prophEtou legontos
G1223 G3588 G4396 G3004
Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg n
THRU THE BEFORE-AVERer sayING
through prophet
21:5 eipate th qugatri siwn idou o basileus sou 5 Tell ye the daughter of Sion,
eipate tE thugatri siOn idou ho basileus sou
G2036 G3588 G2364 G4622 G2400 G3588 G935 G4675
Behold, thy King cometh unto
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f ni proper vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg thee, meek, and sitting upon an
say to-THE DAUGHTER of-SION BE-PERCEIVING THE KING OF-YOU ass, and a colt the foal of an
say-ye ! of-Sion lo ! ass.
ercetai soi praus kai epibebhkws epi onon kai pwlon

erchetai soi praus kai epibebEkOs epi onon kai pOlon
G2064 G4671 G4239 G2532 G1910 G1909 G3688 G2532 G4454
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg a_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Perf Act Nom Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg m
IS-COMING to-YOU MEEK AND HAVING-ON-STEPPED ON ASS AND COLT
having-mounted
uion upozugiou
huion hupozugiou
G5207 G5268
n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg n
SON OF-UNDER-YOKE
foal of-yokebeast
21:6 poreuqentes de oi maqhtai kai poihsantes kaqws prosetaxen 6 And the disciples went, and
poreuthentes de hoi mathEtai kai poiEsantes kathOs prosetaxen
G4198 G1161 G3588 G3101 G2532 G4160 G2531 G4367
did as Jesus commanded them,
vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg
BEING-GONE YET THE LEARNers AND DOing according-AS TOWARD-SETS
disciples bids
Matthew 21
autois o ihsous
autois ho iEsous
G846 G3588 G2424
pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
to-them THE JESUS
them
21:7 hgagon thn onon kai ton pwlon kai epeqhkan epanw 7 And brought the ass, and the
Egagon tEn onon kai ton pOlon kai epethEkan epanO
G71 G3588 G3688 G2532 G3588 G4454 G2532 G2007 G1883
colt, and put on them their
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl Adv clothes, and they set [him]
THEY-LED THE ASS AND THE COLT AND THEY-ON-PLACE ON-UP thereon.
led place-on upon
autwn ta imatia autwn kai epekaqisan epanw autwn

autOn ta himatia autOn kai epekathisan epanO autOn
G846 G3588 G2440 G846 G2532 G1940 G1883 G846
pp Gen Pl m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl Adv pp Gen Pl n
OF-them THE GARMENTS OF-them AND THEY-ON-seat ON-UP OF-them
them they-seat-him-on upon them
21:8 o de pleistos oclos estrwsan eautwn ta imatia en 8 And a very great multitude
ho de pleistos ochlos estrOsan heautOn ta himatia en
G3588 G1161 G4118 G3793 G4766 G1438 G3588 G2440 G1722
spread their garments in the
t_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pf 3 Gen Pl m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Prep way; others cut down branches
THE YET MOST THRONG STREW OF-selves THE GARMENTS IN from the trees, and strawed
of-the-throng of-themselves [them] in the way.
th odw alloi de ekopton kladous apo twn dendrwn kai

tE hodO alloi de ekopton kladous apo tOn dendrOn kai
G3588 G3598 G243 G1161 G2875 G2798 G575 G3588 G1186 G2532
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Pl m Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n Conj
THE WAY others YET STRUCK boughs FROM THE TREES AND
road chopped
estrwnnuon en th odw
estrOnnuon en tE hodO
G4766 G1722 G3588 G3598
vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
STREWED IN THE WAY
strewed-them
21:9 oi de ocloi oi proagontes kai oi akolouqountes 9 And the multitudes that went
hoi de ochloi hoi proagontes kai hoi akolouthountes
G3588 G1161 G3793 G3588 G4254 G2532 G3588 G190
before, and that followed,
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m cried, saying, Hosanna to the
THE YET THRONGS THE BEFORE-LEADING AND THE-ones followING Son of David: Blessed [is] he
the-ones preceding the-ones that cometh in the name of the
Lord; Hosanna in the highest.
ekrazon legontes wsanna tw uiw dabid euloghmenos o
ekrazon legontes hOsanna tO huiO dabid eulogEmenos ho
G2896 G3004 G5614 G3588 G5207 G1138 G2127 G3588
vi Impf Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Hebrew t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m ni proper vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
CRIED sayING HOSANNA to-THE SON of-DAVID beING-blessED THE
of-David
ercomenos en onomati kuriou wsanna en tois uyistois

erchomenos en onomati kuriou hOsanna en tois hupsistois
G2064 G1722 G3686 G2962 G5614 G1722 G3588 G5310
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg n n_ Gen Sg m Hebrew Prep t_ Dat Pl n a_ Dat Pl n
One-COMING IN NAME OF-Master HOSANNA IN THE HIGHest-ones
one-coming of-Lord highest-ones
21:10 kai eiselqontos autou eis ierosoluma eseisqh pasa h 10 And when he was come into
kai eiselthontos autou eis ierosoluma eseisthE pasa hE
G2532 G1525 G846 G1519 G2414 G4579 G3956 G3588
Jerusalem, all the city was
Conj vp 2Aor Act Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Pas 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f moved, saying, Who is this?
AND OF-INTO-COMING OF-Him INTO JERUSALEM IS-QUAKED EVERY THE
of-entering entire
polis legousa tis estin outos

polis legousa tis estin houtos
G4172 G3004 G5101 G2076 G3778
n_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f pi Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pd Nom Sg m
city sayING ANY IS this
who ?
21:11 oi de ocloi elegon outos estin ihsous o 11 And the multitude said, This
hoi de ochloi elegon houtos estin iEsous ho
G3588 G1161 G3793 G3004 G3778 G2076 G2424 G3588
is Jesus the prophet of
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl pd Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m Nazareth of Galilee.
THE YET THRONGS said this IS JESUS THE
profhths o apo nazareq ths galilaias

prophEtEs ho apo nazareth tEs galilaias
G4396 G3588 G575 G3478 G3588 G1056
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m Prep ni proper t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
BEFORE-AVERer THE FROM NAZARETH OF-THE GALILEE
prophet the-one
Matthew 21
21:12 kai eishlqen o ihsous eis to ieron tou qeou 12 . And Jesus went into the
kai eisElthen ho iEsous eis to hieron tou theou
G2532 G1525 G3588 G2424 G1519 G3588 G2411 G3588 G2316
temple of God, and cast out all
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m them that sold and bought in
AND INTO-CAME THE JESUS INTO THE SACRED-place OF-THE God the temple, and overthrew the
entered sanctuary tables of the moneychangers,
and the seats of them that sold
kai exebalen pantas tous pwlountas kai agorazontas en tw doves,
kai exebalen pantas tous pOlountas kai agorazontas en tO
G2532 G1544 G3956 G3588 G4453 G2532 G59 G1722 G3588
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg n
AND He-OUT-CAST ALL THE ones-SELLING AND ones-BUYING IN THE
cast-out ones-selling ones-buying
ierw kai tas trapezas twn kollubistwn katestreyen kai tas

hierO kai tas trapezas tOn kollubistOn katestrepsen kai tas
G2411 G2532 G3588 G5132 G3588 G2855 G2690 G2532 G3588
n_ Dat Sg n Conj t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Acc Pl f
SACRED-place AND THE tables OF-THE LOPPers He-DOWN-TURNS AND THE
sanctuary brokers he-overturns
kaqedras twn pwlountwn tas peristeras

kathedras tOn pOlountOn tas peristeras
G2515 G3588 G4453 G3588 G4058
n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Gen Pl m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f
DOWN-SETTLES OF-THE ones-SELLING THE DOVES
seats ones-selling
21:13 kai legei autois gegraptai o oikos mou oikos 13 And said unto them, It is
kai legei autois gegraptai ho oikos mou oikos
G2532 G3004 G846 G1125 G3588 G3624 G3450 G3624
written, My house shall be
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vi Perf Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg n_ Nom Sg m called the house of prayer; but
AND He-IS-sayING to-them it-HAS-been-WRITTEN THE HOME OF-ME HOME ye have made it a den of
house house thieves.
proseuchs klhqhsetai umeis de auton epoihsate sphlaion lhstwn

proseuchEs klEthEsetai humeis de auton epoiEsate spElaion lEstOn
G4335 G2564 G5210 G1161 G846 G4160 G4693 G3027
n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Nom Pl Conj pp Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Pl m
OF-prayer SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED YOU(p) YET SAME make CAVE OF-ROBBERS
ye him
21:14 kai proshlqon autw tufloi kai cwloi en tw ierw kai 14 And the blind and the lame
kai prosElthon autO tuphloi kai chOloi en tO hierO kai
G2532 G4334 G846 G5185 G2532 G5560 G1722 G3588 G2411 G2532
came to him in the temple; and
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n Conj he healed them.
AND TOWARD-CAME to-Him BLIND AND LAME IN THE SACRED-place AND
came-to him blind-ones lame-ones sanctuary
eqerapeusen autous
etherapeusen autous
G2323 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m
He-curES them
21:15 idontes de oi arciereis kai oi grammateis ta 15 And when the chief priests
idontes de hoi archiereis kai hoi grammateis ta
G1492 G1161 G3588 G749 G2532 G3588 G1122 G3588
and scribes saw the wonderful
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl n things that he did, and the
PERCEIVING YET THE chief-SACRED-ones AND THE WRITers THE children crying in the temple,
chief-priests scribes and saying, Hosanna to the Son
of David; they were sore
qaumasia a epoihsen kai tous paidas krazontas en tw displeased,
thaumasia ha epoiEsen kai tous paidas krazontas en tO
G2297 G3739 G4160 G2532 G3588 G3816 G2896 G1722 G3588
a_ Acc Pl n pr Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg n
MARVELS WHICH He-DOES AND THE boys CRYING IN THE
ierw kai legontas wsanna tw uiw dabid hganakthsan

hierO kai legontas hOsanna tO huiO dabid EganaktEsan
G2411 G2532 G3004 G5614 G3588 G5207 G1138 G23
n_ Dat Sg n Conj vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Hebrew t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m ni proper vi Aor Act 3 Pl
SACRED-place AND sayING HOSANNA to-THE SON of-DAVID THEY-resent
sanctuary of-David they-resent-it
21:16 kai eipon autw akoueis ti outoi legousin o de 16 And said unto him, Hearest
kai eipon autO akoueis ti houtoi legousin ho de
G2532 G2036 G846 G191 G5101 G3778 G3004 G3588 G1161
thou what these say? And
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Sg pi Acc Sg n pd Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Sg m Conj Jesus saith unto them, Yea;
AND said to-Him YOU-ARE-HEARING ANY these ARE-sayING THE YET have ye never read, Out of the
what ? mouth of babes and sucklings
thou hast perfected praise?
ihsous legei autois nai oudepote anegnwte oti ek stomatos
iEsous legei autois nai oudepote anegnOte hoti ek stomatos
G2424 G3004 G846 G3483 G3763 G314 G3754 G1537 G4750
n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Part Adv vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg n
JESUS IS-sayING to-them YEA NOT-YET-?-when YE-read(past) that OUT OF-MOUTH
yes never ye-did-read
Matthew 21
nhpiwn kai qhlazontwn kathrtisw ainon

nEpiOn kai thElazontOn katErtisO ainon
G3516 G2532 G2337 G2675 G136
a_ Gen Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl m vi Aor Mid 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg m
OF-minors AND OF-sucklings YOU-DOWN-EQUIP PRAISE
sucklings you-attune
21:17 kai katalipwn autous exhlqen exw ths polews eis bhqanian 17 And he left them, and went
kai katalipOn autous exElthen exO tEs poleOs eis bEthanian
G2532 G2641 G846 G1831 G1854 G3588 G4172 G1519 G963
out of the city into Bethany;
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg f and he lodged there.
AND leavING them He-OUT-CAME OUT OF-THE city INTO BETHANY
he-came-out
kai hulisqh ekei

kai EulisthE ekei
G2532 G835 G1563
Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Sg Adv
AND IS-COURTizED there
is-camped-out
21:18 prwias de epanagwn eis thn polin epeinasen 18 . Now in the morning as he
prOias de epanagOn eis tEn polin epeinasen
G4405 G1161 G1877 G1519 G3588 G4172 G3983
returned into the city, he
n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg hungered.
OF-morning YET ON-UP-LEADING INTO THE city He-HUNGERS
leading-back
21:19 kai idwn sukhn mian epi ths odou hlqen ep 19 And when he saw a fig tree
kai idOn sukEn mian epi tEs hodou Elthen ep
G2532 G1492 G4808 G1520 G1909 G3588 G3598 G2064 G1909
in the way, he came to it, and
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep found nothing thereon, but
AND PERCEIVING FIG-tree ONE ON THE WAY He-CAME ON leaves only, and said unto it,
roadside Let no fruit grow on thee
henceforward for ever. And
authn kai ouden euren en auth ei mh fulla monon kai presently the fig tree withered
autEn kai ouden heuren en autE ei mE phulla monon kai away.
G846 G2532 G3762 G2147 G1722 G846 G1487 G3361 G5444 G3440 G2532
pp Acc Sg f Conj a_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Dat Sg f Cond Part Neg n_ Acc Pl n Adv Conj
her AND NOT-YET-ONE FOUND IN her IF NO leaves ONLY AND
nothing
legei auth mhketi ek sou karpos genhtai eis ton

legei autE mEketi ek sou karpos genEtai eis ton
G3004 G846 G3371 G1537 G4675 G2590 G1096 G1519 G3588
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f Adv Prep pp 2 Gen Sg n_ Nom Sg m vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m
He-IS-sayING to-her NO-NOT-STILL OUT OF-YOU FRUIT MAY-BE-BECOMING INTO THE
by-no-means-longer
aiwna kai exhranqh paracrhma h sukh

aiOna kai exEranthE parachrEma hE sukE
G165 G2532 G3583 G3916 G3588 G4808
n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Adv t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
eon AND IS-DRIED instantly THE FIG-tree
is-withered
21:20 kai idontes oi maqhtai eqaumasan legontes pws paracrhma 20 And when the disciples saw
kai idontes hoi mathEtai ethaumasan legontes pOs parachrEma
G2532 G1492 G3588 G3101 G2296 G3004 G4459 G3916
[it], they marvelled, saying,
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Adv Int Adv How soon is the fig tree
AND PERCEIVING THE LEARNers MARVEL sayING how instantly withered away!
perceiving-it disciples how ?
exhranqh h sukh
exEranthE hE sukE
G3583 G3588 G4808
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
IS-DRIED THE FIG-tree
is-withered
21:21 apokriqeis de o ihsous eipen autois amhn legw 21 Jesus answered and said
apokritheis de ho iEsous eipen autois amEn legO
G611 G1161 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G281 G3004
unto them, Verily I say unto
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg you, If ye have faith, and doubt
answerING YET THE JESUS said to-them AMEN I-AM-sayING not, ye shall not only do this
verily [which is done] to the fig tree,
but also if ye shall say unto this
umin ean echte pistin kai mh diakriqhte ou monon mountain, Be thou removed,
humin ean echEte pistin kai mE diakrithEte ou monon and be thou cast into the sea; it
G5213 G1437 G2192 G4102 G2532 G3361 G1252 G3756 G3440
pp 2 Dat Pl Cond vs Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg f Conj Part Neg vs Aor Pas 2 Pl Part Neg Adv shall be done.
to-YOU(p) IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-HAVING BELIEF AND NO MAY-BE-BEING-THRU-JUDGED NOT ONLY
to-ye faith ye-may-be-doubting
to ths sukhs poihsete alla kan tw orei toutw

to tEs sukEs poiEsete alla kan tO orei toutO
G3588 G3588 G4808 G4160 G235 G2579 G3588 G3735 G5129
t_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut Act 2 Pl Conj Cond Con t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pd Dat Sg n
THE OF-THE FIG-tree YE-SHALL-BE-DOING but AND-[IF]-EVER to-THE mountain this
also-if-ever
Matthew 21
eiphte arqhti kai blhqhti eis thn qalassan

eipEte arthEti kai blEthEti eis tEn thalassan
G2036 G142 G2532 G906 G1519 G3588 G2281
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl vm Aor Pas 2 Sg Conj vm Aor Pas 2 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
YE-MAY-BE-sayING BE-BEING-LIFTED AND BE-BEING-CAST INTO THE SEA
be-you-being-picked-up ! be-you-being-cast !
genhsetai
genEsetai
G1096
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
it-SHALL-BE-BECOMING
it-shall-be-occurring
21:22 kai panta osa an aithshte en th proseuch 22 And all things, whatsoever
kai panta hosa an aitEsEte en tE proseuchE
G2532 G3956 G3745 G302 G154 G1722 G3588 G4335
ye shall ask in prayer,
Conj a_ Acc Pl n pk Acc Pl n Part vs Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f believing, ye shall receive.
AND ALL as-much-as EVER YE-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING IN THE prayer
all-things
pisteuontes lhyesqe
pisteuontes lEpsesthe
G4100 G2983
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vi Fut midD 2 Pl
BELIEVING YE-SHALL-BE GETTING
ye-shall-be-getting
21:23 kai elqonti autw eis to ieron proshlqon autw 23 . And when he was come
kai elthonti autO eis to hieron prosElthon autO
G2532 G2064 G846 G1519 G3588 G2411 G4334 G846
into the temple, the chief
Conj vp 2Aor Act Dat Sg m pp Dat Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m priests and the elders of the
AND to-COMING Him INTO THE SACRED-place TOWARD-CAME to-Him people came unto him as he
sanctuary came-to him was teaching, and said, By
what authority doest thou these
didaskonti oi arciereis kai oi presbuteroi tou laou things? and who gave thee this
didaskonti hoi archiereis kai hoi presbuteroi tou laou authority?
G1321 G3588 G749 G2532 G3588 G4245 G3588 G2992
vp Pres Act Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
to-TEACHING THE chief-SACRED-ones AND THE SENIORS OF-THE PEOPLE
while-teaching chief-priests elders
legontes en poia exousia tauta poieis kai tis soi

legontes en poia exousia tauta poieis kai tis soi
G3004 G1722 G4169 G1849 G5023 G4160 G2532 G5101 G4671
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep pi Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 2 Sg Conj pi Nom Sg m pp 2 Dat Sg
sayING IN ?-THE-WHICH authority these YOU-ARE-DOING AND ANY to-YOU
which ? these-things who ? you
edwken thn exousian tauthn

edOken tEn exousian tautEn
G1325 G3588 G1849 G3778
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f
GIVES THE authority this
21:24 apokriqeis de o ihsous eipen autois erwthsw umas 24 And Jesus answered and
apokritheis de ho iEsous eipen autois erOtEsO humas
G611 G1161 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G2065 G5209
said unto them, I also will ask
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl you one thing, which if ye tell
answerING YET THE JESUS said to-them I-SHALL-BE-askING YOU(p) me, I in like wise will tell you
shall-be-asking ye by what authority I do these
things.
kagw logon ena on ean eiphte moi kagw
kagO logon hena hon ean eipEte moi kagO
G2504 G3056 G1520 G3739 G1437 G2036 G3427 G2504
pp 1 Nom Sg Con n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m pr Acc Sg m Cond vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg pp 1 Nom Sg Con
AND-I saying ONE WHOM IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-sayING to-ME AND-I
also-I word which ye-may-be-telling me also-I
umin erw en poia exousia tauta poiw

humin erO en poia exousia tauta poiO
G5213 G2046 G1722 G4169 G1849 G5023 G4160
pp 2 Dat Pl vi Fut Act 1 Sg Prep pi Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 1 Sg
to-YOU(p) SHALL-BE-declarING IN ?-THE-WHICH authority these I-AM-DOING
to-ye which ? these-things
21:25 to baptisma iwannou poqen hn ex ouranou h ex 25 The baptism of John,

to baptisma iOannou pothen En ex ouranou E ex
G3588 G908 G2491 G4159 G2258 G1537 G3772 G2228 G1537
whence was it? from heaven,
t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n n_ Gen Sg m Adv Int vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Prep n_ Gen Sg m Part Prep or of men? And they reasoned
THE DIPism OF-JOHN ?-WHICH-PLACE it-WAS OUT OF-heaven OR OUT with themselves, saying, If we
baptism whence ? shall say, From heaven; he will
say unto us, Why did ye not
anqrwpwn oi de dielogizonto par eautois legontes ean then believe him?
anthrOpOn hoi de dielogizonto par heautois legontes ean
G444 G3588 G1161 G1260 G3844 G1438 G3004 G1437
n_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep pf 3 Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Cond
OF-humans THE-ones YET THRU-accountED BESIDE selves sayING IF-EVER
the-ones reasoned themselves
Matthew 21
eipwmen ex ouranou erei hmin dia ti oun ouk

eipOmen ex ouranou erei hEmin dia ti oun ouk
G2036 G1537 G3772 G2046 G2254 G1223 G5101 G3767 G3756
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl Prep n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl Prep pi Acc Sg n Conj Part Neg
WE-MAY-BE-sayING OUT OF-heaven He-SHALL-BE-declarING to-US THRU ANY THEN NOT
because-of what ?
episteusate autw
episteusate autO
G4100 G846
vi Aor Act 2 Pl pp Dat Sg m
YE-BELIEVE to-him
him
21:26 ean de eipwmen ex anqrwpwn foboumeqa ton oclon 26 But if we shall say, Of men;
ean de eipOmen ex anthrOpOn phoboumetha ton ochlon
G1437 G1161 G2036 G1537 G444 G5399 G3588 G3793
we fear the people; for all hold
Cond Conj vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl Prep n_ Gen Pl m vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m John as a prophet.
IF-EVER YET WE-MAY-BE-sayING OUT OF-humans WE-ARE-FEARING THE THRONG
pantes gar ecousin ton iwannhn ws profhthn

pantes gar echousin ton iOannEn hOs prophEtEn
G3956 G1063 G2192 G3588 G2491 G5613 G4396
a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Adv n_ Acc Sg m
ALL for ARE-HAVING THE JOHN AS BEFORE-AVERer
prophet
21:27 kai apokriqentes tw ihsou eipon ouk oidamen efh 27 And they answered Jesus,
kai apokrithentes tO iEsou eipon ouk oidamen ephE
G2532 G611 G3588 G2424 G2036 G3756 G1492 G5346
and said, We cannot tell. And
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Part Neg vi Perf Act 1 Pl vi Impf vxx 3 Sg he said unto them, Neither tell I
AND answerING to-THE JESUS THEY-said NOT WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED AVERRed you by what authority I do
we-are-aware these things.
autois kai autos oude egw legw umin en poia exousia

autois kai autos oude egO legO humin en poia exousia
G846 G2532 G846 G3761 G1473 G3004 G5213 G1722 G4169 G1849
pp Dat Pl m Conj pp Nom Sg m Adv pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Prep pi Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
to-them AND He NOT-YET I AM-sayING to-YOU(p) IN ?-THE-WHICH authority
also neither am-telling ye which ?
tauta poiw
tauta poiO
G5023 G4160
pd Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 1 Sg
these I-AM-DOING
these-things
21:28 ti de umin dokei anqrwpos eicen tekna duo kai 28 . But what think ye? A
ti de humin dokei anthrOpos eichen tekna duo kai
G5101 G1161 G5213 G1380 G444 G2192 G5043 G1417 G2532
[certain] man had two sons;
pi Acc Sg n Conj pp 2 Dat Pl vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl n a_ Nom Conj and he came to the first, and
ANY YET to-YOU(p) it-IS-SEEMING human HAD offsprings TWO AND said, Son, go work to day in
what ? to-ye children my vineyard.
proselqwn tw prwtw eipen teknon upage shmeron

proselthOn tO prOtO eipen teknon hupage sEmeron
G4334 G3588 G4413 G2036 G5043 G5217 G4594
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Voc Sg n vm Pres Act 2 Sg Adv
TOWARD-COMING to-THE BEFORE-most he-said offspring BE-UNDER-LEADING toDAY
coming-to the first child ! be-you-going-away !
ergazou en tw ampelwni mou

ergazou en tO ampelOni mou
G2038 G1722 G3588 G290 G3450
vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg
BE-ACTING IN THE VINEyard OF-ME
be-you-working !
21:29 o de apokriqeis eipen ou qelw usteron de 29 He answered and said, I will

ho de apokritheis eipen ou thelO husteron de
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G3756 G2309 G5305 G1161
not: but afterward he repented,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Part Neg vi Pres Act 1 Sg Adv Conj and went.
THE YET answerING he-said NOT I-AM-WILLING subsequently YET
metamelhqeis aphlqen
metamelEtheis apElthen
G3338 G565
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
BEING-after-CARED he-FROM-CAME
regretting-it he-went-forth
21:30 kai proselqwn tw deuterw eipen wsautws o de 30 And he came to the second,
kai proselthOn tO deuterO eipen hOsautOs ho de
G2532 G4334 G3588 G1208 G2036 G5615 G3588 G1161
and said likewise. And he
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv t_ Nom Sg m Conj answered and said, I [go], sir:
AND TOWARD-COMING to-THE second he-said AS-SAMEly THE YET and went not.
coming-to the similarly
Matthew 21
apokriqeis eipen egw kurie kai ouk aphlqen

apokritheis eipen egO kurie kai ouk apElthen
G611 G2036 G1473 G2962 G2532 G3756 G565
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Nom Sg n_ Voc Sg m Conj Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
answerING he-said I master ! AND NOT FROM-CAME
lord ! he-went-forth
21:31 tis ek twn duo epoihsen to qelhma tou patros 31 Whether of them twain did
tis ek tOn duo epoiEsen to thelEma tou patros
G5101 G1537 G3588 G1417 G4160 G3588 G2307 G3588 G3962
the will of [his] father? They
pi Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m say unto him, The first. Jesus
ANY OUT OF-THE TWO DOES THE WILL OF-THE FATHER saith unto them, Verily I say
which ? unto you, That the publicans
and the harlots go into the
legousin autw o prwtos legei autois o ihsous amhn kingdom of God before you.
legousin autO ho prOtos legei autois ho iEsous amEn
G3004 G846 G3588 G4413 G3004 G846 G3588 G2424 G281
vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Hebrew
THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him THE BEFORE-most IS-sayING to-them THE JESUS AMEN
first-one verily
legw umin oti oi telwnai kai ai pornai proagousin

legO humin hoti hoi telOnai kai hai pornai proagousin
G3004 G5213 G3754 G3588 G5057 G2532 G3588 G4204 G4254
vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f vi Pres Act 3 Pl
I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that THE tribute-collectors AND THE PROSTITUTES ARE-BEFORE-LEADING
to-ye are-preceding
umas eis thn basileian tou qeou

humas eis tEn basileian tou theou
G5209 G1519 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316
pp 2 Acc Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
YOU(p) INTO THE KINGdom OF-THE God
ye
21:32 hlqen gar pros umas iwannhs en odw dikaiosunhs kai ouk 32 For John came unto you in
Elthen gar pros humas iOannEs en hodO dikaiosunEs kai ouk
G2064 G1063 G4314 G5209 G2491 G1722 G3598 G1343 G2532 G3756
the way of righteousness, and
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Prep pp 2 Acc Pl n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj Part Neg ye believed him not: but the
CAME for TOWARD YOU(p) JOHN IN WAY OF-JUSTice AND NOT publicans and the harlots
of-righteousness believed him: and ye, when ye
had seen [it], repented not
episteusate autw oi de telwnai kai ai pornai episteusan afterward, that ye might
episteusate autO hoi de telOnai kai hai pornai episteusan believe him.
G4100 G846 G3588 G1161 G5057 G2532 G3588 G4204 G4100
vi Aor Act 2 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f vi Aor Act 3 Pl
YE-BELIEVE to-him THE YET tribute-collectors AND THE PROSTITUTES BELIEVE
him
autw umeis de idontes ou metemelhqhte usteron tou

autO humeis de idontes hou metemelEthEte husteron tou
G846 G5210 G1161 G1492 G3756 G3338 G5305 G3588
pp Dat Sg m pp 2 Nom Pl Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Part Neg vi Aor pasD 2 Pl Adv t_ Gen Sg m
to-him YOU(p) YET PERCEIVING NOT YE-WERE-after-CARED subsequently OF-THE
him ye perceiving-it regretted
pisteusai autw
pisteusai autO
G4100 G846
vn Aor Act pp Dat Sg m
TO-BELIEVE to-him
him
21:33 allhn parabolhn akousate anqrwpos tis hn oikodespoths 33 . Hear another parable:
allEn parabolEn akousate anthrOpos tis En oikodespotEs
G243 G3850 G191 G444 G5100 G2258 G3617
There was a certain
a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vm Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Nom Sg m px Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m householder, which planted a
other BESIDE-CAST HEAR human ANY WAS HOME-OWNer vineyard, and hedged it round
another parable hear-ye ! certain there-was householder about, and digged a winepress
in it, and built a tower, and let
ostis efuteusen ampelwna kai fragmon autw perieqhken kai wruxen it out to husbandmen, and went
hostis ephuteusen ampelOna kai phragmon autO periethEken kai Oruxen into a far country:
G3748 G5452 G290 G2532 G5418 G846 G4060 G2532 G3736
pr Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m pp Dat Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
WHO-ANY plants VINEyard AND BARRIER to-it ABOUT-PLACES AND EXCAVATES
who-any stone-dike him it places-about
en autw lhnon kai wkodomhsen purgon kai exedoto auton

en autO lEnon kai OkodomEsen purgon kai exedoto auton
G1722 G846 G3025 G2532 G3618 G4444 G2532 G1554 G846
Prep pp Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
IN it TROUGH AND HOME-BUILDS TOWER AND OUT-GAVE SAME
him it builds leased him it
gewrgois kai apedhmhsen

geOrgois kai apedEmEsen
G1092 G2532 G589
n_ Dat Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
to-LAND-ACTers AND travels
to-farmers
Matthew 21
21:34 ote de hggisen o kairos twn karpwn apesteilen tous 34 And when the time of the
hote de Eggisen ho kairos tOn karpOn apesteilen tous
G3753 G1161 G1448 G3588 G2540 G3588 G2590 G649 G3588
fruit drew near, he sent his
Adv Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m servants to the husbandmen,
when YET NEARS THE SEASON OF-THE FRUITS he-commissions THE that they might receive the
draws-near he-dispatches fruits of it.
doulous autou pros tous gewrgous labein tous karpous autou

doulous autou pros tous geOrgous labein tous karpous autou
G1401 G846 G4314 G3588 G1092 G2983 G3588 G2590 G846
n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m
SLAVES OF-him TOWARD THE LAND-ACTers TO-BE-GETTING THE FRUITS OF-him
farmers
21:35 kai labontes oi gewrgoi tous doulous autou on men 35 And the husbandmen took
kai labontes hoi geOrgoi tous doulous autou hon men
G2532 G2983 G3588 G1092 G3588 G1401 G846 G3739 G3303
his servants, and beat one, and
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m pr Acc Sg m Part killed another, and stoned
AND GETTING THE LAND-ACTers THE SLAVES OF-him WHOM INDEED another.
taking farmers whichone
edeiran on de apekteinan on de eliqobolhsan

edeiran hon de apekteinan hon de elithobolEsan
G1194 G3739 G1161 G615 G3739 G1161 G3036
vi Aor Act 3 Pl pr Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pr Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
THEY-SKIN WHOM YET THEY-FROM-KILL WHOM YET THEY-STONE-CAST
they-lash whichone they-kill whichone they-pelt-with-stones
21:36 palin apesteilen allous doulous pleionas twn prwtwn kai 36 Again, he sent other
palin apesteilen allous doulous pleionas tOn prOtOn kai
G3825 G649 G243 G1401 G4119 G3588 G4413 G2532
servants more than the first:
Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Cmp t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m Conj and they did unto them
AGAIN he-commissions others SLAVES MORE OF-THE BEFORE-most AND likewise.
he-dispatches first-ones
epoihsan autois wsautws

epoiEsan autois hOsautOs
G4160 G846 G5615
vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Pl m Adv
THEY-DO to-them AS-SAMEly
similarly
21:37 usteron de apesteilen pros autous ton uion autou 37 But last of all he sent unto
husteron de apesteilen pros autous ton huion autou
G5305 G1161 G649 G4314 G846 G3588 G5207 G846
them his son, saying, They will
Adv Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m reverence my son.
subsequently YET he-commissions TOWARD them THE SON OF-him
he-dispatches
legwn entraphsontai ton uion mou

legOn entrapEsontai ton huion mou
G3004 G1788 G3588 G5207 G3450
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi 2Fut Pas 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg
sayING THEY-SHALL-BE-abashING THE SON OF-ME
they-shall-be-respecting
21:38 oi de gewrgoi idontes ton uion eipon en eautois 38 But when the husbandmen
hoi de geOrgoi idontes ton huion eipon en heautois
G3588 G1161 G1092 G1492 G3588 G5207 G2036 G1722 G1438
saw the son, they said among
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pf 3 Dat Pl m themselves, This is the heir;
THE YET LAND-ACTers PERCEIVING THE SON said IN selves come, let us kill him, and let us
farmers among themselves seize on his inheritance.
outos estin o klhronomos deute apokteinwmen auton

houtos estin ho klEronomos deute apokteinOmen auton
G3778 G2076 G3588 G2818 G1205 G615 G846
pd Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vm txx vxx 2 Pl vs Pres Act 1 Pl pp Acc Sg m
this IS THE tenant HITHER WE-MAY-BE-FROM-KILLING him
enjoyer-of-the-allotment hither-ye ! we-may-be-killing
kai katascwmen thn klhronomian autou

kai kataschOmen tEn klEronomian autou
G2532 G2722 G3588 G2817 G846
Conj vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m
AND WE-SHOULD-BE DOWN-HAVING THE tenancy OF-him
we-should-be-retaining enjoyment-of-the-allotment
21:39 kai labontes auton exebalon exw tou ampelwnos kai 39 And they caught him, and
kai labontes auton exebalon exO tou ampelOnos kai
G2532 G2983 G846 G1544 G1854 G3588 G290 G2532
cast [him] out of the vineyard,
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Adv t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj and slew [him].
AND GETTING him THEY-OUT-CAST(past) OUT OF-THE VINEyard AND
taking they-cast-out(past)-him
apekteinan
apekteinan
G615
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-FROM-KILL
they-kill-him
Matthew 21
21:40 otan oun elqh o kurios tou ampelwnos ti 40 When the lord therefore of
hotan oun elthE ho kurios tou ampelOnos ti
G3752 G3767 G2064 G3588 G2962 G3588 G290 G5101
the vineyard cometh, what will
Conj Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pi Acc Sg n he do unto those husbandmen?
when-EVER THEN MAY-BE-COMING THE master OF-THE VINEyard ANY
whenever lord what ?
poihsei tois gewrgois ekeinois

poiEsei tois geOrgois ekeinois
G4160 G3588 G1092 G1565
vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pd Dat Pl m
he-SHALL-BE-DOING to-THE LAND-ACTers those
farmers
21:41 legousin autw kakous kakws apolesei autous kai ton 41 They say unto him, He will
legousin autO kakous kakOs apolesei autous kai ton
G3004 G846 G2556 G2560 G622 G846 G2532 G3588
miserably destroy those
vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m a_ Acc Pl m Adv vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Sg m wicked men, and will let out
THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him EVIL-ones EVILly he-SHALL-BE-destroyING them AND THE [his] vineyard unto other
evil-men husbandmen, which shall
render him the fruits in their
ampelwna ekdosetai allois gewrgois oitines apodwsousin autw seasons.
ampelOna ekdosetai allois geOrgois hoitines apodOsousin autO
G290 G1554 G243 G1092 G3748 G591 G846
n_ Acc Sg m vi Fut midD 3 Sg a_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pr Nom Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
VINEyard he-SHALL-BE-OUT-GIVING to-others LAND-ACTers WHO-ANY SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-him
he-shall-be-leasing farmers who-any shall-be-rendering
tous karpous en tois kairois autwn

tous karpous en tois kairois autOn
G3588 G2590 G1722 G3588 G2540 G846
t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Pl m
THE FRUITS IN THE SEASONS OF-them
21:42 legei autois o ihsous oudepote anegnwte en tais 42 Jesus saith unto them, Did
legei autois ho iEsous oudepote anegnOte en tais
G3004 G846 G3588 G2424 G3763 G314 G1722 G3588
ye never read in the scriptures,
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Adv vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Dat Pl f The stone which the builders
IS-sayING to-them THE JESUS NOT-YET-?-when YE-read(past) IN THE rejected, the same is become
never ye-did-read the head of the corner: this is
the Lord's doing, and it is
grafais liqon on apedokimasan oi oikodomountes outos marvellous in our eyes?
graphais lithon hon apedokimasan hoi oikodomountes houtos
G1124 G3037 G3739 G593 G3588 G3618 G3778
n_ Dat Pl f n_ Acc Sg m pr Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pd Nom Sg m
WRITings STONE WHICH FROM-test THE ones-HOME-BUILDING this
scriptures reject ones-building this-one
egenhqh eis kefalhn gwnias para kuriou egeneto auth kai

egenEthE eis kephalEn gOnias para kuriou egeneto hautE kai
G1096 G1519 G2776 G1137 G3844 G2962 G1096 G3778 G2532
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Prep n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg pd Nom Sg f Conj
WAS-BECOME INTO HEAD OF-CORNER BESIDE Master BECAME this AND
Lord
estin qaumasth en ofqalmois hmwn

estin thaumastE en ophthalmois hEmOn
G2076 G2298 G1722 G3788 G2257
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg f Prep n_ Dat Pl m pp 1 Gen Pl
it-IS MARVELous IN VIEWers OF-US
eyes
21:43 dia touto legw umin oti arqhsetai af umwn h 43 Therefore say I unto you,
dia touto legO humin hoti arthEsetai aph humOn hE
G1223 G5124 G3004 G5213 G3754 G142 G575 G5216 G3588
The kingdom of God shall be
Prep pd Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Nom Sg f taken from you, and given to a
THRU this I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that SHALL-BE-BEING-LIFTED FROM YOU(p) THE nation bringing forth the fruits
because-of to-ye shall-be-being-taken-away ye thereof.
basileia tou qeou kai doqhsetai eqnei poiounti tous

basileia tou theou kai dothEsetai ethnei poiounti tous
G932 G3588 G2316 G2532 G1325 G1484 G4160 G3588
n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg n vp Pres Act Dat Sg n t_ Acc Pl m
KINGdom OF-THE God AND it-SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-NATION DOING THE
shall-be-being-given producing
karpous auths
karpous autEs
G2590 G846
n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg f
FRUITS OF-her
21:44 kai o peswn epi ton liqon touton 44 And whosoever shall fall on
kai ho pesOn epi ton lithon touton
G2532 G3588 G4098 G1909 G3588 G3037 G5126
this stone shall be broken: but
Conj t_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pd Acc Sg m on whomsoever it shall fall, it
AND THE one-FALLING ON THE STONE this will grind him to powder.
one-falling
sunqlasqhsetai ef on d an pesh
sunthlasthEsetai eph hon d an pesE
G4917 G1909 G3739 G1161 G302 G4098
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep pr Acc Sg m Conj Part vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-BEING-TOGETHER-SHATTERED ON WHOM YET EVER it-SHOULD-BE-FALLING
shall-be-being-shattered
likmhsei auton
likmEsei auton
G3039 G846
vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
it-SHALL-BE-WINNOWING him
it-shall-be-scattering-like-chaff
21:45 kai akousantes oi arciereis kai oi farisaioi tas 45 And when the chief priests
kai akousantes hoi archiereis kai hoi pharisaioi tas
G2532 G191 G3588 G749 G2532 G3588 G5330 G3588
and Pharisees had heard his
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl f parables, they perceived that
AND HEARing THE chief-SACRED-ones AND THE PHARISEES THE he spake of them.
chief-priests
parabolas autou egnwsan oti peri autwn legei

parabolas autou egnOsan hoti peri autOn legei
G3850 G846 G1097 G3754 G4012 G846 G3004
n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj Prep pp Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
BESIDE-CASTS OF-Him THEY-KNOW that ABOUT them He-IS-sayING
parables know concerning he-is-saying-this
21:46 kai zhtountes auton krathsai efobhqhsan tous oclous epeidh 46 But when they sought to lay
kai zEtountes auton kratEsai ephobEthEsan tous ochlous epeidE
G2532 G2212 G846 G2902 G5399 G3588 G3793 G1894
hands on him, they feared the
Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m vn Aor Act vi Aor pasD 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj multitude, because they took
AND SEEKING Him TO-HOLD THEY-WERE-afraid-of THE THRONGS ON-IF-BIND him for a prophet.
since-in-fact
ws profhthn auton eicon

hOs prophEtEn auton eichon
G5613 G4396 G846 G2192
Adv n_ Acc Sg m pp Acc Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Pl
AS BEFORE-AVERer Him THEY-HAD
prophet
Matthew 22
22:1 kai apokriqeis o ihsous palin eipen autois en 1 . And Jesus answered and
kai apokritheis ho iEsous palin eipen autois en
G2532 G611 G3588 G2424 G3825 G2036 G846 G1722
spake unto them again by
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Prep parables, and said,
AND answerING THE JESUS AGAIN said to-them IN
spoke
parabolais legwn
parabolais legOn
G3850 G3004
n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
BESIDE-CASTS sayING
parables
22:2 wmoiwqh h basileia twn ouranwn anqrwpw basilei ostis 2 The kingdom of heaven is
hOmoiOthE hE basileia tOn ouranOn anthrOpO basilei hostis
G3666 G3588 G932 G3588 G3772 G444 G935 G3748
like unto a certain king, which
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pr Nom Sg m made a marriage for his son,
WAS-LIKenED THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens to-human KING WHO-ANY
who-any
epoihsen gamous tw uiw autou

epoiEsen gamous tO huiO autou
G4160 G1062 G3588 G5207 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m
makES MARRIAGES to-THE SON OF-him
wedding-festivities
22:3 kai apesteilen tous doulous autou kalesai tous keklhmenous 3 And sent forth his servants to
kai apesteilen tous doulous autou kalesai tous keklEmenous
G2532 G649 G3588 G1401 G846 G2564 G3588 G2564
call them that were bidden to
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m vn Aor Act t_ Acc Pl m vp Perf Pas Acc Pl m the wedding: and they would
AND commissions THE SLAVES OF-him TO-CALL THE ones-HAVING-been-CALLED not come.
he-dispatches ones-having-been-invited
eis tous gamous kai ouk hqelon elqein

eis tous gamous kai ouk Ethelon elthein
G1519 G3588 G1062 G2532 G3756 G2309 G2064
Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj Part Neg vi Impf Act 3 Pl vn 2Aor Act
INTO THE MARRIAGES AND NOT THEY-WILLED TO-BE-COMING
wedding-festivities they-would
22:4 palin apesteilen allous doulous legwn eipate tois 4 Again, he sent forth other
palin apesteilen allous doulous legOn eipate tois
G3825 G649 G243 G1401 G3004 G2036 G3588
servants, saying, Tell them
Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Pl m which are bidden, Behold, I
AGAIN he-commissions others SLAVES sayING say to-THE have prepared my dinner: my
he-dispatches say-ye ! oxen and [my] fatlings [are]
killed, and all things [are]
keklhmenois idou to ariston mou htoimasa oi ready: come unto the marriage.
keklEmenois idou to ariston mou Etoimasa hoi
G2564 G2400 G3588 G712 G3450 G2090 G3588
vp Perf Pas Dat Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg vi Aor Act 1 Sg t_ Nom Pl m
ones-HAVING-been-CALLED BE-PERCEIVING THE LUNCH OF-ME I-make-READY THE
ones-having-been-invited lo ! luncheon
tauroi mou kai ta sitista tequmena kai panta etoima

tauroi mou kai ta sitista tethumena kai panta hetoima
G5022 G3450 G2532 G3588 G4619 G2380 G2532 G3956 G2092
n_ Nom Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n vp Perf Pas Nom Pl n Conj a_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n
BULLS OF-ME AND THE GRAINlings HAVING-been-SACRIFICED AND ALL READY
grain-fed-animals all-things ready(p)
deute eis tous gamous

deute eis tous gamous
G1205 G1519 G3588 G1062
vm txx vxx 2 Pl Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
HITHER INTO THE MARRIAGES
hither-ye ! wedding-festivities
22:5 oi de amelhsantes aphlqon o men eis ton idion 5 But they made light of [it],
hoi de amelEsantes apElthon ho men eis ton idion
G3588 G1161 G272 G565 G3588 G3303 G1519 G3588 G2398
and went their ways, one to his
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Sg m Part Prep t_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m farm, another to his
THE-ones YET UN-CARing FROM-CAME THE-one INDEED INTO THE OWN merchandise:
the they-came-away the-one
agron o de eis thn emporian autou

agron ho de eis tEn emporian autou
G68 G3588 G1161 G1519 G3588 G1711 G846
n_ Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m
FIELD THE-one YET INTO THE merchandise OF-him
the-one
22:6 oi de loipoi krathsantes tous doulous autou ubrisan kai 6 And the remnant took his
hoi de loipoi kratEsantes tous doulous autou hubrisan kai
G3588 G1161 G3062 G2902 G3588 G1401 G846 G5195 G2532
servants, and entreated [them]
t_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj spitefully, and slew [them].
THE YET rest HOLDing THE SLAVES OF-him THEY-OUTRAGE AND
rest(p) taking-hold-of outrage-them
Matthew 22
apekteinan
apekteinan
G615
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-FROM-KILL
kill-them
22:7 akousas de o basileus wrgisqh kai pemyas ta 7 But when the king heard
akousas de ho basileus OrgisthE kai pempsas ta
G191 G1161 G3588 G935 G3710 G2532 G3992 G3588
[thereof], he was wroth: and he
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl n sent forth his armies, and
HEARing YET THE KING IS-INDIGNANT AND SENDing THE destroyed those murderers, and
hearing-it is-angered burned up their city.
strateumata autou apwlesen tous foneis ekeinous kai thn polin

strateumata autou apOlesen tous phoneis ekeinous kai tEn polin
G4753 G846 G622 G3588 G5406 G1565 G2532 G3588 G4172
n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
WAR-troops OF-him destroys THE MURDERERS those AND THE city
troops
autwn eneprhsen
autOn eneprEsen
G846 G1714
pp Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
OF-them IN-INFLAMES
sets-in-flames
22:8 tote legei tois doulois autou o men gamos etoimos 8Then saith he to his servants,
tote legei tois doulois autou ho men gamos hetoimos
G5119 G3004 G3588 G1401 G846 G3588 G3303 G1062 G2092
The wedding is ready, but they
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg m Part n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m which were bidden were not
then he-IS-sayING to-THE SLAVES OF-him THE INDEED MARRIAGE READY worthy.
wedding
estin oi de keklhmenoi ouk hsan axioi

estin hoi de keklEmenoi ouk Esan axioi
G2076 G3588 G1161 G2564 G3756 G2258 G514
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m Part Neg vi Impf vxx 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m
IS THE YET ones-HAVING-been-CALLED NOT WERE WORTHY
ones-having-been-invited
22:9 poreuesqe oun epi tas diexodous twn odwn kai osous an 9 Go ye therefore into the
poreuesthe oun epi tas diexodous tOn hodOn kai hosous an
G4198 G3767 G1909 G3588 G1327 G3588 G3598 G2532 G3745 G302
highways, and as many as ye
vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Conj Prep t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f Conj pk Acc Pl m Part shall find, bid to the marriage.
YE-BE-beING-GONE THEN ON THE THRU-OUT-WAYS OF-THE WAYS AND as-many-as EVER
be-ye-going ! exits roads
eurhte kalesate eis tous gamous

heurEte kalesate eis tous gamous
G2147 G2564 G1519 G3588 G1062
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl vm Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
YE-MAY-BE-FINDING CALL INTO THE MARRIAGES
call-ye ! wedding-festivities
22:10 kai exelqontes oi douloi ekeinoi eis tas odous 10 So those servants went out
kai exelthontes hoi douloi ekeinoi eis tas hodous
G2532 G1831 G3588 G1401 G1565 G1519 G3588 G3598
into the highways, and
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pd Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f gathered together all as many
AND OUT-COMING THE SLAVES those INTO THE WAYS as they found, both bad and
coming-out roads good: and the wedding was
furnished with guests.
sunhgagon pantas osous euron ponhrous te kai agaqous kai
sunEgagon pantas hosous heuron ponErous te kai agathous kai
G4863 G3956 G3745 G2147 G4190 G5037 G2532 G18 G2532
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Acc Pl m pk Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Acc Pl m Part Conj a_ Acc Pl m Conj
THEY-TOGETHER-LED ALL as-many-as THEY-FOUND wicked-ones BESIDES AND GOOD-ones AND
they-gathered wicked-ones good-ones
eplhsqh o gamos anakeimenwn

eplEsthE ho gamos anakeimenOn
G4130 G3588 G1062 G345
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl m
IS-FILLED THE MARRIAGE OF-UP-LYING-ones
wedding of-ones-lying-back-at-table
22:11 eiselqwn de o basileus qeasasqai tous anakeimenous 11 And when the king came in
eiselthOn de ho basileus theasasthai tous anakeimenous
G1525 G1161 G3588 G935 G2300 G3588 G345
to see the guests, he saw there
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vn Aor midD t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m a man which had not on a
INTO-COMING YET THE KING TO-gaze THE ones-UP-LYING wedding garment:
entering to-gaze-at ones-lying-back-at-table
eiden ekei anqrwpon ouk endedumenon enduma gamou

eiden ekei anthrOpon ouk endedumenon enduma gamou
G1492 G1563 G444 G3756 G1746 G1742 G1062
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg vp Perf Mid Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg m
he-PERCEIVED there human NOT HAVING-IN-SLIPPED IN-SLIP OF-MARRIAGE
having-put-on apparel of-wedding
Matthew 22
22:12 kai legei autw etaire pws eishlqes wde mh ecwn 12 And he saith unto him,
kai legei autO hetaire pOs eisElthes hOde mE echOn
G2532 G3004 G846 G2083 G4459 G1525 G5602 G3361 G2192
Friend, how camest thou in
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m Adv Int vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg Adv Part Neg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m hither not having a wedding
AND he-IS-sayING to-him COMRADE ! how YOU-INTO-CAME here NO HAVING garment? And he was
how ? you-entered speechless.
enduma gamou o de efimwqh

enduma gamou ho de ephimOthE
G1742 G1062 G3588 G1161 G5392
n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
IN-SLIP OF-MARRIAGE THE YET WAS-MUZZLED
apparel of-wedding he-was-still
22:13 tote eipen o basileus tois diakonois dhsantes autou 13 Then said the king to the
tote eipen ho basileus tois diakonois dEsantes autou
G5119 G2036 G3588 G935 G3588 G1249 G1210 G846
servants, Bind him hand and
Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m foot, and take him away, and
then said THE KING to-THE THRU-SERVitors BINDing OF-him cast [him] into outer darkness;
servants there shall be weeping and
gnashing of teeth.
podas kai ceiras arate auton kai ekbalete eis to skotos
podas kai cheiras arate auton kai ekbalete eis to skotos
G4228 G2532 G5495 G142 G846 G2532 G1544 G1519 G3588 G4655
n_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl f vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
FEET AND HANDS LIFT-YE him AND BE-YE-OUT-CASTING INTO THE DARKness
take-away-ye ! be-ye-casting-out !
to exwteron ekei estai o klauqmos kai o brugmos

to exOteron ekei estai ho klauthmos kai ho brugmos
G3588 G1857 G1563 G2071 G3588 G2805 G2532 G3588 G1030
t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
THE OUTer there SHALL-BE THE LAMENTing AND THE GNASHing
lamentation
twn odontwn
tOn odontOn
G3588 G3599
OF-THE TEETH
22:14 polloi gar eisin klhtoi oligoi de eklektoi 14 For many are called, but
polloi gar eisin klEtoi oligoi de eklektoi
G4183 G1063 G1526 G2822 G3641 G1161 G1588
few [are] chosen.
a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m
MANY for ARE CALLED FEW YET chosen
22:15 tote poreuqentes oi farisaioi sumboulion elabon opws 15 . Then went the Pharisees,
tote poreuthentes hoi pharisaioi sumboulion elabon hopOs
G5119 G4198 G3588 G5330 G4824 G2983 G3704
and took counsel how they
Adv vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Adv might entangle him in [his]
then BEING-GONE THE PHARISEES TOGETHER-COUNSEL GOT WHICH-how talk.
consultation held so-that
auton pagideuswsin en logw

auton pagideusOsin en logO
G846 G3802 G1722 G3056
pp Acc Sg m vs Aor Act 3 Pl Prep n_ Dat Sg m
Him THEY-SHOULD-BE-FASTENING IN saying
they-should-be-trapping word
22:16 kai apostellousin autw tous maqhtas autwn meta twn 16 And they sent out unto him
kai apostellousin autO tous mathEtas autOn meta tOn
G2532 G649 G846 G3588 G3101 G846 G3326 G3588
their disciples with the
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Pl m Prep t_ Gen Pl m Herodians, saying, Master, we
AND THEY-ARE-commissionING to-Him THE LEARNers OF-them WITH THE know that thou art true, and
they-are-dispatching disciples teachest the way of God in
truth, neither carest thou for
hrwdianwn legontes didaskale oidamen oti alhqhs ei kai any [man]: for thou regardest
hErOdianOn legontes didaskale oidamen hoti alEthEs ei kai not the person of men.
G2265 G3004 G1320 G1492 G3754 G227 G1488 G2532
n_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Voc Sg m vi Perf Act 1 Pl Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 2 Sg Conj
HERODians sayING TEACHer ! WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that TRUE YOU-ARE AND
we-are-aware
thn odon tou qeou en alhqeia didaskeis kai ou

tEn hodon tou theou en alEtheia didaskeis kai ou
G3588 G3598 G3588 G2316 G1722 G225 G1321 G2532 G3756
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg f vi Pres Act 2 Sg Conj Part Neg
THE WAY OF-THE God IN TRUTH YOU-ARE-TEACHING AND NOT
are-teaching
melei soi peri oudenos ou gar blepeis eis proswpon

melei soi peri oudenos ou gar blepeis eis prosOpon
G3199 G4671 G4012 G3762 G3756 G1063 G991 G1519 G4383
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Prep a_ Gen Sg m Part Neg Conj vi Pres Act 2 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg n
it-IS-CARING to-YOU ABOUT OF-NOT-YET-ONE NOT for YOU-ARE-lookING INTO face
concerning anyone
Matthew 22
anqrwpwn
anthrOpOn
G444
n_ Gen Pl m
OF-humans
22:17 eipe oun hmin ti soi dokei exestin dounai 17 Tell us therefore, What
eipe oun hEmin ti soi dokei exestin dounai
G2036 G3767 G2254 G5101 G4671 G1380 G1832 G1325
thinkest thou? Is it lawful to
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Conj pp 1 Dat Pl pi Acc Sg n pp 2 Dat Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act give tribute unto Caesar, or
BE-sayING THEN to-US ANY to-YOU it-IS-SEEMING it-IS-allowed TO-GIVE not?
be-you-telling ! us what ?
khnson kaisari h ou
kEnson kaisari E ou
G2778 G2541 G2228 G3756
n_ Acc Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Part Part Neg
POLL-TAX to-CEASAR OR NOT
22:18 gnous de o ihsous thn ponhrian autwn eipen 18 But Jesus perceived their
gnous de ho iEsous tEn ponErian autOn eipen
G1097 G1161 G3588 G2424 G3588 G4189 G846 G2036
wickedness, and said, Why
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg tempt ye me, [ye] hypocrites?
KNOWING YET THE JESUS THE wickedness OF-them He-said
said
ti me peirazete upokritai
ti me peirazete hupokritai
G5101 G3165 G3985 G5273
pi Acc Sg n pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Voc Pl m
ANY ME YE-ARE-tryING hypocrites
why ? hypocrites !
22:19 epideixate moi to nomisma tou khnsou oi de 19 Shew me the tribute money.
epideixate moi to nomisma tou kEnsou hoi de
G1925 G3427 G3588 G3546 G3588 G2778 G3588 G1161
And they brought unto him a
vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Nom Pl m Conj penny.
ON-SHOW to-ME THE currency OF-THE POLL-TAX THE-ones YET
exhibit-ye ! the
proshnegkan autw dhnarion

prosEnegkan autO dEnarion
G4374 G846 G1220
vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg n
TOWARD-CARRY to-Him DENARIUS
they-bring
22:20 kai legei autois tinos h eikwn auth kai h 20 And he saith unto them,
kai legei autois tinos hE eikOn hautE kai hE
G2532 G3004 G846 G5101 G3588 G1504 G3778 G2532 G3588
Whose [is] this image and
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pi Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pd Nom Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg f superscription?
AND He-IS-sayING to-them OF-ANY THE image this AND THE
of-whom ?
epigrafh
epigraphE
G1923
n_ Nom Sg f
ON-WRITing
inscription
22:21 legousin autw kaisaros tote legei autois apodote oun 21 They say unto him,
legousin autO kaisaros tote legei autois apodote oun
G3004 G846 G2541 G5119 G3004 G846 G591 G3767
Caesar's. Then saith he unto
vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl Conj them, Render therefore unto
THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him OF-CEASAR then He-IS-sayING to-them BE-YE-FROM-GIVING THEN Caesar the things which are
be-ye-paying ! Caesar's; and unto God the
things that are God's.
ta kaisaros kaisari kai ta tou qeou tw qew
ta kaisaros kaisari kai ta tou theou tO theO
G3588 G2541 G2541 G2532 G3588 G3588 G2316 G3588 G2316
t_ Acc Pl n n_ Gen Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
THE OF-CEASAR to-CEASAR AND THE OF-THE God to-THE God
the(p) the(p)
22:22 kai akousantes eqaumasan kai afentes auton aphlqon 22 When they had heard [these
kai akousantes ethaumasan kai aphentes auton apElthon
G2532 G191 G2296 G2532 G863 G846 G565
words], they marvelled, and
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl left him, and went their way.
AND HEARing THEY-MARVEL AND FROM-LETTING Him THEY-FROM-CAME
hearing-it leaving they-came-away
22:23 en ekeinh th hmera proshlqon autw saddoukaioi oi 23 . The same day came to him
en ekeinE tE hEmera prosElthon autO saddoukaioi hoi
G1722 G1565 G3588 G2250 G4334 G846 G4523 G3588
the Sadducees, which say that
Prep pd Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m there is no resurrection, and
IN that THE DAY TOWARD-CAME to-Him SADDUCEES THE asked him,
came-to him
Matthew 22
legontes mh einai anastasin kai ephrwthsan auton

legontes mE einai anastasin kai epErOtEsan auton
G3004 G3361 G1511 G386 G2532 G1905 G846
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Part Neg vn Pres vxx n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
ones-sayING NO TO-BE UP-STANDing AND THEY-inquire-of Him
ones-saying resurrection
22:24 legontes didaskale mwshs eipen ean tis apoqanh 24 Saying, Master, Moses said,
legontes didaskale mOsEs eipen ean tis apothanE
G3004 G1320 G3475 G2036 G1437 G5100 G599
If a man die, having no
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Voc Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Cond px Nom Sg m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg children, his brother shall
sayING TEACHer ! MOSES said IF-EVER ANY MAY-BE-FROM-DYING marry his wife, and raise up
anyone may-be-dying seed unto his brother.
mh ecwn tekna epigambreusei o adelfos autou thn

mE echOn tekna epigambreusei ho adelphos autou tEn
G3361 G2192 G5043 G1918 G3588 G80 G846 G3588
Part Neg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Pl n vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m t_ Acc Sg f
NO HAVING offsprings SHALL-BE-ON-MARRYING THE brother OF-him THE
children shall-be-marrying
gunaika autou kai anasthsei sperma tw adelfw autou

gunaika autou kai anastEsei sperma tO adelphO autou
G1135 G846 G2532 G450 G4690 G3588 G80 G846
n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m
WOMAN OF-him AND he-SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING seed to-THE brother OF-him
wife shall-be-raising-up
22:25 hsan de par hmin epta adelfoi kai o prwtos 25 Now there were with us
Esan de par hEmin hepta adelphoi kai ho prOtos
G2258 G1161 G3844 G2254 G2033 G80 G2532 G3588 G4413
seven brethren: and the first,
vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj Prep pp 1 Dat Pl a_ Nom n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m when he had married a wife,
THEY-WERE YET BESIDE US SEVEN brothers AND THE BEFORE-most deceased, and, having no issue,
were first left his wife unto his brother:
gamhsas eteleuthsen kai mh ecwn sperma afhken thn

gamEsas eteleutEsen kai mE echOn sperma aphEken tEn
G1060 G5053 G2532 G3361 G2192 G4690 G863 G3588
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Part Neg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f
MARRYing deceasES AND NO HAVING seed FROM-LETS THE
he-leaves
gunaika autou tw adelfw autou

gunaika autou tO adelphO autou
G1135 G846 G3588 G80 G846
n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m
WOMAN OF-him to-THE brother OF-him
wife
22:26 omoiws kai o deuteros kai o tritos ews twn epta 26 Likewise the second also,
homoiOs kai ho deuteros kai ho tritos heOs tOn hepta
G3668 G2532 G3588 G1208 G2532 G3588 G5154 G2193 G3588 G2033
and the third, unto the seventh.
Adv Conj t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom
LIKE-AS AND THE second AND THE third TILL OF-THE SEVEN
likewise also the
22:27 usteron de pantwn apeqanen kai h gunh 27 And last of all the woman
husteron de pantOn apethanen kai hE gunE
G5305 G1161 G3956 G599 G2532 G3588 G1135
died also.
Adv Conj a_ Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
subsequently YET OF-ALL FROM-DIED AND THE WOMAN
died also
22:28 en th oun anastasei tinos twn epta estai gunh pantes 28 Therefore in the
en tE oun anastasei tinos tOn hepta estai gunE pantes
G1722 G3588 G3767 G386 G5101 G3588 G2033 G2071 G1135 G3956
resurrection whose wife shall
Prep t_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f pi Gen Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom vi Fut vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Pl m she be of the seven? for they
IN THE THEN UP-STANDing OF-ANY OF-THE SEVEN SHALL-BE WOMAN ALL all had her.
resurrection of-which ? she-shall-be wife
gar escon authn

gar eschon autEn
G1063 G2192 G846
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg f
for have-HAD her
22:29 apokriqeis de o ihsous eipen autois planasqe 29 Jesus answered and said
apokritheis de ho iEsous eipen autois planasthe
G611 G1161 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G4105
unto them, Ye do err, not
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vm Pres Pas 2 Pl knowing the scriptures, nor the
answerING YET THE JESUS said to-them YE-ARE-beING-STRAYED power of God.
ye-are-being-deceived
mh eidotes tas grafas mhde thn dunamin tou qeou

mE eidotes tas graphas mEde tEn dunamin tou theou
G3361 G1492 G3588 G1124 G3366 G3588 G1411 G3588 G2316
Part Neg vp Perf Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
NO HAVING-PERCEIVED THE WRITings NO-YET THE ABILITY OF-THE God
being-acquainted with scriptures nor-yet power
Matthew 22
22:30 en gar th anastasei oute gamousin oute 30 For in the resurrection they
en gar tE anastasei oute gamousin oute
G1722 G1063 G3588 G386 G3777 G1060 G3777
neither marry, nor are given in
Prep Conj t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj marriage, but are as the angels
IN for THE UP-STANDing NOT-BESIDES THEY-ARE-MARRYING NOT-BESIDES of God in heaven.
resurrection neither nor
ekgamizontai all ws aggeloi tou qeou en ouranw eisin

ekgamizontai all hOs aggeloi tou theou en ouranO eisin
G1547 G235 G5613 G32 G3588 G2316 G1722 G3772 G1526
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl Conj Adv n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
THEY-ARE-OUT-MARRYizING but AS MESSENGERS OF-THE God IN heaven THEY-ARE
they-are-giving-in-marriage are
22:31 peri de ths anastasews twn nekrwn ouk anegnwte to 31 But as touching the
peri de tEs anastaseOs tOn nekrOn ouk anegnOte to
G4012 G1161 G3588 G386 G3588 G3498 G3756 G314 G3588
resurrection of the dead, have
Prep Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg n ye not read that which was
ABOUT YET THE UP-STANDing OF-THE DEAD-ones NOT YE-read(past) THE spoken unto you by God,
concerning resurrection dead-ones ye-did-read saying,
rhqen umin upo tou qeou legontos

rEthen humin hupo tou theou legontos
G4483 G5213 G5259 G3588 G2316 G3004
vp Aor Pas Acc Sg n pp 2 Dat Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg n
BEING-declarED to-YOU(p) by THE God sayING
to-ye
22:32 egw eimi o qeos abraam kai o qeos isaak 32 I am the God of Abraham,
egO eimi ho theos abraam kai ho theos isaak
G1473 G1510 G3588 G2316 G11 G2532 G3588 G2316 G2464
and the God of Isaac, and the
pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 1 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m ni proper Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m ni proper God of Jacob? God is not the
I AM THE God of-ABRAHAM AND THE God of-ISAAC God of the dead, but of the
of-Abraham of-Isaac living.
kai o qeos iakwb ouk estin o qeos qeos

kai ho theos iakOb ouk estin ho theos theos
G2532 G3588 G2316 G2384 G3756 G2076 G3588 G2316 G2316
Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m ni proper Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
AND THE God of-JACOB NOT IS THE God (PLACer) God
of-Jacob God
nekrwn alla zwntwn

nekrOn alla zOntOn
G3498 G235 G2198
a_ Gen Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl m
OF-DEAD-ones but OF-LIVING-ones
of-dead-ones of-ones-living
22:33 kai akousantes oi ocloi exeplhssonto epi th didach 33 And when the multitude
kai akousantes hoi ochloi exeplEssonto epi tE didachE
G2532 G191 G3588 G3793 G1605 G1909 G3588 G1322
heard [this], they were
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Impf Pas 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f astonished at his doctrine.
AND HEARing THE THRONGS THEY-were-astonishED ON THE TEACHing
hearing-it were-astonished
autou
autou
G846
pp Gen Sg m
OF-Him
22:34 oi de farisaioi akousantes oti efimwsen tous saddoukaious 34 . But when the Pharisees
hoi de pharisaioi akousantes hoti ephimOsen tous saddoukaious
G3588 G1161 G5330 G191 G3754 G5392 G3588 G4523
had heard that he had put the
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Sadducees to silence, they
THE YET PHARISEES HEARing that He-MUZZLES THE SADDUCEES were gathered together.
sunhcqhsan epi to auto

sunEchthEsan epi to auto
G4863 G1909 G3588 G846
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg n pp Acc Sg n
WERE-TOGETHER-LED ON THE SAME
were-gathered same-place
22:35 kai ephrwthsen eis ex autwn nomikos peirazwn auton 35 Then one of them, [which
kai epErOtEsen heis ex autOn nomikos peirazOn auton
G2532 G1905 G1520 G1537 G846 G3544 G3985 G846
was] a lawyer, asked [him a
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m Prep pp Gen Pl m a_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m question], tempting him, and
AND inquirES-of ONE OUT OF-them LAWer tryING Him saying,
inquires learned-in-the-law
kai legwn
kai legOn
G2532 G3004
Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
AND sayING
Matthew 22
22:36 didaskale poia entolh megalh en tw nomw 36 Master, which [is] the great
didaskale poia entolE megalE en tO nomO
G1320 G4169 G1785 G3173 G1722 G3588 G3551
commandment in the law?
n_ Voc Sg m pi Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
TEACHer ! ?-THE-WHICH direction GREAT IN THE LAW
which ? precept
22:37 o de ihsous eipen autw agaphseis kurion ton 37 Jesus said unto him, Thou
ho de iEsous eipen autO agapEseis kurion ton
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G846 G25 G2962 G3588
shalt love the Lord thy God
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vi Fut Act 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m with all thy heart, and with all
THE YET JESUS said to-him YOU-SHALL-BE-LOVING Master THE thy soul, and with all thy mind.
Lord
qeon sou en olh th kardia sou kai en olh th

theon sou en holE tE kardia sou kai en holE tE
G2316 G4675 G1722 G3650 G3588 G2588 G4675 G2532 G1722 G3650 G3588
n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg Prep a_ Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Conj Prep a_ Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f
God OF-YOU IN WHOLE THE HEART OF-YOU AND IN WHOLE THE
yuch sou kai en olh th dianoia sou

psuchE sou kai en holE tE dianoia sou
G5590 G4675 G2532 G1722 G3650 G3588 G1271 G4675
n_ Dat Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Conj Prep a_ Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg
soul OF-YOU AND IN WHOLE THE THRU-MIND OF-YOU
comprehension
22:38 auth estin prwth kai megalh entolh 38 This is the first and great
hautE estin prOtE kai megalE entolE
G3778 G2076 G4413 G2532 G3173 G1785
commandment.
pd Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg f Conj a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
this IS BEFORE-most AND GREAT direction
foremost precept
22:39 deutera de omoia auth agaphseis ton plhsion sou ws 39 And the second [is] like
deutera de homoia autE agapEseis ton plEsion sou hOs
G1208 G1161 G3664 G846 G25 G3588 G4139 G4675 G5613
unto it, Thou shalt love thy
a_ Nom Sg f Conj a_ Nom Sg f pp Dat Sg f vi Fut Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg m Adv pp 2 Gen Sg Adv neighbour as thyself.
second YET LIKE to-her YOU-SHALL-BE-LOVING THE NIGH-one OF-YOU AS
herit associate
seauton
seauton
G4572
pf 2 Acc Sg m
YOURself
22:40 en tautais tais dusin entolais olos o nomos kai 40 On these two
en tautais tais dusin entolais holos ho nomos kai
G1722 G3778 G3588 G1417 G1785 G3650 G3588 G3551 G2532
commandments hang all the
Prep pd Dat Pl f t_ Dat Pl f a_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj law and the prophets.
IN these THE TWO directions WHOLE THE LAW AND
precepts
oi profhtai kremantai
hoi prophEtai kremantai
G3588 G4396 G2910
t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
THE BEFORE-AVERers ARE-HANGING
prophets
22:41 sunhgmenwn de twn farisaiwn ephrwthsen autous o 41 . While the Pharisees were
sunEgmenOn de tOn pharisaiOn epErOtEsen autous ho
G4863 G1161 G3588 G5330 G1905 G846 G3588
gathered together, Jesus asked
vp Perf Pas Gen Pl m Conj t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m t_ Nom Sg m them,
OF-HAVING-TOGETHER-LED YET THE PHARISEES inquirES-of them THE
of-having-been-gathered
ihsous
iEsous
G2424
n_ Nom Sg m
JESUS
22:42 legwn ti umin dokei peri tou cristou tinos 42 Saying, What think ye of
legOn ti humin dokei peri tou christou tinos
G3004 G5101 G5213 G1380 G4012 G3588 G5547 G5101
Christ? whose son is he? They
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pi Nom Sg n pp 2 Dat Pl vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pi Gen Sg m say unto him, [The Son] of
sayING ANY to-YOU(p) it-IS-SEEMING ABOUT THE ANOINTED OF-ANY David.
what ? to-ye concerning Christ of-whom ?
uios estin legousin autw tou dabid

huios estin legousin autO tou dabid
G5207 G2076 G3004 G846 G3588 G1138
n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Gen Sg m ni proper
SON He-IS THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him OF-THE DAVID
22:43 legei autois pws oun dabid en pneumati kurion auton kalei 43 He saith unto them, How
legei autois pOs oun dabid en pneumati kurion auton kalei
G3004 G846 G4459 G3767 G1138 G1722 G4151 G2962 G846 G2564
then doth David in spirit call
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Adv Int Conj ni proper Prep n_ Dat Sg n n_ Acc Sg m pp Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg him Lord, saying,
He-IS-sayING to-them how THEN DAVID IN spirit Master Him IS-CALLING
how ? Lord
legwn
legOn
G3004
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
sayING
22:44 eipen o kurios tw kuriw mou kaqou ek 44 The LORD said unto my
eipen ho kurios tO kuriO mou kathou ek
G2036 G3588 G2962 G3588 G2962 G3450 G2521 G1537
Lord, Sit thou on my right
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Prep hand, till I make thine enemies
said THE Master to-THE Master OF-ME BE-sittING OUT thy footstool?
Lord Lord be-you-sitting !
dexiwn mou ews an qw tous ecqrous sou upopodion

dexiOn mou heOs an thO tous echthrous sou hupopodion
G1188 G3450 G2193 G302 G5087 G3588 G2190 G4675 G5286
a_ Gen Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg Conj Part vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg n_ Acc Sg n
OF-RIGHT OF-ME TILL EVER I-MAY-BE-PLACING THE enemies OF-YOU UNDER-FOOT
of-right(p) footstool
twn podwn sou

tOn podOn sou
G3588 G4228 G4675
t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-THE FEET OF-YOU
22:45 ei oun dabid kalei auton kurion pws uios autou estin 45 If David then call him Lord,
ei oun dabid kalei auton kurion pOs huios autou estin
G1487 G3767 G1138 G2564 G846 G2962 G4459 G5207 G846 G2076
how is he his son?
Cond Conj ni proper vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Adv Int n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IF THEN DAVID IS-CALLING Him Master how SON OF-him He-IS
Lord how ?
22:46 kai oudeis edunato autw apokriqhnai logon oude etolmhsen 46 And no man was able to
kai oudeis edunato autO apokrithEnai logon oude etolmEsen
G2532 G3762 G1410 G846 G611 G3056 G3761 G5111
answer him a word, neither
Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vn Aor pasD n_ Acc Sg m Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg durst any [man] from that day
AND NOT-YET-ONE was-ABLE Him TO-answer saying NOT-YET DARES forth ask him any more
no-one word neither [questions].
tis ap ekeinhs ths hmeras eperwthsai auton ouketi

tis ap ekeinEs tEs hEmeras eperOtEsai auton ouketi
G5100 G575 G1565 G3588 G2250 G1905 G846 G3765
px Nom Sg m Prep pd Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vn Aor Act pp Acc Sg m Adv
ANY FROM that THE DAY TO-inquire-of Him NOT-STILL
anyone not-longer
Matthew 23
23:1 tote o ihsous elalhsen tois oclois kai tois maqhtais 1. Then spake Jesus to the
tote ho iEsous elalEsen tois ochlois kai tois mathEtais
G5119 G3588 G2424 G2980 G3588 G3793 G2532 G3588 G3101
multitude, and to his disciples,
Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Conj t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
then THE JESUS TALKS to-THE THRONGS AND to-THE LEARNers
speaks disciples
autou
autou
G846
pp Gen Sg m
OF-Him
23:2 legwn epi ths mwsews kaqedras ekaqisan oi grammateis 2Saying, The scribes and the
legOn epi tEs mOseOs kathedras ekathisan hoi grammateis
G3004 G1909 G3588 G3475 G2515 G2523 G3588 G1122
Pharisees sit in Moses'seat:
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
sayING ON THE OF-MOSES DOWN-SETTLE are-seated THE WRITers
seat scribes
kai oi farisaioi
kai hoi pharisaioi
G2532 G3588 G5330
Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
AND THE PHARISEES
23:3 panta oun osa an eipwsin umin threin threite kai 3 All therefore whatsoever they
panta oun hosa an eipOsin humin tErein tEreite kai
G3956 G3767 G3745 G302 G2036 G5213 G5083 G5083 G2532
bid you observe, [that] observe
a_ Acc Pl n Conj pk Acc Pl n Part vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp 2 Dat Pl vn Pres Act vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj and do; but do not ye after
ALL THEN as-much-as EVER THEY-MAY-BE-sayING to-YOU(p) TO-BE-KEEPING BE-KEEPING AND their works: for they say, and
to-ye be-ye-keeping-it ! do not.
poieite kata de ta erga autwn mh poieite legousin gar

poieite kata de ta erga autOn mE poieite legousin gar
G4160 G2596 G1161 G3588 G2041 G846 G3361 G4160 G3004 G1063
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep Conj t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Pl m Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Pl vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj
BE-DOING according-to YET THE ACTS OF-them NO BE-DOING THEY-ARE-sayING for
be-ye-doing ! be-ye-doing !
kai ou poiousin
kai ou poiousin
G2532 G3756 G4160
Conj Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Pl
AND NOT THEY-ARE-DOING
are-doing
23:4 desmeuousin gar fortia barea kai dusbastakta kai epitiqeasin 4 For they bind heavy burdens
desmeuousin gar phortia barea kai dusbastakta kai epititheasin
G1195 G1063 G5413 G926 G2532 G1419 G2532 G2007
and grievous to be borne, and
vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n Conj a_ Acc Pl n Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl Att lay [them] on men's shoulders;
THEY-ARE-BINDING for loads HEAVY AND ILL-BEARic AND THEY-ARE-ON-PLACING but they [themselves] will not
hard-to-bear are-placing-on-them move them with one of their
fingers.
epi tous wmous twn anqrwpwn tw de daktulw autwn ou
epi tous Omous tOn anthrOpOn tO de daktulO autOn ou
G1909 G3588 G5606 G3588 G444 G3588 G1161 G1147 G846 G3756
Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m t_ Dat Sg m Conj n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Pl m Part Neg
ON THE SHOULDERS OF-THE humans to-THE YET FINGER OF-them NOT
qelousin kinhsai auta

thelousin kinEsai auta
G2309 G2795 G846
vi Pres Act 3 Pl vn Aor Act pp Acc Pl n
THEY-ARE-WILLING TO-STIR them
23:5 panta de ta erga autwn poiousin pros to qeaqhnai 5 But all their works they do
panta de ta erga autOn poiousin pros to theathEnai
G3956 G1161 G3588 G2041 G846 G4160 G4314 G3588 G2300
for to be seen of men: they
a_ Acc Pl n Conj t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Pas make broad their phylacteries,
ALL YET THE ACTS OF-them THEY-ARE-DOING TOWARD THE TO-BE-gazED and enlarge the borders of their
works to-be-gazed-at garments,
tois anqrwpois platunousin de ta fulakthria autwn kai

tois anthrOpois platunousin de ta phulaktEria autOn kai
G3588 G444 G4115 G1161 G3588 G5440 G846 G2532
t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Pl m Conj
to-THE humans THEY-ARE-BROADenING YET THE amulets OF-them AND
megalunousin ta kraspeda twn imatiwn autwn

megalunousin ta kraspeda tOn himatiOn autOn
G3170 G3588 G2899 G3588 G2440 G846
vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n pp Gen Pl m
THEY-ARE-magnifyING THE HANG-FOOTS OF-THE GARMENTS OF-them
are-magnifying tassels
Matthew 23
23:6 filousin te thn prwtoklisian en tois deipnois kai 6 And love the uppermost
philousin te tEn prOtoklisian en tois deipnois kai
G5368 G5037 G3588 G4411 G1722 G3588 G1173 G2532
rooms at feasts, and the chief
vi Pres Act 3 Pl Part t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n Conj seats in the synagogues,
THEY-ARE-beING-FOND BESIDES THE BEFORE-most-CLINE IN THE DINners AND
they-are-being-fond-of first-reclining-place
tas prwtokaqedrias en tais sunagwgais

tas prOtokathedrias en tais sunagOgais
G3588 G4410 G1722 G3588 G4864
t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f
THE BEFORE-most-DOWN-SETTLES IN THE TOGETHER-LEADS
front-seats synagogues
23:7 kai tous aspasmous en tais agorais kai kaleisqai upo twn 7 And greetings in the markets,
kai tous aspasmous en tais agorais kai kaleisthai hupo tOn
G2532 G3588 G783 G1722 G3588 G58 G2532 G2564 G5259 G3588
and to be called of men, Rabbi,
Conj t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f Conj vn Pres Pas Prep t_ Gen Pl m Rabbi.
AND THE greetings IN THE BUY-places AND TO-BE-beING-CALLED by THE
salutations markets
anqrwpwn rabbi rabbi

anthrOpOn rabbi rabbi
G444 G4461 G4461
n_ Gen Pl m Hebrew Hebrew
humans RABBI RABBI
23:8 umeis de mh klhqhte rabbi eis gar estin umwn 8 But be not ye called Rabbi:
humeis de mE klEthEte rabbi heis gar estin humOn
G5210 G1161 G3361 G2564 G4461 G1520 G1063 G2076 G5216
for one is your Master, [even]
pp 2 Nom Pl Conj Part Neg vs Aor Pas 2 Pl Hebrew a_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pp 2 Gen Pl Christ; and all ye are brethren.
YOU(p) YET NO MAY-BE-BEING-CALLED RABBI ONE for IS OF-YOU(p)
ye of-ye
o kaqhghths o cristos pantes de umeis adelfoi este

ho kathEgEtEs ho christos pantes de humeis adelphoi este
G3588 G2519 G3588 G5547 G3956 G1161 G5210 G80 G2075
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Pl m Conj pp 2 Nom Pl n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
THE DOWN-LEADer THE ANOINTED ALL YET YOU(p) brothers ARE
preceptor Christ ye brethren
23:9 kai patera mh kaleshte umwn epi ths ghs eis 9 And call no [man] your
kai patera mE kalesEte humOn epi tEs gEs heis
G2532 G3962 G3361 G2564 G5216 G1909 G3588 G1093 G1520
father upon the earth: for one is
Conj n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg vs Aor Act 2 Pl pp 2 Gen Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f a_ Nom Sg m your Father, which is in
AND FATHER NO YE-SHOULD-BE-CALLING OF-YOU(p) ON THE LAND ONE heaven.
of-ye earth
gar estin o pathr umwn o en tois ouranois

gar estin ho patEr humOn ho en tois ouranois
G1063 G2076 G3588 G3962 G5216 G3588 G1722 G3588 G3772
Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
for IS THE FATHER OF-YOU(p) THE IN THE heavens
of-ye
23:10 mhde klhqhte kaqhghtai eis gar umwn estin o 10 Neither be ye called
mEde klEthEte kathEgEtai eis gar humOn estin ho
G3366 G2564 G2519 G1520 G1063 G5216 G2076 G3588
masters: for one is your
Conj vs Aor Pas 2 Pl n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Sg m Conj pp 2 Gen Pl vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m Master, [even] Christ.
NO-YET YE-MAY-BE-BEING-CALLED DOWN-LEADers ONE for OF-YOU(p) IS THE
nor-yet preceptors of-ye
kaqhghths o cristos
kathEgEtEs ho christos
G2519 G3588 G5547
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
DOWN-LEADer THE ANOINTED
preceptor Christ
23:11 o de meizwn umwn estai umwn diakonos 11 But he that is greatest

ho de meizOn humOn estai humOn diakonos
G3588 G1161 G3187 G5216 G2071 G5216 G1249
among you shall be your
t_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m Cmp pp 2 Gen Pl vi Fut vxx 3 Sg pp 2 Gen Pl n_ Nom Sg m servant.
THE YET GREATER OF-YOU(p) SHALL-BE OF-YOU(p) THRU-SERVitor
of-ye of-ye servant
23:12 ostis de uywsei eauton tapeinwqhsetai kai ostis 12 And whosoever shall exalt
hostis de hupsOsei heauton tapeinOthEsetai kai hostis
G3748 G1161 G5312 G1438 G5013 G2532 G3748
himself shall be abased; and he
pr Nom Sg m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg pf 3 Acc Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj pr Nom Sg m that shall humble himself shall
WHO-ANY YET SHALL-BE-HEIGHTenING self SHALL-BE-BEING-made-LOW AND WHO-ANY be exalted.
anyone-who shall-be-exalting himself shall-be-being-humbled anyone-who
tapeinwsei eauton uywqhsetai

tapeinOsei heauton hupsOthEsetai
G5013 G1438 G5312
vi Fut Act 3 Sg pf 3 Acc Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-makING-LOW self SHALL-BE-BEING-HEIGHTenED
shall-be-humbling himself shall-be-being-exalted
Matthew 23
23:13 ouai de umin grammateis kai farisaioi upokritai oti kleiete 13 . But woe unto you, scribes
ouai de humin grammateis kai pharisaioi hupokritai hoti kleiete
G3759 G1161 G5213 G1122 G2532 G5330 G5273 G3754 G2808
and Pharisees, hypocrites! for
Inj Conj pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Voc Pl m Conj n_ Voc Pl m n_ Voc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl ye shut up the kingdom of
WOE YET to-YOU(p) WRITers AND PHARISEES hypocrites that YE-ARE-LOCKING heaven against men: for ye
woe ! to-ye scribes ! Pharisees ! hypocrites ! neither go in [yourselves],
neither suffer ye them that are
thn basileian twn ouranwn emprosqen twn anqrwpwn umeis gar entering to go in.
tEn basileian tOn ouranOn emprosthen tOn anthrOpOn humeis gar
G3588 G932 G3588 G3772 G1715 G3588 G444 G5210 G1063
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Nom Pl Conj
THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE humans YOU(p) for
in-front-of the ye
ouk eisercesqe oude tous eisercomenous afiete

ouk eiserchesthe oude tous eiserchomenous aphiete
G3756 G1525 G3761 G3588 G1525 G863
Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Adv t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl
NOT ARE-INTO-COMING NOT-YET THE ones-INTO-COMING YE-ARE-FROM-LETTING
are-entering neither ones-entering ye-are-letting
eiselqein
eiselthein
G1525
vn 2Aor Act
TO-BE-INTO-COMING
to-be-entering
23:14 ouai umin grammateis kai farisaioi upokritai oti katesqiete 14 Woe unto you, scribes and
ouai humin grammateis kai pharisaioi hupokritai hoti katesthiete
G3759 G5213 G1122 G2532 G5330 G5273 G3754 G2719
Pharisees, hypocrites! for ye
Inj pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Voc Pl m Conj n_ Voc Pl m n_ Voc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl devour widows'houses, and for
WOE to-YOU(p) WRITers AND PHARISEES hypocrites that YE-ARE-DOWN-EATING a pretence make long prayer:
woe ! to-ye scribes ! Pharisees ! hypocrites ! ye-are-devouring therefore ye shall receive the
greater damnation.
tas oikias twn chrwn kai profasei makra proseucomenoi
tas oikias tOn chErOn kai prophasei makra proseuchomenoi
G3588 G3614 G3588 G5503 G2532 G4392 G3117 G4336
t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f Conj n_ Dat Sg f a_ Acc Pl n vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
THE HOMES OF-THE WIDOWS AND to-BEFORE-APPEARance FAR prayING
houses to-pretense prolix(p) ones-praying
dia touto lhyesqe perissoteron krima

dia touto lEpsesthe perissoteron krima
G1223 G5124 G2983 G4053 G2917
Prep pd Acc Sg n vi Fut midD 2 Pl a_ Acc Sg n Cmp n_ Acc Sg n
THRU this YE-SHALL-BE GETTING more-excessive JUDGment
because-of ye-shall-be-getting
23:15 ouai umin grammateis kai farisaioi upokritai oti periagete 15 Woe unto you, scribes and
ouai humin grammateis kai pharisaioi hupokritai hoti periagete
G3759 G5213 G1122 G2532 G5330 G5273 G3754 G4013
Inj pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Voc Pl m Conj n_ Voc Pl m n_ Voc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl compass sea and land to make
WOE to-YOU(p) WRITers AND PHARISEES hypocrites that YE-ARE-ABOUT-LEADING one proselyte, and when he is
woe ! to-ye scribes ! Pharisees ! hypocrites ! ye-are-going-about made, ye make him twofold
more the child of hell than
thn qalassan kai thn xhran poihsai ena proshluton kai otan yourselves.
tEn thalassan kai tEn xEran poiEsai hena prosEluton kai hotan
G3588 G2281 G2532 G3588 G3584 G4160 G1520 G4339 G2532 G3752
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vn Aor Act a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj Conj
THE SEA AND THE DRY TO-make ONE TOWARD-COMer AND when-EVER
dry-land proselyte whenever
genhtai poieite auton uion geennhs diploteron umwn

genEtai poieite auton huion geennEs diploteron humOn
G1096 G4160 G846 G5207 G1067 G1362 G5216
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg vi Pres Act 2 Pl pp Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg f a_ Acc Sg m Cmp pp 2 Gen Pl
he-MAY-BE-BECOMING YE-ARE-makING him SON OF-GEHENNA more-double OF-YOU(p)
more-than-double of-ye
23:16 ouai umin odhgoi tufloi oi legontes os an 16 Woe unto you, [ye] blind
ouai humin hodEgoi tuphloi hoi legontes hos an
G3759 G5213 G3595 G5185 G3588 G3004 G3739 G302
guides, which say, Whosoever
Inj pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Voc Pl m a_ Voc Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pr Nom Sg m Part shall swear by the temple, it is
WOE to-YOU(p) WAY-LEADers BLIND THE ones-sayING WHO EVER nothing; but whosoever shall
woe ! to-ye guides ! blind ! ones-saying swear by the gold of the
temple, he is a debtor!
omosh en tw naw ouden estin os d an
omosE en tO naO ouden estin hos d an
G3660 G1722 G3588 G3485 G3762 G2076 G3739 G1161 G302
vs Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m a_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pr Nom Sg m Conj Part
SHOULD-BE-SWEARING IN THE TEMPLE NOT-YET-ONE it-IS WHO YET EVER
nothing
omosh en tw crusw tou naou ofeilei

omosE en tO chrusO tou naou opheilei
G3660 G1722 G3588 G5557 G3588 G3485 G3784
vs Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
SHOULD-BE-SWEARING IN THE GOLD OF-THE TEMPLE IS-OWING
Matthew 23
23:17 mwroi kai tufloi tis gar meizwn estin o crusos 17 [Ye] fools and blind: for
mOroi kai tuphloi tis gar meizOn estin ho chrusos
G3474 G2532 G5185 G5101 G1063 G3187 G2076 G3588 G5557
whether is greater, the gold, or
a_ Voc Pl m Conj a_ Voc Pl m pi Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m Cmp vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m the temple that sanctifieth the
INSIPID-ones AND BLIND ANY for GREATER IS THE GOLD gold?
stupid-ones ! blind-ones ! which ?
h o naos o agiazwn ton cruson

E ho naos ho hagiazOn ton chruson
G2228 G3588 G3485 G3588 G37 G3588 G5557
Part t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
OR THE TEMPLE THE HOLYizING THE GOLD
hallowing
23:18 kai os ean omosh en tw qusiasthriw ouden 18 And, Whosoever shall

kai hos ean omosE en tO thusiastEriO ouden
G2532 G3739 G1437 G3660 G1722 G3588 G2379 G3762
swear by the altar, it is
Conj pr Nom Sg m Cond vs Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n a_ Nom Sg n nothing; but whosoever
AND WHO IF-EVER SHOULD-BE-SWEARING IN THE SACRIFICE-place NOT-YET-ONE sweareth by the gift that is
altar nothing upon it, he is guilty.
estin os d an omosh en tw dwrw tw

estin hos d an omosE en tO dOrO tO
G2076 G3739 G1161 G302 G3660 G1722 G3588 G1435 G3588
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n t_ Dat Sg n
it-IS WHO YET EVER SHOULD-BE-SWEARING IN THE oblation to-THE
approach-present the
epanw autou ofeilei

epanO autou opheilei
G1883 G846 G3784
Adv pp Gen Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ON-UP OF-it IS-OWING
upon it
23:19 mwroi kai tufloi ti gar meizon to dwron h 19 [Ye] fools and blind: for
mOroi kai tuphloi ti gar meizon to dOron E
G3474 G2532 G5185 G5101 G1063 G3173 G3588 G1435 G2228
whether [is] greater, the gift, or
a_ Voc Pl m Conj a_ Voc Pl m pi Nom Sg n Conj a_ Nom Sg n Cmp t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Part the altar that sanctifieth the
INSIPID-ones AND BLIND-ones ANY for GREATer THE oblation OR gift?
stupid-ones ! blind-ones ! which ? approach-present
to qusiasthrion to agiazon to dwron

to thusiastErion to hagiazon to dOron
G3588 G2379 G3588 G37 G3588 G1435
t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Sg n t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
THE SACRIFICE-place THE HOLYizING THE oblation
altar hallowing approach-present
23:20 o oun omosas en tw qusiasthriw omnuei en autw 20 Whoso therefore shall swear
ho oun omosas en tO thusiastEriO omnuei en autO
G3588 G3767 G3660 G1722 G3588 G2379 G3660 G1722 G846
by the altar, sweareth by it, and
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep pp Dat Sg n by all things thereon.
THE THEN one-SWEARing IN THE SACRIFICE-place IS-SWEARING IN it
the-one swearing altar
kai en pasin tois epanw autou

kai en pasin tois epanO autou
G2532 G1722 G3956 G3588 G1883 G846
Conj Prep a_ Dat Pl n t_ Dat Pl n Adv pp Gen Sg n
AND IN ALL THE ON-UP OF-it
upon it
23:21 kai o omosas en tw naw omnuei en autw kai 21 And whoso shall swear by
kai ho omosas en tO naO omnuei en autO kai
G2532 G3588 G3660 G1722 G3588 G3485 G3660 G1722 G846 G2532
the temple, sweareth by it, and
Conj t_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep pp Dat Sg m Conj by him that dwelleth therein.
AND THE one-SWEARing IN THE TEMPLE IS-SWEARING IN it AND
one-swearing him it
en tw katoikounti auton
en tO katoikounti auton
G1722 G3588 G2730 G846
Prep t_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m pp Acc Sg m
IN THE One-DOWN-HOMING it
one-dwelling-in him it
23:22 kai o omosas en tw ouranw omnuei en tw 22 And he that shall swear by

kai ho omosas en tO ouranO omnuei en tO
G2532 G3588 G3660 G1722 G3588 G3772 G3660 G1722 G3588
heaven, sweareth by the throne
Conj t_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m of God, and by him that sitteth
AND THE one-SWEARing IN THE heaven IS-SWEARING IN THE thereon.
one-swearing
qronw tou qeou kai en tw kaqhmenw epanw autou

thronO tou theou kai en tO kathEmenO epanO autou
G2362 G3588 G2316 G2532 G1722 G3588 G2521 G1883 G846
n_ Dat Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Sg m Adv pp Gen Sg m
THRONE OF-THE God AND IN THE One-sittING ON-UP OF-it
one-sitting upon him it
Matthew 23
23:23 ouai umin grammateis kai farisaioi upokritai oti apodekatoute 23 Woe unto you, scribes and
ouai humin grammateis kai pharisaioi hupokritai hoti apodekatoute
G3759 G5213 G1122 G2532 G5330 G5273 G3754 G586
Inj pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Voc Pl m Conj n_ Voc Pl m n_ Voc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl pay tithe of mint and anise and
WOE to-YOU(p) WRITers AND PHARISEES hypocrites that YE-ARE-FROM-TENthING cummin, and have omitted the
woe ! to-ye scribes ! Pharisees ! hypocrites ! ye-are-taking-tithes-from weightier [matters] of the law,
judgment, mercy, and faith:
to hduosmon kai to anhqon kai to kuminon kai afhkate these ought ye to have done,
to hEduosmon kai to anEthon kai to kuminon kai aphEkate and not to leave the other
G3588 G2238 G2532 G3588 G432 G2532 G3588 G2951 G2532 G863
t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Aor Act 2 Pl undone.
THE GRATIFY-ODOR AND THE DILL AND THE CUMIN AND YE-FROM-LET
mint ye-leave
ta barutera tou nomou thn krisin kai ton eleon kai

ta barutera tou nomou tEn krisin kai ton eleon kai
G3588 G926 G3588 G3551 G3588 G2920 G2532 G3588 G1656 G2532
t_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n Cmp t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj
THE more-HEAVY OF-THE LAW THE JUDGing AND THE MERCY AND
the-things weightier
thn pistin tauta edei poihsai kakeina mh afienai

tEn pistin tauta edei poiEsai kakeina mE aphienai
G3588 G4102 G5023 G1163 G4160 G2548 G3361 G863
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Pl n vi Impf im-Act 3 Sg vn Aor Act pd Nom Pl n Con Part Neg vn Pres Act
THE BELIEF these it-WAS-BINDING TO-DO AND-those NO TO-FROM-LET
faith these-things and-those-things to-leave
23:24 odhgoi tufloi oi diulizontes ton kwnwpa thn de 24 [Ye] blind guides, which
hodEgoi tuphloi hoi diulizontes ton kOnOpa tEn de
G3595 G5185 G3588 G1368 G3588 G2971 G3588 G1161
strain at a gnat, and swallow a
n_ Voc Pl m a_ Voc Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg f Conj camel.
WAY-LEADers BLIND THE ones-THRU-STRAINING THE MIDGE THE YET
guides ! blind ! ones-straining-out gnat
kamhlon katapinontes
kamElon katapinontes
G2574 G2666
n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
CAMEL DOWN-DRINKING
ones-swallowing
23:25 ouai umin grammateis kai farisaioi upokritai oti kaqarizete to 25 Woe unto you, scribes and
ouai humin grammateis kai pharisaioi hupokritai hoti katharizete to
G3759 G5213 G1122 G2532 G5330 G5273 G3754 G2511 G3588
Inj pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Voc Pl m Conj n_ Voc Pl m n_ Voc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg n make clean the outside of the
WOE to-YOU(p) WRITers AND PHARISEES hypocrites that YE-ARE-cleansING THE cup and of the platter, but
woe ! to-ye scribes ! Pharisees ! hypocrites ! within they are full of extortion
and excess.
exwqen tou pothriou kai ths paroyidos eswqen de
exOthen tou potEriou kai tEs paropsidos esOthen de
G1855 G3588 G4221 G2532 G3588 G3953 G2081 G1161
Adv t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Adv Conj
OUT-PLACE OF-THE DRINK-cup AND OF-THE BESIDE-PROVISION INTO-PLACE YET
outside cup plate inside
gemousin ex arpaghs kai akrasias

gemousin ex harpagEs kai akrasias
G1073 G1537 G724 G2532 G192
vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f
THEY-ARE-beING-REPLETE OUT OF-SNATCHing AND UN-HOLD
they-are-brimming of-rapacity of-incontinence
23:26 farisaie tufle kaqarison prwton to entos tou pothriou kai 26 [Thou] blind Pharisee,
pharisaie tuphle katharison prOton to entos tou potEriou kai
G5330 G5185 G2511 G4412 G3588 G1787 G3588 G4221 G2532
cleanse first that [which is]
n_ Voc Sg m a_ Voc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg Adv t_ Acc Sg n Adv t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Conj within the cup and platter, that
PHARISEE ! BLIND ! cleanse BEFORE-most THE INside OF-THE DRINK-cup AND the outside of them may be
cleanse-you ! first cup clean also.
ths paroyidos ina genhtai kai to ektos autwn kaqaron

tEs paropsidos hina genEtai kai to ektos autOn katharon
G3588 G3953 G2443 G1096 G2532 G3588 G1622 G846 G2513
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg n Adv pp Gen Pl m a_ Nom Sg n
OF-THE BESIDE-PROVISION THAT MAY-BE-BECOMING AND THE OUTside OF-them clean
plate also
23:27 ouai umin grammateis kai farisaioi upokritai oti paromoiazete 27 Woe unto you, scribes and
ouai humin grammateis kai pharisaioi hupokritai hoti paromoiazete
G3759 G5213 G1122 G2532 G5330 G5273 G3754 G3945
Inj pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Voc Pl m Conj n_ Voc Pl m n_ Voc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl are like unto whited
WOE to-YOU(p) WRITers AND PHARISEES hypocrites that YE-ARE-BESIDE-LIKEizING sepulchres, which indeed
woe ! to-ye scribes ! Pharisees ! hypocrites ! ye-are-resembling appear beautiful outward, but
are within full of dead [men's]
tafois kekoniamenois oitines exwqen men fainontai wraioi eswqen bones, and of all uncleanness.
taphois kekoniamenois hoitines exOthen men phainontai hOraioi esOthen
G5028 G2867 G3748 G1855 G3303 G5316 G5611 G2081
n_ Dat Pl m vp Perf Pas Dat Pl m pr Nom Pl m Adv Part vi Pres mid/pas 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m Adv
to-sepulchers HAVING-been-whitewashED WHO-ANY OUT-PLACE INDEED ARE-APPEARING beautiful INTO-PLACE
sepulchers which-any outside inside
Matthew 23
de gemousin ostewn nekrwn kai pashs akaqarsias

de gemousin osteOn nekrOn kai pasEs akatharsias
G1161 G1073 G3747 G3498 G2532 G3956 G167
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl n_ Gen Pl n a_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
YET THEY-ARE-beING-REPLETE OF-BONES OF-DEAD-ones AND OF-EVERY UN-cleanness
they-are-being-crammed of-dead-ones of-all uncleanness
23:28 outws kai umeis exwqen men fainesqe tois anqrwpois dikaioi 28 Even so ye also outwardly
houtOs kai humeis exOthen men phainesthe tois anthrOpois dikaioi
G3779 G2532 G5210 G1855 G3303 G5316 G3588 G444 G1342
appear righteous unto men, but
Adv Conj pp 2 Nom Pl Adv Part vi Pres Pas 2 Pl t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m a_ Nom Pl m within ye are full of hypocrisy
thus AND YOU(p) OUT-PLACE INDEED ARE-APPEARING to-THE humans JUST and iniquity.
also ye outside
eswqen de mestoi este upokrisews kai anomias

esOthen de mestoi este hupokriseOs kai anomias
G2081 G1161 G3324 G2075 G5272 G2532 G458
Adv Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 2 Pl n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f
INTO-PLACE YET DISTENDED YE-ARE OF-hypocrisy AND OF-UN-LAWness
inside lawlessness
23:29 ouai umin grammateis kai farisaioi upokritai oti oikodomeite 29 Woe unto you, scribes and
ouai humin grammateis kai pharisaioi hupokritai hoti oikodomeite
G3759 G5213 G1122 G2532 G5330 G5273 G3754 G3618
Pharisees, hypocrites! because
Inj pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Voc Pl m Conj n_ Voc Pl m n_ Voc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl ye build the tombs of the
WOE to-YOU(p) WRITers AND PHARISEES hypocrites that YE-ARE-HOME-BUILDING prophets, and garnish the
woe ! to-ye scribes ! Pharisees ! hypocrites ! ye-are-building sepulchres of the righteous,
tous tafous twn profhtwn kai kosmeite ta mnhmeia twn

tous taphous tOn prophEtOn kai kosmeite ta mnEmeia tOn
G3588 G5028 G3588 G4396 G2532 G2885 G3588 G3419 G3588
t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Pl m
THE sepulchers OF-THE BEFORE-AVERers AND YE-ARE-SYSTEMING THE memorial-vaults OF-THE
prophets are-adorning tombs
dikaiwn
dikaiOn
G1342
a_ Gen Pl m
JUST
23:30 kai legete ei hmen en tais hmerais twn paterwn hmwn 30 And say, If we had been in
kai legete ei Emen en tais hEmerais tOn paterOn hEmOn
G2532 G3004 G1487 G1510 G1722 G3588 G2250 G3588 G3962 G2257
the days of our fathers, we
Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl Cond vi Impf vxx 1 Pl Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp 1 Gen Pl would not have been partakers
AND YE-ARE-sayING IF WE-WERE IN THE DAYS OF-THE FATHERS OF-US with them in the blood of the
prophets.
ouk an hmen koinwnoi autwn en tw aimati twn profhtwn

ouk an Emen koinOnoi autOn en tO haimati tOn prophEtOn
G3756 G302 G1510 G2844 G846 G1722 G3588 G129 G3588 G4396
Part Neg Part vi Impf vxx 1 Pl a_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
NOT EVER WE-WERE communioners OF-them IN THE BLOOD OF-THE BEFORE-AVERers
participants prophets
23:31 wste martureite eautois oti uioi este twn foneusantwn 31 Wherefore ye be witnesses
hOste martureite heautois hoti huioi este tOn phoneusantOn
G5620 G3140 G1438 G3754 G5207 G2075 G3588 G5407
unto yourselves, that ye are the
Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl pf 3 Dat Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 2 Pl t_ Gen Pl m vp Aor Act Gen Pl m children of them which killed
AS-BESIDES YE-ARE-witnessING to-selves that SONS YE-ARE OF-THE ones-MURDERing the prophets.
so-that ye-are-testifying to-yourselves ones-murdering
tous profhtas
tous prophEtas
G3588 G4396
t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
THE BEFORE-AVERers
prophets
23:32 kai umeis plhrwsate to metron twn paterwn umwn 32 Fill ye up then the measure
kai humeis plErOsate to metron tOn paterOn humOn
G2532 G5210 G4137 G3588 G3358 G3588 G3962 G5216
of your fathers.
Conj pp 2 Nom Pl vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl
AND YOU(p) FILL-YE THE MEASURE OF-THE FATHERS OF-YOU(p)
ye fill-full-ye ! of-ye
23:33 ofeis gennhmata ecidnwn pws fughte apo ths krisews ths 33 [Ye] serpents, [ye]
opheis gennEmata echidnOn pOs phugEte apo tEs kriseOs tEs
G3789 G1081 G2191 G4459 G5343 G575 G3588 G2920 G3588
generation of vipers, how can
n_ Voc Pl m n_ Voc Pl n n_ Gen Pl f Adv Int vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f ye escape the damnation of
serpents products OF-VIPERS how YE-MAY-BE-FLEEING FROM THE JUDGing OF-THE hell?
serpents ! progeny ! how ?
geennhs
geennEs
G1067
n_ Gen Sg f
GEHENNA
Matthew 23
23:34 dia touto idou egw apostellw pros umas profhtas 34 . Wherefore, behold, I send
dia touto idou egO apostellO pros humas prophEtas
G1223 G5124 G2400 G1473 G649 G4314 G5209 G4396
unto you prophets, and wise
Prep pd Acc Sg n vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg Prep pp 2 Acc Pl n_ Acc Pl m men, and scribes: and [some]
THRU this BE-PERCEIVING I AM-commissionING TOWARD YOU(p) BEFORE-AVERers of them ye shall kill and
because-of lo ! am-dispatching ye prophets crucify; and [some] of them
shall ye scourge in your
kai sofous kai grammateis kai ex autwn apokteneite kai synagogues, and persecute
kai sophous kai grammateis kai ex autOn apokteneite kai [them] from city to city:
G2532 G4680 G2532 G1122 G2532 G1537 G846 G615 G2532
Conj a_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl m Conj Prep pp Gen Pl m vi Fut Act 2 Pl Conj
AND WISE-ones AND WRITers AND OUT OF-them YE-SHALL-BE-FROM-KILLING AND
wise-men scribes ye-shall-be-killing
staurwsete kai ex autwn mastigwsete en tais sunagwgais

staurOsete kai ex autOn mastigOsete en tais sunagOgais
G4717 G2532 G1537 G846 G3146 G1722 G3588 G4864
vi Fut Act 2 Pl Conj Prep pp Gen Pl m vi Fut Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f
YE-SHALL-BE-impalING AND OUT OF-them YE-SHALL-BE-scourgING IN THE TOGETHER-LEADS
ye-shall-be-crucifying synagogues
umwn kai diwxete apo polews eis polin

humOn kai diOxete apo poleOs eis polin
G5216 G2532 G1377 G575 G4172 G1519 G4172
pp 2 Gen Pl Conj vi Fut Act 2 Pl Prep n_ Gen Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg f
OF-YOU(p) AND YE-SHALL-BE-CHASING FROM city INTO city
of-ye ye-shall-be-persecuting
23:35 opws elqh ef umas pan aima dikaion ekcunomenon 35 That upon you may come all
hopOs elthE eph humas pan haima dikaion ekchunomenon
G3704 G2064 G1909 G5209 G3956 G129 G1342 G1632
the righteous blood shed upon
Adv vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp 2 Acc Pl a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n the earth, from the blood of
WHICH-how MAY-BE-COMING ON YOU(p) EVERY BLOOD JUST beING-OUT-POURED righteous Abel unto the blood
so-that ye all being-shed of Zacharias son of Barachias,
whom ye slew between the
epi ths ghs apo tou aimatos abel tou dikaiou ews tou temple and the altar.
epi tEs gEs apo tou haimatos abel tou dikaiou heOs tou
G1909 G3588 G1093 G575 G3588 G129 G6 G3588 G1342 G2193 G3588
Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n ni proper t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg n
ON THE LAND FROM THE BLOOD of-ABEL THE JUST TILL OF-THE
earth of-Abel just-one until the
aimatos zacariou uiou baraciou on efoneusate metaxu tou

haimatos zachariou huiou barachiou hon ephoneusate metaxu tou
G129 G2197 G5207 G914 G3739 G5407 G3342 G3588
n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pr Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 2 Pl Adv t_ Gen Sg m
BLOOD OF-ZACHARIAS SON OF-BARACHIAS WHOM YE-MURDER between THE
naou kai tou qusiasthriou

naou kai tou thusiastEriou
G3485 G2532 G3588 G2379
n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
TEMPLE AND THE SACRIFICE-place
altar
23:36 amhn legw umin hxei tauta panta epi thn genean 36 Verily I say unto you, All
amEn legO humin hExei tauta panta epi tEn genean
G281 G3004 G5213 G2240 G5023 G3956 G1909 G3588 G1074
these things shall come upon
Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl vi Fut Act 3 Sg pd Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f this generation.
AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) SHALL-BE-ARRIVING these ALL ON THE generation
verily to-ye these-things
tauthn
tautEn
G3778
pd Acc Sg f
this
23:37 ierousalhm ierousalhm h apokteinousa tous profhtas kai 37 O Jerusalem, Jerusalem,

ierousalEm ierousalEm hE apokteinousa tous prophEtas kai
G2419 G2419 G3588 G615 G3588 G4396 G2532
[thou] that killest the prophets,
ni proper ni proper t_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj and stonest them which are
JERUSALEM JERUSALEM THE one-FROM-KILLING THE BEFORE-AVERers AND sent unto thee, how often
one-killing prophets would I have gathered thy
children together, even as a
liqobolousa tous apestalmenous pros authn posakis hqelhsa hen gathereth her chickens
lithobolousa tous apestalmenous pros autEn posakis EthelEsa under [her] wings, and ye
G3036 G3588 G649 G4314 G846 G4212 G2309
vp Pres Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Pl m vp Perf Pas Acc Pl m Prep pp Acc Sg f Adv vi Aor Act 1 Sg would not!
STONE-CASTING THE ones-HAVING-been-commissionED TOWARD her how-many-times I-WILL
one-pelting-with-stones ones-having-been-dispatched how-many-times ?
episunagagein ta tekna sou on tropon episunagei

episunagagein ta tekna sou hon tropon episunagei
G1996 G3588 G5043 G4675 G3739 G5158 G1996
vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp 2 Gen Sg pr Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
TO-BE-ON-TOGETHER-LEADING THE offspring OF-YOU WHICH manner IS-ON-TOGETHER-LEADING
to-be-assembling children is-assembling
ornis ta nossia eauths upo tas pterugas kai ouk hqelhsate

ornis ta nossia heautEs hupo tas pterugas kai ouk EthelEsate
G3733 G3588 G3556 G1438 G5259 G3588 G4420 G2532 G3756 G2309
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pf 3 Gen Sg f Prep t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Conj Part Neg vi Aor Act 2 Pl
BIRD THE YOUNG OF-self UNDER THE flyers AND NOT YE-WILL
hen brood of-herself wings
23:38 idou afietai umin o oikos umwn erhmos 38 Behold, your house is left
idou aphietai humin ho oikos humOn erEmos
G2400 G863 G5213 G3588 G3624 G5216 G2048
unto you desolate.
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Pres Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl a_ Nom Sg m
BE-PERCEIVING IS-beING-FROM-LET to-YOU(p) THE HOME OF-YOU(p) DESOLATE
lo ! is-being-left to-ye house of-ye
23:39 legw gar umin ou mh me idhte ap arti 39 For I say unto you, Ye shall
legO gar humin ou mE me idEte ap arti
G3004 G1063 G5213 G3756 G3361 G3165 G1492 G575 G737
not see me henceforth, till ye
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl Part Neg Part Neg pp 1 Acc Sg vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep Adv shall say, Blessed [is] he that
I-AM-sayING for to-YOU(p) NOT NO ME YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING FROM at-PRESENT cometh in the name of the
to-ye Lord.
ews an eiphte euloghmenos o ercomenos en onomati

heOs an eipEte eulogEmenos ho erchomenos en onomati
G2193 G302 G2036 G2127 G3588 G2064 G1722 G3686
Conj Part vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg n
TILL EVER YE-MAY-BE-sayING beING-blessED THE One-COMING IN NAME
one-coming
kuriou
kuriou
G2962
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-Master
of-Lord
Matthew 24
24:1 kai exelqwn o ihsous eporeueto apo tou ierou 1 . And Jesus went out, and
kai exelthOn ho iEsous eporeueto apo tou hierou
G2532 G1831 G3588 G2424 G4198 G575 G3588 G2411
departed from the temple: and
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n his disciples came to [him] for
AND OUT-COMING THE JESUS WENT FROM THE SACRED-place to shew him the buildings of
coming-out sanctuary the temple.
kai proshlqon oi maqhtai autou epideixai autw tas oikodomas

kai prosElthon hoi mathEtai autou epideixai autO tas oikodomas
G2532 G4334 G3588 G3101 G846 G1925 G846 G3588 G3619
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m vn Aor Act pp Dat Sg m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f
AND TOWARD-CAME THE LEARNers OF-Him TO-ON-SHOW to-Him THE HOME-BUILDings
approached disciples to-exhibit buildings
tou ierou
tou hierou
G3588 G2411
t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
OF-THE SACRED-place
sanctuary
24:2 o de ihsous eipen autois ou blepete panta tauta 2 And Jesus said unto them,
ho de iEsous eipen autois ou blepete panta tauta
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G846 G3756 G991 G3956 G5023
See ye not all these things?
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Part Neg vi Pres Act 2 Pl a_ Acc Pl n pd Acc Pl n verily I say unto you, There
THE YET JESUS said to-them NOT YE-ARE-lookING ALL these shall not be left here one stone
ye-are-observing upon another, that shall not be
thrown down.
amhn legw umin ou mh afeqh wde liqos epi liqon
amEn legO humin ou mE aphethE hOde lithos epi lithon
G281 G3004 G5213 G3756 G3361 G863 G5602 G3037 G1909 G3037
Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Part Neg Part Neg vs Aor Pas 3 Sg Adv n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg m
AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) NOT NO MAY-BE-BEING-FROM-LET here STONE ON STONE
verily to-ye may-be-being-left
os ou mh kataluqhsetai
hos ou mE kataluthEsetai
G3739 G3756 G3361 G2647
pr Nom Sg m Part Neg Part Neg vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
WHICH NOT NO SHALL-BE-BEING-DOWN-LOOSED
shall-be-being-demolished
24:3 kaqhmenou de autou epi tou orous twn elaiwn 3 And as he sat upon the mount
kathEmenou de autou epi tou orous tOn elaiOn
G2521 G1161 G846 G1909 G3588 G3735 G3588 G1636
of Olives, the disciples came
vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m Conj pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f unto him privately, saying, Tell
OF-sittING YET OF-Him ON THE mountain OF-THE OLIVES us, when shall these things be?
Mount and what [shall be] the sign of
thy coming, and of the end of
proshlqon autw oi maqhtai kat idian legontes eipe the world?
prosElthon autO hoi mathEtai kat idian legontes eipe
G4334 G846 G3588 G3101 G2596 G2398 G3004 G2036
vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Prep a_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
TOWARD-CAME to-Him THE LEARNers according-to OWN sayING BE-sayING
came-to him disciples be-you-telling !
hmin pote tauta estai kai ti to shmeion ths shs

hEmin pote tauta estai kai ti to sEmeion tEs sEs
G2254 G4219 G5023 G2071 G2532 G5101 G3588 G4592 G3588 G4674
pp 1 Dat Pl Part Int pd Nom Pl n vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Conj pi Acc Sg n t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg f ps 2 Gen Sg
to-US ?-when these SHALL-BE AND ANY THE SIGN OF-THE YOUR
us when ? these-things what ?
parousias kai ths sunteleias tou aiwnos

parousias kai tEs sunteleias tou aiOnos
G3952 G2532 G3588 G4930 G3588 G165
n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
BESIDE-BEING AND OF-THE TOGETHER-FINISH OF-THE eon
presence conclusion
24:4 kai apokriqeis o ihsous eipen autois blepete mh 4 . And Jesus answered and
kai apokritheis ho iEsous eipen autois blepete mE
G2532 G611 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G991 G3361
said unto them, Take heed that
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl Part Neg no man deceive you.
AND answerING THE JESUS said to-them BE-lookING NO
be-ye-bewaring !
tis umas planhsh

tis humas planEsE
G5100 G5209 G4105
px Nom Sg m pp 2 Acc Pl vs Aor Act 3 Sg
ANY YOU(p) SHOULD-BE-STRAYING
anyone ye should-be-deceiving
24:5 polloi gar eleusontai epi tw onomati mou legontes 5 For many shall come in my
polloi gar eleusontai epi tO onomati mou legontes
G4183 G1063 G2064 G1909 G3588 G3686 G3450 G3004
name, saying, I am Christ; and
a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Fut midD 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg vp Pres Act Nom Pl m shall deceive many.
MANY for SHALL-BE-COMING ON THE NAME OF-ME sayING
Matthew 24
egw eimi o cristos kai pollous planhsousin

egO eimi ho christos kai pollous planEsousin
G1473 G1510 G3588 G5547 G2532 G4183 G4105
pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 1 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl
I AM THE ANOINTED AND MANY THEY-SHALL-BE-STRAYING
Christ shall-be-deceiving
24:6 mellhsete de akouein polemous kai akoas polemwn 6 And ye shall hear of wars
mellEsete de akouein polemous kai akoas polemOn
G3195 G1161 G191 G4171 G2532 G189 G4171
and rumours of wars: see that
vi Fut Act 2 Pl Conj vn Pres Act n_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Pl m ye be not troubled: for all
YE-SHALL-BE-BEING-ABOUT YET TO-BE-HEARING BATTLES AND HEARings OF-BATTLES [these things] must come to
tidings pass, but the end is not yet.
orate mh qroeisqe dei gar panta genesqai all oupw

horate mE throeisthe dei gar panta genesthai all oupO
G3708 G3361 G2360 G1163 G1063 G3956 G1096 G235 G3768
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Part Neg vm Pres Pas 2 Pl vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg Conj a_ Acc Pl n vn 2Aor midD Conj Adv
BE-SEEING NO BE-beING-ALARMED it-IS-BINDING for ALL TO-BE-BECOMING but NOT-as-yet
be-ye-seeing ! be-ye-being-alarmed ! to-be-occurring
estin to telos
estin to telos
G2076 G3588 G5056
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
IS THE FINISH
consummation
24:7 egerqhsetai gar eqnos epi eqnos kai basileia epi basileian 7 For nation shall rise against
egerthEsetai gar ethnos epi ethnos kai basileia epi basileian
G1453 G1063 G1484 G1909 G1484 G2532 G932 G1909 G932
nation, and kingdom against
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg n Prep n_ Acc Sg n Conj n_ Nom Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg f kingdom: and there shall be
SHALL-BE-BEING-ROUSED for NATION ON NATION AND KINGdom ON KINGdom famines, and pestilences, and
earthquakes, in divers places.
kai esontai limoi kai loimoi kai seismoi kata topous

kai esontai limoi kai loimoi kai seismoi kata topous
G2532 G2071 G3042 G2532 G3061 G2532 G4578 G2596 G5117
Conj vi Fut vxx 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m Prep n_ Acc Pl m
AND SHALL-BE FAMINES AND PESTILENCES AND QUAKings according-to PLACES
there-shall-be earthquakes
24:8 panta de tauta arch wdinwn 8 All these [are] the beginning
panta de tauta archE OdinOn
G3956 G1161 G5023 G746 G5604
of sorrows.
a_ Nom Pl n Conj pd Nom Pl n n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Pl f
ALL YET these ORIGINal OF-travails
beginning of-pangs
24:9 tote paradwsousin umas eis qliyin kai 9 Then shall they deliver you
tote paradOsousin humas eis thlipsin kai
G5119 G3860 G5209 G1519 G2347 G2532
up to be afflicted, and shall kill
Adv vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj you: and ye shall be hated of
then THEY-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING YOU(p) INTO CONSTRICTION AND all nations for my name's sake.
they-shall-be-giving-up ye affliction
apoktenousin umas kai esesqe misoumenoi upo pantwn twn

apoktenousin humas kai esesthe misoumenoi hupo pantOn tOn
G615 G5209 G2532 G2071 G3404 G5259 G3956 G3588
vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Pl Conj vi Fut vxx 2 Pl vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m Prep a_ Gen Pl n t_ Gen Pl n
THEY-SHALL-BE-FROM-KILLING YOU(p) AND YE-SHALL-BE beING-HATED by ALL OF-THE
they-shall-be-killing ye
eqnwn dia to onoma mou

ethnOn dia to onoma mou
G1484 G1223 G3588 G3686 G3450
n_ Gen Pl n Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg
NATIONS THRU THE NAME OF-ME
because-of
24:10 kai tote skandalisqhsontai polloi kai allhlous paradwsousin 10 And then shall many be
kai tote skandalisthEsontai polloi kai allElous paradOsousin
G2532 G5119 G4624 G4183 G2532 G240 G3860
offended, and shall betray one
Conj Adv vi Fut Pas 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m Conj pc Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl another, and shall hate one
AND then SHALL-BE-BEING-SNARED MANY AND one-another THEY-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING another.
they-shall-be-giving-up
kai mishsousin allhlous

kai misEsousin allElous
G2532 G3404 G240
Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl pc Acc Pl m
AND THEY-SHALL-BE-HATING one-another
24:11 kai polloi yeudoprofhtai egerqhsontai kai planhsousin 11 And many false prophets
kai polloi pseudoprophEtai egerthEsontai kai planEsousin
G2532 G4183 G5578 G1453 G2532 G4105
shall rise, and shall deceive
Conj a_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Fut Pas 3 Pl Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl many.
AND MANY FALSE-BEFORE-AVERers SHALL-BE-BEING-ROUSED AND SHALL-BE-STRAYING
false-prophets they-shall-be-deceiving
Matthew 24
pollous
pollous
G4183
a_ Acc Pl m
MANY
24:12 kai dia to plhqunqhnai thn anomian yughsetai h 12 And because iniquity shall
kai dia to plEthunthEnai tEn anomian psugEsetai hE
G2532 G1223 G3588 G4129 G3588 G458 G5594 G3588
abound, the love of many shall
Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Pas t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f wax cold.
AND THRU THE TO-BE-multipliED THE UN-LAWness SHALL-BE-BEING-COOLED THE
because-of lawlessness shall-be-cooling
agaph twn pollwn

agapE tOn pollOn
G26 G3588 G4183
n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
LOVE OF-THE MANY
24:13 o de upomeinas eis telos outos swqhsetai 13 But he that shall endure
G3588 G1161 G5278 G1519 G5056 G3778 G4982
unto the end, the same shall be
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg n pd Nom Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg saved.
THE YET one-UNDER-REMAINing INTO FINISH this-one SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED
one-enduring consummation this-one
24:14 kai khrucqhsetai touto to euaggelion ths basileias 14 And this gospel of the
kai kEruchthEsetai touto to euaggelion tEs basileias
G2532 G2784 G5124 G3588 G2098 G3588 G932
kingdom shall be preached in
Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pd Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f all the world for a witness unto
AND SHALL-BE-BEING-PROCLAIMED this THE WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE KINGdom all nations; and then shall the
shall-be-being-heralded end come.
en olh th oikoumenh eis marturion pasin tois eqnesin kai tote

en holE tE oikoumenE eis marturion pasin tois ethnesin kai tote
G1722 G3650 G3588 G3625 G1519 G3142 G3956 G3588 G1484 G2532 G5119
Prep a_ Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg n a_ Dat Pl n t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n Conj Adv
IN WHOLE THE beING-HOMED INTO witness to-ALL THE NATIONS AND then
inhabited-earth testimony
hxei to telos
hExei to telos
G2240 G3588 G5056
vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
SHALL-BE-ARRIVING THE FINISH
consummation
24:15 otan oun idhte to bdelugma ths erhmwsews to 15 When ye therefore shall see
hotan oun idEte to bdelugma tEs erEmOseOs to
G3752 G3767 G1492 G3588 G946 G3588 G2050 G3588
the abomination of desolation,
Conj Conj vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Acc Sg n spoken of by Daniel the
when-EVER THEN YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE ABOMINATION OF-THE DESOLATing THE prophet, stand in the holy
whenever desolation place, (whoso readeth, let him
understand:)
rhqen dia danihl tou profhtou estws en topw agiw
rEthen dia daniEl tou prophEtou hestOs en topO hagiO
G4483 G1223 G1158 G3588 G4396 G2476 G1722 G5117 G40
vp Aor Pas Acc Sg n Prep ni proper t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Perf Act Acc Sg n Prep n_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m
BEING-declarED THRU DANIEL THE BEFORE-AVERer HAVING-STOOD IN PLACE HOLY
through prophet standing
o anaginwskwn noeitw
ho anaginOskOn noeitO
G3588 G314 G3539
t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 3 Sg
THE one-readING LET-BE-MINDING
one-reading let-him-be-apprehending !
24:16 tote oi en th ioudaia feugetwsan epi ta orh 16 Then let them which be in
tote hoi en tE ioudaia pheugetOsan epi ta orE
G5119 G3588 G1722 G3588 G2449 G5343 G1909 G3588 G3735
Judaea flee into the mountains:
Adv t_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vm Pres Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
then THE-ones IN THE JUDEA LET-BE-FLEEING ON THE mountains
the-ones let-them-be-fleeing !
24:17 o epi tou dwmatos mh katabainetw arai ti 17 Let him which is on the
ho epi tou dOmatos mE katabainetO arai ti
G3588 G1909 G3588 G1430 G3361 G2597 G142 G5100
housetop not come down to
t_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Part Neg vm Pres Act 3 Sg vn Aor Act px Acc Sg n take any thing out of his house:
THE ON THE housetop NO LET-him-BE-DOWN-STEPPING TO-LIFT ANY
the-one let-him-be-descending ! to-take-away anything
ek ths oikias autou

ek tEs oikias autou
G1537 G3588 G3614 G846
Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m
OUT OF-THE HOME OF-him
house
Matthew 24
24:18 kai o en tw agrw mh epistreyatw opisw arai ta 18 Neither let him which is in
kai ho en tO agrO mE epistrepsatO opisO arai ta
G2532 G3588 G1722 G3588 G68 G3361 G1994 G3694 G142 G3588
the field return back to take his
Conj t_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Part Neg vm Aor Act 3 Sg Adv vn Aor Act t_ Acc Pl n clothes.
AND THE IN THE FIELD NO LET-him-ON-TURN BEHIND TO-LIFT THE
the-one let-him-turn-back ! to-pick-up
imatia autou
himatia autou
G2440 G846
n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Sg m
GARMENTS OF-him
24:19 ouai de tais en gastri ecousais kai tais qhlazousais en 19 And woe unto them that are
ouai de tais en gastri echousais kai tais thElazousais en
G3759 G1161 G3588 G1722 G1064 G2192 G2532 G3588 G2337 G1722
with child, and to them that
Inj Conj t_ Dat Pl f Prep n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Dat Pl f Conj t_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Act Dat Pl f Prep give suck in those days!
WOE YET to-THE-ones IN BELLY HAVING AND to-THE-ones sucklING IN
woe ! to-the-ones to-the-ones
ekeinais tais hmerais

ekeinais tais hEmerais
G1565 G3588 G2250
pd Dat Pl f t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f
those THE DAYS
24:20 proseucesqe de ina mh genhtai h fugh umwn 20 But pray ye that your flight
proseuchesthe de hina mE genEtai hE phugE humOn
G4336 G1161 G2443 G3361 G1096 G3588 G5437 G5216
be not in the winter, neither on
vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Conj Conj Part Neg vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl the sabbath day:
BE-YE-prayING YET THAT NO MAY-BE-BECOMING THE FLIGHT OF-YOU(p)
be-ye-praying ! may-be-occurring of-ye
ceimwnos mhde en sabbatw

cheimOnos mEde en sabbatO
G5494 G3366 G1722 G4521
n_ Gen Sg m Conj Prep n_ Dat Sg n
OF-WINTER NO-YET IN SABBATH
nor-yet
24:21 estai gar tote qliyis megalh oia ou gegonen ap 21 For then shall be great
estai gar tote thlipsis megalE hoia ou gegonen ap
G2071 G1063 G5119 G2347 G3173 G3634 G3756 G1096 G575
tribulation, such as was not
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Conj Adv n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f pr Nom Sg f Part Neg vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg Prep since the beginning of the
SHALL-BE for then CONSTRICTION GREAT THE-WHICH NOT HAS-BECOME FROM world to this time, no, nor ever
affliction such-as has-occurred shall be.
archs kosmou ews tou nun oud ou mh genhtai

archEs kosmou heOs tou nun oud ou mE genEtai
G746 G2889 G2193 G3588 G3568 G3761 G3756 G3361 G1096
n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg m Adv Adv Part Neg Part Neg vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
ORIGINal OF-SYSTEM TILL OF-THE NOW NOT-YET NOT NO MAY-BE-BECOMING
beginning of-world the neither may-be-occurring
24:22 kai ei mh ekolobwqhsan ai hmerai ekeinai ouk an eswqh 22 And except those days
kai ei mE ekolobOthEsan hai hEmerai ekeinai ouk an esOthE
G2532 G1487 G3361 G2856 G3588 G2250 G1565 G3756 G302 G4982
should be shortened, there
Conj Cond Part Neg vi Aor Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f pd Nom Pl f Part Neg Part vi Aor Pas 3 Sg should no flesh be saved: but
AND IF NO WERE-LOPPED THE DAYS those NOT EVER WAS-SAVED for the elect's sake those days
were-discounted not shall be shortened.
pasa sarx dia de tous eklektous kolobwqhsontai ai hmerai

pasa sarx dia de tous eklektous kolobOthEsontai hai hEmerai
G3956 G4561 G1223 G1161 G3588 G1588 G2856 G3588 G2250
a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep Conj t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vi Fut Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f
EVERY FLESH THRU YET THE chosen-ones SHALL-BE-BEING-LOPPED THE DAYS
at-all because-of chosen-ones shall-be-being-discounted
ekeinai
ekeinai
G1565
pd Nom Pl f
those
24:23 tote ean tis umin eiph idou wde o cristos 23 Then if any man shall say
tote ean tis humin eipE idou hOde ho christos
G5119 G1437 G5100 G5213 G2036 G2400 G5602 G3588 G5547
unto you, Lo, here [is] Christ,
Adv Cond px Nom Sg m pp 2 Dat Pl vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m or there; believe [it] not.
then IF-EVER ANY to-YOU(p) MAY-BE-sayING BE-PERCEIVING here THE ANOINTED
anyone to-ye lo ! Christ
h wde mh pisteushte
E hOde mE pisteusEte
G2228 G5602 G3361 G4100
Part Adv Part Neg vs Aor Act 2 Pl
OR here NO YE-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING
not ye-should-be-believing-it
Matthew 24
24:24 egerqhsontai gar yeudocristoi kai yeudoprofhtai kai 24 For there shall arise false
egerthEsontai gar pseudochristoi kai pseudoprophEtai kai
G1453 G1063 G5580 G2532 G5578 G2532
Christs, and false prophets,
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl Conj n_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m Conj and shall shew great signs and
SHALL-BE-BEING-ROUSED for FALSE-ANOINTED-ones AND FALSE-BEFORE-AVERers AND wonders; insomuch that, if [it
false-christs false-prophets were] possible, they shall
deceive the very elect.
dwsousin shmeia megala kai terata wste planhsai ei dunaton
dOsousin sEmeia megala kai terata hOste planEsai ei dunaton
G1325 G4592 G3173 G2532 G5059 G5620 G4105 G1487 G1415
vi Fut Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n Conj n_ Acc Pl n Conj vn Aor Act Cond a_ Nom Sg n
THEY-SHALL-BE-GIVING SIGNS GREAT AND MIRACLES AS-BESIDES TO-STRAY IF ABLE
so-as to-deceive possible
kai tous eklektous

kai tous eklektous
G2532 G3588 G1588
Conj t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
AND THE chosen-ones
also chosen-ones
24:25 idou proeirhka umin 25 Behold, I have told you

idou proeirEka humin
G2400 G4280 G5213
before.
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Perf Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
BE-PERCEIVING I-HAVE-BEFORE-declarED to-YOU(p)
lo ! I-have-declared-it-beforehand to-ye
24:26 ean oun eipwsin umin idou en th erhmw estin 26 Wherefore if they shall say
ean oun eipOsin humin idou en tE erEmO estin
G1437 G3767 G2036 G5213 G2400 G1722 G3588 G2048 G2076
unto you, Behold, he is in the
Cond Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp 2 Dat Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg desert; go not forth: behold,
IF-EVER THEN THEY-MAY-BE-sayING to-YOU(p) BE-PERCEIVING IN THE DESOLATE He-IS [he is] in the secret chambers;
to-ye lo ! wilderness believe [it] not.
mh exelqhte idou en tois tameiois mh

mE exelthEte idou en tois tameiois mE
G3361 G1831 G2400 G1722 G3588 G5009 G3361
Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n Part Neg
NO YE-MAY-BE-OUT-COMING BE-PERCEIVING IN THE STOREROOMS NO
not ye-may-be-coming-out lo ! not
pisteushte
pisteusEte
G4100
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
YE-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING
ye-should-be-believing-it
24:27 wsper gar h astraph exercetai apo anatolwn kai 27 For as the lightning cometh
hOsper gar hE astrapE exerchetai apo anatolOn kai
G5618 G1063 G3588 G796 G1831 G575 G395 G2532
out of the east, and shineth
Adv Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep n_ Gen Pl f Conj even unto the west; so shall
AS-EVEN for THE GLEAM-FLING IS-OUT-COMING FROM UP-risings AND also the coming of the Son of
even-as lightning is-coming-out east man be.
fainetai ews dusmwn outws estai kai h parousia tou

phainetai heOs dusmOn houtOs estai kai hE parousia tou
G5316 G2193 G1424 G3779 G2071 G2532 G3588 G3952 G3588
vi Pres mid/pas 3 Sg Conj n_ Gen Pl f Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
IS-APPEARING TILL OF-west thus SHALL-BE AND THE BESIDE-BEING OF-THE
as-far-as west also presence
uiou tou anqrwpou

huiou tou anthrOpou
G5207 G3588 G444
n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
SON OF-THE human
24:28 opou gar ean h to ptwma ekei 28 For wheresoever the carcase
hopou gar ean E to ptOma ekei
G3699 G1063 G1437 G5600 G3588 G4430 G1563
is, there will the eagles be
Adv Conj Cond vs Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Adv gathered together.
THE-?-where for IF-EVER MAY-BE THE corpse there
wherever
sunacqhsontai oi aetoi
sunachthEsontai hoi aetoi
G4863 G3588 G105
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
SHALL-BE-BEING-TOGETHETHER-LED THE VULTURES
shall-be-being-gathered
24:29 euqews de meta thn qliyin twn hmerwn ekeinwn o 29 Immediately after the
eutheOs de meta tEn thlipsin tOn hEmerOn ekeinOn ho
G2112 G1161 G3326 G3588 G2347 G3588 G2250 G1565 G3588
tribulation of those days shall
Adv Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f pd Gen Pl f t_ Nom Sg m the sun be darkened, and the
immediately YET after THE CONSTRICTION OF-THE DAYS those THE moon shall not give her light,
affliction and the stars shall fall from
Matthew 24
heaven, and the powers of the

hlios skotisqhsetai kai h selhnh ou dwsei to heavens shall be shaken:
hElios skotisthEsetai kai hE selEnE ou dOsei to
G2246 G4654 G2532 G3588 G4582 G3756 G1325 G3588
n_ Nom Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Part Neg vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
SUN SHALL-BE-BEING-DARKenED AND THE MOON NOT SHALL-BE-GIVING THE
feggos auths kai oi asteres pesountai apo tou ouranou kai

pheggos autEs kai hoi asteres pesountai apo tou ouranou kai
G5338 G846 G2532 G3588 G792 G4098 G575 G3588 G3772 G2532
n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg f Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Fut midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj
BEAM OF-her AND THE GLEAMers SHALL-BE-FALLING FROM THE heaven AND
stars
ai dunameis twn ouranwn saleuqhsontai

hai dunameis tOn ouranOn saleuthEsontai
G3588 G1411 G3588 G3772 G4531
t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
THE ABILITIES OF-THE heavens SHALL-BE-BEING-SHAKEN
powers
24:30 kai tote fanhsetai to shmeion tou uiou tou 30 And then shall appear the
kai tote phanEsetai to sEmeion tou huiou tou
G2532 G5119 G5316 G3588 G4592 G3588 G5207 G3588
sign of the Son of man in
Conj Adv vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m heaven: and then shall all the
AND then SHALL-BE-APPEARING THE SIGN OF-THE SON OF-THE tribes of the earth mourn, and
they shall see the Son of man
coming in the clouds of heaven
anqrwpou en tw ouranw kai tote koyontai pasai ai with power and great glory.
anthrOpou en tO ouranO kai tote kopsontai pasai hai
G444 G1722 G3588 G3772 G2532 G5119 G2875 G3956 G3588
n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj Adv vi Fut midD 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl f t_ Nom Pl f
human IN THE heaven AND then SHALL-BE-STRIKING ( selves ) ALL THE
shall-be-grieving
fulai ths ghs kai oyontai ton uion tou anqrwpou

phulai tEs gEs kai opsontai ton huion tou anthrOpou
G5443 G3588 G1093 G2532 G3700 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444
n_ Nom Pl f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Fut midD 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
tribes OF-THE LAND AND THEY-SHALL-BE-VIEWING THE SON OF-THE human
they-shall-be-seeing
ercomenon epi twn nefelwn tou ouranou meta dunamews kai

erchomenon epi tOn nephelOn tou ouranou meta dunameOs kai
G2064 G1909 G3588 G3507 G3588 G3772 G3326 G1411 G2532
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg f Conj
COMING ON THE CLOUDS OF-THE heaven WITH ABILITY AND
power
doxhs pollhs
doxEs pollEs
G1391 G4183
n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f
esteem much
glory
24:31 kai apostelei tous aggelous autou meta salpiggos fwnhs 31 And he shall send his angels
kai apostelei tous aggelous autou meta salpiggos phOnEs
G2532 G649 G3588 G32 G846 G3326 G4536 G5456
with a great sound of a
Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f trumpet, and they shall gather
AND He-SHALL-BE-commissionING THE MESSENGERS OF-Him WITH OF-TRUMPET SOUND together his elect from the four
he-shall-be-dispatching winds, from one end of heaven
to the other.
megalhs kai episunaxousin tous eklektous autou ek
megalEs kai episunaxousin tous eklektous autou ek
G3173 G2532 G1996 G3588 G1588 G846 G1537
a_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m Prep
GREAT AND THEY-SHALL-BE-ON-TOGETHER-LEADING THE chosen-ones OF-Him OUT
loud they-shall-be-assembling chosen-ones
twn tessarwn anemwn ap akrwn ouranwn ews akrwn autwn

tOn tessarOn anemOn ap akrOn ouranOn heOs akrOn autOn
G3588 G5064 G417 G575 G206 G3772 G2193 G206 G846
t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Prep n_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl n pp Gen Pl m
OF-THE FOUR WINDS FROM EXTREMITIES OF-heavens TILL EXTREMITIES OF-them
24:32 apo de ths sukhs maqete thn parabolhn otan hdh 32 . Now learn a parable of the
apo de tEs sukEs mathete tEn parabolEn hotan EdE
G575 G1161 G3588 G4808 G3129 G3588 G3850 G3752 G2235
fig tree; When his branch is yet
Prep Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj Adv tender, and putteth forth
FROM YET OF-THE FIG-tree BE-LEARNING THE BESIDE-CAST when-EVER ALREADY leaves, ye know that summer
the be-ye-learning ! parable whenever [is] nigh:
o klados auths genhtai apalos kai ta fulla

ho klados autEs genEtai hapalos kai ta phulla
G3588 G2798 G846 G1096 G527 G2532 G3588 G5444
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg f vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
THE bough OF-her MAY-BE-BECOMING TENDER AND THE leaves
Matthew 24
ekfuh ginwskete oti eggus to qeros

ekphuE ginOskete hoti eggus to theros
G1631 G1097 G3754 G1451 G3588 G2330
vs Pres Act 3 Sg vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Adv t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
MAY-BE-OUT-SPROUTING YE-ARE-KNOWING that NEAR THE WARM
may-be-sprouting-out summer
24:33 outws kai umeis otan idhte panta tauta ginwskete 33 So likewise ye, when ye
houtOs kai humeis hotan idEte panta tauta ginOskete
G3779 G2532 G5210 G3752 G1492 G3956 G5023 G1097
shall see all these things, know
Adv Conj pp 2 Nom Pl Conj vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl a_ Acc Pl n pd Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 2 Pl that it is near, [even] at the
thus AND YOU(p) when-EVER YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING ALL these BE-YE-KNOWING doors.
also ye whenever these-things be-ye-knowing !
oti eggus estin epi qurais

hoti eggus estin epi thurais
G3754 G1451 G2076 G1909 G2374
Conj Adv vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep n_ Dat Pl f
that NEAR He-IS ON DOORS
onat
24:34 amhn legw umin ou mh parelqh h genea 34 Verily I say unto you, This
amEn legO humin ou mE parelthE hE genea
G281 G3004 G5213 G3756 G3361 G3928 G3588 G1074
generation shall not pass, till
Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Part Neg Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f all these things be fulfilled.
AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) NOT NO MAY-BE-BESIDE-COMING THE generation
verily to-ye may-be-passing-by
auth ews an panta tauta genhtai

hautE heOs an panta tauta genEtai
G3778 G2193 G302 G3956 G5023 G1096
pd Nom Sg f Conj Part a_ Nom Pl n pd Nom Pl n vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
this TILL EVER ALL these MAY-BE-BECOMING
these-things may-be-occurring
24:35 o ouranos kai h gh pareleusontai oi de 35 Heaven and earth shall pass

ho ouranos kai hE gE pareleusontai hoi de
G3588 G3772 G2532 G3588 G1093 G3928 G3588 G1161
away, but my words shall not
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vi Fut midD 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m Conj pass away.
THE heaven AND THE LAND SHALL-BE-BESIDE-COMING THE YET
earth shall-be-passing-by
logoi mou ou mh parelqwsin

logoi mou ou mE parelthOsin
G3056 G3450 G3756 G3361 G3928
n_ Nom Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg Part Neg Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
sayings OF-ME NOT NO MAY-BE-BESIDE-COMING
words may-be-passing-by
24:36 peri de ths hmeras ekeinhs kai ths wras oudeis 36 But of that day and hour
peri de tEs hEmeras ekeinEs kai tEs hOras oudeis
G4012 G1161 G3588 G2250 G1565 G2532 G3588 G5610 G3762
knoweth no [man], no, not the
Prep Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f a_ Nom Sg m angels of heaven, but my
ABOUT YET THE DAY that AND THE HOUR NOT-YET-ONE Father only.
concerning no-one
oiden oude oi aggeloi twn ouranwn ei mh o

oiden oude hoi aggeloi tOn ouranOn ei mE ho
G1492 G3761 G3588 G32 G3588 G3772 G1487 G3361 G3588
vi Perf Act 3 Sg Adv t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Cond Part Neg t_ Nom Sg m
HAS-PERCEIVED NOT-YET THE MESSENGERS OF-THE heavens IF NO THE
is-aware neither
pathr mou monos

patEr mou monos
G3962 G3450 G3441
n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg m
FATHER OF-ME ONLY
24:37 wsper de ai hmerai tou nwe outws estai kai h 37 But as the days of Noe
hOsper de hai hEmerai tou nOe houtOs estai kai hE
G5618 G1161 G3588 G2250 G3588 G3575 G3779 G2071 G2532 G3588
[were], so shall also the
Adv Conj t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f t_ Gen Sg m ni proper Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f coming of the Son of man be.
AS-EVEN YET THE DAYS OF-THE NOAH thus SHALL-BE AND THE
even-as also
parousia tou uiou tou anqrwpou

parousia tou huiou tou anthrOpou
G3952 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444
n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
BESIDE-BEING OF-THE SON OF-THE human
presence
24:38 wsper gar hsan en tais hmerais tais pro tou kataklusmou 38 For as in the days that were
hOsper gar Esan en tais hEmerais tais pro tou kataklusmou
G5618 G1063 G2258 G1722 G3588 G2250 G3588 G4253 G3588 G2627
before the flood they were
Adv Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f t_ Dat Pl f Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m eating and drinking, marrying
AS-EVEN for THEY-WERE IN THE DAYS to-THE BEFORE THE DOWN-SURGE and giving in marriage, until
even-as the deluge the day that Noe entered into
Matthew 24
the ark,
trwgontes kai pinontes gamountes kai ekgamizontes acri hs
trOgontes kai pinontes gamountes kai ekgamizontes achri hEs
G5176 G2532 G4095 G1060 G2532 G1547 G891 G3739
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep pr Gen Sg f
CHEWING AND DRINKING MARRYING AND OUT-MARRYizING UNTIL WHICH
masticating giving-in-marriage
hmeras eishlqen nwe eis thn kibwton

hEmeras eisElthen nOe eis tEn kibOton
G2250 G1525 G3575 G1519 G3588 G2787
n_ Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg ni proper Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
DAY INTO-CAME NOAH INTO THE ARK
entered
24:39 kai ouk egnwsan ews hlqen o kataklusmos kai hren 39 And knew not until the
kai ouk egnOsan heOs Elthen ho kataklusmos kai Eren
G2532 G3756 G1097 G2193 G2064 G3588 G2627 G2532 G142
flood came, and took them all
Conj Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg away; so shall also the coming
AND NOT THEY-KNOW TILL CAME THE DOWN-SURGE AND LIFTS of the Son of man be.
deluge takes-away
apantas outws estai kai h parousia tou uiou tou

hapantas houtOs estai kai hE parousia tou huiou tou
G537 G3779 G2071 G2532 G3588 G3952 G3588 G5207 G3588
a_ Acc Pl m Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
ALL(emph.) thus SHALL-BE AND THE BESIDE-BEING OF-THE SON OF-THE
all(emph.)-them also presence
anqrwpou
anthrOpou
G444
n_ Gen Sg m
human
24:40 tote duo esontai en tw agrw o eis 40 Then shall two be in the
tote duo esontai en tO agrO ho heis
G5119 G1417 G2071 G1722 G3588 G68 G3588 G1520
field; the one shall be taken,
Adv a_ Nom vi Fut vxx 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m and the other left.
then TWO SHALL-BE IN THE FIELD THE ONE
paralambanetai kai o eis afietai

paralambanetai kai ho heis aphietai
G3880 G2532 G3588 G1520 G863
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
IS-beING-BESIDE-GOTTEN AND THE ONE IS-beING-FROM-LET
is-being-taken-along is-being-left
24:41 duo alhqousai en tw mulwni mia paralambanetai kai 41 Two [women shall be]
duo alEthousai en tO mulOni mia paralambanetai kai
G1417 G229 G1722 G3588 G3459 G1520 G3880 G2532
grinding at the mill; the one
a_ Nom vp Pres Act Nom Pl f Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m a_ Nom Sg f vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Conj shall be taken, and the other
TWO GRINDING IN THE MILL ONE IS-beING-BESIDE-GOTTEN AND left.
millstone is-being-taken-along
mia afietai
mia aphietai
G1520 G863
a_ Nom Sg f vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
ONE IS-beING-FROM-LET
is-being-left
24:42 grhgoreite oun oti ouk oidate poia wra o 42 Watch therefore: for ye
grEgoreite oun hoti ouk oidate poia hOra ho
G1127 G3767 G3754 G3756 G1492 G4169 G5610 G3588
know not what hour your Lord
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Conj Part Neg vi Perf Act 2 Pl pi Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Nom Sg m doth come.
BE-watchING THEN that NOT YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED ?-THE-WHICH HOUR THE
be-ye-watching ! ye-are-aware which ?
kurios umwn ercetai

kurios humOn erchetai
G2962 G5216 G2064
n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
Master OF-YOU(p) IS-COMING
Lord of-ye
24:43 ekeino de ginwskete oti ei hdei o oikodespoths 43 But know this, that if the
ekeino de ginOskete hoti ei Edei ho oikodespotEs
G1565 G1161 G1097 G3754 G1487 G1492 G3588 G3617
goodman of the house had
pd Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Cond vi Plup Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m known in what watch the thief
that YET BE-YE-KNOWING that IF HAD-PERCEIVED THE HOME-OWNer would come, he would have
be-ye-knowing ! were-aware householder watched, and would not have
suffered his house to be broken
poia fulakh o klepths ercetai egrhgorhsen an kai ouk up.
poia phulakE ho kleptEs erchetai egrEgorEsen an kai ouk
G4169 G5438 G3588 G2812 G2064 G1127 G302 G2532 G3756
pi Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg vi Aor Act 3 Sg Part Conj Part Neg
?-THE-WHICH GUARD THE thief IS-COMING he-watchES EVER AND NOT
which ? watch
Matthew 24
an eiasen diorughnai thn oikian autou

an eiasen diorugEnai tEn oikian autou
G302 G1439 G1358 G3588 G3614 G846
Part vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Pas t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m
EVER LEAVES TO-BE-THRU-EXCAVATED THE HOME OF-him
lets to-be-burrowed house
24:44 dia touto kai umeis ginesqe etoimoi oti h wra 44 Therefore be ye also ready:
dia touto kai humeis ginesthe hetoimoi hoti hE hOra
G1223 G5124 G2532 G5210 G1096 G2092 G3754 G3739 G5610
for in such an hour as ye think
Prep pd Acc Sg n Conj pp 2 Nom Pl vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl a_ Nom Pl m Conj pr Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f not the Son of man cometh.
THRU this AND YOU(p) BE-BECOMING READY that to-WHICH HOUR
because-of also ye be-ye-becoming ! ready-ones
ou dokeite o uios tou anqrwpou ercetai

ou dokeite ho huios tou anthrOpou erchetai
G3756 G1380 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G2064
Part Neg vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
NOT YE-ARE-SEEMING THE SON OF-THE human IS-COMING
ye-are-supposing
24:45 tis ara estin o pistos doulos kai fronimos 45 Who then is a faithful and
tis ara estin ho pistos doulos kai phronimos
G5101 G687 G2076 G3588 G4103 G1401 G2532 G5429
wise servant, whom his lord
pi Nom Sg m Part Int vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m hath made ruler over his
ANY CONSEQUENTLY IS THE BELIEVing SLAVE AND DISPOSED household, to give them meat
who ? faithful prudent in due season?
on katesthsen o kurios autou epi ths qerapeias autou

hon katestEsen ho kurios autou epi tEs therapeias autou
G3739 G2525 G3588 G2962 G846 G1909 G3588 G2322 G846
pr Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m
WHOM DOWN-STANDS THE master OF-him ON THE attendance OF-him
constitutes lord onover
tou didonai autois thn trofhn en kairw

tou didonai autois tEn trophEn en kairO
G3588 G1325 G846 G3588 G5160 G1722 G2540
t_ Gen Sg m vn Pres Act pp Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep n_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE TO-BE-GIVING to-them THE NURTURE IN SEASON
them nourishment
24:46 makarios o doulos ekeinos on elqwn o kurios 46 Blessed [is] that servant,
makarios ho doulos ekeinos hon elthOn ho kurios
G3107 G3588 G1401 G1565 G3739 G2064 G3588 G2962
whom his lord when he cometh
a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m pr Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m shall find so doing.
HAPPY THE SLAVE that WHOM COMING THE master
happy-is lord
autou eurhsei poiounta outws

autou heurEsei poiounta houtOs
G846 G2147 G4160 G3779
pp Gen Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Acc Sg m Adv
OF-him SHALL-BE-FINDING DOING thus
24:47 amhn legw umin oti epi pasin tois uparcousin autou 47 Verily I say unto you, That
amEn legO humin hoti epi pasin tois huparchousin autou
G281 G3004 G5213 G3754 G1909 G3956 G3588 G5224 G846
he shall make him ruler over all
Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Prep a_ Dat Pl n t_ Dat Pl n vp Pres Act Dat Pl n pp Gen Sg m his goods.
AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that ON ALL THE belongINGS OF-him
verily to-ye onover possessions
katasthsei auton
katastEsei auton
G2525 G846
he-SHALL-BE-DOWN-STANDING him
he-shall-be-constituting
24:48 ean de eiph o kakos doulos ekeinos en th 48 But and if that evil servant
ean de eipE ho kakos doulos ekeinos en tE
G1437 G1161 G2036 G3588 G2556 G1401 G1565 G1722 G3588
shall say in his heart, My lord
Cond Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f delayeth his coming;
IF-EVER YET MAY-BE-sayING THE EVIL SLAVE that IN THE
kardia autou cronizei o kurios mou elqein

kardia autou chronizei ho kurios mou elthein
G2588 G846 G5549 G3588 G2962 G3450 G2064
n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg vn 2Aor Act
HEART OF-him IS-delayING THE master OF-ME TO-BE-COMING
lord
24:49 kai arxhtai tuptein tous sundoulous esqiein de kai 49 And shall begin to smite
kai arxEtai tuptein tous sundoulous esthiein de kai
G2532 G756 G5180 G3588 G4889 G2068 G1161 G2532
[his] fellowservants, and to eat
Conj vs Aor Mid 3 Sg vn Pres Act t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vn Pres Act Conj Conj and drink with the drunken;
AND he-SHOULD-BE-beginnING TO-BE-BEATING THE TOGETHER-SLAVES TO-BE-EATING YET AND
should-be-beginning fellow-slaves
pinein meta twn mequontwn

pinein meta tOn methuontOn
G4095 G3326 G3588 G3184
vn Pres Act Prep t_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Gen Pl m
TO-BE-DRINKING WITH THE ones-beING-DRUNK
ones-being-drunk
24:50 hxei o kurios tou doulou ekeinou en hmera 50 The lord of that servant
hExei ho kurios tou doulou ekeinou en hEmera
G2240 G3588 G2962 G3588 G1401 G1565 G1722 G2250
shall come in a day when he
vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg f looketh not for [him], and in an
SHALL-BE-ARRIVING THE master OF-THE SLAVE that IN DAY hour that he is not aware of,
lord
h ou prosdoka kai en wra h ou ginwskei

hE ou prosdoka kai en hOra hE ou ginOskei
G3739 G3756 G4328 G2532 G1722 G5610 G3739 G3756 G1097
pr Dat Sg f Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj Prep n_ Dat Sg f pr Dat Sg f Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to-WHICH NOT he-IS-TOWARD-SEEMING AND IN HOUR to-WHICH NOT he-IS-KNOWING
he-is-hoping which
24:51 kai dicotomhsei auton kai to meros autou meta twn 51 And shall cut him asunder,
kai dichotomEsei auton kai to meros autou meta tOn
G2532 G1371 G846 G2532 G3588 G3313 G846 G3326 G3588
and appoint [him] his portion
Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m with the hypocrites: there shall
AND SHALL-BE-TWO-CUTTING him AND THE PART OF-him WITH THE be weeping and gnashing of
shall-be-cutting-asunder teeth.
upokritwn qhsei ekei estai o klauqmos kai o

hupokritOn thEsei ekei estai ho klauthmos kai ho
G5273 G5087 G1563 G2071 G3588 G2805 G2532 G3588
n_ Gen Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Sg Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m
hypocrites he-SHALL-BE-PLACING there SHALL-BE THE LAMENTing AND THE
shall-be-appointing lamentation
brugmos twn odontwn

brugmos tOn odontOn
G1030 G3588 G3599
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
GNASHing OF-THE TEETH
Matthew 25
25:1 tote omoiwqhsetai h basileia twn ouranwn deka parqenois 1 . Then shall the kingdom of
tote homoiOthEsetai hE basileia tOn ouranOn deka parthenois
G5119 G3666 G3588 G932 G3588 G3772 G1176 G3933
heaven be likened unto ten
Adv vi Fut Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom n_ Dat Pl f virgins, which took their
then SHALL-BE-BEING-LIKenED THE KINGdom OF-THE heavens to-TEN virgins lamps, and went forth to meet
the bridegroom.
aitines labousai tas lampadas autwn exhlqon eis apanthsin tou

haitines labousai tas lampadas autOn exElthon eis apantEsin tou
G3748 G2983 G3588 G2985 G846 G1831 G1519 G529 G3588
pr Nom Pl f vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl f t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
WHO-ANY GETTING THE SHINers OF-them OUT-CAME INTO FROM-meeting OF-THE
who-any torches came-out meeting
numfiou
numphiou
G3566
n_ Gen Sg m
BRIDE-groom
bridegroom
25:2 pente de hsan ex autwn fronimoi kai ai pente mwrai 2 And five of them were wise,
pente de Esan ex autOn phronimoi kai hai pente mOrai
G4002 G1161 G2258 G1537 G846 G5429 G2532 G3588 G4002 G3474
and five [were] foolish.
a_ Nom Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Prep pp Gen Pl f a_ Nom Pl f Conj t_ Nom Pl f a_ Nom a_ Nom Pl f
FIVE YET WERE OUT OF-them DISPOSED AND THE FIVE INSIPID
prudent stupid
25:3 aitines mwrai labousai tas lampadas eautwn ouk elabon meq 3 They that [were] foolish took
haitines mOrai labousai tas lampadas heautOn ouk elabon meth
G3748 G3474 G2983 G3588 G2985 G1438 G3756 G2983 G3326
their lamps, and took no oil
pr Nom Pl f a_ Nom Pl f vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl f t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pf 3 Gen Pl m Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep with them:
WHO-ANY INSIPID GETTING THE SHINers OF-selves NOT THEY-GOT WITH
who-any stupid torches of-themselves
eautwn elaion
heautOn elaion
G1438 G1637
pf 3 Gen Pl m n_ Acc Sg n
selves OLIVE-oil
themselves oil
25:4 ai de fronimoi elabon elaion en tois aggeiois autwn meta 4But the wise took oil in their
hai de phronimoi elabon elaion en tois aggeiois autOn meta
G3588 G1161 G5429 G2983 G1637 G1722 G3588 G30 G846 G3326
vessels with their lamps.
t_ Nom Pl f Conj a_ Nom Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n pp Gen Pl f Prep
THE YET DISPOSED-ones GOT OLIVE-oil IN THE CROCKS OF-them WITH
prudent-ones oil
twn lampadwn autwn

tOn lampadOn autOn
G3588 G2985 G846
t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f pp Gen Pl f
THE SHINers OF-them
torches
25:5 cronizontos de tou numfiou enustaxan pasai kai ekaqeudon 5 While the bridegroom
chronizontos de tou numphiou enustaxan pasai kai ekatheudon
G5549 G1161 G3588 G3566 G3573 G3956 G2532 G2518
tarried, they all slumbered and
vp Pres Act Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl f Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl slept.
OF-delayING YET OF-THE BRIDE-groom THEY-NOD ALL AND THEY-DOWN-LOUNGED
bridegroom drowsed
25:6 meshs de nuktos kraugh gegonen idou o numfios 6 And at midnight there was a
mesEs de nuktos kraugE gegonen idou ho numphios
G3319 G1161 G3571 G2906 G1096 G2400 G3588 G3566
cry made, Behold, the
a_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m bridegroom cometh; go ye out
OF-MIDst YET OF-NIGHT clamor HAS-BECOME BE-PERCEIVING THE BRIDE-groom to meet him.
of-middle has-occurred lo ! bridegroom
ercetai exercesqe eis apanthsin autou

erchetai exerchesthe eis apantEsin autou
G2064 G1831 G1519 G529 G846
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m
IS-COMING BE-YE-OUT-COMING INTO FROM-meeting OF-him
be-ye-coming-out ! meeting
25:7 tote hgerqhsan pasai ai parqenoi ekeinai kai ekosmhsan tas 7 Then all those virgins arose,
tote EgerthEsan pasai hai parthenoi ekeinai kai ekosmEsan tas
G5119 G1453 G3956 G3588 G3933 G1565 G2532 G2885 G3588
and trimmed their lamps.
Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl f t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f pd Nom Pl f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl f
then WERE-ROUSED ALL THE virgins those AND THEY-SYSTEM THE
they-adorn
lampadas autwn
lampadas autOn
G2985 G846
n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Pl f
SHINers OF-them
torches
Matthew 25
25:8 ai de mwrai tais fronimois eipon dote hmin ek 8And the foolish said unto the
hai de mOrai tais phronimois eipon dote hEmin ek
G3588 G1161 G3474 G3588 G5429 G2036 G1325 G2254 G1537
wise, Give us of your oil; for
t_ Nom Pl f Conj a_ Nom Pl f t_ Dat Pl f a_ Dat Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Pl Prep our lamps are gone out.
THE YET INSIPID-ones to-THE DISPOSED-ones said BE-GIVING to-US OUT
stupid-ones prudent-ones be-ye-giving ! us
tou elaiou umwn oti ai lampades hmwn sbennuntai

tou elaiou humOn hoti hai lampades hEmOn sbennuntai
G3588 G1637 G5216 G3754 G3588 G2985 G2257 G4570
t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n pp 2 Gen Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f pp 1 Gen Pl vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
OF-THE OLIVE-oil OF-YOU(p) that THE SHINErs OF-US ARE-beING-EXTINGUISHED
oil of-ye torches are-going-out
25:9 apekriqhsan de ai fronimoi legousai mhpote ouk 9 But the wise answered,
apekrithEsan de hai phronimoi legousai mEpote ouk
G611 G1161 G3588 G5429 G3004 G3379 G3756
saying, [Not so]; lest there be
vi Aor midD 3 Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl f a_ Nom Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Pl f Adv Part Neg not enough for us and you: but
answerED YET THE DISPOSED-ones sayING NO-?-when NOT go ye rather to them that sell,
prudent-ones no-lest-at-some-time and buy for yourselves.
arkesh hmin kai umin poreuesqe de mallon pros tous

arkesE hEmin kai humin poreuesthe de mallon pros tous
G714 G2254 G2532 G5213 G4198 G1161 G3123 G4314 G3588
vs Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl Conj pp 2 Dat Pl vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Conj Adv Prep t_ Acc Pl m
SHOULD-BE-SUFFICING to-US AND to-YOU(p) BE-GOING YET RATHER TOWARD THE
should-be-being-sufficient to-ye be-ye-going !
pwlountas kai agorasate eautais

pOlountas kai agorasate heautais
G4453 G2532 G59 G1438
vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Conj vm Aor Act 2 Pl pf 3 Dat Pl f
ones-SELLING AND BUY to-selves
ones-selling buy-ye ! to-yourselves
25:10 apercomenwn de autwn agorasai hlqen o numfios kai 10 And while they went to buy,
aperchomenOn de autOn agorasai Elthen ho numphios kai
G565 G1161 G846 G59 G2064 G3588 G3566 G2532
the bridegroom came; and they
vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl f Conj pp Gen Pl f vn Aor Act vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj that were ready went in with
OF-FROM-COMING YET OF-them TO-BUY CAME THE BRIDE-groom AND him to the marriage: and the
of-coming-away bridegroom door was shut.
ai etoimoi eishlqon met autou eis tous gamous kai ekleisqh

hai hetoimoi eisElthon met autou eis tous gamous kai ekleisthE
G3588 G2092 G1525 G3326 G846 G1519 G3588 G1062 G2532 G2808
t_ Nom Pl f a_ Nom Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
THE READY-ones INTO-CAME WITH him INTO THE MARRIAGES AND IS-LOCKED
ready-ones entered wedding-festivities
h qura
hE thura
G3588 G2374
t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
THE DOOR
25:11 usteron de ercontai kai ai loipai parqenoi legousai 11 Afterward came also the
husteron de erchontai kai hai loipai parthenoi legousai
G5305 G1161 G2064 G2532 G3588 G3062 G3933 G3004
other virgins, saying, Lord,
Adv Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl f a_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Pl f Lord, open to us.
subsequently YET ARE-COMING AND THE rest virgins sayING
also of-the-virgins
kurie kurie anoixon hmin

kurie kurie anoixon hEmin
G2962 G2962 G455 G2254
n_ Voc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl
master ! master ! UP-OPEN to-US
Lord ! Lord ! open-you !
25:12 o de apokriqeis eipen amhn legw umin ouk 12 But he answered and said,
ho de apokritheis eipen amEn legO humin ouk
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G281 G3004 G5213 G3756
Verily I say unto you, I know
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Part Neg you not.
THE YET answerING he-said AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) NOT
verily to-ye
oida umas
oida humas
G1492 G5209
vi Perf Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED YOU(p)
I-am-acquainted-with ye
25:13 grhgoreite oun oti ouk oidate thn hmeran oude thn 13 Watch therefore, for ye
grEgoreite oun hoti ouk oidate tEn hEmeran oude tEn
G1127 G3767 G3754 G3756 G1492 G3588 G2250 G3761 G3588
know neither the day nor the
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Conj Part Neg vi Perf Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Adv t_ Acc Sg f hour wherein the Son of man
BE-watchING THEN that NOT YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED THE DAY NOT-YET THE cometh.
be-ye-watching ! ye-are-aware-of neither
Matthew 25
wran en h o uios tou anqrwpou ercetai

hOran en hE ho huios tou anthrOpou erchetai
G5610 G1722 G3739 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G2064
n_ Acc Sg f Prep pr Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
HOUR IN WHICH THE SON OF-THE human IS-COMING
25:14 wsper gar anqrwpos apodhmwn ekalesen tous idious doulous kai 14 . For [the kingdom of
hOsper gar anthrOpos apodEmOn ekalesen tous idious doulous kai
G5618 G1063 G444 G589 G2564 G3588 G2398 G1401 G2532
heaven is] as a man travelling
Adv Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj into a far country, [who] called
AS-EVEN for human travelING CALLS THE OWN SLAVES AND his own servants, and delivered
even-as he-calls unto them his goods.
paredwken autois ta uparconta autou

paredOken autois ta huparchonta autou
G3860 G846 G3588 G5224 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Acc Pl n pp Gen Sg m
BESIDE-GIVES to-them THE belongINGS OF-him
gives-over possessions
25:15 kai w men edwken pente talanta w de duo w de 15 And unto one he gave five
kai hO men edOken pente talanta hO de duo hO de
G2532 G3739 G3303 G1325 G4002 G5007 G3739 G1161 G1417 G3739 G1161
talents, to another two, and to
Conj pr Dat Sg m Part vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n pr Dat Sg m Conj a_ Nom pr Dat Sg m Conj another one; to every man
AND to-WHOM INDEED he-GIVES FIVE talents to-WHOM YET TWO to-WHOM YET according to his several ability;
to-whichone to-whichone to-whichone and straightway took his
journey.
en ekastw kata thn idian dunamin kai apedhmhsen euqews
hen hekastO kata tEn idian dunamin kai apedEmEsen eutheOs
G1520 G1538 G2596 G3588 G2398 G1411 G2532 G589 G2112
a_ Acc Sg n a_ Dat Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv
ONE to-EACH according-to THE OWN ABILITY AND travels immediately
he-travels
25:16 poreuqeis de o ta pente talanta labwn eirgasato 16 Then he that had received
poreutheis de ho ta pente talanta labOn eirgasato
G4198 G1161 G3588 G3588 G4002 G5007 G2983 G2038
the five talents went and traded
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl n a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg with the same, and made
BEING-GONE YET THE-one THE FIVE talents GETTING ACTS [them] other five talents.
the-one trades
en autois kai epoihsen alla pente talanta

en autois kai epoiEsen alla pente talanta
G1722 G846 G2532 G4160 G243 G4002 G5007
Prep pp Dat Pl n Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl n a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n
IN them AND makES others FIVE talents
25:17 wsautws kai o ta duo ekerdhsen kai autos alla duo 17 And likewise he that [had
hOsautOs kai ho ta duo ekerdEsen kai autos alla duo
G5615 G2532 G3588 G3588 G1417 G2770 G2532 G846 G243 G1417
received] two, he also gained
Adv Conj t_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl n a_ Nom vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pp Nom Sg m a_ Acc Pl n a_ Nom other two.
AS-SAME-AS AND THE-one THE TWO GAINS AND he others TWO
similarly also the-one also
25:18 o de to en labwn apelqwn wruxen en 18 But he that had received one

ho de to hen labOn apelthOn Oruxen en
G3588 G1161 G3588 G1520 G2983 G565 G3736 G1722
went and digged in the earth,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep and hid his lord's money.
THE-one YET THE ONE GETTING FROM-COMING EXCAVATES IN
the-one coming-away
th gh kai apekruyen to argurion tou kuriou autou

tE gE kai apekrupsen to argurion tou kuriou autou
G3588 G1093 G2532 G613 G3588 G694 G3588 G2962 G846
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m
THE LAND AND FROM-HIDES THE SILVER OF-THE master OF-him
earth conceals lord
25:19 meta de cronon polun ercetai o kurios twn doulwn 19 After a long time the lord of
meta de chronon polun erchetai ho kurios tOn doulOn
G3326 G1161 G5550 G4183 G2064 G3588 G2962 G3588 G1401
those servants cometh, and
Prep Conj n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m reckoneth with them.
after YET TIME much IS-COMING THE master OF-THE SLAVES
lord
ekeinwn kai sunairei met autwn logon

ekeinOn kai sunairei met autOn logon
G1565 G2532 G4868 G3326 G846 G3056
pd Gen Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Pl m n_ Acc Sg m
those AND he-IS-TOGETHER-LIFTING WITH them saying
is-settling account
25:20 kai proselqwn o ta pente talanta labwn 20 And so he that had received
kai proselthOn ho ta pente talanta labOn
G2532 G4334 G3588 G3588 G4002 G5007 G2983
five talents came and brought
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl n a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m other five talents, saying, Lord,
AND TOWARD-COMING THE-one THE FIVE talents GETTING thou deliveredst unto me five
approaching the-one talents: behold, I have gained
Matthew 25
beside them five talents more.

proshnegken alla pente talanta legwn kurie pente talanta
prosEnegken alla pente talanta legOn kurie pente talanta
G4374 G243 G4002 G5007 G3004 G2962 G4002 G5007
vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl n a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Voc Sg m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n
TOWARD-CARRIES others FIVE talents sayING master ! FIVE talents
brings-to-him Lord !
moi paredwkas ide alla pente talanta ekerdhsa ep autois

moi paredOkas ide alla pente talanta ekerdEsa ep autois
G3427 G3860 G1492 G243 G4002 G5007 G2770 G1909 G846
pp 1 Dat Sg vi Aor Act 2 Sg vm Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Acc Pl n a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 1 Sg Prep pp Dat Pl n
to-ME YOU-BESIDE-GIVE BE-PERCEIVING others FIVE talents I-GAIN ON them
you-give-over lo !
25:21 efh de autw o kurios autou eu doule agaqe 21 His lord said unto him, Well
ephE de autO ho kurios autou eu doule agathe
G5346 G1161 G846 G3588 G2962 G846 G2095 G1401 G18
done, [thou] good and faithful
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m Adv n_ Voc Sg m a_ Voc Sg m servant: thou hast been faithful
AVERRed YET to-him THE master OF-him WELL SLAVE ! GOOD ! over a few things, I will make
lord well-done thee ruler over many things:
enter thou into the joy of thy
kai piste epi oliga hs pistos epi pollwn se lord.
kai piste epi oliga Es pistos epi pollOn se
G2532 G4103 G1909 G3641 G2258 G4103 G1909 G4183 G4571
Conj a_ Voc Sg m Prep a_ Acc Pl n vi Impf vxx 2 Sg a_ Nom Sg m Prep a_ Gen Pl n pp 2 Acc Sg
AND BELIEVing ! ON FEW YOU-WERE BELIEVing ON MANY YOU
faithful ! onover faithful onover
katasthsw eiselqe eis thn caran tou kuriou sou

katastEsO eiselthe eis tEn charan tou kuriou sou
G2525 G1525 G1519 G3588 G5479 G3588 G2962 G4675
vi Fut Act 1 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
I-SHALL-BE-DOWN-STANDING BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE JOY OF-THE master OF-YOU
I-shall-be-constituting be-you-entering ! lord
25:22 proselqwn de kai o ta duo talanta labwn 22 He also that had received
proselthOn de kai ho ta duo talanta labOn
G4334 G1161 G2532 G3588 G3588 G1417 G5007 G2983
two talents came and said,
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj Conj t_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl n a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Lord, thou deliveredst unto me
TOWARD-COMING YET AND THE-one THE TWO talents GETTING two talents: behold, I have
approaching also the-one gained two other talents beside
them.
eipen kurie duo talanta moi paredwkas ide alla duo
eipen kurie duo talanta moi paredOkas ide alla duo
G2036 G2962 G1417 G5007 G3427 G3860 G1492 G243 G1417
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Voc Sg m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n pp 1 Dat Sg vi Aor Act 2 Sg vm Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Acc Pl n a_ Nom
said master ! TWO talents to-ME YOU-BESIDE-GIVE BE-PERCEIVING others TWO
Lord ! you-give-over lo !
talanta ekerdhsa ep autois

talanta ekerdEsa ep autois
G5007 G2770 G1909 G846
n_ Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 1 Sg Prep pp Dat Pl n
talents I-GAIN ON them
25:23 efh autw o kurios autou eu doule agaqe kai 23 His lord said unto him, Well
ephE autO ho kurios autou eu doule agathe kai
G5346 G846 G3588 G2962 G846 G2095 G1401 G18 G2532
done, good and faithful
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m Adv n_ Voc Sg m a_ Voc Sg m Conj servant; thou hast been faithful
AVERRed to-him THE master OF-him WELL SLAVE ! GOOD ! AND over a few things, I will make
lord well-done thee ruler over many things:
enter thou into the joy of thy
piste epi oliga hs pistos epi pollwn se lord.
piste epi oliga Es pistos epi pollOn se
G4103 G1909 G3641 G2258 G4103 G1909 G4183 G4571
a_ Voc Sg m Prep a_ Acc Pl n vi Impf vxx 2 Sg a_ Nom Sg m Prep a_ Gen Pl n pp 2 Acc Sg
BELIEVing ! ON FEW YOU-WERE BELIEVing ON MANY YOU
faithful ! onover faithful onover
katasthsw eiselqe eis thn caran tou kuriou sou

katastEsO eiselthe eis tEn charan tou kuriou sou
G2525 G1525 G1519 G3588 G5479 G3588 G2962 G4675
vi Fut Act 1 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
I-SHALL-BE-DOWN-STANDING BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE JOY OF-THE master OF-YOU
I-shall-be-constituting be-you-entering ! lord
25:24 proselqwn de kai o to en talanton eilhfws 24 Then he which had received

proselthOn de kai ho to hen talanton eilEphOs
G4334 G1161 G2532 G3588 G3588 G1520 G5007 G2983
the one talent came and said,
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj Conj t_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vp Perf Act Nom Sg m Lord, I knew thee that thou art
TOWARD-COMING YET AND THE-one THE ONE talent HAVING-GOTTEN an hard man, reaping where
approaching also the-one thou hast not sown, and
gathering where thou hast not
eipen kurie egnwn se oti sklhros ei anqrwpos strawed:
eipen kurie egnOn se hoti sklEros ei anthrOpos
G2036 G2962 G1097 G4571 G3754 G4642 G1488 G444
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Voc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg m
said master ! I-KNEW YOU that HARD YOU-ARE human
Lord !
Matthew 25
qerizwn opou ouk espeiras kai sunagwn oqen ou

therizOn hopou ouk espeiras kai sunagOn hothen ou
G2325 G3699 G3756 G4687 G2532 G4863 G3606 G3756
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Adv Part Neg vi Aor Act 2 Sg Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Adv Part Neg
reapING THE-?-where NOT YOU-SOW AND TOGETHER-LEADING WHICH-PLACE NOT
wheree gathering whence
dieskorpisas
dieskorpisas
G1287
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
YOU-THRU-SCATTER
you-scatter
25:25 kai fobhqeis apelqwn ekruya to talanton sou en 25 And I was afraid, and went
kai phobEtheis apelthOn ekrupsa to talanton sou en
G2532 G5399 G565 G2928 G3588 G5007 G4675 G1722
and hid thy talent in the earth:
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg Prep lo, [there] thou hast [that is]
AND BEING-afraid FROM-COMING I-HIDE THE talent OF-YOU IN thine.
coming-away
th gh ide eceis to son

tE gE ide echeis to son
G3588 G1093 G1492 G2192 G3588 G4674
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vm Aor Act 2 Sg vi Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg n ps 2 Acc Sg
THE LAND BE-PERCEIVING YOU-ARE-HAVING THE YOUR
earth lo ! yours
25:26 apokriqeis de o kurios autou eipen autw ponhre 26 His lord answered and said
apokritheis de ho kurios autou eipen autO ponEre
G611 G1161 G3588 G2962 G846 G2036 G846 G4190
unto him, [Thou] wicked and
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m a_ Voc Sg m slothful servant, thou knewest
answerING YET THE master OF-him said to-him wicked ! that I reap where I sowed not,
lord and gather where I have not
strawed:
doule kai oknhre hdeis oti qerizw opou ouk espeira
doule kai oknEre Edeis hoti therizO hopou ouk espeira
G1401 G2532 G3636 G1492 G3754 G2325 G3699 G3756 G4687
n_ Voc Sg m Conj a_ Voc Sg m vi Plup Act 2 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg Adv Part Neg vi Aor Act 1 Sg
SLAVE ! AND SLOTHful ! YOU-HAD-PERCEIVED that I-AM-reapING THE-?-where NOT I-SOW
you-were-aware wheree
kai sunagw oqen ou dieskorpisa

kai sunagO hothen ou dieskorpisa
G2532 G4863 G3606 G3756 G1287
Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg Adv Part Neg vi Aor Act 1 Sg
AND I-AM-TOGETHER-LEADING WHICH-PLACE NOT I-THRU-SCATTER
I-am-gathering whence I-scatter
25:27 edei oun se balein to argurion mou tois 27 Thou oughtest therefore to
edei oun se balein to argurion mou tois
G1163 G3767 G4571 G906 G3588 G694 G3450 G3588
have put my money to the
vi Impf im-Act 3 Sg Conj pp 2 Acc Sg vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Dat Pl m exchangers, and [then] at my
it-WAS-BINDING THEN YOU TO-BE-CASTING THE SILVER OF-ME to-THE coming I should have received
to-be-depositing mine own with usury.
trapezitais kai elqwn egw ekomisamhn an to emon sun

trapezitais kai elthOn egO ekomisamEn an to emon sun
G5133 G2532 G2064 G1473 G2865 G302 G3588 G1699 G4862
n_ Dat Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp 1 Nom Sg vi Aor Mid 1 Sg Part t_ Acc Sg n ps 1 Acc Sg Prep
bankers AND COMING I am-requitED EVER THE MY TOGETHER
recover mine togetherwith
tokw
tokO
G5110
n_ Dat Sg m
to-BRING-FORTH
interest
25:28 arate oun ap autou to talanton kai dote tw 28 Take therefore the talent
arate oun ap autou to talanton kai dote tO
G142 G3767 G575 G846 G3588 G5007 G2532 G1325 G3588
from him, and give [it] unto
vm Aor Act 2 Pl Conj Prep pp Gen Sg m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Sg m him which hath ten talents.
LIFT-YE THEN FROM him THE talent AND BE-GIVING to-THE
take-away-ye ! be-ye-giving !
econti ta deka talanta

echonti ta deka talanta
G2192 G3588 G1176 G5007
vp Pres Act Dat Sg m t_ Acc Pl n a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n
one-HAVING THE TEN talents
one-having
25:29 tw gar econti panti doqhsetai kai perisseuqhsetai 29 For unto every one that hath
tO gar echonti panti dothEsetai kai perisseuthEsetai
G3588 G1063 G2192 G3956 G1325 G2532 G4052
shall be given, and he shall
t_ Dat Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg have abundance: but from him
to-THE for one-HAVING EVERY SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN AND SHALL-BE-BEING-exceedED that hath not shall be taken
one-having he-shall-be-having-a-superfluity away even that which he hath.
Matthew 25
apo de tou mh econtos kai o ecei arqhsetai

apo de tou mE echontos kai ho echei arthEsetai
G575 G1161 G3588 G3361 G2192 G2532 G3739 G2192 G142
Prep Conj t_ Gen Sg m Part Neg vp Pres Act Gen Sg m Conj pr Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
FROM YET THE-one NO HAVING AND WHICH he-IS-HAVING SHALL-BE-BEING-LIFTED
the-one also shall-be-being-taken-away
ap autou
ap autou
G575 G846
Prep pp Gen Sg m
FROM him
25:30 kai ton acreion doulon ekballete eis to skotos to 30 And cast ye the unprofitable
kai ton achreion doulon ekballete eis to skotos to
G2532 G3588 G888 G1401 G1544 G1519 G3588 G4655 G3588
servant into outer darkness:
Conj t_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg n there shall be weeping and
AND THE UN-USED SLAVE BE-YE-OUT-CASTING INTO THE DARKness THE gnashing of teeth.
useless be-ye-casting-out !
exwteron ekei estai o klauqmos kai o brugmos twn

exOteron ekei estai ho klauthmos kai ho brugmos tOn
G1857 G1563 G2071 G3588 G2805 G2532 G3588 G1030 G3588
a_ Acc Sg n Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m
OUTer there SHALL-BE THE LAMENTing AND THE GNASHing OF-THE
lamentation
odontwn
odontOn
G3599
n_ Gen Pl m
TEETH
25:31 otan de elqh o uios tou anqrwpou en th 31 . When the Son of man shall
hotan de elthE ho huios tou anthrOpou en tE
G3752 G1161 G2064 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G1722 G3588
come in his glory, and all the
Conj Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f holy angels with him, then
when-EVER YET MAY-BE-COMING THE SON OF-THE human IN THE shall he sit upon the throne of
whenever his glory:
doxh autou kai pantes oi agioi aggeloi met autou tote

doxE autou kai pantes hoi hagioi aggeloi met autou tote
G1391 G846 G2532 G3956 G3588 G40 G32 G3326 G846 G5119
n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Prep pp Gen Sg m Adv
esteem OF-Him AND ALL THE HOLY MESSENGERS WITH Him then
glory
kaqisei epi qronou doxhs autou

kathisei epi thronou doxEs autou
G2523 G1909 G2362 G1391 G846
vi Fut Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m
He-SHALL-BE-seatING ON THRONE OF-esteem OF-Him
he-shall-be-being-seated of-glory
25:32 kai sunacqhsetai emprosqen autou panta ta eqnh 32 And before him shall be
kai sunachthEsetai emprosthen autou panta ta ethnE
G2532 G4863 G1715 G846 G3956 G3588 G1484
gathered all nations: and he
Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m a_ Nom Pl n t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n shall separate them one from
AND SHALL-BE-BEING-TOGETHER-LED IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-Him ALL THE NATIONS another, as a shepherd divideth
shall-be-being-gathered in-front-of him [his] sheep from the goats:
kai aforiei autous ap allhlwn wsper o poimhn

kai aphoriei autous ap allElOn hOsper ho poimEn
G2532 G873 G846 G575 G240 G5618 G3588 G4166
Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Prep pc Gen Pl n Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
AND He-SHALL-BE-FROM-definING them FROM one-another AS-EVEN THE SHEPHERD
he-shall-be-severing even-as
aforizei ta probata apo twn erifwn

aphorizei ta probata apo tOn eriphOn
G873 G3588 G4263 G575 G3588 G2056
vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
IS-FROM-definING THE sheep FROM THE KIDS
is-severing sheep(p)
25:33 kai sthsei ta men probata ek dexiwn autou ta de 33 And he shall set the sheep
kai stEsei ta men probata ek dexiOn autou ta de
G2532 G2476 G3588 G3303 G4263 G1537 G1188 G846 G3588 G1161
on his right hand, but the goats
Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n Part n_ Acc Pl n Prep a_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m t_ Acc Pl n Conj on the left.
AND SHALL-BE-STANDING THE INDEED sheep OUT OF-RIGHT OF-Him THE YET
he-shall-be-standing sheep(p) of-right(p)
erifia ex euwnumwn
eriphia ex euOnumOn
G2055 G1537 G2176
n_ Acc Pl n Prep a_ Gen Pl m
KIDS OUT OF-left
of-left(p)
Matthew 25
25:34 tote erei o basileus tois ek dexiwn autou 34 Then shall the King say
tote erei ho basileus tois ek dexiOn autou
G5119 G2046 G3588 G935 G3588 G1537 G1188 G846
unto them on his right hand,
Adv vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Pl n Prep a_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m Come, ye blessed of my Father,
then SHALL-BE-declarING THE KING to-THE-ones OUT OF-RIGHT OF-Him inherit the kingdom prepared
to-the-ones of-right(p) for you from the foundation of
the world:
deute oi euloghmenoi tou patros mou klhronomhsate thn
deute hoi eulogEmenoi tou patros mou klEronomEsate tEn
G1205 G3588 G2127 G3588 G3962 G3450 G2816 G3588
vm txx vxx 2 Pl t_ Nom Pl m vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f
HITHER THE ones-beING-BLESSED OF-THE FATHER OF-ME tenant THE
hither-ye ! ones-being-blessed enjoy-the-allotment-ye-of !
htoimasmenhn umin basileian apo katabolhs kosmou

hEtoimasmenEn humin basileian apo katabolEs kosmou
G2090 G5213 G932 G575 G2602 G2889
vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Acc Sg f Prep n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
HAVING-been-made-READY to-YOU(p) KINGdom FROM DOWN-CASTing OF-SYSTEM
to-ye disruption of-world
25:35 epeinasa gar kai edwkate moi fagein ediyhsa kai epotisate 35 For I was an hungred, and
epeinasa gar kai edOkate moi phagein edipsEsa kai epotisate
G3983 G1063 G2532 G1325 G3427 G5315 G1372 G2532 G4222
ye gave me meat: I was thirsty,
vi Aor Act 1 Sg Conj Conj vi Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg vn 2Aor Act vi Aor Act 1 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 2 Pl and ye gave me drink: I was a
I-HUNGER for AND YE-GIVE to-ME TO-BE-EATING I-THIRST AND YE-DRINKize stranger, and ye took me in:
me ye-give-to-drink
me xenos hmhn kai sunhgagete me

me xenos EmEn kai sunEgagete me
G3165 G3581 G2252 G2532 G4863 G3165
pp 1 Acc Sg a_ Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 1 Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg
ME LODGer I-WAS AND YE-TOGETHER-LED ME
stranger ye-took-in
25:36 gumnos kai periebalete me hsqenhsa kai epeskeyasqe me 36 Naked, and ye clothed me: I
gumnos kai periebalete me EsthenEsa kai epeskepsasthe me
G1131 G2532 G4016 G3165 G770 G2532 G1980 G3165
was sick, and ye visited me: I
a_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg vi Aor Act 1 Sg Conj vi Aor midD 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg was in prison, and ye came
NAKED AND YE-ABOUT-CAST(past) ME I-am-UN-FIRM AND YE-ON-NOTE ME unto me.
ye-clothed I-am-infirm ye-visit
en fulakh hmhn kai hlqete pros me

en phulakE EmEn kai Elthete pros me
G1722 G5438 G2252 G2532 G2064 G4314 G3165
Prep n_ Dat Sg f vi Impf vxx 1 Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep pp 1 Acc Sg
IN GUARD-house I-WAS AND YE-CAME TOWARD ME
jail
25:37 tote apokriqhsontai autw oi dikaioi legontes kurie pote 37 Then shall the righteous
tote apokrithEsontai autO hoi dikaioi legontes kurie pote
G5119 G611 G846 G3588 G1342 G3004 G2962 G4219
answer him, saying, Lord,
Adv vi Fut pasD 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Voc Sg m Part Int when saw we thee an hungred,
then SHALL-BE-answerING to-Him THE JUST sayING Master ! ?-when and fed [thee]? or thirsty, and
him just-ones Lord ! when ? gave [thee] drink?
se eidomen peinwnta kai eqreyamen h diywnta kai

se eidomen peinOnta kai ethrepsamen E dipsOnta kai
G4571 G1492 G3983 G2532 G5142 G2228 G1372 G2532
pp 2 Acc Sg vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl vp Pres Act Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 1 Pl Part vp Pres Act Acc Sg m Conj
YOU WE-PERCEIVED HUNGERING AND WE-NURTURE OR THIRSTING AND
we-nourish
epotisamen
epotisamen
G4222
vi Aor Act 1 Pl
WE-DRINKize
we-give-to-drink
25:38 pote de se eidomen xenon kai sunhgagomen h gumnon kai 38 When saw we thee a
pote de se eidomen xenon kai sunEgagomen E gumnon kai
G4219 G1161 G4571 G1492 G3581 G2532 G4863 G2228 G1131 G2532
stranger, and took [thee] in? or
Part Int Conj pp 2 Acc Sg vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl a_ Acc Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl Part a_ Acc Sg m Conj naked, and clothed [thee]?
?-when YET YOU WE-PERCEIVED LODGer AND WE-TOGETHER-LED OR NAKED AND
when ? stranger we-took-in
periebalomen
periebalomen
G4016
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
WE-ABOUT-CAST(past)
we-clothed
25:39 pote de se eidomen asqenh h en fulakh kai hlqomen 39 Or when saw we thee sick,
pote de se eidomen asthenE E en phulakE kai Elthomen
G4219 G1161 G4571 G1492 G772 G2228 G1722 G5438 G2532 G2064
or in prison, and came unto
Part Int Conj pp 2 Acc Sg vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl a_ Acc Sg m Part Prep n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl thee?
?-when YET YOU WE-PERCEIVED UN-FIRM OR IN GUARD-house AND WE-CAME
when ? infirm jail
Matthew 25
pros se
pros se
G4314 G4571
Prep pp 2 Acc Sg
TOWARD YOU
25:40 kai apokriqeis o basileus erei autois amhn legw 40 And the King shall answer
kai apokritheis ho basileus erei autois amEn legO
G2532 G611 G3588 G935 G2046 G846 G281 G3004
and say unto them, Verily I say
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg unto you, Inasmuch as ye have
AND answerING THE KING SHALL-BE-declarING to-them AMEN I-AM-sayING done [it] unto one of the least
verily of these my brethren, ye have
done [it] unto me.
umin ef oson epoihsate eni toutwn twn adelfwn mou
humin eph hoson epoiEsate heni toutOn tOn adelphOn mou
G5213 G1909 G3745 G4160 G1520 G5130 G3588 G80 G3450
pp 2 Dat Pl Prep pk Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 2 Pl a_ Dat Sg m pd Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg
to-YOU(p) ON as-much-as YE-DO to-ONE OF-these THE brothers OF-ME
to-ye
twn elacistwn emoi epoihsate

tOn elachistOn emoi epoiEsate
G3588 G1646 G1698 G4160
t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m pp 1 Dat Sg vi Aor Act 2 Pl
THE INFERIOR-most to-ME YE-DO
least
25:41 tote erei kai tois ex euwnumwn poreuesqe ap 41 Then shall he say also unto
tote erei kai tois ex euOnumOn poreuesthe ap
G5119 G2046 G2532 G3588 G1537 G2176 G4198 G575
them on the left hand, Depart
Adv vi Fut Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Dat Pl n Prep a_ Gen Pl m vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Prep from me, ye cursed, into
then He-SHALL-BE-declarING AND to-THE OUT OF-left BE-YE-GOING FROM everlasting fire, prepared for
also to-the-ones of-left(p) be-ye-going ! the devil and his angels:
emou oi kathramenoi eis to pur to aiwnion

emou hoi katEramenoi eis to pur to aiOnion
G1700 G3588 G2672 G1519 G3588 G4442 G3588 G166
pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Nom Pl m vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n
ME THE ones-HAVING-been-DOWN-EXECRATED INTO THE FIRE THE eonian
ones-having-been-cursed
to htoimasmenon tw diabolw kai tois aggelois autou

to hEtoimasmenon tO diabolO kai tois aggelois autou
G3588 G2090 G3588 G1228 G2532 G3588 G32 G846
t_ Acc Sg n vp Perf Pas Acc Sg n t_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m Conj t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m
THE HAVING-been-made-READY to-THE THRU-CASTer AND to-THE MESSENGERS OF-him
thing-having-been-made-ready Adversary the
25:42 epeinasa gar kai ouk edwkate moi fagein ediyhsa kai ouk 42 For I was an hungred, and
epeinasa gar kai ouk edOkate moi phagein edipsEsa kai ouk
G3983 G1063 G2532 G3756 G1325 G3427 G5315 G1372 G2532 G3756
ye gave me no meat: I was
vi Aor Act 1 Sg Conj Conj Part Neg vi Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg vn 2Aor Act vi Aor Act 1 Sg Conj Part Neg thirsty, and ye gave me no
I-HUNGER for AND NOT YE-GIVE to-ME TO-BE-EATING I-THIRST AND NOT drink:
me
epotisate me
epotisate me
G4222 G3165
vi Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg
YE-DRINKize ME
ye-give-to-drink
25:43 xenos hmhn kai ou sunhgagete me gumnos kai ou 43 I was a stranger, and ye
xenos EmEn kai ou sunEgagete me gumnos kai ou
G3581 G2252 G2532 G3756 G4863 G3165 G1131 G2532 G3756
took me not in: naked, and ye
a_ Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 1 Sg Conj Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg a_ Nom Sg m Conj Part Neg clothed me not: sick, and in
LODGer I-WAS AND NOT YE-TOGETHER-LED ME NAKED AND NOT prison, and ye visited me not.
stranger ye-took-in
periebalete me asqenhs kai en fulakh kai ouk epeskeyasqe

periebalete me asthenEs kai en phulakE kai ouk epeskepsasthe
G4016 G3165 G772 G2532 G1722 G5438 G2532 G3756 G1980
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg a_ Nom Sg m Conj Prep n_ Dat Sg f Conj Part Neg vi Aor midD 2 Pl
YE-ABOUT-CAST(past) ME UN-FIRM AND IN GUARD-house AND NOT YE-ON-NOTE
ye-clothed infirm jail ye-visit
me
me
G3165
pp 1 Acc Sg
ME
25:44 tote apokriqhsontai autw kai autoi legontes kurie pote 44 Then shall they also answer
tote apokrithEsontai autO kai autoi legontes kurie pote
G5119 G611 G846 G2532 G846 G3004 G2962 G4219
him, saying, Lord, when saw
Adv vi Fut pasD 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Conj pp Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Voc Sg m Part Int we thee an hungred, or athirst,
then SHALL-BE-answerING to-Him AND they sayING Master ! ?-when or a stranger, or naked, or sick,
also Lord ! when ? or in prison, and did not
minister unto thee?

se eidomen peinwnta h diywnta h xenon h gumnon
se eidomen peinOnta E dipsOnta E xenon E gumnon
G4571 G1492 G3983 G2228 G1372 G2228 G3581 G2228 G1131
pp 2 Acc Sg vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl vp Pres Act Acc Sg m Part vp Pres Act Acc Sg m Part a_ Acc Sg m Part a_ Acc Sg m
YOU WE-PERCEIVED HUNGERING OR THIRSTING OR LODGer OR NAKED
stranger
h asqenh h en fulakh kai ou dihkonhsamen soi

E asthenE E en phulakE kai ou diEkonEsamen soi
G2228 G772 G2228 G1722 G5438 G2532 G3756 G1247 G4671
Part a_ Acc Sg m Part Prep n_ Dat Sg f Conj Part Neg vi Aor Act 1 Pl pp 2 Dat Sg
OR UN-FIRM OR IN GUARD-house AND NOT WE-THRU-SERVE to-YOU
infirm jail we-serve you
25:45 tote apokriqhsetai autois legwn amhn legw umin ef 45 Then shall he answer them,
tote apokrithEsetai autois legOn amEn legO humin eph
G5119 G611 G846 G3004 G281 G3004 G5213 G1909
saying, Verily I say unto you,
Adv vi Fut pasD 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Prep Inasmuch as ye did [it] not to
then He-SHALL-BE-answerING to-them sayING AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) ON one of the least of these, ye did
them verily to-ye [it] not to me.
oson ouk epoihsate eni toutwn twn elacistwn oude emoi

hoson ouk epoiEsate heni toutOn tOn elachistOn oude emoi
G3745 G3756 G4160 G1520 G5130 G3588 G1646 G3761 G1698
pk Acc Sg n Part Neg vi Aor Act 2 Pl a_ Dat Sg m pd Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m Adv pp 1 Dat Sg
as-much-as NOT YE-DO to-ONE OF-these THE INFERIOR-most NOT-YET to-ME
least neither
epoihsate
epoiEsate
G4160
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
YE-DO
25:46 kai apeleusontai outoi eis kolasin aiwnion oi de dikaioi 46 And these shall go away
kai apeleusontai houtoi eis kolasin aiOnion hoi de dikaioi
G2532 G565 G3778 G1519 G2851 G166 G3588 G1161 G1342
into everlasting punishment:
Conj vi Fut midD 3 Pl pd Nom Pl m Prep n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f t_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m but the righteous into life
AND SHALL-BE-FROM-COMING these INTO CHASTENing eonian THE YET JUST eternal.
shall-be-coming-away these-ones just-ones
eis zwhn aiwnion

eis zOEn aiOnion
G1519 G2222 G166
Prep n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f
INTO LIFE eonian
Matthew 26
26:1 kai egeneto ote etelesen o ihsous pantas tous logous 1 . And it came to pass, when
kai egeneto hote etelesen ho iEsous pantas tous logous
G2532 G1096 G3753 G5055 G3588 G2424 G3956 G3588 G3056
Jesus had finished all these
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m sayings, he said unto his
AND it-BECAME when FINISHES THE JESUS ALL THE sayings disciples,
it-occurred
toutous eipen tois maqhtais autou

toutous eipen tois mathEtais autou
G5128 G2036 G3588 G3101 G846
pd Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m
these He-said to-THE LEARNers OF-Him
disciples
26:2 oidate oti meta duo hmeras to pasca ginetai kai 2 Ye know that after two days
oidate hoti meta duo hEmeras to pascha ginetai kai
G1492 G3754 G3326 G1417 G2250 G3588 G3957 G1096 G2532
is [the feast of] the passover,
vi Perf Act 2 Pl Conj Prep a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl f t_ Nom Sg n Aramaic vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj and the Son of man is betrayed
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that after TWO DAYS THE PASSOVER IS-BECOMING AND to be crucified.
ye-are-aware
o uios tou anqrwpou paradidotai eis to staurwqhnai

ho huios tou anthrOpou paradidotai eis to staurOthEnai
G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G3860 G1519 G3588 G4717
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Pas
THE SON OF-THE human IS-beING-BESIDE-GIVEN INTO THE TO-BE-impalED
is-being-given-up to-be-crucified
26:3 tote sunhcqhsan oi arciereis kai oi grammateis kai 3 Then assembled together the
tote sunEchthEsan hoi archiereis kai hoi grammateis kai
G5119 G4863 G3588 G749 G2532 G3588 G1122 G2532
chief priests, and the scribes,
Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj and the elders of the people,
then WERE-TOGETHER-LED THE chief-SACRED-ones AND THE WRITers AND unto the palace of the high
were-gathered chief-priests scribes priest, who was called
Caiaphas,
oi presbuteroi tou laou eis thn aulhn tou arcierews
hoi presbuteroi tou laou eis tEn aulEn tou archiereOs
G3588 G4245 G3588 G2992 G1519 G3588 G833 G3588 G749
t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
THE SENIORS OF-THE PEOPLE INTO THE COURT OF-THE chief-SACRED-one
elders courtyard chief-priest
tou legomenou kaiafa

tou legomenou kaiapha
G3588 G3004 G2533
t_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Pas Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
THE beING-said CAIAPHAS
one-being-said
26:4 kai sunebouleusanto ina ton ihsoun krathswsin dolw 4 And consulted that they
kai sunebouleusanto hina ton iEsoun kratEsOsin dolO
G2532 G4823 G2443 G3588 G2424 G2902 G1388
might take Jesus by subtilty,
Conj vi Aor Mid 3 Pl Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vs Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Dat Sg m and kill [him].
AND THEY-TOGETHER-COUNSEL THAT THE JESUS THEY-SHOULD-BE-HOLDING to-FRAUD
they-consult they-should-be-laying-hold-of to-guile
kai apokteinwsin
kai apokteinOsin
G2532 G615
Conj vs Pres Act 3 Pl
AND THEY-MAY-BE-FROM-KILLING
may-be-killing-him
26:5 elegon de mh en th eorth ina mh qorubos genhtai 5 But they said, Not on the
elegon de mE en tE heortE hina mE thorubos genEtai
G3004 G1161 G3361 G1722 G3588 G1859 G2443 G3361 G2351 G1096
feast [day], lest there be an
vi Impf Act 3 Pl Conj Part Neg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj Part Neg n_ Nom Sg m vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg uproar among the people.
THEY-said YET NO IN THE FESTIVAL THAT NO TUMULT MAY-BE-BECOMING
may-be-occurring
en tw law
en tO laO
G1722 G3588 G2992
Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
IN THE PEOPLE
among
26:6 tou de ihsou genomenou en bhqania en oikia simwnos 6 . Now when Jesus was in
tou de iEsou genomenou en bEthania en oikia simOnos
G3588 G1161 G2424 G1096 G1722 G963 G1722 G3614 G4613
Bethany, in the house of Simon
t_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg f Prep n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg m the leper,
OF-THE YET JESUS BECOMING IN BETHANY IN HOME OF-SIMON
coming-to-be house
tou leprou
tou leprou
G3588 G3015
t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m
THE leper
Matthew 26
26:7 proshlqen autw gunh alabastron murou ecousa barutimou 7 There came unto him a
prosElthen autO gunE alabastron murou echousa barutimou
G4334 G846 G1135 G211 G3464 G2192 G927
woman having an alabaster
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg f n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Sg f a_ Gen Sg n box of very precious ointment,
TOWARD-CAME to-Him WOMAN ALABASTER OF-ATTAR HAVING OF-HEAVY-VALUE and poured it on his head, as
came-to him alabaster-vase very-precious he sat [at meat].
kai kateceen epi thn kefalhn autou anakeimenou

kai katecheen epi tEn kephalEn autou anakeimenou
G2532 G2708 G1909 G3588 G2776 G846 G345
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m
AND she-DOWN-POURS ON THE HEAD OF-Him OF-UP-LYING
she-pours-down-it of-lying-back-at-table
26:8 idontes de oi maqhtai autou hganakthsan legontes eis 8 But when his disciples saw
idontes de hoi mathEtai autou EganaktEsan legontes eis
G1492 G1161 G3588 G3101 G846 G23 G3004 G1519
[it], they had indignation,
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep saying, To what purpose [is]
PERCEIVING YET THE LEARNers OF-Him THEY-resent sayING INTO this waste?
perceiving-it disciples resent-it
ti h apwleia auth
ti hE apOleia hautE
G5101 G3588 G684 G3778
pi Acc Sg n t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pd Nom Sg f
ANY THE destruction this
what ?
26:9 hdunato gar touto to muron praqhnai pollou kai 9 For this ointment might have
Edunato gar touto to muron prathEnai pollou kai
G1410 G1063 G5124 G3588 G3464 G4097 G4183 G2532
been sold for much, and given
vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Att Conj pd Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n vn Aor Pas a_ Gen Sg n Conj to the poor.
was-ABLE for this THE ATTAR TO-BE-disposED-of OF-much AND
could
doqhnai ptwcois
dothEnai ptOchois
G1325 G4434
vn Aor Pas a_ Dat Pl m
TO-BE-GIVEN to-POOR
to-poor-ones
26:10 gnous de o ihsous eipen autois ti kopous 10 When Jesus understood [it],
gnous de ho iEsous eipen autois ti kopous
G1097 G1161 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G5101 G2873
he said unto them, Why trouble
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg n n_ Acc Pl m ye the woman? for she hath
KNOWING YET THE JESUS said to-them ANY toils wrought a good work upon me.
knowing-it why ? weariness(p)
parecete th gunaiki ergon gar kalon eirgasato eis eme

parechete tE gunaiki ergon gar kalon eirgasato eis eme
G3930 G3588 G1135 G2041 G1063 G2570 G2038 G1519 G1691
vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f n_ Acc Sg n Conj a_ Acc Sg n vi Aor midD 3 Sg Prep pp 1 Acc Sg
YE-ARE-tenderING to-THE WOMAN ACT for IDEAL she-ACTS INTO ME
ye-are-affording the work she-works
26:11 pantote gar tous ptwcous ecete meq eautwn eme de ou 11 For ye have the poor always
pantote gar tous ptOchous echete meth heautOn eme de ou
G3842 G1063 G3588 G4434 G2192 G3326 G1438 G1691 G1161 G3756
with you; but me ye have not
Adv Conj t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl Prep pf 3 Gen Pl m pp 1 Acc Sg Conj Part Neg always.
always for THE POOR YE-ARE-HAVING WITH selves ME YET NOT
poor-ones yourselves
pantote ecete
pantote echete
G3842 G2192
Adv vi Pres Act 2 Pl
always YE-ARE-HAVING
26:12 balousa gar auth to muron touto epi tou swmatos 12 For in that she hath poured
balousa gar hautE to muron touto epi tou sOmatos
G906 G1063 G846 G3588 G3464 G5124 G1909 G3588 G4983
this ointment on my body, she
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f Conj pp Nom Sg f t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pd Acc Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n did [it] for my burial.
CASTING for this-one THE ATTAR this ON THE BODY
spraying this-one(f)
mou pros to entafiasai me epoihsen

mou pros to entaphiasai me epoiEsen
G3450 G4314 G3588 G1779 G3165 G4160
pp 1 Gen Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Act pp 1 Acc Sg vi Aor Act 3 Sg
OF-ME TOWARD THE TO-IN-sepulcher ME DOES
to-bury she-does
26:13 amhn legw umin opou ean khrucqh to 13 Verily I say unto you,
amEn legO humin hopou ean kEruchthE to
G281 G3004 G5213 G3699 G1437 G2784 G3588
Wheresoever this gospel shall
Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Adv Cond vs Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n be preached in the whole
AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) THE-?-where IF-EVER MAY-BE-BEING-PROCLAIMED THE world, [there] shall also this,
verily to-ye wherever may-be-being-heralded that this woman hath done, be
Matthew 26
told for a memorial of her.

euaggelion touto en olw tw kosmw lalhqhsetai kai o
euaggelion touto en holO tO kosmO lalEthEsetai kai ho
G2098 G5124 G1722 G3650 G3588 G2889 G2980 G2532 G3739
n_ Nom Sg n pd Nom Sg n Prep a_ Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj pr Acc Sg n
WELL-MESSAGE this IN WHOLE THE SYSTEM SHALL-BE-BEING-TALKED AND WHICH
world shall-be-being-spoken also
epoihsen auth eis mnhmosunon auths

epoiEsen autE eis mnEmosunon autEs
G4160 G846 G1519 G3422 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Nom Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg f
DOES this-one INTO REMINDer OF-her
this-one(f) memorial
26:14 tote poreuqeis eis twn dwdeka o legomenos 14 . Then one of the twelve,
tote poreutheis heis tOn dOdeka ho legomenos
G5119 G4198 G1520 G3588 G1427 G3588 G3004
called Judas Iscariot, went unto
Adv vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m the chief priests,
then BEING-GONE ONE OF-THE TWO-TEN THE one-beING-said
twelve one-being-said
ioudas iskariwths pros tous arciereis

ioudas iskariOtEs pros tous archiereis
G2455 G2469 G4314 G3588 G749
n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
JUDAS ISCARIOT TOWARD THE chief-SACRED-ones
chief-priests
26:15 eipen ti qelete moi dounai kagw umin 15 And said [unto them], What
eipen ti thelete moi dounai kagO humin
G2036 G5101 G2309 G3427 G1325 G2504 G5213
will ye give me, and I will
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pi Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg vn 2Aor Act pp 1 Nom Sg Con pp 2 Dat Pl deliver him unto you? And
said ANY YE-ARE-WILLING to-ME TO-GIVE AND-I to-YOU(p) they covenanted with him for
what ? me to-ye thirty pieces of silver.
paradwsw auton oi de esthsan autw triakonta arguria

paradOsO auton hoi de hestEsan autO triakonta arguria
G3860 G846 G3588 G1161 G2476 G846 G5144 G694
vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n
SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING Him THE-ones YET STAND to-him THREE-TY SILVERS
shall-be-giving-up the they-weigh thirty pieces-of-silver
26:16 kai apo tote ezhtei eukairian ina auton paradw 16 And from that time he
kai apo tote ezEtei eukairian hina auton paradO
G2532 G575 G5119 G2212 G2120 G2443 G846 G3860
sought opportunity to betray
Conj Prep Adv vi Impf Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f Conj pp Acc Sg m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg him.
AND FROM then he-SOUGHT WELL-SEASON THAT Him he-MAY-BE-BESIDE-GIVING
opportunity he-may-be-giving-up
26:17 th de prwth twn azumwn proshlqon oi maqhtai 17 . Now the first [day] of the
tE de prOtE tOn azumOn prosElthon hoi mathEtai
G3588 G1161 G4413 G3588 G106 G4334 G3588 G3101
[feast of] unleavened bread the
t_ Dat Sg f Conj a_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl n a_ Gen Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m disciples came to Jesus, saying
to-THE YET BEFORE-most OF-THE UN-FERMENTEDS TOWARD-CAME THE LEARNers unto him, Where wilt thou that
first unleavened-bread(p) approached disciples we prepare for thee to eat the
passover?
tw ihsou legontes autw pou qeleis etoimaswmen
tO iEsou legontes autO pou theleis hetoimasOmen
G3588 G2424 G3004 G846 G4226 G2309 G2090
t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Dat Sg m Part Int vi Pres Act 2 Sg vs Aor Act 1 Pl
to-THE JESUS sayING to-Him ?-where YOU-ARE-WILLING WE-SHOULD-BE-makING-READY
where ?
soi fagein to pasca

soi phagein to pascha
G4671 G5315 G3588 G3957
pp 2 Dat Sg vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n Aramaic
to-YOU TO-BE-EATING THE PASSOVER
26:18 o de eipen upagete eis thn polin pros ton 18 And he said, Go into the
ho de eipen hupagete eis tEn polin pros ton
G3588 G1161 G2036 G5217 G1519 G3588 G4172 G4314 G3588
city to such a man, and say
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg m unto him, The Master saith,
THE YET He-said BE-UNDER-LEADING INTO THE city TOWARD THE My time is at hand; I will keep
be-ye-going-away ! the passover at thy house with
my disciples.
deina kai eipate autw o didaskalos legei o
deina kai eipate autO ho didaskalos legei ho
G1170 G2532 G2036 G846 G3588 G1320 G3004 G3588
a_ Acc Sg m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
SO-AND-SO AND say to-him THE TEACHer IS-sayING THE
say-ye !
kairos mou eggus estin pros se poiw to pasca

kairos mou eggus estin pros se poiO to pascha
G2540 G3450 G1451 G2076 G4314 G4571 G4160 G3588 G3957
n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Adv vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep pp 2 Acc Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg n Aramaic
SEASON OF-ME NEAR IS TOWARD YOU I-AM-DOING THE PASSOVER
appointed-time I-am-doholding
Matthew 26
meta twn maqhtwn mou

meta tOn mathEtOn mou
G3326 G3588 G3101 G3450
Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg
WITH THE LEARNers OF-ME
disciples
26:19 kai epoihsan oi maqhtai ws sunetaxen autois o ihsous 19 And the disciples did as
kai epoiEsan hoi mathEtai hOs sunetaxen autois ho iEsous
G2532 G4160 G3588 G3101 G5613 G4929 G846 G3588 G2424
Jesus had appointed them; and
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m they made ready the passover.
AND DO THE LEARNers AS TOGETHER-SETS to-them THE JESUS
disciples arranges-with them
kai htoimasan to pasca

kai hEtoimasan to pascha
G2532 G2090 G3588 G3957
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n Aramaic
AND THEY-make-READY THE PASSOVER
26:20 oyias de genomenhs anekeito meta twn dwdeka 20 Now when the even was
opsias de genomenEs anekeito meta tOn dOdeka
G3798 G1161 G1096 G345 G3326 G3588 G1427
come, he sat down with the
a_ Gen Sg f Conj vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom twelve.
OF-evening YET BECOMING He-was-UP-LAID WITH THE TWO-TEN
he-was-lying-back-at-table twelve
26:21 kai esqiontwn autwn eipen amhn legw umin oti eis 21 And as they did eat, he said,
kai esthiontOn autOn eipen amEn legO humin hoti heis
G2532 G2068 G846 G2036 G281 G3004 G5213 G3754 G1520
Verily I say unto you, that one
Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj a_ Nom Sg m of you shall betray me.
AND OF-EATING OF-them He-said AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that ONE
verily to-ye
ex umwn paradwsei me
ex humOn paradOsei me
G1537 G5216 G3860 G3165
Prep pp 2 Gen Pl vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg
OUT OF-YOU(p) SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING ME
of-ye shall-be-giving-up
26:22 kai lupoumenoi sfodra hrxanto legein autw ekastos autwn 22 And they were exceeding
kai lupoumenoi sphodra Erxanto legein autO hekastos autOn
G2532 G3076 G4970 G756 G3004 G846 G1538 G846
sorrowful, and began every
Conj vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m Adv vi Aor midD 3 Pl vn Pres Act pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Pl m one of them to say unto him,
AND SORROWING VEHEMENT begin TO-BE-sayING to-Him EACH OF-them Lord, is it I?
ones-sorrowing tremendously they-begin
mhti egw eimi kurie

mEti egO eimi kurie
G3385 G1473 G1510 G2962
Part Int pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 1 Sg n_ Voc Sg m
NO-ANY I AM Master !
not ? Lord !
26:23 o de apokriqeis eipen o embayas met emou 23 And he answered and said,
ho de apokritheis eipen ho embapsas met emou
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G3588 G1686 G3326 G1700
He that dippeth [his] hand with
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep pp 1 Gen Sg me in the dish, the same shall
THE YET answerING He-said THE one-IN-DIPPing WITH ME betray me.
one-dipping-in
en tw trubliw thn ceira outos me paradwsei

en tO trubliO tEn cheira houtos me paradOsei
G1722 G3588 G5165 G3588 G5495 G3778 G3165 G3860
Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pd Nom Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg vi Fut Act 3 Sg
IN THE DISH THE HAND this-one ME SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING
this-one shall-be-giving-up
26:24 o men uios tou anqrwpou upagei kaqws 24 The Son of man goeth as it
ho men huios tou anthrOpou hupagei kathOs
G3588 G3303 G5207 G3588 G444 G5217 G2531
is written of him: but woe unto
t_ Nom Sg m Part n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv that man by whom the Son of
THE INDEED SON OF-THE human IS-UNDER-LEADING according-AS man is betrayed! it had been
is-going-away good for that man if he had not
been born.
gegraptai peri autou ouai de tw anqrwpw ekeinw di ou
gegraptai peri autou ouai de tO anthrOpO ekeinO di hou
G1125 G4012 G846 G3759 G1161 G3588 G444 G1565 G1223 G3739
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m Inj Conj t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pd Dat Sg m Prep pr Gen Sg m
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN ABOUT Him WOE YET to-THE human that THRU WHOM
concerning woe ! through
o uios tou anqrwpou paradidotai kalon hn autw

ho huios tou anthrOpou paradidotai kalon En autO
G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G3860 G2570 G2258 G846
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg n vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
THE SON OF-THE human IS-beING-BESIDE-GIVEN IDEAL it-WAS to-Him
is-being-given-up
Matthew 26
ei ouk egennhqh o anqrwpos ekeinos

ei ouk egennEthE ho anthrOpos ekeinos
G1487 G3756 G1080 G3588 G444 G1565
Cond Part Neg vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m
IF NOT WAS-generatED THE human that
was-born
26:25 apokriqeis de ioudas o paradidous auton eipen mhti 25 Then Judas, which betrayed
apokritheis de ioudas ho paradidous auton eipen mEti
G611 G1161 G2455 G3588 G3860 G846 G2036 G3385
him, answered and said,
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Part Int Master, is it I? He said unto
answerING YET JUDAS THE one-BESIDE-GIVING Him said NO-ANY him, Thou hast said.
one-giving-up not ?
egw eimi rabbi legei autw su eipas

egO eimi rabbi legei autO su eipas
G1473 G1510 G4461 G3004 G846 G4771 G2036
pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 1 Sg Hebrew vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m pp 2 Nom Sg vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
I AM RABBI ! He-IS-sayING to-him YOU say
Rabbi say-it
26:26 esqiontwn de autwn labwn o ihsous ton arton 26 . And as they were eating,
esthiontOn de autOn labOn ho iEsous ton arton
G2068 G1161 G846 G2983 G3588 G2424 G3588 G740
Jesus took bread, and blessed
vp Pres Act Gen Pl m Conj pp Gen Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m [it], and brake [it], and gave
OF-EATING YET OF-them GETTING THE JESUS THE BREAD [it] to the disciples, and said,
taking Take, eat; this is my body.
kai euloghsas eklasen kai edidou tois maqhtais kai eipen

kai eulogEsas eklasen kai edidou tois mathEtais kai eipen
G2532 G2127 G2806 G2532 G1325 G3588 G3101 G2532 G2036
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND blessing He-BREAKS AND GAVE to-THE LEARNers AND said
he-breaks-it disciples
labete fagete touto estin to swma mou

labete phagete touto estin to sOma mou
G2983 G5315 G5124 G2076 G3588 G4983 G3450
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl pd Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg
BE-GETTING BE-EATING this IS THE BODY OF-ME
be-ye-taking ! be-ye-eating !
26:27 kai labwn to pothrion kai eucaristhsas edwken autois 27 And he took the cup, and
kai labOn to potErion kai eucharistEsas edOken autois
G2532 G2983 G3588 G4221 G2532 G2168 G1325 G846
gave thanks, and gave [it] to
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m them, saying, Drink ye all of it;
AND GETTING THE DRINK-cup AND thanking He-GIVES to-them
taking cup giving-thanks he-gives-it
legwn piete ex autou pantes

legOn piete ex autou pantes
G3004 G4095 G1537 G846 G3956
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep pp Gen Sg n a_ Nom Pl m
sayING BE-DRINKING OUT OF-it ALL
be-ye-drinking !
26:28 touto gar estin to aima mou to ths kainhs 28 For this is my blood of the
touto gar estin to haima mou to tEs kainEs
G5124 G1063 G2076 G3588 G129 G3450 G3588 G3588 G2537
new testament, which is shed
pd Nom Sg n Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f for many for the remission of
this for IS THE BLOOD OF-ME THE OF-THE NEW sins.
diaqhkhs to peri pollwn ekcunomenon eis afesin amartiwn

diathEkEs to peri pollOn ekchunomenon eis aphesin hamartiOn
G1242 G3588 G4012 G4183 G1632 G1519 G859 G266
n_ Gen Sg f t_ Nom Sg n Prep a_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n Prep n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Pl f
covenant THE ABOUT MANY beING-OUT-POURED INTO FROM-LETTing OF-misses
concerning being-shed pardon of-sins
26:29 legw de umin oti ou mh piw ap arti ek 29 But I say unto you, I will
legO de humin hoti ou mE piO ap arti ek
G3004 G1161 G5213 G3754 G3756 G3361 G4095 G575 G737 G1537
not drink henceforth of this
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Part Neg Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg Prep Adv Prep fruit of the vine, until that day
I-AM-sayING YET to-YOU(p) that NOT NO I-MAY-BE-DRINKING FROM at-PRESENT OUT when I drink it new with you in
to-ye my Father's kingdom.
toutou tou gennhmatos ths ampelou ews ths hmeras ekeinhs

toutou tou gennEmatos tEs ampelou heOs tEs hEmeras ekeinEs
G5127 G3588 G1081 G3588 G288 G2193 G3588 G2250 G1565
pd Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f
OF-this THE product OF-THE GRAPE-VINE TILL OF-THE DAY that
grapevine the
otan auto pinw meq umwn kainon en th basileia tou

hotan auto pinO meth humOn kainon en tE basileia tou
G3752 G846 G4095 G3326 G5216 G2537 G1722 G3588 G932 G3588
Conj pp Acc Sg n vs Pres Act 1 Sg Prep pp 2 Gen Pl a_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
when-EVER it I-MAY-BE-DRINKING WITH YOU(p) NEW IN THE KINGdom OF-THE
whenever ye
Matthew 26
patros mou
patros mou
G3962 G3450
n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg
FATHER OF-ME
26:30 kai umnhsantes exhlqon eis to oros twn elaiwn 30 And when they had sung an
kai humnEsantes exElthon eis to oros tOn elaiOn
G2532 G5214 G1831 G1519 G3588 G3735 G3588 G1636
hymn, they went out into the
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f mount of Olives.
AND HYMNing THEY-OUT-CAME INTO THE mountain OF-THE OLIVES
singing-a-hymn they-came-out Mount
26:31 tote legei autois o ihsous pantes umeis skandalisqhsesqe 31 . Then saith Jesus unto
tote legei autois ho iEsous pantes humeis skandalisthEsesthe
G5119 G3004 G846 G3588 G2424 G3956 G5210 G4624
them, All ye shall be offended
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Pl m pp 2 Nom Pl vi Fut Pas 2 Pl because of me this night: for it
then IS-sayING to-them THE JESUS ALL YOU(p) SHALL-BE-BEING-SNARED is written, I will smite the
ye shepherd, and the sheep of the
flock shall be scattered abroad.
en emoi en th nukti tauth gegraptai gar pataxw
en emoi en tE nukti tautE gegraptai gar pataxO
G1722 G1698 G1722 G3588 G3571 G3778 G1125 G1063 G3960
Prep pp 1 Dat Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Conj vi Fut Act 1 Sg
IN ME IN THE NIGHT this it-HAS-been-WRITTEN for I-SHALL-BE-SMITING
ton poimena kai diaskorpisqhsetai ta probata ths poimnhs

ton poimena kai diaskorpisthEsetai ta probata tEs poimnEs
G3588 G4166 G2532 G1287 G3588 G4263 G3588 G4167
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
THE SHEPHERD AND SHALL-BE-BEING-THRU-SCATTERED THE sheep OF-THE SHEEP-herd
shall-be-being-scattered sheep(p) flock
26:32 meta de to egerqhnai me proaxw umas eis 32 But after I am risen again, I
meta de to egerthEnai me proaxO humas eis
G3326 G1161 G3588 G1453 G3165 G4254 G5209 G1519
will go before you into Galilee.
Prep Conj t_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Pas pp 1 Acc Sg vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl Prep
after YET THE TO-BE-ROUSED ME I-SHALL-BE-BEFORE-LEADING YOU(p) INTO
I-shall-be-preceding ye
thn galilaian
tEn galilaian
G3588 G1056
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
THE GALILEE
26:33 apokriqeis de o petros eipen autw ei kai pantes 33 Peter answered and said
apokritheis de ho petros eipen autO ei kai pantes
G611 G1161 G3588 G4074 G2036 G846 G1487 G2532 G3956
unto him, Though all [men]
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Cond Conj a_ Nom Pl m shall be offended because of
answerING YET THE Peter said to-Him IF AND ALL thee, [yet] will I never be
offended.
skandalisqhsontai en soi egw oudepote skandalisqhsomai

skandalisthEsontai en soi egO oudepote skandalisthEsomai
G4624 G1722 G4671 G1473 G3763 G4624
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl Prep pp 2 Dat Sg pp 1 Nom Sg Adv vi Fut Pas 1 Sg
SHALL-BE-BEING-SNARED IN YOU I NOT-YET-?-when SHALL-BE-BEING-SNARED
never
26:34 efh autw o ihsous amhn legw soi oti en 34 Jesus said unto him, Verily I
ephE autO ho iEsous amEn legO soi hoti en
G5346 G846 G3588 G2424 G281 G3004 G4671 G3754 G1722
say unto thee, That this night,
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Conj Prep before the cock crow, thou
AVERRed to-him THE JESUS AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU that IN shalt deny me thrice.
verily
tauth th nukti prin alektora fwnhsai tris aparnhsh me

tautE tE nukti prin alektora phOnEsai tris aparnEsE me
G3778 G3588 G3571 G4250 G220 G5455 G5151 G533 G3165
pd Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Adv n_ Acc Sg m vn Aor Act Adv vi Fut midD 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg
this THE NIGHT ERE UN-LAYer TO-SOUND THRice YOU-SHALL-BE-renouncING ME
cock to-crow
26:35 legei autw o petros kan deh me sun 35 Peter said unto him, Though
legei autO ho petros kan deE me sun
G3004 G846 G3588 G4074 G2579 G1163 G3165 G4862
I should die with thee, yet will
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Cond Con vs Pres im-Act 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg Prep I not deny thee. Likewise also
IS-sayING to-Him THE Peter AND-[IF]-EVER MAY-BE-BINDING ME TOGETHER said all the disciples.
and-if-ever it-may-be-binding togetherwith
soi apoqanein ou mh se aparnhsomai omoiws kai pantes

soi apothanein ou mE se aparnEsomai homoiOs kai pantes
G4671 G599 G3756 G3361 G4571 G533 G3668 G2532 G3956
pp 2 Dat Sg vn 2Aor Act Part Neg Part Neg pp 2 Acc Sg vi Fut midD 1 Sg Adv Conj a_ Nom Pl m
to-YOU TO-BE-FROM-DYING NOT NO YOU I-SHALL-BE-renouncING LIKE-AS AND ALL
you to-be-dying likewise also
Matthew 26
oi maqhtai eipon
hoi mathEtai eipon
G3588 G3101 G2036
t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THE LEARNers said
disciples
26:36 tote ercetai met autwn o ihsous eis cwrion 36 . Then cometh Jesus with
tote erchetai met autOn ho iEsous eis chOrion
G5119 G2064 G3326 G846 G3588 G2424 G1519 G5564
them unto a place called
Adv vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg n Gethsemane, and saith unto the
then IS-COMING WITH them THE JESUS INTO freehold disciples, Sit ye here, while I
go and pray yonder.
legomenon geqshmanh kai legei tois maqhtais kaqisate autou ews

legomenon gethsEmanE kai legei tois mathEtais kathisate autou heOs
G3004 G1068 G2532 G3004 G3588 G3101 G2523 G847 G2193
vp Pres Pas Acc Sg n ni proper Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Pl Adv Conj
beING-said GETHSEMANE AND He-IS-sayING to-THE LEARNers BE-seated OF-SAME TILL
disciples be-ye-seated ! here
ou apelqwn proseuxwmai ekei

hou apelthOn proseuxOmai ekei
G3739 G565 G4336 G1563
pr Gen Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vs Aor midD 1 Sg Adv
OF-WHICH FROM-COMING I-SHOULD-BE-prayING there
which coming-away
26:37 kai paralabwn ton petron kai tous duo uious zebedaiou 37 And he took with him Peter
kai paralabOn ton petron kai tous duo huious zebedaiou
G2532 G3880 G3588 G4074 G2532 G3588 G1417 G5207 G2199
and the two sons of Zebedee,
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Sg m and began to be sorrowful and
AND BESIDE-GETTING THE Peter AND THE TWO SONS OF-ZEBEDEE very heavy.
taking-along
hrxato lupeisqai kai adhmonein

Erxato lupeisthai kai adEmonein
G756 G3076 G2532 G85
vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Pas Conj vn Pres Act
He-begins TO-BE-SORROWING AND TO-BE-depressING
to-be-being-sorrowful to-be-being-depressed
26:38 tote legei autois perilupos estin h yuch mou 38 Then saith he unto them,
tote legei autois perilupos estin hE psuchE mou
G5119 G3004 G846 G4036 G2076 G3588 G5590 G3450
My soul is exceeding
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m a_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg sorrowful, even unto death:
then He-IS-sayING to-them ABOUT-SORROWed IS THE soul OF-ME tarry ye here, and watch with
sorrow-stricken me.
ews qanatou meinate wde kai grhgoreite met emou

heOs thanatou meinate hOde kai grEgoreite met emou
G2193 G2288 G3306 G5602 G2532 G1127 G3326 G1700
Conj n_ Gen Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Pl Adv Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
TILL OF-DEATH REMAIN here AND BE-watchING WITH ME
death remain-ye ! be-ye-watching !
26:39 kai proelqwn mikron epesen epi proswpon autou 39 And he went a little further,
kai proelthOn mikron epesen epi prosOpon autou
G2532 G4281 G3397 G4098 G1909 G4383 G846
and fell on his face, and
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m prayed, saying, O my Father, if
AND BEFORE-COMING LITTLE He-FALLS ON face OF-Him it be possible, let this cup pass
coming-forward from me: nevertheless not as I
will, but as thou [wilt].
proseucomenos kai legwn pater mou ei dunaton estin
proseuchomenos kai legOn pater mou ei dunaton estin
G4336 G2532 G3004 G3962 G3450 G1487 G1415 G2076
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Voc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Cond a_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
prayING AND sayING FATHER ! OF-ME IF ABLE it-IS
possible
parelqetw ap emou to pothrion touto plhn ouc ws egw

parelthetO ap emou to potErion touto plEn ouch hOs egO
G3928 G575 G1700 G3588 G4221 G5124 G4133 G3756 G5613 G1473
vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pd Acc Sg n Adv Part Neg Adv pp 1 Nom Sg
LET-BE-BESIDE-COMING FROM ME THE DRINK-cup this MOREly NOT AS I
let-it-be-passing-by ! cup however
qelw all ws su
thelO all hOs su
G2309 G235 G5613 G4771
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj Adv pp 2 Nom Sg
AM-WILLING but AS YOU
26:40 kai ercetai pros tous maqhtas kai euriskei autous 40 And he cometh unto the
kai erchetai pros tous mathEtas kai heuriskei autous
G2532 G2064 G4314 G3588 G3101 G2532 G2147 G846
disciples, and findeth them
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m asleep, and saith unto Peter,
AND He-IS-COMING TOWARD THE LEARNers AND IS-FINDING them What, could ye not watch with
disciples me one hour?
Matthew 26
kaqeudontas kai legei tw petrw outws ouk iscusate mian

katheudontas kai legei tO petrO houtOs ouk ischusate mian
G2518 G2532 G3004 G3588 G4074 G3779 G3756 G2480 G1520
vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Adv Part Neg vi Aor Act 2 Pl a_ Acc Sg f
DOWN-LOUNGING AND He-IS-sayING to-THE Peter thus NOT YE-are-STRONG ONE
drowsing
wran grhgorhsai met emou

hOran grEgorEsai met emou
G5610 G1127 G3326 G1700
n_ Acc Sg f vn Aor Act Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
HOUR TO-watch WITH ME
26:41 grhgoreite kai proseucesqe ina mh eiselqhte eis peirasmon 41 Watch and pray, that ye
grEgoreite kai proseuchesthe hina mE eiselthEte eis peirasmon
G1127 G2532 G4336 G2443 G3361 G1525 G1519 G3986
enter not into temptation: the
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Conj Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg m spirit indeed [is] willing, but
BE-watchING AND BE-prayING THAT NO YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING INTO trial the flesh [is] weak.
be-ye-watching ! be-ye-praying ! ye-may-be-entering
to men pneuma proqumon h de sarx asqenhs

to men pneuma prothumon hE de sarx asthenEs
G3588 G3303 G4151 G4289 G3588 G1161 G4561 G772
t_ Nom Sg n Part n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f
THE INDEED spirit BEFORE-FEEL THE YET FLESH UN-FIRM
eager infirm
26:42 palin ek deuterou apelqwn proshuxato legwn pater 42 He went away again the
palin ek deuterou apelthOn prosEuxato legOn pater
G3825 G1537 G1208 G565 G4336 G3004 G3962
second time, and prayed,
Adv Prep a_ Gen Sg n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Voc Sg m saying, O my Father, if this
AGAIN OUT OF-second FROM-COMING He-prays sayING FATHER ! cup may not pass away from
of-second-time coming-away me, except I drink it, thy will
be done.
mou ei ou dunatai touto to pothrion parelqein
mou ei ou dunatai touto to potErion parelthein
G3450 G1487 G3756 G1410 G5124 G3588 G4221 G3928
pp 1 Gen Sg Cond Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg pd Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n vn 2Aor Act
OF-ME IF NOT IS-ABLE this THE DRINK-cup TO-BE-BESIDE-COMING
can cup to-be-passing-by
ap emou ean mh auto piw genhqhtw to qelhma

ap emou ean mE auto piO genEthEtO to thelEma
G575 G1700 G1437 G3361 G846 G4095 G1096 G3588 G2307
Prep pp 1 Gen Sg Cond Part Neg pp Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg vm Aor pasD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
FROM ME IF-EVER NO it I-MAY-BE-DRINKING LET-BE-BEING-BECOME THE WILL
let-it-be-being-become !
sou
sou
G4675
pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-YOU
26:43 kai elqwn euriskei autous palin kaqeudontas hsan gar 43 And he came and found
kai elthOn heuriskei autous palin katheudontas Esan gar
G2532 G2064 G2147 G846 G3825 G2518 G2258 G1063
them asleep again: for their
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Adv vp Pres Act Acc Pl m vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj eyes were heavy.
AND COMING He-IS-FINDING them AGAIN DOWN-LOUNGING WERE for
drowsing
autwn oi ofqalmoi bebarhmenoi

autOn hoi ophthalmoi bebarEmenoi
G846 G3588 G3788 G916
pp Gen Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m
OF-them THE VIEWers HAVING-been-HEAVIED
eyes
26:44 kai afeis autous apelqwn palin proshuxato ek tritou 44 And he left them, and went
kai apheis autous apelthOn palin prosEuxato ek tritou
G2532 G863 G846 G565 G3825 G4336 G1537 G5154
away again, and prayed the
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Adv vi Aor midD 3 Sg Prep a_ Gen Sg n third time, saying the same
AND FROM-LETTING them FROM-COMING AGAIN He-prays OUT OF-third words.
leaving coming-away of-third-time
ton auton logon eipwn

ton auton logon eipOn
G3588 G846 G3056 G2036
t_ Acc Sg m pp Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
THE SAME saying sayING
word
26:45 tote ercetai pros tous maqhtas autou kai legei autois 45 Then cometh he to his
tote erchetai pros tous mathEtas autou kai legei autois
G5119 G2064 G4314 G3588 G3101 G846 G2532 G3004 G846
disciples, and saith unto them,
Adv vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Sleep on now, and take [your]
then He-IS-COMING TOWARD THE LEARNers OF-Him AND IS-sayING to-them rest: behold, the hour is at
disciples hand, and the Son of man is
Matthew 26
betrayed into the hands of

kaqeudete to loipon kai anapauesqe idou hggiken h sinners.
katheudete to loipon kai anapauesthe idou Eggiken hE
G2518 G3588 G3063 G2532 G373 G2400 G1448 G3588
vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres Mid 2 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
BE-DOWN-LOUNGING THE rest AND BE-UP-CEASING BE-PERCEIVING HAS-NEARED THE
ye-are-drowsing furthermore ye-are-resting lo ! has-drawn-near
wra kai o uios tou anqrwpou paradidotai eis ceiras

hOra kai ho huios tou anthrOpou paradidotai eis cheiras
G5610 G2532 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G3860 G1519 G5495
n_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Pl f
HOUR AND THE SON OF-THE human IS-beING-BESIDE-GIVEN INTO HANDS
is-being-given-up
amartwlwn
hamartOlOn
G268
a_ Gen Pl m
OF-missers
of-sinners
26:46 egeiresqe agwmen idou hggiken o paradidous 46 Rise, let us be going:

egeiresthe agOmen idou Eggiken ho paradidous
G1453 G71 G2400 G1448 G3588 G3860
behold, he is at hand that doth
vm Pres mid/pas 2 Pl vs Pres Act 1 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m betray me.
BE-beING-ROUSED WE-MAY-BE-LEADING BE-PERCEIVING HAS-NEARED THE one-BESIDE-GIVING
be-ye-being-roused ! we-may-be-going lo ! has-drawn-near one-giving-up
me
me
G3165
pp 1 Acc Sg
ME
26:47 kai eti autou lalountos idou ioudas eis twn 47 . And while he yet spake, lo,
kai eti autou lalountos idou ioudas heis tOn
G2532 G2089 G846 G2980 G2400 G2455 G1520 G3588
Judas, one of the twelve, came,
Conj Adv pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m and with him a great multitude
AND STILL OF-Him TALKING BE-PERCEIVING JUDAS ONE OF-THE with swords and staves, from
speaking lo ! the chief priests and elders of
the people.
dwdeka hlqen kai met autou oclos polus meta macairwn kai
dOdeka Elthen kai met autou ochlos polus meta machairOn kai
G1427 G2064 G2532 G3326 G846 G3793 G4183 G3326 G3162 G2532
a_ Nom vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Prep pp Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Gen Pl f Conj
TWO-TEN CAME AND WITH him THRONG MANY WITH swords AND
twelve vast
xulwn apo twn arcierewn kai presbuterwn tou laou

xulOn apo tOn archiereOn kai presbuterOn tou laou
G3586 G575 G3588 G749 G2532 G4245 G3588 G2992
n_ Gen Pl n Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
WOODS FROM THE chief-SACRED-ones AND SENIORS OF-THE PEOPLE
cudgels chief-priests elders
26:48 o de paradidous auton edwken autois shmeion legwn 48 Now he that betrayed him
ho de paradidous auton edOken autois sEmeion legOn
G3588 G1161 G3860 G846 G1325 G846 G4592 G3004
gave them a sign, saying,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Whomsoever I shall kiss, that
THE YET one-BESIDE-GIVING Him GIVES to-them SIGN sayING same is he: hold him fast.
one-giving-up them
on an filhsw autos estin krathsate auton

hon an philEsO autos estin kratEsate auton
G3739 G302 G5368 G846 G2076 G2902 G846
pr Acc Sg m Part vs Aor Act 1 Sg pp Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp Acc Sg m
WHOM EVER I-SHOULD-BE-beING-FOND He it-IS HOLD Him
I-should-be-kissing it-is hold-ye !
26:49 kai euqews proselqwn tw ihsou eipen caire rabbi kai 49 And forthwith he came to
kai eutheOs proselthOn tO iEsou eipen chaire rabbi kai
G2532 G2112 G4334 G3588 G2424 G2036 G5463 G4461 G2532
Jesus, and said, Hail, master;
Conj Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vm Pres Act 2 Sg Hebrew Conj and kissed him.
AND immediately TOWARD-COMING to-THE JESUS he-said BE-JOYING RABBI AND
coming-to the be-you-rejoicing !
katefilhsen auton
katephilEsen auton
G2705 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
he-DOWN-FONDS Him
he-kisses-fondly
26:50 o de ihsous eipen autw etaire ef w 50 And Jesus said unto him,
ho de iEsous eipen autO hetaire eph hO
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G846 G2083 G1909 G3739
Friend, wherefore art thou
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m Prep pr Dat Sg n come? Then came they, and
THE YET JESUS said to-him COMRADE ! ON WHICH laid hands on Jesus, and took
him.
Matthew 26
parei tote proselqontes epebalon tas ceiras epi ton

parei tote proselthontes epebalon tas cheiras epi ton
G3918 G5119 G4334 G1911 G3588 G5495 G1909 G3588
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Prep t_ Acc Sg m
YOU-ARE-BESIDE-BEING then TOWARD-COMING THEY-ON-CAST(past) THE HANDS ON THE
you-are-present approaching they-laid-on
ihsoun kai ekrathsan auton

iEsoun kai ekratEsan auton
G2424 G2532 G2902 G846
n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
JESUS AND THEY-HOLD Him
hold
26:51 kai idou eis twn meta ihsou ekteinas thn ceira 51 And, behold, one of them
kai idou heis tOn meta iEsou ekteinas tEn cheira
G2532 G2400 G1520 G3588 G3326 G2424 G1614 G3588 G5495
which were with Jesus
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m Prep n_ Gen Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f stretched out [his] hand, and
AND BE-PERCEIVING ONE OF-THE-ones WITH JESUS OUT-STRETCHing THE HAND drew his sword, and struck a
lo ! of-the-ones stretching-out servant of the high priest's, and
smote off his ear.
apespasen thn macairan autou kai pataxas ton doulon tou
apespasen tEn machairan autou kai pataxas ton doulon tou
G645 G3588 G3162 G846 G2532 G3960 G3588 G1401 G3588
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
FROM-PULLS THE sword OF-him AND SMITing THE SLAVE OF-THE
pulls
arcierews afeilen autou to wtion

archiereOs apheilen autou to Otion
G749 G851 G846 G3588 G5621
n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
chief-SACRED-one he-FROM-LIFTS OF-him THE EARlobe
chief-priest amputates ear-lobe
26:52 tote legei autw o ihsous apostreyon sou thn 52 Then said Jesus unto him,
tote legei autO ho iEsous apostrepson sou tEn
G5119 G3004 G846 G3588 G2424 G654 G4675 G3588
Put up again thy sword into his
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Acc Sg f place: for all they that take the
then IS-sayING to-him THE JESUS YOU-FROM-TURN OF-YOU THE sword shall perish with the
turn-away-you ! sword.
macairan eis ton topon auths pantes gar oi labontes

machairan eis ton topon autEs pantes gar hoi labontes
G3162 G1519 G3588 G5117 G846 G3956 G1063 G3588 G2983
n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg f a_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
sword INTO THE PLACE OF-her ALL for THE ones-GETTING
ones-taking
macairan en macaira apolountai

machairan en machaira apolountai
G3162 G1722 G3162 G622
n_ Acc Sg f Prep n_ Dat Sg f vi Fut Mid 3 Pl
sword IN sword SHALL-BE-beING-destroyED
shall-be-perishing
26:53 h dokeis oti ou dunamai arti parakalesai ton 53 Thinkest thou that I cannot
E dokeis hoti ou dunamai arti parakalesai ton
G2228 G1380 G3754 G3756 G1410 G737 G3870 G3588
now pray to my Father, and he
Part vi Pres Act 2 Sg Conj Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg Adv vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg m shall presently give me more
OR YOU-ARE-SEEMING that NOT I-AM-ABLE at-PRESENT TO-BESIDE-CALL THE than twelve legions of angels?
you-are-supposing to-entreat
patera mou kai parasthsei moi pleious h dwdeka

patera mou kai parastEsei moi pleious hE dOdeka
G3962 G3450 G2532 G3936 G3427 G4119 G2228 G1427
n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg a_ Acc Pl f Cmp Part a_ Nom
FATHER OF-ME AND He-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-STANDING to-ME MORE OR TWO-TEN
he-shall-be-stationing-beside me than twelve
legewnas aggelwn
legeOnas aggelOn
G3003 G32
n_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
LEGIONS ( Latin ) OF-MESSENGERS
legions
26:54 pws oun plhrwqwsin ai grafai oti outws dei 54 But how then shall the
pOs oun plErOthOsin hai graphai hoti houtOs dei
G4459 G3767 G4137 G3588 G1124 G3754 G3779 G1163
scriptures be fulfilled, that thus
Adv Int Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f Conj Adv vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg it must be?
how THEN MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE WRITings that thus it-IS-BINDING
how ? may-be-being-fulfilled scriptures seeing-that it-must
genesqai
genesthai
G1096
vn 2Aor midD
TO-BE-BECOMING
to-be-occurring
Matthew 26
26:55 en ekeinh th wra eipen o ihsous tois oclois ws 55 In that same hour said Jesus
en ekeinE tE hOra eipen ho iEsous tois ochlois hOs
G1722 G1565 G3588 G5610 G2036 G3588 G2424 G3588 G3793 G5613
to the multitudes, Are ye come
Prep pd Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Adv out as against a thief with
IN that THE HOUR said THE JESUS to-THE THRONGS AS swords and staves for to take
me? I sat daily with you
teaching in the temple, and ye
epi lhsthn exhlqete meta macairwn kai xulwn sullabein me laid no hold on me.
epi lEstEn exElthete meta machairOn kai xulOn sullabein me
G1909 G3027 G1831 G3326 G3162 G2532 G3586 G4815 G3165
Prep n_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep n_ Gen Pl f Conj n_ Gen Pl n vn 2Aor Act pp 1 Acc Sg
ON ROBBER YE-OUT-CAME WITH swords AND WOODS TO-BE-TOGETHER-GETTING ME
ye-came-out cudgels to-be-apprehending
kaq hmeran pros umas ekaqezomhn didaskwn en tw

kath hEmeran pros humas ekathezomEn didaskOn en tO
G2596 G2250 G4314 G5209 G2516 G1321 G1722 G3588
Prep n_ Acc Sg f Prep pp 2 Acc Pl vi Impf midD/pasD 1 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg n
according-to DAY TOWARD YOU(p) I-was-seatED TEACHING IN THE
ierw kai ouk ekrathsate me

hierO kai ouk ekratEsate me
G2411 G2532 G3756 G2902 G3165
n_ Dat Sg n Conj Part Neg vi Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg
SACRED-place AND NOT YE-HOLD ME
sanctuary
26:56 touto de olon gegonen ina plhrwqwsin ai grafai twn 56 But all this was done, that
touto de holon gegonen hina plErOthOsin hai graphai tOn
G5124 G1161 G3650 G1096 G2443 G4137 G3588 G1124 G3588
the scriptures of the prophets
pd Nom Sg n Conj a_ Nom Sg n vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f t_ Gen Pl m might be fulfilled. Then all the
this YET WHOLE HAS-BECOME THAT MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE WRITings OF-THE disciples forsook him, and
has-occurred may-be-being-fulfilled scriptures fled.
profhtwn tote oi maqhtai pantes afentes auton efugon

prophEtOn tote hoi mathEtai pantes aphentes auton ephugon
G4396 G5119 G3588 G3101 G3956 G863 G846 G5343
n_ Gen Pl m Adv t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
BEFORE-AVERers then THE LEARNers ALL FROM-LETTING Him FLED
prophets disciples leaving
26:57 oi de krathsantes ton ihsoun aphgagon pros kaiafan ton 57 . And they that had laid hold
hoi de kratEsantes ton iEsoun apEgagon pros kaiaphan ton
G3588 G1161 G2902 G3588 G2424 G520 G4314 G2533 G3588
on Jesus led [him] away to
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m Caiaphas the high priest, where
THE YET ones-HOLDing THE JESUS FROM-LED TOWARD CAIAPHAS THE the scribes and the elders were
ones-holding led-away-him assembled.
arcierea opou oi grammateis kai oi presbuteroi

archierea hopou hoi grammateis kai hoi presbuteroi
G749 G3699 G3588 G1122 G2532 G3588 G4245
n_ Acc Sg m Adv t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
chief-SACRED-one THE-?-where THE WRITers AND THE SENIORS
chief-priest wheree scribes elders
sunhcqhsan
sunEchthEsan
G4863
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
WERE-TOGETHER-LED
were-gathered
26:58 o de petros hkolouqei autw apo makroqen ews ths aulhs 58 But Peter followed him afar
ho de petros Ekolouthei autO apo makrothen heOs tEs aulEs
G3588 G1161 G4074 G190 G846 G575 G3113 G2193 G3588 G833
off unto the high priest's
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Prep Adv Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f palace, and went in, and sat
THE YET Peter followED to-Him FROM FAR-PLACE TILL OF-THE COURT with the servants, to see the
him afar the courtyard end.
tou arcierews kai eiselqwn esw ekaqhto meta twn

tou archiereOs kai eiselthOn esO ekathEto meta tOn
G3588 G749 G2532 G1525 G2080 G2521 G3326 G3588
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Adv vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE chief-SACRED-one AND INTO-COMING within he-sat WITH THE
chief-priest entering
uphretwn idein to telos

hupEretOn idein to telos
G5257 G1492 G3588 G5056
n_ Gen Pl m vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
subservients TO-BE-PERCEIVING THE FINISH
deputies consummation
26:59 oi de arciereis kai oi presbuteroi kai to sunedrion 59 Now the chief priests, and
hoi de archiereis kai hoi presbuteroi kai to sunedrion
G3588 G1161 G749 G2532 G3588 G4245 G2532 G3588 G4892
elders, and all the council,
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n sought false witness against
THE YET chief-SACRED-ones AND THE SENIORS AND THE Sanhedrin Jesus, to put him to death;
chief-priests elders
Matthew 26
olon ezhtoun yeudomarturian kata tou ihsou opws auton

holon ezEtoun pseudomarturian kata tou iEsou hopOs auton
G3650 G2212 G5577 G2596 G3588 G2424 G3704 G846
a_ Nom Sg n vi Impf Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Adv pp Acc Sg m
WHOLE SOUGHT FALSE-witness DOWN OF-THE JESUS WHICH-how Him
false-testimony against the so-that
qanatwswsin
thanatOsOsin
G2289
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-SHOULD-BE-( causING-to )-DIE
they-should-be-putting-to-death
26:60 kai ouc euron kai pollwn yeudomarturwn proselqontwn ouc 60 But found none: yea, though
kai ouch heuron kai pollOn pseudomarturOn proselthontOn ouch
G2532 G3756 G2147 G2532 G4183 G5575 G4334 G3756
many false witnesses came,
Conj Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj a_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vp 2Aor Act Gen Pl m Part Neg [yet] found they none. At the
AND NOT THEY-FOUND AND OF-MANY FALSE-witnesses TOWARD-COMING NOT last came two false witnesses,
approaching
euron usteron de proselqontes duo yeudomartures

heuron husteron de proselthontes duo pseudomartures
G2147 G5305 G1161 G4334 G1417 G5575
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Adv Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m a_ Nom n_ Nom Pl m
THEY-FOUND subsequently YET TOWARD-COMING TWO FALSE-witnesses
approaching
26:61 eipon outos efh dunamai katalusai ton naon 61 And said, This [fellow]
eipon houtos ephE dunamai katalusai ton naon
G2036 G3778 G5346 G1410 G2647 G3588 G3485
said, I am able to destroy the
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pd Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m temple of God, and to build it
said this-One AVERRed I-AM-ABLE TO-DOWN-LOOSE THE TEMPLE in three days.
this-one to-demolish
tou qeou kai dia triwn hmerwn oikodomhsai auton

tou theou kai dia triOn hEmerOn oikodomEsai auton
G3588 G2316 G2532 G1223 G5140 G2250 G3618 G846
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj Prep a_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f vn Aor Act pp Acc Sg m
OF-THE God AND THRU THREE DAYS TO-HOME-BUILD SAME
during to-build him it
26:62 kai anastas o arciereus eipen autw ouden 62 And the high priest arose,
kai anastas ho archiereus eipen autO ouden
G2532 G450 G3588 G749 G2036 G846 G3762
and said unto him, Answerest
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m a_ Acc Sg n thou nothing? what [is it
AND UP-STANDing THE chief-SACRED-one said to-Him NOT-YET-ONE which] these witness against
rising chief-priest nothing thee?
apokrinh ti outoi sou katamarturousin

apokrinE ti houtoi sou katamarturousin
G611 G5101 G3778 G4675 G2649
vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg pi Acc Sg n pd Nom Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg vi Pres Act 3 Pl
YOU-ARE-answerING ANY these OF-YOU ARE-DOWN-witnessING
what ? you are-testifying-against
26:63 o de ihsous esiwpa kai apokriqeis o arciereus 63 But Jesus held his peace.
ho de iEsous esiOpa kai apokritheis ho archiereus
G3588 G1161 G2424 G4623 G2532 G611 G3588 G749
And the high priest answered
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m and said unto him, I adjure
THE YET JESUS WAS-SILENT AND answerING THE chief-SACRED-one thee by the living God, that
chief-priest thou tell us whether thou be the
Christ, the Son of God.
eipen autw exorkizw se kata tou qeou tou
eipen autO exorkizO se kata tou theou tou
G2036 G846 G1844 G4571 G2596 G3588 G2316 G3588
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
said to-Him I-AM-OUT-OATHizING YOU DOWN OF-THE God THE
I-am-exorcising in-accord-with the
zwntos ina hmin eiphs ei su ei o

zOntos hina hEmin eipEs ei su ei ho
G2198 G2443 G2254 G2036 G1487 G4771 G1488 G3588
vp Pres Act Gen Sg m Conj pp 1 Dat Pl vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg Cond pp 2 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
LIVING THAT to-US YOU-MAY-BE-sayING IF YOU ARE THE
us you-may-be-telling
cristos o uios tou qeou

christos ho huios tou theou
G5547 G3588 G5207 G3588 G2316
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
ANOINTED THE SON OF-THE God
Christ
26:64 legei autw o ihsous su eipas plhn legw 64 Jesus saith unto him, Thou
legei autO ho iEsous su eipas plEn legO
G3004 G846 G3588 G2424 G4771 G2036 G4133 G3004
hast said: nevertheless I say
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Nom Sg vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg Adv vi Pres Act 1 Sg unto you, Hereafter shall ye see
IS-sayING to-him THE JESUS YOU say MOREly I-AM-sayING the Son of man sitting on the
say-it moreover right hand of power, and
Matthew 26
coming in the clouds of

umin ap arti oyesqe ton uion tou anqrwpou heaven.
humin ap arti opsesthe ton huion tou anthrOpou
G5213 G575 G737 G3700 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444
pp 2 Dat Pl Prep Adv vi Fut midD 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
to-YOU(p) FROM at-PRESENT YE-SHALL-BE-VIEWING THE SON OF-THE human
to-ye ye-shall-be-seeing
kaqhmenon ek dexiwn ths dunamews kai ercomenon epi

kathEmenon ek dexiOn tEs dunameOs kai erchomenon epi
G2521 G1537 G1188 G3588 G1411 G2532 G2064 G1909
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m Prep a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m Prep
sittING OUT OF-RIGHT OF-THE ABILITY AND COMING ON
of-right(p) power
twn nefelwn tou ouranou

tOn nephelOn tou ouranou
G3588 G3507 G3588 G3772
t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE CLOUDS OF-THE heaven
the
26:65 tote o arciereus dierrhxen ta imatia autou legwn 65 Then the high priest rent his
tote ho archiereus dierrExen ta himatia autou legOn
G5119 G3588 G749 G1284 G3588 G2440 G846 G3004
clothes, saying, He hath
Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m spoken blasphemy; what
then THE chief-SACRED-one THRU-BURSTS THE GARMENTS OF-him sayING further need have we of
chief-priest tears witnesses? behold, now ye
have heard his blasphemy.
oti eblasfhmhsen ti eti creian ecomen marturwn ide nun
hoti eblasphEmEsen ti eti chreian echomen marturOn ide nun
G3754 G987 G5101 G2089 G5532 G2192 G3144 G1492 G3568
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pi Acc Sg n Adv n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 1 Pl n_ Gen Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Sg Adv
that He-HARM-AVERS ANY STILL need WE-ARE-HAVING OF-witnesses BE-PERCEIVING NOW
he-blasphemes what ? lo !
hkousate thn blasfhmian autou

Ekousate tEn blasphEmian autou
G191 G3588 G988 G846
vi Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m
YE-HEAR THE HARM-AVERment OF-Him
blasphemy
26:66 ti umin dokei oi de apokriqentes eipon enocos 66 What think ye? They
ti humin dokei hoi de apokrithentes eipon enochos
G5101 G5213 G1380 G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G1777
answered and said, He is guilty
pi Acc Sg n pp 2 Dat Pl vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Sg m of death.
ANY to-YOU(p) it-IS-SEEMING THE YET answerING THEY-said liable
why ? to-ye
qanatou estin
thanatou estin
G2288 G2076
n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
OF-DEATH He-IS
26:67 tote eneptusan eis to proswpon autou kai ekolafisan 67 Then did they spit in his
tote eneptusan eis to prosOpon autou kai ekolaphisan
G5119 G1716 G1519 G3588 G4383 G846 G2532 G2852
face, and buffeted him; and
Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl others smote [him] with the
then THEY-IN-SPIT INTO THE face OF-Him AND THEY-FROM-CHASTEN palms of their hands,
they-spit-in buffet
auton oi de errapisan
auton hoi de errapisan
G846 G3588 G1161 G4474
pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
Him THE-ones YET THEY-SLAP
the they-slap-him
26:68 legontes profhteuson hmin criste tis estin o 68 Saying, Prophesy unto us,
legontes prophEteuson hEmin christe tis estin ho
G3004 G4395 G2254 G5547 G5101 G2076 G3588
thou Christ, Who is he that
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl n_ Voc Sg m pi Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m smote thee?
sayING BEFORE-AVER to-US ANOINTED ! ANY IS THE
prophesy-you ! Christ ! who ?
paisas se
paisas se
G3817 G4571
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m pp 2 Acc Sg
one-HITTing YOU
one-hitting
26:69 o de petros exw ekaqhto en th aulh kai 69 . Now Peter sat without in
ho de petros exO ekathEto en tE aulE kai
G3588 G1161 G4074 G1854 G2521 G1722 G3588 G833 G2532
the palace: and a damsel came
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Adv vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj unto him, saying, Thou also
THE YET Peter OUT sat IN THE COURT AND wast with Jesus of Galilee.
outside courtyard
Matthew 26
proshlqen autw mia paidiskh legousa kai su hsqa meta

prosElthen autO mia paidiskE legousa kai su Estha meta
G4334 G846 G1520 G3814 G3004 G2532 G4771 G2258 G3326
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f Conj pp 2 Nom Sg vi Impf vxx 2 Sg Prep
TOWARD-CAME to-him ONE maid sayING AND YOU WERE WITH
came-to him also
ihsou tou galilaiou

iEsou tou galilaiou
G2424 G3588 G1057
JESUS THE GALILEAN
26:70 o de hrnhsato emprosqen pantwn legwn ouk 70 But he denied before [them]
ho de ErnEsato emprosthen pantOn legOn ouk
G3588 G1161 G720 G1715 G3956 G3004 G3756
all, saying, I know not what
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg Prep a_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Part Neg thou sayest.
THE YET he-disowns IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-ALL sayING NOT
in-front-of all
oida ti legeis
oida ti legeis
G1492 G5101 G3004
vi Perf Act 1 Sg pi Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Sg
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED ANY YOU-ARE-sayING
I-am-aware what ?
26:71 exelqonta de auton eis ton pulwna eiden auton allh 71 And when he was gone out
exelthonta de auton eis ton pulOna eiden auton allE
G1831 G1161 G846 G1519 G3588 G4440 G1492 G846 G243
into the porch, another [maid]
vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg m Conj pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m a_ Nom Sg f saw him, and said unto them
OUT-COMING YET him INTO THE GATE PERCEIVED him other(f) that were there, This [fellow]
coming-out another(f) was also with Jesus of
Nazareth.
kai legei tois ekei kai outos hn meta ihsou tou
kai legei tois ekei kai houtos En meta iEsou tou
G2532 G3004 G3588 G1563 G2532 G3778 G2258 G3326 G2424 G3588
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m Adv Conj pd Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Prep n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
AND she-IS-sayING to-THE-ones there AND this-one WAS WITH JESUS THE
to-the-men also this-one
nazwraiou
nazOraiou
G3480
n_ Gen Sg m
NAZARENE
26:72 kai palin hrnhsato meq orkou oti ouk oida ton 72 And again he denied with
kai palin ErnEsato meth horkou hoti ouk oida ton
G2532 G3825 G720 G3326 G3727 G3754 G3756 G1492 G3588
an oath, I do not know the
Conj Adv vi Aor midD 3 Sg Prep n_ Gen Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Perf Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg m man.
AND AGAIN he-disowns WITH OATH that NOT I-HAVE-PERCEIVED THE
I-am-acquainted-with
anqrwpon
anthrOpon
G444
n_ Acc Sg m
human
26:73 meta mikron de proselqontes oi estwtes eipon tw 73 And after a while came unto
meta mikron de proselthontes hoi hestOtes eipon tO
G3326 G3397 G1161 G4334 G3588 G2476 G2036 G3588
[him] they that stood by, and
Prep a_ Acc Sg n Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp Perf Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg m said to Peter, Surely thou also
after LITTLE YET TOWARD-COMING THE ones-HAVING-STOOD said to-THE art [one] of them; for thy
approaching ones-standing speech bewrayeth thee.
petrw alhqws kai su ex autwn ei kai gar h lalia

petrO alEthOs kai su ex autOn ei kai gar hE lalia
G4074 G230 G2532 G4771 G1537 G846 G1488 G2532 G1063 G3588 G2981
n_ Dat Sg m Adv Conj pp 2 Nom Sg Prep pp Gen Pl m vi Pres vxx 2 Sg Conj Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
Peter TRUly AND YOU OUT OF-them ARE AND for THE TALK
also also speech
sou dhlon se poiei

sou dElon se poiei
G4675 G1212 G4571 G4160
pp 2 Gen Sg a_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Acc Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg
OF-YOU EVIDENT YOU IS-makING
26:74 tote hrxato katanaqematizein kai omnuein oti ouk 74 Then began he to curse and
tote Erxato katanathematizein kai omnuein hoti ouk
G5119 G756 G2653 G2532 G3660 G3754 G3756
to swear, [saying], I know not
Adv vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act Conj vn Pres Act Conj Part Neg the man. And immediately the
then he-begins TO-BE-DOWN-anathematizING AND TO-BE-SWEARING that NOT cock crew.
to-be-damning
oida ton anqrwpon kai euqews alektwr efwnhsen

oida ton anthrOpon kai eutheOs alektOr ephOnEsen
G1492 G3588 G444 G2532 G2112 G220 G5455
vi Perf Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj Adv n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED THE human AND immediately UN-LAYer SOUNDS
I-am-acquainted-with cock crows
26:75 kai emnhsqh o petros tou rhmatos tou ihsou 75 And Peter remembered the
kai emnEsthE ho petros tou rEmatos tou iEsou
G2532 G3415 G3588 G4074 G3588 G4487 G3588 G2424
word of Jesus, which said unto
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m him, Before the cock crow,
AND IS-REMINDED THE Peter OF-THE declaration OF-THE JESUS thou shalt deny me thrice. And
he went out, and wept bitterly.
eirhkotos autw oti prin alektora fwnhsai tris aparnhsh

eirEkotos autO hoti prin alektora phOnEsai tris aparnEsE
G2046 G846 G3754 G4250 G220 G5455 G5151 G533
vp Perf Act Gen Sg n Att pp Dat Sg m Conj Adv n_ Acc Sg m vn Aor Act Adv vi Fut midD 2 Sg
OF-HAVING-declarED to-him that ERE UN-LAYer TO-SOUND THRice YOU-SHALL-BE-renouncING
cock to-crow
me kai exelqwn exw eklausen pikrws

me kai exelthOn exO eklausen pikrOs
G3165 G2532 G1831 G1854 G2799 G4090
pp 1 Acc Sg Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv
ME AND OUT-COMING OUT he-LAMENTS BITTERly
coming-out outside
Matthew 27
27:1 prwias de genomenhs sumboulion elabon pantes oi 1 . When the morning was
prOias de genomenEs sumboulion elabon pantes hoi
G4405 G1161 G1096 G4824 G2983 G3956 G3588
come, all the chief priests and
n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f n_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m elders of the people took
OF-morning YET BECOMING TOGETHER-COUNSEL GOT ALL THE counsel against Jesus to put
consultation held him to death:
arciereis kai oi presbuteroi tou laou kata tou ihsou

archiereis kai hoi presbuteroi tou laou kata tou iEsou
G749 G2532 G3588 G4245 G3588 G2992 G2596 G3588 G2424
n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
chief-SACRED-ones AND THE SENIORS OF-THE PEOPLE DOWN OF-THE JESUS
chief-priests elders against the
wste qanatwsai auton

hOste thanatOsai auton
G5620 G2289 G846
Conj vn Aor Act pp Acc Sg m
AS-BESIDES TO-( cause-to )-DIE Him
so-as to-put-to-death
27:2 kai dhsantes auton aphgagon kai paredwkan auton 2 And when they had bound
kai dEsantes auton apEgagon kai paredOkan auton
G2532 G1210 G846 G520 G2532 G3860 G846
him, they led [him] away, and
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m delivered him to Pontius Pilate
AND BINDing Him THEY-FROM-LED AND THEY-BESIDE-GIVE Him the governor.
they-led-away-him give-up
pontiw pilatw tw hgemoni

pontiO pilatO tO hEdemoni
G4194 G4091 G3588 G2232
n_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
to-PONTIUS ( Latin ) PILATE ( Latin ) THE LEADer
to-Pontius Pilate governor
27:3 tote idwn ioudas o paradidous auton oti 3 Then Judas, which had
tote idOn ioudas ho paradidous auton hoti
G5119 G1492 G2455 G3588 G3860 G846 G3754
betrayed him, when he saw
Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m Conj that he was condemned,
then PERCEIVING JUDAS THE one-BESIDE-GIVING Him that repented himself, and brought
one-giving-up again the thirty pieces of silver
to the chief priests and elders,
katekriqh metamelhqeis apestreyen ta triakonta arguria tois
katekrithE metamelEtheis apestrepsen ta triakonta arguria tois
G2632 G3338 G654 G3588 G5144 G694 G3588
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n t_ Dat Pl m
He-WAS-DOWN-JUDGED BEING-after-CARED FROM-TURNS THE THREE-TY SILVERS to-THE
he-was-condemned regretting turns-back thirty pieces-of-silver
arciereusin kai tois presbuterois

archiereusin kai tois presbuterois
G749 G2532 G3588 G4245
n_ Dat Pl m Conj t_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m
chief-SACRED-ones AND to-THE SENIORS
27:4 legwn hmarton paradous aima aqwon oi de eipon 4 Saying, I have sinned in that
legOn hEmarton paradous haima athOon hoi de eipon
G3004 G264 G3860 G129 G121 G3588 G1161 G2036
I have betrayed the innocent
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl blood. And they said, What [is
sayING I-missED BESIDE-GIVING BLOOD UN-PENAL THE YET THEY-said that] to us? see thou [to that].
I-sinned giving-up innocent
ti pros hmas su oyei

ti pros hEmas su opsei
G5101 G4314 G2248 G4771 G3700
pi Nom Sg n Prep pp 1 Acc Pl pp 2 Nom Sg vi Fut midD 2 Sg Att
ANY TOWARD US YOU SHALL-BE-VIEWING
what ? shall-be-seeing-to-that
27:5 kai riyas ta arguria en tw naw anecwrhsen kai 5 And he cast down the pieces
kai ripsas ta arguria en tO naO anechOrEsen kai
G2532 G4496 G3588 G694 G1722 G3588 G3485 G402 G2532
of silver in the temple, and
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj departed, and went and hanged
AND TOSSing THE SILVERS IN THE TEMPLE he-UP-SPACES AND himself.
pieces-of-silver he-retires
apelqwn aphgxato
apelthOn apEgxato
G565 G519
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
FROM-COMING is-FROM-COMPRESSED
coming-away he-strangles-himself
27:6 oi de arciereis labontes ta arguria eipon ouk 6 And the chief priests took the
hoi de archiereis labontes ta arguria eipon ouk
G3588 G1161 G749 G2983 G3588 G694 G2036 G3756
silver pieces, and said, It is not
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Part Neg lawful for to put them into the
THE YET chief-SACRED-ones GETTING THE SILVERS said NOT treasury, because it is the price
chief-priests taking pieces-of-silver of blood.
Matthew 27
exestin balein auta eis ton korbanan epei timh aimatos

exestin balein auta eis ton korbanan epei timE haimatos
G1832 G906 G846 G1519 G3588 G2878 G1893 G5092 G129
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act pp Acc Pl n Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg n
it-IS-allowed TO-BE-CASTING them INTO THE CORBAN (oblation) since VALUE OF-BLOOD
corban price
estin
estin
G2076
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
it-IS
27:7 sumboulion de labontes hgorasan ex autwn ton agron 7 And they took counsel, and
sumboulion de labontes Egorasan ex autOn ton agron
G4824 G1161 G2983 G59 G1537 G846 G3588 G68
bought with them the potter's
n_ Acc Sg n Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pp Gen Pl n t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m field, to bury strangers in.
TOGETHER-COUNSEL YET GETTING THEY-BUY OUT OF-them THE FIELD
consultation holding
tou keramews eis tafhn tois xenois

tou kerameOs eis taphEn tois xenois
G3588 G2763 G1519 G5027 G3588 G3581
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg f t_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m
OF-THE potter INTO sepulcher to-THE LODGers
strangers
27:8 dio eklhqh o agros ekeinos agros aimatos ews ths 8 Wherefore that field was
dio eklEthE ho agros ekeinos agros haimatos heOs tEs
G1352 G2564 G3588 G68 G1565 G68 G129 G2193 G3588
called, The field of blood, unto
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg n Conj t_ Gen Sg f this day.
THRU-WHICH WAS-CALLED THE FIELD that FIELD OF-BLOOD TILL OF-THE
wherefore the
shmeron
sEmeron
G4594
Adv
toDAY
27:9 tote eplhrwqh to rhqen dia ieremiou tou profhtou 9 Then was fulfilled that which
tote eplErOthE to rEthen dia ieremiou tou prophEtou
G5119 G4137 G3588 G4483 G1223 G2408 G3588 G4396
was spoken by Jeremy the
Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n Prep n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m prophet, saying, And they took
then WAS-FILLED THE BEING-declarED THRU JEREMIAH THE BEFORE-AVERer the thirty pieces of silver, the
was-fulfilled through prophet price of him that was valued,
whom they of the children of
legontos kai elabon ta triakonta arguria thn timhn tou Israel did value;
legontos kai elabon ta triakonta arguria tEn timEn tou
G3004 G2532 G2983 G3588 G5144 G694 G3588 G5092 G3588
vp Pres Act Gen Sg n Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl n a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
sayING AND THEY-GOT THE THREE-TY SILVERS THE VALUE OF-THE
thirty pieces-of-silver price
tetimhmenou on etimhsanto apo uiwn israhl

tetimEmenou hon etimEsanto apo huiOn israEl
G5091 G3739 G5091 G575 G5207 G2474
vp Perf Pas Gen Sg m pr Acc Sg m vi Aor Mid 3 Pl Prep n_ Gen Pl m ni proper
one-HAVING-been-VALUED WHOM THEY-VALUE FROM SONS of-ISRAEL
one-having-been-valued of-Israel
27:10 kai edwkan auta eis ton agron tou keramews kaqa 10 And gave them for the
kai edOkan auta eis ton agron tou kerameOs katha
G2532 G1325 G846 G1519 G3588 G68 G3588 G2763 G2505
potter's field, as the Lord
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Pl n Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Adv appointed me.
AND THEY-GIVE them INTO THE FIELD OF-THE potter according-to-WHICH
according-as
sunetaxen moi kurios

sunetaxen moi kurios
G4929 G3427 G2962
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg n_ Nom Sg m
TOGETHER-SETS to-ME Master
arranges-with me Lord
27:11 o de ihsous esth emprosqen tou hgemonos kai 11 . And Jesus stood before the
ho de iEsous hestE emprosthen tou hEdemonos kai
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2476 G1715 G3588 G2232 G2532
governor: and the governor
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj asked him, saying, Art thou the
THE YET JESUS STOOD IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE LEADer AND King of the Jews? And Jesus
in-front-of the governor said unto him, Thou sayest.
ephrwthsen auton o hgemwn legwn su ei o

epErOtEsen auton ho hEdemOn legOn su ei ho
G1905 G846 G3588 G2232 G3004 G4771 G1488 G3588
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp 2 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
inquirES-of Him THE LEADer sayING YOU ARE THE
governor
Matthew 27
basileus twn ioudaiwn o de ihsous efh autw su

basileus tOn ioudaiOn ho de iEsous ephE autO su
G935 G3588 G2453 G3588 G1161 G2424 G5346 G846 G4771
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m pp 2 Nom Sg
KING OF-THE JUDA-ans THE YET JESUS AVERRed to-him YOU
Jews
legeis
legeis
G3004
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ARE-sayING
are-saying-it
27:12 kai en tw kathgoreisqai auton upo twn arcierewn kai 12 And when he was accused
kai en tO katEgoreisthai auton hupo tOn archiereOn kai
G2532 G1722 G3588 G2723 G846 G5259 G3588 G749 G2532
of the chief priests and elders,
Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres Pas pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj he answered nothing.
AND IN THE TO-BE-accusED Him by THE chief-SACRED-ones AND
chief-priests
twn presbuterwn ouden apekrinato

tOn presbuterOn ouden apekrinato
G3588 G4245 G3762 G611
t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m a_ Acc Sg n vi Aor midD 3 Sg
THE SENIORS NOT-YET-ONE He-answers
elders nothing
27:13 tote legei autw o pilatos ouk akoueis posa 13 Then said Pilate unto him,
tote legei autO ho pilatos ouk akoueis posa
G5119 G3004 G846 G3588 G4091 G3756 G191 G4214
Hearest thou not how many
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vi Pres Act 2 Sg pq Acc Pl n things they witness against
then IS-sayING to-Him THE PILATE NOT YOU-ARE-HEARING how-many thee?
how-much
sou katamarturousin
sou katamarturousin
G4675 G2649
pp 2 Gen Sg vi Pres Act 3 Pl
OF-YOU THEY-ARE-DOWN-witnessING
you they-are-testifying-against
27:14 kai ouk apekriqh autw pros oude en rhma wste 14 And he answered him to
kai ouk apekrithE autO pros oude hen rEma hOste
G2532 G3756 G611 G846 G4314 G3761 G1520 G4487 G5620
never a word; insomuch that
Conj Part Neg vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Prep Adv a_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj the governor marvelled greatly.
AND NOT He-answerED to-him TOWARD NOT-YET ONE declaration AS-BESIDES
him so-that
qaumazein ton hgemona lian

thaumazein ton hEdemona lian
G2296 G3588 G2232 G3029
vn Pres Act t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Adv
TO-BE-MARVELING THE LEADer VERY
governor very-much
27:15 kata de eorthn eiwqei o hgemwn apoluein 15 Now at [that] feast the
kata de heortEn eiOthei ho hEdemOn apoluein
G2596 G1161 G1859 G1486 G3588 G2232 G630
governor was wont to release
Prep Conj n_ Acc Sg f vi Plup Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vn Pres Act unto the people a prisoner,
according-to YET FESTIVAL HAD-CUSTOMED THE LEADer TO-BE-FROM-LOOSING whom they would.
had-been-accustomed governor to-be-releasing
ena tw oclw desmion on hqelon

hena tO ochlO desmion hon Ethelon
G1520 G3588 G3793 G1198 G3739 G2309
a_ Acc Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pr Acc Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Pl
ONE to-THE THRONG BOUND-one WHOM THEY-WILLED
prisoner they-would
27:16 eicon de tote desmion epishmon legomenon barabban 16 And they had then a notable
eichon de tote desmion episEmon legomenon barabban
G2192 G1161 G5119 G1198 G1978 G3004 G912
prisoner, called Barabbas.
vi Impf Act 3 Pl Conj Adv n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
THEY-HAD YET then BOUND-one ON-SIGNED beING-said Bar-Abbas
prisoner notorious
27:17 sunhgmenwn oun autwn eipen autois o pilatos tina 17 Therefore when they were
sunEgmenOn oun autOn eipen autois ho pilatos tina
G4863 G3767 G846 G2036 G846 G3588 G4091 G5101
gathered together, Pilate said
vp Perf Pas Gen Pl m Conj pp Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pi Acc Sg m unto them, Whom will ye that I
OF-HAVING-TOGETHER-LED THEN them said to-them THE PILATE ANY release unto you? Barabbas, or
of-having-been-gathered of-them whom ? Jesus which is called Christ?
qelete apolusw umin barabban h ihsoun ton

thelete apolusO humin barabban E iEsoun ton
G2309 G630 G5213 G912 G2228 G2424 G3588
vi Pres Act 2 Pl vs Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Acc Sg m Part n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
YE-ARE-WILLING I-SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING to-YOU(p) Bar-Abbas OR JESUS THE
I-should-be-releasing to-ye
Matthew 27
legomenon criston
legomenon christon
G3004 G5547
vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
beING-said ANOINTED
one-being-said Christ
27:18 hdei gar oti dia fqonon paredwkan auton 18 For he knew that for envy
Edei gar hoti dia phthonon paredOkan auton
G1492 G1063 G3754 G1223 G5355 G3860 G846
they had delivered him.
vi Plup Act 3 Sg Conj Conj Prep n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
he-HAD-PERCEIVED for that THRU ENVY THEY-BESIDE-GIVE Him
he-was-aware because-of they-give-up
27:19 kaqhmenou de autou epi tou bhmatos apesteilen pros 19 When he was set down on
kathEmenou de autou epi tou bEmatos apesteilen pros
G2521 G1161 G846 G1909 G3588 G968 G649 G4314
the judgment seat, his wife sent
vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m Conj pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep unto him, saying, Have thou
OF-sittING YET OF-him ON THE platform commissions TOWARD nothing to do with that just
dais dispatches man: for I have suffered many
things this day in a dream
auton h gunh autou legousa mhden soi kai tw because of him.
auton hE gunE autou legousa mEden soi kai tO
G846 G3588 G1135 G846 G3004 G3367 G4671 G2532 G3588
pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Dat Sg Conj t_ Dat Sg m
him THE WOMAN OF-him sayING NO-YET-ONE to-YOU AND to-THE
wife nothing the
dikaiw ekeinw polla gar epaqon shmeron kat onar di auton

dikaiO ekeinO polla gar epathon sEmeron kat onar di auton
G1342 G1565 G4183 G1063 G3958 G4594 G2596 G3677 G1223 G846
a_ Dat Sg m pd Dat Sg m a_ Acc Pl n Conj vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg Adv Prep ni other Prep pp Acc Sg m
JUST-One that much for I-EMOTIONED toDAY according-to TRANCE THRU Him
just-man I-suffered because-of
27:20 oi de arciereis kai oi presbuteroi epeisan tous oclous 20 But the chief priests and
hoi de archiereis kai hoi presbuteroi epeisan tous ochlous
G3588 G1161 G749 G2532 G3588 G4245 G3982 G3588 G3793
elders persuaded the multitude
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m that they should ask Barabbas,
THE YET chief-SACRED-ones AND THE SENIORS PERSUADE THE THRONGS and destroy Jesus.
ina aithswntai ton barabban ton de ihsoun

hina aitEsOntai ton barabban ton de iEsoun
G2443 G154 G3588 G912 G3588 G1161 G2424
Conj vs Aor Mid 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m
THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING THE Bar-Abbas THE YET JESUS
apoleswsin
apolesOsin
G622
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-SHOULD-BE-destroyING
27:21 apokriqeis de o hgemwn eipen autois tina qelete 21 The governor answered and
apokritheis de ho hEdemOn eipen autois tina thelete
G611 G1161 G3588 G2232 G2036 G846 G5101 G2309
said unto them, Whether of the
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Pl twain will ye that I release unto
answerING YET THE LEADer said to-them ANY YE-ARE-WILLING you? They said, Barabbas.
governor which ?
apo twn duo apolusw umin oi de eipon barabban

apo tOn duo apolusO humin hoi de eipon barabban
G575 G3588 G1417 G630 G5213 G3588 G1161 G2036 G912
Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom vs Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg m
FROM THE TWO I-SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING to-YOU(p) THE YET THEY-said Bar-Abbas
I-should-be-releasing to-ye
27:22 legei autois o pilatos ti oun poihsw ihsoun 22 Pilate saith unto them, What
legei autois ho pilatos ti oun poiEsO iEsoun
G3004 G846 G3588 G4091 G5101 G3767 G4160 G2424
shall I do then with Jesus
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pi Acc Sg n Conj vi Fut Act 1 Sg n_ Acc Sg m which is called Christ? [They]
IS-sayING to-them THE PILATE ANY THEN I-SHALL-BE-DOING JESUS all say unto him, Let him be
what ? crucified.
ton legomenon criston legousin autw pantes staurwqhtw

ton legomenon christon legousin autO pantes staurOthEtO
G3588 G3004 G5547 G3004 G846 G3956 G4717
t_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom Pl m vm Aor Pas 3 Sg
THE beING-said ANOINTED THEY-ARE-sayING to-him ALL LET-Him-BE-BEING-impalED
one-being-said Christ let-him-be-being-crucified !
27:23 o de hgemwn efh ti gar kakon epoihsen oi de 23 And the governor said,
ho de hEdemOn ephE ti gar kakon epoiEsen hoi de
G3588 G1161 G2232 G5346 G5101 G1063 G2556 G4160 G3588 G1161
Why, what evil hath he done?
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pi Acc Sg n Conj a_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl m Conj But they cried out the more,
THE YET LEADer AVERRed ANY for EVIL He-DOES THE-ones YET saying, Let him be crucified.
governor what ? the
Matthew 27
perissws ekrazon legontes staurwqhtw

perissOs ekrazon legontes staurOthEtO
G4057 G2896 G3004 G4717
Adv vi Impf Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vm Aor Pas 3 Sg
exceedingly CRIED sayING LET-Him-BE-BEING-impalED
they-cried let-him-be-being-crucified !
27:24 idwn de o pilatos oti ouden wfelei alla mallon 24 When Pilate saw that he
idOn de ho pilatos hoti ouden Ophelei alla mallon
G1492 G1161 G3588 G4091 G3754 G3762 G5623 G235 G3123
could prevail nothing, but
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj Adv [that] rather a tumult was
PERCEIVING YET THE PILATE that NOT-YET-ONE it-IS-benefitING but RATHER made, he took water, and
nothing washed [his] hands before the
multitude, saying, I am
qorubos ginetai labwn udwr apeniyato tas ceiras innocent of the blood of this
thorubos ginetai labOn hudOr apenipsato tas cheiras just person: see ye [to it].
G2351 G1096 G2983 G5204 G633 G3588 G5495
n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Mid 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f
TUMULT IS-BECOMING GETTING water he-FROM-WASHES THE HANDS
is-occurring he-washes-off
apenanti tou oclou legwn aqwos eimi apo tou

apenanti tou ochlou legOn athOos eimi apo tou
G561 G3588 G3793 G3004 G121 G1510 G575 G3588
Adv t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 1 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg n
FROM-IN-INSTEAD OF-THE THRONG sayING UN-PENAL I-AM FROM THE
in-front-of the innocent
aimatos tou dikaiou toutou umeis oyesqe

haimatos tou dikaiou toutou humeis opsesthe
G129 G3588 G1342 G5127 G5210 G3700
n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m pp 2 Nom Pl vi Fut midD 2 Pl
BLOOD OF-THE JUST-one this YOU(p) SHALL-BE-VIEWING
just-man ye shall-be-seeing-to-it
27:25 kai apokriqeis pas o laos eipen to aima 25 Then answered all the
kai apokritheis pas ho laos eipen to haima
G2532 G611 G3956 G3588 G2992 G2036 G3588 G129
people, and said, His blood
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n [be] on us, and on our children.
AND answerING EVERY THE PEOPLE said THE BLOOD
entire
autou ef hmas kai epi ta tekna hmwn

autou eph hEmas kai epi ta tekna hEmOn
G846 G1909 G2248 G2532 G1909 G3588 G5043 G2257
pp Gen Sg m Prep pp 1 Acc Pl Conj Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp 1 Gen Pl
OF-Him ON US AND ON THE offsprings OF-US
children
27:26 tote apelusen autois ton barabban ton de ihsoun 26 . Then released he Barabbas
tote apelusen autois ton barabban ton de iEsoun
G5119 G630 G846 G3588 G912 G3588 G1161 G2424
unto them: and when he had
Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m scourged Jesus, he delivered
then he-FROM-LOOSES to-them THE Bar-Abbas THE YET JESUS [him] to be crucified.
he-releases
fragellwsas paredwken ina staurwqh

phragellOsas paredOken hina staurOthE
G5417 G3860 G2443 G4717
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
WHIPPing he-BESIDE-GIVES THAT He-MAY-BE-BEING-impalED
he-gives-over-him he-may-be-being-crucified
27:27 tote oi stratiwtai tou hgemonos paralabontes ton ihsoun 27 Then the soldiers of the
tote hoi stratiOtai tou hEdemonos paralabontes ton iEsoun
G5119 G3588 G4757 G3588 G2232 G3880 G3588 G2424
governor took Jesus into the
Adv t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m common hall, and gathered
then THE WARriors OF-THE LEADer BESIDE-GETTING THE JESUS unto him the whole band [of
soldiers governor taking-along soldiers].
eis to praitwrion sunhgagon ep auton olhn thn speiran

eis to praitOrion sunEgagon ep auton holEn tEn speiran
G1519 G3588 G4232 G4863 G1909 G846 G3650 G3588 G4686
Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pp Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
INTO THE PRETORIUM TOGETHER-LED ON Him WHOLE THE BAND
gathered squadron
27:28 kai ekdusantes auton perieqhkan autw clamuda kokkinhn 28 And they stripped him, and
kai ekdusantes auton periethEkan autO chlamuda kokkinEn
G2532 G1562 G846 G4060 G846 G5511 G2847
put on him a scarlet robe.
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f
AND OUT-SLIPPing Him THEY-ABOUT-PLACE to-Him MANTLE scarlet
stripping they-place-about him
27:29 kai plexantes stefanon ex akanqwn epeqhkan epi thn 29 And when they had platted
kai plexantes stephanon ex akanthOn epethEkan epi tEn
G2532 G4120 G4735 G1537 G173 G2007 G1909 G3588
a crown of thorns, they put [it]
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg m Prep n_ Gen Pl f vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f upon his head, and a reed in
AND BRAIDing WREATH OUT OF-POINT-FLOWERS THEY-ON-PLACE ON THE his right hand: and they bowed
of-thorns they-place-on the knee before him, and
Matthew 27
mocked him, saying, Hail,

kefalhn autou kai kalamon epi thn dexian autou kai gonupethsantes King of the Jews!
kephalEn autou kai kalamon epi tEn dexian autou kai gonupetEsantes
G2776 G846 G2532 G2563 G1909 G3588 G1188 G846 G2532 G1120
n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
HEAD OF-Him AND REED ON THE RIGHT OF-Him AND KNEE-FALLing
right-hand falling-on-their-knees
emprosqen autou enepaizon autw legontes caire o

emprosthen autou enepaizon autO legontes chaire ho
G1715 G846 G1702 G846 G3004 G5463 G3588
Prep pp Gen Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-Him THEY-IN-sportED to-Him sayING BE-JOYING THE
in-front-of him they-scoffed-at him be-you-rejoicing !
basileus twn ioudaiwn

basileus tOn ioudaiOn
G935 G3588 G2453
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
KING OF-THE JUDA-ans
Jews
27:30 kai emptusantes eis auton elabon ton kalamon kai etupton 30 And they spit upon him, and
kai emptusantes eis auton elabon ton kalamon kai etupton
G2532 G1716 G1519 G846 G2983 G3588 G2563 G2532 G5180
took the reed, and smote him
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep pp Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl on the head.
AND IN-SPITTing INTO Him THEY-GOT THE REED AND THEY-BEAT(past)
spitting-in beat(past)
eis thn kefalhn autou

eis tEn kephalEn autou
G1519 G3588 G2776 G846
Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m
INTO THE HEAD OF-Him
27:31 kai ote enepaixan autw exedusan auton thn clamuda kai 31 And after that they had
kai hote enepaixan autO exedusan auton tEn chlamuda kai
G2532 G3753 G1702 G846 G1562 G846 G3588 G5511 G2532
mocked him, they took the
Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj robe off from him, and put his
AND when THEY-IN-sport to-Him THEY-OUT-SLIP Him THE MANTLE AND own raiment on him, and led
they-scoff-at him they-strip of-the him away to crucify [him].
enedusan auton ta imatia autou kai aphgagon auton eis to

enedusan auton ta himatia autou kai apEgagon auton eis to
G1746 G846 G3588 G2440 G846 G2532 G520 G846 G1519 G3588
vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n
THEY-IN-SLIP Him THE GARMENTS OF-Him AND THEY-FROM-LED Him INTO THE
put-on led-away
staurwsai
staurOsai
G4717
vn Aor Act
TO-impale
to-crucify
27:32 exercomenoi de euron anqrwpon kurhnaion onomati simwna 32 And as they came out, they
exerchomenoi de heuron anthrOpon kurEnaion onomati simOna
G1831 G1161 G2147 G444 G2956 G3686 G4613
found a man of Cyrene, Simon
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m n_ Dat Sg n n_ Acc Sg m by name: him they compelled
OUT-COMING YET THEY-FOUND human CYRENIAN to-NAME SIMON to bear his cross.
coming-out
touton hggareusan ina arh ton stauron autou

touton Eggareusan hina arE ton stauron autou
G5126 G29 G2443 G142 G3588 G4716 G846
pd Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m
this-one THEY-DRAFT THAT he-SHOULD-BE-LIFTING THE pale OF-Him
this-man they-conscript he-should-be-picking-up cross
27:33 kai elqontes eis topon legomenon golgoqa os estin 33 . And when they were come
kai elthontes eis topon legomenon golgotha hos estin
G2532 G2064 G1519 G5117 G3004 G1115 G3739 G2076
unto a place called Golgotha,
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg f pr Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg that is to say, a place of a skull,
AND COMING INTO PLACE beING-said GOLGOTHA WHICH IS
legomenos kraniou topos

legomenos kraniou topos
G3004 G2898 G5117
vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg n n_ Nom Sg m
beING-said OF-SKULL PLACE
27:34 edwkan autw piein oxos meta colhs memigmenon kai 34 They gave him vinegar to
edOkan autO piein oxos meta cholEs memigmenon kai
G1325 G846 G4095 G3690 G3326 G5521 G3396 G2532
drink mingled with gall: and
vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg n Prep n_ Gen Sg f vp Perf Pas Acc Sg n Conj when he had tasted [thereof],
THEY-GIVE to-Him TO-BE-DRINKING vinegar WITH BILE HAVING-been-MIXED AND he would not drink.
him
Matthew 27
geusamenos ouk hqelen piein

geusamenos ouk Ethelen piein
G1089 G3756 G2309 G4095
vp Aor midD Nom Sg m Part Neg vi Impf Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act
TASTing NOT He-WILLED TO-BE-DRINKING
he-would
27:35 staurwsantes de auton diemerisanto ta imatia autou 35 And they crucified him, and
staurOsantes de auton diemerisanto ta himatia autou
G4717 G1161 G846 G1266 G3588 G2440 G846
parted his garments, casting
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj pp Acc Sg m vi Aor Mid 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Sg m lots: that it might be fulfilled
impaling YET Him THEY-THRU-PART THE GARMENTS OF-Him which was spoken by the
crucifying they-divide prophet, They parted my
garments among them, and
ballontes klhron ina plhrwqh to rhqen upo tou upon my vesture did they cast
ballontes klEron hina plErOthE to rEthen hupo tou lots.
G906 G2819 G2443 G4137 G3588 G4483 G5259 G3588
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg m
CASTING LOT THAT MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE BEING-declarED by THE
profhtou diemerisanto ta imatia mou eautois kai epi ton

prophEtou diemerisanto ta himatia mou heautois kai epi ton
G4396 G1266 G3588 G2440 G3450 G1438 G2532 G1909 G3588
n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Mid 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp 1 Gen Sg pf 3 Dat Pl m Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg m
BEFORE-AVERer THEY-THRU-PART THE GARMENTS OF-ME to-selves AND ON THE
prophet they-divide to-themselves
imatismon mou ebalon klhron

himatismon mou ebalon klEron
G2441 G3450 G906 G2819
n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg m
GARMENTing OF-ME THEY-CAST(past) LOT
vesture
27:36 kai kaqhmenoi ethroun auton ekei 36 And sitting down they
kai kathEmenoi etEroun auton ekei
G2532 G2521 G5083 G846 G1563
watched him there;
Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Adv
AND sittING THEY-KEPT Him there
27:37 kai epeqhkan epanw ths kefalhs autou thn aitian autou 37 And set up over his head his
kai epethEkan epanO tEs kephalEs autou tEn aitian autou
G2532 G2007 G1883 G3588 G2776 G846 G3588 G156 G846
accusation written, THIS IS
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl Adv t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m JESUS THE KING OF THE
AND THEY-ON-PLACE ON-UP OF-THE HEAD OF-Him THE cause OF-Him JEWS.
they-place-on above the charge
gegrammenhn outos estin ihsous o basileus twn ioudaiwn

gegrammenEn houtos estin iEsous ho basileus tOn ioudaiOn
G1125 G3778 G2076 G2424 G3588 G935 G3588 G2453
vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f pd Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
HAVING-been-WRITTEN this IS JESUS THE KING OF-THE JUDA-ans
Jews
27:38 tote staurountai sun autw duo lhstai eis ek dexiwn 38 Then were there two thieves
tote staurountai sun autO duo lEstai heis ek dexiOn
G5119 G4717 G4862 G846 G1417 G3027 G1520 G1537 G1188
crucified with him, one on the
Adv vi Pres Pas 3 Pl Prep pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Sg m Prep a_ Gen Pl m right hand, and another on the
then ARE-beING-impalED TOGETHER to-Him TWO ROBBERS ONE OUT OF-RIGHT left.
are-being-crucified togetherwith him of-right(p)
kai eis ex euwnumwn

kai heis ex euOnumOn
G2532 G1520 G1537 G2176
Conj a_ Nom Sg m Prep a_ Gen Pl m
AND ONE OUT OF-left
of-left(p)
27:39 oi de paraporeuomenoi eblasfhmoun auton kinountes tas 39 And they that passed by
hoi de paraporeuomenoi eblasphEmoun auton kinountes tas
G3588 G1161 G3899 G987 G846 G2795 G3588
reviled him, wagging their
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl f heads,
THE-ones YET BESIDE-GOING HARM-AVERRED Him STIRRING THE
the-ones going-by blasphemed wagging
kefalas autwn
kephalas autOn
G2776 G846
n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Pl m
HEADS OF-them
27:40 kai legontes o kataluwn ton naon kai en trisin 40 And saying, Thou that
kai legontes ho kataluOn ton naon kai en trisin
G2532 G3004 G3588 G2647 G3588 G3485 G2532 G1722 G5140
destroyest the temple, and
Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj Prep a_ Dat Pl f buildest [it] in three days, save
AND sayING THE One-DOWN-LOOSING THE TEMPLE AND IN THREE thyself. If thou be the Son of
one-demolishing God, come down from the
Matthew 27
cross.
hmerais oikodomwn swson seauton ei uios ei tou
hEmerais oikodomOn sOson seauton ei huios ei tou
G2250 G3618 G4982 G4572 G1487 G5207 G1488 G3588
n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pf 2 Acc Sg m Cond n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 2 Sg t_ Gen Sg m
DAYS HOME-BUILDING SAVE YOURself IF SON YOU-ARE OF-THE
building save-you !
qeou katabhqi apo tou staurou

theou katabEthi apo tou staurou
G2316 G2597 G575 G3588 G4716
n_ Gen Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
God BE-DOWN-STEPPING FROM THE pale
be-you-descending ! cross
27:41 omoiws de kai oi arciereis empaizontes meta twn 41 Likewise also the chief
homoiOs de kai hoi archiereis empaizontes meta tOn
G3668 G1161 G2532 G3588 G749 G1702 G3326 G3588
priests mocking [him], with the
Adv Conj Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Gen Pl m scribes and elders, said,
LIKE-AS YET AND THE chief-SACRED-ones IN-sportING WITH THE
likewise also chief-priests scoffing
grammatewn kai presbuterwn elegon

grammateOn kai presbuterOn elegon
G1122 G2532 G4245 G3004
n_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Gen Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl
WRITers AND SENIORS said
scribes elders
27:42 allous eswsen eauton ou dunatai swsai ei basileus israhl 42 He saved others; himself he
allous esOsen heauton ou dunatai sOsai ei basileus israEl
G243 G4982 G1438 G3756 G1410 G4982 G1487 G935 G2474
cannot save. If he be the King
a_ Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pf 3 Acc Sg m Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg vn Aor Act Cond n_ Nom Sg m ni proper of Israel, let him now come
others He-SAVES self NOT He-IS-ABLE TO-SAVE IF KING of-ISRAEL down from the cross, and we
himself he-can of-Israel will believe him.
estin katabatw nun apo tou staurou kai pisteusomen

estin katabatO nun apo tou staurou kai pisteusomen
G2076 G2597 G3568 G575 G3588 G4716 G2532 G4100
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi Fut Act 1 Pl
He-IS LET-Him-BE-DOWN-STEPPING NOW FROM THE pale AND WE-SHALL-BE-BELIEVING
let-him-be-descending ! cross
autw
autO
G846
pp Dat Sg m
to-Him
him
27:43 pepoiqen epi ton qeon rusasqw nun auton ei qelei 43 He trusted in God; let him
pepoithen epi ton theon rusasthO nun auton ei thelei
G3982 G1909 G3588 G2316 G4506 G3568 G846 G1487 G2309
deliver him now, if he will
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vm Aor midD 3 Sg Adv pp Acc Sg m Cond vi Pres Act 3 Sg have him: for he said, I am the
He-HAS-confidence ON THE God LET-Him-rescue NOW Him IF He-IS-WILLING Son of God.
let-him-rescue !
auton eipen gar oti qeou eimi uios

auton eipen gar hoti theou eimi huios
G846 G2036 G1063 G3754 G2316 G1510 G5207
pp Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Conj n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres vxx 1 Sg n_ Nom Sg m
Him He-said for that OF-God I-AM SON
27:44 to d auto kai oi lhstai oi sustaurwqentes 44 The thieves also, which

to d auto kai hoi lEstai hoi sustaurOthentes
G3588 G1161 G846 G2532 G3588 G3027 G3588 G4957
were crucified with him, cast
t_ Acc Sg n Conj pp Acc Sg n Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m the same in his teeth.
THE YET SAME AND THE ROBBERS THE BEING-TOGETHER-impalED
also ones-being-crucified-together
autw wneidizon autw

autO Oneidizon autO
G846 G3679 G846
pp Dat Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
to-Him REPROACHED to-Him
him him
27:45 apo de ekths wras skotos egeneto epi pasan thn ghn 45 Now from the sixth hour
apo de hektEs hOras skotos egeneto epi pasan tEn gEn
G575 G1161 G1623 G5610 G4655 G1096 G1909 G3956 G3588 G1093
there was darkness over all the
Prep Conj a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Sg n vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f land unto the ninth hour.
FROM YET SIXth HOUR DARKness it-BECAME ON EVERY THE LAND
became onover entire
ews wras ennaths

heOs hOras ennatEs
G2193 G5610 G1766
Conj n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f
TILL HOUR NINth
Matthew 27
27:46 peri de thn ennathn wran anebohsen o ihsous fwnh 46 And about the ninth hour
peri de tEn ennatEn hOran aneboEsen ho iEsous phOnE
G4012 G1161 G3588 G1766 G5610 G310 G3588 G2424 G5456
Jesus cried with a loud voice,
Prep Conj t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Dat Sg f saying, Eli, Eli, lama
ABOUT YET THE NINth HOUR UP-IMPLORES THE JESUS to-SOUND sabachthani? that is to say, My
exclaims to-voice God, my God, why hast thou
forsaken me?
megalh legwn hli hli lama sabacqani tout estin
megalE legOn Eli Eli lama sabachthani tout estin
G3173 G3004 G2241 G2241 G2982 G4518 G5124 G2076
a_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Hebrew Hebrew Hebrew Aramaic pd Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
GREAT sayING ELI ELI LAMA SABACHTHANI ( Aramaic ) this IS
loud sabachthani
qee mou qee mou ina ti me egkatelipes

thee mou thee mou hina ti me egkatelipes
G2316 G3450 G2316 G3450 G2443 G5101 G3165 G1459
n_ Voc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg n_ Voc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Conj pi Acc Sg n pp 1 Acc Sg vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
God ! OF-ME God ! OF-ME THAT ANY ME YOU-abandonED
why ? you-did-forsake
27:47 tines de twn ekei estwtwn akousantes elegon oti 47 Some of them that stood
tines de tOn ekei hestOtOn akousantes elegon hoti
G5100 G1161 G3588 G1563 G2476 G191 G3004 G3754
there, when they heard [that],
px Nom Pl m Conj t_ Gen Pl m Adv vp Perf Act Gen Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl Conj said, This [man] calleth for
ANY YET OF-THE-ones there HAVING-STOOD HEARing said that Elias.
some of-the-ones standing hearing-it
hlian fwnei outos

Elian phOnei houtos
G2243 G5455 G3778
n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pd Nom Sg m
ELIAS IS-SOUNDING this-One
Elijah is-summoning this-man
27:48 kai euqews dramwn eis ex autwn kai labwn 48 And straightway one of
kai eutheOs dramOn heis ex autOn kai labOn
G2532 G2112 G5143 G1520 G1537 G846 G2532 G2983
them ran, and took a spunge,
Conj Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Prep pp Gen Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m and filled [it] with vinegar, and
AND immediately RUNNING ONE OUT OF-them AND GETTING put [it] on a reed, and gave him
to drink.
spoggon plhsas te oxous kai periqeis kalamw epotizen

spoggon plEsas te oxous kai peritheis kalamO epotizen
G4699 G4130 G5037 G3690 G2532 G4060 G2563 G4222
n_ Acc Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Part n_ Gen Sg n Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg
SPONGE FILLing BESIDES vinegar AND ABOUT-PLACING to-REED DRINKizED
filling-it sticking-it-on reed gave-to-drink
auton
auton
G846
pp Acc Sg m
Him
27:49 oi de loipoi elegon afes idwmen ei 49 The rest said, Let be, let us
hoi de loipoi elegon aphes idOmen ei
G3588 G1161 G3062 G3004 G863 G1492 G1487
see whether Elias will come to
t_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl Cond save him.
THE YET rest said FROM-LET WE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING IF
rest(p) let-off-you !
ercetai hlias swswn auton

erchetai Elias sOsOn auton
G2064 G2243 G4982 G846
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m vp Fut Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m
IS-COMING ELIAS SAVING Him
Elijah
27:50 o de ihsous palin kraxas fwnh megalh afhken to 50 . Jesus, when he had cried
ho de iEsous palin kraxas phOnE megalE aphEken to
G3588 G1161 G2424 G3825 G2896 G5456 G3173 G863 G3588
again with a loud voice,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Adv vp Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n yielded up the ghost.
THE YET JESUS AGAIN CRYing to-SOUND GREAT FROM-LETS THE
to-voice loud lets-off
pneuma
pneuma
G4151
n_ Acc Sg n
spirit
27:51 kai idou to katapetasma tou naou escisqh eis duo 51 And, behold, the veil of the
kai idou to katapetasma tou naou eschisthE eis duo
G2532 G2400 G3588 G2665 G3588 G3485 G4977 G1519 G1417
temple was rent in twain from
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep a_ Nom the top to the bottom; and the
AND BE-PERCEIVING THE DOWN-EXPANDer OF-THE TEMPLE IS-SPLIT INTO TWO earth did quake, and the rocks
lo ! curtain is-rent rent;
Matthew 27
apo anwqen ews katw kai h gh eseisqh kai ai petrai

apo anOthen heOs katO kai hE gE eseisthE kai hai petrai
G575 G509 G2193 G2736 G2532 G3588 G1093 G4579 G2532 G3588 G4073
Prep Adv Conj Adv Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f
FROM UP-PLACE TILL DOWN AND THE LAND IS-QUAKED AND THE ROCKS
above bottom earth
escisqhsan
eschisthEsan
G4977
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
ARE-SPLIT
are-rent
27:52 kai ta mnhmeia anewcqhsan kai polla swmata twn 52 And the graves were
kai ta mnEmeia aneOchthEsan kai polla sOmata tOn
G2532 G3588 G3419 G455 G2532 G4183 G4983 G3588
opened; and many bodies of
Conj t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n vi Aor Pas 3 Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Pl m the saints which slept arose,
AND THE memorial-vaults WERE-UP-OPENED AND MANY BODIES OF-THE
tombs were-opened
kekoimhmenwn agiwn hgerqh

kekoimEmenOn hagiOn EgerthE
G2837 G40 G1453
vp Perf Pas Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
HAVING-been-reposED HOLY-ones WAS-ROUSED
having-been-put-to-repose saints
27:53 kai exelqontes ek twn mnhmeiwn meta thn egersin autou 53 And came out of the graves
kai exelthontes ek tOn mnEmeiOn meta tEn egersin autou
G2532 G1831 G1537 G3588 G3419 G3326 G3588 G1454 G846
after his resurrection, and went
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m into the holy city, and appeared
AND OUT-COMING OUT OF-THE memorial-vaults after THE ROUSing OF-Him unto many.
coming-out tombs
eishlqon eis thn agian polin kai enefanisqhsan pollois

eisElthon eis tEn hagian polin kai enephanisthEsan pollois
G1525 G1519 G3588 G40 G4172 G2532 G1718 G4183
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl a_ Dat Pl m
THEY-INTO-CAME INTO THE HOLY city AND ARE-IN-APPEARizED to-MANY
they-entered are-disclosed
27:54 o de ekatontarcos kai oi met autou thrountes ton 54 Now when the centurion,
ho de hekatontarchos kai hoi met autou tErountes ton
G3588 G1161 G1543 G2532 G3588 G3326 G846 G5083 G3588
and they that were with him,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m Prep pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m watching Jesus, saw the
THE YET HUNDRED-chief AND THE-ones WITH him KEEPING THE earthquake, and those things
centurion the-ones that were done, they feared
greatly, saying, Truly this was
ihsoun idontes ton seismon kai ta genomena efobhqhsan the Son of God.
iEsoun idontes ton seismon kai ta genomena ephobEthEsan
G2424 G1492 G3588 G4578 G2532 G3588 G1096 G5399
n_ Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl n vp 2Aor midD Acc Pl n vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
JESUS PERCEIVING THE QUAKing AND THE BECOMING(p) WERE-afraid
earthquake occurrences
sfodra legontes alhqws qeou uios hn outos

sphodra legontes alEthOs theou huios En houtos
G4970 G3004 G230 G2316 G5207 G2258 G3778
Adv vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Adv n_ Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pd Nom Sg m
VEHEMENT sayING TRUly OF-God SON WAS this-One
tremendously this-one
27:55 hsan de ekei gunaikes pollai apo makroqen qewrousai aitines 55 And many women were
Esan de ekei gunaikes pollai apo makrothen theOrousai haitines
G2258 G1161 G1563 G1135 G4183 G575 G3113 G2334 G3748
there beholding afar off, which
vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj Adv n_ Nom Pl f a_ Nom Pl f Prep Adv vp Pres Act Nom Pl f pr Nom Pl f followed Jesus from Galilee,
WERE YET there WOMEN MANY FROM FAR-PLACE beholdING WHO-ANY ministering unto him:
afar who-any
hkolouqhsan tw ihsou apo ths galilaias diakonousai autw

EkolouthEsan tO iEsou apo tEs galilaias diakonousai autO
G190 G3588 G2424 G575 G3588 G1056 G1247 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl f pp Dat Sg m
follow to-THE JESUS FROM THE GALILEE THRU-SERVING to-Him
the dispensing
27:56 en ais hn maria h magdalhnh kai maria h 56 Among which was Mary
en hais En maria hE magdalEnE kai maria hE
G1722 G3739 G2258 G3137 G3588 G3094 G2532 G3137 G3588
Magdalene, and Mary the
Prep pr Dat Pl f vi Impf vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f mother of James and Joses,
IN WHOM WAS MARY THE MAGDALENE AND MARY THE and the mother of Zebedee's
among children.
tou iakwbou kai iwsh mhthr kai h mhthr twn uiwn

tou iakObou kai iOsE mEtEr kai hE mEtEr tOn huiOn
G3588 G2385 G2532 G2499 G3384 G2532 G3588 G3384 G3588 G5207
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE JACOBUS AND OF-JOSES MOTHER AND THE MOTHER OF-THE SONS
James
Matthew 27
zebedaiou
zebedaiou
G2199
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-ZEBEDEE
27:57 oyias de genomenhs hlqen anqrwpos plousios apo arimaqaias 57 . When the even was come,
opsias de genomenEs Elthen anthrOpos plousios apo arimathaias
G3798 G1161 G1096 G2064 G444 G4145 G575 G707
there came a rich man of
a_ Gen Sg f Conj vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg f Arimathaea, named Joseph,
OF-evening YET BECOMING CAME human RICH FROM ARIMATHEA who also himself was
Jesus'disciple:
tounoma iwshf os kai autos emaqhteusen tw ihsou

tounoma iOsEph hos kai autos emathEteusen tO iEsou
G5122 G2501 G3739 G2532 G846 G3100 G3588 G2424
Adv Con ni proper pr Nom Sg m Conj pp Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE-NAME JOSEPH WHO AND SAME makES-LEARNer to-THE JESUS
named also shimself makes-disciple
27:58 outos proselqwn tw pilatw hthsato to swma tou 58 He went to Pilate, and
houtos proselthOn tO pilatO EtEsato to sOma tou
G3778 G4334 G3588 G4091 G154 G3588 G4983 G3588
begged the body of Jesus.
pd Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi Aor Mid 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m Then Pilate commanded the
this-one TOWARD-COMING to-THE PILATE REQUESTS THE BODY OF-THE body to be delivered.
this-one coming-to the
ihsou tote o pilatos ekeleusen apodoqhnai to swma

iEsou tote ho pilatos ekeleusen apodothEnai to sOma
G2424 G5119 G3588 G4091 G2753 G591 G3588 G4983
n_ Gen Sg m Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn Aor Pas t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
JESUS then THE PILATE ORDERS TO-BE-FROM-GIVEN THE BODY
to-be-given-up
27:59 kai labwn to swma o iwshf enetulixen auto 59 And when Joseph had taken
kai labOn to sOma ho iOsEph enetulixen auto
G2532 G2983 G3588 G4983 G3588 G2501 G1794 G846
the body, he wrapped it in a
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Nom Sg m ni proper vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg n clean linen cloth,
AND GETTING THE BODY THE JOSEPH IN-FOLDS it
folds-up
sindoni kaqara
sindoni kathara
G4616 G2513
n_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f
to-linen-wrapper clean
linen-wrapper
27:60 kai eqhken auto en tw kainw autou mnhmeiw o 60 And laid it in his own new
kai ethEken auto en tO kainO autou mnEmeiO ho
G2532 G5087 G846 G1722 G3588 G2537 G846 G3419 G3739
tomb, which he had hewn out
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n pp Gen Sg m n_ Dat Sg n pr Acc Sg n in the rock: and he rolled a
AND PLACES it IN THE NEW OF-him memorial-vault WHICH great stone to the door of the
tomb sepulchre, and departed.
elatomhsen en th petra kai proskulisas liqon megan th

elatomEsen en tE petra kai proskulisas lithon megan tE
G2998 G1722 G3588 G4073 G2532 G4351 G3037 G3173 G3588
vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m t_ Dat Sg f
he-quarriES IN THE ROCK AND TOWARD-ROLLing STONE GREAT to-THE
rolling-on large
qura tou mnhmeiou aphlqen

thura tou mnEmeiou apElthen
G2374 G3588 G3419 G565
n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
DOOR OF-THE memorial-vault he-FROM-CAME
tomb he-came-away
27:61 hn de ekei maria h magdalhnh kai h allh maria 61 And there was Mary
En de ekei maria hE magdalEnE kai hE allE maria
G2258 G1161 G1563 G3137 G3588 G3094 G2532 G3588 G243 G3137
Magdalene, and the other
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj Adv n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Mary, sitting over against the
WAS YET there MARY THE MAGDALENE AND THE other MARY sepulchre.
kaqhmenai apenanti tou tafou

kathEmenai apenanti tou taphou
G2521 G561 G3588 G5028
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl f Adv t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
sittING FROM-IN-INSTEAD OF-THE sepulcher
in-front-of the
27:62 th de epaurion htis estin meta thn paraskeuhn 62 Now the next day, that
tE de epaurion hEtis estin meta tEn paraskeuEn
G3588 G1161 G1887 G3748 G2076 G3326 G3588 G3904
followed the day of the
t_ Dat Sg f Conj Adv pr Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f preparation, the chief priests
to-THE YET ON-MORROW WHICH-ANY IS after THE preparation and Pharisees came together
which-any unto Pilate,
sunhcqhsan oi arciereis kai oi farisaioi pros pilaton

sunEchthEsan hoi archiereis kai hoi pharisaioi pros pilaton
G4863 G3588 G749 G2532 G3588 G5330 G4314 G4091
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Prep n_ Acc Sg m
WERE-TOGETHER-LED THE chief-SACRED-ones AND THE PHARISEES TOWARD PILATE
were-gathered chief-priests
27:63 legontes kurie emnhsqhmen oti ekeinos o planos 63 Saying, Sir, we remember
legontes kurie emnEsthEmen hoti ekeinos ho planos
G3004 G2962 G3415 G3754 G1565 G3588 G4108
that that deceiver said, while
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Voc Sg m vi Aor Pas 1 Pl Conj pd Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m he was yet alive, After three
sayING master ! WE-ARE-REMINDED that that-One THE STRAYer days I will rise again.
Lord ! that deceiver
eipen eti zwn meta treis hmeras egeiromai

eipen eti zOn meta treis hEmeras egeiromai
G2036 G2089 G2198 G3326 G5140 G2250 G1453
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep a_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
said STILL LIVING after THREE DAYS I-SHALL-BE-beING-ROUSED
27:64 keleuson oun asfalisqhnai ton tafon ews ths triths hmeras 64 Command therefore that the
keleuson oun asphalisthEnai ton taphon heOs tEs tritEs hEmeras
G2753 G3767 G805 G3588 G5028 G2193 G3588 G5154 G2250
sepulchre be made sure until
vm Aor Act 2 Sg Conj vn Aor Pas t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f the third day, lest his disciples
ORDER THEN TO-BE-UN-TOTTERED THE sepulcher TILL OF-THE third DAY come by night, and steal him
order-you ! to-be-secured the away, and say unto the people,
He is risen from the dead: so
mhpote elqontes oi maqhtai autou nuktos kleywsin auton the last error shall be worse
mEpote elthontes hoi mathEtai autou nuktos klepsOsin auton than the first.
G3379 G2064 G3588 G3101 G846 G3571 G2813 G846
Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg f vs Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
NO-?-when COMING THE LEARNers OF-Him OF-NIGHT SHOULD-BE-stealING Him
lest-at-some-time disciples by-night
kai eipwsin tw law hgerqh apo twn nekrwn kai

kai eipOsin tO laO EgerthE apo tOn nekrOn kai
G2532 G2036 G3588 G2992 G1453 G575 G3588 G3498 G2532
Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m Conj
AND THEY-MAY-BE-sayING to-THE PEOPLE He-WAS-ROUSED FROM THE DEAD-ones AND
may-be-saying dead-ones
estai h escath planh ceirwn ths prwths

estai hE eschatE planE cheirOn tEs prOtEs
G2071 G3588 G2078 G4106 G5501 G3588 G4413
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f Cmp t_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f
SHALL-BE THE LAST STRAYing WORSE OF-THE BEFORE-most
deception than-the first
27:65 efh de autois o pilatos ecete koustwdian 65 Pilate said unto them, Ye
ephE de autois ho pilatos echete koustOdian
G5346 G1161 G846 G3588 G4091 G2192 G2892
have a watch: go your way,
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg f make [it] as sure as ye can.
AVERRed YET to-them THE PILATE YE-ARE-HAVING CUSTODIAN (Latin)
detail
upagete asfalisasqe ws oidate

hupagete asphalisasthe hOs oidate
G5217 G805 G5613 G1492
vm Pres Act 2 Pl vm Aor midD 2 Pl Adv vi Perf Act 2 Pl
BE-UNDER-LEADING UN-TOTTER AS YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED
be-ye-going-away ! secure-ye ! ye-are-aware
27:66 oi de poreuqentes hsfalisanto ton tafon sfragisantes 66 So they went, and made the
hoi de poreuthentes Esphalisanto ton taphon sphragisantes
G3588 G1161 G4198 G805 G3588 G5028 G4972
sepulchre sure, sealing the
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m stone, and setting a watch.
THE YET BEING-GONE THEY-UN-TOTTER THE sepulcher SEALing
they-secure
ton liqon meta ths koustwdias

ton lithon meta tEs koustOdias
G3588 G3037 G3326 G3588 G2892
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
THE STONE WITH THE CUSTODIAN (Latin)
detail
Matthew 28
28:1 oye de sabbatwn th epifwskoush eis mian sabbatwn hlqen 1 . In the end of the sabbath, as
opse de sabbatOn tE epiphOskousE eis mian sabbatOn Elthen
G3796 G1161 G4521 G3588 G2020 G1519 G1520 G4521 G2064
it began to dawn toward the
Adv Conj n_ Gen Pl n t_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Dat Sg f Prep a_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Pl n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg first [day] of the week, came
evening YET OF-SABBATHS to-THE ON-LIGHTING INTO ONE OF-SABBATHS CAME Mary Magdalene and the other
lighting-up one-day Mary to see the sepulchre.
maria h magdalhnh kai h allh maria qewrhsai ton

maria hE magdalEnE kai hE allE maria theOrEsai ton
G3137 G3588 G3094 G2532 G3588 G243 G3137 G2334 G3588
n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg m
MARY THE MAGDALENE AND THE other MARY TO-behold THE
tafon
taphon
G5028
n_ Acc Sg m
sepulcher
28:2 kai idou seismos egeneto megas aggelos gar kuriou 2 And, behold, there was a
kai idou seismos egeneto megas aggelos gar kuriou
G2532 G2400 G4578 G1096 G3173 G32 G1063 G2962
great earthquake: for the angel
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m of the Lord descended from
AND BE-PERCEIVING QUAKing BECAME GREAT MESSENGER for OF-Master heaven, and came and rolled
lo ! earthquake occurred of-Lord back the stone from the door,
and sat upon it.
katabas ex ouranou proselqwn apekulisen ton liqon apo
katabas ex ouranou proselthOn apekulisen ton lithon apo
G2597 G1537 G3772 G4334 G617 G3588 G3037 G575
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep
DOWN-STEPPing OUT OF-heaven TOWARD-COMING FROM-ROLLS THE STONE FROM
descending approaching rolls-away
ths quras kai ekaqhto epanw autou

tEs thuras kai ekathEto epanO autou
G3588 G2374 G2532 G2521 G1883 G846
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Adv pp Gen Sg m
THE DOOR AND sat ON-UP OF-it
upon him it
28:3 hn de h idea autou ws astraph kai to enduma 3 His countenance was like
En de hE idea autou hOs astrapE kai to enduma
G2258 G1161 G3588 G2397 G846 G5613 G796 G2532 G3588 G1742
lightning, and his raiment
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m Adv n_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n white as snow:
WAS YET THE PERCEPtion OF-him AS GLEAM-FLING AND THE IN-SLIP
lightning apparel
autou leukon wsei ciwn

autou leukon hOsei chiOn
G846 G3022 G5616 G5510
pp Gen Sg m a_ Nom Sg n Adv n_ Nom Sg f
OF-him WHITE AS-IF SNOW
28:4 apo de tou fobou autou eseisqhsan oi thrountes kai 4 And for fear of him the
apo de tou phobou autou eseisthEsan hoi tErountes kai
G575 G1161 G3588 G5401 G846 G4579 G3588 G5083 G2532
keepers did shake, and became
Prep Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj as dead [men].
FROM YET THE FEAR OF-him ARE-QUAKED THE ones-KEEPING AND
ones-keeping
egenonto wsei nekroi

egenonto hOsei nekroi
G1096 G5616 G3498
vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl Adv a_ Nom Pl m
BECAME AS-IF DEAD-ones
dead-ones
28:5 apokriqeis de o aggelos eipen tais gunaixin mh 5 And the angel answered and
apokritheis de ho aggelos eipen tais gunaixin mE
G611 G1161 G3588 G32 G2036 G3588 G1135 G3361
said unto the women, Fear not
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f Part Neg ye: for I know that ye seek
answerING YET THE MESSENGER said to-THE WOMEN NO Jesus, which was crucified.
fobeisqe umeis oida gar oti ihsoun ton estaurwmenon

phobeisthe humeis oida gar hoti iEsoun ton estaurOmenon
G5399 G5210 G1492 G1063 G3754 G2424 G3588 G4717
vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl pp 2 Nom Pl vi Perf Act 1 Sg Conj Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m
BE-FEARING YOU(p) I-HAVE-PERCEIVED for that JESUS THE One-HAVING-been-impalED
be-ye-fearing ! ye I-am-aware one-having-been-crucified
zhteite
zEteite
G2212
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
YE-ARE-SEEKING
Matthew 28
28:6 ouk estin wde hgerqh gar kaqws eipen deute 6 He is not here: for he is risen,
ouk estin hOde EgerthE gar kathOs eipen deute
G3756 G2076 G5602 G1453 G1063 G2531 G2036 G1205
as he said. Come, see the place
Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vm txx vxx 2 Pl where the Lord lay.
NOT He-IS here He-WAS-ROUSED for according-AS He-said HITHER
hither-ye !
idete ton topon opou ekeito o kurios

idete ton topon hopou ekeito ho kurios
G1492 G3588 G5117 G3699 G2749 G3588 G2962
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Adv vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
BE-PERCEIVING THE PLACE THE-?-where LAY THE Master
be-ye-perceiving ! wheree Lord
28:7 kai tacu poreuqeisai eipate tois maqhtais autou oti 7 And go quickly, and tell his
kai tachu poreutheisai eipate tois mathEtais autou hoti
G2532 G5035 G4198 G2036 G3588 G3101 G846 G3754
disciples that he is risen from
Conj Adv vp Aor pasD Nom Pl f vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj the dead; and, behold, he goeth
AND SWIFTLY BEING-GONE say to-THE LEARNers OF-Him that before you into Galilee; there
say-ye ! disciples shall ye see him: lo, I have told
you.
hgerqh apo twn nekrwn kai idou proagei umas eis
EgerthE apo tOn nekrOn kai idou proagei humas eis
G1453 G575 G3588 G3498 G2532 G2400 G4254 G5209 G1519
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl Prep
He-WAS-ROUSED FROM THE DEAD-ones AND BE-PERCEIVING He-IS-BEFORE-LEADING YOU(p) INTO
dead-ones lo ! he-is-preceding ye
thn galilaian ekei auton oyesqe idou eipon umin

tEn galilaian ekei auton opsesthe idou eipon humin
G3588 G1056 G1563 G846 G3700 G2400 G2036 G5213
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Adv pp Acc Sg m vi Fut midD 2 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
THE GALILEE there Him YE-SHALL-BE-VIEWING BE-PERCEIVING I-said to-YOU(p)
ye-shall-be-seeing lo ! I-told ye
28:8 kai exelqousai tacu apo tou mnhmeiou meta fobou kai caras 8 And they departed quickly
kai exelthousai tachu apo tou mnEmeiou meta phobou kai charas
G2532 G1831 G5035 G575 G3588 G3419 G3326 G5401 G2532 G5479
from the sepulchre with fear
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl f Adv Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Prep n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg f and great joy; and did run to
AND OUT-COMING SWIFTLY FROM THE memorial-vault WITH FEAR AND JOY bring his disciples word.
coming-out tomb
megalhs edramon apaggeilai tois maqhtais autou

megalEs edramon apaggeilai tois mathEtais autou
G3173 G5143 G518 G3588 G3101 G846
a_ Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl vn Aor Act t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m
GREAT THEY-RAN TO-FROM-MESSAGE to-THE LEARNers OF-Him
to-report disciples
28:9 ws de eporeuonto apaggeilai tois maqhtais autou kai 9 And as they went to tell his
hOs de eporeuonto apaggeilai tois mathEtais autou kai
G5613 G1161 G4198 G518 G3588 G3101 G846 G2532
disciples, behold, Jesus met
Adv Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl vn Aor Act t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj them, saying, All hail. And
AS YET THEY-WENT TO-FROM-MESSAGE to-THE LEARNers OF-Him AND they came and held him by the
to-report disciples feet, and worshipped him.
idou o ihsous aphnthsen autais legwn cairete ai

idou ho iEsous apEntEsen autais legOn chairete hai
G2400 G3588 G2424 G528 G846 G3004 G5463 G3588
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Nom Pl f
BE-PERCEIVING THE JESUS FROM-meets to-them sayING BE-JOYING THE
lo ! meets them be-ye-rejoicing !
de proselqousai ekrathsan autou tous podas kai prosekunhsan

de proselthousai ekratEsan autou tous podas kai prosekunEsan
G1161 G4334 G2902 G846 G3588 G4228 G2532 G4352
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl f vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Gen Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
YET ones-TOWARD-COMING HOLD OF-Him THE FEET AND THEY-worship
approaching they-hold
autw
autO
G846
pp Dat Sg m
to-Him
him
28:10 tote legei autais o ihsous mh fobeisqe upagete 10 Then said Jesus unto them,
tote legei autais ho iEsous mE phobeisthe hupagete
G5119 G3004 G846 G3588 G2424 G3361 G5399 G5217
Be not afraid: go tell my
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl f t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl brethren that they go into
then IS-sayING to-them THE JESUS NO BE-FEARING BE-UNDER-LEADING Galilee, and there shall they see
be-ye-fearing ! be-ye-going-away ! me.
apaggeilate tois adelfois mou ina apelqwsin eis thn

apaggeilate tois adelphois mou hina apelthOsin eis tEn
G518 G3588 G80 G3450 G2443 G565 G1519 G3588
vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f
FROM-MESSAGE to-THE brothers OF-ME THAT THEY-MAY-BE-FROM-COMING INTO THE
report-ye ! brethren they-may-be-coming-away
Matthew 28
galilaian kakei me oyontai

galilaian kakei me opsontai
G1056 G2546 G3165 G3700
n_ Acc Sg f Adv Con pp 1 Acc Sg vi Fut midD 3 Pl
GALILEE AND-there ME THEY-SHALL-BE-VIEWING
28:11 poreuomenwn de autwn idou tines ths koustwdias 11 . Now when they were
poreuomenOn de autOn idou tines tEs koustOdias
G4198 G1161 G846 G2400 G5100 G3588 G2892
going, behold, some of the
vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl f Conj pp Gen Pl f vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg px Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f watch came into the city, and
OF-GOING YET OF-them BE-PERCEIVING ANY OF-THE CUSTODIAN (Latin) shewed unto the chief priests
lo ! some detail all the things that were done.
elqontes eis thn polin aphggeilan tois arciereusin apanta ta

elthontes eis tEn polin apEggeilan tois archiereusin hapanta ta
G2064 G1519 G3588 G4172 G518 G3588 G749 G537 G3588
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m a_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Pl n
COMING INTO THE city FROM-MESSAGE to-THE chief-SACRED-ones ALL(emph.) THE
report chief-priests
genomena
genomena
G1096
vp 2Aor midD Acc Pl n
BECOMING(p)
things-occurring
28:12 kai sunacqentes meta twn presbuterwn sumboulion te 12 And when they were
kai sunachthentes meta tOn presbuterOn sumboulion te
G2532 G4863 G3326 G3588 G4245 G4824 G5037
assembled with the elders, and
Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m n_ Acc Sg n Part had taken counsel, they gave
AND BEING-TOGETHER-LED WITH THE SENIORS TOGETHER-COUNSEL BESIDES large money unto the soldiers,
being-gathered elders consultation
labontes arguria ikana edwkan tois stratiwtais

labontes arguria hikana edOkan tois stratiOtais
G2983 G694 G2425 G1325 G3588 G4757
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
GETTING SILVERS enough THEY-GIVE to-THE WARriors
holding pieces-of-silver considerable soldiers
28:13 legontes eipate oti oi maqhtai autou nuktos elqontes 13 Saying, Say ye, His
legontes eipate hoti hoi mathEtai autou nuktos elthontes
G3004 G2036 G3754 G3588 G3101 G846 G3571 G2064
disciples came by night, and
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m stole him [away] while we
sayING say that THE LEARNers OF-Him OF-NIGHT COMING slept.
say-ye ! disciples
ekleyan auton hmwn koimwmenwn

eklepsan auton hEmOn koimOmenOn
G2813 G846 G2257 G2837
vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Pl vp Pres Pas Gen Pl m
steal Him OF-US reposING
28:14 kai ean akousqh touto epi tou hgemonos hmeis 14 And if this come to the
kai ean akousthE touto epi tou hEdemonos hEmeis
G2532 G1437 G191 G5124 G1909 G3588 G2232 G2249
governor's ears, we will
Conj Cond vs Aor Pas 3 Sg pd Nom Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Nom Pl persuade him, and secure you.
AND IF-EVER SHOULD-BE-BEING-HEARD this ON THE LEADer WE
governor
peisomen auton kai umas amerimnous poihsomen

peisomen auton kai humas amerimnous poiEsomen
G3982 G846 G2532 G5209 G275 G4160
vi Fut Act 1 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj pp 2 Acc Pl a_ Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 1 Pl
SHALL-BE-PERSUADING him AND YOU(p) UN-anxious WE-SHALL-BE-makING
ye without-worry
28:15 oi de labontes ta arguria epoihsan ws edidacqhsan 15 So they took the money, and
hoi de labontes ta arguria epoiEsan hOs edidachthEsan
G3588 G1161 G2983 G3588 G694 G4160 G5613 G1321
did as they were taught: and
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Pl Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Pl this saying is commonly
THE YET GETTING THE SILVERS THEY-DO AS THEY-WERE-TAUGHT reported among the Jews until
pieces-of-silver this day.
kai diefhmisqh o logos outos para ioudaiois mecri ths

kai diephEmisthE ho logos houtos para ioudaiois mechri tEs
G2532 G1310 G3588 G3056 G3778 G3844 G2453 G3360 G3588
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m Prep a_ Dat Pl m Adv t_ Gen Sg f
AND IS-THRU-AVERizED THE saying this BESIDE JUDA-ans UNTO THE
is-blazed-abroad word Jews
shmeron
sEmeron
G4594
Adv
toDAY
Matthew 28 - Mark 1
28:16 oi de endeka maqhtai eporeuqhsan eis thn galilaian eis 16 . Then the eleven disciples
hoi de hendeka mathEtai eporeuthEsan eis tEn galilaian eis
G3588 G1161 G1733 G3101 G4198 G1519 G3588 G1056 G1519
went away into Galilee, into a
t_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor pasD 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep mountain where Jesus had
THE YET ONE-TEN LEARNers WERE-GONE INTO THE GALILEE INTO appointed them.
eleven disciples went
to oros ou etaxato autois o ihsous

to oros hou etaxato autois ho iEsous
G3588 G3735 G3757 G5021 G846 G3588 G2424
t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Adv vi Aor Mid 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
THE mountain where SETS to-them THE JESUS
arranges-with them
28:17 kai idontes auton prosekunhsan autw oi de edistasan 17 And when they saw him,
kai idontes auton prosekunEsan autO hoi de edistasan
G2532 G1492 G846 G4352 G846 G3588 G1161 G1365
they worshipped him: but some
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl doubted.
AND PERCEIVING Him THEY-worship to-Him THE YET THEY-TWO-STAND
him they-hesitate
28:18 kai proselqwn o ihsous elalhsen autois legwn 18 And Jesus came and spake
kai proselthOn ho iEsous elalEsen autois legOn
G2532 G4334 G3588 G2424 G2980 G846 G3004
unto them, saying, All power is
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m given unto me in heaven and in
AND TOWARD-COMING THE JESUS TALKS to-them sayING earth.
approaching speaks
edoqh moi pasa exousia en ouranw kai epi ghs

edothE moi pasa exousia en ouranO kai epi gEs
G1325 G3427 G3956 G1849 G1722 G3772 G2532 G1909 G1093
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep n_ Dat Sg m Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg f
WAS-GIVEN to-ME EVERY authority IN heaven AND ON LAND
all earth
28:19 poreuqentes oun maqhteusate panta ta eqnh baptizontes autous 19 Go ye therefore, and teach
poreuthentes oun mathEteusate panta ta ethnE baptizontes autous
G4198 G3767 G3100 G3956 G3588 G1484 G907 G846
all nations, baptizing them in
vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m Conj vm Aor Act 2 Pl a_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Pl m the name of the Father, and of
BEING-GONE THEN make-LEARNers ALL THE NATIONS DIPizING them the Son, and of the Holy
disciple-ye ! baptizing Ghost:
eis to onoma tou patros kai tou uiou kai tou agiou
eis to onoma tou patros kai tou huiou kai tou hagiou
G1519 G3588 G3686 G3588 G3962 G2532 G3588 G5207 G2532 G3588 G40
Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n
INTO THE NAME OF-THE FATHER AND OF-THE SON AND OF-THE HOLY
pneumatos
pneumatos
G4151
n_ Gen Sg n
spirit
28:20 didaskontes autous threin panta osa eneteilamhn umin kai 20 Teaching them to observe
didaskontes autous tErein panta hosa eneteilamEn humin kai
G1321 G846 G5083 G3956 G3745 G1781 G5213 G2532
all things whatsoever I have
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Pl m vn Pres Act a_ Acc Pl n pk Acc Pl n vi Aor midD 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj commanded you: and, lo, I am
TEACHING them TO-BE-KEEPING ALL as-much-as I-direct to-YOU(p) AND with you alway, [even] unto
whatever ye the end of the world. Amen.
idou egw meq umwn eimi pasas tas hmeras ews ths
idou egO meth humOn eimi pasas tas hEmeras heOs tEs
G2400 G1473 G3326 G5216 G1510 G3956 G3588 G2250 G2193 G3588
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Nom Sg Prep pp 2 Gen Pl vi Pres vxx 1 Sg a_ Acc Pl f t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Conj t_ Gen Sg f
BE-PERCEIVING I WITH YOU(p) AM ALL THE DAYS TILL OF-THE
lo ! ye the
sunteleias tou aiwnos amhn

sunteleias tou aiOnos amEn
G4930 G3588 G165 G281
n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Hebrew
TOGETHER-FINISH OF-THE eon AMEN
conclusion
Mark 1
Mark
1:1 arch tou euaggeliou ihsou cristou uiou tou qeou 1 . The beginning of the gospel
archE tou euaggeliou iEsou christou huiou tou theou
G746 G3588 G2098 G2424 G5547 G5207 G3588 G2316
of Jesus Christ, the Son of
n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m God;
ORIGINal OF-THE WELL-MESSAGE OF-JESUS ANOINTED SON OF-THE God
beginning Christ
1:2 ws gegraptai en tois profhtais idou egw apostellw 2 As it is written in the

hOs gegraptai en tois prophEtais idou egO apostellO
G5613 G1125 G1722 G3588 G4396 G2400 G1473 G649
prophets, Behold, I send my
Adv vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg messenger before thy face,
AS it-HAS-been-WRITTEN IN THE BEFORE-AVERers BE-PERCEIVING I AM-commissionING which shall prepare thy way
prophets lo ! am-dispatching before thee.
ton aggelon mou pro proswpou sou os kataskeuasei

ton aggelon mou pro prosOpou sou hos kataskeuasei
G3588 G32 G3450 G4253 G4383 G4675 G3739 G2680
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Prep n_ Gen Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg pr Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg
THE MESSENGER OF-ME BEFORE face OF-YOU WHO SHALL-BE-constructING
thn odon sou emprosqen sou

tEn hodon sou emprosthen sou
G3588 G3598 G4675 G1715 G4675
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Prep pp 2 Gen Sg
THE WAY OF-YOU IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-YOU
1:3 fwnh bowntos en th erhmw etoimasate thn odon kuriou 3 The voice of one crying in
phOnE boOntos en tE erEmO hetoimasate tEn hodon kuriou
G5456 G994 G1722 G3588 G2048 G2090 G3588 G3598 G2962
the wilderness, Prepare ye the
n_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Act Gen Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m way of the Lord, make his
SOUND OF-IMPLORING-one IN THE DESOLATE make-READY THE WAY OF-Master paths straight.
voice of-one-imploring wilderness make-ready-ye ! road of-Lord
euqeias poieite tas tribous autou

eutheias poieite tas tribous autou
G2117 G4160 G3588 G5147 G846
a_ Acc Pl f vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Sg m
straight BE-makING THE WEAR (ways) OF-Him
be-ye-making ! highways
1:4 egeneto iwannhs baptizwn en th erhmw kai khrusswn 4 John did baptize in the
egeneto iOannEs baptizOn en tE erEmO kai kErussOn
G1096 G2491 G907 G1722 G3588 G2048 G2532 G2784
wilderness, and preach the
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m baptism of repentance for the
BECAME JOHN one-DIPizING IN THE DESOLATE AND PROCLAIMING remission of sins.
came-to-be one-baptizing wilderness heralding
baptisma metanoias eis afesin amartiwn

baptisma metanoias eis aphesin hamartiOn
G908 G3341 G1519 G859 G266
n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Pl f
DIPism OF-after-MIND INTO FROM-LETTing OF-misses
baptism of-repentance pardon of-sins
1:5 kai exeporeueto pros auton pasa h ioudaia cwra kai 5 And there went out unto him
kai exeporeueto pros auton pasa hE ioudaia chOra kai
G2532 G1607 G4314 G846 G3956 G3588 G2449 G5561 G2532
all the land of Judaea, and they
Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg m a_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj of Jerusalem, and were all
AND OUT-WENT TOWARD him EVERY THE JUDEA SPACE AND baptized of him in the river of
went-out entire province Jordan, confessing their sins.
oi ierosolumitai kai ebaptizonto pantes en tw iordanh potamw

hoi ierosolumitai kai ebaptizonto pantes en tO iordanE potamO
G3588 G2415 G2532 G907 G3956 G1722 G3588 G2446 G4215
t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Impf Pas 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
THE JERUSALEMites AND THEY-were-DIPizED ALL IN THE JORDAN river
they-were-baptized
up autou exomologoumenoi tas amartias autwn

hup autou exomologoumenoi tas hamartias autOn
G5259 G846 G1843 G3588 G266 G846
Prep pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Pl m
by him OUT-avowING THE misses OF-them
confessing sins
1:6 hn de iwannhs endedumenos tricas kamhlou kai zwnhn 6 And John was clothed with
En de iOannEs endedumenos trichas kamElou kai zOnEn
G2258 G1161 G2491 G1746 G2359 G2574 G2532 G2223
camel's hair, and with a girdle
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Perf Mid Nom Sg m n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg f of a skin about his loins; and
WAS YET JOHN HAVING-IN-SLIPPED HAIR OF-CAMEL AND GIRDle he did eat locusts and wild
having-dressed hairs honey;
Mark 1
dermatinhn peri thn osfun autou kai esqiwn akridas kai meli
dermatinEn peri tEn osphun autou kai esthiOn akridas kai meli
G1193 G4012 G3588 G3751 G846 G2532 G2068 G200 G2532 G3192
a_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Pl f Conj n_ Acc Sg n
SKIN ABOUT THE LOIN OF-him AND EATING LOCUSTS AND HONEY
leather
agrion
agrion
G66
a_ Acc Sg n
FIELD
wild
1:7 kai ekhrussen legwn ercetai o iscuroteros mou 7 And preached, saying, There
kai ekErussen legOn erchetai ho ischuroteros mou
G2532 G2784 G3004 G2064 G3588 G2478 G3450
cometh one mightier than I
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Cmp pp 1 Gen Sg after me, the latchet of whose
AND he-PROCLAIMED sayING IS-COMING THE One-STRONGER OF-ME shoes I am not worthy to stoop
he-heralded stronger-one down and unloose.
opisw mou ou ouk eimi ikanos kuyas lusai ton

opisO mou hou ouk eimi hikanos kupsas lusai ton
G3694 G3450 G3739 G3756 G1510 G2425 G2955 G3089 G3588
Adv pp 1 Gen Sg pr Gen Sg m Part Neg vi Pres vxx 1 Sg a_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg m
BEHIND ME OF-WHOM NOT I-AM enough BENDing TO-LOOSE THE
after competent stooping
imanta twn upodhmatwn autou

himanta tOn hupodEmatOn autou
G2438 G3588 G5266 G846
n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n pp Gen Sg m
STRAP OF-THE sandals OF-Him
thong
1:8 egw men ebaptisa umas en udati autos de baptisei 8I indeed have baptized you
egO men ebaptisa humas en hudati autos de baptisei
G1473 G3303 G907 G5209 G1722 G5204 G846 G1161 G907
with water: but he shall baptize
pp 1 Nom Sg Part vi Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl Prep n_ Dat Sg n pp Nom Sg m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg you with the Holy Ghost.
I INDEED DIPize YOU(p) IN water He YET SHALL-BE-DIPizING
baptize ye shall-be-baptizing
umas en pneumati agiw

humas en pneumati hagiO
G5209 G1722 G4151 G40
pp 2 Acc Pl Prep n_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n
YOU(p) IN spirit HOLY
ye
1:9 kai egeneto en ekeinais tais hmerais hlqen ihsous apo nazareq 9. And it came to pass in those
kai egeneto en ekeinais tais hEmerais Elthen iEsous apo nazareth
G2532 G1096 G1722 G1565 G3588 G2250 G2064 G2424 G575 G3478
days, that Jesus came from
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep pd Dat Pl f t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Prep ni proper Nazareth of Galilee, and was
AND it-BECAME IN those THE DAYS CAME JESUS FROM NAZARETH baptized of John in Jordan.
it-occurred
ths galilaias kai ebaptisqh upo iwannou eis ton iordanhn

tEs galilaias kai ebaptisthE hupo iOannou eis ton iordanEn
G3588 G1056 G2532 G907 G5259 G2491 G1519 G3588 G2446
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE GALILEE AND He-IS-DIPizED by JOHN INTO THE JORDAN
is-baptized
1:10 kai euqews anabainwn apo tou udatos eiden scizomenous 10 And straightway coming up
kai eutheOs anabainOn apo tou hudatos eiden schizomenous
G2532 G2112 G305 G575 G3588 G5204 G1492 G4977
out of the water, he saw the
Conj Adv vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vp Pres Pas Acc Pl m heavens opened, and the Spirit
AND immediately UP-STEPPING FROM THE water he-PERCEIVED beING-SPLIT like a dove descending upon
stepping-up being-rent him:
tous ouranous kai to pneuma wsei peristeran katabainon ep

tous ouranous kai to pneuma hOsei peristeran katabainon ep
G3588 G3772 G2532 G3588 G4151 G5616 G4058 G2597 G1909
t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Adv n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Acc Sg n Prep
THE heavens AND THE spirit AS-IF DOVE DOWN-STEPPING ON
descending
auton
auton
G846
pp Acc Sg m
Him
1:11 kai fwnh egeneto ek twn ouranwn su ei o 11 And there came a voice
kai phOnE egeneto ek tOn ouranOn su ei ho
G2532 G5456 G1096 G1537 G3588 G3772 G4771 G1488 G3588
from heaven, [saying], Thou
Conj n_ Nom Sg f vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m art my beloved Son, in whom I
AND SOUND BECAME OUT OF-THE heavens YOU ARE THE am well pleased.
voice
Mark 1
uios mou o agaphtos en w eudokhsa

huios mou ho agapEtos en hO eudokEsa
G5207 G3450 G3588 G27 G1722 G3739 G2106
n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Prep pr Dat Sg m vi Aor Act 1 Sg
SON OF-ME THE beLOVED IN WHOM I-WELL-SEEM
I-delight
1:12 kai euqus to pneuma auton ekballei eis thn erhmon 12 And immediately the Spirit
kai euthus to pneuma auton ekballei eis tEn erEmon
G2532 G2117 G3588 G4151 G846 G1544 G1519 G3588 G2048
driveth him into the
Conj Adv t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f wilderness.
AND straightway THE spirit Him IS-OUT-CASTING INTO THE DESOLATE
is-ejecting wilderness
1:13 kai hn ekei en th erhmw hmeras tessarakonta peirazomenos 13 And he was there in the
kai En ekei en tE erEmO hEmeras tessarakonta peirazomenos
G2532 G2258 G1563 G1722 G3588 G2048 G2250 G5062 G3985
wilderness forty days, tempted
Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Adv Prep t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f n_ Acc Pl f a_ Nom vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m of Satan; and was with the
AND He-WAS there IN THE DESOLATE DAYS FOUR-TY beING-triED wild beasts; and the angels
wilderness forty ministered unto him.
upo tou satana kai hn meta twn qhriwn kai oi

hupo tou satana kai En meta tOn thEriOn kai hoi
G5259 G3588 G4567 G2532 G2258 G3326 G3588 G2342 G2532 G3588
Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n Conj t_ Nom Pl m
by THE SATAN (adversary) AND He-WAS WITH THE WILD-BEASTS AND THE
Satan
aggeloi dihkonoun autw

aggeloi diEkonoun autO
G32 G1247 G846
n_ Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
MESSENGERS THRU-SERVED to-Him
served him
1:14 meta de to paradoqhnai ton iwannhn hlqen o 14 . Now after that John was
meta de to paradothEnai ton iOannEn Elthen ho
G3326 G1161 G3588 G3860 G3588 G2491 G2064 G3588
put in prison, Jesus came into
Prep Conj t_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Pas t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m Galilee, preaching the gospel
after YET THE TO-BE-BESIDE-GIVEN THE JOHN CAME THE of the kingdom of God,
to-be-given-up
ihsous eis thn galilaian khrusswn to euaggelion ths

iEsous eis tEn galilaian kErussOn to euaggelion tEs
G2424 G1519 G3588 G1056 G2784 G3588 G2098 G3588
n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg f
JESUS INTO THE GALILEE PROCLAIMING THE WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
heralding
basileias tou qeou

basileias tou theou
G932 G3588 G2316
n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
KINGdom OF-THE God
1:15 kai legwn oti peplhrwtai o kairos kai hggiken h 15 And saying, The time is
kai legOn hoti peplErOtai ho kairos kai Eggiken hE
G2532 G3004 G3754 G4137 G3588 G2540 G2532 G1448 G3588
fulfilled, and the kingdom of
Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj vi Perf Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f God is at hand: repent ye, and
AND sayING that HAS-been-FILLED THE SEASON AND HAS-NEARED THE believe the gospel.
has-been-fulfilled era has-drawn-near
basileia tou qeou metanoeite kai pisteuete en tw euaggeliw

basileia tou theou metanoeite kai pisteuete en tO euaggeliO
G932 G3588 G2316 G3340 G2532 G4100 G1722 G3588 G2098
n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n
KINGdom OF-THE God BE-after-MINDING AND BE-BELIEVING IN THE WELL-MESSAGE
be-ye-repenting ! be-ye-believing !
1:16 peripatwn de para thn qalassan ths galilaias eiden 16 Now as he walked by the
peripatOn de para tEn thalassan tEs galilaias eiden
G4043 G1161 G3844 G3588 G2281 G3588 G1056 G1492
sea of Galilee, he saw Simon
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg and Andrew his brother casting
ABOUT-TREADING YET BESIDE THE SEA OF-THE GALILEE He-PERCEIVED a net into the sea: for they were
walking fishers.
simwna kai andrean ton adelfon autou ballontas amfiblhstron en

simOna kai andrean ton adelphon autou ballontas amphiblEstron en
G4613 G2532 G406 G3588 G80 G846 G906 G293 G1722
n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m n_ Acc Sg n Prep
SIMON AND ANDREW THE brother OF-him CASTING ENVELOPE-CASTer IN
purse-net
th qalassh hsan gar alieis

tE thalassE Esan gar halieis
G3588 G2281 G2258 G1063 G231
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj n_ Nom Pl m
THE SEA THEY-WERE for fishers
Mark 1
1:17 kai eipen autois o ihsous deute opisw mou kai 17 And Jesus said unto them,
kai eipen autois ho iEsous deute opisO mou kai
G2532 G2036 G846 G3588 G2424 G1205 G3694 G3450 G2532
Come ye after me, and I will
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vm txx vxx 2 Pl Adv pp 1 Gen Sg Conj make you to become fishers of
AND said to-them THE JESUS HITHER BEHIND ME AND men.
hither-ye ! after
poihsw umas genesqai alieis anqrwpwn

poiEsO humas genesthai halieis anthrOpOn
G4160 G5209 G1096 G231 G444
vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl vn 2Aor midD n_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
I-SHALL-BE-makING YOU(p) TO-BE-BECOMING fishers OF-humans
ye
1:18 kai euqews afentes ta diktua autwn hkolouqhsan autw 18 And straightway they
kai eutheOs aphentes ta diktua autOn EkolouthEsan autO
G2532 G2112 G863 G3588 G1350 G846 G190 G846
forsook their nets, and
Conj Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m followed him.
AND immediately FROM-LETTING THE NETS OF-them THEY-follow to-Him
leaving him
1:19 kai probas ekeiqen oligon eiden iakwbon ton tou 19 And when he had gone a
kai probas ekeithen oligon eiden iakObon ton tou
G2532 G4260 G1564 G3641 G1492 G2385 G3588 G3588
little further thence, he saw
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Adv Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m James the [son] of Zebedee,
AND BEFORE-STEPPing thence FEW He-PERCEIVED JACOBUS THE OF-THE and John his brother, who also
advancing slightly James were in the ship mending their
nets.
zebedaiou kai iwannhn ton adelfon autou kai autous en tw
zebedaiou kai iOannEn ton adelphon autou kai autous en tO
G2199 G2532 G2491 G3588 G80 G846 G2532 G846 G1722 G3588
n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m Conj pp Acc Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg n
ZEBEDEE AND JOHN THE brother OF-him AND them IN THE
also they
ploiw katartizontas ta diktua

ploiO katartizontas ta diktua
G4143 G2675 G3588 G1350
n_ Dat Sg n vp Pres Act Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
FLOATer DOWN-EQUIPPING THE NETS
ship adjusting
1:20 kai euqews ekalesen autous kai afentes ton patera autwn 20 And straightway he called
kai eutheOs ekalesen autous kai aphentes ton patera autOn
G2532 G2112 G2564 G846 G2532 G863 G3588 G3962 G846
them: and they left their father
Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Pl m Zebedee in the ship with the
AND immediately He-CALLS them AND FROM-LETTING THE FATHER OF-them hired servants, and went after
leaving him.
zebedaion en tw ploiw meta twn misqwtwn aphlqon opisw

zebedaion en tO ploiO meta tOn misthOtOn apElthon opisO
G2199 G1722 G3588 G4143 G3326 G3588 G3411 G565 G3694
n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Adv
ZEBEDEE IN THE FLOATer WITH THE HIRED-ones THEY-FROM-CAME BEHIND
ship hirelings they-came-away after
autou
autou
G846
pp Gen Sg m
Him
1:21 kai eisporeuontai eis kapernaoum kai euqews tois sabbasin 21 And they went into
kai eisporeuontai eis kapernaoum kai eutheOs tois sabbasin
G2532 G1531 G1519 G2584 G2532 G2112 G3588 G4521
Capernaum; and straightway
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep ni proper Conj Adv t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n on the sabbath day he entered
AND THEY-ARE-INTO-GOING INTO CAPERNAUM AND immediately to-THE SABBATHS into the synagogue, and taught.
they-are-going-into
eiselqwn eis thn sunagwghn edidasken

eiselthOn eis tEn sunagOgEn edidasken
G1525 G1519 G3588 G4864 G1321
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Impf Act 3 Sg
INTO-COMING INTO THE TOGETHER-LEAD He-TAUGHT
entering synagogue
1:22 kai exeplhssonto epi th didach autou hn gar 22 And they were astonished at
kai exeplEssonto epi tE didachE autou En gar
G2532 G1605 G1909 G3588 G1322 G846 G2258 G1063
his doctrine: for he taught them
Conj vi Impf Pas 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj as one that had authority, and
AND THEY-were-astonishED ON THE TEACHing OF-Him He-WAS for not as the scribes.
didaskwn autous ws exousian ecwn kai ouc ws oi

didaskOn autous hOs exousian echOn kai ouch hOs hoi
G1321 G846 G5613 G1849 G2192 G2532 G3756 G5613 G3588
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m Adv n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj Part Neg Adv t_ Nom Pl m
TEACHING them AS authority HAVING AND NOT AS THE
one-having
Mark 1
grammateis
grammateis
G1122
n_ Nom Pl m
WRITers
scribes
1:23 kai hn en th sunagwgh autwn anqrwpos en pneumati 23 . And there was in their
kai En en tE sunagOgE autOn anthrOpos en pneumati
G2532 G2258 G1722 G3588 G4864 G846 G444 G1722 G4151
synagogue a man with an
Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Pl m n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg n unclean spirit; and he cried
AND WAS IN THE TOGETHER-LEAD OF-them human IN spirit out,
there-was synagogue
akaqartw kai anekraxen

akathartO kai anekraxen
G169 G2532 G349
a_ Dat Sg n Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
UN-clean AND he-UP-CRIES
unclean he-cries-out
1:24 legwn ea ti hmin kai soi ihsou nazarhne hlqes 24 Saying, Let [us] alone; what
legOn ea ti hEmin kai soi iEsou nazarEne Elthes
G3004 G1436 G5101 G2254 G2532 G4671 G2424 G3479 G2064
have we to do with thee, thou
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Inj pi Nom Sg n pp 1 Dat Pl Conj pp 2 Dat Sg n_ Voc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg Jesus of Nazareth? art thou
sayING HA ! ANY to-US AND to-YOU JESUS NAZAREAN ! YOU-CAME come to destroy us? I know
what ? Jesus ! thee who thou art, the Holy
One of God.
apolesai hmas oida se tis ei o agios
apolesai hEmas oida se tis ei ho hagios
G622 G2248 G1492 G4571 G5101 G1488 G3588 G40
vn Aor Act pp 1 Acc Pl vi Perf Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg pi Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
TO-destroy US I-HAVE-PERCEIVED YOU ANY ARE THE HOLY-One
I-am-aware-of who you-are holy-one
tou qeou
tou theou
G3588 G2316
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE God
1:25 kai epetimhsen autw o ihsous legwn fimwqhti kai 25 And Jesus rebuked him,
kai epetimEsen autO ho iEsous legOn phimOthEti kai
G2532 G2008 G846 G3588 G2424 G3004 G5392 G2532
saying, Hold thy peace, and
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm Aor Pas 2 Sg Conj come out of him.
AND rebukES to-him THE JESUS sayING BE-BEING-MUZZLED AND
him be-you-still !
exelqe ex autou
exelthe ex autou
G1831 G1537 G846
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m
BE-OUT-COMING OUT OF-him
be-you-coming-out !
1:26 kai sparaxan auton to pneuma to akaqarton kai 26 And when the unclean spirit
kai sparaxan auton to pneuma to akatharton kai
G2532 G4682 G846 G3588 G4151 G3588 G169 G2532
had torn him, and cried with a
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg n pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n Conj loud voice, he came out of him.
AND CONVULSing him THE spirit THE UN-clean AND
unclean
kraxan fwnh megalh exhlqen ex autou

kraxan phOnE megalE exElthen ex autou
G2896 G5456 G3173 G1831 G1537 G846
vp Aor Act Nom Sg n n_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m
CRYing to-SOUND GREAT it-OUT-CAME OUT OF-him
to-voice loud it-came-out
1:27 kai eqambhqhsan pantes wste suzhtein pros autous 27 And they were all amazed,
kai ethambEthEsan pantes hOste suzEtein pros autous
G2532 G2284 G3956 G5620 G4802 G4314 G846
insomuch that they questioned
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m Conj vn Pres Act Prep pp Acc Pl m among themselves, saying,
AND WERE-AWED ALL AS-BESIDES TO-BE-TOGETHER-SEEKING TOWARD them What thing is this? what new
so-as to-be-discussing themselves doctrine [is] this? for with
authority commandeth he even
legontas ti estin touto tis h didach h kainh the unclean spirits, and they do
legontas ti estin touto tis hE didachE hE kainE obey him.
G3004 G5101 G2076 G5124 G5101 G3588 G1322 G3588 G2537
vp Pres Act Acc Pl m pi Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pd Nom Sg n pi Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f
sayING ANY IS this ANY THE TEACHing THE NEW
what ? what ?
auth oti kat exousian kai tois pneumasin tois akaqartois

autE hoti kat exousian kai tois pneumasin tois akathartois
G3778 G3754 G2596 G1849 G2532 G3588 G4151 G3588 G169
pd Nom Sg f Conj Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n t_ Dat Pl n a_ Dat Pl n
this that according-to authority AND to-THE spirits THE UN-clean
also the unclean
Mark 1
epitassei kai upakouousin autw

epitassei kai hupakouousin autO
G2004 G2532 G5219 G846
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
He-IS-enjoinING AND THEY-ARE-obeyING to-Him
him
1:28 exhlqen de h akoh autou euqus eis olhn thn 28 And immediately his fame
exElthen de hE akoE autou euthus eis holEn tEn
G1831 G1161 G3588 G189 G846 G2117 G1519 G3650 G3588
spread abroad throughout all
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m Adv Prep a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f the region round about Galilee.
OUT-CAME YET THE HEARing OF-Him straightway INTO WHOLE THE
came-out tidings
pericwron ths galilaias

perichOron tEs galilaias
G4066 G3588 G1056
a_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
ABOUT-SPACE OF-THE GALILEE
country-about
1:29 kai euqews ek ths sunagwghs exelqontes hlqon eis thn 29 . And forthwith, when they
kai eutheOs ek tEs sunagOgEs exelthontes Elthon eis tEn
G2532 G2112 G1537 G3588 G4864 G1831 G2064 G1519 G3588
were come out of the
Conj Adv Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f synagogue, they entered into
AND immediately OUT OF-THE TOGETHER-LEAD OUT-COMING THEY-CAME INTO THE the house of Simon and
synagogue coming-out Andrew, with James and John.
oikian simwnos kai andreou meta iakwbou kai iwannou

oikian simOnos kai andreou meta iakObou kai iOannou
G3614 G4613 G2532 G406 G3326 G2385 G2532 G2491
n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m
HOME OF-SIMON AND ANDREW WITH JACOBUS AND JOHN
James
1:30 h de penqera simwnos katekeito puressousa kai euqews 30 But Simon's wife's mother
hE de penthera simOnos katekeito puressousa kai eutheOs
G3588 G1161 G3994 G4613 G2621 G4445 G2532 G2112
lay sick of a fever, and anon
t_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg m vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg f Conj Adv they tell him of her.
THE YET mother-IN-LAW OF-SIMON was-DOWN-LAID beING-feverish AND immediately
was-laid-down
legousin autw peri auths

legousin autO peri autEs
G3004 G846 G4012 G846
vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Prep pp Gen Sg f
THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him ABOUT her
they-are-telling him
1:31 kai proselqwn hgeiren authn krathsas ths ceiros auths 31 And he came and took her
kai proselthOn Egeiren autEn kratEsas tEs cheiros autEs
G2532 G4334 G1453 G846 G2902 G3588 G5495 G846
by the hand, and lifted her up;
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg f and immediately the fever left
AND TOWARD-COMING He-ROUSES her HOLDing OF-THE HAND OF-her her, and she ministered unto
approaching the them.
kai afhken authn o puretos euqews kai dihkonei autois

kai aphEken autEn ho puretos eutheOs kai diEkonei autois
G2532 G863 G846 G3588 G4446 G2112 G2532 G1247 G846
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Adv Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m
AND FROM-LETS her THE fever immediately AND she-THRU-SERVED to-them
leaves she-waited-on them
1:32 oyias de genomenhs ote edu o hlios eferon 32 And at even, when the sun
opsias de genomenEs hote edu ho hElios epheron
G3798 G1161 G1096 G3753 G1416 G3588 G2246 G5342
did set, they brought unto him
a_ Gen Sg f Conj vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Pl all that were diseased, and
OF-evening YET BECOMING when SLIPPED THE SUN THEY-CARRIED them that were possessed with
set they-brought devils.
pros auton pantas tous kakws econtas kai tous daimonizomenous

pros auton pantas tous kakOs echontas kai tous daimonizomenous
G4314 G846 G3956 G3588 G2560 G2192 G2532 G3588 G1139
Prep pp Acc Sg m a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m Adv vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m
TOWARD Him ALL THE-ones EVILly HAVING AND THE ones-beING-demonizED
the-ones illness ones-being-demonized
1:33 kai h polis olh episunhgmenh hn pros thn 33 And all the city was
kai hE polis holE episunEgmenE En pros tEn
G2532 G3588 G4172 G3650 G1996 G2258 G4314 G3588
gathered together at the door.
Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f vp Perf Pas Nom Sg f vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f
AND THE city WHOLE HAVING-been-ON-TOGETHER-LED WAS TOWARD THE
having-been-assembled
quran
thuran
G2374
n_ Acc Sg f
DOOR
Mark 1
1:34 kai eqerapeusen pollous kakws econtas poikilais nosois kai 34 And he healed many that
kai etherapeusen pollous kakOs echontas poikilais nosois kai
G2532 G2323 G4183 G2560 G2192 G4164 G3554 G2532
were sick of divers diseases,
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m Adv vp Pres Act Acc Pl m a_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f Conj and cast out many devils; and
AND He-curES MANY EVILly HAVING to-VARIOUS DISEASES AND suffered not the devils to
many-ones illness speak, because they knew him.
daimonia polla exebalen kai ouk hfien lalein ta daimonia oti

daimonia polla exebalen kai ouk Ephien lalein ta daimonia hoti
G1140 G4183 G1544 G2532 G3756 G863 G2980 G3588 G1140 G3754
n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Part Neg vi Impf Act 3 Sg vn Pres Act t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Conj
demons MANY He-OUT-CAST AND NOT He-FROM-LET TO-BE-TALKING THE demons that
he-cast-out he-let to-be-speaking
hdeisan auton
Edeisan auton
G1492 G846
vi Plup Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
THEY-HAD-PERCEIVED Him
they-were-aware-of
1:35 kai prwi ennucon lian anastas exhlqen kai aphlqen eis 35 And in the morning, rising
kai prOi ennuchon lian anastas exElthen kai apElthen eis
G2532 G4404 G1773 G3029 G450 G1831 G2532 G565 G1519
up a great while before day, he
Conj Adv Adv Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep went out, and departed into a
AND morning IN-NIGHT VERY UP-STANDing He-OUT-CAME AND FROM-CAME INTO solitary place, and there
in-the-morning rising he-came-out came-away prayed.
erhmon topon kakei proshuceto

erEmon topon kakei prosEucheto
G2048 G5117 G2546 G4336
a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Adv Con vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
DESOLATE PLACE AND-there He-prayED
1:36 kai katediwxan auton o simwn kai oi met autou 36 And Simon and they that
kai katediOxan auton ho simOn kai hoi met autou
G2532 G2614 G846 G3588 G4613 G2532 G3588 G3326 G846
were with him followed after
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m Prep pp Gen Sg m him.
AND DOWN-CHASE Him THE SIMON AND THE-ones WITH him
trail the-ones
1:37 kai eurontes auton legousin autw oti pantes zhtousin 37 And when they had found
kai heurontes auton legousin autO hoti pantes zEtousin
G2532 G2147 G846 G3004 G846 G3754 G3956 G2212
him, they said unto him, All
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl [men] seek for thee.
AND FINDING Him THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him that ALL ARE-SEEKING
are-saying
se
se
G4571
pp 2 Acc Sg
YOU
1:38 kai legei autois agwmen eis tas ecomenas kwmopoleis 38 And he said unto them, Let
kai legei autois agOmen eis tas echomenas kOmopoleis
G2532 G3004 G846 G71 G1519 G3588 G2192 G2969
us go into the next towns, that I
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vs Pres Act 1 Pl Prep t_ Acc Pl f vp Pres Pas Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f may preach there also: for
AND He-IS-sayING to-them WE-MAY-BE-LEADING INTO THE HAVING VILLAGE-cities therefore came I forth.
we-may-be-going next towns
ina kakei khruxw eis touto gar exelhluqa

hina kakei kEruxO eis touto gar exelElutha
G2443 G2546 G2784 G1519 G5124 G1063 G1831
Conj Adv Con vs Aor Act 1 Sg Prep pd Acc Sg n Conj vi Perf Act 1 Sg
THAT AND-there I-SHOULD-BE-PROCLAIMING INTO this for I-HAVE-OUT-COME
I-should-be-heralding I-have-come-out
1:39 kai hn khrusswn en tais sunagwgais autwn eis olhn 39 And he preached in their
kai En kErussOn en tais sunagOgais autOn eis holEn
G2532 G2258 G2784 G1722 G3588 G4864 G846 G1519 G3650
synagogues throughout all
Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pp Gen Pl m Prep a_ Acc Sg f Galilee, and cast out devils.
AND He-WAS PROCLAIMING IN THE TOGETHER-LEADS OF-them INTO WHOLE
heralding synagogues
thn galilaian kai ta daimonia ekballwn

tEn galilaian kai ta daimonia ekballOn
G3588 G1056 G2532 G3588 G1140 G1544
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
THE GALILEE AND THE demons OUT-CASTING
casting-out
1:40 kai ercetai pros auton lepros parakalwn auton kai 40 . And there came a leper to
kai erchetai pros auton lepros parakalOn auton kai
G2532 G2064 G4314 G846 G3015 G3870 G846 G2532
him, beseeching him, and
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m Conj kneeling down to him, and
AND IS-COMING TOWARD Him leper BESIDE-CALLING Him AND saying unto him, If thou wilt,
entreating thou canst make me clean.
Mark 1
gonupetwn auton kai legwn autw oti ean qelhs

gonupetOn auton kai legOn autO hoti ean thelEs
G1120 G846 G2532 G3004 G846 G3754 G1437 G2309
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg m Conj Cond vs Pres Act 2 Sg
KNEE-FALLING him AND sayING to-Him that IF-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-WILLING
falling-on-his-knees to-him
dunasai me kaqarisai
dunasai me katharisai
G1410 G3165 G2511
vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg vn Aor Act
YOU-ARE-ABLE ME TO-cleanse
you-can
1:41 o de ihsous splagcnisqeis ekteinas thn ceira 41 And Jesus, moved with
ho de iEsous splagchnistheis ekteinas tEn cheira
G3588 G1161 G2424 G4697 G1614 G3588 G5495
compassion, put forth [his]
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f hand, and touched him, and
THE YET JESUS BEING-compassionatED OUT-STRETCHing THE HAND saith unto him, I will; be thou
being-moved-with-compassion stretching-out clean.
hyato autou kai legei autw qelw kaqarisqhti

hEpsato autou kai legei autO thelO katharisthEti
G680 G846 G2532 G3004 G846 G2309 G2511
vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Sg vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
TOUCHES OF-Him AND IS-sayING to-him I-AM-WILLING BE-BEING-cleansED
him be-you-being-cleansed !
1:42 kai eipontos autou euqews aphlqen ap autou h lepra 42 And as soon as he had
kai eipontos autou eutheOs apElthen ap autou hE lepra
G2532 G2036 G846 G2112 G565 G575 G846 G3588 G3014
spoken, immediately the
Conj vp 2Aor Act Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f leprosy departed from him, and
AND OF-sayING OF-Him immediately FROM-CAME FROM him THE leprosy he was cleansed.
came-away
kai ekaqarisqh
kai ekatharisthE
G2532 G2511
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
AND he-IS-cleansED
1:43 kai embrimhsamenos autw euqews exebalen auton 43 And he straitly charged him,
kai embrimEsamenos autO eutheOs exebalen auton
G2532 G1690 G846 G2112 G1544 G846
and forthwith sent him away;
Conj vp Aor midD Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg m Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
AND IN-THUNDERing to-him immediately He-OUT-CAST him
muttering he-cast-out
1:44 kai legei autw ora mhdeni mhden eiphs all 44 And saith unto him, See
kai legei autO hora mEdeni mEden eipEs all
G2532 G3004 G846 G3708 G3367 G3367 G2036 G235
thou say nothing to any man:
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg a_ Dat Sg m a_ Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg Conj but go thy way, shew thyself to
AND He-IS-sayING to-him BE-SEEING to-NO-YET-ONE NO-YET-ONE YOU-MAY-BE-sayING but the priest, and offer for thy
is-saying be-you-seeing ! to-anyone nothing cleansing those things which
Moses commanded, for a
upage seauton deixon tw ierei kai prosenegke peri testimony unto them.
hupage seauton deixon tO hierei kai prosenegke peri
G5217 G4572 G1166 G3588 G2409 G2532 G4374 G4012
vm Pres Act 2 Sg pf 2 Acc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep
BE-UNDER-LEADING YOURself SHOW to-THE SACRED-one AND TOWARD-CARRY-YOU ABOUT
be-you-going-away ! show-you ! priest bring-you ! concerning
tou kaqarismou sou a prosetaxen mwshs eis marturion autois

tou katharismou sou ha prosetaxen mOsEs eis marturion autois
G3588 G2512 G4675 G3739 G4367 G3475 G1519 G3142 G846
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg pr Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg n pp Dat Pl m
THE cleansing OF-YOU WHICH TOWARD-SETS MOSES INTO witness to-them
which(p) bids testimony
1:45 o de exelqwn hrxato khrussein polla kai 45 But he went out, and began
ho de exelthOn Erxato kErussein polla kai
G3588 G1161 G1831 G756 G2784 G4183 G2532
to publish [it] much, and to
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act a_ Acc Pl n Conj blaze abroad the matter,
THE-one YET OUT-COMING he-begins TO-BE-PROCLAIMING much AND insomuch that Jesus could no
the coming-out to-be-heralding more openly enter into the city,
but was without in desert
diafhmizein ton logon wste mhketi auton dunasqai places: and they came to him
diaphEmizein ton logon hOste mEketi auton dunasthai from every quarter.
G1310 G3588 G3056 G5620 G3371 G846 G1410
vn Pres Act t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj Adv pp Acc Sg m vn Pres midD/pasD
TO-BE-THRU-AVERRizING THE saying AS-BESIDES NO-NOT-STILL Him TO-BE-enABLED
to-be-blazing-abroad word so-that by-no-means-longer
fanerws eis polin eiselqein all exw en erhmois topois hn

phanerOs eis polin eiselthein all exO en erEmois topois En
G5320 G1519 G4172 G1525 G235 G1854 G1722 G2048 G5117 G2258
Adv Prep n_ Acc Sg f vn 2Aor Act Conj Adv Prep a_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg
APPEARly INTO city TO-BE-INTO-COMING but OUT IN DESOLATE PLACES WAS
manifestly to-be-entering outside
Mark 1 - Mark 2
kai hrconto pros auton pantacoqen

kai Erchonto pros auton pantachothen
G2532 G2064 G4314 G846 G3836
Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep pp Acc Sg m Adv
AND THEY-CAME TOWARD Him EVERY-SOIL-PLACE
from-everywhere
Mark 2
2:1 kai palin eishlqen eis kapernaoum di hmerwn kai hkousqh oti eis 1 . And again he entered into
kai palin eisElthen eis kapernaoum di hEmerOn kai EkousthE hoti eis
G2532 G3825 G1525 G1519 G2584 G1223 G2250 G2532 G191 G3754 G1519
Capernaum after [some] days;
Conj Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep ni proper Prep n_ Gen Pl f Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj Prep and it was noised that he was
AND AGAIN he-INTO-CAME INTO CAPERNAUM THRU DAYS AND it-IS-HEARD that INTO in the house.
he-entered during
oikon estin
oikon estin
G3624 G2076
n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
HOME He-IS
house
2:2 kai euqews sunhcqhsan polloi wste mhketi cwrein mhde 2 And straightway many were
kai eutheOs sunEchthEsan polloi hOste mEketi chOrein mEde
G2532 G2112 G4863 G4183 G5620 G3371 G5562 G3366
gathered together, insomuch
Conj Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m Conj Adv vn Pres Act Conj that there was no room to
AND immediately WERE-TOGETHER-LED MANY AS-BESIDES NO-NOT-STILL TO-BE-SPACING NO-YET receive [them], no, not so
were-gathered so-that by-no-means-still to-be-room not-yeteven much as about the door: and he
preached the word unto them.
ta pros thn quran kai elalei autois ton logon
ta pros tEn thuran kai elalei autois ton logon
G3588 G4314 G3588 G2374 G2532 G2980 G846 G3588 G3056
t_ Acc Pl n Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
THE TOWARD THE DOOR AND He-TALKED to-them THE saying
the(p) he-spoke word
2:3 kai ercontai pros auton paralutikon ferontes airomenon 3 And they come unto him,
kai erchontai pros auton paralutikon pherontes airomenon
G2532 G2064 G4314 G846 G3885 G5342 G142
bringing one sick of the palsy,
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep pp Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m which was borne of four.
AND THEY-ARE-COMING TOWARD Him paralytic CARRYING beING-LIFTED
bringing
upo tessarwn
hupo tessarOn
G5259 G5064
Prep a_ Gen Pl m
by FOUR
four-men
2:4 kai mh dunamenoi proseggisai autw dia ton oclon 4 And when they could not
kai mE dunamenoi proseggisai autO dia ton ochlon
G2532 G3361 G1410 G4331 G846 G1223 G3588 G3793
come nigh unto him for the
Conj Part Neg vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m vn Aor Act pp Dat Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m press, they uncovered the roof
AND NO beING-ABLE TO-TOWARD-NEAR to-Him THRU THE THRONG where he was: and when they
to-draw-near-to him because-of had broken [it] up, they let
down the bed wherein the sick
apestegasan thn steghn opou hn kai exoruxantes of the palsy lay.
apestegasan tEn stegEn hopou En kai exoruxantes
G648 G3588 G4721 G3699 G2258 G2532 G1846
vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Adv vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
THEY-FROM-EXCLUDE THE EXCLUDer THE-?-where He-WAS AND OUT-EXCAVATing
they-unroof roof wheree scooping-out-it
calwsin ton krabbaton ef w o paralutikos

chalOsin ton krabbaton eph hO ho paralutikos
G5465 G3588 G2895 G1909 G3739 G3588 G3885
vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep pr Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
THEY-ARE-LOWERING THE PALLET ON WHICH THE paralytic
katekeito
katekeito
G2621
vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
was-DOWN-LAID
was-laid-down
2:5 idwn de o ihsous thn pistin autwn legei tw 5 When Jesus saw their faith,
idOn de ho iEsous tEn pistin autOn legei tO
G1492 G1161 G3588 G2424 G3588 G4102 G846 G3004 G3588
he said unto the sick of the
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m palsy, Son, thy sins be forgiven
PERCEIVING YET THE JESUS THE BELIEF OF-them He-IS-sayING to-THE thee.
faith
paralutikw teknon afewntai soi ai amartiai sou

paralutikO teknon apheOntai soi hai hamartiai sou
G3885 G5043 G863 G4671 G3588 G266 G4675
a_ Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg n vi Perf Pas 3 Pl pp 2 Dat Sg t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f pp 2 Gen Sg
paralytic offspring HAVE-been-FROM-LET to-YOU THE misses OF-YOU
child ! have-been-pardoned you sins
2:6 hsan de tines twn grammatewn ekei kaqhmenoi kai 6 But there were certain of the
Esan de tines tOn grammateOn ekei kathEmenoi kai
G2258 G1161 G5100 G3588 G1122 G1563 G2521 G2532
scribes sitting there, and
vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj px Nom Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Adv vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m Conj reasoning in their hearts,
WERE YET ANY OF-THE WRITers there sittING AND
there-were some scribes
Mark 2
dialogizomenoi en tais kardiais autwn

dialogizomenoi en tais kardiais autOn
G1260 G1722 G3588 G2588 G846
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pp Gen Pl m
THRU-accountING IN THE HEARTS OF-them
reasoning
2:7 ti outos outws lalei blasfhmias tis dunatai 7 Why doth this [man] thus
ti houtos houtOs lalei blasphEmias tis dunatai
G5101 G3778 G3779 G2980 G988 G5101 G1410
speak blasphemies? who can
pi Acc Sg n pd Nom Sg m Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl f pi Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg forgive sins but God only?
ANY this-One thus IS-TALKING HARM-AVERments ANY IS-ABLE
why ? this-man is-speaking blasphemies who ?
afienai amartias ei mh eis o qeos

aphienai hamartias ei mE heis ho theos
G863 G266 G1487 G3361 G1520 G3588 G2316
vn Pres Act n_ Acc Pl f Cond Part Neg a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
TO-FROM-LET misses IF NO ONE THE God
to-pardon sins
2:8 kai euqews epignous o ihsous tw pneumati autou oti 8 And immediately when Jesus
kai eutheOs epignous ho iEsous tO pneumati autou hoti
G2532 G2112 G1921 G3588 G2424 G3588 G4151 G846 G3754
perceived in his spirit that they
Conj Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pp Gen Sg m Conj so reasoned within themselves,
AND immediately ON-KNOWING THE JESUS to-THE spirit OF-Him that he said unto them, Why reason
recognizing ye these things in your hearts?
outws dialogizontai en eautois eipen autois ti tauta

houtOs dialogizontai en heautois eipen autois ti tauta
G3779 G1260 G1722 G1438 G2036 G846 G5101 G5023
Adv vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep pf 3 Dat Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg n pd Acc Pl n
thus THEY-ARE-THRU-accountING IN selves He-said to-them ANY these
they-are-reasoning themselves why ? these-things
dialogizesqe en tais kardiais umwn

dialogizesthe en tais kardiais humOn
G1260 G1722 G3588 G2588 G5216
vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pp 2 Gen Pl
YE-ARE-THRU-accountING IN THE HEARTS OF-YOU(p)
ye-are-reasoning of-ye
2:9 ti estin eukopwteron eipein tw paralutikw afewntai 9 Whether is it easier to say to

ti estin eukopOteron eipein tO paralutikO apheOntai
G5101 G2076 G2123 G2036 G3588 G3885 G863
the sick of the palsy, [Thy] sins
pi Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vn 2Aor Act t_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m vi Perf Pas 3 Pl be forgiven thee; or to say,
ANY IS easier TO-BE-sayING to-THE paralytic HAVE-been-FROM-LET Arise, and take up thy bed, and
what ? have-been-pardoned walk?
soi ai amartiai h eipein egeirai kai aron sou

soi hai hamartiai E eipein egeirai kai aron sou
G4671 G3588 G266 G2228 G2036 G1453 G2532 G142 G4675
pp 2 Dat Sg t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f Part vn 2Aor Act vm Aor Mid 2 Sg Conj vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 2 Gen Sg
to-YOU THE misses OR TO-BE-sayING be-YOU-ROUSED AND LIFT OF-YOU
you sins be-you-roused ! pick-up-you !
ton krabbaton kai peripatei

ton krabbaton kai peripatei
G3588 G2895 G2532 G4043
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vm Pres Act 2 Sg
THE PALLET AND BE-ABOUT-TREADING
be-you-walking !
G2443 G1161 G1492 G3754 G1849 G2192 G3588 G5207 G3588
the Son of man hath power on
Conj Conj vs Perf Act 2 Pl Conj n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m earth to forgive sins, (he saith
THAT YET YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING that authority IS-HAVING THE SON OF-THE to the sick of the palsy,)
anqrwpou afienai epi ths ghs amartias legei tw paralutikw

anthrOpou aphienai epi tEs gEs hamartias legei tO paralutikO
G444 G863 G1909 G3588 G1093 G266 G3004 G3588 G3885
n_ Gen Sg m vn Pres Act Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Acc Pl f vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m
human TO-FROM-LET ON OF-THE LAND misses He-IS-sayING to-THE paralytic
to-pardon the earth sins
2:11 soi legw egeirai kai aron ton krabbaton sou kai 11 I say unto thee, Arise, and
soi legO egeirai kai aron ton krabbaton sou kai
G4671 G3004 G1453 G2532 G142 G3588 G2895 G4675 G2532
take up thy bed, and go thy
pp 2 Dat Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg vm Aor Mid 2 Sg Conj vm Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg Conj way into thine house.
to-YOU I-AM-sayING be-YOU-ROUSED AND LIFT THE PALLET OF-YOU AND
be-you-roused ! pick-up-you !
upage eis ton oikon sou

hupage eis ton oikon sou
G5217 G1519 G3588 G3624 G4675
vm Pres Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
BE-UNDER-LEADING INTO THE HOME OF-YOU
be-you-going-away ! house
Mark 2
2:12 kai hgerqh euqews kai aras ton krabbaton exhlqen 12 And immediately he arose,
kai EgerthE eutheOs kai aras ton krabbaton exElthen
G2532 G1453 G2112 G2532 G142 G3588 G2895 G1831
took up the bed, and went forth
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Adv Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg before them all; insomuch that
AND he-WAS-ROUSED immediately AND LIFTing THE PALLET he-OUT-CAME they were all amazed, and
picking-up he-came-out glorified God, saying, We
never saw it on this fashion.
enantion pantwn wste existasqai pantas kai doxazein ton
enantion pantOn hOste existasthai pantas kai doxazein ton
G1726 G3956 G5620 G1839 G3956 G2532 G1392 G3588
Adv a_ Gen Pl m Conj vn Pres Mid a_ Acc Pl m Conj vn Pres Act t_ Acc Sg m
IN-INSTEAD OF-ALL AS-BESIDES TO-BE-OUT-STANDING ALL AND TO-BE-esteemizING THE
in-front-of all so-that to-be-being-amazed to-be-glorifying
qeon legontas oti oudepote outws eidomen

theon legontas hoti oudepote houtOs eidomen
G2316 G3004 G3754 G3763 G3779 G1492
n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Conj Adv Adv vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
God sayING that NOT-YET-?-when thus WE-PERCEIVED
never
2:13 kai exhlqen palin para thn qalassan kai pas o oclos 13 . And he went forth again
kai exElthen palin para tEn thalassan kai pas ho ochlos
G2532 G1831 G3825 G3844 G3588 G2281 G2532 G3956 G3588 G3793
by the sea side; and all the
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m multitude resorted unto him,
AND He-OUT-CAME AGAIN BESIDE THE SEA AND EVERY THE THRONG and he taught them.
he-came-out entire
hrceto pros auton kai edidasken autous

Ercheto pros auton kai edidasken autous
G2064 G4314 G846 G2532 G1321 G846
vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m
CAME TOWARD Him AND He-TAUGHT them
2:14 kai paragwn eiden leuin ton tou alfaiou 14 And as he passed by, he
kai paragOn eiden leuin ton tou halphaiou
G2532 G3855 G1492 G3018 G3588 G3588 G256
saw Levi the [son] of Alphaeus
Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m sitting at the receipt of custom,
AND BESIDE-LEADING He-PERCEIVED LEVI THE OF-THE ALPHEUS and said unto him, Follow me.
passing-along And he arose and followed
him.
kaqhmenon epi to telwnion kai legei autw akolouqei
kathEmenon epi to telOnion kai legei autO akolouthei
G2521 G1909 G3588 G5058 G2532 G3004 G846 G190
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg
sittING ON THE tribute-office AND IS-sayING to-him BE-followING
he-is-saying be-you-following !
moi kai anastas hkolouqhsen autw

moi kai anastas EkolouthEsen autO
G3427 G2532 G450 G190 G846
pp 1 Dat Sg Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
to-ME AND UP-STANDing he-follows to-Him
me rising him
2:15 kai egeneto en tw katakeisqai auton en th oikia 15 And it came to pass, that, as
kai egeneto en tO katakeisthai auton en tE oikia
G2532 G1096 G1722 G3588 G2621 G846 G1722 G3588 G3614
Jesus sat at meat in his house,
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres midD/pasD pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f many publicans and sinners sat
AND it-BECAME IN THE TO-BE-DOWN-LYING Him IN THE HOME also together with Jesus and
it-came-to-pass to-be-lying-down house his disciples: for there were
many, and they followed him.
autou kai polloi telwnai kai amartwloi sunanekeinto tw
autou kai polloi telOnai kai hamartOloi sunanekeinto tO
G846 G2532 G4183 G5057 G2532 G268 G4873 G3588
pp Gen Sg m Conj a_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg m
OF-him AND MANY tribute-collectors AND missers TOGETHER-UP-LAID to-THE
also sinners lay-back-at-the-table-together-with the
ihsou kai tois maqhtais autou hsan gar polloi kai hkolouqhsan
iEsou kai tois mathEtais autou Esan gar polloi kai EkolouthEsan
G2424 G2532 G3588 G3101 G846 G2258 G1063 G4183 G2532 G190
n_ Dat Sg m Conj t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
JESUS AND to-THE LEARNers OF-Him THEY-WERE for MANY AND THEY-follow
the disciples
autw
autO
G846
pp Dat Sg m
to-Him
him
2:16 kai oi grammateis kai oi farisaioi idontes auton 16 And when the scribes and
kai hoi grammateis kai hoi pharisaioi idontes auton
G2532 G3588 G1122 G2532 G3588 G5330 G1492 G846
Pharisees saw him eat with
Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m publicans and sinners, they
AND THE WRITers AND THE PHARISEES PERCEIVING Him said unto his disciples, How is
scribes it that he eateth and drinketh
Mark 2
with publicans and sinners?

esqionta meta twn telwnwn kai amartwlwn elegon tois
esthionta meta tOn telOnOn kai hamartOlOn elegon tois
G2068 G3326 G3588 G5057 G2532 G268 G3004 G3588
vp Pres Act Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Gen Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Pl m
EATING WITH THE tribute-collectors AND missers said to-THE
sinners
maqhtais autou ti oti meta twn telwnwn kai amartwlwn

mathEtais autou ti hoti meta tOn telOnOn kai hamartOlOn
G3101 G846 G5101 G3754 G3326 G3588 G5057 G2532 G268
n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m pi Nom Sg n Conj Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Gen Pl m
LEARNers OF-Him ANY that WITH THE tribute-collectors AND missers
disciples why ? sinners
esqiei kai pinei

esthiei kai pinei
G2068 G2532 G4095
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
He-IS-EATING AND IS-DRINKING
2:17 kai akousas o ihsous legei autois ou creian ecousin 17 When Jesus heard [it], he
kai akousas ho iEsous legei autois ou chreian echousin
G2532 G191 G3588 G2424 G3004 G846 G3756 G5532 G2192
saith unto them, They that are
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Part Neg n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Pl whole have no need of the
AND HEARing THE JESUS IS-sayING to-them NOT need ARE-HAVING physician, but they that are
hearing-it sick: I came not to call the
righteous, but sinners to
oi iscuontes iatrou all oi kakws econtes ouk hlqon repentance.
hoi ischuontes iatrou all hoi kakOs echontes ouk Elthon
G3588 G2480 G2395 G235 G3588 G2560 G2192 G3756 G2064
t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m Adv vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
THE ones-beING-STRONG OF-HEALer but THE-ones EVILly HAVING NOT I-CAME
ones-being-strong of-physician the-ones illness
kalesai dikaious alla amartwlous eis metanoian

kalesai dikaious alla hamartOlous eis metanoian
G2564 G1342 G235 G268 G1519 G3341
vn Aor Act a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m Prep n_ Acc Sg f
TO-CALL JUST-ones but missers INTO after-MIND
just-ones sinners repentance
2:18 kai hsan oi maqhtai iwannou kai oi twn farisaiwn 18 . And the disciples of John
kai Esan hoi mathEtai iOannou kai hoi tOn pharisaiOn
G2532 G2258 G3588 G3101 G2491 G2532 G3588 G3588 G5330
and of the Pharisees used to
Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m fast: and they come and say
AND WERE THE LEARNers OF-JOHN AND THE-ones OF-THE PHARISEES unto him, Why do the disciples
disciples the-ones of John and of the Pharisees
fast, but thy disciples fast not?
nhsteuontes kai ercontai kai legousin autw dia ti
nEsteuontes kai erchontai kai legousin autO dia ti
G3522 G2532 G2064 G2532 G3004 G846 G1223 G5101
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Prep pi Acc Sg n
fastING AND THEY-ARE-COMING AND THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him THRU ANY
are-saying because-of what ?
oi maqhtai iwannou kai oi twn farisaiwn nhsteuousin oi

hoi mathEtai iOannou kai hoi tOn pharisaiOn nEsteuousin hoi
G3588 G3101 G2491 G2532 G3588 G3588 G5330 G3522 G3588
t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
THE LEARNers OF-JOHN AND THE OF-THE PHARISEES ARE-fastING THE
disciples
de soi maqhtai ou nhsteuousin

de soi mathEtai ou nEsteuousin
G1161 G4674 G3101 G3756 G3522
Conj ps 2 Nom Pl n_ Nom Pl m Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Pl
YET to-YOU LEARNers NOT ARE-fastING
disciples
2:19 kai eipen autois o ihsous mh dunantai oi uioi 19 And Jesus said unto them,
kai eipen autois ho iEsous mE dunantai hoi huioi
G2532 G2036 G846 G3588 G2424 G3361 G1410 G3588 G5207
Can the children of the
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m bridechamber fast, while the
AND said to-them THE JESUS NO ARE-ABLE THE SONS bridegroom is with them? as
can long as they have the
bridegroom with them, they
tou numfwnos en w o numfios met autwn estin cannot fast.
tou numphOnos en hO ho numphios met autOn estin
G3588 G3567 G1722 G3739 G3588 G3566 G3326 G846 G2076
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep pr Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep pp Gen Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
OF-THE BRIDal-chamber IN WHICH THE BRIDE-groom WITH them IS
bridegroom
nhsteuein oson cronon meq eautwn ecousin ton numfion ou

nEsteuein hoson chronon meth heautOn echousin ton numphion ou
G3522 G3745 G5550 G3326 G1438 G2192 G3588 G3566 G3756
vn Pres Act pk Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep pf 3 Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg
TO-BE-fastING as-much-as TIME WITH selves THEY-ARE-HAVING THE BRIDE-groom NOT
whatever themselves bridegroom
Mark 2
dunantai nhsteuein
dunantai nEsteuein
G1410 G3522
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl vn Pres Act
THEY-ARE-ABLE TO-BE-fastING
they-can
2:20 eleusontai de hmerai otan aparqh ap autwn o 20 But the days will come,
eleusontai de hEmerai hotan aparthE ap autOn ho
G2064 G1161 G2250 G3752 G522 G575 G846 G3588
vi Fut midD 3 Pl Conj n_ Nom Pl f Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Pl m t_ Nom Sg m taken away from them, and
SHALL-BE-COMING YET DAYS when-EVER MAY-BE-BEING-FROM-LIFTED FROM them THE then shall they fast in those
whenever may-be-being-taken-away days.
numfios kai tote nhsteusousin en ekeinais tais hmerais

numphios kai tote nEsteusousin en ekeinais tais hEmerais
G3566 G2532 G5119 G3522 G1722 G1565 G3588 G2250
n_ Nom Sg m Conj Adv vi Fut Act 3 Pl Prep pd Dat Pl f t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f
BRIDE-groom AND then THEY-SHALL-BE-fastING IN those THE DAYS
bridegroom
2:21 kai oudeis epiblhma rakous agnafou epirraptei epi imatiw 21 No man also seweth a piece
kai oudeis epiblEma rakous agnaphou epirraptei epi himatiO
G2532 G3762 G1915 G4470 G46 G1976 G1909 G2440
of new cloth on an old
Conj a_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Dat Sg n garment: else the new piece
AND NOT-YET-ONE ON-CAST-effect OF-BURSTer OF-UN-CARDED IS-ON-SEWING ON cloak that filled it up taketh away
no-one patch of-shred unshrunk is-sewing-on from the old, and the rent is
made worse.
palaiw ei de mh airei to plhrwma autou to kainon
palaiO ei de mE airei to plErOma autou to kainon
G3820 G1487 G1161 G3361 G142 G3588 G4138 G846 G3588 G2537
a_ Dat Sg n Cond Conj Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Sg n t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n
OLD IF YET NO IS-LIFTING THE FILLing it THE NEW
is-taking-away
tou palaiou kai ceiron scisma ginetai

tou palaiou kai cheiron schisma ginetai
G3588 G3820 G2532 G5501 G4978 G1096
t_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n Conj a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
OF-THE OLD AND WORSE SPLIT IS-BECOMING
rent
2:22 kai oudeis ballei oinon neon eis askous palaious ei 22 And no man putteth new
kai oudeis ballei oinon neon eis askous palaious ei
G2532 G3762 G906 G3631 G3501 G1519 G779 G3820 G1487
wine into old bottles: else the
Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Prep n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Cond new wine doth burst the
AND NOT-YET-ONE IS-CASTING WINE YOUNG INTO BOTTLES (of-skin) OLD IF bottles, and the wine is spilled,
no-one is-draining fresh wine-skins and the bottles will be marred:
but new wine must be put into
de mh rhssei o oinos o neos tous askous kai new bottles.
de mE rEssei ho oinos ho neos tous askous kai
G1161 G3361 G4486 G3588 G3631 G3588 G3501 G3588 G779 G2532
Conj Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj
YET NO IS-BURSTING THE WINE THE YOUNG THE BOTTLES (of-skin) AND
fresh wine-skins
o oinos ekceitai kai oi askoi apolountai

ho oinos ekcheitai kai hoi askoi apolountai
G3588 G3631 G1632 G2532 G3588 G779 G622
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Fut Mid 3 Pl
THE WINE IS-beING-OUT-POURED AND THE BOTTLES (of-skin) SHALL-BE-beING-destroyED
is-spilling wine-skins shall-be-perishing
alla oinon neon eis askous kainous blhteon

alla oinon neon eis askous kainous blEteon
G235 G3631 G3501 G1519 G779 G2537 G992
Conj n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Prep n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom Sg n
but WINE YOUNG INTO BOTTLES (of-skin) NEW CASTable
fresh wine-skins is-drained
2:23 kai egeneto paraporeuesqai auton en tois sabbasin dia twn 23 And it came to pass, that he
kai egeneto paraporeuesthai auton en tois sabbasin dia tOn
G2532 G1096 G3899 G846 G1722 G3588 G4521 G1223 G3588
went through the corn fields on
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres midD/pasD pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n Prep t_ Gen Pl m the sabbath day; and his
AND BECAME TO-BE-BESIDE-GOING Him IN THE SABBATHS THRU THE disciples began, as they went,
it-occurred to-be-going-by through to pluck the ears of corn.
sporimwn kai hrxanto oi maqhtai autou odon poiein

sporimOn kai Erxanto hoi mathEtai autou hodon poiein
G4702 G2532 G756 G3588 G3101 G846 G3598 G4160
a_ Gen Pl m Conj vi Aor midD 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg f vn Pres Act
SOWings AND begin THE LEARNers OF-Him WAY TO-BE-DOING
disciples path to-be-making
tillontes tous stacuas

tillontes tous stachuas
G5089 G3588 G4719
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
PLUCKING THE EARS-(of-plants)
ears-of-grain
Mark 2 - Mark 3
2:24 kai oi farisaioi elegon autw ide ti poiousin 24 And the Pharisees said unto
kai hoi pharisaioi elegon autO ide ti poiousin
G2532 G3588 G5330 G3004 G846 G1492 G5101 G4160
him, Behold, why do they on
Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pi Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Pl the sabbath day that which is
AND THE PHARISEES said to-Him BE-PERCEIVING ANY THEY-ARE-DOING not lawful?
lo ! why ?
en tois sabbasin o ouk exestin

en tois sabbasin ho ouk exestin
G1722 G3588 G4521 G3739 G3756 G1832
Prep t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n pr Acc Sg n Part Neg vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
IN THE SABBATHS WHICH NOT it-IS-allowed
is-allowed
2:25 kai autos elegen autois oudepote anegnwte ti epoihsen dabid 25 And he said unto them,
kai autos elegen autois oudepote anegnOte ti epoiEsen dabid
G2532 G846 G3004 G846 G3763 G314 G5101 G4160 G1138
Have ye never read what
Conj pp Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Adv vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl pi Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg ni proper David did, when he had need,
AND He said to-them NOT-YET-?-when YE-read(past) ANY DOES DAVID and was an hungred, he, and
never ye-did-read what ? they that were with him?
ote creian escen kai epeinasen autos kai oi met autou

hote chreian eschen kai epeinasen autos kai hoi met autou
G3753 G5532 G2192 G2532 G3983 G846 G2532 G3588 G3326 G846
Adv n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m Prep pp Gen Sg m
when need he-has-HAD AND HUNGERS he AND THE-ones WITH him
the-ones
2:26 pws eishlqen eis ton oikon tou qeou epi abiaqar tou 26 How he went into the house
pOs eisElthen eis ton oikon tou theou epi abiathar tou
G4459 G1525 G1519 G3588 G3624 G3588 G2316 G1909 G8 G3588
of God in the days of Abiathar
Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep ni proper t_ Gen Sg m the high priest, and did eat the
how he-INTO-CAME INTO THE HOME OF-THE God ON ABIATHAR THE shewbread, which is not lawful
he-entered house to eat but for the priests, and
gave also to them which were
arcierews kai tous artous ths proqesews efagen ous ouk with him?
archiereOs kai tous artous tEs protheseOs ephagen hous ouk
G749 G2532 G3588 G740 G3588 G4286 G5315 G3739 G3756
n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pr Acc Pl m Part Neg
chief-SACRED-one AND THE BREADS OF-THE BEFORE-PLACing ATE WHICH NOT
chief-priest bread(p)
exestin fagein ei mh tois iereusin kai edwken kai tois

exestin phagein ei mE tois hiereusin kai edOken kai tois
G1832 G5315 G1487 G3361 G3588 G2409 G2532 G1325 G2532 G3588
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act Cond Part Neg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Dat Pl m
it-IS-allowed TO-BE-EATING IF NO to-THE SACRED-ones AND he-GIVES AND to-THE-ones
is-allowed priests also to-the-ones
sun autw ousin

sun autO ousin
G4862 G846 G5607
Prep pp Dat Sg m vp Pres vxx Dat Pl m
TOGETHER to-him BEING
togetherwith him
2:27 kai elegen autois to sabbaton dia ton anqrwpon 27 And he said unto them, The
kai elegen autois to sabbaton dia ton anthrOpon
G2532 G3004 G846 G3588 G4521 G1223 G3588 G444
sabbath was made for man,
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m and not man for the sabbath:
AND He-said to-them THE SABBATH THRU THE human
because-of
egeneto ouc o anqrwpos dia to sabbaton

egeneto ouch ho anthrOpos dia to sabbaton
G1096 G3756 G3588 G444 G1223 G3588 G4521
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Part Neg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
BECAME NOT THE human THRU THE SABBATH
because-of
2:28 wste kurios estin o uios tou anqrwpou kai tou 28 Therefore the Son of man is
hOste kurios estin ho huios tou anthrOpou kai tou
G5620 G2962 G2076 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G2532 G3588
Lord also of the sabbath.
Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg n
AS-BESIDES Master IS THE SON OF-THE human AND OF-THE
so-that Lord also
sabbatou
sabbatou
G4521
n_ Gen Sg n
SABBATH
Mark 3
3:1 kai eishlqen palin eis thn sunagwghn kai hn ekei anqrwpos 1 . And he entered again into
kai eisElthen palin eis tEn sunagOgEn kai En ekei anthrOpos
G2532 G1525 G3825 G1519 G3588 G4864 G2532 G2258 G1563 G444
the synagogue; and there was a
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Adv n_ Nom Sg m man there which had a
AND He-INTO-CAME AGAIN INTO THE TOGETHER-LEAD AND WAS there human withered hand.
he-entered synagogue
exhrammenhn ecwn thn ceira

exErammenEn echOn tEn cheira
G3583 G2192 G3588 G5495
vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
HAVING-been-DRIED HAVING THE HAND
having-been-withered
3:2 kai parethroun auton ei tois sabbasin qerapeusei auton ina 2 And they watched him,
kai paretEroun auton ei tois sabbasin therapeusei auton hina
G2532 G3906 G846 G1487 G3588 G4521 G2323 G846 G2443
whether he would heal him on
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Cond t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj the sabbath day; that they
AND THEY-BESIDE-KEPT Him IF to-THE SABBATHS He-SHALL-BE-curING him THAT might accuse him.
they-scrutinized
kathgorhswsin autou
katEgorEsOsin autou
G2723 G846
vs Aor Act 3 Pl pp Gen Sg m
THEY-SHOULD-BE-accusING OF-Him
him
3:3 kai legei tw anqrwpw tw exhrammenhn econti thn 3 And he saith unto the man
kai legei tO anthrOpO tO exErammenEn echonti tEn
G2532 G3004 G3588 G444 G3588 G3583 G2192 G3588
which had the withered hand,
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Dat Sg m t_ Acc Sg f Stand forth.
AND He-IS-sayING to-THE human THE-one HAVING-been-DRIED HAVING THE
the-one having-been-withered
ceira egeirai eis to meson

cheira egeirai eis to meson
G5495 G1453 G1519 G3588 G3319
n_ Acc Sg f vm Aor Mid 2 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n
HAND be-YOU-ROUSED INTO THE MIDst
be-you-roused !
3:4 kai legei autois exestin tois sabbasin agaqopoihsai h 4 And he saith unto them, Is it
kai legei autois exestin tois sabbasin agathopoiEsai E
G2532 G3004 G846 G1832 G3588 G4521 G15 G2228
lawful to do good on the
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n vn Aor Act Part sabbath days, or to do evil? to
AND He-IS-sayING to-them it-IS-allowed to-THE SABBATHS TO-GOOD-DO OR save life, or to kill? But they
to-do-good held their peace.
kakopoihsai yuchn swsai h apokteinai oi de esiwpwn

kakopoiEsai psuchEn sOsai E apokteinai hoi de esiOpOn
G2554 G5590 G4982 G2228 G615 G3588 G1161 G4623
vn Aor Act n_ Acc Sg f vn Aor Act Part vn Aor Act t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl
TO-EVIL-DO soul TO-SAVE OR TO-FROM-KILL THE-ones YET were-SILENT
to-do-evil to-kill the they-were-silent
3:5 kai peribleyamenos autous met orghs sullupoumenos epi th 5 And when he had looked
kai periblepsamenos autous met orgEs sullupoumenos epi tE
G2532 G4017 G846 G3326 G3709 G4818 G1909 G3588
round about on them with
Conj vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m Prep n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f anger, being grieved for the
AND ABOUT-looking them WITH INDIGNATION TOGETHER-SORROWING ON THE hardness of their hearts, he
looking-about on-them commiserating saith unto the man, Stretch
forth thine hand. And he
pwrwsei ths kardias autwn legei tw anqrwpw ekteinon thn stretched [it] out: and his hand
pOrOsei tEs kardias autOn legei tO anthrOpO ekteinon tEn was restored whole as the
G4457 G3588 G2588 G846 G3004 G3588 G444 G1614 G3588
n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg f other.
CALLOUSness OF-THE HEART OF-them He-IS-sayING to-THE human OUT-STRETCH THE
stretch-out-you !
ceira sou kai exeteinen kai apokatestaqh h ceir autou

cheira sou kai exeteinen kai apokatestathE hE cheir autou
G5495 G4675 G2532 G1614 G2532 G600 G3588 G5495 G846
n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m
HAND OF-YOU AND he-OUT-STRETCHES AND WAS-restorED THE HAND OF-him
he-stretches-out
ugihs ws h allh
hugiEs hOs hE allE
G5199 G5613 G3588 G243
a_ Nom Sg f Adv t_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f
SOUND AS THE other
3:6 kai exelqontes oi farisaioi euqews meta twn hrwdianwn 6 And the Pharisees went forth,
kai exelthontes hoi pharisaioi eutheOs meta tOn hErOdianOn
G2532 G1831 G3588 G5330 G2112 G3326 G3588 G2265
and straightway took counsel
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Adv Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m with the Herodians against
AND OUT-COMING THE PHARISEES immediately WITH THE HERODians him, how they might destroy
coming-out him.
Mark 3
sumboulion epoioun kat autou opws auton apoleswsin

sumboulion epoioun kat autou hopOs auton apolesOsin
G4824 G4160 G2596 G846 G3704 G846 G622
n_ Acc Sg n vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep pp Gen Sg m Adv pp Acc Sg m vs Aor Act 3 Pl
TOGETHER-COUNSEL DID DOWN OF-Him WHICH-how Him THEY-SHOULD-BE-destroyING
consultation made against him so-that
3:7 kai o ihsous anecwrhsen meta twn maqhtwn autou pros 7 But Jesus withdrew himself
kai ho iEsous anechOrEsen meta tOn mathEtOn autou pros
G2532 G3588 G2424 G402 G3326 G3588 G3101 G846 G4314
with his disciples to the sea:
Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m Prep and a great multitude from
AND THE JESUS UP-SPACES WITH THE LEARNers OF-Him TOWARD Galilee followed him, and from
retires disciples Judaea,
thn qalassan kai polu plhqos apo ths galilaias hkolouqhsan

tEn thalassan kai polu plEthos apo tEs galilaias EkolouthEsan
G3588 G2281 G2532 G4183 G4128 G575 G3588 G1056 G190
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THE SEA AND MANY multitude FROM THE GALILEE follow
vast
autw kai apo ths ioudaias

autO kai apo tEs ioudaias
G846 G2532 G575 G3588 G2449
pp Dat Sg m Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
to-Him AND FROM THE JUDEA
him
3:8 kai apo ierosolumwn kai apo ths idoumaias kai peran tou 8 And from Jerusalem, and
kai apo ierosolumOn kai apo tEs idoumaias kai peran tou
G2532 G575 G2414 G2532 G575 G3588 G2401 G2532 G4008 G3588
from Idumaea, and [from]
Conj Prep n_ Gen Pl n Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj Adv t_ Gen Sg m beyond Jordan; and they about
AND FROM JERUSALEM AND FROM THE IDUMEA AND OTHER-SIDE OF-THE Tyre and Sidon, a great
multitude, when they had heard
what great things he did, came
iordanou kai oi peri turon kai sidwna plhqos polu akousantes unto him.
iordanou kai hoi peri turon kai sidOna plEthos polu akousantes
G2446 G2532 G3588 G4012 G5184 G2532 G4605 G4128 G4183 G191
n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
JORDAN AND THE-ones ABOUT TYRE AND SIDON multitude MANY HEARing
the-ones vast ones-hearing
osa epoiei hlqon pros auton

hosa epoiei Elthon pros auton
G3745 G4160 G2064 G4314 G846
pk Acc Pl n vi Impf Act 3 Sg vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pp Acc Sg m
as-much-as He-DID CAME TOWARD Him
how-much
3:9 kai eipen tois maqhtais autou ina ploiarion proskarterh 9 And he spake to his
kai eipen tois mathEtais autou hina ploiarion proskarterE
G2532 G2036 G3588 G3101 G846 G2443 G4142 G4342
disciples, that a small ship
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg n vs Pres Act 3 Sg should wait on him because of
AND He-said to-THE LEARNers OF-Him THAT FLOATer (dim) MAY-BE-perseverING the multitude, lest they should
disciples boat may-be-waiting-on throng him.
autw dia ton oclon ina mh qlibwsin auton

autO dia ton ochlon hina mE thlibOsin auton
G846 G1223 G3588 G3793 G2443 G3361 G2346 G846
pp Dat Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj Part Neg vs Pres Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
to-Him THRU THE THRONG THAT NO THEY-MAY-BE-CONSTRICTING Him
him because-of they-may-be-crowding
3:10 pollous gar eqerapeusen wste epipiptein autw ina autou 10 For he had healed many;
pollous gar etherapeusen hOste epipiptein autO hina autou
G4183 G1063 G2323 G5620 G1968 G846 G2443 G846
insomuch that they pressed
a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vn Pres Act pp Dat Sg m Conj pp Gen Sg m upon him for to touch him, as
MANY for He-curES AS-BESIDES TO-BE-ON-FALLING to-Him THAT OF-Him many as had plagues.
so-that to-be-falling-on him him
aywntai osoi eicon mastigas

hapsOntai hosoi eichon mastigas
G680 G3745 G2192 G3148
vs Aor Mid 3 Pl pk Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Pl f
SHOULD-BE-TOUCHING as-many-as HAD scourges
they-should-be-touching
3:11 kai ta pneumata ta akaqarta otan auton eqewrei 11 And unclean spirits, when
kai ta pneumata ta akatharta hotan auton etheOrei
G2532 G3588 G4151 G3588 G169 G3752 G846 G2334
they saw him, fell down before
Conj t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n t_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n Conj pp Acc Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg him, and cried, saying, Thou
AND THE spirits THE UN-clean when-EVER Him it-beheld art the Son of God.
unclean whenever
prosepipten autw kai ekrazen legonta oti su ei

prosepipten autO kai ekrazen legonta hoti su ei
G4363 G846 G2532 G2896 G3004 G3754 G4771 G1488
vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Pl n Conj pp 2 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
TOWARD-FELL to-Him AND CRIED sayING that YOU ARE
it-prostrated it-cried ones-saying
Mark 3
o uios tou qeou

ho huios tou theou
G3588 G5207 G3588 G2316
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
THE SON OF-THE God
3:12 kai polla epetima autois ina mh auton faneron poihswsin 12 And he straitly charged
kai polla epetima autois hina mE auton phaneron poiEsOsin
G2532 G4183 G2008 G846 G2443 G3361 G846 G5318 G4160
them that they should not make
Conj a_ Acc Pl n vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj Part Neg pp Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vs Aor Act 3 Pl him known.
AND MANY He-rebukED to-them THAT NO Him apparent THEY-SHOULD-BE-makING
much he-warned them manifest
3:13 kai anabainei eis to oros kai proskaleitai ous hqelen 13 . And he goeth up into a
kai anabainei eis to oros kai proskaleitai hous Ethelen
G2532 G305 G1519 G3588 G3735 G2532 G4341 G3739 G2309
mountain, and calleth [unto
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg pr Acc Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Sg him] whom he would: and they
AND He-IS-UP-STEPPING INTO THE mountain AND IS-TOWARD-CALLING WHOM WILLED came unto him.
he-is-ascending is-calling-to-him would
autos kai aphlqon pros auton

autos kai apElthon pros auton
G846 G2532 G565 G4314 G846
pp Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pp Acc Sg m
He AND THEY-FROM-CAME TOWARD Him
they-came-away
3:14 kai epoihsen dwdeka ina wsin met autou kai ina 14 And he ordained twelve,
kai epoiEsen dOdeka hina Osin met autou kai hina
G2532 G4160 G1427 G2443 G5600 G3326 G846 G2532 G2443
that they should be with him,
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Nom Conj vs Pres vxx 3 Pl Prep pp Gen Sg m Conj Conj and that he might send them
AND He-makES TWO-TEN THAT THEY-MAY-BE WITH Him AND THAT forth to preach,
twelve
apostellh autous khrussein

apostellE autous kErussein
G649 G846 G2784
vs Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m vn Pres Act
He-MAY-BE-commissionING them TO-BE-PROCLAIMING
to-be-heralding
3:15 kai ecein exousian qerapeuein tas nosous kai ekballein 15 And to have power to heal
kai echein exousian therapeuein tas nosous kai ekballein
G2532 G2192 G1849 G2323 G3588 G3554 G2532 G1544
sicknesses, and to cast out
Conj vn Pres Act n_ Acc Sg f vn Pres Act t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Conj vn Pres Act devils:
AND TO-BE-HAVING authority TO-BE-curING THE DISEASES AND TO-BE-OUT-CASTING
to-be-casting-out
ta daimonia
ta daimonia
G3588 G1140
t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
THE demons
3:16 kai epeqhken tw simwni onoma petron 16 And Simon he surnamed

kai epethEken tO simOni onoma petron
G2532 G2007 G3588 G4613 G3686 G4074
Peter;
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg m
AND ON-PLACES to-THE SIMON NAME Peter (ROCK)
he-places-on Peter
3:17 kai iakwbon ton tou zebedaiou kai iwannhn ton adelfon 17 And James the [son] of
kai iakObon ton tou zebedaiou kai iOannEn ton adelphon
G2532 G2385 G3588 G3588 G2199 G2532 G2491 G3588 G80
Zebedee, and John the brother
Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m of James; and he surnamed
AND JACOBUS THE OF-THE ZEBEDEE AND JOHN THE brother them Boanerges, which is, The
James sons of thunder:
tou iakwbou kai epeqhken autois onomata boanerges o estin

tou iakObou kai epethEken autois onomata boanerges ho estin
G3588 G2385 G2532 G2007 G846 G3686 G993 G3739 G2076
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m n_ Acc Pl n ni proper pr Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
OF-THE JACOBUS AND He-ON-PLACES to-them NAMES BOANERGES WHICH IS
James also he-places-on them
uioi bronths
huioi brontEs
G5207 G1027
n_ Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg f
SONS OF-THUNDER
3:18 kai andrean kai filippon kai barqolomaion kai matqaion kai qwman 18 And Andrew, and Philip,
kai andrean kai philippon kai bartholomaion kai matthaion kai thOman
G2532 G406 G2532 G5376 G2532 G918 G2532 G3156 G2532 G2381
and Bartholomew, and
Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Matthew, and Thomas, and
AND ANDREW AND Philip AND Bartholomew AND MATTHEW AND THOMAS James the [son] of Alphaeus,
and Thaddaeus, and Simon the
Mark 3
Canaanite,
kai iakwbon ton tou alfaiou kai qaddaion kai simwna ton
kai iakObon ton tou halphaiou kai thaddaion kai simOna ton
G2532 G2385 G3588 G3588 G256 G2532 G2280 G2532 G4613 G3588
Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
AND JACOBUS THE OF-THE ALPHEUS AND THADDEUS AND SIMON THE
James
kananithn
kananitEn
G2581
n_ Acc Sg m
CANANITE
3:19 kai ioudan iskariwthn os kai paredwken auton kai 19 And Judas Iscariot, which
kai ioudan iskariOtEn hos kai paredOken auton kai
G2532 G2455 G2469 G3739 G2532 G3860 G846 G2532
also betrayed him: and they
Conj n_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pr Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj went into an house.
AND JUDAS ISCARIOT WHO AND BESIDE-GIVES Him AND
also gives-up
ercontai eis oikon

erchontai eis oikon
G2064 G1519 G3624
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg m
THEY-ARE-COMING INTO HOME
house
3:20 kai sunercetai palin oclos wste mh dunasqai autous 20 And the multitude cometh
kai sunerchetai palin ochlos hOste mE dunasthai autous
G2532 G4905 G3825 G3793 G5620 G3361 G1410 G846
together again, so that they
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Adv n_ Nom Sg m Conj Part Neg vn Pres midD/pasD pp Acc Pl m could not so much as eat bread.
AND IS-TOGETHER-COMING AGAIN THRONG AS-BESIDES NO TO-BE-enABLED them
is-coming-together so-that
mhte arton fagein

mEte arton phagein
G3383 G740 G5315
Conj n_ Acc Sg m vn 2Aor Act
NO-BESIDES BREAD TO-BE-EATING
neither
3:21 kai akousantes oi par autou exhlqon krathsai auton 21 And when his friends heard
kai akousantes hoi par autou exElthon kratEsai auton
G2532 G191 G3588 G3844 G846 G1831 G2902 G846
[of it], they went out to lay
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m Prep pp Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl vn Aor Act pp Acc Sg m hold on him: for they said, He
AND HEARing THE-ones BESIDE OF-Him OUT-CAME TO-HOLD SAME is beside himself.
hearing-it the-ones him came-out him it
elegon gar oti exesth

elegon gar hoti exestE
G3004 G1063 G3754 G1839
vi Impf Act 3 Pl Conj Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THEY-said for that it-WAS-OUT-STOOD
it-was-beside-itself
3:22 kai oi grammateis oi apo ierosolumwn katabantes elegon 22 . And the scribes which
kai hoi grammateis hoi apo ierosolumOn katabantes elegon
G2532 G3588 G1122 G3588 G575 G2414 G2597 G3004
came down from Jerusalem
Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m Prep n_ Gen Pl n vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl said, He hath Beelzebub, and
AND THE WRITers THE FROM JERUSALEM DOWN-STEPPing said by the prince of the devils
scribes descending casteth he out devils.
oti beelzeboul ecei kai oti en tw arconti twn daimoniwn

hoti beelzeboul echei kai hoti en tO archonti tOn daimoniOn
G3754 G954 G2192 G2532 G3754 G1722 G3588 G758 G3588 G1140
Conj ni proper vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
that BEELZEBOUL He-IS-HAVING AND that IN THE chief OF-THE demons
G1544 G3588 G1140
vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
He-IS-OUT-CASTING THE demons
he-is-casting-out
3:23 kai proskalesamenos autous en parabolais elegen autois pws 23 And he called them [unto
kai proskalesamenos autous en parabolais elegen autois pOs
G2532 G4341 G846 G1722 G3850 G3004 G846 G4459
him], and said unto them in
Conj vp Aor midD Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m Prep n_ Dat Pl f vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Adv Int parables, How can Satan cast
AND TOWARD-CALLing them IN BESIDE-CASTS He-said to-them how out Satan?
calling-to-him parables how ?
dunatai satanas satanan ekballein

dunatai satanas satanan ekballein
G1410 G4567 G4567 G1544
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vn Pres Act
IS-ABLE SATAN (Heb. adversary) SATAN (adversary) TO-BE-OUT-CASTING
can Satan Satan to-be-casting-out
Mark 3
3:24 kai ean basileia ef eauthn merisqh ou dunatai 24 And if a kingdom be

kai ean basileia eph heautEn meristhE ou dunatai
G2532 G1437 G932 G1909 G1438 G3307 G3756 G1410
divided against itself, that
Conj Cond n_ Nom Sg f Prep pf 3 Acc Sg f vs Aor Pas 3 Sg Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg kingdom cannot stand.
AND IF-EVER KINGdom ON self SHOULD-BE-BEING-PARTED NOT IS-ABLE
herself
staqhnai h basileia ekeinh

stathEnai hE basileia ekeinE
G2476 G3588 G932 G1565
vn Aor Pas t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pd Nom Sg f
TO-BE-STOOD THE KINGdom that
to-stand
3:25 kai ean oikia ef eauthn merisqh ou dunatai 25 And if a house be divided
kai ean oikia eph heautEn meristhE ou dunatai
G2532 G1437 G3614 G1909 G1438 G3307 G3756 G1410
against itself, that house cannot
Conj Cond n_ Nom Sg f Prep pf 3 Acc Sg f vs Aor Pas 3 Sg Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg stand.
AND IF-EVER HOME ON self SHOULD-BE-BEING-PARTED NOT IS-ABLE
house herself
staqhnai h oikia ekeinh

stathEnai hE oikia ekeinE
G2476 G3588 G3614 G1565
vn Aor Pas t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pd Nom Sg f
TO-BE-STOOD THE HOME that
to-stand house
3:26 kai ei o satanas anesth ef eauton kai memeristai 26 And if Satan rise up against
kai ei ho satanas anestE eph heauton kai memeristai
G2532 G1487 G3588 G4567 G450 G1909 G1438 G2532 G3307
himself, and be divided, he
Conj Cond t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pf 3 Acc Sg m Conj vi Perf Pas 3 Sg cannot stand, but hath an end.
AND IF THE SATAN (Heb. adversary) UP-STOOD ON self AND HAS-been-PARTED
Satan rose himself
ou dunatai staqhnai alla telos ecei

ou dunatai stathEnai alla telos echei
G3756 G1410 G2476 G235 G5056 G2192
Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg vn Aor Pas Conj n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
NOT he-IS-ABLE TO-BE-STOOD but FINISH IS-HAVING
to-stand consummation
3:27 ou dunatai oudeis ta skeuh tou iscurou 27 No man can enter into a
ou dunatai oudeis ta skeuE tou ischurou
G3756 G1410 G3762 G3588 G4632 G3588 G2478
strong man's house, and spoil
Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m his goods, except he will first
NOT IS-ABLE NOT-YET-ONE THE INSTRUMENTS OF-THE STRONG-one bind the strong man; and then
no-one gear strong-one he will spoil his house.
eiselqwn eis thn oikian autou diarpasai ean mh prwton

eiselthOn eis tEn oikian autou diarpasai ean mE prOton
G1525 G1519 G3588 G3614 G846 G1283 G1437 G3361 G4412
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m vn Aor Act Cond Part Neg Adv
INTO-COMING INTO THE HOME OF-him TO-THRU-SNATCH IF-EVER NO BEFORE-most
entering house to-plunder first
ton iscuron dhsh kai tote thn oikian autou

ton ischuron dEsE kai tote tEn oikian autou
G3588 G2478 G1210 G2532 G5119 G3588 G3614 G846
t_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vs Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Adv t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m
THE STRONG-one he-SHOULD-BE-BINDING AND then THE HOME OF-him
strong-one house
diarpasei
diarpasei
G1283
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
he-SHALL-BE-THRU-SNATCHING
he-shall-be-plundering
3:28 amhn legw umin oti panta afeqhsetai ta amarthmata 28 Verily I say unto you, All
amEn legO humin hoti panta aphethEsetai ta hamartEmata
G281 G3004 G5213 G3754 G3956 G863 G3588 G265
sins shall be forgiven unto the
Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl n vi Fut Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n sons of men, and blasphemies
AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that ALL SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET THE miss-effects wherewith soever they shall
verily to-ye shall-be-being-pardoned penalties-of-sins blaspheme:
tois uiois twn anqrwpwn kai blasfhmiai osas an

tois huiois tOn anthrOpOn kai blasphEmiai osas an
G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G2532 G988 G3745 G302
t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl f pk Acc Pl f Part
to-THE SONS OF-THE humans AND HARM-AVERments as-much-as EVER
the blasphemies
blasfhmhswsin
blasphEmEsOsin
G987
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-SHOULD-BE-HARM-AVERRING
they-should-be-blaspheming
Mark 3
3:29 os d an blasfhmhsh eis to pneuma to agion 29 But he that shall blaspheme

hos d an blasphEmEsE eis to pneuma to hagion
G3739 G1161 G302 G987 G1519 G3588 G4151 G3588 G40
against the Holy Ghost hath
pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n never forgiveness, but is in
WHO YET EVER SHOULD-BE-HARM-AVERRING INTO THE spirit THE HOLY danger of eternal damnation:
should-be-blaspheming
ouk ecei afesin eis ton aiwna all enocos estin aiwniou
ouk echei aphesin eis ton aiOna all enochos estin aiOniou
G3756 G2192 G859 G1519 G3588 G165 G235 G1777 G2076 G166
Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Gen Sg f
NOT IS-HAVING FROM-LETTing INTO THE eon but liable IS OF-eonian
pardon
krisews
kriseOs
G2920
n_ Gen Sg f
JUDGing
3:30 oti elegon pneuma akaqarton ecei 30 Because they said, He hath
hoti elegon pneuma akatharton echei
G3754 G3004 G4151 G169 G2192
an unclean spirit.
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
that THEY-said spirit UN-clean He-IS-HAVING
unclean
3:31 ercontai oun oi adelfoi kai h mhthr autou kai exw 31 . There came then his
erchontai oun hoi adelphoi kai hE mEtEr autou kai exO
G2064 G3767 G3588 G80 G2532 G3588 G3384 G846 G2532 G1854
brethren and his mother, and,
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj Adv standing without, sent unto
ARE-COMING THEN THE brothers AND THE MOTHER OF-Him AND OUT him, calling him.
outside
estwtes apesteilan pros auton fwnountes auton

hestOtes apesteilan pros auton phOnountes auton
G2476 G649 G4314 G846 G5455 G846
vp Perf Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pp Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m
HAVING-STOOD THEY-commission TOWARD Him SOUNDING Him
standing they-dispatch summoning
3:32 kai ekaqhto oclos peri auton eipon de autw idou 32 And the multitude sat about
kai ekathEto ochlos peri auton eipon de autO idou
G2532 G2521 G3793 G4012 G846 G2036 G1161 G846 G2400
him, and they said unto him,
Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Prep pp Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj pp Dat Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Behold, thy mother and thy
AND sat THRONG ABOUT Him THEY-said YET to-Him BE-PERCEIVING brethren without seek for thee.
lo !
h mhthr sou kai oi adelfoi sou exw zhtousin se

hE mEtEr sou kai hoi adelphoi sou exO zEtousin se
G3588 G3384 G4675 G2532 G3588 G80 G4675 G1854 G2212 G4571
t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg Adv vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Sg
THE MOTHER OF-YOU AND THE brothers OF-YOU OUT ARE-SEEKING YOU
outside
3:33 kai apekriqh autois legwn tis estin h mhthr 33 And he answered them,
kai apekrithE autois legOn tis estin hE mEtEr
G2532 G611 G846 G3004 G5101 G2076 G3588 G3384
saying, Who is my mother, or
Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pi Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f my brethren?
AND He-answerED to-them sayING ANY IS THE MOTHER
them who ?
mou h oi adelfoi mou

mou hE hoi adelphoi mou
G3450 G2228 G3588 G80 G3450
pp 1 Gen Sg Part t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-ME OR THE brothers OF-ME
3:34 kai peribleyamenos kuklw tous peri auton kaqhmenous 34 And he looked round about
kai periblepsamenos kuklO tous peri auton kathEmenous
G2532 G4017 G2945 G3588 G4012 G846 G2521
on them which sat about him,
Conj vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m n_ Dat Sg m t_ Acc Pl m Prep pp Acc Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m and said, Behold my mother
AND ABOUT-looking to-AROUND THE-ones ABOUT Him sittING and my brethren!
looking-about around on-the-ones
legei ide h mhthr mou kai oi adelfoi mou

legei ide hE mEtEr mou kai hoi adelphoi mou
G3004 G1492 G3588 G3384 G3450 G2532 G3588 G80 G3450
vi Pres Act 3 Sg vm Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg
He-IS-sayING BE-PERCEIVING THE MOTHER OF-ME AND THE brothers OF-ME
lo !
3:35 os gar an poihsh to qelhma tou qeou outos 35 For whosoever shall do the
hos gar an poiEsE to thelEma tou theou houtos
G3739 G1063 G302 G4160 G3588 G2307 G3588 G2316 G3778
will of God, the same is my
pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pd Nom Sg m brother, and my sister, and
WHO for EVER SHOULD-BE-DOING THE WILL OF-THE God this-one mother.
this-one
Mark 3 - Mark 4
adelfos mou kai adelfh mou kai mhthr estin

adelphos mou kai adelphE mou kai mEtEr estin
G80 G3450 G2532 G79 G3450 G2532 G3384 G2076
n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
brother OF-ME AND sister OF-ME AND MOTHER IS
Mark 4
4:1 kai palin hrxato didaskein para thn qalassan kai sunhcqh 1 . And he began again to teach
kai palin Erxato didaskein para tEn thalassan kai sunEchthE
G2532 G3825 G756 G1321 G3844 G3588 G2281 G2532 G4863
by the sea side: and there was
Conj Adv vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg gathered unto him a great
AND AGAIN He-begins TO-BE-TEACHING BESIDE THE SEA AND WAS-TOGETHER-LED multitude, so that he entered
was-gathered into a ship, and sat in the sea;
and the whole multitude was
pros auton oclos polus wste auton embanta eis to by the sea on the land.
pros auton ochlos polus hOste auton embanta eis to
G4314 G846 G3793 G4183 G5620 G846 G1684 G1519 G3588
Prep pp Acc Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Conj pp Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n
TOWARD Him THRONG much AS-BESIDES Him IN-STEPPing INTO THE
vast so-that stepping-in
ploion kaqhsqai en th qalassh kai pas o oclos pros

ploion kathEsthai en tE thalassE kai pas ho ochlos pros
G4143 G2521 G1722 G3588 G2281 G2532 G3956 G3588 G3793 G4314
n_ Acc Sg n vn Pres midD/pasD Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep
FLOATer TO-BE-sittING IN THE SEA AND EVERY THE THRONG TOWARD
ship entire
thn qalassan epi ths ghs hn

tEn thalassan epi tEs gEs En
G3588 G2281 G1909 G3588 G1093 G2258
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Impf vxx 3 Sg
THE SEA ON THE LAND WAS
4:2 kai edidasken autous en parabolais polla kai elegen autois en 2 And he taught them many
kai edidasken autous en parabolais polla kai elegen autois en
G2532 G1321 G846 G1722 G3850 G4183 G2532 G3004 G846 G1722
things by parables, and said
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Prep n_ Dat Pl f a_ Acc Pl n Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Prep unto them in his doctrine,
AND He-TAUGHT them IN BESIDE-CASTS MANY AND said to-them IN
parables many-things
th didach autou
tE didachE autou
G3588 G1322 G846
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m
THE TEACHing OF-Him
4:3 akouete idou exhlqen o speirwn tou speirai 3Hearken; Behold, there went
akouete idou exElthen ho speirOn tou speirai
G191 G2400 G1831 G3588 G4687 G3588 G4687
out a sower to sow:
vm Pres Act 2 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act
BE-YE-HEARING BE-PERCEIVING OUT-CAME THE one-SOWING OF-THE TO-SOW
be-ye-hearing ! lo ! came-out one-sowing
4:4 kai egeneto en tw speirein o men epesen para 4 And it came to pass, as he
kai egeneto en tO speirein ho men epesen para
G2532 G1096 G1722 G3588 G4687 G3739 G3303 G4098 G3844
sowed, some fell by the way
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres Act pr Nom Sg n Part vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep side, and the fowls of the air
AND BECAME IN THE TO-BE-SOWING WHICH INDEED FALLS BESIDE came and devoured it up.
it-occurred
thn odon kai hlqen ta peteina tou ouranou kai katefagen

tEn hodon kai Elthen ta peteina tou ouranou kai katephagen
G3588 G3598 G2532 G2064 G3588 G4071 G3588 G3772 G2532 G2719
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE WAY AND CAME THE flyers OF-THE heaven AND DOWN-ATE
road flying-creatures sky devoured
auto
auto
G846
pp Acc Sg n
it
4:5 allo de epesen epi to petrwdes opou ouk eicen 5 And some fell on stony
allo de epesen epi to petrOdes hopou ouk eichen
G243 G1161 G4098 G1909 G3588 G4075 G3699 G3756 G2192
ground, where it had not much
a_ Nom Sg n Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Adv Part Neg vi Impf Act 3 Sg earth; and immediately it
other YET FALLS ON THE ROCK-PERCEIVED THE-?-where NOT it-HAD sprang up, because it had no
rocky-place where ? depth of earth:
ghn pollhn kai euqews exaneteilen dia to mh ecein

gEn pollEn kai eutheOs exaneteilen dia to mE echein
G1093 G4183 G2532 G2112 G1816 G1223 G3588 G3361 G2192
n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n Part Neg vn Pres Act
LAND much AND immediately OUT-UP-risES THRU THE NO TO-BE-HAVING
earth it-shoots-up because-of
baqos ghs
bathos gEs
G899 G1093
n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg f
DEPTH OF-LAND
of-earth
Mark 4
4:6 hliou de anateilantos ekaumatisqh kai dia to mh ecein 6But when the sun was up, it
hEliou de anateilantos ekaumatisthE kai dia to mE echein
G2246 G1161 G393 G2739 G2532 G1223 G3588 G3361 G2192
was scorched; and because it
n_ Gen Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Gen Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg n Part Neg vn Pres Act had no root, it withered away.
OF-SUN YET UP-rising it-IS-BURNizED AND THRU THE NO TO-BE-HAVING
rising it-is-scorched because-of
rizan exhranqh
rizan exEranthE
G4491 G3583
n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ROOT it-IS-DRIED
it-is-withered
4:7 kai allo epesen eis tas akanqas kai anebhsan ai 7 And some fell among thorns,
kai allo epesen eis tas akanthas kai anebEsan hai
G2532 G243 G4098 G1519 G3588 G173 G2532 G305 G3588
and the thorns grew up, and
Conj a_ Nom Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f choked it, and it yielded no
AND other FALLS INTO THE POINT-FLOWERS AND UP-STEPPed THE fruit.
thorns came-up
akanqai kai sunepnixan auto kai karpon ouk edwken

akanthai kai sunepnixan auto kai karpon ouk edOken
G173 G2532 G4846 G846 G2532 G2590 G3756 G1325
n_ Nom Pl f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg n Conj n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Sg
POINT-FLOWERS AND TOGETHER-CHOKE it AND FRUIT NOT it-GIVES
thorns stifle
4:8 kai allo epesen eis thn ghn thn kalhn kai edidou 8 And other fell on good
kai allo epesen eis tEn gEn tEn kalEn kai edidou
G2532 G243 G4098 G1519 G3588 G1093 G3588 G2570 G2532 G1325
ground, and did yield fruit that
Conj a_ Nom Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg sprang up and increased; and
AND other FALLS INTO THE LAND THE IDEAL AND it-GAVE brought forth, some thirty, and
earth some sixty, and some an
hundred.
karpon anabainonta kai auxanonta kai eferen en triakonta kai en
karpon anabainonta kai auxanonta kai epheren hen triakonta kai hen
G2590 G305 G2532 G837 G2532 G5342 G1722 G5144 G2532 G1722
n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Acc Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Acc Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg Prep a_ Nom Conj Prep
FRUIT UP-STEPPING AND GROWING-UP AND CARRIED ONE THREE-TY AND ONE
coming-up brought-forth thirty
exhkonta kai en ekaton

hexEkonta kai hen hekaton
G1835 G2532 G1722 G1540
a_ Nom Conj Prep a_ Nom
SIX-TY AND ONE HUNDRED
sixty hundred-fold
4:9 kai elegen autois o ecwn wta akouein 9 And he said unto them, He
kai elegen autois ho echOn Ota akouein
G2532 G3004 G846 G3588 G2192 G3775 G191
that hath ears to hear, let him
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Pl n vn Pres Act hear.
AND He-said to-them THE-one HAVING EARS TO-BE-HEARING
the-one
akouetw
akouetO
G191
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
LET-him-BE-HEARING
let-him-be-hearing !
4:10 ote de egeneto katamonas hrwthsan auton oi peri auton 10 And when he was alone,
hote de egeneto katamonas ErOtEsan auton hoi peri auton
G3753 G1161 G1096 G2651 G2065 G846 G3588 G4012 G846
they that were about him with
Adv Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m Prep pp Acc Sg m the twelve asked of him the
when YET He-BECAME DOWN-ONLY ask Him THE-ones ABOUT Him parable.
he-came-to-be in-seclusion the-ones
sun tois dwdeka thn parabolhn

sun tois dOdeka tEn parabolEn
G4862 G3588 G1427 G3588 G3850
Prep t_ Dat Pl m a_ Nom t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
TOGETHER to-THE TWO-TEN THE BESIDE-CAST
togetherwith the twelve parable
4:11 kai elegen autois umin dedotai gnwnai to musthrion ths 11 And he said unto them,
kai elegen autois humin dedotai gnOnai to mustErion tEs
G2532 G3004 G846 G5213 G1325 G1097 G3588 G3466 G3588
Unto you it is given to know
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pp 2 Dat Pl vi Perf Pas 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg f the mystery of the kingdom of
AND He-said to-them to-YOU(p) HAS-been-GIVEN TO-KNOW THE CLOSE-KEEP OF-THE God: but unto them that are
to-ye secret without, all [these] things are
done in parables:
basileias tou qeou ekeinois de tois exw en parabolais ta
basileias tou theou ekeinois de tois exO en parabolais ta
G932 G3588 G2316 G1565 G1161 G3588 G1854 G1722 G3850 G3588
n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pd Dat Pl m Conj t_ Dat Pl m Adv Prep n_ Dat Pl f t_ Nom Pl n
KINGdom OF-THE God to-those YET THE-ones OUT IN BESIDE-CASTS THE
the-ones outside parables
Mark 4
panta ginetai
panta ginetai
G3956 G1096
a_ Nom Pl n vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
ALL IS-BECOMING
is-occurring
4:12 ina blepontes blepwsin kai mh idwsin kai 12 That seeing they may see,
hina blepontes blepOsin kai mE idOsin kai
G2443 G991 G991 G2532 G3361 G1492 G2532
and not perceive; and hearing
Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vs Pres Act 3 Pl Conj Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj they may hear, and not
THAT lookING THEY-MAY-BE-lookING AND NO MAY-BE-PERCEIVING AND understand; lest at any time
observing they-may-be-observing they should be converted, and
[their] sins should be forgiven
akouontes akouwsin kai mh suniwsin mhpote them.
akouontes akouOsin kai mE suniOsin mEpote
G191 G191 G2532 G3361 G4920 G3379
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vs Pres Act 3 Pl Conj Part Neg vs Pres Act 3 Pl Adv
HEARING THEY-MAY-BE-HEARING AND NO MAY-BE-understandING NO-?-when
lest-at-some-time
epistreywsin kai afeqh autois ta amarthmata

epistrepsOsin kai aphethE autois ta hamartEmata
G1994 G2532 G863 G846 G3588 G265
vs Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n
THEY-SHOULD-BE-ON-TURNING AND MAY-BE-BEING-FROM-LET to-them THE miss-effects
they-should-be-turning-about it-may-be-being-pardoned them penalties-of-sins
4:13 kai legei autois ouk oidate thn parabolhn tauthn kai 13 And he said unto them,
kai legei autois ouk oidate tEn parabolEn tautEn kai
G2532 G3004 G846 G3756 G1492 G3588 G3850 G3778 G2532
Know ye not this parable? and
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Part Neg vi Perf Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f Conj how then will ye know all
AND He-IS-sayING to-them NOT YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED THE BESIDE-CAST this AND parables?
parable
pws pasas tas parabolas gnwsesqe

pOs pasas tas parabolas gnOsesthe
G4459 G3956 G3588 G3850 G1097
Adv Int a_ Acc Pl f t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vi Fut midD 2 Pl
how ALL THE BESIDE-CASTS YE-SHALL-BE-KNOWING
how ? parables
4:14 o speirwn ton logon speirei 14 The sower soweth the word.
ho speirOn ton logon speirei
G3588 G4687 G3588 G3056 G4687
t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE one-SOWING THE saying IS-SOWING
one-sowing word
4:15 outoi de eisin oi para thn odon opou speiretai 15 And these are they by the
houtoi de eisin hoi para tEn hodon hopou speiretai
G3778 G1161 G1526 G3588 G3844 G3588 G3598 G3699 G4687
way side, where the word is
pd Nom Pl m Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Adv vi Pres Pas 3 Sg sown; but when they have
these YET ARE THE-ones BESIDE THE WAY THE-?-where IS-beING-SOWN heard, Satan cometh
the-ones road wheree immediately, and taketh away
the word that was sown in their
o logos kai otan akouswsin euqews ercetai o hearts.
ho logos kai hotan akousOsin eutheOs erchetai ho
G3588 G3056 G2532 G3752 G191 G2112 G2064 G3588
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl Adv vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
THE saying AND when-EVER THEY-SHOULD-BE-HEARING immediately IS-COMING THE
word whenever
satanas kai airei ton logon ton esparmenon en tais

satanas kai airei ton logon ton esparmenon en tais
G4567 G2532 G142 G3588 G3056 G3588 G4687 G1722 G3588
n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl f
SATAN (Heb. adversary) AND IS-LIFTING THE saying THE HAVING-been-SOWN IN THE
Satan is-taking-away word
kardiais autwn
kardiais autOn
G2588 G846
n_ Dat Pl f pp Gen Pl m
HEARTS OF-them
4:16 kai outoi eisin omoiws oi epi ta petrwdh 16 And these are they likewise
kai houtoi eisin homoiOs hoi epi ta petrOdE
G2532 G3778 G1526 G3668 G3588 G1909 G3588 G4075
which are sown on stony
Conj pd Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl Adv t_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n ground; who, when they have
AND these ARE LIKE-AS THE ON THE ROCK-PERCEIVEDS heard the word, immediately
likewise the-ones rocky-places receive it with gladness;
speiromenoi oi otan akouswsin ton logon euqews meta

speiromenoi hoi hotan akousOsin ton logon eutheOs meta
G4687 G3739 G3752 G191 G3588 G3056 G2112 G3326
vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m pr Nom Pl m Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Adv Prep
beING-SOWN WHO when-EVER THEY-SHOULD-BE-HEARING THE saying immediately WITH
whenever word
Mark 4
caras lambanousin auton

charas lambanousin auton
G5479 G2983 G846
n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
JOY ARE-GETTING-UP SAME
they-are-getting him it
4:17 kai ouk ecousin rizan en eautois alla proskairoi eisin 17 And have no root in
kai ouk echousin rizan en heautois alla proskairoi eisin
G2532 G3756 G2192 G4491 G1722 G1438 G235 G4340 G1526
themselves, and so endure but
Conj Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg f Prep pf 3 Dat Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl for a time: afterward, when
AND NOT THEY-ARE-HAVING ROOT IN selves but TOWARD-SEASONS ARE affliction or persecution ariseth
themselves temporary for the word's sake,
immediately they are offended.
eita genomenhs qliyews h diwgmou dia ton logon
eita genomenEs thlipseOs E diOgmou dia ton logon
G1534 G1096 G2347 G2228 G1375 G1223 G3588 G3056
Adv vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Part n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
THEREAFTER OF-BECOMING OF-CONSTRICTION OR OF-CHASing THRU THE saying
affliction persecution because-of word
euqews skandalizontai
eutheOs skandalizontai
G2112 G4624
Adv vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
immediately THEY-ARE-beING-SNARED
4:18 kai outoi eisin oi eis tas akanqas speiromenoi 18 And these are they which
kai houtoi eisin hoi eis tas akanthas speiromenoi
G2532 G3778 G1526 G3588 G1519 G3588 G173 G4687
are sown among thorns; such
Conj pd Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m as hear the word,
AND these ARE THE-ones INTO THE POINT-FLOWERS beING-SOWN
the-ones thorns
oi ton logon akouontes

hoi ton logon akouontes
G3588 G3588 G3056 G191
t_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
THE-ones THE saying HEARING
the-ones word
4:19 kai ai merimnai tou aiwnos toutou kai h apath tou 19 And the cares of this world,
kai hai merimnai tou aiOnos toutou kai hE apatE tou
G2532 G3588 G3308 G3588 G165 G5127 G2532 G3588 G539 G3588
and the deceitfulness of riches,
Conj t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m and the lusts of other things
AND THE anxieties OF-THE eon this AND THE SEDUCtion OF-THE entering in, choke the word,
worries and it becometh unfruitful.
ploutou kai ai peri ta loipa epiqumiai eisporeuomenai

ploutou kai hai peri ta loipa epithumiai eisporeuomenai
G4149 G2532 G3588 G4012 G3588 G3062 G1939 G1531
n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl f Prep t_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n n_ Nom Pl f vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl f
RICHES AND THE ABOUT THE rest ON-FEELings INTO-GOING
desires going-in
sumpnigousin ton logon kai akarpos ginetai

sumpnigousin ton logon kai akarpos ginetai
G4846 G3588 G3056 G2532 G175 G1096
vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
ARE-TOGETHER-CHOKING THE saying AND UN-FRUITful it-IS-BECOMING
are-stifling word unfruitful
4:20 kai outoi eisin oi epi thn ghn thn kalhn 20 And these are they which
kai houtoi eisin hoi epi tEn gEn tEn kalEn
G2532 G3778 G1526 G3588 G1909 G3588 G1093 G3588 G2570
are sown on good ground; such
Conj pd Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f as hear the word, and receive
AND these ARE THE-ones ON THE LAND THE IDEAL [it], and bring forth fruit, some
the-ones earth thirtyfold, some sixty, and
some an hundred.
sparentes oitines akouousin ton logon kai paradecontai kai
sparentes hoitines akouousin ton logon kai paradechontai kai
G4687 G3748 G191 G3588 G3056 G2532 G3858 G2532
vp 2Aor Pas Nom Pl m pr Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Conj
BEING-SOWN WHO-ANY ARE-HEARING THE saying AND ARE-BESIDE-RECEIVING AND
who-any word are-assenting-to-it
karpoforousin en triakonta kai en exhkonta kai en ekaton

karpophorousin hen triakonta kai hen hexEkonta kai hen hekaton
G2592 G1722 G5144 G2532 G1722 G1835 G2532 G1722 G1540
vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep a_ Nom Conj Prep a_ Nom Conj Prep a_ Nom
ARE-FRUIT-CARRYING ONE THREE-TY AND ONE SIX-TY AND ONE HUNDRED
are-bearing-fruit thirty sixty hundred-fold
4:21 kai elegen autois mhti o lucnos ercetai ina upo 21 . And he said unto them, Is
kai elegen autois mEti ho luchnos erchetai hina hupo
G2532 G3004 G846 G3385 G3588 G3088 G2064 G2443 G5259
a candle brought to be put
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Part Int t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj Prep under a bushel, or under a bed?
AND He-said to-them NO-ANY THE LAMP IS-COMING THAT UNDER and not to be set on a
not ? candlestick?
Mark 4
ton modion teqh h upo thn klinhn ouc ina epi

ton modion tethE E hupo tEn klinEn ouch hina epi
G3588 G3426 G5087 G2228 G5259 G3588 G2825 G3756 G2443 G1909
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vs Aor Pas 3 Sg Part Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Part Neg Conj Prep
THE MEASURE he-MAY-BE-BEING-PLACED OR UNDER THE couch NOT THAT ON
peck-measure heit-may-be-being-placed
thn lucnian epiteqh

tEn luchnian epitethE
G3588 G3087 G2007
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
THE LAMPstand he-MAY-BE-BEING-ON-PLACED
heit-may-be-being-placed-on
4:22 ou gar estin ti krupton o ean mh 22 For there is nothing hid,

ou gar estin ti krupton ho ean mE
G3756 G1063 G2076 G5100 G2927 G3739 G1437 G3361
which shall not be manifested;
Part Neg Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg px Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n pr Nom Sg n Cond Part Neg neither was any thing kept
NOT for IS ANY HIDDen WHICH IF-EVER NO secret, but that it should come
there-is anything abroad.
fanerwqh oude egeneto apokrufon all ina eis faneron

phanerOthE oude egeneto apokruphon all hina eis phaneron
G5319 G3761 G1096 G614 G235 G2443 G1519 G5318
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg Adv vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg n Conj Conj Prep a_ Acc Sg m
MAY-BE-BEING-made-APPEAR NOT-YET it-BECAME FROM-HIDDen but THAT INTO apparent
may-be-being-manifested neither concealed manifestation
elqh
elthE
G2064
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
it-MAY-BE-COMING
4:23 ei tis ecei wta akouein akouetw 23 If any man have ears to
ei tis echei Ota akouein akouetO
G1487 G5100 G2192 G3775 G191 G191
hear, let him hear.
Cond px Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl n vn Pres Act vm Pres Act 3 Sg
IF ANY IS-HAVING EARS TO-BE-HEARING LET-him-BE-HEARING
anyone let-him-be-hearing !
4:24 kai elegen autois blepete ti akouete en w metrw 24 And he said unto them,
kai elegen autois blepete ti akouete en hO metrO
G2532 G3004 G846 G991 G5101 G191 G1722 G3739 G3358
Take heed what ye hear: with
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl pi Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Pl Prep pr Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n what measure ye mete, it shall
AND He-said to-them BE-lookING ANY YE-ARE-HEARING IN WHICH MEASURE be measured to you: and unto
be-ye-bewaring ! what you that hear shall more be
given.
metreite metrhqhsetai umin kai prosteqhsetai umin tois
metreite metrEthEsetai humin kai prostethEsetai humin tois
G3354 G3354 G5213 G2532 G4369 G5213 G3588
vi Pres Act 2 Pl vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Dat Pl m
YE-ARE-MEASURING it-SHALL-BE-BEING-MEASURED to-YOU(p) AND it-SHALL-BE-BEING-addED to-YOU(p) THE-ones
to-ye to-ye the-ones
akouousin
akouousin
G191
vp Pres Act Dat Pl m
HEARING
4:25 os gar an ech doqhsetai autw kai os ouk 25 For he that hath, to him
hos gar an echE dothEsetai autO kai hos ouk
G3739 G1063 G302 G2192 G1325 G846 G2532 G3739 G3756
shall be given: and he that hath
pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs Pres Act 3 Sg vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Conj pr Nom Sg m Part Neg not, from him shall be taken
WHO for EVER MAY-BE-HAVING it-SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-him AND WHO NOT even that which he hath.
ecei kai o ecei arqhsetai ap autou

echei kai ho echei arthEsetai ap autou
G2192 G2532 G3739 G2192 G142 G575 G846
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj pr Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m
IS-HAVING AND WHICH he-IS-HAVING SHALL-BE-BEING-LIFTED FROM him
also shall-be-being-taken-away
4:26 kai elegen outws estin h basileia tou qeou ws 26 And he said, So is the
kai elegen houtOs estin hE basileia tou theou hOs
G2532 G3004 G3779 G2076 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316 G5613
kingdom of God, as if a man
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg Adv vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Adv should cast seed into the
AND He-said thus IS THE KINGdom OF-THE God AS ground;
ean anqrwpos balh ton sporon epi ths ghs

ean anthrOpos balE ton sporon epi tEs gEs
G1437 G444 G906 G3588 G4703 G1909 G3588 G1093
Cond n_ Nom Sg m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
IF-EVER human SHOULD-BE-CASTING THE seed ON THE LAND
earth
Mark 4
4:27 kai kaqeudh kai egeirhtai nukta kai hmeran kai 27 And should sleep, and rise
kai katheudE kai egeirEtai nukta kai hEmeran kai
G2532 G2518 G2532 G1453 G3571 G2532 G2250 G2532
night and day, and the seed
Conj vs Pres Act 3 Sg Conj vs Pres Pas 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f Conj should spring and grow up, he
AND he-MAY-BE-DOWN-LOUNGING AND MAY-BE-beING-ROUSED NIGHT AND DAY AND knoweth not how.
he-may-be-drowsing
o sporos blastanh kai mhkunhtai ws ouk oiden

ho sporos blastanE kai mEkunEtai hOs ouk oiden
G3588 G4703 G985 G2532 G3373 G5613 G3756 G1492
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vs Pres Act 3 Sg Conj vs Pres Pas 3 Sg Adv Part Neg vi Perf Act 3 Sg
THE seed MAY-BE-GERMINATING AND MAY-BE-LENGTHENING AS NOT HAS-PERCEIVED
is-aware
autos
autos
G846
pp Nom Sg m
he
4:28 automath gar h gh karpoforei prwton corton eita 28 For the earth bringeth forth
automatE gar hE gE karpophorei prOton chorton eita
G844 G1063 G3588 G1093 G2592 G4412 G5528 G1534
fruit of herself; first the blade,
a_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv n_ Acc Sg m Adv then the ear, after that the full
SAME-IMPELLED for THE LAND IS-FRUIT-CARRYING BEFORE-most FODDER THEREAFTER corn in the ear.
spontaneously earth is-bearing-fruit first blade
stacun eita plhrh siton en tw stacui

stachun eita plErE siton en tO stachui
G4719 G1534 G4134 G4621 G1722 G3588 G4719
n_ Acc Sg m Adv a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
EAR (of-plant) THEREAFTER FULL GRAIN IN THE EAR (of-plant)
ear ear
4:29 otan de paradw o karpos euqews apostellei to 29 But when the fruit is
hotan de paradO ho karpos eutheOs apostellei to
G3752 G1161 G3860 G3588 G2590 G2112 G649 G3588
brought forth, immediately he
Conj Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n putteth in the sickle, because
when-EVER YET MAY-BE BESIDE-GIVING THE FRUIT immediately he-IS-commissionING THE the harvest is come.
whenever may-be-giving-way he-is-dispatching
drepanon oti paresthken o qerismos

drepanon hoti parestEken ho therismos
G1407 G3754 G3936 G3588 G2326
n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
SICKLE that HAS-BESIDE-STOOD THE harvest
is-present
4:30 kai elegen tini omoiwswmen thn basileian tou qeou 30 And he said, Whereunto
kai elegen tini homoiOsOmen tEn basileian tou theou
G2532 G3004 G5101 G3666 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316
shall we liken the kingdom of
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pi Dat Sg m vs Aor Act 1 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m God? or with what comparison
AND He-said to-ANY WE-SHOULD-BE-LIKenING THE KINGdom OF-THE God shall we compare it?
to-what ?
h en poia parabolh parabalwmen authn

E en poia parabolE parabalOmen autEn
G2228 G1722 G4169 G3850 G3846 G846
Part Prep pi Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl pp Acc Sg f
OR IN ?-THE-WHICH BESIDE-CAST WE-MAY-BE-BESIDE-CASTING her
which ? parable we-may-be-making-a-parable
4:31 ws kokkw sinapews os otan sparh epi ths ghs 31 [It is] like a grain of
hOs kokkO sinapeOs hos hotan sparE epi tEs gEs
G5613 G2848 G4615 G3739 G3752 G4687 G1909 G3588 G1093
mustard seed, which, when it is
Adv n_ Dat Sg m n_ Gen Sg n pr Nom Sg m Conj vs 2Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f sown in the earth, is less than
AS to-KERNEL OF-MUSTARD WHICH when-EVER it-MAY-BE-BEING-SOWN ON THE LAND all the seeds that be in the
kernel whenever earth earth:
mikroteros pantwn twn spermatwn estin twn epi ths ghs

mikroteros pantOn tOn spermatOn estin tOn epi tEs gEs
G3398 G3956 G3588 G4690 G2076 G3588 G1909 G3588 G1093
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp a_ Gen Pl n t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Gen Pl n Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
LITTLER OF-ALL THE seeds IS OF-THE ON THE LAND
smaller the earth
4:32 kai otan sparh anabainei kai ginetai pantwn twn 32 But when it is sown, it
kai hotan sparE anabainei kai ginetai pantOn tOn
G2532 G3752 G4687 G305 G2532 G1096 G3956 G3588
groweth up, and becometh
Conj Conj vs 2Aor Pas 3 Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg a_ Gen Pl n t_ Gen Pl n greater than all herbs, and
AND when-EVER it-MAY-BE-BEING-SOWN IS-UP-STEPPING AND IS-BECOMING OF-ALL THE shooteth out great branches; so
whenever it-is-coming-up that the fowls of the air may
lodge under the shadow of it.
lacanwn meizwn kai poiei kladous megalous wste dunasqai
lachanOn meizOn kai poiei kladous megalous hOste dunasthai
G3001 G3187 G2532 G4160 G2798 G3173 G5620 G1410
n_ Gen Pl n a_ Nom Sg m Cmp Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Conj vn Pres midD/pasD
GREENS GREATER AND IS-makING boughs GREAT AS-BESIDES TO-BE-enABLED
so-that
Mark 4
upo thn skian autou ta peteina tou ouranou kataskhnoun

hupo tEn skian autou ta peteina tou ouranou kataskEnoun
G5259 G3588 G4639 G846 G3588 G4071 G3588 G3772 G2681
Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vn Pres Act
UNDER THE SHADE OF-it THE flyers OF-THE heaven TO-BE-DOWN-BOOTHING
flying-creatures to-be-roosting
4:33 kai toiautais parabolais pollais elalei autois ton logon 33 And with many such
kai toiautais parabolais pollais elalei autois ton logon
G2532 G5108 G3850 G4183 G2980 G846 G3588 G3056
parables spake he the word
Conj pd Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f a_ Dat Pl f vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m unto them, as they were able to
AND to-such BESIDE-CASTS MANY He-TALKED to-them THE saying hear [it].
parables he-spoke word
kaqws hdunanto akouein

kathOs Edunanto akouein
G2531 G1410 G191
Adv vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl Att vn Pres Act
according-AS THEY-were-ABLE TO-BE-HEARING
to-be-hearing-it
4:34 cwris de parabolhs ouk elalei autois kat idian de tois 34 But without a parable spake
chOris de parabolEs ouk elalei autois kat idian de tois
G5565 G1161 G3850 G3756 G2980 G846 G2596 G2398 G1161 G3588
he not unto them: and when
Adv Conj n_ Gen Sg f Part Neg vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Prep a_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Dat Pl m they were alone, he expounded
apart-from YET BESIDE-CAST NOT He-TALKED to-them according-to OWN YET to-THE all things to his disciples.
parable he-spoke
maqhtais autou epeluen panta

mathEtais autou epeluen panta
G3101 G846 G1956 G3956
n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl n
LEARNers OF-Him He-ON-LOOSED ALL
disciples he-explained
4:35 kai legei autois en ekeinh th hmera oyias genomenhs 35 . And the same day, when
kai legei autois en ekeinE tE hEmera opsias genomenEs
G2532 G3004 G846 G1722 G1565 G3588 G2250 G3798 G1096
the even was come, he saith
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Prep pd Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f a_ Gen Sg f vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f unto them, Let us pass over
AND He-IS-sayING to-them IN that THE DAY OF-evening BECOMING unto the other side.
dielqwmen eis to peran

dielthOmen eis to peran
G1330 G1519 G3588 G4008
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg n Adv
WE-MAY-BE-THRU-COMING INTO THE OTHER-SIDE
we-may-be-passing-through
4:36 kai afentes ton oclon paralambanousin auton ws 36 And when they had sent
kai aphentes ton ochlon paralambanousin auton hOs
G2532 G863 G3588 G3793 G3880 G846 G5613
away the multitude, they took
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Adv him even as he was in the ship.
AND FROM-LETTING THE THRONG THEY-ARE-BESIDE-GETTING Him AS And there were also with him
leaving they-are-taking-along other little ships.
hn en tw ploiw kai alla de ploiaria hn met

En en tO ploiO kai alla de ploiaria En met
G2258 G1722 G3588 G4143 G2532 G243 G1161 G4142 G2258 G3326
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n Conj a_ Nom Pl n Conj n_ Nom Pl n vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Prep
He-WAS IN THE FLOATer AND other YET FLOATERS (dim) WAS WITH
ship boats
autou
autou
G846
pp Gen Sg m
Him
4:37 kai ginetai lailay anemou megalh ta de kumata epeballen 37 And there arose a great
kai ginetai lailaps anemou megalE ta de kumata epeballen
G2532 G1096 G2978 G417 G3173 G3588 G1161 G2949 G1911
storm of wind, and the waves
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg m a_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Pl n Conj n_ Nom Pl n vi Impf Act 3 Sg beat into the ship, so that it
AND IS-BECOMING storm OF-WIND GREAT THE YET BILLOWS ON-CAST was now full.
there-is-occurring dashed
eis to ploion wste auto hdh gemizesqai

eis to ploion hOste auto EdE gemizesthai
G1519 G3588 G4143 G5620 G846 G2235 G1072
Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj pp Nom Sg n Adv vn Pres Pas
INTO THE FLOATer AS-BESIDES it ALREADY TO-BE-beING-REPLETizED
ship so-that to-be-being-filled-to-the-brim
4:38 kai hn autos epi th prumnh epi to proskefalaion 38 And he was in the hinder
kai En autos epi tE prumnE epi to proskephalaion
G2532 G2258 G846 G1909 G3588 G4403 G1909 G3588 G4344
part of the ship, asleep on a
Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pp Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pillow: and they awake him,
AND WAS He ON THE STERN ON THE TOWARD-HEAD and say unto him, Master,
cushion carest thou not that we perish?
Mark 4 - Mark 5
kaqeudwn kai diegeirousin auton kai legousin autw didaskale

katheudOn kai diegeirousin auton kai legousin autO didaskale
G2518 G2532 G1326 G846 G2532 G3004 G846 G1320
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m
DOWN-LOUNGING AND THEY-ARE-THRU-ROUSING Him AND ARE-sayING to-Him TEACHer !
drowsing they-are-rousing
ou melei soi oti apollumeqa

ou melei soi hoti apollumetha
G3756 G3199 G4671 G3754 G622
Part Neg vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Conj vi Pres Mid 1 Pl
NOT IS-CARING to-YOU that WE-ARE-beING-destroyED
it-is-caring we-are-perishing
4:39 kai diegerqeis epetimhsen tw anemw kai eipen th 39 And he arose, and rebuked
kai diegertheis epetimEsen tO anemO kai eipen tE
G2532 G1326 G2008 G3588 G417 G2532 G2036 G3588
the wind, and said unto the sea,
Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg f Peace, be still. And the wind
AND BEING-THRU-ROUSED He-rebukES to-THE WIND AND said to-THE ceased, and there was a great
being-roused the calm.
qalassh siwpa pefimwso kai ekopasen o anemos kai

thalassE siOpa pephimOso kai ekopasen ho anemos kai
G2281 G4623 G5392 G2532 G2869 G3588 G417 G2532
n_ Dat Sg f vm Pres Act 2 Sg vm Perf Pas 2 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj
SEA BE-beING-SILENT BE-HAVE-been-MUZZLED AND STRIKES THE WIND AND
be-you-silent ! be-you-still ! flags
egeneto galhnh megalh

egeneto galEnE megalE
G1096 G1055 G3173
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f
BECAME CALM GREAT
4:40 kai eipen autois ti deiloi este outws pws ouk 40 And he said unto them,
kai eipen autois ti deiloi este houtOs pOs ouk
G2532 G2036 G846 G5101 G1169 G2075 G3779 G4459 G3756
Why are ye so fearful? how is
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pi Nom Sg n a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 2 Pl Adv Adv Int Part Neg it that ye have no faith?
AND He-said to-them ANY DREADers YE-ARE thus how NOT
why ? timid how ?
ecete pistin
echete pistin
G2192 G4102
vi Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg f
YE-ARE-HAVING BELIEF
faith
4:41 kai efobhqhsan fobon megan kai elegon pros allhlous tis 41 And they feared
kai ephobEthEsan phobon megan kai elegon pros allElous tis
G2532 G5399 G5401 G3173 G2532 G3004 G4314 G240 G5101
exceedingly, and said one to
Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep pc Acc Pl m pi Nom Sg m another, What manner of man
AND THEY-WERE-afraid FEAR GREAT AND THEY-said TOWARD one-another ANY is this, that even the wind and
who ? the sea obey him?
ara outos estin oti kai o anemos kai h qalassa

ara houtos estin hoti kai ho anemos kai hE thalassa
G687 G3778 G2076 G3754 G2532 G3588 G417 G2532 G3588 G2281
Part Int pd Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Conj Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
CONSEQUENTLY this IS that AND THE WIND AND THE SEA
this-man also
upakouousin autw
hupakouousin autO
G5219 G846
vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
ARE-obeyING to-Him
him
Mark 5
5:1 kai hlqon eis to peran ths qalasshs eis thn cwran 1 . And they came over unto
kai Elthon eis to peran tEs thalassEs eis tEn chOran
G2532 G2064 G1519 G3588 G4008 G3588 G2281 G1519 G3588 G5561
the other side of the sea, into
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg n Adv t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f the country of the Gadarenes.
AND THEY-CAME INTO THE OTHER-SIDE OF-THE SEA INTO THE SPACE
country
twn gadarhnwn
tOn gadarEnOn
G3588 G1046
t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE GADARENES
5:2 kai exelqonti autw ek tou ploiou euqews aphnthsen autw 2 And when he was come out
kai exelthonti autO ek tou ploiou eutheOs apEntEsen autO
G2532 G1831 G846 G1537 G3588 G4143 G2112 G528 G846
of the ship, immediately there
Conj vp 2Aor Act Dat Sg m pp Dat Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m met him out of the tombs a
AND to-OUT-COMING Him OUT OF-THE FLOATer immediately FROM-meets to-Him man with an unclean spirit,
to-coming-out ship meets him
ek twn mnhmeiwn anqrwpos en pneumati akaqartw

ek tOn mnEmeiOn anthrOpos en pneumati akathartO
G1537 G3588 G3419 G444 G1722 G4151 G169
Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n
OUT OF-THE memorial-vaults human IN spirit UN-clean
tombs unclean
5:3 os thn katoikhsin eicen en tois mnhmeiois kai oute 3 Who had [his] dwelling
hos tEn katoikEsin eichen en tois mnEmeiois kai oute
G3739 G3588 G2731 G2192 G1722 G3588 G3419 G2532 G3777
among the tombs; and no man
pr Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Impf Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n Conj Conj could bind him, no, not with
WHO THE DOWN-HOMEing HAD IN THE memorial-vaults AND NOT-BESIDES chains:
dwelling among tombs not-bseven
alusesin oudeis hdunato auton dhsai

halusesin oudeis Edunato auton dEsai
G254 G3762 G1410 G846 G1210
n_ Dat Pl f a_ Nom Sg m vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Att pp Acc Sg m vn Aor Act
to-UN-LOOSES NOT-YET-ONE was-ABLE him TO-BIND
to-chains anyone
5:4 dia to auton pollakis pedais kai alusesin dedesqai kai 4 Because that he had been
dia to auton pollakis pedais kai halusesin dedesthai kai
G1223 G3588 G846 G4178 G3976 G2532 G254 G1210 G2532
often bound with fetters and
Prep t_ Acc Sg n pp Acc Sg m Adv n_ Dat Pl f Conj n_ Dat Pl f vn Perf Pas Conj chains, and the chains had
THRU THE him MANY-times to-fetters AND to-UN-LOOSES TO-HAVE-been-BOUND AND been plucked asunder by him,
because-of often to-chains and the fetters broken in
pieces: neither could any [man]
diespasqai up autou tas aluseis kai tas pedas tame him.
diespasthai hup autou tas haluseis kai tas pedas
G1288 G5259 G846 G3588 G254 G2532 G3588 G3976
vn Perf Pas Prep pp Gen Sg m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Conj t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f
TO-HAVE-been-THRU-PULLED by him THE UN-LOOSES AND THE fetters
to-have-been-pulled-to-pieces chains
suntetrifqai kai oudeis auton iscuen damasai

suntetriphthai kai oudeis auton ischuen damasai
G4937 G2532 G3762 G846 G2480 G1150
vn Perf Pas Conj a_ Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg vn Aor Act
TO-HAVE-been-crushED AND NOT-YET-ONE him was-STRONG TO-TAME
no-one
5:5 kai diapantos nuktos kai hmeras en tois oresin kai en tois 5 And always, night and day,
kai diapantos nuktos kai hEmeras en tois oresin kai en tois
G2532 G1275 G3571 G2532 G2250 G1722 G3588 G3735 G2532 G1722 G3588
he was in the mountains, and
Conj Adv n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f Prep t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n Conj Prep t_ Dat Pl n in the tombs, crying, and
AND THRU-EVERY NIGHT AND DAY IN THE mountains AND IN THE cutting himself with stones.
continually
mnhmasin hn krazwn kai katakoptwn eauton liqois

mnEmasin En krazOn kai katakoptOn heauton lithois
G3418 G2258 G2896 G2532 G2629 G1438 G3037
n_ Dat Pl n vi Impf vxx 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pf 3 Acc Sg m n_ Dat Pl m
memorial-tombs he-WAS CRYING AND DOWN-STRIKING self to-STONES
tombs gashing himself
5:6 idwn de ton ihsoun apo makroqen edramen kai 6 But when he saw Jesus afar
idOn de ton iEsoun apo makrothen edramen kai
G1492 G1161 G3588 G2424 G575 G3113 G5143 G2532
off, he ran and worshipped
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj him,
PERCEIVING YET THE JESUS FROM FAR-PLACE he-RAN AND
afar
prosekunhsen autw
prosekunEsen autO
G4352 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
worships to-Him
him
Mark 5
5:7 kai kraxas fwnh megalh eipen ti emoi kai soi 7 And cried with a loud voice,
kai kraxas phOnE megalE eipen ti emoi kai soi
G2532 G2896 G5456 G3173 G2036 G5101 G1698 G2532 G4671
and said, What have I to do
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pi Nom Sg n pp 1 Dat Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Sg with thee, Jesus, [thou] Son of
AND CRYing to-SOUND GREAT he-said ANY to-ME AND to-YOU the most high God? I adjure
to-voice loud what ? thee by God, that thou torment
me not.
ihsou uie tou qeou tou uyistou orkizw se ton
iEsou huie tou theou tou hupsistou horkizO se ton
G2424 G5207 G3588 G2316 G3588 G5310 G3726 G4571 G3588
n_ Voc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg t_ Acc Sg m
JESUS ! SON ! OF-THE God THE HIGHest I-AM-OATHizING YOU THE
Most-High I-am-adjuring
qeon mh me basanishs
theon mE me basanisEs
G2316 G3361 G3165 G928
n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg pp 1 Acc Sg vs Aor Act 2 Sg
God NO ME YOU-SHOULD-BE-ORDEALizING
you-should-be-tormenting
5:8 elegen gar autw exelqe to pneuma to akaqarton ek 8 For he said unto him, Come
elegen gar autO exelthe to pneuma to akatharton ek
G3004 G1063 G846 G1831 G3588 G4151 G3588 G169 G1537
out of the man, [thou] unclean
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n Prep spirit.
He-said for to-it BE-OUT-COMING THE spirit THE UN-clean OUT
be-you-coming-out ! unclean
tou anqrwpou
tou anthrOpou
G3588 G444
OF-THE human
5:9 kai ephrwta auton ti soi onoma kai apekriqh legwn 9 And he asked him, What [is]
kai epErOta auton ti soi onoma kai apekrithE legOn
G2532 G1905 G846 G5101 G4671 G3686 G2532 G611 G3004
thy name? And he answered,
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m pi Nom Sg n pp 2 Dat Sg n_ Nom Sg n Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m saying, My name [is] Legion:
AND He-inquirED-of SAME ANY to-YOU NAME AND it-answerED sayING for we are many.
him what ?
legewn onoma moi oti polloi esmen

legeOn onoma moi hoti polloi esmen
G3003 G3686 G3427 G3754 G4183 G2070
n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg n pp 1 Dat Sg Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
LEGION NAME to-ME that MANY WE-ARE
5:10 kai parekalei auton polla ina mh autous aposteilh 10 And he besought him much
kai parekalei auton polla hina mE autous aposteilE
G2532 G3870 G846 G4183 G2443 G3361 G846 G649
that he would not send them
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m a_ Acc Pl n Conj Part Neg pp Acc Pl m vs Aor Act 3 Sg away out of the country.
AND it-BESIDE-CALLED Him much THAT NO them He-SHOULD-BE-commissionING
it-entreated he-should-be-dispatching
exw ths cwras

exO tEs chOras
G1854 G3588 G5561
Adv t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
OUT OF-THE SPACE
country
5:11 hn de ekei pros ta orh agelh coirwn megalh 11 Now there was there nigh
En de ekei pros ta orE agelE choirOn megalE
G2258 G1161 G1563 G4314 G3588 G3735 G34 G5519 G3173
unto the mountains a great herd
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj Adv Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom Sg f of swine feeding.
WAS YET there TOWARD THE mountains HERD OF-HOGS GREAT
boskomenh
boskomenE
G1006
vp Pres Pas Nom Sg f
beING-HERBED
grazing
5:12 kai parekalesan auton pantes oi daimones legontes pemyon 12 And all the devils besought
kai parekalesan auton pantes hoi daimones legontes pempson
G2532 G3870 G846 G3956 G3588 G1142 G3004 G3992
him, saying, Send us into the
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Sg swine, that we may enter into
AND BESIDE-CALL Him ALL THE demons sayING SEND them.
entreat send-you !
hmas eis tous coirous ina eis autous eiselqwmen

hEmas eis tous choirous hina eis autous eiselthOmen
G2248 G1519 G3588 G5519 G2443 G1519 G846 G1525
pp 1 Acc Pl Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj Prep pp Acc Pl m vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
US INTO THE HOGS THAT INTO them WE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING
we-may-be-entering
Mark 5
5:13 kai epetreyen autois euqews o ihsous kai exelqonta ta 13 And forthwith Jesus gave
kai epetrepsen autois eutheOs ho iEsous kai exelthonta ta
G2532 G2010 G846 G2112 G3588 G2424 G2532 G1831 G3588
them leave. And the unclean
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl n t_ Nom Pl n spirits went out, and entered
AND permits to-them immediately THE JESUS AND OUT-COMING THE into the swine: and the herd ran
them coming-out violently down a steep place
into the sea, (they were about
pneumata ta akaqarta eishlqon eis tous coirous kai wrmhsen h two thousand;) and were
pneumata ta akatharta eisElthon eis tous choirous kai hOrmEsen hE choked in the sea.
G4151 G3588 G169 G1525 G1519 G3588 G5519 G2532 G3729 G3588
n_ Nom Pl n t_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
spirits THE UN-clean INTO-CAME INTO THE HOGS AND RUSHES THE
unclean entered
agelh kata tou krhmnou eis thn qalassan hsan de ws

agelE kata tou krEmnou eis tEn thalassan Esan de hOs
G34 G2596 G3588 G2911 G1519 G3588 G2281 G2258 G1161 G5613
n_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj Adv
HERD DOWN THE HANG INTO THE SEA THEY-WERE YET AS
precipice
discilioi kai epnigonto en th qalassh

dischilioi kai epnigonto en tE thalassE
G1367 G2532 G4155 G1722 G3588 G2281
a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Impf Pas 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
TWO-THOUSAND AND THEY-were-CHOKED IN THE SEA
5:14 oi de boskontes tous coirous efugon kai anhggeilan eis 14 And they that fed the swine
hoi de boskontes tous choirous ephugon kai anEggeilan eis
G3588 G1161 G1006 G3588 G5519 G5343 G2532 G312 G1519
fled, and told [it] in the city,
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep and in the country. And they
THE YET ones-HERBING THE HOGS FLED AND THEY-UP-MESSAGE INTO went out to see what it was that
ones-grazing they-inform was done.
thn polin kai eis tous agrous kai exhlqon idein ti

tEn polin kai eis tous agrous kai exElthon idein ti
G3588 G4172 G2532 G1519 G3588 G68 G2532 G1831 G1492 G5101
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl vn 2Aor Act pi Nom Sg n
THE city AND INTO THE FIELDS AND THEY-OUT-CAME TO-BE-PERCEIVING ANY
they-came-out what ?
estin to gegonos
estin to gegonos
G2076 G3588 G1096
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n vp 2Perf Act Nom Sg n
IS THE HAVING-BECOME
having-occurred
5:15 kai ercontai pros ton ihsoun kai qewrousin ton 15 And they come to Jesus,
kai erchontai pros ton iEsoun kai theOrousin ton
G2532 G2064 G4314 G3588 G2424 G2532 G2334 G3588
and see him that was possessed
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m with the devil, and had the
AND THEY-ARE-COMING TOWARD THE JESUS AND THEY-ARE-beholdING THE legion, sitting, and clothed, and
are-beholding in his right mind: and they
were afraid.
daimonizomenon kaqhmenon kai imatismenon kai swfronounta ton
daimonizomenon kathEmenon kai himatismenon kai sOphronounta ton
G1139 G2521 G2532 G2439 G2532 G4993 G3588
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m Conj vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
demonizING-one sittING AND beING-GARMENTED AND beING-sane THE
one-being-demonized
eschkota ton legewna kai efobhqhsan

eschEkota ton legeOna kai ephobEthEsan
G2192 G3588 G3003 G2532 G5399
vp Perf Act Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
one-HAVING-HAD THE LEGION AND THEY-WERE-afraid
one-having-had
5:16 kai dihghsanto autois oi idontes pws egeneto tw 16 And they that saw [it] told
kai diEgEsanto autois hoi idontes pOs egeneto tO
G2532 G1334 G846 G3588 G1492 G4459 G1096 G3588
them how it befell to him that
Conj vi Aor midD 3 Pl pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Adv vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m was possessed with the devil,
AND relate to-them THE ones-PERCEIVING how it-BECAME to-THE and [also] concerning the
ones-perceiving-it swine.
daimonizomenw kai peri twn coirwn

daimonizomenO kai peri tOn choirOn
G1139 G2532 G4012 G3588 G5519
vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Sg m Conj Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
demonizING-one AND ABOUT THE HOGS
one-being-demonized concerning
5:17 kai hrxanto parakalein auton apelqein apo twn oriwn 17 And they began to pray him
kai Erxanto parakalein auton apelthein apo tOn horiOn
G2532 G756 G3870 G846 G565 G575 G3588 G3725
to depart out of their coasts.
Conj vi Aor midD 3 Pl vn Pres Act pp Acc Sg m vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
AND THEY-begin TO-BE-BESIDE-CALLING Him TO-BE-FROM-COMING FROM THE boundaries
to-be-entreating to-be-coming-away
Mark 5
autwn
autOn
G846
pp Gen Pl m
OF-them
5:18 kai embantos autou eis to ploion parekalei auton o 18 And when he was come into
kai embantos autou eis to ploion parekalei auton ho
G2532 G1684 G846 G1519 G3588 G4143 G3870 G846 G3588
the ship, he that had been
Conj vp 2Aor Act Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m possessed with the devil
AND OF-IN-STEPPing OF-Him INTO THE FLOATer BESIDE-CALLED Him THE prayed him that he might be
of-stepping-in ship entreated with him.
daimonisqeis ina h met autou

daimonistheis hina hE met autou
G1139 G2443 G5600 G3326 G846
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj vs Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m
one-BEING-demonizED THAT he-MAY-BE WITH Him
one-being-demonized
5:19 o de ihsous ouk afhken auton alla legei autw 19 Howbeit Jesus suffered him
ho de iEsous ouk aphEken auton alla legei autO
G3588 G1161 G2424 G3756 G863 G846 G235 G3004 G846
not, but saith unto him, Go
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m home to thy friends, and tell
THE YET JESUS NOT FROM-LETS him but He-IS-sayING to-him them how great things the Lord
lets hath done for thee, and hath
had compassion on thee.
upage eis ton oikon sou pros tous sous kai
hupage eis ton oikon sou pros tous sous kai
G5217 G1519 G3588 G3624 G4675 G4314 G3588 G4674 G2532
vm Pres Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl m ps 2 Acc Pl Conj
BE-UNDER-LEADING INTO THE HOME OF-YOU TOWARD THE YOURS AND
be-you-going-away !
anaggeilon autois osa soi o kurios epoihsen kai hlehsen

anaggeilon autois hosa soi ho kurios epoiEsen kai EleEsen
G312 G846 G3745 G4671 G3588 G2962 G4160 G2532 G1653
vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp Dat Pl m pk Acc Pl n pp 2 Dat Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
UP-MESSAGE to-them as-much-as to-YOU THE Master DOES AND is-MERCIFUL-to
inform-you ! Lord
se
se
G4571
pp 2 Acc Sg
YOU
5:20 kai aphlqen kai hrxato khrussein en th dekapolei osa 20 And he departed, and began
kai apElthen kai Erxato kErussein en tE dekapolei hosa
G2532 G565 G2532 G756 G2784 G1722 G3588 G1179 G3745
to publish in Decapolis how
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pk Acc Pl n great things Jesus had done for
AND he-FROM-CAME AND begins TO-BE-PROCLAIMING IN THE Decapolis as-much-as him: and all [men] did marvel.
he-came-away to-be-heralding
epoihsen autw o ihsous kai pantes eqaumazon

epoiEsen autO ho iEsous kai pantes ethaumazon
G4160 G846 G3588 G2424 G2532 G3956 G2296
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl
DOES to-him THE JESUS AND ALL MARVELED
5:21 kai diaperasantos tou ihsou en tw ploiw palin eis to 21 . And when Jesus was
kai diaperasantos tou iEsou en tO ploiO palin eis to
G2532 G1276 G3588 G2424 G1722 G3588 G4143 G3825 G1519 G3588
passed over again by ship unto
Conj vp Aor Act Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n Adv Prep t_ Acc Sg n the other side, much people
AND OF-ferrying OF-THE JESUS IN THE FLOATer AGAIN INTO THE gathered unto him: and he was
ship nigh unto the sea.
peran sunhcqh oclos polus ep auton kai hn para

peran sunEchthE ochlos polus ep auton kai En para
G4008 G4863 G3793 G4183 G1909 G846 G2532 G2258 G3844
Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Prep pp Acc Sg m Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Prep
OTHER-SIDE WAS-TOGETHER-LED THRONG MANY ON Him AND He-WAS BESIDE
was-gathered vast
thn qalassan
tEn thalassan
G3588 G2281
THE SEA
5:22 kai idou ercetai eis twn arcisunagwgwn onomati 22 And, behold, there cometh
kai idou erchetai heis tOn archisunagOgOn onomati
G2532 G2400 G2064 G1520 G3588 G752 G3686
one of the rulers of the
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg n synagogue, Jairus by name;
AND BE-PERCEIVING IS-COMING ONE OF-THE chiefs-of-TOGETHER-LEAD to-NAME and when he saw him, he fell
lo ! chiefs-of-the-synagogue at his feet,
Mark 5
iaeiros kai idwn auton piptei pros tous podas autou

iaeiros kai idOn auton piptei pros tous podas autou
G2383 G2532 G1492 G846 G4098 G4314 G3588 G4228 G846
n_ Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m
JAIRUS AND PERCEIVING Him IS-FALLING TOWARD THE FEET OF-Him
he-is-falling
5:23 kai parekalei auton polla legwn oti to qugatrion 23 And besought him greatly,
kai parekalei auton polla legOn hoti to thugatrion
G2532 G3870 G846 G4183 G3004 G3754 G3588 G2365
saying, My little daughter lieth
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m a_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n at the point of death: [I pray
AND he-BESIDE-CALLED Him much sayING that THE DAUGHER (dim) thee], come and lay thy hands
he-entreated little-daughter on her, that she may be healed;
and she shall live.
mou escatws ecei ina elqwn epiqhs auth tas
mou eschatOs echei hina elthOn epithEs autE tas
G3450 G2079 G2192 G2443 G2064 G2007 G846 G3588
pp 1 Gen Sg Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp Dat Sg f t_ Acc Pl f
OF-ME LASTly IS-HAVING THAT COMING YOU-MAY-BE-ON-PLACING to-her THE
you-may-be-placing-on her
ceiras opws swqh kai zhsetai

cheiras hopOs sOthE kai zEsetai
G5495 G3704 G4982 G2532 G2198
n_ Acc Pl f Adv vs Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj vi Fut midD 3 Sg
HANDS WHICH-how she-MAY-BE-BEING-SAVED AND she-SHALL-BE-LIVING
so-that
5:24 kai aphlqen met autou kai hkolouqei autw oclos polus kai 24 And [Jesus] went with him;
kai apElthen met autou kai Ekolouthei autO ochlos polus kai
G2532 G565 G3326 G846 G2532 G190 G846 G3793 G4183 G2532
and much people followed
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Conj him, and thronged him.
AND He-FROM-CAME WITH him AND followED to-Him THRONG MANY AND
he-came-away him vast
suneqlibon auton
sunethlibon auton
G4918 G846
vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
THEY-TOGETHER-CONSTRICTED Him
they-crowded
5:25 kai gunh tis ousa en rusei aimatos eth dwdeka 25 And a certain woman,
kai gunE tis ousa en rusei haimatos etE dOdeka
G2532 G1135 G5100 G5607 G1722 G4511 G129 G2094 G1427
which had an issue of blood
Conj n_ Nom Sg f px Nom Sg f vp Pres vxx Nom Sg f Prep n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg n n_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom twelve years,
AND WOMAN ANY BEING IN GUSHing OF-BLOOD YEARS TWO-TEN
certain twelve
5:26 kai polla paqousa upo pollwn iatrwn kai dapanhsasa ta 26 And had suffered many
kai polla pathousa hupo pollOn iatrOn kai dapanEsasa ta
G2532 G4183 G3958 G5259 G4183 G2395 G2532 G1159 G3588
things of many physicians, and
Conj a_ Acc Pl n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f Prep a_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Pl n had spent all that she had, and
AND much EMOTIONING UNDER MANY HEALers AND SPENDing THE was nothing bettered, but
suffering physicians rather grew worse,
par eauths panta kai mhden wfelhqeisa alla mallon eis to

par heautEs panta kai mEden OphelEtheisa alla mallon eis to
G3844 G1438 G3956 G2532 G3367 G5623 G235 G3123 G1519 G3588
Prep pf 3 Gen Sg f a_ Acc Pl n Conj a_ Acc Sg n vp Aor Pas Nom Sg f Conj Adv Prep t_ Acc Sg n
BESIDE self ALL AND NO-YET-ONE BEING-benefitED but RATHER INTO THE
herself nothing
ceiron elqousa
cheiron elthousa
G5501 G2064
a_ Acc Sg n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f
WORSE COMING
5:27 akousasa peri tou ihsou elqousa en tw oclw 27 When she had heard of
akousasa peri tou iEsou elthousa en tO ochlO
G191 G4012 G3588 G2424 G2064 G1722 G3588 G3793
Jesus, came in the press
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m behind, and touched his
HEARing ABOUT THE JESUS COMING IN THE THRONG garment.
opisqen hyato tou imatiou autou

opisthen hEpsato tou himatiou autou
G3693 G680 G3588 G2440 G846
Adv vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n pp Gen Sg m
BEHIND-PLACE she-TOUCHES OF-THE cloak OF-Him
from-behind touches the
5:28 elegen gar oti kan twn imatiwn autou aywmai 28 For she said, If I may touch
elegen gar hoti kan tOn himatiOn autou hapsOmai
G3004 G1063 G3754 G2579 G3588 G2440 G846 G680
but his clothes, I shall be
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj Conj Cond Con t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n pp Gen Sg m vs Aor Mid 1 Sg whole.
she-said for that AND-[IF]-EVER OF-THE GARMENTS OF-Him I-SHOULD-BE -TOUCHING
and-if-ever the I-should-be-touching
Mark 5
swqhsomai
sOthEsomai
G4982
vi Fut Pas 1 Sg
I-SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED
5:29 kai euqews exhranqh h phgh tou aimatos auths kai 29 And straightway the
kai eutheOs exEranthE hE pEgE tou haimatos autEs kai
G2532 G2112 G3583 G3588 G4077 G3588 G129 G846 G2532
fountain of her blood was
Conj Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n pp Gen Sg f Conj dried up; and she felt in [her]
AND immediately IS-DRIED THE SPRING OF-THE BLOOD OF-her AND body that she was healed of
that plague.
egnw tw swmati oti iatai apo ths mastigos

egnO tO sOmati hoti iatai apo tEs mastigos
G1097 G3588 G4983 G3754 G2390 G575 G3588 G3148
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n Conj vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
she-KNEW to-THE BODY that she-HAS-been-HEALED FROM THE scourge
5:30 kai euqews o ihsous epignous en eautw thn ex 30 And Jesus, immediately
kai eutheOs ho iEsous epignous en heautO tEn ex
G2532 G2112 G3588 G2424 G1921 G1722 G1438 G3588 G1537
knowing in himself that virtue
Conj Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep pf 3 Dat Sg m t_ Acc Sg f Prep had gone out of him, turned
AND immediately THE JESUS ON-KNOWING IN Self THE OUT him about in the press, and
recognizing himself said, Who touched my clothes?
autou dunamin exelqousan epistrafeis en tw oclw elegen

autou dunamin exelthousan epistrapheis en tO ochlO elegen
G846 G1411 G1831 G1994 G1722 G3588 G3793 G3004
pp Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg f vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg f vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg
OF-Him ABILITY OUT-COMING BEING-ON-TURNED IN THE THRONG He-said
power coming-out being-turned-about said
tis mou hyato twn imatiwn

tis mou hEpsato tOn himatiOn
G5101 G3450 G680 G3588 G2440
pi Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
ANY OF-ME TOUCHES THE GARMENTS
who ?
5:31 kai elegon autw oi maqhtai autou blepeis ton oclon 31 And his disciples said unto
kai elegon autO hoi mathEtai autou blepeis ton ochlon
G2532 G3004 G846 G3588 G3101 G846 G991 G3588 G3793
him, Thou seest the multitude
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m thronging thee, and sayest
AND said to-Him THE LEARNers OF-Him YOU-ARE-lookING THE THRONG thou, Who touched me?
disciples you-are-observing
sunqlibonta se kai legeis tis mou hyato

sunthlibonta se kai legeis tis mou hEpsato
G4918 G4571 G2532 G3004 G5101 G3450 G680
vp Pres Act Acc Sg m pp 2 Acc Sg Conj vi Pres Act 2 Sg pi Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg vi Aor midD 3 Sg
TOGETHER-CONSTRICTING YOU AND YOU-ARE-sayING ANY OF-ME TOUCHES
crowding who ? me
5:32 kai perieblepeto idein thn touto poihsasan 32 And he looked round about
kai perieblepeto idein tEn touto poiEsasan
G2532 G4017 G1492 G3588 G5124 G4160
to see her that had done this
Conj vi Impf Mid 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg n vp Aor Act Acc Sg f thing.
AND He-ABOUT-lookED TO-BE-PERCEIVING THE-one this DOing
he-looked-about the-one
5:33 h de gunh fobhqeisa kai tremousa eiduia o 33 But the woman fearing and
hE de gunE phobEtheisa kai tremousa eiduia ho
G3588 G1161 G1135 G5399 G2532 G5141 G1492 G3739
trembling, knowing what was
t_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f vp Aor pasD Nom Sg f Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg f vp Perf Act Nom Sg f pr Nom Sg n done in her, came and fell
THE YET WOMAN BEING-afraid AND TREMBLING HAVING-PERCEIVED WHICH down before him, and told him
being-aware all the truth.
gegonen ep auth hlqen kai prosepesen autw kai eipen

gegonen ep autE Elthen kai prosepesen autO kai eipen
G1096 G1909 G846 G2064 G2532 G4363 G846 G2532 G2036
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg Prep pp Dat Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
HAS-BECOME ON her CAME AND TOWARD-FALLS to-Him AND said
has-occurred prostrates told
autw pasan thn alhqeian

autO pasan tEn alEtheian
G846 G3956 G3588 G225
pp Dat Sg m a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
to-Him EVERY THE TRUTH
him entire
5:34 o de eipen auth qugater h pistis sou seswken 34 And he said unto her,
ho de eipen autE thugater hE pistis sou sesOken
G3588 G1161 G2036 G846 G2364 G3588 G4102 G4675 G4982
Daughter, thy faith hath made
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f n_ Voc Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg vi Perf Act 3 Sg thee whole; go in peace, and be
THE YET He-said to-her DAUGHTER ! THE BELIEF OF-YOU HAS-SAVED whole of thy plague.
faith
Mark 5
se upage eis eirhnhn kai isqi ugihs apo ths

se hupage eis eirEnEn kai isthi hugiEs apo tEs
G4571 G5217 G1519 G1515 G2532 G2468 G5199 G575 G3588
pp 2 Acc Sg vm Pres Act 2 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj vm Pres vxx 2 Sg a_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg f
YOU BE-UNDER-LEADING INTO PEACE AND YOU-BE SOUND FROM THE
be-you-going-away ! be-you !
mastigos sou
mastigos sou
G3148 G4675
n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg
scourge OF-YOU
5:35 eti autou lalountos ercontai apo tou arcisunagwgou 35 . While he yet spake, there
eti autou lalountos erchontai apo tou archisunagOgou
G2089 G846 G2980 G2064 G575 G3588 G752
came from the ruler of the
Adv pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m synagogue's [house certain]
STILL OF-Him TALKING THEY-ARE-COMING FROM THE chief-of-TOGETHER-LEAD which said, Thy daughter is
speaking chief-of-the-synagogue dead: why troublest thou the
Master any further?
legontes oti h qugathr sou apeqanen ti eti skulleis
legontes hoti hE thugatEr sou apethanen ti eti skulleis
G3004 G3754 G3588 G2364 G4675 G599 G5101 G2089 G4660
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pi Acc Sg n Adv vi Pres Act 2 Sg
sayING that THE DAUGHTER OF-YOU FROM-DIED ANY STILL YOU-ARE-FLAYING
died why ? you-are-bothering
ton didaskalon
ton didaskalon
G3588 G1320
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
THE TEACHer
5:36 o de ihsous euqews akousas ton logon laloumenon 36 As soon as Jesus heard the
ho de iEsous eutheOs akousas ton logon laloumenon
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2112 G191 G3588 G3056 G2980
word that was spoken, he saith
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Adv vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m unto the ruler of the
THE YET JESUS immediately HEARing THE saying beING-TALKED synagogue, Be not afraid, only
word being-spoken believe.
legei tw arcisunagwgw mh fobou monon pisteue

legei tO archisunagOgO mE phobou monon pisteue
G3004 G3588 G752 G3361 G5399 G3440 G4100
vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Part Neg vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Adv vm Pres Act 2 Sg
IS-sayING to-THE chief-of-TOGETHER-LEAD NO BE-FEARING ONLY BE-BELIEVING
chief-of-the-synagogue be-you-fearing ! be-you-believing !
5:37 kai ouk afhken oudena autw sunakolouqhsai ei mh petron 37 And he suffered no man to
kai ouk aphEken oudena autO sunakolouthEsai ei mE petron
G2532 G3756 G863 G3762 G846 G4870 G1487 G3361 G4074
follow him, save Peter, and
Conj Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg m pp Dat Sg m vn Aor Act Cond Part Neg n_ Acc Sg m James, and John the brother of
AND NOT He-FROM-LETS NOT-YET-ONE to-Him TO-TOGETHER-follow IF NO Peter James.
he-lets anyone to-follow-together
kai iakwbon kai iwannhn ton adelfon iakwbou

kai iakObon kai iOannEn ton adelphon iakObou
G2532 G2385 G2532 G2491 G3588 G80 G2385
Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
AND JACOBUS AND JOHN THE brother OF-JACOBUS
James of-James
5:38 kai ercetai eis ton oikon tou arcisunagwgou kai 38 And he cometh to the house
kai erchetai eis ton oikon tou archisunagOgou kai
G2532 G2064 G1519 G3588 G3624 G3588 G752 G2532
of the ruler of the synagogue,
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj and seeth the tumult, and them
AND He-IS-COMING INTO THE HOME OF-THE chief-of-TOGETHER-LEAD AND that wept and wailed greatly.
house chief-of-the-synagogue
qewrei qorubon kai klaiontas kai alalazontas polla

theOrei thorubon kai klaiontas kai alalazontas polla
G2334 G2351 G2532 G2799 G2532 G214 G4183
vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl n
He-IS-beholdING TUMULT AND LAMENTING AND SCREAMING much
ones-lamenting
5:39 kai eiselqwn legei autois ti qorubeisqe kai 39 And when he was come in,
kai eiselthOn legei autois ti thorubeisthe kai
G2532 G1525 G3004 G846 G5101 G2350 G2532
he saith unto them, Why make
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg n vi Pres Pas 2 Pl Conj ye this ado, and weep? the
AND INTO-COMING He-IS-sayING to-them ANY YE-ARE-TUMULTING AND damsel is not dead, but
entering why ? ye-are-making-tumult sleepeth.
klaiete to paidion ouk apeqanen alla kaqeudei

klaiete to paidion ouk apethanen alla katheudei
G2799 G3588 G3813 G3756 G599 G235 G2518
vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
YE-ARE-LAMENTING THE little-girl NOT FROM-DIED but IS-DOWN-LOUNGING
died she-is-drowsing
Mark 5 - Mark 6
5:40 kai kategelwn autou o de ekbalwn apantas 40 And they laughed him to
kai kategelOn autou ho de ekbalOn hapantas
G2532 G2606 G846 G3588 G1161 G1544 G537
scorn. But when he had put
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m a_ Acc Pl m them all out, he taketh the
AND THEY-DOWN-LAUGHED OF-Him THE YET OUT-CASTING ALL (emph.) father and the mother of the
they-ridiculed him casting-out all(emph.)-them damsel, and them that were
with him, and entereth in
paralambanei ton patera tou paidiou kai thn mhtera kai where the damsel was lying.
paralambanei ton patera tou paidiou kai tEn mEtera kai
G3880 G3588 G3962 G3588 G3813 G2532 G3588 G3384 G2532
vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj
HE-IS-BESIDE-GETTING THE FATHER OF-THE little-girl AND THE MOTHER AND
he-is-taking-along
tous met autou kai eisporeuetai opou hn to paidion

tous met autou kai eisporeuetai hopou En to paidion
G3588 G3326 G846 G2532 G1531 G3699 G2258 G3588 G3813
t_ Acc Pl m Prep pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Adv vi Impf vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
THE-ones WITH Him AND He-IS-INTO-GOING THE-?-where WAS THE little-girl
the-ones he-is-going-into wheree
anakeimenon
anakeimenon
G345
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg n
UP-LYING
lying-back
5:41 kai krathsas ths ceiros tou paidiou legei auth taliqa 41 And he took the damsel by
kai kratEsas tEs cheiros tou paidiou legei autE talitha
G2532 G2902 G3588 G5495 G3588 G3813 G3004 G846 G5008
the hand, and said unto her,
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f Aramaic Talitha cumi; which is, being
AND HOLDing OF-THE HAND OF-THE little-girl He-IS-sayING to-her TALITHA interpreted, Damsel, I say unto
the thee, arise.
koumi o estin meqermhneuomenon to korasion soi legw

koumi ho estin methermEneuomenon to korasion soi legO
G2891 G3739 G2076 G3177 G3588 G2877 G4671 G3004
Aramaic pr Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Dat Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg
COUMI WHICH IS beING-after-TRANSLATED THE maiden to-YOU I-AM-sayING
being-construed
egeirai
egeirai
G1453
vm Aor Mid 2 Sg
be-YOU-ROUSED
be-you-roused !
5:42 kai euqews anesth to korasion kai periepatei hn gar 42 And straightway the damsel
kai eutheOs anestE to korasion kai periepatei En gar
G2532 G2112 G450 G3588 G2877 G2532 G4043 G2258 G1063
arose, and walked; for she was
Conj Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj [of the age] of twelve years.
AND immediately UP-STOOD THE maiden AND she-ABOUT-TROD she-WAS for And they were astonished with
rose walked a great astonishment.
etwn dwdeka kai exesthsan ekstasei megalh

etOn dOdeka kai exestEsan ekstasei megalE
G2094 G1427 G2532 G1839 G1611 G3173
n_ Gen Pl n a_ Nom Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f
OF-YEARS TWO-TEN AND THEY-OUT-STOOD to-OUT-STANDing GREAT
twelve they-were-beside-themselves to-amazement
5:43 kai diesteilato autois polla ina mhdeis gnw touto kai 43 And he charged them
kai diesteilato autois polla hina mEdeis gnO touto kai
G2532 G1291 G846 G4183 G2443 G3367 G1097 G5124 G2532
straitly that no man should
Conj vi Aor Mid 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m a_ Acc Pl n Conj a_ Nom Sg m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg pd Acc Sg n Conj know it; and commanded that
AND He-THRU-PUTS to-them much THAT NO-YET-ONE MAY-BE-KNOWING this AND something should be given her
he-cautions them no-one to eat.
eipen doqhnai auth fagein

eipen dothEnai autE phagein
G2036 G1325 G846 G5315
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vn Aor Pas pp Dat Sg f vn 2Aor Act
He-said TO-BE-GIVEN to-her TO-BE-EATING
Mark 6
6:1 kai exhlqen ekeiqen kai hlqen eis thn patrida autou kai 1 . And he went out from
kai exElthen ekeithen kai Elthen eis tEn patrida autou kai
G2532 G1831 G1564 G2532 G2064 G1519 G3588 G3968 G846 G2532
thence, and came into his own
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj country; and his disciples
AND He-OUT-CAME thence AND CAME INTO THE FATHER[-place] OF-Him AND follow him.
he-came-out own-country
akolouqousin autw oi maqhtai autou

akolouthousin autO hoi mathEtai autou
G190 G846 G3588 G3101 G846
vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m
ARE-followING to-Him THE LEARNers OF-Him
him disciples
6:2 kai genomenou sabbatou hrxato en th sunagwgh didaskein 2 And when the sabbath day
kai genomenou sabbatou Erxato en tE sunagOgE didaskein
G2532 G1096 G4521 G756 G1722 G3588 G4864 G1321
was come, he began to teach in
Conj vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vi Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vn Pres Act the synagogue: and many
AND OF-BECOMING OF-SABBATH He-begins IN THE TOGETHER-LEAD TO-BE-TEACHING hearing [him] were astonished,
synagogue saying, From whence hath this
[man] these things? and what
kai polloi akouontes exeplhssonto legontes poqen toutw wisdom [is] this which is given
kai polloi akouontes exeplEssonto legontes pothen toutO unto him, that even such
G2532 G4183 G191 G1605 G3004 G4159 G5129
Conj a_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vi Impf Pas 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Adv Int pd Dat Sg m mighty works are wrought by
AND MANY HEARING were-astonishED sayING ?-WHICH-PLACE to-this-One his hands?
majority whence ? to-this-man
tauta kai tis h sofia h doqeisa autw oti kai

tauta kai tis hE sophia hE dotheisa autO hoti kai
G5023 G2532 G5101 G3588 G4678 G3588 G1325 G846 G3754 G2532
pd Nom Pl n Conj pi Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f vp Aor Pas Nom Sg f pp Dat Sg m Conj Conj
these AND ANY THE WISDOM THE BEING-GIVEN to-Him that AND
these-things what ? also
dunameis toiautai dia twn ceirwn autou ginontai

dunameis toiautai dia tOn cheirOn autou ginontai
G1411 G5108 G1223 G3588 G5495 G846 G1096
n_ Nom Pl f pd Nom Pl f Prep t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f pp Gen Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
ABILITIES such THRU THE HANDS OF-Him ARE-beING-BECOME
powerful-deeds through are-occurring
6:3 ouc outos estin o tektwn o uios marias adelfos 3 Is not this the carpenter, the
ouch houtos estin ho tektOn ho huios marias adelphos
G3756 G3778 G2076 G3588 G5045 G3588 G5207 G3137 G80
son of Mary, the brother of
Part Neg pd Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Sg m James, and Joses, and of Juda,
NOT this IS THE ARTisan THE SON MARY brother and Simon? and are not his
carpenter sisters here with us? And they
were offended at him.
de iakwbou kai iwsh kai iouda kai simwnos kai ouk eisin
de iakObou kai iOsE kai iouda kai simOnos kai ouk eisin
G1161 G2385 G2532 G2499 G2532 G2455 G2532 G4613 G2532 G3756 G1526
Conj n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
YET OF-JACOBUS AND OF-JOSES AND OF-JUDAS AND OF-SIMON AND NOT ARE
of-James
ai adelfai autou wde pros hmas kai eskandalizonto en autw

hai adelphai autou hOde pros hEmas kai eskandalizonto en autO
G3588 G79 G846 G5602 G4314 G2248 G2532 G4624 G1722 G846
t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f pp Gen Sg m Adv Prep pp 1 Acc Pl Conj vi Impf Pas 3 Pl Prep pp Dat Sg m
THE sisters OF-Him here TOWARD US AND THEY-were-SNARED IN Him
6:4 elegen de autois o ihsous oti ouk estin profhths 4 But Jesus said unto them, A
elegen de autois ho iEsous hoti ouk estin prophEtEs
G3004 G1161 G846 G3588 G2424 G3754 G3756 G2076 G4396
prophet is not without honour,
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m but in his own country, and
said YET to-them THE JESUS that NOT IS BEFORE-AVERer among his own kin, and in his
prophet own house.
atimos ei mh en th patridi autou kai en tois

atimos ei mE en tE patridi autou kai en tois
G820 G1487 G3361 G1722 G3588 G3968 G846 G2532 G1722 G3588
a_ Nom Sg m Cond Part Neg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj Prep t_ Dat Pl m
UN-VALUED IF NO IN THE FATHER[-place] OF-him AND IN THE
dishonored own-country among
suggenesin kai en th oikia autou

suggenesin kai en tE oikia autou
G4773 G2532 G1722 G3588 G3614 G846
a_ Dat Pl m Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m
TOGETHER-generateds AND IN THE HOME OF-him
relatives
6:5 kai ouk hdunato ekei oudemian dunamin poihsai ei mh 5 And he could there do no
kai ouk Edunato ekei oudemian dunamin poiEsai ei mE
G2532 G3756 G1410 G1563 G3762 G1411 G4160 G1487 G3361
mighty work, save that he laid
Conj Part Neg vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Att Adv a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vn Aor Act Cond Part Neg his hands upon a few sick folk,
AND NOT He-was-ABLE there NOT-YET-ONE ABILITY TO-DO IF NO and healed [them].
he-could powerful-deed
Mark 6
oligois arrwstois epiqeis tas ceiras eqerapeusen

oligois arrOstois epitheis tas cheiras etherapeusen
G3641 G732 G2007 G3588 G5495 G2323
a_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vi Aor Act 3 Sg
to-FEW UN-FARE-WELLS ON-PLACING THE HANDS He-curES
ones-ailing placing-on
6:6 kai eqaumazen dia thn apistian autwn kai perihgen tas 6 And he marvelled because of
kai ethaumazen dia tEn apistian autOn kai periEgen tas
G2532 G2296 G1223 G3588 G570 G846 G2532 G4013 G3588
their unbelief. And he went
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl f round about the villages,
AND He-MARVELED THRU THE UN-BELIEF OF-them AND He-ABOUT-LED THE teaching.
because-of unbelief he-went-about
kwmas kuklw didaskwn

kOmas kuklO didaskOn
G2968 G2945 G1321
n_ Acc Pl f n_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
VILLAGES to-AROUND TEACHING
around
6:7 kai proskaleitai tous dwdeka kai hrxato autous apostellein 7 . And he called [unto him]
kai proskaleitai tous dOdeka kai Erxato autous apostellein
G2532 G4341 G3588 G1427 G2532 G756 G846 G649
the twelve, and began to send
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m vn Pres Act them forth by two and two;
AND He-IS-TOWARD-CALLING THE TWO-TEN AND begins them TO-BE-commissionING and gave them power over
he-is-calling-to-him twelve he-begins to-be-dispatching unclean spirits;
duo duo kai edidou autois exousian twn pneumatwn twn

duo duo kai edidou autois exousian tOn pneumatOn tOn
G1417 G1417 G2532 G1325 G846 G1849 G3588 G4151 G3588
a_ Nom a_ Nom Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n t_ Gen Pl n
TWO TWO AND GAVE to-them authority OF-THE spirits THE
them
akaqartwn
akathartOn
G169
a_ Gen Pl n
UN-clean
unclean
6:8 kai parhggeilen autois ina mhden airwsin eis odon ei 8 And commanded them that
kai parEggeilen autois hina mEden airOsin eis hodon ei
G2532 G3853 G846 G2443 G3367 G142 G1519 G3598 G1487
they should take nothing for
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj a_ Acc Sg n vs Pres Act 3 Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg f Cond [their] journey, save a staff
AND He-chargES to-them THAT NO-YET-ONE THEY-SHOULD-BE-LIFTING INTO WAY IF only; no scrip, no bread, no
them nothing they-should-be-picking-up road money in [their] purse:
mh rabdon monon mh phran mh arton mh eis thn zwnhn

mE rabdon monon mE pEran mE arton mE eis tEn zOnEn
G3361 G4464 G3440 G3361 G4082 G3361 G740 G3361 G1519 G3588 G2223
Part Neg n_ Acc Sg f Adv Part Neg n_ Acc Sg f Part Neg n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
NO ROD ONLY NO BAG (beggar's) NO BREAD NO INTO THE GIRDle
staff beggar's-bag
calkon
chalkon
G5475
n_ Acc Sg m
COPPER
6:9 all upodedemenous sandalia kai mh endusasqai duo 9 But [be] shod with sandals;
all hupodedemenous sandalia kai mE endusasthai duo
G235 G5265 G4547 G2532 G3361 G1746 G1417
and not put on two coats.
Conj vp Perf Pas Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl n Conj Part Neg vn Aor Mid a_ Nom
but HAVING-been-UNDER-BOUND PLANK-BINDettes AND NO TO-BE--beING-IN-SLIPPED TWO
having-been-bound-on soles to-be-putting-on
citwnas
chitOnas
G5509
n_ Acc Pl m
TUNICS
6:10 kai elegen autois opou ean eiselqhte eis oikian ekei 10 And he said unto them, In
kai elegen autois hopou ean eiselthEte eis oikian ekei
G2532 G3004 G846 G3699 G1437 G1525 G1519 G3614 G1563
what place soever ye enter into
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Adv Cond vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg f Adv an house, there abide till ye
AND He-said to-them THE-?-where IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING INTO HOME there depart from that place.
wherever ye-may-be-entering house
menete ews an exelqhte ekeiqen

menete heOs an exelthEte ekeithen
G3306 G2193 G302 G1831 G1564
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Part vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl Adv
BE-REMAINING TILL EVER YE-MAY-BE-OUT-COMING thence
be-ye-remaining ! ye-may-be-coming-out
Mark 6
6:11 kai osoi an mh dexwntai umas mhde akouswsin 11 And whosoever shall not
kai hosoi an mE dexOntai humas mEde akousOsin
G2532 G3745 G302 G3361 G1209 G5209 G3366 G191
receive you, nor hear you,
Conj pk Nom Pl m Part Part Neg vs Aor midD 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Pl Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl when ye depart thence, shake
AND as-many-as EVER NO SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING YOU(p) NO-YET THEY-SHOULD-BE-HEARING off the dust under your feet for
ye nor-yet a testimony against them.
Verily I say unto you, It shall
umwn ekporeuomenoi ekeiqen ektinaxate ton coun ton upokatw be more tolerable for Sodom
humOn ekporeuomenoi ekeithen ektinaxate ton choun ton hupokatO and Gomorrha in the day of
G5216 G1607 G1564 G1621 G3588 G5522 G3588 G5270
pp 2 Gen Pl vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m Adv vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m Adv judgment, than for that city.
OF-YOU(p) OUT-GOING thence OUT-QUIVER THE SOIL THE UNDER-DOWN
ye going-out shake-off-ye ! underneath
twn podwn umwn eis marturion autois amhn legw umin

tOn podOn humOn eis marturion autois amEn legO humin
G3588 G4228 G5216 G1519 G3142 G846 G281 G3004 G5213
t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg n pp Dat Pl m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
OF-THE FEET OF-YOU(p) INTO witness to-them AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p)
the of-ye testimony verily to-ye
anektoteron estai sodomois h gomorrois en hmera krisews h

anektoteron estai sodomois hE gomorrois en hEmera kriseOs hE
G414 G2071 G4670 G2228 G1116 G1722 G2250 G2920 G2228
a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vi Fut vxx 3 Sg n_ Dat Pl n Part n_ Dat Pl n Prep n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Part
more-tolerable it-SHALL-BE to-SODOM OR to-GOMORRAH IN DAY OF-JUDGing OR
than
th polei ekeinh
tE polei ekeinE
G3588 G4172 G1565
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f
to-THE city that
6:12 kai exelqontes ekhrusson ina metanohswsin 12 And they went out, and
kai exelthontes ekErusson hina metanoEsOsin
G2532 G1831 G2784 G2443 G3340
preached that men should
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl repent.
AND OUT-COMING THEY-PROCLAIMED THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-after-MINDING
coming-out they-heralded they-should-be-repenting
6:13 kai daimonia polla exeballon kai hleifon elaiw pollous 13 And they cast out many
kai daimonia polla exeballon kai Eleiphon elaiO pollous
G2532 G1140 G4183 G1544 G2532 G218 G1637 G4183
devils, and anointed with oil
Conj n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n vi Impf Act 3 Pl Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl n_ Dat Sg n a_ Acc Pl m many that were sick, and
AND demons MANY THEY-OUT-CAST(past) AND THEY-RUBBED to-OLIVE-oil MANY healed [them].
they-cast-out(past) to-oil
arrwstous kai eqerapeuon

arrOstous kai etherapeuon
G732 G2532 G2323
a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl
UN-FARE-WELLS AND THEY-curED
ones-ailing cured-them
6:14 kai hkousen o basileus hrwdhs faneron gar egeneto to 14 . And king Herod heard [of
kai Ekousen ho basileus hErOdEs phaneron gar egeneto to
G2532 G191 G3588 G935 G2264 G5318 G1063 G1096 G3588
him]; (for his name was spread
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg n Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n abroad:) and he said, That
AND HEARS THE KING HEROD apparent for BECAME THE John the Baptist was risen
manifest from the dead, and therefore
mighty works do shew forth
onoma autou kai elegen oti iwannhs o baptizwn ek themselves in him.
onoma autou kai elegen hoti iOannEs ho baptizOn ek
G3686 G846 G2532 G3004 G3754 G2491 G3588 G907 G1537
n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep
NAME OF-Him AND he-said that JOHN THE one-DIPizING OUT
one-baptizing
nekrwn hgerqh kai dia touto energousin ai dunameis en

nekrOn EgerthE kai dia touto energousin hai dunameis en
G3498 G1453 G2532 G1223 G5124 G1754 G3588 G1411 G1722
a_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj Prep pd Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f Prep
OF-DEAD-ones WAS-ROUSED AND THRU this ARE-IN-ACTING THE ABILITIES IN
of-dead-ones because-of are-operating powerful-deeds
autw
autO
G846
pp Dat Sg m
him
6:15 alloi elegon oti hlias estin alloi de elegon oti 15 Others said, That it is Elias.
alloi elegon hoti Elias estin alloi de elegon hoti
G243 G3004 G3754 G2243 G2076 G243 G1161 G3004 G3754
And others said, That it is a
a_ Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl Conj prophet, or as one of the
others said that ELIAS He-IS others YET said that prophets.
Elijah
Mark 6
profhths estin h ws eis twn profhtwn

prophEtEs estin hE hOs heis tOn prophEtOn
G4396 G2076 G2228 G5613 G1520 G3588 G4396
n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Part Adv a_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
BEFORE-AVERer He-IS OR AS ONE OF-THE BEFORE-AVERers
prophet prophets
6:16 akousas de o hrwdhs eipen oti on egw 16 But when Herod heard
akousas de ho hErOdEs eipen hoti hon egO
G191 G1161 G3588 G2264 G2036 G3754 G3739 G1473
[thereof], he said, It is John,
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pr Acc Sg m pp 1 Nom Sg whom I beheaded: he is risen
HEARing YET THE HEROD said that WHOM I from the dead.
hearing-this
apekefalisa iwannhn outos estin autos hgerqh ek nekrwn

apekephalisa iOannEn houtos estin autos EgerthE ek nekrOn
G607 G2491 G3778 G2076 G846 G1453 G1537 G3498
vi Aor Act 1 Sg n_ Acc Sg m pd Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pp Nom Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep a_ Gen Pl m
FROM-HEADize JOHN this IS he WAS-ROUSED OUT OF-DEAD-ones
behead this-one of-dead-ones
6:17 autos gar o hrwdhs aposteilas ekrathsen ton iwannhn kai 17 For Herod himself had sent
autos gar ho hErOdEs aposteilas ekratEsen ton iOannEn kai
G846 G1063 G3588 G2264 G649 G2902 G3588 G2491 G2532
forth and laid hold upon John,
pp Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj and bound him in prison for
he for THE HEROD commissioning HOLDS THE JOHN AND Herodias'sake, his brother
dispatching Philip's wife: for he had
married her.
edhsen auton en th fulakh dia hrwdiada thn gunaika
edEsen auton en tE phulakE dia hErOdiada tEn gunaika
G1210 G846 G1722 G3588 G5438 G1223 G2266 G3588 G1135
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
BINDS him IN THE GUARD-house THRU HERODIAS THE WOMAN
jail because-of wife
filippou tou adelfou autou oti authn egamhsen

philippou tou adelphou autou hoti autEn egamEsen
G5376 G3588 G80 G846 G3754 G846 G1060
n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m Conj pp Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg
OF-Philip THE brother OF-him that her he-MARRIES
6:18 elegen gar o iwannhs tw hrwdh oti ouk exestin 18 For John had said unto
elegen gar ho iOannEs tO hErOdE hoti ouk exestin
G3004 G1063 G3588 G2491 G3588 G2264 G3754 G3756 G1832
Herod, It is not lawful for thee
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg to have thy brother's wife.
said for THE JOHN to-THE HEROD that NOT it-IS-allowed
soi ecein thn gunaika tou adelfou sou

soi echein tEn gunaika tou adelphou sou
G4671 G2192 G3588 G1135 G3588 G80 G4675
pp 2 Dat Sg vn Pres Act t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
to-YOU TO-BE-HAVING THE WOMAN OF-THE brother OF-YOU
you wife
6:19 h de hrwdias eneicen autw kai hqelen auton apokteinai 19 Therefore Herodias had a
hE de hErOdias eneichen autO kai Ethelen auton apokteinai
G3588 G1161 G2266 G1758 G846 G2532 G2309 G846 G615
quarrel against him, and would
t_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m vn Aor Act have killed him; but she could
THE YET HERODIAS IN-HAD to-him AND WILLED him TO-FROM-KILL not:
hemmed-in him to-kill
kai ouk hdunato

kai ouk Edunato
G2532 G3756 G1410
Conj Part Neg vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Att
AND NOT was-ABLE
she-could
6:20 o gar hrwdhs efobeito ton iwannhn eidws auton 20 For Herod feared John,
ho gar hErOdEs ephobeito ton iOannEn eidOs auton
G3588 G1063 G2264 G5399 G3588 G2491 G1492 G846
knowing that he was a just
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Perf Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m man and an holy, and observed
THE for HEROD FEARED THE JOHN HAVING-PERCEIVED him him; and when he heard him,
being-aware he did many things, and heard
him gladly.
andra dikaion kai agion kai sunethrei auton kai akousas
andra dikaion kai hagion kai sunetErei auton kai akousas
G435 G1342 G2532 G40 G2532 G4933 G846 G2532 G191
n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Conj a_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
MAN JUST AND HOLY AND TOGETHER-KEPT him AND HEARing
he-preserved
autou polla epoiei kai hdews autou hkouen

autou polla epoiei kai hEdeOs autou Ekouen
G846 G4183 G4160 G2532 G2234 G846 G191
pp Gen Sg m a_ Acc Pl n vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj Adv pp Gen Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg
OF-him much he-DID AND GRATIFYly OF-him he-HEARD
him with-relish him heard
Mark 6
6:21 kai genomenhs hmeras eukairou ote hrwdhs tois genesiois 21 And when a convenient day
kai genomenEs hEmeras eukairou hote hErOdEs tois genesiois
G2532 G1096 G2250 G2121 G3753 G2264 G3588 G1077
was come, that Herod on his
Conj vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f Adv n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n birthday made a supper to his
AND OF-BECOMING DAY WELL-SEASONED when HEROD to-THE birthdays lords, high captains, and chief
of-day opportune birthday-celebrations [estates] of Galilee;
autou deipnon epoiei tois megistasin autou kai tois ciliarcois

autou deipnon epoiei tois megistasin autou kai tois chiliarchois
G846 G1173 G4160 G3588 G3175 G846 G2532 G3588 G5506
pp Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg n vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
OF-him DINner made to-THE GREATest-ones OF-him AND to-THE THOUSAND-chiefs
magnates the captains
kai tois prwtois ths galilaias

kai tois prOtois tEs galilaias
G2532 G3588 G4413 G3588 G1056
Conj t_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
AND to-THE BEFORE-most OF-THE GALILEE
the foremost-men
6:22 kai eiselqoushs ths qugatros auths ths hrwdiados kai 22 And when the daughter of
kai eiselthousEs tEs thugatros autEs tEs hErOdiados kai
G2532 G1525 G3588 G2364 G846 G3588 G2266 G2532
the said Herodias came in, and
Conj vp 2Aor Act Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj danced, and pleased Herod and
AND OF-INTO-COMING OF-THE DAUGHTER OF-her OF-THE HERODIAS AND them that sat with him, the
of-entering king said unto the damsel, Ask
of me whatsoever thou wilt,
orchsamenhs kai aresashs tw hrwdh kai tois sunanakeimenois and I will give [it] thee.
orchEsamenEs kai aresasEs tO hErOdE kai tois sunanakeimenois
G3738 G2532 G700 G3588 G2264 G2532 G3588 G4873
vp Aor midD Gen Sg f Conj vp Aor Act Gen Sg f t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj t_ Dat Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl m
OF-DANCing AND OF-PLEASing to-THE HEROD AND to-THE ones-TOGETHER-UP-LYING
the the ones-lying-back-at-table-together
eipen o basileus tw korasiw aithson me o ean

eipen ho basileus tO korasiO aitEson me ho ean
G2036 G3588 G935 G3588 G2877 G154 G3165 G3739 G1437
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg pr Acc Sg n Cond
said THE KING to-THE maiden REQUEST ME WHICH IF-EVER
request-you-of !
qelhs kai dwsw soi

thelEs kai dOsO soi
G2309 G2532 G1325 G4671
vs Pres Act 2 Sg Conj vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg
YOU-SHOULD-BE-WILLING AND I-SHALL-BE-GIVING to-YOU
you-may-be-willing I-shall-be-giving-it
6:23 kai wmosen auth oti o ean me aithshs 23 And he sware unto her,
kai Omosen autE hoti ho ean me aitEsEs
G2532 G3660 G846 G3754 G3739 G1437 G3165 G154
Whatsoever thou shalt ask of
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f Conj pr Acc Sg n Cond pp 1 Acc Sg vs Aor Act 2 Sg me, I will give [it] thee, unto
AND he-SWEARS to-her that WHICH IF-EVER ME YOU-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING the half of my kingdom.
dwsw soi ews hmisous ths basileias mou

dOsO soi heOs hEmisous tEs basileias mou
G1325 G4671 G2193 G2255 G3588 G932 G3450
vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Conj a_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg
I-SHALL-BE-GIVING to-YOU TILL OF-HALF-EQUAL OF-THE KINGdom OF-ME
half
6:24 h de exelqousa eipen th mhtri auths ti 24 And she went forth, and
hE de exelthousa eipen tE mEtri autEs ti
G3588 G1161 G1831 G2036 G3588 G3384 G846 G5101
said unto her mother, What
t_ Nom Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg f pi Acc Sg n shall I ask? And she said, The
THE YET OUT-COMING she-said to-THE MOTHER OF-her ANY head of John the Baptist.
coming-out what ?
aithsomai h de eipen thn kefalhn iwannou tou

aitEsomai hE de eipen tEn kephalEn iOannou tou
G154 G3588 G1161 G2036 G3588 G2776 G2491 G3588
vi Fut Mid 1 Sg t_ Nom Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
I-SHALL-BE-REQUESTING THE YET she-said THE HEAD OF-JOHN THE
baptistou
baptistou
G910
n_ Gen Sg m
DIPist
baptist
6:25 kai eiselqousa euqews meta spoudhs pros ton basilea hthsato 25 And she came in
kai eiselthousa eutheOs meta spoudEs pros ton basilea EtEsato
G2532 G1525 G2112 G3326 G4710 G4314 G3588 G935 G154
straightway with haste unto the
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f Adv Prep n_ Gen Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Mid 3 Sg king, and asked, saying, I will
AND INTO-COMING immediately WITH DILIGENCE TOWARD THE KING she-REQUESTS that thou give me by and by in
entering a charger the head of John the
Mark 6
Baptist.
legousa qelw ina moi dws exauths epi pinaki thn
legousa thelO hina moi dOs exautEs epi pinaki tEn
G3004 G2309 G2443 G3427 G1325 G1824 G1909 G4094 G3588
vp Pres Act Nom Sg f vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 1 Dat Sg vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg Adv Prep n_ Dat Sg f t_ Acc Sg f
sayING I-AM-WILLING THAT to-ME YOU-MAY-BE-GIVING forthwith ON BOARD THE
me platter
kefalhn iwannou tou baptistou

kephalEn iOannou tou baptistou
G2776 G2491 G3588 G910
n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
HEAD OF-JOHN THE DIPist
baptist
6:26 kai perilupos genomenos o basileus dia tous orkous 26 And the king was exceeding
kai perilupos genomenos ho basileus dia tous horkous
G2532 G4036 G1096 G3588 G935 G1223 G3588 G3727
sorry; [yet] for his oath's sake,
Conj a_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m and for their sakes which sat
AND ABOUT-SORROW BECOMING THE KING THRU THE OATHS with him, he would not reject
sorrow-stricken because-of her.
kai tous sunanakeimenous ouk hqelhsen authn aqethsai

kai tous sunanakeimenous ouk EthelEsen autEn athetEsai
G2532 G3588 G4873 G3756 G2309 G846 G114
Conj t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f vn Aor Act
AND THE ones-TOGETHER-UP-LYING NOT he-WILLS her TO-UN-PLACE
ones-lying-back-at-table-together to-repudiate
6:27 kai euqews aposteilas o basileus spekoulatwra epetaxen 27 And immediately the king
kai eutheOs aposteilas ho basileus spekoulatOra epetaxen
G2532 G2112 G649 G3588 G935 G4688 G2004
sent an executioner, and
Conj Adv vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg commanded his head to be
AND immediately commissioning THE KING lifeguardsman enjoins brought: and he went and
dispatching beheaded him in the prison,
enecqhnai thn kefalhn autou o de apelqwn apekefalisen

enechthEnai tEn kephalEn autou ho de apelthOn apekephalisen
G5342 G3588 G2776 G846 G3588 G1161 G565 G607
vn Aor Pas t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
TO-BE-CARRIED THE HEAD OF-him THE YET FROM-COMING he-FROM-HEADizES
to-be-brought coming-away he-beheads
auton en th fulakh
auton en tE phulakE
G846 G1722 G3588 G5438
pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
him IN THE GUARD-house
jail
6:28 kai hnegken thn kefalhn autou epi pinaki kai edwken authn 28 And brought his head in a
kai Enegken tEn kephalEn autou epi pinaki kai edOken autEn
G2532 G5342 G3588 G2776 G846 G1909 G4094 G2532 G1325 G846
charger, and gave it to the
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f damsel: and the damsel gave it
AND CARRIES THE HEAD OF-him ON BOARD AND GIVES it to her mother.
platter herit
tw korasiw kai to korasion edwken authn th mhtri auths

tO korasiO kai to korasion edOken autEn tE mEtri autEs
G3588 G2877 G2532 G3588 G2877 G1325 G846 G3588 G3384 G846
t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg f
to-THE maiden AND THE maiden GIVES it to-THE MOTHER OF-her
herit
6:29 kai akousantes oi maqhtai autou hlqon kai hran to 29 And when his disciples
kai akousantes hoi mathEtai autou Elthon kai Eran to
G2532 G191 G3588 G3101 G846 G2064 G2532 G142 G3588
heard [of it], they came and
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n took up his corpse, and laid it
AND HEARing THE LEARNers OF-him CAME AND LIFT THE in a tomb.
hearing-of-it disciples take-away
ptwma autou kai eqhkan auto en mnhmeiw

ptOma autou kai ethEkan auto en mnEmeiO
G4430 G846 G2532 G5087 G846 G1722 G3419
n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg n Prep n_ Dat Sg n
corpse OF-him AND THEY-PLACE it IN memorial-vault
tomb
6:30 kai sunagontai oi apostoloi pros ton ihsoun kai 30 . And the apostles gathered
kai sunagontai hoi apostoloi pros ton iEsoun kai
G2532 G4863 G3588 G652 G4314 G3588 G2424 G2532
themselves together unto Jesus,
Conj vi Pres Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj and told him all things, both
AND ARE-beING-TOGETHER-LED THE commissioners TOWARD THE JESUS AND what they had done, and what
are-being-gathered apostles they had taught.
aphggeilan autw panta kai osa epoihsan kai osa edidaxan

apEggeilan autO panta kai hosa epoiEsan kai hosa edidaxan
G518 G846 G3956 G2532 G3745 G4160 G2532 G3745 G1321
vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m a_ Acc Pl n Conj pk Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj pk Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-FROM-MESSAGE to-Him ALL AND as-much-as THEY-DO AND as-much-as THEY- TEACH
they-report whatever whatever they-teach
Mark 6
6:31 kai eipen autois deute umeis autoi kat idian eis 31 And he said unto them,
kai eipen autois deute humeis autoi kat idian eis
G2532 G2036 G846 G1205 G5210 G846 G2596 G2398 G1519
Come ye yourselves apart into
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vm txx vxx 2 Pl pp 2 Nom Pl pp Nom Pl m Prep a_ Acc Sg f Prep a desert place, and rest a while:
AND He-said to-them HITHER YOU(p) SAME according-to OWN INTO for there were many coming
hither-ye ! ye yourselves and going, and they had no
leisure so much as to eat.
erhmon topon kai anapauesqe oligon hsan gar oi
erEmon topon kai anapauesthe oligon Esan gar hoi
G2048 G5117 G2532 G373 G3641 G2258 G1063 G3588
a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vm Pres Mid 2 Pl Adv vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl m
DESOLATE PLACE AND BE-UP-CEASING FEW WERE for THE-ones
be-ye-resting ! briefly the-ones
ercomenoi kai oi upagontes polloi kai oude fagein

erchomenoi kai hoi hupagontes polloi kai oude phagein
G2064 G2532 G3588 G5217 G4183 G2532 G3761 G5315
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Conj Adv vn 2Aor Act
COMING AND THE-ones UNDER-LEADING MANY AND NOT-YET TO-BE-EATING
the-ones going-away
hukairoun
Eukairoun
G2119
vi Impf Act 3 Pl
THEY-WELL-SEASONED
they-had-opportunity
6:32 kai aphlqon eis erhmon topon tw ploiw kat idian 32 And they departed into a
kai apElthon eis erEmon topon tO ploiO kat idian
G2532 G565 G1519 G2048 G5117 G3588 G4143 G2596 G2398
desert place by ship privately.
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n Prep a_ Acc Sg f
AND THEY-FROM-CAME INTO DESOLATE PLACE to-THE FLOATer according-to OWN
they-came-away ship
6:33 kai eidon autous upagontas oi ocloi kai epegnwsan auton 33 And the people saw them
kai eidon autous hupagontas hoi ochloi kai epegnOsan auton
G2532 G1492 G846 G5217 G3588 G3793 G2532 G1921 G846
departing, and many knew
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m him, and ran afoot thither out
AND PERCEIVED them UNDER-LEADING THE THRONGS AND ON-KNOW Him of all cities, and outwent them,
going-away recognize and came together unto him.
polloi kai pezh apo paswn twn polewn sunedramon ekei kai
polloi kai pezE apo pasOn tOn poleOn sunedramon ekei kai
G4183 G2532 G3979 G575 G3956 G3588 G4172 G4936 G1563 G2532
a_ Nom Pl m Conj Adv Prep a_ Gen Pl f t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Adv Conj
MANY AND aFOOT FROM ALL THE cities THEY-TOGETHER-RAN there AND
they-ran-together
prohlqon autous kai sunhlqon pros auton

proElthon autous kai sunElthon pros auton
G4281 G846 G2532 G4905 G4314 G846
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pp Acc Sg m
THEY-BEFORE-CAME them AND TOGETHER-CAME TOWARD Him
came-before came-together
6:34 kai exelqwn eiden o ihsous polun oclon kai 34 And Jesus, when he came
kai exelthOn eiden ho iEsous polun ochlon kai
G2532 G1831 G1492 G3588 G2424 G4183 G3793 G2532
out, saw much people, and was
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj moved with compassion
AND OUT-COMING PERCEIVED THE JESUS MANY THRONG AND toward them, because they
coming-out vast were as sheep not having a
shepherd: and he began to
esplagcnisqh ep autois oti hsan ws probata mh econta teach them many things.
esplagchnisthE ep autois hoti Esan hOs probata mE echonta
G4697 G1909 G846 G3754 G2258 G5613 G4263 G3361 G2192
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg Prep pp Dat Pl m Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Adv n_ Nom Pl n Part Neg vp Pres Act Nom Pl n
He-IS-compassionatED ON them that THEY-WERE AS sheep NO HAVING
he-is-moved-with-compassion sheep(p)
poimena kai hrxato didaskein autous polla

poimena kai Erxato didaskein autous polla
G4166 G2532 G756 G1321 G846 G4183
n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl n
SHEPHERD AND He-begins TO-BE-TEACHING them much
many-things
6:35 kai hdh wras pollhs genomenhs proselqontes autw oi 35 And when the day was now
kai EdE hOras pollEs genomenEs proselthontes autO hoi
G2532 G2235 G5610 G4183 G1096 G4334 G846 G3588
far spent, his disciples came
Conj Adv n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m unto him, and said, This is a
AND ALREADY OF-HOUR much BECOMING TOWARD-COMING to-Him THE desert place, and now the time
much-advanced coming-to him [is] far passed:
maqhtai autou legousin oti erhmos estin o topos kai hdh

mathEtai autou legousin hoti erEmos estin ho topos kai EdE
G3101 G846 G3004 G3754 G2048 G2076 G3588 G5117 G2532 G2235
n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj Adv
LEARNers OF-Him ARE-sayING that DESOLATE IS THE PLACE AND ALREADY
disciples
Mark 6
wra pollh
hOra pollE
G5610 G4183
n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f
HOUR MANY
much-advanced
6:36 apoluson autous ina apelqontes eis tous kuklw agrous kai 36 Send them away, that they
apoluson autous hina apelthontes eis tous kuklO agrous kai
G630 G846 G2443 G565 G1519 G3588 G2945 G68 G2532
may go into the country round
vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp Acc Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Dat Sg m n_ Acc Pl m Conj about, and into the villages,
FROM-LOOSE them THAT FROM-COMING INTO THE to-AROUND FIELDS AND and buy themselves bread: for
dismiss-you ! coming-away around they have nothing to eat.
kwmas agoraswsin eautois artous ti gar fagwsin ouk

kOmas agorasOsin heautois artous ti gar phagOsin ouk
G2968 G59 G1438 G740 G5101 G1063 G5315 G3756
n_ Acc Pl f vs Aor Act 3 Pl pf 3 Dat Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pi Acc Sg n Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl Part Neg
VILLAGES THEY-SHOULD-BE-BUYING to-selves BREADS ANY for THEY-MAY-BE-EATING NOT
themselves bread(p) anything ?
ecousin
echousin
G2192
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
THEY-ARE-HAVING
6:37 o de apokriqeis eipen autois dote autois umeis 37 He answered and said unto
ho de apokritheis eipen autois dote autois humeis
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G846 G1325 G846 G5210
them, Give ye them to eat. And
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl pp Dat Pl m pp 2 Nom Pl they say unto him, Shall we go
THE YET answerING He-said to-them BE-GIVING to-them YOU(p) and buy two hundred
be-ye-giving ! them ye pennyworth of bread, and give
them to eat?
fagein kai legousin autw apelqontes agoraswmen diakosiwn
phagein kai legousin autO apelthontes agorasOmen diakosiOn
G5315 G2532 G3004 G846 G565 G59 G1250
vn 2Aor Act Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vs Aor Act 1 Pl a_ Gen Pl n
TO-BE-EATING AND THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him FROM-COMING WE-SHOULD-BE-BUYING OF-TWO-hundred
coming-away
dhnariwn artous kai dwmen autois fagein

dEnariOn artous kai dOmen autois phagein
G1220 G740 G2532 G1325 G846 G5315
n_ Gen Pl n n_ Acc Pl m Conj vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl pp Dat Pl m vn 2Aor Act
DENARII BREADS AND MAY-BE-GIVING to-them TO-BE-EATING
bread(p) them
6:38 o de legei autois posous artous ecete upagete 38 He saith unto them, How
ho de legei autois posous artous echete hupagete
G3588 G1161 G3004 G846 G4214 G740 G2192 G5217
many loaves have ye? go and
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pq Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl see. And when they knew, they
THE YET He-IS-sayING to-them how-many BREADS YE-ARE-HAVING BE-UNDER-LEADING say, Five, and two fishes.
how-many ? cakes-of-bread be-ye-going-away !
kai idete kai gnontes legousin pente kai duo icquas

kai idete kai gnontes legousin pente kai duo ichthuas
G2532 G1492 G2532 G1097 G3004 G4002 G2532 G1417 G2486
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Conj a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m
AND BE-PERCEIVING AND KNOWING THEY-ARE-sayING FIVE AND TWO FISHES
be-ye-perceiving !
6:39 kai epetaxen autois anaklinai pantas sumposia sumposia epi 39 And he commanded them to
kai epetaxen autois anaklinai pantas sumposia sumposia epi
G2532 G2004 G846 G347 G3956 G4849 G4849 G1909
make all sit down by
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vn Aor Act a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Prep companies upon the green
AND He-enjoins to-them TO-UP-CLINE ALL TOGETHER-DRINK TOGETHER-DRINK ON grass.
them to-recline them-all company company
tw clwrw cortw
tO chlOrO chortO
G3588 G5515 G5528
t_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
THE GREEN FODDER
grass
6:40 kai anepeson prasiai prasiai ana ekaton kai ana penthkonta 40 And they sat down in ranks,
kai anepeson prasiai prasiai ana hekaton kai ana pentEkonta
G2532 G377 G4237 G4237 G303 G1540 G2532 G303 G4004
by hundreds, and by fifties.
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f Prep a_ Nom Conj Prep a_ Nom
AND THEY-UP-FELL PRACTISE PRACTISE UP HUNDRED AND UP FIVE-ty
they-leant-back plot plot fifty
6:41 kai labwn tous pente artous kai tous duo icquas 41 And when he had taken the
kai labOn tous pente artous kai tous duo ichthuas
G2532 G2983 G3588 G4002 G740 G2532 G3588 G1417 G2486
five loaves and the two fishes,
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m he looked up to heaven, and
AND GETTING THE FIVE BREADS AND THE TWO FISHES blessed, and brake the loaves,
taking cakes-of-bread and gave [them] to his
Mark 6
disciples to set before them;

anableyas eis ton ouranon euloghsen kai kateklasen tous artous and the two fishes divided he
anablepsas eis ton ouranon eulogEsen kai kateklasen tous artous
G308 G1519 G3588 G3772 G2127 G2532 G2622 G3588 G740 among them all.
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
UP-looking INTO THE heaven He-blessES AND DOWN-BREAKS THE BREADS
looking-up breaks-up cakes-of-bread
kai edidou tois maqhtais autou ina paraqwsin autois kai

kai edidou tois mathEtais autou hina parathOsin autois kai
G2532 G1325 G3588 G3101 G846 G2443 G3908 G846 G2532
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Pl m Conj
AND GAVE to-THE LEARNers OF-Him THAT THEY-MAY-BE-BESIDE-PLACING to-them AND
disciples they-may-be-placing-before them
tous duo icquas emerisen pasin

tous duo ichthuas emerisen pasin
G3588 G1417 G2486 G3307 G3956
t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Dat Pl m
THE TWO FISHES He-PARTS to-ALL
6:42 kai efagon pantes kai ecortasqhsan 42 And they did all eat, and
kai ephagon pantes kai echortasthEsan
G2532 G5315 G3956 G2532 G5526
were filled.
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
AND THEY-ATE ALL AND ARE-satisfiED
6:43 kai hran klasmatwn dwdeka kofinous plhreis kai apo twn 43 And they took up twelve
kai Eran klasmatOn dOdeka kophinous plEreis kai apo tOn
G2532 G142 G2801 G1427 G2894 G4134 G2532 G575 G3588
baskets full of the fragments,
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Gen Pl n a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Conj Prep t_ Gen Pl m and of the fishes.
AND THEY-LIFT OF-BREAKS TWO-TEN PANNIERS FULL AND FROM THE
they-pick-up of-fragments twelve
icquwn
ichthuOn
G2486
n_ Gen Pl m
FISHES
6:44 kai hsan oi fagontes tous artous wsei pentakiscilioi 44 And they that did eat of the
kai Esan hoi phagontes tous artous hOsei pentakischilioi
G2532 G2258 G3588 G5315 G3588 G740 G5616 G4000
loaves were about five
Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Adv a_ Nom Pl m thousand men.
AND WERE THE ones-EATING THE BREADS AS-IF FIVE-times-THOUSAND
ones-eating cakes-of-bread about five-thousand
andres
andres
G435
n_ Nom Pl m
MEN
6:45 kai euqews hnagkasen tous maqhtas autou embhnai eis to 45 . And straightway he
kai eutheOs Enagkasen tous mathEtas autou embEnai eis to
G2532 G2112 G315 G3588 G3101 G846 G1684 G1519 G3588
constrained his disciples to get
Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg n into the ship, and to go to the
AND immediately He-necessitatES THE LEARNers OF-Him TO-IN-STEP INTO THE other side before unto
he-compels disciples to-step-in Bethsaida, while he sent away
the people.
ploion kai proagein eis to peran pros bhqsaida ews
ploion kai proagein eis to peran pros bEthsaida heOs
G4143 G2532 G4254 G1519 G3588 G4008 G4314 G966 G2193
n_ Acc Sg n Conj vn Pres Act Prep t_ Acc Sg n Adv Prep ni proper Conj
FLOATer AND TO-BE-BEFORE-LEADING INTO THE OTHER-SIDE TOWARD BETHSAIDA TILL
ship to-be-preceding
autos apolush ton oclon

autos apolusE ton ochlon
G846 G630 G3588 G3793
pp Nom Sg m vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
He SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING THE THRONG
should-be-dismissing
6:46 kai apotaxamenos autois aphlqen eis to oros proseuxasqai 46 And when he had sent them
kai apotaxamenos autois apElthen eis to oros proseuxasthai
G2532 G657 G846 G565 G1519 G3588 G3735 G4336
away, he departed into a
Conj vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m pp Dat Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vn Aor midD mountain to pray.
AND FROM-SETTing to-them He-FROM-CAME INTO THE mountain TO-pray
taking-leave he-came-away
6:47 kai oyias genomenhs hn to ploion en mesw ths 47 And when even was come,
kai opsias genomenEs En to ploion en mesO tEs
G2532 G3798 G1096 G2258 G3588 G4143 G1722 G3319 G3588
the ship was in the midst of the
Conj a_ Gen Sg f vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f vi Impf vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Prep a_ Dat Sg n t_ Gen Sg f sea, and he alone on the land.
AND OF-evening BECOMING WAS THE FLOATer IN MIDst OF-THE
ship middle
Mark 6
qalasshs kai autos monos epi ths ghs

thalassEs kai autos monos epi tEs gEs
G2281 G2532 G846 G3441 G1909 G3588 G1093
n_ Gen Sg f Conj pp Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
SEA AND He ONLY ON THE LAND
alone
6:48 kai eiden autous basanizomenous en tw elaunein hn 48 And he saw them toiling in
kai eiden autous basanizomenous en tO elaunein En
G2532 G1492 G846 G928 G1722 G3588 G1643 G2258
rowing; for the wind was
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m vp Pres Pas Acc Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres Act vi Impf vxx 3 Sg contrary unto them: and about
AND He-PERCEIVED them beING-ORDEALizED IN THE TO-BE-DRIVING WAS the fourth watch of the night he
being-tormented to-be-rowing cometh unto them, walking
upon the sea, and would have
gar o anemos enantios autois kai peri tetarthn fulakhn ths passed by them.
gar ho anemos enantios autois kai peri tetartEn phulakEn tEs
G1063 G3588 G417 G1727 G846 G2532 G4012 G5067 G5438 G3588
Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m pp Dat Pl m Conj Prep a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg f
for THE WIND IN-INSTEAD to-them AND ABOUT FOURth GUARD OF-THE
contrary watch
nuktos ercetai pros autous peripatwn epi ths qalasshs kai

nuktos erchetai pros autous peripatOn epi tEs thalassEs kai
G3571 G2064 G4314 G846 G4043 G1909 G3588 G2281 G2532
n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj
NIGHT He-IS-COMING TOWARD them ABOUT-TREADING ON THE SEA AND
walking
hqelen parelqein autous

Ethelen parelthein autous
G2309 G3928 G846
vi Impf Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act pp Acc Pl m
WILLED TO-BE-BESIDE-COMING them
he-willed to-be-passing-by
6:49 oi de idontes auton peripatounta epi ths qalasshs 49 But when they saw him
hoi de idontes auton peripatounta epi tEs thalassEs
G3588 G1161 G1492 G846 G4043 G1909 G3588 G2281
walking upon the sea, they
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f supposed it had been a spirit,
THE YET PERCEIVING Him ABOUT-TREADING ON THE SEA and cried out:
ones-perceiving walking
edoxan fantasma einai kai anekraxan

edoxan phantasma einai kai anekraxan
G1380 G5326 G1511 G2532 G349
vi Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Nom Sg n vn Pres vxx Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-SEEM APPEAR-effect TO-BE AND THEY-UP-CRY
suppose phantom they-cry-out
6:50 pantes gar auton eidon kai etaracqhsan kai euqews elalhsen 50 For they all saw him, and
pantes gar auton eidon kai etarachthEsan kai eutheOs elalEsen
G3956 G1063 G846 G1492 G2532 G5015 G2532 G2112 G2980
were troubled. And
a_ Nom Pl m Conj pp Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg immediately he talked with
ALL for Him THEY-PERCEIVED AND WERE-DISTURBED AND immediately He-TALKS them, and saith unto them, Be
he-speaks of good cheer: it is I; be not
afraid.
met autwn kai legei autois qarseite egw eimi mh
met autOn kai legei autois tharseite egO eimi mE
G3326 G846 G2532 G3004 G846 G2293 G1473 G1510 G3361
Prep pp Gen Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 1 Sg Part Neg
WITH them AND IS-sayING to-them BE-YE-COURAGE-ING I AM NO
be-ye-having-courage !
fobeisqe
phobeisthe
G5399
vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
BE-FEARING
be-ye-fearing !
6:51 kai anebh pros autous eis to ploion kai ekopasen o 51 And he went up unto them
kai anebE pros autous eis to ploion kai ekopasen ho
G2532 G305 G4314 G846 G1519 G3588 G4143 G2532 G2869 G3588
into the ship; and the wind
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m ceased: and they were sore
AND UP-STEPPed TOWARD them INTO THE FLOATer AND STRIKES THE amazed in themselves beyond
he-stepped-up ship flags measure, and wondered.
anemos kai lian ek perissou en eautois existanto kai eqaumazon

anemos kai lian ek perissou en heautois existanto kai ethaumazon
G417 G2532 G3029 G1537 G4053 G1722 G1438 G1839 G2532 G2296
n_ Nom Sg m Conj Adv Prep a_ Gen Sg n Prep pf 3 Dat Pl m vi Impf Mid 3 Pl Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl
WIND AND VERY OUT OF-excessive IN selves THEY-are-OUT-STOOD AND MARVELED
among themselves they-are-amazed
6:52 ou gar sunhkan epi tois artois hn gar h kardia 52 For they considered not [the
ou gar sunEkan epi tois artois En gar hE kardia
G3756 G1063 G4920 G1909 G3588 G740 G2258 G1063 G3588 G2588
miracle] of the loaves: for their
Part Neg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f heart was hardened.
NOT for THEY-understand ON THE BREADS WAS for THE HEART
bread(p)
Mark 6 - Mark 7
autwn pepwrwmenh
autOn pepOrOmenE
G846 G4456
pp Gen Pl m vp Perf Pas Nom Sg f
OF-them HAVING-been-CALLOUSED
6:53 kai diaperasantes hlqon epi thn ghn gennhsaret kai 53 And when they had passed
kai diaperasantes Elthon epi tEn gEn gennEsaret kai
G2532 G1276 G2064 G1909 G3588 G1093 G1082 G2532
over, they came into the land
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f ni proper Conj of Gennesaret, and drew to the
AND ferrying THEY-CAME ON THE LAND GENNESARET AND shore.
proswrmisqhsan
prosOrmisthEsan
G4358
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
ARE-TOWARD-RUSHED
are-moored
6:54 kai exelqontwn autwn ek tou ploiou euqews epignontes 54 And when they were come
kai exelthontOn autOn ek tou ploiou eutheOs epignontes
G2532 G1831 G846 G1537 G3588 G4143 G2112 G1921
out of the ship, straightway
Conj vp 2Aor Act Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m they knew him,
AND OF-OUT-COMING them OUT OF-THE FLOATer immediately ON-KNOWING
of-coming-out of-them ship recognizing
auton
auton
G846
pp Acc Sg m
Him
6:55 peridramontes olhn thn pericwron ekeinhn hrxanto epi tois 55 And ran through that whole
peridramontes holEn tEn perichOron ekeinEn Erxanto epi tois
G4063 G3650 G3588 G4066 G1565 G756 G1909 G3588
region round about, and began
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f vi Aor midD 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Pl m to carry about in beds those
ABOUT-RUNNING WHOLE THE ABOUT-SPACE that THEY-begin ON THE that were sick, where they
running-about country-about heard he was.
krabbatois tous kakws econtas periferein opou hkouon oti

krabbatois tous kakOs echontas peripherein hopou Ekouon hoti
G2895 G3588 G2560 G2192 G4064 G3699 G191 G3754
n_ Dat Pl m t_ Acc Pl m Adv vp Pres Act Acc Pl m vn Pres Act Adv vi Impf Act 3 Pl Conj
PALLETS THE-ones EVILly HAVING TO-BE-ABOUT-CARRYING THE-?-where THEY-HEARD that
the-ones illness to-be-carrying-about wheree
ekei estin
ekei estin
G1563 G2076
Adv vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
there He-IS
6:56 kai opou an eiseporeueto eis kwmas h poleis h agrous en 56 And whithersoever he
kai hopou an eiseporeueto eis kOmas E poleis E agrous en
G2532 G3699 G302 G1531 G1519 G2968 G2228 G4172 G2228 G68 G1722
entered, into villages, or cities,
Conj Adv Part vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Pl f Part n_ Acc Pl f Part n_ Acc Pl m Prep or country, they laid the sick in
AND THE-?-where EVER He-INTO-WENT INTO VILLAGES OR cities OR FIELDS IN the streets, and besought him
wherever he-went-into that they might touch if it were
but the border of his garment:
tais agorais etiqoun tous asqenountas kai parekaloun auton ina and as many as touched him
tais agorais etithoun tous asthenountas kai parekaloun auton hina were made whole.
G3588 G58 G5087 G3588 G770 G2532 G3870 G846 G2443
t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f vi Impf Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj
THE BUY-places THEY-PLACED THE ones-beING-UN-FIRM AND THEY-BESIDE-CALLED Him THAT
markets ones-being-infirm they-entreated
kan tou kraspedou tou imatiou autou aywntai kai

kan tou kraspedou tou himatiou autou hapsOntai kai
G2579 G3588 G2899 G3588 G2440 G846 G680 G2532
Cond Con t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n pp Gen Sg m vs Aor Mid 3 Pl Conj
AND-[IF]-EVER OF-THE HANG-FOOT OF-THE cloak OF-Him THEY-SHOULD-BE-TOUCHING AND
and-if-ever the tassel
osoi an hptonto autou eswzonto

hosoi an Eptonto autou esOzonto
G3745 G302 G680 G846 G4982
pk Nom Pl m Part vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl pp Gen Sg m vi Impf Pas 3 Pl
as-many-as EVER TOUCHED OF-it were-SAVED
it/him
Mark 7
7:1 kai sunagontai pros auton oi farisaioi kai tines 1 . Then came together unto
kai sunagontai pros auton hoi pharisaioi kai tines
G2532 G4863 G4314 G846 G3588 G5330 G2532 G5100
him the Pharisees, and certain
Conj vi Pres Pas 3 Pl Prep pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj px Nom Pl m of the scribes, which came
AND ARE-beING-TOGETHER-LED TOWARD Him THE PHARISEES AND ANY from Jerusalem.
are-being-gathered some
twn grammatewn elqontes apo ierosolumwn

tOn grammateOn elthontes apo ierosolumOn
G3588 G1122 G2064 G575 G2414
t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep n_ Gen Pl n
OF-THE WRITers COMING FROM JERUSALEM
scribes
7:2 kai idontes tinas twn maqhtwn autou koinais cersin 2 And when they saw some of
kai idontes tinas tOn mathEtOn autou koinais chersin
G2532 G1492 G5100 G3588 G3101 G846 G2839 G5495
his disciples eat bread with
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m px Acc Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m a_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f defiled, that is to say, with
AND PERCEIVING ANY OF-THE LEARNers OF-Him to-COMMON HANDS unwashen, hands, they found
some disciples to-contaminated fault.
tout estin aniptois esqiontas artous ememyanto

tout estin aniptois esthiontas artous emempsanto
G5124 G2076 G449 G2068 G740 G3201
pd Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Pl
this IS to-UN-WASHED EATING BREADS THEY-BLAME
to-unwashed bread(p)
7:3 oi gar farisaioi kai pantes oi ioudaioi ean mh pugmh 3 For the Pharisees, and all the
hoi gar pharisaioi kai pantes hoi ioudaioi ean mE pugmE
G3588 G1063 G5330 G2532 G3956 G3588 G2453 G1437 G3361 G4435
Jews, except they wash [their]
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Cond Part Neg n_ Dat Sg f hands oft, eat not, holding the
THE for PHARISEES AND ALL THE JUDA-ans IF-EVER NO to-FIST tradition of the elders.
Jews
niywntai tas ceiras ouk esqiousin kratountes thn

nipsOntai tas cheiras ouk esthiousin kratountes tEn
G3538 G3588 G5495 G3756 G2068 G2902 G3588
vs Aor Mid 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
THEY-SHOULD-BE-WASHING THE HANDS NOT ARE-EATING HOLDING THE
paradosin twn presbuterwn

paradosin tOn presbuterOn
G3862 G3588 G4245
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
tradition OF-THE SENIORS
elders
7:4 kai apo agoras ean mh baptiswntai ouk esqiousin kai 4 And [when they come] from
kai apo agoras ean mE baptisOntai ouk esthiousin kai
G2532 G575 G58 G1437 G3361 G907 G3756 G2068 G2532
the market, except they wash,
Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg f Cond Part Neg vs Aor Mid 3 Pl Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj they eat not. And many other
AND FROM BUY-place IF-EVER NO THEY-SHOULD-BE-beING-DIPizED NOT THEY-ARE-EATING AND things there be, which they
market they-should-be-being-baptized have received to hold, [as] the
washing of cups, and pots,
alla polla estin a parelabon kratein baptismous brasen vessels, and of tables.
alla polla estin ha parelabon kratein baptismous
G243 G4183 G2076 G3739 G3880 G2902 G909
a_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pr Acc Pl n vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl vn Pres Act n_ Acc Pl m
others MANY it-IS WHICH THEY-BESIDE-GOT TO-BE-HOLDING DIPPings
other-things there-is they-accepted baptisms
pothriwn kai xestwn kai calkiwn kai klinwn

potEriOn kai xestOn kai chalkiOn kai klinOn
G4221 G2532 G3582 G2532 G5473 G2532 G2825
n_ Gen Pl n Conj n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl n Conj n_ Gen Pl f
OF-DRINK-cups AND OF-EWERS AND OF-COPPERS AND OF-couches
of-cups ewers copper-vessels
7:5 epeita eperwtwsin auton oi farisaioi kai oi grammateis 5 Then the Pharisees and
epeita eperOtOsin auton hoi pharisaioi kai hoi grammateis
G1899 G1905 G846 G3588 G5330 G2532 G3588 G1122
scribes asked him, Why walk
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m not thy disciples according to
ON-THEREAFTER ARE-inquirING-of Him THE PHARISEES AND THE WRITers the tradition of the elders, but
thereupon scribes eat bread with unwashen
hands?
dia ti oi maqhtai sou ou peripatousin kata thn
dia ti hoi mathEtai sou hou peripatousin kata tEn
G1223 G5101 G3588 G3101 G4675 G3756 G4043 G2596 G3588
Prep pi Acc Sg n t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f
THRU ANY THE LEARNers OF-YOU NOT ARE-ABOUT-TREADING according-to THE
because-of what ? disciples are-walking
paradosin twn presbuterwn alla aniptois cersin esqiousin ton

paradosin tOn presbuterOn alla aniptois chersin esthiousin ton
G3862 G3588 G4245 G235 G449 G5495 G2068 G3588
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl f vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
tradition OF-THE SENIORS but to-UN-WASHED HANDS THEY-ARE-EATING THE
elders to-unwashed are-eating
Mark 7
arton
arton
G740
n_ Acc Sg m
BREAD
7:6 o de apokriqeis eipen autois oti kalws proefhteusen 6 He answered and said unto
ho de apokritheis eipen autois hoti kalOs proephEteusen
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G846 G3754 G2573 G4395
them, Well hath Esaias
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg prophesied of you hypocrites,
THE YET answerING He-said to-them that IDEALly BEFORE-AVERS as it is written, This people
prophesies honoureth me with [their] lips,
but their heart is far from me.
hsaias peri umwn twn upokritwn ws gegraptai outos o
Esaias peri humOn tOn hupokritOn hOs gegraptai houtos ho
G2268 G4012 G5216 G3588 G5273 G5613 G1125 G3778 G3588
n_ Nom Sg m Prep pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Adv vi Perf Pas 3 Sg pd Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
ISAIAH ABOUT YOU(p) THE hypocrites AS it-HAS-been-WRITTEN this THE
concerning ye
laos tois ceilesin me tima h de kardia autwn porrw

laos tois cheilesin me tima hE de kardia autOn porrO
G2992 G3588 G5491 G3165 G5091 G3588 G1161 G2588 G846 G4206
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Pl m Adv
PEOPLE to-THE LIPS ME IS-VALUING THE YET HEART OF-them forward
is-honoring at-a-distance
apecei ap emou
apechei ap emou
G568 G575 G1700
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
IS-FROM-HAVING FROM ME
is-being-away
7:7 mathn de sebontai me didaskontes didaskalias entalmata 7 Howbeit in vain do they

matEn de sebontai me didaskontes didaskalias entalmata
G3155 G1161 G4576 G3165 G1321 G1319 G1778
worship me, teaching [for]
Adv Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl n doctrines the commandments
VAIN YET THEY-ARE-REVERING ME TEACHING TEACHings directions of men.
in-vain
anqrwpwn
anthrOpOn
G444
n_ Gen Pl m
OF-humans
7:8 afentes gar thn entolhn tou qeou krateite thn 8 For laying aside the
aphentes gar tEn entolEn tou theou krateite tEn
G863 G1063 G3588 G1785 G3588 G2316 G2902 G3588
commandment of God, ye hold
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f the tradition of men, [as] the
FROM-LETTING for THE direction OF-THE God YE-ARE-HOLDING THE washing of pots and cups: and
leaving precept many other such like things ye
do.
paradosin twn anqrwpwn baptismous xestwn kai pothriwn kai alla
paradosin tOn anthrOpOn baptismous xestOn kai potEriOn kai alla
G3862 G3588 G444 G909 G3582 G2532 G4221 G2532 G243
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m n_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl n Conj a_ Acc Pl n
tradition OF-THE humans DIPPings OF-EWERS AND OF-DRINK-cups AND others
baptisms cups others
paromoia toiauta polla poieite

paromoia toiauta polla poieite
G3946 G5108 G4183 G4160
a_ Acc Pl n pd Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 2 Pl
BESIDE-LIKE such much YE-ARE-DOING
like-things
7:9 kai elegen autois kalws aqeteite thn entolhn tou qeou 9 And he said unto them, Full
kai elegen autois kalOs atheteite tEn entolEn tou theou
G2532 G3004 G846 G2573 G114 G3588 G1785 G3588 G2316
well ye reject the
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Adv vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m commandment of God, that ye
AND He-said to-them IDEALly YE-ARE-UN-PLACING THE direction OF-THE God may keep your own tradition.
ye-are-repudiating precept
ina thn paradosin umwn thrhshte

hina tEn paradosin humOn tErEsEte
G2443 G3588 G3862 G5216 G5083
Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl vs Aor Act 2 Pl
THAT THE tradition OF-YOU(p) YE-SHOULD-BE KEEPING
of-ye ye-should-be-keeping
7:10 mwshs gar eipen tima ton patera sou kai thn 10 For Moses said, Honour thy
mOsEs gar eipen tima ton patera sou kai tEn
G3475 G1063 G2036 G5091 G3588 G3962 G4675 G2532 G3588
father and thy mother; and,
n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vm Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg Conj t_ Acc Sg f Whoso curseth father or
MOSES for said BE-VALUING THE FATHER OF-YOU AND THE mother, let him die the death:
be-you-honoring !
Mark 7
mhtera sou kai o kakologwn patera h mhtera qanatw

mEtera sou kai ho kakologOn patera E mEtera thanatO
G3384 G4675 G2532 G3588 G2551 G3962 G2228 G3384 G2288
n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Part n_ Acc Sg f n_ Dat Sg m
MOTHER OF-YOU AND THE-one EVIL-sayING FATHER OR MOTHER to-DEATH
the one-speaking-evil
teleutatw
teleutatO
G5053
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
LET-him-BE-deceasING
let-him-be-deceasing !
7:11 umeis de legete ean eiph anqrwpos tw patri h 11 But ye say, If a man shall
humeis de legete ean eipE anthrOpos tO patri E
G5210 G1161 G3004 G1437 G2036 G444 G3588 G3962 G2228
say to his father or mother, [It
pp 2 Nom Pl Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl Cond vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Part is] Corban, that is to say, a gift,
YOU(p) YET ARE-sayING IF-EVER MAY-BE-sayING human to-THE FATHER OR by whatsoever thou mightest
ye be profited by me; [he shall be
free].
th mhtri korban o estin dwron o ean ex
tE mEtri korban ho estin dOron ho ean ex
G3588 G3384 G2878 G3739 G2076 G1435 G3739 G1437 G1537
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Hebrew pr Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg n pr Acc Sg n Cond Prep
to-THE MOTHER CORBAN (Hebrew) WHICH IS oblation WHICH IF-EVER OUT
corban approach-present
emou wfelhqhs
emou OphelEthEs
G1700 G5623
pp 1 Gen Sg vs Aor Pas 2 Sg
OF-ME YOU-MAY-BE-BEING-benefitED
7:12 kai ouketi afiete auton ouden poihsai tw patri 12 And ye suffer him no more
kai ouketi aphiete auton ouden poiEsai tO patri
G2532 G3765 G863 G846 G3762 G4160 G3588 G3962
to do ought for his father or his
Conj Adv vi Pres Act 2 Pl pp Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Act t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m mother;
AND NOT-STILL YE-ARE-FROM-LETTING him NOT-YET-ONE TO-DO to-THE FATHER
not-longer ye-are-letting anything
autou h th mhtri autou

autou E tE mEtri autou
G846 G2228 G3588 G3384 G846
pp Gen Sg m Part t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m
OF-him OR to-THE MOTHER OF-him
7:13 akurountes ton logon tou qeou th paradosei umwn 13 Making the word of God of
akurountes ton logon tou theou tE paradosei humOn
G208 G3588 G3056 G3588 G2316 G3588 G3862 G5216
none effect through your
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl tradition, which ye have
UN-SANCTIONING THE saying OF-THE God to-THE tradition OF-YOU(p) delivered: and many such like
invalidating word of-ye things do ye.
h paredwkate kai paromoia toiauta polla poieite

hE paredOkate kai paromoia toiauta polla poieite
G3739 G3860 G2532 G3946 G5108 G4183 G4160
pr Dat Sg f vi Aor Act 2 Pl Conj a_ Acc Pl n pd Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 2 Pl
to-WHICH YE-BESIDE-GIVE AND BESIDE-LIKE such MANY YE-ARE-DOING
which ye-give-over like-things
7:14 kai proskalesamenos panta ton oclon elegen autois akouete 14 And when he had called all
kai proskalesamenos panta ton ochlon elegen autois akouete
G2532 G4341 G3956 G3588 G3793 G3004 G846 G191
the people [unto him], he said
Conj vp Aor midD Nom Sg m a_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl unto them, Hearken unto me
AND TOWARD-CALLing ALL THE THRONG He-said to-them BE-HEARING every one [of you], and
calling-to-him be-ye-hearing ! understand:
mou pantes kai suniete

mou pantes kai suniete
G3450 G3956 G2532 G4920
pp 1 Gen Sg a_ Nom Pl m Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl
OF-ME ALL AND BE-understandING
me be-ye-understanding !
7:15 ouden estin exwqen tou anqrwpou eisporeuomenon eis 15 There is nothing from
ouden estin exOthen tou anthrOpou eisporeuomenon eis
G3762 G2076 G1855 G3588 G444 G1531 G1519
without a man, that entering
a_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Adv t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg n Prep into him can defile him: but the
NOT-YET-ONE IS OUT-PLACE OF-THE human INTO-GOING INTO things which come out of him,
nothing there-is outside going-into those are they that defile the
man.
auton o dunatai auton koinwsai alla ta ekporeuomena
auton ho dunatai auton koinOsai alla ta ekporeuomena
G846 G3739 G1410 G846 G2840 G235 G3588 G1607
pp Acc Sg m pr Nom Sg n vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m vn Aor Act Conj t_ Nom Pl n vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl n
him WHICH IS-ABLE him TO-COMMON but THE OUT-GOINGS
can to-contaminate the-things going-out
Mark 7
ap autou ekeina estin ta koinounta ton anqrwpon

ap autou ekeina estin ta koinounta ton anthrOpon
G575 G846 G1565 G2076 G3588 G2840 G3588 G444
Prep pp Gen Sg m pd Nom Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Pl n t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
FROM him those IS THE COMMONING THE human
the(p) contaminating
7:16 ei tis ecei wta akouein akouetw 16 If any man have ears to
ei tis echei Ota akouein akouetO
G1487 G5100 G2192 G3775 G191 G191
hear, let him hear.
Cond px Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl n vn Pres Act vm Pres Act 3 Sg
IF ANY IS-HAVING EARS TO-BE-HEARING LET-him-BE-HEARING
anyone let-him-be-hearing !
7:17 kai ote eishlqen eis oikon apo tou oclou ephrwtwn auton 17 And when he was entered
kai hote eisElthen eis oikon apo tou ochlou epErOtOn auton
G2532 G3753 G1525 G1519 G3624 G575 G3588 G3793 G1905 G846
into the house from the people,
Conj Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m his disciples asked him
AND when He-INTO-CAME INTO HOME FROM THE THRONG inquirED-of Him concerning the parable.
he-entered house
oi maqhtai autou peri ths parabolhs

hoi mathEtai autou peri tEs parabolEs
G3588 G3101 G846 G4012 G3588 G3850
t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
THE LEARNers OF-Him ABOUT THE BESIDE-CAST
disciples concerning parable
7:18 kai legei autois outws kai umeis asunetoi este ou 18 And he saith unto them, Are
kai legei autois houtOs kai humeis asunetoi este ou
G2532 G3004 G846 G3779 G2532 G5210 G801 G2075 G3756
ye so without understanding
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Adv Conj pp 2 Nom Pl a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 2 Pl Part Neg also? Do ye not perceive, that
AND He-IS-sayING to-them thus AND YOU(p) UN-intelligent ARE NOT whatsoever thing from without
also ye unintelligent entereth into the man, [it]
cannot defile him;
noeite oti pan to exwqen eisporeuomenon eis ton
noeite hoti pan to exOthen eisporeuomenon eis ton
G3539 G3754 G3956 G3588 G1855 G1531 G1519 G3588
vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj a_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n Adv vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg n Prep t_ Acc Sg m
YE-ARE-MINDING that EVERY THE OUT-PLACE INTO-GOING INTO THE
ye-are-apprehending everything outside going-into
anqrwpon ou dunatai auton koinwsai

anthrOpon ou dunatai auton koinOsai
G444 G3756 G1410 G846 G2840
n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m vn Aor Act
human NOT IS-ABLE him TO-COMMON
can to-contaminate
7:19 oti ouk eisporeuetai autou eis thn kardian all eis thn 19 Because it entereth not into
hoti ouk eisporeuetai autou eis tEn kardian all eis tEn
G3754 G3756 G1531 G846 G1519 G3588 G2588 G235 G1519 G3588
his heart, but into the belly,
Conj Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg f and goeth out into the draught,
that NOT it-IS-INTO-GOING OF-him INTO THE HEART but INTO THE purging all meats?
it-is-going-into
koilian kai eis ton afedrwna ekporeuetai kaqarizon panta ta

koilian kai eis ton aphedrOna ekporeuetai katharizon panta ta
G2836 G2532 G1519 G3588 G856 G1607 G2511 G3956 G3588
n_ Acc Sg f Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg n a_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Pl n
CAVITY AND INTO THE FROM-SETTLE it-IS-OUT-GOING cleansING ALL THE
bowel latrine it-is-going-out
brwmata
brOmata
G1033
n_ Acc Pl n
FOODS
7:20 elegen de oti to ek tou anqrwpou ekporeuomenon 20 And he said, That which
elegen de hoti to ek tou anthrOpou ekporeuomenon
G3004 G1161 G3754 G3588 G1537 G3588 G444 G1607
cometh out of the man, that
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj Conj t_ Nom Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg n defileth the man.
He-said YET that THE OUT OF-THE human OUT-GOING
going-out
ekeino koinoi ton anqrwpon

ekeino koinoi ton anthrOpon
G1565 G2840 G3588 G444
pd Nom Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
that IS-COMMONING THE human
is-contaminating
7:21 eswqen gar ek ths kardias twn anqrwpwn oi dialogismoi 21 For from within, out of the
esOthen gar ek tEs kardias tOn anthrOpOn hoi dialogismoi
G2081 G1063 G1537 G3588 G2588 G3588 G444 G3588 G1261
heart of men, proceed evil
Adv Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m thoughts, adulteries,
INTO-PLACE for OUT OF-THE HEART OF-THE humans THE THRU-accounts fornications, murders,
inside reasonings
Mark 7
oi kakoi ekporeuontai moiceiai porneiai fonoi

hoi kakoi ekporeuontai moicheiai porneiai phonoi
G3588 G2556 G1607 G3430 G4202 G5408
t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl m
THE EVIL ARE-OUT-GOING ADULTERIES PROSTITUTIONS MURDERS
are-going-out
7:22 klopai pleonexiai ponhriai dolos aselgeia ofqalmos ponhros 22 Thefts, covetousness,
klopai pleonexiai ponEriai dolos aselgeia ophthalmos ponEros
G2829 G4124 G4189 G1388 G766 G3788 G4190
wickedness, deceit,
n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m lasciviousness, an evil eye,
thefts MORE-HAVEings wickeds FRAUD wantonness VIEWer wicked blasphemy, pride, foolishness:
greed(p) wickednesses guile eye
blasfhmia uperhfania afrosunh

blasphEmia huperEphania aphrosunE
G988 G5243 G877
n_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
HARM-AVERment OVER-APPEARance UN-DISPOSition
calumny pride imprudence
7:23 panta tauta ta ponhra eswqen ekporeuetai kai koinoi 23 All these evil things come
panta tauta ta ponEra esOthen ekporeuetai kai koinoi
G3956 G5023 G3588 G4190 G2081 G1607 G2532 G2840
from within, and defile the
a_ Nom Pl n pd Nom Pl n t_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n Adv vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg man.
ALL these THE wicked INTO-PLACE IS-OUT-GOING AND IS-COMMONING
wicked-things inside is-going-out is-contaminating
ton anqrwpon
ton anthrOpon
G3588 G444
THE human
7:24 kai ekeiqen anastas aphlqen eis ta meqoria turou kai 24 . And from thence he arose,
kai ekeithen anastas apElthen eis ta methoria turou kai
G2532 G1564 G450 G565 G1519 G3588 G3181 G5184 G2532
and went into the borders of
Conj Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n n_ Gen Sg f Conj Tyre and Sidon, and entered
AND thence UP-STANDing He-FROM-CAME INTO THE WITH-boundaries OF-TYRE AND into an house, and would have
rising he-came-away frontiers no man know [it]: but he could
not be hid.
sidwnos kai eiselqwn eis thn oikian oudena hqelen gnwnai kai
sidOnos kai eiselthOn eis tEn oikian oudena Ethelen gnOnai kai
G4605 G2532 G1525 G1519 G3588 G3614 G3762 G2309 G1097 G2532
n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act Conj
OF-SIDON AND INTO-COMING INTO THE HOME NOT-YET-ONE He-WILLED TO-KNOW AND
entering house no-one
ouk hdunhqh laqein

ouk EdunEthE lathein
G3756 G1410 G2990
Part Neg vi Aor pasD 3 Sg Att vn 2Aor Act
NOT He-WAS-enABLED TO-BE-OBLIVIOUSING
he-could to-be-eluding-them
7:25 akousasa gar gunh peri autou hs eicen to qugatrion 25 For a [certain] woman,
akousasa gar gunE peri autou hEs eichen to thugatrion
G191 G1063 G1135 G4012 G846 G3739 G2192 G3588 G2365
whose young daughter had an
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f Prep pp Gen Sg m pr Gen Sg f vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n unclean spirit, heard of him,
HEARing for WOMAN ABOUT Him OF-WHOM HAD THE DAUGHER (dim) and came and fell at his feet:
little-daughter
auths pneuma akaqarton elqousa prosepesen pros tous podas

autEs pneuma akatharton elthousa prosepesen pros tous podas
G846 G4151 G169 G2064 G4363 G4314 G3588 G4228
pp Gen Sg f n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
OF-her spirit UN-clean COMING TOWARD-FALLS TOWARD THE FEET
unclean prostrates
autou
autou
G846
pp Gen Sg m
OF-Him
7:26 hn de h gunh ellhnis surofoinissa tw genei kai 26 The woman was a Greek, a
En de hE gunE hellEnis surophoinissa tO genei kai
G2258 G1161 G3588 G1135 G1674 G4949 G3588 G1085 G2532
Syrophenician by nation; and
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n Conj she besought him that he
WAS YET THE WOMAN GREEK SYRIA-PHOENICIAN to-THE breed AND would cast forth the devil out
Syrophenician race of her daughter.
hrwta auton ina to daimonion ekballh ek ths

ErOta auton hina to daimonion ekballE ek tEs
G2065 G846 G2443 G3588 G1140 G1544 G1537 G3588
vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vs Pres Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg f
she-askED Him THAT THE demon He-MAY-BE-OUT-CASTING OUT OF-THE
he-may-be-casting-out
Mark 7
qugatros auths
thugatros autEs
G2364 G846
n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg f
DAUGHTER OF-her
7:27 o de ihsous eipen auth afes prwton cortasqhnai 27 But Jesus said unto her, Let
ho de iEsous eipen autE aphes prOton chortasthEnai
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G846 G863 G4412 G5526
the children first be filled: for
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Adv vn Aor Pas it is not meet to take the
THE YET JESUS said to-her FROM-LET BEFORE-most TO-BE-satisfiED children's bread, and to cast
let-you ! first [it] unto the dogs.
ta tekna ou gar kalon estin labein ton arton twn

ta tekna ou gar kalon estin labein ton arton tOn
G3588 G5043 G3756 G1063 G2570 G2076 G2983 G3588 G740 G3588
t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Part Neg Conj a_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Pl n
THE offsprings NOT for IDEAL it-IS TO-BE-GETTING THE BREAD OF-THE
children to-be-taking
teknwn kai balein tois kunariois

teknOn kai balein tois kunariois
G5043 G2532 G906 G3588 G2952
n_ Gen Pl n Conj vn 2Aor Act t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n
offsprings AND TO-BE-CASTING to-THE dogs (dim)
children puppies
7:28 h de apekriqh kai legei autw nai kurie kai gar 28 And she answered and said
hE de apekrithE kai legei autO nai kurie kai gar
G3588 G1161 G611 G2532 G3004 G846 G3483 G2962 G2532 G1063
unto him, Yes, Lord: yet the
t_ Nom Sg f Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Part n_ Voc Sg m Conj Conj dogs under the table eat of the
THE YET she-answerED AND IS-sayING to-Him YEA Master ! AND for children's crumbs.
yes Lord ! also
ta kunaria upokatw ths trapezhs esqiei apo twn yiciwn

ta kunaria hupokatO tEs trapezEs esthiei apo tOn psichiOn
G3588 G2952 G5270 G3588 G5132 G2068 G575 G3588 G5589
t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n Adv t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
THE dogs (dim) UNDER-DOWN OF-THE table IS-EATING FROM THE SCRAPS
puppies underneath the
twn paidiwn
tOn paidiOn
G3588 G3813
t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
OF-THE little-boys-and-girls
7:29 kai eipen auth dia touton ton logon upage 29 And he said unto her, For
kai eipen autE dia touton ton logon hupage
G2532 G2036 G846 G1223 G5126 G3588 G3056 G5217
this saying go thy way; the
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f Prep pd Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg devil is gone out of thy
AND He-said to-her THRU this THE saying BE-UNDER-LEADING daughter.
because-of be-you-going-away !
exelhluqen to daimonion ek ths qugatros sou

exelEluthen to daimonion ek tEs thugatros sou
G1831 G3588 G1140 G1537 G3588 G2364 G4675
vi Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg
HAS-OUT-COME THE demon OUT OF-THE DAUGHTER OF-YOU
has-come-out
7:30 kai apelqousa eis ton oikon auths euren to daimonion 30 And when she was come to
kai apelthousa eis ton oikon autEs heuren to daimonion
G2532 G565 G1519 G3588 G3624 G846 G2147 G3588 G1140
her house, she found the devil
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n gone out, and her daughter laid
AND FROM-COMING INTO THE HOME OF-her she-FOUND THE demon upon the bed.
coming-away house
exelhluqos kai thn qugatera beblhmenhn epi ths klinhs

exelEluthos kai tEn thugatera beblEmenEn epi tEs klinEs
G1831 G2532 G3588 G2364 G906 G1909 G3588 G2825
vp Perf Act Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
HAVING-OUT-COME AND THE DAUGHTER HAVING-been-CAST ON THE couch
having-come-out being-prostrate
7:31 kai palin exelqwn ek twn oriwn turou kai sidwnos 31 . And again, departing from
kai palin exelthOn ek tOn horiOn turou kai sidOnos
G2532 G3825 G1831 G1537 G3588 G3725 G5184 G2532 G4605
the coasts of Tyre and Sidon,
Conj Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f he came unto the sea of
AND AGAIN OUT-COMING OUT OF-THE boundaries OF-TYRE AND OF-SIDON Galilee, through the midst of
coming-out the coasts of Decapolis.
hlqen pros thn qalassan ths galilaias ana meson twn oriwn
Elthen pros tEn thalassan tEs galilaias ana meson tOn horiOn
G2064 G4314 G3588 G2281 G3588 G1056 G303 G3319 G3588 G3725
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Prep a_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
He-CAME TOWARD THE SEA OF-THE GALILEE UP MIDst OF-THE boundaries
Mark 7
dekapolews
dekapoleOs
G1179
n_ Gen Sg f
TEN-city (Decapolis)
of-Decapolis
7:32 kai ferousin autw kwfon mogilalon kai parakalousin 32 And they bring unto him
kai pherousin autO kOphon mogilalon kai parakalousin
G2532 G5342 G846 G2974 G3424 G2532 G3870
one that was deaf, and had an
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m a_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl impediment in his speech; and
AND THEY-ARE-CARRYING to-Him MUTE DIFFICULTY-TALKer AND THEY-ARE-BESIDE-CALLING they beseech him to put his
they-are-bringing deaf-mute stammering they-are-entreating hand upon him.
auton ina epiqh autw thn ceira

auton hina epithE autO tEn cheira
G846 G2443 G2007 G846 G3588 G5495
pp Acc Sg m Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
Him THAT He-MAY-BE-ON-PLACING to-him THE HAND
he-may-be-placing-on him
7:33 kai apolabomenos auton apo tou oclou kat idian ebalen 33 And he took him aside from
kai apolabomenos auton apo tou ochlou kat idian ebalen
G2532 G618 G846 G575 G3588 G3793 G2596 G2398 G906
the multitude, and put his
Conj vp 2Aor Mid Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep a_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg fingers into his ears, and he
AND FROM-GETTING him FROM THE THRONG according-to OWN He-CASTS spit, and touched his tongue;
getting-away he-thrusts
tous daktulous autou eis ta wta autou kai ptusas

tous daktulous autou eis ta Ota autou kai ptusas
G3588 G1147 G846 G1519 G3588 G3775 G846 G2532 G4429
t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
THE FINGERS OF-Him INTO THE EARS OF-him AND SPITTing
hyato ths glwsshs autou

hEpsato tEs glOssEs autou
G680 G3588 G1100 G846
vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m
TOUCHES OF-THE TONGUE OF-him
the
7:34 kai anableyas eis ton ouranon estenaxen kai legei autw 34 And looking up to heaven,
kai anablepsas eis ton ouranon estenaxen kai legei autO
G2532 G308 G1519 G3588 G3772 G4727 G2532 G3004 G846
he sighed, and saith unto him,
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Ephphatha, that is, Be opened.
AND UP-looking INTO THE heaven He-groans AND IS-sayING to-him
looking-up
effaqa o estin dianoicqhti

ephphatha ho estin dianoichthEti
G2188 G3739 G2076 G1272
Aramaic pr Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
EPHPHATHA WHICH IS BE-BEING-THRU-UP-OPENed
be-you-being-opened-up !
7:35 kai euqews dihnoicqhsan autou ai akoai kai eluqh 35 And straightway his ears
kai eutheOs diEnoichthEsan autou hai akoai kai eluthE
G2532 G2112 G1272 G846 G3588 G189 G2532 G3089
were opened, and the string of
Conj Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Pl pp Gen Sg m t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg his tongue was loosed, and he
AND immediately WERE-THRU-UP-OPENED OF-him THE HEARings AND WAS-LOOSED spake plain.
were-opened-up hearing(p)
o desmos ths glwsshs autou kai elalei orqws

ho desmos tEs glOssEs autou kai elalei orthOs
G3588 G1199 G3588 G1100 G846 G2532 G2980 G3723
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg Adv
THE BOND OF-THE TONGUE OF-him AND he-TALKED ERECTly
he-spoke correctly
7:36 kai diesteilato autois ina mhdeni eipwsin oson de 36 And he charged them that
kai diesteilato autois hina mEdeni eipOsin hoson de
G2532 G1291 G846 G2443 G3367 G2036 G3745 G1161
they should tell no man: but the
Conj vi Aor Mid 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj a_ Dat Sg m vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl pk Acc Sg n Conj more he charged them, so
AND He-THRU-PUTS to-them THAT to-NO-YET-ONE THEY-MAY-BE-sayING as-much-as YET much the more a great deal
he-cautions them no-one they-may-be-telling they published [it];
autos autois diestelleto mallon perissoteron ekhrusson

autos autois diestelleto mallon perissoteron ekErusson
G846 G846 G1291 G3123 G4054 G2784
pp Nom Sg m pp Dat Pl m vi Impf Mid 3 Sg Adv a_ Acc Sg n Cmp vi Impf Act 3 Pl
He to-them THRU-PUT RATHER more-excessive THEY-PROCLAIMED
them cautioned more-exceedingly they-heralded-it
7:37 kai uperperissws exeplhssonto legontes kalws panta pepoihken 37 And were beyond measure
kai huperperissOs exeplEssonto legontes kalOs panta pepoiEken
G2532 G5249 G1605 G3004 G2573 G3956 G4160
astonished, saying, He hath
Conj Adv vi Impf Pas 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Adv a_ Acc Pl n vi Perf Act 3 Sg done all things well: he maketh
AND OVER-excessively THEY-were-astonishED sayING IDEALly ALL He-HAS-DONE both the deaf to hear, and the
superexceedingly all-things dumb to speak.
Mark 7 - Mark 8
kai tous kwfous poiei akouein kai tous alalous lalein

kai tous kOphous poiei akouein kai tous alalous lalein
G2532 G3588 G2974 G4160 G191 G2532 G3588 G216 G2980
Conj t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg vn Pres Act Conj t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vn Pres Act
AND THE MUTES He-IS-makING TO-BE-HEARING AND THE UN-TALKS TO-BE-TALKING
also deaf-mutes dumb-ones to-be-speaking
Mark 8
8:1 en ekeinais tais hmerais pampollou oclou ontos kai mh 1 . In those days the multitude
en ekeinais tais hEmerais pampollou ochlou ontos kai mE
G1722 G1565 G3588 G2250 G3827 G3793 G5607 G2532 G3361
being very great, and having
Prep pd Dat Pl f t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f a_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres vxx Gen Sg m Conj Part Neg nothing to eat, Jesus called his
IN those THE DAYS OF-EVERY-MANY THRONG BEING AND NO disciples [unto him], and saith
of-very-vast unto them,
econtwn ti fagwsin proskalesamenos o ihsous tous

echontOn ti phagOsin proskalesamenos ho iEsous tous
G2192 G5101 G5315 G4341 G3588 G2424 G3588
vp Pres Act Gen Pl m pi Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl vp Aor midD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m
OF-HAVING ANY THEY-MAY-BE-EATING TOWARD-CALLing THE JESUS THE
anything calling-to-him
maqhtas autou legei autois

mathEtas autou legei autois
G3101 G846 G3004 G846
n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m
LEARNers OF-Him He-IS-sayING to-them
disciples
8:2 splagcnizomai epi ton oclon oti hdh hmeras treis 2 I have compassion on the
splagchnizomai epi ton ochlon hoti EdE hEmeras treis
G4697 G1909 G3588 G3793 G3754 G2235 G2250 G5140
multitude, because they have
vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj Adv n_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f now been with me three days,
I-AM-beING-compassionatED ON THE THRONG that ALREADY DAYS THREE and have nothing to eat:
I-am-being-moved-with-compassion
prosmenousin moi kai ouk ecousin ti fagwsin

prosmenousin moi kai ouk echousin ti phagOsin
G4357 G3427 G2532 G3756 G2192 G5101 G5315
vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg Conj Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Pl pi Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-ARE-TOWARD-REMAINING to-ME AND NOT THEY-ARE-HAVING ANY THEY-MAY-BE-EATING
they-are-remaining-with me anything
8:3 kai ean apolusw autous nhsteis eis oikon autwn 3 And if I send them away
kai ean apolusO autous nEsteis eis oikon autOn
G2532 G1437 G630 G846 G3523 G1519 G3624 G846
fasting to their own houses,
Conj Cond vs Aor Act 1 Sg pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Prep n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Pl m they will faint by the way: for
AND IF-EVER I-SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING them fasting INTO HOME OF-them divers of them came from far.
I-should-be-dismissing
ekluqhsontai en th odw tines gar autwn makroqen

ekluthEsontai en tE hodO tines gar autOn makrothen
G1590 G1722 G3588 G3598 G5100 G1063 G846 G3113
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f px Nom Pl m Conj pp Gen Pl m Adv
THEY-SHALL-BE-BEING-OUT-LOOSED IN THE WAY ANY for OF-them FAR-PLACE
they-shall-be-fainting road some from-afar
hkasin
hEkasin
G2240
vi Perf Act 3 Pl
HAVE-ARRIVED
8:4 kai apekriqhsan autw oi maqhtai autou poqen toutous 4 And his disciples answered
kai apekrithEsan autO hoi mathEtai autou pothen toutous
G2532 G611 G846 G3588 G3101 G846 G4159 G5128
him, From whence can a man
Conj vi Aor midD 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m Adv Int pd Acc Pl m satisfy these [men] with bread
AND answerED to-Him THE LEARNers OF-Him ?-WHICH-PLACE these here in the wilderness?
him disciples whence ? these-men
dunhsetai tis wde cortasai artwn ep erhmias

dunEsetai tis hOde chortasai artOn ep erEmias
G1410 G5100 G5602 G5526 G740 G1909 G2047
vi Fut midD 3 Sg px Nom Sg m Adv vn Aor Act n_ Gen Pl m Prep n_ Gen Sg f
SHALL-BE-ABLE ANY here TO-satisfy OF-BREADS ON DESOLATE
can anyone of-bread(p) wilderness
8:5 kai ephrwta autous posous ecete artous oi de eipon 5 And he asked them, How
kai epErOta autous posous echete artous hoi de eipon
G2532 G1905 G846 G4214 G2192 G740 G3588 G1161 G2036
many loaves have ye? And
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m pq Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Pl m t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl they said, Seven.
AND He-inquirED-of them how-many YE-ARE-HAVING BREADS THE YET THEY-said
how-many ? cakes-of-bread
epta
hepta
G2033
a_ Nom
SEVEN
8:6 kai parhggeilen tw oclw anapesein epi ths ghs kai 6 And he commanded the
kai parEggeilen tO ochlO anapesein epi tEs gEs kai
G2532 G3853 G3588 G3793 G377 G1909 G3588 G1093 G2532
people to sit down on the
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj ground: and he took the seven
AND He-chargES to-THE THRONG TO-BE-UP-FALLING ON THE LAND AND loaves, and gave thanks, and
the to-be-leaning-back earth brake, and gave to his disciples
Mark 8
to set before [them]; and they

labwn tous epta artous eucaristhsas eklasen kai edidou did set [them] before the
labOn tous hepta artous eucharistEsas eklasen kai edidou
G2983 G3588 G2033 G740 G2168 G2806 G2532 G1325 people.
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg
GETTING THE SEVEN BREADS thanking He-BREAKS AND He-GAVE
taking cakes-of-bread giving-thanks gave
tois maqhtais autou ina paraqwsin kai pareqhkan tw

tois mathEtais autou hina parathOsin kai parethEkan tO
G3588 G3101 G846 G2443 G3908 G2532 G3908 G3588
t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg m
to-THE LEARNers OF-Him THAT THEY-MAY-BE-BESIDE-PLACING AND THEY-BESIDE-PLACE to-THE
disciples they-may-be-placing-before they-place-them-before the
oclw
ochlO
G3793
n_ Dat Sg m
THRONG
8:7 kai eicon icqudia oliga kai euloghsas eipen paraqeinai kai 7 And they had a few small
kai eichon ichthudia oliga kai eulogEsas eipen paratheinai kai
G2532 G2192 G2485 G3641 G2532 G2127 G2036 G3908 G2532
fishes: and he blessed, and
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act Conj commanded to set them also
AND THEY-HAD FISHES (dim) FEW AND blessing He-said TO-BESIDE-PLACE AND before [them].
small-fishes to-place-before also
auta
auta
G846
pp Acc Pl n
them
8:8 efagon de kai ecortasqhsan kai hran perisseumata klasmatwn 8 So they did eat, and were
ephagon de kai echortasthEsan kai Eran perisseumata klasmatOn
G5315 G1161 G2532 G5526 G2532 G142 G4051 G2801
filled: and they took up of the
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Pl n n_ Gen Pl n broken [meat] that was left
THEY-ATE YET AND ARE-satisfiED AND THEY-LIFT excess OF-BREAKS seven baskets.
they-pick-up surplus of-fragments
epta spuridas
hepta spuridas
G2033 G4711
a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl f
SEVEN HAMPERS
8:9 hsan de oi fagontes ws tetrakiscilioi kai apelusen 9 And they that had eaten were
Esan de hoi phagontes hOs tetrakischilioi kai apelusen
G2258 G1161 G3588 G5315 G5613 G5070 G2532 G630
about four thousand: and he
vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Adv a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg sent them away.
WERE YET THE ones-EATING AS FOUR-times-THOUSAND AND He-FROM-LOOSES
they-were ones-eating about four-thousand he-dismisses
autous
autous
G846
pp Acc Pl m
them
8:10 kai euqews embas eis to ploion meta twn maqhtwn 10 . And straightway he
kai eutheOs embas eis to ploion meta tOn mathEtOn
G2532 G2112 G1684 G1519 G3588 G4143 G3326 G3588 G3101
entered into a ship with his
Conj Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m disciples, and came into the
AND immediately IN-STEPPing INTO THE FLOATer WITH THE LEARNers parts of Dalmanutha.
stepping-in ship disciples
autou hlqen eis ta merh dalmanouqa

autou Elthen eis ta merE dalmanoutha
G846 G2064 G1519 G3588 G3313 G1148
pp Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n ni proper
OF-Him He-CAME INTO THE PARTS DALMANUTHA
of-Dalmanutha
8:11 kai exhlqon oi farisaioi kai hrxanto suzhtein autw 11 And the Pharisees came
kai exElthon hoi pharisaioi kai Erxanto suzEtein autO
G2532 G1831 G3588 G5330 G2532 G756 G4802 G846
forth, and began to question
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor midD 3 Pl vn Pres Act pp Dat Sg m with him, seeking of him a sign
AND OUT-CAME THE PHARISEES AND THEY-begin TO-BE-TOGETHER-SEEKING to-Him from heaven, tempting him.
came-out to-be-discussing
zhtountes par autou shmeion apo tou ouranou peirazontes auton

zEtountes par autou sEmeion apo tou ouranou peirazontes auton
G2212 G3844 G846 G4592 G575 G3588 G3772 G3985 G846
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep pp Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m
SEEKING BESIDE Him SIGN FROM THE heaven tryING Him
Mark 8
8:12 kai anastenaxas tw pneumati autou legei ti h 12 And he sighed deeply in his
kai anastenaxas tO pneumati autou legei ti hE
G2532 G389 G3588 G4151 G846 G3004 G5101 G3588
spirit, and saith, Why doth this
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pp Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pi Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg f generation seek after a sign?
AND UP-groaning to-THE spirit OF-Him He-IS-sayING ANY THE verily I say unto you, There
sighing why ? shall no sign be given unto this
generation.
genea auth shmeion epizhtei amhn legw umin ei doqhsetai
genea hautE sEmeion epizEtei amEn legO humin ei dothEsetai
G1074 G3778 G4592 G1934 G281 G3004 G5213 G1487 G1325
n_ Nom Sg f pd Nom Sg f n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Cond vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
generation this SIGN IS-ON-SEEKING AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) IF SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN
is-seeking-for verily to-ye
th genea tauth shmeion

tE genea tautE sEmeion
G3588 G1074 G3778 G4592
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f n_ Acc Sg n
to-THE generation this SIGN
8:13 kai afeis autous embas palin eis to ploion 13 And he left them, and
kai apheis autous embas palin eis to ploion
G2532 G863 G846 G1684 G3825 G1519 G3588 G4143
entering into the ship again
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Adv Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n departed to the other side.
AND FROM-LETTING them IN-STEPPing AGAIN INTO THE FLOATer
leaving stepping-in ship
aphlqen eis to peran

apElthen eis to peran
G565 G1519 G3588 G4008
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n Adv
He-FROM-CAME INTO THE OTHER-SIDE
he-came-away
8:14 kai epelaqonto oi maqhtai labein artous kai ei mh 14 Now [the disciples] had
kai epelathonto hoi mathEtai labein artous kai ei mE
G2532 G1950 G3588 G3101 G2983 G740 G2532 G1487 G3361
forgotten to take bread, neither
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Pl m Conj Cond Part Neg had they in the ship with them
AND forgot THE LEARNers TO-BE-GETTING BREADS AND IF NO more than one loaf.
disciples bread(p)
ena arton ouk eicon meq eautwn en tw ploiw

hena arton ouk eichon meth heautOn en tO ploiO
G1520 G740 G3756 G2192 G3326 G1438 G1722 G3588 G4143
a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep pf 3 Gen Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n
ONE BREAD NOT THEY-HAD WITH selves IN THE FLOATer
cake-of-bread themselves ship
8:15 kai diestelleto autois legwn orate blepete apo ths 15 And he charged them,
kai diestelleto autois legOn horate blepete apo tEs
G2532 G1291 G846 G3004 G3708 G991 G575 G3588
saying, Take heed, beware of
Conj vi Impf Mid 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg f the leaven of the Pharisees, and
AND He-THRU-PUT to-them sayING BE-SEEING BE-lookING FROM THE [of] the leaven of Herod.
he-cautioned them be-ye-seeing ! be-ye-bewaring !
zumhs twn farisaiwn kai ths zumhs hrwdou

zumEs tOn pharisaiOn kai tEs zumEs hErOdou
G2219 G3588 G5330 G2532 G3588 G2219 G2264
n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
FERMENT OF-THE PHARISEES AND OF-THE FERMENT OF-HEROD
leaven the leaven
8:16 kai dielogizonto pros allhlous legontes oti artous ouk 16 And they reasoned among
kai dielogizonto pros allElous legontes hoti artous ouk
G2532 G1260 G4314 G240 G3004 G3754 G740 G3756
themselves, saying, [It is]
Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep pc Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl m Part Neg because we have no bread.
AND THEY-THRU-accountED TOWARD one-another sayING that BREADS NOT
they-reasoned bread(p)
ecomen
echomen
G2192
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
WE-ARE-HAVING
8:17 kai gnous o ihsous legei autois ti 17 And when Jesus knew [it],
kai gnous ho iEsous legei autois ti
G2532 G1097 G3588 G2424 G3004 G846 G5101
he saith unto them, Why reason
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg n ye, because ye have no bread?
AND KNOWING THE JESUS IS-sayING to-them ANY perceive ye not yet, neither
knowing-it why ? understand? have ye your heart
yet hardened?
dialogizesqe oti artous ouk ecete oupw noeite oude
dialogizesthe hoti artous ouk echete oupO noeite oude
G1260 G3754 G740 G3756 G2192 G3768 G3539 G3761
vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Conj n_ Acc Pl m Part Neg vi Pres Act 2 Pl Adv vi Pres Act 2 Pl Adv
YE-ARE-THRU-accountING that BREADS NOT YE-ARE-HAVING NOT-as-yet YE-ARE-MINDING NOT-YET
ye-are-reasoning bread(p) ye-are-apprehending neither
Mark 8
suniete eti pepwrwmenhn ecete thn kardian umwn

suniete eti pepOrOmenEn echete tEn kardian humOn
G4920 G2089 G4456 G2192 G3588 G2588 G5216
vi Pres Act 2 Pl Adv vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl
YE-ARE-understandING STILL HAVING-been-CALLOUSED YE-ARE-HAVING THE HEART OF-YOU(p)
are-understanding of-ye
8:18 ofqalmous econtes ou blepete kai wta econtes ouk 18 Having eyes, see ye not?
ophthalmous echontes ou blepete kai Ota echontes ouk
G3788 G2192 G3756 G991 G2532 G3775 G2192 G3756
and having ears, hear ye not?
n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Part Neg vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj n_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Part Neg and do ye not remember?
VIEWers HAVING NOT YE-ARE-lookING AND EARS HAVING NOT
eyes ye-are-observing
akouete kai ou mnhmoneuete

akouete kai ou mnEmoneuete
G191 G2532 G3756 G3421
vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Part Neg vi Pres Act 2 Pl
YE-ARE-HEARING AND NOT YE-ARE-rememberING
8:19 ote tous pente artous eklasa eis tous pentakiscilious posous 19 When I brake the five
hote tous pente artous eklasa eis tous pentakischilious posous
G3753 G3588 G4002 G740 G2806 G1519 G3588 G4000 G4214
loaves among five thousand,
Adv t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 1 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m pq Acc Pl m how many baskets full of
when THE FIVE BREADS I-BREAK INTO THE FIVE-times-THOUSAND how-many fragments took ye up? They
cakes-of-bread five-thousand how-many ? say unto him, Twelve.
kofinous plhreis klasmatwn hrate legousin autw dwdeka

kophinous plEreis klasmatOn Erate legousin autO dOdeka
G2894 G4134 G2801 G142 G3004 G846 G1427
n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Pl n vi Aor Act 2 Pl vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom
PANNIERS FULL OF-BREAKS YE-LIFT THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him TWO-TEN
of-fragments ye-pick-up twelve
8:20 ote de tous epta eis tous tetrakiscilious poswn spuridwn 20 And when the seven among
hote de tous hepta eis tous tetrakischilious posOn spuridOn
G3753 G1161 G3588 G2033 G1519 G3588 G5070 G4214 G4711
four thousand, how many
Adv Conj t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom Prep t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m pq Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl f baskets full of fragments took
when YET THE SEVEN INTO THE FOUR-times-THOUSAND OF-how-many HAMPERS ye up? And they said, Seven.
four-thousand how-many ?
plhrwmata klasmatwn hrate oi de eipon epta

plErOmata klasmatOn Erate hoi de eipon hepta
G4138 G2801 G142 G3588 G1161 G2036 G2033
n_ Acc Pl n n_ Gen Pl n vi Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Nom
FILLing OF-BREAKS YE-LIFT THE YET THEY-said SEVEN
filled-up of-fragments ye-pick-up
8:21 kai elegen autois pws ou suniete 21 And he said unto them,
kai elegen autois pOs hou suniete
G2532 G3004 G846 G4459 G3756 G4920
How is it that ye do not
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Adv Int Part Neg vi Pres Act 2 Pl understand?
AND He-said to-them how NOT YE-ARE-understandING
how ?
8:22 kai ercetai eis bhqsaida kai ferousin autw tuflon kai 22 . And he cometh to
kai erchetai eis bEthsaida kai pherousin autO tuphlon kai
G2532 G2064 G1519 G966 G2532 G5342 G846 G5185 G2532
Bethsaida; and they bring a
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep ni proper Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Conj blind man unto him, and
AND He-IS-COMING INTO BETHSAIDA AND THEY-ARE-CARRYING to-Him BLIND AND besought him to touch him.
they-are-bringing blind-man
parakalousin auton ina autou ayhtai

parakalousin auton hina autou hapsEtai
G3870 G846 G2443 G846 G680
vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj pp Gen Sg m vs Aor Mid 3 Sg
THEY-ARE-BESIDE-CALLING Him THAT OF-him He-SHOULD-BE-TOUCHING
are-entreating him
8:23 kai epilabomenos ths ceiros tou tuflou exhgagen auton exw 23 And he took the blind man
kai epilabomenos tEs cheiros tou tuphlou exEgagen auton exO
G2532 G1949 G3588 G5495 G3588 G5185 G1806 G846 G1854
by the hand, and led him out of
Conj vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Adv the town; and when he had spit
AND ON-GETTING OF-THE HAND OF-THE BLIND He-OUT-LED him OUT on his eyes, and put his hands
getting-hold blind-man he-led-out upon him, he asked him if he
saw ought.
ths kwmhs kai ptusas eis ta ommata autou epiqeis
tEs kOmEs kai ptusas eis ta ommata autou epitheis
G3588 G2968 G2532 G4429 G1519 G3588 G3659 G846 G2007
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
OF-THE VILLAGE AND SPITTing INTO THE eyes OF-him ON-PLACING
placing-on
tas ceiras autw ephrwta auton ei ti blepei

tas cheiras autO epErOta auton ei ti blepei
G3588 G5495 G846 G1905 G846 G1487 G5100 G991
t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pp Dat Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Cond px Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE HANDS to-him He-inquirED-of him IF ANY he-IS-lookING
anything he-is-observing
Mark 8
8:24 kai anableyas elegen blepw tous anqrwpous ws dendra 24 And he looked up, and said,
kai anablepsas elegen blepO tous anthrOpous hOs dendra
G2532 G308 G3004 G991 G3588 G444 G5613 G1186
I see men as trees, walking.
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Adv n_ Nom Pl n
AND UP-looking he-said I-AM-lookING THE humans AS TREES
looking-up I-am-observing
peripatountas
peripatountas
G4043
vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
ABOUT-TREADING
walking
8:25 eita palin epeqhken tas ceiras epi tous ofqalmous autou 25 After that he put [his] hands
eita palin epethEken tas cheiras epi tous ophthalmous autou
G1534 G3825 G2007 G3588 G5495 G1909 G3588 G3788 G846
again upon his eyes, and made
Adv Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m him look up: and he was
THEREAFTER AGAIN He-ON-PLACES THE HANDS ON THE VIEWers OF-him restored, and saw every man
he-places-on eyes clearly.
kai epoihsen auton anableyai kai apokatestaqh kai enebleyen

kai epoiEsen auton anablepsai kai apokatestathE kai eneblepsen
G2532 G4160 G846 G308 G2532 G600 G2532 G1689
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m vn Aor Act Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND He-makES him TO-UP-look AND he-WAS-restorED AND he-IN-lookED
to-recover-sight he-looked-at
thlaugws apantas
tElaugOs hapantas
G5081 G537
Adv a_ Acc Pl m
FINISH-RADIANCEly ALL (emph.)
distinctly all(emph.)
8:26 kai apesteilen auton eis ton oikon autou legwn mhde 26 And he sent him away to his
kai apesteilen auton eis ton oikon autou legOn mEde
G2532 G649 G846 G1519 G3588 G3624 G846 G3004 G3366
house, saying, Neither go into
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj the town, nor tell [it] to any in
AND He-commissions him INTO THE HOME OF-him sayING NO-YET the town.
he-dispatches neither
eis thn kwmhn eiselqhs mhde eiphs tini en th

eis tEn kOmEn eiselthEs mEde eipEs tini en tE
G1519 G3588 G2968 G1525 G3366 G2036 G5100 G1722 G3588
Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg Conj vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg px Dat Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f
INTO THE VILLAGE YOU-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING NO-YET YOU-MAY-BE-sayING ANY IN THE
you-may-be-entering nor you-may-be-telling to-anyone
kwmh
kOmE
G2968
n_ Dat Sg f
VILLAGE
8:27 kai exhlqen o ihsous kai oi maqhtai autou eis tas 27 . And Jesus went out, and
kai exElthen ho iEsous kai hoi mathEtai autou eis tas
G2532 G1831 G3588 G2424 G2532 G3588 G3101 G846 G1519 G3588
his disciples, into the towns of
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl f Caesarea Philippi: and by the
AND OUT-CAME THE JESUS AND THE LEARNers OF-Him INTO THE way he asked his disciples,
came-out disciples saying unto them, Whom do
men say that I am?
kwmas kaisareias ths filippou kai en th odw ephrwta tous
kOmas kaisareias tEs philippou kai en tE hodO epErOta tous
G2968 G2542 G3588 G5376 G2532 G1722 G3588 G3598 G1905 G3588
n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m
VILLAGES OF-CAESAREA OF-THE Philippi AND IN THE WAY He-inquirED-of THE
Philip
maqhtas autou legwn autois tina me legousin oi

mathEtas autou legOn autois tina me legousin hoi
G3101 G846 G3004 G846 G5101 G3165 G3004 G3588
n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
LEARNers OF-Him sayING to-them ANY ME ARE-sayING THE
disciples who ?
anqrwpoi einai
anthrOpoi einai
G444 G1511
n_ Nom Pl m vn Pres vxx
humans TO-BE
8:28 oi de apekriqhsan iwannhn ton baptisthn kai alloi hlian 28 And they answered, John
hoi de apekrithEsan iOannEn ton baptistEn kai alloi Elian
G3588 G1161 G611 G2491 G3588 G910 G2532 G243 G2243
the Baptist: but some [say],
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor midD 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj a_ Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg m Elias; and others, One of the
THE YET THEY-answerED JOHN THE DIPist AND others ELIAS prophets.
baptist Elijah
Mark 8
alloi de ena twn profhtwn

alloi de hena tOn prophEtOn
G243 G1161 G1520 G3588 G4396
a_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
others YET ONE OF-THE BEFORE-AVERers
prophets
8:29 kai autos legei autois umeis de tina me legete 29 And he saith unto them, But
kai autos legei autois humeis de tina me legete
G2532 G846 G3004 G846 G5210 G1161 G5101 G3165 G3004
whom say ye that I am? And
Conj pp Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pp 2 Nom Pl Conj pi Acc Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres Act 2 Pl Peter answereth and saith unto
AND He IS-sayING to-them YOU(p) YET ANY ME ARE-sayING him, Thou art the Christ.
einai apokriqeis de o petros legei autw su

einai apokritheis de ho petros legei autO su
G1511 G611 G1161 G3588 G4074 G3004 G846 G4771
vn Pres vxx vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m pp 2 Nom Sg
TO-BE answerING YET THE Peter IS-sayING to-Him YOU
ei o cristos
ei ho christos
G1488 G3588 G5547
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
ARE THE ANOINTED
Christ
8:30 kai epetimhsen autois ina mhdeni legwsin peri autou 30 And he charged them that
kai epetimEsen autois hina mEdeni legOsin peri autou
G2532 G2008 G846 G2443 G3367 G3004 G4012 G846
they should tell no man of him.
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj a_ Dat Sg m vs Pres Act 3 Pl Prep pp Gen Sg m
AND He-rebukES to-them THAT to-NO-YET-ONE THEY-MAY-BE-sayING ABOUT Him
he-warns them no-one they-may-be-telling
8:31 kai hrxato didaskein autous oti dei ton uion 31 And he began to teach them,
kai Erxato didaskein autous hoti dei ton huion
G2532 G756 G1321 G846 G3754 G1163 G3588 G5207
that the Son of man must suffer
Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act pp Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m many things, and be rejected of
AND He-begins TO-BE-TEACHING them that it-IS-BINDING THE SON the elders, and [of] the chief
must priests, and scribes, and be
killed, and after three days rise
tou anqrwpou polla paqein kai apodokimasqhnai apo twn again.
tou anthrOpou polla pathein kai apodokimasthEnai apo tOn
G3588 G444 G4183 G3958 G2532 G593 G575 G3588
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m a_ Acc Pl n vn 2Aor Act Conj vn Aor Pas Prep t_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE human much TO-BE-EMOTIONING AND TO-BE-FROM-testED FROM THE
to-be-suffering to-be-rejected
presbuterwn kai arcierewn kai grammatewn kai apoktanqhnai kai meta

presbuterOn kai archiereOn kai grammateOn kai apoktanthEnai kai meta
G4245 G2532 G749 G2532 G1122 G2532 G615 G2532 G3326
a_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m Conj vn Aor Pas Conj Prep
SENIORS AND chief-SACRED-ones AND WRITers AND TO-BE-FROM-KILLED AND after
elders chief-priests scribes to-be-killed
treis hmeras anasthnai

treis hEmeras anastEnai
G5140 G2250 G450
a_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vn 2Aor Act
THREE DAYS TO-UP-STAND
to-rise
8:32 kai parrhsia ton logon elalei kai proslabomenos auton 32 And he spake that saying
kai parrEsia ton logon elalei kai proslabomenos auton
G2532 G3954 G3588 G3056 G2980 G2532 G4355 G846
openly. And Peter took him,
Conj n_ Dat Sg f t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj vp 2Aor Mid Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m and began to rebuke him.
AND to-boldness THE saying He-TALKED AND TOWARD-GETTING Him
word he-spoke taking-to-him
o petros hrxato epitiman autw

ho petros Erxato epitiman autO
G3588 G4074 G756 G2008 G846
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act pp Dat Sg m
THE Peter begins TO-BE-rebukING to-Him
him
8:33 o de epistrafeis kai idwn tous maqhtas autou 33 But when he had turned
ho de epistrapheis kai idOn tous mathEtas autou
G3588 G1161 G1994 G2532 G1492 G3588 G3101 G846
about and looked on his
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m disciples, he rebuked Peter,
THE YET BEING-ON-TURNED AND PERCEIVING THE LEARNers OF-Him saying, Get thee behind me,
being-turned-about disciples Satan: for thou savourest not
the things that be of God, but
epetimhsen tw petrw legwn upage opisw mou the things that be of men.
epetimEsen tO petrO legOn hupage opisO mou
G2008 G3588 G4074 G3004 G5217 G3694 G3450
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg Adv pp 1 Gen Sg
He-rebukES to-THE Peter sayING BE-UNDER-LEADING BEHIND OF-ME
the be-you-going-away ! me
Mark 8
satana oti ou froneis ta tou qeou alla ta

satana hoti ou phroneis ta tou theou alla ta
G4567 G3754 G3756 G5426 G3588 G3588 G2316 G235 G3588
n_ Voc Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl n
SATAN (adversary) that NOT YOU-ARE-beING-DISPOSed-to THE OF-THE God but THE
satan ! the-things the-things
twn anqrwpwn
tOn anthrOpOn
G3588 G444
OF-THE humans
8:34 kai proskalesamenos ton oclon sun tois maqhtais autou 34 And when he had called the
kai proskalesamenos ton ochlon sun tois mathEtais autou
G2532 G4341 G3588 G3793 G4862 G3588 G3101 G846
people [unto him] with his
Conj vp Aor midD Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m disciples also, he said unto
AND TOWARD-CALLing THE THRONG TOGETHER to-THE LEARNers OF-Him them, Whosoever will come
calling-to-him togetherwith the disciples after me, let him deny himself,
and take up his cross, and
eipen autois ostis qelei opisw mou elqein aparnhsasqw follow me.
eipen autois hostis thelei opisO mou elthein aparnEsasthO
G2036 G846 G3748 G2309 G3694 G3450 G2064 G533
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pr Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv pp 1 Gen Sg vn 2Aor Act vm Aor midD 3 Sg
He-said to-them WHO-ANY IS-WILLING BEHIND OF-ME TO-BE-COMING LET-him-renounce
anyone-who after me let-him-renounce !
eauton kai aratw ton stauron autou kai akolouqeitw moi

heauton kai aratO ton stauron autou kai akoloutheitO moi
G1438 G2532 G142 G3588 G4716 G846 G2532 G190 G3427
pf 3 Acc Sg m Conj vm Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m Conj vm Pres Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg
self AND LET-him-LIFT THE pale OF-him AND LET-him-BE-followING to-ME
himself let-him-pick-up ! cross let-him-be-following ! me
8:35 os gar an qelh thn yuchn autou swsai apolesei 35 For whosoever will save his
hos gar an thelE tEn psuchEn autou sOsai apolesei
G3739 G1063 G302 G2309 G3588 G5590 G846 G4982 G622
life shall lose it; but whosoever
pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m vn Aor Act vi Fut Act 3 Sg shall lose his life for my sake
WHO for EVER MAY-BE-WILLING THE soul OF-him TO-SAVE SHALL-BE-destroyING and the gospel's, the same shall
save it.
authn os d an apolesh thn yuchn autou eneken

autEn hos d an apolesE tEn psuchEn autou heneken
G846 G3739 G1161 G302 G622 G3588 G5590 G846 G1752
pp Acc Sg f pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Adv
her WHO YET EVER SHOULD-BE-destroyING THE soul OF-him on-account-of
emou kai tou euaggeliou outos swsei authn

emou kai tou euaggeliou houtos sOsei autEn
G1700 G2532 G3588 G2098 G3778 G4982 G846
pp 1 Gen Sg Conj t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n pd Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f
ME AND OF-THE WELL-MESSAGE this SHALL-BE-SAVING her
this-one
8:36 ti gar wfelhsei anqrwpon ean kerdhsh ton kosmon 36 For what shall it profit a
ti gar OphelEsei anthrOpon ean kerdEsE ton kosmon
G5101 G1063 G5623 G444 G1437 G2770 G3588 G2889
man, if he shall gain the whole
pi Acc Sg n Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Cond vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m world, and lose his own soul?
ANY for it-SHALL-BE-benefitING human IF-EVER he-SHOULD-BE-GAINING THE SYSTEM
what ? world
olon kai zhmiwqh thn yuchn autou

holon kai zEmiOthE tEn psuchEn autou
G3650 G2532 G2210 G3588 G5590 G846
a_ Acc Sg m Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m
WHOLE AND MAY-BE-BEING-FINED THE soul OF-him
may-be-forfeiting
8:37 h ti dwsei anqrwpos antallagma ths yuchs autou 37 Or what shall a man give in
hE ti dOsei anthrOpos antallagma tEs psuchEs autou
G2228 G5101 G1325 G444 G465 G3588 G5590 G846
exchange for his soul?
Part pi Acc Sg n vi Fut Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m
OR ANY SHALL-BE-GIVING human exCHANGE OF-THE soul OF-him
what ? in-exchange
8:38 os gar an epaiscunqh me kai tous emous logous en 38 Whosoever therefore shall
hos gar an epaischunthE me kai tous emous logous en
G3739 G1063 G302 G1870 G3165 G2532 G3588 G1699 G3056 G1722
be ashamed of me and of my
pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs Aor pasD 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg Conj t_ Acc Pl m ps 1 Acc Pl n_ Acc Pl m Prep words in this adulterous and
WHO for EVER MAY-BE-BEING-ON-VILED ME AND THE MY sayings IN sinful generation; of him also
may-be-being-ashamed-of words shall the Son of man be
ashamed, when he cometh in
th genea tauth th moicalidi kai amartwlw kai o uios the glory of his Father with the
tE genea tautE tE moichalidi kai hamartOlO kai ho huios holy angels.
G3588 G1074 G3778 G3588 G3428 G2532 G268 G2532 G3588 G5207
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj a_ Dat Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
THE generation this THE ADULTERess AND misser AND THE SON
sinner(f) also
Mark 8 - Mark 9
tou anqrwpou epaiscunqhsetai auton otan elqh en th

tou anthrOpou epaischunthEsetai auton hotan elthE en tE
G3588 G444 G1870 G846 G3752 G2064 G1722 G3588
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut pasD 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f
OF-THE human SHALL-BE-BEING-ON-VILED him when-EVER He-MAY-BE-COMING IN THE
shall-be-being-ashamed-of whenever
doxh tou patros autou meta twn aggelwn twn agiwn

doxE tou patros autou meta tOn aggelOn tOn hagiOn
G1391 G3588 G3962 G846 G3326 G3588 G32 G3588 G40
n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
esteem OF-THE FATHER OF-Him WITH THE MESSENGERS THE HOLY
glory
Mark 9
9:1 kai elegen autois amhn legw umin oti eisin tines 1 . And he said unto them,
kai elegen autois amEn legO humin hoti eisin tines
G2532 G3004 G846 G281 G3004 G5213 G3754 G1526 G5100
Verily I say unto you, That
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Pl px Nom Pl m there be some of them that
AND He-said to-them AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that ARE ANY stand here, which shall not
verily to-ye there-are some taste of death, till they have
seen the kingdom of God come
twn wde esthkotwn oitines ou mh geuswntai qanatou ews with power.
tOn hOde hestEkotOn hoitines ou mE geusOntai thanatou heOs
G3588 G5602 G2476 G3748 G3756 G3361 G1089 G2288 G2193
t_ Gen Pl m Adv vp Perf Act Gen Pl m pr Nom Pl m Part Neg Part Neg vs Aor midD 3 Pl n_ Gen Sg m Conj
OF-THE-ones here HAVING-STOOD WHO-ANY NOT NO SHOULD-BE-TASTING OF-DEATH TILL
of-the-ones standing who-any death
an idwsin thn basileian tou qeou elhluquian en

an idOsin tEn basileian tou theou elEluthuian en
G302 G1492 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316 G2064 G1722
Part vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp 2Perf Act Acc Sg f Prep
EVER THEY-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE KINGdom OF-THE God HAVING-COME IN
dunamei
dunamei
G1411
n_ Dat Sg f
ABILITY
power
9:2 kai meq hmeras ex paralambanei o ihsous ton petron kai 2 And after six days Jesus
kai meth hEmeras hex paralambanei ho iEsous ton petron kai
G2532 G3326 G2250 G1803 G3880 G3588 G2424 G3588 G4074 G2532
taketh [with him] Peter, and
Conj Prep n_ Acc Pl f a_ Nom vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj James, and John, and leadeth
AND after DAYS SIX IS-BESIDE-GETTING THE JESUS THE Peter AND them up into an high mountain
is-taking-aside apart by themselves: and he
was transfigured before them.
ton iakwbon kai ton iwannhn kai anaferei autous eis oros
ton iakObon kai ton iOannEn kai anapherei autous eis oros
G3588 G2385 G2532 G3588 G2491 G2532 G399 G846 G1519 G3735
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Prep n_ Acc Sg n
THE JACOBUS AND THE JOHN AND IS-UP-CARRYING them INTO mountain
James is-bringing-up
uyhlon kat idian monous kai metemorfwqh emprosqen autwn

hupsElon kat idian monous kai metemorphOthE emprosthen autOn
G5308 G2596 G2398 G3441 G2532 G3339 G1715 G846
a_ Acc Sg n Prep a_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Pl m
HIGH according-to OWN ONLY AND He-WAS-after-FORMED IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-them
alone(p) he-was-transformed in-front-of them
9:3 kai ta imatia autou egeneto stilbonta leuka lian ws 3 And his raiment became
kai ta himatia autou egeneto stilbonta leuka lian hOs
G2532 G3588 G2440 G846 G1096 G4744 G3022 G3029 G5613
shining, exceeding white as
Conj t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n pp Gen Sg m vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n Adv Adv snow; so as no fuller on earth
AND THE GARMENTS OF-Him BECAME GLISTENING WHITE VERY AS can white them.
ciwn oia gnafeus epi ths ghs ou dunatai leukanai

chiOn hoia gnapheus epi tEs gEs ou dunatai leukanai
G5510 G3634 G1102 G1909 G3588 G1093 G3756 G1410 G3021
n_ Nom Sg f pr Nom Pl n n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg vn Aor Act
SNOW THE-WHICH CARDer ON THE LAND NOT IS-ABLE TO-WHITen
such-as fuller earth
9:4 kai wfqh autois hlias sun mwsei kai hsan sullalountes 4 And there appeared unto
kai OphthE autois Elias sun mOsei kai Esan sullalountes
G2532 G3700 G846 G2243 G4862 G3475 G2532 G2258 G4814
them Elias with Moses: and
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg m Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m they were talking with Jesus.
AND WAS-VIEWED to-them ELIAS TOGETHER to-MOSES AND THEY-WERE TOGETHER-TALKING
was-seen Elijah togetherwith Moses conferring
tw ihsou
tO iEsou
G3588 G2424
t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
to-THE JESUS
9:5 kai apokriqeis o petros legei tw ihsou rabbi kalon 5 And Peter answered and said
kai apokritheis ho petros legei tO iEsou rabbi kalon
G2532 G611 G3588 G4074 G3004 G3588 G2424 G4461 G2570
to Jesus, Master, it is good for
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Hebrew a_ Nom Sg n us to be here: and let us make
AND answerING THE Peter IS-sayING to-THE JESUS RABBI IDEAL three tabernacles; one for thee,
and one for Moses, and one for
Elias.
estin hmas wde einai kai poihswmen skhnas treis soi
estin hEmas hOde einai kai poiEsOmen skEnas treis soi
G2076 G2248 G5602 G1511 G2532 G4160 G4633 G5140 G4671
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl Adv vn Pres vxx Conj vs Aor Act 1 Pl n_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f pp 2 Dat Sg
it-IS US here TO-BE AND WE-SHOULD-BE-makING BOOTHS THREE to-YOU
tabernacles
Mark 9
mian kai mwsei mian kai hlia mian

mian kai mOsei mian kai Elia mian
G1520 G2532 G3475 G1520 G2532 G2243 G1520
a_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg m a_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg m a_ Acc Sg f
ONE AND to-MOSES ONE AND to-ELIAS ONE
to-Elijah
9:6 ou gar hdei ti lalhsh hsan gar ekfoboi 6 For he wist not what to say;
ou gar Edei ti lalEsE Esan gar ekphoboi
G3756 G1063 G1492 G5101 G2980 G2258 G1063 G1630
for they were sore afraid.
Part Neg Conj vi Plup Act 3 Sg pi Acc Sg n vs Aor Act 3 Sg vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m
NOT for he-HAD-PERCEIVED ANY he-SHOULD-BE-TALKING THEY-WERE for OUT-FEAR
he-was-aware what he-should-be-speaking terrified
9:7 kai egeneto nefelh episkiazousa autois kai hlqen fwnh ek 7 And there was a cloud that
kai egeneto nephelE episkiazousa autois kai Elthen phOnE ek
G2532 G1096 G3507 G1982 G846 G2532 G2064 G5456 G1537
overshadowed them: and a
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f pp Dat Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f Prep voice came out of the cloud,
AND BECAME CLOUD ON-SHADING to-them AND CAME SOUND OUT saying, This is my beloved
overshadowing them voice Son: hear him.
ths nefelhs legousa outos estin o uios mou

tEs nephelEs legousa houtos estin ho huios mou
G3588 G3507 G3004 G3778 G2076 G3588 G5207 G3450
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f pd Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-THE CLOUD sayING this IS THE SON OF-ME
o agaphtos autou akouete

ho agapEtos autou akouete
G3588 G27 G846 G191
t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Pl
THE beLOVED OF-Him BE-HEARING
him be-ye-hearing !
9:8 kai exapina peribleyamenoi ouketi oudena eidon alla ton 8 And suddenly, when they had
kai exapina periblepsamenoi ouketi oudena eidon alla ton
G2532 G1819 G4017 G3765 G3762 G1492 G235 G3588
looked round about, they saw
Conj Adv vp Aor Mid Nom Pl m Adv a_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj t_ Acc Sg m no man any more, save Jesus
AND OUT-UN-APPEARly ABOUT-looking NOT-STILL NOT-YET-ONE THEY-PERCEIVED but THE only with themselves.
suddenly looking-about not-longer anyone
ihsoun monon meq eautwn

iEsoun monon meth heautOn
G2424 G3441 G3326 G1438
n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Prep pf 3 Gen Pl m
JESUS ONLY WITH selves
themselves
9:9 katabainontwn de autwn apo tou orous diesteilato autois ina 9 And as they came down from
katabainontOn de autOn apo tou orous diesteilato autois hina
G2597 G1161 G846 G575 G3588 G3735 G1291 G846 G2443
the mountain, he charged them
vp Pres Act Gen Pl m Conj pp Gen Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vi Aor Mid 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj that they should tell no man
OF-DOWN-STEPPING YET them FROM THE mountain He-THRU-PUTS to-them THAT what things they had seen, till
of-descending he-cautions them the Son of man were risen
from the dead.
mhdeni dihghswntai a eidon ei mh otan o
mEdeni diEgEsOntai ha eidon ei mE hotan ho
G3367 G1334 G3739 G1492 G1487 G3361 G3752 G3588
a_ Dat Sg m vs Aor midD 3 Pl pr Acc Pl n vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Cond Part Neg Conj t_ Nom Sg m
to-NO-YET-ONE THEY-SHOULD-BE-relatING WHICH THEY-PERCEIVED IF NO when-EVER THE
to-no-one which(p) whenever
uios tou anqrwpou ek nekrwn anasth

huios tou anthrOpou ek nekrOn anastE
G5207 G3588 G444 G1537 G3498 G450
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep a_ Gen Pl m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
SON OF-THE human OUT OF-DEAD-ones MAY-BE-UP-STANDING
of-dead-ones may-be-rising
9:10 kai ton logon ekrathsan pros eautous suzhtountes ti 10 And they kept that saying
kai ton logon ekratEsan pros heautous suzEtountes ti
G2532 G3588 G3056 G2902 G4314 G1438 G4802 G5101
with themselves, questioning
Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pf 3 Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pi Nom Sg n one with another what the
AND THE saying THEY-HOLD TOWARD selves TOGETHER-SEEKING ANY rising from the dead should
word themselves discussing what ? mean.
estin to ek nekrwn anasthnai

estin to ek nekrOn anastEnai
G2076 G3588 G1537 G3498 G450
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n Prep a_ Gen Pl m vn 2Aor Act
IS THE OUT OF-DEAD-ones TO-UP-STAND
of-dead-ones to-rise
9:11 kai ephrwtwn auton legontes oti legousin oi grammateis 11 And they asked him, saying,
kai epErOtOn auton legontes hoti legousin hoi grammateis
G2532 G1905 G846 G3004 G3754 G3004 G3588 G1122
Why say the scribes that Elias
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m must first come?
AND THEY-inquirED-of Him sayING that ARE-sayING THE WRITers
scribes
Mark 9
oti hlian dei elqein prwton

hoti Elian dei elthein prOton
G3754 G2243 G1163 G2064 G4412
Conj n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act Adv
that ELIAS it-IS-BINDING TO-BE-COMING BEFORE-most
Elijah must first
9:12 o de apokriqeis eipen autois hlias men elqwn 12 And he answered and told
ho de apokritheis eipen autois Elias men elthOn
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G846 G2243 G3303 G2064
them, Elias verily cometh first,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m n_ Nom Sg m Part vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m and restoreth all things; and
THE YET answerING He-said to-them ELIAS INDEED COMING how it is written of the Son of
Elijah man, that he must suffer many
things, and be set at nought.
prwton apokaqista panta kai pws gegraptai epi ton uion
prOton apokathista panta kai pOs gegraptai epi ton huion
G4412 G600 G3956 G2532 G4459 G1125 G1909 G3588 G5207
Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl n Conj Adv Int vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
BEFORE-most IS-restorING ALL AND how it-HAS-been-WRITTEN ON THE SON
first how ?
tou anqrwpou ina polla paqh kai exoudenwqh

tou anthrOpou hina polla pathE kai exoudenOthE
G3588 G444 G2443 G4183 G3958 G2532 G1847
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj a_ Acc Pl n vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
OF-THE human THAT much He-MAY-BE-EMOTIONING AND MAY-BE-BEING-scornED
he-may-be-suffering
9:13 alla legw umin oti kai hlias elhluqen kai epoihsan autw 13 But I say unto you, That
alla legO humin hoti kai Elias elEluthen kai epoiEsan autO
G235 G3004 G5213 G3754 G2532 G2243 G2064 G2532 G4160 G846
Elias is indeed come, and they
Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m have done unto him
but I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that AND ELIAS HAS-COME AND THEY-DO to-him whatsoever they listed, as it is
to-ye also Elijah written of him.
osa hqelhsan kaqws gegraptai ep auton

hosa EthelEsan kathOs gegraptai ep auton
G3745 G2309 G2531 G1125 G1909 G846
pk Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Pl Adv vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg m
as-much-as THEY-WILL according-AS it-HAS-been-WRITTEN ON him
whatever
9:14 kai elqwn pros tous maqhtas eiden oclon polun peri 14 . And when he came to [his]
kai elthOn pros tous mathEtas eiden ochlon polun peri
G2532 G2064 G4314 G3588 G3101 G1492 G3793 G4183 G4012
disciples, he saw a great
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Prep multitude about them, and the
AND COMING TOWARD THE LEARNers He-PERCEIVED THRONG MANY ABOUT scribes questioning with them.
disciples vast
autous kai grammateis suzhtountas autois

autous kai grammateis suzEtountas autois
G846 G2532 G1122 G4802 G846
pp Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m pp Dat Pl m
them AND WRITers TOGETHER-SEEKING to-them
scribes discussing
9:15 kai euqews pas o oclos idwn auton exeqambhqh 15 And straightway all the
kai eutheOs pas ho ochlos idOn auton exethambEthE
G2532 G2112 G3956 G3588 G3793 G1492 G846 G1568
people, when they beheld him,
Conj Adv a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg were greatly amazed, and
AND immediately EVERY THE THRONG PERCEIVING Him WAS-OUT-AWED running to [him] saluted him.
entire was-overawed
kai prostrecontes hspazonto auton

kai prostrechontes Espazonto auton
G2532 G4370 G782 G846
Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
AND TOWARD-RACING THEY-greetED Him
racing-to-him they-saluted
9:16 kai ephrwthsen tous grammateis ti suzhteite pros 16 And he asked the scribes,
kai epErOtEsen tous grammateis ti suzEteite pros
G2532 G1905 G3588 G1122 G5101 G4802 G4314
What question ye with them?
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pi Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Pl Prep
AND He-inquirES-of THE WRITers ANY YE-ARE-TOGETHER-SEEKING TOWARD
scribes what ? ye-are-discussing
autous
autous
G846
pp Acc Pl m
them
9:17 kai apokriqeis eis ek tou oclou eipen didaskale 17 And one of the multitude
kai apokritheis heis ek tou ochlou eipen didaskale
G2532 G611 G1520 G1537 G3588 G3793 G2036 G1320
answered and said, Master, I
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Voc Sg m have brought unto thee my son,
AND answerING ONE OUT OF-THE THRONG said TEACHer ! which hath a dumb spirit;
Mark 9
hnegka ton uion mou pros se econta pneuma alalon

Enegka ton huion mou pros se echonta pneuma alalon
G5342 G3588 G5207 G3450 G4314 G4571 G2192 G4151 G216
vi Aor Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Prep pp 2 Acc Sg vp Pres Act Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n
I-CARRY THE SON OF-ME TOWARD YOU HAVING spirit UN-TALK
I-bring dumb
9:18 kai opou an auton katalabh rhssei auton kai 18 And wheresoever he taketh
kai hopou an auton katalabE rEssei auton kai
G2532 G3699 G302 G846 G2638 G4486 G846 G2532
him, he teareth him: and he
Conj Adv Part pp Acc Sg m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj foameth, and gnasheth with his
AND THE-?-where EVER him it-MAY-BE-DOWN-GETTING it-IS-BURSTING him AND teeth, and pineth away: and I
wherever it-may-be-getting-down it-is-tearing spake to thy disciples that they
should cast him out; and they
afrizei kai trizei tous odontas autou kai xhrainetai kai could not.
aphrizei kai trizei tous odontas autou kai xErainetai kai
G875 G2532 G5149 G3588 G3599 G846 G2532 G3583 G2532
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Conj
he-IS-FROTHizING AND IS-GRATING THE TEETH OF-him AND he-IS-beING-DRIED AND
he-is-frothing he-is-withering-away
eipon tois maqhtais sou ina auto ekbalwsin kai

eipon tois mathEtais sou hina auto ekbalOsin kai
G2036 G3588 G3101 G4675 G2443 G846 G1544 G2532
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg Conj pp Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj
I-said to-THE LEARNers OF-YOU THAT it THEY-SHOULD-BE-OUT-CASTING AND
disciples they-should-be-casting-out
ouk iscusan
ouk ischusan
G3756 G2480
Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Pl
NOT THEY-are-STRONG
9:19 o de apokriqeis autw legei w genea apistos ews 19 He answereth him, and
ho de apokritheis autO legei O genea apistos heOs
G3588 G1161 G611 G846 G3004 G5599 G1074 G571 G2193
saith, O faithless generation,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Inj n_ Voc Sg f a_ Voc Sg f Conj how long shall I be with you?
THE YET answerING to-him He-IS-sayING o! generation UN-BELIEVing TILL how long shall I suffer you?
generation ! unbelieving ! bring him unto me.
pote pros umas esomai ews pote anexomai umwn ferete

pote pros humas esomai heOs pote anexomai humOn pherete
G4219 G4314 G5209 G2071 G2193 G4219 G430 G5216 G5342
Part Int Prep pp 2 Acc Pl vi Fut vxx 1 Sg Conj Part Int vi Fut midD 1 Sg pp 2 Gen Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl
?-when TOWARD YOU(p) I-SHALL-BE TILL ?-when I-SHALL-BE-toleratING OF-YOU(p) BE-CARRYING
when ? ye when ? I-shall-be-bearing-with ye be-ye-bringing !
auton pros me
auton pros me
G846 G4314 G3165
pp Acc Sg m Prep pp 1 Acc Sg
him TOWARD ME
9:20 kai hnegkan auton pros auton kai idwn auton euqews 20 And they brought him unto
kai Enegkan auton pros auton kai idOn auton eutheOs
G2532 G5342 G846 G4314 G846 G2532 G1492 G846 G2112
him: and when he saw him,
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Prep pp Acc Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m Adv straightway the spirit tare him;
AND THEY-CARRY him TOWARD Him AND PERCEIVING Him immediately and he fell on the ground, and
they-bring wallowed foaming.
to pneuma esparaxen auton kai peswn epi ths ghs

to pneuma esparaxen auton kai pesOn epi tEs gEs
G3588 G4151 G4682 G846 G2532 G4098 G1909 G3588 G1093
t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
THE spirit CONVULSES him AND FALLING ON THE LAND
earth
ekulieto afrizwn
ekulieto aphrizOn
G2947 G875
vi Impf mid/pas 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
he-ROLLED FROTHizING
he-wallowed frothing
9:21 kai ephrwthsen ton patera autou posos cronos estin ws 21 And he asked his father,
kai epErOtEsen ton patera autou posos chronos estin hOs
G2532 G1905 G3588 G3962 G846 G4214 G5550 G2076 G5613
How long is it ago since this
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m pq Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Adv came unto him? And he said,
AND He-inquirES-of THE FATHER OF-him how-long TIME it-IS AS Of a child.
how-much ? since
touto gegonen autw o de eipen paidioqen

touto gegonen autO ho de eipen paidiothen
G5124 G1096 G846 G3588 G1161 G2036 G3812
pd Nom Sg n vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv
this HAS-BECOME to-him THE YET he-said OF-little-boy-PLACE
of-being-little-boy
Mark 9
9:22 kai pollakis auton kai eis pur ebalen kai eis udata ina 22 And ofttimes it hath cast
kai pollakis auton kai eis pur ebalen kai eis hudata hina
G2532 G4178 G846 G2532 G1519 G4442 G906 G2532 G1519 G5204 G2443
him into the fire, and into the
Conj Adv pp Acc Sg m Conj Prep n_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Prep n_ Acc Pl n Conj waters, to destroy him: but if
AND MANY-times him AND INTO FIRE it-CASTS AND INTO waters THAT thou canst do any thing, have
often also compassion on us, and help us.
apolesh auton all ei ti dunasai bohqhson hmin

apolesE auton all ei ti dunasai boEthEson hEmin
G622 G846 G235 G1487 G5100 G1410 G997 G2254
vs Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj Cond px Acc Sg n vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl
it-SHOULD-BE-destroyING him but IF ANY YOU-ARE-ABLE help to-US
in-any-way help-you ! us
splagcnisqeis ef hmas
splagchnistheis eph hEmas
G4697 G1909 G2248
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Prep pp 1 Acc Pl
BEING-compassionatED ON US
having-compassion
9:23 o de ihsous eipen autw to ei dunasai 23 Jesus said unto him, If thou
ho de iEsous eipen autO to ei dunasai
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G846 G3588 G1487 G1410
canst believe, all things [are]
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg n Cond vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg possible to him that believeth.
THE YET JESUS said to-him THE IF YOU-ARE-ABLE
pisteusai panta dunata tw pisteuonti

pisteusai panta dunata tO pisteuonti
G4100 G3956 G1415 G3588 G4100
vn Aor Act a_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n t_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m
TO-BELIEVE ALL ABLE to-THE one-BELIEVING
possible one-believing
9:24 kai euqews kraxas o pathr tou paidiou meta dakruwn 24 And straightway the father
kai eutheOs kraxas ho patEr tou paidiou meta dakruOn
G2532 G2112 G2896 G3588 G3962 G3588 G3813 G3326 G1144
of the child cried out, and said
Conj Adv vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Prep n_ Gen Pl n with tears, Lord, I believe; help
AND immediately CRYing THE FATHER OF-THE little-boy WITH TEARS thou mine unbelief.
elegen pisteuw kurie bohqei mou th apistia

elegen pisteuO kurie boEthei mou tE apistia
G3004 G4100 G2962 G997 G3450 G3588 G570
vi Impf Act 3 Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg n_ Voc Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
said I-AM-BELIEVING Master ! BE-helpING OF-ME to-THE UN-BELIEF
Lord ! be-you-helping ! unbelief
9:25 idwn de o ihsous oti episuntrecei oclos 25 When Jesus saw that the
idOn de ho iEsous hoti episuntrechei ochlos
G1492 G1161 G3588 G2424 G3754 G1998 G3793
people came running together,
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m he rebuked the foul spirit,
PERCEIVING YET THE JESUS that IS-ON-TOGETHER-RACING THRONG saying unto him, [Thou] dumb
is-racing-on-together and deaf spirit, I charge thee,
come out of him, and enter no
epetimhsen tw pneumati tw akaqartw legwn autw to more into him.
epetimEsen tO pneumati tO akathartO legOn autO to
G2008 G3588 G4151 G3588 G169 G3004 G846 G3588
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg n t_ Nom Sg n
He-rebukES to-THE spirit THE UN-clean sayING to-it THE
the unclean
pneuma to alalon kai kwfon egw soi epitassw exelqe

pneuma to alalon kai kOphon egO soi epitassO exelthe
G4151 G3588 G216 G2532 G2974 G1473 G4671 G2004 G1831
n_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n Conj a_ Nom Sg n pp 1 Nom Sg pp 2 Dat Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
spirit THE UN-TALK AND MUTE I to-YOU AM-enjoinING BE-OUT-COMING
dumb deaf-mute you be-you-coming-out !
ex autou kai mhketi eiselqhs eis auton

ex autou kai mEketi eiselthEs eis auton
G1537 G846 G2532 G3371 G1525 G1519 G846
Prep pp Gen Sg m Conj Adv vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg m
OUT OF-him AND NO-NOT-STILL YOU-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING INTO him
by-no-means-longer you-may-be-entering
9:26 kai kraxan kai polla sparaxan auton exhlqen kai 26 And [the spirit] cried, and
kai kraxan kai polla sparaxan auton exElthen kai
G2532 G2896 G2532 G4183 G4682 G846 G1831 G2532
rent him sore, and came out of
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg n Conj a_ Nom Pl n vp Aor Act Nom Sg n pp Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj him: and he was as one dead;
AND CRYing AND much CONVULSing him it-OUT-CAME AND insomuch that many said, He is
it-came-out dead.
egeneto wsei nekros wste pollous legein oti apeqanen

egeneto hOsei nekros hOste pollous legein hoti apethanen
G1096 G5616 G3498 G5620 G4183 G3004 G3754 G599
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Adv a_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Acc Pl m vn Pres Act Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
he-BECAME AS-IF DEAD AS-BESIDES MANY TO-BE-sayING that he-FROM-DIED
so-that majority he-died
Mark 9
9:27 o de ihsous krathsas auton ths ceiros hgeiren 27 But Jesus took him by the
ho de iEsous kratEsas auton tEs cheiros Egeiren
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2902 G846 G3588 G5495 G1453
hand, and lifted him up; and he
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg arose.
THE YET JESUS HOLDing him OF-THE HAND ROUSES
auton kai anesth

auton kai anestE
G846 G2532 G450
pp Acc Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
him AND he-UP-STOOD
he-rose
9:28 kai eiselqonta auton eis oikon oi maqhtai autou ephrwtwn 28 And when he was come into
kai eiselthonta auton eis oikon hoi mathEtai autou epErOtOn
G2532 G1525 G846 G1519 G3624 G3588 G3101 G846 G1905
the house, his disciples asked
Conj vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg m pp Acc Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Pl him privately, Why could not
AND INTO-COMING Him INTO HOME THE LEARNers OF-Him inquirED-of we cast him out?
entering house disciples
auton kat idian oti hmeis ouk hdunhqhmen ekbalein auto

auton kat idian hoti hEmeis ouk EdunEthEmen ekbalein auto
G846 G2596 G2398 G3754 G2249 G3756 G1410 G1544 G846
pp Acc Sg m Prep a_ Acc Sg f Conj pp 1 Nom Pl Part Neg vi Aor pasD 1 Pl Att vn 2Aor Act pp Acc Sg n
Him according-to OWN that WE NOT WERE-enABLED TO-BE-OUT-CASTING it
could to-be-casting-out
9:29 kai eipen autois touto to genos en oudeni 29 And he said unto them, This
kai eipen autois touto to genos en oudeni
G2532 G2036 G846 G5124 G3588 G1085 G1722 G3762
kind can come forth by
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pd Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Prep a_ Dat Sg n nothing, but by prayer and
AND He-said to-them this THE breed IN to-NOT-YET-ONE fasting.
species nothing
dunatai exelqein ei mh en proseuch kai nhsteia

dunatai exelthein ei mE en proseuchE kai nEsteia
G1410 G1831 G1487 G3361 G1722 G4335 G2532 G3521
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act Cond Part Neg Prep n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f
IS-ABLE TO-BE-OUT-COMING IF NO IN prayer AND fast
can to-be-coming-out
9:30 kai ekeiqen exelqontes pareporeuonto dia ths galilaias kai ouk 30 . And they departed thence,
kai ekeithen exelthontes pareporeuonto dia tEs galilaias kai ouk
G2532 G1564 G1831 G3899 G1223 G3588 G1056 G2532 G3756
and passed through Galilee;
Conj Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj Part Neg and he would not that any man
AND thence OUT-COMING THEY-BESIDE-WENT THRU THE GALILEE AND NOT should know [it].
coming-out they-went-along through
hqelen ina tis gnw

Ethelen hina tis gnO
G2309 G2443 G5100 G1097
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj px Nom Sg m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
He-WILLED THAT ANY MAY-BE-KNOWING
anyone
9:31 edidasken gar tous maqhtas autou kai elegen autois oti o 31 For he taught his disciples,
edidasken gar tous mathEtas autou kai elegen autois hoti ho
G1321 G1063 G3588 G3101 G846 G2532 G3004 G846 G3754 G3588
and said unto them, The Son of
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg m man is delivered into the hands
He-TAUGHT for THE LEARNers OF-Him AND said to-them that THE of men, and they shall kill him;
disciples and after that he is killed, he
shall rise the third day.
uios tou anqrwpou paradidotai eis ceiras anqrwpwn kai
huios tou anthrOpou paradidotai eis cheiras anthrOpOn kai
G5207 G3588 G444 G3860 G1519 G5495 G444 G2532
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Pl m Conj
SON OF-THE human IS-beING-BESIDE-GIVEN INTO HANDS OF-humans AND
is-being-given-up
apoktenousin auton kai apoktanqeis th trith hmera

apoktenousin auton kai apoktantheis tE tritE hEmera
G615 G846 G2532 G615 G3588 G5154 G2250
vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
THEY-SHALL-BE-FROM-KILLING Him AND BEING-FROM-KILLED to-THE third DAY
they-shall-be-killing being-killed
anasthsetai
anastEsetai
G450
vi Fut Mid 3 Sg
He-SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING
he-shall-be-rising
9:32 oi de hgnooun to rhma kai efobounto auton 32 But they understood not that
hoi de Egnooun to rEma kai ephobounto auton
G3588 G1161 G50 G3588 G4487 G2532 G5399 G846
saying, and were afraid to ask
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m him.
THE-ones YET UN-KNEW THE declaration AND THEY-FEARED Him
the they-were-ignorant-of
Mark 9
eperwthsai
eperOtEsai
G1905
vn Aor Act
TO-inquire-of
9:33 kai hlqen eis kapernaoum kai en th oikia genomenos 33 And he came to Capernaum:
kai Elthen eis kapernaoum kai en tE oikia genomenos
G2532 G2064 G1519 G2584 G2532 G1722 G3588 G3614 G1096
and being in the house he
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep ni proper Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m asked them, What was it that
AND He-CAME INTO CAPERNAUM AND IN THE HOME BECOMING ye disputed among yourselves
house by the way?
ephrwta autous ti en th odw pros eautous dielogizesqe

epErOta autous ti en tE hodO pros heautous dielogizesthe
G1905 G846 G5101 G1722 G3588 G3598 G4314 G1438 G1260
vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m pi Acc Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Prep pf 3 Acc Pl m vi Impf midD/pasD 2 Pl
He-inquirED-of them ANY IN THE WAY TOWARD selves YE-THRU-accountED
what ? road yourselves ye-reasoned
9:34 oi de esiwpwn pros allhlous gar dielecqhsan en th 34 But they held their peace:
hoi de esiOpOn pros allElous gar dielechthEsan en tE
G3588 G1161 G4623 G4314 G240 G1063 G1256 G1722 G3588
for by the way they had
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep pc Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg f disputed among themselves,
THE-ones YET were-SILENT TOWARD one-another for THEY-WERE-THRU-said IN THE who [should be] the greatest.
the they-were-silent they-argued
odw tis meizwn

hodO tis meizOn
G3598 G5101 G3187
n_ Dat Sg f pi Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
WAY ANY GREATER
road who ? greatest
9:35 kai kaqisas efwnhsen tous dwdeka kai legei autois ei 35 And he sat down, and called
kai kathisas ephOnEsen tous dOdeka kai legei autois ei
G2532 G2523 G5455 G3588 G1427 G2532 G3004 G846 G1487
the twelve, and saith unto
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Cond them, If any man desire to be
AND being-seated He-SOUNDS THE TWO-TEN AND IS-sayING to-them IF first, [the same] shall be last of
he-summons twelve all, and servant of all.
tis qelei prwtos einai estai pantwn escatos kai pantwn

tis thelei prOtos einai estai pantOn eschatos kai pantOn
G5100 G2309 G4413 G1511 G2071 G3956 G2078 G2532 G3956
px Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m vn Pres vxx vi Fut vxx 3 Sg a_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Gen Pl m
ANY IS-WILLING BEFORE-most TO-BE he-SHALL-BE OF-ALL LAST AND OF-ALL
anyone first
diakonos
diakonos
G1249
n_ Nom Sg m
THRU-SERVitor
servant
9:36 kai labwn paidion esthsen auto en mesw autwn kai 36 And he took a child, and set
kai labOn paidion hestEsen auto en mesO autOn kai
G2532 G2983 G3813 G2476 G846 G1722 G3319 G846 G2532
him in the midst of them: and
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg n Prep a_ Dat Sg n pp Gen Pl m Conj when he had taken him in his
AND GETTING little-boy (-or-girl) He-STANDS it IN MIDst OF-them AND arms, he said unto them,
taking
enagkalisamenos auto eipen autois

enagkalisamenos auto eipen autois
G1723 G846 G2036 G846
vp Aor midD Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m
IN-CLASPing it said to-them
clasping-in-his-arms
9:37 os ean en twn toioutwn paidiwn dexhtai epi 37 Whosoever shall receive
hos ean hen tOn toioutOn paidiOn dexEtai epi
G3739 G1437 G1520 G3588 G5108 G3813 G1209 G1909
one of such children in my
pr Nom Sg m Cond a_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Pl n pd Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n vs Aor midD 3 Sg Prep name, receiveth me: and
WHO IF-EVER ONE OF-THE such little-boys-or-girls SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING ON whosoever shall receive me,
receiveth not me, but him that
sent me.
tw onomati mou eme decetai kai os ean eme
tO onomati mou eme dechetai kai hos ean eme
G3588 G3686 G3450 G1691 G1209 G2532 G3739 G1437 G1691
t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj pr Nom Sg m Cond pp 1 Acc Sg
THE NAME OF-ME ME IS-RECEIVING AND WHO IF-EVER ME
dexhtai ouk eme decetai alla ton aposteilanta me

dexEtai ouk eme dechetai alla ton aposteilanta me
G1209 G3756 G1691 G1209 G235 G3588 G649 G3165
vs Aor midD 3 Sg Part Neg pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj t_ Acc Sg m vp Aor Act Acc Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg
SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING NOT ME IS-RECEIVING but THE One-commissioning ME
one-commissioning
Mark 9
9:38 apekriqh de autw o iwannhs legwn didaskale 38 And John answered him,
apekrithE de autO ho iOannEs legOn didaskale
G611 G1161 G846 G3588 G2491 G3004 G1320
saying, Master, we saw one
vi Aor midD 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Voc Sg m casting out devils in thy name,
answered YET to-Him THE JOHN sayING TEACHer ! and he followeth not us: and
we forbad him, because he
followeth not us.
eidomen tina en tw onomati sou ekballonta daimonia os
eidomen tina en tO onomati sou ekballonta daimonia hos
G1492 G5100 G1722 G3588 G3686 G4675 G1544 G1140 G3739
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl px Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg vp Pres Act Acc Sg m n_ Acc Pl n pr Nom Sg m
WE-PERCEIVED ANY IN to-THE NAME OF-YOU OUT-CASTING demons WHO
someone casting-out
ouk akolouqei hmin kai ekwlusamen auton oti ouk akolouqei hmin
ouk akolouthei hEmin kai ekOlusamen auton hoti ouk akolouthei hEmin
G3756 G190 G2254 G2532 G2967 G846 G3754 G3756 G190 G2254
Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl Conj vi Aor Act 1 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl
NOT IS-followING to-US AND WE-FORBID him that NOT he-IS-followING to-US
us us
9:39 o de ihsous eipen mh kwluete auton oudeis gar 39 But Jesus said, Forbid him
ho de iEsous eipen mE kOluete auton oudeis gar
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G3361 G2967 G846 G3762 G1063
not: for there is no man which
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Pl pp Acc Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Conj shall do a miracle in my name,
THE YET JESUS said NO BE-FORBIDDING him NOT-YET-ONE for that can lightly speak evil of
be-ye-forbidding ! no-one me.
estin os poihsei dunamin epi tw onomati mou kai

estin hos poiEsei dunamin epi tO onomati mou kai
G2076 G3739 G4160 G1411 G1909 G3588 G3686 G3450 G2532
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pr Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg Conj
IS WHO SHALL-BE-DOING ABILITY ON THE NAME OF-ME AND
there-is powerful-deed
dunhsetai tacu kakologhsai me

dunEsetai tachu kakologEsai me
G1410 G5035 G2551 G3165
vi Fut midD 3 Sg Adv vn Aor Act pp 1 Acc Sg
SHALL-BE-ABLE SWIFTLY TO-EVIL-say ME
to-speak-evil-of
9:40 os gar ouk estin kaq hmwn uper hmwn estin 40 For he that is not against us
hos gar ouk estin kath hEmOn huper hEmOn estin
G3739 G1063 G3756 G2076 G2596 G2257 G5228 G2257 G2076
is on our part.
pr Nom Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep pp 1 Gen Pl Prep pp 1 Gen Pl vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
WHO for NOT IS DOWN OF-US OVER US IS
against us for-the-sake-of
9:41 os gar an potish umas pothrion udatos en tw 41 . For whosoever shall give
hos gar an potisE humas potErion hudatos en tO
G3739 G1063 G302 G4222 G5209 G4221 G5204 G1722 G3588
you a cup of water to drink in
pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs Aor Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg n my name, because ye belong to
WHO for EVER SHOULD-BE-DRINKizING YOU(p) DRINK-cup OF-water IN THE Christ, verily I say unto you, he
should-be-giving-to-drink ye cup shall not lose his reward.
onomati mou oti cristou este amhn legw umin ou mh

onomati mou hoti christou este amEn legO humin ou mE
G3686 G3450 G3754 G5547 G2075 G281 G3004 G5213 G3756 G3361
n_ Dat Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg Conj n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres vxx 2 Pl Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Part Neg Part Neg
NAME OF-ME that OF-ANOINTED YE-ARE AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) NOT NO
seeing-that of-Christ verily to-ye
apolesh ton misqon autou

apolesE ton misthon autou
G622 G3588 G3408 G846
vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m
he-SHOULD-BE-destroyING THE HIRE OF-him
he-should-be-losing wages
9:42 kai os an skandalish ena twn mikrwn toutwn twn 42 And whosoever shall offend
kai hos an skandalisE hena tOn mikrOn toutOn tOn
G2532 G3739 G302 G4624 G1520 G3588 G3398 G5130 G3588
one of [these] little ones that
Conj pr Nom Sg m Part vs Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m pd Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m believe in me, it is better for
AND WHO EVER SHOULD-BE-SNARING ONE OF-THE LITTLE these THE him that a millstone were
little-ones hanged about his neck, and he
were cast into the sea.
pisteuontwn eis eme kalon estin autw mallon ei
pisteuontOn eis eme kalon estin autO mallon ei
G4100 G1519 G1691 G2570 G2076 G846 G3123 G1487
vp Pres Act Gen Pl m Prep pp 1 Acc Sg a_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Adv Cond
ones-BELIEVING INTO ME IDEAL it-IS to-him RATHER IF
ones-believing
perikeitai liqos mulikos peri ton trachlon autou kai

perikeitai lithos mulikos peri ton trachElon autou kai
G4029 G3037 G3457 G4012 G3588 G5137 G846 G2532
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m Conj
IS-ABOUT-LYING STONE MILLic ABOUT THE NECK OF-him AND
is-lying-about of-a-mill
Mark 9
beblhtai eis thn qalassan

beblEtai eis tEn thalassan
G906 G1519 G3588 G2281
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
he-HAS-been-CAST INTO THE SEA
9:43 kai ean skandalizh se h ceir sou apokoyon authn 43 And if thy hand offend thee,
kai ean skandalizE se hE cheir sou apokopson autEn
G2532 G1437 G4624 G4571 G3588 G5495 G4675 G609 G846
cut it off: it is better for thee to
Conj Cond vs Pres Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp Acc Sg f enter into life maimed, than
AND IF-EVER MAY-BE-SNARING YOU THE HAND OF-YOU FROM-STRIKE her having two hands to go into
strike-off-you ! hell, into the fire that never
shall be quenched:
kalon soi estin kullon eis thn zwhn eiselqein h
kalon soi estin kullon eis tEn zOEn eiselthein E
G2570 G4671 G2076 G2948 G1519 G3588 G2222 G1525 G2228
a_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Dat Sg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vn 2Aor Act Part
IDEAL to-YOU it-IS MAIMED INTO THE LIFE TO-BE-INTO-COMING OR
to-be-entering than
tas duo ceiras econta apelqein eis thn geennan eis

tas duo cheiras echonta apelthein eis tEn geennan eis
G3588 G1417 G5495 G2192 G565 G1519 G3588 G1067 G1519
t_ Acc Pl f a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl f vp Pres Act Acc Sg m vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep
THE TWO HANDS HAVING TO-BE-FROM-COMING INTO THE GEHENNA INTO
to-be-coming-away
to pur to asbeston
to pur to asbeston
G3588 G4442 G3588 G762
t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n
THE FIRE THE UN-EXTINGUISHed
unextinguished
9:44 opou o skwlhx autwn ou teleuta kai to pur 44 Where their worm dieth not,
hopou ho skOlEx autOn hou teleuta kai to pur
G3699 G3588 G4663 G846 G3756 G5053 G2532 G3588 G4442
and the fire is not quenched.
Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Pl m Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
THE-?-where THE WORM OF-them NOT IS-deceasING AND THE FIRE
wheree
ou sbennutai
hou sbennutai
G3756 G4570
Part Neg vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
NOT IS-beING-EXTINGUISHED
is-going-out
9:45 kai ean o pous sou skandalizh se apokoyon auton 45 And if thy foot offend thee,
kai ean ho pous sou skandalizE se apokopson auton
G2532 G1437 G3588 G4228 G4675 G4624 G4571 G609 G846
cut it off: it is better for thee to
Conj Cond t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg vs Pres Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp Acc Sg m enter halt into life, than having
AND IF-EVER THE FOOT OF-YOU MAY-BE-SNARING YOU FROM-STRIKE it two feet to be cast into hell,
strike-off-you ! him into the fire that never shall be
quenched:
kalon estin soi eiselqein eis thn zwhn cwlon h
kalon estin soi eiselthein eis tEn zOEn chOlon E
G2570 G2076 G4671 G1525 G1519 G3588 G2222 G5560 G2228
a_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg m Part
IDEAL it-IS to-YOU TO-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE LIFE LAME OR
to-be-entering than
tous duo podas econta blhqhnai eis thn geennan eis to

tous duo podas echonta blEthEnai eis tEn geennan eis to
G3588 G1417 G4228 G2192 G906 G1519 G3588 G1067 G1519 G3588
t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Sg m vn Aor Pas Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg n
THE TWO FEET HAVING TO-BE-CAST INTO THE GEHENNA INTO THE
pur to asbeston
pur to asbeston
G4442 G3588 G762
n_ Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n
FIRE THE UN-EXTINGUISHed
unextinguished
hopou ho skOlEx autOn hou teleuta kai to pur
G3699 G3588 G4663 G846 G3756 G5053 G2532 G3588 G4442
wheree
ou sbennutai
hou sbennutai
G3756 G4570
is-going-out
Mark 9 - Mark 10
9:47 kai ean o ofqalmos sou skandalizh se ekbale 47 And if thine eye offend
kai ean ho ophthalmos sou skandalizE se ekbale
G2532 G1437 G3588 G3788 G4675 G4624 G4571 G1544
thee, pluck it out: it is better
Conj Cond t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg vs Pres Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg for thee to enter into the
AND IF-EVER THE VIEWer OF-YOU MAY-BE-SNARING YOU BE-OUT-CASTING kingdom of God with one eye,
eye be-you-extracting ! than having two eyes to be cast
into hell fire:
auton kalon soi estin monofqalmon eiselqein eis thn
auton kalon soi estin monophthalmon eiselthein eis tEn
G846 G2570 G4671 G2076 G3442 G1525 G1519 G3588
pp Acc Sg m a_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Dat Sg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg m vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg f
it IDEAL to-YOU it-IS ONLY-VIEWer TO-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE
him one-eyed to-be-entering
basileian tou qeou h duo ofqalmous econta blhqhnai eis

basileian tou theou E duo ophthalmous echonta blEthEnai eis
G932 G3588 G2316 G2228 G1417 G3788 G2192 G906 G1519
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Part a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Sg m vn Aor Pas Prep
KINGdom OF-THE God OR TWO VIEWers HAVING TO-BE-CAST INTO
than eyes
thn geennan tou puros

tEn geennan tou puros
G3588 G1067 G3588 G4442
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
THE GEHENNA OF-THE FIRE
hopou ho skOlEx autOn ou teleuta kai to pur
G3699 G3588 G4663 G846 G3756 G5053 G2532 G3588 G4442
wheree
ou sbennutai
ou sbennutai
G3756 G4570
is-going-out
9:49 pas gar puri alisqhsetai kai pasa qusia ali 49 For every one shall be salted
pas gar puri halisthEsetai kai pasa thusia ali
G3956 G1063 G4442 G233 G2532 G3956 G2378 G251
with fire, and every sacrifice
a_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Dat Sg n vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f n_ Dat Sg m shall be salted with salt.
EVERY for to-FIRE SHALL-BE-BEING-SALTED AND EVERY SACRIFICE to-SALT
every-one
alisqhsetai
halisthEsetai
G233
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-BEING-SALTED
9:50 kalon to alas ean de to alas analon genhtai 50 Salt [is] good: but if the salt
kalon to halas ean de to halas analon genEtai
G2570 G3588 G217 G1437 G1161 G3588 G217 G358 G1096
have lost his saltness,
a_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Cond Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg wherewith will ye season it?
IDEAL THE SALT IF-EVER YET THE SALT UN-SALT MAY-BE-BECOMING Have salt in yourselves, and
savorless have peace one with another.
en tini auto artusete ecete en eautois alas kai

en tini auto artusete echete en heautois halas kai
G1722 G5101 G846 G741 G2192 G1722 G1438 G217 G2532
Prep pi Dat Sg n pp Acc Sg n vi Fut Act 2 Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep pf 3 Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg n Conj
IN ANY it YE-SHALL-BE-seasonING BE-HAVING IN selves SALT AND
what ? be-ye-having ! yourselves
eirhneuete en allhlois
eirEneuete en allElois
G1514 G1722 G240
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep pc Dat Pl m
BE-beING-at-PEACE IN one-another
be-ye-being-at-peace ! among
Mark 10
10:1 kakeiqen anastas ercetai eis ta oria ths ioudaias 1 . And he arose from thence,
kakeithen anastas erchetai eis ta horia tEs ioudaias
G2547 G450 G2064 G1519 G3588 G3725 G3588 G2449
and cometh into the coasts of
Adv Con vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Judaea by the farther side of
AND-thence UP-STANDing He-IS-COMING INTO THE boundaries OF-THE JUDEA Jordan: and the people resort
rising unto him again; and, as he was
wont, he taught them again.
dia tou peran tou iordanou kai sumporeuontai palin ocloi
dia tou peran tou iordanou kai sumporeuontai palin ochloi
G1223 G3588 G4008 G3588 G2446 G2532 G4848 G3825 G3793
Prep t_ Gen Sg m Adv t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Adv n_ Nom Pl m
THRU THE OTHER-SIDE OF-THE JORDAN AND ARE-TOGETHER-GOING AGAIN THRONGS
through are-going-together
pros auton kai ws eiwqei palin edidasken autous

pros auton kai hOs eiOthei palin edidasken autous
G4314 G846 G2532 G5613 G1486 G3825 G1321 G846
Prep pp Acc Sg m Conj Adv vi Plup Act 3 Sg Adv vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m
TOWARD Him AND AS He-HAD-CUSTOMED AGAIN He-TAUGHT them
he-had-been-accustomed
10:2 kai proselqontes oi farisaioi ephrwthsan auton ei exestin 2 And the Pharisees came to
kai proselthontes hoi pharisaioi epErOtEsan auton ei exestin
G2532 G4334 G3588 G5330 G1905 G846 G1487 G1832
him, and asked him, Is it
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Cond vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg lawful for a man to put away
AND TOWARD-COMING THE PHARISEES inquire-of Him IF it-IS-allowed [his] wife? tempting him.
approaching
andri gunaika apolusai peirazontes auton

andri gunaika apolusai peirazontes auton
G435 G1135 G630 G3985 G846
n_ Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg f vn Aor Act vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m
to-MAN WOMAN TO-FROM-LOOSE tryING Him
to-husband wife to-dismiss
10:3 o de apokriqeis eipen autois ti umin eneteilato 3 And he answered and said
ho de apokritheis eipen autois ti humin eneteilato
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G846 G5101 G5213 G1781
unto them, What did Moses
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg n pp 2 Dat Pl vi Aor midD 3 Sg command you?
THE YET answerING He-said to-them ANY to-YOU(p) directs
what ? ye
mwshs
mOsEs
G3475
n_ Nom Sg m
MOSES
10:4 oi de eipon mwshs epetreyen biblion apostasiou grayai kai 4 And they said, Moses
hoi de eipon mOsEs epetrepsen biblion apostasiou grapsai kai
G3588 G1161 G2036 G3475 G2010 G975 G647 G1125 G2532
suffered to write a bill of
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vn Aor Act Conj divorcement, and to put [her]
THE YET THEY-said MOSES permits SCROLLet OF-FROM-STAND TO-WRITE AND away.
of-divorce
apolusai
apolusai
G630
vn Aor Act
TO-FROM-LOOSE
to-dismiss-her
10:5 kai apokriqeis o ihsous eipen autois pros thn 5 And Jesus answered and said
kai apokritheis ho iEsous eipen autois pros tEn
G2532 G611 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G4314 G3588
unto them, For the hardness of
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg f your heart he wrote you this
AND answerING THE JESUS said to-them TOWARD THE precept.
sklhrokardian umwn egrayen umin thn entolhn tauthn

sklErokardian humOn egrapsen humin tEn entolEn tautEn
G4641 G5216 G1125 G5213 G3588 G1785 G3778
n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f
HARD-HEART OF-YOU(p) he-WRITES to-YOU(p) THE direction this
hardheartedness of-ye to-ye precept
10:6 apo de archs ktisews arsen kai qhlu epoihsen autous o 6 But from the beginning of the
apo de archEs ktiseOs arsen kai thElu epoiEsen autous ho
G575 G1161 G746 G2937 G730 G2532 G2338 G4160 G846 G3588
creation God made them male
Prep Conj n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Acc Sg n Conj a_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m t_ Nom Sg m and female.
FROM YET ORIGINal OF-CREATION MALE AND female makES them THE
beginning
qeos
theos
G2316
n_ Nom Sg m
God (PLACer)
God
Mark 10
10:7 eneken toutou kataleiyei anqrwpos ton patera autou kai 7 For this cause shall a man
heneken toutou kataleipsei anthrOpos ton patera autou kai
G1752 G5127 G2641 G444 G3588 G3962 G846 G2532
leave his father and mother,
Adv pd Gen Sg n vi Fut Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m Conj and cleave to his wife;
on-account-of this SHALL-BE-leavING human THE FATHER OF-him AND
thn mhtera kai proskollhqhsetai pros thn gunaika autou

tEn mEtera kai proskollEthEsetai pros tEn gunaika autou
G3588 G3384 G2532 G4347 G4314 G3588 G1135 G846
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m
THE MOTHER AND SHALL-BE-BEING-TOWARD-JOINED TOWARD THE WOMAN OF-him
shall-be-being-joined-to wife
10:8 kai esontai oi duo eis sarka mian wste ouketi eisin 8 And they twain shall be one
kai esontai hoi duo eis sarka mian hOste ouketi eisin
G2532 G2071 G3588 G1417 G1519 G4561 G1520 G5620 G3765 G1526
flesh: so then they are no more
Conj vi Fut vxx 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Prep n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f Conj Adv vi Pres vxx 3 Pl twain, but one flesh.
AND SHALL-BE THE TWO INTO FLESH ONE AS-BESIDES NOT-STILL THEY-ARE
so-that not-longer
duo alla mia sarx

duo alla mia sarx
G1417 G235 G1520 G4561
a_ Nom Conj a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
TWO but ONE FLESH
10:9 o oun o qeos sunezeuxen anqrwpos mh cwrizetw 9 What therefore God hath
ho oun ho theos sunezeuxen anthrOpos mE chOrizetO
G3739 G3767 G3588 G2316 G4801 G444 G3361 G5563
joined together, let not man put
pr Acc Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vm Pres Act 3 Sg asunder.
WHICH THEN THE God TOGETHER-YOKES human NO LET-BE-SPACizING
yokes-together let-him-be-separating !
10:10 kai en th oikia palin oi maqhtai autou peri tou 10 And in the house his
kai en tE oikia palin hoi mathEtai autou peri tou
G2532 G1722 G3588 G3614 G3825 G3588 G3101 G846 G4012 G3588
disciples asked him again of
Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Adv t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg n the same [matter].
AND IN THE HOME AGAIN THE LEARNers OF-Him ABOUT THE
house disciples concerning
autou ephrwthsan auton

autou epErOtEsan auton
G846 G1905 G846
pp Gen Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
SAME inquire-of Him
same-thing
10:11 kai legei autois os ean apolush thn gunaika 11 And he saith unto them,
kai legei autois hos ean apolusE tEn gunaika
G2532 G3004 G846 G3739 G1437 G630 G3588 G1135
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pr Nom Sg m Cond vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f wife, and marry another,
AND He-IS-sayING to-them WHO IF-EVER SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING THE WOMAN committeth adultery against
should-be-dismissing wife her.
autou kai gamhsh allhn moicatai ep authn

autou kai gamEsE allEn moichatai ep autEn
G846 G2532 G1060 G243 G3429 G1909 G846
pp Gen Sg m Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg f vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg f
OF-him AND SHOULD-BE-MARRYING other IS-committING-ADULTERY ON her
another is-committing-adultery
10:12 kai ean gunh apolush ton andra auths kai 12 And if a woman shall put
kai ean gunE apolusE ton andra autEs kai
G2532 G1437 G1135 G630 G3588 G435 G846 G2532
away her husband, and be
Conj Cond n_ Nom Sg f vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg f Conj married to another, she
AND IF-EVER WOMAN SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING THE MAN OF-her AND committeth adultery.
should-be-dismissing husband
gamhqh allw moicatai

gamEthE allO moichatai
G1060 G243 G3429
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg a_ Dat Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
MAY-BE-BEING-MARRIED to-other she-IS-committING-ADULTERY
to-another she-is-committing-adultery
10:13 kai proseferon autw paidia ina ayhtai autwn 13 . And they brought young
kai prosepheron autO paidia hina hapsEtai autOn
G2532 G4374 G846 G3813 G2443 G680 G846
children to him, that he should
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m n_ Acc Pl n Conj vs Aor Mid 3 Sg pp Gen Pl m touch them: and [his] disciples
AND THEY-TOWARD-CARRIED to-Him little-boys-and-girls THAT He-SHOULD-BE-TOUCHING OF-them rebuked those that brought
they-brought him them [them].
oi de maqhtai epetimwn tois prosferousin

hoi de mathEtai epetimOn tois prospherousin
G3588 G1161 G3101 G2008 G3588 G4374
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Dat Pl m
THE YET LEARNers rebukED to-THE ones-TOWARD-CARRYING
disciples the ones-bringing-to
Mark 10
10:14 idwn de o ihsous hganakthsen kai eipen autois 14 But when Jesus saw [it], he
idOn de ho iEsous EganaktEsen kai eipen autois
G1492 G1161 G3588 G2424 G23 G2532 G2036 G846
was much displeased, and said
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m unto them, Suffer the little
PERCEIVING YET THE JESUS resents AND said to-them children to come unto me, and
perceiving-it resents-it forbid them not: for of such is
the kingdom of God.
afete ta paidia ercesqai pros me kai mh kwluete
aphete ta paidia erchesthai pros me kai mE kOluete
G863 G3588 G3813 G2064 G4314 G3165 G2532 G3361 G2967
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n vn Pres midD/pasD Prep pp 1 Acc Sg Conj Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Pl
FROM-LET THE little-boys-and-girls TO-BE-COMING TOWARD ME AND NO BE-FORBIDDING
let-ye ! be-ye-forbidding !
auta twn gar toioutwn estin h basileia tou qeou

auta tOn gar toioutOn estin hE basileia tou theou
G846 G3588 G1063 G5108 G2076 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316
pp Acc Pl n t_ Gen Pl n Conj pd Gen Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
them OF-THE for such IS THE KINGdom OF-THE God
such(p)
10:15 amhn legw umin os ean mh dexhtai thn 15 Verily I say unto you,
amEn legO humin hos ean mE dexEtai tEn
G281 G3004 G5213 G3739 G1437 G3361 G1209 G3588
Whosoever shall not receive
Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl pr Nom Sg m Cond Part Neg vs Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f the kingdom of God as a little
AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) WHO IF-EVER NO SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING THE child, he shall not enter therein.
verily to-ye
basileian tou qeou ws paidion ou mh eiselqh eis

basileian tou theou hOs paidion ou mE eiselthE eis
G932 G3588 G2316 G5613 G3813 G3756 G3361 G1525 G1519
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Adv n_ Nom Sg n Part Neg Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
KINGdom OF-THE God AS little-boy (-or-girl) NOT NO MAY-BE-INTO-COMING INTO
he-may-be-entering
authn
autEn
G846
pp Acc Sg f
her
herit
10:16 kai enagkalisamenos auta tiqeis tas ceiras ep auta 16 And he took them up in his
kai enagkalisamenos auta titheis tas cheiras ep auta
G2532 G1723 G846 G5087 G3588 G5495 G1909 G846
arms, put [his] hands upon
Conj vp Aor midD Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Prep pp Acc Pl n them, and blessed them.
AND IN-CLASPing them PLACING THE HANDS ON them
clasping-in-his-arms
hulogei auta
Eulogei auta
G2127 G846
vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl n
He-blessED them
10:17 kai ekporeuomenou autou eis odon prosdramwn eis kai 17 . And when he was gone
kai ekporeuomenou autou eis hodon prosdramOn heis kai
G2532 G1607 G846 G1519 G3598 G4370 G1520 G2532
forth into the way, there came
Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Conj one running, and kneeled to
AND OF-OUT-GOING OF-Him INTO WAY TOWARD-RUNNING ONE AND him, and asked him, Good
of-going-out road running-toward Master, what shall I do that I
may inherit eternal life?
gonupethsas auton ephrwta auton didaskale agaqe ti poihsw
gonupetEsas auton epErOta auton didaskale agathe ti poiEsO
G1120 G846 G1905 G846 G1320 G18 G5101 G4160
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m a_ Voc Sg m pi Acc Sg n vs Aor Act 1 Sg
KNEE-FALLing Him inquirED-of Him TEACHer ! GOOD ! ANY I-SHALL-BE-DOING
falling-on-his-knees what ?
ina zwhn aiwnion klhronomhsw

hina zOEn aiOnion klEronomEsO
G2443 G2222 G166 G2816
Conj n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f vs Aor Act 1 Sg
THAT LIFE eonian I-SHOULD-BE-tenantING
I-should-be-enjoying-the-allotment-of
10:18 o de ihsous eipen autw ti me legeis 18 And Jesus said unto him,
ho de iEsous eipen autO ti me legeis
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G846 G5101 G3165 G3004
Why callest thou me good?
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m pi Acc Sg n pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres Act 2 Sg [there is] none good but one,
THE YET JESUS said to-him ANY ME YOU-ARE-sayING [that is], God.
why ?
agaqon oudeis agaqos ei mh eis o qeos

agathon oudeis agathos ei mE heis ho theos
G18 G3762 G18 G1487 G3361 G1520 G3588 G2316
a_ Acc Sg m a_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Cond Part Neg a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
GOOD NOT-YET-ONE GOOD IF NO ONE THE God
no-one
Mark 10
10:19 tas entolas oidas mh moiceushs mh 19 Thou knowest the

tas entolas oidas mE moicheusEs mE
G3588 G1785 G1492 G3361 G3431 G3361
commandments, Do not
t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vi Perf Act 2 Sg Part Neg vs Aor Act 2 Sg Part Neg commit adultery, Do not kill,
THE directions YOU-HAVE-PERCEIVED NO YOU-SHOULD-BE-ADULTERING NO Do not steal, Do not bear false
precepts you-are-acquainted-with you-should-be-committing-adultery witness, Defraud not, Honour
thy father and mother.
foneushs mh kleyhs mh yeudomarturhshs mh
phoneusEs mE klepsEs mE pseudomarturEsEs mE
G5407 G3361 G2813 G3361 G5576 G3361
vs Aor Act 2 Sg Part Neg vs Aor Act 2 Sg Part Neg vs Aor Act 2 Sg Part Neg
YOU-SHOULD-BE-MURDERING NO YOU-SHOULD-BE-stealING NO YOU-SHOULD-BE-FALSE-witnessING NO
you-should-be-testifying-falsely
aposterhshs tima ton patera sou kai thn mhtera

aposterEsEs tima ton patera sou kai tEn mEtera
G650 G5091 G3588 G3962 G4675 G2532 G3588 G3384
vs Aor Act 2 Sg vm Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
YOU-SHOULD-BE-deprivING BE-VALUING THE FATHER OF-YOU AND THE MOTHER
you-should-be-cheating be-you-honoring !
10:20 o de apokriqeis eipen autw didaskale tauta panta 20 And he answered and said
ho de apokritheis eipen autO didaskale tauta panta
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G846 G1320 G5023 G3956
unto him, Master, all these
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m pd Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n have I observed from my
THE YET answerING he-said to-Him TEACHer ! these ALL youth.
efulaxamhn ek neothtos mou

ephulaxamEn ek neotEtos mou
G5442 G1537 G3503 G3450
vi Aor Mid 1 Sg Prep n_ Gen Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg
I-GUARD OUT OF-YOUTH OF-ME
I-maintain
10:21 o de ihsous embleyas autw hgaphsen auton kai 21 Then Jesus beholding him
ho de iEsous emblepsas autO EgapEsen auton kai
G3588 G1161 G2424 G1689 G846 G25 G846 G2532
loved him, and said unto him,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj One thing thou lackest: go thy
THE YET JESUS IN-looking to-him LOVES him AND way, sell whatsoever thou hast,
looking-at him and give to the poor, and thou
shalt have treasure in heaven:
eipen autw en soi usterei upage osa eceis and come, take up the cross,
eipen autO hen soi husterei hupage hosa echeis and follow me.
G2036 G846 G1520 G4671 G5302 G5217 G3745 G2192
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Dat Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg vm Pres Act 2 Sg pk Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 2 Sg
said to-him ONE to-YOU IS-WANTING BE-UNDER-LEADING as-much-as YOU-ARE-HAVING
one-thing is-being-deficient be-you-going-away ! whatever
pwlhson kai dos tois ptwcois kai exeis qhsauron

pOlEson kai dos tois ptOchois kai exeis thEsauron
G4453 G2532 G1325 G3588 G4434 G2532 G2192 G2344
vm Aor Act 2 Sg Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m Conj vi Fut Act 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg m
SELL AND BE-GIVING to-THE POOR AND YOU-SHALL-BE-HAVING PLACED-INTO-MORROW
sell-you ! be-you-giving ! poor-ones treasure
en ouranw kai deuro akolouqei moi aras ton stauron

en ouranO kai deuro akolouthei moi aras ton stauron
G1722 G3772 G2532 G1204 G190 G3427 G142 G3588 G4716
Prep n_ Dat Sg m Conj vm txx vxx 2 Sg vm Pres Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
IN heaven AND HITHER BE-followING to-ME LIFTing THE pale
hither-you ! be-you-following ! me picking-up cross
10:22 o de stugnasas epi tw logw aphlqen lupoumenos 22 And he was sad at that
ho de stugnasas epi tO logO apElthen lupoumenos
G3588 G1161 G4768 G1909 G3588 G3056 G565 G3076
saying, and went away
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m grieved: for he had great
THE YET SOMBERing ON THE saying he-FROM-CAME SORROWING possessions.
being-somber word he-came-away
hn gar ecwn kthmata polla

En gar echOn ktEmata polla
G2258 G1063 G2192 G2933 G4183
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n
he-WAS for HAVING ACQUISITIONS MANY
one-having
10:23 kai peribleyamenos o ihsous legei tois maqhtais autou 23 And Jesus looked round
kai periblepsamenos ho iEsous legei tois mathEtais autou
G2532 G4017 G3588 G2424 G3004 G3588 G3101 G846
about, and saith unto his
Conj vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m disciples, How hardly shall
AND ABOUT-looking THE JESUS IS-sayING to-THE LEARNers OF-Him they that have riches enter into
looking-about disciples the kingdom of God!
pws duskolws oi ta crhmata econtes eis thn basileian

pOs duskolOs hoi ta chrEmata echontes eis tEn basileian
G4459 G1423 G3588 G3588 G5536 G2192 G1519 G3588 G932
Adv Adv t_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
how ILL-VICTUALly THE-ones THE moneys HAVING INTO THE KINGdom
squeamishly the-ones money(p)
Mark 10
tou qeou eiseleusontai

tou theou eiseleusontai
G3588 G2316 G1525
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut midD 3 Pl
OF-THE God SHALL-BE-INTO-COMING
shall-be-entering
10:24 oi de maqhtai eqambounto epi tois logois autou o de 24 And the disciples were
hoi de mathEtai ethambounto epi tois logois autou ho de
G3588 G1161 G3101 G2284 G1909 G3588 G3056 G846 G3588 G1161
astonished at his words. But
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Impf Pas 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg m Conj Jesus answereth again, and
THE YET LEARNers WERE-AWED ON THE sayings OF-Him THE YET saith unto them, Children, how
disciples were-awed words hard is it for them that trust in
riches to enter into the
ihsous palin apokriqeis legei autois tekna pws duskolon kingdom of God!
iEsous palin apokritheis legei autois tekna pOs duskolon
G2424 G3825 G611 G3004 G846 G5043 G4459 G1422
n_ Nom Sg m Adv vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m n_ Voc Pl n Adv a_ Nom Sg n
JESUS AGAIN answerING IS-sayING to-them offsprings how ILL-VICTUALED
children ! squeamish
estin tous pepoiqotas epi tois crhmasin eis thn basileian

estin tous pepoithotas epi tois chrEmasin eis tEn basileian
G2076 G3588 G3982 G1909 G3588 G5536 G1519 G3588 G932
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m vp 2Perf Act Acc Pl m Prep t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
it-IS THE ones-HAVING-confidence ON THE moneys INTO THE KINGdom
ones-having-confidence money(p)
tou qeou eiselqein

tou theou eiselthein
G3588 G2316 G1525
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vn 2Aor Act
OF-THE God TO-BE-INTO-COMING
to-be-entering
10:25 eukopwteron estin kamhlon dia ths trumalias ths rafidos 25 It is easier for a camel to go
eukopOteron estin kamElon dia tEs trumalias tEs raphidos
G2123 G2076 G2574 G1223 G3588 G5168 G3588 G4476
through the eye of a needle,
a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f than for a rich man to enter
easier it-IS CAMEL THRU THE BORE OF-THE SEWer into the kingdom of God.
through eye needle
dielqein h plousion eis thn basileian tou qeou

dielthein E plousion eis tEn basileian tou theou
G1330 G2228 G4145 G1519 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316
vn 2Aor Act Part a_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
TO-BE-THRU-COMING OR RICH INTO THE KINGdom OF-THE God
to-be-passing-through than rich-man
eiselqein
eiselthein
G1525
vn 2Aor Act
TO-BE-INTO-COMING
to-be-entering
10:26 oi de perissws exeplhssonto legontes pros eautous kai 26 And they were astonished
hoi de perissOs exeplEssonto legontes pros heautous kai
G3588 G1161 G4057 G1605 G3004 G4314 G1438 G2532
out of measure, saying among
t_ Nom Pl m Conj Adv vi Impf Pas 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep pf 3 Acc Pl m Conj themselves, Who then can be
THE-ones YET exceedingly were-astonishED sayING TOWARD selves AND saved?
the they-were-astonished themselves
tis dunatai swqhnai

tis dunatai sOthEnai
G5101 G1410 G4982
pi Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg vn Aor Pas
ANY IS-ABLE TO-BE-SAVED
who ? can
10:27 embleyas de autois o ihsous legei para anqrwpois 27 And Jesus looking upon
emblepsas de autois ho iEsous legei para anthrOpois
G1689 G1161 G846 G3588 G2424 G3004 G3844 G444
them saith, With men [it is]
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Dat Pl m impossible, but not with God:
IN-looking YET to-them THE JESUS IS-sayING BESIDE humans for with God all things are
looking-at them possible.
adunaton all ou para tw qew panta gar dunata estin para

adunaton all ou para tO theO panta gar dunata estin para
G102 G235 G3756 G3844 G3588 G2316 G3956 G1063 G1415 G2076 G3844
a_ Nom Sg n Conj Part Neg Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m a_ Nom Pl n Conj a_ Nom Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep
UN-ABLE but NOT BESIDE THE God ALL for ABLE IS BESIDE
impossible possible
tw qew
tO theO
G3588 G2316
THE God
Mark 10
10:28 kai hrxato o petros legein autw idou hmeis 28 Then Peter began to say
kai Erxato ho petros legein autO idou hEmeis
G2532 G756 G3588 G4074 G3004 G846 G2400 G2249
unto him, Lo, we have left all,
Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vn Pres Act pp Dat Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Nom Pl and have followed thee.
AND begins THE Peter TO-BE-sayING to-Him BE-PERCEIVING WE
lo !
afhkamen panta kai hkolouqhsamen soi

aphEkamen panta kai EkolouthEsamen soi
G863 G3956 G2532 G190 G4671
vi Aor Act 1 Sg a_ Acc Pl n Conj vi Aor Act 1 Pl pp 2 Dat Sg
FROM-LET ALL AND follow to-YOU
leave you
10:29 apokriqeis de o ihsous eipen amhn legw umin 29 And Jesus answered and
apokritheis de ho iEsous eipen amEn legO humin
G611 G1161 G3588 G2424 G2036 G281 G3004 G5213
said, Verily I say unto you,
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl There is no man that hath left
answerING YET THE JESUS said AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) house, or brethren, or sisters,
verily to-ye or father, or mother, or wife, or
children, or lands, for my sake,
oudeis estin os afhken oikian h adelfous h adelfas h and the gospel's,
oudeis estin hos aphEken oikian E adelphous E adelphas E
G3762 G2076 G3739 G863 G3614 G2228 G80 G2228 G79 G2228
a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pr Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f Part n_ Acc Pl m Part n_ Acc Pl f Part
NOT-YET-ONE IS WHO FROM-LETS HOME OR brothers OR sisters OR
no-one there-is leaves house
patera h mhtera h gunaika h tekna h agrous eneken emou

patera hE mEtera E gunaika E tekna E agrous heneken emou
G3962 G2228 G3384 G2228 G1135 G2228 G5043 G2228 G68 G1752 G1700
n_ Acc Sg m Part n_ Acc Sg f Part n_ Acc Sg f Part n_ Acc Pl n Part n_ Acc Pl m Adv pp 1 Gen Sg
FATHER OR MOTHER OR WOMAN OR offsprings OR FIELDS on-account-of OF-ME
wife children me
kai tou euaggeliou

kai tou euaggeliou
G2532 G3588 G2098
Conj t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
AND OF-THE WELL-MESSAGE
the
10:30 ean mh labh ekatontaplasiona nun en tw kairw 30 But he shall receive an

ean mE labE hekatontaplasiona nun en tO kairO
G1437 G3361 G2983 G1542 G3568 G1722 G3588 G2540
hundredfold now in this time,
Cond Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl n Adv Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m houses, and brethren, and
IF-EVER NO MAY-BE-GETTING HUNDRED-FOLD NOW IN THE SEASON sisters, and mothers, and
era children, and lands, with
persecutions; and in the world
toutw oikias kai adelfous kai adelfas kai mhteras kai tekna kai to come eternal life.
toutO oikias kai adelphous kai adelphas kai mEteras kai tekna kai
G5129 G3614 G2532 G80 G2532 G79 G2532 G3384 G2532 G5043 G2532
pd Dat Sg m n_ Acc Pl f Conj n_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl f Conj n_ Acc Pl f Conj n_ Acc Pl n Conj
this HOMES AND brothers AND sisters AND MOTHERS AND offsprings AND
houses children
agrous meta diwgmwn kai en tw aiwni tw ercomenw

agrous meta diOgmOn kai en tO aiOni tO erchomenO
G68 G3326 G1375 G2532 G1722 G3588 G165 G3588 G2064
n_ Acc Pl m Prep n_ Gen Pl m Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Sg m
FIELDS WITH CHASEings AND IN THE eon THE COMING
persecutions
zwhn aiwnion
zOEn aiOnion
G2222 G166
n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f
LIFE eonian
10:31 polloi de esontai prwtoi escatoi kai oi escatoi prwtoi 31 But many [that are] first
polloi de esontai prOtoi eschatoi kai hoi eschatoi prOtoi
G4183 G1161 G2071 G4413 G2078 G2532 G3588 G2078 G4413
shall be last; and the last first.
a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Fut vxx 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
MANY YET SHALL-BE BEFORE-most LAST AND THE LAST BEFORE-most
first-ones last-ones last-ones first-ones
10:32 hsan de en th odw anabainontes eis ierosoluma kai 32 . And they were in the way
Esan de en tE hodO anabainontes eis ierosoluma kai
G2258 G1161 G1722 G3588 G3598 G305 G1519 G2414 G2532
going up to Jerusalem; and
vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj Jesus went before them: and
THEY-WERE YET IN THE WAY UP-STEPPING INTO JERUSALEM AND they were amazed; and as they
road going-up followed, they were afraid.
And he took again the twelve,
hn proagwn autous o ihsous kai eqambounto kai and began to tell them what
En proagOn autous ho iEsous kai ethambounto kai things should happen unto him,
G2258 G4254 G846 G3588 G2424 G2532 G2284 G2532
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Impf Pas 3 Pl Conj
WAS BEFORE-LEADING them THE JESUS AND THEY-were-AWED AND
preceding
Mark 10
akolouqountes efobounto kai paralabwn palin tous dwdeka

akolouthountes ephobounto kai paralabOn palin tous dOdeka
G190 G5399 G2532 G3880 G3825 G3588 G1427
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Adv t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom
followING THEY-FEARED AND BESIDE-GETTING AGAIN THE TWO-TEN
taking-aside twelve
hrxato autois legein ta mellonta autw sumbainein

Erxato autois legein ta mellonta autO sumbainein
G756 G846 G3004 G3588 G3195 G846 G4819
vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vn Pres Act t_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Acc Pl n pp Dat Sg m vn Pres Act
He-begins to-them TO-BE-sayING THE beING-ABOUT to-Him TO-BE-befallING
them to-be-telling the-things him
10:33 oti idou anabainomen eis ierosoluma kai o uios 33 [Saying], Behold, we go up
hoti idou anabainomen eis ierosoluma kai ho huios
G3754 G2400 G305 G1519 G2414 G2532 G3588 G5207
to Jerusalem; and the Son of
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Pres Act 1 Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m man shall be delivered unto the
that BE-PERCEIVING WE-ARE-UP-STEPPING INTO JERUSALEM AND THE SON chief priests, and unto the
lo ! we-are-going-up scribes; and they shall
condemn him to death, and
tou anqrwpou paradoqhsetai tois arciereusin kai tois shall deliver him to the
tou anthrOpou paradothEsetai tois archiereusin kai tois Gentiles:
G3588 G444 G3860 G3588 G749 G2532 G3588
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Conj t_ Dat Pl m
OF-THE human SHALL-BE-BEING-BESIDE-GIVEN to-THE chief-SACRED-ones AND to-THE
shall-be-being-given-up chief-priests
grammateusin kai katakrinousin auton qanatw kai

grammateusin kai katakrinousin auton thanatO kai
G1122 G2532 G2632 G846 G2288 G2532
n_ Dat Pl m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj
WRITers AND THEY-SHALL-BE-DOWN-JUDGING Him to-DEATH AND
scribes they-shall-be-condemning
paradwsousin auton tois eqnesin

paradOsousin auton tois ethnesin
G3860 G846 G3588 G1484
vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n
THEY-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING Him to-THE NATIONS
they-shall-be-giving-up
10:34 kai empaixousin autw kai mastigwsousin auton kai 34 And they shall mock him,
kai empaixousin autO kai mastigOsousin auton kai
G2532 G1702 G846 G2532 G3146 G846 G2532
and shall scourge him, and
Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj shall spit upon him, and shall
AND THEY-SHALL-BE-IN-sportING to-Him AND THEY-SHALL-BE-scourgING Him AND kill him: and the third day he
they-shall-be-scoffing-at him shall rise again.
emptusousin autw kai apoktenousin auton kai th

emptusousin autO kai apoktenousin auton kai tE
G1716 G846 G2532 G615 G846 G2532 G3588
vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj t_ Dat Sg f
THEY-SHALL-BE-IN-SPITTING to-Him AND THEY-SHALL-BE-FROM-KILLING Him AND to-THE
shall-be-spitting-in they-shall-be-killing
trith hmera anasthsetai

tritE hEmera anastEsetai
G5154 G2250 G450
a_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi Fut Mid 3 Sg
third DAY He-SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING
he-shall-be-rising
10:35 kai prosporeuontai autw iakwbos kai iwannhs oi uioi 35 And James and John, the
kai prosporeuontai autO iakObos kai iOannEs hoi huioi
G2532 G4365 G846 G2385 G2532 G2491 G3588 G5207
sons of Zebedee, come unto
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m him, saying, Master, we would
AND ARE-TOWARD-GOING to-Him JACOBUS AND JOHN THE SONS that thou shouldest do for us
are-going-to him James whatsoever we shall desire.
zebedaiou legontes didaskale qelomen ina o ean

zebedaiou legontes didaskale thelomen hina ho ean
G2199 G3004 G1320 G2309 G2443 G3739 G1437
n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Voc Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Pl Conj pr Acc Sg n Cond
OF-ZEBEDEE sayING TEACHer ! WE-ARE-WILLING THAT WHICH IF-EVER
aithswmen poihshs hmin

aitEsOmen poiEsEs hEmin
G154 G4160 G2254
vs Aor Act 1 Pl vs Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl
WE-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING YOU-SHOULD-BE-DOING to-US
we-should-be-requesting-of
10:36 o de eipen autois ti qelete poihsai me umin 36 And he said unto them,
ho de eipen autois ti thelete poiEsai me humin
G3588 G1161 G2036 G846 G5101 G2309 G4160 G3165 G5213
What would ye that I should do
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Pl vn Aor Act pp 1 Acc Sg pp 2 Dat Pl for you?
THE YET He-said to-them ANY YE-ARE-WILLING TO-DO ME to-YOU(p)
what ? to-ye
Mark 10
10:37 oi de eipon autw dos hmin ina eis ek dexiwn 37 They said unto him, Grant
hoi de eipon autO dos hEmin hina heis ek dexiOn
G3588 G1161 G2036 G846 G1325 G2254 G2443 G1520 G1537 G1188
unto us that we may sit, one on
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl Conj a_ Nom Sg m Prep a_ Gen Pl m thy right hand, and the other on
THE YET THEY-said to-Him BE-GIVING to-US THAT ONE OUT OF-RIGHT thy left hand, in thy glory.
be-you-granting ! of-right(p)
sou kai eis ex euwnumwn sou kaqiswmen en th

sou kai heis ex euOnumOn sou kathisOmen en tE
G4675 G2532 G1520 G1537 G2176 G4675 G2523 G1722 G3588
pp 2 Gen Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg m Prep a_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg vs Aor Act 1 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg f
OF-YOU AND ONE OUT OF-left OF-YOU WE-SHOULD-BE-seatING IN THE
of-left(p) we-should-be-being-seated
doxh sou
doxE sou
G1391 G4675
n_ Dat Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg
esteem OF-YOU
glory
10:38 o de ihsous eipen autois ouk oidate ti 38 But Jesus said unto them,
ho de iEsous eipen autois ouk oidate ti
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G846 G3756 G1492 G5101
Ye know not what ye ask: can
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Part Neg vi Perf Act 2 Pl pi Acc Sg n ye drink of the cup that I drink
THE YET JESUS said to-them NOT YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED ANY of? and be baptized with the
ye-are-aware what baptism that I am baptized
with?
aiteisqe dunasqe piein to pothrion o egw
aiteisthe dunasthe piein to potErion ho egO
G154 G1410 G4095 G3588 G4221 G3739 G1473
vi Pres Mid 2 Pl vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pr Acc Sg n pp 1 Nom Sg
YE-ARE-REQUESTING YE-ARE-ABLE TO-BE-DRINKING THE DRINK-cup WHICH I
cup
pinw kai to baptisma o egw baptizomai baptisqhnai

pinO kai to baptisma ho egO baptizomai baptisthEnai
G4095 G2532 G3588 G908 G3739 G1473 G907 G907
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pr Acc Sg n pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres Pas 1 Sg vn Aor Pas
AM-DRINKING AND THE DIPism WHICH I AM-beING-DIPizED TO-BE-DIPizED
baptism am-being-baptized to-be-baptized
10:39 oi de eipon autw dunameqa o de ihsous 39 And they said unto him, We
hoi de eipon autO dunametha ho de iEsous
G3588 G1161 G2036 G846 G1410 G3588 G1161 G2424
can. And Jesus said unto them,
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Pl t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Ye shall indeed drink of the
THE YET THEY-said to-Him WE-ARE-ABLE THE YET JESUS cup that I drink of; and with
the baptism that I am baptized
withal shall ye be baptized:
eipen autois to men pothrion o egw pinw
eipen autois to men potErion ho egO pinO
G2036 G846 G3588 G3303 G4221 G3739 G1473 G4095
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg n Part n_ Acc Sg n pr Acc Sg n pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg
said to-them THE INDEED DRINK-cup WHICH I AM-DRINKING
cup
piesqe kai to baptisma o egw baptizomai

piesthe kai to baptisma ho egO baptizomai
G4095 G2532 G3588 G908 G3739 G1473 G907
vi Fut midD 2 Pl Conj t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pr Acc Sg n pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
YE-SHALL-BE-DRINKING AND THE DIPism WHICH I AM-beING-DIPizED
baptism am-being-baptized
baptisqhsesqe
baptisthEsesthe
G907
vi Fut Pas 2 Pl
YE-SHALL-BE-BEING-DIPizED
ye-shall-be-being-baptized
10:40 to de kaqisai ek dexiwn mou kai ex euwnumwn mou 40 But to sit on my right hand
to de kathisai ek dexiOn mou kai ex euOnumOn mou
G3588 G1161 G2523 G1537 G1188 G3450 G2532 G1537 G2176 G3450
and on my left hand is not
t_ Nom Sg n Conj vn Aor Act Prep a_ Gen Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg Conj Prep a_ Gen Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg mine to give; but [it shall be
THE YET TO-be-seated OUT OF-RIGHT OF-ME AND OUT OF-left OF-ME given to them] for whom it is
of-right(p) of-left(p) prepared.
ouk estin emon dounai all ois htoimastai

ouk estin emon dounai all hois hEtoimastai
G3756 G2076 G1699 G1325 G235 G3739 G2090
Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg ps 1 Nom Sg vn 2Aor Act Conj pr Dat Pl m vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
NOT IS MY TO-GIVE but to-WHOM it-HAS-been-made-READY
mine it-shall-be-given-to-them-to-whom
10:41 kai akousantes oi deka hrxanto aganaktein peri iakwbou kai 41 And when the ten heard [it],
kai akousantes hoi deka Erxanto aganaktein peri iakObou kai
G2532 G191 G3588 G1176 G756 G23 G4012 G2385 G2532
they began to be much
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom vi Aor midD 3 Pl vn Pres Act Prep n_ Gen Sg m Conj displeased with James and
AND HEARing THE TEN begin TO-BE-resentING ABOUT JACOBUS AND John.
hearing-of-it to-be-being-resentful concerning James
Mark 10
iwannou
iOannou
G2491
n_ Gen Sg m
JOHN
10:42 o de ihsous proskalesamenos autous legei autois 42 But Jesus called them [to
ho de iEsous proskalesamenos autous legei autois
G3588 G1161 G2424 G4341 G846 G3004 G846
him], and saith unto them, Ye
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor midD Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m know that they which are
THE YET JESUS TOWARD-CALLing them IS-sayING to-them accounted to rule over the
calling-to-him Gentiles exercise lordship over
them; and their great ones
oidate oti oi dokountes arcein twn eqnwn exercise authority upon them.
oidate hoti hoi dokountes archein tOn ethnOn
G1492 G3754 G3588 G1380 G757 G3588 G1484
vi Perf Act 2 Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vn Pres Act t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that THE ones-SEEMING TO-BE-chief OF-THE NATIONS
ye-are-aware ones-presuming to-be-being-chief
katakurieuousin autwn kai oi megaloi autwn katexousiazousin

katakurieuousin autOn kai hoi megaloi autOn katexousiazousin
G2634 G846 G2532 G3588 G3173 G846 G2715
vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Gen Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ARE-DOWN-masterING OF-them AND THE GREAT-ones OF-them ARE-coercING
are-lording-it-over them great-men
autwn
autOn
G846
pp Gen Pl m
OF-them
them
10:43 ouc outws de estai en umin all os ean qelh 43 But so shall it not be among
ouch houtOs de estai en humin all hos ean thelE
G3756 G3779 G1161 G2071 G1722 G5213 G235 G3739 G1437 G2309
you: but whosoever will be
Part Neg Adv Conj vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Prep pp 2 Dat Pl Conj pr Nom Sg m Cond vs Pres Act 3 Sg great among you, shall be your
NOT thus YET it-SHALL-BE IN YOU(p) but WHO IF-EVER MAY-BE-WILLING minister:
among ye
genesqai megas en umin estai diakonos umwn

genesthai megas en humin estai diakonos humOn
G1096 G3173 G1722 G5213 G2071 G1249 G5216
vn 2Aor midD a_ Nom Sg m Prep pp 2 Dat Pl vi Fut vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl
TO-BE-BECOMING GREAT IN YOU(p) SHALL-BE THRU-SERVitor OF-YOU(p)
among ye servant of-ye
10:44 kai os an qelh umwn genesqai prwtos estai 44 And whosoever of you will
kai hos an thelE humOn genesthai prOtos estai
G2532 G3739 G302 G2309 G5216 G1096 G4413 G2071
be the chiefest, shall be servant
Conj pr Nom Sg m Part vs Pres Act 3 Sg pp 2 Gen Pl vn 2Aor midD a_ Nom Sg m vi Fut vxx 3 Sg of all.
AND WHO EVER MAY-BE-WILLING OF-YOU(p) TO-BE-BECOMING BEFORE-most SHALL-BE
foremost
pantwn doulos
pantOn doulos
G3956 G1401
a_ Gen Pl m n_ Nom Sg m
OF-ALL SLAVE
10:45 kai gar o uios tou anqrwpou ouk hlqen 45 For even the Son of man
kai gar ho huios tou anthrOpou ouk Elthen
G2532 G1063 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G3756 G2064
came not to be ministered unto,
Conj Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg but to minister, and to give his
AND for THE SON OF-THE human NOT CAME life a ransom for many.
also
diakonhqhnai alla diakonhsai kai dounai thn yuchn autou lutron

diakonEthEnai alla diakonEsai kai dounai tEn psuchEn autou lutron
G1247 G235 G1247 G2532 G1325 G3588 G5590 G846 G3083
vn Aor Pas Conj vn Aor Act Conj vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg n
TO-BE-THRU-SERVED but TO-THRU-SERVE AND TO-GIVE THE soul OF-Him LOOSener
to-be-served to-serve ransom
anti pollwn
anti pollOn
G473 G4183
Prep a_ Gen Pl m
INSTEAD OF-MANY
insteadfor many
10:46 kai ercontai eis iericw kai ekporeuomenou autou apo iericw 46 . And they came to Jericho:
kai erchontai eis ierichO kai ekporeuomenou autou apo ierichO
G2532 G2064 G1519 G2410 G2532 G1607 G846 G575 G2410
and as he went out of Jericho
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep ni proper Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m Prep ni proper with his disciples and a great
AND THEY-ARE-COMING INTO JERICHO AND OF-OUT-GOING OF-Him FROM JERICHO number of people, blind
of-going-out Bartimaeus, the son of
Mark 10
Timaeus, sat by the highway

kai twn maqhtwn autou kai oclou ikanou uios timaiou side begging.
kai tOn mathEtOn autou kai ochlou hikanou huios timaiou
G2532 G3588 G3101 G846 G2532 G3793 G2425 G5207 G5090
Conj t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
AND THE LEARNers OF-Him AND OF-THRONG enough SON OF-TIMEUS
of-the disciples considerable
bartimaios o tuflos ekaqhto para thn odon prosaitwn

bartimaios ho tuphlos ekathEto para tEn hodon prosaitOn
G924 G3588 G5185 G2521 G3844 G3588 G3598 G4319
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
BAR-TIMEUS THE BLIND sat BESIDE THE WAY TOWARD-REQUESTING
blind-one road begging
10:47 kai akousas oti ihsous o nazwraios estin hrxato 47 And when he heard that it
kai akousas hoti iEsous ho nazOraios estin Erxato
G2532 G191 G3754 G2424 G3588 G3480 G2076 G756
was Jesus of Nazareth, he
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg vi Aor midD 3 Sg began to cry out, and say,
AND HEARing that JESUS THE NAZARENE it-IS he-begins Jesus, [thou] Son of David,
have mercy on me.
krazein kai legein o uios dabid ihsou elehson me

krazein kai legein ho huios dabid iEsou eleEson me
G2896 G2532 G3004 G3588 G5207 G1138 G2424 G1653 G3165
vn Pres Act Conj vn Pres Act t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m ni proper n_ Voc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg
TO-BE-CRYING AND TO-BE-sayING THE SON of-DAVID JESUS ! BE-MERCIFUL-to ME
of-David be-you-merciful-to !
10:48 kai epetimwn autw polloi ina siwphsh o de 48 And many charged him that
kai epetimOn autO polloi hina siOpEsE ho de
G2532 G2008 G846 G4183 G2443 G4623 G3588 G1161
he should hold his peace: but
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom Pl m Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m Conj he cried the more a great deal,
AND rebukED to-him MANY THAT he-SHOULD-BE-beING-SILENT THE YET [Thou] Son of David, have
him mercy on me.
pollw mallon ekrazen uie dabid elehson me

pollO mallon ekrazen huie dabid eleEson me
G4183 G3123 G2896 G5207 G1138 G1653 G3165
a_ Dat Sg n Adv vi Impf Act 3 Sg n_ Voc Sg m ni proper vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg
to-much RATHER he-CRIED SON ! of-DAVID BE-MERCIFUL-to ME
of-David be-you-merciful-to !
10:49 kai stas o ihsous eipen auton fwnhqhnai kai 49 And Jesus stood still, and
kai stas ho iEsous eipen auton phOnEthEnai kai
G2532 G2476 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G5455 G2532
commanded him to be called.
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m vn Aor Pas Conj And they call the blind man,
AND STANDing THE JESUS said him TO-BE-SOUNDED AND saying unto him, Be of good
to-be-summoned comfort, rise; he calleth thee.
fwnousin ton tuflon legontes autw qarsei egeirai

phOnousin ton tuphlon legontes autO tharsei egeirai
G5455 G3588 G5185 G3004 G846 G2293 G1453
vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Dat Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg vm Aor Mid 2 Sg
THEY-ARE-SOUNDING THE BLIND sayING to-him BE-COURAGE-ING be-YOU-ROUSED
they-are-summoning blind-man be-you-having-courage ! be-you-roused !
fwnei se
phOnei se
G5455 G4571
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg
He-IS-SOUNDING YOU
he-is-summoning
10:50 o de apobalwn to imation autou anastas hlqen 50 And he, casting away his
ho de apobalOn to himation autou anastas Elthen
G3588 G1161 G577 G3588 G2440 G846 G450 G2064
garment, rose, and came to
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Jesus.
THE YET FROM-CASTING THE cloak OF-him UP-STANDing he-CAME
casting-off rising
pros ton ihsoun

pros ton iEsoun
G4314 G3588 G2424
Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
TOWARD THE JESUS
10:51 kai apokriqeis legei autw o ihsous ti qeleis 51 And Jesus answered and
kai apokritheis legei autO ho iEsous ti theleis
G2532 G611 G3004 G846 G3588 G2424 G5101 G2309
said unto him, What wilt thou
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pi Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Sg that I should do unto thee? The
AND answerING IS-sayING to-him THE JESUS ANY YOU-ARE-WILLING blind man said unto him, Lord,
what ? that I might receive my sight.
poihsw soi o de tuflos eipen autw rabboni ina

poiEsO soi ho de tuphlos eipen autO rabboni hina
G4160 G4671 G3588 G1161 G5185 G2036 G846 G4462 G2443
vs Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg t_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Aramaic Conj
I-SHALL-BE-DOING to-YOU THE YET BLIND said to-Him RABBONI THAT
blind-man
Mark 10 - Mark 11
anableyw
anablepsO
G308
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
I-SHOULD-BE-UP-lookING
I-should-be-receiving-sight
10:52 o de ihsous eipen autw upage h pistis 52 And Jesus said unto him,
ho de iEsous eipen autO hupage hE pistis
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G846 G5217 G3588 G4102
Go thy way; thy faith hath
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f made thee whole. And
THE YET JESUS said to-him BE-UNDER-LEADING THE BELIEF immediately he received his
be-you-going-away ! faith sight, and followed Jesus in the
way.
sou seswken se kai euqews anebleyen kai hkolouqei tw
sou sesOken se kai eutheOs aneblepsen kai Ekolouthei tO
G4675 G4982 G4571 G2532 G2112 G308 G2532 G190 G3588
pp 2 Gen Sg vi Perf Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m
OF-YOU HAS-SAVED YOU AND immediately he-UP-looks AND followED to-THE
he-receives-sight the
ihsou en th odw
iEsou en tE hodO
G2424 G1722 G3588 G3598
n_ Dat Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
JESUS IN THE WAY
road
Mark 11
11:1 kai ote eggizousin eis ierousalhm eis bhqfagh kai bhqanian pros 1 . And when they came nigh
kai hote eggizousin eis ierousalEm eis bEthphagE kai bEthanian pros
G2532 G3753 G1448 G1519 G2419 G1519 G967 G2532 G963 G4314
to Jerusalem, unto Bethphage
Conj Adv vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep ni proper Prep ni proper Conj n_ Acc Sg f Prep and Bethany, at the mount of
AND when THEY-ARE-NEARING INTO JERUSALEM INTO BETHPHAGE AND BETHANY TOWARD Olives, he sendeth forth two of
they-are-drawing-near his disciples,
to oros twn elaiwn apostellei duo twn maqhtwn autou

to oros tOn elaiOn apostellei duo tOn mathEtOn autou
G3588 G3735 G3588 G1636 G649 G1417 G3588 G3101 G846
t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f vi Pres Act 3 Sg a_ Nom t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m
THE mountain OF-THE OLIVES He-IS-commissionING TWO OF-THE LEARNers OF-Him
Mount he-is-dispatching disciples
11:2 kai legei autois upagete eis thn kwmhn thn 2 And saith unto them, Go your
kai legei autois hupagete eis tEn kOmEn tEn
G2532 G3004 G846 G5217 G1519 G3588 G2968 G3588
way into the village over
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f against you: and as soon as ye
AND He-IS-sayING to-them BE-UNDER-LEADING INTO THE VILLAGE THE be entered into it, ye shall find
be-ye-going-away ! a colt tied, whereon never man
sat; loose him, and bring [him].
katenanti umwn kai euqews eisporeuomenoi eis authn eurhsete
katenanti humOn kai eutheOs eisporeuomenoi eis autEn heurEsete
G2713 G5216 G2532 G2112 G1531 G1519 G846 G2147
Adv pp 2 Gen Pl Conj Adv vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m Prep pp Acc Sg f vi Fut Act 2 Pl
DOWN-IN-INSTEAD OF-YOU(p) AND immediately INTO-GOING INTO her YE-SHALL-BE-FINDING
facing ye going-into herit
pwlon dedemenon ef on oudeis anqrwpwn kekaqiken

pOlon dedemenon eph hon oudeis anthrOpOn kekathiken
G4454 G1210 G1909 G3739 G3762 G444 G2523
n_ Acc Sg m vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m Prep pr Acc Sg m a_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Pl m vi Perf Act 3 Sg
COLT HAVING-been-BOUND ON WHICH NOT-YET-ONE OF-humans HAS-been-SEATED
no-one
lusantes auton agagete

lusantes auton agagete
G3089 G846 G71
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
LOOSing it BE-LEADING
him it be-ye-leading-it !
11:3 kai ean tis umin eiph ti poieite touto eipate 3 And if any man say unto you,
kai ean tis humin eipE ti poieite touto eipate
G2532 G1437 G5100 G5213 G2036 G5101 G4160 G5124 G2036
Why do ye this? say ye that the
Conj Cond px Nom Sg m pp 2 Dat Pl vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg pi Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Pl pd Acc Sg n vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl Lord hath need of him; and
AND IF-EVER ANY to-YOU(p) MAY-BE-sayING ANY YE-ARE-DOING this say straightway he will send him
anyone to-ye what ? say-ye ! hither.
oti o kurios autou creian ecei kai euqews auton

hoti ho kurios autou chreian echei kai eutheOs auton
G3754 G3588 G2962 G846 G5532 G2192 G2532 G2112 G846
Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj Adv pp Acc Sg m
that THE Master OF-it need IS-HAVING AND immediately it
Lord of-himit him it
apostelei wde
apostelei hOde
G649 G5602
vi Fut Act 3 Sg Adv
He-SHALL-BE-commissionING here
he-shall-be-dispatching
11:4 aphlqon de kai euron ton pwlon dedemenon pros 4 And they went their way, and
apElthon de kai heuron ton pOlon dedemenon pros
G565 G1161 G2532 G2147 G3588 G4454 G1210 G4314
found the colt tied by the door
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m Prep without in a place where two
THEY-FROM-CAME YET AND FOUND THE COLT HAVING-been-BOUND TOWARD ways met; and they loose him.
they-came-away
thn quran exw epi tou amfodou kai luousin auton

tEn thuran exO epi tou amphodou kai luousin auton
G3588 G2374 G1854 G1909 G3588 G296 G2532 G3089 G846
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Adv Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
THE DOOR OUT ON THE ENVELOPE-WAY AND THEY-ARE-LOOSING it
outside encircling-road him it
11:5 kai tines twn ekei esthkotwn elegon autois ti poieite 5 And certain of them that
kai tines tOn ekei hestEkotOn elegon autois ti poieite
G2532 G5100 G3588 G1563 G2476 G3004 G846 G5101 G4160
stood there said unto them,
Conj px Nom Pl m t_ Gen Pl m Adv vp Perf Act Gen Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Pl What do ye, loosing the colt?
AND ANY OF-THE-ones there HAVING-STOOD said to-them ANY YE-ARE-DOING
some of-the-ones standing what ?
luontes ton pwlon

luontes ton pOlon
G3089 G3588 G4454
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
LOOSING THE COLT
Mark 11
11:6 oi de eipon autois kaqws eneteilato o ihsous kai 6 And they said unto them
hoi de eipon autois kathOs eneteilato ho iEsous kai
G3588 G1161 G2036 G846 G2531 G1781 G3588 G2424 G2532
even as Jesus had commanded:
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Pl m Adv vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj and they let them go.
THE YET THEY-said to-them according-AS directs THE JESUS AND
afhkan autous
aphEkan autous
G863 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Pl m
THEY-FROM-LET them
they-let-off
11:7 kai hgagon ton pwlon pros ton ihsoun kai epebalon 7 And they brought the colt to
kai Egagon ton pOlon pros ton iEsoun kai epebalon
G2532 G71 G3588 G4454 G4314 G3588 G2424 G2532 G1911
Jesus, and cast their garments
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl on him; and he sat upon him.
AND THEY-LED THE COLT TOWARD THE JESUS AND THEY-ON-CAST(past)
they-cast-on(past)
autw ta imatia autwn kai ekaqisen ep autw

autO ta himatia autOn kai ekathisen ep autO
G846 G3588 G2440 G846 G2532 G2523 G1909 G846
pp Dat Sg m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Dat Sg m
to-it THE GARMENTS OF-them AND He-is-seated ON him
him it him it
11:8 polloi de ta imatia autwn estrwsan eis thn odon alloi 8 And many spread their
polloi de ta himatia autOn estrOsan eis tEn hodon alloi
G4183 G1161 G3588 G2440 G846 G4766 G1519 G3588 G3598 G243
garments in the way: and
a_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f a_ Nom Pl m others cut down branches off
MANY YET THE GARMENTS OF-them STREW INTO THE WAY others the trees, and strawed [them] in
road the way.
de stoibadas ekopton ek twn dendrwn kai estrwnnuon eis thn

de stoibadas ekopton ek tOn dendrOn kai estrOnnuon eis tEn
G1161 G4746 G2875 G1537 G3588 G1186 G2532 G4766 G1519 G3588
Conj n_ Acc Pl f vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f
YET soft-foliages STRUCK OUT OF-THE TREES AND STREWED INTO THE
chopped strewed-them
odon
hodon
G3598
n_ Acc Sg f
WAY
road
11:9 kai oi proagontes kai oi akolouqountes ekrazon 9 And they that went before,
kai hoi proagontes kai hoi akolouthountes ekrazon
G2532 G3588 G4254 G2532 G3588 G190 G2896
and they that followed, cried,
Conj t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl saying, Hosanna; Blessed [is]
AND THE ones-BEFORE-LEADING AND THE ones-followING CRIED he that cometh in the name of
ones-preceding ones-following the Lord:
legontes wsanna euloghmenos o ercomenos en onomati

legontes hOsanna eulogEmenos ho erchomenos en onomati
G3004 G5614 G2127 G3588 G2064 G1722 G3686
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Hebrew vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg n
sayING HOSANNA beING-blessED THE One-COMING IN NAME
one-coming
kuriou
kuriou
G2962
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-Master
of-Lord
11:10 euloghmenh h ercomenh basileia en onomati kuriou 10 Blessed [be] the kingdom of
eulogEmenE hE erchomenE basileia en onomati kuriou
G2127 G3588 G2064 G932 G1722 G3686 G2962
our father David, that cometh
vp Perf Pas Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep n_ Dat Sg n n_ Gen Sg m in the name of the Lord:
beING-blessED THE COMING KINGdom IN NAME OF-Master Hosanna in the highest.
of-Lord
tou patros hmwn dabid wsanna en tois uyistois

tou patros hEmOn dabid hOsanna en tois hupsistois
G3588 G3962 G2257 G1138 G5614 G1722 G3588 G5310
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Gen Pl ni proper Hebrew Prep t_ Dat Pl n a_ Dat Pl n
OF-THE FATHER OF-US DAVID HOSANNA IN THE HIGHest-ones
highest(p)
11:11 kai eishlqen eis ierosoluma o ihsous kai eis to 11 And Jesus entered into
kai eisElthen eis ierosoluma ho iEsous kai eis to
G2532 G1525 G1519 G2414 G3588 G2424 G2532 G1519 G3588
Jerusalem, and into the temple:
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg n and when he had looked round
AND INTO-CAME INTO JERUSALEM THE JESUS AND INTO THE about upon all things, and now
entered the eventide was come, he
Mark 11
went out unto Bethany with the

ieron kai peribleyamenos panta oyias hdh oushs ths twelve.
hieron kai periblepsamenos panta opsias EdE ousEs tEs
G2411 G2532 G4017 G3956 G3798 G2235 G5607 G3588
n_ Acc Sg n Conj vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m a_ Acc Pl n a_ Gen Sg f Adv vp Pres vxx Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f
SACRED-place AND ABOUT-looking ALL evening ALREADY OF-BEING THE
sanctuary looking-about of-evening being
wras exhlqen eis bhqanian meta twn dwdeka

hOras exElthen eis bEthanian meta tOn dOdeka
G5610 G1831 G1519 G963 G3326 G3588 G1427
n_ Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom
HOUR He-OUT-CAME INTO BETHANY WITH THE TWO-TEN
he-came-out twelve
11:12 kai th epaurion exelqontwn autwn apo bhqanias epeinasen 12 . And on the morrow, when
kai tE epaurion exelthontOn autOn apo bEthanias epeinasen
G2532 G3588 G1887 G1831 G846 G575 G963 G3983
they were come from Bethany,
Conj t_ Dat Sg f Adv vp 2Aor Act Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m Prep n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg he was hungry:
AND to-THE ON-MORROW OF-OUT-COMING them FROM BETHANY He-HUNGERS
of-coming-out
11:13 kai idwn sukhn makroqen ecousan fulla hlqen ei 13 And seeing a fig tree afar
kai idOn sukEn makrothen echousan phulla Elthen ei
G2532 G1492 G4808 G3113 G2192 G5444 G2064 G1487
off having leaves, he came, if
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg f Adv vp Pres Act Acc Sg f n_ Acc Pl n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Cond haply he might find any thing
AND PERCEIVING FIG-tree FAR-PLACE HAVING leaves He-CAME IF thereon: and when he came to
afar it, he found nothing but leaves;
for the time of figs was not
ara eurhsei ti en auth kai elqwn ep authn [yet].
ara heurEsei ti en autE kai elthOn ep autEn
G686 G2147 G5100 G1722 G846 G2532 G2064 G1909 G846
Part vi Fut Act 3 Sg px Acc Sg n Prep pp Dat Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep pp Acc Sg f
CONSEQUENTLY He-SHALL-BE-FINDING ANY IN her AND COMING ON her
anything herit herit
ouden euren ei mh fulla ou gar hn kairos sukwn

ouden heuren ei mE phulla hou gar En kairos sukOn
G3762 G2147 G1487 G3361 G5444 G3756 G1063 G2258 G2540 G4810
a_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Cond Part Neg n_ Acc Pl n Part Neg Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Pl n
NOT-YET-ONE He-FOUND IF NO leaves NOT for it-WAS SEASON OF-FIGS
nothing
11:14 kai apokriqeis o ihsous eipen auth mhketi ek 14 And Jesus answered and
kai apokritheis ho iEsous eipen autE mEketi ek
G2532 G611 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G3371 G1537
said unto it, No man eat fruit
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f Adv Prep of thee hereafter for ever. And
AND answerING THE JESUS said to-her NO-STILL OUT his disciples heard [it].
to-herit by-no-means-still
sou eis ton aiwna mhdeis karpon fagoi kai hkouon

sou eis ton aiOna mEdeis karpon phagoi kai Ekouon
G4675 G1519 G3588 G165 G3367 G2590 G5315 G2532 G191
pp 2 Gen Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m a_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vo 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl
OF-YOU INTO THE eon NO-YET-ONE FRUIT MAY-he-BE-EATING AND HEARD
anyone
oi maqhtai autou
hoi mathEtai autou
G3588 G3101 G846
t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m
THE LEARNers OF-Him
disciples
11:15 kai ercontai eis ierosoluma kai eiselqwn o ihsous 15 And they come to
kai erchontai eis ierosoluma kai eiselthOn ho iEsous
G2532 G2064 G1519 G2414 G2532 G1525 G3588 G2424
Jerusalem: and Jesus went into
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m the temple, and began to cast
AND THEY-ARE-COMING INTO JERUSALEM AND INTO-COMING THE JESUS out them that sold and bought
entering in the temple, and overthrew
the tables of the
eis to ieron hrxato ekballein tous pwlountas kai moneychangers, and the seats
eis to hieron Erxato ekballein tous pOlountas kai of them that sold doves;
G1519 G3588 G2411 G756 G1544 G3588 G4453 G2532
Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Conj
INTO THE SACRED-place He-begins TO-BE-OUT-CASTING THE ones-SELLING AND
sanctuary to-be-casting-out ones-selling
agorazontas en tw ierw kai tas trapezas twn kollubistwn

agorazontas en tO hierO kai tas trapezas tOn kollubistOn
G59 G1722 G3588 G2411 G2532 G3588 G5132 G3588 G2855
vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n Conj t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
ones-BUYING IN THE SACRED-place AND THE tables OF-THE LOPPers
ones-buying sanctuary brokers
kai tas kaqedras twn pwlountwn tas peristeras katestreyen

kai tas kathedras tOn pOlountOn tas peristeras katestrepsen
G2532 G3588 G2515 G3588 G4453 G3588 G4058 G2690
Conj t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Gen Pl m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND THE DOWN-SETTLES OF-THE ones-SELLING THE DOVES He-DOWN-TURNS
seats ones-selling he-overturns
Mark 11
11:16 kai ouk hfien ina tis dienegkh skeuos dia tou 16 And would not suffer that
kai ouk Ephien hina tis dienegkE skeuos dia tou
G2532 G3756 G863 G2443 G5100 G1308 G4632 G1223 G3588
any man should carry [any]
Conj Part Neg vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj px Nom Sg m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg n vessel through the temple.
AND NOT FROM-LET THAT ANY MAY-BE-THRU-CARRYING INSTRUMENT THRU THE
he-gave-leave anyone may-be-carrying-through vessel through
ierou
hierou
G2411
n_ Gen Sg n
SACRED-place
sanctuary
11:17 kai edidasken legwn autois ou gegraptai oti o 17 And he taught, saying unto
kai edidasken legOn autois ou gegraptai hoti ho
G2532 G1321 G3004 G846 G3756 G1125 G3754 G3588
them, Is it not written, My
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Dat Pl m Part Neg vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m house shall be called of all
AND He-TAUGHT sayING to-them NOT it-HAS-been-WRITTEN that THE nations the house of prayer?
but ye have made it a den of
thieves.
oikos mou oikos proseuchs klhqhsetai pasin tois eqnesin
oikos mou oikos proseuchEs klEthEsetai pasin tois ethnesin
G3624 G3450 G3624 G4335 G2564 G3956 G3588 G1484
n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut Pas 3 Sg a_ Dat Pl n t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n
HOME OF-ME HOME OF-prayer SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED to-ALL THE NATIONS
house house
umeis de epoihsate auton sphlaion lhstwn

humeis de epoiEsate auton spElaion lEstOn
G5210 G1161 G4160 G846 G4693 G3027
pp 2 Nom Pl Conj vi Aor Act 2 Pl pp Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Pl m
YOU(p) YET make SAME CAVE OF-ROBBERS
ye him it
11:18 kai hkousan oi grammateis kai oi arciereis kai ezhtoun 18 And the scribes and chief
kai Ekousan hoi grammateis kai hoi archiereis kai ezEtoun
G2532 G191 G3588 G1122 G2532 G3588 G749 G2532 G2212
priests heard [it], and sought
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl how they might destroy him:
AND HEAR THE WRITers AND THE chief-SACRED-ones AND THEY-SOUGHT for they feared him, because all
scribes chief-priests the people was astonished at
his doctrine.
pws auton apolesousin efobounto gar auton oti pas
pOs auton apolesousin ephobounto gar auton hoti pas
G4459 G846 G622 G5399 G1063 G846 G3754 G3956
Adv Int pp Acc Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Pl vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl Conj pp Acc Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m
how Him THEY-SHALL-BE-destroyING THEY-FEARED for Him that EVERY
how ? entire
o oclos exeplhsseto epi th didach autou

ho ochlos exeplEsseto epi tE didachE autou
G3588 G3793 G1605 G1909 G3588 G1322 G846
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m
THE THRONG was-astonishED ON THE TEACHing OF-Him
11:19 kai ote oye egeneto exeporeueto exw ths polews 19 And when even was come,
kai hote opse egeneto exeporeueto exO tEs poleOs
G2532 G3753 G3796 G1096 G1607 G1854 G3588 G4172
he went out of the city.
Conj Adv Adv vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Adv t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
AND when evening BECAME He-OUT-WENT OUT OF-THE city
it-became he-went-out outside the
11:20 kai prwi paraporeuomenoi eidon thn sukhn exhrammenhn 20 And in the morning, as they
kai prOi paraporeuomenoi eidon tEn sukEn exErammenEn
G2532 G4404 G3899 G1492 G3588 G4808 G3583
passed by, they saw the fig tree
Conj Adv vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f dried up from the roots.
AND morning BESIDE-GOING THEY-PERCEIVED THE FIG-tree HAVING-been-DRIED
in-the-morning going-by having-been-withered
ek rizwn
ek rizOn
G1537 G4491
Prep n_ Gen Pl f
OUT OF-ROOTS
11:21 kai anamnhsqeis o petros legei autw rabbi ide 21 And Peter calling to
kai anamnEstheis ho petros legei autO rabbi ide
G2532 G363 G3588 G4074 G3004 G846 G4461 G1492
remembrance saith unto him,
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Hebrew vm Aor Act 2 Sg Master, behold, the fig tree
AND BEING-UP-REMINDED THE Peter IS-sayING to-Him RABBI BE-PERCEIVING which thou cursedst is
recollecting lo ! withered away.
h sukh hn kathrasw exhrantai

hE sukE hEn katErasO exErantai
G3588 G4808 G3739 G2672 G3583
t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pr Acc Sg f vi Aor midD 2 Sg vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
THE FIG-tree WHICH YOU-DOWN-EXECRATE HAS-DRIED
you-curse has-withered
Mark 11
11:22 kai apokriqeis ihsous legei autois ecete pistin qeou 22 And Jesus answering saith
kai apokritheis iEsous legei autois echete pistin theou
G2532 G611 G2424 G3004 G846 G2192 G4102 G2316
unto them, Have faith in God.
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
AND answerING JESUS IS-sayING to-them BE-YE-HAVING BELIEF OF-God
be-ye-having ! faith
11:23 amhn gar legw umin oti os an eiph tw orei 23 For verily I say unto you,
amEn gar legO humin hoti hos an eipE tO orei
G281 G1063 G3004 G5213 G3754 G3739 G302 G2036 G3588 G3735
That whosoever shall say unto
Hebrew Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj pr Nom Sg m Part vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n this mountain, Be thou
AMEN for I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that WHO EVER MAY-BE-sayING to-THE mountain removed, and be thou cast into
verily to-ye the sea; and shall not doubt in
his heart, but shall believe that
toutw arqhti kai blhqhti eis thn qalassan kai mh those things which he saith
toutO arthEti kai blEthEti eis tEn thalassan kai mE shall come to pass; he shall
G5129 G142 G2532 G906 G1519 G3588 G2281 G2532 G3361
pd Dat Sg n vm Aor Pas 2 Sg Conj vm Aor Pas 2 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj Part Neg have whatsoever he saith.
this BE-BEING-LIFTED AND BE-BEING-CAST INTO THE SEA AND NO
be-you-being-picked-up ! be-you-being-cast !
diakriqh en th kardia autou alla pisteush oti

diakrithE en tE kardia autou alla pisteusE hoti
G1252 G1722 G3588 G2588 G846 G235 G4100 G3754
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg Conj
MAY-BE-BEING-THRU-JUDGED IN THE HEART OF-him but SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING that
may-be-doubting
a legei ginetai estai autw o ean eiph

ha legei ginetai estai autO ho ean eipE
G3739 G3004 G1096 G2071 G846 G3739 G1437 G2036
pr Nom Pl n vi Pres Act 3 Sg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg vi Fut vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m pr Acc Sg n Cond vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
WHICH he-IS-sayING IS-BECOMING SHALL-BE to-him WHICH IF-EVER he-MAY-BE-sayING
which(p) is-occurring it-shall-be
11:24 dia touto legw umin panta osa an proseucomenoi 24 Therefore I say unto you,
dia touto legO humin panta hosa an proseuchomenoi
G1223 G5124 G3004 G5213 G3956 G3745 G302 G4336
What things soever ye desire,
Prep pd Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl a_ Acc Pl n pk Acc Pl n Part vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m when ye pray, believe that ye
THRU this I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) ALL as-much-as EVER ones-prayING receive [them], and ye shall
because-of to-ye all-things whatever praying have [them].
aiteisqe pisteuete oti lambanete kai estai umin

aiteisthe pisteuete hoti lambanete kai estai humin
G154 G4100 G3754 G2983 G2532 G2071 G5213
vi Pres Mid 2 Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi Fut vxx 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
YE-ARE-REQUESTING BE-BELIEVING that YE-ARE-GETTING-[UP] AND it-SHALL-BE to-YOU(p)
be-ye-believing ! ye-are-obtaining to-ye
11:25 kai otan sthkhte proseucomenoi afiete ei ti 25 And when ye stand praying,
kai hotan stEkEte proseuchomenoi aphiete ei ti
G2532 G3752 G4739 G4336 G863 G1487 G5100
forgive, if ye have ought
Conj Conj vs Pres Act 2 Pl vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl Cond px Acc Sg n against any: that your Father
AND when-EVER YE-MAY-BE-STANDING-firm prayING BE-FROM-LETTING IF ANY also which is in heaven may
whenever ye-may-be-standing be-ye-forgiving ! anything forgive you your trespasses.
ecete kata tinos ina kai o pathr umwn o en

echete kata tinos hina kai ho patEr humOn ho en
G2192 G2596 G5100 G2443 G2532 G3588 G3962 G5216 G3588 G1722
vi Pres Act 2 Pl Prep px Gen Sg m Conj Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Nom Sg m Prep
YE-ARE-HAVING DOWN OF-ANY THAT AND THE FATHER OF-YOU(p) THE IN
against anyone also of-ye the-one
tois ouranois afh umin ta paraptwmata umwn

tois ouranois aphE humin ta paraptOmata humOn
G3588 G3772 G863 G5213 G3588 G3900 G5216
t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp 2 Gen Pl
THE heavens MAY-BE-FROM-LETTING to-YOU(p) THE BESIDE-FALLS OF-YOU(p)
may-be-forgiving ye offenses of-ye
11:26 ei de umeis ouk afiete oude o pathr umwn 26 But if ye do not forgive,
ei de humeis ouk aphiete oude ho patEr humOn
G1487 G1161 G5210 G3756 G863 G3761 G3588 G3962 G5216
neither will your Father which
Cond Conj pp 2 Nom Pl Part Neg vi Pres Act 2 Pl Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl is in heaven forgive your
IF YET YOU(p) NOT ARE-FROM-LETTING NOT-YET THE FATHER OF-YOU(p) trespasses.
are-forgiving neither
o en tois ouranois afhsei ta paraptwmata umwn

ho en tois ouranois aphEsei ta paraptOmata humOn
G3588 G1722 G3588 G3772 G863 G3588 G3900 G5216
t_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp 2 Gen Pl
THE IN THE heavens SHALL-BE-FROM-LETTING THE BESIDE-FALLS OF-YOU(p)
shall-be-forgiving offenses
11:27 kai ercontai palin eis ierosoluma kai en tw ierw 27 . And they come again to
kai erchontai palin eis ierosoluma kai en tO hierO
G2532 G2064 G3825 G1519 G2414 G2532 G1722 G3588 G2411
Jerusalem: and as he was
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Adv Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n walking in the temple, there
AND THEY-ARE-COMING AGAIN INTO JERUSALEM AND IN THE SACRED-place come to him the chief priests,
sanctuary and the scribes, and the elders,
Mark 11
peripatountos autou ercontai pros auton oi arciereis kai

peripatountos autou erchontai pros auton hoi archiereis kai
G4043 G846 G2064 G4314 G846 G3588 G749 G2532
vp Pres Act Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj
OF-ABOUT-TREADING OF-Him ARE-COMING TOWARD Him THE chief-SACRED-ones AND
of-walking chief-priests
oi grammateis kai oi presbuteroi

hoi grammateis kai hoi presbuteroi
G3588 G1122 G2532 G3588 G4245
t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
THE WRITers AND THE SENIORS
scribes elders
11:28 kai legousin autw en poia exousia tauta poieis kai 28 And say unto him, By what
kai legousin autO en poia exousia tauta poieis kai
G2532 G3004 G846 G1722 G4169 G1849 G5023 G4160 G2532
authority doest thou these
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Prep pi Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 2 Sg Conj things? and who gave thee this
AND THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him IN ?-THE-WHICH authority these YOU-ARE-DOING AND authority to do these things?
which ? these-things
tis soi thn exousian tauthn edwken ina tauta poihs

tis soi tEn exousian tautEn edOken hina tauta poiEs
G5101 G4671 G3588 G1849 G3778 G1325 G2443 G5023 G4160
pi Nom Sg m pp 2 Dat Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pd Acc Pl n vs Pres Act 2 Sg
ANY to-YOU THE authority this GIVES THAT these YOU-MAY-BE-DOING
who ? you these-things
11:29 o de ihsous apokriqeis eipen autois eperwthsw 29 And Jesus answered and
ho de iEsous apokritheis eipen autois eperOtEsO
G3588 G1161 G2424 G611 G2036 G846 G1905
said unto them, I will also ask
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vi Fut Act 1 Sg of you one question, and
THE YET JESUS answerING said to-them SHALL-BE-inquirING-of answer me, and I will tell you
by what authority I do these
things.
umas kagw ena logon kai apokriqhte moi kai erw
humas kagO hena logon kai apokrithEte moi kai erO
G5209 G2504 G1520 G3056 G2532 G611 G3427 G2532 G2046
pp 2 Acc Pl pp 1 Nom Sg Con a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vm Aor pasD 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg Conj vi Fut Act 1 Sg
YOU(p) AND-I ONE saying AND BE-answerING to-ME AND I-SHALL-BE-declarING
ye also-I word be-ye-answering ! me
umin en poia exousia tauta poiw

humin en poia exousia tauta poiO
G5213 G1722 G4169 G1849 G5023 G4160
pp 2 Dat Pl Prep pi Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 1 Sg
to-YOU(p) IN ?-THE-WHICH authority these I-AM-DOING
to-ye which ? these-things
11:30 to baptisma iwannou ex ouranou hn h ex anqrwpwn 30 The baptism of John, was

to baptisma iOannou ex ouranou En E ex anthrOpOn
G3588 G908 G2491 G1537 G3772 G2258 G2228 G1537 G444
[it] from heaven, or of men?
t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n n_ Gen Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Part Prep n_ Gen Pl m answer me.
THE DIPism OF-JOHN OUT OF-heaven it-WAS OR OUT OF-humans
baptism
apokriqhte moi
apokrithEte moi
G611 G3427
vm Aor pasD 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg
BE-answerING to-ME
be-ye-answering ! me
11:31 kai elogizonto pros eautous legontes ean eipwmen ex 31 And they reasoned with
kai elogizonto pros heautous legontes ean eipOmen ex
G2532 G3049 G4314 G1438 G3004 G1437 G2036 G1537
themselves, saying, If we shall
Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep pf 3 Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Cond vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl Prep say, From heaven; he will say,
AND AND-THEY-accounted TOWARD selves sayING IF-EVER WE-MAY-BE-sayING OUT Why then did ye not believe
and-they-reckoned themselves him?
ouranou erei dia ti oun ouk episteusate autw

ouranou erei dia ti oun ouk episteusate autO
G3772 G2046 G1223 G5101 G3767 G3756 G4100 G846
n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg Prep pi Acc Sg n Conj Part Neg vi Aor Act 2 Pl pp Dat Sg m
OF-heaven He-SHALL-BE-declarING THRU ANY THEN NOT YE-BELIEVE to-him
because-of what ? him
11:32 all ean eipwmen ex anqrwpwn efobounto ton laon 32 But if we shall say, Of men;
all ean eipOmen ex anthrOpOn ephobounto ton laon
G235 G1437 G2036 G1537 G444 G5399 G3588 G2992
they feared the people: for all
Conj Cond vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl Prep n_ Gen Pl m vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m [men] counted John, that he
but IF-EVER WE-MAY-BE-sayING OUT OF-humans THEY-FEARED THE PEOPLE was a prophet indeed.
apantes gar eicon ton iwannhn oti ontws profhths hn

hapantes gar eichon ton iOannEn hoti ontOs prophEtEs En
G537 G1063 G2192 G3588 G2491 G3754 G3689 G4396 G2258
a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj Adv n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg
ALL(emph.) for HAD THE JOHN that BEINGly BEFORE-AVERer he-WAS
really prophet
Mark 11 - Mark 12
11:33 kai apokriqentes legousin tw ihsou ouk oidamen kai 33 And they answered and said
kai apokrithentes legousin tO iEsou ouk oidamen kai
G2532 G611 G3004 G3588 G2424 G3756 G1492 G2532
unto Jesus, We cannot tell.
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Part Neg vi Perf Act 1 Pl Conj And Jesus answering saith
AND answerING THEY-ARE-sayING to-THE JESUS NOT WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED AND unto them, Neither do I tell you
we-are-aware by what authority I do these
things.
o ihsous apokriqeis legei autois oude egw legw
ho iEsous apokritheis legei autois oude egO legO
G3588 G2424 G611 G3004 G846 G3761 G1473 G3004
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Adv pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg
THE JESUS answerING IS-sayING to-them NOT-YET I AM-sayING
neither am-telling
umin en poia exousia tauta poiw

humin en poia exousia tauta poiO
G5213 G1722 G4169 G1849 G5023 G4160
pp 2 Dat Pl Prep pi Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 1 Sg
to-YOU(p) IN ?-THE-WHICH authority these I-AM-DOING
ye which ? these-things
Mark 12
12:1 kai hrxato autois en parabolais legein ampelwna efuteusen 1 . And he began to speak unto
kai Erxato autois en parabolais legein ampelOna ephuteusen
G2532 G756 G846 G1722 G3850 G3004 G290 G5452
them by parables. A [certain]
Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Prep n_ Dat Pl f vn Pres Act n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg man planted a vineyard, and
AND He-begins to-them IN BESIDE-CASTS TO-BE-sayING VINEyard plants set an hedge about [it], and
parables digged [a place for] the
winefat, and built a tower, and
anqrwpos kai perieqhken fragmon kai wruxen upolhnion kai wkodomhsen let it out to husbandmen, and
anthrOpos kai periethEken phragmon kai Oruxen hupolEnion kai OkodomEsen went into a far country.
G444 G2532 G4060 G5418 G2532 G3736 G5276 G2532 G3618
n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
human AND ABOUT-PLACES BARRIER AND EXCAVATES UNDER-TROUGH AND HOME-BUILDS
he-places-about stone-dike vat builds
purgon kai exedoto auton gewrgois kai apedhmhsen

purgon kai exedoto auton geOrgois kai apedEmEsen
G4444 G2532 G1554 G846 G1092 G2532 G589
n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m n_ Dat Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
TOWER AND OUT-GAVE him to-LAND-ACTers AND travels
leased him it to-farmers
12:2 kai apesteilen pros tous gewrgous tw kairw doulon ina para 2 And at the season he sent to
kai apesteilen pros tous geOrgous tO kairO doulon hina para
G2532 G649 G4314 G3588 G1092 G3588 G2540 G1401 G2443 G3844
the husbandmen a servant, that
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj Prep he might receive from the
AND he-commissions TOWARD THE LAND-ACTers to-THE SEASON SLAVE THAT BESIDE husbandmen of the fruit of the
he-dispatches farmers vineyard.
twn gewrgwn labh apo tou karpou tou ampelwnos

tOn geOrgOn labE apo tou karpou tou ampelOnos
G3588 G1092 G2983 G575 G3588 G2590 G3588 G290
t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
THE LAND-ACTers he-MAY-BE-GETTING FROM THE FRUIT OF-THE VINEyard
farmers
12:3 oi de labontes auton edeiran kai apesteilan kenon 3And they caught [him], and
hoi de labontes auton edeiran kai apesteilan kenon
G3588 G1161 G2983 G846 G1194 G2532 G649 G2756
beat him, and sent [him] away
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Acc Sg m empty.
THE YET GETTING him THEY-SKIN AND THEY-commission EMPTY
taking they-lash-him dispatch-him
12:4 kai palin apesteilen pros autous allon doulon kakeinon 4 And again he sent unto them
kai palin apesteilen pros autous allon doulon kakeinon
G2532 G3825 G649 G4314 G846 G243 G1401 G2548
another servant; and at him
Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pd Acc Sg m Con they cast stones, and wounded
AND AGAIN he-commissions TOWARD them other SLAVE AND-that-one [him] in the head, and sent
he-dispatches another and-that-one [him] away shamefully
handled.
liqobolhsantes ekefalaiwsan kai apesteilan htimwmenon
lithobolEsantes ekephalaiOsan kai apesteilan EtimOmenon
G3036 G2775 G2532 G649 G821
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m
STONE-CASTing THEY-HEAD AND commission HAVING-UN-VALUED
pelting-with-stones they-hit-his-head dispatch-him having-dishonored-him
12:5 kai palin allon apesteilen kakeinon apekteinan kai pollous allous 5 And again he sent another;
kai palin allon apesteilen kakeinon apekteinan kai pollous allous
G2532 G3825 G243 G649 G2548 G615 G2532 G4183 G243
and him they killed, and many
Conj Adv a_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pd Acc Sg m Con vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m others; beating some, and
AND AGAIN other he-commissions AND-that-one THEY-FROM-KILL AND MANY others killing some.
another he-dispatches and-that-one they-kill
tous men derontes tous de apokteinontes

tous men derontes tous de apokteinontes
G3588 G3303 G1194 G3588 G1161 G615
t_ Acc Pl m Part vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
THE-ones INDEED SKINNING THE-ones YET FROM-KILLING
the-ones lashing the-ones killing
12:6 eti oun ena uion ecwn agaphton autou apesteilen kai 6 Having yet therefore one son,
eti oun hena huion echOn agapEton autou apesteilen kai
G2089 G3767 G1520 G5207 G2192 G27 G846 G649 G2532
his wellbeloved, he sent him
Adv Conj a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m a_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj also last unto them, saying,
STILL THEN ONE SON HAVING beLOVED OF-him he-commissions AND They will reverence my son.
he-dispatches also
auton pros autous escaton legwn oti entraphsontai ton

auton pros autous eschaton legOn hoti entrapEsontai ton
G846 G4314 G846 G2078 G3004 G3754 G1788 G3588
pp Acc Sg m Prep pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Fut Pas 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
him TOWARD them LAST sayING that THEY-SHALL-BE-abashING THE
they-shall-be-respecting
uion mou
huion mou
G5207 G3450
n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg
SON OF-ME
Mark 12
12:7 ekeinoi de oi gewrgoi eipon pros eautous oti outos 7 But those husbandmen said
ekeinoi de hoi geOrgoi eipon pros heautous hoti houtos
G1565 G1161 G3588 G1092 G2036 G4314 G1438 G3754 G3778
among themselves, This is the
pd Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pf 3 Acc Pl m Conj pd Nom Sg m heir; come, let us kill him, and
those YET THE LAND-ACTers said TOWARD selves that this the inheritance shall be ours.
farmers themselves
estin o klhronomos deute apokteinwmen auton kai

estin ho klEronomos deute apokteinOmen auton kai
G2076 G3588 G2818 G1205 G615 G846 G2532
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vm txx vxx 2 Pl vs Pres Act 1 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj
IS THE tenant HITHER WE-MAY-BE-FROM-KILLING him AND
enjoyer-of-the-allotment hither-ye ! we-may-be-killing
hmwn estai h klhronomia

hEmOn estai hE klEronomia
G2257 G2071 G3588 G2817
pp 1 Gen Pl vi Fut vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
OF-US SHALL-BE THE tenancy
enjoyment-of-the-allotment
12:8 kai labontes auton apekteinan kai exebalon exw tou 8 And they took him, and
kai labontes auton apekteinan kai exebalon exO tou
G2532 G2983 G846 G615 G2532 G1544 G1854 G3588
killed [him], and cast [him] out
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Adv t_ Gen Sg m of the vineyard.
AND GETTING him THEY-FROM-KILL AND THEY-OUT-CAST(past) OUT OF-THE
taking they-kill-him they-cast-out(past)-him
ampelwnos
ampelOnos
G290
n_ Gen Sg m
VINEyard
12:9 ti oun poihsei o kurios tou ampelwnos eleusetai 9 What shall therefore the lord
ti oun poiEsei ho kurios tou ampelOnos eleusetai
G5101 G3767 G4160 G3588 G2962 G3588 G290 G2064
of the vineyard do? he will
pi Acc Sg n Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut midD 3 Sg come and destroy the
ANY THEN SHALL-BE-DOING THE master OF-THE VINEyard he-SHALL-BE-COMING husbandmen, and will give the
what ? lord vineyard unto others.
kai apolesei tous gewrgous kai dwsei ton ampelwna allois

kai apolesei tous geOrgous kai dOsei ton ampelOna allois
G2532 G622 G3588 G1092 G2532 G1325 G3588 G290 G243
Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m a_ Dat Pl m
AND SHALL-BE-destroyING THE LAND-ACTers AND SHALL-BE-GIVING THE VINEyard to-others
farmers
12:10 oude thn grafhn tauthn anegnwte liqon on apedokimasan 10 And have ye not read this
oude tEn graphEn tautEn anegnOte lithon hon apedokimasan
G3761 G3588 G1124 G3778 G314 G3037 G3739 G593
scripture; The stone which the
Adv t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg m pr Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl builders rejected is become the
NOT-YET THE WRITing this YE-read(past) STONE WHICH FROM-test head of the corner:
scripture ye-did-read reject
oi oikodomountes outos egenhqh eis kefalhn gwnias

hoi oikodomountes houtos egenEthE eis kephalEn gOnias
G3588 G3618 G3778 G1096 G1519 G2776 G1137
t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pd Nom Sg m vi Aor pasD 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
THE ones-HOME-BUILDING this WAS-BECOME INTO HEAD OF-CORNER
ones-building
12:11 para kuriou egeneto auth kai estin qaumasth en ofqalmois 11 This was the Lord's doing,
para kuriou egeneto hautE kai estin thaumastE en ophthalmois
G3844 G2962 G1096 G3778 G2532 G2076 G2298 G1722 G3788
and it is marvellous in our
Prep n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg pd Nom Sg f Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg f Prep n_ Dat Pl m eyes?
BESIDE OF-Master BECAME this AND it-IS MARVELous IN VIEWers
Lord eyes
hmwn
hEmOn
G2257
pp 1 Gen Pl
OF-US
12:12 kai ezhtoun auton krathsai kai efobhqhsan ton oclon 12 And they sought to lay hold
kai ezEtoun auton kratEsai kai ephobEthEsan ton ochlon
G2532 G2212 G846 G2902 G2532 G5399 G3588 G3793
on him, but feared the people:
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m vn Aor Act Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m for they knew that he had
AND THEY-SOUGHT Him TO-HOLD AND THEY-WERE-afraid-of THE THRONG spoken the parable against
them: and they left him, and
went their way.
egnwsan gar oti pros autous thn parabolhn eipen kai
egnOsan gar hoti pros autous tEn parabolEn eipen kai
G1097 G1063 G3754 G4314 G846 G3588 G3850 G2036 G2532
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj Conj Prep pp Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj
THEY-KNOW for that TOWARD them THE BESIDE-CAST He-said AND
parable he-spoke
Mark 12
afentes auton aphlqon

aphentes auton apElthon
G863 G846 G565
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
FROM-LETTING Him THEY-FROM-CAME
leaving they-came-away
12:13 kai apostellousin pros auton tinas twn farisaiwn kai 13 . And they send unto him
kai apostellousin pros auton tinas tOn pharisaiOn kai
G2532 G649 G4314 G846 G5100 G3588 G5330 G2532
certain of the Pharisees and of
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep pp Acc Sg m px Acc Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj the Herodians, to catch him in
AND THEY-ARE-commissionING TOWARD Him ANY OF-THE PHARISEES AND [his] words.
they-are-dispatching some
twn hrwdianwn ina auton agreuswsin logw

tOn hErOdianOn hina auton agreusOsin logO
G3588 G2265 G2443 G846 G64 G3056
t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj pp Acc Sg m vs Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE HERODians THAT Him THEY-SHOULD-BE-CATCHING to-saying
to-word
12:14 oi de elqontes legousin autw didaskale oidamen 14 And when they were come,
hoi de elthontes legousin autO didaskale oidamen
G3588 G1161 G2064 G3004 G846 G1320 G1492
they say unto him, Master, we
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m vi Perf Act 1 Pl know that thou art true, and
THE YET COMING THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him TEACHer ! WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED carest for no man: for thou
we-are-aware regardest not the person of
men, but teachest the way of
oti alhqhs ei kai ou melei soi peri oudenos ou God in truth: Is it lawful to
hoti alEthEs ei kai ou melei soi peri oudenos ou give tribute to Caesar, or not?
G3754 G227 G1488 G2532 G3756 G3199 G4671 G4012 G3762 G3756
Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 2 Sg Conj Part Neg vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Prep a_ Gen Sg m Part Neg
that TRUE YOU-ARE AND NOT IS-CARING to-YOU ABOUT NOT-YET-ONE NOT
it-is-caring anyone
gar blepeis eis proswpon anqrwpwn all ep alhqeias thn odon

gar blepeis eis prosOpon anthrOpOn all ep alEtheias tEn hodon
G1063 G991 G1519 G4383 G444 G235 G1909 G225 G3588 G3598
Conj vi Pres Act 2 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Pl m Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
for YOU-ARE-lookING INTO face OF-humans but ON TRUTH THE WAY
tou qeou didaskeis exestin khnson kaisari dounai h ou

tou theou didaskeis exestin kEnson kaisari dounai E ou
G3588 G2316 G1321 G1832 G2778 G2541 G1325 G2228 G3756
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Sg vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vn 2Aor Act Part Part Neg
OF-THE God YOU-ARE-TEACHING it-IS-allowed POLL-TAX to-CEASAR TO-GIVE OR NOT
are-teaching
12:15 dwmen h mh dwmen o de eidws autwn 15 Shall we give, or shall we

dOmen E mE dOmen ho de eidOs autOn
G1325 G2228 G3361 G1325 G3588 G1161 G1492 G846
not give? But he, knowing their
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl Part Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Perf Act Nom Sg m pp Gen Pl m hypocrisy, said unto them,
WE-MAY-BE-GIVING OR NO WE-MAY-BE-GIVING THE YET HAVING-PERCEIVED OF-them Why tempt ye me? bring me a
penny, that I may see [it].
thn upokrisin eipen autois ti me peirazete ferete

tEn hupokrisin eipen autois ti me peirazete pherete
G3588 G5272 G2036 G846 G5101 G3165 G3985 G5342
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg n pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres Act 2 Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl
THE hypocrisy He-said to-them ANY ME YE-ARE-tryING BE-YE-CARRYING
why ? be-ye-bringing !
moi dhnarion ina idw

moi dEnarion hina idO
G3427 G1220 G2443 G1492
pp 1 Dat Sg n_ Acc Sg n Conj vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
to-ME DENARIUS THAT I-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING
me I-may-be-perceiving-it
12:16 oi de hnegkan kai legei autois tinos h eikwn 16 And they brought [it]. And
hoi de Enegkan kai legei autois tinos hE eikOn
G3588 G1161 G5342 G2532 G3004 G846 G5101 G3588 G1504
he saith unto them, Whose [is]
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pi Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f this image and superscription?
THE YET THEY-CARRY AND He-IS-sayING to-them OF-ANY THE image And they said unto him,
they-bring-it of-whom ? Caesar's.
auth kai h epigrafh oi de eipon autw kaisaros

hautE kai hE epigraphE hoi de eipon autO kaisaros
G3778 G2532 G3588 G1923 G3588 G1161 G2036 G846 G2541
pd Nom Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
this AND THE ON-WRITing THE YET THEY-said to-Him OF-CEASAR
inscription
12:17 kai apokriqeis o ihsous eipen autois apodote ta 17 And Jesus answering said
kai apokritheis ho iEsous eipen autois apodote ta
G2532 G611 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G591 G3588
unto them, Render to Caesar
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl n the things that are Caesar's,
AND answerING THE JESUS said to-them BE-YE-FROM-GIVING THE and to God the things that are
be-ye-paying ! the(p) God's. And they marvelled at
Mark 12
him.
kaisaros kaisari kai ta tou qeou tw qew kai eqaumasan
kaisaros kaisari kai ta tou theou tO theO kai ethaumasan
G2541 G2541 G2532 G3588 G3588 G2316 G3588 G2316 G2532 G2296
n_ Gen Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
OF-CEASAR to-CEASAR AND THE OF-THE God to-THE God AND THEY-MARVEL
the(p)
ep autw
ep autO
G1909 G846
Prep pp Dat Sg m
ON Him
12:18 kai ercontai saddoukaioi pros auton oitines legousin anastasin 18 . Then come unto him the
kai erchontai saddoukaioi pros auton hoitines legousin anastasin
G2532 G2064 G4523 G4314 G846 G3748 G3004 G386
Sadducees, which say there is
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl m Prep pp Acc Sg m pr Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg f no resurrection; and they asked
AND ARE-COMING SADDUCEES TOWARD Him WHO-ANY ARE-sayING UP-STANDing him, saying,
who-any resurrection
mh einai kai ephrwthsan auton legontes

mE einai kai epErOtEsan auton legontes
G3361 G1511 G2532 G1905 G846 G3004
Part Neg vn Pres vxx Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
NO TO-BE AND THEY-inquire-of Him sayING
12:19 didaskale mwshs egrayen hmin oti ean tinos adelfos 19 Master, Moses wrote unto
didaskale mOsEs egrapsen hEmin hoti ean tinos adelphos
G1320 G3475 G1125 G2254 G3754 G1437 G5100 G80
us, If a man's brother die, and
n_ Voc Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl Conj Cond px Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg m leave [his] wife [behind him],
TEACHer ! MOSES WRITES to-US that IF-EVER OF-ANY brother and leave no children, that his
of-anyone brother should take his wife,
and raise up seed unto his
apoqanh kai kataliph gunaika kai tekna mh afh ina brother.
apothanE kai katalipE gunaika kai tekna mE aphE hina
G599 G2532 G2641 G1135 G2532 G5043 G3361 G863 G2443
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Pl n Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj
MAY-BE-FROM-DYING AND MAY-BE-leavING WOMAN AND offsprings NO MAY-BE-FROM-LETTING THAT
may-be-dying wife children may-be-leaving
labh o adelfos autou thn gunaika autou kai

labE ho adelphos autou tEn gunaika autou kai
G2983 G3588 G80 G846 G3588 G1135 G846 G2532
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj
MAY-BE-GETTING THE brother OF-him THE WOMAN OF-him AND
may-be-taking wife
exanasthsh sperma tw adelfw autou

exanastEsE sperma tO adelphO autou
G1817 G4690 G3588 G80 G846
vs Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m
SHOULD-BE-OUT-UP-STANDING seed to-THE brother OF-him
should-be-raising-up
12:20 epta oun adelfoi hsan kai o prwtos elaben gunaika kai 20 Now there were seven
hepta oun adelphoi Esan kai ho prOtos elaben gunaika kai
G2033 G3767 G80 G2258 G2532 G3588 G4413 G2983 G1135 G2532
brethren: and the first took a
a_ Nom Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f Conj wife, and dying left no seed.
SEVEN THEN brothers WERE AND THE BEFORE-most GOT WOMAN AND
there-were first wife
apoqnhskwn ouk afhken sperma

apothnEskOn ouk aphEken sperma
G599 G3756 G863 G4690
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n
FROM-DYING NOT FROM-LETS seed
dying leaves
12:21 kai o deuteros elaben authn kai apeqanen kai oude 21 And the second took her,
kai ho deuteros elaben autEn kai apethanen kai oude
G2532 G3588 G1208 G2983 G846 G2532 G599 G2532 G3761
and died, neither left he any
Conj t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Adv seed: and the third likewise.
AND THE second GOT her AND FROM-DIED AND NOT-YET
second-one died neither
autos afhken sperma kai o tritos wsautws

autos aphEken sperma kai ho tritos hOsautOs
G846 G863 G4690 G2532 G3588 G5154 G5615
pp Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Adv
he FROM-LETS seed AND THE third AS-SAMEly
leaves third-one similarly
12:22 kai elabon authn oi epta kai ouk afhkan sperma escath 22 And the seven had her, and
kai elabon autEn hoi hepta kai ouk aphEkan sperma eschatE
G2532 G2983 G846 G3588 G2033 G2532 G3756 G863 G4690 G2078
left no seed: last of all the
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg f t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Conj Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg n a_ Nom Sg f woman died also.
AND GOT her THE SEVEN AND NOT FROM-LET seed LAST
leave
Mark 12
pantwn apeqanen kai h gunh

pantOn apethanen kai hE gunE
G3956 G599 G2532 G3588 G1135
a_ Gen Pl n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
OF-ALL FROM-DIED AND THE WOMAN
died also
12:23 en th oun anastasei otan anastwsin tinos autwn 23 In the resurrection therefore,
en tE oun anastasei hotan anastOsin tinos autOn
G1722 G3588 G3767 G386 G3752 G450 G5101 G846
when they shall rise, whose
Prep t_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl pi Gen Sg m pp Gen Pl m wife shall she be of them? for
IN THE THEN UP-STANDing when-EVER THEY-MAY-BE-UP-STANDING OF-ANY OF-them the seven had her to wife.
resurrection whenever they-may-be-rising of-which
estai gunh oi gar epta escon authn gunaika

estai gunE hoi gar hepta eschon autEn gunaika
G2071 G1135 G3588 G1063 G2033 G2192 G846 G1135
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
SHALL-BE WOMAN THE for SEVEN have-HAD her WOMAN
she-shall-be wife wife
12:24 kai apokriqeis o ihsous eipen autois ou dia 24 And Jesus answering said
kai apokritheis ho iEsous eipen autois ou dia
G2532 G611 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G3756 G1223
unto them, Do ye not therefore
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Part Neg Prep err, because ye know not the
AND answerING THE JESUS said to-them NOT THRU scriptures, neither the power of
because-of God?
touto planasqe mh eidotes tas grafas mhde thn

touto planasthe mE eidotes tas graphas mEde tEn
G5124 G4105 G3361 G1492 G3588 G1124 G3366 G3588
pd Acc Sg n vi Pres Pas 2 Pl Part Neg vp Perf Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Conj t_ Acc Sg f
this YE-ARE-beING-STRAYED NO HAVING-PERCEIVED THE WRITings NO-YET THE
ye-are-being-deceived being-acquainted with scriptures nor-yet
dunamin tou qeou

dunamin tou theou
G1411 G3588 G2316
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
ABILITY OF-THE God
power
12:25 otan gar ek nekrwn anastwsin oute gamousin 25 For when they shall rise
hotan gar ek nekrOn anastOsin oute gamousin
G3752 G1063 G1537 G3498 G450 G3777 G1060
from the dead, they neither
Conj Conj Prep a_ Gen Pl m vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl marry, nor are given in
when-EVER for OUT OF-DEAD-ones THEY-MAY-BE-UP-STANDING NOT-BESIDES THEY-ARE-MARRYING marriage; but are as the angels
whenever of-dead-ones they-may-be-rising neither which are in heaven.
oute gamiskontai all eisin ws aggeloi oi en tois

oute gamiskontai all eisin hOs aggeloi hoi en tois
G3777 G1061 G235 G1526 G5613 G32 G3588 G1722 G3588
Conj vi Pres Pas 3 Pl Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Pl Adv n_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Dat Pl m
NOT-BESIDES ARE-beING-MARRYizED but THEY-ARE AS MESSENGERS THE IN THE
nor are-being-given-in-marriage are
ouranois
ouranois
G3772
n_ Dat Pl m
heavens
12:26 peri de twn nekrwn oti egeirontai ouk anegnwte en 26 And as touching the dead,
peri de tOn nekrOn hoti egeirontai ouk anegnOte en
G4012 G1161 G3588 G3498 G3754 G1453 G3756 G314 G1722
that they rise: have ye not read
Prep Conj t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m Conj vi Pres Pas 3 Pl Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep in the book of Moses, how in
ABOUT YET THE DEAD-ones that THEY-ARE-beING-ROUSED NOT YE-read(past) IN the bush God spake unto him,
concerning dead-ones ye-did-read saying, I [am] the God of
Abraham, and the God of
th biblw mwsews epi ths batou ws eipen autw o Isaac, and the God of Jacob?
tE biblO mOseOs epi tEs batou hOs eipen autO ho
G3588 G976 G3475 G1909 G3588 G942 G5613 G2036 G846 G3588
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
THE SCROLL OF-MOSES ON THE THORN-BUSH AS said to-him THE
how spoke
qeos legwn egw o qeos abraam kai o qeos

theos legOn egO ho theos abraam kai ho theos
G2316 G3004 G1473 G3588 G2316 G11 G2532 G3588 G2316
n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp 1 Nom Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m ni proper Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
God sayING I THE God of-ABRAHAM AND THE God
I-am of-Abraham
isaak kai o qeos iakwb

isaak kai ho theos iakOb
G2464 G2532 G3588 G2316 G2384
ni proper Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m ni proper
of-ISAAC AND THE God of-JACOB
of-Isaac of-Jacob
Mark 12
12:27 ouk estin o qeos nekrwn alla qeos zwntwn 27 He is not the God of the
ouk estin ho theos nekrOn alla theos zOntOn
G3756 G2076 G3588 G2316 G3498 G235 G2316 G2198
dead, but the God of the living:
Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Pl m ye therefore do greatly err.
NOT IS THE God OF-DEAD-ones but God OF-LIVING-ones
he-is of-dead-ones of-ones-living
umeis oun polu planasqe

humeis oun polu planasthe
G5210 G3767 G4183 G4105
pp 2 Nom Pl Conj a_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Pas 2 Pl
YOU(p) THEN much YE-ARE-beING-STRAYED
ye-are-being-deceived
12:28 kai proselqwn eis twn grammatewn akousas autwn 28 . And one of the scribes
kai proselthOn heis tOn grammateOn akousas autOn
G2532 G4334 G1520 G3588 G1122 G191 G846
came, and having heard them
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Gen Pl m reasoning together, and
AND TOWARD-COMING ONE OF-THE WRITers HEARing OF-them perceiving that he had
approaching scribes them answered them well, asked
him, Which is the first
suzhtountwn eidws oti kalws autois apekriqh ephrwthsen auton commandment of all?
suzEtountOn eidOs hoti kalOs autois apekrithE epErOtEsen auton
G4802 G1492 G3754 G2573 G846 G611 G1905 G846
vp Pres Act Gen Pl m vp Perf Act Nom Sg m Conj Adv pp Dat Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Sg vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
TOGETHER-SEEKING HAVING-PERCEIVED that IDEALly to-them He-answerED inquirES-of Him
discussing
poia estin prwth paswn entolh

poia estin prOtE pasOn entolE
G4169 G2076 G4413 G3956 G1785
pi Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg f a_ Gen Pl f n_ Nom Sg f
?-THE-WHICH IS BEFORE-most OF-ALL direction
which ? foremost precept
12:29 o de ihsous apekriqh autw oti prwth paswn twn 29 And Jesus answered him,
ho de iEsous apekrithE autO hoti prOtE pasOn tOn
G3588 G1161 G2424 G611 G846 G3754 G4413 G3956 G3588
The first of all the
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg f a_ Gen Pl f t_ Gen Pl f commandments [is], Hear, O
THE YET JESUS answerED to-him that BEFORE-most OF-ALL THE Israel; The Lord our God is one
him foremost Lord:
entolwn akoue israhl kurios o qeos hmwn kurios eis

entolOn akoue israEl kurios ho theos hEmOn kurios heis
G1785 G191 G2474 G2962 G3588 G2316 G2257 G2962 G1520
n_ Gen Pl f vm Pres Act 2 Sg ni proper n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Pl n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
directions BE-HEARING ISRAEL Master THE God OF-US Master ONE
precepts be-you-hearing ! Lord Lord
estin
estin
G2076
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS
12:30 kai agaphseis kurion ton qeon sou ex olhs ths 30 And thou shalt love the
kai agapEseis kurion ton theon sou ex holEs tEs
G2532 G25 G2962 G3588 G2316 G4675 G1537 G3650 G3588
Lord thy God with all thy
Conj vi Fut Act 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg Prep a_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f heart, and with all thy soul, and
AND YOU-SHALL-BE-LOVING Master THE God OF-YOU OUT OF-WHOLE THE with all thy mind, and with all
Lord thy strength: this [is] the first
commandment.
kardias sou kai ex olhs ths yuchs sou kai ex olhs
kardias sou kai ex holEs tEs psuchEs sou kai ex holEs
G2588 G4675 G2532 G1537 G3650 G3588 G5590 G4675 G2532 G1537 G3650
n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Conj Prep a_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Conj Prep a_ Gen Sg f
HEART OF-YOU AND OUT OF-WHOLE THE soul OF-YOU AND OUT OF-WHOLE
ths dianoias sou kai ex olhs ths iscuos sou auth

tEs dianoias sou kai ex holEs tEs ischuos sou autE
G3588 G1271 G4675 G2532 G1537 G3650 G3588 G2479 G4675 G3778
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Conj Prep a_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg pd Nom Sg f
THE THRU-MIND OF-YOU AND OUT OF-WHOLE THE STRENGTH OF-YOU this
comprehension this-is
prwth entolh
prOtE entolE
G4413 G1785
a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
BEFORE-most direction
foremost precept
12:31 kai deutera omoia auth agaphseis ton plhsion sou ws 31 And the second [is] like,
kai deutera homoia autE agapEseis ton plEsion sou hOs
G2532 G1208 G3664 G846 G25 G3588 G4139 G4675 G5613
[namely] this, Thou shalt love
Conj a_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f pp Dat Sg f vi Fut Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg m Adv pp 2 Gen Sg Adv thy neighbour as thyself. There
AND second LIKE to-her YOU-SHALL-BE-LOVING THE NIGH-one OF-YOU AS is none other commandment
herit associate greater than these.
Mark 12
seauton meizwn toutwn allh entolh ouk estin

seauton meizOn toutOn allE entolE ouk estin
G4572 G3187 G5130 G243 G1785 G3756 G2076
pf 2 Acc Sg m a_ Nom Sg f Cmp pd Gen Pl f a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
YOURself GREATER OF-these other direction NOT IS
another precept
12:32 kai eipen autw o grammateus kalws didaskale ep alhqeias 32 And the scribe said unto
kai eipen autO ho grammateus kalOs didaskale ep alEtheias
G2532 G2036 G846 G3588 G1122 G2573 G1320 G1909 G225
him, Well, Master, thou hast
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Adv n_ Voc Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg f said the truth: for there is one
AND said to-Him THE WRITer IDEALly TEACHer ! ON TRUTH God; and there is none other
scribe but he:
eipas oti eis estin qeos kai ouk estin allos plhn
eipas hoti heis estin theos kai ouk estin allos plEn
G2036 G3754 G1520 G2076 G2316 G2532 G3756 G2076 G243 G4133
vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m Adv
YOU-say that ONE He-IS God AND NOT IS other MOREly
not there-is more-than
autou
autou
G846
pp Gen Sg m
OF-Him
him
12:33 kai to agapan auton ex olhs ths kardias kai ex 33 And to love him with all the
kai to agapan auton ex holEs tEs kardias kai ex
G2532 G3588 G25 G846 G1537 G3650 G3588 G2588 G2532 G1537
heart, and with all the
Conj t_ Nom Sg n vn Pres Act pp Acc Sg m Prep a_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj Prep understanding, and with all the
AND THE TO-BE-LOVING Him OUT OF-WHOLE THE HEART AND OUT soul, and with all the strength,
and to love [his] neighbour as
himself, is more than all whole
olhs ths sunesews kai ex olhs ths yuchs kai ex olhs burnt offerings and sacrifices.
holEs tEs suneseOs kai ex holEs tEs psuchEs kai ex holEs
G3650 G3588 G4907 G2532 G1537 G3650 G3588 G5590 G2532 G1537 G3650
a_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj Prep a_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj Prep a_ Gen Sg f
OF-WHOLE THE understanding AND OUT OF-WHOLE THE soul AND OUT OF-WHOLE
ths iscuos kai to agapan ton plhsion ws eauton

tEs ischuos kai to agapan ton plEsion hOs heauton
G3588 G2479 G2532 G3588 G25 G3588 G4139 G5613 G1438
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg n vn Pres Act t_ Acc Sg m Adv Adv pf 3 Acc Sg m
THE STRENGTH AND THE TO-BE-LOVING THE NIGH-one AS self
associate himself
pleion estin pantwn twn olokautwmatwn kai twn qusiwn

pleion estin pantOn tOn holokautOmatOn kai tOn thusiOn
G4119 G2076 G3956 G3588 G3646 G2532 G3588 G2378
a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Gen Pl n t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n Conj t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f
MORE IS OF-ALL THE WHOLE-BURNS AND THE SACRIFICES
ascent-offerings
12:34 kai o ihsous idwn auton oti nounecws apekriqh 34 And when Jesus saw that he
kai ho iEsous idOn auton hoti nounechOs apekrithE
G2532 G3588 G2424 G1492 G846 G3754 G3562 G611
answered discreetly, he said
Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m Conj Adv vi Aor midD 3 Sg unto him, Thou art not far from
AND THE JESUS PERCEIVING him that MIND-HAVINGly he-answerED the kingdom of God. And no
apprehendingly man after that durst ask him
[any question].
eipen autw ou makran ei apo ths basileias tou
eipen autO ou makran ei apo tEs basileias tou
G2036 G846 G3756 G3112 G1488 G575 G3588 G932 G3588
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Part Neg Adv vi Pres vxx 2 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
said to-him NOT FAR YOU-ARE FROM THE KINGdom OF-THE
qeou kai oudeis ouketi etolma auton eperwthsai

theou kai oudeis ouketi etolma auton eperOtEsai
G2316 G2532 G3762 G3765 G5111 G846 G1905
n_ Gen Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m Adv vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m vn Aor Act
God AND NOT-YET-ONE NOT-STILL DARED Him TO-inquire-of
no-one any-longer
12:35 kai apokriqeis o ihsous elegen didaskwn en tw 35 . And Jesus answered and
kai apokritheis ho iEsous elegen didaskOn en tO
G2532 G611 G3588 G2424 G3004 G1321 G1722 G3588
said, while he taught in the
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg n temple, How say the scribes
AND answerING THE JESUS said TEACHING IN THE that Christ is the Son of
David?
ierw pws legousin oi grammateis oti o cristos uios

hierO pOs legousin hoi grammateis hoti ho christos huios
G2411 G4459 G3004 G3588 G1122 G3754 G3588 G5547 G5207
n_ Dat Sg n Adv Int vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
SACRED-place how ARE-sayING THE WRITers that THE ANOINTED SON
sanctuary how ? scribes Christ
Mark 12
estin dabid
estin dabid
G2076 G1138
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg ni proper
IS of-DAVID
of-David
12:36 autos gar dabid eipen en tw pneumati tw agiw 36 For David himself said by
autos gar dabid eipen en tO pneumati tO hagiO
G846 G1063 G1138 G2036 G1722 G3588 G4151 G3588 G40
the Holy Ghost, The LORD
pp Nom Sg m Conj ni proper vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n said to my Lord, Sit thou on
he for DAVID said IN THE spirit THE HOLY my right hand, till I make thine
enemies thy footstool.
eipen o kurios tw kuriw mou kaqou ek dexiwn

eipen ho kurios tO kuriO mou kathou ek dexiOn
G2036 G3588 G2962 G3588 G2962 G3450 G2521 G1537 G1188
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Prep a_ Gen Pl m
said THE Master to-THE Master OF-ME BE-sittING OUT OF-RIGHT(p)
Lord Lord be-you-sitting !
mou ews an qw tous ecqrous sou upopodion twn

mou heOs an thO tous echthrous sou hupopodion tOn
G3450 G2193 G302 G5087 G3588 G2190 G4675 G5286 G3588
pp 1 Gen Sg Conj Part vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Pl m
OF-ME TILL EVER I-MAY-BE-PLACING THE enemies OF-YOU UNDER-FOOT OF-THE
footstool
podwn sou
podOn sou
G4228 G4675
n_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg
FEET OF-YOU
12:37 autos oun dabid legei auton kurion kai poqen uios 37 David therefore himself
autos oun dabid legei auton kurion kai pothen huios
G846 G3767 G1138 G3004 G846 G2962 G2532 G4159 G5207
calleth him Lord; and whence
pp Nom Sg m Conj ni proper vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj Adv Int n_ Nom Sg m is he [then] his son? And the
he THEN DAVID IS-sayING Him Master AND ?-WHICH-PLACE SON common people heard him
is-terming Lord whence ? gladly.
autou estin kai o polus oclos hkouen autou hdews

autou estin kai ho polus ochlos Ekouen autou hEdeOs
G846 G2076 G2532 G3588 G4183 G3793 G191 G846 G2234
pp Gen Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m Adv
OF-him He-IS AND THE MANY THRONG HEARD OF-Him GRATIFYly
vast him with-relish
12:38 kai elegen autois en th didach autou blepete apo twn 38 And he said unto them in
kai elegen autois en tE didachE autou blepete apo tOn
G2532 G3004 G846 G1722 G3588 G1322 G846 G991 G575 G3588
his doctrine, Beware of the
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Gen Pl m scribes, which love to go in
AND He-said to-them IN THE TEACHing OF-Him BE-lookING FROM THE long clothing, and [love]
be-ye-bewaring ! salutations in the marketplaces,
grammatewn twn qelontwn en stolais peripatein kai aspasmous

grammateOn tOn thelontOn en stolais peripatein kai aspasmous
G1122 G3588 G2309 G1722 G4749 G4043 G2532 G783
n_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Gen Pl m Prep n_ Dat Pl f vn Pres Act Conj n_ Acc Pl m
WRITers THE ones-WILLING IN robes TO-BE-ABOUT-TREADING AND greetings
scribes ones-willing to-be-walking salutations
en tais agorais
en tais agorais
G1722 G3588 G58
Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f
IN THE BUY-places
markets
12:39 kai prwtokaqedrias en tais sunagwgais kai prwtoklisias en 39 And the chief seats in the
kai prOtokathedrias en tais sunagOgais kai prOtoklisias en
G2532 G4410 G1722 G3588 G4864 G2532 G4411 G1722
synagogues, and the uppermost
Conj n_ Acc Pl f Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f Conj n_ Acc Pl f Prep rooms at feasts:
AND BEFORE-most-DOWN-SETTLES IN THE TOGETHER-LEADS AND BEFORE-most-CLINES IN
front-seats synagogues first-reclining-places
tois deipnois
tois deipnois
G3588 G1173
t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n
THE DINners
12:40 oi katesqiontes tas oikias twn chrwn kai profasei 40 Which devour
hoi katesthiontes tas oikias tOn chErOn kai prophasei
G3588 G2719 G3588 G3614 G3588 G5503 G2532 G4392
widows'houses, and for a
t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f Conj n_ Dat Sg f pretence make long prayers:
THE ones-DOWN-EATING THE HOMES OF-THE WIDOWS AND to-BEFORE-APPEARance these shall receive greater
ones-devouring houses to-pretense damnation.
Mark 12 - Mark 13
makra proseucomenoi outoi lhyontai perissoteron krima

makra proseuchomenoi houtoi lEpsontai perissoteron krima
G3117 G4336 G3778 G2983 G4053 G2917
a_ Acc Pl n vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m pd Nom Pl m vi Fut midD 3 Pl a_ Acc Sg n Cmp n_ Acc Sg n
FAR prayING these SHALL-BE-GETTING more-excessive JUDGment
prolix(p) ones-praying
12:41 kai kaqisas o ihsous katenanti tou gazofulakiou 41 . And Jesus sat over against
kai kathisas ho iEsous katenanti tou gazophulakiou
G2532 G2523 G3588 G2424 G2713 G3588 G1049
the treasury, and beheld how
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Adv t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n the people cast money into the
AND being-seated THE JESUS DOWN-IN-INSTEAD OF-THE EXCHEQUER-GUARD treasury: and many that were
facing the treasury rich cast in much.
eqewrei pws o oclos ballei calkon eis to gazofulakion

etheOrei pOs ho ochlos ballei chalkon eis to gazophulakion
G2334 G4459 G3588 G3793 G906 G5475 G1519 G3588 G1049
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
beheld how THE THRONG IS-CASTING COPPER INTO THE EXCHEQUER-GUARD
treasury
kai polloi plousioi eballon polla

kai polloi plousioi eballon polla
G2532 G4183 G4145 G906 G4183
Conj a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl a_ Acc Pl n
AND MANY RICH CAST much
rich-ones
12:42 kai elqousa mia chra ptwch ebalen lepta duo o 42 And there came a certain
kai elthousa mia chEra ptOchE ebalen lepta duo ho
G2532 G2064 G1520 G5503 G4434 G906 G3016 G1417 G3739
poor widow, and she threw in
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl n a_ Nom pr Nom Sg n two mites, which make a
AND COMING ONE WIDOW POOR CASTS leptons TWO WHICH farthing.
mites
estin kodranths
estin kodrantEs
G2076 G2835
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m
IS QUADRANS
12:43 kai proskalesamenos tous maqhtas autou legei autois amhn 43 And he called [unto him]
kai proskalesamenos tous mathEtas autou legei autois amEn
G2532 G4341 G3588 G3101 G846 G3004 G846 G281
his disciples, and saith unto
Conj vp Aor midD Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Hebrew them, Verily I say unto you,
AND TOWARD-CALLing THE LEARNers OF-Him He-IS-sayING to-them AMEN That this poor widow hath cast
calling-to-him disciples verily more in, than all they which
have cast into the treasury:
legw umin oti h chra auth h ptwch pleion
legO humin hoti hE chEra hautE hE ptOchE pleion
G3004 G5213 G3754 G3588 G5503 G3778 G3588 G4434 G4119
vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pd Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that THE WIDOW this THE POOR MORE
to-ye
pantwn beblhken twn balontwn eis to gazofulakion

pantOn beblEken tOn balontOn eis to gazophulakion
G3956 G906 G3588 G906 G1519 G3588 G1049
a_ Gen Pl m vi Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Gen Pl m vp 2Aor Act Gen Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
OF-ALL HAS-CAST OF-THE ones-CASTING INTO THE EXCHEQUER-GUARD
ones-casting treasury
12:44 pantes gar ek tou perisseuontos autois ebalon auth de 44 For all [they] did cast in of
pantes gar ek tou perisseuontos autois ebalon autE de
G3956 G1063 G1537 G3588 G4052 G846 G906 G846 G1161
their abundance; but she of her
a_ Nom Pl m Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg n vp Pres Act Gen Sg n pp Dat Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Nom Sg f Conj want did cast in all that she
ALL for OUT OF-THE exceedING to-them CAST(past) this-one YET had, [even] all her living.
superfluity she
ek ths usterhsews auths panta osa eicen ebalen olon

ek tEs husterEseOs autEs panta hosa eichen ebalen holon
G1537 G3588 G5304 G846 G3956 G3745 G2192 G906 G3650
Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg f a_ Acc Pl n pk Acc Pl n vi Impf Act 3 Sg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg m
OUT OF-THE WANTing OF-her ALL as-much-as she-HAD CASTS WHOLE
want
ton bion auths

ton bion autEs
G3588 G979 G846
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg f
THE livelihood OF-her
Mark 13
13:1 kai ekporeuomenou autou ek tou ierou legei autw 1 . And as he went out of the
kai ekporeuomenou autou ek tou hierou legei autO
G2532 G1607 G846 G1537 G3588 G2411 G3004 G846
temple, one of his disciples
Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m saith unto him, Master, see
AND OF-OUT-GOING OF-Him OUT OF-THE SACRED-place IS-sayING to-Him what manner of stones and
of-going-out sanctuary what buildings [are here]!
eis twn maqhtwn autou didaskale ide potapoi liqoi kai

heis tOn mathEtOn autou didaskale ide potapoi lithoi kai
G1520 G3588 G3101 G846 G1320 G1492 G4217 G3037 G2532
a_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m n_ Voc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj
ONE OF-THE LEARNers OF-Him TEACHer ! BE-PERCEIVING ?-where-FROM STONES AND
disciples lo ! what-manner-of
potapai oikodomai
potapai oikodomai
G4217 G3619
a_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f
?-where-FROM HOME-BUILDings
what-manner-of buildings
13:2 kai o ihsous apokriqeis eipen autw blepeis tautas 2 And Jesus answering said
kai ho iEsous apokritheis eipen autO blepeis tautas
G2532 G3588 G2424 G611 G2036 G846 G991 G3778
unto him, Seest thou these
Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Sg pd Acc Pl f great buildings? there shall not
AND THE JESUS answerING said to-him YOU-ARE-lookING these be left one stone upon another,
you-are-observing that shall not be thrown down.
tas megalas oikodomas ou mh afeqh liqos epi liqw

tas megalas oikodomas ou mE aphethE lithos epi lithO
G3588 G3173 G3619 G3756 G3361 G863 G3037 G1909 G3037
t_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Part Neg Part Neg vs Aor Pas 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg m
THE GREAT HOME-BUILDings NOT NO MAY-BE-BEING-FROM-LET STONE ON STONE
buildings may-be-being-left
os ou mh kataluqh
hos ou mE kataluthE
G3739 G3756 G3361 G2647
pr Nom Sg m Part Neg Part Neg vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
WHICH NOT NO MAY-BE-BEING-DOWN-LOOSED
may-be-being-demolished
13:3 kai kaqhmenou autou eis to oros twn elaiwn 3 And as he sat upon the mount
kai kathEmenou autou eis to oros tOn elaiOn
G2532 G2521 G846 G1519 G3588 G3735 G3588 G1636
of Olives over against the
Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f temple, Peter and James and
AND OF-sittING OF-Him INTO THE mountain OF-THE OLIVES John and Andrew asked him
Mount privately,
katenanti tou ierou ephrwtwn auton kat idian petros kai

katenanti tou hierou epErOtOn auton kat idian petros kai
G2713 G3588 G2411 G1905 G846 G2596 G2398 G4074 G2532
Adv t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Prep a_ Acc Sg f n_ Nom Sg m Conj
DOWN-IN-INSTEAD OF-THE SACRED-place inquirED-of Him according-to OWN Peter AND
facing the sanctuary
iakwbos kai iwannhs kai andreas

iakObos kai iOannEs kai andreas
G2385 G2532 G2491 G2532 G406
n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
JACOBUS AND JOHN AND ANDREW
James
13:4 eipe hmin pote tauta estai kai ti to shmeion 4 Tell us, when shall these
eipe hEmin pote tauta estai kai ti to sEmeion
G2036 G2254 G4219 G5023 G2071 G2532 G5101 G3588 G4592
things be? and what [shall be]
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl Part Int pd Nom Pl n vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Conj pi Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n the sign when all these things
BE-sayING to-US ?-when these SHALL-BE AND ANY THE SIGN shall be fulfilled?
be-you-telling ! us when ? these-things what ?
otan mellh panta tauta sunteleisqai

hotan mellE panta tauta sunteleisthai
G3752 G3195 G3956 G5023 G4931
Conj vs Pres Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl n pd Acc Pl n vn Pres Pas
when-EVER MAY-BE-ABOUT ALL these TO-BE-beING-concludED
whenever may-be-being-about these-things
13:5 o de ihsous apokriqeis autois hrxato legein blepete 5 . And Jesus answering them
ho de iEsous apokritheis autois Erxato legein blepete
G3588 G1161 G2424 G611 G846 G756 G3004 G991
began to say, Take heed lest
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m pp Dat Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act vm Pres Act 2 Pl any [man] deceive you:
THE YET JESUS answerING to-them begins TO-BE-sayING BE-lookING
them be-ye-bewaring !
mh tis umas planhsh

mE tis humas planEsE
G3361 G5100 G5209 G4105
Part Neg px Nom Sg m pp 2 Acc Pl vs Aor Act 3 Sg
NO ANY YOU(p) SHOULD-BE-STRAYING
any-man ye should-be-deceiving
Mark 13
13:6 polloi gar eleusontai epi tw onomati mou legontes oti 6 For many shall come in my
polloi gar eleusontai epi tO onomati mou legontes hoti
G4183 G1063 G2064 G1909 G3588 G3686 G3450 G3004 G3754
name, saying, I am [Christ];
a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Fut midD 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj and shall deceive many.
MANY for SHALL-BE-COMING ON THE NAME OF-ME sayING that
egw eimi kai pollous planhsousin

egO eimi kai pollous planEsousin
G1473 G1510 G2532 G4183 G4105
pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 1 Sg Conj a_ Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl
I AM AND MANY THEY-SHALL-BE-STRAYING
shall-be-deceiving
13:7 otan de akoushte polemous kai akoas polemwn mh 7 And when ye shall hear of
hotan de akousEte polemous kai akoas polemOn mE
G3752 G1161 G191 G4171 G2532 G189 G4171 G3361
wars and rumours of wars, be
Conj Conj vs Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Pl m Part Neg ye not troubled: for [such
when-EVER YET YE-SHOULD-BE-HEARING BATTLES AND HEARings OF-BATTLES NO things] must needs be; but the
whenever tidings end [shall] not [be] yet.
qroeisqe dei gar genesqai all oupw to telos

throeisthe dei gar genesthai all oupO to telos
G2360 G1163 G1063 G1096 G235 G3768 G3588 G5056
vm Pres Pas 2 Pl vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg Conj vn 2Aor midD Conj Adv t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
BE-beING-ALARMED it-IS-BINDING for TO-BE-BECOMING but NOT-as-yet THE FINISH
be-ye-being-alarmed ! it-must to-be-occurring consummation
13:8 egerqhsetai gar eqnos epi eqnos kai basileia epi basileian 8 For nation shall rise against
egerthEsetai gar ethnos epi ethnos kai basileia epi basileian
G1453 G1063 G1484 G1909 G1484 G2532 G932 G1909 G932
nation, and kingdom against
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg n Prep n_ Acc Sg n Conj n_ Nom Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg f kingdom: and there shall be
SHALL-BE-BEING-ROUSED for NATION ON NATION AND KINGdom ON KINGdom earthquakes in divers places,
and there shall be famines and
troubles: these [are] the
kai esontai seismoi kata topous kai esontai limoi kai taracai beginnings of sorrows.
kai esontai seismoi kata topous kai esontai limoi kai tarachai
G2532 G2071 G4578 G2596 G5117 G2532 G2071 G3042 G2532 G5016
Conj vi Fut vxx 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl m Prep n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Fut vxx 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl f
AND SHALL-BE QUAKings according-to PLACES AND SHALL-BE FAMINES AND DISTURBances
there-shall-be earthquakes there-shall-be
arcai wdinwn tauta

archai OdinOn tauta
G746 G5604 G5023
n_ Nom Pl f n_ Gen Pl f pd Nom Pl n
ORIGINals OF-travails these
beginnings of-pangs these-are
13:9 blepete de umeis eautous paradwsousin gar umas eis 9 But take heed to yourselves:
blepete de humeis heautous paradOsousin gar humas eis
G991 G1161 G5210 G1438 G3860 G1063 G5209 G1519
for they shall deliver you up to
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj pp 2 Nom Pl pf 3 Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl Conj pp 2 Acc Pl Prep councils; and in the
BE-YE-lookING YET YOU(p) selves THEY-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING for YOU(p) INTO synagogues ye shall be beaten:
be-ye-looking ! ye themselves they-shall-be-giving-up ye and ye shall be brought before
rulers and kings for my sake,
sunedria kai eis sunagwgas darhsesqe kai epi hgemonwn kai for a testimony against them.
sunedria kai eis sunagOgas darEsesthe kai epi hEdemonOn kai
G4892 G2532 G1519 G4864 G1194 G2532 G1909 G2232 G2532
n_ Acc Pl n Conj Prep n_ Acc Pl f vi 2Fut Pas 2 Pl Conj Prep n_ Gen Pl m Conj
Sanhedrins AND INTO TOGETHER-LEADS YE-SHALL-BE-beING-SKINNED AND ON LEADers AND
synagogues ye-shall-be-being-lashed governors
basilewn acqhsesqe eneken emou eis marturion autois

basileOn achthEsesthe heneken emou eis marturion autois
G935 G71 G1752 G1700 G1519 G3142 G846
n_ Gen Pl m vi Fut Pas 2 Pl Adv pp 1 Gen Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg n pp Dat Pl m
KINGS YOU-SHALL-BE-BEING-LED on-account-of ME INTO witness to-them
ye-shall-be-being-led testimony
13:10 kai eis panta ta eqnh dei prwton khrucqhnai to 10 And the gospel must first be
kai eis panta ta ethnE dei prOton kEruchthEnai to
G2532 G1519 G3956 G3588 G1484 G1163 G4412 G2784 G3588
published among all nations.
Conj Prep a_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg Adv vn Aor Pas t_ Nom Sg n
AND INTO ALL THE NATIONS IS-BINDING BEFORE-most TO-BE-PROCLAIMED THE
must first to-be-heralded
euaggelion
euaggelion
G2098
n_ Nom Sg n
WELL-MESSAGE
13:11 otan de agagwsin umas paradidontes mh 11 But when they shall lead
hotan de agagOsin humas paradidontes mE
G3752 G1161 G71 G5209 G3860 G3361
[you], and deliver you up, take
Conj Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Part Neg no thought beforehand what ye
when-EVER YET THEY-MAY-BE-FROM-LEADING YOU(p) BESIDE-GIVING NO shall speak, neither do ye
whenever they-may-be-leading-off ye giving-over-ye premeditate: but whatsoever
Mark 13
shall be given you in that hour,

promerimnate ti lalhshte mhde meletate all o that speak ye: for it is not ye
promerimnate ti lalEsEte mEde meletate all ho
G4305 G5101 G2980 G3366 G3191 G235 G3739 that speak, but the Holy Ghost.
vm Pres Act 2 Pl pi Acc Sg n vs Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj pr Acc Sg n
BE-YE-beING-BEFORE-anxious ANY YE-SHOULD-BE-TALKING NO-YET BE-YE-meditatING but WHICH
be-ye-worrying-beforehand ! what ? ye-should-be-speaking neither be-ye-meditating !
ean doqh umin en ekeinh th wra touto laleite ou

ean dothE humin en ekeinE tE hOra touto laleite ou
G1437 G1325 G5213 G1722 G1565 G3588 G5610 G5124 G2980 G3756
Cond vs Aor Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Prep pd Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Acc Sg n vm Pres Act 2 Pl Part Neg
IF-EVER MAY-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-YOU(p) IN that THE HOUR this YE-BE-TALKING NOT
to-ye be-ye-speaking !
gar este umeis oi lalountes alla to pneuma to

gar este humeis hoi lalountes alla to pneuma to
G1063 G2075 G5210 G3588 G2980 G235 G3588 G4151 G3588
Conj vi Pres vxx 2 Pl pp 2 Nom Pl t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n
for ARE YOU(p) THE ones-TALKING but THE spirit THE
ye ones-speaking
agion
hagion
G40
a_ Nom Sg n
HOLY
13:12 paradwsei de adelfos adelfon eis qanaton kai pathr 12 Now the brother shall betray
paradOsei de adelphos adelphon eis thanaton kai patEr
G3860 G1161 G80 G80 G1519 G2288 G2532 G3962
the brother to death, and the
vi Fut Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m father the son; and children
SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING YET brother brother INTO DEATH AND FATHER shall rise up against [their]
shall-be-giving-up parents, and shall cause them
to be put to death.
teknon kai epanasthsontai tekna epi goneis kai qanatwsousin
teknon kai epanastEsontai tekna epi goneis kai thanatOsousin
G5043 G2532 G1881 G5043 G1909 G1118 G2532 G2289
n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Fut midD 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl n Prep n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl
offspring AND SHALL-BE-ON-UP-STANDING offsprings ON parents AND THEY-SHALL-BE-(causing-to)-DIE
child shall-be-rising-up children shall-be-putting-to-death
autous
autous
G846
pp Acc Pl m
them
13:13 kai esesqe misoumenoi upo pantwn dia to onoma mou 13 And ye shall be hated of all
kai esesthe misoumenoi hupo pantOn dia to onoma mou
G2532 G2071 G3404 G5259 G3956 G1223 G3588 G3686 G3450
[men] for my name's sake: but
Conj vi Fut vxx 2 Pl vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m Prep a_ Gen Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg he that shall endure unto the
AND YE-SHALL-BE beING-HATED by ALL THRU THE NAME OF-ME end, the same shall be saved.
because-of
o de upomeinas eis telos outos swqhsetai

G3588 G1161 G5278 G1519 G5056 G3778 G4982
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg n pd Nom Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
THE YET one-UNDER-REMAINing INTO FINISH this-one SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED
one-enduring consummation this-one
13:14 otan de idhte to bdelugma ths erhmwsews to 14 . But when ye shall see the
hotan de idEte to bdelugma tEs erEmOseOs to
G3752 G1161 G1492 G3588 G946 G3588 G2050 G3588
abomination of desolation,
Conj Conj vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Acc Sg n spoken of by Daniel the
when-EVER YET YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE ABOMINATION OF-THE DESOLATing THE prophet, standing where it
whenever desolation ought not, (let him that readeth
understand,) then let them that
rhqen upo danihl tou profhtou estws opou ou be in Judaea flee to the
rEthen hupo daniEl tou prophEtou hestOs hopou ou mountains:
G4483 G5259 G1158 G3588 G4396 G2476 G3699 G3756
vp Aor Pas Acc Sg n Prep ni proper t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Perf Act Acc Sg n Adv Part Neg
BEING-declarED by DANIEL THE BEFORE-AVERer HAVING-STOOD THE-?-where NOT
prophet standing wheree
dei o anaginwskwn noeitw tote oi en th

dei ho anaginOskOn noeitO tote hoi en tE
G1163 G3588 G314 G3539 G5119 G3588 G1722 G3588
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 3 Sg Adv t_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f
it-IS-BINDING THE one-readING LET-BE-MINDING then THE-ones IN THE
it-must one-reading let-him-be-apprehending ! the-ones
ioudaia feugetwsan eis ta orh

ioudaia pheugetOsan eis ta orE
G2449 G5343 G1519 G3588 G3735
n_ Dat Sg f vm Pres Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
JUDEA LET-BE-FLEEING INTO THE mountains
let-them-be-fleeing !
Mark 13
13:15 o de epi tou dwmatos mh katabatw eis thn 15 And let him that is on the
ho de epi tou dOmatos mE katabatO eis tEn
G3588 G1161 G1909 G3588 G1430 G3361 G2597 G1519 G3588
housetop not go down into the
t_ Nom Sg m Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Part Neg vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f house, neither enter [therein],
THE-one YET ON THE housetop NO LET-BE-DOWN-STEPPING INTO THE to take any thing out of his
the-one let-him-be-descending ! house:
oikian mhde eiselqetw arai ti ek ths oikias autou

oikian mEde eiselthetO arai ti ek tEs oikias autou
G3614 G3366 G1525 G142 G5100 G1537 G3588 G3614 G846
n_ Acc Sg f Conj vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg vn Aor Act px Acc Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m
HOME NO-YET LET-BE-INTO-COMING TO-LIFT ANY OUT OF-THE HOME OF-him
house neither let-him-be-entering ! to-pick-up anything house
13:16 kai o eis ton agron wn mh epistreyatw eis 16 And let him that is in the
kai ho eis ton agron On mE epistrepsatO eis
G2532 G3588 G1519 G3588 G68 G5607 G3361 G1994 G1519
field not turn back again for to
Conj t_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres vxx Nom Sg m Part Neg vm Aor Act 3 Sg Prep take up his garment.
AND THE-one INTO THE FIELD BEING NO LET-ON-TURN INTO
the-one let-him-turn-back !
ta opisw arai to imation autou

ta opisO arai to himation autou
G3588 G3694 G142 G3588 G2440 G846
t_ Acc Pl n Adv vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m
THE BEHIND TO-LIFT THE cloak OF-him
the-things to-pick-up
13:17 ouai de tais en gastri ecousais kai tais qhlazousais en 17 But woe to them that are
ouai de tais en gastri echousais kai tais thElazousais en
G3759 G1161 G3588 G1722 G1064 G2192 G2532 G3588 G2337 G1722
with child, and to them that
Inj Conj t_ Dat Pl f Prep n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Dat Pl f Conj t_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Act Dat Pl f Prep give suck in those days!
WOE YET to-THE-ones IN BELLY HAVING AND to-THE ones-sucklING IN
woe ! to-the-ones ones-suckling
ekeinais tais hmerais

ekeinais tais hEmerais
G1565 G3588 G2250
pd Dat Pl f t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f
those THE DAYS
13:18 proseucesqe de ina mh genhtai h fugh umwn 18 And pray ye that your flight
proseuchesthe de hina mE genEtai hE phugE humOn
G4336 G1161 G2443 G3361 G1096 G3588 G5437 G5216
be not in the winter.
vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Conj Conj Part Neg vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl
BE-YE-prayING YET THAT NO MAY-BE-BECOMING THE FLEEing OF-YOU(p)
be-ye-praying ! may-be-occurring flight
ceimwnos
cheimOnos
G5494
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-WINTER
13:19 esontai gar ai hmerai ekeinai qliyis oia ou gegonen 19 For [in] those days shall be
esontai gar hai hEmerai ekeinai thlipsis hoia ou gegonen
G2071 G1063 G3588 G2250 G1565 G2347 G3634 G3756 G1096
affliction, such as was not
vi Fut vxx 3 Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f pd Nom Pl f n_ Nom Sg f pr Nom Sg f Part Neg vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg from the beginning of the
SHALL-BE for THE DAYS those CONSTRICTION THE-WHICH NOT HAS-BECOME creation which God created
affliction such-as has-occurred unto this time, neither shall be.
toiauth ap archs ktisews hs ektisen o qeos ews tou

toiautE ap archEs ktiseOs hEs ektisen ho theos heOs tou
G5108 G575 G746 G2937 G3739 G2936 G3588 G2316 G2193 G3588
pd Nom Sg f Prep n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pr Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg m
such FROM ORIGINal OF-CREATION WHICH CREATES THE God TILL OF-THE
beginning the
nun kai ou mh genhtai

nun kai ou mE genEtai
G3568 G2532 G3756 G3361 G1096
Adv Conj Part Neg Part Neg vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
NOW AND NOT NO MAY-BE-BECOMING
may-be-occurring
13:20 kai ei mh kurios ekolobwsen tas hmeras ouk an eswqh 20 And except that the Lord
kai ei mE kurios ekolobOsen tas hEmeras ouk an esOthE
G2532 G1487 G3361 G2962 G2856 G3588 G2250 G3756 G302 G4982
had shortened those days, no
Conj Cond Part Neg n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Part Neg Part vi Aor Pas 3 Sg flesh should be saved: but for
AND IF NO Master LOPPS THE DAYS NOT EVER WAS-SAVED the elect's sake, whom he hath
Lord discounts not chosen, he hath shortened the
days.
pasa sarx alla dia tous eklektous ous exelexato ekolobwsen
pasa sarx alla dia tous eklektous hous exelexato ekolobOsen
G3956 G4561 G235 G1223 G3588 G1588 G3739 G1586 G2856
a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj Prep t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m pr Acc Pl m vi Aor Mid 3 Sg vi Aor Act 3 Sg
EVERY FLESH but THRU THE chosen WHOM He-choosES He-LOPPS
at-all because-of chosen-ones he-discounts
Mark 13
tas hmeras
tas hEmeras
G3588 G2250
t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f
THE DAYS
13:21 kai tote ean tis umin eiph idou wde o 21 And then if any man shall
kai tote ean tis humin eipE idou hOde ho
G2532 G5119 G1437 G5100 G5213 G2036 G2400 G5602 G3588
say to you, Lo, here [is] Christ;
Conj Adv Cond px Nom Sg m pp 2 Dat Pl vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Adv t_ Nom Sg m or, lo, [he is] there; believe
AND then IF-EVER ANY to-YOU(p) MAY-BE-sayING BE-PERCEIVING here THE [him] not:
anyone to-ye lo !
cristos h idou ekei mh pisteushte

christos hE idou ekei mE pisteusEte
G5547 G2228 G2400 G1563 G3361 G4100
n_ Nom Sg m Part vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Adv Part Neg vs Aor Act 2 Pl
ANOINTED OR BE-PERCEIVING there NO YE-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING
Christ lo !
13:22 egerqhsontai gar yeudocristoi kai yeudoprofhtai kai 22 For false Christs and false
egerthEsontai gar pseudochristoi kai pseudoprophEtai kai
G1453 G1063 G5580 G2532 G5578 G2532
prophets shall rise, and shall
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl Conj n_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m Conj shew signs and wonders, to
SHALL-BE-BEING-ROUSED for FALSE-ANOINTED-ones AND FALSE-BEFORE-AVERers AND seduce, if [it were] possible,
false-christs false-prophets even the elect.
dwsousin shmeia kai terata pros to apoplanan ei

dOsousin sEmeia kai terata pros to apoplanan ei
G1325 G4592 G2532 G5059 G4314 G3588 G635 G1487
vi Fut Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Pl n Conj n_ Acc Pl n Prep t_ Acc Sg n vn Pres Act Cond
THEY-SHALL-BE-GIVING SIGNS AND MIRACLES TOWARD THE TO-BE-FROM-STRAYING IF
to-be-leading-astray
dunaton kai tous eklektous

dunaton kai tous eklektous
G1415 G2532 G3588 G1588
a_ Nom Sg n Conj t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
ABLE AND THE chosen-ones
possible also chosen-ones
13:23 umeis de blepete idou proeirhka umin panta 23 But take ye heed: behold, I
humeis de blepete idou proeirEka humin panta
G5210 G1161 G991 G2400 G4280 G5213 G3956
have foretold you all things.
pp 2 Nom Pl Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Perf Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl a_ Acc Pl n
YOU(p) YET BE-lookING BE-PERCEIVING I-HAVE-BEFORE-declarED to-YOU(p) ALL
ye be-ye-bewaring ! lo ! I-have-declared-it-beforehand to-ye
13:24 all en ekeinais tais hmerais meta thn qliyin ekeinhn o 24 . But in those days, after
all en ekeinais tais hEmerais meta tEn thlipsin ekeinEn ho
G235 G1722 G1565 G3588 G2250 G3326 G3588 G2347 G1565 G3588
that tribulation, the sun shall be
Conj Prep pd Dat Pl f t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg m darkened, and the moon shall
but IN those THE DAYS after THE CONSTRICTION that THE not give her light,
affliction
hlios skotisqhsetai kai h selhnh ou dwsei to

hElios skotisthEsetai kai hE selEnE ou dOsei to
G2246 G4654 G2532 G3588 G4582 G3756 G1325 G3588
n_ Nom Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Part Neg vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
SUN SHALL-BE-BEING-DARKenED AND THE MOON NOT SHALL-BE-GIVING THE
feggos auths
pheggos autEs
G5338 G846
n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg f
BEAM OF-her
13:25 kai oi asteres tou ouranou esontai ekpiptontes kai ai 25 And the stars of heaven
kai hoi asteres tou ouranou esontai ekpiptontes kai hai
G2532 G3588 G792 G3588 G3772 G2071 G1601 G2532 G3588
shall fall, and the powers that
Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut vxx 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl f are in heaven shall be shaken.
AND THE GLEAMers OF-THE heaven SHALL-BE OUT-FALLING AND THE
stars falling-out
dunameis ai en tois ouranois saleuqhsontai

dunameis hai en tois ouranois saleuthEsontai
G1411 G3588 G1722 G3588 G3772 G4531
n_ Nom Pl f t_ Nom Pl f Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
ABILITIES THE IN THE heavens SHALL-BE-BEING-SHAKEN
powers
13:26 kai tote oyontai ton uion tou anqrwpou 26 And then shall they see the
kai tote opsontai ton huion tou anthrOpou
G2532 G5119 G3700 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444
Son of man coming in the
Conj Adv vi Fut midD 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m clouds with great power and
AND then THEY-SHALL-BE-VIEWING THE SON OF-THE human glory.
Mark 13
ercomenon en nefelais meta dunamews pollhs kai doxhs

erchomenon en nephelais meta dunameOs pollEs kai doxEs
G2064 G1722 G3507 G3326 G1411 G4183 G2532 G1391
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m Prep n_ Dat Pl f Prep n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f
COMING IN CLOUDS WITH ABILITY much AND esteem
power glory
13:27 kai tote apostelei tous aggelous autou kai 27 And then shall he send his
kai tote apostelei tous aggelous autou kai
G2532 G5119 G649 G3588 G32 G846 G2532
angels, and shall gather
Conj Adv vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj together his elect from the four
AND then He-SHALL-BE-commissionING THE MESSENGERS OF-Him AND winds, from the uttermost part
he-shall-be-dispatching of the earth to the uttermost
part of heaven.
episunaxei tous eklektous autou ek twn tessarwn
episunaxei tous eklektous autou ek tOn tessarOn
G1996 G3588 G1588 G846 G1537 G3588 G5064
vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
He-SHALL-BE-ON-TOGETHER-LEADING THE chosen-ones OF-Him OUT OF-THE FOUR
he-shall-be-assembling chosen-ones
anemwn ap akrou ghs ews akrou ouranou

anemOn ap akrou gEs heOs akrou ouranou
G417 G575 G206 G1093 G2193 G206 G3772
n_ Gen Pl m Prep n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg m
WINDS FROM EXTREMITY OF-LAND TILL EXTREMITY OF-heaven
of-earth
13:28 apo de ths sukhs maqete thn parabolhn otan auths 28 . Now learn a parable of the
apo de tEs sukEs mathete tEn parabolEn hotan autEs
G575 G1161 G3588 G4808 G3129 G3588 G3850 G3752 G846
fig tree; When her branch is
Prep Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj pp Gen Sg f yet tender, and putteth forth
FROM YET THE FIG-tree BE-LEARNING THE BESIDE-CAST when-EVER OF-her leaves, ye know that summer is
be-ye-learning ! parable whenever of-herit near:
hdh o klados apalos genhtai kai ekfuh ta

EdE ho klados hapalos genEtai kai ekphuE ta
G2235 G3588 G2798 G527 G1096 G2532 G1631 G3588
Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj vs Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n
ALREADY THE bough TENDER MAY-BE-BECOMING AND MAY-BE-OUT-SPROUTING THE
may-be-sprouting-out
fulla ginwskete oti eggus to qeros estin

phulla ginOskete hoti eggus to theros estin
G5444 G1097 G3754 G1451 G3588 G2330 G2076
n_ Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Adv t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
leaves YE-ARE-KNOWING that NEAR THE WARM IS
summer
13:29 outws kai umeis otan tauta idhte ginomena 29 So ye in like manner, when
houtOs kai humeis hotan tauta idEte ginomena
G3779 G2532 G5210 G3752 G5023 G1492 G1096
ye shall see these things come
Adv Conj pp 2 Nom Pl Conj pd Acc Pl n vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl n to pass, know that it is nigh,
thus AND YOU(p) when-EVER these YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING BECOMING [even] at the doors.
also ye whenever these-things occurring
ginwskete oti eggus estin epi qurais

ginOskete hoti eggus estin epi thurais
G1097 G3754 G1451 G2076 G1909 G2374
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Adv vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep n_ Dat Pl f
BE-YE-KNOWING that NEAR He-IS ON DOORS
be-ye-knowing !
13:30 amhn legw umin oti ou mh parelqh h genea 30 Verily I say unto you, that
amEn legO humin hoti ou mE parelthE hE genea
G281 G3004 G5213 G3754 G3756 G3361 G3928 G3588 G1074
this generation shall not pass,
Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Part Neg Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f till all these things be done.
AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that NOT NO MAY-BE-BESIDE-COMING THE generation
verily to-ye may-be-passing-by
auth mecris ou panta tauta genhtai

hautE mechris hou panta tauta genEtai
G3778 G3360 G3739 G3956 G5023 G1096
pd Nom Sg f Adv pr Gen Sg m a_ Nom Pl n pd Nom Pl n vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
this UNTO OF-WHICH ALL these MAY-BE-BECOMING
until which these-things may-be-occurring
13:31 o ouranos kai h gh pareleusontai oi de 31 Heaven and earth shall pass

ho ouranos kai hE gE pareleusontai hoi de
G3588 G3772 G2532 G3588 G1093 G3928 G3588 G1161
away: but my words shall not
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vi Fut midD 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m Conj pass away.
THE heaven AND THE LAND SHALL-BE-BESIDE-COMING THE YET
earth shall-be-passing-by
logoi mou ou mh parelqwsin

logoi mou ou mE parelthOsin
G3056 G3450 G3756 G3361 G3928
n_ Nom Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg Part Neg Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
sayings OF-ME NOT NO MAY-BE-BESIDE-COMING
words may-be-passing-by
Mark 13 - Mark 14
13:32 peri de ths hmeras ekeinhs kai ths wras oudeis 32 But of that day and [that]
peri de tEs hEmeras ekeinEs kai tEs hOras oudeis
G4012 G1161 G3588 G2250 G1565 G2532 G3588 G5610 G3762
hour knoweth no man, no, not
Prep Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f a_ Nom Sg m the angels which are in heaven,
ABOUT YET THE DAY that AND THE HOUR NOT-YET-ONE neither the Son, but the Father.
concerning no-one
oiden oude oi aggeloi oi en ouranw oude o

oiden oude hoi aggeloi hoi en ouranO oude ho
G1492 G3761 G3588 G32 G3588 G1722 G3772 G3761 G3588
vi Perf Act 3 Sg Adv t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m Prep n_ Dat Sg m Adv t_ Nom Sg m
HAS-PERCEIVED NOT-YET THE MESSENGERS THE IN heaven NOT-YET THE
is-aware neither nor
uios ei mh o pathr
huios ei mE ho patEr
G5207 G1487 G3361 G3588 G3962
n_ Nom Sg m Cond Part Neg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
SON IF NO THE FATHER
13:33 blepete agrupneite kai proseucesqe ouk oidate gar pote 33 Take ye heed, watch and
blepete agrupneite kai proseuchesthe ouk oidate gar pote
G991 G69 G2532 G4336 G3756 G1492 G1063 G4219
pray: for ye know not when the
vm Pres Act 2 Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Part Neg vi Perf Act 2 Pl Conj Part Int time is.
BE-lookING BE-YE-beING-vigilant AND BE-YE-prayING NOT YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED for ?-when
be-ye-bewaring ! be-ye-being-vigilant ! be-ye-praying ! ye-are-aware when ?
o kairos estin
ho kairos estin
G3588 G2540 G2076
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE SEASON IS
era
13:34 ws anqrwpos apodhmos afeis thn oikian autou kai 34 [For the Son of man is] as a
hOs anthrOpos apodEmos apheis tEn oikian autou kai
G5613 G444 G590 G863 G3588 G3614 G846 G2532
man taking a far journey, who
Adv n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj left his house, and gave
AS human traveler FROM-LETTING THE HOME OF-him AND authority to his servants, and to
leaving every man his work, and
commanded the porter to
dous tois doulois autou thn exousian kai ekastw to watch.
dous tois doulois autou tEn exousian kai hekastO to
G1325 G3588 G1401 G846 G3588 G1849 G2532 G1538 G3588
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Dat Sg m t_ Acc Sg n
GIVING to-THE SLAVES OF-him THE authority AND to-EACH THE
the
ergon autou kai tw qurwrw eneteilato ina grhgorh

ergon autou kai tO thurOrO eneteilato hina grEgorE
G2041 G846 G2532 G3588 G2377 G1781 G2443 G1127
n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m Conj t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg Conj vs Pres Act 3 Sg
work OF-him AND to-THE DOOR-SEE-er he-directs THAT he-MAY-BE-watchING
the doorkeeper
13:35 grhgoreite oun ouk oidate gar pote o kurios ths 35 Watch ye therefore: for ye
grEgoreite oun ouk oidate gar pote ho kurios tEs
G1127 G3767 G3756 G1492 G1063 G4219 G3588 G2962 G3588
know not when the master of
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Part Neg vi Perf Act 2 Pl Conj Part Int t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg f the house cometh, at even, or at
BE-watchING THEN NOT YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED for ?-when THE master OF-THE midnight, or at the
be-ye-watching ! ye-are-aware when ? lord cockcrowing, or in the
morning:
oikias ercetai oye h mesonuktiou h alektorofwnias h
oikias erchetai opse E mesonuktiou E alektorophOnias E
G3614 G2064 G3796 G2228 G3317 G2228 G219 G2228
n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Adv Part n_ Gen Sg n Part n_ Gen Sg f Part
HOME IS-COMING evening OR OF-MID-NIGHT OR OF-UN-LAY-SOUNDING OR
house of-midnight of-cockcrowing
prwi
prOi
G4404
Adv
morning
in-the-morning
13:36 mh elqwn exaifnhs eurh umas kaqeudontas 36 Lest coming suddenly he

mE elthOn exaiphnEs heurE humas katheudontas
G3361 G2064 G1810 G2147 G5209 G2518
find you sleeping.
Part Neg vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Adv vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
NO COMING suddenly he-MAY-BE-FINDING YOU(p) DOWN-LOUNGING
ye drowsing
13:37 a de umin legw pasin legw grhgoreite 37 And what I say unto you I
ha de humin legO pasin legO grEgoreite
G3739 G1161 G5213 G3004 G3956 G3004 G1127
say unto all, Watch.
pr Acc Pl n Conj pp 2 Dat Pl vi Pres Act 1 Sg a_ Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 1 Sg vm Pres Act 2 Pl
WHICH YET to-YOU(p) I-AM-sayING to-ALL I-AM-sayING BE-watchING
which(p) to-ye be-ye-watching !
Mark 14
14:1 hn de to pasca kai ta azuma meta duo hmeras 1 . After two days was [the
En de to pascha kai ta azuma meta duo hEmeras
G2258 G1161 G3588 G3957 G2532 G3588 G106 G3326 G1417 G2250
feast of] the passover, and of
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg n Aramaic Conj t_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n Prep a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl f unleavened bread: and the
it-WAS YET THE PASSOVER AND THE UN-FERMENTEDS after TWO DAYS chief priests and the scribes
unleavened-breads sought how they might take
him by craft, and put [him] to
kai ezhtoun oi arciereis kai oi grammateis pws auton en death.
kai ezEtoun hoi archiereis kai hoi grammateis pOs auton en
G2532 G2212 G3588 G749 G2532 G3588 G1122 G4459 G846 G1722
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Adv Int pp Acc Sg m Prep
AND SOUGHT THE chief-SACRED-ones AND THE WRITers how Him IN
chief-priests scribes how ?
dolw krathsantes apokteinwsin

dolO kratEsantes apokteinOsin
G1388 G2902 G615
n_ Dat Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vs Pres Act 3 Pl
FRAUD HOLDing THEY-MAY-BE-FROM-KILLING
guile laying-hold they-may-be-killing
14:2 elegon de mh en th eorth mhpote qorubos estai 2 But they said, Not on the
elegon de mE en tE heortE mEpote thorubos estai
G3004 G1161 G3361 G1722 G3588 G1859 G3379 G2351 G2071
feast [day], lest there be an
vi Impf Act 3 Pl Conj Part Neg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Adv n_ Nom Sg m vi Fut vxx 3 Sg uproar of the people.
THEY-said YET NO IN THE FESTIVAL NO-?-when TUMULT SHALL-BE
lest-at-some-time there-shall-be
tou laou
tou laou
G3588 G2992
OF-THE PEOPLE
14:3 kai ontos autou en bhqania en th oikia simwnos 3 And being in Bethany in the
kai ontos autou en bEthania en tE oikia simOnos
G2532 G5607 G846 G1722 G963 G1722 G3588 G3614 G4613
house of Simon the leper, as he
Conj vp Pres vxx Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg f Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg m sat at meat, there came a
AND OF-BEING OF-Him IN BETHANY IN THE HOME OF-SIMON woman having an alabaster
house box of ointment of spikenard
very precious; and she brake
tou leprou katakeimenou autou hlqen gunh ecousa the box, and poured [it] on his
tou leprou katakeimenou autou Elthen gunE echousa head.
G3588 G3015 G2621 G846 G2064 G1135 G2192
t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f
THE leper OF-DOWN-LYING OF-Him CAME WOMAN HAVING
of-lying-down
alabastron murou nardou pistikhs polutelous kai suntriyasa to

alabastron murou nardou pistikEs polutelous kai suntripsasa to
G211 G3464 G3487 G4101 G4185 G2532 G4937 G3588
n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Sg n
ALABASTER OF-ATTAR NARD BELIEVic OF-MUCH-FINISH AND crushing THE
alabaster-vase veritable costly
alabastron kateceen autou kata ths kefalhs

alabastron katecheen autou kata tEs kephalEs
G211 G2708 G846 G2596 G3588 G2776
n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Gen Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
ALABASTER she-DOWN-POURS OF-Him DOWN OF-THE HEAD
alabaster-vase she-pours-down-it the
14:4 hsan de tines aganaktountes pros eautous kai legontes 4 And there were some that
Esan de tines aganaktountes pros heautous kai legontes
G2258 G1161 G5100 G23 G4314 G1438 G2532 G3004
had indignation within
vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj px Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep pf 3 Acc Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m themselves, and said, Why was
WERE YET ANY resentING TOWARD selves AND sayING this waste of the ointment
some themselves made?
eis ti h apwleia auth tou murou gegonen

eis ti hE apOleia hautE tou murou gegonen
G1519 G5101 G3588 G684 G3778 G3588 G3464 G1096
Prep pi Acc Sg n t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pd Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
INTO ANY THE destruction this OF-THE ATTAR HAS-BECOME
what ? has-occurred
14:5 hdunato gar touto praqhnai epanw triakosiwn dhnariwn kai 5 For it might have been sold
Edunato gar touto prathEnai epanO triakosiOn dEnariOn kai
G1410 G1063 G5124 G4097 G1883 G5145 G1220 G2532
for more than three hundred
vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Att Conj pd Nom Sg n vn Aor Pas Adv a_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl n Conj pence, and have been given to
was-ABLE for this TO-BE-disposED-of ON-UP THREE-hundred DENARII AND the poor. And they murmured
could over against her.
doqhnai tois ptwcois kai enebrimwnto auth

dothEnai tois ptOchois kai enebrimOnto autE
G1325 G3588 G4434 G2532 G1690 G846
vn Aor Pas t_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl pp Dat Sg f
TO-BE-GIVEN to-THE POOR AND THEY-IN-THUNDERED to-her
poor-ones they-muttered
Mark 14
14:6 o de ihsous eipen afete authn ti auth kopous 6 And Jesus said, Let her
ho de iEsous eipen aphete autEn ti autE kopous
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G863 G846 G5101 G846 G2873
alone; why trouble ye her? she
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl pp Acc Sg f pi Acc Sg n pp Dat Sg f n_ Acc Pl m hath wrought a good work on
THE YET JESUS said FROM-LET her ANY to-her toils me.
leave-ye ! why ? her weariness(p)
parecete kalon ergon eirgasato eis eme

parechete kalon ergon eirgasato eis eme
G3930 G2570 G2041 G2038 G1519 G1691
vi Pres Act 2 Pl a_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor midD 3 Sg Prep pp 1 Acc Sg
YE-ARE-tenderING IDEAL work she-works INTO ME
ye-are-affording
14:7 pantote gar tous ptwcous ecete meq eautwn kai otan 7 For ye have the poor with
pantote gar tous ptOchous echete meth heautOn kai hotan
G3842 G1063 G3588 G4434 G2192 G3326 G1438 G2532 G3752
you always, and whensoever
Adv Conj t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl Prep pf 3 Gen Pl m Conj Conj ye will ye may do them good:
always for THE POOR YE-ARE-HAVING WITH selves AND when-EVER but me ye have not always.
poor-ones yourselves whenever
qelhte dunasqe autous eu poihsai eme de ou pantote

thelEte dunasthe autous eu poiEsai eme de ou pantote
G2309 G1410 G846 G2095 G4160 G1691 G1161 G3756 G3842
vs Pres Act 2 Pl vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl pp Acc Pl m Adv vn Aor Act pp 1 Acc Sg Conj Part Neg Adv
YE-MAY-BE-WILLING YE-ARE-ABLE them WELL TO-DO ME YET NOT always
ye-can
ecete
echete
G2192
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
YE-ARE-HAVING
14:8 o eicen auth epoihsen proelaben murisai mou to 8 She hath done what she
ho eichen autE epoiEsen proelaben murisai mou to
G3739 G2192 G846 G4160 G4301 G3462 G3450 G3588
could: she is come aforehand
pr Acc Sg n vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Nom Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vn Aor Act pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Acc Sg n to anoint my body to the
WHICH she-HAD she DOES she-BEFORE-GETS TO-ATTARize OF-ME THE burying.
she-gets-beforehand to-anoint-with-attar
swma eis ton entafiasmon

sOma eis ton entaphiasmon
G4983 G1519 G3588 G1780
n_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
BODY INTO THE IN-sepulchering
burial
14:9 amhn legw umin opou an khrucqh to euaggelion 9 Verily I say unto you,
amEn legO humin hopou an kEruchthE to euaggelion
G281 G3004 G5213 G3699 G302 G2784 G3588 G2098
Wheresoever this gospel shall
Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Adv Part vs Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n be preached throughout the
AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) THE-?-where EVER MAY-BE-BEING-PROCLAIMED THE WELL-MESSAGE whole world, [this] also that
verily to-ye wherever may-be-being-heralded she hath done shall be spoken
of for a memorial of her.
touto eis olon ton kosmon kai o epoihsen auth
touto eis holon ton kosmon kai ho epoiEsen autE
G5124 G1519 G3650 G3588 G2889 G2532 G3739 G4160 G846
pd Nom Sg n Prep a_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj pr Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Nom Sg f
this INTO WHOLE THE SYSTEM AND WHICH she-DOES this
world also does she
lalhqhsetai eis mnhmosunon auths

lalEthEsetai eis mnEmosunon autEs
G2980 G1519 G3422 G846
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg f
SHALL-BE-BEING-TALKED INTO REMINDer OF-her
shall-be-being-spoken-of memorial
14:10 kai o ioudas o iskariwths eis twn dwdeka 10 And Judas Iscariot, one of
kai ho ioudas ho iskariOtEs heis tOn dOdeka
G2532 G3588 G2455 G3588 G2469 G1520 G3588 G1427
the twelve, went unto the chief
Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom priests, to betray him unto
AND THE JUDAS THE ISCARIOT ONE OF-THE TWO-TEN them.
twelve
aphlqen pros tous arciereis ina paradw auton autois

apElthen pros tous archiereis hina paradO auton autois
G565 G4314 G3588 G749 G2443 G3860 G846 G846
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m pp Dat Pl m
FROM-CAME TOWARD THE chief-SACRED-ones THAT he-MAY-BE-BESIDE-GIVING Him to-them
came-away chief-priests he-may-be-giving-up
14:11 oi de akousantes ecarhsan kai ephggeilanto autw argurion 11 And when they heard [it],
hoi de akousantes echarEsan kai epEggeilanto autO argurion
G3588 G1161 G191 G5463 G2532 G1861 G846 G694
they were glad, and promised
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor pasD 3 Pl Conj vi Aor midD/pasD 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg n to give him money. And he
THE YET HEARing THEY-WERE-JOYed AND THEY-promise to-him SILVER sought how he might
they-rejoiced promise him conveniently betray him.
Mark 14
dounai kai ezhtei pws eukairws auton paradw

dounai kai ezEtei pOs eukairOs auton paradO
G1325 G2532 G2212 G4459 G2122 G846 G3860
vn 2Aor Act Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg Adv Int Adv pp Acc Sg m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
TO-GIVE AND he-SOUGHT how WELL-SEASONly Him he-MAY-BE-BESIDE-GIVING
how ? opportunely he-may-be-giving-up
14:12 kai th prwth hmera twn azumwn ote to pasca 12 . And the first day of
kai tE prOtE hEmera tOn azumOn hote to pascha
G2532 G3588 G4413 G2250 G3588 G106 G3753 G3588 G3957
unleavened bread, when they
Conj t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl n a_ Gen Pl n Adv t_ Acc Sg n Aramaic killed the passover, his
AND to-THE BEFORE-most DAY OF-THE UN-FERMENTEDS when THE PASSOVER disciples said unto him, Where
first unleavened-bread(p) wilt thou that we go and
prepare that thou mayest eat
equon legousin autw oi maqhtai autou pou qeleis the passover?
ethuon legousin autO hoi mathEtai autou pou theleis
G2380 G3004 G846 G3588 G3101 G846 G4226 G2309
vi Impf Act 3 Pl vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m Part Int vi Pres Act 2 Sg
THEY-SACRIFICED ARE-sayING to-Him THE LEARNers OF-Him ?-where YOU-ARE-WILLING
disciples where ?
apelqontes etoimaswmen ina faghs to pasca

apelthontes hetoimasOmen hina phagEs to pascha
G565 G2090 G2443 G5315 G3588 G3957
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vs Aor Act 1 Pl Conj vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg n Aramaic
FROM-COMING WE-SHOULD-BE-makING-READY THAT YOU-MAY-BE-EATING THE PASSOVER
coming-away
14:13 kai apostellei duo twn maqhtwn autou kai legei autois 13 And he sendeth forth two of
kai apostellei duo tOn mathEtOn autou kai legei autois
G2532 G649 G1417 G3588 G3101 G846 G2532 G3004 G846
his disciples, and saith unto
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg a_ Nom t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m them, Go ye into the city, and
AND He-IS-commissionING TWO OF-THE LEARNers OF-Him AND He-IS-sayING to-them there shall meet you a man
he-is-dispatching disciples is-saying bearing a pitcher of water:
follow him.
upagete eis thn polin kai apanthsei umin anqrwpos
hupagete eis tEn polin kai apantEsei humin anthrOpos
G5217 G1519 G3588 G4172 G2532 G528 G5213 G444
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Nom Sg m
BE-YE-UNDER-LEADING INTO THE city AND SHALL-BE-FROM-meetING to-YOU(p) human
be-ye-going-away ! shall-be-meeting ye
keramion udatos bastazwn akolouqhsate autw

keramion hudatos bastazOn akolouthEsate autO
G2765 G5204 G941 G190 G846
n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp Dat Sg m
HOLDer (dim) OF-water BEARING follow to-him
jar follow-ye ! him
14:14 kai opou ean eiselqh eipate tw oikodespoth oti 14 And wheresoever he shall
kai hopou ean eiselthE eipate tO oikodespotE hoti
G2532 G3699 G1437 G1525 G2036 G3588 G3617 G3754
go in, say ye to the goodman of
Conj Adv Cond vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj the house, The Master saith,
AND THE-?-where IF-EVER he-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING say to-THE HOME-OWNER that Where is the guestchamber,
wherever he-may-be-entering say-ye ! householder where I shall eat the passover
with my disciples?
o didaskalos legei pou estin to kataluma opou
ho didaskalos legei pou estin to kataluma hopou
G3588 G1320 G3004 G4226 G2076 G3588 G2646 G3699
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Part Int vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Adv
THE TEACHer IS-sayING ?-where IS THE DOWN-LOOSE THE-?-where
where ? caravansary wheree
to pasca meta twn maqhtwn mou fagw

to pascha meta tOn mathEtOn mou phagO
G3588 G3957 G3326 G3588 G3101 G3450 G5315
t_ Acc Sg n Aramaic Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
THE PASSOVER WITH THE LEARNers OF-ME I-MAY-BE-EATING
disciples
14:15 kai autos umin deixei anwgeon mega estrwmenon 15 And he will shew you a
kai autos humin deixei anOgeon mega estrOmenon
G2532 G846 G5213 G1166 G508 G3173 G4766
large upper room furnished
Conj pp Nom Sg m pp 2 Dat Pl vi Fut Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n vp Perf Pas Acc Sg n [and] prepared: there make
AND he to-YOU(p) SHALL-BE-SHOWING UP-LAND GREAT HAVING-been-STREWN ready for us.
ye upper-room large with-places-having-been-spread
etoimon ekei etoimasate hmin

hetoimon ekei hetoimasate hEmin
G2092 G1563 G2090 G2254
a_ Acc Sg n Adv vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Pl
READY there make-YE-READY to-US
make-ready-ye !
14:16 kai exhlqon oi maqhtai autou kai hlqon eis thn polin 16 And his disciples went
kai exElthon hoi mathEtai autou kai Elthon eis tEn polin
G2532 G1831 G3588 G3101 G846 G2532 G2064 G1519 G3588 G4172
forth, and came into the city,
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f and found as he had said unto
AND OUT-CAME THE LEARNers OF-Him AND CAME INTO THE city them: and they made ready the
came-out disciples passover.
Mark 14
kai euron kaqws eipen autois kai htoimasan to pasca

kai heuron kathOs eipen autois kai hEtoimasan to pascha
G2532 G2147 G2531 G2036 G846 G2532 G2090 G3588 G3957
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n Aramaic
AND THEY-FOUND according-AS He-said to-them AND THEY-make-READY THE PASSOVER
14:17 kai oyias genomenhs ercetai meta twn dwdeka 17 And in the evening he
kai opsias genomenEs erchetai meta tOn dOdeka
G2532 G3798 G1096 G2064 G3326 G3588 G1427
cometh with the twelve.
Conj a_ Gen Sg f vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom
AND OF-evening BECOMING He-IS-COMING WITH THE TWO-TEN
twelve
14:18 kai anakeimenwn autwn kai esqiontwn eipen o 18 And as they sat and did eat,
kai anakeimenOn autOn kai esthiontOn eipen ho
G2532 G345 G846 G2532 G2068 G2036 G3588
Jesus said, Verily I say unto
Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m you, One of you which eateth
AND OF-UP-LYING OF-them AND OF-EATING said THE with me shall betray me.
of-lying-back-at-table
ihsous amhn legw umin oti eis ex umwn paradwsei

iEsous amEn legO humin hoti heis ex humOn paradOsei
G2424 G281 G3004 G5213 G3754 G1520 G1537 G5216 G3860
n_ Nom Sg m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj a_ Nom Sg m Prep pp 2 Gen Pl vi Fut Act 3 Sg
JESUS AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that ONE OUT OF-YOU(p) SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING
verily to-ye of-ye shall-be-giving-up
me o esqiwn met emou

me ho esthiOn met emou
G3165 G3588 G2068 G3326 G1700
pp 1 Acc Sg t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
ME THE one-EATING WITH ME
one-eating
14:19 oi de hrxanto lupeisqai kai legein autw eis 19 And they began to be
hoi de Erxanto lupeisthai kai legein autO heis
G3588 G1161 G756 G3076 G2532 G3004 G846 G1520
sorrowful, and to say unto him
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor midD 3 Pl vn Pres Pas Conj vn Pres Act pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom Sg m one by one, [Is] it I? and
THE YET THEY-begin TO-BE-SORROWING AND TO-BE-sayING to-Him ONE another [said, Is] it I?
to-be-being-sorrowful
kaq eis mhti egw kai allos mhti egw

kath heis mEti egO kai allos mEti egO
G2596 G1520 G3385 G1473 G2532 G243 G3385 G1473
Prep a_ Nom Sg m Part Int pp 1 Nom Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg m Part Int pp 1 Nom Sg
according-to ONE NO-ANY I AND other NO-ANY I
downby not ? another not ?
14:20 o de apokriqeis eipen autois eis ek twn dwdeka 20 And he answered and said
ho de apokritheis eipen autois heis ek tOn dOdeka
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G846 G1520 G1537 G3588 G1427
unto them, [It is] one of the
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m a_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom twelve, that dippeth with me in
THE YET answerING He-said to-them ONE OUT OF-THE TWO-TEN the dish.
twelve
o embaptomenos met emou eis to trublion

ho embaptomenos met emou eis to trublion
G3588 G1686 G3326 G1700 G1519 G3588 G5165
t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m Prep pp 1 Gen Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
THE one-IN-DIPPING WITH ME INTO THE DISH
one-dipping-in
14:21 o men uios tou anqrwpou upagei kaqws 21 The Son of man indeed
ho men huios tou anthrOpou hupagei kathOs
G3588 G3303 G5207 G3588 G444 G5217 G2531
goeth, as it is written of him:
t_ Nom Sg m Part n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv but woe to that man by whom
THE INDEED SON OF-THE human IS-UNDER-LEADING according-AS the Son of man is betrayed!
is-going-away good were it for that man if he
had never been born.
gegraptai peri autou ouai de tw anqrwpw ekeinw di ou
gegraptai peri autou ouai de tO anthrOpO ekeinO di hou
G1125 G4012 G846 G3759 G1161 G3588 G444 G1565 G1223 G3739
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m Inj Conj t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pd Dat Sg m Prep pr Gen Sg m
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN ABOUT Him WOE YET to-THE human that THRU WHOM
concerning woe ! through
o uios tou anqrwpou paradidotai kalon hn autw

ho huios tou anthrOpou paradidotai kalon En autO
G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G3860 G2570 G2258 G846
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg n vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
THE SON OF-THE human IS-beING-BESIDE-GIVEN IDEAL it-WAS to-Him
is-being-given-up
ei ouk egennhqh o anqrwpos ekeinos

ei ouk egennEthE ho anthrOpos ekeinos
G1487 G3756 G1080 G3588 G444 G1565
Cond Part Neg vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m
IF NOT WAS-generatED THE human that
was-born
Mark 14
14:22 kai esqiontwn autwn labwn o ihsous arton 22 And as they did eat, Jesus
kai esthiontOn autOn labOn ho iEsous arton
G2532 G2068 G846 G2983 G3588 G2424 G740
took bread, and blessed, and
Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m brake [it], and gave to them,
AND OF-EATING OF-them GETTING THE JESUS BREAD and said, Take, eat: this is my
taking body.
euloghsas eklasen kai edwken autois kai eipen labete

eulogEsas eklasen kai edOken autois kai eipen labete
G2127 G2806 G2532 G1325 G846 G2532 G2036 G2983
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
blessing He-BREAKS AND GIVES to-them AND said BE-GETTING
he-breaks-it be-ye-taking !
fagete touto estin to swma mou

phagete touto estin to sOma mou
G5315 G5124 G2076 G3588 G4983 G3450
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl pd Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg
BE-EATING this IS THE BODY OF-ME
be-ye-eating !
14:23 kai labwn to pothrion eucaristhsas edwken autois kai 23 And he took the cup, and
kai labOn to potErion eucharistEsas edOken autois kai
G2532 G2983 G3588 G4221 G2168 G1325 G846 G2532
when he had given thanks, he
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj gave [it] to them: and they all
AND GETTING THE DRINK-cup thanking He-GIVES to-them AND drank of it.
taking cup giving-thanks he-gives-it
epion ex autou pantes

epion ex autou pantes
G4095 G1537 G846 G3956
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pp Gen Sg n a_ Nom Pl m
THEY-DRANK OUT OF-it ALL
14:24 kai eipen autois touto estin to aima mou to 24 And he said unto them, This
kai eipen autois touto estin to haima mou to
G2532 G2036 G846 G5124 G2076 G3588 G129 G3450 G3588
is my blood of the new
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pd Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg n testament, which is shed for
AND He-said to-them this IS THE BLOOD OF-ME THE many.
ths kainhs diaqhkhs to peri pollwn ekcunomenon

tEs kainEs diathEkEs to peri pollOn ekchunomenon
G3588 G2537 G1242 G3588 G4012 G4183 G1632
t_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Nom Sg n Prep a_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n
OF-THE NEW covenant THE ABOUT MANY beING-OUT-POURED
concerning being-shed
14:25 amhn legw umin oti ouketi ou mh piw ek tou 25 Verily I say unto you, I will
amEn legO humin hoti ouketi ou mE piO ek tou
G281 G3004 G5213 G3754 G3765 G3756 G3361 G4095 G1537 G3588
drink no more of the fruit of
Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Adv Part Neg Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg n the vine, until that day that I
AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that NOT-STILL NOT NO I-MAY-BE-DRINKING OUT OF-THE drink it new in the kingdom of
verily to-ye not-longer God.
gennhmatos ths ampelou ews ths hmeras ekeinhs otan auto

gennEmatos tEs ampelou heOs tEs hEmeras ekeinEs hotan auto
G1081 G3588 G288 G2193 G3588 G2250 G1565 G3752 G846
n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f Conj pp Acc Sg n
product OF-THE GRAPE-VINE TILL OF-THE DAY that when-EVER it
grapevine the whenever
pinw kainon en th basileia tou qeou

pinO kainon en tE basileia tou theou
G4095 G2537 G1722 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316
vs Pres Act 1 Sg a_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
I-MAY-BE-DRINKING NEW IN THE KINGdom OF-THE God
14:26 kai umnhsantes exhlqon eis to oros twn elaiwn 26 And when they had sung an
kai humnEsantes exElthon eis to oros tOn elaiOn
G2532 G5214 G1831 G1519 G3588 G3735 G3588 G1636
hymn, they went out into the
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f mount of Olives.
AND HYMNing THEY-OUT-CAME INTO THE mountain OF-THE OLIVES
singing-a-hymn they-came-out Mount
14:27 kai legei autois o ihsous oti pantes skandalisqhsesqe 27 And Jesus saith unto them,
kai legei autois ho iEsous hoti pantes skandalisthEsesthe
G2532 G3004 G846 G3588 G2424 G3754 G3956 G4624
All ye shall be offended
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Fut Pas 2 Pl because of me this night: for it
AND IS-sayING to-them THE JESUS that ALL YE-SHALL-BE-BEING-SNARED is written, I will smite the
shepherd, and the sheep shall
be scattered.
en emoi en th nukti tauth oti gegraptai pataxw ton
en emoi en tE nukti tautE hoti gegraptai pataxO ton
G1722 G1698 G1722 G3588 G3571 G3778 G3754 G1125 G3960 G3588
Prep pp 1 Dat Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f Conj vi Perf Pas 3 Sg vi Fut Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg m
IN ME IN THE NIGHT this that HAS-been-WRITTEN I-SHALL-BE-SMITING THE
it-has-been-written
Mark 14
poimena kai diaskorpisqhsetai ta probata

poimena kai diaskorpisthEsetai ta probata
G4166 G2532 G1287 G3588 G4263
n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n
SHEPHERD AND SHALL-BE-BEING-THRU-SCATTERED THE sheep
shall-be-being-scattered sheep(p)
14:28 alla meta to egerqhnai me proaxw umas eis 28 But after that I am risen, I
alla meta to egerthEnai me proaxO humas eis
G235 G3326 G3588 G1453 G3165 G4254 G5209 G1519
will go before you into Galilee.
Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Pas pp 1 Acc Sg vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl Prep
but after THE TO-BE-ROUSED ME I-SHALL-BE-BEFORE-LEADING YOU(p) INTO
I-shall-be-preceding ye
thn galilaian
tEn galilaian
G3588 G1056
THE GALILEE
14:29 o de petros efh autw kai ei pantes 29 But Peter said unto him,
ho de petros ephE autO kai ei pantes
G3588 G1161 G4074 G5346 G846 G2532 G1487 G3956
Although all shall be offended,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Conj Cond a_ Nom Pl m yet [will] not I.
THE YET Peter AVERRed to-Him AND IF ALL
skandalisqhsontai all ouk egw

skandalisthEsontai all ouk egO
G4624 G235 G3756 G1473
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl Conj Part Neg pp 1 Nom Sg
SHALL-BE-BEING-SNARED but NOT I
nevertheless
14:30 kai legei autw o ihsous amhn legw soi oti 30 And Jesus saith unto him,
kai legei autO ho iEsous amEn legO soi hoti
G2532 G3004 G846 G3588 G2424 G281 G3004 G4671 G3754
Verily I say unto thee, That
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Conj this day, [even] in this night,
AND IS-sayING to-him THE JESUS AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU that before the cock crow twice,
verily thou shalt deny me thrice.
shmeron en th nukti tauth prin h dis alektora fwnhsai tris

sEmeron en tE nukti tautE prin E dis alektora phOnEsai tris
G4594 G1722 G3588 G3571 G3778 G4250 G2228 G1364 G220 G5455 G5151
Adv Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f Adv Part Adv n_ Acc Sg m vn Aor Act Adv
toDAY IN THE NIGHT this ERE OR twice UN-LAYer TO-SOUND THRice
than cock to-crow
aparnhsh me
aparnEsE me
G533 G3165
vi Fut midD 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-renouncING ME
14:31 o de ek perissou elegen mallon ean me deh 31 But he spake the more
ho de ek perissou elegen mallon ean me deE
G3588 G1161 G1537 G4053 G3004 G3123 G1437 G3165 G1163
vehemently, If I should die
t_ Nom Sg m Conj Prep a_ Gen Sg n vi Impf Act 3 Sg Adv Cond pp 1 Acc Sg vs Pres im-Act 3 Sg with thee, I will not deny thee
THE YET OUT OF-excessive he-said RATHER IF-EVER ME it-MAY-BE-BINDING in any wise. Likewise also said
they all.
sunapoqanein soi ou mh se aparnhsomai wsautws de

sunapothanein soi ou mE se aparnEsomai hOsautOs de
G4880 G4671 G3756 G3361 G4571 G533 G5615 G1161
vn 2Aor Act pp 2 Dat Sg Part Neg Part Neg pp 2 Acc Sg vi Fut midD 1 Sg Adv Conj
TO-BE-TOGETHER-FROM-DYING to-YOU NOT NO YOU I-SHALL-BE-renouncING AS-SAMEly YET
to-be-dying-together similarly
kai pantes elegon

kai pantes elegon
G2532 G3956 G3004
Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl
AND ALL said
also
14:32 kai ercontai eis cwrion ou to onoma geqshmanh kai 32 . And they came to a place
kai erchontai eis chOrion hou to onoma gethsEmanE kai
G2532 G2064 G1519 G5564 G3739 G3588 G3686 G1068 G2532
which was named Gethsemane:
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg n pr Gen Sg n t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n ni proper Conj and he saith to his disciples, Sit
AND THEY-ARE-COMING INTO freehold OF-WHICH THE NAME GETHSEMANE AND ye here, while I shall pray.
legei tois maqhtais autou kaqisate wde ews proseuxwmai

legei tois mathEtais autou kathisate hOde heOs proseuxOmai
G3004 G3588 G3101 G846 G2523 G5602 G2193 G4336
vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Pl Adv Conj vs Aor midD 1 Sg
He-IS-sayING to-THE LEARNers OF-Him BE-seated here TILL I-SHOULD-BE-prayING
disciples be-ye-seated ! while
Mark 14
14:33 kai paralambanei ton petron kai ton iakwbon kai iwannhn 33 And he taketh with him
kai paralambanei ton petron kai ton iakObon kai iOannEn
G2532 G3880 G3588 G4074 G2532 G3588 G2385 G2532 G2491
Peter and James and John, and
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m began to be sore amazed, and
AND He-IS-BESIDE-GETTING THE Peter AND THE JACOBUS AND JOHN to be very heavy;
he-is-taking-aside James
meq eautou kai hrxato ekqambeisqai kai adhmonein

meth heautou kai Erxato ekthambeisthai kai adEmonein
G3326 G1438 G2532 G756 G1568 G2532 G85
Prep pf 3 Gen Sg m Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Pas Conj vn Pres Act
WITH Self AND begins TO-BE-beING-OUT-AWED AND TO-BE-depressING
himself he-begins to-be-being-overawed to-be-being-depressed
14:34 kai legei autois perilupos estin h yuch mou ews 34 And saith unto them, My
kai legei autois perilupos estin hE psuchE mou heOs
G2532 G3004 G846 G4036 G2076 G3588 G5590 G3450 G2193
soul is exceeding sorrowful
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m a_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg Conj unto death: tarry ye here, and
AND He-IS-sayING to-them ABOUT-SORROWed IS THE soul OF-ME TILL watch.
sorrow-stricken
qanatou meinate wde kai grhgoreite

thanatou meinate hOde kai grEgoreite
G2288 G3306 G5602 G2532 G1127
n_ Gen Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Pl Adv Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl
OF-DEATH REMAIN here AND BE-watchING
death remain-ye ! be-ye-watching !
14:35 kai proelqwn mikron epesen epi ths ghs kai 35 And he went forward a
kai proelthOn mikron epesen epi tEs gEs kai
G2532 G4281 G3397 G4098 G1909 G3588 G1093 G2532
little, and fell on the ground,
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m a_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj and prayed that, if it were
AND BEFORE-COMING LITTLE He-FALLS ON THE LAND AND possible, the hour might pass
coming-forward earth from him.
proshuceto ina ei dunaton estin parelqh ap autou

prosEucheto hina ei dunaton estin parelthE ap autou
G4336 G2443 G1487 G1415 G2076 G3928 G575 G846
vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj Cond a_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m
He-prayED THAT IF ABLE it-IS MAY-BE-BESIDE-COMING FROM Him
prayed possible may-be-passing-by
h wra
hE hOra
G3588 G5610
t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
THE HOUR
14:36 kai elegen abba o pathr panta dunata soi parenegke 36 And he said, Abba, Father,
kai elegen abba ho patEr panta dunata soi parenegke
G2532 G3004 G5 G3588 G3962 G3956 G1415 G4671 G3911
all things [are] possible unto
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg ni proper t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n pp 2 Dat Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg thee; take away this cup from
AND He-said ABBA THE FATHER ALL ABLE to-YOU BESIDE-CARRY me: nevertheless not what I
all-things possible carry-aside-you ! will, but what thou wilt.
to pothrion ap emou touto all ou ti egw qelw alla

to potErion ap emou touto all ou ti egO thelO alla
G3588 G4221 G575 G1700 G5124 G235 G3756 G5101 G1473 G2309 G235
t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Prep pp 1 Gen Sg pd Acc Sg n Conj Part Neg pi Acc Sg n pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj
THE DRINK-cup FROM ME this but NOT ANY I AM-WILLING but
cup what
ti su
ti su
G5101 G4771
pi Acc Sg n pp 2 Nom Sg
ANY YOU
what
14:37 kai ercetai kai euriskei autous kaqeudontas kai legei 37 And he cometh, and findeth
kai erchetai kai heuriskei autous katheudontas kai legei
G2532 G2064 G2532 G2147 G846 G2518 G2532 G3004
them sleeping, and saith unto
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg Peter, Simon, sleepest thou?
AND He-IS-COMING AND IS-FINDING them DOWN-LOUNGING AND He-IS-sayING couldest not thou watch one
drowsing hour?
tw petrw simwn kaqeudeis ouk iscusas mian wran

tO petrO simOn katheudeis ouk ischusas mian hOran
G3588 G4074 G4613 G2518 G3756 G2480 G1520 G5610
t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Sg Part Neg vi Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
to-THE Peter SIMON YOU-ARE-DOWN-LOUNGING NOT YOU-are-STRONG ONE HOUR
you-are-drowsing
grhgorhsai
grEgorEsai
G1127
vn Aor Act
TO-watch
Mark 14
14:38 grhgoreite kai proseucesqe ina mh eiselqhte eis peirasmon 38 Watch ye and pray, lest ye
grEgoreite kai proseuchesthe hina mE eiselthEte eis peirasmon
G1127 G2532 G4336 G2443 G3361 G1525 G1519 G3986
enter into temptation. The
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Conj Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg m spirit truly [is] ready, but the
BE-watchING AND BE-prayING THAT NO YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING INTO trial flesh [is] weak.
be-ye-watching ! be-ye-praying ! ye-may-be-entering
to men pneuma proqumon h de sarx asqenhs

to men pneuma prothumon hE de sarx asthenEs
G3588 G3303 G4151 G4289 G3588 G1161 G4561 G772
t_ Nom Sg n Part n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f
THE INDEED spirit BEFORE-FEEL THE YET FLESH UN-FIRM
is-eager is-infirm
14:39 kai palin apelqwn proshuxato ton auton logon eipwn 39 And again he went away,
kai palin apelthOn prosEuxato ton auton logon eipOn
G2532 G3825 G565 G4336 G3588 G846 G3056 G2036
and prayed, and spake the
Conj Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m pp Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m same words.
AND AGAIN FROM-COMING He-prays THE SAME saying sayING
coming-away word
14:40 kai upostreyas euren autous palin kaqeudontas hsan gar 40 And when he returned, he
kai upostrepsas heuren autous palin katheudontas Esan gar
G2532 G5290 G2147 G846 G3825 G2518 G2258 G1063
found them asleep again, (for
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Adv vp Pres Act Acc Pl m vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj their eyes were heavy,) neither
AND UNDER-TURNing He-FOUND them AGAIN DOWN-LOUNGING WERE for wist they what to answer him.
returning drowsing
oi ofqalmoi autwn bebarhmenoi kai ouk hdeisan ti

hoi ophthalmoi autOn bebarEmenoi kai ouk Edeisan ti
G3588 G3788 G846 G916 G2532 G3756 G1492 G5101
t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Pl m vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m Conj Part Neg vi Plup Act 3 Pl pi Acc Sg n
THE VIEWers OF-them HAVING-been-HEAVIED AND NOT THEY-HAD-PERCEIVED ANY
eyes they-were-aware what
autw apokriqwsin
autO apokrithOsin
G846 G611
pp Dat Sg m vs Aor pasD 3 Pl
to-Him THEY-MAY-BE-answerING
him
14:41 kai ercetai to triton kai legei autois kaqeudete 41 And he cometh the third
kai erchetai to triton kai legei autois katheudete
G2532 G2064 G3588 G5154 G2532 G3004 G846 G2518
time, and saith unto them,
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl Sleep on now, and take [your]
AND He-IS-COMING THE third AND IS-sayING to-them BE-DOWN-LOUNGING rest: it is enough, the hour is
third-time ye-are-drowsing come; behold, the Son of man
is betrayed into the hands of
to loipon kai anapauesqe apecei hlqen h wra sinners.
to loipon kai anapauesthe apechei Elthen hE hOra
G3588 G3063 G2532 G373 G566 G2064 G3588 G5610
t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres Mid 2 Pl vi Pres Act 3 Sg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
THE rest AND BE-UP-CEASING it-IS-FROM-HAVING CAME THE HOUR
furthermore ye-are-resting it-is-having-its-fill
idou paradidotai o uios tou anqrwpou eis tas

idou paradidotai ho huios tou anthrOpou eis tas
G2400 G3860 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G1519 G3588
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Pres Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl f
BE-PERCEIVING IS-beING-BESIDE-GIVEN THE SON OF-THE human INTO THE
lo ! is-being-given-up
ceiras twn amartwlwn

cheiras tOn hamartOlOn
G5495 G3588 G268
n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
HANDS OF-THE missers
sinners
14:42 egeiresqe agwmen idou o paradidous me 42 Rise up, let us go; lo, he that
egeiresthe agOmen idou ho paradidous me
G1453 G71 G2400 G3588 G3860 G3165
betrayeth me is at hand.
vm Pres mid/pas 2 Pl vs Pres Act 1 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg
BE-beING-ROUSED WE-MAY-BE-LEADING BE-PERCEIVING THE one-BESIDE-GIVING ME
be-ye-being-roused ! we-may-be-going lo ! one-giving-up
hggiken
Eggiken
G1448
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
HAS-NEARED
has-drawn-near
14:43 kai euqews eti autou lalountos paraginetai ioudas eis 43 . And immediately, while he
kai eutheOs eti autou lalountos paraginetai ioudas heis
G2532 G2112 G2089 G846 G2980 G3854 G2455 G1520
yet spake, cometh Judas, one
Conj Adv Adv pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m of the twelve, and with him a
AND immediately STILL OF-Him TALKING IS-BESIDE-BECOMING JUDAS ONE great multitude with swords
speaking is-coming-along and staves, from the chief
Mark 14
priests and the scribes and the

wn twn dwdeka kai met autou oclos polus meta elders.
On tOn dOdeka kai met autou ochlos polus meta
G5607 G3588 G1427 G2532 G3326 G846 G3793 G4183 G3326
vp Pres vxx Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom Conj Prep pp Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Prep
BEING OF-THE TWO-TEN AND WITH him THRONG much WITH
twelve vast
macairwn kai xulwn para twn arcierewn kai twn grammatewn kai
machairOn kai xulOn para tOn archiereOn kai tOn grammateOn kai
G3162 G2532 G3586 G3844 G3588 G749 G2532 G3588 G1122 G2532
n_ Gen Pl f Conj n_ Gen Pl n Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj
swords AND WOODS BESIDE THE chief-SACRED-ones AND THE WRITers AND
cudgels chief-priests scribes
twn presbuterwn
tOn presbuterOn
G3588 G4245
t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
THE SENIORS
elders
14:44 dedwkei de o paradidous auton susshmon autois 44 And he that betrayed him
dedOkei de ho paradidous auton sussEmon autois
G1325 G1161 G3588 G3860 G846 G4953 G846
had given them a token,
vi Plup Act 3 Sg Att Conj t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg n pp Dat Pl m saying, Whomsoever I shall
HAD-GIVEN YET THE one-BESIDE-GIVING Him TOGETHER-SIGN to-them kiss, that same is he; take him,
one-giving-up signal and lead [him] away safely.
legwn on an filhsw autos estin krathsate

legOn hon an philEsO autos estin kratEsate
G3004 G3739 G302 G5368 G846 G2076 G2902
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pr Acc Sg m Part vs Aor Act 1 Sg pp Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg vm Aor Act 2 Pl
sayING WHOM EVER I-SHOULD-BE-beING-FOND He it-IS HOLD
I-should-be-kissing hold-ye !
auton kai apagagete asfalws

auton kai apagagete asphalOs
G846 G2532 G520 G806
pp Acc Sg m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl Adv
Him AND BE-YE-FROM-LEADING UN-TOTTERly
be-ye-leading-away-him ! securely
14:45 kai elqwn euqews proselqwn autw legei rabbi rabbi kai 45 And as soon as he was
kai elthOn eutheOs proselthOn autO legei rabbi rabbi kai
G2532 G2064 G2112 G4334 G846 G3004 G4461 G4461 G2532
come, he goeth straightway to
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Hebrew Hebrew Conj him, and saith, Master, master;
AND COMING immediately TOWARD-COMING to-Him he-IS-sayING RABBI RABBI AND and kissed him.
coming-to him
katefilhsen auton
katephilEsen auton
G2705 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
he-DOWN-FONDS Him
he-kisses-fondly
14:46 oi de epebalon ep auton tas ceiras autwn kai ekrathsan 46 And they laid their hands on
hoi de epebalon ep auton tas cheiras autOn kai ekratEsan
G3588 G1161 G1911 G1909 G846 G3588 G5495 G846 G2532 G2902
him, and took him.
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pp Acc Sg m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THE-ones YET ON-CAST(past) ON Him THE HANDS OF-them AND HOLD
the they-laid-on
auton
auton
G846
pp Acc Sg m
Him
14:47 eis de tis twn paresthkotwn spasamenos thn 47 And one of them that stood
heis de tis tOn parestEkotOn spasamenos tEn
G1520 G1161 G5100 G3588 G3936 G4685 G3588
by drew a sword, and smote a
a_ Nom Sg m Conj px Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m vp Perf Act Gen Pl m vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f servant of the high priest, and
ONE YET ANY OF-THE ones-HAVING-BESIDE-STOOD PULLing THE cut off his ear.
certain ones-standing-by
macairan epaisen ton doulon tou arcierews kai afeilen autou

machairan epaisen ton doulon tou archiereOs kai apheilen autou
G3162 G3817 G3588 G1401 G3588 G749 G2532 G851 G846
n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m
sword HITS THE SLAVE OF-THE chief-SACRED-one AND he-FROM-LIFTS OF-him
chief-priest amputates
to wtion
to Otion
G3588 G5621
t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
THE EARlobe
ear-lobe
Mark 14
14:48 kai apokriqeis o ihsous eipen autois ws epi lhsthn 48 And Jesus answered and
kai apokritheis ho iEsous eipen autois hOs epi lEstEn
G2532 G611 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G5613 G1909 G3027
said unto them, Are ye come
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Adv Prep n_ Acc Sg m out, as against a thief, with
AND answerING THE JESUS said to-them AS ON ROBBER swords and [with] staves to
take me?
exhlqete meta macairwn kai xulwn sullabein me

exElthete meta machairOn kai xulOn sullabein me
G1831 G3326 G3162 G2532 G3586 G4815 G3165
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep n_ Gen Pl f Conj n_ Gen Pl n vn 2Aor Act pp 1 Acc Sg
YE-OUT-CAME WITH swords AND WOODS TO-BE-TOGETHER-GETTING ME
ye-came-out cudgels to-be-apprehending
14:49 kaq hmeran hmhn pros umas en tw ierw 49 I was daily with you in the
kath hEmeran EmEn pros humas en tO hierO
G2596 G2250 G2252 G4314 G5209 G1722 G3588 G2411
temple teaching, and ye took
Prep n_ Acc Sg f vi Impf vxx 1 Sg Prep pp 2 Acc Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n me not: but the scriptures must
according-to DAY I-WAS TOWARD YOU(p) IN THE SACRED-place be fulfilled.
ye sanctuary
didaskwn kai ouk ekrathsate me all ina plhrwqwsin ai

didaskOn kai ouk ekratEsate me all hina plErOthOsin hai
G1321 G2532 G3756 G2902 G3165 G235 G2443 G4137 G3588
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg Conj Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f
TEACHING AND NOT YE-HOLD ME but THAT MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE
grafai
graphai
G1124
n_ Nom Pl f
WRITings
scriptures
14:50 kai afentes auton pantes efugon 50 And they all forsook him,
kai aphentes auton pantes ephugon
G2532 G863 G846 G3956 G5343
and fled.
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m a_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
AND FROM-LETTING Him ALL THEY-FLED
leaving
14:51 kai eis tis neaniskos hkolouqei autw peribeblhmenos 51 And there followed him a
kai eis tis neaniskos Ekolouthei autO peribeblEmenos
G2532 G1520 G5100 G3495 G190 G846 G4016
certain young man, having a
Conj a_ Nom Sg m px Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m linen cloth cast about [his]
AND ONE ANY YOUTH followED to-Him HAVING-been-ABOUT-CAST naked [body]; and the young
certain him having-been-clothed men laid hold on him:
sindona epi gumnou kai kratousin auton oi neaniskoi

sindona epi gumnou kai kratousin auton hoi neaniskoi
G4616 G1909 G1131 G2532 G2902 G846 G3588 G3495
n_ Acc Sg f Prep a_ Gen Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
linen-wrapper ON NAKED AND ARE-HOLDING him THE YOUTHS
naked-body
14:52 o de katalipwn thn sindona gumnos efugen ap autwn 52 And he left the linen cloth,
ho de katalipOn tEn sindona gumnos ephugen ap autOn
G3588 G1161 G2641 G3588 G4616 G1131 G5343 G575 G846
and fled from them naked.
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f a_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Pl m
THE YET one-leavING THE linen-wrapper NAKED FLED FROM them
one-leaving he-fled
14:53 kai aphgagon ton ihsoun pros ton arcierea kai 53 . And they led Jesus away to
kai apEgagon ton iEsoun pros ton archierea kai
G2532 G520 G3588 G2424 G4314 G3588 G749 G2532
the high priest: and with him
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj were assembled all the chief
AND THEY-FROM-LED THE JESUS TOWARD THE chief-SACRED-one AND priests and the elders and the
they-led-away chief-priest scribes.
sunercontai autw pantes oi arciereis kai oi presbuteroi

sunerchontai autO pantes hoi archiereis kai hoi presbuteroi
G4905 G846 G3956 G3588 G749 G2532 G3588 G4245
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
ARE-TOGETHER-COMING to-Him ALL THE chief-SACRED-ones AND THE SENIORS
are-coming-together chief-priests elders
kai oi grammateis
kai hoi grammateis
G2532 G3588 G1122
Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
AND THE WRITers
scribes
14:54 kai o petros apo makroqen hkolouqhsen autw ews esw eis 54 And Peter followed him
kai ho petros apo makrothen EkolouthEsen autO heOs esO eis
G2532 G3588 G4074 G575 G3113 G190 G846 G2193 G2080 G1519
afar off, even into the palace of
Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Conj Adv Prep the high priest: and he sat with
AND THE Peter FROM FAR-PLACE follows to-Him TILL within INTO the servants, and warmed
afar him himself at the fire.
Mark 14
thn aulhn tou arcierews kai hn sugkaqhmenos meta

tEn aulEn tou archiereOs kai En sugkathEmenos meta
G3588 G833 G3588 G749 G2532 G2258 G4775 G3326
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m Prep
THE COURT OF-THE chief-SACRED-one AND he-WAS TOGETHER-sittING WITH
courtyard chief-priest sitting-together
twn uphretwn kai qermainomenos pros to fws

tOn hupEretOn kai thermainomenos pros to phOs
G3588 G5257 G2532 G2328 G4314 G3588 G5457
t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
THE subservients AND WARMING TOWARD THE LIGHT
deputies warming-himself
14:55 oi de arciereis kai olon to sunedrion ezhtoun kata 55 And the chief priests and all
hoi de archiereis kai holon to sunedrion ezEtoun kata
G3588 G1161 G749 G2532 G3650 G3588 G4892 G2212 G2596
the council sought for witness
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep against Jesus to put him to
THE YET chief-SACRED-ones AND WHOLE THE Sanhedrin SOUGHT DOWN death; and found none.
chief-priests against
tou ihsou marturian eis to qanatwsai auton kai ouc

tou iEsou marturian eis to thanatOsai auton kai ouch
G3588 G2424 G3141 G1519 G3588 G2289 G846 G2532 G3756
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Act pp Acc Sg m Conj Part Neg
OF-THE JESUS witness INTO THE TO-( cause-to )-DIE Him AND NOT
the testimony to-put-to-death
euriskon
heuriskon
G2147
vi Impf Act 3 Pl
THEY-FOUND
14:56 polloi gar eyeudomarturoun kat autou kai isai ai marturiai 56 For many bare false witness
polloi gar epseudomarturoun kat autou kai isai hai marturiai
G4183 G1063 G5576 G2596 G846 G2532 G2470 G3588 G3141
against him, but their witness
a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep pp Gen Sg m Conj a_ Nom Pl f t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f agreed not together.
MANY for FALSE-witnessED DOWN OF-Him AND EQUAL THE witnesses
testified-falsely against him consistent testimonies
ouk hsan
ouk Esan
G3756 G2258
Part Neg vi Impf vxx 3 Pl
NOT WERE
14:57 kai tines anastantes eyeudomarturoun kat autou legontes 57 And there arose certain, and
kai tines anastantes epseudomarturoun kat autou legontes
G2532 G5100 G450 G5576 G2596 G846 G3004
bare false witness against him,
Conj px Nom Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m saying,
AND ANY UP-STANDing FALSE-witnessED DOWN OF-Him sayING
some rising testified-falsely against him
14:58 oti hmeis hkousamen autou legontos oti egw 58 We heard him say, I will
hoti hEmeis Ekousamen autou legontos hoti egO
G3754 G2249 G191 G846 G3004 G3754 G1473
destroy this temple that is
Conj pp 1 Nom Pl vi Aor Act 1 Pl pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m Conj pp 1 Nom Sg made with hands, and within
that WE HEAR OF-Him sayING that I three days I will build another
him made without hands.
katalusw ton naon touton ton ceiropoihton kai dia

katalusO ton naon touton ton cheiropoiEton kai dia
G2647 G3588 G3485 G5126 G3588 G5499 G2532 G1223
vi Fut Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pd Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Conj Prep
SHALL-BE-DOWN-LOOSING THE TEMPLE this THE HAND-made AND THRU
shall-be-demolishing made-by-hands during
triwn hmerwn allon aceiropoihton oikodomhsw

triOn hEmerOn allon acheiropoiEton oikodomEsO
G5140 G2250 G243 G886 G3618
a_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f a_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vi Fut Act 1 Sg
THREE DAYS other UN-HAND-made I-SHALL-BE-HOME-BUILDING
another not-made-by-hands I-shall-be-building
14:59 kai oude outws ish hn h marturia autwn 59 But neither so did their
kai oude houtOs isE En hE marturia autOn
G2532 G3761 G3779 G2470 G2258 G3588 G3141 G846
witness agree together.
Conj Adv Adv a_ Nom Sg f vi Impf vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Pl m
AND NOT-YET thus EQUAL WAS THE witness OF-them
neither consistent testimony
14:60 kai anastas o arciereus eis to meson ephrwthsen 60 And the high priest stood up
kai anastas ho archiereus eis to meson epErOtEsen
G2532 G450 G3588 G749 G1519 G3588 G3319 G1905
in the midst, and asked Jesus,
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg saying, Answerest thou
AND UP-STANDing THE chief-SACRED-one INTO THE MIDst inquirES-of nothing? what [is it which]
rising chief-priest these witness against thee?
Mark 14
ton ihsoun legwn ouk apokrinh ouden ti outoi

ton iEsoun legOn ouk apokrinE ouden ti houtoi
G3588 G2424 G3004 G3756 G611 G3762 G5101 G3778
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg a_ Acc Sg n pi Acc Sg n pd Nom Pl m
THE JESUS sayING NOT YOU-ARE-answerING NOT-YET-ONE ANY these
anything what ?
sou katamarturousin
sou katamarturousin
G4675 G2649
pp 2 Gen Sg vi Pres Act 3 Pl
OF-YOU ARE-DOWN-witnessING
you are-testifying-against
14:61 o de esiwpa kai ouden apekrinato palin o 61 But he held his peace, and
ho de esiOpa kai ouden apekrinato palin ho
G3588 G1161 G4623 G2532 G3762 G611 G3825 G3588
answered nothing. Again the
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj a_ Acc Sg n vi Aor midD 3 Sg Adv t_ Nom Sg m high priest asked him, and said
THE YET He-WAS-SILENT AND NOT-YET-ONE answers AGAIN THE unto him, Art thou the Christ,
nothing the Son of the Blessed?
arciereus ephrwta auton kai legei autw su ei

archiereus epErOta auton kai legei autO su ei
G749 G1905 G846 G2532 G3004 G846 G4771 G1488
n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m pp 2 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
chief-SACRED-one inquirED-of Him AND IS-sayING to-Him YOU ARE
chief-priest
o cristos o uios tou euloghtou

ho christos ho huios tou eulogEtou
G3588 G5547 G3588 G5207 G3588 G2128
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m
THE ANOINTED THE SON OF-THE blessed
Christ
14:62 o de ihsous eipen egw eimi kai oyesqe 62 And Jesus said, I am: and ye
ho de iEsous eipen egO eimi kai opsesthe
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G1473 G1510 G2532 G3700
shall see the Son of man sitting
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 1 Sg Conj vi Fut midD 2 Pl on the right hand of power, and
THE YET JESUS said I AM AND YE-SHALL-BE-VIEWING coming in the clouds of
ye-shall-be-seeing heaven.
ton uion tou anqrwpou kaqhmenon ek dexiwn ths

ton huion tou anthrOpou kathEmenon ek dexiOn tEs
G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G2521 G1537 G1188 G3588
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m Prep a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg f
THE SON OF-THE human sittING OUT OF-RIGHT OF-THE
of-right(p)
dunamews kai ercomenon meta twn nefelwn tou ouranou

dunameOs kai erchomenon meta tOn nephelOn tou ouranou
G1411 G2532 G2064 G3326 G3588 G3507 G3588 G3772
n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
ABILITY AND COMING WITH THE CLOUDS OF-THE heaven
power
14:63 o de arciereus diarrhxas tous citwnas autou legei 63 Then the high priest rent his
ho de archiereus diarrExas tous chitOnas autou legei
G3588 G1161 G749 G1284 G3588 G5509 G846 G3004
clothes, and saith, What need
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg we any further witnesses?
THE YET chief-SACRED-one THRU-BURSTing THE TUNICS OF-him IS-sayING
chief-priest tearing
ti eti creian ecomen marturwn

ti eti chreian echomen marturOn
G5101 G2089 G5532 G2192 G3144
pi Acc Sg n Adv n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 1 Pl n_ Gen Pl m
ANY STILL need WE-ARE-HAVING OF-witnesses
what ?
14:64 hkousate ths blasfhmias ti umin fainetai oi de 64 Ye have heard the

Ekousate tEs blasphEmias ti humin phainetai hoi de
G191 G3588 G988 G5101 G5213 G5316 G3588 G1161
blasphemy: what think ye?
vi Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pi Acc Sg n pp 2 Dat Pl vi Pres mid/pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl m Conj And they all condemned him to
YE-HEAR OF-THE HARM-AVERment ANY to-YOU(p) it-IS-APPEARING THE YET be guilty of death.
the blasphemy what ? to-ye
pantes katekrinan auton einai enocon qanatou

pantes katekrinan auton einai enochon thanatou
G3956 G2632 G846 G1511 G1777 G2288
a_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m vn Pres vxx a_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
ALL DOWN-JUDGE Him TO-BE liable OF-DEATH
they-condemn
14:65 kai hrxanto tines emptuein autw kai perikaluptein to 65 And some began to spit on
kai Erxanto tines emptuein autO kai perikaluptein to
G2532 G756 G5100 G1716 G846 G2532 G4028 G3588
him, and to cover his face, and
Conj vi Aor midD 3 Pl px Nom Pl m vn Pres Act pp Dat Sg m Conj vn Pres Act t_ Acc Sg n to buffet him, and to say unto
AND begin ANY TO-BE-IN-SPITTING to-Him AND TO-BE-ABOUT-COVERING THE him, Prophesy: and the
some to-be-spitting-in to-be-covering-about servants did strike him with the
Mark 14
palms of their hands.

proswpon autou kai kolafizein auton kai legein autw
prosOpon autou kai kolaphizein auton kai legein autO
G4383 G846 G2532 G2852 G846 G2532 G3004 G846
n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m Conj vn Pres Act pp Acc Sg m Conj vn Pres Act pp Dat Sg m
face OF-Him AND TO-BE-FROM-CHASTISING Him AND TO-BE-sayING to-Him
to-be-buffeting
profhteuson kai oi uphretai rapismasin auton eballon

prophEteuson kai hoi hupEretai rapismasin auton eballon
G4395 G2532 G3588 G5257 G4475 G846 G906
vm Aor Act 2 Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m n_ Dat Pl n pp Acc Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Pl
BEFORE-AVER AND THE subservients to-SLAPS Him CAST
prophesy-you ! deputies
14:66 kai ontos tou petrou en th aulh katw ercetai 66 . And as Peter was beneath
kai ontos tou petrou en tE aulE katO erchetai
G2532 G5607 G3588 G4074 G1722 G3588 G833 G2736 G2064
in the palace, there cometh one
Conj vp Pres vxx Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Adv vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg of the maids of the high priest:
AND OF-BEING THE Peter IN THE COURT DOWN IS-COMING
courtyard below
mia twn paidiskwn tou arcierews

mia tOn paidiskOn tou archiereOs
G1520 G3588 G3814 G3588 G749
a_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
ONE OF-THE maids OF-THE chief-SACRED-one
chief-priest
14:67 kai idousa ton petron qermainomenon embleyasa autw 67 And when she saw Peter
kai idousa ton petron thermainomenon emblepsasa autO
G2532 G1492 G3588 G4074 G2328 G1689 G846
warming himself, she looked
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Mid Acc Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg f pp Dat Sg m upon him, and said, And thou
AND PERCEIVING THE Peter WARMING IN-looking to-him also wast with Jesus of
warming-himself looking-at him Nazareth.
legei kai su meta tou nazarhnou ihsou hsqa

legei kai su meta tou nazarEnou iEsou Estha
G3004 G2532 G4771 G3326 G3588 G3479 G2424 G2258
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj pp 2 Nom Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Impf vxx 2 Sg
she-IS-sayING AND YOU WITH THE NAZAREAN JESUS WERE
also
14:68 o de hrnhsato legwn ouk oida oude 68 But he denied, saying, I

ho de ErnEsato legOn ouk oida oude
G3588 G1161 G720 G3004 G3756 G1492 G3761
know not, neither understand I
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Part Neg vi Perf Act 1 Sg Adv what thou sayest. And he went
THE YET he-disowns sayING NOT I-HAVE-PERCEIVED NOT-YET out into the porch; and the
he-denies I-am-aware neither cock crew.
epistamai ti su legeis kai exhlqen exw eis to

epistamai ti su legeis kai exElthen exO eis to
G1987 G5101 G4771 G3004 G2532 G1831 G1854 G1519 G3588
vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg pi Acc Sg n pp 2 Nom Sg vi Pres Act 2 Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv Prep t_ Acc Sg n
I-AM-adeptING ANY YOU ARE-sayING AND he-OUT-CAME OUT INTO THE
I-am-being-adept-in what ? he-came-out outside
proaulion kai alektwr efwnhsen

proaulion kai alektOr ephOnEsen
G4259 G2532 G220 G5455
n_ Acc Sg n Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
BEFORE-COURT AND UN-LAYer SOUNDS
forecourt cock crows
14:69 kai h paidiskh idousa auton palin hrxato legein 69 And a maid saw him again,
kai hE paidiskE idousa auton palin Erxato legein
G2532 G3588 G3814 G1492 G846 G3825 G756 G3004
and began to say to them that
Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f pp Acc Sg m Adv vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act stood by, This is [one] of them.
AND THE maid PERCEIVING him AGAIN begins TO-BE-sayING
tois paresthkosin oti outos ex autwn estin

tois parestEkosin hoti houtos ex autOn estin
G3588 G3936 G3754 G3778 G1537 G846 G2076
t_ Dat Pl m vp Perf Act Dat Pl m Conj pd Nom Sg m Prep pp Gen Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to-THE ones-HAVING-BESIDE-STOOD that this-one OUT OF-them IS
ones-standing-by this-one
14:70 o de palin hrneito kai meta mikron palin oi 70 And he denied it again. And
ho de palin Erneito kai meta mikron palin hoi
G3588 G1161 G3825 G720 G2532 G3326 G3397 G3825 G3588
a little after, they that stood by
t_ Nom Sg m Conj Adv vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj Prep a_ Acc Sg m Adv t_ Nom Pl m said again to Peter, Surely thou
THE YET AGAIN he-disOWNED AND after LITTLE AGAIN THE art [one] of them: for thou art a
he-denied Galilaean, and thy speech
agreeth [thereto].
parestwtes elegon tw petrw alhqws ex autwn ei
parestOtes elegon tO petrO alEthOs ex autOn ei
G3936 G3004 G3588 G4074 G230 G1537 G846 G1488
vp Perf Act Nom Pl m Con vi Impf Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Adv Prep pp Gen Pl m vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
ones-HAVING-BESIDE-STOOD said to-THE Peter TRUly OUT OF-them YOU-ARE
ones-standing-by
Mark 14 - Mark 15
kai gar galilaios ei kai h lalia sou omoiazei

kai gar galilaios ei kai hE lalia sou omoiazei
G2532 G1063 G1057 G1488 G2532 G3588 G2981 G4675 G3662
Conj Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 2 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg
AND for GALILEAN YOU-ARE AND THE TALK OF-YOU IS-beING-LIKE
also speech is-being-alike
14:71 o de hrxato anaqematizein kai omnuein oti ouk 71 But he began to curse and to
ho de Erxato anathematizein kai omnuein hoti ouk
G3588 G1161 G756 G332 G2532 G3660 G3754 G3756
swear, [saying], I know not
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act Conj vn Pres Act Conj Part Neg this man of whom ye speak.
THE YET he-begins TO-BE-anathematizING AND TO-BE-SWEARING that NOT
oida ton anqrwpon touton on legete

oida ton anthrOpon touton hon legete
G1492 G3588 G444 G5126 G3739 G3004
vi Perf Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pd Acc Sg m pr Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Pl
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED THE human this WHOM YE-ARE-sayING
I-am-acquainted-with
14:72 kai ek deuterou alektwr efwnhsen kai anemnhsqh o petros 72 And the second time the
kai ek deuterou alektOr ephOnEsen kai anemnEsthE ho petros
G2532 G1537 G1208 G220 G5455 G2532 G363 G3588 G4074
cock crew. And Peter called to
Conj Prep a_ Gen Sg n n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m mind the word that Jesus said
AND OUT OF-second UN-LAYer SOUNDS AND IS-UP-REMINDED THE Peter unto him, Before the cock
of-second-time cock crows recollects crow twice, thou shalt deny me
thrice. And when he thought
tou rhmatos ou eipen autw o ihsous oti prin alektora thereon, he wept.
tou rEmatos hou eipen autO ho iEsous hoti prin alektora
G3588 G4487 G3739 G2036 G846 G3588 G2424 G3754 G4250 G220
t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n pr Gen Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj Adv n_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE declaration OF-WHICH said to-him THE JESUS that ERE UN-LAYer
the which cock
fwnhsai dis aparnhsh me tris kai epibalwn eklaien

phOnEsai dis aparnEsE me tris kai epibalOn eklaien
G5455 G1364 G533 G3165 G5151 G2532 G1911 G2799
vn Aor Act Adv vi Fut midD 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg Adv Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg
TO-SOUND twice YOU-SHALL-BE-renouncING ME THRice AND ON-CASTING he-LAMENTED
to-crow reflecting
Mark 15
15:1 kai euqews epi to prwi sumboulion poihsantes oi 1 . And straightway in the
kai eutheOs epi to prOi sumboulion poiEsantes hoi
G2532 G2112 G1909 G3588 G4404 G4824 G4160 G3588
morning the chief priests held
Conj Adv Prep t_ Acc Sg n Adv n_ Acc Sg n vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m a consultation with the elders
AND immediately ON THE morning TOGETHER-COUNSEL DOing THE and scribes and the whole
consultation doholding council, and bound Jesus, and
carried [him] away, and
arciereis meta twn presbuterwn kai grammatewn kai olon to delivered [him] to Pilate.
archiereis meta tOn presbuterOn kai grammateOn kai holon to
G749 G3326 G3588 G4245 G2532 G1122 G2532 G3650 G3588
n_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n
chief-SACRED-ones WITH THE SENIORS AND WRITers AND WHOLE THE
chief-priests elders scribes
sunedrion dhsantes ton ihsoun aphnegkan kai paredwkan tw

sunedrion dEsantes ton iEsoun apEnegkan kai paredOkan tO
G4892 G1210 G3588 G2424 G667 G2532 G3860 G3588
n_ Nom Sg n vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg m
Sanhedrin BINDing THE JESUS THEY-FROM-CARRY AND THEY-BESIDE-GIVE to-THE
they-carry-away-him give-over-him
pilatw
pilatO
G4091
n_ Dat Sg m
PILATE
15:2 kai ephrwthsen auton o pilatos su ei o 2 And Pilate asked him, Art
kai epErOtEsen auton ho pilatos su ei ho
G2532 G1905 G846 G3588 G4091 G4771 G1488 G3588
thou the King of the Jews?
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m And he answering said unto
AND inquirES-of Him THE PILATE YOU ARE THE him, Thou sayest [it].
basileus twn ioudaiwn o de apokriqeis eipen autw

basileus tOn ioudaiOn ho de apokritheis eipen autO
G935 G3588 G2453 G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G846
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
KING OF-THE JUDA-ans THE YET answerING He-said to-him
Jews him
su legeis
su legeis
G4771 G3004
pp 2 Nom Sg vi Pres Act 2 Sg
YOU ARE-sayING
are-saying-it
15:3 kai kathgoroun autou oi arciereis polla autos de 3 And the chief priests accused
kai katEgoroun autou hoi archiereis polla autos de
G2532 G2723 G846 G3588 G749 G4183 G846 G1161
him of many things: but he
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Gen Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m a_ Acc Pl n pp Nom Sg m Conj answered nothing.
AND accusED OF-Him THE chief-SACRED-ones much He YET
him chief-priests of-many-things
ouden apekrinato
ouden apekrinato
G3762 G611
a_ Acc Sg n vi Aor midD 3 Sg
NOT-YET-ONE answers
nothing
15:4 o de pilatos palin ephrwthsen auton legwn ouk 4 And Pilate asked him again,
ho de pilatos palin epErOtEsen auton legOn ouk
G3588 G1161 G4091 G3825 G1905 G846 G3004 G3756
saying, Answerest thou
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Part Neg nothing? behold how many
THE YET PILATE AGAIN inquirES-of Him sayING NOT things they witness against
thee.
apokrinh ouden ide posa sou katamarturousin

apokrinE ouden ide posa sou katamarturousin
G611 G3762 G1492 G4214 G4675 G2649
vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg a_ Acc Sg n vm Aor Act 2 Sg pq Acc Pl n pp 2 Gen Sg vi Pres Act 3 Pl
YOU-ARE-answerING NOT-YET-ONE BE-PERCEIVING how-much OF-YOU THEY-ARE-DOWN-witnessING
anything lo ! of-how-many-things you they-are-testifying-against
15:5 o de ihsous ouketi ouden apekriqh wste qaumazein 5But Jesus yet answered
ho de iEsous ouketi ouden apekrithE hOste thaumazein
G3588 G1161 G2424 G3765 G3762 G611 G5620 G2296
nothing; so that Pilate
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Adv a_ Acc Sg n vi Aor midD 3 Sg Conj vn Pres Act marvelled.
THE YET JESUS NOT-STILL NOT-YET-ONE answerED AS-BESIDES TO-BE-MARVELING
not-longer anything so-that
ton pilaton
ton pilaton
G3588 G4091
THE PILATE
Mark 15
15:6 kata de eorthn apeluen autois ena desmion onper 6 Now at [that] feast he
kata de heortEn apeluen autois hena desmion onper
G2596 G1161 G1859 G630 G846 G1520 G1198 G3746
released unto them one
Prep Conj n_ Acc Sg f vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pr Acc Sg m prisoner, whomsoever they
according-to YET FESTIVAL he-FROM-LOOSED to-them ONE BOUND-one WHOM-EVEN desired.
he-released prisoner even-whom
htounto
Etounto
G154
vi Impf Mid 3 Pl
THEY-REQUESTED
15:7 hn de o legomenos barabbas meta twn sustasiastwn 7 And there was [one] named
En de ho legomenos barabbas meta tOn sustasiastOn
G2258 G1161 G3588 G3004 G912 G3326 G3588 G4955
Barabbas, [which lay] bound
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m with them that had made
WAS YET THE one-beING-said Bar-Abbas WITH THE TOGETHER-STANDers insurrection with him, who had
there-was one-being-said insurrectionists committed murder in the
insurrection.
dedemenos oitines en th stasei fonon pepoihkeisan
dedemenos hoitines en tE stasei phonon pepoiEkeisan
G1210 G3748 G1722 G3588 G4714 G5408 G4160
vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m pr Nom Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f n_ Acc Sg m vi Plup Act 3 Pl
HAVING-been-BOUND WHO-ANY IN THE STANDing MURDER HAD-DONE
who-any insurrection
15:8 kai anabohsas o oclos hrxato aiteisqai kaqws aei 8 And the multitude crying
kai anaboEsas ho ochlos Erxato aiteisthai kathOs aei
G2532 G310 G3588 G3793 G756 G154 G2531 G104
aloud began to desire [him to
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Mid Adv Adv do] as he had ever done unto
AND UP-IMPLORing THE THRONG begins TO-BE-REQUESTING according-AS ever them.
exclaiming
epoiei autois
epoiei autois
G4160 G846
vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m
he-DID to-them
15:9 o de pilatos apekriqh autois legwn qelete 9 But Pilate answered them,
ho de pilatos apekrithE autois legOn thelete
G3588 G1161 G4091 G611 G846 G3004 G2309
saying, Will ye that I release
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Pl unto you the King of the Jews?
THE YET PILATE answerED to-them sayING YE-ARE-WILLING
them
apolusw umin ton basilea twn ioudaiwn

apolusO humin ton basilea tOn ioudaiOn
G630 G5213 G3588 G935 G3588 G2453
vs Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
I-SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING to-YOU(p) THE KING OF-THE JUDA-ans
I-should-be-releasing to-ye Jews
15:10 eginwsken gar oti dia fqonon paradedwkeisan auton oi 10 For he knew that the chief
eginOsken gar hoti dia phthonon paradedOkeisan auton hoi
G1097 G1063 G3754 G1223 G5355 G3860 G846 G3588
priests had delivered him for
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj Conj Prep n_ Acc Sg m vi Plup Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m envy.
he-KNEW for that THRU ENVY HAD-BESIDE-GIVEN Him THE
because-of had-given-up
arciereis
archiereis
G749
n_ Nom Pl m
chief-SACRED-ones
chief-priests
15:11 oi de arciereis aneseisan ton oclon ina mallon ton 11 But the chief priests moved
hoi de archiereis aneseisan ton ochlon hina mallon ton
G3588 G1161 G749 G383 G3588 G3793 G2443 G3123 G3588
the people, that he should
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj Adv t_ Acc Sg m rather release Barabbas unto
THE YET chief-SACRED-ones UP-QUAKE THE THRONG THAT RATHER THE them.
chief-priests excite
barabban apolush autois

barabban apolusE autois
G912 G630 G846
n_ Acc Sg m vs Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m
Bar-Abbas he-SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING to-them
he-should-be-releasing
15:12 o de pilatos apokriqeis palin eipen autois ti oun 12 And Pilate answered and
ho de pilatos apokritheis palin eipen autois ti oun
G3588 G1161 G4091 G611 G3825 G2036 G846 G5101 G3767
said again unto them, What
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg n Conj will ye then that I shall do
THE YET PILATE answerING AGAIN said to-them ANY THEN [unto him] whom ye call the
what ? King of the Jews?
Mark 15
qelete poihsw on legete basilea twn ioudaiwn

thelete poiEsO hon legete basilea tOn ioudaiOn
G2309 G4160 G3739 G3004 G935 G3588 G2453
vi Pres Act 2 Pl vs Aor Act 1 Sg pr Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
YE-ARE-WILLING I-SHALL-BE-DOING WHOM YE-ARE-sayING KING OF-THE JUDA-ans
Jews
15:13 oi de palin ekraxan staurwson auton 13 And they cried out again,
hoi de palin ekraxan staurOson auton
G3588 G1161 G3825 G2896 G4717 G846
Crucify him.
t_ Nom Pl m Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp Acc Sg m
THE YET AGAIN THEY-CRY impale-YOU Him
crucify-you !
15:14 o de pilatos elegen autois ti gar kakon epoihsen 14 Then Pilate said unto them,
ho de pilatos elegen autois ti gar kakon epoiEsen
G3588 G1161 G4091 G3004 G846 G5101 G1063 G2556 G4160
Why, what evil hath he done?
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg n Conj a_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg And they cried out the more
THE YET PILATE said to-them ANY for EVIL He-DOES exceedingly, Crucify him.
what ?
oi de perissoterws ekraxan staurwson auton

hoi de perissoterOs ekraxan staurOson auton
G3588 G1161 G4056 G2896 G4717 G846
t_ Nom Pl m Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp Acc Sg m
THE YET more-exceedingly THEY-CRY impale-YOU Him
crucify-you !
15:15 o de pilatos boulomenos tw oclw to ikanon 15 . And [so] Pilate, willing to

ho de pilatos boulomenos tO ochlO to hikanon
G3588 G1161 G4091 G1014 G3588 G3793 G3588 G2425
content the people, released
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Barabbas unto them, and
THE YET PILATE intendING to-THE THRONG THE enough delivered Jesus, when he had
scourged [him], to be
crucified.
poihsai apelusen autois ton barabban kai paredwken ton ihsoun
poiEsai apelusen autois ton barabban kai paredOken ton iEsoun
G4160 G630 G846 G3588 G912 G2532 G3860 G3588 G2424
vn Aor Act vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
TO-DO FROM-LOOSES to-them THE Bar-Abbas AND BESIDE-GIVES THE JESUS
releases gives-up
fragellwsas ina staurwqh

phragellOsas hina staurOthE
G5417 G2443 G4717
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
WHIPPing THAT He-MAY-BE-BEING-impalED
whipping-him he-may-be-being-crucified
15:16 oi de stratiwtai aphgagon auton esw ths aulhs o 16 And the soldiers led him
hoi de stratiOtai apEgagon auton esO tEs aulEs ho
G3588 G1161 G4757 G520 G846 G2080 G3588 G833 G3739
away into the hall, called
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Adv t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pr Nom Sg n Praetorium; and they call
THE YET WARriors FROM-LED Him within OF-THE COURT WHICH together the whole band.
soldiers led-away the courtyard
estin praitwrion kai sugkalousin olhn thn speiran

estin praitOrion kai sugkalousin holEn tEn speiran
G2076 G4232 G2532 G4779 G3650 G3588 G4686
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
IS PRETORIUM AND THEY-ARE-TOGETHER-CALLING WHOLE THE BAND
they-are-calling-together squadron
15:17 kai enduousin auton porfuran kai peritiqeasin autw 17 And they clothed him with
kai enduousin auton porphuran kai perititheasin autO
G2532 G1746 G846 G4209 G2532 G4060 G846
purple, and platted a crown of
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m thorns, and put it about his
AND THEY-ARE-IN-SLIPPING Him PURPLE AND THEY-ARE-ABOUT-PLACING to-Him [head],
they-are-dressing they-are-placing-about him
plexantes akanqinon stefanon

plexantes akanthinon stephanon
G4120 G174 G4735
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
BRAIDing POINT-FLOWERy WREATH
thorny
15:18 kai hrxanto aspazesqai auton caire basileu twn ioudaiwn 18 And began to salute him,
kai Erxanto aspazesthai auton chaire basileu tOn ioudaiOn
G2532 G756 G782 G846 G5463 G935 G3588 G2453
Hail, King of the Jews!
Conj vi Aor midD 3 Pl vn Pres midD/pasD pp Acc Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg n_ Voc Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
AND THEY-begin TO-BE-greetING Him BE-JOYING KING ! OF-THE JUDA-ans
to-be-saluting be-you-rejoicing ! Jews
15:19 kai etupton autou thn kefalhn kalamw kai eneptuon autw 19 And they smote him on the
kai etupton autou tEn kephalEn kalamO kai eneptuon autO
G2532 G5180 G846 G3588 G2776 G2563 G2532 G1716 G846
head with a reed, and did spit
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Gen Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Dat Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m upon him, and bowing [their]
AND THEY-BEAT(past) OF-Him THE HEAD to-REED AND THEY-IN-SPAT to-Him knees worshipped him.
spat-in
Mark 15
kai tiqentes ta gonata prosekunoun autw

kai tithentes ta gonata prosekunoun autO
G2532 G5087 G3588 G1119 G4352 G846
Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
AND PLACING THE KNEES THEY-worshipED to-Him
him
15:20 kai ote enepaixan autw exedusan auton thn porfuran kai 20 And when they had mocked
kai hote enepaixan autO exedusan auton tEn porphuran kai
G2532 G3753 G1702 G846 G1562 G846 G3588 G4209 G2532
him, they took off the purple
Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj from him, and put his own
AND when THEY-IN-sport to-Him THEY-OUT-SLIP Him THE PURPLE AND clothes on him, and led him out
they-scoff-at him they-strip of-the to crucify him.
enedusan auton ta imatia ta idia kai exagousin auton

enedusan auton ta himatia ta idia kai exagousin auton
G1746 G846 G3588 G2440 G3588 G2398 G2532 G1806 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
THEY-IN-SLIP Him THE GARMENTS THE OWN AND THEY-ARE-OUT-LEADING Him
put-on they-are-leading-out
ina staurwswsin auton

hina staurOsOsin auton
G2443 G4717 G846
Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-impalING Him
they-should-be-crucifying
15:21 kai aggareuousin paragonta tina simwna kurhnaion 21 And they compel one Simon
kai aggareuousin paragonta tina simOna kurEnaion
G2532 G29 G3855 G5100 G4613 G2956
a Cyrenian, who passed by,
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Acc Sg m px Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m coming out of the country, the
AND THEY-ARE-DRAFTING BESIDE-LEADING ANY SIMON CYRENIAN father of Alexander and Rufus,
they-are-conscripting one-passing-along certain to bear his cross.
ercomenon ap agrou ton patera alexandrou kai roufou ina

erchomenon ap agrou ton patera alexandrou kai rouphou hina
G2064 G575 G68 G3588 G3962 G223 G2532 G4504 G2443
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m Conj
COMING FROM FIELD THE FATHER OF-ALEXANDER AND OF-RUFUS THAT
Rufus
arh ton stauron autou

arE ton stauron autou
G142 G3588 G4716 G846
he-SHOULD-BE-LIFTING THE pale OF-Him
he-should-be-picking-up cross
15:22 kai ferousin auton epi golgoqa topon o estin 22 . And they bring him unto
kai pherousin auton epi golgotha topon ho estin
G2532 G5342 G846 G1909 G1115 G5117 G3739 G2076
the place Golgotha, which is,
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg m pr Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg being interpreted, The place of
AND THEY-ARE-CARRYING Him ON GOLGOTHA PLACE WHICH IS a skull.
they-are-bringing
meqermhneuomenon kraniou topos

methermEneuomenon kraniou topos
G3177 G2898 G5117
vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n n_ Gen Sg n n_ Nom Sg m
beING-after-TRANSLATED OF-SKULL PLACE
being-construed
15:23 kai edidoun autw piein esmurnismenon oinon o de 23 And they gave him to drink
kai edidoun autO piein esmurnismenon oinon ho de
G2532 G1325 G846 G4095 G4669 G3631 G3588 G1161
wine mingled with myrrh: but
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m vn 2Aor Act vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m Conj he received [it] not.
AND THEY-GAVE to-Him TO-BE-DRINKING HAVING-been-MYRRHizED WINE THE YET
him having-been-blended-with-myrrh
ouk elaben
ouk elaben
G3756 G2983
Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
NOT He-GOT
he-took-it
15:24 kai staurwsantes auton diemerizon ta imatia autou 24 And when they had
kai staurOsantes auton diemerizon ta himatia autou
G2532 G4717 G846 G1266 G3588 G2440 G846
crucified him, they parted his
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Sg m garments, casting lots upon
AND impaling Him THEY-THRU-PARTED THE GARMENTS OF-Him them, what every man should
crucifying they-divided take.
ballontes klhron ep auta tis ti arh

ballontes klEron ep auta tis ti arE
G906 G2819 G1909 G846 G5101 G5101 G142
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg m Prep pp Acc Pl n pi Nom Sg m pi Acc Sg n vs Aor Act 3 Sg
CASTING LOT ON them ANY ANY SHOULD-BE-LIFTING
who ? anything should-be-taking-away
Mark 15
15:25 hn de wra trith kai estaurwsan auton 25 And it was the third hour,
En de hOra tritE kai estaurOsan auton
G2258 G1161 G5610 G5154 G2532 G4717 G846
and they crucified him.
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
WAS YET HOUR third AND THEY-impale Him
it-was they-crucify
15:26 kai hn h epigrafh ths aitias autou epigegrammenh 26 And the superscription of
kai En hE epigraphE tEs aitias autou epigegrammenE
G2532 G2258 G3588 G1923 G3588 G156 G846 G1924
his accusation was written
Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m vp Perf Pas Nom Sg f over, THE KING OF THE
AND WAS THE ON-WRITing OF-THE cause OF-Him HAVING-been-ON-WRITTEN JEWS.
inscription charge having-been-inscribed
o basileus twn ioudaiwn

ho basileus tOn ioudaiOn
G3588 G935 G3588 G2453
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
THE KING OF-THE JUDA-ans
Jews
15:27 kai sun autw staurousin duo lhstas ena ek dexiwn kai 27 And with him they crucify
kai sun autO staurousin duo lEstas hena ek dexiOn kai
G2532 G4862 G846 G4717 G1417 G3027 G1520 G1537 G1188 G2532
two thieves; the one on his
Conj Prep pp Dat Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Pl a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Sg m Prep a_ Gen Pl m Conj right hand, and the other on his
AND TOGETHER to-Him THEY-ARE-impalING TWO ROBBERS ONE OUT OF-RIGHT AND left.
togetherwith him they-are-crucifying of-right(p)
ena ex euwnumwn autou

hena ex euOnumOn autou
G1520 G1537 G2176 G846
a_ Acc Sg m Prep a_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m
ONE OUT OF-left OF-Him
of-left(p)
15:28 kai eplhrwqh h grafh h legousa kai meta anomwn 28 And the scripture was
kai eplErOthE hE graphE hE legousa kai meta anomOn
G2532 G4137 G3588 G1124 G3588 G3004 G2532 G3326 G459
fulfilled, which saith, And he
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f Conj Prep a_ Gen Pl m was numbered with the
AND WAS-FILLED THE WRITing THE sayING AND WITH UN-LAWeds transgressors.
was-fulfilled scripture lawless-ones
elogisqh
elogisthE
G3049
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
He-IS-accountED
he-is-reckoned
15:29 kai oi paraporeuomenoi eblasfhmoun auton kinountes tas 29 And they that passed by
kai hoi paraporeuomenoi eblasphEmoun auton kinountes tas
G2532 G3588 G3899 G987 G846 G2795 G3588
railed on him, wagging their
Conj t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl f heads, and saying, Ah, thou
AND THE-ones BESIDE-GOING HARM-AVERRED Him STIRRING THE that destroyest the temple, and
the ones-going-by blasphemed wagging buildest [it] in three days,
kefalas autwn kai legontes oua o kataluwn ton naon

kephalas autOn kai legontes oua ho kataluOn ton naon
G2776 G846 G2532 G3004 G3758 G3588 G2647 G3588 G3485
n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Inj t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
HEADS OF-them AND sayING AHA ! THE One-DOWN-LOOSING THE TEMPLE
one-demolishing
kai en trisin hmerais oikodomwn

kai en trisin hEmerais oikodomOn
G2532 G1722 G5140 G2250 G3618
Conj Prep a_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
AND IN THREE DAYS HOME-BUILDING
building-it
15:30 swson seauton kai kataba apo tou staurou 30 Save thyself, and come
sOson seauton kai kataba apo tou staurou
G4982 G4572 G2532 G2597 G575 G3588 G4716
down from the cross.
vm Aor Act 2 Sg pf 2 Acc Sg m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Att Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
SAVE YOURself AND BE-YOU-COMING-DOWN FROM THE pale
save-you ! be-you-descending ! cross
15:31 omoiws de kai oi arciereis empaizontes pros allhlous meta 31 Likewise also the chief
homoiOs de kai hoi archiereis empaizontes pros allElous meta
G3668 G1161 G2532 G3588 G749 G1702 G4314 G240 G3326
priests mocking said among
Adv Conj Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep pc Acc Pl m Prep themselves with the scribes, He
LIKE-AS YET AND THE chief-SACRED-ones IN-sportING TOWARD one-another WITH saved others; himself he cannot
likewise also chief-priests scoffing save.
twn grammatewn elegon allous eswsen eauton ou dunatai

tOn grammateOn elegon allous esOsen heauton ou dunatai
G3588 G1122 G3004 G243 G4982 G1438 G3756 G1410
t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl a_ Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pf 3 Acc Sg m Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
THE WRITers said others He-SAVES self NOT He-IS-ABLE
scribes himself he-can
Mark 15
swsai
sOsai
G4982
vn Aor Act
TO-SAVE
15:32 o cristos o basileus tou israhl katabatw nun 32 Let Christ the King of Israel
ho christos ho basileus tou israEl katabatO nun
G3588 G5547 G3588 G935 G3588 G2474 G2597 G3568
descend now from the cross,
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m ni proper vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv that we may see and believe.
THE ANOINTED THE KING OF-THE ISRAEL LET-BE-DOWN-STEPPING NOW And they that were crucified
Christ let-him-be-descending ! with him reviled him.
apo tou staurou ina idwmen kai pisteuswmen kai oi

apo tou staurou hina idOmen kai pisteusOmen kai hoi
G575 G3588 G4716 G2443 G1492 G2532 G4100 G2532 G3588
Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl Conj vs Aor Act 1 Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl m
FROM THE pale THAT WE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING AND WE-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING AND THE-ones
cross should-be-believing the
sunestaurwmenoi autw wneidizon auton

sunestaurOmenoi autO Oneidizon auton
G4957 G846 G3679 G846
vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m pp Dat Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
HAVING-been-TOGETHER-impalED to-Him REPROACHED Him
ones-having-been-crucified-together him
15:33 genomenhs de wras ekths skotos egeneto ef olhn thn 33 . And when the sixth hour
genomenEs de hOras hektEs skotos egeneto eph holEn tEn
G1096 G1161 G5610 G1623 G4655 G1096 G1909 G3650 G3588
was come, there was darkness
vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Sg n vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f over the whole land until the
OF-BECOMING YET HOUR SIXth DARKness BECAME ON WHOLE THE ninth hour.
of-hour onover
ghn ews wras ennaths

gEn heOs hOras ennatEs
G1093 G2193 G5610 G1766
n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f
LAND TILL HOUR OF-NINth
ninth
15:34 kai th wra th ennath ebohsen o ihsous fwnh megalh 34 And at the ninth hour Jesus
kai tE hOra tE ennatE eboEsen ho iEsous phOnE megalE
G2532 G3588 G5610 G3588 G1766 G994 G3588 G2424 G5456 G3173
cried with a loud voice, saying,
Conj t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f Eloi, Eloi, lama sabachthani?
AND to-THE HOUR THE NINth IMPLORES THE JESUS to-SOUND GREAT which is, being interpreted, My
to-voice loud God, my God, why hast thou
forsaken me?
legwn elwi elwi lamma sabacqani o estin
legOn elOi elOi lamma sabachthani ho estin
G3004 G1682 G1682 G2982 G4518 G3739 G2076
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Aramaic Aramaic Hebrew Aramaic pr Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
sayING ELOI ELOI LAMMA SABACHTHANI ( Aramaic ) WHICH IS
lama sabachthani
meqermhneuomenon o qeos mou o qeos mou eis

methermEneuomenon ho theos mou ho theos mou eis
G3177 G3588 G2316 G3450 G3588 G2316 G3450 G1519
vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Prep
beING-after-TRANSLATED THE God OF-ME THE God OF-ME INTO
being-construed
ti me egkatelipes
ti me egkatelipes
G5101 G3165 G1459
pi Acc Sg n pp 1 Acc Sg vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ANY ME YOU-abandonED
what ? you-did-forsake
15:35 kai tines twn paresthkotwn akousantes elegon idou 35 And some of them that
kai tines tOn parestEkotOn akousantes elegon idou
G2532 G5100 G3588 G3936 G191 G3004 G2400
stood by, when they heard [it],
Conj px Nom Pl m t_ Gen Pl m vp Perf Act Gen Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg said, Behold, he calleth Elias.
AND ANY OF-THE ones-HAVING-BESIDE-STOOD HEARing said BE-PERCEIVING
some ones-standing-by hearing-it lo !
hlian fwnei
Elian phOnei
G2243 G5455
n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ELIAS He-IS-SOUNDING
Elijah he-is-summoning
15:36 dramwn de eis kai gemisas spoggon oxous 36 And one ran and filled a
dramOn de eis kai gemisas spoggon oxous
G5143 G1161 G1520 G2532 G1072 G4699 G3690
spunge full of vinegar, and put
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg n [it] on a reed, and gave him to
RUNNING YET ONE AND REPLETizing SPONGE OF-vinegar drink, saying, Let alone; let us
soaking see whether Elias will come to
Mark 15
take him down.

periqeis te kalamw epotizen auton legwn afete
peritheis te kalamO epotizen auton legOn aphete
G4060 G5037 G2563 G4222 G846 G3004 G863
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Part n_ Dat Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
ABOUT-PLACING BESIDES to-REED DRINKizED Him sayING FROM-LET
sticking-it-on reed gave-to-drink let-off-ye !
idwmen ei ercetai hlias kaqelein auton

idOmen ei erchetai Elias kathelein auton
G1492 G1487 G2064 G2243 G2507 G846
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl Cond vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m vn 2Aor Act pp Acc Sg m
WE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING IF IS-COMING ELIAS TO-BE-DOWN-LIFTING Him
Elijah to-be-taking-down
15:37 o de ihsous afeis fwnhn megalhn exepneusen 37 And Jesus cried with a loud
ho de iEsous apheis phOnEn megalEn exepneusen
G3588 G1161 G2424 G863 G5456 G3173 G1606
voice, and gave up the ghost.
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE YET JESUS FROM-LETTING SOUND GREAT expirES
letting-out loud
15:38 kai to katapetasma tou naou escisqh eis duo apo 38 And the veil of the temple
kai to katapetasma tou naou eschisthE eis duo apo
G2532 G3588 G2665 G3588 G3485 G4977 G1519 G1417 G575
was rent in twain from the top
Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep a_ Nom Prep to the bottom.
AND THE DOWN-EXPANDer OF-THE TEMPLE IS-SPLIT INTO TWO FROM
curtain is-rent
anwqen ews katw

anOthen heOs katO
G509 G2193 G2736
Adv Conj Adv
UP-PLACE TILL DOWN
above bottom
15:39 idwn de o kenturiwn o paresthkws ex 39 And when the centurion,

idOn de ho kenturiOn ho parestEkOs ex
G1492 G1161 G3588 G2760 G3588 G3936 G1537
which stood over against him,
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Perf Act Nom Sg m Prep saw that he so cried out, and
PERCEIVING YET THE CENTURION THE one-HAVING-BESIDE-STOOD OUT gave up the ghost, he said,
one-standing-by Truly this man was the Son of
God.
enantias autou oti outws kraxas exepneusen eipen alhqws
enantias autou hoti houtOs kraxas exepneusen eipen alEthOs
G1727 G846 G3754 G3779 G2896 G1606 G2036 G230
a_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj Adv vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv
OF-IN-INSTEAD OF-Him that thus CRYing He-expirES said TRUly
of-opposite-of him
o anqrwpos outos uios hn qeou

ho anthrOpos houtos huios En theou
G3588 G444 G3778 G5207 G2258 G2316
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg n_ Gen Sg m
THE human this SON WAS OF-God
15:40 hsan de kai gunaikes apo makroqen qewrousai en ais 40 There were also women
Esan de kai gunaikes apo makrothen theOrousai en hais
G2258 G1161 G2532 G1135 G575 G3113 G2334 G1722 G3739
looking on afar off: among
vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj Conj n_ Nom Pl f Prep Adv vp Pres Act Nom Pl f Prep pr Dat Pl f whom was Mary Magdalene,
WERE YET AND WOMEN FROM FAR-PLACE beholdING IN WHOM and Mary the mother of James
there-were also afar among the less and of Joses, and
Salome;
hn kai maria h magdalhnh kai maria h tou iakwbou
En kai maria hE magdalEnE kai maria hE tou iakObou
G2258 G2532 G3137 G3588 G3094 G2532 G3137 G3588 G3588 G2385
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
WAS AND MARY THE MAGDALENE AND MARY THE OF-THE JACOBUS
also James
tou mikrou kai iwsh mhthr kai salwmh

tou mikrou kai iOsE mEtEr kai salOmE
G3588 G3398 G2532 G2499 G3384 G2532 G4539
t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f
THE LITTLE AND OF-JOSES MOTHER AND SALOME
15:41 ai kai ote hn en th galilaia hkolouqoun autw kai 41 (Who also, when he was in
hai kai hote En en tE galilaia Ekolouthoun autO kai
G3739 G2532 G3753 G2258 G1722 G3588 G1056 G190 G846 G2532
Galilee, followed him, and
pr Nom Pl f Conj Adv vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Conj ministered unto him;) and
WHO AND when He-WAS IN THE GALILEE followED to-Him AND many other women which
also him came up with him unto
Jerusalem.
dihkonoun autw kai allai pollai ai sunanabasai autw eis
diEkonoun autO kai allai pollai hai sunanabasai autO eis
G1247 G846 G2532 G243 G4183 G3588 G4872 G846 G1519
vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Conj a_ Nom Pl f a_ Nom Pl f t_ Nom Pl f vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl f pp Dat Sg m Prep
THRU-SERVED to-Him AND others MANY THE ones-TOGETHER-UP-STEPPing to-Him INTO
dispensed ones-ascending-with him
Mark 15
ierosoluma
ierosoluma
G2414
n_ Acc Sg f
JERUSALEM
15:42 kai hdh oyias genomenhs epei hn paraskeuh o 42 . And now when the even
kai EdE opsias genomenEs epei En paraskeuE ho
G2532 G2235 G3798 G1096 G1893 G2258 G3904 G3739
was come, because it was the
Conj Adv a_ Gen Sg f vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f pr Nom Sg n preparation, that is, the day
AND ALREADY evening OF-BECOMING since it-WAS preparation WHICH before the sabbath,
of-evening becoming
estin prosabbaton
estin prosabbaton
G2076 G4315
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg n
IS BEFORE-SABBATH
before-the-sabbath
15:43 hlqen iwshf o apo arimaqaias euschmwn bouleuths os 43 Joseph of Arimathaea, an

Elthen iOsEph ho apo arimathaias euschEmOn bouleutEs hos
G2064 G2501 G3588 G575 G707 G2158 G1010 G3739
honourable counsellor, which
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg ni proper t_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg f a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pr Nom Sg m also waited for the kingdom of
CAME JOSEPH THE FROM ARIMATHEA WELL-FIGURED COUNSELlor WHO God, came, and went in boldly
the-one respectable counselor unto Pilate, and craved the
body of Jesus.
kai autos hn prosdecomenos thn basileian tou qeou
kai autos En prosdechomenos tEn basileian tou theou
G2532 G846 G2258 G4327 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316
Conj pp Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
AND he WAS TOWARD-RECEIVING THE KINGdom OF-THE God
also anticipating
tolmhsas eishlqen pros pilaton kai hthsato to swma tou

tolmEsas eisElthen pros pilaton kai EtEsato to sOma tou
G5111 G1525 G4314 G4091 G2532 G154 G3588 G4983 G3588
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Mid 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m
DARing INTO-CAME TOWARD PILATE AND REQUESTS THE BODY OF-THE
entered
ihsou
iEsou
G2424
n_ Gen Sg m
JESUS
15:44 o de pilatos eqaumasen ei hdh teqnhken kai 44 And Pilate marvelled if he

ho de pilatos ethaumasen ei EdE tethnEken kai
G3588 G1161 G4091 G2296 G1487 G2235 G2348 G2532
were already dead: and calling
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Cond Adv vi Perf Act 3 Sg Conj [unto him] the centurion, he
THE YET PILATE MARVELS IF ALREADY He-HAS-DIED AND asked him whether he had been
any while dead.
proskalesamenos ton kenturiwna ephrwthsen auton ei palai apeqanen

proskalesamenos ton kenturiOna epErOtEsen auton ei palai apethanen
G4341 G3588 G2760 G1905 G846 G1487 G3819 G599
vp Aor midD Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Cond Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
TOWARD-CALLing THE CENTURION he-inquirES-of him IF OLD He-FROM-DIED
calling-to-him long-ago he-died
15:45 kai gnous apo tou kenturiwnos edwrhsato to swma 45 And when he knew [it] of
kai gnous apo tou kenturiOnos edOrEsato to sOma
G2532 G1097 G575 G3588 G2760 G1433 G3588 G4983
the centurion, he gave the body
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n to Joseph.
AND KNOWING FROM THE CENTURION he-presents THE BODY
knowing-it
tw iwshf
tO iOsEph
G3588 G2501
t_ Dat Sg m ni proper
to-THE JOSEPH
15:46 kai agorasas sindona kai kaqelwn auton eneilhsen th 46 And he bought fine linen,
kai agorasas sindona kai kathelOn auton eneilEsen tE
G2532 G59 G4616 G2532 G2507 G846 G1750 G3588
and took him down, and
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg f wrapped him in the linen, and
AND BUYing linen-wrapper AND DOWN-LIFTING Him he-IN-WHIRLS to-THE laid him in a sepulchre which
taking-down he-wraps-him was hewn out of a rock, and
rolled a stone unto the door of
sindoni kai kateqhken auton en mnhmeiw o hn the sepulchre.
sindoni kai katethEken auton en mnEmeiO ho En
G4616 G2532 G2698 G846 G1722 G3419 G3739 G2258
n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg n pr Nom Sg n vi Impf vxx 3 Sg
linen-wrapper AND DOWN-PLACES Him IN memorial-vault WHICH WAS
places-down tomb
Mark 15 - Mark 16
lelatomhmenon ek petras kai prosekulisen liqon epi thn quran

lelatomEmenon ek petras kai prosekulisen lithon epi tEn thuran
G2998 G1537 G4073 G2532 G4351 G3037 G1909 G3588 G2374
vp Perf Pas Nom Sg n Prep n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
HAVING-been-quarriED OUT OF-ROCK AND TOWARD-ROLLS STONE ON THE DOOR
he-rolls-to
tou mnhmeiou
tou mnEmeiou
G3588 G3419
OF-THE memorial-vault
tomb
15:47 h de maria h magdalhnh kai maria iwsh eqewroun 47 And Mary Magdalene and
hE de maria hE magdalEnE kai maria iOsE etheOroun
G3588 G1161 G3137 G3588 G3094 G2532 G3137 G2499 G2334
Mary [the mother] of Joses
t_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Pl beheld where he was laid.
THE YET MARY THE MAGDALENE AND MARY OF-JOSES beheld
pou tiqetai
pou tithetai
G4225 G5087
Part vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
?-where He-IS-beING-PLACED
where ?
Mark 16
16:1 kai diagenomenou tou sabbatou maria h magdalhnh kai maria 1 . And when the sabbath was
kai diagenomenou tou sabbatou maria hE magdalEnE kai maria
G2532 G1230 G3588 G4521 G3137 G3588 G3094 G2532 G3137
past, Mary Magdalene, and
Conj vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f Mary the [mother] of James,
AND OF-THRU-BECOMING OF-THE SABBATH MARY THE MAGDALENE AND MARY and Salome, had bought sweet
of-elapsing spices, that they might come
and anoint him.
h tou iakwbou kai salwmh hgorasan arwmata ina elqousai
hE tou iakObou kai salOmE Egorasan arOmata hina elthousai
G3588 G3588 G2385 G2532 G4539 G59 G759 G2443 G2064
t_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Pl n Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl f
THE OF-THE JACOBUS AND SALOME BUY SPICES THAT COMING
James
aleiywsin auton
aleipsOsin auton
G218 G846
vs Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
THEY-SHOULD-BE-RUBBING Him
16:2 kai lian prwi ths mias sabbatwn ercontai epi to 2 And very early in the
kai lian prOi tEs mias sabbatOn erchontai epi to
G2532 G3029 G4404 G3588 G1520 G4521 G2064 G1909 G3588
morning the first [day] of the
Conj Adv Adv t_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Pl n vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg n week, they came unto the
AND VERY morning OF-THE OF-ONE OF-SABBATHS THEY-ARE-COMING ON THE sepulchre at the rising of the
very-early in-the-morning one-day sun.
mnhmeion anateilantos tou hliou

mnEmeion anateilantos tou hEliou
G3419 G393 G3588 G2246
n_ Acc Sg n vp Aor Act Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
memorial-vault OF-UP-rising OF-THE SUN
tomb of-rising
16:3 kai elegon pros eautas tis apokulisei hmin ton 3 And they said among
kai elegon pros heautas tis apokulisei hEmin ton
G2532 G3004 G4314 G1438 G5101 G617 G2254 G3588
themselves, Who shall roll us
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep pf 3 Acc Pl f pi Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl t_ Acc Sg m away the stone from the door
AND THEY-said TOWARD selves ANY SHALL-BE-FROM-ROLLING to-US THE of the sepulchre?
themselves who ? shall-be-rolling-away
liqon ek ths quras tou mnhmeiou

lithon ek tEs thuras tou mnEmeiou
G3037 G1537 G3588 G2374 G3588 G3419
n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
STONE OUT OF-THE DOOR OF-THE memorial-vault
tomb
16:4 kai anableyasai qewrousin oti apokekulistai o liqos 4 And when they looked, they
kai anablepsasai theOrousin hoti apokekulistai ho lithos
G2532 G308 G2334 G3754 G617 G3588 G3037
saw that the stone was rolled
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl f vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj vi Perf Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m away: for it was very great.
AND UP-looking THEY-ARE-beholdING that HAS-been-FROM-ROLLED THE STONE
looking-up has-been-rolled-away
hn gar megas sfodra

En gar megas sphodra
G2258 G1063 G3173 G4970
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg m Adv
it-WAS for GREAT VEHEMENT
tremendously
16:5 kai eiselqousai eis to mnhmeion eidon neaniskon 5 And entering into the
kai eiselthousai eis to mnEmeion eidon neaniskon
G2532 G1525 G1519 G3588 G3419 G1492 G3495
sepulchre, they saw a young
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl f Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg m man sitting on the right side,
AND INTO-COMING INTO THE memorial-vault THEY-PERCEIVED YOUTH clothed in a long white
entering tomb garment; and they were
affrighted.
kaqhmenon en tois dexiois peribeblhmenon stolhn leukhn kai
kathEmenon en tois dexiois peribeblEmenon stolEn leukEn kai
G2521 G1722 G3588 G1188 G4016 G4749 G3022 G2532
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl n a_ Dat Pl n vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f Conj
sittING IN THE RIGHTS HAVING-been-ABOUT-CAST robe WHITE AND
right(p) having-been-clothed
exeqambhqhsan
exethambEthEsan
G1568
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
THEY-WERE-OUT-AWED
they-were-overawed
16:6 o de legei autais mh ekqambeisqe ihsoun zhteite 6 And he saith unto them, Be
ho de legei autais mE ekthambeisthe iEsoun zEteite
G3588 G1161 G3004 G846 G3361 G1568 G2424 G2212
not affrighted: Ye seek Jesus
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl f Part Neg vm Pres Pas 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Pl of Nazareth, which was
THE YET he-IS-sayING to-them NO YE-BE-beING-OUT-AWED JESUS YE-ARE-SEEKING crucified: he is risen; he is not
be-ye-being-overawed ! here: behold the place where
Mark 16
they laid him.

ton nazarhnon ton estaurwmenon hgerqh ouk estin wde
ton nazarEnon ton estaurOmenon EgerthE ouk estin hOde
G3588 G3479 G3588 G4717 G1453 G3756 G2076 G5602
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Adv
THE NAZAREAN THE One-HAVING-been-impalED He-WAS-ROUSED NOT He-IS here
one-having-been-crucified
ide o topos opou eqhkan auton

ide ho topos hopou ethEkan auton
G1492 G3588 G5117 G3699 G5087 G846
vm Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
BE-PERCEIVING THE PLACE THE-?-where THEY-PLACE Him
be-you-perceiving ! wheree
16:7 all upagete eipate tois maqhtais autou kai tw petrw 7 But go your way, tell his
all hupagete eipate tois mathEtais autou kai tO petrO
G235 G5217 G2036 G3588 G3101 G846 G2532 G3588 G4074
disciples and Peter that he
Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m goeth before you into Galilee:
but BE-UNDER-LEADING say to-THE LEARNers OF-Him AND to-THE Peter there shall ye see him, as he
be-ye-going-away ! say-ye ! disciples said unto you.
oti proagei umas eis thn galilaian ekei auton oyesqe

hoti proagei humas eis tEn galilaian ekei auton opsesthe
G3754 G4254 G5209 G1519 G3588 G1056 G1563 G846 G3700
Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Adv pp Acc Sg m vi Fut midD 2 Pl
that He-IS-BEFORE-LEADING YOU(p) INTO THE GALILEE there Him YE-SHALL-BE-VIEWING
he-is-preceding ye ye-shall-be-seeing
kaqws eipen umin

kathOs eipen humin
G2531 G2036 G5213
Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
according-AS He-said to-YOU(p)
to-ye
16:8 kai exelqousai tacu efugon apo tou mnhmeiou eicen de 8 And they went out quickly,
kai exelthousai tachu ephugon apo tou mnEmeiou eichen de
G2532 G1831 G5035 G5343 G575 G3588 G3419 G2192 G1161
and fled from the sepulchre;
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl f Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj for they trembled and were
AND OUT-COMING SWIFTLY THEY-FLED FROM THE memorial-vault it-HAD YET amazed: neither said they any
coming-out tomb thing to any [man]; for they
were afraid.
autas tromos kai ekstasis kai oudeni ouden eipon
autas tromos kai ekstasis kai oudeni ouden eipon
G846 G5156 G2532 G1611 G2532 G3762 G3762 G2036
pp Acc Pl f n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg f Conj a_ Dat Sg m a_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
them TREMBLing AND OUT-STANDing AND to-NOT-YET-ONE NOT-YET-ONE THEY-said
amazement to-anyone nothing
efobounto gar
ephobounto gar
G5399 G1063
vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl Conj
THEY-FEARED for
16:9 anastas de prwi prwth sabbatou efanh prwton maria 9 . Now when [Jesus] was
anastas de prOi prOtE sabbatou ephanE prOton maria
G450 G1161 G4404 G4413 G4521 G5316 G4412 G3137
risen early the first [day] of the
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj Adv a_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg n vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg Adv n_ Dat Sg f week, he appeared first to
UP-STANDing YET to-morning BEFORE-most OF-SABBATH He-APPEARed BEFORE-most to-MARY Mary Magdalene, out of whom
rising in-the-morning to-first-day first he had cast seven devils.
th magdalhnh af hs ekbeblhkei epta daimonia

tE magdalEnE aph hEs ekbeblEkei hepta daimonia
G3588 G3094 G575 G3739 G1544 G2033 G1140
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Prep pr Gen Sg f vi Plup Act 3 Sg a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n
THE MAGDALENE FROM WHOM He-HAD-OUT-CAST SEVEN demons
he-had-cast-out
16:10 ekeinh poreuqeisa aphggeilen tois met autou genomenois 10 [And] she went and told
ekeinE poreutheisa apEggeilen tois met autou genomenois
G1565 G4198 G518 G3588 G3326 G846 G1096
them that had been with him,
pd Nom Sg f vp Aor pasD Nom Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m Prep pp Gen Sg m vp 2Aor midD Dat Pl m as they mourned and wept.
that-one BEING-GONE FROM-MESSAGES to-THE-ones WITH Him BECOMING
that-one(f) reports to-the-ones
penqousin kai klaiousin

penthousin kai klaiousin
G3996 G2532 G2799
vp Pres Act Dat Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Dat Pl m
MOURNING AND LAMENTING
ones-mourning
16:11 kakeinoi akousantes oti zh kai eqeaqh up auths 11 And they, when they had
kakeinoi akousantes hoti zE kai etheathE hup autEs
G2548 G191 G3754 G2198 G2532 G2300 G5259 G846
heard that he was alive, and
pd Nom Pl m Con vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg f had been seen of her, believed
AND-those HEARing that He-IS-LIVING AND WAS-gazED by her not.
was-gazed-upon
Mark 16
hpisthsan
EpistEsan
G569
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
UN-BELIEVE
disbelieve
16:12 meta de tauta dusin ex autwn peripatousin efanerwqh en 12 After that he appeared in
meta de tauta dusin ex autOn peripatousin ephanerOthE en
G3326 G1161 G5023 G1417 G1537 G846 G4043 G5319 G1722
another form unto two of them,
Prep Conj pd Acc Pl n a_ Dat Pl m Prep pp Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Dat Pl m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep as they walked, and went into
after YET these to-TWO OUT OF-them ABOUT-TREADING He-WAS-made-APPEAR IN the country.
these-things ones-walking he-was-manifested
etera morfh poreuomenois eis agron

hetera morphE poreuomenois eis agron
G2087 G3444 G4198 G1519 G68
a_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl m Prep n_ Acc Sg m
DIFFERENT FORM to-ones-GOING INTO FIELD
ones-going
16:13 kakeinoi apelqontes aphggeilan tois loipois oude ekeinois 13 And they went and told [it]
kakeinoi apelthontes apEggeilan tois loipois oude ekeinois
G2548 G565 G518 G3588 G3062 G3761 G1565
unto the residue: neither
pd Nom Pl m Con vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m Adv pd Dat Pl m believed they them.
AND-those FROM-COMING FROM-MESSAGE to-THE rest NOT-YET to-those
coming-away report rest(p) neither those
episteusan
episteusan
G4100
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-BELIEVE
16:14 usteron anakeimenois autois tois endeka efanerwqh kai 14 . Afterward he appeared
husteron anakeimenois autois tois hendeka ephanerOthE kai
G5305 G345 G846 G3588 G1733 G5319 G2532
unto the eleven as they sat at
Adv vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl m pp Dat Pl m t_ Dat Pl m a_ Nom vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj meat, and upbraided them with
subsequently to-UP-LYING them to-THE ONE-TEN He-WAS-made-APPEAR AND their unbelief and hardness of
to-lying-back-at-table eleven he-was-manifested heart, because they believed
not them which had seen him
wneidisen thn apistian autwn kai sklhrokardian oti tois after he was risen.
Oneidisen tEn apistian autOn kai sklErokardian hoti tois
G3679 G3588 G570 G846 G2532 G4641 G3754 G3588
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Pl m Conj n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Dat Pl m
He-REPROACHES THE UN-BELIEF OF-them AND HARD-HEART that to-THE
unbelief hardheartedness the
qeasamenois auton eghgermenon ouk episteusan

theasamenois auton egEgermenon ouk episteusan
G2300 G846 G1453 G3756 G4100
vp Aor midD Dat Pl m pp Acc Sg m vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ones-gazing Him HAVING-been-ROUSED NOT THEY-BELIEVE
ones-gazing-on
16:15 kai eipen autois poreuqentes eis ton kosmon apanta khruxate 15 And he said unto them, Go
kai eipen autois poreuthentes eis ton kosmon hapanta kEruxate
G2532 G2036 G846 G4198 G1519 G3588 G2889 G537 G2784
ye into all the world, and
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Pl preach the gospel to every
AND He-said to-them BEING-GONE INTO THE SYSTEM ALL(emph.) PROCLAIM creature.
world herald-ye !
to euaggelion pash th ktisei

to euaggelion pasE tE ktisei
G3588 G2098 G3956 G3588 G2937
t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n a_ Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
THE WELL-MESSAGE to-EVERY THE CREATION
to-entire
16:16 o pisteusas kai baptisqeis swqhsetai o de 16 He that believeth and is

ho pisteusas kai baptistheis sOthEsetai ho de
G3588 G4100 G2532 G907 G4982 G3588 G1161
baptized shall be saved; but he
t_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m Conj that believeth not shall be
THE one-BELIEVing AND BEING-DIPizED SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED THE YET damned.
one-believing being-baptized
apisthsas katakriqhsetai
apistEsas katakrithEsetai
G569 G2632
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
one-UN-BELIEVing SHALL-BE-BEING-DOWN-JUDGED
one-disbelieving shall-be-being-condemned
16:17 shmeia de tois pisteusasin tauta parakolouqhsei en tw 17 And these signs shall follow
sEmeia de tois pisteusasin tauta parakolouthEsei en tO
G4592 G1161 G3588 G4100 G5023 G3877 G1722 G3588
them that believe; In my name
n_ Nom Pl n Conj t_ Dat Pl m vp Aor Act Dat Pl m pd Nom Pl n vi Fut Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg n shall they cast out devils; they
SIGNS YET to-THE ones-BELIEVing these SHALL-BE-BESIDE-followING IN THE shall speak with new tongues;
ones-believing shall-be-fully-following
Mark 16 - Luke 1
onomati mou daimonia ekbalousin glwssais lalhsousin

onomati mou daimonia ekbalousin glOssais lalEsousin
G3686 G3450 G1140 G1544 G1100 G2980
n_ Dat Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg n_ Acc Pl n vi Fut Act 3 Pl n_ Dat Pl f vi Fut Act 3 Pl
NAME OF-ME demons THEY-SHALL-BE-OUT-CASTING to-TONGUES THEY-SHALL-BE-TALKING
they-shall-be-casting-out to-languages they-shall-be-speaking
kainais
kainais
G2537
a_ Dat Pl f
NEW
16:18 ofeis arousin kan qanasimon ti piwsin 18 They shall take up serpents;
opheis arousin kan thanasimon ti piOsin
G3789 G142 G2579 G2286 G5100 G4095
and if they drink any deadly
n_ Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl Cond Con a_ Acc Sg n px Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl thing, it shall not hurt them;
serpents THEY-SHALL-BE-LIFTING AND-[IF]-EVER DEATHly ANY THEY-MAY-BE-DRINKING they shall lay hands on the
they-shall-be-picking-up and-if-ever deadly anything sick, and they shall recover.
ou mh autous blayei epi arrwstous ceiras epiqhsousin

ou mE autous blapsei epi arrOstous cheiras epithEsousin
G3756 G3361 G846 G984 G1909 G732 G5495 G2007
Part Neg Part Neg pp Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Sg Prep a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl f vi Fut Act 3 Pl
NOT NO them it-SHALL-BE-HARMING ON UN-FARE-WELLS HANDS THEY-SHALL-BE-ON-PLACING
ones-ailing they-shall-be-placing-on
kai kalws exousin

kai kalOs exousin
G2532 G2573 G2192
Conj Adv vi Fut Act 3 Pl
AND IDEALly THEY-SHALL-BE-HAVING
16:19 o men oun kurios meta to lalhsai autois anelhfqh eis 19 . So then after the Lord had
ho men oun kurios meta to lalEsai autois anelEphthE eis
G3588 G3303 G3767 G2962 G3326 G3588 G2980 G846 G353 G1519
spoken unto them, he was
t_ Nom Sg m Part Conj n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Act pp Dat Pl m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep received up into heaven, and
THE INDEED THEN Master after THE TO-TALK to-them WAS-UP-GOTTEN INTO sat on the right hand of God.
Lord to-speak was-taken-up
ton ouranon kai ekaqisen ek dexiwn tou qeou

ton ouranon kai ekathisen ek dexiOn tou theou
G3588 G3772 G2532 G2523 G1537 G1188 G3588 G2316
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
THE heaven AND is-seated OUT OF-RIGHT OF-THE God
of-right(p)
16:20 ekeinoi de exelqontes ekhruxan pantacou tou kuriou 20 And they went forth, and
ekeinoi de exelthontes ekEruxan pantachou tou kuriou
G1565 G1161 G1831 G2784 G3837 G3588 G2962
preached every where, the
pd Nom Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Adv t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Lord working with [them], and
those YET OUT-COMING PROCLAIM EVERY-SOIL OF-THE Master confirming the word with signs
coming-away herald everywhere the Lord following. Amen.
sunergountos kai ton logon bebaiountos dia twn epakolouqountwn

sunergountos kai ton logon bebaiountos dia tOn epakolouthountOn
G4903 G2532 G3588 G3056 G950 G1223 G3588 G1872
vp Pres Act Gen Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl n vp Pres Act Gen Pl n
TOGETHER-ACTING AND THE saying OF-confirmING THRU THE ON-followING
working-together word confirming through following-up
shmeiwn amhn
sEmeiOn amEn
G4592 G281
n_ Gen Pl n Hebrew
SIGNS AMEN
Luke 1
Luke
1:1 epeidhper polloi epeceirhsan anataxasqai dihghsin peri twn 1 . Forasmuch as many have
epeidEper polloi epecheirEsan anataxasthai diEgEsin peri tOn
G1895 G4183 G2021 G392 G1335 G4012 G3588
taken in hand to set forth in
Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl vn Aor midD n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Gen Pl n order a declaration of those
ON-IF-BIND-EVEN MANY ON-HAND TO-UP-SET relation ABOUT OF-THE things which are most surely
since-in-fact-even take-in-hand to-compose narrative concerning the believed among us,
peplhroforhmenwn en hmin pragmatwn

peplErophorEmenOn en hEmin pragmatOn
G4135 G1722 G2254 G4229
vp Perf Pas Gen Pl n Prep pp 1 Dat Pl n_ Gen Pl n
HAVING-been-FULL-CARRIED IN US PRACTISES
having-been-fully-assured among matters
1:2 kaqws paredosan hmin oi ap archs autoptai kai uphretai 2 Even as they delivered them
kathOs paredosan hEmin hoi ap archEs autoptai kai hupEretai
G2531 G3860 G2254 G3588 G575 G746 G845 G2532 G5257
unto us, which from the
Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp 1 Dat Pl t_ Nom Pl m Prep n_ Gen Sg f a_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m beginning were eyewitnesses,
according-AS BESIDE-GIVE to-US THE-ones FROM ORIGINal SAME-VIEWERS AND subservients and ministers of the word;
give-over the-ones beginning eyewitnesses deputies
genomenoi tou logou

genomenoi tou logou
G1096 G3588 G3056
vp 2Aor midD Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
BECOMING OF-THE saying
word
1:3 edoxen kamoi parhkolouqhkoti anwqen pasin akribws kaqexhs 3 It seemed good to me also,
edoxen kamoi parEkolouthEkoti anOthen pasin akribOs kathexEs
G1380 G2504 G3877 G509 G3956 G199 G2517
having had perfect
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg Con vp Perf Act Dat Sg m Adv a_ Dat Pl n Adv Adv understanding of all things
it-SEEMS AND-to-ME HAVING-BESIDE-followED UP-PLACE to-ALL EXACTly according-to-next from the very first, to write
also-to-me having-fully-followed from-the-very-first all accurately consecutively unto thee in order, most
excellent Theophilus,
soi grayai kratiste qeofile
soi grapsai kratiste theophile
G4671 G1125 G2903 G2321
pp 2 Dat Sg vn Aor Act a_ Voc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m
to-YOU TO-WRITE MOST-HOLDing ! Theophilus ! (God-FOND)
most-mighty ! Theophilus !
1:4 ina epignws peri wn kathchqhs logwn thn 4 That thou mightest know the
hina epignOs peri hOn katEchEthEs logOn tEn
G2443 G1921 G4012 G3739 G2727 G3056 G3588
certainty of those things,
Conj vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep pr Gen Pl m vi Aor Pas 2 Sg n_ Gen Pl m t_ Acc Sg f wherein thou hast been
THAT YOU-MAY-BE-ON-KNOWING ABOUT WHICH YOU-WERE-instructED sayings THE instructed.
you-may-be-recognizing concerning words
asfaleian
asphaleian
G803
n_ Acc Sg f
UN-TOTTER
certainty
1:5 egeneto en tais hmerais hrwdou tou basilews ths ioudaias 5 . There was in the days of
egeneto en tais hEmerais hErOdou tou basileOs tEs ioudaias
G1096 G1722 G3588 G2250 G2264 G3588 G935 G3588 G2449
Herod, the king of Judaea, a
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f certain priest named Zacharias,
it-BECAME IN THE DAYS OF-HEROD THE KING OF-THE JUDEA of the course of Abia: and his
there-came-to-be wife [was] of the daughters of
Aaron, and her name [was]
iereus tis onomati zacarias ex efhmerias abia kai h gunh Elisabeth.
hiereus tis onomati zacharias ex ephEmerias abia kai hE gunE
G2409 G5100 G3686 G2197 G1537 G2183 G7 G2532 G3588 G1135
n_ Nom Sg m px Nom Sg m n_ Dat Sg n n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg f ni proper Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
SACRED-one ANY to-NAME ZACHARIAS OUT OF-ON-DAY ABIA AND THE WOMAN
priest certain of-routine of-Abia wife
autou ek twn qugaterwn aarwn kai to onoma auths elisabet

autou ek tOn thugaterOn aarOn kai to onoma autEs elisabet
G846 G1537 G3588 G2364 G2 G2532 G3588 G3686 G846 G1665
pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f ni proper Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Sg f ni proper
OF-him OUT OF-THE DAUGHTERS of-AARON AND THE NAME OF-her ELIZABETH
of-Aaron
1:6 hsan de dikaioi amfoteroi enwpion tou qeou poreuomenoi 6 And they were both righteous
Esan de dikaioi amphoteroi enOpion tou theou poreuomenoi
G2258 G1161 G1342 G297 G1799 G3588 G2316 G4198
before God, walking in all the
vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Adv t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m commandments and ordinances
THEY-WERE YET JUST both IN-VIEW OF-THE God GOING of the Lord blameless.
sight-ofbefore the
Luke 1
en pasais tais entolais kai dikaiwmasin tou kuriou amemptoi

en pasais tais entolais kai dikaiOmasin tou kuriou amemptoi
G1722 G3956 G3588 G1785 G2532 G1345 G3588 G2962 G273
Prep a_ Dat Pl f t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f Conj n_ Dat Pl n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m a_ Nom Pl m
IN ALL THE directions AND JUST-effects OF-THE Master UN-BLAMEable
precepts just-statutes Lord blameless
1:7 kai ouk hn autois teknon kaqoti h elisabet hn 7 And they had no child,
kai ouk En autois teknon kathoti hE elisabet En
G2532 G3756 G2258 G846 G5043 G2530 G3588 G1665 G2258
because that Elisabeth was
Conj Part Neg vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m n_ Nom Sg n Adv t_ Nom Sg f ni proper vi Impf vxx 3 Sg barren, and they both were
AND NOT WAS to-them offspring DOWN-that THE ELIZABETH WAS [now] well stricken in years.
child forasmuch-as
steira kai amfoteroi probebhkotes en tais hmerais autwn hsan

steira kai amphoteroi probebEkotes en tais hEmerais autOn Esan
G4723 G2532 G297 G4260 G1722 G3588 G2250 G846 G2258
n_ Nom Sg f Conj a_ Nom Pl m vp Perf Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pp Gen Pl m vi Impf vxx 3 Pl
STERILE AND both HAVING-BEFORE-STEPPED IN THE DAYS OF-them WERE
barren having-advanced
1:8 egeneto de en tw ierateuein auton en th taxei 8 And it came to pass, that

egeneto de en tO hierateuein auton en tE taxei
G1096 G1161 G1722 G3588 G2407 G846 G1722 G3588 G5010
while he executed the priest's
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres Act pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f office before God in the order
it-BECAME YET IN THE TO-BE-SACREDING him IN THE SETTing of his course,
it-occurred to-be-doing-priestly-duties order
ths efhmerias autou enanti tou qeou

tEs ephEmerias autou enanti tou theou
G3588 G2183 G846 G1725 G3588 G2316
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m Adv t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE ON-DAY OF-him IN-INSTEAD OF-THE God
routine in-front-of the
1:9 kata to eqos ths ierateias elacen tou 9 According to the custom of
kata to ethos tEs hierateias elachen tou
G2596 G3588 G1485 G3588 G2405 G2975 G3588
the priest's office, his lot was
Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Gen Sg m to burn incense when he went
according-to THE CUSTOM OF-THE SACREDing he-CHANCED-UPON OF-THE into the temple of the Lord.
priestly-office he-chanced on
qumiasai eiselqwn eis ton naon tou kuriou

thumiasai eiselthOn eis ton naon tou kuriou
G2370 G1525 G1519 G3588 G3485 G3588 G2962
vn Aor Act vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
TO-SACRIFICE-(incense) INTO-COMING INTO THE TEMPLE OF-THE Master
to-burn-incense entering Lord
1:10 kai pan to plhqos tou laou hn proseucomenon 10 And the whole multitude of
kai pan to plEthos tou laou En proseuchomenon
G2532 G3956 G3588 G4128 G3588 G2992 G2258 G4336
the people were praying
Conj a_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg n without at the time of incense.
AND EVERY THE multitude OF-THE PEOPLE WAS prayING
entire
exw th wra tou qumiamatos

exO tE hOra tou thumiamatos
G1854 G3588 G5610 G3588 G2368
Adv t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
OUT to-THE HOUR OF-THE incense
outside
1:11 wfqh de autw aggelos kuriou estws ek dexiwn tou 11 And there appeared unto
OphthE de autO aggelos kuriou hestOs ek dexiOn tou
G3700 G1161 G846 G32 G2962 G2476 G1537 G1188 G3588
him an angel of the Lord
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Perf Act Nom Sg m Prep a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg n standing on the right side of
WAS-VIEWED YET to-him MESSENGER OF-Master HAVING-STOOD OUT OF-RIGHT OF-THE the altar of incense.
there-was-seen of-Lord standing of-right(p)
qusiasthriou tou qumiamatos

thusiastEriou tou thumiamatos
G2379 G3588 G2368
n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
SACRIFICE-place OF-THE incense
altar
1:12 kai etaracqh zacarias idwn kai fobos epepesen ep 12 And when Zacharias saw
kai etarachthE zacharias idOn kai phobos epepesen ep
G2532 G5015 G2197 G1492 G2532 G5401 G1968 G1909
[him], he was troubled, and
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep fear fell upon him.
AND WAS-DISTURBED ZACHARIAS PERCEIVING AND FEAR ON-FALLS ON
perceiving-it falls-on
auton
auton
G846
pp Acc Sg m
him
Luke 1
1:13 eipen de pros auton o aggelos mh fobou 13 But the angel said unto him,
eipen de pros auton ho aggelos mE phobou
G2036 G1161 G4314 G846 G3588 G32 G3361 G5399
Fear not, Zacharias: for thy
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Prep pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg prayer is heard; and thy wife
said YET TOWARD him THE MESSENGER NO BE-FEARING Elisabeth shall bear thee a son,
be-you-fearing ! and thou shalt call his name
John.
zacaria dioti eishkousqh h dehsis sou kai h gunh
zacharia dioti eisEkousthE hE deEsis sou kai hE gunE
G2197 G1360 G1522 G3588 G1162 G4675 G2532 G3588 G1135
n_ Voc Sg m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
ZACHARIAS THRU-that IS-INTO-HEARD THE petition OF-YOU AND THE WOMAN
because-that is-hearkened-to wife
sou elisabet gennhsei uion soi kai kaleseis to

sou elisabet gennEsei huion soi kai kaleseis to
G4675 G1665 G1080 G5207 G4671 G2532 G2564 G3588
pp 2 Gen Sg ni proper vi Fut Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Dat Sg Conj vi Fut Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
OF-YOU ELIZABETH SHALL-BE-generatING SON to-YOU AND YOU-SHALL-BE-CALLING THE
shall-be-bearing
onoma autou iwannhn

onoma autou iOannEn
G3686 G846 G2491
n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
NAME OF-him JOHN
1:14 kai estai cara soi kai agalliasis kai polloi epi th 14 And thou shalt have joy and
kai estai chara soi kai agalliasis kai polloi epi tE
G2532 G2071 G5479 G4671 G2532 G20 G2532 G4183 G1909 G3588
gladness; and many shall
Conj vi Fut vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Dat Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg f Conj a_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f rejoice at his birth.
AND SHALL-BE JOY to-YOU AND exulting AND MANY ON THE
there-shall-be exultation
gennhsei autou carhsontai

gennEsei autou charEsontai
G1083 G846 G5463
n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m vi 2Fut pasD 3 Pl
generating OF-him SHALL-BE-JOYING
birth shall-be-rejoicing
1:15 estai gar megas enwpion tou kuriou kai oinon kai sikera 15 For he shall be great in the
estai gar megas enOpion tou kuriou kai oinon kai sikera
G2071 G1063 G3173 G1799 G3588 G2962 G2532 G3631 G2532 G4608
sight of the Lord, and shall
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg m Adv t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj ni other drink neither wine nor strong
he-SHALL-BE for GREAT IN-VIEW OF-THE Master AND WINE AND INTOXICANT drink; and he shall be filled
in-sight-of Lord with the Holy Ghost, even
from his mother's womb.
ou mh pih kai pneumatos agiou plhsqhsetai eti ek
ou mE piE kai pneumatos hagiou plEsthEsetai eti ek
G3756 G3361 G4095 G2532 G4151 G40 G4130 G2089 G1537
Part Neg Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Adv Prep
NOT NO he-MAY-BE-DRINKING AND OF-spirit HOLY he-SHALL-BE-BEING-FILLED STILL OUT
koilias mhtros autou

koilias mEtros autou
G2836 G3384 G846
n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m
OF-CAVITY OF-MOTHER OF-him
of-womb
1:16 kai pollous twn uiwn israhl epistreyei epi kurion ton 16 And many of the children of
kai pollous tOn huiOn israEl epistrepsei epi kurion ton
G2532 G4183 G3588 G5207 G2474 G1994 G1909 G2962 G3588
Israel shall he turn to the Lord
Conj a_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m ni proper vi Fut Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m their God.
AND MANY OF-THE SONS of-ISRAEL he-SHALL-BE-ON-TURNING ON Master THE
of-Israel he-shall-be-turning-back Lord
qeon autwn
theon autOn
G2316 G846
n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Pl m
God OF-them
1:17 kai autos proeleusetai enwpion autou en pneumati kai 17 And he shall go before him
kai autos proeleusetai enOpion autou en pneumati kai
G2532 G846 G4281 G1799 G846 G1722 G4151 G2532
in the spirit and power of
Conj pp Nom Sg m vi Fut midD 3 Sg Adv pp Gen Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg n Conj Elias, to turn the hearts of the
AND he SHALL-BE-BEFORE-COMING IN-VIEW OF-Him IN spirit AND fathers to the children, and the
shall-be-coming-before in-sight-of him disobedient to the wisdom of
the just; to make ready a
dunamei hliou epistreyai kardias paterwn epi tekna kai apeiqeis people prepared for the Lord.
dunamei hEliou epistrepsai kardias paterOn epi tekna kai apeitheis
G1411 G2243 G1994 G2588 G3962 G1909 G5043 G2532 G545
n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Pl m Prep n_ Acc Pl n Conj a_ Acc Pl m
ABILITY OF-ELIAS TO-ON-TURN HEARTS OF-FATHERS ON offsprings AND UN-PERSUADable
power of-Elijah to-turn-back children ones-stubborn
Luke 1
en fronhsei dikaiwn etoimasai kuriw laon kateskeuasmenon

en phronEsei dikaiOn hetoimasai kuriO laon kateskeuasmenon
G1722 G5428 G1342 G2090 G2962 G2992 G2680
Prep n_ Dat Sg f a_ Gen Pl m vn Aor Act n_ Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m
IN DISPOSition OF-JUST-ones TO-make-READY to-Master PEOPLE HAVING-been-constructED
prudence of-just-ones to-Lord having-been-formed
1:18 kai eipen zacarias pros ton aggelon kata ti 18 And Zacharias said unto the
kai eipen zacharias pros ton aggelon kata ti
G2532 G2036 G2197 G4314 G3588 G32 G2596 G5101
angel, Whereby shall I know
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep pi Acc Sg n this? for I am an old man, and
AND said ZACHARIAS TOWARD THE MESSENGER according-to ANY my wife well stricken in years.
what ?
gnwsomai touto egw gar eimi presbuths kai h gunh

gnOsomai touto egO gar eimi presbutEs kai hE gunE
G1097 G5124 G1473 G1063 G1510 G4246 G2532 G3588 G1135
vi Fut midD 1 Sg pd Acc Sg n pp 1 Nom Sg Conj vi Pres vxx 1 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
I-SHALL-BE-KNOWING this I for AM SENIOR AND THE WOMAN
aged wife
mou probebhkuia en tais hmerais auths

mou probebEkuia en tais hEmerais autEs
G3450 G4260 G1722 G3588 G2250 G846
pp 1 Gen Sg vp Perf Act Nom Sg f Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pp Gen Sg f
OF-ME HAVING-BEFORE-STEPPED IN THE DAYS OF-her
having-advanced
1:19 kai apokriqeis o aggelos eipen autw egw eimi 19 And the angel answering
kai apokritheis ho aggelos eipen autO egO eimi
G2532 G611 G3588 G32 G2036 G846 G1473 G1510
said unto him, I am Gabriel,
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 1 Sg that stand in the presence of
AND answerING THE MESSENGER said to-him I AM God; and am sent to speak unto
thee, and to shew thee these
glad tidings.
gabrihl o paresthkws enwpion tou qeou kai apestalhn
gabriEl ho parestEkOs enOpion tou theou kai apestalEn
G1043 G3588 G3936 G1799 G3588 G2316 G2532 G649
ni proper t_ Nom Sg m vp Perf Act Nom Sg m Adv t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Pas 1 Sg
GABRIEL THE one-HAVING-BESIDE-STOOD IN-VIEW OF-THE God AND I-WAS-commissionED
one-standing-by sight-ofbefore the I-was-dispatched
lalhsai pros se kai euaggelisasqai soi tauta

lalEsai pros se kai euaggelisasthai soi tauta
G2980 G4314 G4571 G2532 G2097 G4671 G5023
vn Aor Act Prep pp 2 Acc Sg Conj vn Aor Mid pp 2 Dat Sg pd Acc Pl n
TO-TALK TOWARD YOU AND TO-WELL-MESSAGize to-YOU these
to-speak to-bring-the-well-message of-these-things
1:20 kai idou esh siwpwn kai mh dunamenos 20 And, behold, thou shalt be
kai idou esE siOpOn kai mE dunamenos
G2532 G2400 G2071 G4623 G2532 G3361 G1410
dumb, and not able to speak,
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Fut vxx 2 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj Part Neg vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m until the day that these things
AND BE-PERCEIVING YOU-SHALL-BE beING-SILENT AND NO beING-ABLE shall be performed, because
lo ! one-being-silent thou believest not my words,
which shall be fulfilled in their
lalhsai acri hs hmeras genhtai tauta anq wn ouk season.
lalEsai achri hEs hEmeras genEtai tauta anth hOn ouk
G2980 G891 G3739 G2250 G1096 G5023 G473 G3739 G3756
vn Aor Act Prep pr Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg pd Nom Pl n Prep pr Gen Pl m Part Neg
TO-TALK UNTIL WHICH DAY MAY-BE-BECOMING these INSTEAD OF-WHICH NOT
to-speak may-be-occurring these-things corresponding-to which(p)
episteusas tois logois mou oitines plhrwqhsontai eis ton

episteusas tois logois mou hoitines plErOthEsontai eis ton
G4100 G3588 G3056 G3450 G3748 G4137 G1519 G3588
vi Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg pr Nom Pl m vi Fut Pas 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg m
YOU-BELIEVE to-THE sayings OF-ME WHO-ANY SHALL-BE-BEING-FILLED INTO THE
the words which-any shall-be-being-fulfilled
kairon autwn
kairon autOn
G2540 G846
n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Pl m
SEASON OF-them
1:21 kai hn o laos prosdokwn ton zacarian kai 21 And the people waited for
kai En ho laos prosdokOn ton zacharian kai
G2532 G2258 G3588 G2992 G4328 G3588 G2197 G2532
Zacharias, and marvelled that
Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj he tarried so long in the
AND WAS THE PEOPLE TOWARD-SEEMING THE ZACHARIAS AND temple.
hoping-for
eqaumazon en tw cronizein auton en tw naw

ethaumazon en tO chronizein auton en tO naO
G2296 G1722 G3588 G5549 G846 G1722 G3588 G3485
vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres Act pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
THEY-MARVELED IN THE TO-BE-delayING him IN THE TEMPLE
Luke 1
1:22 exelqwn de ouk hdunato lalhsai autois kai epegnwsan 22 And when he came out, he
exelthOn de ouk Edunato lalEsai autois kai epegnOsan
G1831 G1161 G3756 G1410 G2980 G846 G2532 G1921
could not speak unto them: and
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Att vn Aor Act pp Dat Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl they perceived that he had seen
OUT-COMING YET NOT he-was-ABLE TO-TALK to-them AND THEY-ON-KNOW a vision in the temple: for he
coming-out to-speak they-recognize beckoned unto them, and
remained speechless.
oti optasian ewraken en tw naw kai autos hn
hoti optasian heOraken en tO naO kai autos En
G3754 G3701 G3708 G1722 G3588 G3485 G2532 G846 G2258
Conj n_ Acc Sg f vi Perf Act 3 Sg Att Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj pp Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg
that VIEW he-HAS-SEEN IN THE TEMPLE AND he WAS
apparition
dianeuwn autois kai diemenen kwfos

dianeuOn autois kai diemenen kOphos
G1269 G846 G2532 G1265 G2974
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Dat Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m
THRU-NODDING to-them AND THRU-REMAINED MUTE
motioning continued
1:23 kai egeneto ws eplhsqhsan ai hmerai ths leitourgias autou 23 And it came to pass, that, as
kai egeneto hOs eplEsthEsan hai hEmerai tEs leitourgias autou
G2532 G1096 G5613 G4130 G3588 G2250 G3588 G3009 G846
soon as the days of his
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m ministration were
AND it-BECAME AS ARE-FILLED THE DAYS OF-THE officiation OF-him accomplished, he departed to
it-occurred are-fulfilled ministry his own house.
aphlqen eis ton oikon autou

apElthen eis ton oikon autou
G565 G1519 G3588 G3624 G846
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m
he-FROM-CAME INTO THE HOME OF-him
he-came-away
1:24 meta de tautas tas hmeras sunelaben elisabet h gunh 24 And after those days his
meta de tautas tas hEmeras sunelaben elisabet hE gunE
G3326 G1161 G3778 G3588 G2250 G4815 G1665 G3588 G1135
wife Elisabeth conceived, and
Prep Conj pd Acc Pl f t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg ni proper t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f hid herself five months, saying,
after YET these THE DAYS TOGETHER-GOT ELIZABETH THE WOMAN
conceived wife
autou kai periekruben eauthn mhnas pente legousa

autou kai periekruben heautEn mEnas pente legousa
G846 G2532 G4032 G1438 G3376 G4002 G3004
pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pf 3 Acc Sg f n_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom vp Pres Act Nom Sg f
OF-him AND ABOUT-HID herself MONTHS FIVE sayING
kept-close
1:25 oti outws moi pepoihken o kurios en hmerais ais 25 Thus hath the Lord dealt
hoti houtOs moi pepoiEken ho kurios en hEmerais hais
G3754 G3779 G3427 G4160 G3588 G2962 G1722 G2250 G3739
with me in the days wherein he
Conj Adv pp 1 Dat Sg vi Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Dat Pl f pr Dat Pl f looked on [me], to take away
that thus to-ME HAS-DONE THE Master IN DAYS to-WHICH my reproach among men.
Lord
epeiden afelein to oneidos mou en anqrwpois

epeiden aphelein to oneidos mou en anthrOpois
G1896 G851 G3588 G3681 G3450 G1722 G444
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg Prep n_ Dat Pl m
He-ON-PERCEIVED TO-BE-FROM-LIFTING THE REPROACH OF-ME IN humans
he-took-notice to-be-eliminating among
1:26 en de tw mhni tw ektw apestalh o aggelos 26 . And in the sixth month the
en de tO mEni tO hektO apestalE ho aggelos
G1722 G1161 G3588 G3376 G3588 G1623 G649 G3588 G32
angel Gabriel was sent from
Prep Conj t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m God unto a city of Galilee,
IN YET THE MONTH THE SIXth WAS-commissioned THE MESSENGER named Nazareth,
was-dispatched
gabrihl upo tou qeou eis polin ths galilaias h onoma

gabriEl hupo tou theou eis polin tEs galilaias hE onoma
G1043 G5259 G3588 G2316 G1519 G4172 G3588 G1056 G3739 G3686
ni proper Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pr Dat Sg f n_ Nom Sg n
GABRIEL by THE God INTO city OF-THE GALILEE to-WHICH NAME
nazareq
nazareth
G3478
ni proper
NAZARETH
1:27 pros parqenon memnhsteumenhn andri w onoma iwshf ex 27 To a virgin espoused to a

pros parthenon memnEsteumenEn andri hO onoma iOsEph ex
G4314 G3933 G3423 G435 G3739 G3686 G2501 G1537
man whose name was Joseph,
Prep n_ Acc Sg f vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f n_ Dat Sg m pr Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg n ni proper Prep of the house of David; and the
TOWARD virgin HAVING -been-espousED to-MAN to-WHOM NAME JOSEPH OUT virgin's name [was] Mary.
having-been-espoused
Luke 1
oikou dabid kai to onoma ths parqenou mariam

oikou dabid kai to onoma tEs parthenou mariam
G3624 G1138 G2532 G3588 G3686 G3588 G3933 G3137
n_ Gen Sg m ni proper Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f ni proper
OF-HOME of-DAVID AND THE NAME OF-THE virgin MARIAM
of-house of-David Mary
1:28 kai eiselqwn o aggelos pros authn eipen caire 28 And the angel came in unto
kai eiselthOn ho aggelos pros autEn eipen chaire
G2532 G1525 G3588 G32 G4314 G846 G2036 G5463
her, and said, Hail, [thou that
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep pp Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vm Pres Act 2 Sg art] highly favoured, the Lord
AND INTO-COMING THE MESSENGER TOWARD her said BE-JOYING [is] with thee: blessed [art]
entering be-you-rejoicing ! thou among women.
kecaritwmenh o kurios meta sou euloghmenh su en

kecharitOmenE ho kurios meta sou eulogEmenE su en
G5487 G3588 G2962 G3326 G4675 G2127 G4771 G1722
vp Perf Pas Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep pp 2 Gen Sg vp Perf Pas Nom Sg f pp 2 Nom Sg Prep
HAVING-been-gracED THE Master WITH YOU beING-blessED YOU IN
having-been-favored-one Lord among
gunaixin
gunaixin
G1135
n_ Dat Pl f
WOMEN
1:29 h de idousa dietaracqh epi tw logw autou 29 And when she saw [him],
hE de idousa dietarachthE epi tO logO autou
G3588 G1161 G1492 G1298 G1909 G3588 G3056 G846
she was troubled at his saying,
t_ Nom Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m and cast in her mind what
THE YET PERCEIVING she-WAS-THRU-DISTURBED ON THE saying OF-him manner of salutation this
she-was-agitated word should be.
kai dielogizeto potapos eih o aspasmos outos

kai dielogizeto potapos eiE ho aspasmos houtos
G2532 G1260 G4217 G1498 G3588 G783 G3778
Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m vo Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m
AND THRU-accountED ?-where-FROM MAY-BE THE greeting this
reasoned what-manner-of salutation
1:30 kai eipen o aggelos auth mh fobou mariam 30 And the angel said unto her,
kai eipen ho aggelos autE mE phobou mariam
G2532 G2036 G3588 G32 G846 G3361 G5399 G3137
Fear not, Mary: for thou hast
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg f Part Neg vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg ni proper found favour with God.
AND said THE MESSENGER to-her NO BE-FEARING MARIAM
be-you-fearing ! Mary
eures gar carin para tw qew

heures gar charin para tO theO
G2147 G1063 G5485 G3844 G3588 G2316
vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg Conj n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
YOU-FOUND for grace BESIDE THE God
favor
1:31 kai idou sullhyh en gastri kai 31 And, behold, thou shalt
kai idou sullEpsE en gastri kai
G2532 G2400 G4815 G1722 G1064 G2532
conceive in thy womb, and
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Fut midD 2 Sg Prep n_ Dat Sg f Conj bring forth a son, and shalt call
AND BE-PERCEIVING YOU-SHALL-BE-TOGETHER-GETTING IN BELLY AND his name JESUS.
lo ! you-shall-be-conceiving
texh uion kai kaleseis to onoma autou

texE huion kai kaleseis to onoma autou
G5088 G5207 G2532 G2564 G3588 G3686 G846
vi Fut midD 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Fut Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m
YOU-SHALL-BE-BRINGING-FORTH SON AND YOU-SHALL-BE-CALLING THE NAME OF-Him
shall-be-bringing-forth
ihsoun
iEsoun
G2424
n_ Acc Sg m
JESUS
1:32 outos estai megas kai uios uyistou klhqhsetai kai 32 He shall be great, and shall
houtos estai megas kai huios hupsistou klEthEsetai kai
G3778 G2071 G3173 G2532 G5207 G5310 G2564 G2532
be called the Son of the
pd Nom Sg m vi Fut vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m a_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj Highest: and the Lord God
this-One SHALL-BE GREAT AND SON OF-HIGHest SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED AND shall give unto him the throne
this-one of-Most-High he-shall-be-being-called of his father David:
dwsei autw kurios o qeos ton qronon dabid tou

dOsei autO kurios ho theos ton thronon dabid tou
G1325 G846 G2962 G3588 G2316 G3588 G2362 G1138 G3588
vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-GIVING to-Him Master THE God THE THRONE of-DAVID THE
him Lord of-David
Luke 1
patros autou
patros autou
G3962 G846
FATHER OF-Him
1:33 kai basileusei epi ton oikon iakwb eis tous aiwnas kai 33 And he shall reign over the
kai basileusei epi ton oikon iakOb eis tous aiOnas kai
G2532 G936 G1909 G3588 G3624 G2384 G1519 G3588 G165 G2532
house of Jacob for ever; and of
Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m ni proper Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj his kingdom there shall be no
AND He-SHALL-BE-reignING ON THE HOME of-JACOB INTO THE eons AND end.
house of-Jacob
ths basileias autou ouk estai telos

tEs basileias autou ouk estai telos
G3588 G932 G846 G3756 G2071 G5056
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m Part Neg vi Fut vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg n
OF-THE KINGdom OF-Him NOT SHALL-BE FINISH
there-shall-be consummation
1:34 eipen de mariam pros ton aggelon pws estai touto epei 34 Then said Mary unto the
eipen de mariam pros ton aggelon pOs estai touto epei
G2036 G1161 G3137 G4314 G3588 G32 G4459 G2071 G5124 G1893
angel, How shall this be,
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj ni proper Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Adv Int vi Fut vxx 3 Sg pd Nom Sg n Conj seeing I know not a man?
said YET MARIAM TOWARD THE MESSENGER how SHALL-BE this since
Mary how ?
andra ou ginwskw
andra ou ginOskO
G435 G3756 G1097
n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg vi Pres Act 1 Sg
MAN NOT I-AM-KNOWING
1:35 kai apokriqeis o aggelos eipen auth pneuma agion 35 And the angel answered and
kai apokritheis ho aggelos eipen autE pneuma hagion
G2532 G611 G3588 G32 G2036 G846 G4151 G40
said unto her, The Holy Ghost
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n shall come upon thee, and the
AND answerING THE MESSENGER said to-her spirit HOLY power of the Highest shall
overshadow thee: therefore
also that holy thing which shall
epeleusetai epi se kai dunamis uyistou episkiasei soi be born of thee shall be called
epeleusetai epi se kai dunamis hupsistou episkiasei soi the Son of God.
G1904 G1909 G4571 G2532 G1411 G5310 G1982 G4671
vi Fut midD 3 Sg Prep pp 2 Acc Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg f a_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg
SHALL-BE-ON-COMING ON YOU AND ABILITY OF-HIGHest SHALL-BE-ON-SHADING to-YOU
shall-be-coming-on power of-Most-High shall-be-overshadowing you
dio kai to gennwmenon ek sou agion klhqhsetai

dio kai to gennOmenon ek sou hagion klEthEsetai
G1352 G2532 G3588 G1080 G1537 G4675 G40 G2564
Conj Conj t_ Nom Sg n vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n Prep pp 2 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg n vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
THRU-WHICH AND THE One-beING-generatED OUT OF-YOU HOLY SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED
wherefore also being-generated holy-thing
uios qeou
huios theou
G5207 G2316
n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
SON OF-God
1:36 kai idou elisabet h suggenhs sou kai auth 36 And, behold, thy cousin
kai idou elisabet hE suggenEs sou kai autE
G2532 G2400 G1665 G3588 G4773 G4675 G2532 G846
Elisabeth, she hath also
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg ni proper t_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Conj pp Nom Sg f conceived a son in her old age:
AND BE-PERCEIVING ELIZABETH THE TOGETHER-generated OF-YOU AND she and this is the sixth month with
lo ! relative also her, who was called barren.
suneilhfuia uion en ghra auths kai outos mhn ektos

suneilEphuia huion en gEra autEs kai houtos mEn hektos
G4815 G5207 G1722 G1094 G846 G2532 G3778 G3376 G1623
vp Perf Act Nom Sg f n_ Acc Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg n pp Gen Sg f Conj pd Nom Sg m Part a_ Nom Sg m
HAVING-TOGETHER-GOT SON IN VETERAN OF-her AND this MONTH SIXth
having-conceived decrepitude
estin auth th kaloumenh steira

estin autE tE kaloumenE steira
G2076 G846 G3588 G2564 G4723
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Pas Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
IS to-her THE one-beING-CALLED STERILE
being-called barren
1:37 oti ouk adunathsei para tw qew pan rhma 37 For with God nothing shall
hoti ouk adunatEsei para tO theO pan rEma
G3754 G3756 G101 G3844 G3588 G2316 G3956 G4487
be impossible.
Conj Part Neg vi Fut Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
that NOT SHALL-BE-UN-ABLE BESIDE THE God EVERY declaration
seeing-that not shall-be-impossible at-all
Luke 1
1:38 eipen de mariam idou h doulh kuriou genoito 38 And Mary said, Behold the
eipen de mariam idou hE doulE kuriou genoito
G2036 G1161 G3137 G2400 G3588 G1399 G2962 G1096
handmaid of the Lord; be it
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj ni proper vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg m vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg unto me according to thy word.
said YET MARIAM BE-PERCEIVING THE SLAVE(f) OF-Master MAY-it-BE-BECOMING And the angel departed from
Mary lo ! of-Lord her.
moi kata to rhma sou kai aphlqen ap auths o

moi kata to rEma sou kai apElthen ap autEs ho
G3427 G2596 G3588 G4487 G4675 G2532 G565 G575 G846 G3588
pp 1 Dat Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg f t_ Nom Sg m
to-ME according-to THE declaration OF-YOU AND FROM-CAME FROM her THE
came-away
aggelos
aggelos
G32
n_ Nom Sg m
MESSENGER
1:39 anastasa de mariam en tais hmerais tautais eporeuqh eis thn 39 . And Mary arose in those
anastasa de mariam en tais hEmerais tautais eporeuthE eis tEn
G450 G1161 G3137 G1722 G3588 G2250 G3778 G4198 G1519 G3588
days, and went into the hill
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f Conj ni proper Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pd Dat Pl f vi Aor pasD 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f country with haste, into a city
UP-STANDing YET MARIAM IN THE DAYS these WAS-GONE INTO THE of Juda;
rising Mary went
oreinhn meta spoudhs eis polin iouda

oreinEn meta spoudEs eis polin iouda
G3714 G3326 G4710 G1519 G4172 G2448
a_ Acc Sg f Prep n_ Gen Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
mountainous WITH DILIGENCE INTO city of-JUDA
mountainous-region of-Judah
1:40 kai eishlqen eis ton oikon zacariou kai hspasato thn 40 And entered into the house
kai eisElthen eis ton oikon zachariou kai Espasato tEn
G2532 G1525 G1519 G3588 G3624 G2197 G2532 G782 G3588
of Zacharias, and saluted
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f Elisabeth.
AND she-INTO-CAME INTO THE HOME OF-ZACHARIAS AND greets THE
she-entered house salutes
elisabet
elisabet
G1665
ni proper
ELIZABETH
1:41 kai egeneto ws hkousen h elisabet ton aspasmon ths 41 And it came to pass, that,
kai egeneto hOs Ekousen hE elisabet ton aspasmon tEs
G2532 G1096 G5613 G191 G3588 G1665 G3588 G783 G3588
when Elisabeth heard the
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f ni proper t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg f salutation of Mary, the babe
AND it-BECAME AS HEARS THE ELIZABETH THE greeting OF-THE leaped in her womb; and
it-occurred salutation Elisabeth was filled with the
Holy Ghost:
marias eskirthsen to brefos en th koilia auths kai eplhsqh
marias eskirtEsen to brephos en tE koilia autEs kai eplEsthE
G3137 G4640 G3588 G1025 G1722 G3588 G2836 G846 G2532 G4130
n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg f Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
MARY JUMPS THE BABE IN THE CAVITY OF-her AND IS-FILLED
womb
pneumatos agiou h elisabet

pneumatos hagiou hE elisabet
G4151 G40 G3588 G1665
n_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n t_ Nom Sg f ni proper
OF-spirit HOLY THE ELIZABETH
1:42 kai anefwnhsen fwnh megalh kai eipen euloghmenh su en 42 And she spake out with a
kai anephOnEsen phOnE megalE kai eipen eulogEmenE su en
G2532 G400 G5456 G3173 G2532 G2036 G2127 G4771 G1722
loud voice, and said, Blessed
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vp Perf Pas Nom Sg f pp 2 Nom Sg Prep [art] thou among women, and
AND she-UP-SOUNDS to-SOUND GREAT AND said beING-blessED YOU IN blessed [is] the fruit of thy
she-shouts-out to-voice loud among womb.
gunaixin kai euloghmenos o karpos ths koilias sou

gunaixin kai eulogEmenos ho karpos tEs koilias sou
G1135 G2532 G2127 G3588 G2590 G3588 G2836 G4675
n_ Dat Pl f Conj vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg
WOMEN AND beING-blessED THE FRUIT OF-THE CAVITY OF-YOU
womb
1:43 kai poqen moi touto ina elqh h mhthr tou 43 And whence [is] this to me,
kai pothen moi touto hina elthE hE mEtEr tou
G2532 G4159 G3427 G5124 G2443 G2064 G3588 G3384 G3588
that the mother of my Lord
Conj Adv Int pp 1 Dat Sg pd Nom Sg n Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m should come to me?
AND ?-WHICH-PLACE to-ME this THAT MAY-BE-COMING THE MOTHER OF-THE
whence ?
Luke 1
kuriou mou pros me

kuriou mou pros me
G2962 G3450 G4314 G3165
n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Prep pp 1 Acc Sg
Master OF-ME TOWARD ME
Lord
1:44 idou gar ws egeneto h fwnh tou aspasmou sou 44 For, lo, as soon as the voice
idou gar hOs egeneto hE phOnE tou aspasmou sou
G2400 G1063 G5613 G1096 G3588 G5456 G3588 G783 G4675
of thy salutation sounded in
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Conj Adv vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg mine ears, the babe leaped in
BE-PERCEIVING for AS BECAME THE SOUND OF-THE greeting OF-YOU my womb for joy.
lo ! salutation
eis ta wta mou eskirthsen en agalliasei to brefos en

eis ta Ota mou eskirtEsen en agalliasei to brephos en
G1519 G3588 G3775 G3450 G4640 G1722 G20 G3588 G1025 G1722
Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp 1 Gen Sg vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Dat Sg f t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Prep
INTO THE EARS OF-ME JUMPS IN exulting THE BABE IN
exultation
th koilia mou
tE koilia mou
G3588 G2836 G3450
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg
THE CAVITY OF-ME
womb
1:45 kai makaria h pisteusasa oti estai teleiwsis tois 45 And blessed [is] she that
kai makaria hE pisteusasa hoti estai teleiOsis tois
G2532 G3107 G3588 G4100 G3754 G2071 G5050 G3588
believed: for there shall be a
Conj a_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f vp Aor Act Nom Sg f Conj vi Fut vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f t_ Dat Pl n performance of those things
AND HAPPY THE one-BELIEVing that SHALL-BE maturing to-THE which were told her from the
happy-is one-believing(f) seeing-that there-shall-be to-the-things Lord.
lelalhmenois auth para kuriou

lelalEmenois autE para kuriou
G2980 G846 G3844 G2962
vp Perf Pas Dat Pl n pp Dat Sg f Prep n_ Gen Sg m
HAVING-been-TALKED to-her BESIDE Master
having-been-spoken Lord
1:46 kai eipen mariam megalunei h yuch mou ton kurion 46 And Mary said, My soul
kai eipen mariam megalunei hE psuchE mou ton kurion
G2532 G2036 G3137 G3170 G3588 G5590 G3450 G3588 G2962
doth magnify the Lord,
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg ni proper vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
AND said MARIAM IS-magnifyING THE soul OF-ME THE Master
Mary Lord
1:47 kai hgalliasen to pneuma mou epi tw qew tw 47 And my spirit hath rejoiced
kai Egalliasen to pneuma mou epi tO theO tO
G2532 G21 G3588 G4151 G3450 G1909 G3588 G2316 G3588
in God my Saviour.
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m
AND exults THE spirit OF-ME ON THE God THE
swthri mou
sOtEri mou
G4990 G3450
n_ Dat Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg
SAViour OF-ME
1:48 oti epebleyen epi thn tapeinwsin ths doulhs autou idou 48 For he hath regarded the
hoti epeblepsen epi tEn tapeinOsin tEs doulEs autou idou
G3754 G1914 G1909 G3588 G5014 G3588 G1399 G846 G2400
low estate of his handmaiden:
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg for, behold, from henceforth all
that He-ON-looks ON THE LOWness OF-THE SLAVE(f) OF-Him BE-PERCEIVING generations shall call me
he-looks-on humiliation lo ! blessed.
gar apo tou nun makariousin me pasai ai geneai

gar apo tou nun makariousin me pasai hai geneai
G1063 G575 G3588 G3568 G3106 G3165 G3956 G3588 G1074
Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg m Adv vi Fut Act 3 Pl Att pp 1 Acc Sg a_ Nom Pl f t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f
for FROM THE NOW SHALL-BE-HAPPYizING ME ALL THE generations
shall-be-counting-happy
1:49 oti epoihsen moi megaleia o dunatos kai agion to 49 For he that is mighty hath
hoti epoiEsen moi megaleia ho dunatos kai hagion to
G3754 G4160 G3427 G3167 G3588 G1415 G2532 G40 G3588
done to me great things; and
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg a_ Acc Pl n t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Acc Sg n t_ Nom Sg n holy [is] his name.
that DOES to-ME GREATnesses THE ABLE-One AND HOLY THE
great-things Powerful-One
onoma autou
onoma autou
G3686 G846
n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Sg m
NAME OF-Him
Luke 1
1:50 kai to eleos autou eis geneas genewn tois 50 And his mercy [is] on them
kai to eleos autou eis geneas geneOn tois
G2532 G3588 G1656 G846 G1519 G1074 G1074 G3588
that fear him from generation
Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m Prep n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Pl f t_ Dat Pl m to generation.
AND THE MERCY OF-Him INTO generations OF-generations to-THE
foboumenois auton
phoboumenois auton
G5399 G846
vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl m pp Acc Sg m
ones-FEARING Him
ones-fearing
1:51 epoihsen kratos en bracioni autou dieskorpisen uperhfanous 51 He hath shewed strength
epoiEsen kratos en brachioni autou dieskorpisen huperEphanous
G4160 G2904 G1722 G1023 G846 G1287 G5244
with his arm; he hath scattered
vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n Prep n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m the proud in the imagination of
He-DOES HOLDing IN (upper)-arm OF-Him He-THRU-SCATTERS OVER-APPEARing their hearts.
mightily upper-arm he-scatters proud-ones
dianoia kardias autwn

dianoia kardias autOn
G1271 G2588 G846
n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Pl m
to-THRU-MIND OF-HEART OF-them
to-comprehension
1:52 kaqeilen dunastas apo qronwn kai uywsen tapeinous 52 He hath put down the
katheilen dunastas apo thronOn kai hupsOsen tapeinous
G2507 G1413 G575 G2362 G2532 G5312 G5011
mighty from [their] seats, and
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl m Prep n_ Gen Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m exalted them of low degree.
He-DOWN-LIFTS ABLErs FROM THRONES AND HEIGHTens LOW-ones
he-pulls-down potentates exalts humble-ones
1:53 peinwntas eneplhsen agaqwn kai ploutountas exapesteilen kenous 53 He hath filled the hungry
peinOntas eneplEsen agathOn kai ploutountas exapesteilen kenous
G3983 G1705 G18 G2532 G4147 G1821 G2756
with good things; and the rich
vp Pres Act Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Gen Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m he hath sent empty away.
HUNGERING-ones He-IN-FILLS OF-GOODS AND ones-beING-RICH He-OUT-FROM-PUTS EMPTY
ones-hungering he-fills of-good-things ones-being-rich he-sends-away empty(p)
1:54 antelabeto israhl paidos autou mnhsqhnai eleous 54 He hath holpen his servant
antelabeto israEl paidos autou mnEsthEnai eleous
G482 G2474 G3816 G846 G3415 G1656
Israel, in remembrance of [his]
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg ni proper n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m vn Aor Pas n_ Gen Sg n mercy;
He-supportED ISRAEL boy OF-Him TO-BE-REMINDED OF-MERCY
1:55 kaqws elalhsen pros tous pateras hmwn tw abraam kai 55 As he spake to our fathers,
kathOs elalEsen pros tous pateras hEmOn tO abraam kai
G2531 G2980 G4314 G3588 G3962 G2257 G3588 G11 G2532
to Abraham, and to his seed
Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp 1 Gen Pl t_ Dat Sg m ni proper Conj for ever.
according-AS He-TALKS TOWARD THE FATHERS OF-US to-THE ABRAHAM AND
he-speaks
tw spermati autou eis ton aiwna

tO spermati autou eis ton aiOna
G3588 G4690 G846 G1519 G3588 G165
t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
to-THE seed OF-him INTO THE eon
1:56 emeinen de mariam sun auth wsei mhnas treis kai upestreyen 56 And Mary abode with her
emeinen de mariam sun autE hOsei mEnas treis kai hupestrepsen
G3306 G1161 G3137 G4862 G846 G5616 G3376 G5140 G2532 G5290
about three months, and
vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj ni proper Prep pp Dat Sg f Adv n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg returned to her own house.
REMAINS YET MARIAM TOGETHER to-her AS-IF MONTHS THREE AND reTURNS
Mary togetherwith her about
eis ton oikon auths

eis ton oikon autEs
G1519 G3588 G3624 G846
Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg f
INTO THE HOME OF-her
1:57 th de elisabet eplhsqh o cronos tou tekein 57 . Now Elisabeth's full time
tE de elisabet eplEsthE ho chronos tou tekein
G3588 G1161 G1665 G4130 G3588 G5550 G3588 G5088
came that she should be
t_ Dat Sg f Conj ni proper vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m vn 2Aor Act delivered; and she brought
to-THE YET ELIZABETH IS-FILLED THE TIME OF-THE TO-BE-BRINGING-FORTH forth a son.
is-fulfilled
authn kai egennhsen uion

autEn kai egennEsen huion
G846 G2532 G1080 G5207
pp Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m
her AND she-generatES SON
she-bears
Luke 1
1:58 kai hkousan oi perioikoi kai oi suggeneis auths oti 58 And her neighbours and her
kai Ekousan hoi perioikoi kai hoi suggeneis autEs hoti
G2532 G191 G3588 G4040 G2532 G3588 G4773 G846 G3754
cousins heard how the Lord
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg f Conj had shewed great mercy upon
AND HEAR THE ABOUT-HOMES AND THE TOGETHER-generateds OF-her that her; and they rejoiced with her.
homes-about relatives
emegalunen kurios to eleos autou met auths kai sunecairon

emegalunen kurios to eleos autou met autEs kai sunechairon
G3170 G2962 G3588 G1656 G846 G3326 G846 G2532 G4796
vi Impf Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m Prep pp Gen Sg f Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl
magnifiES Master THE MERCY OF-Him WITH her AND THEY-TOGETHER-JOYED
Lord they-rejoiced-togetherwith
auth
autE
G846
pp Dat Sg f
to-her
her
1:59 kai egeneto en th ogdoh hmera hlqon peritemein to 59 And it came to pass, that on
kai egeneto en tE ogdoE hEmera Elthon peritemein to
G2532 G1096 G1722 G3588 G3590 G2250 G2064 G4059 G3588
the eighth day they came to
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n circumcise the child; and they
AND BECAME IN THE EIGHTh DAY THEY-CAME TO-BE-ABOUT-CUTTING THE called him Zacharias, after the
it-occurred to-be-circumcising name of his father.
paidion kai ekaloun auto epi tw onomati tou patros autou

paidion kai ekaloun auto epi tO onomati tou patros autou
G3813 G2532 G2564 G846 G1909 G3588 G3686 G3588 G3962 G846
n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m
little-boy AND THEY-CALLED him ON THE NAME OF-THE FATHER OF-him
ithim
zacarian
zacharian
G2197
n_ Acc Sg m
ZACHARIAS
1:60 kai apokriqeisa h mhthr autou eipen ouci alla 60 And his mother answered
kai apokritheisa hE mEtEr autou eipen ouchi alla
G2532 G611 G3588 G3384 G846 G2036 G3780 G235
and said, Not [so]; but he shall
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Part Neg Conj be called John.
AND answerING THE MOTHER OF-him said NOT(emph.) but
klhqhsetai iwannhs
klEthEsetai iOannEs
G2564 G2491
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m
he-SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED JOHN
1:61 kai eipon pros authn oti oudeis estin en th 61 And they said unto her,
kai eipon pros autEn hoti oudeis estin en tE
G2532 G2036 G4314 G846 G3754 G3762 G2076 G1722 G3588
There is none of thy kindred
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pp Acc Sg f Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f that is called by this name.
AND THEY-said TOWARD her that NOT-YET-ONE IS IN THE
not-one there-is
suggeneia sou os kaleitai tw onomati toutw

suggeneia sou hos kaleitai tO onomati toutO
G4772 G4675 G3739 G2564 G3588 G3686 G5129
n_ Dat Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg pr Nom Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pd Dat Sg n
TOGETHER-generated OF-YOU WHO IS-beING-CALLED to-THE NAME this
relationship
1:62 eneneuon de tw patri autou to ti an qeloi 62 And they made signs to his
eneneuon de tO patri autou to ti an theloi
G1770 G1161 G3588 G3962 G846 G3588 G5101 G302 G2309
father, how he would have him
vi Impf Act 3 Pl Conj t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m t_ Acc Sg n pi Acc Sg n Part vo Pres Act 3 Sg called.
THEY-IN-NODDED YET to-THE FATHER OF-him THE ANY EVER he-MAY-BE-WILLING
they-nodded what ?
kaleisqai auton
kaleisthai auton
G2564 G846
vn Pres Pas pp Acc Sg m
TO-BE-beING-CALLED him
1:63 kai aithsas pinakidion egrayen legwn iwannhs estin 63 And he asked for a writing
kai aitEsas pinakidion egrapsen legOn iOannEs estin
G2532 G154 G4093 G1125 G3004 G2491 G2076
table, and wrote, saying, His
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg name is John. And they
AND REQUESTing tablet he-WRITES sayING JOHN IS marvelled all.
writing-tablet
Luke 1
to onoma autou kai eqaumasan pantes

to onoma autou kai ethaumasan pantes
G3588 G3686 G846 G2532 G2296 G3956
t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m
THE NAME OF-him AND THEY-MARVEL ALL
1:64 anewcqh de to stoma autou paracrhma kai h glwssa 64 And his mouth was opened
aneOchthE de to stoma autou parachrEma kai hE glOssa
G455 G1161 G3588 G4750 G846 G3916 G2532 G3588 G1100
immediately, and his tongue
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Sg m Adv Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f [loosed], and he spake, and
WAS-UP-OPENED YET THE MOUTH OF-him instantly AND THE TONGUE praised God.
was-opened
autou kai elalei eulogwn ton qeon

autou kai elalei eulogOn ton theon
G846 G2532 G2980 G2127 G3588 G2316
pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
OF-him AND he-TALKED blessING THE God
he-spoke
1:65 kai egeneto epi pantas fobos tous perioikountas autous kai 65 And fear came on all that
kai egeneto epi pantas phobos tous perioikountas autous kai
G2532 G1096 G1909 G3956 G5401 G3588 G4039 G846 G2532
dwelt round about them: and
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep a_ Acc Pl m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m pp Acc Pl m Conj all these sayings were noised
AND BECAME ON ALL FEAR THE-ones ABOUT-HOMING them AND abroad throughout all the hill
the ones-homing-about country of Judaea.
en olh th oreinh ths ioudaias dielaleito panta ta

en holE tE oreinE tEs ioudaias dielaleito panta ta
G1722 G3650 G3588 G3714 G3588 G2449 G1255 G3956 G3588
Prep a_ Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Impf Pas 3 Sg a_ Nom Pl n t_ Nom Pl n
IN WHOLE THE mountainous OF-THE JUDEA was-THRU-TALKED ALL THE
mountainous-region was-talked-about
rhmata tauta
rEmata tauta
G4487 G5023
n_ Nom Pl n pd Nom Pl n
declarations these
1:66 kai eqento pantes oi akousantes en th kardia autwn 66 And all they that heard
kai ethento pantes hoi akousantes en tE kardia autOn
G2532 G5087 G3956 G3588 G191 G1722 G3588 G2588 G846
[them] laid [them] up in their
Conj vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Pl m hearts, saying, What manner of
AND PLACED ALL THE ones-HEARing IN THE HEART OF-them child shall this be! And the
pondered ones-hearing hand of the Lord was with him.
legontes ti ara to paidion touto estai kai

legontes ti ara to paidion touto estai kai
G3004 G5101 G687 G3588 G3813 G5124 G2071 G2532
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pi Nom Sg n Part Int t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pd Nom Sg n vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Conj
sayING ANY CONSEQUENTLY THE little-boy this SHALL-BE AND
what ? also
ceir kuriou hn met autou

cheir kuriou En met autou
G5495 G2962 G2258 G3326 G846
n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m
HAND OF-Master WAS WITH it
of-Lord him
1:67 kai zacarias o pathr autou eplhsqh pneumatos agiou kai 67 . And his father Zacharias
kai zacharias ho patEr autou eplEsthE pneumatos hagiou kai
G2532 G2197 G3588 G3962 G846 G4130 G4151 G40 G2532
was filled with the Holy Ghost,
Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg n_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n Conj and prophesied, saying,
AND ZACHARIAS THE FATHER OF-it IS-FILLED OF-spirit HOLY AND
of-him
proefhteusen legwn
proephEteusen legOn
G4395 G3004
vi Aor Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
BEFORE-AVERS sayING
prophesies
1:68 euloghtos kurios o qeos tou israhl oti epeskeyato kai 68 Blessed [be] the Lord God
eulogEtos kurios ho theos tou israEl hoti epeskepsato kai
G2128 G2962 G3588 G2316 G3588 G2474 G3754 G1980 G2532
of Israel; for he hath visited
a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m ni proper Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg Conj and redeemed his people,
blessed Master THE God OF-THE ISRAEL that He-ON-NOTES AND
Lord he-visits
epoihsen lutrwsin tw law autou

epoiEsen lutrOsin tO laO autou
G4160 G3085 G3588 G2992 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m
DOES LOOSening to-THE PEOPLE OF-Him
makes redemption
Luke 1
1:69 kai hgeiren keras swthrias hmin en tw oikw dabid tou 69 And hath raised up an horn
kai Egeiren keras sOtErias hEmin en tO oikO dabid tou
G2532 G1453 G2768 G4991 G2254 G1722 G3588 G3624 G1138 G3588
of salvation for us in the house
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg f pp 1 Dat Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m of his servant David;
AND ROUSES horn OF-SAVing to-US IN THE HOME of-DAVID THE
of-salvation house of-David
paidos autou
paidos autou
G3816 G846
boy OF-Him
1:70 kaqws elalhsen dia stomatos twn agiwn twn ap aiwnos 70 As he spake by the mouth
kathOs elalEsen dia stomatos tOn hagiOn tOn ap aiOnos
G2531 G2980 G1223 G4750 G3588 G40 G3588 G575 G165
of his holy prophets, which
Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m Prep n_ Gen Sg m have been since the world
according-AS He-TALKS THRU MOUTH OF-THE HOLY THE FROM eon began:
he-speaks through
profhtwn autou
prophEtOn autou
G4396 G846
n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m
BEFORE-AVERers OF-Him
prophets
1:71 swthrian ex ecqrwn hmwn kai ek ceiros pantwn twn 71 That we should be saved
sOtErian ex echthrOn hEmOn kai ek cheiros pantOn tOn
G4991 G1537 G2190 G2257 G2532 G1537 G5495 G3956 G3588
from our enemies, and from
n_ Acc Sg f Prep a_ Gen Pl m pp 1 Gen Pl Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m the hand of all that hate us;
SAVing OUT OF-enemies OF-US AND OUT OF-HAND OF-ALL THE
salvation
misountwn hmas
misountOn hEmas
G3404 G2248
vp Pres Act Gen Pl m pp 1 Acc Pl
ones-HATING US
ones-hating
1:72 poihsai eleos meta twn paterwn hmwn kai mnhsqhnai diaqhkhs 72 To perform the mercy
poiEsai eleos meta tOn paterOn hEmOn kai mnEsthEnai diathEkEs
G4160 G1656 G3326 G3588 G3962 G2257 G2532 G3415 G1242
[promised] to our fathers, and
vn Aor Act n_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp 1 Gen Pl Conj vn Aor Pas n_ Gen Sg f to remember his holy covenant;
TO-DO MERCY WITH THE FATHERS OF-US AND TO-BE-REMINDED OF-covenant
agias autou
hagias autou
G40 G846
a_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m
HOLY OF-Him
1:73 orkon on wmosen pros abraam ton patera hmwn 73 The oath which he sware to
horkon hon Omosen pros abraam ton patera hEmOn
G3727 G3739 G3660 G4314 G11 G3588 G3962 G2257
our father Abraham,
n_ Acc Sg m pr Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep ni proper t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Pl
OATH WHICH He-SWEARS TOWARD ABRAHAM THE FATHER OF-US
1:74 tou dounai hmin afobws ek ceiros twn ecqrwn hmwn 74 That he would grant unto
tou dounai hEmin aphobOs ek cheiros tOn echthrOn hEmOn
G3588 G1325 G2254 G870 G1537 G5495 G3588 G2190 G2257
us, that we being delivered out
t_ Gen Sg m vn 2Aor Act pp 1 Dat Pl Adv Prep n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m pp 1 Gen Pl of the hand of our enemies
OF-THE TO-GIVE to-US UN-FEARly OUT OF-HAND OF-THE enemies OF-US might serve him without fear,
to-grant fearlessly
rusqentas latreuein autw

rusthentas latreuein autO
G4506 G3000 G846
vp Aor Pas Acc Pl m vn Pres Act pp Dat Sg m
BEING-rescuED TO-BE-offerING-DIVINE-SERVICE to-Him
to-be-offering-divine-service
1:75 en osiothti kai dikaiosunh enwpion autou pasas tas hmeras 75 In holiness and
en hosiotEti kai dikaiosunE enOpion autou pasas tas hEmeras
G1722 G3742 G2532 G1343 G1799 G846 G3956 G3588 G2250
righteousness before him, all
Prep n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f Adv pp Gen Sg m a_ Acc Pl f t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f the days of our life.
IN BENIGNity AND JUSTice IN-VIEW OF-Him ALL THE DAYS
righteousness in-sight-of him
ths zwhs hmwn

tEs zOEs hEmOn
G3588 G2222 G2257
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp 1 Gen Pl
OF-THE LIFE OF-US
Luke 1 - Luke 2
1:76 kai su paidion profhths uyistou klhqhsh 76 And thou, child, shalt be
kai su paidion prophEtEs hupsistou klEthEsE
G2532 G4771 G3813 G4396 G5310 G2564
called the prophet of the
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg n_ Voc Sg n n_ Nom Sg m a_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 2 Sg Highest: for thou shalt go
AND YOU little-boy BEFORE-AVERer OF-HIGHest SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED before the face of the Lord to
also prophet of-Most-High prepare his ways;
proporeush gar pro proswpou kuriou etoimasai odous autou

proporeusE gar pro prosOpou kuriou hetoimasai hodous autou
G4313 G1063 G4253 G4383 G2962 G2090 G3598 G846
vi Fut midD 2 Sg Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Sg m
YOU-SHALL-BE-BEFORE-GOING for BEFORE face OF-Master TO-make-READY WAYS OF-Him
you-shall-be-going-before of-Lord roads
1:77 tou dounai gnwsin swthrias tw law autou en afesei 77 To give knowledge of
tou dounai gnOsin sOtErias tO laO autou en aphesei
G3588 G1325 G1108 G4991 G3588 G2992 G846 G1722 G859
salvation unto his people by
t_ Gen Sg m vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg f the remission of their sins,
OF-THE TO-GIVE KNOWledge OF-SAVing to-THE PEOPLE OF-Him IN FROM-LETTing
of-salvation pardon
amartiwn autwn
hamartiOn autOn
G266 G846
n_ Gen Pl f pp Gen Pl m
OF-misses OF-them
of-sins
1:78 dia splagcna eleous qeou hmwn en ois epeskeyato hmas 78 Through the tender mercy
dia splagchna eleous theou hEmOn en hois epeskepsato hEmas
G1223 G4698 G1656 G2316 G2257 G1722 G3739 G1980 G2248
of our God; whereby the
Prep n_ Acc Pl n n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Gen Pl Prep pr Dat Pl n vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl dayspring from on high hath
THRU compassions OF-MERCY OF-God OF-US IN WHICH ON-NOTES US visited us,
because-of which(p) visits
anatolh ex uyous
anatolE ex hupsous
G395 G1537 G5311
n_ Nom Sg f Prep n_ Gen Sg n
rising OUT OF-HIGH
dayspring
1:79 epifanai tois en skotei kai skia qanatou kaqhmenois 79 To give light to them that sit
epiphanai tois en skotei kai skia thanatou kathEmenois
G2014 G3588 G1722 G4655 G2532 G4639 G2288 G2521
in darkness and [in] the
vn Aor Act t_ Dat Pl m Prep n_ Dat Sg n Conj n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl m shadow of death, to guide our
TO-ON-APPEAR to-THE-ones IN DARK AND SHADE OF-DEATH sittING feet into the way of peace.
to-make-its-advent to-the-ones darkness shadow
tou kateuqunai tous podas hmwn eis odon eirhnhs

tou kateuthunai tous podas hEmOn eis hodon eirEnEs
G3588 G2720 G3588 G4228 G2257 G1519 G3598 G1515
t_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp 1 Gen Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE TO-DOWN-straighten THE FEET OF-US INTO WAY OF-PEACE
to-direct path
1:80 to de paidion huxanen kai ekrataiouto pneumati kai hn 80 And the child grew, and
to de paidion Euxanen kai ekrataiouto pneumati kai En
G3588 G1161 G3813 G837 G2532 G2901 G4151 G2532 G2258
waxed strong in spirit, and was
t_ Nom Sg n Conj n_ Nom Sg n vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj vi Impf Pas 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg n Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg in the deserts till the day of his
THE YET little-boy GROWS-UP AND was-staunch to-spirit AND WAS shewing unto Israel.
en tais erhmois ews hmeras anadeixews autou pros ton israhl

en tais erEmois heOs hEmeras anadeixeOs autou pros ton israEl
G1722 G3588 G2048 G2193 G2250 G323 G846 G4314 G3588 G2474
Prep t_ Dat Pl f a_ Dat Pl f Conj n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m ni proper
IN THE DESOLATES TILL OF-DAY OF-UP-SHOWing OF-him TOWARD THE ISRAEL
wildernesses day of-indication
Luke 2
2:1 egeneto de en tais hmerais ekeinais exhlqen dogma para 1 . And it came to pass in those
egeneto de en tais hEmerais ekeinais exElthen dogma para
G1096 G1161 G1722 G3588 G2250 G1565 G1831 G1378 G3844
days, that there went out a
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pd Dat Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg n Prep decree from Caesar Augustus,
BECAME YET IN THE DAYS those OUT-CAME decree BESIDE that all the world should be
it-occurred came-out taxed.
kaisaros augoustou apografesqai pasan thn oikoumenhn

kaisaros augoustou apographesthai pasan tEn oikoumenEn
G2541 G828 G583 G3956 G3588 G3625
n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vn Pres mid/pas a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
CEASAR AUGUSTUS (Latin) TO-BE-beING-FROM-WRITTEN EVERY THE beING-HOMED
Caesar Augustus to-be-being-registered entire inhabited-earth
2:2 auth h apografh prwth egeneto hgemoneuontos ths 2([And] this taxing was first
hautE hE apographE prOtE egeneto hEdemoneuontos tEs
G3778 G3588 G582 G4413 G1096 G2230 G3588
made when Cyrenius was
pd Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg vp Pres Act Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg f governor of Syria.)
this THE FROM-WRITing BEFORE-most BECAME OF-LEADershipING OF-THE
registration first occurred of-being-governor
surias kurhniou
surias kurEniou
G4947 G2958
n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
SYRIA OF-QUIRINIUS
Quirinius
2:3 kai eporeuonto pantes apografesqai ekastos eis thn idian 3 And all went to be taxed,
kai eporeuonto pantes apographesthai hekastos eis tEn idian
G2532 G4198 G3956 G583 G1538 G1519 G3588 G2398
every one into his own city.
Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m vn Pres Pas a_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f
AND WENT ALL TO-BE-beING-FROM-WRITTEN EACH INTO THE OWN
to-be-being-registered each-one
polin
polin
G4172
n_ Acc Sg f
city
2:4 anebh de kai iwshf apo ths galilaias ek polews nazareq eis 4 And Joseph also went up
anebE de kai iOsEph apo tEs galilaias ek poleOs nazareth eis
G305 G1161 G2532 G2501 G575 G3588 G1056 G1537 G4172 G3478 G1519
from Galilee, out of the city of
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Conj ni proper Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Prep n_ Gen Sg f ni proper Prep Nazareth, into Judaea, unto the
UP-STEPPed YET AND JOSEPH FROM THE GALILEE OUT OF-city NAZARETH INTO city of David, which is called
went-up also of-Nazareth Bethlehem; (because he was of
the house and lineage of
thn ioudaian eis polin dabid htis kaleitai bhqleem dia to David:)
tEn ioudaian eis polin dabid hEtis kaleitai bEthleem dia to
G3588 G2449 G1519 G4172 G1138 G3748 G2564 G965 G1223 G3588
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg f ni proper pr Nom Sg f vi Pres Pas 3 Sg ni proper Prep t_ Acc Sg n
THE JUDEA INTO city of-DAVID WHO-ANY IS-beING-CALLED BETHLEHEM THRU THE
of-David which-any because-of
einai auton ex oikou kai patrias dabid

einai auton ex oikou kai patrias dabid
G1511 G846 G1537 G3624 G2532 G3965 G1138
vn Pres vxx pp Acc Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg f ni proper
TO-BE him OUT OF-HOME AND OF-FATHERhood of-DAVID
of-house of-kindred of-David
2:5 apograyasqai sun mariam th memnhsteumenh autw gunaiki 5 To be taxed with Mary his
apograpsasthai sun mariam tE memnEsteumenE autO gunaiki
G583 G4862 G3137 G3588 G3423 G846 G1135
espoused wife, being great
vn Aor Mid Prep ni proper t_ Dat Sg f vp Perf Pas Dat Sg f pp Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg f with child.
TO-BE-FROM-WRITTEN TOGETHER to-MARIAM THE HAVING-been-espousED to-him WOMAN
to-be-registered togetherwith Mary wife
oush egkuw
ousE egkuO
G5607 G1471
vp Pres vxx Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
BEING to-IN-TEEM
being(f) parturient
2:6 egeneto de en tw einai autous ekei eplhsqhsan ai hmerai 6 And so it was, that, while
egeneto de en tO einai autous ekei eplEsthEsan hai hEmerai
G1096 G1161 G1722 G3588 G1511 G846 G1563 G4130 G3588 G2250
they were there, the days were
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres vxx pp Acc Pl m Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f accomplished that she should
BECAME YET IN THE TO-BE them there ARE-FILLED THE DAYS be delivered.
it-came-to-pass are-fulfilled
tou tekein authn

tou tekein autEn
G3588 G5088 G846
t_ Gen Sg m vn 2Aor Act pp Acc Sg f
OF-THE TO-BE-BRINGING-FORTH her
Luke 2
2:7 kai eteken ton uion auths ton prwtotokon 7 And she brought forth her
kai eteken ton huion autEs ton prOtotokon
G2532 G5088 G3588 G5207 G846 G3588 G4416
firstborn son, and wrapped him
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg f t_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m in swaddling clothes, and laid
AND she-BROUGHT-FORTH THE SON OF-her THE BEFORE-most-BROUGHT-FORTH him in a manger; because there
firstborn was no room for them in the
inn.
kai esparganwsen auton kai aneklinen auton en th fatnh dioti
kai esparganOsen auton kai aneklinen auton en tE phatnE dioti
G2532 G4683 G846 G2532 G347 G846 G1722 G3588 G5336 G1360
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj
AND SWADDLES Him AND UP-CLINES Him IN THE MANGER THRU-that
cradles because-that
ouk hn autois topos en tw katalumati

ouk En autois topos en tO katalumati
G3756 G2258 G846 G5117 G1722 G3588 G2646
Part Neg vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n
NOT WAS to-them PLACE IN THE DOWN-LOOSE
there-was caravansary
2:8 kai poimenes hsan en th cwra th auth agraulountes 8 . And there were in the same
kai poimenes Esan en tE chOra tE autE agraulountes
G2532 G4166 G2258 G1722 G3588 G5561 G3588 G846 G63
country shepherds abiding in
Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f pp Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m the field, keeping watch over
AND SHEPHERDS WERE IN THE SPACE to-THE SAME FIELD-COURTING their flock by night.
district the ones-being-in-the-field-fold
kai fulassontes fulakas ths nuktos epi thn poimnhn autwn

kai phulassontes phulakas tEs nuktos epi tEn poimnEn autOn
G2532 G5442 G5438 G3588 G3571 G1909 G3588 G4167 G846
Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Pl m
AND GUARDING GUARD-houses OF-THE NIGHT ON THE SHEEP-herd OF-them
maintaining watches onover flock
2:9 kai idou aggelos kuriou epesth autois kai doxa kuriou 9 And, lo, the angel of the Lord
kai idou aggelos kuriou epestE autois kai doxa kuriou
G2532 G2400 G32 G2962 G2186 G846 G2532 G1391 G2962
came upon them, and the glory
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg m of the Lord shone round about
AND BE-PERCEIVING MESSENGER OF-Master ON-STOOD to-them AND esteem OF-Master them: and they were sore
lo ! of-Lord stood-by them glory of-Lord afraid.
perielamyen autous kai efobhqhsan fobon megan

perielampsen autous kai ephobEthEsan phobon megan
G4034 G846 G2532 G5399 G5401 G3173
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m
ABOUT-SHINES them AND THEY-WERE-afraid FEAR GREAT
shines-about
2:10 kai eipen autois o aggelos mh fobeisqe idou 10 And the angel said unto
kai eipen autois ho aggelos mE phobeisthe idou
G2532 G2036 G846 G3588 G32 G3361 G5399 G2400
them, Fear not: for, behold, I
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg bring you good tidings of great
AND said to-them THE MESSENGER NO YE-BE-FEARING BE-PERCEIVING joy, which shall be to all
be-ye-fearing ! lo ! people.
gar euaggelizomai umin caran megalhn htis estai panti tw

gar euaggelizomai humin charan megalEn hEtis estai panti tO
G1063 G2097 G5213 G5479 G3173 G3748 G2071 G3956 G3588
Conj vi Pres Mid 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f pr Nom Sg f vi Fut vxx 3 Sg a_ Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m
for I-AM-WELL-MESSAGizING to-YOU(p) JOY GREAT WHICH-ANY SHALL-BE to-EVERY THE
I-am-bringing-a-well-message to-ye of-joy which-any to-entire
law
laO
G2992
n_ Dat Sg m
PEOPLE
2:11 oti etecqh umin shmeron swthr os estin cristos 11 For unto you is born this
hoti etechthE humin sEmeron sOtEr hos estin christos
G3754 G5088 G5213 G4594 G4990 G3739 G2076 G5547
day in the city of David a
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Adv n_ Nom Sg m pr Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Saviour, which is Christ the
that WAS-BROUGHT-FORTH to-YOU(p) toDAY SAViour WHO IS ANOINTED Lord.
to-ye Christ
kurios en polei dabid

kurios en polei dabid
G2962 G1722 G4172 G1138
n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg f ni proper
Master IN city of-DAVID
Lord of-David
2:12 kai touto umin to shmeion eurhsete brefos 12 And this [shall be] a sign
kai touto humin to sEmeion heurEsete brephos
G2532 G5124 G5213 G3588 G4592 G2147 G1025
unto you; Ye shall find the
Conj pd Nom Sg n pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n vi Fut Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg n babe wrapped in swaddling
AND this to-YOU(p) THE SIGN YE-SHALL-BE-FINDING BABE clothes, lying in a manger.
to-ye
Luke 2
esparganwmenon keimenon en th fatnh

esparganOmenon keimenon en tE phatnE
G4683 G2749 G1722 G3588 G5336
vp Perf Pas Acc Sg n vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
HAVING-been-SWADDLED LYING IN THE MANGER
2:13 kai exaifnhs egeneto sun tw aggelw plhqos stratias 13 And suddenly there was
kai exaiphnEs egeneto sun tO aggelO plEthos stratias
G2532 G1810 G1096 G4862 G3588 G32 G4128 G4756
with the angel a multitude of
Conj Adv vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg n n_ Gen Sg f the heavenly host praising
AND suddenly BECAME TOGETHER to-THE MESSENGER multitude OF-host God, and saying,
there-came-to-be togetherwith the
ouraniou ainountwn ton qeon kai legontwn

ouraniou ainountOn ton theon kai legontOn
G3770 G134 G3588 G2316 G2532 G3004
a_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Gen Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl m
heavenly PRAISING THE God AND sayING
2:14 doxa en uyistois qew kai epi ghs eirhnh en anqrwpois 14 Glory to God in the highest,
doxa en hupsistois theO kai epi gEs eirEnE en anthrOpois
G1391 G1722 G5310 G2316 G2532 G1909 G1093 G1515 G1722 G444
and on earth peace, good will
n_ Nom Sg f Prep a_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Sg m Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep n_ Dat Pl m toward men.
esteem IN HIGHest-ones to-God AND ON LAND PEACE IN humans
glory highest(p) earth
eudokia
eudokia
G2107
n_ Nom Sg f
WELL-SEEMing
delight
2:15 kai egeneto ws aphlqon ap autwn eis ton ouranon oi 15 And it came to pass, as the
kai egeneto hOs apElthon ap autOn eis ton ouranon hoi
G2532 G1096 G5613 G565 G575 G846 G1519 G3588 G3772 G3588
angels were gone away from
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pp Gen Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m them into heaven, the
AND BECAME AS FROM-CAME FROM them INTO THE heaven THE shepherds said one to another,
it-occurred came-away Let us now go even unto
Bethlehem, and see this thing
aggeloi kai oi anqrwpoi oi poimenes eipon pros allhlous which is come to pass, which
aggeloi kai hoi anthrOpoi hoi poimenes eipon pros allElous the Lord hath made known
G32 G2532 G3588 G444 G3588 G4166 G2036 G4314 G240
n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pc Acc Pl m unto us.
MESSENGERS AND THE humans THE SHEPHERDS said TOWARD one-another
dielqwmen dh ews bhqleem kai idwmen to rhma

dielthOmen dE heOs bEthleem kai idOmen to rEma
G1330 G1211 G2193 G965 G2532 G1492 G3588 G4487
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl Part Conj ni proper Conj vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
WE-MAY-BE-THRU-COMING BIND TILL BETHLEHEM AND WE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE declaration
we-may-be-passing-through by-all-means
touto to gegonos o o kurios egnwrisen hmin

touto to gegonos ho ho kurios egnOrisen hEmin
G5124 G3588 G1096 G3739 G3588 G2962 G1107 G2254
pd Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg n vp 2Perf Act Acc Sg n pr Acc Sg n t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl
this THE HAVING-BECOME WHICH THE Master KNOWizES to-US
having-come-to-pass Lord makes-known
2:16 kai hlqon speusantes kai aneuron thn te mariam kai 16 And they came with haste,
kai Elthon speusantes kai aneuron tEn te mariam kai
G2532 G2064 G4692 G2532 G429 G3588 G5037 G3137 G2532
and found Mary, and Joseph,
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg f Part ni proper Conj and the babe lying in a manger.
AND THEY-CAME being-DILIGENT AND THEY-UP-FOUND THE BESIDES MARIAM AND
hurrying they-found-out bsboth Mary
ton iwshf kai to brefos keimenon en th fatnh

ton iOsEph kai to brephos keimenon en tE phatnE
G3588 G2501 G2532 G3588 G1025 G2749 G1722 G3588 G5336
t_ Acc Sg m ni proper Conj t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
THE JOSEPH AND THE BABE LYING IN THE MANGER
2:17 idontes de diegnwrisan peri tou rhmatos tou 17 And when they had seen
idontes de diegnOrisan peri tou rEmatos tou
G1492 G1161 G1232 G4012 G3588 G4487 G3588
[it], they made known abroad
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg n the saying which was told them
PERCEIVING YET THEY-THRU-KNOWize ABOUT THE declaration THE concerning this child.
perceiving-it they-make-known-abroad concerning
lalhqentos autois peri tou paidiou toutou

lalEthentos autois peri tou paidiou toutou
G2980 G846 G4012 G3588 G3813 G5127
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg n pp Dat Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n pd Gen Sg n
BEING-TALKED to-them ABOUT THE little-boy this
being-spoken concerning
Luke 2
2:18 kai pantes oi akousantes eqaumasan peri twn lalhqentwn 18 And all they that heard [it]
kai pantes hoi akousantes ethaumasan peri tOn lalEthentOn
G2532 G3956 G3588 G191 G2296 G4012 G3588 G2980
wondered at those things
Conj a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Gen Pl n vp Aor Pas Gen Pl n which were told them by the
AND ALL THE ones-HEARing MARVEL ABOUT THE BEING-TALKED shepherds.
ones-hearing concerning being-spoken
upo twn poimenwn pros autous

hupo tOn poimenOn pros autous
G5259 G3588 G4166 G4314 G846
Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Prep pp Acc Pl m
by THE SHEPHERDS TOWARD them
2:19 h de mariam panta sunethrei ta rhmata tauta 19 But Mary kept all these
hE de mariam panta sunetErei ta rEmata tauta
G3588 G1161 G3137 G3956 G4933 G3588 G4487 G5023
things, and pondered [them] in
t_ Nom Sg f Conj ni proper a_ Acc Pl n vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pd Acc Pl n her heart.
THE YET MARIAM ALL TOGETHER-KEPT THE declarations these
Mary preserved
sumballousa en th kardia auths

sumballousa en tE kardia autEs
G4820 G1722 G3588 G2588 G846
vp Pres Act Nom Sg f Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg f
TOGETHER-CASTING IN THE HEART OF-her
parleying-them
2:20 kai epestreyan oi poimenes doxazontes kai ainountes ton 20 And the shepherds returned,
kai epestrepsan hoi poimenes doxazontes kai ainountes ton
G2532 G1994 G3588 G4166 G1392 G2532 G134 G3588
glorifying and praising God for
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m all the things that they had
AND ON-TURN THE SHEPHERDS esteemizING AND PRAISING THE heard and seen, as it was told
turn-back glorifying unto them.
qeon epi pasin ois hkousan kai eidon kaqws elalhqh pros
theon epi pasin hois Ekousan kai eidon kathOs elalEthE pros
G2316 G1909 G3956 G3739 G191 G2532 G1492 G2531 G2980 G4314
n_ Acc Sg m Prep a_ Dat Pl n pr Dat Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep
God ON ALL to-WHICH THEY-HEAR AND PERCEIVED according-AS WAS-TALKED TOWARD
which it-was-spoken
autous
autous
G846
pp Acc Pl m
them
2:21 kai ote eplhsqhsan hmerai oktw tou peritemein to paidion 21 . And when eight days were
kai hote eplEsthEsan hEmerai oktO tou peritemein to paidion
G2532 G3753 G4130 G2250 G3638 G3588 G4059 G3588 G3813
accomplished for the
Conj Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl f a_ Nom t_ Gen Sg m vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n circumcising of the child, his
AND when ARE-FILLED DAYS EIGHT OF-THE TO-BE-ABOUT-CUTTING THE little-boy name was called JESUS,
are-fulfilled to-be-circumcising which was so named of the
angel before he was conceived
kai eklhqh to onoma autou ihsous to klhqen upo in the womb.
kai eklEthE to onoma autou iEsous to klEthen hupo
G2532 G2564 G3588 G3686 G846 G2424 G3588 G2564 G5259
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg n vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n Prep
AND WAS-CALLED THE NAME OF-Him JESUS THE BEING-CALLED by
also
tou aggelou pro tou sullhfqhnai auton en th koilia

tou aggelou pro tou sullEphthEnai auton en tE koilia
G3588 G32 G4253 G3588 G4815 G846 G1722 G3588 G2836
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Pas pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
THE MESSENGER BEFORE THE TO-BE-TOGETHER-GOTTEN Him IN THE CAVITY
to-be-conceived womb
2:22 kai ote eplhsqhsan ai hmerai tou kaqarismou auths kata 22 And when the days of her
kai hote eplEsthEsan hai hEmerai tou katharismou autEs kata
G2532 G3753 G4130 G3588 G2250 G3588 G2512 G846 G2596
purification according to the
Conj Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg f Prep law of Moses were
AND when ARE-FILLED THE DAYS OF-THE cleansing OF-her according-to accomplished, they brought
are-fulfilled him to Jerusalem, to present
[him] to the Lord;
ton nomon mwsews anhgagon auton eis ierosoluma parasthsai
ton nomon mOseOs anEgagon auton eis ierosoluma parastEsai
G3588 G3551 G3475 G321 G846 G1519 G2414 G3936
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Att pp Acc Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg f vn Aor Act
THE LAW OF-MOSES THEY-UP-LED Him INTO JERUSALEM TO-BESIDE-STAND
they-brought-up to-present-him
tw kuriw
tO kuriO
G3588 G2962
to-THE Master
Lord
Luke 2
2:23 kaqws gegraptai en nomw kuriou oti pan arsen 23 (As it is written in the law
kathOs gegraptai en nomO kuriou hoti pan arsen
G2531 G1125 G1722 G3551 G2962 G3754 G3956 G730
of the Lord, Every male that
Adv vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Prep n_ Dat Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n openeth the womb shall be
according-AS it-HAS-been-WRITTEN IN LAW OF-Master that EVERY MALE called holy to the Lord;)
of-Lord
dianoigon mhtran agion tw kuriw klhqhsetai

dianoigon mEtran hagion tO kuriO klEthEsetai
G1272 G3388 G40 G3588 G2962 G2564
vp Pres Act Nom Sg n n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg n t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
THRU-UP-OPENING matrix HOLY to-THE Master SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED
opening-up Lord
2:24 kai tou dounai qusian kata to eirhmenon en nomw 24 And to offer a sacrifice
kai tou dounai thusian kata to eirEmenon en nomO
G2532 G3588 G1325 G2378 G2596 G3588 G2046 G1722 G3551
according to that which is said
Conj t_ Gen Sg m vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg n vp Perf Pas Acc Sg n Att Prep n_ Dat Sg m in the law of the Lord, A pair
AND OF-THE TO-GIVE SACRIFICE according-to THE HAVING-been-declarED IN LAW of turtledoves, or two young
pigeons.
kuriou zeugos trugonwn h duo neossous peristerwn

kuriou zeugos trugonOn E duo neossous peristerOn
G2962 G2201 G5167 G2228 G1417 G3502 G4058
n_ Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg n n_ Gen Pl f Part a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Pl f
OF-Master YOKE OF-COO-ers OR TWO YOUNGlings OF-DOVES
of-Lord pair of-turtle-doves squabs
2:25 kai idou hn anqrwpos en ierousalhm w onoma 25 . And, behold, there was a
kai idou En anthrOpos en ierousalEm hO onoma
G2532 G2400 G2258 G444 G1722 G2419 G3739 G3686
man in Jerusalem, whose name
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Impf vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Prep ni proper pr Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg n [was] Simeon; and the same
AND BE-PERCEIVING WAS human IN JERUSALEM to-WHOM NAME man [was] just and devout,
lo ! there-was waiting for the consolation of
Israel: and the Holy Ghost was
simewn kai o anqrwpos outos dikaios kai eulabhs upon him.
simeOn kai ho anthrOpos houtos dikaios kai eulabEs
G4826 G2532 G3588 G444 G3778 G1342 G2532 G2126
ni proper Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m
SIMEON AND THE human this JUST AND pious
prosdecomenos paraklhsin tou israhl kai pneuma agion hn

prosdechomenos paraklEsin tou israEl kai pneuma hagion En
G4327 G3874 G3588 G2474 G2532 G4151 G40 G2258
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m ni proper Conj n_ Nom Sg n a_ Acc Sg n vi Impf vxx 3 Sg
TOWARD-RECEIVING BESIDE-CALLing OF-THE ISRAEL AND spirit HOLY WAS
anticipating consolation
ep auton
ep auton
G1909 G846
Prep pp Acc Sg m
ON him
2:26 kai hn autw kecrhmatismenon upo tou pneumatos tou 26 And it was revealed unto
kai En autO kechrEmatismenon hupo tou pneumatos tou
G2532 G2258 G846 G5537 G5259 G3588 G4151 G3588
him by the Holy Ghost, that he
Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vp Perf Pas Nom Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg n should not see death, before he
AND WAS to-him HAVING-been-apprizED by THE spirit THE had seen the Lord's Christ.
it-was having-been-apprised
agiou mh idein qanaton prin h idh ton

hagiou mE idein thanaton prin hE idE ton
G40 G3361 G1492 G2288 G4250 G2228 G1492 G3588
a_ Gen Sg n Part Neg vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg m Adv Part vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m
HOLY NO TO-BE-PERCEIVING DEATH ERE OR he-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE
to-be-being-aquainted-with than he-may-be-acquainted-with
criston kuriou
christon kuriou
G5547 G2962
n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
ANOINTED OF-Master
Christ of-Lord
2:27 kai hlqen en tw pneumati eis to ieron kai en 27 And he came by the Spirit
kai Elthen en tO pneumati eis to hieron kai en
G2532 G2064 G1722 G3588 G4151 G1519 G3588 G2411 G2532 G1722
into the temple: and when the
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj Prep parents brought in the child
AND he-CAME IN THE spirit INTO THE SACRED-place AND IN Jesus, to do for him after the
sanctuary custom of the law,
tw eisagagein tous goneis to paidion ihsoun tou poihsai

tO eisagagein tous goneis to paidion iEsoun tou poiEsai
G3588 G1521 G3588 G1118 G3588 G3813 G2424 G3588 G4160
t_ Dat Sg m vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act
THE TO-BE-INTO-LEADING THE parents THE little-boy JESUS OF-THE TO-DO
to-be-bringing-in
Luke 2
autous kata to eiqismenon tou nomou peri autou

autous kata to eithismenon tou nomou peri autou
G846 G2596 G3588 G1480 G3588 G3551 G4012 G846
pp Acc Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg n vp Perf Pas Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep pp Gen Sg m
them according-to THE HAVING-been-acCUSTOMED OF-THE LAW ABOUT Him
having-been-accustomed concerning
2:28 kai autos edexato auto eis tas agkalas autou kai 28 Then took he him up in his
kai autos edexato auto eis tas agkalas autou kai
G2532 G846 G1209 G846 G1519 G3588 G43 G846 G2532
arms, and blessed God, and
Conj pp Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Acc Sg n Prep t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Sg m Conj said,
AND he RECEIVES Him INTO THE CLASP-in-arms OF-him AND
also ithim clasping-him-in-arms
euloghsen ton qeon kai eipen

eulogEsen ton theon kai eipen
G2127 G3588 G2316 G2532 G2036
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
blessES THE God AND said
he-blesses
2:29 nun apolueis ton doulon sou despota kata to 29 Lord, now lettest thou thy
nun apolueis ton doulon sou despota kata to
G3568 G630 G3588 G1401 G4675 G1203 G2596 G3588
servant depart in peace,
Adv vi Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg n_ Voc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n according to thy word:
NOW YOU-ARE-FROM-LOOSING THE SLAVE OF-YOU OWNer ! according-to THE
you-are-dismissing
rhma sou en eirhnh

rEma sou en eirEnE
G4487 G4675 G1722 G1515
n_ Acc Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg Prep n_ Dat Sg f
declaration OF-YOU IN PEACE
2:30 oti eidon oi ofqalmoi mou to swthrion sou 30 For mine eyes have seen thy
hoti eidon hoi ophthalmoi mou to sOtErion sou
G3754 G1492 G3588 G3788 G3450 G3588 G4992 G4675
salvation,
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg
that PERCEIVED THE VIEWers OF-ME THE SAVing OF-YOU
eyes salvation
2:31 o htoimasas kata proswpon pantwn twn lawn 31 Which thou hast prepared
ho hEtoimasas kata prosOpon pantOn tOn laOn
G3739 G2090 G2596 G4383 G3956 G3588 G2992
before the face of all people;
pr Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 2 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg n a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
WHICH YOU-make-READY according-to face OF-ALL THE PEOPLES
suiting
2:32 fws eis apokaluyin eqnwn kai doxan laou sou israhl 32 A light to lighten the
phOs eis apokalupsin ethnOn kai doxan laou sou israEl
G5457 G1519 G602 G1484 G2532 G1391 G2992 G4675 G2474
Gentiles, and the glory of thy
n_ Nom Sg n Prep n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Pl n Conj n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg ni proper people Israel.
LIGHT INTO FROM-COVERing OF-NATIONS AND esteem OF-PEOPLE OF-YOU ISRAEL
revelation glory
2:33 kai hn iwshf kai h mhthr autou qaumazontes epi tois 33 And Joseph and his mother
kai En iOsEph kai hE mEtEr autou thaumazontes epi tois
G2532 G2258 G2501 G2532 G3588 G3384 G846 G2296 G1909 G3588
marvelled at those things
Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg ni proper Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Dat Pl n which were spoken of him.
AND WAS JOSEPH AND THE MOTHER OF-Him MARVELING ON THE
laloumenois peri autou

laloumenois peri autou
G2980 G4012 G846
vp Pres Pas Dat Pl n Prep pp Gen Sg m
beING-TALKED ABOUT Him
being-spoken concerning
2:34 kai euloghsen autous simewn kai eipen pros mariam thn mhtera 34 And Simeon blessed them,
kai eulogEsen autous simeOn kai eipen pros mariam tEn mEtera
G2532 G2127 G846 G4826 G2532 G2036 G4314 G3137 G3588 G3384
and said unto Mary his mother,
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m ni proper Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep ni proper t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Behold, this [child] is set for
AND blessES them SIMEON AND said TOWARD MARIAM THE MOTHER the fall and rising again of
Mary many in Israel; and for a sign
which shall be spoken against;
autou idou outos keitai eis ptwsin kai anastasin pollwn
autou idou houtos keitai eis ptOsin kai anastasin pollOn
G846 G2400 G3778 G2749 G1519 G4431 G2532 G386 G4183
pp Gen Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pd Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f a_ Gen Pl m
OF-Him BE-PERCEIVING this-One IS-LYING INTO FALL AND UP-STANDing OF-MANY
lo ! this-one rising
en tw israhl kai eis shmeion antilegomenon

en tO israEl kai eis sEmeion antilegomenon
G1722 G3588 G2474 G2532 G1519 G4592 G483
Prep t_ Dat Sg m ni proper Conj Prep n_ Acc Sg n vp Pres Pas Acc Sg n
IN THE ISRAEL AND INTO SIGN beING-contradictED
Luke 2
2:35 kai sou de auths thn yuchn dieleusetai romfaia opws 35 (Yea, a sword shall pierce
kai sou de autEs tEn psuchEn dieleusetai romphaia hopOs
G2532 G4675 G1161 G846 G3588 G5590 G1330 G4501 G3704
through thy own soul also,)
Conj pp 2 Gen Sg Conj pp Gen Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Fut midD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f Adv that the thoughts of many
AND OF-YOU YET SAME THE soul SHALL-BE-THRU-COMING SABER WHICH-how hearts may be revealed.
also selfown shall-be-passing-through saber-blade so-that
an apokalufqwsin ek pollwn kardiwn dialogismoi

an apokaluphthOsin ek pollOn kardiOn dialogismoi
G302 G601 G1537 G4183 G2588 G1261
Part vs Aor Pas 3 Pl Prep a_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f n_ Nom Pl m
EVER MAY-BE-BEING-FROM-COVERED OUT OF-MANY HEARTS THRU-accounts
may-be-being-revealed reasonings
2:36 kai hn anna profhtis qugathr fanouhl ek fulhs ashr 36 And there was one Anna, a
kai En hanna prophEtis thugatEr phanouEl ek phulEs asEr
G2532 G2258 G451 G4398 G2364 G5323 G1537 G5443 G768
prophetess, the daughter of
Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f ni proper Prep n_ Gen Sg f ni proper Phanuel, of the tribe of Aser:
AND WAS ANNA BEFORE-AVERess DAUGHTER of-PHANUEL OUT OF-tribe of-ASER she was of a great age, and had
there-was Hannah prophetess of-Phanuel of-Asher lived with an husband seven
years from her virginity;
auth probebhkuia en hmerais pollais zhsasa eth meta
autE probebEkuia en hEmerais pollais zEsasa etE meta
G846 G4260 G1722 G2250 G4183 G2198 G2094 G3326
pp Nom Sg f vp Perf Act Nom Sg f Prep n_ Dat Pl f a_ Dat Pl f vp Aor Act Nom Sg f n_ Acc Pl n Prep
this-one HAVING-BEFORE-STEPPED IN DAYS MANY LIVing YEARS WITH
she one-having-advanced
andros epta apo ths parqenias auths

andros hepta apo tEs parthenias autEs
G435 G2033 G575 G3588 G3932 G846
n_ Gen Sg m a_ Nom Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg f
MAN SEVEN FROM THE virginity OF-her
husband
2:37 kai auth chra ws etwn ogdohkontatessarwn h ouk 37 And she [was] a widow of
kai autE chEra hOs etOn ogdoEkontatessarOn hE ouk
G2532 G846 G5503 G5613 G2094 G3589 G3739 G3756
about fourscore and four years,
Conj pp Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Adv n_ Gen Pl n a_ Gen Pl n pr Nom Sg f Part Neg which departed not from the
AND she WIDOW AS OF-YEARS EIGHTy-FOUR WHO NOT temple, but served [God] with
fastings and prayers night and
day.
afistato apo tou ierou nhsteiais kai dehsesin latreuousa
aphistato apo tou hierou nEsteiais kai deEsesin latreuousa
G868 G575 G3588 G2411 G3521 G2532 G1162 G3000
vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n n_ Dat Pl f Conj n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f
is-FROM-STOOD FROM THE SACRED-place to-fasts AND to-petitions offerING-DIVINE-SERVICE
withdraws sanctuary petitions offering-divine-service
nukta kai hmeran

nukta kai hEmeran
G3571 G2532 G2250
n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f
NIGHT AND DAY
2:38 kai auth auth th wra epistasa anqwmologeito tw 38 And she coming in that
kai autE autE tE hOra epistasa anthOmologeito tO
G2532 G846 G846 G3588 G5610 G2186 G437 G3588
instant gave thanks likewise
Conj pp Nom Sg f pp Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m unto the Lord, and spake of
AND SAME this THE HOUR ON-STANDing she-INSTEAD-avowED to-THE him to all them that looked for
she standing-by she-made-a-response redemption in Jerusalem.
kuriw kai elalei peri autou pasin tois prosdecomenois

kuriO kai elalei peri autou pasin tois prosdechomenois
G2962 G2532 G2980 G4012 G846 G3956 G3588 G4327
n_ Dat Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m a_ Dat Pl m t_ Dat Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl m
Master AND TALKED ABOUT Him to-ALL THE ones-TOWARD-RECEIVING
Lord spoke concerning ones-anticipating
lutrwsin en ierousalhm
lutrOsin en ierousalEm
G3085 G1722 G2419
n_ Acc Sg f Prep ni proper
LOOSening IN JERUSALEM
redemption
2:39 kai ws etelesan apanta ta kata ton nomon kuriou 39 And when they had
kai hOs etelesan hapanta ta kata ton nomon kuriou
G2532 G5613 G5055 G537 G3588 G2596 G3588 G3551 G2962
performed all things according
Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Pl n Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg m to the law of the Lord, they
AND AS THEY-FINISH ALL(emph.) THE according-to THE LAW OF-Master returned into Galilee, to their
they-accomplish the-things of-Lord own city Nazareth.
upestreyan eis thn galilaian eis thn polin autwn nazareq

hupestrepsan eis tEn galilaian eis tEn polin autOn nazareth
G5290 G1519 G3588 G1056 G1519 G3588 G4172 G846 G3478
vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Pl m ni proper
THEY-reTURN INTO THE GALILEE INTO THE city OF-them NAZARETH
Luke 2
2:40 to de paidion huxanen kai ekrataiouto pneumati plhroumenon 40 And the child grew, and
to de paidion Euxanen kai ekrataiouto pneumati plEroumenon
G3588 G1161 G3813 G837 G2532 G2901 G4151 G4137
waxed strong in spirit, filled
t_ Nom Sg n Conj n_ Nom Sg n vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj vi Impf Pas 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg n vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n with wisdom: and the grace of
THE YET little-boy GROWS-UP AND was-staunch to-spirit beING-FILLED God was upon him.
sofias kai caris qeou hn ep auto

sophias kai charis theou En ep auto
G4678 G2532 G5485 G2316 G2258 G1909 G846
n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg n
OF-WISDOM AND grace OF-God WAS ON it
ithim
2:41 kai eporeuonto oi goneis autou kat etos eis ierousalhm 41 . Now his parents went to
kai eporeuonto hoi goneis autou kat etos eis ierousalEm
G2532 G4198 G3588 G1118 G846 G2596 G2094 G1519 G2419
Jerusalem every year at the
Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg n Prep ni proper feast of the passover.
AND WENT THE parents OF-Him according-to YEAR INTO JERUSALEM
th eorth tou pasca

tE heortE tou pascha
G3588 G1859 G3588 G3957
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg m Aramaic
to-THE FESTIVAL OF-THE PASSOVER
2:42 kai ote egeneto etwn dwdeka anabantwn autwn eis ierosoluma 42 And when he was twelve
kai hote egeneto etOn dOdeka anabantOn autOn eis ierosoluma
G2532 G3753 G1096 G2094 G1427 G305 G846 G1519 G2414
years old, they went up to
Conj Adv vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Gen Pl n a_ Nom vp 2Aor Act Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m Prep n_ Acc Sg f Jerusalem after the custom of
AND when BECAME OF-YEARS TWO-TEN OF-UP-STEPPing OF-them INTO JERUSALEM the feast.
he-became twelve of-going-up
kata to eqos ths eorths

kata to ethos tEs heortEs
G2596 G3588 G1485 G3588 G1859
Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
according-to THE CUSTOM OF-THE FESTIVAL
2:43 kai teleiwsantwn tas hmeras en tw upostrefein autous 43 And when they had fulfilled
kai teleiOsantOn tas hEmeras en tO hupostrephein autous
G2532 G5048 G3588 G2250 G1722 G3588 G5290 G846
the days, as they returned, the
Conj vp Aor Act Gen Pl m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres Act pp Acc Pl m child Jesus tarried behind in
AND OF-maturing THE DAYS IN THE TO-BE-reTURNING them Jerusalem; and Joseph and his
of-finishing mother knew not [of it].
upemeinen ihsous o pais en ierousalhm kai ouk egnw

hupemeinen iEsous ho pais en ierousalEm kai ouk egnO
G5278 G2424 G3588 G3816 G1722 G2419 G2532 G3756 G1097
vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep ni proper Conj Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
UNDER-REMAINS JESUS THE boy IN JERUSALEM AND NOT KNEW
remains-behind knew-it
iwshf kai h mhthr autou

iOsEph kai hE mEtEr autou
G2501 G2532 G3588 G3384 G846
ni proper Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m
JOSEPH AND THE MOTHER OF-Him
2:44 nomisantes de auton en th sunodia einai hlqon hmeras 44 But they, supposing him to
nomisantes de auton en tE sunodia einai Elthon hEmeras
G3543 G1161 G846 G1722 G3588 G4923 G1511 G2064 G2250
have been in the company,
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vn Pres vxx vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Gen Sg f went a day's journey; and they
inferring YET Him IN THE TOGETHER-WAY TO-BE THEY-CAME OF-DAY sought him among [their]
caravan kinsfolk and acquaintance.
odon kai anezhtoun auton en tois suggenesin kai en tois

hodon kai anezEtoun auton en tois suggenesin kai en tois
G3598 G2532 G327 G846 G1722 G3588 G4773 G2532 G1722 G3588
n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m Conj Prep t_ Dat Pl m
WAY AND THEY-UP-SOUGHT Him IN THE TOGETHER-generateds AND IN THE
they-hunted among relatives among
gnwstois
gnOstois
G1110
a_ Dat Pl m
KNOWN
known-ones
2:45 kai mh eurontes auton upestreyan eis ierousalhm zhtountes 45 And when they found him
kai mE heurontes auton hupestrepsan eis ierousalEm zEtountes
G2532 G3361 G2147 G846 G5290 G1519 G2419 G2212
not, they turned back again to
Conj Part Neg vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep ni proper vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Jerusalem, seeking him.
AND NO FINDING Him THEY-reTURN INTO JERUSALEM SEEKING
Luke 2
auton
auton
G846
pp Acc Sg m
Him
2:46 kai egeneto meq hmeras treis euron auton en tw ierw 46 And it came to pass, that
kai egeneto meth hEmeras treis heuron auton en tO hierO
G2532 G1096 G3326 G2250 G5140 G2147 G846 G1722 G3588 G2411
after three days they found him
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n in the temple, sitting in the
AND it-BECAME after DAYS THREE THEY-FOUND Him IN THE SACRED-place midst of the doctors, both
it-occurred sanctuary hearing them, and asking them
questions.
kaqezomenon en mesw twn didaskalwn kai akouonta autwn
kathezomenon en mesO tOn didaskalOn kai akouonta autOn
G2516 G1722 G3319 G3588 G1320 G2532 G191 G846
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m Prep a_ Dat Sg n t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Acc Sg m pp Gen Pl m
beING-seatED IN MIDst OF-THE TEACHers AND HEARING OF-them
them
kai eperwtwnta autous

kai eperOtOnta autous
G2532 G1905 G846
Conj vp Pres Act Acc Sg m pp Acc Pl m
AND inquirING-of them
2:47 existanto de pantes oi akouontes autou epi th sunesei 47 And all that heard him were
existanto de pantes hoi akouontes autou epi tE sunesei
G1839 G1161 G3956 G3588 G191 G846 G1909 G3588 G4907
astonished at his understanding
vi Impf Mid 3 Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f and answers.
are-OUT-STOOD YET ALL THE ones-HEARING OF-Him ON to-THE understanding
are-amazed ones-hearing him the
kai tais apokrisesin autou

kai tais apokrisesin autou
G2532 G3588 G612 G846
Conj t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pp Gen Sg m
AND to-THE answerings OF-Him
the answers
2:48 kai idontes auton exeplaghsan kai pros auton h 48 And when they saw him,
kai idontes auton exeplagEsan kai pros auton hE
G2532 G1492 G846 G1605 G2532 G4314 G846 G3588
they were amazed: and his
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Pas 3 Pl Conj Prep pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg f mother said unto him, Son,
AND PERCEIVING Him THEY-were-astonished AND TOWARD Him THE why hast thou thus dealt with
us? behold, thy father and I
have sought thee sorrowing.
mhthr autou eipen teknon ti epoihsas hmin outws idou
mEtEr autou eipen teknon ti epoiEsas hEmin houtOs idou
G3384 G846 G2036 G5043 G5101 G4160 G2254 G3779 G2400
n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Voc Sg n pi Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl Adv vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
MOTHER OF-Him said offspring ANY YOU-DO to-US thus BE-PERCEIVING
child ! why ? lo !
o pathr sou kagw odunwmenoi ezhtoumen se

ho patEr sou kagO odunOmenoi ezEtoumen se
G3588 G3962 G4675 G2504 G3600 G2212 G4571
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg pp 1 Nom Sg Con vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 1 Pl pp 2 Acc Sg
THE FATHER OF-YOU AND-I beING-PAINED SOUGHT YOU
ones-being-pained
2:49 kai eipen pros autous ti oti ezhteite me ouk 49 And he said unto them,
kai eipen pros autous ti hoti ezEteite me ouk
G2532 G2036 G4314 G846 G5101 G3754 G2212 G3165 G3756
How is it that ye sought me?
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m pi Nom Sg n Conj vi Impf Act 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg Part Neg wist ye not that I must be about
AND He-said TOWARD them ANY that YE-SOUGHT ME NOT my Father's business?
why ?
hdeite oti en tois tou patros mou dei einai

Edeite hoti en tois tou patros mou dei einai
G1492 G3754 G1722 G3588 G3588 G3962 G3450 G1163 G1511
vi Plup Act 2 Pl Conj Prep t_ Dat Pl n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg vn Pres vxx
YE-HAD-PERCEIVED that IN THE OF-THE FATHER OF-ME IS-BINDING TO-BE
among the-things it-is-binding
me
me
G3165
pp 1 Acc Sg
ME
2:50 kai autoi ou sunhkan to rhma o elalhsen autois 50 And they understood not the
kai autoi ou sunEkan to rEma ho elalEsen autois
G2532 G846 G3756 G4920 G3588 G4487 G3739 G2980 G846
saying which he spake unto
Conj pp Nom Pl m Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pr Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m them.
AND they NOT understand THE declaration WHICH He-TALKS to-them
he-speaks
Luke 2 - Luke 3
2:51 kai katebh met autwn kai hlqen eis nazareq kai hn 51 And he went down with
kai katebE met autOn kai Elthen eis nazareth kai En
G2532 G2597 G3326 G846 G2532 G2064 G1519 G3478 G2532 G2258
them, and came to Nazareth,
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep ni proper Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg and was subject unto them: but
AND He-DOWN-STEPPed WITH them AND CAME INTO NAZARETH AND WAS his mother kept all these
he-descended sayings in her heart.
upotassomenos autois kai h mhthr autou diethrei panta ta

hupotassomenos autois kai hE mEtEr autou dietErei panta ta
G5293 G846 G2532 G3588 G3384 G846 G1301 G3956 G3588
vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m pp Dat Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Pl n
beING-UNDER-SET to-them AND THE MOTHER OF-Him THRU-KEPT ALL THE
being-subject carefully-kept
rhmata tauta en th kardia auths

rEmata tauta en tE kardia autEs
G4487 G5023 G1722 G3588 G2588 G846
n_ Acc Pl n pd Acc Pl n Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg f
declarations these IN THE HEART OF-her
2:52 kai ihsous proekopten sofia kai hlikia kai cariti para qew 52 And Jesus increased in
kai iEsous proekopten sophia kai hElikia kai chariti para theO
G2532 G2424 G4298 G4678 G2532 G2244 G2532 G5485 G3844 G2316
wisdom and stature, and in
Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f Prep n_ Dat Sg m favour with God and man.
AND JESUS progressED to-WISDOM AND to-PRIME AND to-grace BESIDE God
wisdom stature favor
kai anqrwpois
kai anthrOpois
G2532 G444
Conj n_ Dat Pl m
AND to-humans
humans
Luke 3
3:1 en etei de pentekaidekatw ths hgemonias tiberiou kaisaros 1 . Now in the fifteenth year of
en etei de pentekaidekatO tEs hEdemonias tiberiou kaisaros
G1722 G2094 G1161 G4003 G3588 G2231 G5086 G2541
the reign of Tiberius Caesar,
Prep n_ Dat Sg n Conj a_ Dat Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Pontius Pilate being governor
IN YEAR YET FIVE-AND-TENth OF-THE LEADership OF-TIBERIUS CEASAR of Judaea, and Herod being
fifteenth government Caesar tetrarch of Galilee, and his
brother Philip tetrarch of
hgemoneuontos pontiou pilatou ths ioudaias kai tetrarcountos ths Ituraea and of the region of
hEdemoneuontos pontiou pilatou tEs ioudaias kai tetrarchountos tEs Trachonitis, and Lysanias the
G2230 G4194 G4091 G3588 G2449 G2532 G5075 G3588
vp Pres Act Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp Pres Act Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg f tetrarch of Abilene,
OF-LEADershipING OF-Pontius PILATE OF-THE JUDEA AND OF-FOURth-chiefING OF-THE
of-being-governor Pontius of-being-tetrarch
galilaias hrwdou filippou de tou adelfou autou tetrarcountos

galilaias hErOdou philippou de tou adelphou autou tetrarchountos
G1056 G2264 G5376 G1161 G3588 G80 G846 G5075
n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m
GALILEE OF-HEROD OF-Philip YET THE brother OF-him FOURth-chiefING
Herod being-tetrarch
ths itouraias kai tracwnitidos cwras kai lusaniou ths abilhnhs

tEs itouraias kai trachOnitidos chOras kai lusaniou tEs abilEnEs
G3588 G2484 G2532 G5139 G5561 G2532 G3078 G3588 G9
t_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE ITUREA AND OF-Trachonitis OF-SPACE AND OF-LYSANIAS OF-THE ABILENE
province
tetrarcountos
tetrarchountos
G5075
vp Pres Act Gen Sg m
FOURth-chiefING
being-tetrarch
3:2 ep arcierewn anna kai kaiafa egeneto rhma qeou epi 2 Annas and Caiaphas being
ep archiereOn hanna kai kaiapha egeneto rEma theou epi
G1909 G749 G452 G2532 G2533 G1096 G4487 G2316 G1909
the high priests, the word of
Prep n_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg n n_ Gen Sg m Prep God came unto John the son of
ON chief-SACRED-ones ANNAS AND of-CAIAPHAS BECAME declaration OF-God ON Zacharias in the wilderness.
chief-priests Caiaphas
iwannhn ton tou zacariou uion en th erhmw

iOannEn ton tou zachariou huion en tE erEmO
G2491 G3588 G3588 G2197 G5207 G1722 G3588 G2048
n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f
JOHN THE OF-THE ZACHARIAS SON IN THE DESOLATE
wilderness
3:3 kai hlqen eis pasan thn pericwron tou iordanou khrusswn 3 And he came into all the
kai Elthen eis pasan tEn perichOron tou iordanou kErussOn
G2532 G2064 G1519 G3956 G3588 G4066 G3588 G2446 G2784
country about Jordan,
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m preaching the baptism of
AND CAME INTO EVERY THE ABOUT-SPACE OF-THE JORDAN PROCLAIMING repentance for the remission of
he-came entire country-about heralding sins;
baptisma metanoias eis afesin amartiwn

baptisma metanoias eis aphesin hamartiOn
G908 G3341 G1519 G859 G266
n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Pl f
DIPism OF-after-MIND INTO FROM-LETTing OF-misses
baptism of-repentance pardon of-sins
3:4 ws gegraptai en biblw logwn hsaiou tou profhtou 4 As it is written in the book of
hOs gegraptai en biblO logOn Esaiou tou prophEtou
G5613 G1125 G1722 G976 G3056 G2268 G3588 G4396
the words of Esaias the
Adv vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Prep n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m prophet, saying, The voice of
AS it-HAS-been-WRITTEN IN SCROLL OF-sayings OF-ISAIAH THE BEFORE-AVERer one crying in the wilderness,
prophet Prepare ye the way of the Lord,
make his paths straight.
legontos fwnh bowntos en th erhmw etoimasate thn
legontos phOnE boOntos en tE erEmO hetoimasate tEn
G3004 G5456 G994 G1722 G3588 G2048 G2090 G3588
vp Pres Act Gen Sg n n_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Act Gen Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f
sayING SOUND OF-IMPLORING-one IN THE DESOLATE make-YE-READY THE
voice of-one-imploring wilderness make-ready-ye !
odon kuriou euqeias poieite tas tribous autou

hodon kuriou eutheias poieite tas tribous autou
G3598 G2962 G2117 G4160 G3588 G5147 G846
n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m a_ Acc Pl f vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Sg m
WAY OF-Master straight BE-YE-makING THE WEAR (ways) OF-Him
road of-Lord be-ye-making ! highways
3:5 pasa faragx plhrwqhsetai kai pan oros kai bounos 5 Every valley shall be filled,
pasa pharagx plErOthEsetai kai pan oros kai bounos
G3956 G5327 G4137 G2532 G3956 G3735 G2532 G1015
and every mountain and hill
a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Conj n_ Nom Sg m shall be brought low; and the
EVERY RAVINE SHALL-BE-BEING-FILLED AND EVERY mountain AND HILL crooked shall be made straight,
and the rough ways [shall be]
Luke 3
made smooth;
tapeinwqhsetai kai estai ta skolia eis euqeian kai ai
tapeinOthEsetai kai estai ta skolia eis eutheian kai hai
G5013 G2532 G2071 G3588 G4646 G1519 G2117 G2532 G3588
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj vi Fut vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n Prep a_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Nom Pl f
SHALL-BE-BEING-made-LOW AND SHALL-BE THE CROOKED INTO straight AND THE
crooked(p)
traceiai eis odous leias

tracheiai eis hodous leias
G5138 G1519 G3598 G3006
a_ Nom Pl f Prep n_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f
ROUGHS INTO WAYS SMOOTH
rough(p) roads
3:6 kai oyetai pasa sarx to swthrion tou qeou 6 And all flesh shall see the
kai opsetai pasa sarx to sOtErion tou theou
G2532 G3700 G3956 G4561 G3588 G4992 G3588 G2316
salvation of God.
Conj vi Fut midD 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
AND SHALL-BE-VIEWING EVERY FLESH THE SAVing OF-THE God
shall-be-seeing all salvation
3:7 elegen oun tois ekporeuomenois oclois baptisqhnai up autou 7 Then said he to the multitude
elegen oun tois ekporeuomenois ochlois baptisthEnai hup autou
G3004 G3767 G3588 G1607 G3793 G907 G5259 G846
that came forth to be baptized
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Dat Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vn Aor Pas Prep pp Gen Sg m of him, O generation of vipers,
he-said THEN to-THE OUT-GOING THRONGS TO-BE-DIPizED by him who hath warned you to flee
ones-going-out to-be-baptized from the wrath to come?
gennhmata ecidnwn tis upedeixen umin fugein apo ths

gennEmata echidnOn tis hupedeixen humin phugein apo tEs
G1081 G2191 G5101 G5263 G5213 G5343 G575 G3588
n_ Voc Pl n n_ Gen Pl f pi Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Gen Sg f
products OF-VIPERS ANY UNDER-SHOWS to-YOU(p) TO-BE-FLEEING FROM THE
progeny ! who ? intimates to-ye
melloushs orghs
mellousEs orgEs
G3195 G3709
vp Pres Act Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
beING-ABOUT INDIGNATION
impending
3:8 poihsate oun karpous axious ths metanoias kai mh 8 Bring forth therefore fruits
poiEsate oun karpous axious tEs metanoias kai mE
G4160 G3767 G2590 G514 G3588 G3341 G2532 G3361
worthy of repentance, and
vm Aor Act 2 Pl Conj n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj Part Neg begin not to say within
DO THEN FRUITS WORTHY OF-THE after-MINDing AND NO yourselves, We have Abraham
produce-ye ! repentance to [our] father: for I say unto
you, That God is able of these
arxhsqe legein en eautois patera ecomen ton abraam stones to raise up children unto
arxEsthe legein en heautois patera echomen ton abraam Abraham.
G756 G3004 G1722 G1438 G3962 G2192 G3588 G11
vs Aor Mid 2 Pl vn Pres Act Prep pf 3 Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Pl t_ Acc Sg m ni proper
YE-SHOULD-BE-beginnING TO-BE-sayING IN selves FATHER WE-ARE-HAVING THE ABRAHAM
among yourselves
legw gar umin oti dunatai o qeos ek twn liqwn

legO gar humin hoti dunatai ho theos ek tOn lithOn
G3004 G1063 G5213 G3754 G1410 G3588 G2316 G1537 G3588 G3037
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
I-AM-sayING for to-YOU(p) that IS-ABLE THE God OUT OF-THE STONES
to-ye
toutwn egeirai tekna tw abraam

toutOn egeirai tekna tO abraam
G5130 G1453 G5043 G3588 G11
pd Gen Pl m vn Aor Act n_ Acc Pl n t_ Dat Sg m ni proper
these TO-ROUSE offsprings to-THE ABRAHAM
children
3:9 hdh de kai h axinh pros thn rizan twn dendrwn 9 And now also the axe is laid
EdE de kai hE axinE pros tEn rizan tOn dendrOn
G2235 G1161 G2532 G3588 G513 G4314 G3588 G4491 G3588 G1186
unto the root of the trees: every
Adv Conj Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n tree therefore which bringeth
ALREADY YET AND THE AX TOWARD THE ROOT OF-THE TREES not forth good fruit is hewn
also down, and cast into the fire.
keitai pan oun dendron mh poioun karpon kalon

keitai pan oun dendron mE poioun karpon kalon
G2749 G3956 G3767 G1186 G3361 G4160 G2590 G2570
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg n Conj n_ Nom Sg n Part Neg vp Pres Act Nom Sg n n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m
IS-LYING EVERY THEN TREE NO DOING FRUIT IDEAL
doproducing

G1581 G2532 G1519 G4442 G906
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Conj Prep n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
IS-beING-OUT-STRIKen AND INTO FIRE IS-beING-CAST
is-being-hewn-down
Luke 3
3:10 kai ephrwtwn auton oi ocloi legontes ti oun 10 And the people asked him,
kai epErOtOn auton hoi ochloi legontes ti oun
G2532 G1905 G846 G3588 G3793 G3004 G5101 G3767
saying, What shall we do then?
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pi Acc Sg n Conj
AND inquirED-of him THE THRONGS sayING ANY THEN
what ?
poihsomen
poiEsomen
G4160
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
WE-SHALL-BE-DOING
3:11 apokriqeis de legei autois o ecwn duo citwnas 11 He answereth and saith unto
apokritheis de legei autois ho echOn duo chitOnas
G611 G1161 G3004 G846 G3588 G2192 G1417 G5509
them, He that hath two coats,
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m let him impart to him that hath
answerING YET he-IS-sayING to-them THE one-HAVING TWO TUNICS none; and he that hath meat, let
one-having him do likewise.
metadotw tw mh econti kai o ecwn brwmata

metadotO tO mE echonti kai ho echOn brOmata
G3330 G3588 G3361 G2192 G2532 G3588 G2192 G1033
vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m Part Neg vp Pres Act Dat Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Pl n
LET-BE-WITH-GIVING to-THE NO HAVING AND THE one-HAVING FOODS
let-him-be-sharing ! to-the-one one-having
omoiws poieitw
homoiOs poieitO
G3668 G4160
Adv vm Pres Act 3 Sg
LIKE-AS LET-BE-DOING
likewise let-him-be-doing !
3:12 hlqon de kai telwnai baptisqhnai kai eipon pros auton 12 Then came also publicans to
Elthon de kai telOnai baptisthEnai kai eipon pros auton
G2064 G1161 G2532 G5057 G907 G2532 G2036 G4314 G846
be baptized, and said unto him,
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj Conj n_ Nom Pl m vn Aor Pas Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pp Acc Sg m Master, what shall we do?
CAME YET AND tribute-collectors TO-BE-DIPizED AND THEY-said TOWARD him
also to-be-baptized
didaskale ti poihsomen
didaskale ti poiEsomen
G1320 G5101 G4160
n_ Voc Sg m pi Acc Sg n vi Fut Act 1 Pl
TEACHer ! ANY WE-SHALL-BE-DOING
what ?
3:13 o de eipen pros autous mhden pleon para to 13 And he said unto them,
ho de eipen pros autous mEden pleon para to
G3588 G1161 G2036 G4314 G846 G3367 G4119 G3844 G3588
Exact no more than that which
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Cmp Prep t_ Acc Sg n is appointed you.
THE YET he-said TOWARD them NO-YET-ONE MORE BESIDE THE
nothing
diatetagmenon umin prassete

diatetagmenon humin prassete
G1299 G5213 G4238
vp Perf Pas Acc Sg n pp 2 Dat Pl vi Pres Act 2 Pl
HAVING-been-prescribED to-YOU(p) YE-BE-PRACTISING
to-ye be-ye-imposing !
3:14 ephrwtwn de auton kai strateuomenoi legontes kai hmeis 14 And the soldiers likewise
epErOtOn de auton kai strateuomenoi legontes kai hEmeis
G1905 G1161 G846 G2532 G4754 G3004 G2532 G2249
demanded of him, saying, And
vi Impf Act 3 Pl Conj pp Acc Sg m Conj vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj pp 1 Nom Pl what shall we do? And he said
inquirED-of YET him AND ones-WARRING sayING AND WE unto them, Do violence to no
also soldiers man, neither accuse [any]
falsely; and be content with
ti poihsomen kai eipen pros autous mhdena your wages.
ti poiEsomen kai eipen pros autous mEdena
G5101 G4160 G2532 G2036 G4314 G846 G3367
pi Acc Sg n vi Fut Act 1 Pl Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Sg m
ANY WE-SHALL-BE-DOING AND he-said TOWARD them NO-YET-ONE
what ? no-one
diaseishte mhde sukofanthshte kai arkeisqe tois

diaseisEte mEde sukophantEsEte kai arkeisthe tois
G1286 G3366 G4811 G2532 G714 G3588
vs Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vs Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vm Pres Pas 2 Pl t_ Dat Pl n
YE-SHOULD-BE-THRU-QUAKING NO-YET YE-SHOULD-BE-FIG-ALLEGING AND YE-BE-beING-SUFFICED to-THE
ye-should-be-intimidating neither ye-should-be-blackmailing be-ye-being-sufficed !
oywniois umwn
opsOniois humOn
G3800 G5216
n_ Dat Pl n pp 2 Gen Pl
PROVISION-PURCHASES OF-YOU(p)
rations of-ye
Luke 3
3:15 prosdokwntos de tou laou kai dialogizomenwn pantwn en 15 . And as the people were in
prosdokOntos de tou laou kai dialogizomenOn pantOn en
G4328 G1161 G3588 G2992 G2532 G1260 G3956 G1722
expectation, and all men mused
vp Pres Act Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m Prep in their hearts of John, whether
OF-TOWARD-SEEMING YET THE PEOPLE AND OF-THRU-accountING ALL IN he were the Christ, or not;
of-hoping of-reasoning
tais kardiais autwn peri tou iwannou mhpote autos eih

tais kardiais autOn peri tou iOannou mEpote autos eiE
G3588 G2588 G846 G4012 G3588 G2491 G3379 G846 G1498
t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pp Gen Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Adv pp Nom Sg m vo Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE HEARTS OF-them ABOUT THE JOHN NO-?-when he MAY-BE
concerning lest-at-some-time
o cristos
ho christos
G3588 G5547
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
THE ANOINTED
Christ
3:16 apekrinato o iwannhs apasin legwn egw men udati 16 John answered, saying unto
apekrinato ho iOannEs apasin legOn egO men hudati
G611 G3588 G2491 G537 G3004 G1473 G3303 G5204
[them] all, I indeed baptize you
vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp 1 Nom Sg Part n_ Dat Sg n with water; but one mightier
answers THE JOHN to-ALL(emph.) sayING I INDEED to-water than I cometh, the latchet of
whose shoes I am not worthy
to unloose: he shall baptize you
baptizw umas ercetai de o iscuroteros mou ou with the Holy Ghost and with
baptizO humas erchetai de ho ischuroteros mou hou fire:
G907 G5209 G2064 G1161 G3588 G2478 G3450 G3739
vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Cmp pp 1 Gen Sg pr Gen Sg m
AM-DIPizING YOU(p) IS-COMING YET THE STRONGER OF-ME OF-WHOM
am-baptizing ye stronger-one
ouk eimi ikanos lusai ton imanta twn upodhmatwn autou

ouk eimi hikanos lusai ton himanta tOn hupodEmatOn autou
G3756 G1510 G2425 G3089 G3588 G2438 G3588 G5266 G846
Part Neg vi Pres vxx 1 Sg a_ Nom Sg m vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n pp Gen Sg m
NOT I-AM enough TO-LOOSE THE STRAP OF-THE sandals OF-Him
competent thong
autos umas baptisei en pneumati agiw kai puri

autos humas baptisei en pneumati hagiO kai puri
G846 G5209 G907 G1722 G4151 G40 G2532 G4442
pp Nom Sg m pp 2 Acc Pl vi Fut Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n Conj n_ Dat Sg n
He YOU(p) SHALL-BE-DIPizING IN spirit HOLY AND FIRE
ye shall-be-baptizing
3:17 ou to ptuon en th ceiri autou kai 17 Whose fan [is] in his hand,
hou to ptuon en tE cheiri autou kai
G3739 G3588 G4425 G1722 G3588 G5495 G846 G2532
and he will throughly purge his
pr Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj floor, and will gather the wheat
OF-WHOM THE WINNOWING-SHOVEL IN THE HAND OF-Him AND into his garner; but the chaff he
will burn with fire
unquenchable.
diakaqariei thn alwna autou kai sunaxei
diakathariei tEn halOna autou kai sunaxei
G1245 G3588 G257 G846 G2532 G4863
vi Fut Act 3 Sg Att t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg
He-SHALL-BE-THRU-cleansING THE THRESHing-floor OF-Him AND SHALL-BE-TOGETHER-LEADING
he-shall-be-scouring shall-be-gathering
ton siton eis thn apoqhkhn autou to de acuron

ton siton eis tEn apothEkEn autou to de achuron
G3588 G4621 G1519 G3588 G596 G846 G3588 G1161 G892
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m t_ Acc Sg n Conj n_ Acc Sg n
THE GRAIN INTO THE FROM-PLACE OF-Him THE YET CHAFF
barn
katakausei puri asbestw

katakausei puri asbestO
G2618 G4442 G762
vi Fut Act 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n
He-SHALL-BE-DOWN-BURNING to-FIRE UN-EXTINGUISHed
he-shall-be-burning-up unextinguished
3:18 polla men oun kai etera parakalwn euhggelizeto ton 18 And many other things in
polla men oun kai hetera parakalOn euEggelizeto ton
G4183 G3303 G3767 G2532 G2087 G3870 G2097 G3588
his exhortation preached he
a_ Acc Pl n Part Conj Conj a_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi Impf Mid 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m unto the people.
MANY INDEED THEN AND DIFFERENT BESIDE-CALLING he-WELL-MESSAGizED THE
also different-things entreating he-brought-the-well-message to-the
laon
laon
G2992
n_ Acc Sg m
PEOPLE
Luke 3
3:19 o de hrwdhs o tetrarchs elegcomenos up autou peri 19 But Herod the tetrarch,
ho de hErOdEs ho tetrarchEs elegchomenos hup autou peri
G3588 G1161 G2264 G3588 G5076 G1651 G5259 G846 G4012
being reproved by him for
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m Prep pp Gen Sg m Prep Herodias his brother Philip's
THE YET HEROD THE FOURth-chief beING-EXPOSED by him ABOUT wife, and for all the evils
tetrarch concerning which Herod had done,
hrwdiados ths gunaikos filippou tou adelfou autou kai peri

hErOdiados tEs gunaikos philippou tou adelphou autou kai peri
G2266 G3588 G1135 G5376 G3588 G80 G846 G2532 G4012
n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m Conj Prep
HERODIAS THE WOMAN OF-Philip THE brother OF-him AND ABOUT
wife concerning
pantwn wn epoihsen ponhrwn o hrwdhs

pantOn hOn epoiEsen ponErOn ho hErOdEs
G3956 G3739 G4160 G4190 G3588 G2264
a_ Gen Pl n pr Gen Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Gen Pl n t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
ALL OF-WHICH DOES OF-wickednesses THE HEROD
which wicked-things
3:20 proseqhken kai touto epi pasin kai katekleisen ton iwannhn en 20 Added yet this above all,
prosethEken kai touto epi pasin kai katekleisen ton iOannEn en
G4369 G2532 G5124 G1909 G3956 G2532 G2623 G3588 G2491 G1722
that he shut up John in prison.
vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pd Acc Sg n Prep a_ Dat Pl n Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep
adds AND this ON ALL AND DOWN-LOCKS THE JOHN IN
also locks-up
th fulakh
tE phulakE
G3588 G5438
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
THE GUARD-house
jail
3:21 egeneto de en tw baptisqhnai apanta ton laon kai 21 . Now when all the people
egeneto de en tO baptisthEnai hapanta ton laon kai
G1096 G1161 G1722 G3588 G907 G537 G3588 G2992 G2532
were baptized, it came to pass,
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Aor Pas a_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj that Jesus also being baptized,
BECAME YET IN THE TO-BE-DIPizED ALL(emph.) THE PEOPLE AND and praying, the heaven was
it-occurred to-be-baptized opened,
ihsou baptisqentos kai proseucomenou anewcqhnai ton ouranon

iEsou baptisthentos kai proseuchomenou aneOchthEnai ton ouranon
G2424 G907 G2532 G4336 G455 G3588 G3772
n_ Gen Sg m vp Aor Pas Gen Sg m Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m vn Aor Pas t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
JESUS OF-BEING-DIPizED AND prayING TO-BE-UP-OPENED THE heaven
of-Jesus being-baptized to-be-opened
3:22 kai katabhnai to pneuma to agion swmatikw eidei wsei 22 And the Holy Ghost
kai katabEnai to pneuma to hagion sOmatikO eidei hOsei
G2532 G2597 G3588 G4151 G3588 G40 G4984 G1491 G5616
descended in a bodily shape
Conj vn 2Aor Act t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n a_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n Adv like a dove upon him, and a
AND TO-DOWN-STEP THE spirit THE HOLY to-BODYic perception AS-IF voice came from heaven,
to-descend to-bodily which said, Thou art my
beloved Son; in thee I am well
peristeran ep auton kai fwnhn ex ouranou genesqai legousan pleased.
peristeran ep auton kai phOnEn ex ouranou genesthai legousan
G4058 G1909 G846 G2532 G5456 G1537 G3772 G1096 G3004
n_ Acc Sg f Prep pp Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg f Prep n_ Gen Sg m vn 2Aor midD vp Pres Act Acc Sg f
DOVE ON Him AND SOUND OUT OF-heaven TO-BE-BECOMING sayING
voice
su ei o uios mou o agaphtos en soi

su ei ho huios mou ho agapEtos en soi
G4771 G1488 G3588 G5207 G3450 G3588 G27 G1722 G4671
pp 2 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Prep pp 2 Dat Sg
YOU ARE THE SON OF-ME THE beLOVED IN YOU
hudokhsa
EudokEsa
G2106
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
I-WELL-SEEM
I-delight
3:23 kai autos hn o ihsous wsei etwn triakonta 23 And Jesus himself began to
kai autos En ho iEsous hOsei etOn triakonta
G2532 G846 G2258 G3588 G2424 G5616 G2094 G5144
be about thirty years of age,
Conj pp Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Adv n_ Gen Pl n a_ Nom being (as was supposed) the
AND He WAS THE JESUS AS-IF OF-YEARS THREE-TY son of Joseph, which was [the
about years thirty son] of Heli,
arcomenos wn ws enomizeto uios iwshf tou hli

archomenos On hOs enomizeto huios iOsEph tou hEli
G756 G5607 G5613 G3543 G5207 G2501 G3588 G2242
vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m vp Pres vxx Nom Sg m Adv vi Impf Pas 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper
beginnING BEING AS was-LAWizED SON of-JOSEPH OF-THE HELI
was-legalized of-Joseph
Luke 3
3:24 tou matqat tou leui tou melci tou ianna tou iwshf 24 Which was [the son] of
tou matthat tou leui tou melchi tou ianna tou iOsEph
G3588 G3158 G3588 G3017 G3588 G3197 G3588 G2388 G3588 G2501
Matthat, which was [the son]
t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper of Levi, which was [the son] of
OF-THE MATTHAT OF-THE LEVI OF-THE MELCHI OF-THE JANNA OF-THE JOSEPH Melchi, which was [the son] of
Mechi Janna, which was [the son] of
Joseph,
3:25 tou mattaqiou tou amws tou naoum tou esli tou 25 Which was [the son] of
tou mattathiou tou amOs tou naoum tou hesli tou
G3588 G3161 G3588 G301 G3588 G3486 G3588 G2069 G3588
Mattathias, which was [the
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m son] of Amos, which was [the
OF-THE MATTATHIAS OF-THE AMOS OF-THE NAUM OF-THE ESLI OF-THE son] of Naum, which was [the
Nahum son] of Esli, which was [the
son] of Nagge,
naggai
naggai
G3477
ni proper
NAGGE
Naggai
3:26 tou maaq tou mattaqiou tou semei tou iwshf tou 26 Which was [the son] of
tou maath tou mattathiou tou semei tou iOsEph tou
G3588 G3092 G3588 G3161 G3588 G4584 G3588 G2501 G3588
Maath, which was [the son] of
t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m Mattathias, which was [the
OF-THE MAATH OF-THE MATTATHIAS OF-THE SEMEI OF-THE JOSEPH OF-THE son] of Semei, which was [the
son] of Joseph, which was [the
son] of Juda,
iouda
iouda
G2455
n_ Gen Sg m
JUDA
3:27 tou iwanna tou rhsa tou zorobabel tou salaqihl tou 27 Which was [the son] of
tou iOanna tou rEsa tou zorobabel tou salathiEl tou
G3588 G2490 G3588 G4488 G3588 G2216 G3588 G4528 G3588
Joanna, which was [the son] of
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m Rhesa, which was [the son] of
OF-THE JOANNA OF-THE RHESA OF-THE ZOROBABEL OF-THE SALATHIEL OF-THE Zorobabel, which was [the
son] of Salathiel, which was
[the son] of Neri,
nhri
nEri
G3518
ni proper
NERI
3:28 tou melci tou addi tou kwsam tou elmwdam tou hr 28 Which was [the son] of
tou melchi tou addi tou kOsam tou elmOdam tou Er
G3588 G3197 G3588 G78 G3588 G2973 G3588 G1678 G3588 G2262
Melchi, which was [the son] of
t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper Addi, which was [the son] of
OF-THE MELCHI OF-THE ADDI OF-THE COSAM OF-THE ELMODAM OF-THE ER Cosam, which was [the son] of
Mechi Elmodam, which was [the son]
of Er,
3:29 tou iwsh tou eliezer tou iwreim tou matqat tou 29 Which was [the son] of
tou iOsE tou eliezer tou iOreim tou matthat tou
G3588 G2499 G3588 G1663 G3588 G2497 G3588 G3158 G3588
Jose, which was [the son] of
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m Eliezer, which was [the son] of
OF-THE JOSE OF-THE ELIEZER OF-THE JORIM OF-THE MATTHAT OF-THE Jorim, which was [the son] of
Matthat, which was [the son]
of Levi,
leui
leui
G3017
ni proper
LEVI
3:30 tou simewn tou iouda tou iwshf tou iwnan tou 30 Which was [the son] of
tou simeOn tou iouda tou iOsEph tou iOnan tou
G3588 G4826 G3588 G2455 G3588 G2501 G3588 G2494 G3588
Simeon, which was [the son]
t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m of Juda, which was [the son] of
OF-THE SIMEON OF-THE JUDA OF-THE JOSEPH OF-THE JONAN OF-THE Joseph, which was [the son] of
Judah Jonan, which was [the son] of
Eliakim,
eliakeim
eliakeim
G1662
ni proper
ELIAKIM
3:31 tou melea tou menam tou mattaqa tou naqan tou dabid 31 Which was [the son] of
tou melea tou menam tou mattatha tou nathan tou dabid
G3588 G3190 G3588 G3104 G3588 G3160 G3588 G3481 G3588 G1138
Melea, which was [the son] of
t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper Menan, which was [the son] of
OF-THE MELEA OF-THE MENAN OF-THE MATTATHA OF-THE NATHAN OF-THE DAVID Mattatha, which was [the son]
of Nathan, which was [the son]
Luke 3 - Luke 4
of David,
3:32 tou iessai tou wbhd tou booz tou salmwn tou 32 Which was [the son] of
tou iessai tou ObEd tou booz tou salmOn tou
G3588 G2421 G3588 G5601 G3588 G1003 G3588 G4533 G3588 Jesse, which was [the son] of
t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m Obed, which was [the son] of
OF-THE JESSE OF-THE OBED OF-THE BOOZ OF-THE SALMON OF-THE Booz, which was [the son] of
Boaz Salmon, which was [the son]
of Naasson,
naasswn
naassOn
G3476
ni proper
NAASSON
3:33 tou aminadab tou aram tou esrwm tou fares tou 33 Which was [the son] of
tou aminadab tou aram tou hesrOm tou phares tou
G3588 G284 G3588 G689 G3588 G2074 G3588 G5329 G3588
Aminadab, which was [the
t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m son] of Aram, which was [the
OF-THE AMINADAB OF-THE ARAM OF-THE ESROM OF-THE PHARES OF-THE son] of Esrom, which was [the
son] of Phares, which was [the
son] of Juda,
iouda
iouda
G2455
n_ Gen Sg m
JUDA
Judah
3:34 tou iakwb tou isaak tou abraam tou qara tou nacwr 34 Which was [the son] of
tou iakOb tou isaak tou abraam tou thara tou nachOr
G3588 G2384 G3588 G2464 G3588 G11 G3588 G2291 G3588 G3493
Jacob, which was [the son] of
t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper Isaac, which was [the son] of
OF-THE JACOB OF-THE ISAAC OF-THE ABRAHAM OF-THE THARA OF-THE NACHOR Abraham, which was [the son]
Tera Nahor of Thara, which was [the son]
of Nachor,
3:35 tou sarouc tou ragau tou falek tou eber tou sala 35 Which was [the son] of
tou sarouch tou ragau tou phalek tou eber tou sala
G3588 G4562 G3588 G4466 G3588 G5317 G3588 G1443 G3588 G4527
Saruch, which was [the son] of
t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper Ragau, which was [the son] of
OF-THE SARUCH OF-THE RAGAU OF-THE PHALEC OF-THE HEBER OF-THE SALA Phalec, which was [the son] of
Reu Peleg Eber Heber, which was [the son] of
Sala,
3:36 tou kainan tou arfaxad tou shm tou nwe tou lamec 36 Which was [the son] of
tou kainan tou arphaxad tou sEm tou nOe tou lamech
G3588 G2536 G3588 G742 G3588 G4590 G3588 G3575 G3588 G2984
Cainan, which was [the son] of
t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper Arphaxad, which was [the son]
OF-THE CAINAN OF-THE ARPHAXAD OF-THE SEM OF-THE NOAH OF-THE LAMECH of Sem, which was [the son] of
Shem Noe, which was [the son] of
Lamech,
3:37 tou maqousala tou enwc tou iared tou malelehl tou 37 Which was [the son] of
tou mathousala tou henOch tou iared tou maleleEl tou
G3588 G3103 G3588 G1802 G3588 G2391 G3588 G3121 G3588
Mathusala, which was [the
t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m son] of Enoch, which was [the
OF-THE MATHUSALA OF-THE ENOCH OF-THE JARED OF-THE MALELEEL OF-THE son] of Jared, which was [the
Methuselah son] of Maleleel, which was
[the son] of Cainan,
kainan
kainan
G2536
ni proper
CAINAN
3:38 tou enws tou shq tou adam tou qeou 38 Which was [the son] of
tou enOs tou sEth tou adam tou theou
G3588 G1800 G3588 G4589 G3588 G76 G3588 G2316
Enos, which was [the son] of
t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m ni proper t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Seth, which was [the son] of
OF-THE ENOS OF-THE SETH OF-THE ADAM OF-THE God Adam, which was [the son] of
Enosh God.
Luke 4
4:1 ihsous de pneumatos agiou plhrhs upestreyen apo tou iordanou 1 . And Jesus being full of the
iEsous de pneumatos hagiou plErEs hupestrepsen apo tou iordanou
G2424 G1161 G4151 G40 G4134 G5290 G575 G3588 G2446
Holy Ghost returned from
n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n a_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Jordan, and was led by the
JESUS YET OF-spirit HOLY FULL reTURNS FROM THE JORDAN Spirit into the wilderness,
kai hgeto en tw pneumati eis thn erhmon

kai Egeto en tO pneumati eis tEn erEmon
G2532 G71 G1722 G3588 G4151 G1519 G3588 G2048
Conj vi Impf Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n Prep t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f
AND was-LED IN THE spirit INTO THE DESOLATE
wilderness
4:2 hmeras tessarakonta peirazomenos upo tou diabolou kai ouk 2 Being forty days tempted of
hEmeras tessarakonta peirazomenos hupo tou diabolou kai ouk
G2250 G5062 G3985 G5259 G3588 G1228 G2532 G3756
the devil. And in those days he
n_ Acc Pl f a_ Nom vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m Conj Part Neg did eat nothing: and when they
DAYS FOUR-TY beING-triED by THE THRU-CASTer AND NOT were ended, he afterward
forty Adversary hungered.
efagen ouden en tais hmerais ekeinais kai suntelesqeiswn autwn

ephagen ouden en tais hEmerais ekeinais kai suntelestheisOn autOn
G5315 G3762 G1722 G3588 G2250 G1565 G2532 G4931 G846
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pd Dat Pl f Conj vp Aor Pas Gen Pl f pp Gen Pl f
He-ATE NOT-YET-ONE IN THE DAYS those AND OF-BEING-concludED them
anything
usteron epeinasen
husteron epeinasen
G5305 G3983
Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg
subsequently He-HUNGERS
4:3 kai eipen autw o diabolos ei uios ei tou 3 And the devil said unto him,
kai eipen autO ho diabolos ei huios ei tou
G2532 G2036 G846 G3588 G1228 G1487 G5207 G1488 G3588
If thou be the Son of God,
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Cond n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 2 Sg t_ Gen Sg m command this stone that it be
AND said to-Him THE THRU-CASTer IF SON YOU-ARE OF-THE made bread.
Adversary
qeou eipe tw liqw toutw ina genhtai artos

theou eipe tO lithO toutO hina genEtai artos
G2316 G2036 G3588 G3037 G5129 G2443 G1096 G740
n_ Gen Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pd Dat Sg m Conj vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m
God BE-sayING to-THE STONE this THAT it-MAY-BE-BECOMING BREAD
be-you-saying !
4:4 kai apekriqh ihsous pros auton legwn gegraptai oti 4 And Jesus answered him,
kai apekrithE iEsous pros auton legOn gegraptai hoti
G2532 G611 G2424 G4314 G846 G3004 G1125 G3754
saying, It is written, That man
Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Prep pp Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Conj shall not live by bread alone,
AND answerED JESUS TOWARD him sayING it-HAS-been-WRITTEN that but by every word of God.
ouk ep artw monw zhsetai o anqrwpos all epi panti

ouk ep artO monO zEsetai ho anthrOpos all epi panti
G3756 G1909 G740 G3441 G2198 G3588 G444 G235 G1909 G3956
Part Neg Prep n_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m vi Fut midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj Prep a_ Dat Sg n
NOT ON BREAD ONLY SHALL-BE-LIVING THE human but ON EVERY
alone
rhmati qeou
rEmati theou
G4487 G2316
n_ Dat Sg n n_ Gen Sg m
declaration OF-God
4:5 kai anagagwn auton o diabolos eis oros uyhlon edeixen 5 And the devil, taking him up
kai anagagOn auton ho diabolos eis oros hupsElon edeixen
G2532 G321 G846 G3588 G1228 G1519 G3735 G5308 G1166
into an high mountain, shewed
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg unto him all the kingdoms of
AND UP-LEADING Him THE THRU-CASTer INTO mountain HIGH he-SHOWS the world in a moment of time.
leading-up Adversary
autw pasas tas basileias ths oikoumenhs en stigmh cronou

autO pasas tas basileias tEs oikoumenEs en stigmE chronou
G846 G3956 G3588 G932 G3588 G3625 G1722 G4743 G5550
pp Dat Sg m a_ Acc Pl f t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Prep n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
to-Him ALL THE KINGdoms OF-THE OF-beING-HOMED IN PRICK OF-TIME
him inhabited-earth instant
4:6 kai eipen autw o diabolos soi dwsw thn 6 And the devil said unto him,
kai eipen autO ho diabolos soi dOsO tEn
G2532 G2036 G846 G3588 G1228 G4671 G1325 G3588
All this power will I give thee,
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Dat Sg vi Fut Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg f and the glory of them: for that
AND said to-Him THE THRU-CASTer to-YOU I-SHALL-BE-GIVING THE is delivered unto me; and to
Adversary whomsoever I will I give it.
Luke 4
exousian tauthn apasan kai thn doxan autwn oti emoi

exousian tautEn hapasan kai tEn doxan autOn hoti emoi
G1849 G3778 G537 G2532 G3588 G1391 G846 G3754 G1698
n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Pl f Conj pp 1 Dat Sg
authority this EVERY(emph.) AND THE esteem OF-them that to-ME
all(emph.) glory
paradedotai kai w ean qelw didwmi authn

paradedotai kai hO ean thelO didOmi autEn
G3860 G2532 G3739 G1437 G2309 G1325 G846
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Conj pr Dat Sg m Cond vs Pres Act 1 Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp Acc Sg f
HAS-been-BESIDE-GIVEN AND to-WHOM IF-EVER I-MAY-BE-WILLING I-AM-GIVING her
it-has-been-given-up herit
4:7 su oun ean proskunhshs enwpion mou estai sou 7If thou therefore wilt worship
su oun ean proskunEsEs enOpion mou estai sou
G4771 G3767 G1437 G4352 G1799 G3450 G2071 G4675
me, all shall be thine.
pp 2 Nom Sg Conj Cond vs Aor Act 2 Sg Adv pp 1 Gen Sg vi Fut vxx 3 Sg pp 2 Gen Sg
YOU THEN IF-EVER YOU-SHOULD-BE-worshipING IN-VIEW OF-ME SHALL-BE OF-YOU
should-be-worshiping sight-ofbefore me it-shall-be
panta
panta
G3956
a_ Nom Pl n
ALL
4:8 kai apokriqeis autw eipen o ihsous upage 8 And Jesus answered and said
kai apokritheis autO eipen ho iEsous hupage
G2532 G611 G846 G2036 G3588 G2424 G5217
unto him, Get thee behind me,
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg Satan: for it is written, Thou
AND answerING to-him said THE JESUS BE-YOU-UNDER-LEADING shalt worship the Lord thy
be-you-going-away ! God, and him only shalt thou
serve.
opisw mou satana gegraptai gar proskunhseis kurion ton
opisO mou satana gegraptai gar proskunEseis kurion ton
G3694 G3450 G4567 G1125 G1063 G4352 G2962 G3588
Adv pp 1 Gen Sg n_ Voc Sg m vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Conj vi Fut Act 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
BEHIND OF-ME SATAN it-HAS-been-WRITTEN for YOU-SHALL-BE-worshipING Master THE
me Satan ! Lord
qeon sou kai autw monw latreuseis

theon sou kai autO monO latreuseis
G2316 G4675 G2532 G846 G3441 G3000
n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg Conj pp Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m vi Fut Act 2 Sg
God OF-YOU AND to-Him ONLY YOU-SHALL-BE-offerING-DIVINE-SERVICE
you-shall-be-offering-divine-service
4:9 kai hgagen auton eis ierousalhm kai esthsen auton epi to 9 And he brought him to
kai Egagen auton eis ierousalEm kai hestEsen auton epi to
G2532 G71 G846 G1519 G2419 G2532 G2476 G846 G1909 G3588
Jerusalem, and set him on a
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Prep ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n pinnacle of the temple, and
AND he-LED Him INTO JERUSALEM AND STANDS Him ON THE said unto him, If thou be the
Son of God, cast thyself down
from hence:
pterugion tou ierou kai eipen autw ei o uios
pterugion tou hierou kai eipen autO ei ho huios
G4419 G3588 G2411 G2532 G2036 G846 G1487 G3588 G5207
n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Cond t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
flyer-let OF-THE SACRED-place AND said to-Him IF THE SON
little-wing sanctuary he-said
ei tou qeou bale seauton enteuqen katw

ei tou theou bale seauton enteuthen katO
G1488 G3588 G2316 G906 G4572 G1782 G2736
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pf 2 Acc Sg m Adv Adv
YOU-ARE OF-THE God BE-CASTING YOURself hence DOWN
be-you-casting !
4:10 gegraptai gar oti tois aggelois autou enteleitai peri 10 For it is written, He shall
gegraptai gar hoti tois aggelois autou enteleitai peri
G1125 G1063 G3754 G3588 G32 G846 G1781 G4012
give his angels charge over
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Conj Conj t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Fut midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep thee, to keep thee:
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN for that to-THE MESSENGERS OF-Him SHALL-BE-beING-directED ABOUT
it-shall-be-being-directed concerning
sou tou diafulaxai se

sou tou diaphulaxai se
G4675 G3588 G1314 G4571
pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act pp 2 Acc Sg
YOU OF-THE TO-protect YOU
4:11 kai oti epi ceirwn arousin se mhpote 11 And in [their] hands they
kai hoti epi cheirOn arousin se mEpote
G2532 G3754 G1909 G5495 G142 G4571 G3379
shall bear thee up, lest at any
Conj Conj Prep n_ Gen Pl f vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Sg Adv time thou dash thy foot against
AND that ON HANDS THEY-SHALL-BE-LIFTING YOU NO-?-when a stone.
lest-at-some-time
Luke 4
proskoyhs pros liqon ton poda sou

proskopsEs pros lithon ton poda sou
G4350 G4314 G3037 G3588 G4228 G4675
vs Aor Act 2 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
YOU-SHOULD-BE-TOWARD-STRIKING TOWARD STONE THE FOOT OF-YOU
you-should-be-dashing-against
4:12 kai apokriqeis eipen autw o ihsous oti eirhtai 12 And Jesus answering said
kai apokritheis eipen autO ho iEsous hoti eirEtai
G2532 G611 G2036 G846 G3588 G2424 G3754 G2046
unto him, It is said, Thou shalt
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Perf Pas 3 Sg not tempt the Lord thy God.
AND answerING said to-him THE JESUS that it-HAS-been-declarED
ouk ekpeiraseis kurion ton qeon sou

ouk ekpeiraseis kurion ton theon sou
G3756 G1598 G2962 G3588 G2316 G4675
Part Neg vi Fut Act 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
NOT YOU-SHALL-BE-OUT-tryING Master THE God OF-YOU
you-shall-be-putting-on-trial Lord
4:13 kai suntelesas panta peirasmon o diabolos apesth ap 13 And when the devil had
kai suntelesas panta peirasmon ho diabolos apestE ap
G2532 G4931 G3956 G3986 G3588 G1228 G868 G575
ended all the temptation, he
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep departed from him for a
AND concluding EVERY trial THE THRU-CASTer FROM-STOOD FROM season.
Adversary withdrew
autou acri kairou

autou achri kairou
G846 G891 G2540
pp Gen Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg m
Him UNTIL SEASON
appointed-time
4:14 kai upestreyen o ihsous en th dunamei tou pneumatos 14 . And Jesus returned in the
kai hupestrepsen ho iEsous en tE dunamei tou pneumatos
G2532 G5290 G3588 G2424 G1722 G3588 G1411 G3588 G4151
power of the Spirit into
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Galilee: and there went out a
AND reTURNS THE JESUS IN THE ABILITY OF-THE spirit fame of him through all the
power region round about.
eis thn galilaian kai fhmh exhlqen kaq olhs ths pericwrou
eis tEn galilaian kai phEmE exElthen kath holEs tEs perichOrou
G1519 G3588 G1056 G2532 G5345 G1831 G2596 G3650 G3588 G4066
Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep a_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f
INTO THE GALILEE AND AVERment OUT-CAME DOWN WHOLE OF-THE ABOUT-SPACE
fame came-out country-about
peri autou
peri autou
G4012 G846
Prep pp Gen Sg m
ABOUT Him
concerning
4:15 kai autos edidasken en tais sunagwgais autwn doxazomenos upo 15 And he taught in their
kai autos edidasken en tais sunagOgais autOn doxazomenos hupo
G2532 G846 G1321 G1722 G3588 G4864 G846 G1392 G5259
synagogues, being glorified of
Conj pp Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pp Gen Pl m vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m Prep all.
AND He TAUGHT IN THE TOGETHER-LEADS OF-them beING-esteemizED by
synagogues being-glorified
pantwn
pantOn
G3956
a_ Gen Pl m
ALL
4:16 kai hlqen eis thn nazareq ou hn teqrammenos kai 16 And he came to Nazareth,
kai Elthen eis tEn nazareth hou En tethrammenos kai
G2532 G2064 G1519 G3588 G3478 G3757 G2258 G5142 G2532
where he had been brought up:
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f ni proper Adv vi Impf vxx 3 Sg vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m Conj and, as his custom was, he
AND He-CAME INTO THE NAZARETH where He-WAS HAVING-been-NURTURED AND went into the synagogue on the
having-been-reared sabbath day, and stood up for
to read.
eishlqen kata to eiwqos autw en th hmera twn
eisElthen kata to eiOthos autO en tE hEmera tOn
G1525 G2596 G3588 G1486 G846 G1722 G3588 G2250 G3588
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n vp 2Perf Act Acc Sg n pp Dat Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl n
He-INTO-CAME according-to THE HAVING-CUSTOMED to-Him IN THE DAY OF-THE
he-entered having-been-customed
sabbatwn eis thn sunagwghn kai anesth anagnwnai

sabbatOn eis tEn sunagOgEn kai anestE anagnOnai
G4521 G1519 G3588 G4864 G2532 G450 G314
n_ Gen Pl n Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act
SABBATHS INTO THE TOGETHER-LEAD AND He-UP-STOOD TO-read
synagogue rose
Luke 4
4:17 kai epedoqh autw biblion hsaiou tou profhtou kai 17 And there was delivered
kai epedothE autO biblion Esaiou tou prophEtou kai
G2532 G1929 G846 G975 G2268 G3588 G4396 G2532
unto him the book of the
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg n n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj prophet Esaias. And when he
AND WAS-ON-GIVEN to-Him SCROLLet OF-ISAIAH THE BEFORE-AVERer AND had opened the book, he found
was-handed prophet the place where it was written,
anaptuxas to biblion euren ton topon ou hn

anaptuxas to biblion heuren ton topon hou En
G380 G3588 G975 G2147 G3588 G5117 G3757 G2258
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Adv vi Impf vxx 3 Sg
UP-ROTATing THE SCROLLet He-FOUND THE PLACE where it-WAS
unfurling
gegrammenon
gegrammenon
G1125
vp Perf Pas Nom Sg n
HAVING-been-WRITTEN
4:18 pneuma kuriou ep eme ou eneken ecrisen me 18 The Spirit of the Lord [is]
pneuma kuriou ep eme hou heneken echrisen me
G4151 G2962 G1909 G1691 G3739 G1752 G5548 G3165
upon me, because he hath
n_ Nom Sg n n_ Gen Sg m Prep pp 1 Acc Sg pr Gen Sg n Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg anointed me to preach the
spirit OF-Master ON ME OF-WHICH on-account-of He-ANOINTS ME gospel to the poor; he hath sent
of-Lord which me to heal the brokenhearted,
to preach deliverance to the
euaggelizesqai ptwcois apestalken me iasasqai tous captives, and recovering of
euaggelizesthai ptOchois apestalken me iasasthai tous sight to the blind, to set at
G2097 G4434 G649 G3165 G2390 G3588
vn Pres Mid a_ Dat Pl m vi Perf Act 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg vn Aor midD t_ Acc Pl m liberty them that are bruised,
TO-BE-WELL-MESSAGizING to-POOR-ones He-HAS-commissionED ME TO-BE-HEALING THE
to-be-bringing-the-well-message to-poor-ones
suntetrimmenous thn kardian khruxai aicmalwtois afesin kai

suntetrimmenous tEn kardian kEruxai aichmalOtois aphesin kai
G4937 G3588 G2588 G2784 G164 G859 G2532
vp Perf Pas Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vn Aor Act n_ Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg f Conj
ones-HAVING-been-crushED THE HEART TO-PROCLAIM to-captives FROM-LETTing AND
ones-having-been-crushed to-herald pardon
tuflois anableyin aposteilai teqrausmenous en afesei

tuphlois anablepsin aposteilai tethrausmenous en aphesei
G5185 G309 G649 G2352 G1722 G859
a_ Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg f vn Aor Act vp Perf Pas Acc Pl m Prep n_ Dat Sg f
to-BLIND-ones UP-looking TO-commission ones-HAVING-been-SHIVERED IN FROM-LETTing
to-blind-ones receiving-of-sight to-dispatch ones-having-been-oppressed pardon
4:19 khruxai eniauton kuriou dekton 19 To preach the acceptable

kEruxai eniauton kuriou dekton
G2784 G1763 G2962 G1184
year of the Lord.
vn Aor Act n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg m a_ Acc Sg m
TO-PROCLAIM year OF-Master RECEIVable
to-herald of-Lord acceptable
4:20 kai ptuxas to biblion apodous tw uphreth ekaqisen 20 And he closed the book, and
kai ptuxas to biblion apodous tO hupEretE ekathisen
G2532 G4428 G3588 G975 G591 G3588 G5257 G2523
he gave [it] again to the
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg minister, and sat down. And
AND ROTATing THE SCROLLet FROM-GIVING to-THE subservient He-is-seated the eyes of all them that were
furling giving-back-it deputy in the synagogue were fastened
on him.
kai pantwn en th sunagwgh oi ofqalmoi hsan atenizontes
kai pantOn en tE sunagOgE hoi ophthalmoi Esan atenizontes
G2532 G3956 G1722 G3588 G4864 G3588 G3788 G2258 G816
Conj a_ Gen Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Impf vxx 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
AND OF-ALL IN THE TOGETHER-LEAD THE VIEWers WERE STRETCHING
synagogue eyes looking-intently
autw
autO
G846
pp Dat Sg m
to-Him
4:21 hrxato de legein pros autous oti shmeron peplhrwtai h 21 And he began to say unto
Erxato de legein pros autous hoti sEmeron peplErOtai hE
G756 G1161 G3004 G4314 G846 G3754 G4594 G4137 G3588
them, This day is this scripture
vi Aor midD 3 Sg Conj vn Pres Act Prep pp Acc Pl m Conj Adv vi Perf Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f fulfilled in your ears.
He-begins YET TO-BE-sayING TOWARD them that toDAY HAS-been-FILLED THE
has-been-fulfilled
grafh auth en tois wsin umwn

graphE hautE en tois Osin humOn
G1124 G3778 G1722 G3588 G3775 G5216
n_ Nom Sg f pd Nom Sg f Prep t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n pp 2 Gen Pl
WRITing this IN THE EARS OF-YOU(p)
scripture of-ye
Luke 4
4:22 kai pantes emarturoun autw kai eqaumazon epi tois logois ths 22 And all bare him witness,
kai pantes emarturoun autO kai ethaumazon epi tois logois tEs
G2532 G3956 G3140 G846 G2532 G2296 G1909 G3588 G3056 G3588
and wondered at the gracious
Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m t_ Gen Sg f words which proceeded out of
AND ALL witnessED to-Him AND MARVELED ON THE sayings OF-THE his mouth. And they said, Is
testified words not this Joseph's son?
caritos tois ekporeuomenois ek tou stomatos autou kai elegon

charitos tois ekporeuomenois ek tou stomatos autou kai elegon
G5485 G3588 G1607 G1537 G3588 G4750 G846 G2532 G3004
n_ Gen Sg f t_ Dat Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl
grace to-THE OUT-GOING OUT OF-THE MOUTH OF-Him AND THEY-said
the ones-issuing
ouc outos estin o uios iwshf

ouch houtos estin ho huios iOsEph
G3756 G3778 G2076 G3588 G5207 G2501
Part Neg pd Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m ni proper
NOT this IS THE SON of-JOSEPH
of-Joseph
4:23 kai eipen pros autous pantws ereite moi thn 23 And he said unto them, Ye
kai eipen pros autous pantOs ereite moi tEn
G2532 G2036 G4314 G846 G3843 G2046 G3427 G3588
will surely say unto me this
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m Adv vi Fut Act 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg t_ Acc Sg f proverb, Physician, heal
AND He-said TOWARD them ALL-ly YE-SHALL-BE-declarING to-ME THE thyself: whatsoever we have
undoubtedly heard done in Capernaum, do
also here in thy country.
parabolhn tauthn iatre qerapeuson seauton osa hkousamen genomena
parabolEn tautEn iatre therapeuson seauton hosa Ekousamen genomena
G3850 G3778 G2395 G2323 G4572 G3745 G191 G1096
n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f n_ Voc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pf 2 Acc Sg m pk Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 1 Pl vp 2Aor midD Acc Pl n
BESIDE-CAST this HEALer ! cure YOURself as-much-as WE-HEAR BECOMING
parable physician ! cure-you ! whatever occurring(p)
en th kapernaoum poihson kai wde en th patridi sou

en tE kapernaoum poiEson kai hOde en tE patridi sou
G1722 G3588 G2584 G4160 G2532 G5602 G1722 G3588 G3968 G4675
Prep t_ Dat Sg f ni proper vm Aor Act 2 Sg Conj Adv Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg
IN THE CAPERNAUM DO AND here IN THE FATHER[-place] OF-YOU
do-you ! also own-country
4:24 eipen de amhn legw umin oti oudeis profhths dektos 24 And he said, Verily I say
eipen de amEn legO humin hoti oudeis prophEtEs dektos
G2036 G1161 G281 G3004 G5213 G3754 G3762 G4396 G1184
unto you, No prophet is
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m accepted in his own country.
He-said YET AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that NOT-YET-ONE BEFORE-AVERer RECEIVable
verily to-ye not-one prophet acceptable
estin en th patridi autou

estin en tE patridi autou
G2076 G1722 G3588 G3968 G846
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m
IS IN THE FATHER[-place] OF-him
own-country
4:25 ep alhqeias de legw umin pollai chrai hsan en tais 25 But I tell you of a truth,
ep alEtheias de legO humin pollai chErai Esan en tais
G1909 G225 G1161 G3004 G5213 G4183 G5503 G2258 G1722 G3588
many widows were in Israel in
Prep n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl a_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Pl f the days of Elias, when the
ON TRUTH YET I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) MANY WIDOWS WERE IN THE heaven was shut up three years
to-ye and six months, when great
famine was throughout all the
hmerais hliou en tw israhl ote ekleisqh o ouranos epi land;
hEmerais hEliou en tO israEl hote ekleisthE ho ouranos epi
G2250 G2243 G1722 G3588 G2474 G3753 G2808 G3588 G3772 G1909
n_ Dat Pl f n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg m ni proper Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep
DAYS OF-ELIAS IN THE ISRAEL when IS-LOCKED THE heaven ON
of-Elijah
eth tria kai mhnas ex ws egeneto limos megas epi pasan

etE tria kai mEnas hex hOs egeneto limos megas epi pasan
G2094 G5140 G2532 G3376 G1803 G5613 G1096 G3042 G3173 G1909 G3956
n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n Conj n_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom Adv vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Prep a_ Acc Sg f
YEARS THREE AND MONTHS SIX AS BECAME FAMINE GREAT ON EVERY
came-to-be onover entire
thn ghn
tEn gEn
G3588 G1093
THE LAND
4:26 kai pros oudemian autwn epemfqh hlias ei mh eis sarepta 26 But unto none of them was
kai pros oudemian autOn epemphthE Elias ei mE eis sarepta
G2532 G4314 G3762 G846 G3992 G2243 G1487 G3361 G1519 G4558
Elias sent, save unto Sarepta,
Conj Prep a_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Pl f vi Aor Pas 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Cond Part Neg Prep n_ Acc Pl n [a city] of Sidon, unto a
AND TOWARD NOT-YET-ONE OF-them WAS-SENT ELIAS IF NO INTO SAREPTA woman [that was] a widow.
none Elijah
Luke 4
ths sidwnos pros gunaika chran

tEs sidOnos pros gunaika chEran
G3588 G4605 G4314 G1135 G5503
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
OF-THE SIDON TOWARD WOMAN WIDOW
4:27 kai polloi leproi hsan epi elissaiou tou profhtou en 27 And many lepers were in
kai polloi leproi Esan epi elissaiou tou prophEtou en
G2532 G4183 G3015 G2258 G1909 G1666 G3588 G4396 G1722
Israel in the time of Eliseus the
Conj a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Prep n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep prophet; and none of them was
AND MANY lepers WERE ON ELISSAIOS THE BEFORE-AVERer IN cleansed, saving Naaman the
Elisha prophet Syrian.
tw israhl kai oudeis autwn ekaqarisqh ei mh neeman o

tO israEl kai oudeis autOn ekatharisthE ei mE neeman ho
G3588 G2474 G2532 G3762 G846 G2511 G1487 G3361 G3497 G3588
t_ Dat Sg m ni proper Conj a_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Pl m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Cond Part Neg ni proper t_ Nom Sg m
THE ISRAEL AND NOT-YET-ONE OF-them IS-cleansED IF NO NAAMAN THE
none
suros
suros
G4948
n_ Nom Sg m
SYRIAN
4:28 kai eplhsqhsan pantes qumou en th sunagwgh akouontes 28 And all they in the
kai eplEsthEsan pantes thumou en tE sunagOgE akouontes
G2532 G4130 G3956 G2372 G1722 G3588 G4864 G191
synagogue, when they heard
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m these things, were filled with
AND ARE-FILLED ALL OF-fury IN THE TOGETHER-LEAD HEARING wrath,
all-men synagogue
tauta
tauta
G5023
pd Acc Pl n
these
these-things
4:29 kai anastantes exebalon auton exw ths polews kai 29 And rose up, and thrust him
kai anastantes exebalon auton exO tEs poleOs kai
G2532 G450 G1544 G846 G1854 G3588 G4172 G2532
out of the city, and led him
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Adv t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj unto the brow of the hill
AND UP-STANDing THEY-OUT-CAST(past) Him OUT OF-THE city AND whereon their city was built,
rising they-cast-out (past) outside that they might cast him down
headlong.
hgagon auton ews ths ofruos tou orous ef ou h
Egagon auton heOs tEs ophruos tou orous eph hou hE
G71 G846 G2193 G3588 G3790 G3588 G3735 G1909 G3739 G3588
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Prep pr Gen Sg n t_ Nom Sg f
THEY-LED Him TILL OF-THE BROW OF-THE mountain ON WHICH THE
the
polis autwn wkodomhto eis to katakrhmnisai auton

polis autOn OkodomEto eis to katakrEmnisai auton
G4172 G846 G3618 G1519 G3588 G2630 G846
n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Pl m vi Plup Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Act pp Acc Sg m
city OF-them HAD-been-HOME-BUILDED INTO THE TO-DOWN-HANG Him
had-been-built to-push-over-the-precipice
4:30 autos de dielqwn dia mesou autwn eporeueto 30 But he passing through the
autos de dielthOn dia mesou autOn eporeueto
G846 G1161 G1330 G1223 G3319 G846 G4198
midst of them went his way,
pp Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep a_ Gen Sg n pp Gen Pl m vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
He YET THRU-COMING THRU MIDst OF-them WENT
passing-through through
4:31 kai kathlqen eis kapernaoum polin ths galilaias kai hn 31 . And came down to
kai katElthen eis kapernaoum polin tEs galilaias kai En
G2532 G2718 G1519 G2584 G4172 G3588 G1056 G2532 G2258
Capernaum, a city of Galilee,
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep ni proper n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg and taught them on the sabbath
AND He-DOWN-CAME INTO CAPERNAUM city OF-THE GALILEE AND He-WAS days.
he-came-down
didaskwn autous en tois sabbasin

didaskOn autous en tois sabbasin
G1321 G846 G1722 G3588 G4521
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m Prep t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n
TEACHING them IN THE SABBATHS
4:32 kai exeplhssonto epi th didach autou oti en exousia hn 32 And they were astonished at
kai exeplEssonto epi tE didachE autou hoti en exousia En
G2532 G1605 G1909 G3588 G1322 G846 G3754 G1722 G1849 G2258
his doctrine: for his word was
Conj vi Impf Pas 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj Prep n_ Dat Sg f vi Impf vxx 3 Sg with power.
AND THEY-were-astonishED ON THE TEACHing OF-Him that IN authority WAS
Luke 4
o logos autou
ho logos autou
G3588 G3056 G846
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m
THE saying OF-Him
word
4:33 kai en th sunagwgh hn anqrwpos ecwn pneuma 33 And in the synagogue there
kai en tE sunagOgE En anthrOpos echOn pneuma
G2532 G1722 G3588 G4864 G2258 G444 G2192 G4151
was a man, which had a spirit
Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi Impf vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg n of an unclean devil, and cried
AND IN THE TOGETHER-LEAD WAS human HAVING spirit out with a loud voice,
synagogue
daimoniou akaqartou kai anekraxen fwnh megalh

daimoniou akathartou kai anekraxen phOnE megalE
G1140 G169 G2532 G349 G5456 G3173
n_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f
OF-demon UN-clean AND he-UP-CRIES to-SOUND GREAT
unclean it-cries-out to-voice loud
4:34 legwn ea ti hmin kai soi ihsou nazarhne hlqes 34 Saying, Let [us] alone; what
legOn ea ti hEmin kai soi iEsou nazarEne Elthes
G3004 G1436 G5101 G2254 G2532 G4671 G2424 G3479 G2064
have we to do with thee, [thou]
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Inj pi Nom Sg n pp 1 Dat Pl Conj pp 2 Dat Sg n_ Voc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg Jesus of Nazareth? art thou
sayING HA ! ANY to-US AND to-YOU JESUS ! NAZAREAN ! YOU-CAME come to destroy us? I know
what ? thee who thou art; the Holy
One of God.
apolesai hmas oida se tis ei o agios
apolesai hEmas oida se tis ei ho hagios
G622 G2248 G1492 G4571 G5101 G1488 G3588 G40
vn Aor Act pp 1 Acc Pl vi Perf Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg pi Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
TO-destroy US I-HAVE-PERCEIVED YOU ANY ARE THE HOLY-One
I-am-aware-of who ? you-are holy-one
tou qeou
tou theou
G3588 G2316
OF-THE God
4:35 kai epetimhsen autw o ihsous legwn fimwqhti kai 35 And Jesus rebuked him,
kai epetimEsen autO ho iEsous legOn phimOthEti kai
G2532 G2008 G846 G3588 G2424 G3004 G5392 G2532
saying, Hold thy peace, and
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg n t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm Aor Pas 2 Sg Conj come out of him. And when
AND rebukES to-it THE JESUS sayING BE-BEING-MUZZLED AND the devil had thrown him in the
it be-you-still ! midst, he came out of him, and
hurt him not.
exelqe ex autou kai riyan auton to daimonion eis
exelthe ex autou kai ripsan auton to daimonion eis
G1831 G1537 G846 G2532 G4496 G846 G3588 G1140 G1519
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg n pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Prep
BE-OUT-COMING OUT OF-him AND TOSSing him THE demon INTO
be-you-coming-out ! pitching
to meson exhlqen ap autou mhden blayan auton

to meson exElthen ap autou mEden blapsan auton
G3588 G3319 G1831 G575 G846 G3367 G984 G846
t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m a_ Acc Sg n vp Aor Act Nom Sg n pp Acc Sg m
THE MIDst OUT-CAME FROM him NO-YET-ONE HARMing him
came-out nothing
4:36 kai egeneto qambos epi pantas kai sunelaloun pros 36 And they were all amazed,
kai egeneto thambos epi pantas kai sunelaloun pros
G2532 G1096 G2285 G1909 G3956 G2532 G4814 G4314
and spake among themselves,
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg n Prep a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep saying, What a word [is] this!
AND BECAME AWE ON ALL AND THEY-TOGETHER-TALKED TOWARD for with authority and power
they-conferred he commandeth the unclean
spirits, and they come out.
allhlous legontes tis o logos outos oti en exousia
allElous legontes tis ho logos houtos hoti en exousia
G240 G3004 G5101 G3588 G3056 G3778 G3754 G1722 G1849
pc Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pi Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m Conj Prep n_ Dat Sg f
one-another sayING ANY THE saying this that IN authority
what ? word
kai dunamei epitassei tois akaqartois pneumasin kai exercontai

kai dunamei epitassei tois akathartois pneumasin kai exerchontai
G2532 G1411 G2004 G3588 G169 G4151 G2532 G1831
Conj n_ Dat Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl n a_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
AND ABILITY He-IS-enjoinING to-THE UN-clean spirits AND THEY-ARE-OUT-COMING
power the unclean they-are-coming-out
4:37 kai exeporeueto hcos peri autou eis panta topon ths 37 And the fame of him went
kai exeporeueto Echos peri autou eis panta topon tEs
G2532 G1607 G2279 G4012 G846 G1519 G3956 G5117 G3588
out into every place of the
Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Prep pp Gen Sg m Prep a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg f country round about.
AND OUT-WENT RESOUND ABOUT Him INTO EVERY PLACE OF-THE
went-out hubbub concerning
Luke 4
pericwrou
perichOrou
G4066
a_ Gen Sg f
ABOUT-SPACE
country-about
4:38 anastas de ek ths sunagwghs eishlqen eis thn oikian 38 And he arose out of the
anastas de ek tEs sunagOgEs eisElthen eis tEn oikian
G450 G1161 G1537 G3588 G4864 G1525 G1519 G3588 G3614
synagogue, and entered into
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Simon's house. And Simon's
UP-STANDing YET OUT OF-THE TOGETHER-LEAD He-INTO-CAME INTO THE HOME wife's mother was taken with a
rising synagogue he-entered house great fever; and they besought
him for her.
simwnos h penqera de tou simwnos hn sunecomenh
simOnos hE penthera de tou simOnos En sunechomenE
G4613 G3588 G3994 G1161 G3588 G4613 G2258 G4912
n_ Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg vp Pres Pas Nom Sg f
OF-SIMON THE mother-IN-LAW YET OF-THE SIMON WAS beING-pressED
puretw megalw kai hrwthsan auton peri auths

puretO megalO kai ErOtEsan auton peri autEs
G4446 G3173 G2532 G2065 G846 G4012 G846
n_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Prep pp Gen Sg f
to-fever GREAT AND THEY-ask Him ABOUT her
high
4:39 kai epistas epanw auths epetimhsen tw puretw kai afhken 39 And he stood over her, and
kai epistas epanO autEs epetimEsen tO puretO kai aphEken
G2532 G2186 G1883 G846 G2008 G3588 G4446 G2532 G863
rebuked the fever; and it left
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Adv pp Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg her: and immediately she arose
AND ON-STANDing ON-UP OF-her He-rebukES to-THE fever AND it-FROM-LETS and ministered unto them.
standing-by over her the it-leaves
authn paracrhma de anastasa dihkonei autois

autEn parachrEma de anastasa diEkonei autois
G846 G3916 G1161 G450 G1247 G846
pp Acc Sg f Adv Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m
her instantly YET UP-STANDing she-THRU-SERVED to-them
rising she-served them
4:40 dunontos de tou hliou pantes osoi eicon asqenountas 40 Now when the sun was
dunontos de tou hEliou pantes hosoi eichon asthenountas
G1416 G1161 G3588 G2246 G3956 G3745 G2192 G770
setting, all they that had any
vp Pres Act Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m a_ Nom Pl m pk Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Acc Pl m sick with divers diseases
OF-SLIPPING YET OF-THE SUN ALL as-many-as HAD ones-beING-UN-FIRM brought them unto him; and he
of-setting whoever ones-being-infirm laid his hands on every one of
them, and healed them.
nosois poikilais hgagon autous pros auton o de eni
nosois poikilais Egagon autous pros auton ho de heni
G3554 G4164 G71 G846 G4314 G846 G3588 G1161 G1520
n_ Dat Pl f a_ Dat Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Pl m Prep pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Dat Sg m
to-DISEASES VARIOUS LED them TOWARD Him THE YET to-ONE
ekastw autwn tas ceiras epiqeis eqerapeusen autous

hekastO autOn tas cheiras epitheis etherapeusen autous
G1538 G846 G3588 G5495 G2007 G2323 G846
a_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Pl m t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m
EACH OF-them THE HANDS ON-PLACING He-curES them
placing-on
4:41 exhrceto de kai daimonia apo pollwn krazonta kai 41 And devils also came out of
exErcheto de kai daimonia apo pollOn krazonta kai
G1831 G1161 G2532 G1140 G575 G4183 G2896 G2532
many, crying out, and saying,
vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj Conj n_ Nom Pl n Prep a_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl n Conj Thou art Christ the Son of
OUT-CAME YET AND demons FROM MANY CRYING AND God. And he rebuking [them]
came-out also suffered them not to speak: for
they knew that he was Christ.
legonta oti su ei o cristos o uios tou
legonta hoti su ei ho christos ho huios tou
G3004 G3754 G4771 G1488 G3588 G5547 G3588 G5207 G3588
vp Pres Act Nom Pl n Conj pp 2 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
sayING that YOU ARE THE ANOINTED THE SON OF-THE
Christ
qeou kai epitimwn ouk eia auta lalein oti

theou kai epitimOn ouk eia auta lalein hoti
G2316 G2532 G2008 G3756 G1439 G846 G2980 G3754
n_ Gen Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Part Neg vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl n vn Pres Act Conj
God AND rebukING NOT He-LEFT them TO-BE-TALKING that
rebuking-them he-let to-be-speaking
hdeisan ton criston auton einai

Edeisan ton christon auton einai
G1492 G3588 G5547 G846 G1511
vi Plup Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Acc Sg m vn Pres vxx
THEY-HAD-PERCEIVED THE ANOINTED Him TO-BE
Christ
Luke 4 - Luke 5
4:42 genomenhs de hmeras exelqwn eporeuqh eis erhmon topon 42 And when it was day, he
genomenEs de hEmeras exelthOn eporeuthE eis erEmon topon
G1096 G1161 G2250 G1831 G4198 G1519 G2048 G5117
departed and went into a desert
vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor pasD 3 Sg Prep a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m place: and the people sought
OF-BECOMING YET DAY OUT-COMING He-WAS-GONE INTO DESOLATE PLACE him, and came unto him, and
of-day coming-out he-went stayed him, that he should not
depart from them.
kai oi ocloi ezhtoun auton kai hlqon ews autou kai
kai hoi ochloi ezEtoun auton kai Elthon heOs autou kai
G2532 G3588 G3793 G2212 G846 G2532 G2064 G2193 G846 G2532
Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj pp Gen Sg m Conj
AND THE THRONGS SOUGHT Him AND THEY-CAME TILL OF-Him AND
him
kateicon auton tou mh poreuesqai ap autwn

kateichon auton tou mE poreuesthai ap autOn
G2722 G846 G3588 G3361 G4198 G575 G846
vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m Part Neg vn Pres midD/pasD Prep pp Gen Pl m
THEY-DOWN-HAD Him OF-THE NO TO-BE-GOING FROM them
detained
4:43 o de eipen pros autous oti kai tais eterais polesin 43 And he said unto them, I
ho de eipen pros autous hoti kai tais heterais polesin
G3588 G1161 G2036 G4314 G846 G3754 G2532 G3588 G2087 G4172
must preach the kingdom of
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m Conj Conj t_ Dat Pl f a_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f God to other cities also: for
THE YET He-said TOWARD them that AND to-THE DIFFERENT cities therefore am I sent.
also
euaggelisasqai me dei thn basileian tou qeou oti eis

euaggelisasthai me dei tEn basileian tou theou hoti eis
G2097 G3165 G1163 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316 G3754 G1519
vn Aor Mid pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj Prep
TO-WELL-MESSAGize ME it-IS-BINDING THE KINGdom OF-THE God that INTO
to-bring-the-well-message of-the
touto apestalmai
touto apestalmai
G5124 G649
pd Acc Sg n vi Perf Pas 1 Sg
this I-HAVE-been-commissionED
4:44 kai hn khrusswn en tais sunagwgais ths galilaias 44 And he preached in the
kai En kErussOn en tais sunagOgais tEs galilaias
G2532 G2258 G2784 G1722 G3588 G4864 G3588 G1056
synagogues of Galilee.
Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
AND He-WAS PROCLAIMING IN THE TOGETHER-LEADS OF-THE GALILEE
heralding synagogues
Luke 5
5:1 egeneto de en tw ton oclon epikeisqai autw tou 1 . And it came to pass, that, as
egeneto de en tO ton ochlon epikeisthai autO tou
G1096 G1161 G1722 G3588 G3588 G3793 G1945 G846 G3588
the people pressed upon him to
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vn Pres midD/pasD pp Dat Sg m t_ Gen Sg m hear the word of God, he stood
BECAME YET IN THE THE THRONG TO-BE-ON-LYING to-Him OF-THE by the lake of Gennesaret,
it-occurred to-be-being-importune
akouein ton logon tou qeou kai autos hn

akouein ton logon tou theou kai autos En
G191 G3588 G3056 G3588 G2316 G2532 G846 G2258
vn Pres Act t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj pp Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg
TO-BE-HEARING THE saying OF-THE God AND He WAS
word also
estws para thn limnhn gennhsaret

hestOs para tEn limnEn gennEsaret
G2476 G3844 G3588 G3041 G1082
vp Perf Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f ni proper
HAVING-STOOD BESIDE THE LAKE GENNESARET
standing
5:2 kai eiden duo ploia estwta para thn limnhn oi de 2And saw two ships standing
kai eiden duo ploia hestOta para tEn limnEn hoi de
G2532 G1492 G1417 G4143 G2476 G3844 G3588 G3041 G3588 G1161
by the lake: but the fishermen
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n vp Perf Act Acc Pl n Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Nom Pl m Conj were gone out of them, and
AND He-PERCEIVED TWO FLOATers HAVING-STOOD BESIDE THE LAKE THE YET were washing [their] nets.
ships standing
alieis apobantes ap autwn apeplunan ta diktua

halieis apobantes ap autOn apeplunan ta diktua
G231 G576 G575 G846 G637 G3588 G1350
n_ Nom Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep pp Gen Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
fishers FROM-STEPPing FROM them FROM-PLUNGE THE NETS
stepping-off rinse-off
5:3 embas de eis en twn ploiwn o hn tou 3 And he entered into one of
embas de eis hen tOn ploiOn ho En tou
G1684 G1161 G1519 G1520 G3588 G4143 G3739 G2258 G3588
the ships, which was Simon's,
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj Prep a_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n pr Nom Sg n vi Impf vxx 3 Sg t_ Gen Sg m and prayed him that he would
IN-STEPPing YET INTO ONE OF-THE FLOATers WHICH WAS OF-THE thrust out a little from the land.
stepping-in ships And he sat down, and taught
the people out of the ship.
simwnos hrwthsen auton apo ths ghs epanagagein oligon kai
simOnos ErOtEsen auton apo tEs gEs epanagagein oligon kai
G4613 G2065 G846 G575 G3588 G1093 G1877 G3641 G2532
n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vn 2Aor Act a_ Acc Sg m Conj
SIMON He-asks him FROM THE LAND TO-BE-ON-UP-LEADING FEW AND
to-be-backing-up slightly
kaqisas edidasken ek tou ploiou tous oclous

kathisas edidasken ek tou ploiou tous ochlous
G2523 G1321 G1537 G3588 G4143 G3588 G3793
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
being-seated He-TAUGHT OUT OF-THE FLOATer THE THRONGS
ship
5:4 ws de epausato lalwn eipen pros ton simwna 4 Now when he had left
hOs de epausato lalOn eipen pros ton simOna
G5613 G1161 G3973 G2980 G2036 G4314 G3588 G4613
speaking, he said unto Simon,
Adv Conj vi Aor Mid 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Launch out into the deep, and
AS YET He-CEASES TALKING He-said TOWARD THE SIMON let down your nets for a
speaking draught.
epanagage eis to baqos kai calasate ta diktua umwn eis

epanagage eis to bathos kai chalasate ta diktua humOn eis
G1877 G1519 G3588 G899 G2532 G5465 G3588 G1350 G5216 G1519
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp 2 Gen Pl Prep
YOU-BE-ON-UP-LEADING INTO THE DEPTH AND LOWER THE NETS OF-YOU(p) INTO
be-you-backing-up ! lower-ye ! of-ye
agran
agran
G61
n_ Acc Sg f
CATCH
5:5 kai apokriqeis o simwn eipen autw epistata di 5 And Simon answering said
kai apokritheis ho simOn eipen autO epistata di
G2532 G611 G3588 G4613 G2036 G846 G1988 G1223
unto him, Master, we have
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m Prep toiled all the night, and have
AND answerING THE SIMON said to-Him Adept ! THRU taken nothing: nevertheless at
Doctor ! through thy word I will let down the
net.
olhs ths nuktos kopiasantes ouden elabomen epi de tw
holEs tEs nuktos kopiasantes ouden elabomen epi de tO
G3650 G3588 G3571 G2872 G3762 G2983 G1909 G1161 G3588
a_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vp Aor Act Nom Pl m a_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl Prep Conj t_ Dat Sg n
WHOLE OF-THE NIGHT toiling NOT-YET-ONE WE-GOT ON YET THE
the nothing
Luke 5
rhmati sou calasw to diktuon

rEmati sou chalasO to diktuon
G4487 G4675 G5465 G3588 G1350
n_ Dat Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg vi Fut Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
declaration OF-YOU I-SHALL-BE-LOWERING THE NET
5:6 kai touto poihsantes sunekleisan icquwn plhqos polu 6And when they had this
kai touto poiEsantes sunekleisan ichthuOn plEthos polu
G2532 G5124 G4160 G4788 G2486 G4128 G4183
done, they inclosed a great
Conj pd Acc Sg n vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Gen Pl m n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n multitude of fishes: and their
AND this DOing THEY-TOGETHER-LOCK OF-FISHES multitude MANY net brake.
they-impound vast
dierrhgnuto de to diktuon autwn

dierrEgnuto de to diktuon autOn
G1284 G1161 G3588 G1350 G846
vi Impf Pas 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Pl m
was-THRU-BURSTED YET THE NET OF-them
tore-through
5:7 kai kateneusan tois metocois tois en tw eterw ploiw 7 And they beckoned unto
kai kateneusan tois metochois tois en tO heterO ploiO
G2532 G2656 G3588 G3353 G3588 G1722 G3588 G2087 G4143
[their] partners, which were in
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m t_ Dat Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n the other ship, that they should
AND THEY-DOWN-NOD to-THE WITH-HAVers THE IN THE DIFFERENT FLOATer come and help them. And they
they-beckon partners ship came, and filled both the ships,
so that they began to sink.
tou elqontas sullabesqai autois kai hlqon kai eplhsan
tou elthontas sullabesthai autois kai Elthon kai eplEsan
G3588 G2064 G4815 G846 G2532 G2064 G2532 G4130
t_ Gen Sg m vp 2Aor Act Acc Pl m vn 2Aor Mid pp Dat Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
OF-THE COMING TO-BE-TOGETHER-GETTING to-them AND THEY-CAME AND THEY-FILL
ones-coming to-be-helping them
amfotera ta ploia wste buqizesqai auta

amphotera ta ploia hOste buthizesthai auta
G297 G3588 G4143 G5620 G1036 G846
a_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Conj vn Pres Pas pp Nom Pl n
both THE FLOATers AS-BESIDES TO-BE-beING-SUBMERGED them
ships so-that to-be-being-swamped
5:8 idwn de simwn petros prosepesen tois gonasin tou 8 When Simon Peter saw [it],
idOn de simOn petros prosepesen tois gonasin tou
G1492 G1161 G4613 G4074 G4363 G3588 G1119 G3588
he fell down at Jesus'knees,
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n t_ Gen Sg m saying, Depart from me; for I
PERCEIVING YET SIMON Peter TOWARD-FALLS to-THE KNEES OF-THE am a sinful man, O Lord.
perceiving-it prostrates
ihsou legwn exelqe ap emou oti anhr amartwlos

iEsou legOn exelthe ap emou hoti anEr hamartOlos
G2424 G3004 G1831 G575 G1700 G3754 G435 G268
n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep pp 1 Gen Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
JESUS sayING BE-OUT-COMING FROM ME that MAN misser
be-you-coming-away ! sinner
eimi kurie
eimi kurie
G1510 G2962
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg n_ Voc Sg m
I-AM Master !
Lord !
5:9 qambos gar periescen auton kai pantas tous sun autw epi 9 For he was astonished, and
thambos gar perieschen auton kai pantas tous sun autO epi
G2285 G1063 G4023 G846 G2532 G3956 G3588 G4862 G846 G1909
all that were with him, at the
n_ Nom Sg n Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m Prep pp Dat Sg m Prep draught of the fishes which
AWE for ABOUT-has-HAD him AND ALL THE-ones TOGETHER to-him ON they had taken:
engulfs the-ones togetherwith him
th agra twn icquwn h sunelabon

tE agra tOn ichthuOn hE sunelabon
G3588 G61 G3588 G2486 G3739 G4815
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pr Dat Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THE CATCH OF-THE FISHES WHICH THEY-TOGETHER-GOT
they-jointly-took
5:10 omoiws de kai iakwbon kai iwannhn uious zebedaiou oi hsan 10 And so [was] also James,
homoiOs de kai iakObon kai iOannEn huious zebedaiou hoi Esan
G3668 G1161 G2532 G2385 G2532 G2491 G5207 G2199 G3739 G2258
and John, the sons of Zebedee,
Adv Conj Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Sg m pr Nom Pl m vi Impf vxx 3 Pl which were partners with
LIKE-AS YET AND JACOBUS AND JOHN SONS OF-ZEBEDEE WHICH WERE Simon. And Jesus said unto
likewise also James who Simon, Fear not; from
henceforth thou shalt catch
koinwnoi tw simwni kai eipen pros ton simwna o men.
koinOnoi tO simOni kai eipen pros ton simOna ho
G2844 G3588 G4613 G2532 G2036 G4314 G3588 G4613 G3588
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
communioners to-THE SIMON AND said TOWARD THE SIMON THE
mates
Luke 5
ihsous mh fobou apo tou nun anqrwpous esh

iEsous mE phobou apo tou nun anthrOpous esE
G2424 G3361 G5399 G575 G3588 G3568 G444 G2071
n_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m Adv n_ Acc Pl m vi Fut vxx 2 Sg
JESUS NO YOU-BE-FEARING FROM THE NOW humans YOU-SHALL-BE
be-you-fearing !
zwgrwn
zOgrOn
G2221
LIVE-CATCHING
catching-alive
5:11 kai katagagontes ta ploia epi thn ghn afentes apanta 11 And when they had brought
kai katagagontes ta ploia epi tEn gEn aphentes hapanta
G2532 G2609 G3588 G4143 G1909 G3588 G1093 G863 G537
their ships to land, they
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m a_ Acc Pl n forsook all, and followed him.
AND DOWN-LEADING THE FLOATers ON THE LAND FROM-LETTING ALL(emph.)
landing ships leaving
hkolouqhsan autw
EkolouthEsan autO
G190 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
THEY-follow to-Him
him
5:12 kai egeneto en tw einai auton en mia twn polewn 12 . And it came to pass, when
kai egeneto en tO einai auton en mia tOn poleOn
G2532 G1096 G1722 G3588 G1511 G846 G1722 G1520 G3588 G4172
he was in a certain city, behold
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres vxx pp Acc Sg m Prep a_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f a man full of leprosy: who
AND it-BECAME IN THE TO-BE Him IN ONE OF-THE cities seeing Jesus fell on [his] face,
it-occurred and besought him, saying,
Lord, if thou wilt, thou canst
kai idou anhr plhrhs lepras kai idwn ton ihsoun make me clean.
kai idou anEr plErEs lepras kai idOn ton iEsoun
G2532 G2400 G435 G4134 G3014 G2532 G1492 G3588 G2424
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
AND BE-PERCEIVING MAN FULL OF-leprosy AND PERCEIVING THE JESUS
lo !
peswn epi proswpon edehqh autou legwn kurie ean

pesOn epi prosOpon edeEthE autou legOn kurie ean
G4098 G1909 G4383 G1189 G846 G3004 G2962 G1437
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Pas 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Voc Sg m Cond
FALLING ON face he-WAS-BOUND OF-Him sayING Master ! IF-EVER
he-besought him Lord !
qelhs dunasai me kaqarisai

thelEs dunasai me katharisai
G2309 G1410 G3165 G2511
vs Pres Act 2 Sg vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg vn Aor Act
YOU-SHOULD-BE-WILLING YOU-ARE-ABLE ME TO-cleanse
you-can
5:13 kai ekteinas thn ceira hyato autou eipwn qelw 13 And he put forth [his] hand,
kai ekteinas tEn cheira hEpsato autou eipOn thelO
G2532 G1614 G3588 G5495 G680 G846 G2036 G2309
and touched him, saying, I
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Sg will: be thou clean. And
AND OUT-STRETCHing THE HAND He-TOUCHES OF-him sayING I-AM-WILLING immediately the leprosy
stretching-out him departed from him.
kaqarisqhti kai euqews h lepra aphlqen ap autou

katharisthEti kai eutheOs hE lepra apElthen ap autou
G2511 G2532 G2112 G3588 G3014 G565 G575 G846
vm Aor Pas 2 Sg Conj Adv t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m
YOU-BE-BEING-cleansED AND immediately THE leprosy FROM-CAME FROM him
be-you-being-cleansed ! came-away
5:14 kai autos parhggeilen autw mhdeni eipein alla apelqwn 14 And he charged him to tell
kai autos parEggeilen autO mEdeni eipein alla apelthOn
G2532 G846 G3853 G846 G3367 G2036 G235 G565
no man: but go, and shew
Conj pp Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m vn 2Aor Act Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m thyself to the priest, and offer
AND He chargES to-him to-NO-YET-ONE TO-BE-sayING but FROM-COMING for thy cleansing, according as
him to-no-one to-be-telling coming-away Moses commanded, for a
testimony unto them.
deixon seauton tw ierei kai prosenegke peri tou
deixon seauton tO hierei kai prosenegke peri tou
G1166 G4572 G3588 G2409 G2532 G4374 G4012 G3588
vm Aor Act 2 Sg pf 2 Acc Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m
SHOW YOURself to-THE SACRED-one AND TOWARD-CARRY-YOU ABOUT THE
show-you ! priest bring-you ! concerning
kaqarismou sou kaqws prosetaxen mwshs eis marturion autois

katharismou sou kathOs prosetaxen mOsEs eis marturion autois
G2512 G4675 G2531 G4367 G3475 G1519 G3142 G846
n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg n pp Dat Pl m
cleansing OF-YOU according-AS TOWARD-SETS MOSES INTO witness to-them
bids testimony
Luke 5
5:15 dihrceto de mallon o logos peri autou kai 15 But so much the more went
diErcheto de mallon ho logos peri autou kai
G1330 G1161 G3123 G3588 G3056 G4012 G846 G2532
there a fame abroad of him:
vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep pp Gen Sg m Conj and great multitudes came
THRU-CAME YET RATHER THE saying ABOUT Him AND together to hear, and to be
passed-through account concerning healed by him of their
infirmities.
sunhrconto ocloi polloi akouein kai qerapeuesqai up autou apo
sunErchonto ochloi polloi akouein kai therapeuesthai hup autou apo
G4905 G3793 G4183 G191 G2532 G2323 G5259 G846 G575
vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m vn Pres Act Conj vn Pres Pas Prep pp Gen Sg m Prep
TOGETHER-CAME THRONGS MANY TO-BE-HEARING AND TO-BE-beING-curED by Him FROM
came-together vast
twn asqeneiwn autwn

tOn astheneiOn autOn
G3588 G769 G846
t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f pp Gen Pl m
THE UN-FIRMS OF-them
infirmities
5:16 autos de hn upocwrwn en tais erhmois kai 16 And he withdrew himself

autos de En hupochOrOn en tais erEmois kai
G846 G1161 G2258 G5298 G1722 G3588 G2048 G2532
into the wilderness, and
pp Nom Sg m Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl f a_ Dat Pl f Conj prayed.
He YET WAS UNDER-SPACING IN THE DESOLATES AND
retreating wildernesses
proseucomenos
proseuchomenos
G4336
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m
prayING
5:17 kai egeneto en mia twn hmerwn kai autos hn 17 . And it came to pass on a
kai egeneto en mia tOn hEmerOn kai autos En
G2532 G1096 G1722 G1520 G3588 G2250 G2532 G846 G2258
certain day, as he was
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep a_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f Conj pp Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg teaching, that there were
AND BECAME IN ONE OF-THE DAYS AND He WAS Pharisees and doctors of the
it-occurred law sitting by, which were
come out of every town of
didaskwn kai hsan kaqhmenoi farisaioi kai nomodidaskaloi Galilee, and Judaea, and
didaskOn kai Esan kathEmenoi pharisaioi kai nomodidaskaloi Jerusalem: and the power of
G1321 G2532 G2258 G2521 G5330 G2532 G3547
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Pl vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m the Lord was [present] to heal
TEACHING AND WERE sittING PHARISEES AND LAW-TEACHers them.
teachers-of-the-law
oi hsan elhluqotes ek pashs kwmhs ths galilaias kai

hoi Esan elEluthotes ek pasEs kOmEs tEs galilaias kai
G3739 G2258 G2064 G1537 G3956 G2968 G3588 G1056 G2532
pr Nom Pl m vi Impf vxx 3 Pl vp 2Perf Act Nom Pl m Prep a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj
WHO WERE HAVING-COME OUT OF-EVERY VILLAGE OF-THE GALILEE AND
ioudaias kai ierousalhm kai dunamis kuriou hn eis to

ioudaias kai ierousalEm kai dunamis kuriou En eis to
G2449 G2532 G2419 G2532 G1411 G2962 G2258 G1519 G3588
n_ Gen Sg f Conj ni proper Conj n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n
OF-JUDEA AND JERUSALEM AND ABILITY OF-Master WAS INTO THE
power of-Lord there-was
iasqai autous
iasthai autous
G2390 G846
vn Pres midD/pasD pp Acc Pl m
TO-BE-HEALING them
5:18 kai idou andres ferontes epi klinhs anqrwpon os 18 And, behold, men brought
kai idou andres pherontes epi klinEs anthrOpon hos
G2532 G2400 G435 G5342 G1909 G2825 G444 G3739
in a bed a man which was
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep n_ Gen Sg f n_ Acc Sg m pr Nom Sg m taken with a palsy: and they
AND BE-PERCEIVING MEN CARRYING ON couch human WHO sought [means] to bring him in,
lo ! and to lay [him] before him.
hn paralelumenos kai ezhtoun auton eisenegkein kai qeinai

En paralelumenos kai ezEtoun auton eisenegkein kai theinai
G2258 G3886 G2532 G2212 G846 G1533 G2532 G5087
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m vn 2Aor Act Conj vn 2Aor Act
WAS HAVING-been-paralyzED AND THEY-SOUGHT him TO-BE-INTO-CARRYING AND TO-PLACE
to-be-carrying-in
enwpion autou
enOpion autou
G1799 G846
Adv pp Gen Sg m
IN-VIEW OF-Him
sight-ofbefore him
Luke 5
5:19 kai mh eurontes dia poias eisenegkwsin auton dia 19 And when they could not
kai mE heurontes dia poias eisenegkOsin auton dia
G2532 G3361 G2147 G1223 G4169 G1533 G846 G1223
find by what [way] they might
Conj Part Neg vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep pi Gen Sg f vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Prep bring him in because of the
AND NO FINDING THRU ?-THE-WHICH THEY-MAY-BE-INTO-CARRYING him THRU multitude, they went upon the
through which ? they-may-be-carrying-in because-of housetop, and let him down
through the tiling with [his]
ton oclon anabantes epi to dwma dia twn keramwn couch into the midst before
ton ochlon anabantes epi to dOma dia tOn keramOn Jesus.
G3588 G3793 G305 G1909 G3588 G1430 G1223 G3588 G2766
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
THE THRONG UP-STEPPing ON THE housetop THRU THE potteries
going-up through tiles
kaqhkan auton sun tw klinidiw eis to meson emprosqen

kathEkan auton sun tO klinidiO eis to meson emprosthen
G2524 G846 G4862 G3588 G2826 G1519 G3588 G3319 G1715
vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n Prep t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Prep
THEY-DOWN-LET him TOGETHER to-THE cot INTO THE MIDst IN-TOWARD-PLACE
they-let-down togetherwith the in-front-of
tou ihsou
tou iEsou
G3588 G2424
OF-THE JESUS
the
5:20 kai idwn thn pistin autwn eipen autw anqrwpe 20 And when he saw their
kai idOn tEn pistin autOn eipen autO anthrOpe
G2532 G1492 G3588 G4102 G846 G2036 G846 G444
faith, he said unto him, Man,
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m thy sins are forgiven thee.
AND PERCEIVING THE BELIEF OF-them He-said to-him human !
faith
afewntai soi ai amartiai sou

apheOntai soi hai hamartiai sou
G863 G4671 G3588 G266 G4675
vi Perf Pas 3 Pl pp 2 Dat Sg t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f pp 2 Gen Sg
HAVE-been-FROM-LET to-YOU THE misses OF-YOU
have-been-pardoned you sins
5:21 kai hrxanto dialogizesqai oi grammateis kai oi farisaioi 21 And the scribes and the
kai Erxanto dialogizesthai hoi grammateis kai hoi pharisaioi
G2532 G756 G1260 G3588 G1122 G2532 G3588 G5330
Pharisees began to reason,
Conj vi Aor midD 3 Pl vn Pres midD/pasD t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m saying, Who is this which
AND begin TO-BE-THRU-accountING THE WRITers AND THE PHARISEES speaketh blasphemies? Who
to-be-reasoning scribes can forgive sins, but God
alone?
legontes tis estin outos os lalei blasfhmias tis
legontes tis estin houtos hos lalei blasphEmias tis
G3004 G5101 G2076 G3778 G3739 G2980 G988 G5101
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pi Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pd Nom Sg m pr Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl f pi Nom Sg m
sayING ANY IS this WHO IS-TALKING HARM-AVERments ANY
who ? is-speaking blasphemies who ?
dunatai afienai amartias ei mh monos o qeos

dunatai aphienai hamartias ei mE monos ho theos
G1410 G863 G266 G1487 G3361 G3441 G3588 G2316
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg vn Pres Act n_ Acc Pl f Cond Part Neg a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
IS-ABLE TO-FROM-LET misses IF NO ONLY THE God
to-pardon sins
5:22 epignous de o ihsous tous dialogismous autwn 22 But when Jesus perceived
epignous de ho iEsous tous dialogismous autOn
G1921 G1161 G3588 G2424 G3588 G1261 G846
their thoughts, he answering
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Pl m said unto them, What reason ye
ON-KNOWING YET THE JESUS THE THRU-accounts OF-them in your hearts?
recognizing reasonings
apokriqeis eipen pros autous ti dialogizesqe en tais

apokritheis eipen pros autous ti dialogizesthe en tais
G611 G2036 G4314 G846 G5101 G1260 G1722 G3588
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m pi Acc Sg n vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Prep t_ Dat Pl f
answerING said TOWARD them ANY YE-ARE-THRU-accountING IN THE
what ? ye-are-reasoning
kardiais umwn
kardiais humOn
G2588 G5216
n_ Dat Pl f pp 2 Gen Pl
HEARTS OF-YOU(p)
of-ye
5:23 ti estin eukopwteron eipein afewntai soi ai 23 Whether is easier, to say,

ti estin eukopOteron eipein apheOntai soi hai
G5101 G2076 G2123 G2036 G863 G4671 G3588
Thy sins be forgiven thee; or to
pi Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vn 2Aor Act vi Perf Pas 3 Pl pp 2 Dat Sg t_ Nom Pl f say, Rise up and walk?
ANY IS easier TO-BE-sayING HAVE-been-FROM-LET to-YOU THE
what ? have-been-forgiven you
Luke 5
amartiai sou h eipein egeirai kai peripatei

hamartiai sou E eipein egeirai kai peripatei
G266 G4675 G2228 G2036 G1453 G2532 G4043
n_ Nom Pl f pp 2 Gen Sg Part vn 2Aor Act vm Aor Mid 2 Sg Conj vm Pres Act 2 Sg
misses OF-YOU OR TO-BE-sayING be-YOU-ROUSED AND BE-ABOUT-TREADING
sins be-you-roused ! be-you-walking !
G2443 G1161 G1492 G3754 G1849 G2192 G3588 G5207 G3588
the Son of man hath power
Conj Conj vs Perf Act 2 Pl Conj n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m upon earth to forgive sins, (he
THAT YET YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING that authority IS-HAVING THE SON OF-THE said unto the sick of the palsy,)
I say unto thee, Arise, and take
up thy couch, and go into thine
anqrwpou epi ths ghs afienai amartias eipen tw house.
anthrOpou epi tEs gEs aphienai hamartias eipen tO
G444 G1909 G3588 G1093 G863 G266 G2036 G3588
n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vn Pres Act n_ Acc Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m
human ON THE LAND TO-FROM-LET misses He-said to-THE
earth to-pardon sins
paralelumenw soi legw egeirai kai aras to

paralelumenO soi legO egeirai kai aras to
G3886 G4671 G3004 G1453 G2532 G142 G3588
vp Perf Pas Dat Sg m pp 2 Dat Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg vm Aor Mid 2 Sg Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n
one-HAVING-been-paralyzED to-YOU I-AM-sayING be-YOU-ROUSED AND LIFTing THE
one-having-been-paralyzed be-you-roused ! picking-up
klinidion sou poreuou eis ton oikon sou

klinidion sou poreuou eis ton oikon sou
G2826 G4675 G4198 G1519 G3588 G3624 G4675
n_ Acc Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
cot OF-YOU BE-GOING INTO THE HOME OF-YOU
be-you-going ! house
5:25 kai paracrhma anastas enwpion autwn aras ef w 25 And immediately he rose up
kai parachrEma anastas enOpion autOn aras eph hO
G2532 G3916 G450 G1799 G846 G142 G1909 G3739
before them, and took up that
Conj Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Adv pp Gen Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep pr Dat Sg n whereon he lay, and departed
AND instantly UP-STANDing IN-VIEW OF-them LIFTing ON WHICH to his own house, glorifying
rising sight-ofbefore them picking-up God.
katekeito aphlqen eis ton oikon autou doxazwn ton

katekeito apElthen eis ton oikon autou doxazOn ton
G2621 G565 G1519 G3588 G3624 G846 G1392 G3588
vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
he-was-DOWN-LAID he-FROM-CAME INTO THE HOME OF-him esteemizING THE
he-was-laid-down he-came-away house glorifying
qeon
theon
G2316
n_ Acc Sg m
God
5:26 kai ekstasis elaben apantas kai edoxazon ton qeon kai 26 And they were all amazed,
kai ekstasis elaben hapantas kai edoxazon ton theon kai
G2532 G1611 G2983 G537 G2532 G1392 G3588 G2316 G2532
and they glorified God, and
Conj n_ Nom Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj were filled with fear, saying,
AND OUT-STANDing GOT ALL(emph.) AND THEY-esteemizED THE God AND We have seen strange things to
amazement took-hold-of they-glorified day.
eplhsqhsan fobou legontes oti eidomen paradoxa shmeron

eplEsthEsan phobou legontes hoti eidomen paradoxa sEmeron
G4130 G5401 G3004 G3754 G1492 G3861 G4594
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl a_ Acc Pl n Adv
THEY-ARE-FILLED OF-FEAR sayING that WE-PERCEIVED BESIDE-esteems toDAY
are-filled baffling-things
5:27 kai meta tauta exhlqen kai eqeasato telwnhn onomati leuin 27 . And after these things he
kai meta tauta exElthen kai etheasato telOnEn onomati leuin
G2532 G3326 G5023 G1831 G2532 G2300 G5057 G3686 G3018
went forth, and saw a publican,
Conj Prep pd Acc Pl n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m n_ Dat Sg n n_ Acc Sg m named Levi, sitting at the
AND after these He-OUT-CAME AND gazES tribute-collector to-NAME LEVI receipt of custom: and he said
these-things he-came-out gazes-at unto him, Follow me.
kaqhmenon epi to telwnion kai eipen autw akolouqei

kathEmenon epi to telOnion kai eipen autO akolouthei
G2521 G1909 G3588 G5058 G2532 G2036 G846 G190
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg
sittING ON THE tribute-office AND He-said to-him YOU-BE-followING
be-you-following !
moi
moi
G3427
pp 1 Dat Sg
to-ME
me
Luke 5
5:28 kai katalipwn apanta anastas hkolouqhsen autw 28 And he left all, rose up, and
kai katalipOn hapanta anastas EkolouthEsen autO
G2532 G2641 G537 G450 G190 G846
followed him.
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m a_ Acc Pl n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
AND leavING ALL(emph.) UP-STANDing he-follows to-Him
rising him
5:29 kai epoihsen dochn megalhn o leuis autw en th oikia 29 And Levi made him a great
kai epoiEsen dochEn megalEn ho leuis autO en tE oikia
G2532 G4160 G1403 G3173 G3588 G3018 G846 G1722 G3588 G3614
feast in his own house: and
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f there was a great company of
AND makES RECEPTION GREAT THE LEVI to-Him IN THE HOME publicans and of others that sat
house down with them.
autou kai hn oclos telwnwn polus kai allwn oi

autou kai En ochlos telOnOn polus kai allOn hoi
G846 G2532 G2258 G3793 G5057 G4183 G2532 G243 G3739
pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Gen Pl m pr Nom Pl m
OF-him AND WAS THRONG OF-tribute-collectors MANY AND OF-others WHO
there-was vast
hsan met autwn katakeimenoi

Esan met autOn katakeimenoi
G2258 G3326 G846 G2621
vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Prep pp Gen Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
WERE WITH them DOWN-LYING
lying-down
5:30 kai egogguzon oi grammateis autwn kai oi farisaioi pros 30 But their scribes and
kai egogguzon hoi grammateis autOn kai hoi pharisaioi pros
G2532 G1111 G3588 G1122 G846 G2532 G3588 G5330 G4314
Pharisees murmured against
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Prep his disciples, saying, Why do
AND MURMURED THE WRITers OF-them AND THE PHARISEES TOWARD ye eat and drink with publicans
scribes and sinners?
tous maqhtas autou legontes dia ti meta telwnwn kai

tous mathEtas autou legontes dia ti meta telOnOn kai
G3588 G3101 G846 G3004 G1223 G5101 G3326 G5057 G2532
t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep pi Acc Sg n Prep n_ Gen Pl m Conj
THE LEARNers OF-Him sayING THRU ANY WITH tribute-collectors AND
disciples because-of what ?
amartwlwn esqiete kai pinete

hamartOlOn esthiete kai pinete
G268 G2068 G2532 G4095
a_ Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl
missers YE-ARE-EATING AND YE-ARE-DRINKING
sinners
5:31 kai apokriqeis o ihsous eipen pros autous ou creian 31 And Jesus answering said
kai apokritheis ho iEsous eipen pros autous ou chreian
G2532 G611 G3588 G2424 G2036 G4314 G846 G3756 G5532
unto them, They that are whole
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m Part Neg n_ Acc Sg f need not a physician; but they
AND answerING THE JESUS said TOWARD them NOT need that are sick.
ecousin oi ugiainontes iatrou all oi kakws econtes

echousin hoi hugiainontes iatrou all hoi kakOs echontes
G2192 G3588 G5198 G2395 G235 G3588 G2560 G2192
vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m Adv vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
ARE-HAVING THE ones-beING-SOUND OF-HEALer but THE EVILly ones-HAVING
ones-being-sound of-physician the-ones illness having
5:32 ouk elhluqa kalesai dikaious alla amartwlous eis metanoian 32 I came not to call the
ouk elElutha kalesai dikaious alla hamartOlous eis metanoian
G3756 G2064 G2564 G1342 G235 G268 G1519 G3341
righteous, but sinners to
Part Neg vi 2Perf Act 1 Sg vn Aor Act a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m Prep n_ Acc Sg f repentance.
NOT I-HAVE-COME TO-CALL JUST-ones but missers INTO after-MIND
just-ones sinners repentance
5:33 oi de eipon pros auton dia ti oi maqhtai 33 And they said unto him,
hoi de eipon pros auton dia ti hoi mathEtai
G3588 G1161 G2036 G4314 G846 G1223 G5101 G3588 G3101
Why do the disciples of John
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pp Acc Sg m Prep pi Acc Sg n t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m fast often, and make prayers,
THE YET THEY-said TOWARD Him THRU ANY THE LEARNers and likewise [the disciples] of
because-of what ? disciples the Pharisees; but thine eat and
drink?
iwannou nhsteuousin pukna kai dehseis poiountai omoiws kai oi
iOannou nEsteuousin pukna kai deEseis poiountai homoiOs kai hoi
G2491 G3522 G4437 G2532 G1162 G4160 G3668 G2532 G3588
n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Pl a_ Acc Pl n Conj n_ Acc Pl f vi Pres Mid 3 Pl Adv Conj t_ Nom Pl m
OF-JOHN ARE-fastING FREQUENT AND petitions THEY-ARE-makING LIKE-AS AND THE-ones
frequently are-making likewise also the-ones
twn farisaiwn oi de soi esqiousin kai pinousin

tOn pharisaiOn hoi de soi esthiousin kai pinousin
G3588 G5330 G3588 G1161 G4674 G2068 G2532 G4095
t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Pl m Conj ps 2 Nom Pl vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl
OF-THE PHARISEES THE YET to-YOU ARE-EATING AND ARE-DRINKING
the-ones
Luke 5
5:34 o de eipen pros autous mh dunasqe tous uious 34 And he said unto them, Can
ho de eipen pros autous mE dunasthe tous huious
G3588 G1161 G2036 G4314 G846 G3361 G1410 G3588 G5207
ye make the children of the
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m bridechamber fast, while the
THE YET He-said TOWARD them NO ARE-ABLE THE SONS bridegroom is with them?
said ye-can
tou numfwnos en w o numfios met autwn estin

tou numphOnos en hO ho numphios met autOn estin
G3588 G3567 G1722 G3739 G3588 G3566 G3326 G846 G2076
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep pr Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep pp Gen Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
OF-THE BRIDal-chamber IN WHICH THE BRIDE-groom WITH them IS
bridegroom
poihsai nhsteuein
poiEsai nEsteuein
G4160 G3522
vn Aor Act vn Pres Act
TO-make TO-BE-fastING
5:35 eleusontai de hmerai kai otan aparqh ap autwn 35 But the days will come,
eleusontai de hEmerai kai hotan aparthE ap autOn
G2064 G1161 G2250 G2532 G3752 G522 G575 G846
vi Fut midD 3 Pl Conj n_ Nom Pl f Conj Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Pl m taken away from them, and
SHALL-BE-COMING YET DAYS AND when-EVER MAY-BE-BEING-FROM-LIFTED FROM them then shall they fast in those
also whenever may-be-being-taken-away days.
o numfios tote nhsteusousin en ekeinais tais hmerais

ho numphios tote nEsteusousin en ekeinais tais hEmerais
G3588 G3566 G5119 G3522 G1722 G1565 G3588 G2250
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Adv vi Fut Act 3 Pl Prep pd Dat Pl f t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f
THE BRIDE-groom then THEY-SHALL-BE-fastING IN those THE DAYS
bridegroom
5:36 elegen de kai parabolhn pros autous oti oudeis epiblhma 36 And he spake also a parable
elegen de kai parabolEn pros autous hoti oudeis epiblEma
G3004 G1161 G2532 G3850 G4314 G846 G3754 G3762 G1915
unto them; No man putteth a
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj Conj n_ Acc Sg f Prep pp Acc Pl m Conj a_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg n piece of a new garment upon
He-said YET AND BESIDE-CAST TOWARD them that NOT-YET-ONE ON-CAST-effect an old; if otherwise, then both
also parable no-one patch the new maketh a rent, and the
piece that was [taken] out of
imatiou kainou epiballei epi imation palaion ei de mhge kai to the new agreeth not with the
himatiou kainou epiballei epi himation palaion ei de mEge kai to old.
G2440 G2537 G1911 G1909 G2440 G3820 G1487 G1161 G3361 G2532 G3588
n_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Cond Conj Part Neg Conj t_ Acc Sg n
cloak NEW IS-ON-CASTING ON cloak OLD IF YET NO-SURELY AND THE
is-patching surely-no also
kainon scizei kai tw palaiw ou sumfwnei epiblhma to apo

kainon schizei kai tO palaiO ou sumphOnei epiblEma to apo
G2537 G4977 G2532 G3588 G3820 G3756 G4856 G1915 G3588 G575
a_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg n Prep
NEW IS-SPLITTING AND to-THE OLD NOT IS-agreeING ON-CAST-effect THE FROM
is-rending patch
tou kainou
tou kainou
G3588 G2537
t_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n
THE NEW
5:37 kai oudeis ballei oinon neon eis askous palaious ei 37 And no man putteth new
kai oudeis ballei oinon neon eis askous palaious ei
G2532 G3762 G906 G3631 G3501 G1519 G779 G3820 G1487
wine into old bottles; else the
Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Prep n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Cond new wine will burst the bottles,
AND NOT-YET-ONE IS-CASTING WINE YOUNG INTO BOTTLES (of-skin) OLD IF and be spilled, and the bottles
no-one is-draining fresh wine-skins shall perish.
de mhge rhxei o neos oinos tous askous kai

de mEge rExei ho neos oinos tous askous kai
G1161 G3361 G4486 G3588 G3501 G3631 G3588 G779 G2532
Conj Part Neg vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj
YET NO-SURELY SHALL-BE-BURSTING THE YOUNG WINE THE BOTTLES (of-skin) AND
surely-no fresh wine-skins
autos ekcuqhsetai kai oi askoi apolountai

autos ekchuthEsetai kai hoi askoi apolountai
G846 G1632 G2532 G3588 G779 G622
pp Nom Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Fut Mid 3 Pl
it SHALL-BE-BEING-OUT-POURED AND THE BOTTLES (of-skin) SHALL-BE-beING-destroyED
shall-be-being-spilled wine-skins shall-be-perishing
5:38 alla oinon neon eis askous kainous blhteon kai amfoteroi 38 But new wine must be put
alla oinon neon eis askous kainous blEteon kai amphoteroi
G235 G3631 G3501 G1519 G779 G2537 G992 G2532 G297
into new bottles; and both are
Conj n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Prep n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom Sg n Conj a_ Nom Pl m preserved.
but WINE YOUNG INTO BOTTLES (of-skin) NEW CASTable AND both
fresh wine-skins is-drained
Luke 5 - Luke 6
sunthrountai
suntErountai
G4933
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
ARE-beING-TOGETHER-KEPT
are-being-preserved
5:39 kai oudeis piwn palaion euqews qelei neon legei 39 No man also having drunk
kai oudeis piOn palaion eutheOs thelei neon legei
G2532 G3762 G4095 G3820 G2112 G2309 G3501 G3004
old [wine] straightway desireth
Conj a_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg new: for he saith, The old is
AND NOT-YET-ONE DRINKING OLD immediately IS-WILLING YOUNG he-IS-sayING better.
no-one fresh
gar o palaios crhstoteros estin

gar ho palaios chrEstoteros estin
G1063 G3588 G3820 G5543 G2076
Conj t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Cmp vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
for THE OLD kinder IS
mellower
Luke 6
6:1 egeneto de en sabbatw deuteroprwtw diaporeuesqai auton dia 1 . And it came to pass on the
egeneto de en sabbatO deuteroprOtO diaporeuesthai auton dia
G1096 G1161 G1722 G4521 G1207 G1279 G846 G1223
second sabbath after the first,
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj Prep n_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n vn Pres midD/pasD pp Acc Sg m Prep that he went through the corn
BECAME YET IN SABBATH second-BEFORE-most TO-BE-THRU-GOING Him THRU fields; and his disciples
it-occurred second-first to-be-going-through through plucked the ears of corn, and
did eat, rubbing [them] in
twn sporimwn kai etillon oi maqhtai autou tous stacuas [their] hands.
tOn sporimOn kai etillon hoi mathEtai autou tous stachuas
G3588 G4702 G2532 G5089 G3588 G3101 G846 G3588 G4719
t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
THE SOWings AND PLUCKED THE LEARNers OF-Him THE EARS-(of-plants)
disciples ears-of-grain
kai hsqion ywcontes tais cersin

kai Esthion psOchontes tais chersin
G2532 G2068 G5597 G3588 G5495
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f
AND ATE STROKE-HAVING to-THE HANDS
rubbing-together-them
6:2 tines de twn farisaiwn eipon autois ti poieite o 2 And certain of the Pharisees
tines de tOn pharisaiOn eipon autois ti poieite ho
G5100 G1161 G3588 G5330 G2036 G846 G5101 G4160 G3739
said unto them, Why do ye that
px Nom Pl m Conj t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Pl pr Nom Sg n which is not lawful to do on
ANY YET OF-THE PHARISEES said to-them ANY YE-ARE-DOING WHICH the sabbath days?
certain-ones why ?
ouk exestin poiein en tois sabbasin

ouk exestin poiein en tois sabbasin
G3756 G1832 G4160 G1722 G3588 G4521
Part Neg vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg vn Pres Act Prep t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n
NOT IS-allowed TO-BE-DOING IN THE SABBATHS
6:3 kai apokriqeis pros autous eipen o ihsous oude touto 3 And Jesus answering them
kai apokritheis pros autous eipen ho iEsous oude touto
G2532 G611 G4314 G846 G2036 G3588 G2424 G3761 G5124
said, Have ye not read so much
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Prep pp Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Adv pd Acc Sg n as this, what David did, when
AND answerING TOWARD them said THE JESUS NOT-YET this himself was an hungred, and
not-yeteven they which were with him;
anegnwte o epoihsen dabid opote epeinasen autos kai oi met

anegnOte ho epoiEsen dabid opote epeinasen autos kai hoi met
G314 G3739 G4160 G1138 G3698 G3983 G846 G2532 G3588 G3326
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl pr Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg ni proper Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m Prep
YE-read(past) WHICH DOES DAVID THE-?-when HUNGERS he AND THE WITH
ye-did-read once-when he-hungers the-ones
autou ontes
autou ontes
G846 G5607
pp Gen Sg m vp Pres vxx Nom Pl m
him BEING
6:4 ws eishlqen eis ton oikon tou qeou kai tous artous 4 How he went into the house
hOs eisElthen eis ton oikon tou theou kai tous artous
G5613 G1525 G1519 G3588 G3624 G3588 G2316 G2532 G3588 G740
of God, and did take and eat
Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m the shewbread, and gave also
AS he-INTO-CAME INTO THE HOME OF-THE God AND THE BREADS to them that were with him;
how he-entered house bread(p) which it is not lawful to eat but
for the priests alone?
ths proqesews elaben kai efagen kai edwken kai tois met
tEs protheseOs elaben kai ephagen kai edOken kai tois met
G3588 G4286 G2983 G2532 G5315 G2532 G1325 G2532 G3588 G3326
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Dat Pl m Prep
OF-THE BEFORE-PLACing GOT AND ATE AND GIVES AND to-THE-ones WITH
took also to-the-ones
autou ous ouk exestin fagein ei mh monous tous

autou hous ouk exestin phagein ei mE monous tous
G846 G3739 G3756 G1832 G5315 G1487 G3361 G3441 G3588
pp Gen Sg m pr Acc Pl m Part Neg vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act Cond Part Neg a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
him WHOM NOT IS-allowed TO-BE-EATING IF NO ONLY THE
whom(p)
iereis
hiereis
G2409
n_ Acc Pl m
SACRED-ones
priests
6:5 kai elegen autois oti kurios estin o uios tou 5 And he said unto them, That
kai elegen autois hoti kurios estin ho huios tou
G2532 G3004 G846 G3754 G2962 G2076 G3588 G5207 G3588
the Son of man is Lord also of
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m the sabbath.
AND He-said to-them that Master IS THE SON OF-THE
Lord
Luke 6
anqrwpou kai tou sabbatou

anthrOpou kai tou sabbatou
G444 G2532 G3588 G4521
n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
human AND OF-THE SABBATH
also
6:6 egeneto de kai en eterw sabbatw eiselqein auton eis 6 And it came to pass also on
egeneto de kai en heterO sabbatO eiselthein auton eis
G1096 G1161 G2532 G1722 G2087 G4521 G1525 G846 G1519
another sabbath, that he
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj Conj Prep a_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n vn 2Aor Act pp Acc Sg m Prep entered into the synagogue and
BECAME YET AND IN DIFFERENT SABBATH TO-BE-INTO-COMING Him INTO taught: and there was a man
it-occurred also to-be-entering whose right hand was
withered.
thn sunagwghn kai didaskein kai hn ekei anqrwpos kai h
tEn sunagOgEn kai didaskein kai En ekei anthrOpos kai hE
G3588 G4864 G2532 G1321 G2532 G2258 G1563 G444 G2532 G3588
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj vn Pres Act Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Adv n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg f
THE TOGETHER-LEAD AND TO-BE-TEACHING AND WAS there human AND THE
synagogue
ceir autou h dexia hn xhra

cheir autou hE dexia En xEra
G5495 G846 G3588 G1188 G2258 G3584
n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f vi Impf vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg f
HAND OF-him THE RIGHT WAS DRY
withered
6:7 parethroun de auton oi grammateis kai oi farisaioi ei en 7 And the scribes and
paretEroun de auton hoi grammateis kai hoi pharisaioi ei en
G3906 G1161 G846 G3588 G1122 G2532 G3588 G5330 G1487 G1722
Pharisees watched him,
vi Impf Act 3 Pl Conj pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Cond Prep whether he would heal on the
BESIDE-KEPT YET Him THE WRITers AND THE PHARISEES IF IN sabbath day; that they might
scrutinized scribes find an accusation against him.
tw sabbatw qerapeusei ina eurwsin kathgorian autou

tO sabbatO therapeusei hina heurOsin katEgorian autou
G3588 G4521 G2323 G2443 G2147 G2724 G846
t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n vi Fut Act 3 Sg Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m
THE SABBATH He-SHALL-BE-curING THAT THEY-MAY-BE-FINDING accusation OF-Him
6:8 autos de hdei tous dialogismous autwn kai eipen 8 But he knew their thoughts,
autos de Edei tous dialogismous autOn kai eipen
G846 G1161 G1492 G3588 G1261 G846 G2532 G2036
and said to the man which had
pp Nom Sg m Conj vi Plup Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg the withered hand, Rise up,
He YET HAD-PERCEIVED THE THRU-accounts OF-them AND He-said and stand forth in the midst.
reasonings And he arose and stood forth.
tw anqrwpw tw xhran econti thn ceira egeirai kai

tO anthrOpO tO xEran echonti tEn cheira egeirai kai
G3588 G444 G3588 G3584 G2192 G3588 G5495 G1453 G2532
t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Dat Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vm Aor Mid 2 Sg Conj
to-THE human THE DRY HAVING THE HAND be-YOU-ROUSED AND
withered be-you-roused !
sthqi eis to meson o de anastas esth

stEthi eis to meson ho de anastas hestE
G2476 G1519 G3588 G3319 G3588 G1161 G450 G2476
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
BE-STANDING INTO THE MIDst THE YET UP-STANDing he-STOOD
be-you-standing ! rising
6:9 eipen oun o ihsous pros autous eperwthsw umas 9 Then said Jesus unto them, I
eipen oun ho iEsous pros autous eperOtEsO humas
G2036 G3767 G3588 G2424 G4314 G846 G1905 G5209
will ask you one thing; Is it
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep pp Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl lawful on the sabbath days to
said THEN THE JESUS TOWARD them I-SHALL-BE-inquirING-of YOU(p) do good, or to do evil? to save
ye life, or to destroy [it]?
ti exestin tois sabbasin agaqopoihsai h kakopoihsai yuchn

ti exestin tois sabbasin agathopoiEsai E kakopoiEsai psuchEn
G5101 G1832 G3588 G4521 G15 G2228 G2554 G5590
pi Nom Sg n vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n vn Aor Act Part vn Aor Act n_ Acc Sg f
ANY it-IS-allowed to-THE SABBATHS TO-GOOD-DO OR TO-EVIL-DO soul
anything to-do-good to-do-evil
swsai h apolesai
sOsai E apolesai
G4982 G2228 G622
vn Aor Act Part vn Aor Act
TO-SAVE OR TO-destroy
6:10 kai peribleyamenos pantas autous eipen tw anqrwpw ekteinon 10 And looking round about
kai periblepsamenos pantas autous eipen tO anthrOpO ekteinon
G2532 G4017 G3956 G846 G2036 G3588 G444 G1614
upon them all, he said unto the
Conj vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m a_ Acc Pl m pp Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg man, Stretch forth thy hand.
AND ABOUT-looking ALL them He-said to-THE human OUT-STRETCH And he did so: and his hand
looking-about stretch-out-you ! was restored whole as the
Luke 6
other.
thn ceira sou o de epoihsen outws kai apokatestaqh h
tEn cheira sou ho de epoiEsen houtOs kai apokatestathE hE
G3588 G5495 G4675 G3588 G1161 G4160 G3779 G2532 G600 G3588
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
THE HAND OF-YOU THE YET he-DOES thus AND WAS-restorED THE
ceir autou ugihs ws h allh

cheir autou hugiEs hOs hE allE
G5495 G846 G5199 G5613 G3588 G243
n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m a_ Nom Sg f Adv t_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f
HAND OF-him SOUND AS THE other
6:11 autoi de eplhsqhsan anoias kai dielaloun pros allhlous ti 11 And they were filled with
autoi de eplEsthEsan anoias kai dielaloun pros allElous ti
G846 G1161 G4130 G454 G2532 G1255 G4314 G240 G5101
madness; and communed one
pp Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep pc Acc Pl m pi Acc Sg n with another what they might
they YET ARE-FILLED OF-UN-MIND AND THRU-TALKED TOWARD one-another ANY do to Jesus.
of-folly talked-about what ?
an poihseian tw ihsou
an poiEseian tO iEsou
G302 G4160 G3588 G2424
Part vo Aor Act 3 Pl Aeo t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
EVER MAY-THEY-BE-DOING to-THE JESUS
6:12 egeneto de en tais hmerais tautais exhlqen eis to oros 12 . And it came to pass in
egeneto de en tais hEmerais tautais exElthen eis to oros
G1096 G1161 G1722 G3588 G2250 G3778 G1831 G1519 G3588 G3735
those days, that he went out
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pd Dat Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n into a mountain to pray, and
BECAME YET IN THE DAYS these He-OUT-CAME INTO THE mountain continued all night in prayer to
it-occurred he-came-out God.
proseuxasqai kai hn dianuktereuwn en th proseuch tou

proseuxasthai kai En dianuktereuOn en tE proseuchE tou
G4336 G2532 G2258 G1273 G1722 G3588 G4335 G3588
vn Aor midD Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
TO-pray AND He-WAS THRU-NIGHTING IN THE prayer OF-THE
one-being-throughout-the-night
qeou
theou
G2316
n_ Gen Sg m
God
6:13 kai ote egeneto hmera prosefwnhsen tous maqhtas autou kai 13 And when it was day, he
kai hote egeneto hEmera prosephOnEsen tous mathEtas autou kai
G2532 G3753 G1096 G2250 G4377 G3588 G3101 G846 G2532
called [unto him] his disciples:
Conj Adv vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj and of them he chose twelve,
AND when it-BECAME DAY He-TOWARD-SOUNDS THE LEARNers OF-Him AND whom also he named apostles;
he-shouts-to disciples
eklexamenos ap autwn dwdeka ous kai apostolous wnomasen

eklexamenos ap autOn dOdeka hous kai apostolous Onomasen
G1586 G575 G846 G1427 G3739 G2532 G652 G3687
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m Prep pp Gen Pl m a_ Nom pr Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
choosing FROM them TWO-TEN WHOM AND commissioners NAMES
twelve also apostles he-names
6:14 simwna on kai wnomasen petron kai andrean ton adelfon 14 Simon, (whom he also
simOna hon kai Onomasen petron kai andrean ton adelphon
G4613 G3739 G2532 G3687 G4074 G2532 G406 G3588 G80
named Peter,) and Andrew his
n_ Acc Sg m pr Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m brother, James and John, Philip
SIMON WHOM AND He-NAMES Peter (ROCK) AND ANDREW THE brother and Bartholomew,
also Peter
autou iakwbon kai iwannhn filippon kai barqolomaion

autou iakObon kai iOannEn philippon kai bartholomaion
G846 G2385 G2532 G2491 G5376 G2532 G918
pp Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m
OF-him JACOBUS AND JOHN Philip AND Bartholomew
James
6:15 matqaion kai qwman iakwbon ton tou alfaiou kai simwna 15 Matthew and Thomas,
matthaion kai thOman iakObon ton tou halphaiou kai simOna
G3156 G2532 G2381 G2385 G3588 G3588 G256 G2532 G4613
James the [son] of Alphaeus,
n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m and Simon called Zelotes,
MATTHEW AND THOMAS JACOBUS THE OF-THE ALPHEUS AND SIMON
James
ton kaloumenon zhlwthn

ton kaloumenon zElOtEn
G3588 G2564 G2207
t_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
THE one-beING-CALLED BOILer
one-being-called Zealot
Luke 6
6:16 ioudan iakwbou kai ioudan iskariwthn os kai egeneto 16 And Judas [the brother] of
ioudan iakObou kai ioudan iskariOtEn hos kai egeneto
G2455 G2385 G2532 G2455 G2469 G3739 G2532 G1096
James, and Judas Iscariot,
n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pr Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg which also was the traitor.
JUDAS OF-JACOBUS AND JUDAS ISCARIOT WHO AND BECAME
of-James also
prodoths
prodotEs
G4273
n_ Nom Sg m
BEFORE-GIVER
traitor
6:17 kai katabas met autwn esth epi topou pedinou kai 17 And he came down with
kai katabas met autOn hestE epi topou pedinou kai
G2532 G2597 G3326 G846 G2476 G1909 G5117 G3977 G2532
them, and stood in the plain,
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep pp Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m Conj and the company of his
AND DOWN-STEPPing WITH them He-STOOD ON PLACE FOOT AND disciples, and a great multitude
descending even of people out of all Judaea and
Jerusalem, and from the sea
oclos maqhtwn autou kai plhqos polu tou laou apo pashs coast of Tyre and Sidon, which
ochlos mathEtOn autou kai plEthos polu tou laou apo pasEs came to hear him, and to be
G3793 G3101 G846 G2532 G4128 G4183 G3588 G2992 G575 G3956
n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep a_ Gen Sg f healed of their diseases;
THRONG OF-LEARNers OF-Him AND multitude MANY OF-THE PEOPLE FROM EVERY
of-disciples vast entire
ths ioudaias kai ierousalhm kai ths paraliou turou kai sidwnos
tEs ioudaias kai ierousalEm kai tEs paraliou turou kai sidOnos
G3588 G2449 G2532 G2419 G2532 G3588 G3882 G5184 G2532 G4605
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj ni proper Conj t_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE JUDEA AND JERUSALEM AND OF-THE BESIDE-SALTED OF-TYRE AND OF-SIDON
the the maritime Tyre Sidon
oi hlqon akousai autou kai iaqhnai apo twn noswn autwn

hoi Elthon akousai autou kai iathEnai apo tOn nosOn autOn
G3739 G2064 G191 G846 G2532 G2390 G575 G3588 G3554 G846
pr Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl vn Aor Act pp Gen Sg m Conj vn Aor Pas Prep t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f pp Gen Pl m
WHO CAME TO-HEAR OF-Him AND TO-BE-HEALED FROM THE DISEASES OF-them
him
6:18 kai oi ocloumenoi upo pneumatwn akaqartwn kai eqerapeuonto 18 And they that were vexed
kai hoi ochloumenoi hupo pneumatOn akathartOn kai etherapeuonto
G2532 G3588 G3791 G5259 G4151 G169 G2532 G2323
with unclean spirits: and they
Conj t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m Prep n_ Gen Pl n a_ Gen Pl n Conj vi Impf Pas 3 Pl were healed.
AND THE ones-beING-THRONGED by spirits UN-clean AND THEY-were-curED
ones-being-molested unclean they-were-cured
6:19 kai pas o oclos ezhtei aptesqai autou oti dunamis 19 And the whole multitude
kai pas ho ochlos ezEtei haptesthai autou hoti dunamis
G2532 G3956 G3588 G3793 G2212 G680 G846 G3754 G1411
sought to touch him: for there
Conj a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg vn Pres Mid pp Gen Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg f went virtue out of him, and
AND EVERY THE THRONG SOUGHT TO-BE-TOUCHING OF-Him that ABILITY healed [them] all.
entire him power
par autou exhrceto kai iato pantas

par autou exErcheto kai iato pantas
G3844 G846 G1831 G2532 G2390 G3956
Prep pp Gen Sg m vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m
BESIDE Him OUT-CAME AND He-HEALED ALL
came-out them-all
6:20 kai autos eparas tous ofqalmous autou eis tous maqhtas 20 . And he lifted up his eyes
kai autos eparas tous ophthalmous autou eis tous mathEtas
G2532 G846 G1869 G3588 G3788 G846 G1519 G3588 G3101
on his disciples, and said,
Conj pp Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Blessed [be ye] poor: for yours
AND He ON-LIFTing THE VIEWers OF-Him INTO THE LEARNers is the kingdom of God.
lifting-up eyes disciples
autou elegen makarioi oi ptwcoi oti umetera estin h

autou elegen makarioi hoi ptOchoi hoti humetera estin hE
G846 G3004 G3107 G3588 G4434 G3754 G5212 G2076 G3588
pp Gen Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Conj ps 2 Nom Pl vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
OF-Him said HAPPY THE POOR-ones that YOUR-more IS THE
happy-are poor-ones yours(emph.)
basileia tou qeou

basileia tou theou
G932 G3588 G2316
n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
KINGdom OF-THE God
6:21 makarioi oi peinwntes nun oti cortasqhsesqe makarioi 21 Blessed [are ye] that hunger
makarioi hoi peinOntes nun hoti chortasthEsesthe makarioi
G3107 G3588 G3983 G3568 G3754 G5526 G3107
now: for ye shall be filled.
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Adv Conj vi Fut Pas 2 Pl a_ Nom Pl m Blessed [are ye] that weep
HAPPY THE ones-HUNGERING NOW that YE-SHALL-BE-BEING-satisfiED HAPPY now: for ye shall laugh.
happy-are ones-hungering happy-are
Luke 6
oi klaiontes nun oti gelasete

hoi klaiontes nun hoti gelasete
G3588 G2799 G3568 G3754 G1070
t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Adv Conj vi Fut Act 2 Pl
THE ones-LAMENTING NOW that YE-SHALL-BE-LAUGHING
ones-lamenting
6:22 makarioi este otan mishswsin umas oi anqrwpoi kai 22 Blessed are ye, when men
makarioi este hotan misEsOsin humas hoi anthrOpoi kai
G3107 G2075 G3752 G3404 G5209 G3588 G444 G2532
shall hate you, and when they
a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 2 Pl Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj shall separate you [from their
HAPPY YE-ARE when-EVER SHOULD-BE-HATING YOU(p) THE humans AND company], and shall reproach
whenever ye [you], and cast out your name
as evil, for the Son of man's
otan aforiswsin umas kai oneidiswsin kai sake.
hotan aphorisOsin humas kai oneidisOsin kai
G3752 G873 G5209 G2532 G3679 G2532
Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Pl Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl Conj
when-EVER THEY-SHOULD-BE-FROM-definING YOU(p) AND THEY-SHOULD-BE-REPROACHING AND
whenever they-should-be-severing ye
ekbalwsin to onoma umwn ws ponhron eneka tou

ekbalOsin to onoma humOn hOs ponEron heneka tou
G1544 G3588 G3686 G5216 G5613 G4190 G1752 G3588
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp 2 Gen Pl Adv a_ Acc Sg n Adv t_ Gen Sg m
THEY-SHOULD-BE-OUT-CASTING THE NAME OF-YOU(p) AS wicked on-account-of OF-THE
they-should-be-casting-out of-ye the
uiou tou anqrwpou

huiou tou anthrOpou
G5207 G3588 G444
SON OF-THE human
6:23 cairete en ekeinh th hmera kai skirthsate idou gar 23 Rejoice ye in that day, and
chairete en ekeinE tE hEmera kai skirtEsate idou gar
G5463 G1722 G1565 G3588 G2250 G2532 G4640 G2400 G1063
leap for joy: for, behold, your
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep pd Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj vm Aor Act 2 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Conj reward [is] great in heaven: for
BE-YE-JOYING IN that THE DAY AND JUMP BE-PERCEIVING for in the like manner did their
be-ye-rejoicing ! frisk-ye ! lo ! fathers unto the prophets.
o misqos umwn polus en tw ouranw kata tauta gar

ho misthos humOn polus en tO ouranO kata tauta gar
G3588 G3408 G5216 G4183 G1722 G3588 G3772 G2596 G5024 G1063
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl a_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Prep n_ Acc Pl n Con Conj
THE HIRE OF-YOU(p) much IN THE heaven according-to these for
wages of-ye vast these-things
epoioun tois profhtais oi pateres autwn

epoioun tois prophEtais hoi pateres autOn
G4160 G3588 G4396 G3588 G3962 G846
vi Impf Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Pl m
DID to-THE BEFORE-AVERers THE FATHERS OF-them
prophets
6:24 plhn ouai umin tois plousiois oti apecete thn paraklhsin 24 But woe unto you that are
plEn ouai humin tois plousiois hoti apechete tEn paraklEsin
G4133 G3759 G5213 G3588 G4145 G3754 G568 G3588 G3874
rich! for ye have received your
Adv Inj pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f consolation.
MOREly WOE to-YOU(p) THE RICH-ones that YE-ARE-FROM-HAVING THE BESIDE-CALLing
moreover woe ! to-ye rich-ones ye-are-collecting consolation
umwn
humOn
G5216
pp 2 Gen Pl
OF-YOU(p)
of-ye
6:25 ouai umin oi empeplhsmenoi oti peinasete ouai umin 25 Woe unto you that are full!
ouai humin hoi empeplEsmenoi hoti peinasete ouai humin
G3759 G5213 G3588 G1705 G3754 G3983 G3759 G5213
for ye shall hunger. Woe unto
Inj pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Nom Pl m vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m Conj vi Fut Act 2 Pl Inj pp 2 Dat Pl you that laugh now! for ye
WOE to-YOU(p) THE ones-HAVING-been-IN-FILLED that YE-SHALL-BE-HUNGERING WOE to-YOU(p) shall mourn and weep.
woe ! to-ye ones-having-been-filled woe ! to-ye
oi gelwntes nun oti penqhsete kai klausete

hoi gelOntes nun hoti penthEsete kai klausete
G3588 G1070 G3568 G3754 G3996 G2532 G2799
t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Adv Conj vi Fut Act 2 Pl Conj vi Fut Act 2 Pl
THE ones-LAUGHING NOW that YE-SHALL-BE-MOURNING AND YE-SHALL-BE-LAMENTING
ones-laughing
6:26 ouai umin otan kalws umas eipwsin pantes oi anqrwpoi 26 Woe unto you, when all
ouai humin hotan kalOs humas eipOsin pantes hoi anthrOpoi
G3759 G5213 G3752 G2573 G5209 G2036 G3956 G3588 G444
men shall speak well of you!
Inj pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Adv pp 2 Acc Pl vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m for so did their fathers to the
WOE to-YOU(p) when-EVER IDEALly YOU(p) MAY-BE-sayING ALL THE humans false prophets.
woe ! to-ye whenever ye
Luke 6
kata tauta gar epoioun tois yeudoprofhtais oi pateres

kata tauta gar epoioun tois pseudoprophEtais hoi pateres
G2596 G5024 G1063 G4160 G3588 G5578 G3588 G3962
Prep n_ Acc Pl n Con Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
according-to these for DID to-THE FALSE-BEFORE-AVERers THE FATHERS
these-things false-prophets
autwn
autOn
G846
pp Gen Pl m
OF-them
6:27 all umin legw tois akouousin agapate tous ecqrous umwn 27 . But I say unto you which
all humin legO tois akouousin agapate tous echthrous humOn
G235 G5213 G3004 G3588 G191 G25 G3588 G2190 G5216
hear, Love your enemies, do
Conj pp 2 Dat Pl vi Pres Act 1 Sg t_ Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Dat Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl good to them which hate you,
but to-YOU(p) I-AM-sayING to-THE ones-HEARING BE-LOVING THE enemies OF-YOU(p)
to-ye ones-hearing be-ye-loving ! of-ye
kalws poieite tois misousin umas

kalOs poieite tois misousin humas
G2573 G4160 G3588 G3404 G5209
Adv vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Dat Pl m pp 2 Acc Pl
IDEALly BE-DOING to-THE ones-HATING YOU(p)
be-ye-doing ! ones-hating ye
6:28 eulogeite tous katarwmenous umin kai proseucesqe uper 28 Bless them that curse you,
eulogeite tous katarOmenous humin kai proseuchesthe huper
G2127 G3588 G2672 G5213 G2532 G4336 G5228
and pray for them which
vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m pp 2 Dat Pl Conj vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Prep despitefully use you.
BE-blessING THE ones-DOWN-EXECRATING to-YOU(p) AND BE-prayING OVER
be-ye-blessing ! ones-cursing you(p) be-ye-praying ! for-the-sake-of
twn ephreazontwn umas

tOn epEreazontOn humas
G3588 G1908 G5209
t_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Gen Pl m pp 2 Acc Pl
THE ones-traducING YOU(p)
ones-traducing ye
6:29 tw tuptonti se epi thn siagona parece kai thn 29 And unto him that smiteth
tO tuptonti se epi tEn siagona pareche kai tEn
G3588 G5180 G4571 G1909 G3588 G4600 G3930 G2532 G3588
thee on the [one] cheek offer
t_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m pp 2 Acc Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vm Pres Act 2 Sg Conj t_ Acc Sg f also the other; and him that
to-THE one-BEATING YOU ON THE CHEEK BE-tenderING AND THE taketh away thy cloke forbid
one-beating be-you-tendering ! also not [to take thy] coat also.
allhn kai apo tou airontos sou to imation kai ton

allEn kai apo tou airontos sou to himation kai ton
G243 G2532 G575 G3588 G142 G4675 G3588 G2440 G2532 G3588
a_ Acc Sg f Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg m
other AND FROM THE one-LIFTING OF-YOU THE cloak AND THE
one-taking-away also
citwna mh kwlushs
chitOna mE kOlusEs
G5509 G3361 G2967
n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg vs Aor Act 2 Sg
TUNIC NO YOU-SHOULD-BE-FORBIDDING
you-should-be-preventing
6:30 panti de tw aitounti se didou kai apo tou 30 Give to every man that
panti de tO aitounti se didou kai apo tou
G3956 G1161 G3588 G154 G4571 G1325 G2532 G575 G3588
asketh of thee; and of him that
a_ Dat Sg m Conj t_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m pp 2 Acc Sg vm Pres Act 2 Sg Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg m taketh away thy goods ask
to-EVERY YET THE one-REQUESTING YOU BE-GIVING AND FROM THE [them] not again.
one-requesting be-you-giving !
airontos ta sa mh apaitei
airontos ta sa mE apaitei
G142 G3588 G4674 G3361 G523
vp Pres Act Gen Sg m t_ Acc Pl n ps 2 Acc Pl Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Sg
one-LIFTING THE YOUR(p) NO BE-FROM-REQUESTING
one-taking-away be-you-demanding-it !
6:31 kai kaqws qelete ina poiwsin umin oi anqrwpoi kai 31 And as ye would that men
kai kathOs thelete hina poiOsin humin hoi anthrOpoi kai
G2532 G2531 G2309 G2443 G4160 G5213 G3588 G444 G2532
should do to you, do ye also to
Conj Adv vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vs Pres Act 3 Pl pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj them likewise.
AND according-AS YE-ARE-WILLING THAT MAY-BE-DOING to-YOU(p) THE humans AND
to-ye also
umeis poieite autois omoiws

humeis poieite autois homoiOs
G5210 G4160 G846 G3668
pp 2 Nom Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl pp Dat Pl m Adv
YOU(p) YE-BE-DOING to-them LIKE-AS
be-ye-doing ! likewise
Luke 6
6:32 kai ei agapate tous agapwntas umas poia umin caris 32 For if ye love them which
kai ei agapate tous agapOntas humas poia humin charis
G2532 G1487 G25 G3588 G25 G5209 G4169 G5213 G5485
love you, what thank have ye?
Conj Cond vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m pp 2 Acc Pl pi Nom Sg f pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Nom Sg f for sinners also love those that
AND IF YE-ARE-LOVING THE ones-LOVING YOU(p) ?-THE-WHICH to-YOU(p) grace love them.
ones-loving ye what ? to-ye thanks
estin kai gar oi amartwloi tous agapwntas autous agapwsin

estin kai gar hoi hamartOloi tous agapOntas autous agapOsin
G2076 G2532 G1063 G3588 G268 G3588 G25 G846 G25
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Conj Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m pp Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl
it-IS AND for THE missers THE ones-LOVING them ARE-LOVING
also sinners ones-loving
6:33 kai ean agaqopoihte tous agaqopoiountas umas poia 33 And if ye do good to them
kai ean agathopoiEte tous agathopoiountas humas poia
G2532 G1437 G15 G3588 G15 G5209 G4169
which do good to you, what
Conj Cond vs Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m pp 2 Acc Pl pi Nom Sg f thank have ye? for sinners also
AND IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-GOOD-DOING THE ones-GOOD-DOING YOU(p) ?-THE-WHICH do even the same.
ye-may-be-doing-good ones-doing-good ye what ?
umin caris estin kai gar oi amartwloi to auto poiousin

humin charis estin kai gar hoi hamartOloi to auto poiousin
G5213 G5485 G2076 G2532 G1063 G3588 G268 G3588 G846 G4160
pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Conj Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg n pp Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Pl
to-YOU(p) grace it-IS AND for THE missers THE SAME ARE-DOING
to-ye thanks also sinners
6:34 kai ean daneizhte par wn elpizhte apolabein 34 And if ye lend [to them] of
kai ean daneizEte par hOn elpizEte apolabein
G2532 G1437 G1155 G3844 G3739 G1679 G618
whom ye hope to receive, what
Conj Cond vs Pres Act 2 Pl Prep pr Gen Pl m vs Pres Act 2 Pl vn 2Aor Act thank have ye? for sinners also
AND IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-LENDING BESIDE WHOM YE-MAY-BE-EXPECTING TO-BE-FROM-GETTING lend to sinners, to receive as
whom(p) to-be-getting-back much again.
poia umin caris estin kai gar oi amartwloi amartwlois

poia humin charis estin kai gar hoi hamartOloi hamartOlois
G4169 G5213 G5485 G2076 G2532 G1063 G3588 G268 G268
pi Nom Sg f pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Conj Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m a_ Dat Pl m
?-THE-WHICH to-YOU(p) grace it-IS AND for THE missers to-missers
what ? to-ye thanks also sinners to-sinners
daneizousin ina apolabwsin ta isa

daneizousin hina apolabOsin ta isa
G1155 G2443 G618 G3588 G2470
vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n
ARE-LENDING THAT THEY-MAY-BE-FROM-GETTING THE EQUAL(p)
they-may-be-getting-back equivalent(p)
6:35 plhn agapate tous ecqrous umwn kai agaqopoieite kai daneizete 35 But love ye your enemies,
plEn agapate tous echthrous humOn kai agathopoieite kai daneizete
G4133 G25 G3588 G2190 G5216 G2532 G15 G2532 G1155
and do good, and lend, hoping
Adv vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl for nothing again; and your
MOREly BE-LOVING THE enemies OF-YOU(p) AND BE-GOOD-DOING AND BE-LENDING reward shall be great, and ye
moreover be-ye-loving ! of-ye be-ye-doing-good ! be-ye-lending ! shall be the children of the
Highest: for he is kind unto the
mhden apelpizontes kai estai o misqos umwn polus kai unthankful and [to] the evil.
mEden apelpizontes kai estai ho misthos humOn polus kai
G3367 G560 G2532 G2071 G3588 G3408 G5216 G4183 G2532
a_ Acc Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vi Fut vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl a_ Nom Sg m Conj
NO-YET-ONE FROM-EXPECTING AND SHALL-BE THE HIRE OF-YOU(p) much AND
nothing expecting-from wages of-ye vast
esesqe uioi tou uyistou oti autos crhstos estin epi tous
esesthe huioi tou hupsistou hoti autos chrEstos estin epi tous
G2071 G5207 G3588 G5310 G3754 G846 G5543 G2076 G1909 G3588
vi Fut vxx 2 Pl n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m Conj pp Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl m
YE-SHALL-BE SONS OF-THE HIGHest that He kind IS ON THE
Most-High
acaristous kai ponhrous

acharistous kai ponErous
G884 G2532 G4190
a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m
UN-grateful AND wicked
ungrateful-ones wicked-ones
6:36 ginesqe oun oiktirmones kaqws kai o pathr umwn 36 Be ye therefore merciful, as
ginesthe oun oiktirmones kathOs kai ho patEr humOn
G1096 G3767 G3629 G2531 G2532 G3588 G3962 G5216
your Father also is merciful.
vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m Adv Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl
BE-YE-BECOMING THEN PITIful according-AS AND THE FATHER OF-YOU(p)
be-ye-becoming ! also of-ye
oiktirmwn estin
oiktirmOn estin
G3629 G2076
a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
PITIful IS
Luke 6
6:37 mh krinete kai ou mh kriqhte mh katadikazete 37 . Judge not, and ye shall not
mE krinete kai ou mE krithEte mE katadikazete
G3361 G2919 G2532 G3756 G3361 G2919 G3361 G2613
be judged: condemn not, and
Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Part Neg Part Neg vs Aor Pas 2 Pl Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Pl ye shall not be condemned:
NO BE-JUDGING AND NOT NO YE-MAY-BE-BEING-JUDGED NO BE-YE-convictING forgive, and ye shall be
be-ye-judging ! be-ye-convicting ! forgiven:
kai ou mh katadikasqhte apoluete kai

kai ou mE katadikasthEte apoluete kai
G2532 G3756 G3361 G2613 G630 G2532
Conj Part Neg Part Neg vs Aor Pas 2 Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj
AND NOT NO YE-MAY-BE-BEING-convictED YE-BE-FROM-LOOSING AND
be-ye-releasing !
apoluqhsesqe
apoluthEsesthe
G630
vi Fut Pas 2 Pl
YE-SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LOOSED
ye-shall-be-being-released
6:38 didote kai doqhsetai umin metron kalon pepiesmenon 38 Give, and it shall be given
didote kai dothEsetai humin metron kalon pepiesmenon
G1325 G2532 G1325 G5213 G3358 G2570 G4085
unto you; good measure,
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n vp Perf Pas Acc Sg n pressed down, and shaken
BE-GIVING AND it-SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-YOU(p) MEASURE IDEAL HAVING-been-SQUEEZED together, and running over,
be-ye-giving ! to-ye shall men give into your
bosom. For with the same
kai sesaleumenon kai uperekcunomenon dwsousin eis ton kolpon measure that ye mete withal it
kai sesaleumenon kai uperekchunomenon dOsousin eis ton kolpon shall be measured to you again.
G2532 G4531 G2532 G5240 G1325 G1519 G3588 G2859
Conj vp Perf Pas Acc Sg n Conj vp Pres Pas Acc Sg n vi Fut Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
AND HAVING-been-SHAKEN AND beING-OVER-OUT-POURED THEY-SHALL-BE-GIVING INTO THE BOSOM
running-over
umwn tw gar autw metrw w metreite

humOn tO gar autO metrO hO metreite
G5216 G3588 G1063 G846 G3358 G3739 G3354
pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Dat Sg n Conj pp Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pr Dat Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Pl
OF-YOU(p) to-THE for SAME MEASURE WHICH YE-ARE-MEASURING
of-ye to-which
antimetrhqhsetai umin
antimetrEthEsetai humin
G488 G5213
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
SHALL-BE-BEING-INSTEAD-MEASURED to-YOU(p)
it-shall-be-being-measured-again to-ye
6:39 eipen de parabolhn autois mhti dunatai tuflos tuflon 39 And he spake a parable unto
eipen de parabolEn autois mEti dunatai tuphlos tuphlon
G2036 G1161 G3850 G846 G3385 G1410 G5185 G5185
them, Can the blind lead the
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Acc Sg f pp Dat Pl m Part Int vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m a_ Acc Sg m blind? shall they not both fall
He-said YET BESIDE-CAST to-them NO-ANY IS-ABLE BLIND BLIND into the ditch?
he-told parable not ? can blind-one blind-one
odhgein ouci amfoteroi eis boqunon pesountai

hodEgein ouchi amphoteroi eis bothunon pesountai
G3594 G3780 G297 G1519 G999 G4098
vn Pres Act Part Int a_ Nom Pl m Prep n_ Acc Sg m vi Fut midD/pasD 3 Pl
TO-BE-WAY-LEADING NOT(emph.) both INTO PIT SHALL-BE-FALLING
to-be-guiding not(emph.) ?
6:40 ouk estin maqhths uper ton didaskalon autou 40 The disciple is not above his
ouk estin mathEtEs huper ton didaskalon autou
G3756 G2076 G3101 G5228 G3588 G1320 G846
master: but every one that is
Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m perfect shall be as his master.
NOT IS LEARNer OVER THE TEACHer OF-him
disciple above
kathrtismenos de pas estai ws o didaskalos autou

katErtismenos de pas estai hOs ho didaskalos autou
G2675 G1161 G3956 G2071 G5613 G3588 G1320 G846
vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m
HAVING-been-DOWN-EQUIPPED YET EVERY SHALL-BE AS THE TEACHer OF-him
having-been-adjusted every-one
6:41 ti de blepeis to karfos to en tw ofqalmw 41 And why beholdest thou the

ti de blepeis to karphos to en tO ophthalmO
G5101 G1161 G991 G3588 G2595 G3588 G1722 G3588 G3788
mote that is in thy brother's
pi Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m eye, but perceivest not the
ANY YET YOU-ARE-lookING THE SHRIVEL THE IN THE VIEWer beam that is in thine own eye?
why ? you-are-observing mote eye
tou adelfou sou thn de dokon thn en tw idiw

tou adelphou sou tEn de dokon tEn en tO idiO
G3588 G80 G4675 G3588 G1161 G1385 G3588 G1722 G3588 G2398
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE brother OF-YOU THE YET BEAM THE IN THE OWN
Luke 6
ofqalmw ou katanoeis
ophthalmO ou katanoeis
G3788 G3756 G2657
n_ Dat Sg m Part Neg vi Pres Act 2 Sg
VIEWer NOT YOU-ARE-DOWN-MINDING
eye you-are-considering
6:42 h pws dunasai legein tw adelfw sou adelfe 42 Either how canst thou say to
hE pOs dunasai legein tO adelphO sou adelphe
G2228 G4459 G1410 G3004 G3588 G80 G4675 G80
thy brother, Brother, let me
Part Adv Int vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg vn Pres Act t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg n_ Voc Sg m pull out the mote that is in
OR how YOU-ARE-ABLE TO-BE-sayING to-THE brother OF-YOU brother ! thine eye, when thou thyself
how ? you-can beholdest not the beam that is
in thine own eye? Thou
afes ekbalw to karfos to en tw ofqalmw hypocrite, cast out first the
aphes ekbalO to karphos to en tO ophthalmO beam out of thine own eye, and
G863 G1544 G3588 G2595 G3588 G1722 G3588 G3788
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m then shalt thou see clearly to
FROM-LET I-SHOULD-BE-OUT-CASTING THE SHRIVEL THE-one IN THE VIEWer pull out the mote that is in thy
let-you ! I-should-be-extracting mote the eye brother's eye.
sou autos thn en tw ofqalmw sou dokon ou

sou autos tEn en tO ophthalmO sou dokon ou
G4675 G846 G3588 G1722 G3588 G3788 G4675 G1385 G3756
pp 2 Gen Sg pp Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg n_ Acc Sg f Part Neg
OF-YOU SAME THE IN THE VIEWer OF-YOU BEAM NOT
yourself eye
blepwn upokrita ekbale prwton thn dokon ek tou

blepOn hupokrita ekbale prOton tEn dokon ek tou
G991 G5273 G1544 G4412 G3588 G1385 G1537 G3588
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Voc Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Adv t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg m
lookING hypocrite BE-OUT-CASTING BEFORE-most THE BEAM OUT OF-THE
observing hypocrite ! be-you-extracting ! first
ofqalmou sou kai tote diableyeis ekbalein to karfos

ophthalmou sou kai tote diablepseis ekbalein to karphos
G3788 G4675 G2532 G5119 G1227 G1544 G3588 G2595
n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg Conj Adv vi Fut Act 2 Sg vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
VIEWer OF-YOU AND then YOU-SHALL-BE-THRU-lookING TO-BE-OUT-CASTING THE SHRIVEL
eye you-shall-be-being-keen-sighted to-be-extracting mote
to en tw ofqalmw tou adelfou sou

to en tO ophthalmO tou adelphou sou
G3588 G1722 G3588 G3788 G3588 G80 G4675
t_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
THE IN THE VIEWer OF-THE brother OF-YOU
eye
6:43 ou gar estin dendron kalon poioun karpon sapron oude 43 For a good tree bringeth not
ou gar estin dendron kalon poioun karpon sapron oude
G3756 G1063 G2076 G1186 G2570 G4160 G2590 G4550 G3761
forth corrupt fruit; neither doth
Part Neg Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Sg n n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Adv a corrupt tree bring forth good
NOT for IS TREE IDEAL makING FRUIT ROTTen NOT-YET fruit.
doproducing neither
dendron sapron poioun karpon kalon

dendron sapron poioun karpon kalon
G1186 G4550 G4160 G2590 G2570
n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Sg n n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m
TREE ROTTen makING FRUIT IDEAL
doproducing
6:44 ekaston gar dendron ek tou idiou karpou ginwsketai ou gar 44 For every tree is known by
hekaston gar dendron ek tou idiou karpou ginOsketai ou gar
G1538 G1063 G1186 G1537 G3588 G2398 G2590 G1097 G3756 G1063
his own fruit. For of thorns
a_ Nom Sg n Conj n_ Nom Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Part Neg Conj men do not gather figs, nor of a
EACH for TREE OUT OF-THE OWN FRUIT IS-beING-KNOWN NOT for bramble bush gather they
grapes.
ex akanqwn sullegousin suka oude ek batou

ex akanthOn sullegousin suka oude ek batou
G1537 G173 G4816 G4810 G3761 G1537 G942
Prep n_ Gen Pl f vi Pres Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Pl n Adv Prep n_ Gen Sg m
OUT OF-POINT-FLOWERS THEY-ARE-TOGETHER-collectING FIGS NOT-YET OUT OF-THORN-BUSH
of-thorns they-are-culling neither
trugwsin stafulhn
trugOsin staphulEn
G5166 G4718
vi Pres Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg f
THEY-ARE-CROPPING GRAPE
they-are-picking
6:45 o agaqos anqrwpos ek tou agaqou qhsaurou ths 45 A good man out of the good
ho agathos anthrOpos ek tou agathou thEsaurou tEs
G3588 G18 G444 G1537 G3588 G18 G2344 G3588
treasure of his heart bringeth
t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg f forth that which is good; and
THE GOOD human OUT OF-THE GOOD PLACED-INTO-MORROW OF-THE an evil man out of the evil
treasure treasure of his heart bringeth
Luke 6
forth that which is evil: for of

kardias autou proferei to agaqon kai o ponhros anqrwpos the abundance of the heart his
kardias autou propherei to agathon kai ho ponEros anthrOpos
G2588 G846 G4393 G3588 G18 G2532 G3588 G4190 G444 mouth speaketh.
n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
HEART OF-him IS-BEFORE-CARRYING THE GOOD AND THE wicked human
is-bringing-forth
ek tou ponhrou qhsaurou ths kardias autou proferei

ek tou ponErou thEsaurou tEs kardias autou propherei
G1537 G3588 G4190 G2344 G3588 G2588 G846 G4393
Prep t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
OUT OF-THE wicked PLACED-INTO-MORROW OF-THE HEART OF-him IS-BEFORE-CARRYING
treasure is-bringing-forth
to ponhron ek gar tou perisseumatos ths kardias lalei

to ponEron ek gar tou perisseumatos tEs kardias lalei
G3588 G4190 G1537 G1063 G3588 G4051 G3588 G2588 G2980
t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Prep Conj t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE wicked OUT for OF-THE excess OF-THE HEART IS-TALKING
superabundance is-speaking
to stoma autou
to stoma autou
G3588 G4750 G846
t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Sg m
THE MOUTH OF-him
6:46 ti de me kaleite kurie kurie kai ou poieite 46 And why call ye me, Lord,
ti de me kaleite kurie kurie kai ou poieite
G5101 G1161 G3165 G2564 G2962 G2962 G2532 G3756 G4160
Lord, and do not the things
pi Nom Sg n Conj pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Voc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Pres Act 2 Pl which I say?
ANY YET ME YE-ARE-CALLING Master ! Master ! AND NOT YE-ARE-DOING
why ? Lord ! Lord ! are-doing
a legw
ha legO
G3739 G3004
pr Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 1 Sg
WHICH I-AM-sayING
which(p)
6:47 pas o ercomenos pros me kai akouwn 47 Whosoever cometh to me,

pas ho erchomenos pros me kai akouOn
G3956 G3588 G2064 G4314 G3165 G2532 G191
and heareth my sayings, and
a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m Prep pp 1 Acc Sg Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m doeth them, I will shew you to
EVERY THE one-COMING TOWARD ME AND HEARING whom he is like:
one-coming
mou twn logwn kai poiwn autous upodeixw umin

mou tOn logOn kai poiOn autous hupodeixO humin
G3450 G3588 G3056 G2532 G4160 G846 G5263 G5213
pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
OF-ME THE sayings AND DOING them I-SHALL-BE-UNDER-SHOWING to-YOU(p)
words I-shall-be-intimating to-ye
tini estin omoios

tini estin homoios
G5101 G2076 G3664
pi Dat Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m
to-ANY he-IS LIKE
to-whom ?
6:48 omoios estin anqrwpw oikodomounti oikian os eskayen kai 48 He is like a man which built
homoios estin anthrOpO oikodomounti oikian hos eskapsen kai
G3664 G2076 G444 G3618 G3614 G3739 G4626 G2532
an house, and digged deep, and
a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg f pr Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj laid the foundation on a rock:
LIKE he-IS to-human HOME-BUILDING HOME WHO DIGS AND and when the flood arose, the
building house stream beat vehemently upon
that house, and could not shake
ebaqunen kai eqhken qemelion epi thn petran plhmmuras de it: for it was founded upon a
ebathunen kai ethEken themelion epi tEn petran plEmmuras de rock.
G900 G2532 G5087 G2310 G1909 G3588 G4073 G4132 G1161
vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj
DEEPens AND PLACES foundation ON THE ROCK OF-FULL-TRICKLE YET
of-inundation
genomenhs proserrhxen o potamos th oikia ekeinh kai ouk

genomenEs proserrExen ho potamos tE oikia ekeinE kai ouk
G1096 G4366 G3588 G4215 G3588 G3614 G1565 G2532 G3756
vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f Conj Part Neg
OF-BECOMING TOWARD-BURSTS THE river to-THE HOME that AND NOT
occurring bursts-through house
iscusen saleusai authn teqemeliwto gar epi thn petran

ischusen saleusai autEn tethemeliOto gar epi tEn petran
G2480 G4531 G846 G2311 G1063 G1909 G3588 G4073
vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn Aor Act pp Acc Sg f vi Plup Pas 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
it-is-STRONG TO-SHAKE her it-HAD-been-FOUNDED for ON THE ROCK
herit sheit-had-been-founded
Luke 6 - Luke 7
6:49 o de akousas kai mh poihsas omoios estin 49 But he that heareth, and
ho de akousas kai mE poiEsas homoios estin
G3588 G1161 G191 G2532 G3361 G4160 G3664 G2076
doeth not, is like a man that
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj Part Neg vp Aor Act Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg without a foundation built an
THE YET one-HEARing AND NO DOing LIKE IS house upon the earth; against
one-hearing which the stream did beat
vehemently, and immediately it
anqrwpw oikodomhsanti oikian epi thn ghn cwris qemeliou h fell; and the ruin of that house
anthrOpO oikodomEsanti oikian epi tEn gEn chOris themeliou hE was great.
G444 G3618 G3614 G1909 G3588 G1093 G5565 G2310 G3739
n_ Dat Sg m vp Aor Act Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Adv n_ Gen Sg m pr Dat Sg f
to-human HOME-BUILDing HOME ON THE LAND apart-from foundation to-WHICH
human building house earth without
proserrhxen o potamos kai euqews epesen kai egeneto to

proserrExen ho potamos kai eutheOs epesen kai egeneto to
G4366 G3588 G4215 G2532 G2112 G4098 G2532 G1096 G3588
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n
TOWARD-BURSTS THE river AND immediately it-FALLS AND BECAME THE
bursts-through sheit-falls
rhgma ths oikias ekeinhs mega

rEgma tEs oikias ekeinEs mega
G4485 G3588 G3614 G1565 G3173
n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f a_ Nom Sg n
BURST OF-THE HOME that GREAT
crash house
Luke 7
7:1 epei de eplhrwsen panta ta rhmata autou eis tas akoas 1 . Now when he had ended all
epei de eplErOsen panta ta rEmata autou eis tas akoas
G1893 G1161 G4137 G3956 G3588 G4487 G846 G1519 G3588 G189
his sayings in the audience of
Conj Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f the people, he entered into
since YET He-FILLS ALL THE declarations OF-Him INTO THE HEARing Capernaum.
he-completes hearing(p)
tou laou eishlqen eis kapernaoum

tou laou eisElthen eis kapernaoum
G3588 G2992 G1525 G1519 G2584
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep ni proper
OF-THE PEOPLE He-INTO-CAME INTO CAPERNAUM
he-entered
7:2 ekatontarcou de tinos doulos kakws ecwn hmellen 2 And a certain centurion's
hekatontarchou de tinos doulos kakOs echOn Emellen
G1543 G1161 G5100 G1401 G2560 G2192 G3195
servant, who was dear unto
n_ Gen Sg m Conj px Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Adv vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg Att him, was sick, and ready to
OF-HUNDRED-chief YET OF-ANY SLAVE EVILly HAVING WAS-ABOUT die.
of-centurion certain illness
teleutan os hn autw entimos

teleutan hos En autO entimos
G5053 G3739 G2258 G846 G1784
vn Pres Act pr Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
TO-BE-deceasING WHO WAS to-him IN-VALUED
held-in-honor
7:3 akousas de peri tou ihsou apesteilen pros auton 3 And when he heard of Jesus,
akousas de peri tou iEsou apesteilen pros auton
G191 G1161 G4012 G3588 G2424 G649 G4314 G846
he sent unto him the elders of
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg m the Jews, beseeching him that
HEARing YET ABOUT THE JESUS he-commissions TOWARD Him he would come and heal his
concerning he-dispatches servant.
presbuterous twn ioudaiwn erwtwn auton opws elqwn

presbuterous tOn ioudaiOn erOtOn auton hopOs elthOn
G4245 G3588 G2453 G2065 G846 G3704 G2064
a_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
SENIORS OF-THE JUDA-ans askING Him WHICH-how COMING
elders Jews so-that
diaswsh ton doulon autou

diasOsE ton doulon autou
G1295 G3588 G1401 G846
He-SHOULD-BE-THRU-SAVING THE SLAVE OF-him
he-should-be-saving-through
7:4 oi de paragenomenoi pros ton ihsoun parekaloun auton 4 And when they came to
hoi de paragenomenoi pros ton iEsoun parekaloun auton
G3588 G1161 G3854 G4314 G3588 G2424 G3870 G846
Jesus, they besought him
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp 2Aor midD Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m instantly, saying, That he was
THE YET ones-BESIDE-COMING TOWARD THE JESUS BESIDE-CALLED Him worthy for whom he should do
ones-coming-along entreated this:
spoudaiws legontes oti axios estin w parexei touto

spoudaiOs legontes hoti axios estin hO parexei touto
G4709 G3004 G3754 G514 G2076 G3739 G3930 G5124
Adv vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pr Dat Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg pd Acc Sg n
DILIGENTly sayING that WORTHY he-IS to-WHOM He-SHALL-BE-tenderING this
7:5 agapa gar to eqnos hmwn kai thn sunagwghn autos 5For he loveth our nation, and
agapa gar to ethnos hEmOn kai tEn sunagOgEn autos
G25 G1063 G3588 G1484 G2257 G2532 G3588 G4864 G846
he hath built us a synagogue.
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp 1 Gen Pl Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Nom Sg m
he-IS-LOVING for THE NATION OF-US AND THE TOGETHER-LEAD he
synagogue
wkodomhsen hmin
OkodomEsen hEmin
G3618 G2254
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl
HOME-BUILDS to-US
builds us
7:6 o de ihsous eporeueto sun autois hdh de autou 6 Then Jesus went with them.
ho de iEsous eporeueto sun autois EdE de autou
G3588 G1161 G2424 G4198 G4862 G846 G2235 G1161 G846
And when he was now not far
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep pp Dat Pl m Adv Conj pp Gen Sg m from the house, the centurion
THE YET JESUS WENT TOGETHER to-them ALREADY YET OF-Him sent friends to him, saying unto
togetherwith them him, Lord, trouble not thyself:
for I am not worthy that thou
ou makran apecontos apo ths oikias epemyen pros auton o shouldest enter under my roof:
ou makran apechontos apo tEs oikias epempsen pros auton ho
G3756 G3112 G568 G575 G3588 G3614 G3992 G4314 G846 G3588
Part Neg Adv vp Pres Act Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
NOT FAR OF-FROM-HAVING FROM THE HOME SENDS TOWARD Him THE
being-away house
Luke 7
ekatontarcos filous legwn autw kurie mh skullou ou

hekatontarchos philous legOn autO kurie mE skullou ou
G1543 G5384 G3004 G846 G2962 G3361 G4660 G3756
n_ Nom Sg m a_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m Part Neg vm Pres Pas 2 Sg Part Neg
HUNDRED-chief FOND-ones sayING to-Him Master ! NO BE-FLAYING (self) NOT
centurion friends Lord ! be-you-bothering !
gar eimi ikanos ina upo thn steghn mou eiselqhs

gar eimi hikanos hina hupo tEn stegEn mou eiselthEs
G1063 G1510 G2425 G2443 G5259 G3588 G4721 G3450 G1525
Conj vi Pres vxx 1 Sg a_ Nom Sg m Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
for I-AM enough THAT UNDER THE EXCLUDer OF-ME YOU-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING
roof you-may-be-entering
7:7 dio oude emauton hxiwsa pros se elqein alla 7 Wherefore neither thought I
dio oude emauton ExiOsa pros se elthein alla
G1352 G3761 G1683 G515 G4314 G4571 G2064 G235
myself worthy to come unto
Conj Adv pf 1 Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 1 Sg Prep pp 2 Acc Sg vn 2Aor Act Conj thee: but say in a word, and my
THRU-WHICH NOT-YET MYself I-am-WORTHY TOWARD YOU TO-BE-COMING but servant shall be healed.
wherefore neither I-count-worthy
eipe logw kai iaqhsetai o pais mou

eipe logO kai iathEsetai ho pais mou
G2036 G3056 G2532 G2390 G3588 G3816 G3450
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Dat Sg m Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg
BE-sayING to-saying AND SHALL-BE-BEING-HEALED THE boy OF-ME
be-you-saying ! to-word
7:8 kai gar egw anqrwpos eimi upo exousian tassomenos 8 For I also am a man set under
kai gar egO anthrOpos eimi hupo exousian tassomenos
G2532 G1063 G1473 G444 G1510 G5259 G1849 G5021
authority, having under me
Conj Conj pp 1 Nom Sg n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 1 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m soldiers, and I say unto one,
AND for I human AM UNDER authority beING-SET Go, and he goeth; and to
also another, Come, and he cometh;
and to my servant, Do this, and
ecwn up emauton stratiwtas kai legw toutw poreuqhti he doeth [it].
echOn hup emauton stratiOtas kai legO toutO poreuthEti
G2192 G5259 G1683 G4757 G2532 G3004 G5129 G4198
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep pf 1 Acc Sg m n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg pd Dat Sg m vm Aor pasD 2 Sg
HAVING UNDER MYself WARriors AND I-AM-sayING to-this BE-BEING-GONE
soldiers to-this-one be-you-being-gone !
kai poreuetai kai allw ercou kai ercetai kai tw

kai poreuetai kai allO erchou kai erchetai kai tO
G2532 G4198 G2532 G243 G2064 G2532 G2064 G2532 G3588
Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj a_ Dat Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj t_ Dat Sg m
AND he-IS-GOING AND to-other BE-COMING AND he-IS-COMING AND to-THE
to-another be-you-coming !
doulw mou poihson touto kai poiei

doulO mou poiEson touto kai poiei
G1401 G3450 G4160 G5124 G2532 G4160
n_ Dat Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg vm Aor Act 2 Sg pd Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
SLAVE OF-ME DO this AND he-IS-DOING
do-you ! he-is-doing-it
7:9 akousas de tauta o ihsous eqaumasen auton kai 9 When Jesus heard these
akousas de tauta ho iEsous ethaumasen auton kai
G191 G1161 G5023 G3588 G2424 G2296 G846 G2532
things, he marvelled at him,
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj pd Acc Pl n t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj and turned him about, and said
HEARing YET these THE JESUS MARVELS him AND unto the people that followed
these-things marvels-at him, I say unto you, I have not
found so great faith, no, not in
strafeis tw akolouqounti autw oclw eipen legw umin Israel.
strapheis tO akolouthounti autO ochlO eipen legO humin
G4762 G3588 G190 G846 G3793 G2036 G3004 G5213
vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m pp Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
BEING-TURNED to-THE followING Him THRONG said I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p)
to-ye
oude en tw israhl tosauthn pistin euron

oude en tO israEl tosautEn pistin heuron
G3761 G1722 G3588 G2474 G5118 G4102 G2147
Adv Prep t_ Dat Sg m ni proper pd Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
NOT-YET IN THE ISRAEL so-much BELIEF I-FOUND
not-yeteven faith
7:10 kai upostreyantes oi pemfqentes eis ton oikon euron 10 And they that were sent,
kai hupostrepsantes hoi pemphthentes eis ton oikon heuron
G2532 G5290 G3588 G3992 G1519 G3588 G3624 G2147
returning to the house, found
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl the servant whole that had
AND reTURNing THE ones-BEING-SENT INTO THE HOME THEY-FOUND been sick.
ones-being-sent house found
ton asqenounta doulon ugiainonta

ton asthenounta doulon hugiainonta
G3588 G770 G1401 G5198
t_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
THE beING-UN-FIRM SLAVE beING-SOUND
being-infirm
Luke 7
7:11 kai egeneto en th exhs eporeueto eis polin kaloumenhn 11 . And it came to pass the
kai egeneto en tE hexEs eporeueto eis polin kaloumenEn
G2532 G1096 G1722 G3588 G1836 G4198 G1519 G4172 G2564
day after, that he went into a
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f Adv vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Pas Acc Sg f city called Nain; and many of
AND it-BECAME IN THE next He-WENT INTO city beING-CALLED his disciples went with him,
it-occurred and much people.
nain kai suneporeuonto autw oi maqhtai autou ikanoi kai

nain kai suneporeuonto autO hoi mathEtai autou hikanoi kai
G3484 G2532 G4848 G846 G3588 G3101 G846 G2425 G2532
ni proper Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m a_ Nom Pl m Conj
NAIN AND TOGETHER-WENT to-Him THE LEARNers OF-Him enough AND
went-with him disciples considerable
oclos polus
ochlos polus
G3793 G4183
n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
THRONG MANY
vast
7:12 ws de hggisen th pulh ths polews kai idou 12 Now when he came nigh to
hOs de Eggisen tE pulE tEs poleOs kai idou
G5613 G1161 G1448 G3588 G4439 G3588 G4172 G2532 G2400
the gate of the city, behold,
Adv Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg there was a dead man carried
AS YET He-NEARS to-THE GATE OF-THE city AND BE-PERCEIVING out, the only son of his mother,
the lo ! and she was a widow: and
much people of the city was
exekomizeto teqnhkws uios monogenhs th mhtri autou kai with her.
exekomizeto tethnEkOs huios monogenEs tE mEtri autou kai
G1580 G2348 G5207 G3439 G3588 G3384 G846 G2532
vi Impf Pas 3 Sg vp Perf Act Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj
WAS-OUT-FETCHED HAVING-DIED SON ONLY-generated to-THE MOTHER OF-him AND
there-was-fetched-out one-having-died only-begotten
auth hn chra kai oclos ths polews ikanos hn

autE En chEra kai ochlos tEs poleOs hikanos En
G846 G2258 G5503 G2532 G3793 G3588 G4172 G2425 G2258
pp Nom Sg f vi Impf vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f a_ Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg
she WAS WIDOW AND THRONG OF-THE city enough WAS
considerable
sun auth
sun autE
G4862 G846
Prep pp Dat Sg f
TOGETHER to-her
togetherwith her
7:13 kai idwn authn o kurios esplagcnisqh ep auth 13 And when the Lord saw her,
kai idOn autEn ho kurios esplagchnisthE ep autE
G2532 G1492 G846 G3588 G2962 G4697 G1909 G846
he had compassion on her, and
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor pasD 3 Sg Prep pp Dat Sg f said unto her, Weep not.
AND PERCEIVING her THE Master IS-compassionatED ON her
Lord is-moved-with-compassion
kai eipen auth mh klaie

kai eipen autE mE klaie
G2532 G2036 G846 G3361 G2799
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Sg
AND said to-her NO BE-LAMENTING
be-you-lamenting !
7:14 kai proselqwn hyato ths sorou oi de bastazontes 14 And he came and touched
kai proselthOn hEpsato tEs sorou hoi de bastazontes
G2532 G4334 G680 G3588 G4673 G3588 G1161 G941
the bier: and they that bare
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m [him] stood still. And he said,
AND TOWARD-COMING He-TOUCHES OF-THE BIER THE YET ones-BEARING Young man, I say unto thee,
approaching the ones-bearing-it Arise.
esthsan kai eipen neaniske soi legw egerqhti

hestEsan kai eipen neaniske soi legO egerthEti
G2476 G2532 G2036 G3495 G4671 G3004 G1453
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Voc Sg m pp 2 Dat Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
STAND AND He-said YOUTH ! to-YOU I-AM-sayING BE-BEING-ROUSED
be-you-being-roused !
7:15 kai anekaqisen o nekros kai hrxato lalein kai edwken 15 And he that was dead sat
kai anekathisen ho nekros kai Erxato lalein kai edOken
G2532 G339 G3588 G3498 G2532 G756 G2980 G2532 G1325
up, and began to speak. And he
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg delivered him to his mother.
AND is-UP-seated THE DEAD AND begins TO-BE-TALKING AND He-GIVES
sits-up dead-one to-be-speaking
auton th mhtri autou

auton tE mEtri autou
G846 G3588 G3384 G846
pp Acc Sg m t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m
him to-THE MOTHER OF-him
Luke 7
7:16 elaben de fobos apantas kai edoxazon ton qeon 16 And there came a fear on
elaben de phobos hapantas kai edoxazon ton theon
G2983 G1161 G5401 G537 G2532 G1392 G3588 G2316
all: and they glorified God,
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg m a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m saying, That a great prophet is
GOT YET FEAR ALL (emph.) AND esteemizED THE God risen up among us; and, That
all(emph.) they-glorified God hath visited his people.
legontes oti profhths megas eghgertai en hmin kai oti

legontes hoti prophEtEs megas egEgertai en hEmin kai hoti
G3004 G3754 G4396 G3173 G1453 G1722 G2254 G2532 G3754
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Prep pp 1 Dat Pl Conj Conj
sayING that BEFORE-AVERer GREAT HAS-been-ROUSED IN US AND that
prophet among
epeskeyato o qeos ton laon autou

epeskepsato ho theos ton laon autou
G1980 G3588 G2316 G3588 G2992 G846
vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m
ON-NOTES THE God THE PEOPLE OF-Him
visits
7:17 kai exhlqen o logos outos en olh th ioudaia peri 17 And this rumour of him
kai exElthen ho logos houtos en holE tE ioudaia peri
G2532 G1831 G3588 G3056 G3778 G1722 G3650 G3588 G2449 G4012
went forth throughout all
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m Prep a_ Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Prep Judaea, and throughout all the
AND OUT-CAME THE saying this IN WHOLE THE JUDEA ABOUT region round about.
came-out concerning
autou kai en pash th pericwrw

autou kai en pasE tE perichOrO
G846 G2532 G1722 G3956 G3588 G4066
pp Gen Sg m Conj Prep a_ Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f
Him AND IN EVERY THE ABOUT-SPACE
entire country-about
7:18 kai aphggeilan iwannh oi maqhtai autou peri pantwn toutwn 18 And the disciples of John
kai apEggeilan iOannE hoi mathEtai autou peri pantOn toutOn
G2532 G518 G2491 G3588 G3101 G846 G4012 G3956 G5130
shewed him of all these things.
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m Prep a_ Gen Pl n pd Gen Pl n
AND FROM-MESSAGE to-JOHN THE LEARNers OF-him ABOUT ALL OF-these
report disciples concerning these-things
7:19 kai proskalesamenos duo tinas twn maqhtwn autou o 19 . And John calling [unto
kai proskalesamenos duo tinas tOn mathEtOn autou ho
G2532 G4341 G1417 G5100 G3588 G3101 G846 G3588
him] two of his disciples sent
Conj vp Aor midD Nom Sg m a_ Nom px Acc Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg m [them] to Jesus, saying, Art
AND TOWARD-CALLing TWO ANY OF-THE LEARNers OF-him THE thou he that should come? or
calling-to-him certain-ones disciples look we for another?
iwannhs epemyen pros ton ihsoun legwn su ei

iOannEs epempsen pros ton iEsoun legOn su ei
G2491 G3992 G4314 G3588 G2424 G3004 G4771 G1488
n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp 2 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
JOHN SENDS TOWARD THE JESUS sayING YOU ARE
o ercomenos h allon prosdokwmen

ho erchomenos E allon prosdokOmen
G3588 G2064 G2228 G243 G4328
t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m Part a_ Acc Sg m vs Pres Act 1 Pl
THE One-COMING OR other WE-MAY-BE-TOWARD-SEEMING
one-coming another-one we-may-be-hoping-for
7:20 paragenomenoi de pros auton oi andres eipon iwannhs 20 When the men were come
paragenomenoi de pros auton hoi andres eipon iOannEs
G3854 G1161 G4314 G846 G3588 G435 G2036 G2491
unto him, they said, John
vp 2Aor midD Nom Pl m Conj Prep pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Nom Sg m Baptist hath sent us unto thee,
BESIDE-BECOMING YET TOWARD Him THE MEN said JOHN saying, Art thou he that should
coming-along come? or look we for another?
o baptisths apestalken hmas pros se legwn su

ho baptistEs apestalken hEmas pros se legOn su
G3588 G910 G649 G2248 G4314 G4571 G3004 G4771
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Perf Act 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl Prep pp 2 Acc Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp 2 Nom Sg
THE DIPist HAS-commissionED US TOWARD YOU sayING YOU
baptist has-dispatched
ei o ercomenos h allon prosdokwmen

ei ho erchomenos E allon prosdokOmen
G1488 G3588 G2064 G2228 G243 G4328
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m Part a_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ARE THE One-COMING OR other WE-MAY-BE-TOWARD-SEEMING
one-coming another-one we-may-be-hoping-for
7:21 en auth de th wra eqerapeusen pollous apo noswn kai 21 And in that same hour he
en autE de tE hOra etherapeusen pollous apo nosOn kai
G1722 G846 G1161 G3588 G5610 G2323 G4183 G575 G3554 G2532
cured many of [their]
Prep pp Dat Sg f Conj t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m Prep n_ Gen Pl f Conj infirmities and plagues, and of
IN this YET THE HOUR He-curES MANY FROM DISEASES AND evil spirits; and unto many
many-ones [that were] blind he gave sight.
Luke 7
mastigwn kai pneumatwn ponhrwn kai tuflois pollois ecarisato to

mastigOn kai pneumatOn ponErOn kai tuphlois pollois echarisato to
G3148 G2532 G4151 G4190 G2532 G5185 G4183 G5483 G3588
n_ Gen Pl f Conj n_ Gen Pl n a_ Gen Pl n Conj a_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
scourges AND spirits wicked AND to-BLIND-ones MANY He-gracES THE
to-blind-ones he-graciously-grants
blepein
blepein
G991
vn Pres Act
TO-BE-lookING
to-be-observing
7:22 kai apokriqeis o ihsous eipen autois poreuqentes 22 Then Jesus answering said
kai apokritheis ho iEsous eipen autois poreuthentes
G2532 G611 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G4198
unto them, Go your way, and
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m tell John what things ye have
AND answerING THE JESUS said to-them BEING-GONE seen and heard; how that the
blind see, the lame walk, the
lepers are cleansed, the deaf
apaggeilate iwannh a eidete kai hkousate oti tufloi hear, the dead are raised, to the
apaggeilate iOannE ha eidete kai Ekousate hoti tuphloi poor the gospel is preached.
G518 G2491 G3739 G1492 G2532 G191 G3754 G5185
vm Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Dat Sg m pr Acc Pl n vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 2 Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m
FROM-MESSAGE to-JOHN WHICH YE-PERCEIVED AND YE-HEAR that BLIND-ones
report-ye ! which(p) blind-ones
anablepousin cwloi peripatousin leproi kaqarizontai kwfoi akouousin

anablepousin chOloi peripatousin leproi katharizontai kOphoi akouousin
G308 G5560 G4043 G3015 G2511 G2974 G191
vi Pres Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Pas 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ARE-UP-lookING LAME-ones ARE-ABOUT-TREADING lepers ARE-beING-cleansED MUTES ARE-HEARING
are-receiving-sight lame-ones are-walking deaf-mutes
nekroi egeirontai ptwcoi euaggelizontai

nekroi egeirontai ptOchoi euaggelizontai
G3498 G1453 G4434 G2097
a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Pas 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
DEAD-ones ARE-beING-ROUSED POOR-ones ARE-beING-WELL-MESSAGizED
dead-ones poor-ones are-being-brought-the-well-message
7:23 kai makarios estin os ean mh skandalisqh en emoi 23 And blessed is [he],
kai makarios estin hos ean mE skandalisthE en emoi
G2532 G3107 G2076 G3739 G1437 G3361 G4624 G1722 G1698
whosoever shall not be
Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pr Nom Sg m Cond Part Neg vs Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep pp 1 Dat Sg offended in me.
AND HAPPY he-IS WHO IF-EVER NO MAY-BE-BEING-SNARED IN ME
7:24 apelqontwn de twn aggelwn iwannou hrxato legein pros 24 And when the messengers
apelthontOn de tOn aggelOn iOannou Erxato legein pros
G565 G1161 G3588 G32 G2491 G756 G3004 G4314
of John were departed, he
vp 2Aor Act Gen Pl m Conj t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act Prep began to speak unto the people
OF-FROM-COMING YET THE MESSENGERS OF-JOHN He-begins TO-BE-sayING TOWARD concerning John, What went ye
of-coming-away of-the out into the wilderness for to
see? A reed shaken with the
tous oclous peri iwannou ti exelhluqate eis thn erhmon wind?
tous ochlous peri iOannou ti exelEluthate eis tEn erEmon
G3588 G3793 G4012 G2491 G5101 G1831 G1519 G3588 G2048
t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Prep n_ Gen Sg m pi Acc Sg n vi Perf Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f
THE THRONGS ABOUT JOHN ANY YE-HAVE-OUT-COME INTO THE DESOLATE
concerning what ? ye-have-come-out wilderness
qeasasqai kalamon upo anemou saleuomenon

theasasthai kalamon hupo anemou saleuomenon
G2300 G2563 G5259 G417 G4531
vn Aor midD n_ Acc Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m
TO-gaze REED by WIND beING-SHAKEN
to-gaze-at
7:25 alla ti exelhluqate idein anqrwpon en malakois imatiois 25 But what went ye out for to
alla ti exelEluthate idein anthrOpon en malakois himatiois
G235 G5101 G1831 G1492 G444 G1722 G3120 G2440
see? A man clothed in soft
Conj pi Acc Sg n vi Perf Act 2 Pl vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg m Prep a_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n raiment? Behold, they which
but ANY YE-HAVE-OUT-COME TO-BE-PERCEIVING human IN SOFT GARMENTS are gorgeously apparelled, and
what ? ye-have-come-out live delicately, are in
kings'courts.
hmfiesmenon idou oi en imatismw endoxw kai trufh
Emphiesmenon idou hoi en himatismO endoxO kai truphE
G294 G2400 G3588 G1722 G2441 G1741 G2532 G5172
vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Nom Pl m Prep n_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m Conj n_ Dat Sg f
HAVING-been-ENVELOPED-IN BE-PERCEIVING THE-ones IN GARMENTing IN-esteemed AND to-ENERVATION
having-been-garbed lo ! the-ones vesture glorious to-luxury
uparcontes en tois basileiois eisin

huparchontes en tois basileiois eisin
G5225 G1722 G3588 G934 G1526
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
belongING IN THE KINGish ARE
inhering among royal-ones
Luke 7
7:26 alla ti exelhluqate idein profhthn nai legw umin 26 But what went ye out for to
alla ti exelEluthate idein prophEtEn nai legO humin
G235 G5101 G1831 G1492 G4396 G3483 G3004 G5213
see? A prophet? Yea, I say
Conj pi Acc Sg n vi Perf Act 2 Pl vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg m Part vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl unto you, and much more than
but ANY YE-HAVE-OUT-COME TO-BE-PERCEIVING BEFORE-AVERer YEA I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) a prophet.
what ? ye-have-come-out prophet yes to-ye
kai perissoteron profhtou

kai perissoteron prophEtou
G2532 G4053 G4396
Conj a_ Acc Sg m Cmp n_ Gen Sg m
AND more-excessive OF-BEFORE-AVERer
exceedingly-more of-prophet
7:27 outos estin peri ou gegraptai idou egw 27 This is [he], of whom it is
houtos estin peri hou gegraptai idou egO
G3778 G2076 G4012 G3739 G1125 G2400 G1473
written, Behold, I send my
pd Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep pr Gen Sg m vi Perf Pas 3 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Nom Sg messenger before thy face,
this IS ABOUT WHOM it-HAS-been-WRITTEN BE-PERCEIVING I which shall prepare thy way
this-one concerning lo ! before thee.
apostellw ton aggelon mou pro proswpou sou os

apostellO ton aggelon mou pro prosOpou sou hos
G649 G3588 G32 G3450 G4253 G4383 G4675 G3739
vi Pres Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Prep n_ Gen Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg pr Nom Sg m
AM-commissionING THE MESSENGER OF-ME BEFORE face OF-YOU WHO
am-dispatching
kataskeuasei thn odon sou emprosqen sou

kataskeuasei tEn hodon sou emprosthen sou
G2680 G3588 G3598 G4675 G1715 G4675
vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Prep pp 2 Gen Sg
SHALL-BE-constructING THE WAY OF-YOU IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-YOU
7:28 legw gar umin meizwn en gennhtois gunaikwn profhths 28 For I say unto you, Among
legO gar humin meizOn en gennEtois gunaikOn prophEtEs
G3004 G1063 G5213 G3187 G1722 G1084 G1135 G4396
those that are born of women
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl a_ Nom Sg m Cmp Prep a_ Dat Pl m n_ Gen Pl f n_ Nom Sg m there is not a greater prophet
I-AM-sayING for to-YOU(p) GREATER IN generated(p) OF-WOMEN BEFORE-AVERer than John the Baptist: but he
to-ye among ones-born prophet that is least in the kingdom of
God is greater than he.
iwannou tou baptistou oudeis estin o de mikroteros en
iOannou tou baptistou oudeis estin ho de mikroteros en
G2491 G3588 G910 G3762 G2076 G3588 G1161 G3398 G1722
n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m Cmp Prep
OF-JOHN THE DIPist NOT-YET-ONE IS THE YET LITTLER IN
baptist not-one there-is smaller-one
th basileia tou qeou meizwn autou estin

tE basileia tou theou meizOn autou estin
G3588 G932 G3588 G2316 G3187 G846 G2076
t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Cmp pp Gen Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE KINGdom OF-THE God GREATER OF-him IS
7:29 kai pas o laos akousas kai oi telwnai 29 And all the people that
kai pas ho laos akousas kai hoi telOnai
G2532 G3956 G3588 G2992 G191 G2532 G3588 G5057
heard [him], and the publicans,
Conj a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m justified God, being baptized
AND EVERY THE PEOPLE HEARing AND THE tribute-collectors with the baptism of John.
entire also
edikaiwsan ton qeon baptisqentes to baptisma iwannou

edikaiOsan ton theon baptisthentes to baptisma iOannou
G1344 G3588 G2316 G907 G3588 G908 G2491
vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg m
THEY-JUSTIFY THE God BEING-DIPizED THE DIPism OF-JOHN
justify being-baptized baptism
7:30 oi de farisaioi kai oi nomikoi thn boulhn tou qeou 30 But the Pharisees and
hoi de pharisaioi kai hoi nomikoi tEn boulEn tou theou
G3588 G1161 G5330 G2532 G3588 G3544 G3588 G1012 G3588 G2316
lawyers rejected the counsel of
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m God against themselves, being
THE YET PHARISEES AND THE LAWers THE COUNSEL OF-THE God not baptized of him.
lawyers
hqethsan eis eautous mh baptisqentes up autou

EthetEsan eis heautous mE baptisthentes hup autou
G114 G1519 G1438 G3361 G907 G5259 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pf 3 Acc Pl m Part Neg vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m Prep pp Gen Sg m
UN-PLACE INTO selves NO BEING-DIPizED by him
repudiate themselves being-baptized
7:31 eipen de o kurios tini oun omoiwsw tous 31 And the Lord said,
eipen de ho kurios tini oun homoiOsO tous
G2036 G1161 G3588 G2962 G5101 G3767 G3666 G3588
Whereunto then shall I liken
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pi Dat Sg n Conj vi Fut Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Pl m the men of this generation? and
said YET THE Master to-ANY THEN I-SHALL-BE-LIKenING THE to what are they like?
Lord to-whom ?
Luke 7
anqrwpous ths geneas tauths kai tini eisin omoioi

anthrOpous tEs geneas tautEs kai tini eisin homoioi
G444 G3588 G1074 G3778 G2532 G5101 G1526 G3664
n_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f Conj pi Dat Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m
humans OF-THE generation this AND to-ANY THEY-ARE LIKE
to-whom ?
7:32 omoioi eisin paidiois tois en agora kaqhmenois kai 32 They are like unto children
homoioi eisin paidiois tois en agora kathEmenois kai
G3664 G1526 G3813 G3588 G1722 G58 G2521 G2532
sitting in the marketplace, and
a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl n_ Dat Pl n t_ Dat Pl n Prep n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl n Conj calling one to another, and
LIKE THEY-ARE to-little-boys-and-girls THE-ones IN BUY-place sittING AND saying, We have piped unto
the-ones market you, and ye have not danced;
we have mourned to you, and
prosfwnousin allhlois kai legousin hulhsamen umin kai ouk wrchsasqe ye have not wept.
prosphOnousin allElois kai legousin EulEsamen humin kai ouk OrchEsasthe
G4377 G240 G2532 G3004 G832 G5213 G2532 G3756 G3738
vi Pres Act 3 Pl pc Dat Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl vi Aor Act 1 Pl pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Part Neg vi Aor midD 2 Pl
TOWARD-SOUNDING to-one-another AND ARE-sayING WE-FLAGEOLET to-YOU(p) AND NOT YE-DANCE
shouting-to one-another we-flute to-ye
eqrhnhsamen umin kai ouk eklausate

ethrEnEsamen humin kai ouk eklausate
G2354 G5213 G2532 G3756 G2799
vi Aor Act 1 Pl pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Part Neg vi Aor Act 2 Pl
WE-DIRGE to-YOU(p) AND NOT YE-LAMENT
we-wail to-ye
7:33 elhluqen gar iwannhs o baptisths mhte arton esqiwn 33 For John the Baptist came
elEluthen gar iOannEs ho baptistEs mEte arton esthiOn
G2064 G1063 G2491 G3588 G910 G3383 G740 G2068
neither eating bread nor
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m drinking wine; and ye say, He
HAS-COME for JOHN THE DIPist NO-BESIDES BREAD EATING hath a devil.
baptist neither
mhte oinon pinwn kai legete daimonion ecei

mEte oinon pinOn kai legete daimonion echei
G3383 G3631 G4095 G2532 G3004 G1140 G2192
Conj n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
NO-BESIDES WINE DRINKING AND YE-ARE-sayING demon he-IS-HAVING
nor
7:34 elhluqen o uios tou anqrwpou esqiwn kai 34 The Son of man is come
elEluthen ho huios tou anthrOpou esthiOn kai
G2064 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G2068 G2532
eating and drinking; and ye
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj say, Behold a gluttonous man,
HAS-COME THE SON OF-THE human EATING AND and a winebibber, a friend of
publicans and sinners!
pinwn kai legete idou anqrwpos fagos kai oinopoths

pinOn kai legete idou anthrOpos phagos kai oinopotEs
G4095 G2532 G3004 G2400 G444 G5314 G2532 G3630
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
DRINKING AND YE-ARE-sayING BE-PERCEIVING human EATer AND WINE-DRINKer
lo ! gluttonous
telwnwn filos kai amartwlwn

telOnOn philos kai hamartOlOn
G5057 G5384 G2532 G268
n_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Gen Pl m
OF-tribute-collectors FOND-One AND OF-missers
friend of-sinners
7:35 kai edikaiwqh h sofia apo twn teknwn auths pantwn 35 But wisdom is justified of
kai edikaiOthE hE sophia apo tOn teknOn autEs pantOn
G2532 G1344 G3588 G4678 G575 G3588 G5043 G846 G3956
all her children.
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n pp Gen Sg f a_ Gen Pl n
AND WAS-JUSTIFIED THE WISDOM FROM THE offsprings OF-her ALL
children
7:36 hrwta de tis auton twn farisaiwn ina fagh met 36 . And one of the Pharisees
ErOta de tis auton tOn pharisaiOn hina phagE met
G2065 G1161 G5100 G846 G3588 G5330 G2443 G5315 G3326
desired him that he would eat
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj px Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep with him. And he went into the
askED YET ANY Him OF-THE PHARISEES THAT He-MAY-BE-EATING WITH Pharisee's house, and sat down
certain-one to meat.
autou kai eiselqwn eis thn oikian tou farisaiou anekliqh

autou kai eiselthOn eis tEn oikian tou pharisaiou aneklithE
G846 G2532 G1525 G1519 G3588 G3614 G3588 G5330 G347
pp Gen Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
him AND INTO-COMING INTO THE HOME OF-THE PHARISEE He-WAS-UP-CLINED
entering house he-reclined
7:37 kai idou gunh en th polei htis hn amartwlos 37 And, behold, a woman in
kai idou gunE en tE polei hEtis En hamartOlos
G2532 G2400 G1135 G1722 G3588 G4172 G3748 G2258 G268
the city, which was a sinner,
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pr Nom Sg f vi Impf vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg f when she knew that [Jesus] sat
AND BE-PERCEIVING WOMAN IN THE city WHO-ANY WAS misser at meat in the Pharisee's house,
lo ! who-any sinner brought an alabaster box of
Luke 7
ointment,
epignousa oti anakeitai en th oikia tou farisaiou
epignousa hoti anakeitai en tE oikia tou pharisaiou
G1921 G3754 G345 G1722 G3588 G3614 G3588 G5330
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
ON-KNOWING that He-IS-UP-LYING IN THE HOME OF-THE PHARISEE
recognizing he-is-lying-down-at-table house
komisasa alabastron murou

komisasa alabastron murou
G2865 G211 G3464
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
FETCHing ALABASTER OF-ATTAR
alabaster-vase
7:38 kai stasa para tous podas autou opisw klaiousa 38 And stood at his feet behind
kai stasa para tous podas autou opisO klaiousa
G2532 G2476 G3844 G3588 G4228 G846 G3694 G2799
[him] weeping, and began to
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m Adv vp Pres Act Nom Sg f wash his feet with tears, and
AND STANDing BESIDE THE FEET OF-Him BEHIND LAMENTING did wipe [them] with the hairs
of her head, and kissed his
feet, and anointed [them] with
hrxato brecein tous podas autou tois dakrusin kai tais qrixin the ointment.
Erxato brechein tous podas autou tois dakrusin kai tais thrixin
G756 G1026 G3588 G4228 G846 G3588 G1144 G2532 G3588 G2359
vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n Conj t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f
begins TO-BE-RAINING THE FEET OF-Him to-THE TEARS AND to-THE HAIRS
she-begins
ths kefalhs auths exemassen kai katefilei tous podas autou

tEs kephalEs autEs exemassen kai katephilei tous podas autou
G3588 G2776 G846 G1591 G2532 G2705 G3588 G4228 G846
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg f vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m
OF-THE HEAD OF-her she-OUT-WIPED AND DOWN-FONDED THE FEET OF-Him
she-wiped-off-them fondly-kissed
kai hleifen tw murw

kai Eleiphen tO murO
G2532 G218 G3588 G3464
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n
AND RUBBED to-THE ATTAR
rubbed-them
7:39 idwn de o farisaios o kalesas auton 39 Now when the Pharisee

idOn de ho pharisaios ho kalesas auton
G1492 G1161 G3588 G5330 G3588 G2564 G846
which had bidden him saw [it],
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m he spake within himself,
PERCEIVING YET THE PHARISEE THE one-CALLing Him saying, This man, if he were a
perceiving-it one-inviting prophet, would have known
who and what manner of
eipen en eautw legwn outos ei hn profhths woman [this is] that toucheth
eipen en heautO legOn houtos ei En prophEtEs him: for she is a sinner.
G2036 G1722 G1438 G3004 G3778 G1487 G2258 G4396
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pf 3 Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m Cond vi Impf vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m
he-said IN himself sayING this-One IF He-WAS BEFORE-AVERer
said this-one prophet
eginwsken an tis kai potaph h gunh htis aptetai

eginOsken an tis kai potapE hE gunE hEtis haptetai
G1097 G302 G5101 G2532 G4217 G3588 G1135 G3748 G680
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Part pi Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pr Nom Sg f vi Pres Mid 3 Sg
KNEW EVER ANY AND ?-where-FROM THE WOMAN WHO-ANY IS-TOUCHING
who ? what-manner-of who-any
autou oti amartwlos estin

autou hoti hamartOlos estin
G846 G3754 G268 G2076
pp Gen Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
OF-Him that misser she-IS
him seeing-that sinner
7:40 kai apokriqeis o ihsous eipen pros auton simwn 40 And Jesus answering said
kai apokritheis ho iEsous eipen pros auton simOn
G2532 G611 G3588 G2424 G2036 G4314 G846 G4613
unto him, Simon, I have
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m somewhat to say unto thee.
AND answerING THE JESUS said TOWARD him SIMON And he saith, Master, say on.
ecw soi ti eipein o de fhsin didaskale

echO soi ti eipein ho de phEsin didaskale
G2192 G4671 G5100 G2036 G3588 G1161 G5346 G1320
vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg px Acc Sg n vn 2Aor Act t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Voc Sg m
I-AM-HAVING to-YOU ANY TO-BE-sayING THE YET he-IS-AVERRING TEACHer !
something
eipe
eipe
G2036
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
BE-sayING
be-you-saying-it !
Luke 7
7:41 duo crewfeiletai hsan daneisth tini o eis wfeilen 41 There was a certain creditor
duo chreOpheiletai Esan daneistE tini ho heis Opheilen
G1417 G5533 G2258 G1157 G5100 G3588 G1520 G3784
which had two debtors: the one
a_ Nom n_ Nom Pl m vi Impf vxx 3 Pl n_ Dat Sg m px Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg owed five hundred pence, and
TWO USE-OWers WERE to-LOANER ANY THE ONE OWED the other fifty.
debtors-paying-usury there-were to-creditor certain
dhnaria pentakosia o de eteros penthkonta

dEnaria pentakosia ho de heteros pentEkonta
G1220 G4001 G3588 G1161 G2087 G4004
n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n t_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom
DENARII FIVE-hundred THE YET DIFFERENT FIVE-ty
different-one fifty
7:42 mh econtwn de autwn apodounai amfoterois ecarisato tis 42 And when they had nothing
mE echontOn de autOn apodounai amphoterois echarisato tis
G3361 G2192 G1161 G846 G591 G297 G5483 G5101
to pay, he frankly forgave them
Part Neg vp Pres Act Gen Pl m Conj pp Gen Pl m vn 2Aor Act a_ Dat Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Sg pi Nom Sg m both. Tell me therefore, which
NO OF-HAVING YET them TO-FROM-GIVE to-both he-gracES ANY of them will love him most?
to-pay he-deals-graciously which
oun autwn eipe pleion auton agaphsei

oun autOn eipe pleion auton agapEsei
G3767 G846 G2036 G4119 G846 G25
Conj pp Gen Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Acc Sg n Cmp pp Acc Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg
THEN OF-them BE-sayING MORE him SHALL-BE-LOVING
be-you-telling !
7:43 apokriqeis de o simwn eipen upolambanw oti w 43 Simon answered and said, I
apokritheis de ho simOn eipen hupolambanO hoti hO
G611 G1161 G3588 G4613 G2036 G5274 G3754 G3739
suppose that [he], to whom he
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pr Dat Sg m forgave most. And he said unto
answerING YET THE SIMON said I-AM-UNDER-GETTING that to-WHOM him, Thou hast rightly judged.
I-am-taking-it
to pleion ecarisato o de eipen autw orqws ekrinas

to pleion echarisato ho de eipen autO orthOs ekrinas
G3588 G4119 G5483 G3588 G1161 G2036 G846 G3723 G2919
t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Cmp vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Adv vi Aor Act 2 Sg
THE MORE he-gracES THE YET He-said to-him ERECTly YOU-JUDGE
he-deals-graciously correctly you-decide
7:44 kai strafeis pros thn gunaika tw simwni efh 44 And he turned to the
kai strapheis pros tEn gunaika tO simOni ephE
G2532 G4762 G4314 G3588 G1135 G3588 G4613 G5346
woman, and said unto Simon,
Conj vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Seest thou this woman? I
AND BEING-TURNED TOWARD THE WOMAN to-THE SIMON He-AVERRed entered into thine house, thou
gavest me no water for my
feet: but she hath washed my
blepeis tauthn thn gunaika eishlqon sou eis thn oikian feet with tears, and wiped
blepeis tautEn tEn gunaika eisElthon sou eis tEn oikian [them] with the hairs of her
G991 G3778 G3588 G1135 G1525 G4675 G1519 G3588 G3614
vi Pres Act 2 Sg pd Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Gen Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f head.
YOU-ARE-lookING this THE WOMAN I-INTO-CAME OF-YOU INTO THE HOME
you-are-observing I-entered house
udwr epi tous podas mou ouk edwkas auth de tois

hudOr epi tous podas mou ouk edOkas autE de tois
G5204 G1909 G3588 G4228 G3450 G3756 G1325 G846 G1161 G3588
n_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg Part Neg vi Aor Act 2 Sg pp Nom Sg f Conj t_ Dat Pl n
water ON THE FEET OF-ME NOT YOU-GIVE this-one YET to-THE
she
dakrusin ebrexen mou tous podas kai tais qrixin ths kefalhs
dakrusin ebrexen mou tous podas kai tais thrixin tEs kephalEs
G1144 G1026 G3450 G3588 G4228 G2532 G3588 G2359 G3588 G2776
n_ Dat Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
TEARS RAINS OF-ME THE FEET AND to-THE HAIRS OF-THE HEAD
auths exemaxen
autEs exemaxen
G846 G1591
pp Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg
OF-her OUT-WIPES
wipes-off-them
7:45 filhma moi ouk edwkas auth de af hs eishlqon ou 45 Thou gavest me no kiss: but
philEma moi ouk edOkas autE de aph hEs eisElthon ou
G5370 G3427 G3756 G1325 G846 G1161 G575 G3739 G1525 G3756
this woman since the time I
n_ Acc Sg n pp 1 Dat Sg Part Neg vi Aor Act 2 Sg pp Nom Sg f Conj Prep pr Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg Part Neg came in hath not ceased to kiss
FOND-effect to-ME NOT YOU-GIVE this-one YET FROM WHICH I-INTO-CAME NOT my feet.
kiss she I-entered
dielipen katafilousa mou tous podas

dielipen kataphilousa mou tous podas
G1257 G2705 G3450 G3588 G4228
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
THRU-LACKED DOWN-FONDING OF-ME THE FEET
did-intermit fondly-kissing
Luke 7 - Luke 8
7:46 elaiw thn kefalhn mou ouk hleiyas auth de murw 46 My head with oil thou didst
elaiO tEn kephalEn mou ouk Eleipsas autE de murO
G1637 G3588 G2776 G3450 G3756 G218 G846 G1161 G3464
not anoint: but this woman
n_ Dat Sg n t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg Part Neg vi Aor Act 2 Sg pp Nom Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg n hath anointed my feet with
to-OLIVE-oil THE HEAD OF-ME NOT YOU-RUB this-one YET to-ATTAR ointment.
to-oil she
hleiyen mou tous podas

Eleipsen mou tous podas
G218 G3450 G3588 G4228
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
RUBS OF-ME THE FEET
7:47 ou carin legw soi afewntai ai amartiai auths 47 Wherefore I say unto thee,
hou charin legO soi apheOntai hai hamartiai autEs
G3739 G5484 G3004 G4671 G863 G3588 G266 G846
Her sins, which are many, are
pr Gen Sg n Adv vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg vi Perf Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f pp Gen Sg f forgiven; for she loved much:
OF-WHICH grace I-AM-sayING to-YOU HAVE-been-FROM-LET THE misses OF-her but to whom little is forgiven,
on-behalf have-been-pardoned sins [the same] loveth little.
ai pollai oti hgaphsen polu w de oligon afietai oligon

hai pollai hoti EgapEsen polu hO de oligon aphietai oligon
G3588 G4183 G3754 G25 G4183 G3739 G1161 G3641 G863 G3641
t_ Nom Pl f a_ Nom Pl f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg n pr Dat Sg m Conj a_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Pas 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg n
THE MANY that she-LOVES much to-WHOM YET FEW IS-beING-FROM-LET FEW
is-being-pardoned
agapa
agapa
G25
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IS-LOVING
7:48 eipen de auth afewntai sou ai amartiai 48 And he said unto her, Thy
eipen de autE apheOntai sou hai hamartiai
G2036 G1161 G846 G863 G4675 G3588 G266
sins are forgiven.
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Sg f vi Perf Pas 3 Pl pp 2 Gen Sg t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f
He-said YET to-her HAVE-been-FROM-LET OF-YOU THE misses
have-been-forgiven sins
7:49 kai hrxanto oi sunanakeimenoi legein en eautois tis 49 And they that sat at meat
kai Erxanto hoi sunanakeimenoi legein en heautois tis
G2532 G756 G3588 G4873 G3004 G1722 G1438 G5101
with him began to say within
Conj vi Aor midD 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m vn Pres Act Prep pf 3 Dat Pl m pi Nom Sg m themselves, Who is this that
AND begin THE ones-TOGETHER-UP-LYING TO-BE-sayING IN selves ANY forgiveth sins also?
ones-lying-back-at-table-together among themselves who ?
outos estin os kai amartias afihsin

houtos estin hos kai hamartias aphiEsin
G3778 G2076 G3739 G2532 G266 G863
pd Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pr Nom Sg m Conj n_ Acc Pl f vi Pres Act 3 Sg
this IS WHO AND misses IS-FROM-LETTING
also sins is-pardoning
7:50 eipen de pros thn gunaika h pistis sou seswken 50 And he said to the woman,
eipen de pros tEn gunaika hE pistis sou sesOken
G2036 G1161 G4314 G3588 G1135 G3588 G4102 G4675 G4982
Thy faith hath saved thee; go
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg vi Perf Act 3 Sg in peace.
He-said YET TOWARD THE WOMAN THE BELIEF OF-YOU HAS-SAVED
faith
se poreuou eis eirhnhn

se poreuou eis eirEnEn
G4571 G4198 G1519 G1515
pp 2 Acc Sg vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f
YOU BE-GOING INTO PEACE
be-you-going !
Luke 8
8:1 kai egeneto en tw kaqexhs kai autos diwdeuen kata 1 . And it came to pass
kai egeneto en tO kathexEs kai autos diOdeuen kata
G2532 G1096 G1722 G3588 G2517 G2532 G846 G1353 G2596
afterward, that he went
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m Adv Conj pp Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg Prep throughout every city and
AND it-BECAME IN THE according-to-next AND He THRU-WAYS according-to village, preaching and shewing
it-occurred consecutively also traversed the glad tidings of the kingdom
of God: and the twelve [were]
polin kai kwmhn khrusswn kai euaggelizomenos thn basileian with him,
polin kai kOmEn kErussOn kai euaggelizomenos tEn basileian
G4172 G2532 G2968 G2784 G2532 G2097 G3588 G932
n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
city AND VILLAGE PROCLAIMING AND WELL-MESSAGizING THE KINGdom
heralding bringing-the-well-message of-the
tou qeou kai oi dwdeka sun autw

tou theou kai hoi dOdeka sun autO
G3588 G2316 G2532 G3588 G1427 G4862 G846
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Prep pp Dat Sg m
OF-THE God AND THE TWO-TEN TOGETHER to-Him
twelve togetherwith him
8:2 kai gunaikes tines ai hsan teqerapeumenai apo pneumatwn 2 And certain women, which
kai gunaikes tines hai Esan tetherapeumenai apo pneumatOn
G2532 G1135 G5100 G3739 G2258 G2323 G575 G4151
had been healed of evil spirits
Conj n_ Nom Pl f px Nom Pl f pr Nom Pl f vi Impf vxx 3 Pl vp Perf Pas Nom Pl f Prep n_ Gen Pl n and infirmities, Mary called
AND WOMEN ANY WHO WERE HAVING-been-curED FROM spirits Magdalene, out of whom went
some seven devils,
ponhrwn kai asqeneiwn maria h kaloumenh magdalhnh af hs

ponErOn kai astheneiOn maria hE kaloumenE magdalEnE aph hEs
G4190 G2532 G769 G3137 G3588 G2564 G3094 G575 G3739
a_ Gen Pl n Conj n_ Gen Pl f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Pas Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep pr Gen Sg f
wicked AND UN-FIRMS MARY THE beING-CALLED MAGDALENE FROM WHOM
infirmities
daimonia epta exelhluqei

daimonia hepta exelEluthei
G1140 G2033 G1831
n_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom vi Plup Act 3 Sg
demons SEVEN HAD-OUT-COME
had-come-out
8:3 kai iwanna gunh couza epitropou hrwdou kai sousanna kai 3 And Joanna the wife of
kai iOanna gunE chouza epitropou hErOdou kai sousanna kai
G2532 G2489 G1135 G5529 G2012 G2264 G2532 G4677 G2532
Chuza Herod's steward, and
Conj n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg f Conj Susanna, and many others,
AND JOANNA WOMAN OF-CHUSA permitter OF-HEROD AND SUSANNA AND which ministered unto him of
wife of-Chuza manager their substance.
eterai pollai aitines dihkonoun autw apo twn uparcontwn autais

heterai pollai haitines diEkonoun autO apo tOn huparchontOn autais
G2087 G4183 G3748 G1247 G846 G575 G3588 G5224 G846
a_ Nom Pl f a_ Nom Pl f pr Nom Pl f vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl n vp Pres Act Gen Pl n pp Dat Pl f
DIFFERENT MANY WHO-ANY THRU-SERVED to-Him FROM THE belongINGS to-them
different-ones who-any dispensed possessions
8:4 suniontos de oclou pollou kai twn kata polin 4 . And when much people
suniontos de ochlou pollou kai tOn kata polin
G4896 G1161 G3793 G4183 G2532 G3588 G2596 G4172
were gathered together, and
vp Pres vxx Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Pl m Prep n_ Acc Sg f were come to him out of every
OF-TOGETHER-BEING YET OF-THRONG MANY AND OF-THE according-to city city, he spake by a parable:
of-being-together vast
epiporeuomenwn pros auton eipen dia parabolhs

epiporeuomenOn pros auton eipen dia parabolEs
G1975 G4314 G846 G2036 G1223 G3850
vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl m Prep pp Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Gen Sg f
OF-ON-GOING TOWARD Him He-said THRU BESIDE-CAST
ones-going-on through parable
8:5 exhlqen o speirwn tou speirai ton sporon autou 5 A sower went out to sow his
exElthen ho speirOn tou speirai ton sporon autou
G1831 G3588 G4687 G3588 G4687 G3588 G4703 G846
seed: and as he sowed, some
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m fell by the way side; and it was
OUT-CAME THE one-SOWING OF-THE TO-SOW THE seed OF-him trodden down, and the fowls of
came-out one-sowing the air devoured it.
kai en tw speirein auton o men epesen para thn

kai en tO speirein auton ho men epesen para tEn
G2532 G1722 G3588 G4687 G846 G3739 G3303 G4098 G3844 G3588
Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres Act pp Acc Sg m pr Nom Sg n Part vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f
AND IN THE TO-BE-SOWING him WHICH INDEED FALLS BESIDE THE
odon kai katepathqh kai ta peteina tou ouranou katefagen

hodon kai katepatEthE kai ta peteina tou ouranou katephagen
G3598 G2532 G2662 G2532 G3588 G4071 G3588 G3772 G2719
n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
WAY AND it-WAS-tramplED AND THE flyers OF-THE heaven DOWN-ATE
road was-trampled flying-creatures devoured
Luke 8
auto
auto
G846
pp Acc Sg n
it
8:6 kai eteron epesen epi thn petran kai fuen exhranqh 6 And some fell upon a rock;
kai heteron epesen epi tEn petran kai phuen exEranthE
G2532 G2087 G4098 G1909 G3588 G4073 G2532 G5453 G3583
and as soon as it was sprung
Conj a_ Nom Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg n vi Aor Pas 3 Sg up, it withered away, because
AND DIFFERENT FALLS ON THE ROCK AND BEING-SPROUTED IS-DRIED it lacked moisture.
sprouting is-withered
dia to mh ecein ikmada

dia to mE echein ikmada
G1223 G3588 G3361 G2192 G2429
Prep t_ Acc Sg n Part Neg vn Pres Act n_ Acc Sg f
THRU THE NO TO-BE-HAVING MOISTURE
because-of
8:7 kai eteron epesen en mesw twn akanqwn kai 7 And some fell among thorns;
kai heteron epesen en mesO tOn akanthOn kai
G2532 G2087 G4098 G1722 G3319 G3588 G173 G2532
and the thorns sprang up with
Conj a_ Nom Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep a_ Dat Sg n t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f Conj it, and choked it.
AND DIFFERENT FALLS IN MIDst OF-THE POINT-FLOWERS AND
thorns
sumfueisai ai akanqai apepnixan auto

sumphueisai hai akanthai apepnixan auto
G4855 G3588 G173 G638 G846
vp 2Aor Pas Nom Pl f t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg n
BEING-TOGETHER-SPROUTED THE POINT-FLOWERS FROM-CHOKE it
sprouting-together thorns smother
8:8 kai eteron epesen epi thn ghn thn agaqhn kai fuen 8 And other fell on good
kai heteron epesen epi tEn gEn tEn agathEn kai phuen
G2532 G2087 G4098 G1909 G3588 G1093 G3588 G18 G2532 G5453
ground, and sprang up, and
Conj a_ Nom Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg n bare fruit an hundredfold. And
AND DIFFERENT FALLS ON THE LAND THE GOOD AND BEING-SPROUTED when he had said these things,
earth sprouting he cried, He that hath ears to
hear, let him hear.
epoihsen karpon ekatontaplasiona tauta legwn efwnei o
epoiEsen karpon hekatontaplasiona tauta legOn ephOnei ho
G4160 G2590 G1542 G5023 G3004 G5455 G3588
vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m pd Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
makES FRUIT HUNDRED-FOLD these sayING He-SOUNDED THE
produces these-things he-shouted
ecwn wta akouein akouetw

echOn Ota akouein akouetO
G2192 G3775 G191 G191
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Pl n vn Pres Act vm Pres Act 3 Sg
one-HAVING EARS TO-BE-HEARING LET-him-BE-HEARING
8:9 ephrwtwn de auton oi maqhtai autou legontes tis 9 And his disciples asked him,
epErOtOn de auton hoi mathEtai autou legontes tis
G1905 G1161 G846 G3588 G3101 G846 G3004 G5101
saying, What might this
vi Impf Act 3 Pl Conj pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pi Nom Sg f parable be?
inquirED-of YET Him THE LEARNers OF-Him sayING ANY
disciples what ?
eih h parabolh auth

eiE hE parabolE autE
G1498 G3588 G3850 G3778
vo Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pd Nom Sg f
MAY-BE THE BESIDE-CAST this
parable
8:10 o de eipen umin dedotai gnwnai ta musthria ths 10 And he said, Unto you it is
ho de eipen humin dedotai gnOnai ta mustEria tEs
G3588 G1161 G2036 G5213 G1325 G1097 G3588 G3466 G3588
given to know the mysteries of
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl vi Perf Pas 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Sg f the kingdom of God: but to
THE YET He-said to-YOU(p) it-HAS-been-GIVEN TO-KNOW THE CLOSE-KEEPS OF-THE others in parables; that seeing
to-ye secrets they might not see, and hearing
they might not understand.
basileias tou qeou tois de loipois en parabolais ina
basileias tou theou tois de loipois en parabolais hina
G932 G3588 G2316 G3588 G1161 G3062 G1722 G3850 G2443
n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Dat Pl m Conj a_ Dat Pl m Prep n_ Dat Pl f Conj
KINGdom OF-THE God to-THE YET rest IN BESIDE-CASTS THAT
rest(p) parables
blepontes mh blepwsin kai akouontes mh suniwsin

blepontes mE blepOsin kai akouontes mE suniOsin
G991 G3361 G991 G2532 G191 G3361 G4920
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Part Neg vs Pres Act 3 Pl Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Part Neg vs Pres Act 3 Pl
lookING NO THEY-MAY-BE-lookING AND HEARING NO THEY-MAY-BE-understandING
observing they-may-be-observing
Luke 8
8:11 estin de auth h parabolh o sporos estin 11 Now the parable is this: The
estin de hautE hE parabolE ho sporos estin
G2076 G1161 G3778 G3588 G3850 G3588 G4703 G2076
seed is the word of God.
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Conj pd Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS YET this THE BESIDE-CAST THE seed IS
parable
o logos tou qeou

ho logos tou theou
G3588 G3056 G3588 G2316
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
THE saying OF-THE God
word
8:12 oi de para thn odon eisin oi akouontes eita 12 Those by the way side are
hoi de para tEn hodon eisin hoi akouontes eita
G3588 G1161 G3844 G3588 G3598 G1526 G3588 G191 G1534
they that hear; then cometh the
t_ Nom Pl m Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Adv devil, and taketh away the
THE YET BESIDE THE WAY ARE THE ones-HEARING THEREAFTER word out of their hearts, lest
the-ones road ones-hearing they should believe and be
saved.
ercetai o diabolos kai airei ton logon apo ths
erchetai ho diabolos kai airei ton logon apo tEs
G2064 G3588 G1228 G2532 G142 G3588 G3056 G575 G3588
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f
IS-COMING THE THRU-CASTer AND IS-LIFTING THE saying FROM THE
Adversary is-taking-away word
kardias autwn ina mh pisteusantes swqwsin

kardias autOn hina mE pisteusantes sOthOsin
G2588 G846 G2443 G3361 G4100 G4982
n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Pl m Conj Part Neg vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
HEART OF-them THAT NO BELIEVing THEY-MAY-BE-BEING-SAVED
8:13 oi de epi ths petras oi otan akouswsin meta 13 They on the rock [are they],
hoi de epi tEs petras hoi hotan akousOsin meta
G3588 G1161 G1909 G3588 G4073 G3739 G3752 G191 G3326
which, when they hear, receive
t_ Nom Pl m Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pr Nom Pl m Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl Prep the word with joy; and these
THE YET ON THE ROCK WHO when-EVER THEY-SHOULD-BE-HEARING WITH have no root, which for a while
the-ones who(p) whenever believe, and in time of
temptation fall away.
caras decontai ton logon kai outoi rizan ouk ecousin
charas dechontai ton logon kai houtoi rizan ouk echousin
G5479 G1209 G3588 G3056 G2532 G3778 G4491 G3756 G2192
n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj pd Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg f Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Pl
JOY ARE-RECEIVING THE saying AND these ROOT NOT ARE-HAVING
word
oi pros kairon pisteuousin kai en kairw peirasmou

hoi pros kairon pisteuousin kai en kairO peirasmou
G3739 G4314 G2540 G4100 G2532 G1722 G2540 G3986
pr Nom Pl m Prep n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj Prep n_ Dat Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
WHO TOWARD SEASON ARE-BELIEVING AND IN SEASON OF-trial
afistantai
aphistantai
G868
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
THEY-ARE-FROM-STANDING
are-withdrawing
8:14 to de eis tas akanqas peson outoi eisin oi 14 And that which fell among
to de eis tas akanthas peson houtoi eisin hoi
G3588 G1161 G1519 G3588 G173 G4098 G3778 G1526 G3588
thorns are they, which, when
t_ Nom Sg n Conj Prep t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg n pd Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m they have heard, go forth, and
THE YET INTO THE POINT-FLOWERS FALLING these ARE THE are choked with cares and
thorns riches and pleasures of [this]
life, and bring no fruit to
akousantes kai upo merimnwn kai ploutou kai hdonwn tou biou perfection.
akousantes kai hupo merimnOn kai ploutou kai hEdonOn tou biou
G191 G2532 G5259 G3308 G2532 G4149 G2532 G2237 G3588 G979
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj Prep n_ Gen Pl f Conj n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Pl f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
ones-HEARing AND UNDER anxieties AND RICHES AND GRATIFIcations OF-THE livelihood
ones-hearing by worries life
poreuomenoi sumpnigontai kai ou telesforousin

poreuomenoi sumpnigontai kai ou telesphorousin
G4198 G4846 G2532 G3756 G5052
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m vi Pres Pas 3 Pl Conj Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Pl
GOING ARE-beING-TOGETHER-CHOKED AND NOT ARE-FINISH-CARRYING
are-being-stifled are-bringing-it-to-maturity
8:15 to de en th kalh gh outoi eisin oitines en 15 But that on the good ground
to de en tE kalE gE houtoi eisin hoitines en
G3588 G1161 G1722 G3588 G2570 G1093 G3778 G1526 G3748 G1722
are they, which in an honest
t_ Nom Sg n Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl pr Nom Pl m Prep and good heart, having heard
THE YET IN THE IDEAL LAND these ARE WHO-ANY IN the word, keep [it], and bring
earth who-any forth fruit with patience.
Luke 8
kardia kalh kai agaqh akousantes ton logon katecousin kai

kardia kalE kai agathE akousantes ton logon katechousin kai
G2588 G2570 G2532 G18 G191 G3588 G3056 G2722 G2532
n_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f Conj a_ Dat Sg f vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj
HEART IDEAL AND GOOD HEARing THE saying ARE-DOWN-HAVING AND
word are-retaining-it
karpoforousin en upomonh
karpophorousin en hupomonE
G2592 G1722 G5281
vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep n_ Dat Sg f
ARE-FRUIT-CARRYING IN UNDER-REMAINing
are-bearing-fruit endurance
8:16 oudeis de lucnon ayas kaluptei auton skeuei h 16 No man, when he hath
oudeis de luchnon hapsas kaluptei auton skeuei E
G3762 G1161 G3088 G681 G2572 G846 G4632 G2228
lighted a candle, covereth it
a_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg f vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m n_ Dat Sg n Part with a vessel, or putteth [it]
NOT-YET-ONE YET LAMP TOUCHing IS-COVERING it to-INSTRUMENT OR under a bed; but setteth [it] on
no-one lighting him it to-vessel a candlestick, that they which
enter in may see the light.
upokatw klinhs tiqhsin all epi lucnias epitiqhsin ina oi
hupokatO klinEs tithEsin all epi luchnias epitithEsin hina hoi
G5270 G2825 G5087 G235 G1909 G3087 G2007 G2443 G3588
Adv n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl m
UNDER-DOWN OF-couch IS-PLACING but ON LAMPstand IS-ON-PLACING THAT THE
underneath couch is-placing-it is-placing-on-it
eisporeuomenoi blepwsin to fws

eisporeuomenoi blepOsin to phOs
G1531 G991 G3588 G5457
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m vs Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
ones-INTO-GOING MAY-BE-lookING THE LIGHT
ones-going-in may-be-observing
8:17 ou gar estin krupton o ou faneron genhsetai oude 17 For nothing is secret, that
ou gar estin krupton ho ou phaneron genEsetai oude
G3756 G1063 G2076 G2927 G3739 G3756 G5318 G1096 G3761
shall not be made manifest;
Part Neg Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg n pr Nom Sg n Part Neg a_ Nom Sg n vi Fut midD 3 Sg Adv neither [any thing] hid, that
NOT for IS HIDDen WHICH NOT apparent SHALL-BE-BECOMING NOT-YET shall not be known and come
nothing neither abroad.
apokrufon o ou gnwsqhsetai kai eis faneron elqh

apokruphon ho ou gnOsthEsetai kai eis phaneron elthE
G614 G3739 G3756 G1097 G2532 G1519 G5318 G2064
a_ Nom Sg n pr Nom Sg n Part Neg vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj Prep a_ Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
FROM-HIDDen WHICH NOT SHALL-BE-BEING-KNOWN AND INTO apparent MAY-BE-COMING
concealed
8:18 blepete oun pws akouete os gar an ech 18 Take heed therefore how ye
blepete oun pOs akouete hos gar an echE
G991 G3767 G4459 G191 G3739 G1063 G302 G2192
hear: for whosoever hath, to
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Adv vi Pres Act 2 Pl pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs Pres Act 3 Sg him shall be given; and
YE-BE-lookING THEN how YE-ARE-HEARING WHO for EVER MAY-BE-HAVING whosoever hath not, from him
be-ye-bewaring ! shall be taken even that which
he seemeth to have.
doqhsetai autw kai os an mh ech kai o
dothEsetai autO kai hos an mE echE kai ho
G1325 G846 G2532 G3739 G302 G3361 G2192 G2532 G3739
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Conj pr Nom Sg m Part Part Neg vs Pres Act 3 Sg Conj pr Acc Sg n
SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-him AND WHO EVER NO MAY-BE-HAVING AND WHICH
also
dokei ecein arqhsetai ap autou

dokei echein arthEsetai ap autou
G1380 G2192 G142 G575 G846
vi Pres Act 3 Sg vn Pres Act vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m
he-IS-SEEMING TO-BE-HAVING SHALL-BE-BEING-LIFTED FROM him
he-is-supposing shall-be-being-taken-away
8:19 paregenonto de pros auton h mhthr kai oi adelfoi 19 Then came to him [his]
paregenonto de pros auton hE mEtEr kai hoi adelphoi
G3854 G1161 G4314 G846 G3588 G3384 G2532 G3588 G80
mother and his brethren, and
vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl Conj Prep pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m could not come at him for the
BESIDE-CAME YET TOWARD Him THE MOTHER AND THE brothers press.
came-along
autou kai ouk hdunanto suntucein autw dia ton

autou kai ouk Edunanto suntuchein autO dia ton
G846 G2532 G3756 G1410 G4940 G846 G1223 G3588
pp Gen Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl Att vn 2Aor Act pp Dat Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m
OF-Him AND NOT THEY-were-ABLE TO-BE-TOGETHER-HAPPENING to-Him THRU THE
to-be-falling-in-with him because-of
oclon
ochlon
G3793
n_ Acc Sg m
THRONG
Luke 8
8:20 kai aphggelh autw legontwn h mhthr sou kai 20 And it was told him [by
kai apEggelE autO legontOn hE mEtEr sou kai
G2532 G518 G846 G3004 G3588 G3384 G4675 G2532
certain] which said, Thy
Conj vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Pl m t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Conj mother and thy brethren stand
AND it-WAS-FROM-MESSAGed to-Him OF-sayING THE MOTHER OF-YOU AND without, desiring to see thee.
it-was-reported
oi adelfoi sou esthkasin exw idein se qelontes

hoi adelphoi sou hestEkasin exO idein se thelontes
G3588 G80 G4675 G2476 G1854 G1492 G4571 G2309
t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg vi Perf Act 3 Pl Adv vn 2Aor Act pp 2 Acc Sg vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
THE brothers OF-YOU HAVE-STOOD OUT TO-BE-PERCEIVING YOU WILLING
stand outside ones-willing
8:21 o de apokriqeis eipen pros autous mhthr mou kai 21 And he answered and said
ho de apokritheis eipen pros autous mEtEr mou kai
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G4314 G846 G3384 G3450 G2532
unto them, My mother and my
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m n_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg Conj brethren are these which hear
THE YET answerING He-said TOWARD them MOTHER OF-ME AND the word of God, and do it.
adelfoi mou outoi eisin oi ton logon tou qeou

adelphoi mou houtoi eisin hoi ton logon tou theou
G80 G3450 G3778 G1526 G3588 G3588 G3056 G3588 G2316
n_ Nom Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg pd Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
brothers OF-ME these ARE THE-ones THE saying OF-THE God
the-ones word
akouontes kai poiountes auton

akouontes kai poiountes auton
G191 G2532 G4160 G846
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m
HEARING AND DOING him
him it
8:22 kai egeneto en mia twn hmerwn kai autos enebh eis 22 . Now it came to pass on a
kai egeneto en mia tOn hEmerOn kai autos enebE eis
G2532 G1096 G1722 G1520 G3588 G2250 G2532 G846 G1684 G1519
certain day, that he went into a
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep a_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f Conj pp Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep ship with his disciples: and he
AND it-BECAME IN ONE OF-THE DAYS AND He IN-STEPPed INTO said unto them, Let us go over
it-occurred stepped-in unto the other side of the lake.
And they launched forth.
ploion kai oi maqhtai autou kai eipen pros autous
ploion kai hoi mathEtai autou kai eipen pros autous
G4143 G2532 G3588 G3101 G846 G2532 G2036 G4314 G846
n_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m
FLOATer AND THE LEARNers OF-Him AND He-said TOWARD them
ship disciples
dielqwmen eis to peran ths limnhs kai anhcqhsan

dielthOmen eis to peran tEs limnEs kai anEchthEsan
G1330 G1519 G3588 G4008 G3588 G3041 G2532 G321
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg n Adv t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
WE-MAY-BE-THRU-COMING INTO THE OTHER-SIDE OF-THE LAKE AND THEY-WERE-UP-LED
we-may-be-passing-through they-set-out
8:23 pleontwn de autwn afupnwsen kai katebh lailay anemou eis 23 But as they sailed he fell
pleontOn de autOn aphupnOsen kai katebE lailaps anemou eis
G4126 G1161 G846 G879 G2532 G2597 G2978 G417 G1519
asleep: and there came down a
vp Pres Act Gen Pl m Conj pp Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg m Prep storm of wind on the lake; and
OF-FLOATING YET OF-them He-FROM-SLEEPS AND DOWN-STEPPed storm OF-WIND INTO they were filled [with water],
of-sailing he-falls-asleep descended and were in jeopardy.
thn limnhn kai suneplhrounto kai ekinduneuon

tEn limnEn kai suneplErounto kai ekinduneuon
G3588 G3041 G2532 G4845 G2532 G2793
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Impf Pas 3 Pl Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl
THE LAKE AND THEY-were-TOGETHER-FILLED AND THEY-DANGERED
they-were-foundered they-were-in-danger
8:24 proselqontes de dihgeiran auton legontes epistata epistata 24 And they came to him, and
proselthontes de diEgeiran auton legontes epistata epistata
G4334 G1161 G1326 G846 G3004 G1988 G1988
awoke him, saying, Master,
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Voc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m master, we perish. Then he
TOWARD-COMING YET THEY-THRU-ROUSE Him sayING Adept ! Adept ! arose, and rebuked the wind
approaching they-rouse Doctor ! Doctor ! and the raging of the water:
and they ceased, and there was
apollumeqa o de egerqeis epetimhsen tw anemw kai a calm.
apollumetha ho de egertheis epetimEsen tO anemO kai
G622 G3588 G1161 G1453 G2008 G3588 G417 G2532
vi Pres Mid 1 Pl t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj
WE-ARE-beING-destroyED THE YET BEING-ROUSED He-rebukES to-THE WIND AND
we-are-perishing the
tw kludwni tou udatos kai epausanto kai egeneto galhnh

tO kludOni tou hudatos kai epausanto kai egeneto galEnE
G3588 G2830 G3588 G5204 G2532 G3973 G2532 G1096 G1055
t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Conj vi Aor Mid 3 Pl Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f
to-THE SURGE OF-THE water AND THEY-CEASE AND it-BECAME CALM
the surging
Luke 8
8:25 eipen de autois pou estin h pistis umwn fobhqentes 25 And he said unto them,
eipen de autois pou estin hE pistis humOn phobEthentes
G2036 G1161 G846 G4226 G2076 G3588 G4102 G5216 G5399
Where is your faith? And they
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Pl m Part Int vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m being afraid wondered, saying
He-said YET to-them ?-where IS THE BELIEF OF-YOU(p) BEING-afraid one to another, What manner
where ? faith of-ye of man is this! for he
commandeth even the winds
de eqaumasan legontes pros allhlous tis ara outos and water, and they obey him.
de ethaumasan legontes pros allElous tis ara houtos
G1161 G2296 G3004 G4314 G240 G5101 G687 G3778
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep pc Acc Pl m pi Nom Sg m Part Int pd Nom Sg m
YET THEY-MARVEL sayING TOWARD one-another ANY CONSEQUENTLY this
who ?
estin oti kai tois anemois epitassei kai tw udati kai

estin hoti kai tois anemois epitassei kai tO hudati kai
G2076 G3754 G2532 G3588 G417 G2004 G2532 G3588 G5204 G2532
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Conj Conj t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n Conj
IS that AND to-THE WINDS He-IS-enjoinING AND to-THE water AND
also the the
upakouousin autw
hupakouousin autO
G5219 G846
vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
THEY-ARE-obeyING to-Him
him
8:26 kai katepleusan eis thn cwran twn gadarhnwn htis estin 26 And they arrived at the
kai katepleusan eis tEn chOran tOn gadarEnOn hEtis estin
G2532 G2668 G1519 G3588 G5561 G3588 G1046 G3748 G2076
country of the Gadarenes,
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m pr Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg which is over against Galilee.
AND THEY-DOWN-FLOAT INTO THE SPACE OF-THE GADARENES WHICH-ANY IS
they-sail-down country which-any
antiperan ths galilaias

antiperan tEs galilaias
G495 G3588 G1056
Adv t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
INSTEAD-OTHER-SIDE OF-THE GALILEE
across-from the
8:27 exelqonti de autw epi thn ghn uphnthsen autw anhr 27 And when he went forth to
exelthonti de autO epi tEn gEn hupEntEsen autO anEr
G1831 G1161 G846 G1909 G3588 G1093 G5221 G846 G435
land, there met him out of the
vp 2Aor Act Dat Sg m Conj pp Dat Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg m city a certain man, which had
to-OUT-COMING YET Him ON THE LAND UNDER-meets to-Him MAN devils long time, and ware no
to-coming-out there-meets him clothes, neither abode in [any]
house, but in the tombs.
tis ek ths polews os eicen daimonia ek cronwn ikanwn
tis ek tEs poleOs hos eichen daimonia ek chronOn hikanOn
G5100 G1537 G3588 G4172 G3739 G2192 G1140 G1537 G5550 G2425
px Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pr Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl n Prep n_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
ANY OUT OF-THE city WHO HAD demons OUT OF-TIMES enough
certain of-time(p) considerable
kai imation ouk enedidusketo kai en oikia ouk emenen all en

kai himation ouk enedidusketo kai en oikia ouk emenen all en
G2532 G2440 G3756 G1737 G2532 G1722 G3614 G3756 G3306 G235 G1722
Conj n_ Acc Sg n Part Neg vi Impf Mid 3 Sg Conj Prep n_ Dat Sg f Part Neg vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj Prep
AND cloak NOT was-IN-SLIPPED AND IN HOME NOT REMAINED but IN
was-dressed house
tois mnhmasin
tois mnEmasin
G3588 G3418
t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n
THE memorial-tombs
tombs
8:28 idwn de ton ihsoun kai anakraxas prosepesen autw 28 When he saw Jesus, he
idOn de ton iEsoun kai anakraxas prosepesen autO
G1492 G1161 G3588 G2424 G2532 G349 G4363 G846
cried out, and fell down before
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m him, and with a loud voice
PERCEIVING YET THE JESUS AND UP-CRYing he-TOWARD-FALLS to-Him said, What have I to do with
crying-out he-prostrates thee, Jesus, [thou] Son of God
most high? I beseech thee,
kai fwnh megalh eipen ti emoi kai soi ihsou uie torment me not.
kai phOnE megalE eipen ti emoi kai soi iEsou huie
G2532 G5456 G3173 G2036 G5101 G1698 G2532 G4671 G2424 G5207
Conj n_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pi Nom Sg n pp 1 Dat Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Sg n_ Voc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m
AND to-SOUND GREAT said ANY to-ME AND to-YOU JESUS ! SON !
to-voice loud what ?
tou qeou tou uyistou deomai sou mh me

tou theou tou hupsistou deomai sou mE me
G3588 G2316 G3588 G5310 G1189 G4675 G3361 G3165
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg pp 2 Gen Sg Part Neg pp 1 Acc Sg
OF-THE God OF-THE HIGHest I-AM-beseechING OF-YOU NO ME
the Most-High you
Luke 8
basanishs
basanisEs
G928
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
YOU-SHOULD-BE-ORDEALizING
you-should-be-tormenting
8:29 parhggeilen gar tw pneumati tw akaqartw exelqein apo 29 (For he had commanded the
parEggeilen gar tO pneumati tO akathartO exelthein apo
G3853 G1063 G3588 G4151 G3588 G169 G1831 G575
unclean spirit to come out of
vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n t_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n vn 2Aor Act Prep the man. For oftentimes it had
He-chargES for to-THE spirit THE UN-clean TO-BE-OUT-COMING FROM caught him: and he was kept
unclean to-be-coming-out bound with chains and in
fetters; and he brake the bands,
tou anqrwpou pollois gar cronois sunhrpakei auton kai and was driven of the devil
tou anthrOpou pollois gar chronois sunErpakei auton kai into the wilderness.)
G3588 G444 G4183 G1063 G5550 G4884 G846 G2532
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m a_ Dat Pl m Conj n_ Dat Pl m vi Plup Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj
THE human to-MANY for TIMES it-HAD-TOGETHER-SNATCHED him AND
many it-had-gripped
edesmeito alusesin kai pedais fulassomenos kai diarrhsswn ta

edesmeito halusesin kai pedais phulassomenos kai diarrEssOn ta
G1196 G254 G2532 G3976 G5442 G2532 G1284 G3588
vi Impf Pas 3 Sg n_ Dat Pl f Conj n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl n
he-WAS-BOUND to-UN-LOOSES AND to-fetters beING-GUARDED AND THRU-BURSTING THE
to-chains bursting-through
desma hlauneto upo tou daimonos eis tas erhmous

desma Elauneto hupo tou daimonos eis tas erEmous
G1199 G1643 G5259 G3588 G1142 G1519 G3588 G2048
n_ Acc Pl n vi Impf Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f
BONDS he-was-DRIVEN by THE demon INTO THE DESOLATES
desolate-places
8:30 ephrwthsen de auton o ihsous legwn ti soi 30 And Jesus asked him,
epErOtEsen de auton ho iEsous legOn ti soi
G1905 G1161 G846 G3588 G2424 G3004 G5101 G4671
saying, What is thy name? And
vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pi Nom Sg n pp 2 Dat Sg he said, Legion: because many
inquirES-of YET him THE JESUS sayING ANY to-YOU devils were entered into him.
what ?
estin onoma o de eipen legewn oti daimonia polla

estin onoma ho de eipen legeOn hoti daimonia polla
G2076 G3686 G3588 G1161 G2036 G3003 G3754 G1140 G4183
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n
IS NAME THE YET he-said LEGION that demons MANY
eishlqen eis auton

eisElthen eis auton
G1525 G1519 G846
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg m
INTO-CAME INTO him
entered
8:31 kai parekaloun auton ina mh epitaxh autois eis thn 31 And they besought him that
kai parekaloun auton hina mE epitaxE autois eis tEn
G2532 G3870 G846 G2443 G3361 G2004 G846 G1519 G3588
he would not command them
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj Part Neg vs Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl n Prep t_ Acc Sg f to go out into the deep.
AND THEY-BESIDE-CALLED Him THAT NO He-SHOULD-BE-enjoinING to-them INTO THE
they-entreated them
abusson apelqein
abusson apelthein
G12 G565
n_ Acc Sg f vn 2Aor Act
abyss TO-BE-FROM-COMING
to-be-coming-away
8:32 hn de ekei agelh coirwn ikanwn boskomenwn en tw 32 And there was there an herd
En de ekei agelE choirOn hikanOn boskomenOn en tO
G2258 G1161 G1563 G34 G5519 G2425 G1006 G1722 G3588
of many swine feeding on the
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj Adv n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Pas Gen Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg n mountain: and they besought
WAS YET there HERD OF-HOGS enough beING-HERBED IN THE him that he would suffer them
considerable grazing to enter into them. And he
suffered them.
orei kai parekaloun auton ina epitreyh autois eis
orei kai parekaloun auton hina epitrepsE autois eis
G3735 G2532 G3870 G846 G2443 G2010 G846 G1519
n_ Dat Sg n Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl n Prep
mountain AND THEY-BESIDE-CALLED Him THAT He-SHOULD-BE-permittING to-them INTO
they-entreated them
ekeinous eiselqein kai epetreyen autois

ekeinous eiselthein kai epetrepsen autois
G1565 G1525 G2532 G2010 G846
pd Acc Pl m vn 2Aor Act Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl n
those TO-BE-INTO-COMING AND He-permits to-them
to-be-entering them
Luke 8
8:33 exelqonta de ta daimonia apo tou anqrwpou eishlqen eis 33 Then went the devils out of
exelthonta de ta daimonia apo tou anthrOpou eisElthen eis
G1831 G1161 G3588 G1140 G575 G3588 G444 G1525 G1519
the man, and entered into the
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl n Conj t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep swine: and the herd ran
OUT-COMING YET THE demons FROM THE human INTO-CAME INTO violently down a steep place
coming-out entered into the lake, and were choked.
tous coirous kai wrmhsen h agelh kata tou krhmnou eis

tous choirous kai hOrmEsen hE agelE kata tou krEmnou eis
G3588 G5519 G2532 G3729 G3588 G34 G2596 G3588 G2911 G1519
t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep
THE HOGS AND RUSHES THE HERD DOWN THE HANG INTO
precipice
thn limnhn kai apepnigh

tEn limnEn kai apepnigE
G3588 G3041 G2532 G638
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
THE LAKE AND WAS-FROM-CHOKed
was-smothered
8:34 idontes de oi boskontes to gegenhmenon efugon kai 34 When they that fed [them]
idontes de hoi boskontes to gegenEmenon ephugon kai
G1492 G1161 G3588 G1006 G3588 G1096 G5343 G2532
saw what was done, they fled,
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg n vp Perf Pas Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj and went and told [it] in the
PERCEIVING YET THE ones-HERBING THE HAVING-BECOME THEY-FLED AND city and in the country.
graziers having-occurred fled
apelqontes aphggeilan eis thn polin kai eis tous agrous

apelthontes apEggeilan eis tEn polin kai eis tous agrous
G565 G518 G1519 G3588 G4172 G2532 G1519 G3588 G68
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
FROM-COMING THEY-FROM-MESSAGE INTO THE city AND INTO THE FIELDS
coming-away report-it
8:35 exhlqon de idein to gegonos kai hlqon pros 35 Then they went out to see
exElthon de idein to gegonos kai Elthon pros
G1831 G1161 G1492 G3588 G1096 G2532 G2064 G4314
what was done; and came to
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n vp 2Perf Act Acc Sg n Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep Jesus, and found the man, out
THEY-OUT-CAME YET TO-BE-PERCEIVING THE HAVING-BECOME AND THEY-CAME TOWARD of whom the devils were
they-came-out having-occurred departed, sitting at the feet of
Jesus, clothed, and in his right
ton ihsoun kai euron kaqhmenon ton anqrwpon af ou mind: and they were afraid.
ton iEsoun kai heuron kathEmenon ton anthrOpon aph hou
G3588 G2424 G2532 G2147 G2521 G3588 G444 G575 G3739
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep pr Gen Sg m
THE JESUS AND THEY-FOUND sittING THE human FROM WHOM
found
ta daimonia exelhluqei imatismenon kai swfronounta para tous

ta daimonia exelEluthei himatismenon kai sOphronounta para tous
G3588 G1140 G1831 G2439 G2532 G4993 G3844 G3588
t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n vi Plup Act 3 Sg vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl m
THE demons HAD-OUT-COME beING-GARMENTED AND beING-sane BESIDE THE
had-come-out
podas tou ihsou kai efobhqhsan

podas tou iEsou kai ephobEthEsan
G4228 G3588 G2424 G2532 G5399
n_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
FEET OF-THE JESUS AND THEY-WERE-afraid
8:36 aphggeilan de autois kai oi idontes pws eswqh o 36 They also which saw [it]
apEggeilan de autois kai hoi idontes pOs esOthE ho
G518 G1161 G846 G2532 G3588 G1492 G4459 G4982 G3588
told them by what means he
vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj pp Dat Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m that was possessed of the
FROM-MESSAGE YET to-them AND THE ones-PERCEIVING how WAS-SAVED THE devils was healed.
report also ones-perceiving
daimonisqeis
daimonistheis
G1139
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m
one-BEING-demonizED
one-being-demonized
8:37 kai hrwthsan auton apan to plhqos ths pericwrou twn 37 Then the whole multitude of
kai ErOtEsan auton hapan to plEthos tEs perichOrou tOn
G2532 G2065 G846 G537 G3588 G4128 G3588 G4066 G3588
the country of the Gadarenes
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m a_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Pl m round about besought him to
AND ask Him EVERY(emph.) THE multitude OF-THE ABOUT-SPACE OF-THE depart from them; for they
entire(emph.) country-about were taken with great fear: and
he went up into the ship, and
gadarhnwn apelqein ap autwn oti fobw megalw suneiconto returned back again.
gadarEnOn apelthein ap autOn hoti phobO megalO suneichonto
G1046 G565 G575 G846 G3754 G5401 G3173 G4912
a_ Gen Pl m vn 2Aor Act Prep pp Gen Pl n Conj n_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m vi Impf Pas 3 Pl
GADARENES TO-BE-FROM-COMING FROM them that to-FEAR GREAT THEY-were-pressED
to-be-coming-away
Luke 8
autos de embas eis to ploion upestreyen

autos de embas eis to ploion hupestrepsen
G846 G1161 G1684 G1519 G3588 G4143 G5290
pp Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg
He YET IN-STEPPing INTO THE FLOATer reTURNS
stepping-in ship
8:38 edeeto de autou o anhr af ou exelhluqei 38 Now the man out of whom
edeeto de autou ho anEr aph hou exelEluthei
G1189 G1161 G846 G3588 G435 G575 G3739 G1831
the devils were departed
vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj pp Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep pr Gen Sg m vi Plup Act 3 Sg besought him that he might be
besought YET OF-Him THE MAN FROM WHOM HAD-OUT-COME with him: but Jesus sent him
him had-come-out away, saying,
ta daimonia einai sun autw apelusen de auton o

ta daimonia einai sun autO apelusen de auton ho
G3588 G1140 G1511 G4862 G846 G630 G1161 G846 G3588
t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n vn Pres vxx Prep pp Dat Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
THE demons TO-BE TOGETHER to-Him FROM-LOOSES YET him THE
togetherwith him dismisses
ihsous legwn
iEsous legOn
G2424 G3004
n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
JESUS sayING
8:39 upostrefe eis ton oikon sou kai dihgou osa 39 Return to thine own house,
hupostrephe eis ton oikon sou kai diEgou hosa
G5290 G1519 G3588 G3624 G4675 G2532 G1334 G3745
and shew how great things
vm Pres Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg Conj vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg pk Acc Pl n God hath done unto thee. And
YOU-BE-reTURNING INTO THE HOME OF-YOU AND BE-relatING as-much-as he went his way, and published
be-you-returning ! be-you-relating ! how-much throughout the whole city how
great things Jesus had done
epoihsen soi o qeos kai aphlqen kaq olhn thn unto him.
epoiEsen soi ho theos kai apElthen kath holEn tEn
G4160 G4671 G3588 G2316 G2532 G565 G2596 G3650 G3588
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f
DOES to-YOU THE God AND he-FROM-CAME according-to WHOLE THE
he-came-away down
polin khrusswn osa epoihsen autw o ihsous

polin kErussOn hosa epoiEsen autO ho iEsous
G4172 G2784 G3745 G4160 G846 G3588 G2424
n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pk Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
city PROCLAIMING as-much-as DOES to-him THE JESUS
heralding how-much
8:40 egeneto de en tw upostreyai ton ihsoun apedexato auton 40 . And it came to pass, that,
egeneto de en tO hupostrepsai ton iEsoun apedexato auton
G1096 G1161 G1722 G3588 G5290 G3588 G2424 G588 G846
when Jesus was returned, the
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m people [gladly] received him:
it-BECAME YET IN THE TO-reTURN THE JESUS welcomES Him for they were all waiting for
it-occurred him.
o oclos hsan gar pantes prosdokwntes auton

ho ochlos Esan gar pantes prosdokOntes auton
G3588 G3793 G2258 G1063 G3956 G4328 G846
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m
THE THRONG THEY-WERE for ALL TOWARD-SEEMING Him
hoping-for
8:41 kai idou hlqen anhr w onoma iaeiros kai autos 41 And, behold, there came a
kai idou Elthen anEr hO onoma iaeiros kai autos
G2532 G2400 G2064 G435 G3739 G3686 G2383 G2532 G846
man named Jairus, and he was
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m pr Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg m Conj pp Nom Sg m a ruler of the synagogue: and
AND BE-PERCEIVING CAME MAN to-WHOM NAME JAIRUS AND he he fell down at Jesus'feet, and
lo ! besought him that he would
come into his house:
arcwn ths sunagwghs uphrcen kai peswn para tous podas
archOn tEs sunagOgEs hupErchen kai pesOn para tous podas
G758 G3588 G4864 G5225 G2532 G4098 G3844 G3588 G4228
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
chief OF-THE TOGETHER-LEAD belongED AND FALLING BESIDE THE FEET
chieftainship synagogue possessed
tou ihsou parekalei auton eiselqein eis ton oikon

tou iEsou parekalei auton eiselthein eis ton oikon
G3588 G2424 G3870 G846 G1525 G1519 G3588 G3624
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE JESUS he-BESIDE-CALLED Him TO-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE HOME
he-entreated to-be-entering house
autou
autou
G846
pp Gen Sg m
OF-him
Luke 8
8:42 oti qugathr monogenhs hn autw ws etwn dwdeka kai 42 For he had one only
hoti thugatEr monogenEs En autO hOs etOn dOdeka kai
G3754 G2364 G3439 G2258 G846 G5613 G2094 G1427 G2532
daughter, about twelve years of
Conj n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f vi Impf vxx 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Adv n_ Gen Pl n a_ Nom Conj age, and she lay a dying. But
that DAUGHTER ONLY-generated WAS to-him AS OF-YEARS TWO-TEN AND as he went the people thronged
only-begotten about twelve him.
auth apeqnhsken en de tw upagein auton oi ocloi

hautE apethnEsken en de tO hupagein auton hoi ochloi
G846 G599 G1722 G1161 G3588 G5217 G846 G3588 G3793
pp Nom Sg f vi Impf Act 3 Sg Prep Conj t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres Act pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
this FROM-DIED IN YET THE TO-BE-UNDER-LEADING Him THE THRONGS
she died to-be-going-away
sunepnigon auton
sunepnigon auton
G4846 G846
vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
TOGETHER-CHOKED Him
stifled
8:43 kai gunh ousa en rusei aimatos apo etwn dwdeka htis 43 And a woman having an
kai gunE ousa en rusei haimatos apo etOn dOdeka hEtis
G2532 G1135 G5607 G1722 G4511 G129 G575 G2094 G1427 G3748
issue of blood twelve years,
Conj n_ Nom Sg f vp Pres vxx Nom Sg f Prep n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg n Prep n_ Gen Pl n a_ Nom pr Nom Sg f which had spent all her living
AND WOMAN BEING IN GUSHing OF-BLOOD FROM YEARS TWO-TEN WHO-ANY upon physicians, neither could
twelve who-any be healed of any,
eis iatrous prosanalwsasa olon ton bion ouk iscusen up

eis iatrous prosanalOsasa holon ton bion ouk ischusen hup
G1519 G2395 G4321 G3650 G3588 G979 G3756 G2480 G5259
Prep n_ Acc Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Sg f a_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
INTO HEALers TOWARD-UP-CONSUMing WHOLE THE livelihood NOT is-STRONG by
physicians consuming
oudenos qerapeuqhnai
oudenos therapeuthEnai
G3762 G2323
a_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Pas
NOT-YET-ONE TO-BE-curED
anyone
8:44 proselqousa opisqen hyato tou kraspedou tou imatiou 44 Came behind [him], and
proselthousa opisthen hEpsato tou kraspedou tou himatiou
G4334 G3693 G680 G3588 G2899 G3588 G2440
touched the border of his
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f Adv vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n garment: and immediately her
TOWARD-COMING BEHIND-PLACE she-TOUCHES OF-THE HANG-FOOT OF-THE cloak issue of blood stanched.
approaching from-behind the tassel
autou kai paracrhma esth h rusis tou aimatos auths

autou kai parachrEma hestE hE rusis tou haimatos autEs
G846 G2532 G3916 G2476 G3588 G4511 G3588 G129 G846
pp Gen Sg m Conj Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n pp Gen Sg f
OF-Him AND instantly STOOD THE GUSHing OF-THE BLOOD OF-her
was-stanched
8:45 kai eipen o ihsous tis o ayamenos mou 45 And Jesus said, Who
kai eipen ho iEsous tis ho hapsamenos mou
G2532 G2036 G3588 G2424 G5101 G3588 G680 G3450
touched me? When all denied,
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pi Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Peter and they that were with
AND said THE JESUS ANY THE one-TOUCHing OF-ME him said, Master, the multitude
who ? one-touching me throng thee and press [thee],
and sayest thou, Who touched
arnoumenwn de pantwn eipen o petros kai oi met me?
arnoumenOn de pantOn eipen ho petros kai hoi met
G720 G1161 G3956 G2036 G3588 G4074 G2532 G3588 G3326
vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl m Conj a_ Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m Prep
OF-disownING YET ALL said THE Peter AND THE-ones WITH
of-denying the-ones
autou epistata oi ocloi sunecousin se kai

autou epistata hoi ochloi sunechousin se kai
G846 G1988 G3588 G3793 G4912 G4571 G2532
pp Gen Sg m n_ Voc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Sg Conj
him Adept ! THE THRONGS ARE-pressING YOU AND
Doctor !
apoqlibousin kai legeis tis o ayamenos mou

apothlibousin kai legeis tis ho hapsamenos mou
G598 G2532 G3004 G5101 G3588 G680 G3450
vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj vi Pres Act 2 Sg pi Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg
THEY-ARE-FROM-CONSTRICTING AND YOU-ARE-sayING ANY THE one-TOUCHing OF-ME
they-are-jostling who ? one-touching me
8:46 o de ihsous eipen hyato mou tis egw gar 46 And Jesus said, Somebody
ho de iEsous eipen hEpsato mou tis egO gar
G3588 G1161 G2424 G2036 G680 G3450 G5100 G1473 G1063
hath touched me: for I perceive
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp 1 Gen Sg px Nom Sg f pp 1 Nom Sg Conj that virtue is gone out of me.
THE YET JESUS said TOUCHES OF-ME ANY I for
me someone
Luke 8
egnwn dunamin exelqousan ap emou

egnOn dunamin exelthousan ap emou
G1097 G1411 G1831 G575 G1700
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg n_ Acc Sg f vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg f Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
KNEW ABILITY OUT-COMING FROM ME
power coming-out
8:47 idousa de h gunh oti ouk elaqen tremousa 47 And when the woman saw
idousa de hE gunE hoti ouk elathen tremousa
G1492 G1161 G3588 G1135 G3754 G3756 G2990 G5141
that she was not hid, she came
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg f trembling, and falling down
PERCEIVING YET THE WOMAN that NOT she-was-OBLIVIOUS TREMBLING before him, she declared unto
him before all the people for
what cause she had touched
hlqen kai prospesousa autw di hn aitian hyato autou him, and how she was healed
Elthen kai prospesousa autO di hEn aitian hEpsato autou immediately.
G2064 G2532 G4363 G846 G1223 G3739 G156 G680 G846
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f pp Dat Sg m Prep pr Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m
CAME AND TOWARD-FALLING to-Him THRU WHICH cause she-TOUCHES OF-Him
prostrating because-of him
aphggeilen autw enwpion pantos tou laou kai ws iaqh

apEggeilen autO enOpion pantos tou laou kai hOs iathE
G518 G846 G1799 G3956 G3588 G2992 G2532 G5613 G2390
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Adv a_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
she-FROM-MESSAGES to-Him IN-VIEW OF-EVERY THE PEOPLE AND AS WAS-HEALED
she-reports in-the-sight-of entire so
paracrhma
parachrEma
G3916
Adv
instantly
8:48 o de eipen auth qarsei qugater h pistis 48 And he said unto her,
ho de eipen autE tharsei thugater hE pistis
G3588 G1161 G2036 G846 G2293 G2364 G3588 G4102
Daughter, be of good comfort:
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f vm Pres Act 2 Sg n_ Voc Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f thy faith hath made thee whole;
THE YET He-said to-her BE-COURAGE-ING DAUGHTER ! THE BELIEF go in peace.
be-you-having-courage ! faith
sou seswken se poreuou eis eirhnhn

sou sesOken se poreuou eis eirEnEn
G4675 G4982 G4571 G4198 G1519 G1515
pp 2 Gen Sg vi Perf Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f
OF-YOU HAS-SAVED YOU BE-GOING INTO PEACE
be-you-going !
8:49 eti autou lalountos ercetai tis para tou 49 While he yet spake, there
eti autou lalountos erchetai tis para tou
G2089 G846 G2980 G2064 G5100 G3844 G3588
cometh one from the ruler of
Adv pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg px Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m the synagogue's [house],
STILL OF-Him TALKING IS-COMING ANY BESIDE THE saying to him, Thy daughter is
speaking someone dead; trouble not the Master.
arcisunagwgou legwn autw oti teqnhken h qugathr sou

archisunagOgou legOn autO hoti tethnEken hE thugatEr sou
G752 G3004 G846 G3754 G2348 G3588 G2364 G4675
n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg m Conj vi Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg
chief-of-TOGETHER-LEAD sayING to-him that HAS-DIED THE DAUGHTER OF-YOU
chief-of-the-synagogue
mh skulle ton didaskalon

mE skulle ton didaskalon
G3361 G4660 G3588 G1320
Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
NO BE-FLAYING THE TEACHer
be-you-bothering !
8:50 o de ihsous akousas apekriqh autw legwn mh 50 But when Jesus heard [it],
ho de iEsous akousas apekrithE autO legOn mE
G3588 G1161 G2424 G191 G611 G846 G3004 G3361
he answered him, saying, Fear
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Part Neg not: believe only, and she shall
THE YET JESUS HEARing answerED to-him sayING NO be made whole.
hearing-it him
fobou monon pisteue kai swqhsetai

phobou monon pisteue kai sOthEsetai
G5399 G3440 G4100 G2532 G4982
vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Adv vm Pres Act 2 Sg Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
BE-FEARING ONLY BE-BELIEVING AND she-SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED
be-you-fearing ! be-you-believing !
8:51 eiselqwn de eis thn oikian ouk afhken eiselqein 51 And when he came into the
eiselthOn de eis tEn oikian ouk aphEken eiselthein
G1525 G1161 G1519 G3588 G3614 G3756 G863 G1525
house, he suffered no man to
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act go in, save Peter, and James,
INTO-COMING YET INTO THE HOME NOT He-FROM-LETS TO-BE-INTO-COMING and John, and the father and
entering house he-lets to-be-entering the mother of the maiden.
Luke 8 - Luke 9
oudena ei mh petron kai iakwbon kai iwannhn kai ton patera

oudena ei mE petron kai iakObon kai iOannEn kai ton patera
G3762 G1487 G3361 G4074 G2532 G2385 G2532 G2491 G2532 G3588 G3962
a_ Acc Sg m Cond Part Neg n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
NOT-YET-ONE IF NO Peter AND JACOBUS AND JOHN AND THE FATHER
no-one James
ths paidos kai thn mhtera

tEs paidos kai tEn mEtera
G3588 G3816 G2532 G3588 G3384
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
OF-THE girl AND THE MOTHER
8:52 eklaion de pantes kai ekoptonto authn o de 52 And all wept, and bewailed
eklaion de pantes kai ekoptonto autEn ho de
G2799 G1161 G3956 G2532 G2875 G846 G3588 G1161
her: but he said, Weep not; she
vi Impf Act 3 Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Impf Mid 3 Pl pp Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg m Conj is not dead, but sleepeth.
LAMENTED YET ALL AND THEY-STRUCK-(themselves) her THE YET
they-grieved-for
eipen mh klaiete ouk apeqanen alla kaqeudei

eipen mE klaiete ouk apethanen alla katheudei
G2036 G3361 G2799 G3756 G599 G235 G2518
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Pl Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
He-said NO BE-YE-LAMENTING NOT she-FROM-DIED but she-IS-DOWN-LOUNGING
be-ye-lamenting ! she-died she-is-drowsing
8:53 kai kategelwn autou eidotes oti apeqanen 53 And they laughed him to
kai kategelOn autou eidotes hoti apethanen
G2532 G2606 G846 G1492 G3754 G599
scorn, knowing that she was
Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Gen Sg m vp Perf Act Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg dead.
AND THEY-DOWN-LAUGHED OF-Him HAVING-PERCEIVED that she-FROM-DIED
they-ridiculed him being-aware she-died
8:54 autos de ekbalwn exw pantas kai krathsas ths ceiros 54 And he put them all out, and
autos de ekbalOn exO pantas kai kratEsas tEs cheiros
G846 G1161 G1544 G1854 G3956 G2532 G2902 G3588 G5495
took her by the hand, and
pp Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Adv a_ Acc Pl m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f called, saying, Maid, arise.
He YET OUT-CASTING OUT ALL AND HOLDing OF-THE HAND
casting-out outside the
auths efwnhsen legwn h pais egeirou

autEs ephOnEsen legOn hE pais egeirou
G846 G5455 G3004 G3588 G3816 G1453
pp Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vm Pres mid/pas 2 Sg
OF-her SOUNDS sayING THE girl BE-beING-ROUSED
shouts be-you-being-roused !
8:55 kai epestreyen to pneuma auths kai anesth paracrhma kai 55 And her spirit came again,
kai epestrepsen to pneuma autEs kai anestE parachrEma kai
G2532 G1994 G3588 G4151 G846 G2532 G450 G3916 G2532
and she arose straightway: and
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv Conj he commanded to give her
AND ON-TURNS THE spirit OF-her AND she-UP-STOOD instantly AND meat.
turns-back she-rose
dietaxen auth doqhnai fagein

dietaxen autE dothEnai phagein
G1299 G846 G1325 G5315
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f vn Aor Pas vn 2Aor Act
He-prescribES to-her TO-BE-GIVEN TO-BE-EATING
8:56 kai exesthsan oi goneis auths o de parhggeilen autois 56 And her parents were
kai exestEsan hoi goneis autEs ho de parEggeilen autois
G2532 G1839 G3588 G1118 G846 G3588 G1161 G3853 G846
astonished: but he charged
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg f t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m them that they should tell no
AND OUT-STOOD THE parents OF-her THE YET He-chargES to-them man what was done.
were-amazed them
mhdeni eipein to gegonos

mEdeni eipein to gegonos
G3367 G2036 G3588 G1096
a_ Dat Sg m vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n vp 2Perf Act Acc Sg n
to-NO-YET-ONE TO-BE-sayING THE HAVING-BECOME
no-one to-be-telling having-occurred
Luke 9
9:1 sugkalesamenos de tous dwdeka maqhtas autou edwken autois 1 . Then he called his twelve
sugkalesamenos de tous dOdeka mathEtas autou edOken autois
G4779 G1161 G3588 G1427 G3101 G846 G1325 G846
disciples together, and gave
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m them power and authority over
TOGETHER-CALLing YET THE TWO-TEN LEARNers OF-Him He-GIVES to-them all devils, and to cure diseases.
calling-together twelve disciples them
dunamin kai exousian epi panta ta daimonia kai nosous qerapeuein

dunamin kai exousian epi panta ta daimonia kai nosous therapeuein
G1411 G2532 G1849 G1909 G3956 G3588 G1140 G2532 G3554 G2323
n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f Prep a_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Conj n_ Acc Pl f vn Pres Act
ABILITY AND authority ON ALL THE demons AND DISEASES TO-BE-curING
power
9:2 kai apesteilen autous khrussein thn basileian tou qeou 2 And he sent them to preach
kai apesteilen autous kErussein tEn basileian tou theou
G2532 G649 G846 G2784 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316
the kingdom of God, and to
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m vn Pres Act t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m heal the sick.
AND He-commissions them TO-BE-PROCLAIMING THE KINGdom OF-THE God
to-be-heralding
kai iasqai tous asqenountas

kai iasthai tous asthenountas
G2532 G2390 G3588 G770
Conj vn Pres midD/pasD t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
AND TO-BE-HEALING THE ones-beING-UN-FIRM
ones-being-infirm
9:3 kai eipen pros autous mhden airete eis thn odon 3And he said unto them, Take
kai eipen pros autous mEden airete eis tEn hodon
G2532 G2036 G4314 G846 G3367 G142 G1519 G3588 G3598
nothing for [your] journey,
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Sg n vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f neither staves, nor scrip,
AND He-said TOWARD them NO-YET-ONE BE-LIFTING INTO THE WAY neither bread, neither money;
nothing be-ye-picking-up ! road neither have two coats apiece.
mhte rabdous mhte phran mhte arton mhte argurion

mEte rabdous mEte pEran mEte arton mEte argurion
G3383 G4464 G3383 G4082 G3383 G740 G3383 G694
Conj n_ Acc Pl f Conj n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg n
NO-BESIDES RODS NO-BESIDES BAG (beggar's) NO-BESIDES BREAD NO-BESIDES SILVER
neither staves nor beggar's-bag nor nor
mhte ana duo citwnas ecein

mEte ana duo chitOnas echein
G3383 G303 G1417 G5509 G2192
Conj Prep a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m vn Pres Act
NO-BESIDES UP TWO TUNICS TO-BE-HAVING
nor apiece
9:4 kai eis hn an oikian eiselqhte ekei menete kai 4 And whatsoever house ye
kai eis hEn an oikian eiselthEte ekei menete kai
G2532 G1519 G3739 G302 G3614 G1525 G1563 G3306 G2532
enter into, there abide, and
Conj Prep pr Acc Sg f Part n_ Acc Sg f vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl Adv vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj thence depart.
AND INTO WHICH EVER HOME YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING there BE-YE-REMAINING AND
house ye-may-be-entering be-ye-remaining !
ekeiqen exercesqe
ekeithen exerchesthe
G1564 G1831
Adv vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
thence BE-YE-OUT-COMING
be-ye-coming-out !
9:5 kai osoi an mh dexwntai umas exercomenoi apo 5 And whosoever will not
kai hosoi an mE dexOntai humas exerchomenoi apo
G2532 G3745 G302 G3361 G1209 G5209 G1831 G575
receive you, when ye go out of
Conj pk Nom Pl m Part Part Neg vs Aor midD 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Pl vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m Prep that city, shake off the very
AND as-many-as EVER NO SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING YOU(p) OUT-COMING FROM dust from your feet for a
whoever ye coming-out testimony against them.
ths polews ekeinhs kai ton koniorton apo twn podwn umwn
tEs poleOs ekeinEs kai ton koniorton apo tOn podOn humOn
G3588 G4172 G1565 G2532 G3588 G2868 G575 G3588 G4228 G5216
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl
THE city that AND THE DUST FROM THE FEET OF-YOU(p)
also of-ye
apotinaxate eis marturion ep autous

apotinaxate eis marturion ep autous
G660 G1519 G3142 G1909 G846
vm Aor Act 2 Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg n Prep pp Acc Pl m
FROM-QUIVER-YE INTO witness ON them
twitch-off-ye ! testimony
9:6 exercomenoi de dihrconto kata tas kwmas euaggelizomenoi 6 And they departed, and went
exerchomenoi de diErchonto kata tas kOmas euaggelizomenoi
G1831 G1161 G1330 G2596 G3588 G2968 G2097
through the towns, preaching
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m the gospel, and healing every
OUT-COMING YET THEY-THRU-CAME according-to THE VILLAGES WELL-MESSAGizING where.
coming-out they-passed-through bringing-the-well-message
Luke 9
kai qerapeuontes pantacou

kai therapeuontes pantachou
G2532 G2323 G3837
Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Adv
AND curING EVERY-SOIL
everywhere
9:7 hkousen de hrwdhs o tetrarchs ta ginomena up 7 Now Herod the tetrarch

Ekousen de hErOdEs ho tetrarchEs ta ginomena hup
G191 G1161 G2264 G3588 G5076 G3588 G1096 G5259
heard of all that was done by
vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl n vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl n Prep him: and he was perplexed,
HEARS YET HEROD THE FOURth-chief THE BECOMING(p) by because that it was said of
tetrarch occurring(p) some, that John was risen from
the dead;
autou panta kai dihporei dia to legesqai upo tinwn oti
autou panta kai diEporei dia to legesthai hupo tinOn hoti
G846 G3956 G2532 G1280 G1223 G3588 G3004 G5259 G5100 G3754
pp Gen Sg m a_ Acc Pl n Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg n vn Pres Pas Prep px Gen Pl m Conj
Him ALL AND was-bewilderED THRU THE TO-BE-beING-said by ANY that
because-of some
iwannhs eghgertai ek nekrwn

iOannEs egEgertai ek nekrOn
G2491 G1453 G1537 G3498
n_ Nom Sg m vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Prep a_ Gen Pl m
JOHN HAS-been-ROUSED OUT OF-DEAD-ones
of-dead-ones
9:8 upo tinwn de oti hlias efanh allwn de oti profhths 8 And of some, that Elias had
hupo tinOn de hoti Elias ephanE allOn de hoti prophEtEs
G5259 G5100 G1161 G3754 G2243 G5316 G243 G1161 G3754 G4396
appeared; and of others, that
Prep px Gen Pl m Conj Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg a_ Gen Pl m Conj Conj n_ Nom Sg m one of the old prophets was
by ANY YET that ELIAS APPEARed OF-others YET that BEFORE-AVERer risen again.
some Elijah prophet
eis twn arcaiwn anesth

eis tOn archaiOn anestE
G1520 G3588 G744 G450
a_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ONE OF-THE ORIGINals UP-STOOD
ancients rose
9:9 kai eipen o hrwdhs iwannhn egw apekefalisa tis de 9And Herod said, John have I
kai eipen ho hErOdEs iOannEn egO apekephalisa tis de
G2532 G2036 G3588 G2264 G2491 G1473 G607 G5101 G1161
beheaded: but who is this, of
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Nom Sg vi Aor Act 1 Sg pi Nom Sg m Conj whom I hear such things? And
AND said THE HEROD JOHN I FROM-HEADize ANY YET he desired to see him.
behead who ?
estin outos peri ou egw akouw toiauta kai ezhtei

estin houtos peri hou egO akouO toiauta kai ezEtei
G2076 G3778 G4012 G3739 G1473 G191 G5108 G2532 G2212
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pd Nom Sg m Prep pr Gen Sg m pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg pd Acc Pl n Conj vi Impf Act 3 Sg
IS this ABOUT WHOM I AM-HEARING such AND SOUGHT
such-things he-sought
idein auton
idein auton
G1492 G846
vn 2Aor Act pp Acc Sg m
TO-BE-PERCEIVING Him
to-be-becoming-acquainted-with
9:10 kai upostreyantes oi apostoloi dihghsanto autw osa 10 . And the apostles, when
kai hupostrepsantes hoi apostoloi diEgEsanto autO hosa
G2532 G5290 G3588 G652 G1334 G846 G3745
they were returned, told him all
Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m pk Acc Pl n that they had done. And he
AND reTURNing THE commissioners relate to-Him as-much-as took them, and went aside
apostles whatever privately into a desert place
belonging to the city called
epoihsan kai paralabwn autous upecwrhsen kat idian eis topon Bethsaida.
epoiEsan kai paralabOn autous hupechOrEsen kat idian eis topon
G4160 G2532 G3880 G846 G5298 G2596 G2398 G1519 G5117
vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep a_ Acc Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg m
THEY-DO AND BESIDE-GETTING them He-UNDER-SPACES according-to OWN INTO PLACE
taking-along he-retreats
erhmon polews kaloumenhs bhqsaida

erEmon poleOs kaloumenEs bEthsaida
G2048 G4172 G2564 G966
a_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Pas Gen Sg f ni proper
DESOLATE OF-city beING-CALLED BETHSAIDA
9:11 oi de ocloi gnontes hkolouqhsan autw kai dexamenos 11 And the people, when they
hoi de ochloi gnontes EkolouthEsan autO kai dexamenos
G3588 G1161 G3793 G1097 G190 G846 G2532 G1209
knew [it], followed him: and
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m Conj vp Aor midD Nom Sg m he received them, and spake
THE YET THRONGS KNOWING follow to-Him AND RECEIVing unto them of the kingdom of
knowing-it him God, and healed them that had
Luke 9
need of healing.
autous elalei autois peri ths basileias tou qeou kai tous
autous elalei autois peri tEs basileias tou theou kai tous
G846 G2980 G846 G4012 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316 G2532 G3588
pp Acc Pl m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl m
them He-TALKED to-them ABOUT THE KINGdom OF-THE God AND THE-ones
he-spoke concerning the-ones
creian econtas qerapeias iato

chreian echontas therapeias iato
G5532 G2192 G2322 G2390
n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Acc Pl m n_ Gen Sg f vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
need HAVING OF-cure He-HEALED
9:12 h de hmera hrxato klinein proselqontes de oi 12 And when the day began to
hE de hEmera Erxato klinein proselthontes de hoi
G3588 G1161 G2250 G756 G2827 G4334 G1161 G3588
wear away, then came the
t_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m twelve, and said unto him,
THE YET DAY begins TO-BE-deCLINING TOWARD-COMING YET THE Send the multitude away, that
approaching they may go into the towns and
country round about, and
dwdeka eipon autw apoluson ton oclon ina apelqontes eis lodge, and get victuals: for we
dOdeka eipon autO apoluson ton ochlon hina apelthontes eis are here in a desert place.
G1427 G2036 G846 G630 G3588 G3793 G2443 G565 G1519
a_ Nom vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep
TWO-TEN said to-Him FROM-LOOSE THE THRONG THAT FROM-COMING INTO
twelve dismiss-you ! coming-away
tas kuklw kwmas kai tous agrous kataluswsin kai

tas kuklO kOmas kai tous agrous katalusOsin kai
G3588 G2945 G2968 G2532 G3588 G68 G2647 G2532
t_ Acc Pl f n_ Dat Sg m n_ Acc Pl f Conj t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vs Aor Act 3 Pl Conj
THE to-AROUND VILLAGES AND THE FIELDS THEY-SHOULD-BE-DOWN-LOOSING AND
they-should-be-putting-up-for-the-night
eurwsin episitismon oti wde en erhmw topw esmen

heurOsin episitismon hoti hOde en erEmO topO esmen
G2147 G1979 G3754 G5602 G1722 G2048 G5117 G2070
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg m Conj Adv Prep a_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
THEY-SHOULD-BE-FINDING ON-GRAIN that here IN DESOLATE PLACE WE-ARE
forage
9:13 eipen de pros autous dote autois umeis fagein oi 13 But he said unto them, Give
eipen de pros autous dote autois humeis phagein hoi
G2036 G1161 G4314 G846 G1325 G846 G5210 G5315 G3588
ye them to eat. And they said,
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Prep pp Acc Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl pp Dat Pl m pp 2 Nom Pl vn 2Aor Act t_ Nom Pl m We have no more but five
He-said YET TOWARD them BE-GIVING to-them YOU(p) TO-BE-EATING THE loaves and two fishes; except
be-ye-giving ! them ye we should go and buy meat for
all this people.
de eipon ouk eisin hmin pleion h pente artoi kai
de eipon ouk eisin hEmin pleion E pente artoi kai
G1161 G2036 G3756 G1526 G2254 G4119 G2228 G4002 G740 G2532
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Pl pp 1 Dat Pl a_ Nom Sg n Cmp Part a_ Nom n_ Nom Pl m Conj
YET THEY-said NOT ARE to-US MORE OR FIVE BREADS AND
than cakes-of-bread
duo icques ei mhti poreuqentes hmeis agoraswmen eis panta

duo ichthues ei mEti poreuthentes hEmeis agorasOmen eis panta
G1417 G2486 G1487 G3385 G4198 G2249 G59 G1519 G3956
a_ Nom n_ Nom Pl m Cond Part Int vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m pp 1 Nom Pl vs Aor Act 1 Pl Prep a_ Acc Sg m
TWO FISHES IF NO-ANY BEING-GONE WE SHOULD-BE-BUYING INTO ALL
not ?
ton laon touton brwmata

ton laon touton brOmata
G3588 G2992 G5126 G1033
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pd Acc Sg m n_ Acc Pl n
THE PEOPLE this FOODS
9:14 hsan gar wsei andres pentakiscilioi eipen de pros tous 14 For they were about five
Esan gar hOsei andres pentakischilioi eipen de pros tous
G2258 G1063 G5616 G435 G4000 G2036 G1161 G4314 G3588
thousand men. And he said to
vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj Adv n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Acc Pl m his disciples, Make them sit
THEY-WERE for AS-IF MEN FIVE-times-THOUSAND He-said YET TOWARD THE down by fifties in a company.
about five-thousand
maqhtas autou kataklinate autous klisias ana penthkonta

mathEtas autou kataklinate autous klisias ana pentEkonta
G3101 G846 G2625 G846 G2828 G303 G4004
n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl f Prep a_ Nom
LEARNers OF-Him DOWN-CLINE them CLINES UP FIVE-ty
disciples cause-to-recline-ye ! groups apiece fifty
9:15 kai epoihsan outws kai aneklinan apantas 15 And they did so, and made
kai epoiEsan houtOs kai aneklinan hapantas
G2532 G4160 G3779 G2532 G347 G537
them all sit down.
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl Adv Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Acc Pl m
AND THEY-DO thus AND THEY-UP-CLINE ALL(emph.)
cause-to-recline
Luke 9
9:16 labwn de tous pente artous kai tous duo icquas 16 Then he took the five loaves
labOn de tous pente artous kai tous duo ichthuas
G2983 G1161 G3588 G4002 G740 G2532 G3588 G1417 G2486
and the two fishes, and looking
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m up to heaven, he blessed them,
GETTING YET THE FIVE BREADS AND THE TWO FISHES and brake, and gave to the
taking cakes-of-bread disciples to set before the
multitude.
anableyas eis ton ouranon euloghsen autous kai kateklasen kai
anablepsas eis ton ouranon eulogEsen autous kai kateklasen kai
G308 G1519 G3588 G3772 G2127 G846 G2532 G2622 G2532
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj
UP-looking INTO THE heaven He-blessES them AND DOWN-BREAKS AND
looking-up breaks-up-them
edidou tois maqhtais paratiqenai tw oclw

edidou tois mathEtais paratithenai tO ochlO
G1325 G3588 G3101 G3908 G3588 G3793
vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vn Aor Pas t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
GAVE to-THE LEARNers TO-BESIDE-PLACE to-THE THRONG
disciples to-place-before the
9:17 kai efagon kai ecortasqhsan pantes kai hrqh to 17 And they did eat, and were
kai ephagon kai echortasthEsan pantes kai ErthE to
G2532 G5315 G2532 G5526 G3956 G2532 G142 G3588
all filled: and there was taken
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n up of fragments that remained
AND THEY-ATE AND ARE-satisfiED ALL AND WAS-LIFTED THE to them twelve baskets.
was-picked-up
perisseusan autois klasmatwn kofinoi dwdeka

perisseusan autois klasmatOn kophinoi dOdeka
G4052 G846 G2801 G2894 G1427
vp Aor Act Nom Sg n pp Dat Pl m n_ Gen Pl n n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom
exceeding to-them OF-BREAKS PANNIERS TWO-TEN
superfluous of-fragments twelve
9:18 kai egeneto en tw einai auton proseucomenon katamonas 18 . And it came to pass, as he
kai egeneto en tO einai auton proseuchomenon katamonas
G2532 G1096 G1722 G3588 G1511 G846 G4336 G2651
was alone praying, his
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres vxx pp Acc Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m Adv disciples were with him: and
AND it-BECAME IN THE TO-BE Him prayING DOWN-ONLY he asked them, saying, Whom
it-occurred in-seclusion say the people that I am?
sunhsan autw oi maqhtai kai ephrwthsen autous legwn

sunEsan autO hoi mathEtai kai epErOtEsen autous legOn
G4895 G846 G3588 G3101 G2532 G1905 G846 G3004
vi Impf vxx 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
WERE-TOGETHER to-Him THE LEARNers AND He-inquirES-of them sayING
with-him disciples
tina me legousin oi ocloi einai

tina me legousin hoi ochloi einai
G5101 G3165 G3004 G3588 G3793 G1511
pi Acc Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vn Pres vxx
ANY ME ARE-sayING THE THRONGS TO-BE
who ?
9:19 oi de apokriqentes eipon iwannhn ton baptisthn alloi 19 They answering said, John
hoi de apokrithentes eipon iOannEn ton baptistEn alloi
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G2491 G3588 G910 G243
the Baptist; but some [say],
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m a_ Nom Pl m Elias; and others [say], that one
THE YET answerING THEY-said JOHN THE DIPist others of the old prophets is risen
baptist again.
de hlian alloi de oti profhths tis twn arcaiwn anesth

de Elian alloi de hoti prophEtEs tis tOn archaiOn anestE
G1161 G2243 G243 G1161 G3754 G4396 G5100 G3588 G744 G450
Conj n_ Acc Sg m a_ Nom Pl m Conj Conj n_ Nom Sg m px Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
YET ELIAS others YET that BEFORE-AVERer ANY OF-THE ORIGINals UP-STOOD
Elijah prophet some ancients rose
9:20 eipen de autois umeis de tina me legete einai 20 He said unto them, But
eipen de autois humeis de tina me legete einai
G2036 G1161 G846 G5210 G1161 G5101 G3165 G3004 G1511
whom say ye that I am? Peter
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Pl m pp 2 Nom Pl Conj pi Acc Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres Act 2 Pl vn Pres vxx answering said, The Christ of
He-said YET to-them YOU(p) YET ANY ME ARE-sayING TO-BE God.
apokriqeis de o petros eipen ton criston tou qeou

apokritheis de ho petros eipen ton christon tou theou
G611 G1161 G3588 G4074 G2036 G3588 G5547 G3588 G2316
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
answerING YET THE Peter said THE ANOINTED OF-THE God
Christ
9:21 o de epitimhsas autois parhggeilen mhdeni eipein touto 21 And he straitly charged
ho de epitimEsas autois parEggeilen mEdeni eipein touto
G3588 G1161 G2008 G846 G3853 G3367 G2036 G5124
them, and commanded [them]
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Dat Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Dat Sg m vn 2Aor Act pd Acc Sg n to tell no man that thing;
THE YET rebuking to-them He-chargES to-NO-YET-ONE TO-BE-sayING this
warning them no-one to-be-telling
Luke 9
9:22 eipwn oti dei ton uion tou anqrwpou polla 22 Saying, The Son of man
eipOn hoti dei ton huion tou anthrOpou polla
G2036 G3754 G1163 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G4183
must suffer many things, and
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m a_ Acc Pl n be rejected of the elders and
sayING that it-IS-BINDING THE SON OF-THE human much chief priests and scribes, and
must be slain, and be raised the third
day.
paqein kai apodokimasqhnai apo twn presbuterwn kai arcierewn
pathein kai apodokimasthEnai apo tOn presbuterOn kai archiereOn
G3958 G2532 G593 G575 G3588 G4245 G2532 G749
vn 2Aor Act Conj vn Aor Pas Prep t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m
TO-BE-EMOTIONING AND TO-BE-FROM-testED FROM THE SENIORS AND chief-SACRED-ones
to-be-suffering to-be-rejected elders chief-priests
kai grammatewn kai apoktanqhnai kai th trith hmera egerqhnai

kai grammateOn kai apoktanthEnai kai tE tritE hEmera egerthEnai
G2532 G1122 G2532 G615 G2532 G3588 G5154 G2250 G1453
Conj n_ Gen Pl m Conj vn Aor Pas Conj t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vn Aor Pas
AND WRITers AND TO-BE-FROM-KILLED AND to-THE third DAY TO-BE-ROUSED
scribes to-be-killed
9:23 elegen de pros pantas ei tis qelei opisw mou 23 And he said to [them] all, If
elegen de pros pantas ei tis thelei opisO mou
G3004 G1161 G4314 G3956 G1487 G5100 G2309 G3694 G3450
any [man] will come after me,
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj Prep a_ Acc Pl m Cond px Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv pp 1 Gen Sg let him deny himself, and take
He-said YET TOWARD ALL IF ANY IS-WILLING BEHIND ME up his cross daily, and follow
anyone after me.
elqein aparnhsasqw eauton kai aratw ton stauron autou

elthein aparnEsasthO heauton kai aratO ton stauron autou
G2064 G533 G1438 G2532 G142 G3588 G4716 G846
vn 2Aor Act vm Aor midD 3 Sg pf 3 Acc Sg m Conj vm Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m
TO-BE-COMING LET-him-renounce self AND LET-him-LIFT THE pale OF-him
let-him-renounce ! himself let-him-pick-up ! cross
kaq hmeran kai akolouqeitw moi

kath hEmeran kai akoloutheitO moi
G2596 G2250 G2532 G190 G3427
Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj vm Pres Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg
according-to DAY AND LET-him-BE-followING to-ME
let-him-be-following ! me
9:24 os gar an qelh thn yuchn autou swsai 24 For whosoever will save his
hos gar an thelE tEn psuchEn autou sOsai
G3739 G1063 G302 G2309 G3588 G5590 G846 G4982
life shall lose it: but whosoever
pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m vn Aor Act will lose his life for my sake,
WHO for EVER SHOULD-BE-WILLING THE soul OF-him TO-SAVE the same shall save it.
may-be-willing
apolesei authn os d an apolesh thn yuchn autou

apolesei autEn hos d an apolesE tEn psuchEn autou
G622 G846 G3739 G1161 G302 G622 G3588 G5590 G846
vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-destroyING her WHO YET EVER SHOULD-BE-destroyING THE soul OF-him
eneken emou outos swsei authn

heneken emou houtos sOsei autEn
G1752 G1700 G3778 G4982 G846
Adv pp 1 Gen Sg pd Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f
on-account-of OF-ME this-one SHALL-BE-SAVING her
me this-one
9:25 ti gar wfeleitai anqrwpos kerdhsas ton kosmon olon 25 For what is a man
ti gar Opheleitai anthrOpos kerdEsas ton kosmon holon
G5101 G1063 G5623 G444 G2770 G3588 G2889 G3650
advantaged, if he gain the
pi Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres Pas 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m whole world, and lose himself,
ANY for IS-beING-benefitED human GAINing THE SYSTEM WHOLE or be cast away?
what ? world
eauton de apolesas h zhmiwqeis

heauton de apolesas E zEmiOtheis
G1438 G1161 G622 G2228 G2210
pf 3 Acc Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Part vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
self YET destroying OR BEING-FINED
himself forfeiting
9:26 os gar an epaiscunqh me kai tous emous logous 26 For whosoever shall be
hos gar an epaischunthE me kai tous emous logous
G3739 G1063 G302 G1870 G3165 G2532 G3588 G1699 G3056
ashamed of me and of my
pr Nom Sg m Conj Part vs Aor pasD 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg Conj t_ Acc Pl m ps 1 Acc Pl n_ Acc Pl m words, of him shall the Son of
WHO for EVER MAY-BE-BEING-ON-VILED ME AND THE MY sayings man be ashamed, when he
may-be-being-ashamed-of of-the words shall come in his own glory,
and [in his] Father's, and of the
touton o uios tou anqrwpou epaiscunqhsetai otan holy angels.
touton ho huios tou anthrOpou epaischunthEsetai hotan
G5126 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G1870 G3752
pd Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut pasD 3 Sg Conj
this THE SON OF-THE human SHALL-BE-BEING-ON-VILED when-EVER
of-this-one shall-be-being-ashamed whenever
Luke 9
elqh en th doxh autou kai tou patros kai twn

elthE en tE doxE autou kai tou patros kai tOn
G2064 G1722 G3588 G1391 G846 G2532 G3588 G3962 G2532 G3588
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Pl m
He-MAY-BE-COMING IN THE esteem OF-Him AND OF-THE FATHER AND OF-THE
glory
agiwn aggelwn
hagiOn aggelOn
G40 G32
a_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
HOLY MESSENGERS
9:27 legw de umin alhqws eisin tines twn wde esthkotwn 27 But I tell you of a truth,
legO de humin alEthOs eisin tines tOn hOde hestEkotOn
G3004 G1161 G5213 G230 G1526 G5100 G3588 G5602 G2476
there be some standing here,
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl Adv vi Pres vxx 3 Pl px Nom Pl m t_ Gen Pl m Adv vp Perf Act Gen Pl m which shall not taste of death,
I-AM-sayING YET to-YOU(p) TRUly THEY-ARE ANY OF-THE-ones here HAVING-STOOD till they see the kingdom of
to-ye there-are some of-the-ones standing God.
oi ou mh geusontai qanatou ews an idwsin thn

hoi ou mE geusontai thanatou heOs an idOsin tEn
G3739 G3756 G3361 G1089 G2288 G2193 G302 G1492 G3588
pr Nom Pl m Part Neg Part Neg vi Fut midD 3 Pl n_ Gen Sg m Conj Part vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg f
WHO NOT NO SHALL-BE-TASTING OF-DEATH TILL EVER THEY-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE
death
basileian tou qeou

basileian tou theou
G932 G3588 G2316
KINGdom OF-THE God
9:28 egeneto de meta tous logous toutous wsei hmerai oktw kai 28 . And it came to pass about
egeneto de meta tous logous toutous hOsei hEmerai oktO kai
G1096 G1161 G3326 G3588 G3056 G5128 G5616 G2250 G3638 G2532
an eight days after these
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Pl m Adv n_ Nom Pl f a_ Nom Conj sayings, he took Peter and
BECAME YET after THE sayings these AS-IF DAYS EIGHT AND John and James, and went up
it-occurred about into a mountain to pray.
paralabwn ton petron kai iwannhn kai iakwbon anebh eis

paralabOn ton petron kai iOannEn kai iakObon anebE eis
G3880 G3588 G4074 G2532 G2491 G2532 G2385 G305 G1519
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
BESIDE-GETTING THE Peter AND JOHN AND JACOBUS He-UP-STEPPed INTO
taking-along James he-ascended
to oros proseuxasqai
to oros proseuxasthai
G3588 G3735 G4336
t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vn Aor midD
THE mountain TO-pray
9:29 kai egeneto en tw proseucesqai auton to eidos tou 29 And as he prayed, the
kai egeneto en tO proseuchesthai auton to eidos tou
G2532 G1096 G1722 G3588 G4336 G846 G3588 G1491 G3588
fashion of his countenance was
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres midD/pasD pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg n altered, and his raiment [was]
AND BECAME IN THE TO-BE-prayING Him THE PERCEPtion OF-THE white [and] glistering.
proswpou autou eteron kai o imatismos autou leukos

prosOpou autou heteron kai ho himatismos autou leukos
G4383 G846 G2087 G2532 G3588 G2441 G846 G3022
n_ Gen Sg n pp Gen Sg m a_ Nom Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
face OF-Him DIFFERENT AND THE GARMENTing OF-Him WHITE
vesture
exastraptwn
exastraptOn
G1823
OUT-GLEAM-FLINGING
glittering
9:30 kai idou andres duo sunelaloun autw oitines hsan 30 And, behold, there talked
kai idou andres duo sunelaloun autO hoitines Esan
G2532 G2400 G435 G1417 G4814 G846 G3748 G2258
with him two men, which were
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom vi Impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m pr Nom Pl m vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Moses and Elias:
AND BE-PERCEIVING MEN TWO TOGETHER-TALKED to-Him WHO-ANY WERE
lo ! conferred-with him who-any
mwshs kai hlias

mOsEs kai Elias
G3475 G2532 G2243
n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
MOSES AND ELIAS
Elijah
Luke 9
9:31 oi ofqentes en doxh elegon thn exodon autou hn 31 Who appeared in glory, and
hoi ophthentes en doxE elegon tEn exodon autou hEn
G3739 G3700 G1722 G1391 G3004 G3588 G1841 G846 G3739
spake of his decease which he
pr Nom Pl m vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m Prep n_ Dat Sg f vi Impf Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m pr Acc Sg f should accomplish at
WHO BEING-VIEWED IN esteem said THE OUT-WAY OF-Him WHICH Jerusalem.
being-seen glory exodus
emellen plhroun en ierousalhm

emellen plEroun en ierousalEm
G3195 G4137 G1722 G2419
vi Impf Act 3 Sg vn Pres Act Prep ni proper
He-WAS-ABOUT TO-BE-FILLING IN JERUSALEM
to-be-completing
9:32 o de petros kai oi sun autw hsan 32 But Peter and they that were
ho de petros kai hoi sun autO Esan
G3588 G1161 G4074 G2532 G3588 G4862 G846 G2258
with him were heavy with
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m Prep pp Dat Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Pl sleep: and when they were
THE YET Peter AND THE TOGETHER to-him WERE awake, they saw his glory, and
the-ones togetherwith him the two men that stood with
him.
bebarhmenoi upnw diagrhgorhsantes de eidon thn doxan
bebarEmenoi hupnO diagrEgorEsantes de eidon tEn doxan
G916 G5258 G1235 G1161 G1492 G3588 G1391
vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m n_ Dat Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
HAVING-been-HEAVIED to-SLEEP THRU-ROUSing YET THEY-PERCEIVED THE esteem
becoming-alert glory
autou kai tous duo andras tous sunestwtas autw

autou kai tous duo andras tous sunestOtas autO
G846 G2532 G3588 G1417 G435 G3588 G4921 G846
pp Gen Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m vp Perf Act Acc Pl m pp Dat Sg m
OF-Him AND THE TWO MEN THE HAVING-TOGETHER-STOOD to-Him
standing-togetherwith him
9:33 kai egeneto en tw diacwrizesqai autous ap autou 33 And it came to pass, as they
kai egeneto en tO diachOrizesthai autous ap autou
G2532 G1096 G1722 G3588 G1316 G846 G575 G846
departed from him, Peter said
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres midD/pasD pp Acc Pl m Prep pp Gen Sg m unto Jesus, Master, it is good
AND BECAME IN THE TO-BE-beING-THRU-SPACEizED them FROM Him for us to be here: and let us
it-occurred to-be-being-detached make three tabernacles; one for
thee, and one for Moses, and
eipen o petros pros ton ihsoun epistata kalon estin one for Elias: not knowing
eipen ho petros pros ton iEsoun epistata kalon estin what he said.
G2036 G3588 G4074 G4314 G3588 G2424 G1988 G2570 G2076
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m a_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
said THE Peter TOWARD THE JESUS Adept ! IDEAL it-IS
Doctor !
hmas wde einai kai poihswmen skhnas treis mian soi kai
hEmas hOde einai kai poiEsOmen skEnas treis mian soi kai
G2248 G5602 G1511 G2532 G4160 G4633 G5140 G1520 G4671 G2532
pp 1 Acc Pl Adv vn Pres vxx Conj vs Aor Act 1 Pl n_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Dat Sg Conj
US here TO-BE AND WE-SHOULD-BE-makING BOOTHS THREE ONE to-YOU AND
tabernacles
mwsei mian kai mian hlia mh eidws o legei

mOsei mian kai mian Elia mE eidOs ho legei
G3475 G1520 G2532 G1520 G2243 G3361 G1492 G3739 G3004
n_ Dat Sg m a_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Acc Sg f n_ Dat Sg m Part Neg vp Perf Act Nom Sg m pr Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to-MOSES ONE AND ONE to-ELIAS NO HAVING-PERCEIVED WHICH he-IS-sayING
to-Elijah being-aware
9:34 tauta de autou legontos egeneto nefelh kai epeskiasen 34 While he thus spake, there
tauta de autou legontos egeneto nephelE kai epeskiasen
G5023 G1161 G846 G3004 G1096 G3507 G2532 G1982
came a cloud, and
pd Acc Pl n Conj pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg overshadowed them: and they
these YET OF-him sayING BECAME CLOUD AND ON-SHADES feared as they entered into the
these-things overshadows cloud.
autous efobhqhsan de en tw ekeinous eiselqein eis thn

autous ephobEthEsan de en tO ekeinous eiselthein eis tEn
G846 G5399 G1161 G1722 G3588 G1565 G1525 G1519 G3588
pp Acc Pl m vi Aor pasD 3 Pl Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m pd Acc Pl m vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg f
them THEY-WERE-afraid YET IN THE those TO-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE
those-men to-be-entering
nefelhn
nephelEn
G3507
n_ Acc Sg f
CLOUD
9:35 kai fwnh egeneto ek ths nefelhs legousa outos 35 And there came a voice out
kai phOnE egeneto ek tEs nephelEs legousa houtos
G2532 G5456 G1096 G1537 G3588 G3507 G3004 G3778
of the cloud, saying, This is my
Conj n_ Nom Sg f vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f pd Nom Sg m beloved Son: hear him.
AND SOUND BECAME OUT OF-THE CLOUD sayING this
voice
Luke 9
estin o uios mou o agaphtos autou akouete

estin ho huios mou ho agapEtos autou akouete
G2076 G3588 G5207 G3450 G3588 G27 G846 G191
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Pl
IS THE SON OF-ME THE beLOVED OF-Him BE-HEARING
him be-ye-hearing !
9:36 kai en tw genesqai thn fwnhn eureqh o ihsous 36 And when the voice was
kai en tO genesthai tEn phOnEn heurethE ho iEsous
G2532 G1722 G3588 G1096 G3588 G5456 G2147 G3588 G2424
past, Jesus was found alone.
Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn 2Aor midD t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m And they kept [it] close, and
AND IN THE TO-BE-BECOMING THE SOUND WAS-FOUND THE JESUS told no man in those days any
voice of those things which they had
seen.
monos kai autoi esighsan kai oudeni aphggeilan en ekeinais
monos kai autoi esigEsan kai oudeni apEggeilan en ekeinais
G3441 G2532 G846 G4601 G2532 G3762 G518 G1722 G1565
a_ Nom Sg m Conj pp Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj a_ Dat Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pd Dat Pl f
ONLY AND they HUSH AND to-NOT-YET-ONE THEY-FROM-MESSAGE IN those
alone to-no-one they-report
tais hmerais ouden wn ewrakasin

tais hEmerais ouden hOn heOrakasin
G3588 G2250 G3762 G3739 G3708
t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f a_ Acc Sg n pr Gen Pl m vi Perf Act 3 Pl Att
THE DAYS NOT-YET-ONE OF-WHICH THEY-HAVE SEEN
anything they-have-seen
9:37 egeneto de en th exhs hmera katelqontwn autwn apo tou 37 . And it came to pass, that
egeneto de en tE hexEs hEmera katelthontOn autOn apo tou
G1096 G1161 G1722 G3588 G1836 G2250 G2718 G846 G575 G3588
on the next day, when they
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg f Adv n_ Dat Sg f vp 2Aor Act Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg n were come down from the hill,
BECAME YET IN THE next DAY OF-DOWN-COMING OF-them FROM THE much people met him.
it-occurred of-coming-down
orous sunhnthsen autw oclos polus

orous sunEntEsen autO ochlos polus
G3735 G4876 G846 G3793 G4183
n_ Gen Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
mountain TOGETHER-meets to-Him THRONG MANY
meets-with him vast
9:38 kai idou anhr apo tou oclou anebohsen legwn 38 And, behold, a man of the
kai idou anEr apo tou ochlou aneboEsen legOn
G2532 G2400 G435 G575 G3588 G3793 G310 G3004
company cried out, saying,
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Master, I beseech thee, look
AND BE-PERCEIVING MAN FROM THE THRONG UP-IMPLORES sayING upon my son: for he is mine
lo ! exclaims only child.
didaskale deomai sou epibleyon epi ton uion mou oti

didaskale deomai sou epiblepson epi ton huion mou hoti
G1320 G1189 G4675 G1914 G1909 G3588 G5207 G3450 G3754
n_ Voc Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg pp 2 Gen Sg vm Aor Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Conj
TEACHer ! I-AM-beseechING OF-YOU ON-LOOK-YOU ON THE SON OF-ME that
you look-on-you !
monogenhs estin moi

monogenEs estin moi
G3439 G2076 G3427
a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg
ONLY-generated he-IS to-ME
only-begotten
9:39 kai idou pneuma lambanei auton kai exaifnhs krazei kai 39 And, lo, a spirit taketh him,
kai idou pneuma lambanei auton kai exaiphnEs krazei kai
G2532 G2400 G4151 G2983 G846 G2532 G1810 G2896 G2532
and he suddenly crieth out; and
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj it teareth him that he foameth
AND BE-PERCEIVING spirit IS-GETTING-UP him AND suddenly he-IS-CRYING AND again, and bruising him hardly
lo ! is-getting departeth from him.
sparassei auton meta afrou kai mogis apocwrei ap autou

sparassei auton meta aphrou kai mogis apochOrei ap autou
G4682 G846 G3326 G876 G2532 G3425 G672 G575 G846
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg m Conj Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m
it-IS-CONVULSING him WITH FROTH AND DIFFICULTly IS-FROM-SPACING FROM him
with-difficulty is-departing
suntribon auton
suntribon auton
G4937 G846
vp Pres Act Nom Sg n pp Acc Sg m
crushING him
9:40 kai edehqhn twn maqhtwn sou ina ekballwsin auto 40 And I besought thy
kai edeEthEn tOn mathEtOn sou hina ekballOsin auto
G2532 G1189 G3588 G3101 G4675 G2443 G1544 G846
disciples to cast him out; and
Conj vi Aor Pas 1 Sg t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg Conj vs Pres Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg n they could not.
AND I-besought OF-THE LEARNers OF-YOU THAT THEY-MAY-BE-OUT-CASTING it
the disciples they-may-be-casting-out
Luke 9
kai ouk hdunhqhsan

kai ouk EdunEthEsan
G2532 G3756 G1410
Conj Part Neg vi Aor pasD 3 Pl Att
AND NOT THEY-WERE-enABLED
they-could
9:41 apokriqeis de o ihsous eipen w genea apistos kai 41 And Jesus answering said,
apokritheis de ho iEsous eipen O genea apistos kai
G611 G1161 G3588 G2424 G2036 G5599 G1074 G571 G2532
O faithless and perverse
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Inj n_ Voc Sg f a_ Nom Sg f Conj generation, how long shall I be
answerING YET THE JESUS said o! generation UN-BELIEVing AND with you, and suffer you?
generation ! unbelieving Bring thy son hither.
diestrammenh ews pote esomai pros umas kai anexomai

diestrammenE heOs pote esomai pros humas kai anexomai
G1294 G2193 G4219 G2071 G4314 G5209 G2532 G430
vp Perf Pas Nom Sg f Conj Part Int vi Fut vxx 1 Sg Prep pp 2 Acc Pl Conj vi Fut midD 1 Sg
HAVING-been-THRU-TURNED TILL ?-when I-SHALL-BE TOWARD YOU(p) AND I-SHALL-BE-toleratING
having-been-perverted when ? ye I-shall-be-bearing-with
umwn prosagage wde ton uion sou

humOn prosagage hOde ton huion sou
G5216 G4317 G5602 G3588 G5207 G4675
pp 2 Gen Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Adv t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-YOU(p) BE-TOWARD-LEADING here THE SON OF-YOU
ye be-you-leading-toward !
9:42 eti de prosercomenou autou errhxen auton to daimonion 42 And as he was yet a
eti de proserchomenou autou errExen auton to daimonion
G2089 G1161 G4334 G846 G4486 G846 G3588 G1140
coming, the devil threw him
Adv Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n down, and tare [him]. And
STILL YET OF-TOWARD-COMING OF-him BURSTS him THE demon Jesus rebuked the unclean
of-approaching tears spirit, and healed the child, and
delivered him again to his
kai sunesparaxen epetimhsen de o ihsous tw pneumati tw father.
kai sunesparaxen epetimEsen de ho iEsous tO pneumati tO
G2532 G4952 G2008 G1161 G3588 G2424 G3588 G4151 G3588
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n t_ Dat Sg n
AND TOGETHER-CONVULSES rebukES YET THE JESUS to-THE spirit THE
violently-convulses the
akaqartw kai iasato ton paida kai apedwken auton tw

akathartO kai iasato ton paida kai apedOken auton tO
G169 G2532 G2390 G3588 G3816 G2532 G591 G846 G3588
a_ Dat Sg n Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m t_ Dat Sg m
UN-clean AND He-HEALS THE boy AND FROM-GIVES him to-THE
unclean gives-back
patri autou
patri autou
G3962 G846
n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m
FATHER OF-him
9:43 exeplhssonto de pantes epi th megaleiothti tou qeou 43 . And they were all amazed
exeplEssonto de pantes epi tE megaleiotEti tou theou
G1605 G1161 G3956 G1909 G3588 G3168 G3588 G2316
at the mighty power of God.
vi Impf Pas 3 Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m But while they wondered every
were-astonishED YET ALL ON THE magnificence OF-THE God one at all things which Jesus
did, he said unto his disciples,
pantwn de qaumazontwn epi pasin ois epoihsen o ihsous

pantOn de thaumazontOn epi pasin hois epoiEsen ho iEsous
G3956 G1161 G2296 G1909 G3956 G3739 G4160 G3588 G2424
a_ Gen Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl m Prep a_ Dat Pl n pr Dat Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
OF-ALL YET OF-MARVELING ON ALL to-WHICH DOES THE JESUS
marveling which
eipen pros tous maqhtas autou

eipen pros tous mathEtas autou
G2036 G4314 G3588 G3101 G846
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m
He-said TOWARD THE LEARNers OF-Him
disciples
9:44 qesqe umeis eis ta wta umwn tous logous toutous 44 Let these sayings sink down
thesthe humeis eis ta Ota humOn tous logous toutous
G5087 G5210 G1519 G3588 G3775 G5216 G3588 G3056 G5128
into your ears: for the Son of
vm 2Aor Mid 2 Pl pp 2 Nom Pl Prep t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Pl m man shall be delivered into the
BE-PLACING YOU(p) INTO THE EARS OF-YOU(p) THE sayings these hands of men.
be-ye-placing ! ye of-ye
o gar uios tou anqrwpou mellei paradidosqai eis

ho gar huios tou anthrOpou mellei paradidosthai eis
G3588 G1063 G5207 G3588 G444 G3195 G3860 G1519
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg vn Pres Pas Prep
THE for SON OF-THE human IS-ABOUT TO-BE-beING-BESIDE-GIVEN INTO
is-being-about to-be-being-given-up
Luke 9
ceiras anqrwpwn
cheiras anthrOpOn
G5495 G444
n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Pl m
HANDS OF-humans
9:45 oi de hgnooun to rhma touto kai hn 45 But they understood not this
hoi de Egnooun to rEma touto kai En
G3588 G1161 G50 G3588 G4487 G5124 G2532 G2258
saying, and it was hid from
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Impf Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pd Acc Sg n Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg them, that they perceived it
THE YET THEY-UN-KNEW THE declaration this AND WAS not: and they feared to ask him
they-were-ignorant-of it-was of that saying.
parakekalummenon ap autwn ina mh aisqwntai auto kai

parakekalummenon ap autOn hina mE aisthOntai auto kai
G3871 G575 G846 G2443 G3361 G143 G846 G2532
vp Perf Pas Nom Sg n Prep pp Gen Pl m Conj Part Neg vs 2Aor midD 3 Pl pp Acc Sg n Conj
HAVING-been-BESIDE-COVERED FROM them THAT NO THEY-MAY-BE-SENSING it AND
having-been-screened
efobounto erwthsai auton peri tou rhmatos toutou

ephobounto erOtEsai auton peri tou rEmatos toutou
G5399 G2065 G846 G4012 G3588 G4487 G5127
vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl vn Aor Act pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n pd Gen Sg n
THEY-FEARED TO-ask Him ABOUT THE declaration this
concerning
9:46 eishlqen de dialogismos en autois to tis an eih 46 Then there arose a

eisElthen de dialogismos en autois to tis an eiE
G1525 G1161 G1261 G1722 G846 G3588 G5101 G302 G1498
reasoning among them, which
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg m Prep pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg n pi Nom Sg m Part vo Pres vxx 3 Sg of them should be greatest.
INTO-CAME YET THRU-account IN them THE ANY EVER MAY-BE
entered reasoning among who ?
meizwn autwn
meizOn autOn
G3187 G846
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp pp Gen Pl m
GREATER OF-them
greatest
9:47 o de ihsous idwn ton dialogismon ths kardias 47 And Jesus, perceiving the
ho de iEsous idOn ton dialogismon tEs kardias
G3588 G1161 G2424 G1492 G3588 G1261 G3588 G2588
thought of their heart, took a
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f child, and set him by him,
THE YET JESUS PERCEIVING THE THRU-account OF-THE HEART
reasoning
autwn epilabomenos paidiou esthsen auto par eautw

autOn epilabomenos paidiou hestEsen auto par heautO
G846 G1949 G3813 G2476 G846 G3844 G1438
pp Gen Pl m vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg n Prep pf 3 Dat Sg m
OF-them ON-GETTING OF-little-boy (or-girl) STANDS it BESIDE Self
getting-hold-of little-boy (or-girl) himself
9:48 kai eipen autois os ean dexhtai touto to 48 And said unto them,
kai eipen autois hos ean dexEtai touto to
G2532 G2036 G846 G3739 G1437 G1209 G5124 G3588
Whosoever shall receive this
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m pr Nom Sg m Cond vs Aor midD 3 Sg pd Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg n child in my name receiveth me:
AND said to-them WHO IF-EVER SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING this THE and whosoever shall receive
me receiveth him that sent me:
for he that is least among you
paidion epi tw onomati mou eme decetai kai os all, the same shall be great.
paidion epi tO onomati mou eme dechetai kai hos
G3813 G1909 G3588 G3686 G3450 G1691 G1209 G2532 G3739
n_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj pr Nom Sg m
little-boy (-or-girl) ON THE NAME OF-ME ME IS-RECEIVING AND WHO
ean eme dexhtai decetai ton aposteilanta me

ean eme dexEtai dechetai ton aposteilanta me
G1437 G1691 G1209 G1209 G3588 G649 G3165
Cond pp 1 Acc Sg vs Aor midD 3 Sg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m vp Aor Act Acc Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg
IF-EVER ME SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING IS-RECEIVING THE One-commissioning ME
one-commissioning
o gar mikroteros en pasin umin uparcwn outos estai

ho gar mikroteros en pasin humin huparchOn houtos estai
G3588 G1063 G3398 G1722 G3956 G5213 G5225 G3778 G2071
t_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m Cmp Prep a_ Dat Pl m pp 2 Dat Pl vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
THE for LITTLER IN ALL to-YOU(p) belongING this-one SHALL-BE
one-smaller among ye inherently this-one
megas
megas
G3173
a_ Nom Sg m
GREAT
Luke 9
9:49 apokriqeis de o iwannhs eipen epistata eidomen tina 49 And John answered and
apokritheis de ho iOannEs eipen epistata eidomen tina
G611 G1161 G3588 G2491 G2036 G1988 G1492 G5100
said, Master, we saw one
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Voc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl px Acc Sg m casting out devils in thy name;
answerING YET THE JOHN said Adept ! WE-PERCEIVED ANY and we forbad him, because he
Doctor ! someone followeth not with us.
epi tw onomati sou ekballonta ta daimonia kai ekwlusamen

epi tO onomati sou ekballonta ta daimonia kai ekOlusamen
G1909 G3588 G3686 G4675 G1544 G3588 G1140 G2532 G2967
Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg vp Pres Act Acc Sg m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Conj vi Aor Act 1 Pl
ON THE NAME OF-YOU OUT-CASTING THE demons AND WE-FORBID
casting-out
auton oti ouk akolouqei meq hmwn

auton hoti ouk akolouthei meth hEmOn
G846 G3754 G3756 G190 G3326 G2257
pp Acc Sg m Conj Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep pp 1 Gen Pl
him that NOT he-IS-followING WITH US
9:50 kai eipen pros auton o ihsous mh kwluete os 50 And Jesus said unto him,
kai eipen pros auton ho iEsous mE kOluete hos
G2532 G2036 G4314 G846 G3588 G2424 G3361 G2967 G3739
Forbid [him] not: for he that is
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Pl pr Nom Sg m not against us is for us.
AND said TOWARD him THE JESUS NO BE-YE-FORBIDDING WHO
be-ye-forbidding !
gar ouk estin kaq hmwn uper hmwn estin

gar ouk estin kath hEmOn huper hEmOn estin
G1063 G3756 G2076 G2596 G2257 G5228 G2257 G2076
Conj Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep pp 1 Gen Pl Prep pp 1 Gen Pl vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
for NOT IS DOWN OF-US OVER US IS
against us for-the-sake-of
9:51 egeneto de en tw sumplhrousqai tas hmeras ths 51 . And it came to pass, when
egeneto de en tO sumplErousthai tas hEmeras tEs
G1096 G1161 G1722 G3588 G4845 G3588 G2250 G3588
the time was come that he
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres Pas t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Sg f should be received up, he
it-BECAME YET IN THE TO-BE-beING-TOGETHER-FILLED THE DAYS OF-THE stedfastly set his face to go to
it-occurred to-be-being-fulfilled Jerusalem,
analhyews autou kai autos to proswpon autou esthrixen tou

analEpseOs autou kai autos to prosOpon autou estErixen tou
G354 G846 G2532 G846 G3588 G4383 G846 G4741 G3588
n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj pp Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Gen Sg m
UP-GETTing OF-Him AND He THE face OF-Him STANDS-fast OF-THE
taking-up fixes-steadfastly
poreuesqai eis ierousalhm

poreuesthai eis ierousalEm
G4198 G1519 G2419
vn Pres midD/pasD Prep ni proper
TO-BE-GOING INTO JERUSALEM
9:52 kai apesteilen aggelous pro proswpou autou kai poreuqentes 52 And sent messengers before
kai apesteilen aggelous pro prosOpou autou kai poreuthentes
G2532 G649 G32 G4253 G4383 G846 G2532 G4198
his face: and they went, and
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl m Prep n_ Gen Sg n pp Gen Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m entered into a village of the
AND He-commissions MESSENGERS BEFORE face OF-Him AND BEING-GONE Samaritans, to make ready for
he-dispatches him.
eishlqon eis kwmhn samareitwn wste etoimasai autw

eisElthon eis kOmEn samareitOn hOste hetoimasai autO
G1525 G1519 G2968 G4541 G5620 G2090 G846
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Pl m Conj vn Aor Act pp Dat Sg m
THEY-INTO-CAME INTO VILLAGE OF-SAMARItans AS-BESIDES TO-make-READY to-Him
they-entered so-as
9:53 kai ouk edexanto auton oti to proswpon autou hn 53 And they did not receive
kai ouk edexanto auton hoti to prosOpon autou En
G2532 G3756 G1209 G846 G3754 G3588 G4383 G846 G2258
him, because his face was as
Conj Part Neg vi Aor midD 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg though he would go to
AND NOT THEY-RECEIVE Him that THE face OF-Him WAS Jerusalem.
poreuomenon eis ierousalhm

poreuomenon eis ierousalEm
G4198 G1519 G2419
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg n Prep ni proper
GOING INTO JERUSALEM
9:54 idontes de oi maqhtai autou iakwbos kai iwannhs eipon 54 And when his disciples
idontes de hoi mathEtai autou iakObos kai iOannEs eipon
G1492 G1161 G3588 G3101 G846 G2385 G2532 G2491 G2036
James and John saw [this],
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl they said, Lord, wilt thou that
PERCEIVING YET THE LEARNers OF-Him JACOBUS AND JOHN said we command fire to come
perceiving-it disciples James down from heaven, and
Luke 9
consume them, even as Elias

kurie qeleis eipwmen pur katabhnai apo tou ouranou did?
kurie theleis eipOmen pur katabEnai apo tou ouranou
G2962 G2309 G2036 G4442 G2597 G575 G3588 G3772
n_ Voc Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Sg vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl n_ Acc Sg n vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
Master ! YOU-ARE-WILLING WE-MAY-BE-sayING FIRE TO-DOWN-STEP FROM THE heaven
Lord ! to-descend
kai analwsai autous ws kai hlias epoihsen

kai analOsai autous hOs kai Elias epoiEsen
G2532 G355 G846 G5613 G2532 G2243 G4160
Conj vn Aor Act pp Acc Pl m Adv Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND TO-UP-CONSUME them AS AND ELIAS DOES
to-consume also Elijah
9:55 strafeis de epetimhsen autois kai eipen ouk oidate 55 But he turned, and rebuked
strapheis de epetimEsen autois kai eipen ouk oidate
G4762 G1161 G2008 G846 G2532 G2036 G3756 G1492
them, and said, Ye know not
vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Part Neg vi Perf Act 2 Pl what manner of spirit ye are of.
BEING-TURNED YET He-rebukES to-them AND said NOT YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED
them ye-are-aware
oiou pneumatos este umeis

oiou pneumatos este humeis
G3634 G4151 G2075 G5210
pk Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vi Pres vxx 2 Pl pp 2 Nom Pl
OF-WHICH-WHICH OF-spirit ARE YOU(p)
of-what-manner
9:56 o gar uios tou anqrwpou ouk hlqen yucas anqrwpwn 56 For the Son of man is not
ho gar huios tou anthrOpou ouk Elthen psuchas anthrOpOn
G3588 G1063 G5207 G3588 G444 G3756 G2064 G5590 G444
come to destroy men's lives,
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Pl m but to save [them]. And they
THE for SON OF-THE human NOT CAME souls OF-humans went to another village.
apolesai alla swsai kai eporeuqhsan eis eteran kwmhn

apolesai alla sOsai kai eporeuthEsan eis heteran kOmEn
G622 G235 G4982 G2532 G4198 G1519 G2087 G2968
vn Aor Act Conj vn Aor Act Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Pl Prep a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
TO-destroy but TO-SAVE AND THEY-WERE-GONE INTO DIFFERENT VILLAGE
they-went
9:57 egeneto de poreuomenwn autwn en th odw eipen 57 . And it came to pass, that,
egeneto de poreuomenOn autOn en tE hodO eipen
G1096 G1161 G4198 G846 G1722 G3588 G3598 G2036
as they went in the way, a
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg certain [man] said unto him,
BECAME YET OF-GOING OF-them IN THE WAY said Lord, I will follow thee
it-came-to-pass road whithersoever thou goest.
tis pros auton akolouqhsw soi opou an aperch

tis pros auton akolouthEsO soi hopou an aperchE
G5100 G4314 G846 G190 G4671 G3699 G302 G565
px Nom Sg m Prep pp Acc Sg m vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Adv Part vs Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg
ANY TOWARD Him I-SHALL-BE-followING to-YOU THE-?-where EVER YOU-MAY-BE-FROM-COMING
someone you wherever you-may-be-coming-away
kurie
kurie
G2962
n_ Voc Sg m
Master !
Lord !
9:58 kai eipen autw o ihsous ai alwpekes fwleous 58 And Jesus said unto him,
kai eipen autO ho iEsous hai alOpekes phOleous
G2532 G2036 G846 G3588 G2424 G3588 G258 G5454
Foxes have holes, and birds of
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f n_ Acc Pl m the air [have] nests; but the
AND said to-him THE JESUS THE JACKALS BURROWS Son of man hath not where to
lay [his] head.
ecousin kai ta peteina tou ouranou kataskhnwseis o de

echousin kai ta peteina tou ouranou kataskEnOseis ho de
G2192 G2532 G3588 G4071 G3588 G3772 G2682 G3588 G1161
vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Acc Pl f t_ Nom Sg m Conj
ARE-HAVING AND THE flyers OF-THE heaven DOWN-BOOTHS THE YET
flying-creatures roosts
uios tou anqrwpou ouk ecei pou thn kefalhn klinh

huios tou anthrOpou ouk echei pou tEn kephalEn klinE
G5207 G3588 G444 G3756 G2192 G4226 G3588 G2776 G2827
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg Part Int t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vs Pres Act 3 Sg
SON OF-THE human NOT IS-HAVING ?-where THE HEAD MAY-BE-deCLINING
where ? he-may-be-reclining
9:59 eipen de pros eteron akolouqei moi o de eipen 59 And he said unto another,
eipen de pros heteron akolouthei moi ho de eipen
G2036 G1161 G4314 G2087 G190 G3427 G3588 G1161 G2036
Follow me. But he said, Lord,
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Prep a_ Acc Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg suffer me first to go and bury
He-said YET TOWARD DIFFERENT BE-followING to-ME THE YET said my father.
different-one be-you-following ! me he-said
Luke 9 - Luke 10
kurie epitreyon moi apelqonti prwton qayai ton patera

kurie epitrepson moi apelthonti prOton thapsai ton patera
G2962 G2010 G3427 G565 G4412 G2290 G3588 G3962
n_ Voc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg vp 2Aor Act Dat Sg m Adv vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
Master ! permit to-ME to-FROM-COMING BEFORE-most TO-entomb THE FATHER
Lord ! permit-you ! me coming-away first
mou
mou
G3450
pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-ME
9:60 eipen de autw o ihsous afes tous nekrous qayai 60 Jesus said unto him, Let the
eipen de autO ho iEsous aphes tous nekrous thapsai
G2036 G1161 G846 G3588 G2424 G863 G3588 G3498 G2290
dead bury their dead: but go
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vn Aor Act thou and preach the kingdom
said YET to-him THE JESUS FROM-LET THE DEAD TO-entomb of God.
let-you ! dead-ones
tous eautwn nekrous su de apelqwn diaggelle thn

tous heautOn nekrous su de apelthOn diaggelle tEn
G3588 G1438 G3498 G4771 G1161 G565 G1229 G3588
t_ Acc Pl m pf 3 Gen Pl m a_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Nom Sg Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg f
THE OF-selves DEAD YOU YET FROM-COMING BE-publishING THE
of-themselves dead-ones coming-away be-you-publishing !
basileian tou qeou

basileian tou theou
G932 G3588 G2316
KINGdom OF-THE God
9:61 eipen de kai eteros akolouqhsw soi kurie prwton de 61 And another also said, Lord,
eipen de kai heteros akolouthEsO soi kurie prOton de
G2036 G1161 G2532 G2087 G190 G4671 G2962 G4412 G1161
I will follow thee; but let me
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg n_ Voc Sg m Adv Conj first go bid them farewell,
said YET AND DIFFERENT I-SHALL-BE-followING to-YOU Master ! BEFORE-most YET which are at home at my
also different-one you Lord ! first house.
epitreyon moi apotaxasqai tois eis ton oikon mou

epitrepson moi apotaxasthai tois eis ton oikon mou
G2010 G3427 G657 G3588 G1519 G3588 G3624 G3450
vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg vn Aor Mid t_ Dat Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg
permit to-ME TO-FROM-SET to-THE-ones INTO THE HOME OF-ME
permit-you ! me to-take-leave to-the-ones
9:62 eipen de pros auton o ihsous oudeis epibalwn 62 And Jesus said unto him,
eipen de pros auton ho iEsous oudeis epibalOn
G2036 G1161 G4314 G846 G3588 G2424 G3762 G1911
No man, having put his hand to
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Prep pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m the plough, and looking back,
said YET TOWARD him THE JESUS NOT-YET-ONE ON-CASTING is fit for the kingdom of God.
no-one putting-forth
thn ceira autou ep arotron kai blepwn eis ta opisw

tEn cheira autou ep arotron kai blepOn eis ta opisO
G3588 G5495 G846 G1909 G723 G2532 G991 G1519 G3588 G3694
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg n Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl n Adv
THE HAND OF-him ON PLOW AND lookING INTO THE BEHIND
the-things
euqetos estin eis thn basileian tou qeou

euthetos estin eis tEn basileian tou theou
G2111 G2076 G1519 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316
a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
WELL-PLACED IS INTO THE KINGdom OF-THE God
fit
Luke 10
10:1 meta de tauta anedeixen o kurios kai eterous ebdomhkonta 1 . After these things the Lord
meta de tauta anedeixen ho kurios kai heterous hebdomEkonta
G3326 G1161 G5023 G322 G3588 G2962 G2532 G2087 G1440
appointed other seventy also,
Prep Conj pd Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom and sent them two and two
after YET these UP-SHOWS THE Master AND DIFFERENT SEVENTY before his face into every city
these-things indicates Lord also different-ones and place, whither he himself
would come.
kai apesteilen autous ana duo pro proswpou autou eis pasan polin
kai apesteilen autous ana duo pro prosOpou autou eis pasan polin
G2532 G649 G846 G303 G1417 G4253 G4383 G846 G1519 G3956 G4172
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Prep a_ Nom Prep n_ Gen Sg n pp Gen Sg m Prep a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
AND He-commissions them UP TWO BEFORE face OF-Him INTO EVERY city
he-dispatches
kai topon ou emellen autos ercesqai

kai topon hou emellen autos erchesthai
G2532 G5117 G3739 G3195 G846 G2064
Conj n_ Acc Sg m pr Gen Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Nom Sg m vn Pres midD/pasD
AND PLACE where WAS-ABOUT He TO-BE-COMING
10:2 elegen oun pros autous o men qerismos polus oi de 2 Therefore said he unto them,
elegen oun pros autous ho men therismos polus hoi de
G3004 G3767 G4314 G846 G3588 G3303 G2326 G4183 G3588 G1161
The harvest truly [is] great, but
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj Prep pp Acc Pl m t_ Nom Sg m Part n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Pl m Conj the labourers [are] few: pray ye
He-said THEN TOWARD them THE INDEED harvest MANY THE YET therefore the Lord of the
vast harvest, that he would send
forth labourers into his harvest.
ergatai oligoi dehqhte oun tou kuriou tou qerismou opws
ergatai oligoi deEthEte oun tou kuriou tou therismou hopOs
G2040 G3641 G1189 G3767 G3588 G2962 G3588 G2326 G3704
n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m vm Aor pasD 2 Pl Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Adv
ACTers FEW BE-BINDING THEN THE Master OF-THE harvest WHICH-how
workers be-ye-beseeching ! Lord so-that
ekballh ergatas eis ton qerismon autou

ekballE ergatas eis ton therismon autou
G1544 G2040 G1519 G3588 G2326 G846
vs Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m
He-MAY-BE-OUT-CASTING ACTers INTO THE harvest OF-Him
he-may-be-ejecting workers
10:3 upagete idou egw apostellw umas ws arnas en 3Go your ways: behold, I send
hupagete idou egO apostellO humas hOs arnas en
G5217 G2400 G1473 G649 G5209 G5613 G704 G1722
you forth as lambs among
vm Pres Act 2 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Nom Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl Adv n_ Acc Pl m Prep wolves.
BE-UNDER-LEADING BE-PERCEIVING I AM-commissionING YOU(p) AS LAMBS IN
be-ye-going-away ! lo ! am-dispatching ye
mesw lukwn
mesO lukOn
G3319 G3074
a_ Dat Sg n n_ Gen Pl m
MIDst OF-WOLVES
10:4 mh bastazete balantion mh phran mhde upodhmata kai mhdena 4 Carry neither purse, nor
mE bastazete balantion mE pEran mEde hupodEmata kai mEdena
G3361 G941 G905 G3361 G4082 G3366 G5266 G2532 G3367
scrip, nor shoes: and salute no
Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg n Part Neg n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Pl n Conj a_ Acc Sg m man by the way.
NO YE-BE-BEARING purse NO BAG (beggar's) NO-YET sandals AND NO-YET-ONE
be-ye-bearing ! beggar's-bag nor-yet no-one
kata thn odon aspashsqe

kata tEn hodon aspasEsthe
G2596 G3588 G3598 G782
Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vs Aor midD 2 Pl
according-to THE WAY YE-SHOULD-BE-greetING
10:5 eis hn d an oikian eiserchsqe prwton legete eirhnh 5 And into whatsoever house
eis hEn d an oikian eiserchEsthe prOton legete eirEnE
G1519 G3739 G1161 G302 G3614 G1525 G4412 G3004 G1515
ye enter, first say, Peace [be] to
Prep pr Acc Sg f Conj Part n_ Acc Sg f vs Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Adv vm Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Nom Sg f this house.
INTO WHICH YET EVER HOME YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING BEFORE-most BE-sayING PEACE
house ye-may-be-entering first be-ye-saying !
tw oikw toutw
tO oikO toutO
G3588 G3624 G5129
t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pd Dat Sg m
to-THE HOME this
household
10:6 kai ean men h ekei o uios eirhnhs epanapausetai 6 And if the son of peace be
kai ean men hE ekei ho huios eirEnEs epanapausetai
G2532 G1437 G3303 G5600 G1563 G3588 G5207 G1515 G1879
there, your peace shall rest
Conj Cond Part vs Pres vxx 3 Sg Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut midD 3 Sg upon it: if not, it shall turn to
AND IF-EVER INDEED MAY-BE there THE SON OF-PEACE SHALL-BE-ON-restING you again.
shall-be-resting-on
Luke 10
ep auton h eirhnh umwn ei de mhge ef umas

ep auton hE eirEnE humOn ei de mEge eph humas
G1909 G846 G3588 G1515 G5216 G1487 G1161 G3361 G1909 G5209
Prep pp Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl Cond Conj Part Neg Prep pp 2 Acc Pl
ON him THE PEACE OF-YOU(p) IF YET NO-SURELY ON YOU(p)
him it of-ye surely-no ye
anakamyei
anakampsei
G344
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
it-SHALL-BE-UP-BOWING
it-shall-be-coming-back
10:7 en auth de th oikia menete esqiontes kai pinontes 7 And in the same house
en autE de tE oikia menete esthiontes kai pinontes
G1722 G846 G1161 G3588 G3614 G3306 G2068 G2532 G4095
remain, eating and drinking
Prep pp Dat Sg f Conj t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vm Pres Act 2 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m such things as they give: for
IN SAME YET THE HOME BE-YE-REMAINING EATING AND DRINKING the labourer is worthy of his
house be-ye-remaining ! hire. Go not from house to
house.
ta par autwn axios gar o ergaths tou misqou autou
ta par autOn axios gar ho ergatEs tou misthou autou
G3588 G3844 G846 G514 G1063 G3588 G2040 G3588 G3408 G846
t_ Acc Pl n Prep pp Gen Pl m a_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m
THE BESIDE them WORTHY for THE ACTer OF-THE HIRE OF-him
the-things worker wages
estin mh metabainete ex oikias eis oikian

estin mE metabainete ex oikias eis oikian
G2076 G3361 G3327 G1537 G3614 G1519 G3614
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep n_ Gen Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg f
IS NO BE-YE-after-STEPPING OUT OF-HOME INTO HOME
be-ye-proceeding ! of-house house
10:8 kai eis hn d an polin eiserchsqe kai decwntai 8 And into whatsoever city ye
kai eis hEn d an polin eiserchEsthe kai dechOntai
G2532 G1519 G3739 G1161 G302 G4172 G1525 G2532 G1209
enter, and they receive you, eat
Conj Prep pr Acc Sg f Conj Part n_ Acc Sg f vs Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Conj vs Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl such things as are set before
AND INTO WHICH YET EVER city YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING AND THEY-MAY-BE-RECEIVING you:
ye-may-be-entering
umas esqiete ta paratiqemena umin

humas esthiete ta paratithemena humin
G5209 G2068 G3588 G3908 G5213
pp 2 Acc Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Pas Acc Pl n pp 2 Dat Pl
YOU(p) BE-EATING THE beING-BESIDE-PLACED to-YOU(p)
ye be-ye-eating ! the-things being-placed-before ye
10:9 kai qerapeuete tous en auth asqeneis kai legete autois 9 And heal the sick that are
kai therapeuete tous en autE astheneis kai legete autois
G2532 G2323 G3588 G1722 G846 G772 G2532 G3004 G846
therein, and say unto them, The
Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m Prep pp Dat Sg f a_ Acc Pl m Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl pp Dat Pl m kingdom of God is come nigh
AND BE-curING THE IN her UN-FIRM AND BE-sayING to-them unto you.
be-ye-curing ! the-ones herit infirm be-ye-saying !
hggiken ef umas h basileia tou qeou

Eggiken eph humas hE basileia tou theou
G1448 G1909 G5209 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316
vi Perf Act 3 Sg Prep pp 2 Acc Pl t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
HAS-NEARED ON YOU(p) THE KINGdom OF-THE God
has-drawn-near ye
10:10 eis hn d an polin eiserchsqe kai mh decwntai 10 But into whatsoever city ye
eis hEn d an polin eiserchEsthe kai mE dechOntai
G1519 G3739 G1161 G302 G4172 G1525 G2532 G3361 G1209
enter, and they receive you not,
Prep pr Acc Sg f Conj Part n_ Acc Sg f vs Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Conj Part Neg vs Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl go your ways out into the
INTO WHICH YET EVER city YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING AND NO THEY-MAY-BE-RECEIVING streets of the same, and say,
ye-may-be-entering
umas exelqontes eis tas plateias auths eipate

humas exelthontes eis tas plateias autEs eipate
G5209 G1831 G1519 G3588 G4113 G846 G2036
pp 2 Acc Pl vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Sg f vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
YOU(p) OUT-COMING INTO THE BROADS OF-her say-YE
ye coming-out squares of-herit say-ye !
10:11 kai ton koniorton ton kollhqenta hmin ek ths polews 11 Even the very dust of your
kai ton koniorton ton kollEthenta hEmin ek tEs poleOs
G2532 G3588 G2868 G3588 G2853 G2254 G1537 G3588 G4172
city, which cleaveth on us, we
Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m vp Aor Pas Acc Sg m pp 1 Dat Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f do wipe off against you:
AND THE DUST THE BEING-JOINED to-US OUT OF-THE city notwithstanding be ye sure of
also clinging this, that the kingdom of God
is come nigh unto you.
umwn apomassomeqa umin plhn touto ginwskete oti hggiken ef
humOn apomassometha humin plEn touto ginOskete hoti Eggiken eph
G5216 G631 G5213 G4133 G5124 G1097 G3754 G1448 G1909
pp 2 Gen Pl vi Pres Mid 1 Pl pp 2 Dat Pl Adv pd Acc Sg n vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi Perf Act 3 Sg Prep
OF-YOU(p) WE-ARE-FROM-WIPING to-YOU(p) MOREly this BE-YE-KNOWING that HAS-NEARED ON
of-ye we-are-wiping-off to-ye moreover be-ye-knowing ! has-drawn-near
Luke 10
umas h basileia tou qeou

humas hE basileia tou theou
G5209 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316
pp 2 Acc Pl t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
YOU(p) THE KINGdom OF-THE God
10:12 legw de umin oti sodomois en th hmera ekeinh 12 But I say unto you, that it
legO de humin hoti sodomois en tE hEmera ekeinE
G3004 G1161 G5213 G3754 G4670 G1722 G3588 G2250 G1565
shall be more tolerable in that
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl Conj n_ Dat Pl n Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f day for Sodom, than for that
I-AM-sayING YET to-YOU(p) that to-SODOM IN THE DAY that city.
to-ye
anektoteron estai h th polei ekeinh

anektoteron estai E tE polei ekeinE
G414 G2071 G2228 G3588 G4172 G1565
a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Part t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f
more-tolerable it-SHALL-BE OR to-THE city that
than
10:13 ouai soi cwrazin ouai soi bhqsaida oti ei en turw kai 13 Woe unto thee, Chorazin!
ouai soi chOrazin ouai soi bEthsaida hoti ei en turO kai
G3759 G4671 G5523 G3759 G4671 G966 G3754 G1487 G1722 G5184 G2532
woe unto thee, Bethsaida! for
Inj pp 2 Dat Sg ni proper Inj pp 2 Dat Sg ni proper Conj Cond Prep n_ Dat Sg f Conj if the mighty works had been
WOE to-YOU CHORAZIN WOE to-YOU BETHSAIDA that IF IN TYRE AND done in Tyre and Sidon, which
woe ! woe ! have been done in you, they
had a great while ago repented,
sidwni egenonto ai dunameis ai genomenai en umin palai an sitting in sackcloth and ashes.
sidOni egenonto hai dunameis hai genomenai en humin palai an
G4605 G1096 G3588 G1411 G3588 G1096 G1722 G5213 G3819 G302
n_ Dat Sg f vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f t_ Nom Pl f vp 2Aor midD Nom Pl f Prep pp 2 Dat Pl Adv Part
SIDON BECAME THE ABILITIES THE ones-BECOMING IN YOU(p) OLD EVER
occurred powerful-deeds ones-occurring ye long-ago
en sakkw kai spodw kaqhmenai metenohsan

en sakkO kai spodO kathEmenai metenoEsan
G1722 G4526 G2532 G4700 G2521 G3340
Prep n_ Dat Sg m Conj n_ Dat Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl f vi Aor Act 3 Pl
IN SACKCLOTH-of-hair AND ASHES sittING THEY-after-MIND
sackcloth they-repent
10:14 plhn turw kai sidwni anektoteron estai en th krisei h 14 But it shall be more
plEn turO kai sidOni anektoteron estai en tE krisei E
G4133 G5184 G2532 G4605 G414 G2071 G1722 G3588 G2920 G2228
tolerable for Tyre and Sidon at
Adv n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Part the judgment, than for you.
MOREly to-TYRE AND to-SIDON more-tolerable it-SHALL-BE IN THE JUDGing OR
moreover Sidon than
umin
humin
G5213
pp 2 Dat Pl
to-YOU(p)
to-ye
10:15 kai su kapernaoum h ews tou ouranou uywqeisa ews 15 And thou, Capernaum,
kai su kapernaoum hE heOs tou ouranou upsOtheisa heOs
G2532 G4771 G2584 G3588 G2193 G3588 G3772 G5312 G2193
which art exalted to heaven,
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg ni proper t_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Aor Pas Nom Sg f Conj shalt be thrust down to hell.
AND YOU CAPERNAUM THE TILL OF-THE heaven BEING-HEIGHTenED TILL
the being-exalted
adou katabibasqhsh
hadou katabibasthEsE
G86 G2601
n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 2 Sg
OF-UN-PERCEIVED YOU-SHALL-BE-BEING-DOWN-have-STEPizED
unseen you-shall-be-being-subsided
10:16 o akouwn umwn emou akouei kai o aqetwn 16 He that heareth you heareth
ho akouOn humOn emou akouei kai ho athetOn
G3588 G191 G5216 G1700 G191 G2532 G3588 G114
me; and he that despiseth you
t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl pp 1 Gen Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m despiseth me; and he that
THE one-HEARING OF-YOU(p) OF-ME IS-HEARING AND THE one-UN-PLACING despiseth me despiseth him
one-hearing ye me one-repudiating that sent me.
umas eme aqetei o de eme aqetwn aqetei ton

humas eme athetei ho de eme athetOn athetei ton
G5209 G1691 G114 G3588 G1161 G1691 G114 G114 G3588
pp 2 Acc Pl pp 1 Acc Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m Conj pp 1 Acc Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m
YOU(p) ME IS-UN-PLACING THE-one YET ME UN-PLACING IS-UN-PLACING THE
ye is-repudiating the-one repudiating is-repudiating
aposteilanta me
aposteilanta me
G649 G3165
vp Aor Act Acc Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg
One-commissioning ME
one-commissioning
Luke 10
10:17 upestreyan de oi ebdomhkonta meta caras legontes kurie 17 . And the seventy returned
hupestrepsan de hoi hebdomEkonta meta charas legontes kurie
G5290 G1161 G3588 G1440 G3326 G5479 G3004 G2962
again with joy, saying, Lord,
vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Prep n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Voc Sg m even the devils are subject unto
reTURN YET THE SEVENTY WITH JOY sayING Master ! us through thy name.
Lord !
kai ta daimonia upotassetai hmin en tw onomati sou

kai ta daimonia hupotassetai hEmin en tO onomati sou
G2532 G3588 G1140 G5293 G2254 G1722 G3588 G3686 G4675
Conj t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n vi Pres Pas 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg
AND THE demons IS-beING-UNDER-SET to-US IN THE NAME OF-YOU
also is-being-subject
10:18 eipen de autois eqewroun ton satanan ws astraphn ek 18 And he said unto them, I
eipen de autois etheOroun ton satanan hOs astrapEn ek
G2036 G1161 G846 G2334 G3588 G4567 G5613 G796 G1537
beheld Satan as lightning fall
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Pl m vi Impf Act 1 Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Adv n_ Acc Sg f Prep from heaven.
He-said YET to-them I-beheld THE SATAN (adversary) AS GLEAM-FLING OUT
Satan lightning
tou ouranou pesonta

tou ouranou pesonta
G3588 G3772 G4098
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg m
OF-THE heaven FALLING
10:19 idou didwmi umin thn exousian tou patein epanw 19 Behold, I give unto you
idou didOmi humin tEn exousian tou patein epanO
G2400 G1325 G5213 G3588 G1849 G3588 G3961 G1883
power to tread on serpents and
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m vn Pres Act Adv scorpions, and over all the
BE-PERCEIVING I-AM-GIVING to-YOU(p) THE authority OF-THE TO-BE-TREADING ON-UP power of the enemy: and
lo ! ye upon nothing shall by any means
hurt you.
ofewn kai skorpiwn kai epi pasan thn dunamin tou ecqrou
opheOn kai skorpiOn kai epi pasan tEn dunamin tou echthrou
G3789 G2532 G4651 G2532 G1909 G3956 G3588 G1411 G3588 G2190
n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m Conj Prep a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m
OF-serpents AND OF-SCATTER-VENOMS AND ON EVERY THE ABILITY OF-THE enemy
serpents scorpions onover entire power
kai ouden umas ou mh adikhsei

kai ouden humas ou mE adikEsei
G2532 G3762 G5209 G3756 G3361 G91
Conj a_ Acc Sg n pp 2 Acc Pl Part Neg Part Neg vi Fut Act 3 Sg
AND NOT-YET-ONE YOU(p) NOT NO SHALL-BE-injurING
nothing ye
10:20 plhn en toutw mh cairete oti ta pneumata umin 20 Notwithstanding in this

plEn en toutO mE chairete hoti ta pneumata humin
G4133 G1722 G5129 G3361 G5463 G3754 G3588 G4151 G5213
rejoice not, that the spirits are
Adv Prep pd Dat Sg n Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n pp 2 Dat Pl subject unto you; but rather
MOREly IN this NO BE-JOYING that THE spirits to-YOU(p) rejoice, because your names
moreover be-ye-rejoicing ! to-ye are written in heaven.
upotassetai cairete de mallon oti ta onomata umwn egrafh

hupotassetai chairete de mallon hoti ta onomata humOn egraphE
G5293 G5463 G1161 G3123 G3754 G3588 G3686 G5216 G1125
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Adv Conj t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n pp 2 Gen Pl vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
IS-beING-UNDER-SET BE-JOYING YET RATHER that THE NAMES OF-YOU(p) WAS-WRITten
is-being-subject be-ye-rejoicing ! of-ye
en tois ouranois
en tois ouranois
G1722 G3588 G3772
Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
IN THE heavens
10:21 en auth th wra hgalliasato tw pneumati o ihsous 21 In that hour Jesus rejoiced
en autE tE hOra Egalliasato tO pneumati ho iEsous
G1722 G846 G3588 G5610 G21 G3588 G4151 G3588 G2424
in spirit, and said, I thank thee,
Prep pp Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m O Father, Lord of heaven and
IN this THE HOUR exults to-THE spirit THE JESUS earth, that thou hast hid these
things from the wise and
prudent, and hast revealed
kai eipen exomologoumai soi pater kurie tou ouranou kai them unto babes: even so,
kai eipen exomologoumai soi pater kurie tou ouranou kai Father; for so it seemed good
G2532 G2036 G1843 G4671 G3962 G2962 G3588 G3772 G2532
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vi Pres Mid 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg n_ Voc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj in thy sight.
AND said I-AM-OUT-avowING to-YOU FATHER ! Master ! OF-THE heaven AND
I-am-acclaiming you Lord !
ths ghs oti apekruyas tauta apo sofwn kai sunetwn kai
tEs gEs hoti apekrupsas tauta apo sophOn kai sunetOn kai
G3588 G1093 G3754 G613 G5023 G575 G4680 G2532 G4908 G2532
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 2 Sg pd Acc Pl n Prep a_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Gen Pl m Conj
OF-THE LAND that YOU-FROM-HIDE these FROM WISE AND intelligent AND
earth you-conceal these-things wise-ones intelligent-ones
Luke 10
apekaluyas auta nhpiois nai o pathr oti outws egeneto

apekalupsas auta nEpiois nai ho patEr hoti houtOs egeneto
G601 G846 G3516 G3483 G3588 G3962 G3754 G3779 G1096
vi Aor Act 2 Sg pp Acc Pl n a_ Dat Pl m Part t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj Adv vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
YOU-FROM-COVER them to-minors YEA THE FATHER that thus it-BECAME
you-reveal seeing-that
eudokia emprosqen sou

eudokia emprosthen sou
G2107 G1715 G4675
n_ Nom Sg f Prep pp 2 Gen Sg
WELL-SEEMing IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-YOU
delight in-front-of you
10:22 panta paredoqh moi upo tou patros mou kai oudeis 22 All things are delivered to
panta paredothE moi hupo tou patros mou kai oudeis
G3956 G3860 G3427 G5259 G3588 G3962 G3450 G2532 G3762
me of my Father: and no man
a_ Nom Pl n vi Aor Pas 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg m knoweth who the Son is, but
ALL WAS-BESIDE-GIVEN to-ME by THE FATHER OF-ME AND NOT-YET-ONE the Father; and who the Father
was-given-up no-one is, but the Son, and [he] to
whom the Son will reveal
ginwskei tis estin o uios ei mh o pathr kai [him].
ginOskei tis estin ho huios ei mE ho patEr kai
G1097 G5101 G2076 G3588 G5207 G1487 G3361 G3588 G3962 G2532
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pi Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Cond Part Neg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj
IS-KNOWING ANY IS THE SON IF NO THE FATHER AND
who ?
tis estin o pathr ei mh o uios kai w

tis estin ho patEr ei mE ho huios kai hO
G5101 G2076 G3588 G3962 G1487 G3361 G3588 G5207 G2532 G3739
pi Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Cond Part Neg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj pr Dat Sg m
ANY IS THE FATHER IF NO THE SON AND to-WHOM
who ?
ean boulhtai o uios apokaluyai

ean boulEtai ho huios apokalupsai
G1437 G1014 G3588 G5207 G601
Cond vs Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vn Aor Act
IF-EVER MAY-BE-intendING THE SON TO-FROM-COVER
to-unveil-him
10:23 kai strafeis pros tous maqhtas kat idian eipen 23 And he turned him unto
kai strapheis pros tous mathEtas kat idian eipen
G2532 G4762 G4314 G3588 G3101 G2596 G2398 G2036
[his] disciples, and said
Conj vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Prep a_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg privately, Blessed [are] the
AND BEING-TURNED TOWARD THE LEARNers according-to OWN He-said eyes which see the things that
disciples ye see:
makarioi oi ofqalmoi oi blepontes a blepete

makarioi hoi ophthalmoi hoi blepontes ha blepete
G3107 G3588 G3788 G3588 G991 G3739 G991
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pr Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 2 Pl
HAPPY THE VIEWers THE lookING WHICH YE-ARE-lookING
happy-are eyes observing which(p) ye-are-observing
10:24 legw gar umin oti polloi profhtai kai basileis hqelhsan 24 For I tell you, that many
legO gar humin hoti polloi prophEtai kai basileis EthelEsan
G3004 G1063 G5213 G3754 G4183 G4396 G2532 G935 G2309
prophets and kings have
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl desired to see those things
I-AM-sayING for to-YOU(p) that MANY BEFORE-AVERers AND KINGS WILL which ye see, and have not
to-ye prophets seen [them]; and to hear those
things which ye hear, and have
idein a umeis blepete kai ouk eidon kai akousai not heard [them].
idein ha humeis blepete kai ouk eidon kai akousai
G1492 G3739 G5210 G991 G2532 G3756 G1492 G2532 G191
vn 2Aor Act pr Acc Pl n pp 2 Nom Pl vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vn Aor Act
TO-BE-PERCEIVING WHICH YOU(p) ARE-lookING AND NOT THEY-PERCEIVED AND TO-HEAR
which(p) ye are-observing
a akouete kai ouk hkousan

ha akouete kai ouk Ekousan
G3739 G191 G2532 G3756 G191
pr Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Pl
WHICH YE-ARE-HEARING AND NOT THEY-HEAR
which(p)
10:25 kai idou nomikos tis anesth ekpeirazwn auton kai 25 . And, behold, a certain
kai idou nomikos tis anestE ekpeirazOn auton kai
G2532 G2400 G3544 G5100 G450 G1598 G846 G2532
lawyer stood up, and tempted
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Nom Sg m px Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m Conj him, saying, Master, what shall
AND BE-PERCEIVING LAWer ANY UP-STOOD OUT-tryING Him AND I do to inherit eternal life?
lo ! lawyer certain rose putting-on-trial
legwn didaskale ti poihsas zwhn aiwnion

legOn didaskale ti poiEsas zOEn aiOnion
G3004 G1320 G5101 G4160 G2222 G166
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Voc Sg m pi Acc Sg n vp Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f
sayING TEACHer ! ANY DOing LIFE eonian
what ?
Luke 10
klhronomhsw
klEronomEsO
G2816
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
I-SHOULD-BE-tenantING
I-should-be-enjoying-the-allotment-of
10:26 o de eipen pros auton en tw nomw ti 26 He said unto him, What is

ho de eipen pros auton en tO nomO ti
G3588 G1161 G2036 G4314 G846 G1722 G3588 G3551 G5101
written in the law? how readest
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pi Acc Sg n thou?
THE YET He-said TOWARD him IN THE LAW ANY
what ?
gegraptai pws anaginwskeis

gegraptai pOs anaginOskeis
G1125 G4459 G314
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Adv Int vi Pres Act 2 Sg
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN how YOU-ARE-readING
has-been-written how ?
10:27 o de apokriqeis eipen agaphseis kurion ton 27 And he answering said,

ho de apokritheis eipen agapEseis kurion ton
G3588 G1161 G611 G2036 G25 G2962 G3588
Thou shalt love the Lord thy
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vi Fut Act 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m God with all thy heart, and
THE YET answerING said YOU-SHALL-BE-LOVING Master THE with all thy soul, and with all
he-said Lord thy strength, and with all thy
mind; and thy neighbour as
qeon sou ex olhs ths kardias sou kai ex olhs ths thyself.
theon sou ex holEs tEs kardias sou kai ex holEs tEs
G2316 G4675 G1537 G3650 G3588 G2588 G4675 G2532 G1537 G3650 G3588
n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg Prep a_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Conj Prep a_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f
God OF-YOU OUT OF-WHOLE THE HEART OF-YOU AND OUT OF-WHOLE THE
yuchs sou kai ex olhs ths iscuos sou kai ex olhs

psuchEs sou kai ex holEs tEs ischuos sou kai ex holEs
G5590 G4675 G2532 G1537 G3650 G3588 G2479 G4675 G2532 G1537 G3650
n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Conj Prep a_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Conj Prep a_ Gen Sg f
soul OF-YOU AND OUT OF-WHOLE THE STRENGTH OF-YOU AND OUT OF-WHOLE
ths dianoias sou kai ton plhsion sou ws seauton

tEs dianoias sou kai ton plEsion sou hOs seauton
G3588 G1271 G4675 G2532 G3588 G4139 G4675 G5613 G4572
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg Conj t_ Acc Sg m Adv pp 2 Gen Sg Adv pf 2 Acc Sg m
THE THRU-MIND OF-YOU AND THE NIGH-one OF-YOU AS YOURself
comprehension associate
10:28 eipen de autw orqws apekriqhs touto poiei kai 28 And he said unto him, Thou
eipen de autO orthOs apekrithEs touto poiei kai
G2036 G1161 G846 G3723 G611 G5124 G4160 G2532
hast answered right: this do,
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Sg m Adv vi Aor midD 2 Sg pd Acc Sg n vm Pres Act 2 Sg Conj and thou shalt live.
He-said YET to-him ERECTly YOU-answerED this BE-DOING AND
correctly be-you-doing !
zhsh
zEsE
G2198
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-LIVING
10:29 o de qelwn dikaioun eauton eipen pros ton 29 But he, willing to justify
ho de thelOn dikaioun heauton eipen pros ton
G3588 G1161 G2309 G1344 G1438 G2036 G4314 G3588
himself, said unto Jesus, And
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vn Pres Act pf 3 Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m who is my neighbour?
THE YET WILLING TO-BE-JUSTIFYING self he-said TOWARD THE
himself
ihsoun kai tis estin mou plhsion

iEsoun kai tis estin mou plEsion
G2424 G2532 G5101 G2076 G3450 G4139
n_ Acc Sg m Conj pi Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pp 1 Gen Sg Adv
JESUS AND ANY IS OF-ME NIGH-one
who ? associate
10:30 upolabwn de o ihsous eipen anqrwpos tis 30 And Jesus answering said,
hupolabOn de ho iEsous eipen anthrOpos tis
G5274 G1161 G3588 G2424 G2036 G444 G5100
A certain [man] went down
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m px Nom Sg m from Jerusalem to Jericho, and
UNDER-GETTING YET THE JESUS said human ANY fell among thieves, which
taking-up-him certain stripped him of his raiment,
and wounded [him], and
katebainen apo ierousalhm eis iericw kai lhstais periepesen oi kai departed, leaving [him] half
katebainen apo ierousalEm eis ierichO kai lEstais periepesen hoi kai dead.
G2597 G575 G2419 G1519 G2410 G2532 G3027 G4045 G3739 G2532
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Prep ni proper Prep ni proper Conj n_ Dat Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pr Nom Pl m Conj
DOWN-STEPPED FROM JERUSALEM INTO JERICHO AND to-ROBBERS ABOUT-FALLS WHO AND
descended he-falls-among
Luke 10
ekdusantes auton kai plhgas epiqentes aphlqon afentes hmiqanh

ekdusantes auton kai plEgas epithentes apElthon aphentes hEmithanE
G1562 G846 G2532 G4127 G2007 G565 G863 G2253
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Pl f vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m a_ Acc Sg m
OUT-SLIPPing him AND BLOWS ON-PLACING FROM-CAME FROM-LETTING HALF-DEAD
stripping placing-on-him came-away leaving-him
tugcanonta
tugchanonta
G5177
vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
HAPPENING-UP
it-is-happening
10:31 kata sugkurian de iereus tis katebainen en th 31 And by chance there came
kata sugkurian de hiereus tis katebainen en tE
G2596 G4795 G1161 G2409 G5100 G2597 G1722 G3588
down a certain priest that way:
Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg m px Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f and when he saw him, he
according-to TOGETHER-SANCTION YET SACRED-one ANY DOWN-STEPPED IN THE passed by on the other side.
acby coincidence priest certain descended
odw ekeinh kai idwn auton antiparhlqen

hodO ekeinE kai idOn auton antiparElthen
G3598 G1565 G2532 G1492 G846 G492
n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
WAY that AND PERCEIVING him INSTEAD-BESIDE-CAME
road passed-by-on-the-other-side
10:32 omoiws de kai leuiths genomenos kata ton topon 32 And likewise a Levite,
homoiOs de kai leuitEs genomenos kata ton topon
G3668 G1161 G2532 G3019 G1096 G2596 G3588 G5117
when he was at the place, came
Adv Conj Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m and looked [on him], and
LIKE-AS YET AND LEVITE BECOMING according-to THE PLACE passed by on the other side.
likewise also coming-to-be acto
elqwn kai idwn antiparhlqen

elthOn kai idOn antiparElthen
G2064 G2532 G1492 G492
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
COMING AND PERCEIVING INSTEAD-BESIDE-CAME
perceiving-him passed-by-on-the-other-side
10:33 samareiths de tis odeuwn hlqen kat auton kai 33 But a certain Samaritan, as
samareitEs de tis hodeuOn Elthen kat auton kai
G4541 G1161 G5100 G3593 G2064 G2596 G846 G2532
he journeyed, came where he
n_ Nom Sg m Conj px Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg m Conj was: and when he saw him, he
SAMARItan YET ANY WAYING CAME according-to him AND had compassion [on him],
certain being-on-his-way downby
idwn auton esplagcnisqh

idOn auton esplagchnisthE
G1492 G846 G4697
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
PERCEIVING him he-IS-compassionatED
he-is-moved-with-compassion
10:34 kai proselqwn katedhsen ta traumata autou epicewn 34 And went to [him], and
kai proselthOn katedEsen ta traumata autou epicheOn
G2532 G4334 G2611 G3588 G5134 G846 G2022
bound up his wounds, pouring
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m in oil and wine, and set him on
AND TOWARD-COMING he-DOWN-BINDS THE WOUNDS OF-him ON-POURING his own beast, and brought him
coming-to-him he-bandages pouring-on to an inn, and took care of him.
elaion kai oinon epibibasas de auton epi to idion kthnos

elaion kai oinon epibibasas de auton epi to idion ktEnos
G1637 G2532 G3631 G1913 G1161 G846 G1909 G3588 G2398 G2934
n_ Acc Sg n Conj n_ Acc Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
OLIVE-oil AND WINE ON-STEPizing YET him ON THE OWN ACQUISITION
oil mounting beast
hgagen auton eis pandoceion kai epemelhqh autou

Egagen auton eis pandocheion kai epemelEthE autou
G71 G846 G1519 G3829 G2532 G1959 G846
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m
he-LED him INTO EVERY-RECEIVing AND WAS-ON-CARED OF-him
khan had-cared-for him
10:35 kai epi thn aurion exelqwn ekbalwn duo dhnaria edwken 35 And on the morrow when
kai epi tEn aurion exelthOn ekbalOn duo dEnaria edOken
G2532 G1909 G3588 G839 G1831 G1544 G1417 G1220 G1325
he departed, he took out two
Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg f Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Sg pence, and gave [them] to the
AND ON THE MORROW OUT-COMING OUT-CASTING TWO DENARII he-GIVES host, and said unto him, Take
coming-out extracting care of him; and whatsoever
thou spendest more, when I
tw pandocei kai eipen autw epimelhqhti autou kai o come again, I will repay thee.
tO pandochei kai eipen autO epimelEthEti autou kai ho
G3588 G3830 G2532 G2036 G846 G1959 G846 G2532 G3739
t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vm Aor Pas 2 Sg pp Gen Sg m Conj pr Acc Sg n
to-THE EVERY-RECEIVER AND said to-him BE-BEING-ON-CARED OF-him AND WHICH
khan-keeper be-you-caring-for ! him
Luke 10
ti an prosdapanhshs egw en tw epanercesqai

ti an prosdapanEsEs egO en tO epanerchesthai
G5100 G302 G4325 G1473 G1722 G3588 G1880
px Acc Sg n Part vs Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Nom Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres midD/pasD
ANY EVER YOU-SHOULD-BE-TOWARD-SPENDING I IN THE TO-BE-ON-UP-COMING
what you-should-be-expending to-be-coming-back
me apodwsw soi
me apodOsO soi
G3165 G591 G4671
pp 1 Acc Sg vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg
ME SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-YOU
shall-be-paying you
10:36 tis oun toutwn twn triwn dokei soi plhsion 36 Which now of these three,
tis oun toutOn tOn triOn dokei soi plEsion
G5101 G3767 G5130 G3588 G5140 G1380 G4671 G4139
thinkest thou, was neighbour
pi Nom Sg m Conj pd Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Adv unto him that fell among the
ANY THEN OF-these OF-THE THREE IS-SEEMING to-YOU NIGH-one thieves?
which ? the associate
gegonenai tou empesontos eis tous lhstas

gegonenai tou empesontos eis tous lEstas
G1096 G3588 G1706 G1519 G3588 G3027
vn 2Perf Act t_ Gen Sg m vp 2Aor Act Gen Sg m Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
TO-HAVE-BECOME OF-THE one-IN-FALLING INTO THE ROBBERS
one-falling-in
10:37 o de eipen o poihsas to eleos met autou 37 And he said, He that

ho de eipen ho poiEsas to eleos met autou
G3588 G1161 G2036 G3588 G4160 G3588 G1656 G3326 G846
shewed mercy on him. Then
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Prep pp Gen Sg m said Jesus unto him, Go, and
THE YET said THE one-DOing THE MERCY WITH him do thou likewise.
he-said one-doing merciful-thing
eipen oun autw o ihsous poreuou kai su poiei

eipen oun autO ho iEsous poreuou kai su poiei
G2036 G3767 G846 G3588 G2424 G4198 G2532 G4771 G4160
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Conj pp 2 Nom Sg vm Pres Act 2 Sg
said THEN to-him THE JESUS BE-GOING AND YOU BE-DOING
be-you-going ! be-you-doing !
omoiws
homoiOs
G3668
Adv
LIKE-AS
likewise
10:38 egeneto de en tw poreuesqai autous kai autos eishlqen 38 . Now it came to pass, as
egeneto de en tO poreuesthai autous kai autos eisElthen
G1096 G1161 G1722 G3588 G4198 G846 G2532 G846 G1525
they went, that he entered into
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres midD/pasD pp Acc Pl m Conj pp Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg a certain village: and a certain
BECAME YET IN THE TO-BE-GOING them AND He INTO-CAME woman named Martha
it-came-to-pass entered received him into her house.
eis kwmhn tina gunh de tis onomati marqa upedexato auton

eis kOmEn tina gunE de tis onomati martha hupedexato auton
G1519 G2968 G5100 G1135 G1161 G5100 G3686 G3136 G5264 G846
Prep n_ Acc Sg f px Acc Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj px Nom Sg f n_ Dat Sg n n_ Nom Sg f vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
INTO VILLAGE ANY WOMAN YET ANY to-NAME MARTHA UNDER-RECEIVES Him
certain certain entertains
eis ton oikon auths

eis ton oikon autEs
G1519 G3588 G3624 G846
Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg f
INTO THE HOME OF-her
house
10:39 kai thde hn adelfh kaloumenh maria h kai 39 And she had a sister called
kai tEde En adelphE kaloumenE maria hE kai
G2532 G3592 G2258 G79 G2564 G3137 G3739 G2532
Mary, which also sat at
Conj pd Dat Sg f vi Impf vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Pas Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pr Nom Sg f Conj Jesus'feet, and heard his word.
AND to-THE-YET WAS sister beING-CALLED MARY WHO AND
also yet-to-this-one also
parakaqisasa para tous podas tou ihsou hkouen ton logon

parakathisasa para tous podas tou iEsou Ekouen ton logon
G3869 G3844 G3588 G4228 G3588 G2424 G191 G3588 G3056
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
BESIDE-being-seated at BESIDE THE FEET OF-THE JESUS HEARD THE saying
being seated-at word
autou
autou
G846
pp Gen Sg m
OF-Him
Luke 10 - Luke 11
10:40 h de marqa periespato peri pollhn diakonian epistasa 40 But Martha was cumbered
hE de martha periespato peri pollEn diakonian epistasa
G3588 G1161 G3136 G4049 G4012 G4183 G1248 G2186
about much serving, and came
t_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f vi Impf Pas 3 Sg Prep a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f to him, and said, Lord, dost
THE YET MARTHA was-ABOUT-PULLED ABOUT MANY THRU-SERVice ON-STANDing thou not care that my sister
was-distracted much serving standing-by hath left me to serve alone? bid
her therefore that she help me.
de eipen kurie ou melei soi oti h adelfh mou
de eipen kurie ou melei soi hoti hE adelphE mou
G1161 G2036 G2962 G3756 G3199 G4671 G3754 G3588 G79 G3450
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Voc Sg m Part Neg vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg
YET said Master ! NOT IS-CARING to-YOU that THE sister OF-ME
she-said Lord ! it-is-caring
monhn me katelipen diakonein eipe oun auth ina moi

monEn me katelipen diakonein eipe oun autE hina moi
G3441 G3165 G2641 G1247 G2036 G3767 G846 G2443 G3427
a_ Acc Sg f pp 1 Acc Sg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vn Pres Act vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Conj pp Dat Sg f Conj pp 1 Dat Sg
ONLY ME left TO-BE-THRU-SERVING BE-sayING THEN to-her THAT to-ME
alone to-be-serving be-you-saying ! me
sunantilabhtai
sunantilabEtai
G4878
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
MAY-BE-TOGETHER-supportING
she-may-be-aiding
10:41 apokriqeis de eipen auth o ihsous marqa marqa 41 And Jesus answered and
apokritheis de eipen autE ho iEsous martha martha
G611 G1161 G2036 G846 G3588 G2424 G3136 G3136
said unto her, Martha, Martha,
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Voc Sg f n_ Voc Sg f thou art careful and troubled
answerING YET said to-her THE JESUS MARTHA MARTHA about many things:
Martha ! Martha !
merimnas kai turbazh peri polla

merimnas kai turbazE peri polla
G3309 G2532 G5182 G4012 G4183
vi Pres Act 2 Sg Conj vi Pres Pas 2 Sg Prep a_ Acc Pl n
YOU-ARE-beING-anxious AND YOU-ARE-beING-TURBIDED ABOUT MANY
you-are-worrying you-are-being-turbid many-things
10:42 enos de estin creia maria de thn agaqhn merida 42 But one thing is needful:
henos de estin chreia maria de tEn agathEn merida
G1520 G1161 G2076 G5532 G3137 G1161 G3588 G18 G3310
and Mary hath chosen that
a_ Gen Sg n Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f good part, which shall not be
OF-ONE YET IS need MARY YET THE GOOD PART taken away from her.
of-one-thing
exelexato htis ouk afaireqhsetai ap auths

exelexato hEtis ouk aphairethEsetai ap autEs
G1586 G3748 G3756 G851 G575 G846
vi Aor Mid 3 Sg pr Nom Sg f Part Neg vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg f
choosES WHICH-ANY NOT SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LIFTED FROM OF-her
which-any shall-be-wrested-from her
Luke 11
11:1 kai egeneto en tw einai auton en topw tini 1 . And it came to pass, that, as
kai egeneto en tO einai auton en topO tini
G2532 G1096 G1722 G3588 G1511 G846 G1722 G5117 G5100
he was praying in a certain
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres vxx pp Acc Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg m px Dat Sg m place, when he ceased, one of
AND BECAME IN THE TO-BE Him IN PLACE ANY his disciples said unto him,
it-occurred certain Lord, teach us to pray, as John
also taught his disciples.
proseucomenon ws epausato eipen tis twn maqhtwn autou
proseuchomenon hOs epausato eipen tis tOn mathEtOn autou
G4336 G5613 G3973 G2036 G5100 G3588 G3101 G846
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m Adv vi Aor Mid 3 Sg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg px Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m
prayING AS He-CEASES said ANY OF-THE LEARNers OF-Him
certain-one disciples
pros auton kurie didaxon hmas proseucesqai kaqws kai iwannhs

pros auton kurie didaxon hEmas proseuchesthai kathOs kai iOannEs
G4314 G846 G2962 G1321 G2248 G4336 G2531 G2532 G2491
Prep pp Acc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl vn Pres midD/pasD Adv Conj n_ Nom Sg m
TOWARD Him Master ! TEACH US TO-BE-prayING according-AS AND JOHN
Lord ! teach-you ! also
edidaxen tous maqhtas autou

edidaxen tous mathEtas autou
G1321 G3588 G3101 G846
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m
TEACHES THE LEARNers OF-him
disciples
11:2 eipen de autois otan proseuchsqe legete pater hmwn 2 And he said unto them,
eipen de autois hotan proseuchEsthe legete pater hEmOn
G2036 G1161 G846 G3752 G4336 G3004 G3962 G2257
When ye pray, say, Our Father
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Pl m Conj vs Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Voc Sg m pp 1 Gen Pl which art in heaven, Hallowed
He-said YET to-them when-EVER YE-MAY-BE-prayING BE-sayING FATHER ! OF-US be thy name. Thy kingdom
whenever be-ye-saying ! come. Thy will be done, as in
heaven, so in earth.
o en tois ouranois agiasqhtw to onoma sou
ho en tois ouranois hagiasthEtO to onoma sou
G3588 G1722 G3588 G3772 G37 G3588 G3686 G4675
t_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vm Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg
THE IN THE heavens LET-BE-BEING-HOLYizED THE NAME OF-YOU
let-it-be-being-hallowed !
elqetw h basileia sou genhqhtw to qelhma sou

elthetO hE basileia sou genEthEtO to thelEma sou
G2064 G3588 G932 G4675 G1096 G3588 G2307 G4675
vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg vm Aor pasD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg
LET-BE-COMING THE KINGdom OF-YOU LET-BE-BEING-BECOME THE WILL OF-YOU
let-her-be-coming ! let-it-be-being-become !
ws en ouranw kai epi ths ghs

hOs en ouranO kai epi tEs gEs
G5613 G1722 G3772 G2532 G1909 G3588 G1093
Adv Prep n_ Dat Sg m Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
AS IN heaven AND ON THE LAND
also earth
11:3 ton arton hmwn ton epiousion didou hmin to kaq 3 Give us day by day our daily
ton arton hEmOn ton epiousion didou hEmin to kath
G3588 G740 G2257 G3588 G1967 G1325 G2254 G3588 G2596
bread.
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Pl t_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl t_ Acc Sg n Prep
THE BREAD OF-US THE ON-BEINGed BE-GIVING to-US THE according-to
dole be-you-giving ! us
hmeran
hEmeran
G2250
n_ Acc Sg f
DAY
11:4 kai afes hmin tas amartias hmwn kai gar autoi 4 And forgive us our sins; for
kai aphes hEmin tas hamartias hEmOn kai gar autoi
G2532 G863 G2254 G3588 G266 G2257 G2532 G1063 G846
we also forgive every one that
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f pp 1 Gen Pl Conj Conj pp Nom Pl m is indebted to us. And lead us
AND FROM-LET to-US THE misses OF-US AND for SAME not into temptation; but deliver
pardon-you ! us sins also ourselves us from evil.
afiemen panti ofeilonti hmin kai mh eisenegkhs

aphiemen panti opheilonti hEmin kai mE eisenegkEs
G863 G3956 G3784 G2254 G2532 G3361 G1533
vi Pres Act 1 Pl a_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m pp 1 Dat Pl Conj Part Neg vs Aor Act 2 Sg
WE-ARE-FROM-LETTING to-EVERY one-OWING to-US AND NO YOU-MAY-BE-INTO-CARRYING
we-are-pardoning every one-owing us you-may-be-bringing-into
hmas eis peirasmon alla rusai hmas apo tou ponhrou

hEmas eis peirasmon alla rusai hEmas apo tou ponErou
G2248 G1519 G3986 G235 G4506 G2248 G575 G3588 G4190
pp 1 Acc Pl Prep n_ Acc Sg m Conj vm Aor midD 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m
US INTO trial but rescue-YOU US FROM THE wicked-one
rescue-you ! wicked-one
Luke 11
11:5 kai eipen pros autous tis ex umwn exei filon 5 And he said unto them,
kai eipen pros autous tis ex humOn exei philon
G2532 G2036 G4314 G846 G5101 G1537 G5216 G2192 G5384
Which of you shall have a
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m pi Nom Sg m Prep pp 2 Gen Pl vi Fut Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg m friend, and shall go unto him at
AND He-said TOWARD them ANY OUT OF-YOU(p) SHALL-BE-HAVING FOND-one midnight, and say unto him,
who ? of-ye friend Friend, lend me three loaves;
kai poreusetai pros auton mesonuktiou kai eiph autw file

kai poreusetai pros auton mesonuktiou kai eipE autO phile
G2532 G4198 G4314 G846 G3317 G2532 G2036 G846 G5384
Conj vi Fut midD 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg n Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m
AND SHALL-BE-GOING TOWARD him OF-MID-NIGHT AND MAY-BE-sayING to-him FOND-one !
of-midnight friend !
crhson moi treis artous

chrEson moi treis artous
G5531 G3427 G5140 G740
vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
USE to-ME THREE BREADS
let-use-you ! me cakes-of-bread
11:6 epeidh filos mou paregeneto ex odou pros me kai ouk 6 For a friend of mine in his
epeidE philos mou paregeneto ex hodou pros me kai ouk
G1894 G5384 G3450 G3854 G1537 G3598 G4314 G3165 G2532 G3756
journey is come to me, and I
Conj a_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep n_ Gen Sg f Prep pp 1 Acc Sg Conj Part Neg have nothing to set before him?
ON-IF-BIND FOND-One OF-ME BESIDE-BECAME OUT OF-WAY TOWARD ME AND NOT
since-in-fact friend came-along of-road nothing
ecw o paraqhsw autw

echO ho parathEsO autO
G2192 G3739 G3908 G846
vi Pres Act 1 Sg pr Acc Sg n vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp Dat Sg m
I-AM-HAVING WHICH I-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-PLACING to-him
I-shall-be-placing-before him
11:7 kakeinos eswqen apokriqeis eiph mh moi kopous 7 And he from within shall
kakeinos esOthen apokritheis eipE mE moi kopous
G2548 G2081 G611 G2036 G3361 G3427 G2873
answer and say, Trouble me
pd Nom Sg m Con Adv vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Part Neg pp 1 Dat Sg n_ Acc Pl m not: the door is now shut, and
AND-that-one INTO-PLACE answerING MAY-BE-sayING NO to-ME toils my children are with me in
and-that-one inside me weariness(p) bed; I cannot rise and give
thee.
parece hdh h qura kekleistai kai ta paidia mou
pareche EdE hE thura kekleistai kai ta paidia mou
G3930 G2235 G3588 G2374 G2808 G2532 G3588 G3813 G3450
vm Pres Act 2 Sg Adv t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n pp 1 Gen Sg
BE-tenderING ALREADY THE DOOR HAS-been-LOCKED AND THE little-boys-and-girls OF-ME
be-you-affording !
met emou eis thn koithn eisin ou dunamai anastas

met emou eis tEn koitEn eisin ou dunamai anastas
G3326 G1700 G1519 G3588 G2845 G1526 G3756 G1410 G450
Prep pp 1 Gen Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Pl Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
WITH ME INTO THE LIE-ing ARE NOT I-AM-ABLING UP-STANDing
bed I-can rising
dounai soi
dounai soi
G1325 G4671
vn 2Aor Act pp 2 Dat Sg
TO-GIVE to-YOU
11:8 legw umin ei kai ou dwsei autw anastas dia 8 I say unto you, Though he
legO humin ei kai ou dOsei autO anastas dia
G3004 G5213 G1487 G2532 G3756 G1325 G846 G450 G1223
will not rise and give him,
vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Cond Conj Part Neg vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep because he is his friend, yet
I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) IF AND NOT SHALL-BE-GIVING to-him UP-STANDing THRU because of his importunity he
to-ye even he-shall-be-giving rising because-of will rise and give him as many
as he needeth.
to einai autou filon dia ge thn anaideian autou
to einai autou philon dia ge tEn anaideian autou
G3588 G1511 G846 G5384 G1223 G1065 G3588 G335 G846
t_ Acc Sg n vn Pres vxx pp Gen Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Prep Part t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m
THE TO-BE OF-him FOND-one THRU SURELY THE UN-MODESTY OF-him
friend because-of pestering
egerqeis dwsei autw oswn crhzei

egertheis dOsei autO hosOn chrEzei
G1453 G1325 G846 G3745 G5535
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m pk Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
BEING-ROUSED SHALL-BE-GIVING to-him OF-as-much-as he-IS-needING
he-shall-be-giving him whatever
11:9 kagw umin legw aiteite kai doqhsetai umin 9 And I say unto you, Ask, and
kagO humin legO aiteite kai dothEsetai humin
G2504 G5213 G3004 G154 G2532 G1325 G5213
it shall be given you; seek, and
pp 1 Nom Sg Con pp 2 Dat Pl vi Pres Act 1 Sg vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl ye shall find; knock, and it
AND-I to-YOU(p) AM-sayING BE-REQUESTING AND it-SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-YOU(p) shall be opened unto you.
to-ye be-ye-requesting ! to-ye
Luke 11
zhteite kai eurhsete krouete kai anoighsetai umin

zEteite kai heurEsete krouete kai anoigEsetai humin
G2212 G2532 G2147 G2925 G2532 G455 G5213
vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi Fut Act 2 Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
BE-SEEKING AND YE-SHALL-BE-FINDING BE-KNOCKING AND it-SHALL-BE-BEING-UP-OPENED to-YOU(p)
be-ye-seeking ! be-ye-knocking ! it-shall-be-being opened to-ye
11:10 pas gar o aitwn lambanei kai o zhtwn 10 For every one that asketh
pas gar ho aitOn lambanei kai ho zEtOn
G3956 G1063 G3588 G154 G2983 G2532 G3588 G2212
receiveth; and he that seeketh
a_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m findeth; and to him that
EVERY for THE one-REQUESTING IS-GETTING-UP AND THE one-SEEKING knocketh it shall be opened.
one-requesting is-obtaining one-seeking
euriskei kai tw krouonti anoighsetai

heuriskei kai tO krouonti anoigEsetai
G2147 G2532 G3588 G2925 G455
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg
IS-FINDING AND to-THE one-KNOCKING it-SHALL-BE-BEING-UP-OPENED
one-knocking it-shall-be-being-opened
11:11 tina de umwn ton patera aithsei o uios 11 If a son shall ask bread of
tina de humOn ton patera aitEsei ho huios
G5101 G1161 G5216 G3588 G3962 G154 G3588 G5207
any of you that is a father, will
pi Acc Sg m Conj pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m he give him a stone? or if [he
ANY YET OF-YOU(p) THE FATHER SHALL-BE-REQUESTING THE SON ask] a fish, will he for a fish
any ? of-ye give him a serpent?
arton mh liqon epidwsei autw ei kai icqun mh anti

arton mE lithon epidOsei autO ei kai ichthun mE anti
G740 G3361 G3037 G1929 G846 G1487 G2532 G2486 G3361 G473
n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg n_ Acc Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m Cond Conj n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg Prep
BREAD NO STONE he-SHALL-BE-ON-GIVING to-him IF AND FISH NO INSTEAD
he-shall-be-handing him also
icquos ofin epidwsei autw

ichthuos ophin epidOsei autO
G2486 G3789 G1929 G846
n_ Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
OF-FISH serpent SHALL-BE-ON-GIVING to-him
11:12 h kai ean aithsh won mh epidwsei autw 12 Or if he shall ask an egg,
E kai ean aitEsE Oon mE epidOsei autO
G2228 G2532 G1437 G154 G5609 G3361 G1929 G846
will he offer him a scorpion?
Part Conj Cond vs Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n Part Neg vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
OR AND IF-EVER he-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING EGG NO he-SHALL-BE-ON-GIVING to-him
also he-shall-be-handing him
skorpion
skorpion
G4651
n_ Acc Sg m
SCATTER-VENOM
scorpion
11:13 ei oun umeis ponhroi uparcontes oidate agaqa domata 13 If ye then, being evil, know
ei oun humeis ponEroi huparchontes oidate agatha domata
G1487 G3767 G5210 G4190 G5225 G1492 G18 G1390
how to give good gifts unto
Cond Conj pp 2 Nom Pl a_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vi Perf Act 2 Pl a_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n your children: how much more
IF THEN YOU(p) wicked belongING HAVE-PERCEIVED GOOD GIFTS shall [your] heavenly Father
ye being-inherently are-aware give the Holy Spirit to them
that ask him?
didonai tois teknois umwn posw mallon o pathr o ex
didonai tois teknois humOn posO mallon ho patEr ho ex
G1325 G3588 G5043 G5216 G4214 G3123 G3588 G3962 G3588 G1537
vn Pres Act t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n pp 2 Gen Pl pq Dat Sg n Adv t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m Prep
TO-BE-GIVING to-THE offsprings OF-YOU(p) to-how-much RATHER THE FATHER THE OUT
children of-ye how-much
ouranou dwsei pneuma agion tois aitousin auton

ouranou dOsei pneuma hagion tois aitousin auton
G3772 G1325 G4151 G40 G3588 G154 G846
n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n t_ Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Dat Pl m pp Acc Sg m
OF-heaven SHALL-BE-GIVING spirit HOLY to-THE ones-REQUESTING Him
ones-requesting
11:14 kai hn ekballwn daimonion kai auto hn kwfon 14 . And he was casting out a
kai En ekballOn daimonion kai auto En kOphon
G2532 G2258 G1544 G1140 G2532 G846 G2258 G2974
devil, and it was dumb. And it
Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg n Conj pp Nom Sg n vi Impf vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg n came to pass, when the devil
AND He-WAS OUT-CASTING demon AND it WAS MUTE was gone out, the dumb spake;
casting-out mute-one and the people wondered.
egeneto de tou daimoniou exelqontos elalhsen o kwfos kai

egeneto de tou daimoniou exelthontos elalEsen ho kOphos kai
G1096 G1161 G3588 G1140 G1831 G2980 G3588 G2974 G2532
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vp 2Aor Act Gen Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Conj
BECAME YET OF-THE demon OUT-COMING TALKS THE MUTE AND
it-occurred of-coming-out speaks mute-man
Luke 11
eqaumasan oi ocloi
ethaumasan hoi ochloi
G2296 G3588 G3793
vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
MARVEL THE THRONGS
11:15 tines de ex autwn eipon en beelzeboul arconti twn 15 But some of them said, He
tines de ex autOn eipon en beelzeboul archonti tOn
G5100 G1161 G1537 G846 G2036 G1722 G954 G758 G3588
casteth out devils through
px Nom Pl m Conj Prep pp Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep ni proper n_ Dat Sg m t_ Gen Pl n Beelzebub the chief of the
ANY YET OUT OF-them said IN BEELZEBOUL chief-one OF-THE devils.
some chief
daimoniwn ekballei ta daimonia

daimoniOn ekballei ta daimonia
G1140 G1544 G3588 G1140
n_ Gen Pl n vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
demons He-IS-OUT-CASTING THE demons
he-is-casting-out
11:16 eteroi de peirazontes shmeion par autou ezhtoun ex ouranou 16 And others, tempting [him],
heteroi de peirazontes sEmeion par autou ezEtoun ex ouranou
G2087 G1161 G3985 G4592 G3844 G846 G2212 G1537 G3772
sought of him a sign from
a_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg n Prep pp Gen Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Pl Prep n_ Gen Sg m heaven.
DIFFERENT YET tryING SIGN BESIDE Him SOUGHT OUT OF-heaven
different-ones trying-him
11:17 autos de eidws autwn ta dianohmata eipen autois 17 But he, knowing their
autos de eidOs autOn ta dianoEmata eipen autois
G846 G1161 G1492 G846 G3588 G1270 G2036 G846
thoughts, said unto them,
pp Nom Sg m Conj vp Perf Act Nom Sg m pp Gen Pl m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Every kingdom divided against
He YET HAVING-PERCEIVED OF-them THE THRU-MINDS said to-them itself is brought to desolation;
being-aware cogitations and a house [divided] against a
house falleth.
pasa basileia ef eauthn diamerisqeisa erhmoutai kai oikos epi
pasa basileia eph heautEn diameristheisa erEmoutai kai oikos epi
G3956 G932 G1909 G1438 G1266 G2049 G2532 G3624 G1909
a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep pf 3 Acc Sg f vp Aor Pas Nom Sg f vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg m Prep
EVERY KINGdom ON herself BEING-THRU-PARTED IS-beING-DESOLATED AND HOME ON
heritself being-divided house
oikon piptei
oikon piptei
G3624 G4098
n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
HOME IS-FALLING
house
11:18 ei de kai o satanas ef eauton diemerisqh pws 18 If Satan also be divided

ei de kai ho satanas eph heauton diemeristhE pOs
G1487 G1161 G2532 G3588 G4567 G1909 G1438 G1266 G4459
against himself, how shall his
Cond Conj Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep pf 3 Acc Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Adv Int kingdom stand? because ye say
IF YET AND THE SATAN (Heb. adversary) ON self IS-THRU-PARTED how that I cast out devils through
also Satan himself is-divided how ? Beelzebub.
staqhsetai h basileia autou oti legete en beelzeboul

stathEsetai hE basileia autou hoti legete en beelzeboul
G2476 G3588 G932 G846 G3754 G3004 G1722 G954
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl Prep ni proper
SHALL-BE-BEING-STOOD THE KINGdom OF-him that YE-ARE-sayING IN BEELZEBOUL
shall-be-standing seeing-that
ekballein me ta daimonia
ekballein me ta daimonia
G1544 G3165 G3588 G1140
vn Pres Act pp 1 Acc Sg t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
TO-BE-OUT-CASTING ME THE demons
to-be-casting-out
11:19 ei de egw en beelzeboul ekballw ta daimonia oi 19 And if I by Beelzebub cast

ei de egO en beelzeboul ekballO ta daimonia hoi
G1487 G1161 G1473 G1722 G954 G1544 G3588 G1140 G3588
out devils, by whom do your
Cond Conj pp 1 Nom Sg Prep ni proper vi Pres Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Nom Pl m sons cast [them] out? therefore
IF YET I IN BEELZEBOUL AM-OUT-CASTING THE demons THE shall they be your judges.
am-casting-out
uioi umwn en tini ekballousin dia touto kritai umwn

huioi humOn en tini ekballousin dia touto kritai humOn
G5207 G5216 G1722 G5101 G1544 G1223 G5124 G2923 G5216
n_ Nom Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl Prep pi Dat Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep pd Acc Sg n n_ Nom Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl
SONS OF-YOU(p) IN ANY ARE-OUT-CASTING THRU this JUDGers OF-YOU(p)
of-ye whom ? are-casting-out-them because-of judges
autoi esontai
autoi esontai
G846 G2071
pp Nom Pl m vi Fut vxx 3 Pl
they SHALL-BE
Luke 11
11:20 ei de en daktulw qeou ekballw ta daimonia ara 20 But if I with the finger of
ei de en daktulO theou ekballO ta daimonia ara
G1487 G1161 G1722 G1147 G2316 G1544 G3588 G1140 G686
God cast out devils, no doubt
Cond Conj Prep n_ Dat Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Part the kingdom of God is come
IF YET IN FINGER OF-God AM-OUT-CASTING THE demons CONSEQUENTLY upon you.
am-casting-out
efqasen ef umas h basileia tou qeou

ephthasen eph humas hE basileia tou theou
G5348 G1909 G5209 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316
vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp 2 Acc Pl t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
OUTSTRIPS ON YOU(p) THE KINGdom OF-THE God
outstrips-in-time ye
11:21 otan o iscuros kaqwplismenos fulassh thn 21 When a strong man armed
hotan ho ischuros kathOplismenos phulassE tEn
G3752 G3588 G2478 G2528 G5442 G3588
keepeth his palace, his goods
Conj t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m vs Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f are in peace:
when-EVER THE STRONG-one HAVING-been-DOWN-IMPLEMENTED MAY-BE-GUARDING THE
whenever strong-one having-been-armed
eautou aulhn en eirhnh estin ta uparconta autou

heautou aulEn en eirEnE estin ta huparchonta autou
G1438 G833 G1722 G1515 G2076 G3588 G5224 G846
pf 3 Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg f Prep n_ Dat Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Pl n pp Gen Sg m
OF-self COURT IN PEACE IS THE belongINGS OF-him
of-himself courtyard possessions
11:22 epan de o iscuroteros autou epelqwn 22 But when a stronger than he

epan de ho ischuroteros autou epelthOn
G1875 G1161 G3588 G2478 G846 G1904
shall come upon him, and
Conj Conj t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Cmp pp Gen Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m overcome him, he taketh from
ON-[IF]-EVER YET THE STRONGER OF-him ON-COMING him all his armour wherein he
if-ever stronger-one coming-on trusted, and divideth his spoils.
nikhsh auton thn panoplian autou airei ef h

nikEsE auton tEn panoplian autou airei eph hE
G3528 G846 G3588 G3833 G846 G142 G1909 G3739
vs Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep pr Dat Sg f
SHOULD-BE-CONQUERING him THE EVERY-IMPLEMENT OF-him IS-LIFTING ON WHICH
panoply he-is-taking-away
epepoiqei kai ta skula autou diadidwsin

epepoithei kai ta skula autou diadidOsin
G3982 G2532 G3588 G4661 G846 G1239
vi 2Plup Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
he-HAD-confidence AND THE FLAYS (pelts) OF-him IS-THRU-GIVING
spoils is-distributing
11:23 o mh wn met emou kat emou estin kai 23 He that is not with me is
ho mE On met emou kat emou estin kai
G3588 G3361 G5607 G3326 G1700 G2596 G1700 G2076 G2532
against me: and he that
t_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vp Pres vxx Nom Sg m Prep pp 1 Gen Sg Prep pp 1 Gen Sg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Conj gathereth not with me
THE-one NO BEING WITH ME DOWN OF-ME IS AND scattereth.
the-one against me
o mh sunagwn met emou skorpizei

ho mE sunagOn met emou skorpizei
G3588 G3361 G4863 G3326 G1700 G4650
t_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep pp 1 Gen Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE-one NO TOGETHER-LEADING WITH ME IS-SCATTERING
the-one assembling
11:24 otan to akaqarton pneuma exelqh apo tou anqrwpou 24 When the unclean spirit is
hotan to akatharton pneuma exelthE apo tou anthrOpou
G3752 G3588 G169 G4151 G1831 G575 G3588 G444
gone out of a man, he walketh
Conj t_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m through dry places, seeking
when-EVER THE UN-clean spirit MAY-BE-OUT-COMING FROM THE human rest; and finding none, he saith,
whenever unclean may-be-coming-out I will return unto my house
whence I came out.
diercetai di anudrwn topwn zhtoun anapausin kai mh
dierchetai di anudrOn topOn zEtoun anapausin kai mE
G1330 G1223 G504 G5117 G2212 G372 G2532 G3361
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep a_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg n n_ Acc Sg f Conj Part Neg
it-IS-THRU-COMING THRU UN-WET PLACES SEEKING UP-CEASing AND NO
it-is-passing-through through waterless rest
euriskon legei upostreyw eis ton oikon mou oqen

heuriskon legei hupostrepsO eis ton oikon mou hothen
G2147 G3004 G5290 G1519 G3588 G3624 G3450 G3606
vp Pres Act Nom Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg vi Fut Act 1 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg Adv
FINDING IS-sayING I-SHALL-BE-reTURNING INTO THE HOME OF-ME WHICH-PLACE
it-is-saying whence
exhlqon
exElthon
G1831
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
I-OUT-CAME
I-came-out
Luke 11
11:25 kai elqon euriskei sesarwmenon kai kekosmhmenon 25 And when he cometh, he
kai elthon heuriskei sesarOmenon kai kekosmEmenon
G2532 G2064 G2147 G4563 G2532 G2885
findeth [it] swept and
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m Conj vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m garnished.
AND COMING it-IS-FINDING HAVING-been-SWEPT AND HAVING-been-SYSTEMED
it-is-finding-it having-been-decorated
11:26 tote poreuetai kai paralambanei epta etera pneumata ponhrotera 26 Then goeth he, and taketh
tote poreuetai kai paralambanei hepta hetera pneumata ponErotera
G5119 G4198 G2532 G3880 G2033 G2087 G4151 G4190
[to him] seven other spirits
Adv vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg a_ Nom a_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n Cmp more wicked than himself; and
then it-IS-GOING AND IS-BESIDE-GETTING SEVEN DIFFERENT spirits more-wicked they enter in, and dwell there:
is-taking-along and the last [state] of that man
is worse than the first.
eautou kai eiselqonta katoikei ekei kai ginetai ta escata
heautou kai eiselthonta katoikei ekei kai ginetai ta eschata
G1438 G2532 G1525 G2730 G1563 G2532 G1096 G3588 G2078
pf 3 Gen Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl n vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n
OF-self AND INTO-COMING IS-DOWN-HOMING there AND IS-BECOMING THE LAST
of-itself entering it-is-dwelling last(p)
tou anqrwpou ekeinou ceirona twn prwtwn

tou anthrOpou ekeinou cheirona tOn prOtOn
G3588 G444 G1565 G5501 G3588 G4413
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m a_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Pl n a_ Gen Pl n
OF-THE human that WORSE OF-THE BEFORE-most
first
11:27 egeneto de en tw legein auton tauta eparasa tis 27 . And it came to pass, as he
egeneto de en tO legein auton tauta eparasa tis
G1096 G1161 G1722 G3588 G3004 G846 G5023 G1869 G5100
spake these things, a certain
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres Act pp Acc Sg m pd Acc Pl n vp Aor Act Nom Sg f px Nom Sg f woman of the company lifted
BECAME YET IN THE TO-BE-sayING Him these ON-LIFTing ANY up her voice, and said unto
it-occurred these-things lifting-up certain him, Blessed [is] the womb
that bare thee, and the paps
gunh fwnhn ek tou oclou eipen autw makaria h koilia which thou hast sucked.
gunE phOnEn ek tou ochlou eipen autO makaria hE koilia
G1135 G5456 G1537 G3588 G3793 G2036 G846 G3107 G3588 G2836
n_ Nom Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
WOMAN SOUND OUT OF-THE THRONG said to-Him HAPPY THE CAVITY
her-voice womb
h bastasasa se kai mastoi ous eqhlasas

hE bastasasa se kai mastoi hous ethElasas
G3588 G941 G4571 G2532 G3149 G3739 G2337
t_ Nom Sg f vp Aor Act Nom Sg f pp 2 Acc Sg Conj n_ Nom Pl m pr Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 2 Sg
THE one-BEARing YOU AND BREASTS WHICH YOU-suckle
bearing
11:28 autos de eipen menounge makarioi oi akouontes 28 But he said, Yea rather,
autos de eipen menounge makarioi hoi akouontes
G846 G1161 G2036 G3304 G3107 G3588 G191
blessed [are] they that hear the
pp Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Part a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m word of God, and keep it.
He YET said INDEED-THEN-SURELY HAPPY THE ones-HEARING
to-be-sure happy-are ones-hearing
ton logon tou qeou kai fulassontes auton

ton logon tou theou kai phulassontes auton
G3588 G3056 G3588 G2316 G2532 G5442 G846
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m
THE saying OF-THE God AND GUARDING him
word maintaining him it
11:29 twn de oclwn epaqroizomenwn hrxato legein h genea 29 . And when the people were
tOn de ochlOn epathroizomenOn Erxato legein hE genea
G3588 G1161 G3793 G1865 G756 G3004 G3588 G1074
gathered thick together, he
t_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Pas Gen Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f began to say, This is an evil
OF-THE YET THRONGS beING-ON-CONVENED He-begins TO-BE-sayING THE generation generation: they seek a sign;
being-convened-for and there shall no sign be
given it, but the sign of Jonas
auth ponhra estin shmeion epizhtei kai shmeion ou the prophet.
hautE ponEra estin sEmeion epizEtei kai sEmeion ou
G3778 G4190 G2076 G4592 G1934 G2532 G4592 G3756
pd Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg n Part Neg
this wicked IS SIGN it-IS-ON-SEEKING AND SIGN NOT
it-is-seeking-for
doqhsetai auth ei mh to shmeion iwna tou profhtou

dothEsetai autE ei mE to sEmeion iOna tou prophEtou
G1325 G846 G1487 G3361 G3588 G4592 G2495 G3588 G4396
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f Cond Part Neg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-her IF NO THE SIGN of-JONA THE BEFORE-AVERer
to-herit of-Jonah prophet
11:30 kaqws gar egeneto iwnas shmeion tois nineuitais outws 30 For as Jonas was a sign unto
kathOs gar egeneto iOnas sEmeion tois nineuitais houtOs
G2531 G1063 G1096 G2495 G4592 G3588 G3536 G3779
the Ninevites, so shall also the
Adv Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg n t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Adv Son of man be to this
according-AS for BECAME JONA SIGN to-THE NINEVITES thus generation.
Jonah
Luke 11
estai kai o uios tou anqrwpou th genea tauth

estai kai ho huios tou anthrOpou tE genea tautE
G2071 G2532 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G3588 G1074 G3778
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f
SHALL-BE AND THE SON OF-THE human to-THE generation this
also
11:31 basilissa notou egerqhsetai en th krisei meta twn 31 The queen of the south shall
basilissa notou egerthEsetai en tE krisei meta tOn
G938 G3558 G1453 G1722 G3588 G2920 G3326 G3588
n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Prep t_ Gen Pl m the men of this generation, and
KINGess OF-SOUTH SHALL-BE-BEING-ROUSED IN THE JUDGing WITH THE condemn them: for she came
queen from the utmost parts of the
earth to hear the wisdom of
andrwn ths geneas tauths kai katakrinei autous oti hlqen Solomon; and, behold, a
andrOn tEs geneas tautEs kai katakrinei autous hoti Elthen greater than Solomon [is] here.
G435 G3588 G1074 G3778 G2532 G2632 G846 G3754 G2064
n_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
MEN OF-THE generation this AND SHALL-BE-DOWN-JUDGING them that she-CAME
shall-be-condemning
ek twn peratwn ths ghs akousai thn sofian solomwntos kai

ek tOn peratOn tEs gEs akousai tEn sophian solomOntos kai
G1537 G3588 G4009 G3588 G1093 G191 G3588 G4678 G4672 G2532
Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m Conj
OUT OF-THE ends OF-THE LAND TO-HEAR THE WISDOM OF-SOLOMON AND
earth
idou pleion solomwntos wde

idou pleion solomOntos hOde
G2400 G4119 G4672 G5602
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Nom Sg n Cmp n_ Gen Sg m Adv
BE-PERCEIVING MORE OF-SOLOMON here
lo !
11:32 andres nineui anasthsontai en th krisei meta ths geneas 32 The men of Nineve shall
andres nineui anastEsontai en tE krisei meta tEs geneas
G435 G3535 G450 G1722 G3588 G2920 G3326 G3588 G1074
n_ Nom Pl m ni proper vi Fut Mid 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f this generation, and shall
MEN of-NINEVE SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING IN THE JUDGing WITH THE generation condemn it: for they repented
of-Nineve shall-be-rising at the preaching of Jonas; and,
behold, a greater than Jonas
tauths kai katakrinousin authn oti metenohsan eis to [is] here.
tautEs kai katakrinousin autEn hoti metenoEsan eis to
G3778 G2532 G2632 G846 G3754 G3340 G1519 G3588
pd Gen Sg f Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg n
this AND THEY-SHALL-BE-DOWN-JUDGING her that THEY-after-MIND INTO THE
they-shall-be-condemning herit they-repent
khrugma iwna kai idou pleion iwna wde

kErugma iOna kai idou pleion iOna hOde
G2782 G2495 G2532 G2400 G4119 G2495 G5602
n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Nom Sg n Cmp n_ Gen Sg m Adv
PROCLAMATION of-JONA AND BE-PERCEIVING MORE of-JONA here
heralding of-Jonah lo ! of-Jonah
11:33 oudeis de lucnon ayas eis krupton tiqhsin oude upo 33 No man, when he hath
oudeis de luchnon hapsas eis krupton tithEsin oude hupo
G3762 G1161 G3088 G681 G1519 G2927 G5087 G3761 G5259
lighted a candle, putteth [it] in
a_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg f vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep a_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv Prep a secret place, neither under a
NOT-YET-ONE YET LAMP TOUCHing INTO HIDDen IS-PLACING NOT-YET UNDER bushel, but on a candlestick,
no-one lighting hiding is-placing-it nor-yet that they which come in may
see the light.
ton modion all epi thn lucnian ina oi eisporeuomenoi
ton modion all epi tEn luchnian hina hoi eisporeuomenoi
G3588 G3426 G235 G1909 G3588 G3087 G2443 G3588 G1531
t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
THE MEASURE but ON THE LAMPstand THAT THE ones-INTO-GOING
peck-measure ones-going-in
to feggos blepwsin
to pheggos blepOsin
G3588 G5338 G991
t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vs Pres Act 3 Pl
THE BEAM (of-light) MAY-BE-lookING
light-beam may-be-observing
11:34 o lucnos tou swmatos estin o ofqalmos otan 34 The light of the body is the
ho luchnos tou sOmatos estin ho ophthalmos hotan
G3588 G3088 G3588 G4983 G2076 G3588 G3788 G3752
eye: therefore when thine eye
t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj is single, thy whole body also
THE LAMP OF-THE BODY IS THE VIEWer when-EVER is full of light; but when [thine
eye whenever eye] is evil, thy body also [is]
full of darkness.
oun o ofqalmos sou aplous h kai olon to
oun ho ophthalmos sou haplous E kai holon to
G3767 G3588 G3788 G4675 G573 G5600 G2532 G3650 G3588
Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg m vs Pres vxx 3 Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n
THEN THE VIEWer OF-YOU UN-COMPOUND MAY-BE AND WHOLE THE
eye single also
Luke 11
swma sou fwteinon estin epan de ponhros h kai

sOma sou phOteinon estin epan de ponEros E kai
G4983 G4675 G5460 G2076 G1875 G1161 G4190 G5600 G2532
n_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Conj Conj a_ Nom Sg m vs Pres vxx 3 Sg Conj
BODY OF-YOU LIGHTed IS ON-[IF]-EVER YET wicked MAY-BE AND
luminous if-ever it-may-be also
to swma sou skoteinon

to sOma sou skoteinon
G3588 G4983 G4675 G4652
t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg n
THE BODY OF-YOU DARK
11:35 skopei oun mh to fws to en soi skotos 35 Take heed therefore that the
skopei oun mE to phOs to en soi skotos
G4648 G3767 G3361 G3588 G5457 G3588 G1722 G4671 G4655
light which is in thee be not
vm Pres Act 2 Sg Conj Part Neg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n Prep pp 2 Dat Sg n_ Nom Sg n darkness.
BE-NOTING THEN NO THE LIGHT THE IN YOU DARKness
be-you-noting !
estin
estin
G2076
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS
11:36 ei oun to swma sou olon fwteinon mh econ 36 If thy whole body therefore
ei oun to sOma sou holon phOteinon mE echon
G1487 G3767 G3588 G4983 G4675 G3650 G5460 G3361 G2192
[be] full of light, having no
Cond Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg a_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n Part Neg vp Pres Act Nom Sg n part dark, the whole shall be
IF THEN THE BODY OF-YOU WHOLE LIGHTed NO HAVING full of light, as when the bright
luminous shining of a candle doth give
thee light.
ti meros skoteinon estai fwteinon olon ws otan o
ti meros skoteinon estai phOteinon holon hOs hotan ho
G5100 G3313 G4652 G2071 G5460 G3650 G5613 G3752 G3588
px Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n vi Fut vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n Adv Conj t_ Nom Sg m
ANY PART DARK SHALL-BE LIGHTed WHOLE AS when-EVER THE
luminous whenever
lucnos th astraph fwtizh se

luchnos tE astrapE phOtizE se
G3088 G3588 G796 G5461 G4571
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vs Pres Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg
LAMP to-THE GLEAM-FLING MAY-BE-LIGHTenING YOU
flashing may-be-illuminating
11:37 en de tw lalhsai hrwta auton farisaios tis opws 37 . And as he spake, a certain
en de tO lalEsai ErOta auton pharisaios tis hopOs
G1722 G1161 G3588 G2980 G2065 G846 G5330 G5100 G3704
Pharisee besought him to dine
Prep Conj t_ Dat Sg m vn Aor Act vi Impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m n_ Nom Sg m px Nom Sg m Adv with him: and he went in, and
IN YET THE TO-TALK askED Him PHARISEE ANY WHICH-how sat down to meat.
to-speak certain so-that
aristhsh par autw eiselqwn de anepesen

aristEsE par autO eiselthOn de anepesen
G709 G3844 G846 G1525 G1161 G377
vs Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Dat Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
He-SHOULD-BE-LUNCHING BESIDE to-him INTO-COMING YET He-UP-FALLS
him entering he-leans-back-at-table
11:38 o de farisaios idwn eqaumasen oti ou prwton 38 And when the Pharisee saw
ho de pharisaios idOn ethaumasen hoti ou prOton
G3588 G1161 G5330 G1492 G2296 G3754 G3756 G4412
[it], he marvelled that he had
t_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Part Neg Adv not first washed before dinner.
THE YET PHARISEE PERCEIVING MARVELS that NOT BEFORE-most
perceiving-it first
ebaptisqh pro tou aristou

ebaptisthE pro tou aristou
G907 G4253 G3588 G712
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
He-IS-DIPizED BEFORE THE LUNCH
he-is-baptized luncheon
11:39 eipen de o kurios pros auton nun umeis oi 39 And the Lord said unto him,
eipen de ho kurios pros auton nun humeis hoi
G2036 G1161 G3588 G2962 G4314 G846 G3568 G5210 G3588
Now do ye Pharisees make
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep pp Acc Sg m Adv pp 2 Nom Pl t_ Nom Pl m clean the outside of the cup
said YET THE Master TOWARD him NOW YOU(p) THE and the platter; but your
Lord ye inward part is full of ravening
and wickedness.
farisaioi to exwqen tou pothriou kai tou pinakos kaqarizete
pharisaioi to exOthen tou potEriou kai tou pinakos katharizete
G5330 G3588 G1855 G3588 G4221 G2532 G3588 G4094 G2511
n_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg n Adv t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Pl
PHARISEES THE OUT-PLACE OF-THE DRINK-cup AND OF-THE BOARD ARE-cleansING
outside cup the platter
Luke 11
to de eswqen umwn gemei arpaghs kai ponhrias

to de esOthen humOn gemei harpagEs kai ponErias
G3588 G1161 G2081 G5216 G1073 G724 G2532 G4189
t_ Nom Sg n Conj Adv pp 2 Gen Pl vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f
THE YET INTO-PLACE OF-YOU(p) IS-beING-REPLETE OF-SNATCHing AND OF-wickedness
inside of-ye is-brimming of-rapacity wickedness
11:40 afrones ouc o poihsas to exwqen kai to 40 [Ye] fools, did not he that
aphrones ouch ho poiEsas to exOthen kai to
G878 G3756 G3588 G4160 G3588 G1855 G2532 G3588
made that which is without
a_ Voc Pl m Part Neg t_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n Adv Conj t_ Acc Sg n make that which is within
UN-DISPOSED ! NOT THE One-making THE OUT-PLACE AND THE also?
imprudent-ones ! one-making outside also
eswqen epoihsen
esOthen epoiEsen
G2081 G4160
Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg
INTO-PLACE makES
inside
11:41 plhn ta enonta dote elehmosunhn kai idou panta 41 But rather give alms of such
plEn ta enonta dote eleEmosunEn kai idou panta
G4133 G3588 G1751 G1325 G1654 G2532 G2400 G3956
things as ye have; and, behold,
Adv t_ Acc Pl n vp Pres vxx Acc Pl n vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg f Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Nom Pl n all things are clean unto you.
MOREly THE IN-BEING BE-GIVING alms AND BE-PERCEIVING ALL
however the(p) within be-ye-giving ! lo !
kaqara umin estin

kathara humin estin
G2513 G5213 G2076
a_ Nom Pl n pp 2 Dat Pl vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
clean to-YOU(p) IS
to-ye
11:42 all ouai umin tois farisaiois oti apodekatoute to hduosmon 42 But woe unto you,
all ouai humin tois pharisaiois hoti apodekatoute to hEduosmon
G235 G3759 G5213 G3588 G5330 G3754 G586 G3588 G2238
Pharisees! for ye tithe mint and
Conj Inj pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n rue and all manner of herbs,
but WOE to-YOU(p) THE PHARISEES that YE-ARE-FROM-TENthING THE GRATIFY-ODOR and pass over judgment and
woe ! to-ye ye-are-taking-tithes-from mint the love of God: these ought ye
to have done, and not to leave
kai to phganon kai pan lacanon kai parercesqe thn krisin the other undone.
kai to pEganon kai pan lachanon kai parerchesthe tEn krisin
G2532 G3588 G4076 G2532 G3956 G3001 G2532 G3928 G3588 G2920
Conj t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj a_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
AND THE RUE AND EVERY GREEN AND YE-ARE-BESIDE-COMING THE JUDGing
ye-are-passing-by
kai thn agaphn tou qeou tauta edei poihsai kakeina mh

kai tEn agapEn tou theou tauta edei poiEsai kakeina mE
G2532 G3588 G26 G3588 G2316 G5023 G1163 G4160 G2548 G3361
Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pd Acc Pl n vi Impf im-Act 3 Sg vn Aor Act pd Nom Pl n Con Part Neg
AND THE LOVE OF-THE God these it-WAS-BINDING TO-DO AND-those NO
afienai
aphienai
G863
vn Pres Act
TO-FROM-LET
to-omit
11:43 ouai umin tois farisaiois oti agapate thn prwtokaqedrian 43 Woe unto you, Pharisees!
ouai humin tois pharisaiois hoti agapate tEn prOtokathedrian
G3759 G5213 G3588 G5330 G3754 G25 G3588 G4410
for ye love the uppermost seats
Inj pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f in the synagogues, and
WOE to-YOU(p) THE PHARISEES that YE-ARE-LOVING THE BEFORE-most-DOWN-SETTLE greetings in the markets.
woe ! to-ye front-seat
en tais sunagwgais kai tous aspasmous en tais agorais

en tais sunagOgais kai tous aspasmous en tais agorais
G1722 G3588 G4864 G2532 G3588 G783 G1722 G3588 G58
Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f Conj t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f
IN THE TOGETHER-LEADS AND THE greetings IN THE BUY-places
synagogues salutations markets
11:44 ouai umin grammateis kai farisaioi upokritai oti este ws 44 Woe unto you, scribes and
ouai humin grammateis kai pharisaioi hupokritai hoti este hOs
G3759 G5213 G1122 G2532 G5330 G5273 G3754 G2075 G5613
Inj pp 2 Dat Pl n_ Voc Pl m Conj n_ Voc Pl m n_ Voc Pl m Conj vi Pres vxx 2 Pl Adv are as graves which appear not,
WOE to-YOU(p) WRITers AND PHARISEES hypocrites that YE-ARE AS and the men that walk over
woe ! to-ye scribes ! Pharisees ! hypocrites ! [them] are not aware [of them].
ta mnhmeia ta adhla kai oi anqrwpoi oi

ta mnEmeia ta adEla kai hoi anthrOpoi hoi
G3588 G3419 G3588 G82 G2532 G3588 G444 G3588
t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n t_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
THE memorial-vaults THE UN-EVIDENT AND THE humans THE
tombs obscure
Luke 11
peripatountes epanw ouk oidasin

peripatountes epanO ouk oidasin
G4043 G1883 G3756 G1492
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Adv Part Neg vi Perf Act 3 Pl
ones-ABOUT-TREADING ON-UP NOT THEY-HAVE-PERCEIVED
ones-walking upon-them are-aware-of-it
11:45 apokriqeis de tis twn nomikwn legei autw didaskale 45 Then answered one of the
apokritheis de tis tOn nomikOn legei autO didaskale
G611 G1161 G5100 G3588 G3544 G3004 G846 G1320
lawyers, and said unto him,
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj px Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m Master, thus saying thou
answerING YET ANY OF-THE LAWers IS-sayING to-Him TEACHer ! reproachest us also.
certain-one lawyers
tauta legwn kai hmas ubrizeis

tauta legOn kai hEmas hubrizeis
G5023 G3004 G2532 G2248 G5195
pd Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj pp 1 Acc Pl vi Pres Act 2 Sg
these sayING AND US YOU-ARE-OUTRAGING
these-things also
11:46 o de eipen kai umin tois nomikois ouai oti 46 And he said, Woe unto you
ho de eipen kai humin tois nomikois ouai hoti
G3588 G1161 G2036 G2532 G5213 G3588 G3544 G3759 G3754
also, [ye] lawyers! for ye lade
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m Inj Conj men with burdens grievous to
THE YET He-said AND to-YOU(p) THE LAWers WOE that be borne, and ye yourselves
also to-ye lawyers woe ! touch not the burdens with one
of your fingers.
fortizete tous anqrwpous fortia dusbastakta kai autoi eni
phortizete tous anthrOpous phortia dusbastakta kai autoi heni
G5412 G3588 G444 G5413 G1419 G2532 G846 G1520
vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n Conj pp Nom Pl m a_ Dat Sg m
YE-ARE-CARRYizING THE humans loads ILL-BEARic AND SAME to-ONE
ye-are-loading hard-to-bear yourselves
twn daktulwn umwn ou prosyauete tois fortiois

tOn daktulOn humOn ou prospsauete tois phortiois
G3588 G1147 G5216 G3756 G4379 G3588 G5413
t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl Part Neg vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n
OF-THE FINGERS OF-YOU(p) NOT YE-ARE-TOWARD-STROKING to-THE loads
of-ye ye-are-touching the
11:47 ouai umin oti oikodomeite ta mnhmeia twn profhtwn 47 Woe unto you! for ye build
ouai humin hoti oikodomeite ta mnEmeia tOn prophEtOn
G3759 G5213 G3754 G3618 G3588 G3419 G3588 G4396
the sepulchres of the prophets,
Inj pp 2 Dat Pl Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m and your fathers killed them.
WOE to-YOU(p) that YE-ARE-HOME-BUILDING THE memorial-vaults OF-THE BEFORE-AVERers
woe ! to-ye ye-are-building tombs prophets
oi de pateres umwn apekteinan autous

hoi de pateres humOn apekteinan autous
G3588 G1161 G3962 G5216 G615 G846
t_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Pl m
THE YET FATHERS OF-YOU(p) FROM-KILL them
of-ye kill
11:48 ara martureite kai suneudokeite tois ergois 48 Truly ye bear witness that
ara martureite kai suneudokeite tois ergois
G686 G3140 G2532 G4909 G3588 G2041
ye allow the deeds of your
Part vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n fathers: for they indeed killed
CONSEQUENTLY YE-ARE-witnessING AND YE-ARE-TOGETHER-WELL-SEEMING to-THE ACTS them, and ye build their
ye-are-being-witnesses are-endorsing the sepulchres.
twn paterwn umwn oti autoi men apekteinan autous umeis de

tOn paterOn humOn hoti autoi men apekteinan autous humeis de
G3588 G3962 G5216 G3754 G846 G3303 G615 G846 G5210 G1161
t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl Conj pp Nom Pl m Part vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Pl m pp 2 Nom Pl Conj
OF-THE FATHERS OF-YOU(p) that they INDEED FROM-KILL them YOU(p) YET
of-ye kill ye
oikodomeite autwn ta mnhmeia

oikodomeite autOn ta mnEmeia
G3618 G846 G3588 G3419
vi Pres Act 2 Pl pp Gen Pl m t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
ARE-HOME-BUILDING OF-them THE memorial-vaults
are-building tombs
11:49 dia touto kai h sofia tou qeou eipen 49 Therefore also said the
dia touto kai hE sophia tou theou eipen
G1223 G5124 G2532 G3588 G4678 G3588 G2316 G2036
wisdom of God, I will send
Prep pd Acc Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg them prophets and apostles,
THRU this AND THE WISDOM OF-THE God said and [some] of them they shall
because-of also slay and persecute:
apostelw eis autous profhtas kai apostolous kai ex autwn

apostelO eis autous prophEtas kai apostolous kai ex autOn
G649 G1519 G846 G4396 G2532 G652 G2532 G1537 G846
vi Fut Act 1 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl m Conj Prep pp Gen Pl m
I-SHALL-BE-commissionING INTO them BEFORE-AVERers AND commissioners AND OUT OF-them
I-shall-be-dispatching prophets apostles
Luke 11 - Luke 12
apoktenousin kai ekdiwxousin

apoktenousin kai ekdiOxousin
G615 G2532 G1559
vi Fut Act 3 Pl Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl
THEY-SHALL-BE-FROM-KILLING AND THEY-SHALL-BE-OUT-CHASING
they-shall-be-killing they-shall-be-banishing
11:50 ina ekzhthqh to aima pantwn twn profhtwn 50 That the blood of all the
hina ekzEtEthE to haima pantOn tOn prophEtOn
G2443 G1567 G3588 G129 G3956 G3588 G4396
prophets, which was shed from
Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m the foundation of the world,
THAT MAY-BE-BEING-OUT-SOUGHT THE BLOOD OF-ALL OF-THE BEFORE-AVERers may be required of this
may-be-being-exacted the prophets generation;
to ekcunomenon apo katabolhs kosmou apo ths geneas tauths

to ekchunomenon apo katabolEs kosmou apo tEs geneas tautEs
G3588 G1632 G575 G2602 G2889 G575 G3588 G1074 G3778
t_ Nom Sg n vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n Prep n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f
THE beING-OUT-POURED FROM DOWN-CASTing OF-SYSTEM FROM THE generation this
being-shed disruption of-world
11:51 apo tou aimatos abel ews tou aimatos zacariou tou 51 From the blood of Abel unto
apo tou haimatos abel heOs tou haimatos zachariou tou
G575 G3588 G129 G6 G2193 G3588 G129 G2197 G3588
the blood of Zacharias, which
Prep t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n ni proper Conj t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m perished between the altar and
FROM THE BLOOD of-ABEL TILL OF-THE BLOOD OF-ZACHARIAS THE the temple: verily I say unto
of-Abel the you, It shall be required of this
generation.
apolomenou metaxu tou qusiasthriou kai tou oikou nai legw
apolomenou metaxu tou thusiastEriou kai tou oikou nai legO
G622 G3342 G3588 G2379 G2532 G3588 G3624 G3483 G3004
vp 2Aor Mid Gen Sg m Adv t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Part vi Pres Act 1 Sg
one-beING-destroyED between THE SACRIFICE-place AND THE HOME YEA I-AM-sayING
one-perishing altar house
umin ekzhthqhsetai apo ths geneas tauths

humin ekzEtEthEsetai apo tEs geneas tautEs
G5213 G1567 G575 G3588 G1074 G3778
pp 2 Dat Pl vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f
to-YOU(p) it-SHALL-BE-BEING-OUT-SOUGHT FROM THE generation this
to-ye it-shall-be-being-exacted
11:52 ouai umin tois nomikois oti hrate thn kleida ths gnwsews 52 Woe unto you, lawyers! for
ouai humin tois nomikois hoti Erate tEn kleida tEs gnOseOs
G3759 G5213 G3588 G3544 G3754 G142 G3588 G2807 G3588 G1108
ye have taken away the key of
Inj pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f knowledge: ye entered not in
WOE to-YOU(p) THE LAWers that YE-LIFT THE LOCKer OF-THE KNOWledge yourselves, and them that were
woe ! to-ye lawyers ye-take-away key entering in ye hindered.
autoi ouk eishlqete kai tous eisercomenous ekwlusate

autoi ouk eisElthete kai tous eiserchomenous ekOlusate
G846 G3756 G1525 G2532 G3588 G1525 G2967
pp Nom Pl m Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Conj t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 2 Pl
SAME NOT YE-INTO-CAME AND THE ones-INTO-COMING YE-FORBID
yourselves ye-entered ones-entering ye-prevent
11:53 legontos de autou tauta pros autous hrxanto oi 53 And as he said these things
legontos de autou tauta pros autous Erxanto hoi
G3004 G1161 G846 G5023 G4314 G846 G756 G3588
unto them, the scribes and the
vp Pres Act Gen Sg m Conj pp Gen Sg m pd Acc Pl n Prep pp Acc Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m Pharisees began to urge [him]
sayING YET OF-Him these TOWARD them begin THE vehemently, and to provoke
these-things him to speak of many things:
grammateis kai oi farisaioi deinws enecein kai apostomatizein

grammateis kai hoi pharisaioi deinOs enechein kai apostomatizein
G1122 G2532 G3588 G5330 G1171 G1758 G2532 G653
n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Adv vn Pres Act Conj vn Pres Act
WRITers AND THE PHARISEES DREADly TO-BE-IN-HAVING AND TO-BE-FROM-MOUTHizING
scribes dreadfully to-be-hemming-in-him to-be-quizzing
auton peri pleionwn

auton peri pleionOn
G846 G4012 G4119
pp Acc Sg m Prep a_ Gen Pl n Cmp
Him ABOUT MORE
more-things
11:54 enedreuontes auton kai zhtountes qhreusai ti ek 54 Laying wait for him, and
enedreuontes auton kai zEtountes thEreusai ti ek
G1748 G846 G2532 G2212 G2340 G5100 G1537
seeking to catch something out
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vn Aor Act px Acc Sg n Prep of his mouth, that they might
ambushING Him AND SEEKING TO-WILD-BEAST (hunt) ANY OUT accuse him.
to-pounce-upon something
tou stomatos autou ina kathgorhswsin autou

tou stomatos autou hina katEgorEsOsin autou
G3588 G4750 G846 G2443 G2723 G846
t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n pp Gen Sg m Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl pp Gen Sg m
OF-THE MOUTH OF-Him THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-accusING OF-Him
him
Luke 12
12:1 en ois episunacqeiswn twn muriadwn tou oclou 1 . In the mean time, when
en hois episunachtheisOn tOn muriadOn tou ochlou
G1722 G3739 G1996 G3588 G3461 G3588 G3793
there were gathered together an
Prep pr Dat Pl m vp Aor Pas Gen Pl f t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m innumerable multitude of
IN WHICH OF-BEING-ON-TOGETHER-LED OF-THE MYRIADS OF-THE THRONG people, insomuch that they
of-being-assembled tens-of-thousands trode one upon another, he
began to say unto his disciples
wste katapatein allhlous hrxato legein pros tous maqhtas first of all, Beware ye of the
hOste katapatein allElous Erxato legein pros tous mathEtas leaven of the Pharisees, which
G5620 G2662 G240 G756 G3004 G4314 G3588 G3101
Conj vn Pres Act pc Acc Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn Pres Act Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m is hypocrisy.
AS-BESIDES TO-BE-DOWN-TREADING one-another He-begins TO-BE-sayING TOWARD THE LEARNers
so-as to-be-trampling disciples
autou prwton prosecete eautois apo ths zumhs twn farisaiwn

autou prOton prosechete heautois apo tEs zumEs tOn pharisaiOn
G846 G4412 G4337 G1438 G575 G3588 G2219 G3588 G5330
pp Gen Sg m Adv vm Pres Act 2 Pl pf 3 Dat Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
OF-Him BEFORE-most BE-YE-heedING to-selves FROM THE FERMENT OF-THE PHARISEES
first be-ye-heeding ! to-yourselves leaven
htis estin upokrisis

hEtis estin hupokrisis
G3748 G2076 G5272
pr Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg f
WHO-ANY IS hypocrisy
which-any
12:2 ouden de sugkekalummenon estin o ouk 2 For there is nothing covered,

ouden de sugkekalummenon estin ho ouk
G3762 G1161 G4780 G2076 G3739 G3756
that shall not be revealed;
a_ Nom Sg n Conj vp Perf Pas Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg pr Nom Sg n Part Neg neither hid, that shall not be
NOT-YET-ONE YET HAVING-been-TOGETHER-COVERED IS WHICH NOT known.
nothing having-been-covered-up
apokalufqhsetai kai krupton o ou gnwsqhsetai

apokaluphthEsetai kai krupton ho ou gnOsthEsetai
G601 G2532 G2927 G3739 G3756 G1097
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg n pr Nom Sg n Part Neg vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-COVERED AND HIDDen WHICH NOT SHALL-BE-BEING-KNOWN
shall-be-being-revealed
12:3 anq wn osa en th skotia eipate en tw fwti 3 Therefore whatsoever ye

anth hOn hosa en tE skotia eipate en tO phOti
G473 G3739 G3745 G1722 G3588 G4653 G2036 G1722 G3588 G5457
have spoken in darkness shall
Prep pr Gen Pl n pk Acc Pl n Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n be heard in the light; and that
INSTEAD OF-WHICH as-much-as IN THE DARKness YE-say IN THE LIGHT which ye have spoken in the
corresponding-to which whatever ear in closets shall be
proclaimed upon the
akousqhsetai kai o pros to ous elalhsate en tois housetops.
akousthEsetai kai ho pros to ous elalEsate en tois
G191 G2532 G3739 G4314 G3588 G3775 G2980 G1722 G3588
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj pr Acc Sg n Prep t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Dat Pl n
SHALL-BE-BEING-HEARD AND WHICH TOWARD THE EAR YE-TALK IN THE
ye-speak
tameiois khrucqhsetai epi twn dwmatwn

tameiois kEruchthEsetai epi tOn dOmatOn
G5009 G2784 G1909 G3588 G1430
n_ Dat Pl n vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
STOREROOMS SHALL-BE-BEING-PROCLAIMED ON THE housetops
shall-be-being-heralded
12:4 legw de umin tois filois mou mh fobhqhte apo 4 And I say unto you my
legO de humin tois philois mou mE phobEthEte apo
G3004 G1161 G5213 G3588 G5384 G3450 G3361 G5399 G575
friends, Be not afraid of them
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg Part Neg vm Aor pasD 2 Pl Prep that kill the body, and after that
I-AM-sayING YET to-YOU(p) THE FOND-ones OF-ME NO YE-BE-BEING-afraid FROM have no more that they can do.
to-ye friends be-ye-being-afraid !
twn apokteinontwn to swma kai meta tauta mh econtwn

tOn apokteinontOn to sOma kai meta tauta mE echontOn
G3588 G615 G3588 G4983 G2532 G3326 G5023 G3361 G2192
t_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Gen Pl m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj Prep pd Acc Pl n Part Neg vp Pres Act Gen Pl m
THE ones-FROM-KILLING THE BODY AND after these NO OF-HAVING
ones-killing having
perissoteron ti poihsai
perissoteron ti poiEsai
G4053 G5100 G4160
a_ Acc Sg n Cmp px Acc Sg n vn Aor Act
more-excessive ANY TO-DO
anything
12:5 upodeixw de umin tina fobhqhte fobhqhte 5 But I will forewarn you
hupodeixO de humin tina phobEthEte phobEthEte
G5263 G1161 G5213 G5101 G5399 G5399
whom ye shall fear: Fear him,
vi Fut Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl pi Acc Sg m vs Aor pasD 2 Pl vm Aor pasD 2 Pl which after he hath killed hath
I-SHALL-BE-UNDER-SHOWING YET to-YOU(p) ANY YE-MAY-BE-BEING-afraid YE-BE-BEING-afraid power to cast into hell; yea, I
I-shall-be-intimating to-ye whom ? ye-may-be-being-afraid-of be-ye-being-afraid-of ! say unto you, Fear him.
Luke 12
ton meta to apokteinai exousian econta embalein eis

ton meta to apokteinai exousian echonta embalein eis
G3588 G3326 G3588 G615 G1849 G2192 G1685 G1519
t_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Act n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Acc Sg m vn 2Aor Act Prep
THE after THE TO-FROM-KILL authority HAVING TO-BE-IN-CASTING INTO
the-one to-kill to-be-casting-into
thn geennan nai legw umin touton fobhqhte

tEn geennan nai legO humin touton phobEthEte
G3588 G1067 G3483 G3004 G5213 G5126 G5399
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Part vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl pd Acc Sg m vm Aor pasD 2 Pl
THE GEHENNA YEA I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) this-One YE-BE-BEING-afraid
to-ye this-one be-ye-being-afraid-of !
12:6 ouci pente strouqia pwleitai assariwn duo kai en ex 6 Are not five sparrows sold
ouchi pente strouthia pOleitai assariOn duo kai hen ex
G3780 G4002 G4765 G4453 G787 G1417 G2532 G1520 G1537
for two farthings, and not one
Part Int a_ Nom n_ Nom Pl n vi Pres Pas 3 Sg n_ Gen Pl n a_ Nom Conj a_ Nom Sg n Prep of them is forgotten before
NOT(emph.) FIVE PASSERINES IS-beING-SOLD OF-ASSARIONS TWO AND ONE OUT God?
not(emph.) ? sparrows is-being-sold of-pence
autwn ouk estin epilelhsmenon enwpion tou qeou

autOn ouk estin epilelEsmenon enOpion tou theou
G846 G3756 G2076 G1950 G1799 G3588 G2316
pp Gen Pl n Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg vp Perf Pas Nom Sg n Adv t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
OF-them NOT IS HAVING-been-forgotten IN-VIEW OF-THE God
in-sight-of the
12:7 alla kai ai trices ths kefalhs umwn pasai hriqmhntai 7 But even the very hairs of
alla kai hai triches tEs kephalEs humOn pasai ErithmEntai
G235 G2532 G3588 G2359 G3588 G2776 G5216 G3956 G705
your head are all numbered.
Conj Conj t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl a_ Nom Pl f vi Perf Pas 3 Pl Fear not therefore: ye are of
but AND THE HAIRS OF-THE HEAD OF-YOU(p) ALL HAVE-been-NUMBERED more value than many
even of-ye sparrows.
mh oun fobeisqe pollwn strouqiwn diaferete

mE oun phobeisthe pollOn strouthiOn diapherete
G3361 G3767 G5399 G4183 G4765 G1308
Part Neg Conj vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl a_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n vi Pres Act 2 Pl
NO THEN BE-FEARING OF-MANY PASSERINES YE-ARE-THRU-CARRYING
be-ye-fearing ! many sparrows ye-are-being-of-more-consequence-than
12:8 legw de umin pas os an omologhsh en emoi 8 Also I say unto you,
legO de humin pas hos an homologEsE en emoi
G3004 G1161 G5213 G3956 G3739 G302 G3670 G1722 G1698
Whosoever shall confess me
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl a_ Nom Sg m pr Nom Sg m Part vs Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp 1 Dat Sg before men, him shall the Son
I-AM-sayING YET to-YOU(p) EVERY WHO EVER SHOULD-BE-avowING IN ME of man also confess before the
to-ye every-one angels of God:
emprosqen twn anqrwpwn kai o uios tou anqrwpou

emprosthen tOn anthrOpOn kai ho huios tou anthrOpou
G1715 G3588 G444 G2532 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444
Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE humans AND THE SON OF-THE human
in-front-of the also
omologhsei en autw emprosqen twn aggelwn tou qeou

homologEsei en autO emprosthen tOn aggelOn tou theou
G3670 G1722 G846 G1715 G3588 G32 G3588 G2316
vi Fut Act 3 Sg Prep pp Dat Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-avowING IN him IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE MESSENGERS OF-THE God
in-front-of the
12:9 o de arnhsamenos me enwpion twn anqrwpwn 9 But he that denieth me before

ho de arnEsamenos me enOpion tOn anthrOpOn
G3588 G1161 G720 G3165 G1799 G3588 G444
men shall be denied before the
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor midD Nom Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg Adv t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m angels of God.
THE YET one-disowning ME IN-VIEW OF-THE humans
one-disowning sight-ofbefore the
aparnhqhsetai enwpion twn aggelwn tou qeou

aparnEthEsetai enOpion tOn aggelOn tou theou
G533 G1799 G3588 G32 G3588 G2316
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Adv t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-BEING-renouncED IN-VIEW OF-THE MESSENGERS OF-THE God
sight-ofbefore the
12:10 kai pas os erei logon eis ton uion tou 10 And whosoever shall speak
kai pas hos erei logon eis ton huion tou
G2532 G3956 G3739 G2046 G3056 G1519 G3588 G5207 G3588
a word against the Son of man,
Conj a_ Nom Sg m pr Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m it shall be forgiven him: but
AND EVERY WHO SHALL-BE-declarING saying INTO THE SON OF-THE unto him that blasphemeth
every-one word against the Holy Ghost it shall
not be forgiven.
anqrwpou afeqhsetai autw tw de eis to agion pneuma
anthrOpou aphethEsetai autO tO de eis to hagion pneuma
G444 G863 G846 G3588 G1161 G1519 G3588 G40 G4151
n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
human SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET to-him to-THE YET INTO THE HOLY spirit
it-shall-be-being-pardoned him the-one
Luke 12
blasfhmhsanti ouk afeqhsetai

blasphEmEsanti ouk aphethEsetai
G987 G3756 G863
vp Aor Act Dat Sg m Part Neg vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
one-HARM-AVERRing NOT SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET
blaspheming it-shall-be-being-pardoned
12:11 otan de prosferwsin umas epi tas sunagwgas kai 11 And when they bring you
hotan de prospherOsin humas epi tas sunagOgas kai
G3752 G1161 G4374 G5209 G1909 G3588 G4864 G2532
unto the synagogues, and
Conj Conj vs Pres Act 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Pl Prep t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Conj [unto] magistrates, and powers,
when-EVER YET THEY-MAY-BE-TOWARD-CARRYING YOU(p) ON THE TOGETHER-LEADS AND take ye no thought how or
whenever they-may-be-bringing-to ye synagogues what thing ye shall answer, or
what ye shall say:
tas arcas kai tas exousias mh merimnate pws h ti
tas archas kai tas exousias mE merimnate pOs E ti
G3588 G746 G2532 G3588 G1849 G3361 G3309 G4459 G2228 G5101
t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Conj t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Pl Adv Int Part pi Acc Sg n
THE ORIGINals AND THE authorities NO BE-YE-beING-anxious how OR ANY
chiefs be-ye-worrying ! how ? what ?
apologhshsqe h ti eiphte
apologEsEsthe E ti eipEte
G626 G2228 G5101 G2036
vs Aor midD 2 Pl Part pi Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
YE-SHOULD-BE-FROM-sayING OR ANY YE-MAY-BE-sayING
ye-should-be-defending what ?
12:12 to gar agion pneuma didaxei umas en auth th 12 For the Holy Ghost shall
to gar hagion pneuma didaxei humas en autE tE
G3588 G1063 G40 G4151 G1321 G5209 G1722 G846 G3588
teach you in the same hour
t_ Nom Sg n Conj a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl Prep pp Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f what ye ought to say.
THE for HOLY spirit SHALL-BE-TEACHING YOU(p) IN SAME THE
ye
wra a dei eipein

hOra ha dei eipein
G5610 G3739 G1163 G2036
n_ Dat Sg f pr Acc Pl n vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act
HOUR WHICH IS-BINDING TO-BE-sayING
which(p)
12:13 eipen de tis autw ek tou oclou didaskale eipe 13 . And one of the company
eipen de tis autO ek tou ochlou didaskale eipe
G2036 G1161 G5100 G846 G1537 G3588 G3793 G1320 G2036
said unto him, Master, speak to
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj px Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Voc Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg my brother, that he divide the
said YET ANY to-Him OUT OF-THE THRONG TEACHer ! BE-sayING inheritance with me.
someone be-you-saying !
tw adelfw mou merisasqai met emou thn klhronomian

tO adelphO mou merisasthai met emou tEn klEronomian
G3588 G80 G3450 G3307 G3326 G1700 G3588 G2817
t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg vn Aor Mid Prep pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
to-THE brother OF-ME TO-PART WITH ME THE tenancy
enjoyment-of-the-allotment
12:14 o de eipen autw anqrwpe tis me katesthsen 14 And he said unto him, Man,
ho de eipen autO anthrOpe tis me katestEsen
G3588 G1161 G2036 G846 G444 G5101 G3165 G2525
who made me a judge or a
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m pi Nom Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg vi Aor Act 3 Sg divider over you?
THE YET He-said to-him human ! ANY ME DOWN-STANDS
who ? constitutes
dikasthn h meristhn ef umas

dikastEn E meristEn eph humas
G1348 G2228 G3312 G1909 G5209
n_ Acc Sg f Part n_ Acc Sg m Prep pp 2 Acc Pl
JUSTer OR PARTer ON YOU(p)
justice onover ye
12:15 eipen de pros autous orate kai fulassesqe apo ths 15 And he said unto them,
eipen de pros autous horate kai phulassesthe apo tEs
G2036 G1161 G4314 G846 G3708 G2532 G5442 G575 G3588
Take heed, and beware of
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Prep pp Acc Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vm Pres Mid 2 Pl Prep t_ Gen Sg f covetousness: for a man's life
He-said YET TOWARD them BE-SEEING AND BE-GUARDING FROM THE consisteth not in the abundance
be-ye-seeing ! be-ye-guarding ! of the things which he
possesseth.
pleonexias oti ouk en tw perisseuein tini h zwh autou
pleonexias hoti ouk en tO perisseuein tini hE zOE autou
G4124 G3754 G3756 G1722 G3588 G4052 G5100 G3588 G2222 G846
n_ Gen Sg f Conj Part Neg Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn Pres Act px Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m
MORE-HAVing that NOT IN THE TO-BE-exceedING to-ANY-one THE LIFE OF-him
greed superfluity to-anyone
estin ek twn uparcontwn autou

estin ek tOn huparchontOn autou
G2076 G1537 G3588 G5224 G846
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl n vp Pres Act Gen Pl n pp Gen Sg m
IS OUT OF-THE belongINGS OF-him
possessions
Luke 12
12:16 eipen de parabolhn pros autous legwn anqrwpou tinos 16 And he spake a parable unto
eipen de parabolEn pros autous legOn anthrOpou tinos
G2036 G1161 G3850 G4314 G846 G3004 G444 G5100
them, saying, The ground of a
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Acc Sg f Prep pp Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg m px Gen Sg m certain rich man brought forth
He-said YET BESIDE-CAST TOWARD them sayING OF-human ANY plentifully:
he-told parable certain
plousiou euforhsen h cwra

plousiou euphorEsen hE chOra
G4145 G2164 G3588 G5561
a_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
RICH WELL-CARRIES THE SPACE
bears-well country-place
12:17 kai dielogizeto en eautw legwn ti poihsw oti 17 And he thought within
kai dielogizeto en heautO legOn ti poiEsO hoti
G2532 G1260 G1722 G1438 G3004 G5101 G4160 G3754
himself, saying, What shall I
Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep pf 3 Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pi Acc Sg n vs Aor Act 1 Sg Conj do, because I have no room
AND he-THRU-accountED IN self sayING ANY I-SHALL-BE-DOING that where to bestow my fruits?
he-reasoned himself what ? seeing-that
ouk ecw pou sunaxw tous karpous mou

ouk echO pou sunaxO tous karpous mou
G3756 G2192 G4226 G4863 G3588 G2590 G3450
Part Neg vi Pres Act 1 Sg Part Int vi Fut Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg
NOT I-AM-HAVING ?-where I-SHALL-BE-TOGETHER-LEADING THE FRUITS OF-ME
where ? I-shall-be-gathering
12:18 kai eipen touto poihsw kaqelw mou tas 18 And he said, This will I do:
kai eipen touto poiEsO kathelO mou tas
G2532 G2036 G5124 G4160 G2507 G3450 G3588
I will pull down my barns, and
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pd Acc Sg n vi Fut Act 1 Sg vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp 1 Gen Sg t_ Acc Pl f build greater; and there will I
AND he-said this I-SHALL-BE-DOING I-SHALL-BE-DOWN-LIFTING OF-ME THE bestow all my fruits and my
I-shall-be-pulling-down goods.
apoqhkas kai meizonas oikodomhsw kai sunaxw ekei

apothEkas kai meizonas oikodomEsO kai sunaxO ekei
G596 G2532 G3173 G3618 G2532 G4863 G1563
n_ Acc Pl f Conj a_ Acc Pl f Cmp vi Fut Act 1 Sg Conj vi Fut Act 1 Sg Adv
FROM-PLACES AND GREATer I-SHALL-BE-HOME-BUILDING AND I-SHALL-BE-TOGETHER-LEADING there
barns greater-ones I-shall-be-building I-shall-be-gathering
panta ta genhmata mou kai ta agaqa mou

panta ta genEmata mou kai ta agatha mou
G3956 G3588 G1081 G3450 G2532 G3588 G18 G3450
a_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp 1 Gen Sg Conj t_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n pp 1 Gen Sg
ALL THE products OF-ME AND THE GOODS OF-ME
12:19 kai erw th yuch mou yuch eceis polla 19 And I will say to my soul,
kai erO tE psuchE mou psuchE echeis polla
G2532 G2046 G3588 G5590 G3450 G5590 G2192 G4183
Soul, thou hast much goods
Conj vi Fut Act 1 Sg t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg n_ Voc Sg f vi Pres Act 2 Sg a_ Acc Pl n laid up for many years; take
AND I-SHALL-BE-declarING to-THE soul OF-ME soul YOU-ARE-HAVING MANY thine ease, eat, drink, [and] be
soul ! merry.
agaqa keimena eis eth polla anapauou fage pie

agatha keimena eis etE polla anapauou phage pie
G18 G2749 G1519 G2094 G4183 G373 G5315 G4095
a_ Acc Pl n vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl n Prep n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n vm Pres Mid 2 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
GOODS LYING INTO YEARS MANY BE-UP-CEASING BE-EATING BE-DRINKING
good-things being-laid-up be-you-resting ! be-you-eating ! be-you-drinking !
eufrainou
euphrainou
G2165
vm Pres Pas 2 Sg
BE-beING-glad
be-making-merry-you !
12:20 eipen de autw o qeos afron tauth th nukti 20 But God said unto him,
eipen de autO ho theos aphron tautE tE nukti
G2036 G1161 G846 G3588 G2316 G878 G3778 G3588 G3571
[Thou] fool, this night thy soul
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m a_ Voc Sg m pd Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f shall be required of thee: then
said YET to-him THE God UN-DISPOSED ! to-this THE NIGHT whose shall those things be,
imprudent-one ! which thou hast provided?
thn yuchn sou apaitousin apo sou a de

tEn psuchEn sou apaitousin apo sou ha de
G3588 G5590 G4675 G523 G575 G4675 G3739 G1161
t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep pp 2 Gen Sg pr Nom Pl n Conj
THE soul OF-YOU THEY-ARE-FROM-REQUESTING FROM YOU WHICH YET
they-are-demanding which(p)
htoimasas tini estai

hEtoimasas tini estai
G2090 G5101 G2071
vi Aor Act 2 Sg pi Dat Sg m vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
YOU-make-READY ANY SHALL-BE
whose ? it-shall-be
Luke 12
12:21 outws o qhsaurizwn eautw kai mh eis qeon 21 So [is] he that layeth up
houtOs ho thEsaurizOn heautO kai mE eis theon
G3779 G3588 G2343 G1438 G2532 G3361 G1519 G2316
treasure for himself, and is not
Adv t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pf 3 Dat Sg m Conj Part Neg Prep n_ Acc Sg m rich toward God.
thus THE one-PLACING-INTO-MORROW to-self AND NO INTO God
one-hoarding to-himself
ploutwn
ploutOn
G4147
beING-RICH
12:22 eipen de pros tous maqhtas autou dia touto umin 22 . And he said unto his
eipen de pros tous mathEtas autou dia touto humin
G2036 G1161 G4314 G3588 G3101 G846 G1223 G5124 G5213
disciples, Therefore I say unto
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m Prep pd Acc Sg n pp 2 Dat Pl you, Take no thought for your
He-said YET TOWARD THE LEARNers OF-Him THRU this to-YOU(p) life, what ye shall eat; neither
disciples because-of to-ye for the body, what ye shall put
on.
legw mh merimnate th yuch umwn ti faghte mhde
legO mE merimnate tE psuchE humOn ti phagEte mEde
G3004 G3361 G3309 G3588 G5590 G5216 G5101 G5315 G3366
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl pi Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl Conj
I-AM-sayING NO BE-YE-beING-anxious to-THE soul OF-YOU(p) ANY YE-MAY-BE-EATING NO-YET
be-ye-worrying ! what ? nor-yet
tw swmati ti endushsqe
tO sOmati ti endusEsthe
G3588 G4983 G5101 G1746
t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n pi Acc Sg n vs Aor Mid 2 Pl
to-THE BODY ANY YE-SHOULD-BE-IN-SLIPPING
what ? ye-should-be-putting-on
12:23 h yuch pleion estin ths trofhs kai to swma 23 The life is more than meat,
hE psuchE pleion estin tEs trophEs kai to sOma
G3588 G5590 G4119 G2076 G3588 G5160 G2532 G3588 G4983
and the body [is more] than
t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n raiment.
THE soul MORE IS OF-THE NURTURE AND THE BODY
nourishment
tou endumatos
tou endumatos
G3588 G1742
OF-THE IN-SLIP
apparel
12:24 katanohsate tous korakas oti ou speirousin oude qerizousin 24 Consider the ravens: for
katanoEsate tous korakas hoti ou speirousin oude therizousin
G2657 G3588 G2876 G3754 G3756 G4687 G3761 G2325
they neither sow nor reap;
vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Pl Adv vi Pres Act 3 Pl which neither have storehouse
DOWN-MIND-YE THE RAVENS that NOT THEY-ARE-SOWING NOT-YET THEY-ARE-reapING nor barn; and God feedeth
consider-ye ! neither them: how much more are ye
better than the fowls?
ois ouk estin tameion oude apoqhkh kai o qeos
hois ouk estin tameion oude apothEkE kai ho theos
G3739 G3756 G2076 G5009 G3761 G596 G2532 G3588 G2316
pr Dat Pl m Part Neg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg n Adv n_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
to-WHICH NOT IS STOREROOM NOT-YET FROM-PLACE AND THE God
to-which(p) there-is nor barn
trefei autous posw mallon umeis diaferete twn peteinwn

trephei autous posO mallon humeis diapherete tOn peteinOn
G5142 G846 G4214 G3123 G5210 G1308 G3588 G4071
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m pq Dat Sg n Adv pp 2 Nom Pl vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
IS-NURTURING them to-how-much RATHER YOU(p) ARE-THRU-CARRYING OF-THE flyers
how-much more ye are-being-of-consequence than the flying-creatures
12:25 tis de ex umwn merimnwn dunatai prosqeinai epi thn 25 And which of you with
tis de ex humOn merimnOn dunatai prostheinai epi tEn
G5101 G1161 G1537 G5216 G3308 G1410 G4369 G1909 G3588
taking thought can add to his
pi Nom Sg m Conj Prep pp 2 Gen Pl n_ Gen Pl f vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg f stature one cubit?
ANY YET OUT OF-YOU(p) beING-anxious IS-ABLING TO-add ON THE
who ? of-ye worrying is-able
hlikian autou phcun ena

hElikian autou pEchun hena
G2244 G846 G4083 G1520
n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m
PRIME OF-him CUBIT ONE
stature
12:26 ei oun oute elaciston dunasqe ti peri twn loipwn 26 If ye then be not able to do
ei oun oute elachiston dunasthe ti peri tOn loipOn
G1487 G3767 G3777 G1646 G1410 G5101 G4012 G3588 G3062
that thing which is least, why
Cond Conj Conj a_ Acc Sg n vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl pi Acc Sg n Prep t_ Gen Pl n a_ Gen Pl n take ye thought for the rest?
IF THEN NOT-BESIDES INFERIOR-most YE-ARE-ABLING ANY ABOUT THE rest
not-bseven least ye-are-able why ? rest(p)
Luke 12
merimnate
merimnate
G3309
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
YE-ARE-beING-anxious
ye-are-worrying
12:27 katanohsate ta krina pws auxanei ou kopia oude 27 Consider the lilies how they
katanoEsate ta krina pOs auxanei ou kopia oude
G2657 G3588 G2918 G4459 G837 G3756 G2872 G3761
grow: they toil not, they spin
vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv not; and yet I say unto you, that
DOWN-MIND-YE THE ANEMONES how it-IS-GROWING-UP NOT it-IS-toilING NOT-YET Solomon in all his glory was
consider-ye ! it-is-growing neither not arrayed like one of these.
nhqei legw de umin oude solomwn en pash th doxh

nEthei legO de humin oude solomOn en pasE tE doxE
G3514 G3004 G1161 G5213 G3761 G4672 G1722 G3956 G3588 G1391
vi Pres Act 3 Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Pl Adv n_ Nom Sg m Prep a_ Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
it-IS-SPINNING I-AM-sayING YET to-YOU(p) NOT-YET SOLOMON IN EVERY THE esteem
to-ye not-yeteven all glory
autou periebaleto ws en toutwn

autou periebaleto hOs hen toutOn
G846 G4016 G5613 G1520 G5130
pp Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg Adv a_ Acc Sg n pd Gen Pl n
OF-him was-ABOUT-CAST AS ONE OF-these
was-clothed
12:28 ei de ton corton en tw agrw shmeron onta kai 28 If then God so clothe the
ei de ton chorton en tO agrO sEmeron onta kai
G1487 G1161 G3588 G5528 G1722 G3588 G68 G4594 G5607 G2532
grass, which is to day in the
Cond Conj t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Adv vp Pres vxx Acc Sg m Conj field, and to morrow is cast
IF YET THE FODDER IN THE FIELD toDAY BEING AND into the oven; how much more
grass [will he clothe] you, O ye of
little faith?
aurion eis klibanon ballomenon o qeos outws amfiennusin
aurion eis klibanon ballomenon ho theos houtOs amphiennusin
G839 G1519 G2823 G906 G3588 G2316 G3779 G294
Adv Prep n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg
MORROW INTO STOVE beING-CAST THE God thus IS-ENVELOPING-IN
tomorrow is-garbing
posw mallon umas oligopistoi

posO mallon humas oligopistoi
G4214 G3123 G5209 G3640
pq Dat Sg n Adv pp 2 Acc Pl a_ Voc Pl m
to-how-much RATHER YOU(p) FEW-BELIEVing-ones
how-much ye scant-of-faith-ones !
12:29 kai umeis mh zhteite ti faghte h ti 29 And seek not ye what ye

kai humeis mE zEteite ti phagEte hE ti
G2532 G5210 G3361 G2212 G5101 G5315 G2228 G5101
shall eat, or what ye shall
Conj pp 2 Nom Pl Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Pl pi Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl Part pi Acc Sg n drink, neither be ye of doubtful
AND YOU(p) NO BE-SEEKING ANY YE-MAY-BE-EATING OR ANY mind.
ye be-ye-seeking ! what ? what ?
pihte kai mh metewrizesqe

piEte kai mE meteOrizesthe
G4095 G2532 G3361 G3349
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl Conj Part Neg vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
YE-MAY-BE-DRINKING AND NO YE-BE-beING-WITH-AIRizED
be-ye-being-in-suspense !
12:30 tauta gar panta ta eqnh tou kosmou epizhtei umwn 30 For all these things do the
tauta gar panta ta ethnE tou kosmou epizEtei humOn
G5023 G1063 G3956 G3588 G1484 G3588 G2889 G1934 G5216
nations of the world seek after:
pd Acc Pl n Conj a_ Nom Pl n t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp 2 Gen Pl and your Father knoweth that
these for ALL THE NATIONS OF-THE SYSTEM IS-ON-SEEKING OF-YOU(p) ye have need of these things.
these-things world is-seeking-for of-ye
de o pathr oiden oti crhzete toutwn

de ho patEr oiden hoti chrEzete toutOn
G1161 G3588 G3962 G1492 G3754 G5535 G5130
Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Perf Act 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl pd Gen Pl n
YET THE FATHER HAS-PERCEIVED that YE-ARE-needING OF-these
is-aware these-things
12:31 plhn zhteite thn basileian tou qeou kai tauta panta 31 But rather seek ye the
plEn zEteite tEn basileian tou theou kai tauta panta
G4133 G2212 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316 G2532 G5023 G3956
kingdom of God; and all these
Adv vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj pd Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n things shall be added unto you.
MOREly BE-YE-SEEKING THE KINGdom OF-THE God AND these ALL
however be-ye-seeking ! these-things
prosteqhsetai umin
prostethEsetai humin
G4369 G5213
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
SHALL-BE-BEING-addED to-YOU(p)
to-ye
Luke 12
12:32 mh fobou to mikron poimnion oti eudokhsen o 32 Fear not, little flock; for it is
mE phobou to mikron poimnion hoti eudokEsen ho
G3361 G5399 G3588 G3398 G4168 G3754 G2106 G3588
your Father's good pleasure to
Part Neg vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg t_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m give you the kingdom.
NO BE-FEARING THE LITTLE flocklet that WELL-SEEMS THE
be-you-fearing ! it-delights
pathr umwn dounai umin thn basileian

patEr humOn dounai humin tEn basileian
G3962 G5216 G1325 G5213 G3588 G932
n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl vn 2Aor Act pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
FATHER OF-YOU(p) TO-GIVE to-YOU(p) THE KINGdom
of-ye ye
12:33 pwlhsate ta uparconta umwn kai dote elehmosunhn 33 Sell that ye have, and give
pOlEsate ta huparchonta humOn kai dote eleEmosunEn
G4453 G3588 G5224 G5216 G2532 G1325 G1654
alms; provide yourselves bags
vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Acc Pl n pp 2 Gen Pl Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg f which wax not old, a treasure
SELL-YE THE belongINGS OF-YOU(p) AND BE-GIVING alms in the heavens that faileth not,
sell-ye ! possessions of-ye be-ye-giving ! where no thief approacheth,
neither moth corrupteth.
poihsate eautois balantia mh palaioumena qhsauron anekleipton
poiEsate heautois balantia mE palaioumena thEsauron anekleipton
G4160 G1438 G905 G3361 G3822 G2344 G413
vm Aor Act 2 Pl pf 3 Dat Pl m n_ Acc Pl n Part Neg vp Pres Pas Acc Pl n n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m
make to-selves purses NO beING-OLDED PLACED-INTO-MORROW UN-OUT-LACKed
make-ye ! yourselves aging treasure not-default
en tois ouranois opou klepths ouk eggizei oude shs

en tois ouranois hopou kleptEs ouk eggizei oude sEs
G1722 G3588 G3772 G3699 G2812 G3756 G1448 G3761 G4597
Prep t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Adv n_ Nom Sg m Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv n_ Nom Sg m
IN THE heavens WHICH-where thief NOT IS-NEARING NOT-YET MOTH
wheree neither
diafqeirei
diaphtheirei
G1311
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IS-THRU-CORRUPTING
is-causing-decay
12:34 opou gar estin o qhsauros umwn ekei kai h 34 For where your treasure is,
hopou gar estin ho thEsauros humOn ekei kai hE
G3699 G1063 G2076 G3588 G2344 G5216 G1563 G2532 G3588
there will your heart be also.
Adv Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl Adv Conj t_ Nom Sg f
WHICH-where for IS THE PLACED-INTO-MORROW OF-YOU(p) there AND THE
wherever treasure of-ye also
kardia umwn estai

kardia humOn estai
G2588 G5216 G2071
n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
HEART OF-YOU(p) SHALL-BE
of-ye
12:35 estwsan umwn ai osfues periezwsmenai kai oi lucnoi 35 Let your loins be girded
estOsan humOn hai osphues periezOsmenai kai hoi luchnoi
G2077 G5216 G3588 G3751 G4024 G2532 G3588 G3088
about, and [your] lights
vm Pres vxx 3 Pl pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f vp Perf Pas Nom Pl f Conj t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m burning;
LET-BE OF-YOU(p) THE LOINS HAVING-been-ABOUT-GIRDED AND THE LAMPS
let-them-be ! of-ye having-been-girded-about
kaiomenoi
kaiomenoi
G2545
vp Pres Pas Nom Pl f
BURNING
12:36 kai umeis omoioi anqrwpois prosdecomenois ton kurion eautwn 36 And ye yourselves like unto
kai humeis homoioi anthrOpois prosdechomenois ton kurion heautOn
G2532 G5210 G3664 G444 G4327 G3588 G2962 G1438
men that wait for their lord,
Conj pp 2 Nom Pl a_ Nom Pl m n_ Dat Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pf 3 Gen Pl m when he will return from the
AND YOU(p) LIKE to-humans TOWARD-RECEIVING THE master OF-selves wedding; that when he cometh
ye humans anticipating lord of-themselves and knocketh, they may open
unto him immediately.
pote analusei ek twn gamwn ina elqontos kai
pote analusei ek tOn gamOn hina elthontos kai
G4219 G360 G1537 G3588 G1062 G2443 G2064 G2532
Part Int vi Fut Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Gen Sg m Conj
?-when he-SHALL-BE-UP-LOOSING OUT OF-THE MARRIAGES THAT OF-COMING AND
when ? he-shall-be-breaking-loose wedding-festivities
krousantos euqews anoixwsin autw

krousantos eutheOs anoixOsin autO
G2925 G2112 G455 G846
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m Adv vs Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
KNOCKing immediately THEY-SHOULD-BE-UP-OPENING to-him
they-should-be-opening
Luke 12
12:37 makarioi oi douloi ekeinoi ous elqwn o kurios 37 Blessed [are] those servants,
makarioi hoi douloi ekeinoi hous elthOn ho kurios
G3107 G3588 G1401 G1565 G3739 G2064 G3588 G2962
whom the lord when he cometh
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pd Nom Pl m pr Acc Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m shall find watching: verily I
HAPPY THE SLAVES those WHOM COMING THE master say unto you, that he shall gird
happy-are Lord himself, and make them to sit
down to meat, and will come
eurhsei grhgorountas amhn legw umin oti perizwsetai kai forth and serve them.
heurEsei grEgorountas amEn legO humin hoti perizOsetai kai
G2147 G1127 G281 G3004 G5213 G3754 G4024 G2532
vi Fut Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj vi Fut Mid 3 Sg Conj
SHALL-BE-FINDING watchING AMEN I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that he-SHALL-BE-ABOUT-GIRDING AND
verily to-ye he-shall-be-girding-about-himself
anaklinei autous kai parelqwn diakonhsei autois

anaklinei autous kai parelthOn diakonEsei autois
G347 G846 G2532 G3928 G1247 G846
vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m
SHALL-BE-reCLINING them AND BESIDE-COMING he-SHALL-BE-THRU-SERVING to-them
shall-be-causing-to-recline coming-by shall-be-serving them
12:38 kai ean elqh en th deutera fulakh kai en th 38 And if he shall come in the
kai ean elthE en tE deutera phulakE kai en tE
G2532 G1437 G2064 G1722 G3588 G1208 G5438 G2532 G1722 G3588
second watch, or come in the
Conj Cond vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg f third watch, and find [them]
AND IF-EVER he-MAY-BE-COMING IN THE second GUARD AND IN THE so, blessed are those servants.
watch
trith fulakh elqh kai eurh outws makarioi eisin

tritE phulakE elthE kai heurE houtOs makarioi eisin
G5154 G5438 G2064 G2532 G2147 G3779 G3107 G1526
a_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
third GUARD he-MAY-BE-COMING AND MAY-BE-FINDING thus HAPPY ARE
watch may-be-finding-them
oi douloi ekeinoi
hoi douloi ekeinoi
G3588 G1401 G1565
t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pd Nom Pl m
THE SLAVES those
12:39 touto de ginwskete oti ei hdei o oikodespoths 39 And this know, that if the
touto de ginOskete hoti ei Edei ho oikodespotEs
G5124 G1161 G1097 G3754 G1487 G1492 G3588 G3617
goodman of the house had
pd Acc Sg n Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Cond vi Plup Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m known what hour the thief
this YET YE-ARE-KNOWING that IF HAD-PERCEIVED THE HOME-OWNer would come, he would have
were-aware householder watched, and not have suffered
his house to be broken through.
poia wra o klepths ercetai egrhgorhsen an kai ouk
poia hOra ho kleptEs erchetai egrEgorEsen an kai ouk
G4169 G5610 G3588 G2812 G2064 G1127 G302 G2532 G3756
pi Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg vi Aor Act 3 Sg Part Conj Part Neg
? to-THE-WHICH HOUR THE thief IS-COMING he-watchES EVER AND NOT
to-which ?
an afhken diorughnai ton oikon autou

an aphEken diorugEnai ton oikon autou
G302 G863 G1358 G3588 G3624 G846
Part vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Pas t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m
EVER FROM-LETS TO-BE-THRU-EXCAVATED THE HOME OF-him
lets to-be-burrowed house
12:40 kai umeis oun ginesqe etoimoi oti h wra ou 40 Be ye therefore ready also:
kai humeis oun ginesthe hetoimoi hoti hE hOra ou
G2532 G5210 G3767 G1096 G2092 G3754 G3739 G5610 G3756
for the Son of man cometh at
Conj pp 2 Nom Pl Conj vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl a_ Nom Pl m Conj pr Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Part Neg an hour when ye think not.
AND YOU(p) THEN BE-BECOMING READY that to-WHICH HOUR NOT
also ye be-ye-becoming !
dokeite o uios tou anqrwpou ercetai

dokeite ho huios tou anthrOpou erchetai
G1380 G3588 G5207 G3588 G444 G2064
vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
YE-ARE-SEEMING THE SON OF-THE human IS-COMING
ye-are-supposing
12:41 eipen de autw o petros kurie pros hmas thn 41 . Then Peter said unto him,
eipen de autO ho petros kurie pros hEmas tEn
G2036 G1161 G846 G3588 G4074 G2962 G4314 G2248 G3588
Lord, speakest thou this
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Voc Sg m Prep pp 1 Acc Pl t_ Acc Sg f parable unto us, or even to all?
said YET to-Him THE Peter Master ! TOWARD US THE
Lord !
parabolhn tauthn legeis h kai pros pantas

parabolEn tautEn legeis E kai pros pantas
G3850 G3778 G3004 G2228 G2532 G4314 G3956
n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 2 Sg Part Conj Prep a_ Acc Pl m
BESIDE-CAST this YOU-ARE-sayING OR AND TOWARD ALL
parable also
Luke 12
12:42 eipen de o kurios tis ara estin o 42 And the Lord said, Who
eipen de ho kurios tis ara estin ho
G2036 G1161 G3588 G2962 G5101 G687 G2076 G3588
then is that faithful and wise
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pi Nom Sg m Part Int vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m steward, whom [his] lord shall
said YET THE Master ANY CONSEQUENTLY IS THE make ruler over his household,
Lord who ? to give [them their] portion of
meat in due season?
pistos oikonomos kai fronimos on katasthsei o kurios
pistos oikonomos kai phronimos hon katastEsei ho kurios
G4103 G3623 G2532 G5429 G3739 G2525 G3588 G2962
a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m pr Acc Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
BELIEVing HOME-LAWer AND DISPOSED WHOM SHALL-BE-DOWN-STANDING THE master
faithful administrator prudent shall-be-constituting lord
epi ths qerapeias autou tou didonai en kairw to

epi tEs therapeias autou tou didonai en kairO to
G1909 G3588 G2322 G846 G3588 G1325 G1722 G2540 G3588
Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m vn Pres Act Prep n_ Dat Sg m t_ Acc Sg n
ON THE attendance OF-him OF-THE TO-BE-GIVING IN SEASON THE
onover to-be-giving-them
sitometrion
sitometrion
G4620
n_ Acc Sg n
GRAIN-MEASURE
measure-of-grain
12:43 makarios o doulos ekeinos on elqwn o kurios 43 Blessed [is] that servant,
makarios ho doulos ekeinos hon elthOn ho kurios
G3107 G3588 G1401 G1565 G3739 G2064 G3588 G2962
whom his lord when he cometh
a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m pr Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m shall find so doing.
HAPPY THE SLAVE that WHOM COMING THE master
happy-is lord
autou eurhsei poiounta outws

autou heurEsei poiounta houtOs
G846 G2147 G4160 G3779
pp Gen Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Acc Sg m Adv
OF-him SHALL-BE-FINDING DOING thus
12:44 alhqws legw umin oti epi pasin tois uparcousin autou 44 Of a truth I say unto you,
alEthOs legO humin hoti epi pasin tois huparchousin autou
G230 G3004 G5213 G3754 G1909 G3956 G3588 G5224 G846
that he will make him ruler
Adv vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Prep a_ Dat Pl n t_ Dat Pl n vp Pres Act Dat Pl n pp Gen Sg m over all that he hath.
TRUly I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that ON ALL THE belongINGS OF-him
to-ye onover possessions
katasthsei auton
katastEsei auton
G2525 G846
he-SHALL-BE-DOWN-STANDING him
he-shall-be-constituting
12:45 ean de eiph o doulos ekeinos en th kardia 45 But and if that servant say
ean de eipE ho doulos ekeinos en tE kardia
G1437 G1161 G2036 G3588 G1401 G1565 G1722 G3588 G2588
in his heart, My lord delayeth
Cond Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f his coming; and shall begin to
IF-EVER YET MAY-BE-sayING THE SLAVE that IN THE HEART beat the menservants and
maidens, and to eat and drink,
and to be drunken;
autou cronizei o kurios mou ercesqai kai arxhtai
autou chronizei ho kurios mou erchesthai kai arxEtai
G846 G5549 G3588 G2962 G3450 G2064 G2532 G756
pp Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg vn Pres midD/pasD Conj vs Aor Mid 3 Sg
OF-him IS-delayING THE master OF-ME TO-BE-COMING AND SHOULD-BE-beginnING
lord he-should-be-beginning
tuptein tous paidas kai tas paidiskas esqiein te kai

tuptein tous paidas kai tas paidiskas esthiein te kai
G5180 G3588 G3816 G2532 G3588 G3814 G2068 G5037 G2532
vn Pres Act t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vn Pres Act Part Conj
TO-BE-BEATING THE boys AND THE maids TO-BE-EATING BESIDES AND
pinein kai mequskesqai

pinein kai methuskesthai
G4095 G2532 G3182
vn Pres Act Conj vn Pres Pas
TO-BE-DRINKING AND TO-BE-beING-DRUNK
12:46 hxei o kurios tou doulou ekeinou en hmera 46 The lord of that servant will
hExei ho kurios tou doulou ekeinou en hEmera
G2240 G3588 G2962 G3588 G1401 G1565 G1722 G2250
come in a day when he looketh
vi Fut Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg f not for [him], and at an hour
SHALL-BE-ARRIVING THE master OF-THE SLAVE that IN DAY when he is not aware, and will
lord cut him in sunder, and will
Luke 12
appoint him his portion with

h ou prosdoka kai en wra h ou ginwskei kai the unbelievers.
hE ou prosdoka kai en hOra hE ou ginOskei kai
G3739 G3756 G4328 G2532 G1722 G5610 G3739 G3756 G1097 G2532
pr Dat Sg f Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj Prep n_ Dat Sg f pr Dat Sg f Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj
to-WHICH NOT he-IS-TOWARD-SEEMING AND IN HOUR to-WHICH NOT he-IS-KNOWING AND
he-is-hoping
dicotomhsei auton kai to meros autou meta twn

dichotomEsei auton kai to meros autou meta tOn
G1371 G846 G2532 G3588 G3313 G846 G3326 G3588
vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m
SHALL-BE-TWO-CUTTING him AND THE PART OF-him WITH THE
shall-be-cutting-asunder
apistwn qhsei
apistOn thEsei
G571 G5087
a_ Gen Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ones-UN-BELIEVing SHALL-BE-PLACING
unfaithful-ones shall-be-appointing
12:47 ekeinos de o doulos o gnous to qelhma 47 And that servant, which

ekeinos de ho doulos ho gnous to thelEma
G1565 G1161 G3588 G1401 G3588 G1097 G3588 G2307
knew his lord's will, and
pd Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n prepared not [himself], neither
that YET THE SLAVE THE one-KNOWING THE WILL did according to his will, shall
one-knowing be beaten with many [stripes].
tou kuriou eautou kai mh etoimasas mhde poihsas pros

tou kuriou heautou kai mE hetoimasas mEde poiEsas pros
G3588 G2962 G1438 G2532 G3361 G2090 G3366 G4160 G4314
t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pf 3 Gen Sg m Conj Part Neg vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Prep
OF-THE master OF-self AND NO making-READY NO-YET DOing TOWARD
lord of-himself nor-yet
to qelhma autou darhsetai pollas

to thelEma autou darEsetai pollas
G3588 G2307 G846 G1194 G4183
t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl f
THE WILL OF-him SHALL-BE-beING-SKINNED MANY
shall-be-being-lashed many-ones
12:48 o de mh gnous poihsas de axia plhgwn 48 But he that knew not, and
ho de mE gnous poiEsas de axia plEgOn
G3588 G1161 G3361 G1097 G4160 G1161 G514 G4127
did commit things worthy of
t_ Nom Sg m Conj Part Neg vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj a_ Acc Pl n n_ Gen Pl f stripes, shall be beaten with
THE YET NO one-KNOWING DOing YET WORTHY OF-BLOWS few [stripes]. For unto
the-one knowing deserving blows whomsoever much is given, of
him shall be much required:
darhsetai oligas panti de w edoqh polu polu and to whom men have
darEsetai oligas panti de hO edothE polu polu committed much, of him they
G1194 G3641 G3956 G1161 G3739 G1325 G4183 G4183
vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl f a_ Dat Sg m Conj pr Dat Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg n a_ Nom Sg n will ask the more.
SHALL-BE-beING-SKINNED FEW to-EVERY YET to-WHOM WAS-GIVEN MANY MANY
shall-be-being-lashed few-ones to-everyone much much
zhthqhsetai par autou kai w pareqento polu

zEtEthEsetai par autou kai hO parethento polu
G2212 G3844 G846 G2532 G3739 G3908 G4183
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Sg m Conj pr Dat Sg m vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl a_ Acc Sg n
SHALL-BE-BEING-SOUGHT BESIDE OF-him AND to-WHOM THEY-BESIDE-PLACED MANY
him they-committed much
perissoteron aithsousin auton

perissoteron aitEsousin auton
G4053 G154 G846
a_ Acc Sg n Cmp vi Fut Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
more-excessive THEY-SHALL-BE-REQUESTING him
more-excessively they-shall-be-requesting-of
12:49 pur hlqon balein eis thn ghn kai ti qelw 49 I am come to send fire on
pur Elthon balein eis tEn gEn kai ti thelO
G4442 G2064 G906 G1519 G3588 G1093 G2532 G5101 G2309
the earth; and what will I, if it
n_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj pi Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 1 Sg be already kindled?
FIRE I-CAME TO-BE-CASTING INTO THE LAND AND ANY I-AM-WILLING
earth what ?
ei hdh anhfqh
ei EdE anEphthE
G1487 G2235 G381
Cond Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
IF ALREADY it-WAS-UP-TOUCHED
it-was-kindled
12:50 baptisma de ecw baptisqhnai kai pws sunecomai ews ou 50 But I have a baptism to be
baptisma de echO baptisthEnai kai pOs sunechomai heOs hou
G908 G1161 G2192 G907 G2532 G4459 G4912 G2193 G3739
baptized with; and how am I
n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg vn Aor Pas Conj Adv vi Pres Pas 1 Sg Conj pr Gen Sg m straitened till it be
DIPism YET I-AM-HAVING TO-BE-DIPizED AND how I-AM-beING-pressED TILL OF-WHICH accomplished!
baptism to-be-baptized-with which
Luke 12
telesqh
telesthE
G5055
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
it-SHOULD-BE-BEING-FINISHED
it-should-be-being-accomplished
12:51 dokeite oti eirhnhn paregenomhn dounai en th gh ouci 51 Suppose ye that I am come
dokeite hoti eirEnEn paregenomEn dounai en tE gE ouchi
G1380 G3754 G1515 G3854 G1325 G1722 G3588 G1093 G3780
to give peace on earth? I tell
vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor midD 1 Sg vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Part Neg you, Nay; but rather division:
YE-ARE-SEEMING that PEACE I-BESIDE-BECAME TO-GIVE IN THE LAND NOT(emph.)
ye-are-supposing I-came-along earth
legw umin all h diamerismon

legO humin all E diamerismon
G3004 G5213 G235 G2228 G1267
vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Part n_ Acc Sg m
I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) but OR THRU-PARTing
to-ye rather division
12:52 esontai gar apo tou nun pente en oikw eni 52 For from henceforth there
esontai gar apo tou nun pente en oikO heni
G2071 G1063 G575 G3588 G3568 G4002 G1722 G3624 G1520
shall be five in one house
vi Fut vxx 3 Pl Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg m Adv a_ Nom Prep n_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m divided, three against two, and
SHALL-BE for FROM THE NOW FIVE IN HOME ONE two against three.
there-shall-be house
diamemerismenoi treis epi dusin kai duo epi trisin

diamemerismenoi treis epi dusin kai duo epi trisin
G1266 G5140 G1909 G1417 G2532 G1417 G1909 G5140
vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Prep a_ Dat Pl m Conj a_ Nom Prep a_ Dat Pl m
HAVING-been-THRU-PARTED THREE ON TWO AND TWO ON THREE
having-been-divided
12:53 diamerisqhsetai pathr ef uiw kai uios epi patri 53 The father shall be divided
diameristhEsetai patEr eph huiO kai huios epi patri
G1266 G3962 G1909 G5207 G2532 G5207 G1909 G3962
against the son, and the son
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Dat Sg m against the father; the mother
SHALL-BE-BEING-THRU-PARTED FATHER ON SON AND SON ON FATHER against the daughter, and the
shall-be-being-divided daughter against the mother;
the mother in law against her
mhthr epi qugatri kai qugathr epi mhtri penqera epi thn numfhn daughter in law, and the
mEtEr epi thugatri kai thugatEr epi mEtri penthera epi tEn numphEn daughter in law against her
G3384 G1909 G2364 G2532 G2364 G1909 G3384 G3994 G1909 G3588 G3565
n_ Nom Sg f Prep n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f Prep n_ Dat Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f mother in law.
MOTHER ON DAUGHTER AND DAUGHTER ON MOTHER mother-IN-LAW ON THE BRIDE
daughter-in-law
auths kai numfh epi thn penqeran auths

autEs kai numphE epi tEn pentheran autEs
G846 G2532 G3565 G1909 G3588 G3994 G846
pp Gen Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg f
OF-her AND BRIDE ON THE mother-IN-LAW OF-her
daughter-in-law
12:54 elegen de kai tois oclois otan idhte thn nefelhn 54 . And he said also to the
elegen de kai tois ochlois hotan idEte tEn nephelEn
G3004 G1161 G2532 G3588 G3793 G3752 G1492 G3588 G3507
people, When ye see a cloud
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj Conj t_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Conj vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f rise out of the west,
He-said YET AND to-THE THRONGS when-EVER YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE CLOUD straightway ye say, There
also whenever cometh a shower; and so it is.
anatellousan apo dusmwn euqews legete ombros ercetai kai

anatellousan apo dusmOn eutheOs legete ombros erchetai kai
G393 G575 G1424 G2112 G3004 G3655 G2064 G2532
vp Pres Act Acc Sg f Prep n_ Gen Pl f Adv vi Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj
UP-risING FROM west immediately YE-ARE-sayING rainstorm IS-COMING AND
rising
ginetai outws
ginetai houtOs
G1096 G3779
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Adv
it-IS-BECOMING thus
it-is-occurring
12:55 kai otan noton pneonta legete oti kauswn estai kai 55 And when [ye see] the south
kai hotan noton pneonta legete hoti kausOn estai kai
G2532 G3752 G3558 G4154 G3004 G3754 G2742 G2071 G2532
wind blow, ye say, There will
Conj Conj n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Fut vxx 3 Sg Conj be heat; and it cometh to pass.
AND when-EVER SOUTH BLOWING YE-ARE-sayING that BURNing SHALL-BE AND
whenever south-wind scorching-heat there-shall-be
ginetai
ginetai
G1096
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
it-IS-BECOMING
it-is-occurring
Luke 12 - Luke 13
12:56 upokritai to proswpon tou ouranou kai ths ghs 56 [Ye] hypocrites, ye can
hupokritai to prosOpon tou ouranou kai tEs gEs
G5273 G3588 G4383 G3588 G3772 G2532 G3588 G1093
discern the face of the sky and
n_ Voc Pl m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f of the earth; but how is it that
hypocrites THE face OF-THE heaven AND OF-THE LAND ye do not discern this time?
hypocrites ! aspect sky earth
oidate dokimazein ton de kairon touton pws ou dokimazete

oidate dokimazein ton de kairon touton pOs hou dokimazete
G1492 G1381 G3588 G1161 G2540 G5126 G4459 G3756 G1381
vi Perf Act 2 Pl vn Pres Act t_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m pd Acc Sg m Adv Int Part Neg vi Pres Act 2 Pl
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED TO-BE-testING THE YET SEASON this how NOT YE-ARE-TESTING
ye-are-aware era how ?
12:57 ti de kai af eautwn ou krinete to dikaion 57 Yea, and why even of

ti de kai aph heautOn ou krinete to dikaion
G5101 G1161 G2532 G575 G1438 G3756 G2919 G3588 G1342
yourselves judge ye not what is
pi Acc Sg n Conj Conj Prep pf 3 Gen Pl m Part Neg vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n right?
ANY YET AND FROM selves NOT YE-ARE-JUDGING THE JUST
why ? even yourselves ye-are-deciding
12:58 ws gar upageis meta tou antidikou sou ep arconta 58 When thou goest with thine
hOs gar hupageis meta tou antidikou sou ep archonta
G5613 G1063 G5217 G3326 G3588 G476 G4675 G1909 G758
adversary to the magistrate, [as
Adv Conj vi Pres Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg m thou art] in the way, give
AS for YOU-ARE-UNDER-LEADING WITH THE INSTEAD-JUSTer OF-YOU ON chief diligence that thou mayest be
you-are-going-away plaintiff magistrate delivered from him; lest he
hale thee to the judge, and the
en th odw dos ergasian aphllacqai ap autou mhpote judge deliver thee to the
en tE hodO dos ergasian apEllachthai ap autou mEpote officer, and the officer cast
G1722 G3588 G3598 G1325 G2039 G525 G575 G846 G3379
Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg f vn Perf Pas Prep pp Gen Sg m Adv thee into prison.
IN THE WAY BE-GIVING ACTion TO-BE-FROM-CHANGED FROM him NO-?-when
be-you-giving ! to-be-cleared lest-at-some-time
katasurh se pros ton krithn kai o kriths

katasurE se pros ton kritEn kai ho kritEs
G2694 G4571 G4314 G3588 G2923 G2532 G3588 G2923
vs Aor Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
he-MAY-BE-DOWN-DRAGGING YOU TOWARD THE JUDGer AND THE JUDGer
he-may-be-dragging judge judge
se paradw tw praktori kai o praktwr se

se paradO tO praktori kai ho praktOr se
G4571 G3860 G3588 G4233 G2532 G3588 G4233 G4571
pp 2 Acc Sg vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Acc Sg
YOU MAY-BE BESIDE-GIVING to-THE PRACTISer AND THE PRACTISer YOU
may-be-giving-over sheriff sheriff
ballh eis fulakhn

ballE eis phulakEn
G906 G1519 G5438
vs Pres Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg f
MAY-BE-CASTING INTO GUARD-house
jail
12:59 legw soi ou mh exelqhs ekeiqen ews ou kai 59 I tell thee, thou shalt not
legO soi ou mE exelthEs ekeithen heOs hou kai
G3004 G4671 G3756 G3361 G1831 G1564 G2193 G3739 G2532
depart thence, till thou hast
vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg Part Neg Part Neg vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg Adv Conj pr Gen Sg m Conj paid the very last mite.
I-AM-sayING to-YOU NOT NO YOU-MAY-BE-OUT-COMING thence TILL OF-WHICH AND
you-may-be-coming-out which even
to escaton lepton apodws

to eschaton lepton apodOs
G3588 G2078 G3016 G591
t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
THE LAST lepton YOU-MAY-BE-FROM-GIVING
mite you-may-be-paying
Luke 13
13:1 parhsan de tines en autw tw kairw apaggellontes 1 . There were present at that
parEsan de tines en autO tO kairO apaggellontes
G3918 G1161 G5100 G1722 G846 G3588 G2540 G518
season some that told him of
vi Impf vxx 3 Pl Conj px Nom Pl m Prep pp Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m the Galilaeans, whose blood
WERE-BESIDE-BEING YET ANY IN SAME THE SEASON FROM-MESSAGING Pilate had mingled with their
there-were-present some occasion reporting sacrifices.
autw peri twn galilaiwn wn to aima pilatos emixen

autO peri tOn galilaiOn hOn to haima pilatos emixen
G846 G4012 G3588 G1057 G3739 G3588 G129 G4091 G3396
pp Dat Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pr Gen Pl m t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
to-Him ABOUT THE GALILEANS OF-WHOM THE BLOOD PILATE MIXES
concerning
meta twn qusiwn autwn

meta tOn thusiOn autOn
G3326 G3588 G2378 G846
Prep t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f pp Gen Pl m
WITH THE SACRIFICES OF-them
13:2 kai apokriqeis o ihsous eipen autois dokeite oti 2 And Jesus answering said
kai apokritheis ho iEsous eipen autois dokeite hoti
G2532 G611 G3588 G2424 G2036 G846 G1380 G3754
unto them, Suppose ye that
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj these Galilaeans were sinners
AND answerING THE JESUS said to-them YE-ARE-SEEMING that above all the Galilaeans,
ye-are-supposing because they suffered such
things?
oi galilaioi outoi amartwloi para pantas tous galilaious
hoi galilaioi houtoi hamartOloi para pantas tous galilaious
G3588 G1057 G3778 G268 G3844 G3956 G3588 G1057
t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m pd Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Prep a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
THE GALILEANS these missers BESIDE ALL THE GALILEANS
sinners beyond
egenonto oti toiauta peponqasin

egenonto hoti toiauta peponthasin
G1096 G3754 G5108 G3958
vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl Conj pd Acc Pl n vi 2Perf Act 3 Pl
BECAME that such THEY-HAVE-EMOTIONED
seeing-that such-things they-have-suffered
13:3 ouci legw umin all ean mh metanohte pantes 3 I tell you, Nay: but, except ye
ouchi legO humin all ean mE metanoEte pantes
G3780 G3004 G5213 G235 G1437 G3361 G3340 G3956
repent, ye shall all likewise
Part Neg vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Cond Part Neg vs Pres Act 2 Pl a_ Nom Pl m perish.
NOT(emph.) I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) but IF-EVER NO YE-MAY-BE-after-MINDING ALL
to-ye ye-may-be-repenting
wsautws apoleisqe
hOsautOs apoleisthe
G5615 G622
Adv vi Fut Mid 2 Pl
AS-SAMEly SHALL-BE-beING-destroyED
similarly ye-shall-be-perishing
13:4 h ekeinoi oi deka kai oktw ef ous epesen o 4 Or those eighteen, upon
E ekeinoi hoi deka kai oktO eph hous epesen ho
G2228 G1565 G3588 G1176 G2532 G3638 G1909 G3739 G4098 G3588
whom the tower in Siloam fell,
Part pd Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Conj a_ Nom Prep pr Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m and slew them, think ye that
OR those THE TEN AND EIGHT ON WHOM FALLS THE they were sinners above all
men that dwelt in Jerusalem?
purgos en tw silwam kai apekteinen autous dokeite oti outoi

purgos en tO silOam kai apekteinen autous dokeite hoti houtoi
G4444 G1722 G3588 G4611 G2532 G615 G846 G1380 G3754 G3778
n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg m ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj pd Nom Pl m
TOWER IN THE SILOAM AND FROM-KILLS them YE-ARE-SEEMING that these
kills ye-are-supposing
ofeiletai egenonto para pantas anqrwpous tous katoikountas en

opheiletai egenonto para pantas anthrOpous tous katoikountas en
G3781 G1096 G3844 G3956 G444 G3588 G2730 G1722
n_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl Prep a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Prep
OWErs BECAME BESIDE ALL humans THE ones-DOWN-HOMING IN
debtors beyond ones-dwelling
ierousalhm
ierousalEm
G2419
ni proper
JERUSALEM
13:5 ouci legw umin all ean mh metanohte pantes omoiws 5 I tell you, Nay: but, except ye
ouchi legO humin all ean mE metanoEte pantes homoiOs
G3780 G3004 G5213 G235 G1437 G3361 G3340 G3956 G3668
repent, ye shall all likewise
Part Neg vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Cond Part Neg vs Pres Act 2 Pl a_ Nom Pl m Adv perish.
NOT(emph.) I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) but IF-EVER NO YE-MAY-BE-after-MINDING ALL LIKE-AS
to-ye ye-may-be-repenting likewise
Luke 13
apoleisqe
apoleisthe
G622
vi Fut Mid 2 Pl
SHALL-BE-beING-destroyED
ye-shall-be-perishing
13:6 elegen de tauthn thn parabolhn sukhn eicen tis en 6 . He spake also this parable;
elegen de tautEn tEn parabolEn sukEn eichen tis en
G3004 G1161 G3778 G3588 G3850 G4808 G2192 G5100 G1722
A certain [man] had a fig tree
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj pd Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Impf Act 3 Sg px Nom Sg m Prep planted in his vineyard; and he
He-said YET this THE BESIDE-CAST FIG-tree HAD ANY IN came and sought fruit thereon,
he-told parable certain-man and found none.
tw ampelwni autou pefuteumenhn kai hlqen karpon zhtwn

tO ampelOni autou pephuteumenEn kai Elthen karpon zEtOn
G3588 G290 G846 G5452 G2532 G2064 G2590 G2212
t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
THE VINEyard OF-him HAVING-been-plantED AND he-CAME FRUIT SEEKING
en auth kai ouc euren

en autE kai ouch heuren
G1722 G846 G2532 G3756 G2147
Prep pp Dat Sg f Conj Part Neg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
IN her AND NOT he-FOUND
herit
13:7 eipen de pros ton ampelourgon idou tria eth 7 Then said he unto the dresser
eipen de pros ton ampelourgon idou tria etE
G2036 G1161 G4314 G3588 G289 G2400 G5140 G2094
of his vineyard, Behold, these
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n three years I come seeking fruit
he-said YET TOWARD THE GRAPE-VINE-ACTer BE-PERCEIVING THREE YEARS on this fig tree, and find none:
vineyardist lo ! cut it down; why cumbereth it
the ground?
ercomai zhtwn karpon en th sukh tauth kai ouc
erchomai zEtOn karpon en tE sukE tautE kai ouch
G2064 G2212 G2590 G1722 G3588 G4808 G3778 G2532 G3756
vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f Conj Part Neg
I-AM-COMING SEEKING FRUIT IN THE FIG-tree this AND NOT
euriskw ekkoyon authn ina ti kai thn ghn katargei

heuriskO ekkopson autEn hina ti kai tEn gEn katargei
G2147 G1581 G846 G2443 G5101 G2532 G3588 G1093 G2673
vi Pres Act 1 Sg vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp Acc Sg f Conj pi Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg
I-AM-FINDING OUT-STRIKE her THAT ANY AND THE LAND IS-DOWN-UN-ACTING
hew-down-you ! herit why ? also it-is-wasting
13:8 o de apokriqeis legei autw kurie afes authn 8 And he answering said unto
ho de apokritheis legei autO kurie aphes autEn
G3588 G1161 G611 G3004 G846 G2962 G863 G846
him, Lord, let it alone this year
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp Acc Sg f also, till I shall dig about it,
THE-one YET answerING IS-sayING to-him master ! FROM-LET her and dung [it]:
the he-is-saying Lord ! leave-you ! herit
kai touto to etos ews otou skayw peri authn kai

kai touto to etos heOs hotou skapsO peri autEn kai
G2532 G5124 G3588 G2094 G2193 G3755 G4626 G4012 G846 G2532
Conj pd Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj pr Gen Sg n Att vs Aor Act 1 Sg Prep pp Acc Sg f Conj
AND this THE YEAR TILL OF-WHICH-ANY I-SHALL-BE-DIGGING ABOUT her AND
also which-any herit
balw koprian
balO koprian
G906 G2874
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg n_ Acc Sg f
I-SHOULD-BE-CASTING MANURE
13:9 kan men poihsh karpon ei de mhge eis to 9 And if it bear fruit, [well]:
kan men poiEsE karpon ei de mEge eis to
G2579 G3303 G4160 G2590 G1487 G1161 G3361 G1519 G3588
and if not, [then] after that thou
Cond Con Part vs Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Cond Conj Part Neg Prep t_ Acc Sg n shalt cut it down.
AND-[IF]-EVER INDEED it-SHOULD-BE-DOING FRUIT IF YET NO-SURELY INTO THE
and-if-ever it-should-be-producing surely-no
mellon ekkoyeis authn

mellon ekkopseis autEn
G3195 G1581 G846
vp Pres Act Acc Sg n vi Fut Act 2 Sg pp Acc Sg f
beING-ABOUT YOU-SHALL-BE-OUT-STRIKING her
impending-year you-shall-be-hewing-down herit
13:10 hn de didaskwn en mia twn sunagwgwn en tois 10 . And he was teaching in

En de didaskOn en mia tOn sunagOgOn en tois
G2258 G1161 G1321 G1722 G1520 G3588 G4864 G1722 G3588
one of the synagogues on the
vi Impf vxx 3 Sg Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep a_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f Prep t_ Dat Pl n sabbath.
He-WAS YET TEACHING IN ONE OF-THE TOGETHER-LEADS IN THE
synagogues
Luke 13
sabbasin
sabbasin
G4521
n_ Dat Pl n
SABBATHS
13:11 kai idou gunh hn pneuma ecousa asqeneias eth 11 And, behold, there was a
kai idou gunE En pneuma echousa astheneias etE
G2532 G2400 G1135 G2258 G4151 G2192 G769 G2094
woman which had a spirit of
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg f vi Impf vxx 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Acc Pl n infirmity eighteen years, and
AND BE-PERCEIVING WOMAN WAS spirit HAVING OF-UN-FIRMness YEARS was bowed together, and could
lo ! of-infirmity in no wise lift up [herself].
deka kai oktw kai hn sugkuptousa kai mh dunamenh

deka kai oktO kai En sugkuptousa kai mE dunamenE
G1176 G2532 G3638 G2532 G2258 G4794 G2532 G3361 G1410
a_ Nom Conj a_ Nom Conj vi Impf vxx 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg f Conj Part Neg vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg f
TEN AND EIGHT AND she-WAS TOGETHER-BENDING AND NO beING-ABLE
being-bent-together
anakuyai eis to panteles

anakupsai eis to panteles
G352 G1519 G3588 G3838
vn Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n
TO-UP-BEND INTO THE EVERY-FINISH
to-unbend uttermost
13:12 idwn de authn o ihsous prosefwnhsen kai eipen 12 And when Jesus saw her, he
idOn de autEn ho iEsous prosephOnEsen kai eipen
G1492 G1161 G846 G3588 G2424 G4377 G2532 G2036
called [her to him], and said
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj pp Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg unto her, Woman, thou art
PERCEIVING YET her THE JESUS TOWARD-SOUNDS AND said loosed from thine infirmity.
shouts-to
auth gunai apolelusai ths asqeneias sou

autE gunai apolelusai tEs astheneias sou
G846 G1135 G630 G3588 G769 G4675
pp Dat Sg f n_ Voc Sg f vi Perf Pas 2 Sg t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg
to-her WOMAN ! YOU-HAVE-been-FROM-LOOSED OF-THE UN-FIRMness OF-YOU
you-have-been-released infirmity
13:13 kai epeqhken auth tas ceiras kai paracrhma anwrqwqh kai 13 And he laid [his] hands on
kai epethEken autE tas cheiras kai parachrEma anOrthOthE kai
G2532 G2007 G846 G3588 G5495 G2532 G3916 G461 G2532
her: and immediately she was
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Conj Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj made straight, and glorified
AND He-ON-PLACES to-her THE HANDS AND instantly she-WAS-UP-ERECTED AND God.
he-places-on her she-was-made-erect-again
edoxazen ton qeon

edoxazen ton theon
G1392 G3588 G2316
vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
esteemizED THE God
she-glorified
13:14 apokriqeis de o arcisunagwgos aganaktwn oti tw 14 And the ruler of the

apokritheis de ho archisunagOgos aganaktOn hoti tO
G611 G1161 G3588 G752 G23 G3754 G3588
synagogue answered with
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj t_ Dat Sg n indignation, because that Jesus
answerING YET THE chief-of-TOGETHER-LEAD resentING that to-THE had healed on the sabbath day,
chief-of-the-synagogue and said unto the people, There
are six days in which men
sabbatw eqerapeusen o ihsous elegen tw oclw ex hmerai ought to work: in them
sabbatO etherapeusen ho iEsous elegen tO ochlO hex hEmerai therefore come and be healed,
G4521 G2323 G3588 G2424 G3004 G3588 G3793 G1803 G2250
n_ Dat Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m a_ Nom n_ Nom Pl f and not on the sabbath day.
SABBATH curES THE JESUS he-said to-THE THRONG SIX DAYS
said
eisin en ais dei ergazesqai en tautais oun

eisin en hais dei ergazesthai en tautais oun
G1526 G1722 G3739 G1163 G2038 G1722 G3778 G3767
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl Prep pr Dat Pl f vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg vn Pres midD/pasD Prep pd Dat Pl f Conj
ARE IN WHICH it-IS-BINDING TO-BE-workING IN these THEN
there-are
ercomenoi qerapeuesqe kai mh th hmera tou sabbatou

erchomenoi therapeuesthe kai mE tE hEmera tou sabbatou
G2064 G2323 G2532 G3361 G3588 G2250 G3588 G4521
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m vm Pres Pas 2 Pl Conj Part Neg t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
COMING BE-YE-beING-curED AND NO to-THE DAY OF-THE SABBATH
be-ye-being-cured !
13:15 apekriqh oun autw o kurios kai eipen upokrita ekastos 15 The Lord then answered
apekrithE oun autO ho kurios kai eipen hupokrita hekastos
G611 G3767 G846 G3588 G2962 G2532 G2036 G5273 G1538
him, and said, [Thou]
vi Aor midD 3 Sg Conj pp Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Voc Sg m a_ Nom Sg m hypocrite, doth not each one of
answerED THEN to-him THE Master AND said hypocrite ! EACH you on the sabbath loose his ox
him Lord or [his] ass from the stall, and
Luke 13
lead [him] away to watering?

umwn tw sabbatw ou luei ton boun autou h ton
humOn tO sabbatO ou luei ton boun autou E ton
G5216 G3588 G4521 G3756 G3089 G3588 G1016 G846 G2228 G3588
pp 2 Gen Pl t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m Part t_ Acc Sg m
OF-YOU(p) to-THE SABBATH NOT IS-LOOSING THE OX OF-him OR THE
of-ye he-is-loosing
onon apo ths fatnhs kai apagagwn potizei

onon apo tEs phatnEs kai apagagOn potizei
G3688 G575 G3588 G5336 G2532 G520 G4222
n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ASS FROM THE MANGER AND FROM-LEADING it-IS-DRINKizING
leading-away-it is-giving-to-drink-it
13:16 tauthn de qugatera abraam ousan hn edhsen o 16 And ought not this woman,
tautEn de thugatera abraam ousan hEn edEsen ho
G3778 G1161 G2364 G11 G5607 G3739 G1210 G3588
being a daughter of Abraham,
pd Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f ni proper vp Pres vxx Acc Sg f pr Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m whom Satan hath bound, lo,
this YET DAUGHTER of-ABRAHAM BEING WHOM BINDS THE these eighteen years, be loosed
this-woman of-Abraham from this bond on the sabbath
day?
satanas idou deka kai oktw eth ouk edei luqhnai
satanas idou deka kai oktO etE ouk edei luthEnai
G4567 G2400 G1176 G2532 G3638 G2094 G3756 G1163 G3089
n_ Nom Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Nom Conj a_ Nom n_ Acc Pl n Part Neg vi Impf im-Act 3 Sg vn Aor Pas
SATAN (Heb. adversary) BE-PERCEIVING TEN AND EIGHT YEARS NOT it-WAS-BINDING TO-BE-LOOSED
Satan lo ! she-must
apo tou desmou toutou th hmera tou sabbatou

apo tou desmou toutou tE hEmera tou sabbatou
G575 G3588 G1199 G5127 G3588 G2250 G3588 G4521
Prep t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
FROM THE BOND this to-THE DAY OF-THE SABBATH
13:17 kai tauta legontos autou kathscunonto pantes oi 17 And when he had said these
kai tauta legontos autou katEschunonto pantes hoi
G2532 G5023 G3004 G846 G2617 G3956 G3588
things, all his adversaries were
Conj pd Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m vi Impf Pas 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m ashamed: and all the people
AND these OF-sayING OF-Him were-DOWN-VILED ALL THE rejoiced for all the glorious
these-things were-mortified things that were done by him.
antikeimenoi autw kai pas o oclos ecairen epi pasin

antikeimenoi autO kai pas ho ochlos echairen epi pasin
G480 G846 G2532 G3956 G3588 G3793 G5463 G1909 G3956
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m pp Dat Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi Impf Act 3 Sg Prep a_ Dat Pl n
ones-opposING to-Him AND EVERY THE THRONG JOYED ON ALL
ones-opposing him entire rejoiced
tois endoxois tois ginomenois up autou

tois endoxois tois ginomenois hup autou
G3588 G1741 G3588 G1096 G5259 G846
t_ Dat Pl n a_ Dat Pl n t_ Dat Pl n vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl n Prep pp Gen Sg m
THE IN-esteemeds THE BECOMING by Him
glorious-things
13:18 elegen de tini omoia estin h basileia tou qeou 18 . Then said he, Unto what is
elegen de tini homoia estin hE basileia tou theou
G3004 G1161 G5101 G3664 G2076 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316
the kingdom of God like? and
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj pi Dat Sg m a_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m whereunto shall I resemble it?
He-said YET to-ANY LIKE IS THE KINGdom OF-THE God
to-what ?
kai tini omoiwsw authn

kai tini homoiOsO autEn
G2532 G5101 G3666 G846
Conj pi Dat Sg m vi Fut Act 1 Sg pp Acc Sg f
AND to-ANY I-SHALL-BE-LIKenING her
to-what ? herit
13:19 omoia estin kokkw sinapews on labwn anqrwpos 19 It is like a grain of mustard
homoia estin kokkO sinapeOs hon labOn anthrOpos
G3664 G2076 G2848 G4615 G3739 G2983 G444
seed, which a man took, and
a_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg m n_ Gen Sg n pr Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m cast into his garden; and it
LIKE it-IS to-KERNEL OF-MUSTARD WHICH GETTING human grew, and waxed a great tree;
and the fowls of the air lodged
in the branches of it.
ebalen eis khpon eautou kai huxhsen kai egeneto eis dendron
ebalen eis kEpon heautou kai EuxEsen kai egeneto eis dendron
G906 G1519 G2779 G1438 G2532 G837 G2532 G1096 G1519 G1186
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg m pf 3 Gen Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Sg n
CASTS INTO GARDEN OF-self AND it-GROWS AND BECAME INTO TREE
of-selfhim
mega kai ta peteina tou ouranou kateskhnwsen en tois

mega kai ta peteina tou ouranou kateskEnOsen en tois
G3173 G2532 G3588 G4071 G3588 G3772 G2681 G1722 G3588
a_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Pl m
GREAT AND THE flyers OF-THE heaven DOWN-BOOTHS IN THE
flying-creatures roosts among
Luke 13
kladois autou
kladois autou
G2798 G846
n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg n
boughs OF-it
13:20 kai palin eipen tini omoiwsw thn basileian tou 20 And again he said,
kai palin eipen tini homoiOsO tEn basileian tou
G2532 G3825 G2036 G5101 G3666 G3588 G932 G3588
Whereunto shall I liken the
Conj Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pi Dat Sg n vi Fut Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m kingdom of God?
AND AGAIN He-said to-ANY I-SHALL-BE-LIKenING THE KINGdom OF-THE
to-what ?
qeou
theou
G2316
n_ Gen Sg m
God
13:21 omoia estin zumh hn labousa gunh enekruyen eis 21 It is like leaven, which a
homoia estin zumE hEn labousa gunE enekrupsen eis
G3664 G2076 G2219 G3739 G2983 G1135 G1470 G1519
woman took and hid in three
a_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg f pr Acc Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep measures of meal, till the
LIKE it-IS to-FERMENT WHICH GETTING WOMAN IN-HIDES INTO whole was leavened.
to-leaven hides-in
aleurou sata tria ews ou ezumwqh olon

aleurou sata tria heOs hou ezumOthE holon
G224 G4568 G5140 G2193 G3739 G2220 G3650
n_ Gen Sg n n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n Conj pr Gen Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg n
OF-MEAL SATONS THREE TILL OF-WHICH WAS-FERMENTED WHOLE
seahs which was-leavened
13:22 kai dieporeueto kata poleis kai kwmas didaskwn kai poreian 22 And he went through the
kai dieporeueto kata poleis kai kOmas didaskOn kai poreian
G2532 G1279 G2596 G4172 G2532 G2968 G1321 G2532 G4197
cities and villages, teaching,
Conj vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Pl f Conj n_ Acc Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg f and journeying toward
AND He-THRU-WENT according-to cities AND VILLAGES TEACHING AND GOing Jerusalem.
he-went-through
poioumenos eis ierousalhm

poioumenos eis ierousalEm
G4160 G1519 G2419
vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m Prep ni proper
DOING INTO JERUSALEM
making
13:23 eipen de tis autw kurie ei oligoi oi swzomenoi 23 . Then said one unto him,
eipen de tis autO kurie ei oligoi hoi sOzomenoi
G2036 G1161 G5100 G846 G2962 G1487 G3641 G3588 G4982
Lord, are there few that be
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj px Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg m Cond a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m saved? And he said unto them,
said YET ANY to-Him Master ! IF FEW THE ones-beING-SAVED
someone Lord ! ones-being-saved
o de eipen pros autous

ho de eipen pros autous
G3588 G1161 G2036 G4314 G846
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Acc Pl m
THE YET He-said TOWARD them
13:24 agwnizesqe eiselqein dia ths stenhs pulhs oti polloi 24 Strive to enter in at the strait
agOnizesthe eiselthein dia tEs stenEs pulEs hoti polloi
G75 G1525 G1223 G3588 G4728 G4439 G3754 G4183
gate: for many, I say unto you,
vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj a_ Nom Pl m will seek to enter in, and shall
BE-CONTENDING TO-BE-INTO-COMING THRU THE CRAMPED GATE that MANY not be able.
be-ye-struggling ! to-be-entering through
legw umin zhthsousin eiselqein kai ouk iscusousin

legO humin zEtEsousin eiselthein kai ouk ischusousin
G3004 G5213 G2212 G1525 G2532 G3756 G2480
vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl vi Fut Act 3 Pl vn 2Aor Act Conj Part Neg vi Fut Act 3 Pl
I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) SHALL-BE-SEEKING TO-BE-INTO-COMING AND NOT THEY-SHALL-BE-beING-STRONG
to-ye to-be-entering shall-be-being-strong
13:25 af ou an egerqh o oikodespoths kai 25 When once the master of the

aph hou an egerthE ho oikodespotEs kai
G575 G3739 G302 G1453 G3588 G3617 G2532
house is risen up, and hath shut
Prep pr Gen Sg m Part vs Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj to the door, and ye begin to
FROM WHICH EVER MAY-BE-BEING-ROUSED THE HOME-OWNer AND stand without, and to knock at
householder the door, saying, Lord, Lord,
open unto us; and he shall
apokleish thn quran kai arxhsqe exw estanai kai answer and say unto you, I
apokleisE tEn thuran kai arxEsthe exO hestanai kai know you not whence ye are:
G608 G3588 G2374 G2532 G756 G1854 G2476 G2532
vs Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj vs Aor Mid 2 Pl Adv vn Perf Act Conj
SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOCKING THE DOOR AND YE-SHOULD-BE-beginnING OUT TO-HAVE-STOOD AND
should-be-latching outside to-stand
Luke 13
krouein thn quran legontes kurie kurie anoixon hmin kai

krouein tEn thuran legontes kurie kurie anoixon hEmin kai
G2925 G3588 G2374 G3004 G2962 G2962 G455 G2254 G2532
vn Pres Act t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Voc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl Conj
TO-BE-KNOCKING THE DOOR sayING Master ! Master ! UP-OPEN to-US AND
Lord ! Lord ! open-you !
apokriqeis erei umin ouk oida umas poqen

apokritheis erei humin ouk oida humas pothen
G611 G2046 G5213 G3756 G1492 G5209 G4159
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Part Neg vi Perf Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl Adv Int
answerING He-SHALL-BE-declarING to-YOU(p) NOT I-HAVE-PERCEIVED YOU(p) ?-WHICH-PLACE
to-ye I-am-acquainted-with ye whence ?
este
este
G2075
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
YE-ARE
13:26 tote arxesqe legein efagomen enwpion sou kai epiomen 26 Then shall ye begin to say,
tote arxesthe legein ephagomen enOpion sou kai epiomen
G5119 G756 G3004 G5315 G1799 G4675 G2532 G4095
We have eaten and drunk in
Adv vi Fut Mid 2 Pl vn Pres Act vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl Adv pp 2 Gen Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl thy presence, and thou hast
then SHOULD-YE-BE-beginnING TO-BE-sayING WE-ATE IN-VIEW OF-YOU AND WE-DRANK taught in our streets.
ye-should-be-beginning in-sight-of you
kai en tais plateiais hmwn edidaxas

kai en tais plateiais hEmOn edidaxas
G2532 G1722 G3588 G4113 G2257 G1321
Conj Prep t_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f pp 1 Gen Pl vi Aor Act 2 Sg
AND IN THE BROADS OF-US YOU-TEACH
squares
13:27 kai erei legw umin ouk oida umas 27 But he shall say, I tell you, I
kai erei legO humin ouk oida humas
G2532 G2046 G3004 G5213 G3756 G1492 G5209
know you not whence ye are;
Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Part Neg vi Perf Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl depart from me, all [ye]
AND He-SHALL-BE-declarING I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) NOT I-HAVE-PERCEIVED YOU(p) workers of iniquity.
to-ye I-am-acquainted-with
poqen este aposthte ap emou pantes oi ergatai

pothen este apostEte ap emou pantes hoi ergatai
G4159 G2075 G868 G575 G1700 G3956 G3588 G2040
Adv Int vi Pres vxx 2 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep pp 1 Gen Sg a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
?-WHICH-PLACE YE-ARE BE-YE-FROM-STANDING FROM ME ALL THE ACTers
whence ? be-ye-withdrawing ! workers
ths adikias
tEs adikias
G3588 G93
t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE UN-JUSTness
injustice
13:28 ekei estai o klauqmos kai o brugmos twn odontwn 28 There shall be weeping and
ekei estai ho klauthmos kai ho brugmos tOn odontOn
G1563 G2071 G3588 G2805 G2532 G3588 G1030 G3588 G3599
gnashing of teeth, when ye
Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m shall see Abraham, and Isaac,
there SHALL-BE THE LAMENTing AND THE GNASHing OF-THE TEETH and Jacob, and all the
lamentation prophets, in the kingdom of
God, and you [yourselves]
otan oyhsqe abraam kai isaak kai iakwb kai pantas tous thrust out.
hotan opsEsthe abraam kai isaak kai iakOb kai pantas tous
G3752 G3700 G11 G2532 G2464 G2532 G2384 G2532 G3956 G3588
Conj vs Aor midD 2 Pl ni proper Conj ni proper Conj ni proper Conj a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
when-EVER YE-SHOULD-BE-VIEWING ABRAHAM AND ISAAC AND JACOB AND ALL THE
whenever ye-should-be-seeing
profhtas en th basileia tou qeou umas de ekballomenous

prophEtas en tE basileia tou theou humas de ekballomenous
G4396 G1722 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316 G5209 G1161 G1544
n_ Acc Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Acc Pl Conj vp Pres Pas Acc Pl m
BEFORE-AVERers IN THE KINGdom OF-THE God YOU(p) YET beING-OUT-CAST
prophets ye being-cast-out
exw
exO
G1854
Adv
OUT
outside
13:29 kai hxousin apo anatolwn kai dusmwn kai apo borra kai 29 And they shall come from
kai hExousin apo anatolOn kai dusmOn kai apo borra kai
G2532 G2240 G575 G395 G2532 G1424 G2532 G575 G1005 G2532
the east, and [from] the west,
Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl Prep n_ Gen Pl f Conj n_ Gen Pl f Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg m Conj and from the north, and [from]
AND THEY-SHALL-BE-ARRIVING FROM risings ( east ) AND west AND FROM NORTH AND the south, and shall sit down in
east the kingdom of God.
Luke 13
notou kai anakliqhsontai en th basileia tou qeou

notou kai anaklithEsontai en tE basileia tou theou
G3558 G2532 G347 G1722 G3588 G932 G3588 G2316
n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
SOUTH AND THEY-SHALL-BE-BEING-reCLINED IN THE KINGdom OF-THE God
they-shall-be-being-made-to-recline
13:30 kai idou eisin escatoi oi esontai prwtoi kai 30 And, behold, there are last
kai idou eisin eschatoi hoi esontai prOtoi kai
G2532 G2400 G1526 G2078 G3739 G2071 G4413 G2532
which shall be first, and there
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Pres vxx 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m pr Nom Pl m vi Fut vxx 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m Conj are first which shall be last.
AND BE-PERCEIVING THEY-ARE LAST-ones WHO SHALL-BE BEFORE-most-ones AND
lo ! last-ones first-ones
eisin prwtoi oi esontai escatoi

eisin prOtoi hoi esontai eschatoi
G1526 G4413 G3739 G2071 G2078
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m pr Nom Pl m vi Fut vxx 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m
THEY-ARE BEFORE-most-ones WHO SHALL-BE LAST-ones
first-ones last-ones
13:31 en auth th hmera proshlqon tines farisaioi legontes 31 . The same day there came
en autE tE hEmera prosElthon tines pharisaioi legontes
G1722 G846 G3588 G2250 G4334 G5100 G5330 G3004
certain of the Pharisees, saying
Prep pp Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl px Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m unto him, Get thee out, and
IN SAME THE DAY TOWARD-CAME ANY PHARISEES sayING depart hence: for Herod will
approached some kill thee.
autw exelqe kai poreuou enteuqen oti hrwdhs qelei

autO exelthe kai poreuou enteuthen hoti hErOdEs thelei
G846 G1831 G2532 G4198 G1782 G3754 G2264 G2309
pp Dat Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Conj vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Adv Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to-Him BE-OUT-COMING AND BE-GOING hence that HEROD IS-WILLING
be-you-coming-out ! be-you-going !
se apokteinai
se apokteinai
G4571 G615
pp 2 Acc Sg vn Aor Act
YOU TO-FROM-KILL
to-kill
13:32 kai eipen autois poreuqentes eipate th alwpeki tauth 32 And he said unto them, Go
kai eipen autois poreuthentes eipate tE alOpeki tautE
G2532 G2036 G846 G4198 G2036 G3588 G258 G3778
ye, and tell that fox, Behold, I
Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f cast out devils, and I do cures
AND He-said to-them BEING-GONE say to-THE JACKAL this to day and to morrow, and the
say-ye ! third [day] I shall be perfected.
idou ekballw daimonia kai iaseis epitelw shmeron kai aurion

idou ekballO daimonia kai iaseis epitelO sEmeron kai aurion
G2400 G1544 G1140 G2532 G2392 G2005 G4594 G2532 G839
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg n_ Acc Pl n Conj n_ Acc Pl f vi Pres Act 1 Sg Adv Conj Adv
BE-PERCEIVING I-AM-OUT-CASTING demons AND HEALings I-AM-ON-FINISHING toDAY AND MORROW
lo ! I-am-casting-out I-am-performing tomorrow
kai th trith teleioumai

kai tE tritE teleioumai
G2532 G3588 G5154 G5048
Conj t_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
AND to-THE third I-AM-beING-maturED
third-day I-am-being-perfected
13:33 plhn dei me shmeron kai aurion kai th ecomenh 33 Nevertheless I must walk to
plEn dei me sEmeron kai aurion kai tE echomenE
G4133 G1163 G3165 G4594 G2532 G839 G2532 G3588 G2192
day, and to morrow, and the
Adv vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg Adv Conj Adv Conj t_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Pas Dat Sg f [day] following: for it cannot
MOREly it-IS-BINDING ME toDAY AND MORROW AND to-THE HAVING be that a prophet perish out of
moreover tomorrow one-having Jerusalem.
poreuesqai oti ouk endecetai profhthn apolesqai exw

poreuesthai hoti ouk endechetai prophEtEn apolesthai exO
G4198 G3754 G3756 G1735 G4396 G622 G1854
vn Pres midD/pasD Conj Part Neg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m vn 2Aor Mid Adv
TO-BE-GOING that NOT it-IS-IN-RECEIVING BEFORE-AVERer TO-BE-beING-destroyED OUT
it-is-being-credible prophet to-be-perishing outside
ierousalhm
ierousalEm
G2419
ni proper
of-JERUSALEM
of-Jerusalem
13:34 ierousalhm ierousalhm h apokteinousa tous profhtas kai 34 O Jerusalem, Jerusalem,

ierousalEm ierousalEm hE apokteinousa tous prophEtas kai
G2419 G2419 G3588 G615 G3588 G4396 G2532
which killest the prophets, and
ni proper ni proper t_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj stonest them that are sent unto
JERUSALEM JERUSALEM THE one-FROM-KILLING THE BEFORE-AVERers AND thee; how often would I have
one-killing prophets gathered thy children together,
Luke 13 - Luke 14
as a hen [doth gather] her

liqobolousa tous apestalmenous pros authn posakis hqelhsa brood under [her] wings, and
lithobolousa tous apestalmenous pros autEn posakis EthelEsa
G3036 G3588 G649 G4314 G846 G4212 G2309 ye would not!
vp Pres Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Pl m vp Perf Pas Acc Pl m Prep pp Acc Sg f Adv vi Aor Act 1 Sg
STONE-CASTING THE ones-HAVING-been-commissionED TOWARD her how-many-times I-WILL
one-pelting-with-stones ones-having-been-dispatched how-many-times ?
episunaxai ta tekna sou on tropon ornis thn eauths

episunaxai ta tekna sou hon tropon ornis tEn heautEs
G1996 G3588 G5043 G4675 G3739 G5158 G3733 G3588 G1438
vn Aor Act t_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pp 2 Gen Sg pr Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f pf 3 Gen Sg f
TO-ON-TOGETHER-LEAD THE offsprings OF-YOU WHICH manner BIRD THE OF-self
to-assemble children hen of-herself
nossian upo tas pterugas kai ouk hqelhsate

nossian hupo tas pterugas kai ouk EthelEsate
G3555 G5259 G3588 G4420 G2532 G3756 G2309
n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Conj Part Neg vi Aor Act 2 Pl
YOUNG UNDER THE flyers AND NOT YE-WILL
brood wings
13:35 idou afietai umin o oikos umwn erhmos amhn 35 Behold, your house is left
idou aphietai humin ho oikos humOn erEmos amEn
G2400 G863 G5213 G3588 G3624 G5216 G2048 G281
unto you desolate: and verily I
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg vi Pres Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl a_ Nom Sg m Hebrew say unto you, Ye shall not see
BE-PERCEIVING IS-beING-FROM-LET to-YOU(p) THE HOME OF-YOU(p) DESOLATE AMEN me, until [the time] come when
lo ! is-being-left to-ye house of-ye verily ye shall say, Blessed [is] he
that cometh in the name of the
de legw umin oti ou mh me idhte ews an Lord.
de legO humin hoti ou mE me idEte heOs an
G1161 G3004 G5213 G3754 G3756 G3361 G3165 G1492 G2193 G302
Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl Conj Part Neg Part Neg pp 1 Acc Sg vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl Conj Part
YET I-AM-sayING to-YOU(p) that NOT NO ME YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING TILL EVER
to-ye
hxh ote eiphte euloghmenos o ercomenos en

ExE hote eipEte eulogEmenos ho erchomenos en
G2240 G3753 G2036 G2127 G3588 G2064 G1722
vs Aor Act 3 Sg Adv vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m Prep
it-SHOULD-BE-ARRIVING when YE-MAY-BE-sayING beING-blessED THE One-COMING IN
one-coming
onomati kuriou
onomati kuriou
G3686 G2962
n_ Dat Sg n n_ Gen Sg m
NAME OF-Master
of-Lord
Luke 14
14:1 kai egeneto en tw elqein auton eis oikon tinos 1 . And it came to pass, as he
kai egeneto en tO elthein auton eis oikon tinos
G2532 G1096 G1722 G3588 G2064 G846 G1519 G3624 G5100
went into the house of one of
Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg m vn 2Aor Act pp Acc Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg m px Gen Sg m the chief Pharisees to eat bread
AND it-BECAME IN THE TO-BE-COMING Him INTO HOME OF-ANY on the sabbath day, that they
it-occurred house of-certain-one watched him.
twn arcontwn twn farisaiwn sabbatw fagein arton kai autoi

tOn archontOn tOn pharisaiOn sabbatO phagein arton kai autoi
G3588 G758 G3588 G5330 G4521 G5315 G740 G2532 G846
t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg n vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg m Conj pp Nom Pl m
OF-THE chiefs OF-THE PHARISEES to-SABBATH TO-BE-EATING BREAD AND they
hsan parathroumenoi auton

Esan paratEroumenoi auton
G2258 G3906 G846
vi Impf vxx 3 Pl vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m
WERE BESIDE-KEEPING Him
scrutinizing
14:2 kai idou anqrwpos tis hn udrwpikos emprosqen 2 And, behold, there was a
kai idou anthrOpos tis En hudrOpikos emprosthen
G2532 G2400 G444 G5100 G2258 G5203 G1715
certain man before him which
Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Nom Sg m px Nom Sg m vi Impf vxx 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m Prep had the dropsy.
AND BE-PERCEIVING human ANY WAS WET-VIEWic IN-TOWARD-PLACE
lo ! certain dropsical in-front-of
autou
autou
G846
pp Gen Sg m
OF-Him
him
14:3 kai apokriqeis o ihsous eipen pros tous nomikous kai 3 And Jesus answering spake
kai apokritheis ho iEsous eipen pros tous nomikous kai
G2532 G611 G3588 G2424 G2036 G4314 G3588 G3544 G2532
unto the lawyers and Pharisees,
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Conj saying, Is it lawful to heal on
AND answerING THE JESUS said TOWARD THE LAWers AND the sabbath day?
spoke lawyers
farisaious legwn ei exestin tw sabbatw qerapeuein

pharisaious legOn ei exestin tO sabbatO therapeuein
G5330 G3004 G1487 G1832 G3588 G4521 G2323
n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Cond vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n vn Pres Act
PHARISEES sayING IF it-IS-allowed to-THE SABBATH TO-BE-curING
14:4 oi de hsucasan kai epilabomenos iasato auton kai 4 And they held their peace.
hoi de hEsuchasan kai epilabomenos iasato auton kai
G3588 G1161 G2270 G2532 G1949 G2390 G846 G2532
And he took [him], and healed
t_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m Conj him, and let him go;
THE-ones YET QUIETize AND ON-GETTING He-HEALS him AND
the they-are-quiet getting-hold-of-him
apelusen
apelusen
G630
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
FROM-LOOSES
dismisses-him
14:5 kai apokriqeis pros autous eipen tinos umwn onos h 5 And answered them, saying,
kai apokritheis pros autous eipen tinos humOn onos E
G2532 G611 G4314 G846 G2036 G5101 G5216 G3688 G2228
Which of you shall have an ass
Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m Prep pp Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pi Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl n_ Nom Sg m Part or an ox fallen into a pit, and
AND answerING TOWARD them He-said OF-ANY OF-YOU(p) ASS OR will not straightway pull him
of-whom ? of-ye out on the sabbath day?
bous eis frear empeseitai kai ouk euqews anaspasei

bous eis phrear empeseitai kai ouk eutheOs anaspasei
G1016 G1519 G5421 G1706 G2532 G3756 G2112 G385
n_ Nom Sg m Prep n_ Acc Sg n vi Fut midD 3 Sg Conj Part Neg Adv vi Fut Act 3 Sg
OX INTO WELL SHALL-BE-IN-FALLING AND NOT immediately he-SHALL-BE-UP-PULLING
shall-be-falling-into he-shall-be-pulling-up
auton en th hmera tou sabbatou

auton en tE hEmera tou sabbatou
G846 G1722 G3588 G2250 G3588 G4521
pp Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
him IN THE DAY OF-THE SABBATH
14:6 kai ouk iscusan antapokriqhnai autw pros tauta 6 And they could not answer
kai ouk ischusan antapokrithEnai autO pros tauta
G2532 G3756 G2480 G470 G846 G4314 G5023
him again to these things.
Conj Part Neg vi Aor Act 3 Pl vn Aor pasD pp Dat Sg m Prep pd Acc Pl n
AND NOT THEY-are-STRONG TO-INSTEAD-answer to-Him TOWARD these
to-answer-again him these-things
Luke 14
14:7 elegen de pros tous keklhmenous parabolhn epecwn 7 . And he put forth a parable
elegen de pros tous keklEmenous parabolEn epechOn
G3004 G1161 G4314 G3588 G2564 G3850 G1907
to those which were bidden,
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj Prep t_ Acc Pl m vp Perf Pas Acc Pl m n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m when he marked how they
He-said YET TOWARD THE ones-HAVING-been-CALLED BESIDE-CAST ON-HAVING chose out the chief rooms;
he-told ones-having-been-invited parable attending saying unto them,
pws tas prwtoklisias exelegonto legwn pros autous

pOs tas prOtoklisias exelegonto legOn pros autous
G4459 G3588 G4411 G1586 G3004 G4314 G846
Adv t_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vi Impf Mid 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Prep pp Acc Pl m
how THE BEFORE-most-CLINES THEY-chose sayING TOWARD them
first-reclining-places
14:8 otan klhqhs upo tinos eis gamous mh 8 When thou art bidden of any
hotan klEthEs hupo tinos eis gamous mE
G3752 G2564 G5259 G5100 G1519 G1062 G3361
[man] to a wedding, sit not
Conj vs Aor Pas 2 Sg Prep px Gen Sg m Prep n_ Acc Pl m Part Neg down in the highest room; lest
when-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-BEING-CALLED by ANY INTO MARRIAGES NO a more honourable man than
whenever you-may-be-being-invited anyone wedding-festivities thou be bidden of him;
katakliqhs eis thn prwtoklisian mhpote entimoteros

kataklithEs eis tEn prOtoklisian mEpote entimoteros
G2625 G1519 G3588 G4411 G3379 G1784
vs Aor Pas 2 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Adv a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
YOU-MAY-BE-BEING-DOWN-CLINED INTO THE BEFORE-most-CLINE NO-?-when more-IN-VALUED
you-may-be-being-reclined first-reclining-place lest-at-some-time one-more-held-in-honor
sou h keklhmenos up autou

sou E keklEmenos hup autou
G4675 G5600 G2564 G5259 G846
pp 2 Gen Sg vs Pres vxx 3 Sg vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m Prep pp Gen Sg m
OF-YOU MAY-BE HAVING-been-CALLED by him
having-been-invited
14:9 kai elqwn o se kai auton kalesas 9 And he that bade thee and
kai elthOn ho se kai auton kalesas
G2532 G2064 G3588 G4571 G2532 G846 G2564
him come and say to thee, Give
Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Acc Sg Conj pp Acc Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m this man place; and thou begin
AND COMING THE YOU AND him CALLing with shame to take the lowest
the-one inviting room.
erei soi dos toutw topon kai tote arxh

erei soi dos toutO topon kai tote arxE
G2046 G4671 G1325 G5129 G5117 G2532 G5119 G756
vi Fut Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg pd Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj Adv vs Aor Mid 2 Sg
he-SHALL-BE-declarING to-YOU BE-GIVING to-this-one PLACE AND then YOU-SHOULD-BE-beginnING
be-you-giving ! this-man
met aiscunhs ton escaton topon katecein

met aischunEs ton eschaton topon katechein
G3326 G152 G3588 G2078 G5117 G2722
Prep n_ Gen Sg f t_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vn Pres Act
WITH VILEness THE LAST PLACE TO-BE-DOWN-HAVING
shame to-be-retaining
14:10 all otan klhqhs poreuqeis anapeson eis ton 10 But when thou art bidden,
all hotan klEthEs poreutheis anapeson eis ton
G235 G3752 G2564 G4198 G377 G1519 G3588
go and sit down in the lowest
Conj Conj vs Aor Pas 2 Sg vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m room; that when he that bade
but when-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-BEING-CALLED BEING-GONE UP-FALL-YOU INTO THE thee cometh, he may say unto
whenever you-may-be-being-invited lean-back-at-table-you ! thee, Friend, go up higher: then
shalt thou have worship in the
escaton topon ina otan elqh o keklhkws se presence of them that sit at
eschaton topon hina hotan elthE ho keklEkOs se meat with thee.
G2078 G5117 G2443 G3752 G2064 G3588 G2564 G4571
a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m vp Perf Act Nom Sg m pp 2 Acc Sg
LAST PLACE THAT when-EVER MAY-BE-COMING THE one-HAVING-CALLED YOU
whenever one-having-invited
eiph soi file prosanabhqi anwteron tote estai soi

eipE soi phile prosanabEthi anOteron tote estai soi
G2036 G4671 G5384 G4320 G511 G5119 G2071 G4671
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg n_ Voc Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg a_ Acc Sg n Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg
he-MAY-BE-sayING to-YOU FOND-one ! BE-TOWARD-UP-STEPPING UPPer then SHALL-BE to-YOU
friend ! step-up-you ! further
doxa enwpion twn sunanakeimenwn soi

doxa enOpion tOn sunanakeimenOn soi
G1391 G1799 G3588 G4873 G4671
n_ Nom Sg f Adv t_ Gen Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl m pp 2 Dat Sg
esteem IN-VIEW OF-THE ones-TOGETHER-UP-LYING to-YOU
glory in-the-sight-of the ones-lying-back-at-table-togetherwith you
14:11 oti pas o uywn eauton tapeinwqhsetai kai 11 For whosoever exalteth
hoti pas ho hupsOn heauton tapeinOthEsetai kai
G3754 G3956 G3588 G5312 G1438 G5013 G2532
himself shall be abased; and he
Conj a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pf 3 Acc Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj that humbleth himself shall be
that EVERY THE one-HEIGHTenING self SHALL-BE-BEING-made-LOW AND exalted.
one-exalting himself shall-be-being-humbled
Luke 14
o tapeinwn eauton uywqhsetai

ho tapeinOn heauton hupsOthEsetai
G3588 G5013 G1438 G5312
t_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pf 3 Acc Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
THE one-makING-LOW self SHALL-BE-BEING-HEIGHTenED
one-humbling himself shall-be-being-exalted
14:12 elegen de kai tw keklhkoti auton otan poihs 12 Then said he also to him
elegen de kai tO keklEkoti auton hotan poiEs
G3004 G1161 G2532 G3588 G2564 G846 G3752 G4160
that bade him, When thou
vi Impf Act 3 Sg Conj Conj t_ Dat Sg m vp Perf Act Dat Sg m pp Acc Sg m Conj vs Pres Act 2 Sg makest a dinner or a supper,
He-said YET AND to-THE one-HAVING-CALLED Him when-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-makING call not thy friends, nor thy
also one-having-invited whenever brethren, neither thy kinsmen,
nor [thy] rich neighbours; lest
ariston h deipnon mh fwnei tous filous sou mhde tous they also bid thee again, and a
ariston E deipnon mE phOnei tous philous sou mEde tous recompence be made thee.
G712 G2228 G1173 G3361 G5455 G3588 G5384 G4675 G3366 G3588
n_ Nom Sg n Part n_ Acc Sg n Part Neg vm Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg Conj t_ Acc Pl m
LUNCH OR DINner NO YOU-BE-SOUNDING THE FOND-ones OF-YOU NO-YET THE
luncheon be-you-summoning ! friends nor-yet
adelfous sou mhde tous suggeneis sou mhde geitonas

adelphous sou mEde tous suggeneis sou mEde geitonas
G80 G4675 G3366 G3588 G4773 G4675 G3366 G1069
n_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg Conj t_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg Conj n_ Acc Pl m
brothers OF-YOU NO-YET THE TOGETHER-generateds OF-YOU NO-YET NEIGHBORS
nor-yet relatives nor-yet neighbors(f)
plousious mhpote kai autoi se antikaleswsin kai

plousious mEpote kai autoi se antikalesOsin kai
G4145 G3379 G2532 G846 G4571 G479 G2532
a_ Acc Pl m Adv Conj pp Nom Pl m pp 2 Acc Sg vs Aor Act 3 Pl Conj
RICH NO-?-when AND they YOU SHOULD-BE-INSTEAD-CALLING AND
lest-at-some-time also should-be-inviting-in-return
genhtai soi antapodoma

genEtai soi antapodoma
G1096 G4671 G468
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg n_ Acc Sg n
MAY-BE-BECOMING to-YOU repayment
14:13 all otan poihs dochn kalei ptwcous anaphrous cwlous 13 But when thou makest a
all hotan poiEs dochEn kalei ptOchous anapErous chOlous
G235 G3752 G4160 G1403 G2564 G4434 G376 G5560
feast, call the poor, the
Conj Conj vs Pres Act 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg f vm Pres Act 2 Sg a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m maimed, the lame, the blind:
but when-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-makING RECEPTION BE-CALLING POOR-ones UP-CRIPPLES LAME-ones
whenever be-you-inviting ! poor-ones crippled-ones lame-ones
tuflous
tuphlous
G5185
a_ Acc Pl m
BLIND-ones
blind-ones
14:14 kai makarios esh oti ouk ecousin antapodounai soi 14 And thou shalt be blessed;
kai makarios esE hoti ouk echousin antapodounai soi
G2532 G3107 G2071 G3754 G3756 G2192 G467 G4671
for they cannot recompense
Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Fut vxx 2 Sg Conj Part Neg vi Pres Act 3 Pl vn 2Aor Act pp 2 Dat Sg thee: for thou shalt be
AND HAPPY YOU-SHALL-BE that NOT THEY-ARE-HAVING TO-repay to-YOU recompensed at the
nothing you resurrection of the just.
antapodoqhsetai gar soi en th anastasei twn dikaiwn

antapodothEsetai gar soi en tE anastasei tOn dikaiOn
G467 G1063 G4671 G1722 G3588 G386 G3588 G1342
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
SHALL-BE-BEING-repaid for to-YOU IN THE UP-STANDing OF-THE JUST-ones
it-shall-be-being-repaid you resurrection just-ones
14:15 akousas de tis twn sunanakeimenwn tauta 15 . And when one of them that
akousas de tis tOn sunanakeimenOn tauta
G191 G1161 G5100 G3588 G4873 G5023
sat at meat with him heard
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj px Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl m pd Acc Pl n these things, he said unto him,
HEARing YET ANY OF-THE ones-TOGETHER-UP-LYING these Blessed [is] he that shall eat
someone ones-lying-back-at-table-togetherwith-him these-things bread in the kingdom of God.
eipen autw makarios os fagetai arton en th basileia

eipen autO makarios hos phagetai arton en tE basileia
G2036 G846 G3107 G3739 G5315 G740 G1722 G3588 G932
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m a_ Nom Sg m pr Nom Sg m vi Fut midD 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
said to-Him HAPPY WHO SHALL-BE-EATING BREAD IN THE KINGdom
happy-is
tou qeou
tou theou
G3588 G2316
OF-THE God
Luke 14
14:16 o de eipen autw anqrwpos tis epoihsen deipnon 16 Then said he unto him, A
ho de eipen autO anthrOpos tis epoiEsen deipnon
G3588 G1161 G2036 G846 G444 G5100 G4160 G1173
certain man made a great
t_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg m px Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n supper, and bade many:
THE YET He-said to-him human ANY makES DINner
certain
mega kai ekalesen pollous

mega kai ekalesen pollous
G3173 G2532 G2564 G4183
a_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m
GREAT AND CALLS MANY
invites
14:17 kai apesteilen ton doulon autou th wra tou deipnou 17 And sent his servant at
kai apesteilen ton doulon autou tE hOra tou deipnou
G2532 G649 G3588 G1401 G846 G3588 G5610 G3588 G1173
supper time to say to them that
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m t_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n were bidden, Come; for all
AND he-commissions THE SLAVE OF-him to-THE HOUR OF-THE DINner things are now ready.
he-dispatches
eipein tois keklhmenois ercesqe oti hdh etoima estin

eipein tois keklEmenois erchesthe hoti EdE hetoima estin
G2036 G3588 G2564 G2064 G3754 G2235 G2092 G2076
vn 2Aor Act t_ Dat Pl m vp Perf Pas Dat Pl m vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl Conj Adv a_ Nom Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
TO-BE-sayING to-THE ones-HAVING-been-CALLED BE-COMING that ALREADY READY IS
ones-having-been-invited be-ye-coming ! ready(p)
panta
panta
G3956
a_ Nom Pl n
ALL
14:18 kai hrxanto apo mias paraiteisqai pantes o prwtos 18 And they all with one
kai Erxanto apo mias paraiteisthai pantes ho prOtos
G2532 G756 G575 G1520 G3868 G3956 G3588 G4413
[consent] began to make
Conj vi Aor midD 3 Pl Prep a_ Gen Sg f vn Pres midD/pasD a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m excuse. The first said unto him,
AND THEY-begin FROM ONE TO-BE-refusING ALL THE BEFORE-most I have bought a piece of
one-motive to-be-making-excuse first ground, and I must needs go
and see it: I pray thee have me
eipen autw agron hgorasa kai ecw anagkhn exelqein kai excused.
eipen autO agron Egorasa kai echO anagkEn exelthein kai
G2036 G846 G68 G59 G2532 G2192 G318 G1831 G2532
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 1 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg n_ Acc Sg f vn 2Aor Act Conj
said to-him FIELD I-BUY AND I-AM-HAVING necessity TO-BE-OUT-COMING AND
to-be-coming-out
idein auton erwtw se ece me parhthmenon

idein auton erOtO se eche me parEtEmenon
G1492 G846 G2065 G4571 G2192 G3165 G3868
vn 2Aor Act pp Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg vm Pres Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m
TO-BE-PERCEIVING him I-AM-askING YOU BE-HAVING ME HAVING-been-refusED
him it be-you-having ! having-been-excused
14:19 kai eteros eipen zeugh bown hgorasa pente kai 19 And another said, I have
kai heteros eipen zeugE boOn Egorasa pente kai
G2532 G2087 G2036 G2201 G1016 G59 G4002 G2532
bought five yoke of oxen, and I
Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl n n_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 1 Sg a_ Nom Conj go to prove them: I pray thee
AND DIFFERENT-one said YOKES OF-OXEN I-BUY FIVE AND have me excused.
different-one yoke
poreuomai dokimasai auta erwtw se ece me

poreuomai dokimasai auta erOtO se eche me
G4198 G1381 G846 G2065 G4571 G2192 G3165
vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg vn Aor Act pp Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg vm Pres Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg
I-AM-GOING TO-test them I-AM-askING YOU BE-HAVING ME
be-you-having !
parhthmenon
parEtEmenon
G3868
vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m
HAVING-been-refusED
having-been-excused
14:20 kai eteros eipen gunaika eghma kai dia touto ou 20 And another said, I have
kai heteros eipen gunaika egEma kai dia touto ou
G2532 G2087 G2036 G1135 G1060 G2532 G1223 G5124 G3756
married a wife, and therefore I
Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 1 Sg Conj Prep pd Acc Sg n Part Neg cannot come.
AND DIFFERENT-one said WOMAN I-MARRY AND THRU this NOT
different-one wife because-of
dunamai elqein
dunamai elthein
G1410 G2064
vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg vn 2Aor Act
I-AM-ABLE TO-BE-COMING
I-can
Luke 14
14:21 kai paragenomenos o doulos ekeinos aphggeilen tw 21 So that servant came, and
kai paragenomenos ho doulos ekeinos apEggeilen tO
G2532 G3854 G3588 G1401 G1565 G518 G3588
shewed his lord these things.
Conj vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m Then the master of the house
AND BESIDE-BECOMING THE SLAVE that he-FROM-MESSAGES to-THE being angry said to his servant,
coming-along reports Go out quickly into the streets
and lanes of the city, and bring
kuriw autou tauta tote orgisqeis o oikodespoths eipen in hither the poor, and the
kuriO autou tauta tote orgistheis ho oikodespotEs eipen

Biblia Griega Interlineal

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Biblia Griega Interlineal

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Biblia Griega Interlineal

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Matthew 1

de egennhsen ton ioudan kai tous adelfous autou

fares de egennhsen ton esrwm esrwm de egennhsen ton aram

naasswn naasswn de egennhsen ton salmwn

ton wbhd ek ths rouq wbhd de egennhsen ton iessai

basileus egennhsen ton solomwnta ek ths tou ouriou

abia de egennhsen ton asa

iwram iwram de egennhsen ton ozian

acaz de egennhsen ton ezekian

amwn amwn de egennhsen ton iwsian

epi ths metoikesias babulwnos

salaqihl salaqihl de egennhsen ton zorobabel

eliakeim eliakeim de egennhsen ton azwr

aceim de egennhsen ton elioud

matqan matqan de egennhsen ton iakwb

egennhqh ihsous o legomenos cristos

apo ths metoikesias babulwnos ews tou cristou geneai dekatessares

sunelqein autous eureqh en gastri ecousa ek

qelwn authn paradeigmatisai eboulhqh laqra apolusai authn

fobhqhs paralabein mariam thn gunaika sou to gar

en auth gennhqen ek pneumatos estin agiou

upo tou kuriou dia tou profhtou legontos

1:23 idou h parqenos en gastri exei kai 23 Behold, a virgin shall be

emmanouhl o estin meqermhneuomenon meq hmwn o qeos

prosetaxen autw o aggelos kuriou kai parelaben thn gunaika

auths ton prwtotokon kai ekalesen to onoma autou

hmerais hrwdou tou basilews idou magoi apo anatolwn

paregenonto eis ierosoluma

ioudaiwn eidomen gar autou ton astera en th anatolh kai

hlqomen proskunhsai autw

ierosoluma met autou

laou epunqaneto par autwn pou o cristos gennatai

gegraptai dia tou profhtou

hgoumenos ostis poimanei ton laon mou ton

ton cronon tou fainomenou asteros

moi opws kagw elqwn proskunhsw autw

ews elqwn esth epanw ou hn to paidion

they had opened their

anoixantes tous qhsaurous autwn proshnegkan autw

dwra cruson kai libanon kai smurnan

allhs odou anecwrhsan eis thn cwran autwn

isqi ekei ews an eipw soi mellei gar hrwdhs zhtein

to paidion tou apolesai auto

autou nuktos kai anecwrhsen eis aigupton

legontos ex aiguptou ekalesa ton uion mou

kata ton cronon on hkribwsen para twn magwn

oti ouk eisin

onar fainetai tw iwshf en aiguptw

mhtera autou kai poreuou eis ghn israhl teqnhkasin gar

oi zhtountes thn yuchn tou paidiou

autou kai hlqen eis ghn israhl

de kat onar anecwrhsen eis ta merh ths galilaias

plhrwqh to rhqen dia twn profhtwn oti nazwraios

khrusswn en th erhmw ths ioudaias

thn odon kuriou euqeias poieite tas tribous autou

tricwn kamhlou kai zwnhn dermatinhn peri thn osfun autou h

de trofh autou hn akrides kai meli agrion

kai pasa h pericwros tou iordanou

ecidnwn tis upedeixen umin fugein apo ths melloushs